JP7848468B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a symbol display device that displays changes in the pattern sequence triggered by events such as a ball entering a designated entry point within the game area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball's entry into the entry point. The display screen also incorporates various effects, such as "reach" displays, to enhance the player's attention to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2002-78904

In the type of gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration to increase the level of attention it attracts to the game.

This invention has been made in view of the circumstances illustrated above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase the level of attention given to the game.

The present invention
A gaming machine comprising a means for controlling the display of a pattern display means by variably displaying patterns using the pattern display means and then stopping the display of patterns corresponding to the result of the game,
The aforementioned pattern is composed of an image that includes at least an image corresponding to predetermined information,
As for the display modes of the predetermined information, a first display mode and a second display mode that differs in appearance from the first display mode are provided.
The configuration allows switching the display mode of the pattern display means from a first display mode to a second display mode in which at least the background image of the pattern display means is different from that of the first display mode.
When switching from the first display mode to the second display mode, the configuration allows the display mode of the predetermined information, which is in the first display mode, to be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.
It has a first predetermined game state corresponding to the first display mode and a second predetermined game state corresponding to the second display mode,
In the first predetermined game state, it is possible that the result of the game will be the first result.
In the second predetermined game state, it is possible that the result of the game will be the second result.
If the result of the game is the first result, it is possible to stop displaying the first pattern, which includes an image corresponding to the predetermined information in the first display mode.
If the result of the game is the second result, it is possible to stop displaying a second pattern including an image corresponding to the predetermined information in the second display mode .
The system is characterized in that it is possible to prevent the variablely displayed patterns in the second predetermined game state from including patterns of images corresponding to the predetermined information in the first display mode .

According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively increase the level of attention given to the game.

This is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a front view of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is a perspective view of the game board unit from the rear. This is a rear view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the back pack unit. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for big wins, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for special misses. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot, the lottery mode, and the support mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special miss, the lottery mode, and the support mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode, (b) A schematic diagram showing the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A, and (c) A schematic diagram showing the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the overview of the support mode. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the operating port. This is a flowchart showing the information retrieval process. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the data setup process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a schematic diagram showing the time display table for variations corresponding to big wins. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling special out-of-bounds events. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This flowchart shows the control process for through gates. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating changes in a through gate. This is a schematic diagram comparing the display time of images in the display unit for through gates. This is a flowchart showing the processing for power supply support. This is a flowchart showing the power switch operation process. This is a flowchart showing the process for final display. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device and the display control device. This flowchart shows the variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is the first variable display control process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the first variation. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the general outline of gameplay sequences. (a) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to a big win, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to a special loss. This timing chart shows the flow of gameplay when transitioning to the fourth normal game state following a special miss. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a timing chart illustrating the changes in a pitcher's repertoire. (a) A schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the second embodiment; (b) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1; (c) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable display time. This flowchart shows the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a front view of the game board unit in the third embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the second operating port. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for the second operation port. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the operating port in the fourth embodiment. This flowchart shows the first variation initiation process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the second special effect. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a front view of the game board unit in the fifth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the behavior when a special win occurs, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the transition patterns of the game state. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes. This flowchart shows the process for transitioning to a special winning game state. This is a flowchart showing the start process for special wins. This flowchart shows the process for ending a special winning game. This is a flowchart showing the V distribution setting process. A flowchart showing the process for winning the V prize. This flowchart shows the process for transitioning to the jackpot state. There are many transition processes at the end of a big win. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the special variable display time table for the second operation port. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing the contact/failure table for the operating port in the sixth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the transition patterns between game states. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a front view of the game board unit in the seventh embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the second operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of winning combination, the lottery mode, and the support mode. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a front view of the game board unit in the eighth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the second operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of winning combination, the lottery mode, and the support mode. This flowchart shows the transition process performed by the main control unit's MPU when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the compatibility table in the ninth embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for big wins, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of win, the lottery mode, and the support mode. (a) A schematic diagram comparing the support modes, and (b) A schematic diagram comparing the display time of the images in the display unit for the through gate. This flowchart shows the transition process performed by the main control unit's MPU when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This flowchart shows the game round termination process executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a timing chart illustrating the changes in a pitcher's repertoire. (a) A schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the tenth embodiment; (b) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1; (c) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the lottery result and the pattern displayed on the operation port display unit in the eleventh embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling special out-of-bounds events. This is a schematic diagram showing the variation in the display of symbols on the display screen. This is a flowchart illustrating the process for switching the support mode in the twelfth embodiment. This flowchart shows the main processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. (a) A flowchart showing special notification processing executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device, and (b) and (c) schematic diagrams showing special notifications. This flowchart shows the special notification control process executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a front view of the game board unit in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the second operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of winning combination, the lottery mode, and the support mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the changes in the game state. This flowchart shows the first variation initiation process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for outlier results in the 14th embodiment. This is a front view of the game board unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration related to the display of the design. This is a schematic diagram showing the patterns displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of patterns displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to the special losing result. (a) A flowchart showing the special failure setting process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special failure result and the number of rotations. This flowchart shows the special processing for the latter half of the game, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control system. This flowchart shows the special variation termination process for when a change occurs, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is a timing chart showing the notification process for the termination criteria count. This is a front view of the game board unit in the 15th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the second operating port. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting pending commands, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting the jackpot announcement effect, which is executed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and effect control system. This flowchart shows the process for determining the details of the jackpot announcement animation. This is a schematic diagram showing the pending notification effect. This flowchart shows the command handling process for hold display control executed by the MPU of the display control device. This flowchart shows the pending display process executed by the MPU of the display control unit. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a Type 1予告演出 (preview sequence), and (b) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a Type 2予告演出 (preview sequence). This is a front view of the special effects device. This is a schematic diagram showing various display modes for special effects devices. This flowchart shows the special miss notification effect setting process executed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and effect control system. This is a flowchart showing the process for determining the details of the special miss notification effect. This flowchart shows the special miss notification effect execution process performed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and effect control system. This is a timing chart showing the sequence of special miss notification effects. This is a front view of the game board unit in the 16th embodiment. This is a vertical cross-section of a special effects device. (a) Front view of the special effects device, (b) schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the path of the light-emitting element and the light-diffusing and non-light-diffusing sections. This is a schematic diagram comparing different light emission patterns. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the light-emitting element and the manner in which it emits light. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the changes in the light emission pattern. This is a cross-sectional view of the special effects device in the 17th embodiment. This is a front view of the special effects device. This is a schematic diagram showing various display modes for special effects devices. This is a front view of the game board unit in the 18th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the prize-winning device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the correct/incorrect table for the operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the operating ports. This is a schematic diagram comparing the results of various jackpots. This is a flowchart showing the V distribution setting process. A flowchart showing the process for winning the V prize. There are many transition processes at the end of a big win. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting pending commands, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the pending notification effect. This flowchart shows the process for confirming the arrival of the ceiling, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control system. This timing chart illustrates the flow of gameplay when the "ceiling reached" confirmation animation is executed. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit showing the operating port unit and its surroundings in the 19th embodiment. This is a partial cross-sectional view of a game board unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the game balls. This is a perspective view of the movable piece. This flowchart shows the power supply support processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the switching process for electrical services. (a) A schematic diagram comparing the support modes, and (b) A schematic diagram comparing the display time of the images in the display unit for the through gate. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the time required for the game ball to pass through the area. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of game balls being dispensed. This is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of an electric motorized device. This is a schematic diagram showing the operating port unit in the 20th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the process for power supply support in the 21st embodiment. This is a schematic diagram comparing the opening patterns. This flowchart shows the power switching process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a schematic diagram comparing the support modes. This is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when the support mode switches. This is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when the support mode switches. This is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when the support mode switches. This is a timing chart comparing the flow of gameplay when the support mode switches. This is a timing chart comparing the flow of gameplay when the support mode switches. This is a timing chart comparing the flow of gameplay when the support mode switches. This is a timing chart comparing the flow of gameplay when the support mode switches. This is a schematic diagram comparing the opening patterns in the 22nd embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters and the like used in the lottery for determining winners and losers in the 24th embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode, and (c) A schematic diagram showing the loss table. This is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for jackpots. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the operating port. This is a flowchart showing the information retrieval process. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for the first normal game state. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time tables for the second and third normal game states. This is a flowchart showing the process for final display. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device and the display control device. (a) A flowchart showing the variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the display mode in a special stage. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the special stage, and (b) A flowchart showing the second/third variation display control process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the second/third variation. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the type of effects that occur. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the special effects that occur during special stages. (a) A timing chart showing the flow of the special stage's effects, and (b) A flowchart showing the effect setting process when a predetermined number of times is reached. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the displayed ally character and the probability of winning. This is a schematic diagram showing the ally character determination table. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the second type of special effect. This flowchart shows the process for setting the effects when a predetermined number of times is reached in the 25th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the ally character determination table. This is a schematic diagram showing the display configuration of the special stage in the 26th embodiment. This flowchart shows the process for setting the effects when a specified number of plays is reached. This is a schematic diagram showing the enemy character determination table. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between combinations of enemy and ally characters and the probability of winning. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the second type of special effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the type of effect that occurs in the 27th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time tables for the second and third normal game states. This flowchart shows the settings process for special battle sequences. This is a schematic diagram showing the rank-up lottery table for allied characters. This is a schematic diagram showing the rank-up distribution table for allied characters. This is a flowchart showing the setting process for special battle effects in the 28th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the rank-up lottery table for enemy characters. This is a schematic diagram showing the rank-up distribution table for enemy characters. This is a schematic diagram showing a screen for a special stage in the 29th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the special battle sequence. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the special battle sequence. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the special battle sequence when the enemy character changes. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the special battle animation when changing allied characters. This is a flowchart showing the flow of the special battle sequence in the 30th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the differences in display areas. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the special performance. This is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to the 31st embodiment. This is a front view of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame. (a) A front view showing the configuration of the game board unit, and (b) A front view of the main display unit. This is a perspective view of the game board unit from the rear. This is a rear view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the back pack unit. This is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit. (a) Front view of the graphic display device, (b) Perspective view of the graphic display device. This is an exploded perspective view of a pattern display device. (a) Front view of the hold display device, (b) schematic diagram showing the display mode of the hold pattern. This is a front view of the auxiliary display device. (a) Front view of the movable performance device, (b) Schematic diagram showing the light emission mode of the movable performance device. This is a schematic diagram showing the movement of a movable performance device. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for jackpots, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the types of jackpots. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram showing various designs. This is a schematic diagram showing the sequence of patterns. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the operating port. This is a flowchart showing the information retrieval process. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the data setup process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This is a flowchart showing the processing for power supply support. This is a flowchart showing the power switch operation process. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification and performance control device. This flowchart shows the variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the general overview of the display of changing patterns. (a) A flowchart showing the command response process for hold display control executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device, and (b) A schematic diagram showing an overview of the hold display. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting pending commands, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the setting process for the hold notification effect, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and effect control device. This is a flowchart showing the process for determining the explicit hold notification animation pattern. This is a schematic diagram comparing various hold notification effects. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the first reserved notification effect A, and (b) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the first reserved notification effect B. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the Type 2 Hold Notification演出 A. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 2 Hold Notification演出 A. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 2 Hold Notification演出 A. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 A. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 A. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 A. This is a schematic diagram comparing special variation display effects. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 1 Special Fluctuation Display演出 (special effect). This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 1 Special Fluctuation Display演出 (special effect). This is a timing chart showing the flow of the Type 2 Special Fluctuation Display演出 (performance/effect). This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 2 Special Fluctuation Display effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 2 Special Fluctuation Display effect. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the Type 3 Special Fluctuation Display演出 (performance/effect). This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Special Fluctuation Display演出 (performance/presentation). This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Special Fluctuation Display演出 (performance/presentation). This is a timing chart showing the flow of the Type 2 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 2 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 2 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the third type hold notification effect B in the 32nd embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3 Hold Notification演出 B. This is a schematic diagram showing a movable performance device in the 33rd embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing a table for the third type of hold notification effect in the 34th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the special explicit hold notification effect in the 35th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the special explicit hold notification effect. This is a schematic diagram showing a movable performance device in the 36th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the first chance-up effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the first chance-up effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the second chance-up effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the second chance-up effect. This is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of a movable display device. This is a schematic diagram comparing various hold notification effects in the 37th embodiment. This flowchart shows the process for rewriting the explicit hold notification effect pattern, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and effect control device. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second chance-up effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second chance-up effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of events when the second chance-up effect and the fourth type of reserve notification effect are combined. This is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of a variable display unit. This is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of a variable display unit. This is a schematic diagram showing a variable display unit in the 38th embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the case where the protruding part of the movable performance device is in the first extended state, and (b) A schematic diagram illustrating the case where the protruding part of the movable performance device is in the second extended state. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the rotational position of a movable ornament and its linked object. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating example symbol combinations corresponding to the continuous variation effect, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of consecutive occurrences and the probability of a big win. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a continuous variation display effect that is not compatible with movable display devices. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a continuous variation display effect that is not compatible with movable display devices. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of consecutive occurrences and the linked targets. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a continuous variation display effect in conjunction with a movable display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a continuous variation display effect in conjunction with a movable display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a continuous variation display effect in conjunction with a movable display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the fifth type of hold notification effect in conjunction with the movable effect device. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the fifth type of hold notification effect in conjunction with the movable effect device. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stop target and the continuation probability in the 39th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a continuous variation display effect in conjunction with a movable display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a continuous variation display effect in conjunction with a movable display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a continuous variation display effect in conjunction with a movable display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the fifth type of hold notification effect in conjunction with the movable effect device. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the fifth type of hold notification effect in conjunction with the movable effect device. This is a schematic diagram showing a variable display unit in the 40th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the message displayed in the special message display animation and its implied meaning. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the auxiliary display device and the movable display device when a special message display effect is executed. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the special message display effect that supports continuous variation display effects. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of special message display effects that support continuous fluctuation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of special message display effects that support continuous fluctuation display. This is a schematic diagram showing the second stop-time synchronized performance in conjunction with the movable performance device. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second stop-time linked performance A. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second stop-time linked performance A. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second stop-time linked performance A. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first stop notification effect and the sixth type of hold notification effect in the 41st embodiment, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the sequence of symbols targeted for the first stop and the probability of a big win, etc. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first stop notification effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first stop notification effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 6 hold notification effect. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 6 hold notification effect. This is a flowchart showing the process for switching the performance mode in the 42nd embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the effects that are performed in special effects mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of suggestive effects in the special effects mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of suggestive effects in the special effects mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of suggestive effects in the special effects mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of suggestive effects in the special effects mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of suggestive effects in the special effects mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of suggestive presentation in the 43rd embodiment. This is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to the 44th embodiment. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine in disassembled form. This is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. (a) A schematic diagram of the right first operating port when it is in the closed state, and (b) A schematic diagram of the right first operating port when it is in the open state. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. (a) A schematic diagram of the first variable prize device in the closed state, and (b) A schematic diagram of the first variable prize device in the open state. (a) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second variable prize device as seen from the side, and (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second variable prize device as seen from the rear. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the contents of various counters used in lotteries and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table. This is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the operating port. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the first game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the first data setting process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the first variation. When setting the first variation display time, it may be necessary to use the process. This is a flowchart showing the forced termination process. This is a flowchart showing the control process for the second game round. This is a flowchart showing the second data setting process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the second variation. This is a flowchart showing the process for setting the second variation display time. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This is an explanatory diagram of the game's overview. This is an explanatory diagram of the payout basis. This is a schematic diagram showing the compatibility table in the 45th embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram of the game's overview. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content of the graphic display device in the 46th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing various designs. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state, the jackpot result, and the final stopping symbol combination. This is a schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations that appear when a special winning result is achieved. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the pattern conversion animation. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the pattern conversion animation. This is a schematic diagram showing the basic pattern sequence. This is a schematic diagram showing the special symbol sequence. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content of the graphic display device in the 47th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing various designs. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state, the jackpot result, and the combination of symbols displayed at the final stop; (b) A schematic diagram showing the combination of symbols displayed when a special jackpot result occurs. (a) A schematic diagram of the history display area, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the pattern displayed in the previous area. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the history display change animation. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the history display change animation. This is a schematic diagram showing a variation of the history display change animation. This is a schematic diagram showing a variation of the history display change animation. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content of the graphic display device in the 48th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing various designs. (a) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations displayed when a special win occurs, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the conditions under which the final stopping symbol combination becomes a Type 4 symbol combination when a special win occurs in the second probability variation state. (a) A schematic diagram of the V-stock display area, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the V-stock display. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the V-stock acquisition animation that is performed when a jackpot is hit. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the V-stock acquisition animation that is performed when a special win (B) occurs. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the V-stock acquisition animation that is performed when a special win A occurs. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state, the jackpot result, and the final stop symbol combination in the 49th embodiment; (b) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combination displayed when a special jackpot result occurs. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the V-stock acquisition animation. (a) A schematic diagram comparing each hold effect in the 50th embodiment, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the hold effect. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stay stage and the transition trigger in the 51st embodiment, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the stage change effect. (a) A schematic diagram showing a special notification in the 52nd embodiment, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of release effect and the trigger for its execution. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the release animation. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the release animation. (b) A schematic diagram showing the hold display in the 53rd embodiment, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stay stage and the hold icon that is a candidate for display. This is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to the 54th embodiment. This is a front view of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is a perspective view of the game board unit from the rear. This is a rear view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the back pack unit. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for jackpots, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the types of jackpots. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the activation port. This is a flowchart showing the information retrieval process. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the data setup process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This is a flowchart showing the processing for power supply support. This is a flowchart showing the power switch operation process. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification and performance control device. This flowchart shows the variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a front view of the movable performance device. This is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the movable decorative elements during synchronized performances. This is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the movable decorative elements during synchronized performances. This is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the movable decorative elements during synchronized performances. This is a timing chart showing the movement of movable decorative elements during synchronized performances. This is a schematic diagram comparing two synchronized effects in the 55th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first linked performance. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second linked performance. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the right-side movable decorative element and the display screen in the 56th embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing the movable decorative element on the right side, and (b) A schematic diagram illustrating the light emission control pattern of the movable decorative element on the right side. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the synchronized performance that is executed when the movable ornament on the right side returns to its original position. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stay stages in the 57th embodiment. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting pending commands, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the normal stage change animation. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the special stage change effect. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of special stage change effects. This is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the 58th embodiment. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is a perspective view of the game board unit from the rear. This is a rear view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the back pack unit. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for jackpots, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the types of jackpots. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the operating port. This is a flowchart showing the information retrieval process. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the data setup process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This is a flowchart showing the processing for power supply support. This is a flowchart showing the power switch operation process. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification and performance control device. This flowchart shows the variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a schematic diagram comparing the two types of variable display methods. (a) A schematic diagram showing the design, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the design broken down into its constituent images. This is a schematic diagram showing the various memory areas of the library ROM. This is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay during the first special variation display. This is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay during the first special variation display. This is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay during the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the first special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the second special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game round that results in the third special variation display. This is a schematic diagram illustrating a modified example. This is a schematic diagram illustrating a modified example. This is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to the 59th embodiment. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. (a) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) A front view of the main display unit. This is a front view of the upper variable prize winning device. This is a front view of the ball entry unit. (a) A front perspective view of the right-side operating ball entry section, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the passage structure related to the right-side operating ball entry section. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between passage length and the time required to pass through. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the functions of various counters used in lotteries and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of win and the various modes, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the game round control process. This flowchart shows the control processing for the first operating port. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating fluctuations for the first operating port. This is a flowchart showing the control process for the second operating port. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating fluctuations for the second operating port. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is a flowchart showing the first opening/closing process. This is a flowchart showing the second opening/closing process. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This is a flowchart showing the processing for power supply support. This is a schematic diagram comparing the display time for fluctuations and the display time for confirmation for each support mode. This is a flowchart showing the power switch operation process. This flowchart shows the process for setting the variable display time for the first operating port. This is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable display time for the second operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the differences in the display time for fluctuations and the display time for confirmation for each game state. This is a schematic diagram showing the differences in the display time for fluctuations and the display time for confirmation for each game state. This is a schematic diagram showing the differences in the display time for fluctuations and the display time for confirmation for each game state. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a schematic diagram comparing the different game states. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device and the display control device. This flowchart shows the game round processing performed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and performance control system. This is a flowchart showing the variable display control process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the general outline of gameplay sequences. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display mode and the game state. This is a schematic diagram showing the group of patterns displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the group of patterns displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating a pattern sequence. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state, the jackpot result, and the combination of symbols displayed at the final stop; (b) A schematic diagram showing the combination of symbols displayed when a special jackpot result occurs. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of stage transitions. This is a timing chart showing the flow of stage transitions. This is a schematic diagram showing variations of the design group. This is a schematic diagram showing variations of the design group. This is a flowchart showing the pre-verification process in the 60th embodiment. This flowchart shows the process for changing the symbol group when transitioning to an underwater stage, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control system. This is a schematic diagram showing the group of patterns displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the sequence of patterns. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stage of stay and the displayed symbols. (a) A schematic diagram showing the types of special promotion effects, (b) A schematic diagram showing special promotion effects. This flowchart shows the flow of changes in the pattern group and the stage of stay. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of changes in the pattern group and the stage of stay. This flowchart shows the flow of changes in the pattern group and the stage of stay. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of changes in the pattern group and the stage of stay. This flowchart shows the flow of changes in the pattern group and the stage of stay. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of changes in the pattern group and the stage of stay. (a) Front view of the game board in the 61st embodiment, (b) Front view of the main display unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the operating port unit. This is a front view of the special electric ball input unit. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the confirmed symbol combination, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of regular win and the confirmed symbol combination. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the pass/fail table for the through gate. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for through gates, and (b) A schematic diagram showing an overview of the support mode. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the prize-winning process for through gates. This is a flowchart showing the information acquisition process for through gates. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the operating port. This is a flowchart showing the process for acquiring information for the operating port. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the special game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the data setup process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating special feature changes. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This is a flowchart showing the control process for the general game rounds. This is a flowchart showing the data setup process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating a general change in the graph. This is a flowchart showing the power supply support process. This is a flowchart showing the power switch operation process. This is a flowchart showing the V distribution setting process. This is a flowchart showing the process for winning the V prize. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for special illustrations. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for special illustrations. This is a schematic diagram showing the time table for displaying fluctuations for general use. This is a schematic diagram showing the time table for displaying fluctuations for general use. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device and the display control device. This flowchart shows the game round processing performed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and performance control system. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of the symbol display device, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the game state and the displayed symbols. This flowchart shows the process for setting the ending, which is executed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and performance control system. (a) A timing chart showing the flow of the first type ending display, and (b) A timing chart showing the flow of the second type ending display. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 1 ending display. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 2 ending display. (a) A timing chart showing the flow of the third type ending display, and (b) A timing chart showing the flow of the fourth type ending display. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the Type 3/Type 4 endings. This is a flowchart showing the second variable display control process in the 62nd embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the pre-verification process for through gates. A schematic diagram showing the different types of preview effects. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second trailer's presentation. (a) A flowchart showing the flow of setting up the special second予告演出 in the 63rd embodiment, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between travel distance and expectation level. This is a schematic diagram showing the differences in travel routes. This is a schematic diagram showing the different types of pattern search animations. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the arrangement of various pattern combinations and their movement routes.

<First Embodiment>
The following describes in detail a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), a type of amusement machine, based on the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and Figures 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded state. Note that, for convenience, the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 3.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main unit 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

As shown in Figure 2, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting elongated frame materials on all four sides, forming an overall rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10; it may also be installed as part of the island equipment in the gaming hall.

The main body of the gaming machine 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a manner that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 18 is provided at the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. These upper and lower support fittings 17 and 18 constitute a support mechanism, which allows the main body of the gaming machine 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 3 and 4).

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the main body of the gaming machine 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 positioned in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 positioned behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in a front view of the gaming machine, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Figure 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is almost identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central part of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be seen from the front, and this window portion 21 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds these glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that divides the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear sections, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, while the game area PE is double-covered from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23.

Furthermore, it is not necessarily required to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Moreover, the number of glass panels is arbitrary; it may be one or three or more. However, in light of improving safety and security, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and arrange them facing each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use transparent synthetic resin panel members instead of glass panels.

Various light-emitting means, such as lamps, are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a ring-shaped illuminated section 26 containing LEDs or other light-emitting means is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The ring-shaped illuminated section 26 lights up or flashes in response to changes in the game state, such as during a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Furthermore, an error indicator lamp section 27, which lights up in the event of an error or malfunction, is provided at the center of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and at the very top of the pachinko machine 10. Prize ball lamp sections 28, which light up during prize ball payout, are provided to the left and right of the error indicator lamp section 27. Additionally, speaker sections 29, which output sound effects, background music, etc., according to the game state, are provided in positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see Figure 3).

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 are arranged vertically, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 33, opening upwards, is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34, also opening upwards, is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described later), arranging them in a line, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism (described later). The lower tray 34 has the function of storing excess game balls in the upper tray 33 and also functions as a receptacle for game balls that were launched by the game ball launching mechanism but did not reach the game area PE (see Figure 3) and are returned to the player.

In the upper bulge 31, a special effect button 35, operated by the player, is located in front of the upper tray 33. This special effect button 35 is connected to a notification and effect control device 140, which executes corresponding effects based on the operation of the special effect button 35.

To the right of the lower bulge 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided, protruding toward the player. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described later. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (rotation) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases. When this amount of operation is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount, the game ball reaches the game area PE. Furthermore, by adjusting this amount of operation, the player can choose to launch the game balls to either the right or left route, as described later.

As shown in Figure 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door-side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion is formed at its upper corner, projecting rearward and opening upward. This receiving portion is partitioned left and right by a partition wall, thereby separating the entrance portion of the front door-side upper tray passage from the entrance portion of the front door-side lower tray passage. The upstream side of both the front door-side upper tray passage and the front door-side lower tray passage leads to a game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Game balls entering the front door-side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the front door-side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14, at the pivot end, protruding shafts are provided at its upper and lower ends. These protruding shafts constitute the assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, as with Figure 3, the configuration within the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted in Figure 5 for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, which has an outer shape similar to that of the outer frame 11, being roughly rectangular. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a small gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The fascia board is positioned below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 rests on the fascia board. A small clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 to prevent mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base end (left side in Figure 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown in the illustration, the support brackets 71 and 72 have shafts, and bearing portions provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can rotate relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotating end side (right side in Figure 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later) and has front door hook members 76 scattered along its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has a hook receiving member 49 (see Figure 3) provided on the back of the front door frame 14 and slits formed to protrude towards the front side of the inner frame 13, corresponding to each front door hook member 76. The front door hook members 76 protruding through these slits engage with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable state. Furthermore, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 that extends to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 engage with a hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, thereby locking the main body of the gaming machine 12 in a closed position relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base 50 (locking device 75) is equipped with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is separate from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77 and the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is positioned adjacent to the locking unit. Turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right (clockwise) unlocks the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the left (counterclockwise) unlocks the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11.

A recessed area 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central part of the inner frame base body 50. The recessed area 51 is recessed towards the rear of the game machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is secured by a manual locking mechanism while fitted into this recessed area 51 from the front of the game machine. A roughly rectangular window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the recessed area 51, through which the rear configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b, described later) protrudes to the rear of the inner frame 13. Almost the entire area of this window opening 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is formed by integrating a game board 80a, which is mainly made of wooden board material, and a rear block 80b, which is provided on the rear side of the game board 80a and has various game components (variable display device, control device, movable performance mechanism, etc.) mounted on the base body 251.

The game area PE, through which the game balls flow, is formed on the front of the game board 80a. As already explained, the game area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls; that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE do not line up front to back at the same point in the game area PE. This suppresses ball jamming in the game area PE. Note that the game board 80a is not limited to wood; it can also be made of synthetic resin.

The following description will explain the game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) based on Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 7 is a rear perspective view of the game board unit 80.

The game board 80a has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in its own thickness direction (front-to-back direction). As shown in Figure 6, each opening is equipped with a general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable prize entry device 83, a through gate 84, etc. When a game ball enters the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, or the variable prize entry device 83, these game balls are detected by detection sensors provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection result, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. In addition, an out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of game balls into the out opening 86, the entry of game balls into the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, or the variable prize entry device 83 will also be referred to as "winning."

Furthermore, the game board 80a is equipped with numerous game pins 87, windmills 94, and other game components to appropriately distribute the flow paths of the game balls. These various configurations of game pins 87, windmills, etc., differentiate the flow paths of the game balls, resulting in a reasonable probability of winning prizes in the general prize winning slots 81, etc.

A central opening is formed in the middle of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached to cover this central opening from the rear side of the game board unit 80. Behind this central opening, the variable display unit 85 and other components belonging to the rear block 80b are located, and these components can be viewed from the front of the game machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An operating port unit 82 and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 includes a first operating port 91 located below the variable display unit 85, and a second operating port 92 located below the first operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is equipped with an electric mechanism 93, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). The electric mechanism 93 comprises a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is switchable between an open state (assist state) that allows ball entry into the second operating port 92 and a closed state (non-assist state) that prevents ball entry.

Furthermore, the electric mechanism 93 may be configured such that, when in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the second operating opening 92, and when switched to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the second operating opening 92 than when it is closed.

Upstream from the second operating port 92, specifically to the side of the variable display unit 85, is the through gate 84. When a support lottery is triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 84, the electric mechanism 93 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, if a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls will be dispensed, and if a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls will be dispensed. However, the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable prize-winning device (special ball-entry device or special ball-entry means) 83 is equipped with a large prize-winning opening and a shutter that can be switched between an "allowing" state, which permits ball entry into the large prize-winning opening, and a "blocking" state, which prevents ball entry. In the following description, the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "allowing" state will be referred to as the "open state," and the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "blocking" state will be referred to as the "closed state."

Furthermore, the variable prize-winning device 83 may be configured such that, when it is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83, and when it switches to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83 than when it is closed.

In the normal game state described later, an internal lottery is performed based on the entry of balls into the operating ports 91 and 92. If the internal lottery is won (for example, a jackpot is achieved), the game transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The variable prize entry device 83 is maintained in the closed state and is configured to be switched to the open state when the game transitions to the special game state. In the special game state, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or after a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have been entered, one round is defined as the switching to the open state being repeated for multiple rounds (for example, 6 rounds) with a maximum limit.

Next, a supplementary explanation of the variable display unit 85 will be provided. The variable display unit 85 has a symbol display device 95 that displays symbols variably (variable display) when a prize is awarded in the operating ports 91 and 92. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and its display content is controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, symbols are displayed, for example, in a row at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are displayed variably by scrolling horizontally. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on a pre-set active line, and the game transitions to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). Note that the symbol display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device; it may also be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 96 is provided on the game board 80a so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the game board 80a, so that the gap between the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, collisions between the game ball flowing down the game area PE and the symbol display device 95 are avoided, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into the right route, which bypasses the variable display unit 85 (specifically the center frame 96) from the right side, and the left route, which bypasses it from the left side. In this embodiment, the various game components provided in the game area PE are arranged symmetrically (a so-called symmetrical gauge), and there is no difference in advantage or disadvantage between the right and left routes. The configuration allows game balls launched from either the right or left route to enter the operating ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable prize winning device 83.

A stage is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 96, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls flowing in through an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 are discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. The stage is configured to make it relatively easier for game balls that reach the stage to flow into the first operation port 91, specifically, to flow into the first operation port 91 more easily than game balls that do not pass through the stage, thus contributing to increased player attention to the movement of game balls on this stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, restricting game balls that reach the stage from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 85).

The activation ports 91 and 92 are positioned closer to the variable display unit 85. Since a win in the activation ports 91 and 92 can trigger a transition to a special game state, players are expected to pay attention to whether or not a win occurs in the activation ports 91 and 92, and also to the symbol display device 95 to determine whether or not a transition to the special game state occurs. The placement of the activation ports 91 and 92 closer to the variable display unit 85 is a design choice to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 85.

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partitioning member 98 is provided, which, together with the guide rail 100 (described later), demarcates the game area PE. The game area partitioning member 98 is equipped with a stopper member and a main display unit 99, which the game balls flying along the guide rail 100 will collide with. The stopper member is a buffer member positioned near the tip of the guide rail 100. Upon impact with this stopper member, the game ball's momentum is reduced before it flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the main display unit 99. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, with a portion of it positioned to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is equipped with a main display section D, which displays predetermined patterns and other information. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in Figure 6(b), the main display unit D comprises a first operation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the first operation port 91, and a second operation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the second operation port 92. In the first operation port display unit D1, a change in the pattern is triggered by a win in the first operation port 91, and as a result of stopping this change in the pattern display, the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the change in the first operation port display unit D1 is stopped, and after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state.

The display unit D2 for the second operation slot triggers a change in the symbol display upon entry into the second operation slot 92. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is clearly displayed as the change in the display stops. If the result of the internal lottery based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the display unit D2 for the second operation slot stops the change in the display. After a predetermined symbol is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into either of the operating ports 91 or 92, a variation display is initiated on the corresponding operating port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display stops (confirms). This state is maintained until the confirmed display time elapses, which constitutes one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration where a single display area is provided and a variation display is performed in that single display area regardless of which operating port 91 or 92 wins, one game round can be defined as the variation display starting in that single display area, displaying a predetermined stop result, stopping (confirms), and maintaining that state until the confirmed display time elapses.

In this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92 is limited to four times each (a total of eight balls). The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a first operation port hold count display section S1 and a second operation port hold count display section S2, respectively, which display the number of balls held in the first and second operation ports 91 and 92.

Furthermore, in addition to the operation port display units D1 and D2, the main display unit 99's main display section D is also equipped with a through-gate display unit DS that displays the lottery results based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84. The through-gate display unit DS triggers a change in the pattern display upon winning a prize in the through-gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of this change display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is clearly displayed (a confirmation display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is a support win, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through-gate display unit DS, the change display stops, and after the confirmation display is completed, the system transitions to the electric mechanism open state. In the electric mechanism open state, the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operation port 92, is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times. The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a hold count display section SS that shows the number of held balls.

The main display unit D, as detailed above, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and its visibility is ensured because the game balls do not move in front of these various display units.

To explain the configuration of the inner frame 13 again using Figure 5, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, there is a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls positioned at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball feeding device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch standby position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby integrating it with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle, tilted upwards toward the game board unit 80. The launch rail 112 has a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross-section, and the game ball fits into this groove, thereby defining its front-to-back position.

A ball stopper is positioned near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112 to hold the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 in the aforementioned launch standby position. The solenoid 111 is positioned further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension and retraction direction, causing the game ball, positioned in the launch standby position, to be launched towards the game board unit 80, specifically towards the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with the game area partitioning member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically the front surface of the plate), partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102, which are positioned opposite each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and these two rails 101 and 102 partition a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the game area PE. The game ball, launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111, is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). Furthermore, in the game board unit 80, a reverse return prevention member 106 is attached to the front of the exit portion 105, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. This prevents subsequent game balls from being obstructed by game balls that have already reached the game area PE.

The rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 are arc-shaped, centered approximately in the middle of the game area PE. Therefore, game balls passing through the guide passage 103 are easily moved (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within them. In other words, when a game ball is launched to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide passage 103 effectively constitutes the passage area (path) through which the game ball passes, while the area along the inner rail 101 effectively becomes an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in Figure 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. In other words, the two rails 100 and 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset to the left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. This brings both rails 100 and 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80 while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is located below the gap formed in this manner. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 fails to reach the game area PE and returns to the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, these foul balls will enter the foul ball passage through the gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged into the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This suppresses interference between foul balls and the next game ball to be launched.

In the inner frame base 50, a through hole is formed to the left of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14), extending through the inner frame base 50 in the front-to-back direction. A passage forming member 121 is installed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body-side upper tray passage 122 and a main body-side lower tray passage 123. The upstream sides of these main body-side upper tray passages 122 and 123 lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Furthermore, a receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45, attached to the front door frame 14, fits below the passage forming member 121. Below the main body-side upper tray passage 122 is the front door-side upper tray passage, and below the main body-side lower tray passage 123 is the front door-side upper tray passage.

In the inner frame base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening/closing member 124 is attached to open and close the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force closes each opening/closing member 124, preventing game balls from falling out of the passages 122 and 123. Conversely, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by a receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage are connected, and the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage are also connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base 50 and game board unit 80) will be described based on Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing bracket 132 is attached to the pivot base end (right side in Figure 8) on the back of the inner frame base body 50. The bearing bracket 132 has bearing portions 133 formed at vertically spaced intervals, and these bearing portions 133 allow the back pack unit 15 to rotatably attach to the inner frame 13. Furthermore, multiple fixing levers 134 are provided on the back of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in the closed position.

As already explained, a window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess (game board housing section) 51 in the inner frame base 50, penetrating in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and opening to the rear side of the inner frame base 50. This window opening 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various components such as control devices are mounted on the rear side of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these components are exposed to the rear side of the inner frame 13 through the window opening 52. Now, with reference to Figure 7, the configuration of the rear side of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As already explained, a rear block 80b is attached to the back of the game board 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base 251 that opens towards the game board 80a. This base 251 is fixed to the back of the game board unit 80, thereby integrating the game board 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area for arranging movable performance mechanisms, etc., while the rear side is the area for arranging control devices that control these various components and the variable display unit 85 (pattern display device 95).

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the aforementioned pattern display device 95 (see Figure 6) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 95 are mounted on this protruding portion. These pattern display device 95 and display control device are arranged in a stacked configuration in the front-to-back direction (the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50), with the pattern display device 95 at the front and the display control device at the rear. Furthermore, a notification/effect control device 140 is mounted on the rear of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification and performance control device 140 includes a notification and performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device (described later). The notification and performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

Below the notification and performance control device 140, a main control unit 160 is provided, covering the base body 251 from the rear. The main control unit 160 comprises a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function for controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function for monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit). This main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The circuit board box 163 comprises a box base (front case) with a roughly rectangular shape and a box cover (back case) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a box sealing section 164, thereby sealing the circuit board box 163. Multiple box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short side of the circuit board box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be configured in any way that makes it impossible to open the box base and the box cover, but the box base and the box cover are made impossible to open by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to reseal the box even after it has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. When the main control board inside malfunctions or when the main control board needs to be inspected, the connection between the box sealing section with the locking pin inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. After that, if the sealing process is to be repeated, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is kept in the circuit board box 163, it will be easy to detect unauthorized opening by examining the circuit board box 163.

The circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are indestructibly connected by a base seal 165. Specifically, the base seal 165, like the box seal 164, has a locking hole and a locking pin. The insertion of the locking pin into the locking hole ensures that the circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are irremovably connected. This makes it easier to detect if the circuit board box 163 has been illegally removed.

On the front of the base body 251, in the portion facing the lower rear of the game board unit 80, a collection passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general prize entry point 81, the operating point unit 82, and the variable prize entry device 83, and converges at a single point downstream. As a result, game balls that enter the general prize entry point 81, etc., are all collected below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. In other words, the base body 251 is equipped with the function of collecting game balls that enter the various prize entry points.

Below the game board unit 80 is a discharge passage, which will be described later. Game balls collected below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage are guided into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out-out opening 86 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots are guided into the discharge passage via the out-out opening 86.

Furthermore, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is equipped with detection sensors for each of the aforementioned ball entry sections: a general prize entry sensor for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize entry opening 81, and operation opening detection sensors for detecting game balls that have entered the operation openings 91 and 92. These various detection sensors constitute the prize entry detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from each detection sensor to the main control unit 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described based on Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in Figure 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as its main body, and the dispensing mechanism 202, discharge passage panel, and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to this back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and, as shown in Figure 10, has a base portion 211 to which the dispensing mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the top are closed and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board has various output terminals, through which various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the locking pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported relative to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 has multiple insertion points through which the fixing lever 134 provided on the inner frame 13 is inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the base portion 211 from the rear when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion points.

The dispensing mechanism 202 is positioned on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The dispensing mechanism 202 includes a tank 221 located at the top of the back pack 201, with an upward opening. Game balls supplied from the island equipment in the gaming hall are continuously replenished into this tank 221. A tank rail 222, gently sloping downstream, is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223, extending vertically, is connected downstream of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the downstream end of the case rail 223. Game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 225 located on the base 211 of the back pack 201 via a dispensing passage (not shown) located downstream of the dispensing device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later. Its inner opening connects to the upper tray 33 via the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage, while its outer opening connects to the lower tray 34 via the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage.

The lower end of the base portion 211 is fitted with a discharge passage panel and a control unit 204, which are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from front to back. The discharge passage panel has a discharge passage formed on the side facing the control unit 204, which is open to the rear. This opening in the discharge passage is closed by the control unit 204. The discharge passage is designed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the gaming hall, etc. Game balls guided from the aforementioned recovery passage, etc., to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through this discharge passage.

The control unit assembly 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base 241, on which the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. These two devices, the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243, are arranged in a front-to-back configuration, with the payout control device 242 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the dispensing control device 242, a dispensing control board for controlling the dispensing device 224 is housed within a circuit board box 244, and a state reset switch 245 provided on the dispensing control board protrudes outside the circuit board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state reset switch 245 will resolve the ball jam.

The power supply and launch control device 243 houses the power supply and launch control board within the circuit board box 246. The power supply and launch control board generates and outputs the necessary power for various control devices, and further controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 and the ball feeding device 113, which constitute the game ball launch mechanism 110.

Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is equipped with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power to the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state and an off state.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a data storage function, so that even if a power outage occurs, it will retain the state it was in at the time of the outage, and when power is restored, it will return to that state. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, such as when a gaming hall closes for the day, the state before the shutdown is stored. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 provided on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main unit 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the rear of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, these various switches are difficult to operate when the main unit 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone without the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheat) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the block shown in Figure 11.

The main control board 401, located in the main control unit 162, is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is a component that incorporates a ROM 403 for storing various control programs and fixed-value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 403, and various counter circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and random number generators. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 or RAM 404, may be provided by separate components.

The MPU 402 is equipped with both input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the dispensing control device 242, and various detection sensors, all located on the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, the following are connected: ball entry detection sensor 391a for detecting ball entry into the general prize entry opening 81, ball entry detection sensor 391b for detecting ball entry into the variable prize entry device 83, ball entry detection sensor 391c for detecting ball entry into the first operation opening 91, ball entry detection sensor 391d for detecting ball entry into the second operation opening 92, and ball entry detection sensor 391e for detecting ball entry into the through gate 84. The MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each entry point. Furthermore, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot lottery based on ball entry into the first operation opening 91 and the second operation opening 92, and also executes a support lottery based on ball entry into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based, for example, the result of determining whether a ball has entered the prize-winning ball entry section, such as the aforementioned operating ports 91 and 92. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a ball has entered the general prize port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the variable prize device 83, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the first operating port 91, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output; and if a ball has entered the second operating port 92, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

The notification and performance control device 140 receives various commands from the main control device 162, including commands for starting the variation, type commands, ending the variation, opening commands, and ending commands. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting these commands. Details of these commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and this predetermined number of bytes contains various information.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a variable prize drive unit that opens and closes the shutter of the variable prize device 83, an electric prize drive unit that opens and closes the electric prize mechanism 93 of the second operating opening 92, and a main display unit 99. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 402 performs drive control of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit so that the variable prize device 83 is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the support lottery for the electric prize mechanism 93 is won, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the electric prize mechanism drive unit so that the electric prize mechanism 93 is opened and closed. The MPU 402 also controls the display of the main display unit D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402. Through this external output terminal board 213, information regarding ball entry into various ball entry points and lottery results such as jackpots is output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to monitor the status of the pachinko machine 10 and the gameplay situation.

The power outage monitoring board 405 acts as a relay between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243. The power outage monitoring board 405 is equipped with the function of monitoring the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loaned balls via the payout device 224 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming arcade. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies this generated operating power through a predetermined power path. Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, which is driven when predetermined launching conditions are met.

The notification and performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification and performance control board on which an MPU (Multi-Purpose Unit) is mounted. The MPU contains a ROM (Remote Control Module) that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM (Memory for Temporarily Storing Various Data During Execution of the Control Programs Stored in the ROM), and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM and RAM to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. The MPU of the notification and performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, as well as controlling the display control device 410, based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on commands input from the notification and performance control device 140. In this case, the notification and performance control device 140 determines the pattern of symbol variation on the symbol display device 95 (for example, whether a reach occurs and the content of the reach performance) and the pattern of symbol stop display (the type of symbol combination to be displayed when the variation display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, we will explain the configuration and content of the display of the changing symbols for each game round. In the following explanation, please refer to Figures 12 and 13 as appropriate. Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams illustrating the display content on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.
For the sake of explanation, the illustration of the background image and other elements displayed on the display screen 95a has been omitted in Figure 13, etc.

The display control device 410 is equipped with a character ROM. This character ROM pre-stores data for nine main symbols, each numbered "1" through "9" (see Figures 12(a) to (i)), and data for sub-symbols without numbers (see Figure 12(j)).

As shown in Figure 13(a), the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up: upper, middle, and lower. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is composed of main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 95a, the patterns in each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

The upper symbol row Z1 consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in descending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. The lower symbol row Z3 also consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in ascending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. Therefore, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are composed of 18 symbols each. In contrast, the middle symbol row Z2 consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in ascending order, with an additional main symbol "4" placed between the "9" and "1" symbols, and one secondary symbol between each of these main symbols. Thus, the middle symbol row Z2 consists of 10 main symbols, totaling 20 symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13(b), the display screen 95a displays three symbols for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. The display screen 95a also has five active lines: the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5. The display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Once the display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has finished with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed, indicating either a normal jackpot or a probability-increasing jackpot.

Furthermore, considering that the display of variations in each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 can be referred to as the first symbol row (or first picture row), the lower symbol row Z3 as the second symbol row (or second picture row), and the middle symbol row Z2 as the third symbol row (or third picture row).

Of the main symbols listed above, those with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are considered "specific symbols," while those with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are considered "non-specific symbols." In the case of a probability-increasing jackpot, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed. In the case of a regular jackpot, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed.

Furthermore, the manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 95 is not limited to those described above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row may be set to vertical.

Below the lower part of the display screen 95a, specifically below the variable display area ME which is composed of variable display areas for the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows, is a hold display area. The hold display area consists of a hold count display area Da, where the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operation openings 91 and 92 are arranged horizontally, and an execution target display area Dc, which can display hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the game rounds currently being played in the variable display area ME.

More specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the activation openings 91 and 92 is 8. Correspondingly, the reserved ball display area Da is configured with the following areas: the 1st unit reserved ball display area, the 2nd unit reserved ball display area, the 3rd unit reserved ball display area, the 4th unit reserved ball display area, the 5th unit reserved ball display area, the 6th unit reserved ball display area, the 7th unit reserved ball display area, and the 8th unit reserved ball display area.

For example, when a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 1, the predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area. When a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 4, the predetermined reserved images (reserved icons) are displayed in the first to fourth unit reserved display areas, respectively. Figure 13(b) illustrates the case where the number of reserved balls in the operating slots 91 and 92 is 3. In the following explanation, "number of reserved balls" will also be simply referred to as "number of reserved balls."

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as jackpot抽選 (jackpot lottery), setting the display on the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 95. Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, it uses a random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery, a type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 95 is fluctuating towards a miss, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time of the symbol fluctuations on the display sections D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit 99 and the display time of the symbol fluctuations on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Furthermore, it uses an electric mechanism release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operation port 92 into the electric mechanism release state.

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an operation slot reserve area RE, an execution area AE, and a total reserved ball storage area.

The operating port retention area RE comprises the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth areas. In accordance with the winning history of the first or second operating port 91, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 is stored as retention information in one of the eighth areas. This retention information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in areas 1 through 8, if multiple consecutive entries into the first or second operating port 91 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. Furthermore, up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the first or second operating port 92 are retained and stored. The retained ball storage area 432 also has a total retained count storage area, which stores information to identify the number of entries into the first or second operating port 91 that are being retained and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE when the display section D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 starts displaying the changing patterns. At the start of each game round, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, we will provide further explanation about the various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 15, two win/loss tables are set: a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes in its win/loss lottery means: a low probability mode (low probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

Under the circumstances where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 15(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 15(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 (ranging from 0 to 599), "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. Incidentally, if the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot are arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot corresponds to a losing result. Losing results are broadly classified into normal losing results and special losing results. While details will be described later, special losing results are treated more favorably than normal losing results in that they trigger a switch in the support mode by the electric mechanism 93 to the high-frequency support mode A described later. If a special losing result occurs under predetermined conditions, the support mode switches to the high-frequency support mode after the game round related to that special losing result has ended. In the following explanation, normal losing results will also be simply referred to as "losing results."

In the situation where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 15(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are "111", "333", and "555", totaling three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 (0-599), "111", "333", and "555" correspond to special miss results. On the other hand, even in the game state where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 15(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are also "111", "333", and "555", totaling three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 (0-599), "111", "333", and "555" correspond to jackpot results. Therefore, the probability of a special miss is the same in both low probability mode and high probability mode.

Next, the type counter C2 will be explained. The type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 29, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results differ in two conditions: (1) the lottery mode in the win/loss lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) the support mode by the electric mechanism 93 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The support modes provided by the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operating port 92 are set to be low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state), so that the frequency at which the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when comparing situations where game balls are continuously launched in the same manner towards the game area PE. The high-frequency support mode is broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by the aforementioned special miss, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot. The differences between these support modes will be described later.

The type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first or second operation port 91, it is stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432.

The distribution destinations of game results for the type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 16. Two distribution tables are set: the distribution table for jackpots (first distribution information group) shown in Figure 16(a), and the distribution table for special misses (second distribution information group) shown in Figure 16(b).

As shown in Figure 16(a), the distribution table for jackpots sets the distribution destinations for game results as follows: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability-changing jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot results, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability-changing jackpot results.

As shown in Figure 17(a), a 6R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result where, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode B. This high-frequency support mode B ends when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode B reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to the special game state), and the game switches to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to 40 games.

A 6R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot where, after the end of the special game state (open/close execution mode), the lottery mode becomes high probability mode and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode B. This high-frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot result and transition to the special game state, and switches to low-frequency support mode upon the start of the special game state.

Next, as shown in Figure 16(b), the distribution table for special misses sets special miss result A and special miss result B as the distribution destinations for the game result. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 23" corresponds to special miss result A, and "24 to 29" corresponds to special miss result B.

As shown in Figure 17(b), neither special failure result A nor special failure result B triggers a switch in the lottery mode; rather, they trigger a switch in the support mode by the electric mechanism 93.

Specifically, a special loss result A triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game round in which that special loss result A occurred. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and the system transitions to low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set at 20 games.

Regarding special failure result B, the end of the game round in which this special failure result B occurred triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and the system transitions to low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, 40 games are set as the termination threshold.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92. Then, a decision is made on whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, during gameplay rounds transitioning to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. While the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same for each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, a configuration where the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode may be used.

Here, "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) capable of displaying (or changing) the variation (or variable) of symbols (pictures), where, in a game round where the game result corresponds to an open/close execution mode, the stop display result after the variation display may become a special display result. This state is intended to make the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the special display result, occurring between the start of the variation (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 95 and the display of the stop display result.

In other words, this refers to a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, a potential winning symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are then displayed in a variable symbol state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying potential reach symbol combinations that correspond to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a pre-set active line within the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

To further explain the display content on display screen 95a, first, the symbol variation display ends in the upper symbol row, and then, when the symbol variation display ends in the lower symbol row, a reach line is formed when a main symbol with a number that constitutes a winning symbol combination is displayed to stop on any of the active lines. When this reach line is formed, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row is performed, indicating a reach. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row ends, with the main symbols forming the reach line, along with the main symbols with numbers that constitute a winning symbol combination, being displayed to stop on the reach line.

Furthermore, the reach display includes methods such as displaying the reach symbol combination as described above, then showing the remaining symbol variations in the remaining symbol rows, and displaying predetermined characters as animations in the background screen to create a reach effect, or displaying the reach symbol combination in a reduced size or hidden, and then displaying predetermined characters as animations across approximately the entire display screen 95a to create a reach effect. Additionally, the decision of whether or not to display a pre-announcement using predetermined images, such as predetermined characters, when a reach display is being shown or before a reach display may be made using a reach random number counter C3 or other counters.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 95. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2, and at the start of pattern variation by the pattern display device 95.

The electric mechanism release counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric mechanism release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is conducted based on the stored value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 93 of the second operation opening 92 to the open state. Further explanation of the support mode will be provided below with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 18 and 19.

The random number values that result in a support win are stored as a support lottery table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 18, the support lottery table includes a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group), a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A (low-probability win/loss information group), and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B (high-probability win/loss information group).

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (Figure 18(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results.

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A (Figure 18(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results. Therefore, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is shared with the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high-frequency support mode B (Figure 18(c)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values except for "4" and "304". In other words, all values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" except for "4" and "304" correspond to support win results. Therefore, high-frequency support mode B is differentiated from high-frequency support mode A and low-frequency support mode by resulting in support wins in almost all support lotteries.

As shown in Figure 19, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/2. The number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) when a support bonus is won is set to "1," and the time the electric mechanism 93 remains in the open state (open time) is set to "0.1 seconds." By drastically shortening the open time in this way, entry into the second operating opening 92 is effectively avoided during the low-frequency support mode.

In High-Frequency Support Mode A, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/2, similar to Low-Frequency Support Mode. However, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) when a support bonus is won is set to "2 times." The time the electric mechanism is maintained in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds," and the interval time it is maintained in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds." By extending the open time compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode in this way, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted during High-Frequency Support Mode A. This allows for timely entry into the second operating port 92, making it possible to play while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls held (investment). In other words, compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode, High-Frequency Support Mode A is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

In High-Frequency Support Mode B, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/1.1. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "2 times." The time the electric mechanism is maintained in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds," and the interval time it is maintained in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds." By extending the open time compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted in High-Frequency Support Mode B. In High-Frequency Support Mode B, the frequency of entry into the second operating port 92 is higher than in High-Frequency Support Mode A, allowing players to continue playing while further reducing the decrease in their ball count (investment). In other words, compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode and High-Frequency Support Mode A, High-Frequency Support Mode B is configured to have a higher ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

As already explained, the game states in this embodiment are broadly divided into a normal game state, where the game progresses by repeating game rounds based on balls entering the operating ports 91 and 92, and a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is triggered by a jackpot and to which the variable prize entry device 83 is opened and closed. The normal game state consists of a first normal game state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode; a second normal game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode B; a third normal game state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode B; and a fourth normal game state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode A. The advantage for the player is set to increase in the order of first normal game state < fourth normal game state, and third normal game state < second normal game state.

(Regarding the various processes executed by the main control unit 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 402 within the main control unit 162 for the advancement of the game will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 402 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the explanation of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, let's refer to the flowchart in Figure 20 and explain the timer interrupt processing. This process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU402.

In step S101, the system reads the status of various prize detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e). Specifically, it reads the status of the various prize detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162, determines the status of the respective sensors, and saves the detection information (prize detection information).

Subsequently, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the subsequent step S103, the system updates the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric mechanism release counter C4. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric mechanism release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are reset to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S104, the entry process for the through gate 84 is executed. In the entry process for the through gate, it is determined whether the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the flag is stored, and provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved memory items SN) is less than 4, the value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433. Then, if the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the entry detection flag is erased, and the entry process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the prize-winning process for the through-gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105. In step S105, the prize-winning process for the activation ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for the operating port)
Here, the prize-winning process for the operating port will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered (become a prize in) the first operating opening 91. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S202, where a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 242 to dispense three game balls.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. In the following step S204, the value corresponding to the first operation opening 91 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (entered) the second operating opening 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating opening 92, the process proceeds to step S207, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to dispense four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing described later.

In the following step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. In the following step S209, the value corresponding to the second operation opening 92 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

Furthermore, if both steps S201 and S206 result in a negative determination, that is, if no ball enters either the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92, the prize-winning process will terminate immediately.

Now, referring to Figure 22, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, in step S302, the number of reserved operation memories N for the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and in step S303, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

In the subsequent step S304, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, which were updated in step S103, are stored in the first available memory area of the operating slot reserve area RE, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN, which was incremented by 1 in step S302.

In other words, if the first operation slot reserve memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, which were updated in step S103, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot reserve area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation slot reserve memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302.

Furthermore, if the second operation slot's reserved memory count RbN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, updated in step S103, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation slot's reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 99. During the display update process, if the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operation port 91, the display of the hold count display section S1 for the first operation port is updated. If the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operation port 92, the display of the hold count display section S2 for the second operation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 and the reserved number related to the second operation port 92. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 92 increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S306 and S307, the sub-control devices, namely the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410, are notified that a prize has been awarded to the operation openings 91 and 92. A pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information indicating whether the prize was awarded to the first operation opening 91 or the second operation opening 92.

The hold command set in step S307 will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output processing of the normal processing (step S401), which will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, has been executed, and the main processing for the game is performed during normal processing. In summary, the processes in steps S401 to S407 are executed as periodic processing with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing in steps S409 and S410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the first step, S401, executes external signal output processing. In the external signal output processing of step S401, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side and the hall computer.

Specifically, the system determines whether a prize ball command is set, and if so, transmits it to the payout control device 242. Furthermore, if various commands such as the variation start command, type command, variation end command, and other performance commands, as well as the hold command and the shift command (described later), are set, they are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, each time the change in the pattern is displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating the pattern confirmation is output to the hall computer. During the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer. During the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S403, game round control processing is performed to control the game in each game round. This game round control processing includes determining the jackpot, setting the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95, and controlling the display on the main display unit 99.

After executing the game turn control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where the game state transition process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode B, etc. Further details regarding the game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be explained later.

In the subsequent step S405, a control process for the through-gate is executed, including a support lottery process based on the winning entry into the through-gate 84. In step S406, a support process for the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operating opening 92, is executed. Details regarding the through-gate process in step S405 and the electric mechanism support process in step S406 will be described later.

Subsequently, in step S407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is energized once at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S408, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal process is reached, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

The execution time for each process in steps S401 to S407 varies depending on the game state; therefore, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Thus, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control process in step S403 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 24 to 27.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 24, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502 onward, namely the game round start processes in steps S503 to S506 and the game round progress processes in steps S507 to S509.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, steps S502 and S503 determine whether a game round is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in a variable display state. If they are in a variable display state, step S502 is a negative determination, and the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether the confirmed display on the operation port display units D1 and D2 has finished. If the determination in step S503 is positive, the process proceeds to steps S504 to S506 for starting a game round. In the game round start process, first in step S504, it is determined whether the total number of starting reserved balls (common reserved ball count CRN) is "0". If the common reserved ball count CRN is "0", it means that no reserved ball information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, this game round control process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the common reserve count CRN is not "0", in step S505, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operation port of the reserve ball storage area 432 for variable display. Furthermore, in step S506, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the symbol display device 95, after which the game round control process ends.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S505 and the variation start process in step S506. First, we will explain the data setting process in step S505 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 25.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, the number of operation hold memory N stored in the hold memory area that is the target of this setting process, as well as the common hold memory CRN, are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of hold information stored in the operation port hold area RE (see Figure 14), i.e., the number of operation hold memory N, is "0". If the number of operation hold memory N is "0", the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of operation hold memory N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the data (hold information) stored in the second to eighth areas of the operation port hold area RE are shifted sequentially to the lower areas. As a result, when data from area 1 is moved to execution area AE, for example, the data within each area is shifted as follows: area 2 → area 1, area 3 → area 2, area 4 → area 3, area 5 → area 4, area 6 → area 5, area 7 → area 6, area 8 → area 7, and so on.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information that allows the notification and display control device 140 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the operation port holding area RE. After this, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the notification and display control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23). This shift command is then transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification and display control device 140.

(Initiation of change process)
Next, the variation start process in step S506 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 26.

In the variation initiation process, first, in step S701, the update process for the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is executed. The game count counter is reset to 0 upon transitioning to the special game state, and is incremented by "1" each time the update process in step S701 is executed. The MPU 402 can identify the number of games played after the special game state ends by referring to the value of this game count counter.

In the following step S702, a win/loss determination process is executed based on the winning entries into the operating ports 91 and 92. This win/loss determination process determines whether the held information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, it identifies the information for jackpot determination, i.e., the information obtained from the winning random number counter C1, from the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is low probability mode, the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot. If the win/loss lottery mode is high probability mode, the win/loss table for high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the following step S703, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination process in step S702 corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S704.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information from the information stored in the execution area AE, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R probability variation jackpot result.

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, a positive determination is made in step S705, and the process proceeds to step S706, where the stop result setting process for the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. If it is a 6R regular jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S705, and the process proceeds to step S707, where the stop result setting process for the 6R regular jackpot is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S703, if a negative result is obtained in step S703, i.e., if it is not a jackpot, proceed to step S708. If the result of this draw is a normal miss as described above, a negative result is obtained in step S708 and proceed to step S713. In step S713, the stop result setting process for normal misses is executed. If the result of this draw is a special miss as described above, an affirmative result is obtained in step S708 and proceed to step S709, where the special miss type determination process is executed.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2, among the information stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for special exceptions stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to special exception result A or special exception result B.

If the result is special failure A, a positive determination is made in step S710, and the process proceeds to step S711, where the stop result setting process for special failure A is executed. If the result is special failure B, a negative determination is made in step S710, and the process proceeds to step S712, where the stop result setting process for special failure B is executed.

In the stop result setting processes of steps S706, S707, and S711-S713, the information regarding the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In steps S706 and S707, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R regular jackpot is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707, the 6R regular jackpot flag is stored.

Furthermore, in steps S711 and S712, information for determining whether the result of this game round is either a special miss A or a special miss B is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S711, the special miss A flag is stored, and in step S712, the special miss B flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S706, S707, or S711-S713, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S714. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

After the setting process for the display time of the variation is executed in step S714, the process proceeds to step S715, where the variation start command and the type command are set. The variation start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time. The type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the type command includes information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R normal jackpot result, special miss result A, and special miss result B. Note that in step S713, the value of the game count counter is referenced to determine whether the ceiling has been reached, and this information is also included in the variation start command.

The variation start command and type command set in step S715 are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls the lamp unit 26 and speaker unit 29 so that the determined performance content is executed. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance, such as the variation display pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 95, for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and transmits this determined information to the above variation start command and type command to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 so that the game performance (display performance) is executed in the manner determined by the notification/performance control device 140, based on the received variation start command and type command.

Subsequently, in step S716, the display of the changing symbols is started on either the first operation port display unit D1 or the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this symbol change start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the display of the changing symbols, etc., to start before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

(Setting the variable display time)
Next, an overview of the setting process for the variation display time (step S714) will be described with reference to Figures 27 to 29. As already explained, in this embodiment, reserve information is acquired based on balls entering the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, and based on the acquired reserve information, the variation display to confirmation display of the patterns and symbols in the game round is executed. Here, the variation display time of the patterns and symbols is set according to the current game state, the result of the win/loss lottery based on balls entering the operation ports D1 and D2, the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, etc. Regarding the variation display time, when comparing a jackpot result with a loss result, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a loss result where no reach display occurs, the display time is set to become shorter as the number of stored reserve information increases.

In the process of setting the variable display time, it is first determined whether a jackpot or a special miss occurred in the lottery in step S702 described above. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the following are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404: the 6R probability variation jackpot flag, the 6R normal jackpot flag, the special miss A flag, or the special miss B flag.

(Fluctuating display time table for normal misses)
If the lottery result is a normal miss (complete miss) that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling (not reaching it), it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display on the symbol display device 95 in the current game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 403 are referenced to determine whether or not to generate a reach display. Then, the variable display time table corresponding to a complete miss is referenced from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403, and the variable display time is set according to the current game state, the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, and whether or not a reach has occurred.

Figure 27(a1) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the display time for the variation is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the first normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 27(a2) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the display time for the variation is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the fourth normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the fourth normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the first normal game state.

Figure 27(a3) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0", the display time for the variation will be set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation will be set to "1 or 2 seconds". In the second normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 27(a4) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the third normal game state, which is in low probability mode and supports high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored hold information is "0", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored hold information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the third normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the second normal game state. Note that in the third normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Incidentally, in all four normal game states (1st to 4th), during game rounds where a losing reach display (losing reach) occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. This display time is within the same range as the display time set for game rounds corresponding to jackpot results (see Figure 28). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for jackpot results, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for losing results. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may, when the game progresses without a jackpot and the number of plays in normal gameplay reaches a predetermined upper limit (hereinafter also referred to as the ceiling), forcibly switch the support mode to high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling. In the game rounds where the ceiling is reached, a variable display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds) is set, similar to when a jackpot occurs or when a special miss occurs.

Furthermore, this is not the only option; it is also possible to configure the system so that the display time for spins that reach the ceiling is not corresponding to the reach indicator. For example, the display time for spins that reach the ceiling and spins that do not reach the ceiling may be set to be the same regardless of whether the ceiling is reached or not.

Incidentally, the term "complete miss" as used in the following explanation refers to any game result that does not fall under the categories of a big win, a special miss, or a normal miss that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling.

(Table of display time for big wins)
If the lottery result is a jackpot (6R probability variation jackpot or 6R regular jackpot), the ROM 403 refers to the jackpot-corresponding variable display time table from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423, and sets the variable display time regardless of the current game state or the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE.

Figure 28 illustrates the display time for the variation when a complete loss occurs in the first to fourth normal game states. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "20 to 30 seconds". This range of display time is the same as the range for when a losing reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively longer time is more likely to be set compared to a relatively shorter time. Note that in the first, third, and fourth normal game states, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 is "1 second", while in the second normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 is "0.5 seconds".

(Fluctuating display time table for handling special out-of-bounds events)
If the lottery result is a special miss (special miss A or special miss B), the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table corresponding to the special miss from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403.

Figure 29(c1) shows the display time for a special miss in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the variation will be set to "20 to 30 seconds". This range of display time is the same as the range for when a miss reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively longer time is more likely to be set compared to a relatively shorter time. In the first normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 29(c2) shows the display time for a special miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the variation will be set to "20 to 30 seconds". This range of display time is the same as the range for when a miss reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively longer time is more likely to be set compared to a relatively shorter time. In the first normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 29(c3) shows the display time for a special miss in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the special miss is set to either "1" or "2 seconds". The range of this display time is the same as that for a complete miss as described above, making it difficult to distinguish a special miss from the display time alone. In the second normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 29(c4) shows the display time for a special miss in the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the special miss is set to either "1" or "2 seconds". The range of this display time is the same as that for the complete miss described above, making it difficult to distinguish a special miss from the display time alone. In the third normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, if the game progresses without a jackpot and the number of games played in the normal game state reaches a predetermined upper limit (ceiling), the support mode may be forcibly switched to high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling. While reaching the ceiling does not occur in high-frequency support mode B, it can occur in the first normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode) and the fourth normal game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode A). In the first and fourth normal game states, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, the display time for the variation is set to the same variation display time as for the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds). In other words, the machine is configured to display a reach during the game round when the ceiling is reached.

Returning to the explanation of the game turn control process (Figure 24), if the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 are showing a variable display or a confirmed display, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) in RAM 404 has become "0". This value is deducted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 20) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display processing is executed in step S508. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the corresponding display unit D1 or D2 for the operation port is changed. After that, the game round control processing ends. If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display processing is executed in step S509, and then the game round control processing ends. Details of this confirmation display processing will be described later.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 30.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the system is in opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If it is not in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether or not the game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the change display ended on either the operation port display unit D1 or D2 of the main display unit D. If the game round has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the game round has ended, a positive result is determined in step S802, and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether the game result of this round (the result of the above win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether either the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If neither of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S804. This start process releases the restriction on the operation of the variable prize device 83 by the locking device, allowing the opening and closing operation of the variable prize device 83 until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S804, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in step S801, the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag is used to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

In the following step S805, the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means of determining the number of times the variable prize device 83 has been opened. After executing the process in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, where the high-frequency support mode flags A and B, stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, are erased. This forces the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode to switch to the low-frequency support mode. Subsequently, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S808, after which the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S807 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The notification/effect control device 140 determines the content of the effects corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined effects. This content includes the display mode of the symbol display device 95, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/effect control device 140, so that the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is changed, for example, to display animated characters or background images corresponding to a jackpot.

Furthermore, the external signal set in step S808 is also transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The hall computer can then determine that the gate is in open/close execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if it is determined in step S801 that the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S810. Now, referring to Figure 31, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot will be explained.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
In the opening and closing process of the main prize slot, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variable prize device 83 (main prize slot) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable ball entry device drive unit of the variable prize device 83. If the main prize slot is not open, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S902 is positive, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the main prize slot, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S903, the main prize slot opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904, where the variable prize entry device 83 (large prize opening) is opened. Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is driven to open the large prize opening.

Subsequently, steps S905 and S906 are executed as setting processes for the closing conditions (setting processes for when the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning slot) are configured. Specifically, in step S905, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S906, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process in step S906, in step S907, an open command is set to indicate that the variable prize device 83 (large prize slot) has been opened, and the large prize slot opening/closing process is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (see Figure 23). Based on the received open command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize-winning opening based on the detection signal from the detection sensor installed in the variable prize-winning device 83.

If a prize has been awarded, the output process for the prize award command is executed in step S910. This prize award command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, and the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, for example, on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, changes as a result of this prize award command.

After executing the command output process in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1. In the following step S912, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S912, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S908 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the large prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S913, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is deactivated in order to close the variable prize entry device 83 (large prize opening).

In the following step S914, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC1 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S915, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC1 value is "0". If the determination in step S915 is negative, the process proceeds to step S916, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S916, a closing command is set in step S917, and the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23). The notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S915, if it is determined in step S915 that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918. In step S918, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending waiting time is set for the ending of the open/close execution mode, so that the next game round is not started. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Subsequently, in step S919, after setting the ending command, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 30), after executing the opening and closing of the large prize slot in step S810, the process proceeds to step S811, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends immediately. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S813, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process ends. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S1001 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1002, where a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for high probability mode will be referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

Subsequently, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on this set high-frequency support mode B flag, in the subsequent electric support processing, the D support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was a 6R regular jackpot, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 (step S1004), and the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "40". After that, the process proceeds to step S1003, where the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

After executing the process in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1006, where the value of the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is cleared (reset). Then, in step S1007, the various flags (such as the jackpot flag) for the opening/closing execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, the control process for the through gate in step S405 of the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 33 and 34.

(Control processing for through gates)
In the control process for the through gate, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not support is being provided by the electric mechanism 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The support flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when support by the electric mechanism 93 begins and is deleted from the various flag storage area 435 when support ends.

If the support flag is stored, the control process for this through gate terminates immediately. If the support flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1101, and the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether the through gate display unit DS in the main display unit D is currently displaying a changing or confirmed pattern. If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is retained up to a maximum of four times. That is, the retained information (electric bonus retain) based on winning at the through gate 84 is stored in the electric bonus retain area 433 up to a maximum of four times. In step S1103, it is determined whether the bonus bonus retain memory count SN is "0". If the bonus bonus retain memory count SN is "0", a positive determination is made in step S1103 and the control process for this through gate is terminated. If the bonus bonus retain memory count SN is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S1103 and the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the electric bonus retain area 433 for variable display.

This data setting process decrements the number of reserved items (SN) by 1. Then, it determines whether the number of reserved items stored in the electric reserved item area 433 is "0". If the number of reserved items (SN) is "0", the data setting process ends. Conversely, if the number of reserved items (SN) is not "0", the data (reserved information) stored in the first area of the electric reserved item area 433 is moved to the execution area. Then, the data (reserved information) stored in the second to fourth areas of the electric reserved item area 433 is shifted sequentially to the lower areas. As a result, for example, when the data in the first area is moved to the execution area, the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

After executing the data setting process in step S1104, the process to start the pattern change on the through-gate display unit DS is executed in step S1105, and then the control process for this through-gate is terminated. Here, the pattern change start process in step S1105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 34.

(Initiation of change process)
In the variation start process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B or not. If the current support mode is either low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode A, a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, a support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode A (see Figures 18(a) and (b)). If the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, a support lottery process (high-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to high-frequency support mode B (see Figure 18(c)).

If support is selected in the support lottery process in steps S1202 and S1203, a positive determination is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1205 to execute the stop result setting process for support selection. If support is not selected in the support lottery process in steps S1202 and S1203, a negative determination is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1206 to execute the stop result setting process for support not selected.

After performing the stop result setting process in steps S1205 and S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the setting process for the display time of the changing pattern in the through gate display unit DS is performed.
The variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 stores a variable display time table for low-frequency support mode and a variable display time table for high-frequency support mode, respectively. When the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the pattern is set by referring to the variable display time table for low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time set by referring to the variable display time table for low-frequency support mode is specified to be "10 to 20 seconds" (see Figure 35). On the other hand, when the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B, the variable display time of the pattern is set by referring to the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time set by referring to the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode is specified to be "0.5 seconds" (see Figure 35). In other words, in high-frequency support modes A and B, the variable display time of the pattern in the through-gate display unit DS is significantly shorter compared to the low-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, in all support modes, the display time for confirming the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS is consistently set to "0.5 seconds".

After executing the setting process in step S1207, the control process for this through-gate is terminated in step S1208 by starting the display of the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS.

(Processing for power supply support)
Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 36 and 37, the power supply support process in step S406, which is performed as part of the normal process, will be described.

In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is currently being provided by the electric feature 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not currently being provided, a negative determination is made in step S1301, and the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the display of confirmed symbols has finished in the through-gate display unit DS. If the display of confirmed symbols has not finished, a negative determination is made in step S1302, and the process for supporting the electric feature ends. If the display of confirmed symbols has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84. If support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S1303, and the process for this electric support function ends there. If support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84, an positive determination is made in step S1303, and the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If there is a low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means of determining the number of times the electric function 93 has opened. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the process proceeds to step S1306, and "2" is set in the round counter RC2.

After executing steps S1305 and S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307, where support flags are set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S1308, the opening start process is executed, and the main electric support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time for the opening. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric mechanism 93 begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive result is obtained in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S1308 has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S1309, and the main power support process ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S1309, and the process proceeds to step S1310. Now, referring to Figure 37, the power switching process in step S1310 will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device switching process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric device 93 is open (in the open state). Whether the electric device 93 is open or not is determined by whether the electric device drive unit is in a driving state. If the electric device 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric device switching process ends there. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric device 93, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the electric device switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S1403, proceed to step S1404.

In step S1404, the electric mechanism release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit (solenoid) is started, switching the electric mechanism 93 from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S1405, the second prize counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S1406, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) (step S1407). If it is low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if a positive result is obtained in step S1401, i.e., if the electric mechanism 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no entry has occurred, the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is deducted by 1 in step S1411, and in the following step S1412, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S1412, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1409 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the conditions for ending the opening of the electric mechanism 93 have been met. In this case, in step S1413, the output of the drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit is stopped in order to close the electric mechanism 93 (second operating opening 92).

In the following step S1414, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC2 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC2 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S1415, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC2 value is "0". If the determination in step S1415 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1416, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds).
If it is determined in step S1415 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, the waiting time for the ending of the electric support is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 36, after executing the electric power switch opening/closing process in step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the result in step S1311 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S1311 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1312, where it is determined whether the ending waiting time set in step S1417 has elapsed. If the result in step S1312 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S1312 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the electric power support process ends. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84.

As detailed above, the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93 is primarily configured to switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode via a special game state. However, in cases of the above-mentioned special failure or reaching the ceiling, the mode may switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode without going through the special game state. Below, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 38 and 39, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the configuration related to the support mode switching, specifically the confirmation display process (step S509) of the game turn control process (Figure 24) executed as part of the normal process.

(Processing for final display)
As shown in Figure 38, in the confirmation display process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is currently being performed by the operation port display units D1 and D2. If the determination in step S1501 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, the confirmation display time setting process is executed. In this embodiment, "1 sec" is set as the confirmation display time in the first normal game state, third normal game state, and fourth normal game state, and "0.5 sec" is set as the confirmation display time in the second normal game state.

In the following step S1503, the start process for the confirmed display is executed. In this start process, the display controls of the operation port display units D1 and D2 are performed to stop the patterns determined in steps S706, S707, and S711-S713. Afterward, in step S1504, a variation end command is set, and this confirmed display process ends. The variation end command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, etc., in step S401 of the normal process. Based on receiving this variation end command, the notification/performance control device 140 terminates the variation display of the currently running patterns on the pattern display device 95, etc. (transitioning to the confirmed display).

Returning to the explanation of step S1501, if a positive result is obtained in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether the confirmation display time for the patterns in the operation port display units D1 and D2 has elapsed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1505, the confirmation display process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S1505, the support mode switching process is executed in step S1506, ending the confirmation display process. Now, referring to Figure 39, the support mode switching process will be explained.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the result in step S1601 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the result in step S1602 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the result in step S1602 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1604, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S1604 is negative, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. When the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1601, if a negative result is obtained in step S1601, proceed to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive result is obtained in step S1606, proceed to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative result is obtained in step S1607, proceed to step S1608. In step S1608, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1609, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative result is obtained in step S1609, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S1609, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the count limit flag are cleared in step S1605, and the switching process ends. In other words, when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the system switches to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1606, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether the current game count corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative determination is made in step S1611, and this switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S1611 (corresponding to a special miss) or if a positive determination is made in step S1610 (reaching the ceiling), the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in the following step S1613, the game count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S1614, where the setting process for the continuation count counter is executed, and then the main switching process is terminated.

In the continuation counter setting process, if the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during the current game round, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 400 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 20 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 40 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A.

Returning to the explanation of step S1607, if the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S1614, and this switching process ends. This extends high-frequency support mode A so that it continues until 400 game plays have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of game plays for which high-frequency support mode A continues is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through other normal game states.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 40, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification and effect control board 441, located in the notification and effect control device 140, is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 contains a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, a RAM 444 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM 443 and RAM 444 to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 442 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for controlling the hold display (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29, which are installed on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 140 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element where the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip; a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not mandatory for the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 to be integrated into a single chip on the MPU 472; they may also be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process to identify the variation display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 95 based on the commands transmitted from the notification/effect control device 140, and also executes processing related to hold notifications, etc., and then executes drawing processing for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores JPEG image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 472. This work data and flags are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device, which acts as a liquid crystal display driver, integrated into the graphic display device 95. Because the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be described as a microcontroller chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP475 adjusts the timing of the MPU472, video RAM477, etc., to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM477 from the character ROM476 at a predetermined timing to display it on the graphic display device 95.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data, such as patterns, displayed on the pattern display device 95. This character ROM 476 holds bitmap image data of various display patterns, a color palette table referenced when determining the color representation for each dot of the bitmap image, and other similar data.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and store image data and other information in each character ROM 476. It is also possible to configure the system so that JPEG image data for background images, stored in the program ROM 473, is stored in the character ROMs 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 95. The display content of the pattern display device 95 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the general outline of the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 95a is identified by the notification/effect control device 140 by referring to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the pattern variation display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification result. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 executes a pattern variation control process as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 msec), and the general outline of the pattern variation display mode is identified in this pattern variation control process. Now, the pattern variation control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 41.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control processing, if the game state is the first normal game state, a positive determination is made in step S1701, and the first variable display control processing for the first normal game state is executed in step S1702. If the game state is the second normal game state, a negative determination is made in step S1701 and a positive determination is made in step S1703, and the second variable display control processing for the second normal game state is executed in step S1704. If the game state is the third normal game state, negative determinations are made in steps S1701 and S1703, and the third variable display control processing for the third normal game state is executed in step S1705. If the game state is the fourth normal game state, negative determinations are made in steps S1701 and S1703 and a positive determination is made in step S1707, and the fourth variable display control processing for the fourth normal game state is executed in step S1708.

(First variable display control process)
Here, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 42, the first variable display control process executed in the first normal game state will be explained.

In the first variation display control process, step S1801 first determines whether or not a game round is currently being executed, that is, whether or not the variation display or confirmation display for one game round is being executed on the symbol display device 95. If it is determined that a game round is not currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S1802, where it is determined whether or not a variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1802, the current fluctuation display control process terminates. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S1802, the first fluctuation initiation process (described later) is executed in step S1803, and then the current fluctuation display control process terminates.

Returning to the explanation of step S1801, if a positive result is obtained in step S1801, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative result is obtained in step S1804, the variation display control process is terminated after executing the variation in progress processing in step S1805. The variation in progress processing is the process of executing various effects or changing determined effects during the game round started by the variation start processing.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1806, where the variation termination process is executed, and then the variation display control process is terminated. In the variation termination process, the variation display of the symbols and the ongoing effects are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the held information for the current game round. This process involves driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 to perform the effects corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 410, and the variation termination process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95 to confirm and stop the symbols based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing to initiate the first change)
Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 43, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the first variation initiation process in step S1803. The first variation initiation process is a process to start the game round's effects based on the receipt of a variation start command from the main control device 162. In the first variation initiation process, settings such as the reach display are made as part of the game round's effects.

In the first variation start process, step S1901 first reads the variation start command received, and identifies information on whether a reach occurred and the variation display time from this command. Also, as already explained, when a variation start command is sent from the main control unit 162, a type command is also sent. In step S1601, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, normal jackpot result, special miss result, normal miss result, and ceiling reach, is identified from this command. Then, in step S1901, from the identified information, information on whether a jackpot was won, the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information on whether a special miss occurred, the type of special miss if a special miss occurred, information on whether a reach occurred if neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurred, information on whether the ceiling was reached, and variation display time information are obtained, and this obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S1902, based on the information obtained in step S1901, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the result of the current game is a jackpot result (either a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result), the jackpot performance setting process is executed in the following step S1903. The jackpot performance setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process, which determines the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the active line on which that combination will be stopped and displayed, and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process), which determines the variation display pattern of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and their address information. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following combinations of symbols are defined as corresponding to a jackpot: "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination (see, for example, Figure 45(a)).

As already explained, when a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the process of determining the jackpot display pattern, the system retrieves the reach display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 and determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the received variation start command and variation display time and type command. Furthermore, the system executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, it is determined whether or not the ceiling will be reached in this game round. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive determination is made in step S1904 and the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling is executed. The process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling is broadly divided into a stop result determination process, which determines the combination of symbols to be displayed for reaching the ceiling and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process), which determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for reaching the ceiling.

In the process of determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling that is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of symbols "1," "3," and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see Figure 45(b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variation display pattern for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The display pattern for either a normal reach display or a super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during a game round that reaches the ceiling, the jackpot takes priority. That is, the symbol combination and display pattern for that game round are set by the setting process in step S1903.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive result is obtained in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the special miss animation setting process is executed. The special miss animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a special miss and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for the special miss.

In the process for determining the stop result for special misses, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, similar to when the ceiling is reached, the combination of symbols "1", "3", and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (see Figure 45(b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is reported via a reach display. The process for determining the variation display pattern for special misses retrieves the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443. It then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. Furthermore, it executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is determined in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the animation setting process for a complete miss. In the animation setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the animation setting process for a reach is executed; if a reach does not occur, the animation setting process for a non-reach is executed.

The process for setting up the effects for triggering a reach is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach and the valid lines for which that combination will be stopped; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss after reaching a winning combination, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a big win, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for a complete miss after a reach, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the received variable start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The processing for setting up the effects when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach) and the valid lines for which that combination of symbols will be displayed as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach).

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss (no reach), the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a jackpot, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the display pattern for a complete miss (no reach), the display pattern table for misses (no reach) stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the display pattern corresponding to the game result in the display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S1903, S1905, S1907, or S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, commands containing the stop result and presentation pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 are output to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 then controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S1909, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S1910, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the display mode of the patterns shown on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, based on the schematic diagram in Figure 44.

(Display method)
The variable display modes of the symbols executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 95a are broadly classified into five types: non-reach miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. These variable display modes are set to have different variable display times, and based on the information related to the variable display time attached to the command from the main control device 162, it is possible to grasp an overview of the variable display mode for each game round.

Specifically, the display time for non-reach misses is "1 sec to 14 sec" (with differences depending on the game state, number of reserved balls, etc.), the display time for normal reach A is "20 sec", the display time for normal reach B is "25 sec", which is longer than the display time for normal reach A, and the display time for super reach A to C is "30 sec", which is longer than the display time for normal reach A and B. For example, if the information regarding the display time of the variation attached to the command from the main control device 162 is "20 sec", the notification and performance control device 140 will understand that normal reach A should be executed, and if the information regarding the display time of the variation attached to the command from the main control device 162 is "25 sec", the notification and performance control device 140 will understand that normal reach B should be executed. In contrast, if the information regarding the variable display time attached to the command from the main control unit 162 is "30 sec," the decision of which of Super Reach A to C to execute is left to the notification and performance control unit 140.

In this determination, during gameplay rounds corresponding to a jackpot, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A. During gameplay rounds corresponding to a complete miss, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, during gameplay rounds corresponding to a jackpot result, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. During gameplay rounds corresponding to a miss, the selection order is more likely to be Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In short, the probability of winning a jackpot increases as the display time increases, and this probability increases in the order of Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C.

Furthermore, regarding the game rounds corresponding to special misses, the selection order is made more likely in the following sequence: Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. In game rounds where the ceiling is reached, the selection rates are evenly distributed so that Super Reach C = Super Reach B = Super Reach A.

Here, the display patterns for normal reach A and B will be explained with reference to Figure 44(a). When normal reach A or B is selected, the display of all stopped symbol rows begins to change (scroll display), then the display of the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) ends (stops), and then the display of the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3) ends (stops). With the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stopped in this state, a reach line is formed when the main symbols with the same number on any of the active lines L1 to L5 (see Figure 13(a)) are stopped. Then, with the reach line formed, the display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) changes, resulting in a reach display (reach change display). After the reach display is formed, the display of the middle symbol row Z2 ends by stopping it. Then, if the same symbols that make up the winning combination stop on the winning line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won. If any other symbols stop on the same winning line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the combination of symbols that was finally displayed remains the same for a predetermined period. In other words, the current game round continues until the display period has elapsed, and once that period has elapsed, the game is allowed to move on to the next round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the display time of the middle symbol sequence Z2 after the reach line is formed is ensured, thereby maintaining the difference in display time between normal reach A and normal reach B. However, the method of setting this difference is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in display time by setting a difference in the time from when the display of the symbols starts until the reach line is formed.

Next, based on the display patterns of Normal Reach A and B described above, the display patterns of Super Reach A, B, and C will be explained. As shown in Figures 44(b) to (c), Super Reach A, B, and C form the reach lines described above through the same process as Normal Reach A and B. After the reach lines are formed, the reach effect is performed by displaying predetermined characters as animations in conjunction with the display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a fairy is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME); in Super Reach B, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a boy is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME); and in Super Reach C, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a girl is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME).

Next, referring to Figure 46, we will explain the game flow when transitioning to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling. Figure 46 is a timing chart illustrating the game flow when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss.

During the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, at timing ta1, the symbol variation display on the operation slot display unit and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 95 begin based on the entry into the operation slot. Since this game round corresponds to a special miss, at timing ta2, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display pattern transitions to a reach display. Subsequently, at timing ta3, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is displayed as a stop (confirmation display) prior to the confirmation display of the symbols on the operation slot display unit. Immediately afterward, at timing ta4, the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 darkens, and at timing ta5, the symbols corresponding to the special miss are displayed as a stop on the operation slot display unit, and a message indicating a transition to high frequency support mode A (for example, the words "Chance Zone Entered") is displayed on the display screen 95a.

At the timing of ta6, after the confirmation display time has elapsed from the timing of ta5, the support mode switches to high-frequency support mode A, and accordingly, the background of the display screen 95a changes to the background corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. Furthermore, the remaining number of games required to continue high-frequency support mode A is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

As described above, prior to the confirmation display of the symbols in the operation port display unit, the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss is displayed, and by increasing the notification time indicating the transition to high-frequency support mode A, the likelihood of the notification being missed is suppressed.

Furthermore, the gameplay flow when the trigger for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A is reaching the ceiling is basically the same as the gameplay flow when the trigger is a special miss. However, unlike in the case of a special miss, during the game state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, which is transitioned to when reaching the ceiling is the trigger, the display of the remaining number of games on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is omitted.

(Overview of the game)
Next, an overview of the gameplay of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 47 and 48. Figure 47 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state, and Figure 48 is a timing chart illustrating the changes in the number of balls held as the game progresses.

As already explained, the first normal game state, in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In this first normal game state, the goal is to achieve a win in the first operation opening 91 and transition to other game states such as the special game state. As described above, the game board 80a shown in this embodiment is a so-called symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), and a win in the first operation opening 91 can occur regardless of whether the game ball is launched towards the right route or the left route. In addition, through gates 84 are provided on both the right and left routes, and the configuration allows some of the game balls launched aiming for the first operation opening 91 to enter the through gates 84. However, the opening time of the electric mechanism 93 when support is won in the support lottery based on a win in the through gate 84 during the low frequency support mode is extremely short, making it practically impossible to win in the second operation opening 92. In other words, during the first normal game state, the player cannot receive the benefits of the electric mechanism 93, and the number of balls decreases rapidly as the game progresses (see Figure 48).

As shown in Figure 47, if a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved during the first normal game state, the game transitions to a special game state and then to a second normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B.

In the second normal game state, the electric mechanism 93 is opened frequently, and its opening time is set to be a length that allows for a substantial entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to entries into the first operating port 91, entries into the second operating port 92 occur, and based on these entries into the second operating port 92, a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player. As a result, during the second normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses is mitigated compared to the first normal game state, making it possible to play while minimizing investment (decrease in balls). Furthermore, since the second normal game state continues until the next jackpot, the number of balls can be significantly increased by continuously transitioning to the special game state. If a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in the second normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state via the special game state. By looping between the second normal game state and the special game state in this way, the number of balls held increases significantly (see Figure 48).

If a 6R regular jackpot is achieved during the first or second normal game state, the game will transition to a special game state and then to the third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B.

In the third normal game state, the electric mechanism 93 is opened frequently, and its opening time is set to be a length that substantially allows for ball entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to ball entry into the first operating port 91, ball entry into the second operating port 92 occurs, and based on this entry into the second operating port 92, a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player. As a result, during the third normal game state, the reduction in the number of balls held is mitigated, similar to the second normal game state, making it possible to play while suppressing investment (reduction in balls held). However, for the high-frequency support mode B in the third normal game state, a termination threshold (upper limit: 40 times) is set. If the number of games played during the third normal game state reaches this upper limit, the game will transition to the first normal game state.

Here, it is a concern that prolonged stay in the first normal game state could lead to monotony in gameplay and decrease the player's motivation to play. In this embodiment, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the game transitions to a fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

While the probability of hitting a jackpot during the fourth normal game state is the same as in the first normal game state, the frequency of opening of the electric mechanism 93 increases, resulting in more frequent entries into the second operating opening 92. As a result, during the fourth normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held is mitigated compared to the first normal game state, allowing players to progress through the game while minimizing investment (decrease in balls) (see Figure 48). Furthermore, in the fourth normal game state, similar to the first normal game state, the display time for each game round is significantly shortened as the number of held balls increases. Therefore, transitioning to the fourth normal game state results in more frequent entries into the second operating opening 92, thus accelerating the pace of the game.

Furthermore, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the game transitions directly to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. This minimizes the time required from a special miss until the player can enjoy the benefits of High-Frequency Support Mode A. This configuration, which allows for quick enjoyment of the benefits of High-Frequency Support Mode, is desirable for suppressing delays in state transitions and emphasizing the smoothness of gameplay. Additionally, diversifying the transition patterns by allowing transitions to High-Frequency Support Mode (High-Frequency Support Modes A and B) via two different routes—one via the special game state and the other without—is desirable for diversifying gameplay.

In the first normal game state, the probability of hitting a jackpot is low, and the base payout is also low. Therefore, there is a possibility that investment will become excessively high as the game progresses. This not only worsens the impression of the gaming machine but can also reduce the health of the game. In this embodiment, however, a ceiling (upper limit on the number of plays) is set in the first normal game state. When this ceiling is reached, the game transitions to a fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, although the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as in the first normal game state, the electric mechanism 93 opens frequently, resulting in frequent entries into the second operating opening 92. This allows the game to progress while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held (see Figure 48).

The first embodiment described in detail above provides the following excellent effects.

If a jackpot is achieved through a lottery based on ball entry into the operating ports 91 and 92, the support mode is changed via a special game state. If a special loss occurs, the support mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the game flow when changing to a higher support mode, contributing to the suppression of game monotony. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when switching to a higher support mode, the frequency at which the electric mechanism 93 opens differs depending on whether the trigger is a jackpot or a special loss. By ensuring the superiority of support from high-frequency support mode B while providing game assistance from high-frequency support mode A, game diversification can be effectively achieved. In particular, for the disadvantageous high-frequency support mode B, the support mode is switched quickly without going through the special game state. Such a configuration is preferable for improving player satisfaction.

If a special losing result occurs during the first normal game state, the game transitions directly to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. In this case, the lottery mode remains the low probability mode, but the support mode changes from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A. This makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing investment, thus providing a kind of player relief function. Because this relief function is activated without passing through the special game state as described above, the time required for this function to be activated can be minimized, thus reducing the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

As shown in this embodiment, when switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support lottery based on passing through gate 84 is changed. When switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the time required from winning until the electric mechanism 93 opens is shortened without changing the probability of winning. By using different parameters to differentiate between high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in this way, the two high-frequency support modes can be suitably allowed to coexist.

In High-Frequency Support Mode B, compared to High-Frequency Support Mode A, the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the payout mechanism to the number of game balls launched—that is, the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls dispensed by the number of game balls launched (hereinafter referred to as the "base")—is higher, making it possible to play while suppressing the depletion of your remaining game balls. In other words, if you achieve a jackpot and transition to High-Frequency Support Mode B via a special game state, you have a chance to win a large number of balls. In contrast, while High-Frequency Support Mode A offers a more favorable base than Low-Frequency Support Mode, the degree of this is lower than in High-Frequency Support Mode B, thus preventing excessive relief functions. With this configuration, the combination of multiple support modes can enhance the dynamics of the game.

By setting an upper limit (termination threshold) on the number of games played in High-Frequency Support Mode A, a return from High-Frequency Support Mode A to Low-Frequency Support Mode becomes possible, effectively suppressing the decrease in tension during gameplay after entering High-Frequency Support Mode A.

In the third normal game state, which is entered when a regular jackpot is achieved, the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode B is set to 40. In the fourth normal game state, which is entered when a special loss occurs, the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode A is set to be less than or equal to the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode B (specifically, 20 or 40). This is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transitions to the fourth normal game state and thus increasing the frequency of transitions between game states. Furthermore, by setting a portion of the termination count for the fourth normal game state (entered when a special loss occurs) to the same number as the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode B, it is possible to create the illusion that there are multiple routes to transition to a single game state (third normal game state, fourth normal game state). This is desirable in achieving diversification of gameplay while avoiding causing confusion for players.

Furthermore, termination criteria are set for both the second and fourth normal game states. By providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of games played, both via and without special game states, the game can be diversified. In this configuration, a practically preferable setup can be achieved by configuring the base in high-frequency support mode A such that the difference between the base in high-frequency support mode A and the base in high-frequency support mode B is smaller than the difference between the base in low-frequency support mode.

According to this embodiment, if a special losing result occurs in the first normal game state, or if the number of game attempts reaches the upper limit (ceiling) during the first normal game state, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this way, by setting the trigger for transitioning to the fourth normal game state as a judgment result or reaching the ceiling that does not correspond to transitioning to a special game state, and by providing relief to the player through this fourth normal game state, it is possible to contribute to curbing excessive investment. In particular, by setting a relatively high number of game attempts triggered by reaching the ceiling and a relatively low number of game attempts triggered by a special losing result, it is possible to suitably achieve both diversification of gameplay and enhancement of the relief function.

<Variation 1>
The support mode A, triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling, may be given preferential treatment to the player, that is, to increase the frequency of winning into the second operating port 92, compared to the support mode B, triggered by a big win.

<Modified Example 2>
The base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A was initially set to be closer to the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B than to the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode, but this can be changed to be closer to the former. Alternatively, the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A may be set to be midway between the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B.

<Example 3>
The display time for the variable change when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be different from the display time for the variable change when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state. For example, the display time for the variable change when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be set to be longer than the display time for the variable change when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, or the display time for the variable change when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be set to be shorter than the display time for the variable change when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state.

<Modification 4>
There may be a difference between the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss and the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. For example, the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss may be set to have a higher frequency of winning into the second operating port 92 than the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, or the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss may be set to have a lower frequency of winning into the second operating port 92 than the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Example 5>
The number of times required to terminate a game when a special outcome occurs may be set to be greater than the number of times required to terminate a game when the ceiling is reached, or they may be set to be the same number.

<Modification 6>
The game may also be configured so that the gameplay counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the high-frequency support mode A, which is entered upon reaching the ceiling, ends.

<Example 7>
It is also possible to configure the system so that if another special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, the continuation count counter is reset (overwritten). However, it is assumed that consecutive special misses will result in fewer games being played in high-frequency support mode A than the number of games that should have been able to continue, which will reduce the player's satisfaction. Therefore, taking these circumstances into consideration, it is best to fix the value set to "40" when a special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss. Specifically, it is best to unify the type of special miss to one and configure the system so that "40" is set to the continuation count counter when that special miss occurs.

<Difference 8>
In the first embodiment described above, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) during the transition process at the end of the special game state. However, as long as the game count counter is reset when a jackpot is achieved, the specific timing of the reset is arbitrary. For example, the game count counter can be reset when the game round corresponding to the jackpot is completed, or it can be reset at the start of the special game state or during a round of gameplay.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, if the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during the fourth normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode A, the value of the continuation count counter is overwritten with a value triggered by reaching the ceiling (specifically, "400"). When the ceiling is reached, the game is promptly transferred to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, meaning that the benefits of reaching the ceiling are realized seamlessly without going through other normal game states. In other words, the fourth normal game state related to reaching the ceiling takes precedence over the fourth normal game state related to special misses. In this embodiment, the configuration related to the transition of game states when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state differs from that of the first embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 49(a), the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, and green in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling. In other words, the trigger for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A can be clearly indicated by the background color of the display screen 95a. In the following description, high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1," and high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2." Incidentally, the support modes of high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are the same, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed to the number of game balls launched) is the same for both, as in the first embodiment.

Here, referring to the schematic diagrams in Figures 49(b) to (c), we will provide a supplementary explanation of the notification flow for the start of high-frequency support mode A.

In game rounds where a special miss occurs and the game transitions to High Frequency Support Mode A1, as shown in Figure 49(b), the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game round is displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a. Specifically, after a reach display, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed (confirmed) on one of the active lines. Then, at the start of the next game round, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in High Frequency Support Mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in game rounds where the game transitions to High-Frequency Support Mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in Figure 49(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling may be displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a during that game round. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol will be displayed (confirmed) on any of the active lines via the reach display. In contrast, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss will be displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. In this case, the background color of the display screen 95a will also remain blue.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 50, we will explain the support mode switching process that constitutes the game round control process executed as part of the normal processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the result in step S2001 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the result in step S2002 is negative, the switching process ends immediately. If the result in step S2002 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2004, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S2004 is negative, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. When the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2001, if a negative result is obtained in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive result is obtained in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2008, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a positive result is obtained in step S2008, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the count limit flag are cleared in step S2005, and this switching process ends. In other words, if the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the system switches to low-frequency support mode.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009 to determine whether the game count counter has reached its upper limit (whether the ceiling has been reached). If a negative result is obtained in step S2009, the main switching process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010, where the preparation flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the main switching process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2006, if a negative result is obtained in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If it corresponds to a special miss, a positive result is obtained in step S2011, and the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. In the following step S2013, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, after executing the continuation count counter setting process in step S2014, this switching process ends.

In the process of setting the continuation count counter, if the result of the current game is a special miss A, the continuation count counter is set to "20". This ensures that High Frequency Support Mode A1 continues until 20 game rounds have been played during that mode. Conversely, if the result of the current game is a special miss B, the continuation count counter is set to "40". This ensures that High Frequency Support Mode A1 continues until 40 game rounds have been played during that mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2011, if a negative result is obtained in step S2011, i.e., if it does not correspond to a special miss, the process proceeds to step S2015. In step S2015, it is determined whether the aforementioned preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a positive result is obtained in step S2015, the preparation flag is cleared in step S2016, and the processes in steps S2012 to S2014 are executed. In this case, the continuation count counter setting process in step S2014 sets the continuation count counter to "400". As a result, high-frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of game rounds played during high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

Incidentally, if the above preparation flag remains stored when transitioning to a special game state, the preparation flag will be cleared at the end of that special game state.

Returning to the explanation of step S2015, if a negative result is obtained in step S2015, that is, if the preparation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2017. In step S2017, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit (whether the ceiling has been reached). If a negative result is obtained in step S2017, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S2017, the processes of steps S2012 to S2014 are executed, and then this switching process ends. In this step S2014, the continuation count counter is set to "400". As a result, high-frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

According to the configuration described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 after one game round in the first normal game state. In other words, the game will return to the fourth normal game state after one game round in the first normal game state. Here, even though the return to the fourth normal game state is confirmed, a prolonged game round could give the player the impression that the transition to a favorable state is being unnecessarily delayed. This embodiment features a design that takes this into consideration, aiming to achieve a swift return to the fourth normal game state. This design will be explained below with reference to Figures 51 to 54. First, the setting process for the variable display time (step S714 in Figure 26) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 51 to 52.

(Setting the variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the current game state is either the first normal game state or the fourth normal game state. If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2102, where the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is executed, and then the process of setting the variable display time is terminated. If the determination in step S2101 is negative, then in step S2103, it is determined whether the current game state is the second normal game state. If the determination in step S2103 is affirmative, then in step S2104, the setting process for the second normal game state is executed, and then the process of setting the variable display time is terminated. If the determination in step S2103 is negative, that is, if the current game state is the third normal game state, then in step S2105, the setting process for the third normal game state is executed, and then the process of setting the variable display time is terminated. Now, referring to Figure 52, the setting processes for the first and fourth normal game states will be explained.

(Setting process for the 1st and 4th normal game states)
In the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot. If the determination in step S2201 is positive, the setting process for jackpots is executed in step S2202, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In the process of step S2202, the variable display time for the current game round is determined by referring to the variable display time table for jackpots (see Figure 28) stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive result is obtained in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204 to execute the special miss setting process, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In step S2204, the variable display time for the current game round is determined by referring to the variable display time table for special misses (see Figure 27) stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether the current game round will result in reaching the ceiling. If a positive result is obtained in step S2205, the ceiling reach setting process is executed in step S2206, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2005, if a negative result is obtained in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not the preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a positive result is obtained in step S2207, the continuous transition setting process is executed in step S2208, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. If a negative result is obtained in step S2207, the complete loss setting process is executed in step S2209, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Here, in steps S2206 and S2208, the variable display time table corresponding to the normal deviation is referenced; however, this variable display time table is provided individually depending on the presence or absence of the preparation flag. Further explanation of these variable display time tables will be provided below with reference to Figures 53 and 54.

If the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, which is in low probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the preparation flag is not stored, the fluctuation display time for the activation display unit will be set to "20 to 30 seconds," which corresponds to the fluctuation display time for the reach display. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination indicating the ceiling has been reached (see Figure 49(c)) will be displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 after the reach display.

On the other hand, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode A1) while the preparation flag is not stored, the display time for the activation indicator is set to the same as the display time for a complete miss (see Figure 27). During this game round, symbols other than those corresponding to reaching the ceiling, specifically the symbol combinations corresponding to a complete miss, will be displayed. In other words, the "CHANCE" symbol will not be included in the displayed symbols. This configuration makes it difficult to identify reaching the ceiling during the fourth normal game state from the symbol combinations or the display time (display pattern) of the symbols.

If the game transitions to the first normal game state (corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) while the preparation flag is stored, and the game result is neither a jackpot nor a special miss (a normal miss), then "3 seconds" is set as the display time for the operation indicator. This display time matches the shortest possible display time for a complete miss in the first normal game state (see Figure 27). In other words, if the ceiling is reached and the preparation flag is stored during the fourth normal game state, the game will return to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state after the fourth normal game state ends, but the duration of time spent in the first normal game state is suppressed to prevent it from becoming excessively long.

Furthermore, during the fourth normal game state, the game may repeat with the preparation flag still stored. In such cases, the displayed variation time will be the same as the displayed variation time set during game rounds where the preparation flag is not stored (see Figures 27 and 53).

(Flow of continuous transitions)
Next, referring to the timing chart in Figure 55, we will explain the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode A1.

At the timing of TB1 after transitioning to the fourth normal game state following a special miss, the 299th game round since the end of the special game state has begun. In the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue.

At the subsequent timing of tb2, the 300th game round after the end of the special game state has begun, and at the timing of tb3, the symbol combination corresponding to this 300th game round is displayed as confirmed. Since the game is currently in the 4th normal game state, the symbol combination displayed (confirmed) is not the one corresponding to reaching the ceiling, but rather the one corresponding to a complete miss (normal miss). In the example shown in Figure 55, even in the game round that started at the timing of tb2, the number of rounds (upper limit) for ending the 4th normal game state has not been reached, so the 4th normal game state continues and the above preparation flag is stored.

Even for game rounds started at timing tb4, the number of rounds required to terminate (upper limit) will not be reached, and the aforementioned blue background will be maintained. However, after the end of the fourth normal game state, a message ("STANDBY") indicating a return to the fourth normal game state will be displayed at the top of the display screen 95a, and the counter showing the remaining number of rounds will be hidden.

At timing tb5, the final game round that reaches the termination threshold in the current fourth normal game state begins. In the example shown in Figure 55, this game round corresponds to a complete miss (normal miss), and at timing tb6, when the display of confirmed symbols and patterns is complete, the game transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, and a new game round begins. Although this game round corresponds to the first normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a remains blue, and the word "STANDBY" displayed at the top of the display screen 95a also remains displayed. At timing tb7, when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the display screen 95a blacks out. Then, at timing tb8, when the confirmation display begins, the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling is displayed (reduced) in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the words "Entering Super Chance Zone" are displayed in the center of the display screen 95a as a message indicating the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

At the timing of tb9, after the confirmation display time has elapsed, the game state transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A2. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to green.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, even if the game progresses without a trigger for transitioning to the special game state (jackpot result) being established, the game may transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A due to a special miss result or reaching the ceiling. By entering high-frequency support mode A, the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92 increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if a special miss result and reaching the ceiling are used in combination as triggers for transitioning to the fourth normal game state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the fourth normal game state is forcibly terminated due to a special miss result, it is feared that some of the benefits that the player would have originally enjoyed will be lost, and the player's satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this embodiment, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling will be delayed until at least the number of game rounds played in that fourth normal game state reaches the termination threshold. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

As described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the game transitions to the fourth normal game state as a result of reaching the ceiling, the behavior (switching pattern) of the electric mechanism 93 can be made identical to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being less significant compared to the previous behavior.

If the above delay function is present, it is assumed that if the benefits of reaching the ceiling end immediately after a significant delay, it could diminish the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the number of termination criteria related to special misses < the second termination criteria related to reaching the ceiling, excessive delays can be suppressed, and the impression that the benefits after reaching the ceiling are insignificant can be avoided.

If the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the system is configured to transition from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, and then return to the fourth normal game state. This adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent it from becoming monotonous.

In a configuration where the game returns to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, variations in the duration of the game-specific actions performed during the first normal game state can lead to the following problems. Specifically, if the action duration is relatively short, there may be insufficient time to inform the player of the transition to the fourth normal game state. If the action duration is relatively long, it may give the player the impression that the transition to the fourth normal game state is being unfairly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, for game rounds during the first normal game state where the transition to the fourth normal game state is delayed, a predetermined action duration is set regardless of the number of reserved balls. By making the action duration constant, the above concerns can be resolved.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs while a transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is imminent, the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is invalidated. Such a configuration is preferable in preventing excessive relief functions for the player.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the first game state, a special animation (stop display of the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is executed during that spin, promptly informing the player that the game will transition to the fourth normal game state. Conversely, if the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the fourth normal game state, the special animation (stop display of the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is avoided during that spin. In this way, by deliberately omitting the special animation when the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the fourth normal game state, which was transitioned to after a special miss, before the end of that fourth normal game state.

<Variation 1>
In the second embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state. In other words, the fourth normal game state is continuous with one game round corresponding to the first normal game state in between. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be changed as follows. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the game may transition immediately to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 without going through the first normal game state after the end of the fourth normal game state. In other words, the fourth normal game state may be continued without interruption. Even in this case, since high-frequency support mode A1 is not forcibly terminated midway due to a special miss (high-frequency support mode A1 can be completed), the player's satisfaction does not decrease.

<Modified Example 2>
In the second embodiment described above, the background color of the display screen 95a is set to be different for the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 and the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the background color to be the same in both fourth normal game states.

<Example 3>
In the second embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the system is configured to start displaying a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal game state in the next game round. However, it is also possible to configure the system to start displaying the message in the game round in which the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the system to not suggest the continuation of the fourth normal game state, either by displaying a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal game state from the game round in which the ceiling is reached or the next game round. In other words, it is possible to keep the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling unspecified until the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss ends.

<Modification 4>
If the game transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state while the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state, the electric mechanism 93 may be configured to switch to the closed state after the initially set opening time for the electric mechanism 93 has elapsed, or the electric mechanism 93 may be configured to quickly switch to the closed state in order to immediately stop the opening.

<Example 5>
In the second embodiment described above, when transitioning from the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, the display time for the changes in the symbols on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to be shorter than the display time for the changes in the symbols on the through gate display unit DS set during low-frequency support mode (10 to 20 seconds). However, the embodiment is not limited to this. When transitioning from the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, it is also possible to set a longer time for the changes in the symbols on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state than the display time for the changes in the symbols on the through gate display unit DS set during low-frequency support mode (10 to 20 seconds).

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment described above, when transitioning from a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via a first normal game state, the display time for the symbols on the display unit for the operation port and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to "3 seconds," which is the display time for a complete miss. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via a first normal game state, the display time for the symbols on the display unit for the operation port and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to "30 to 40 seconds," which is the display time for a reach.

<Example 7>
In the second embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the game is configured to transition to the first normal game state once the number of game rounds in the fourth normal game state reaches the termination threshold, and then return to the fourth normal game state. In this case, the number of game rounds performed during the first normal game state is set to one, but the game is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the number of game rounds performed during the first game state is defined to be at least below the upper limit of the number of reserves that can be stored (preferably the upper limit of the number of reserves related to the second operation port 92).

As shown in this modified example, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the system transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state and then returns to the fourth normal game state. This configuration adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent monotony. Furthermore, in a configuration that includes the first normal game state, the repeated game rounds in the first normal game state may give the player the impression that the enjoyment of benefits is being unfairly delayed. This impression is particularly strong when the number of stored special information rounds becomes zero due to the intervention of the first normal game state, interrupting the continuous progression of game rounds. In this regard, by limiting the number of game rounds performed in the intervening first normal game state to be less than the upper limit of stored special information, the interruption of the continuous progression of game rounds upon return to the fourth normal game state can be avoided, effectively eliminating the above concern.

<Difference 8>
The system may be configured to perform a special effect when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without resulting in a jackpot, thereby enabling a special effect to be performed to indicate a transition to the fourth normal game state. If the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game rounds played during that fourth normal game state is greater than a predetermined number, the special effect is performed during the game round in which the upper limit is reached. On the other hand, if the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game rounds played during that fourth normal game state is less than the predetermined number, the special effect is performed during a game round played after the game round in which the upper limit is reached.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the fourth normal game state, which is triggered by a special miss result, the timing of this can affect the player's impression. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, it may give the impression that the special miss result was wasted. Therefore, as shown in this modified example, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the timing of the special effect, i.e., the timing of the ceiling reach notification, can be varied according to the number of spins played during that fourth normal game state (the number of spins played up to that point), thereby eliminating the above concern.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the gameplay using the special mechanism described above differs from that of the first and second embodiments. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the differences in the basic configuration of the game board unit will be explained with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 is a front view of the game board unit.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board 80aA will be described in detail below.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which serves as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and, similar to the first embodiment described above, the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right and a route that bypasses it from the left.

However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 57.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 was configured to result in a special loss. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery entries based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is configured to result in a special loss. The winning/losing table for the operating ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 58 and 59.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 58, the win/loss tables for the first operating port include a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 58(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 58(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the losing results (normal losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on the entry into the first operating port 91A, the configuration prevents the "special losing" described in the first embodiment.

As shown in Figure 59, the win/loss tables for the second operation port consist of a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on a win in the second operating port 92A, the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 59(a)) is referenced, and the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 59(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1, which ranges from 0 to 599, "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results.

Furthermore, in situations where the win/loss tables for low probability mode and high probability mode are referenced during the prize draw based on the entry into the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are all "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596", totaling 150 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596" correspond to special loss results. And all random number values that do not correspond to either a big win or a special loss correspond to a loss result (normal loss result).

(How to play the game)
Now, with reference to Figure 60, we will explain the game flow. Figure 60 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, consists of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the first operation port 91A, and the special stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the second operation port 92A.

The special stage is a temporary stage where the player stays when transitioning from other normal game states compatible with high-frequency support mode—specifically, the third normal game state compatible with low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, or the fourth normal game state compatible with low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A—to the first normal game state. The maximum number of game rounds that can be played in this stage matches the maximum number of reserved information stored in the second operation port's reserved area Rb. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player moves to the special stage, provided that reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is stored. If neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurs in this special stage, the player moves from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a support is triggered by launching a game ball to the right route, entry into the second operation port 92A is effectively avoided. Furthermore, since game balls launched to the right route cannot enter the first operation port 91A, it becomes difficult to participate in the lottery based on entry into operation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, while game balls launched to the left route avoid entry into the second operation port 92A, entry into the first operation port 91A is possible. For these reasons, in the first normal game state, aiming for the left route is more advantageous to the player than aiming for the right route. Note that if a game ball is launched to the right route during the first game state, a warning will be issued prompting the player to return to the left route.

If a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to play while minimizing investment (decrease in remaining balls) by launching game balls to the right route. During the second normal game state, game balls launched to the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, there is approximately a 1/4 probability of a special miss in the lottery based on entry into the second operation port 92A, but special misses during the second normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, it will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

If a 6R regular jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first or second normal game state, the game transitions to a special game state and then to a third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to reduce their investment (decrease in balls) by launching game balls along the right route.

During the third normal game state, game balls launched via the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, the lottery based on balls entering the second operation port 92A has a probability of approximately 1/4 resulting in a special miss. However, special misses during the third normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the third normal game state, it will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A.

If the game progresses without a jackpot during the third normal game state, and the number of game rounds played (specifically, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A) reaches the termination threshold (20 rounds), the game transitions to the first normal game state. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", the game transitions to the main stage; if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is anything other than "0", the game transitions to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on ball entry into the second operation port 92A is performed for the number of reserved balls. If the lottery based on ball entry into the second operation port 92A results in a special miss, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A. During the fourth normal game state, players can play while minimizing investment (decrease in remaining balls) by firing game balls to the right route. During the fourth normal game state, game balls fired to the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses mainly with the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, the lottery based on ball entry into the second operation port 92A has a probability of approximately 1/4 of resulting in a special miss, but special misses during the fourth normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses.

If the game progresses without a jackpot during the fourth normal game state, and the number of game rounds played (specifically, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A) reaches the termination threshold (20 rounds), the game transitions to the first normal game state. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", the game transitions to the main stage; if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is anything other than "0", the game transitions to the special stage. In this way, if the game can be looped between the fourth normal game state and the special stage, the player can gain an advantage in the game.

Here, when transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the degree of advantage changes significantly depending on the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A. In this embodiment, in the final game round of the third or fourth normal game state, the display time of the changing symbols on the display unit D2 for the second operation port is made longer than in other game rounds of the third and fourth normal game states. This configuration makes it easier to accumulate the maximum number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A during the final game round.

(Fluctuating display time table for the operating port)
Specifically, as shown in Figure 61(a), the variable display time table for the second operation port, which is referenced in the 20th game round in the third normal game state, is configured to have a variable display time of "40 sec" regardless of the number of reserved balls. In contrast to this,
The variable display time table for the second operation port, which is referenced in each of the 1st to 19th game rounds in the third normal game state, is configured so that in all cases the variable display time set is shorter than that set for the 20th game round. For example, as shown in Figure 61(b), in the case of a non-reach display miss (special miss or normal miss), "12 to 14 seconds" or "1 to 2 seconds" is set depending on the number of reserved balls, and in the case of a reach display miss (special miss or normal miss), "20 to 30 seconds" is set. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, as shown in Figure 61(c), "20 to 30 seconds" is set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

In this way, by configuring the system so that the display time for the variation is extended in the 20th and final game round compared to the 1st to 19th game rounds, it is possible to reduce the chances of transitioning (demoting) from the third normal game state to the first normal game state without the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaching the memory limit.

Furthermore, the variable display time table for the second operation slot, which is referenced during the first normal game state, is broadly divided into two tables: one referenced for special misses and normal misses, and another referenced for jackpots. In the variable display time table for special misses and normal misses referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "10 seconds" when the number of reserved balls is "0," and to "0.5 seconds" when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "4." In the variable display time table for jackpots referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds" for every game round, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game result.

Next, referring to Figure 62, the sequence of events when transitioning to the fourth normal game state will be explained. Figure 62 illustrates a case where, during the third normal game state, the game reached the termination threshold without a jackpot, and the remaining reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A include a special miss.

In the third normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue, and the remaining number of games for which the high-frequency support mode will continue is displayed in the upper corner of the display screen 95a. At the timing of tc1, when the 19th game round related to the second operation port 92A begins, the number of reserved balls decreases from "4" to "3," and at the timing of tc2, when the 20th game round (final game round) begins, the number of reserved balls decreases from "3" to "2."

When the final game round begins, a video of the loop branching sequence is displayed on screen 95a. At the beginning of this video, "Mission: Catch the Fairy" is displayed, followed by the display of a fairy character and a girl character. As described above, the display time for the final game round is longer than that for the 1st to 19th game rounds. This makes it easier for balls to enter the second operation slot 92A during the final game round. In the example in Figure 62, balls enter the second operation slot 92A consecutively at timings tc3 and tc4, and the number of reserved balls related to the second operation slot 92A reaches its memory limit before the end of the final game round.

In this embodiment, the loop branching animation is a series of animations that are executed across the final game round in the third normal game state and the game rounds executed during the special stage in the first normal game state. If the final game round corresponds to a jackpot, and the game rounds executed during the special stage correspond to either a special miss or a jackpot, the animation of successful fairy capture is executed. If the final game round corresponds to either a special miss or a normal miss, and all game rounds executed during the special stage correspond to normal misses, the animation of failed fairy capture is executed.

In the example shown in Figure 62, at the timing of tc5, when the confirmed symbol display on the second operation slot display unit D2 is executed during the final spin in the third normal game state, the animation for successfully capturing the fairy is performed. Afterward, the word "STANDBY" is displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating a transition to the normal game state (fourth normal game state) compatible with the high-frequency support mode, until the special stage is completed. During this time, the game state transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state.

Furthermore, if the electric mechanism 93A is in the open state when transitioning from the third normal game state to the first normal game state, the electric mechanism 93A will be forcibly switched to the closed state, thereby preventing the ball from entering the second operating opening 92A after the transition to the first normal game state.

At timing TC7, the game round corresponding to the special miss begins, and at timing TC8, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is confirmed and displayed. Then, at timing TC9, the game transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this fourth normal game state, the background color of display screen 95a turns blue, and the loop count of the high-frequency support mode and the remaining number of games are displayed at the top of display screen 95a.

Subsequently, if the final spin of the fourth normal game state (corresponding to High Frequency Support Mode A) is reached without a jackpot, the game transitions to the first normal game state (corresponding to Low Probability Mode and Low Frequency Support Mode). Specifically, the game transitions to a special stage provided that the reserves related to the second operation port 92A are stored. Even when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the above-mentioned loop branching animation (specifically, a video with some parts of the fairy and girl chase scene omitted) will be executed across the final spin of the fourth normal game state and each spin performed in the special stage of the first normal game state.

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, if a normal jackpot result occurs in the first normal game state, the game transitions to a third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. In the third normal game state, the electric mechanism 93A frequently switches to the open state, increasing the opportunities for balls to enter the second operating port 92A and suppressing the reduction of the player's ball count. The third normal game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played. When the number of game rounds played in the third normal game state reaches the first termination threshold (20 rounds), the game transitions to the first normal game state, which corresponds to low-frequency support mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second operating port 92A.

Here, the reserved information obtained based on the entry into the second operation port 92A is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second operation port. After transitioning from the third normal game state to the first normal game state, the game rounds are executed based on the stored reserved information. The remaining game rounds related to the second operation port 92A may result in a special miss. If a special miss occurs in these remaining game rounds, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A, without going through a special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode loops. This loop makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the reduction of remaining balls. By diversifying the gameplay in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

As described above, when transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is executed, up to the number of reserved information stored in the second operation port reserve area Rb. In the lottery based on winning into the second operation port 92A, the probability of a special miss (1/4) is higher than the probability of a jackpot (1/100), making it possible to aim for a jackpot while looping the high-frequency support mode described above. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of a jackpot.

During the third and fourth normal game states, if a special loss occurs, that result is invalidated. However, if a special loss occurs during the remaining game rounds related to the second operation port 92A when transitioning from the third and fourth normal game states to the first normal game state, that special loss triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state or a loop in the fourth normal game state. With this configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the maximum number of reserved information stored related to the second operation port 92A. Therefore, when adjusting the advantage by increasing or decreasing the number of rounds required to terminate in the third and fourth normal game states, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and to suitably improve the flexibility in setting the number of rounds required to terminate.

In high-frequency support mode A, the opening and closing pattern of the electric mechanism 93A is closer to that of high-frequency support mode B than to that of low-frequency support mode. This configuration is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the game states before and after the first normal game state as being identical, when the game progresses from the third normal game state to the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In particular, the number of turns required to terminate the game in the fourth normal game state (20 turns) is the same as the number of turns required to terminate the game in the third normal game state (20 turns). This configuration effectively facilitates the aforementioned perception.

Immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the remaining reserved game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are executed. If a special loss occurs during these game rounds, the game transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. Here, as shown in this embodiment, in the third and fourth normal game states, it is possible to determine in advance whether the remaining reserved game rounds will result in a special loss, and by performing a continuation animation based on that result, the level of attention given to whether or not the aforementioned loop occurs can be increased.

The aforementioned pre-identification (prior identification) is performed when transitioning from the third and fourth normal game states to the first normal game state, specifically during the final game round in those third and fourth normal game states. By configuring the system to perform this identification during the final game round in the third and fourth normal game states, the continuation animation is executed when the number of reserved information stored in the second operation port's reserved area Rb reaches its storage limit. This effectively allows the continuation animation to suggest the continuation of the loop.

Furthermore, by configuring the game to initiate the continuation animation before the aforementioned pre-determination during the final game round in the third and fourth normal game states, the constraints on the execution period of the continuation animation can be relaxed, and the obsolescence of the continuation animation can be effectively suppressed.

<Variation 1>
In the third embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs in certain game states (for example, the second normal game state), it is invalidated and treated as a normal miss. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that the lottery for special misses is not performed at all, for example, by referring to a win/loss table that does not include special misses in the game results.

<Modified Example 2>
In the third embodiment described above, the number of rounds required to terminate in the third game state (20 rounds) and the number of rounds required to terminate in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (20 rounds) were set to be the same. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and the number of rounds required to terminate in the third game state and the number of rounds required to terminate in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss may be set to be different.

For example, the number of spins required to terminate the game in the third game state (40 spins) may be set to be greater than the number of spins required to terminate the game in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (20 spins). Alternatively, the number of spins required to terminate the game in the third game state (20 spins) may be set to be less than the number of spins required to terminate the game in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (40 spins).

<Example 3>
In the third embodiment described above, the display time for the change in the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A in the first normal game state is set to "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game result, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The display time for the change in the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A in the first normal game state may also be set according to the number of reserved balls and the game result, similar to the display time for the change in the number of game rounds related to the first operation port 91A.

<Modification 4>
In the third embodiment described above, the display time for the final game round in the third normal game state is extended to prevent the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state. However, the following configuration is also possible, either as an alternative or in addition. That is, when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the display time for the final game round in the fourth normal game state is extended to prevent the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state.

<Example 5>
In the third embodiment described above, the loop branching effect is executed across the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B and the first normal game state. However, it is also possible to configure the loop branching effect to be executed across the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B, the first normal game state, and the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. By increasing the execution time of the effect in this way, it is possible to enhance the loop branching effect while quickly transitioning to the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the number of games played at the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) (when the ceiling is reached), the system transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it has a configuration that simulates variable ceiling. The configuration related to the simulated variable function in this embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to Figure 63, the distribution table for special misses in this embodiment will be explained.

(Distribution table for special exceptions)
In the distribution table for special misses in this embodiment, special miss result A, special miss result B, and special miss result C are set as destinations for the game result. Specifically, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 23" correspond to special miss result A, "24 to 28" correspond to special miss result B, and "29" corresponds to special miss result C.

Special failure results A through C do not serve as triggers for switching between lottery modes, but rather function as triggers for switching between support modes.

Specifically, special loss result A triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game round in which special loss result A occurred, that is, a trigger for transitioning to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and the system switches to low-frequency support mode (transitioning to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to "20 times".

Regarding special failure result B, the end of the game round in which this special failure result B occurred triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A, i.e., a transition to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and switches to low-frequency support mode (transitioning to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to "40 times".

Regarding the special miss result C, the end of the game round in which this special miss result C occurred triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A, i.e., a transition to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and switches to low-frequency support mode (transitioning to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to "260 times".

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the ceiling is set to 300 spins, and the upper limit for the number of spins in the third normal game state is 40 spins. In other words, the number of spins set as the termination criteria when special failure result A occurs, and the number of spins set as the termination criteria when special failure result B occurs, are both less than the maximum number of spins performed in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling. Conversely, the number of spins set as the termination criteria when special failure result C occurs is the same as the maximum number of spins performed in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling.

Furthermore, the number of games played before termination in special failure result C can be set to be greater than the maximum number of games played in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling mentioned above.

In other words, in this embodiment, if a special miss result C occurs during the first normal game state, support by high-frequency support mode A until reaching the ceiling is effectively confirmed. Furthermore, if special miss results A and B occur, and the remaining number of games until reaching the ceiling is less than the termination criteria number for special miss results A and B, support by high-frequency support mode A until reaching the ceiling is confirmed.

In this embodiment, the behavior of the symbol display device 95, etc., differs depending on whether the number of games played before reaching the ceiling exceeds the number of games remaining until the special miss result occurs. Specifically, similar to the first embodiment, when a special miss result occurs, the player is notified (clearly indicated) by the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result being displayed. However, if the number of games played before reaching the ceiling exceeds the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, this notification is not given. The specific configuration for achieving this behavior, namely the first variation start process executed as part of the periodic processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 64.

(Processing to initiate the first change)
In the first variation start process, first, in step S2301, the variation start command received is read, and from this command, information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time are identified. Also, as already explained, when a variation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent. In step S2301, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and from this command, various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, is identified. Then, in step S2301, from the identified information, information on whether a jackpot was won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information on whether a special miss occurred, information on the type of special miss if a special miss occurred, information on whether a reach occurred if neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurred, information on whether the ceiling was reached, and information on the variation display time are identified, and the identified information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S2302, the various counters used to determine the number of games played are updated. Specifically, the remaining number of games counter, located in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444, which is used to determine the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, is updated (deducted by "1"). Note that this remaining number of games counter is configured to be set to "300" when the special game state ends.

In the following step S2303, based on the information obtained in step S2301, it is determined whether the result of the current game round is a jackpot. If the result of the current game is a jackpot (either a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot), the jackpot performance setting process is executed in the following step S2304. The jackpot performance setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process, which determines the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the active line on which that combination will be stopped and displayed, and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process), which determines the variation display pattern of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and their address information. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as corresponding to a jackpot: "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination.

As already explained, when a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the process of determining the jackpot display pattern, the system retrieves the reach display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 and determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the received variation start command and variation display time and type command. Furthermore, the system executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S2303 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, based on the information obtained in step S2301, it is determined whether the result of the current game round is a special loss. If the result of the current game round is a special loss, a positive determination is made in step S2305, and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, the count comparison process is performed.

In the count comparison process, the remaining count counter mentioned above is referenced to determine whether the number of plays until reaching the ceiling is less than the number of plays until reaching the ceiling, which is set as the termination threshold for this special failure. If the number of plays until reaching the ceiling is less than the number of plays until reaching the ceiling, a positive determination is made in step S2307, and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the first special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special failures, is executed.

The first special effect setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for special misses to be displayed and the valid lines for displaying those symbol combinations, and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for special misses.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the first special effect setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the combination of symbols "1," "3," and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss.

In the variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the first special effect setting process, the variable display pattern is determined so that the player is notified of the special effect failure via the reach display. Specifically, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and the normal reach display or super reach display effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the first special effect, which is set by the first special effect setting process, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(a).

In the game round corresponding to the first special effect, the display screen 95a transitions to a "reach" display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of all stopped symbol rows began to change. At a predetermined timing after transitioning to the "reach" display, the display screen 95a will stop displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (a combination of "1," "3," and "4" symbols). Afterward, a message indicating a switch to high-frequency support mode A (e.g., "Chance Time Entered") will be displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a will change to blue.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 64, if a negative result is obtained in step S2307, that is, if the number of attempts to reach the termination criterion set for this special failure matches or exceeds the remaining attempts until the ceiling is reached, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, the second special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special failures, is executed.

The second special effect setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for special misses to be displayed and the valid lines for displaying those symbol combinations, and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for special misses.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the second special effect setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. The symbol combination determined in this stop result determination process includes the "CHANCE" symbol. Therefore, in the second special effect, the "CHANCE" symbol will be displayed on one of the active lines.

In the variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the second special effect setting process, the variable display pattern is determined so that the player is notified of the special effect failure via the reach display. Specifically, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the second special effect, which is set by the second special effect setting process, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(b).

In the second special effect round, the display screen 95a transitions to a "reach" display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display for all the stopped symbol rows. At a predetermined timing after the transition to the "reach" display, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed on the display screen 95a. Afterward, a message indicating a switch to high-frequency support mode A (e.g., "Rescue Activated") is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a changes to green.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 64, if a negative result is obtained in step S2305, that is, if the current game round does not correspond to a special losing result, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in the current game round. If the ceiling is reached, a positive result is obtained in step S2310, and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the process for setting up the effects for reaching the ceiling is executed. Details of this process for setting up the effects for reaching the ceiling will be described later.

If a negative result is determined in step S2310, the animation setting process for a complete miss is executed in step S2312. This process determines whether a reach occurs in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the animation setting process for a reach occurs is executed; if a reach does not occur, the animation setting process for a non-reach occurs is executed.

The process for setting up the effects for triggering a reach is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach and the valid lines for which that combination will be stopped; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss after reaching a winning combination, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a big win, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for a complete miss after a reach, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the received variable start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The processing for setting up the effects when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach) and the valid lines for which that combination of symbols will be displayed as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach).

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss (no reach), the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a jackpot, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the display pattern for a complete miss (no reach), the display pattern table for misses (no reach) stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the display pattern corresponding to the game result in the display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, or S2312, the process proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, commands containing the stop result and presentation pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 are output to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 then controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S1909, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S1910, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, the process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling in step S2311 described above will be explained. The process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling consists of a normal setting process executed when the current game state is the first normal game state, and a special setting process executed when the current game state is a normal game state other than the first normal game state (for example, the fourth normal game state).

The normal setting process constituting step S2311 is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling to be displayed as a stop and the valid line for displaying that combination as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for reaching the ceiling.

In the stop result determination process of the normal setting process described above, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling that is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. In this embodiment, the symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling.

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display pattern determination process, the variation display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(b), we will provide a supplementary explanation of the effects performed during the first normal game state when the ceiling is reached.

In the first normal game state, during the game round in which the ceiling is reached, the display screen 95a transitions to a "reach" display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of all the stopped symbol rows. At a predetermined timing after transitioning to the "reach" display, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed on the display screen 95a. Afterward, a message indicating a switch to high-frequency support mode A (e.g., "Rescue Activated") is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a changes to green.

In other words, the animation when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is the same as the second special animation set in step S2309 above. The animation pattern and the combination of symbols displayed are identical when the termination threshold number, set as a result of a special miss, matches or exceeds the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. To put it another way, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the second special animation is executed whether the termination threshold number, set as a result of a special miss, matches or exceeds the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. The system is configured so that the player cannot distinguish whether the trigger for this animation (the animation pattern and the combination of symbols displayed) was a special miss or reaching the ceiling.

The special setting process constituting step S2311 is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be stopped and the valid lines on which that combination will be stopped; and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols.

In this stop result determination process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols that normally corresponds to a miss. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

Furthermore, the result is reported via a reach display. In the variable display pattern determination process, the variable display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The variable display time of the received variable start command and the non-reach display pattern corresponding to the game result of the command are then determined. Additionally, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In other words, if the ceiling is reached during a normal game state other than the first normal game state (specifically, the fourth normal game state), the same animation as in the case of a complete miss without a reach will be performed. This makes it difficult to identify whether the ceiling has been reached from the animation content. To put it another way, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, and it results in a complete miss (neither a big win, a special miss, nor reaching the ceiling), the animation corresponding to a complete miss will be performed. The system is designed so that the player cannot distinguish from the animation (the animation style and the combination of symbols displayed) whether the trigger was reaching the ceiling or a complete miss.

Next, the game flow will be explained with reference to Figure 66. Figure 66(a) is a timing chart illustrating the game flow when the ceiling is reached after the end of the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, and Figure 66(b) is a timing chart illustrating the game flow when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss.

In the example shown in Figure 66(a), a special miss occurs at timing td1 during the first normal game state. This special miss results in special miss A, and the termination threshold is set to "20" spins. The remaining spins until reaching the ceiling are greater than the termination threshold set in this case. Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 66(a), the ceiling will not be reached during the fourth normal game state, which is transitioned to as a result of the special miss.

In a game round resulting in a special miss, the first special effect (see Figure 65(a)) is executed, and it is clearly indicated that the game will transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A as a result of the special miss. Upon transitioning to the fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 changes from white to blue. Furthermore, a countdown display of the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state begins in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, clearly indicating the remaining number of games.

At the timing of td2, when the number of game rounds played during this fourth normal game state reaches the termination threshold, the game transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to white.

Subsequently, the game progresses without any jackpots, and at timing TD3, the number of game spins performed after the end of the special game state reaches its upper limit (ceiling), triggering a transition from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In the final game spin that reaches the ceiling, the aforementioned second special effect (see Figure 65(b)) is performed, clearly indicating to the player that the ceiling has been reached. The background color of the display screen 95a changes to green in conjunction with the transition to the fourth normal game state at timing TD3.

In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 66(b), a special miss occurs at the timing of te1 during the first normal game state. This special miss is result B, and the termination threshold is set to "40" spins. The remaining spins to reach the ceiling are greater than the termination threshold set this time. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 66(b), the ceiling can be reached during the fourth normal game state, which is transitioned to as a result of the special miss. At the timing of te1, the second special effect is executed, and the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to green. However, the countdown display of the remaining spins is not executed on this display screen 95a, and the remaining spins are not explicitly shown.

During the fourth normal game state, at timing te2, the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state has reached its upper limit (ceiling). In this game round, a normal miss (complete miss) animation is performed, and the symbol combination corresponding to a normal miss (complete miss) is displayed.

At the subsequent timing of te3, the number of game rounds played during the current 4th normal game state has reached the termination threshold, and the game state transitions from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state. In the first game round after transitioning to the 1st normal game state, a normal miss (complete miss) animation is performed, and the symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed. At the timing of te4, when the game round ends, the game quickly returns to the 4th normal game state. Thus, even during the continuous transitions from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state and back to the 4th normal game state, the background color on the display screen 95a remains green.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In high-frequency support mode A, the number of entries into the second operation port 92 is frequent, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if the result is a special miss, the game may transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this case, a special effect is executed. If the result is a special miss and the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state to which the game transitions as a result of the special miss, the same special effect as the one executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed. By having such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the ceiling is variable. Furthermore, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the above-mentioned effect of reaching the ceiling is not executed, and the ceiling is not explicitly shown, thereby further enhancing the aforementioned mimicry effect. Furthermore, when a special failure occurs and the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, if the set termination threshold number of plays is less than the number of plays until the ceiling is reached, a different animation will be performed. This is desirable for achieving the aforementioned mimicry effect.

When the system cycles from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode and back to high-frequency support mode A, the aforementioned mimicry effect can be more effectively achieved by continuing to display indicators suggesting the series of modes at least across the transitions from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode.

<Variation 1>
In the fourth embodiment described above, if the number of times the termination criteria are set when a special miss occurs matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, or is greater than the number of times remaining, the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may also be configured to execute the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state only when the number of times the termination criteria are set when a special miss occurs and is greater than the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached.

<Modified Example 2>
In the fourth embodiment described above, if the number of times the termination criteria are set when a special miss occurs matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, or is greater than the number of times remaining, the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed. However, it is not necessarily required that the two effects be completely identical. If the number of times the termination criteria are set when a special miss occurs matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, or is greater than the number of times remaining, it is sufficient that an effect is executed that is perceived by the player as being identical to the effect executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, rather than the effect executed when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state.

<Example 3>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the system is configured not to explicitly indicate when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, but it is also possible to configure the system to explicitly indicate when the ceiling has been reached. For example, the system may be configured to explicitly indicate when the ceiling has been reached by displaying a message on the display screen 95a or by changing the background music output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, the system is configured to return to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state. However, it is also possible to set the display time of the symbols on the display unit for the operation port during this first normal game state to the display time corresponding to the reach display. In this way, securing the display time of the symbols for each game round in the first normal game state is preferable for executing the continuation effect (upgrade effect) of the fourth normal game state during that game round.

<Example 5>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the special game state ends, but the system is not limited to this. For example, the game count counter may be reset when transitioning to the special game state, or it may be reset while in the special game state. It is also possible to reset the game count counter when the high-frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 6>
The number of games played to terminate when a special failure result A occurs (20 games) is set to be less than the number of games played from the end of high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached, while the number of games played to terminate when a special failure result C occurs (260 games) is set to be more than the number of games played from the end of high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached. In other words, when a special failure result A occurs, the timing determines whether high-frequency support mode A can continue until the ceiling is reached, while when a special failure result C occurs, high-frequency support mode A can continue until the ceiling is reached. This could be changed so that the number of games played to terminate when a special failure result A occurs (20 games) is less than the number of games played until the ceiling is reached (300 games), and the number of games played to terminate when a special failure result C occurs (for example, 310 games) is more than the number of games played until the ceiling is reached (300 games).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the system transitions to a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A to suppress excessive investment by the player. In such a configuration, even if the transition to the fourth normal game state is intended to rescue the player, the time it takes to enjoy the benefits of the rescue (such as payouts from jackpots) can give the impression that the game is drawn out. In the fourth normal game state, the number of balls entering the second operation port 92 increases frequently, which tends to shorten the display time of the variation. However, this fourth normal game state corresponds to a low probability mode, and the probability of hitting a jackpot based on balls entering the operation ports 91 and 92 is not changed, so it is assumed that it will be difficult to completely eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

Therefore, one of the features of this embodiment is that, when the number of game spins performed after the end of a special game state (in this embodiment, the jackpot game state or V-jackpot game state described later) reaches its upper limit (ceiling), the game transitions to a limited-spin chance zone (a special game state described later) where the probability of hitting a jackpot substantially increases. The specific configuration for achieving this function will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6). However, in this embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) has an asymmetrical gauge, and the arrangement of various game components provided in the game area PE has been changed. The game board unit 80B in this embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 67. Figure 67 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in the direction of its own thickness (front-to-back direction). A general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83B, a through gate 84A, etc. are provided in each opening. When game balls flow into the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83B, these game balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided in accordance with each ball entry area, and based on the detection results, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits.

Furthermore, the game board 80aB is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that entries into the general prize pockets 81, etc., occur with a suitable probability. An out-out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aB, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out-out opening 86.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, has a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A located directly below the first operating port 91A. The latter of the two operating ports 92A is equipped with an electric mechanism 93A, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). When the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A is set to low-frequency support mode, it is effectively impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Winning a prize in the second operating port 92A is permitted when the mode switches to high-frequency support mode.

The game board 80aB is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83B, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83B or the through gate 84A. Game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83B, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B differs from that of the variable prize-winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. The specific configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B will be explained below with reference to Figure 68. Figure 68 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device 83B.

(Variable prize-winning device 83B)
Inside the variable prize winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B is formed through which game balls that have flowed into the entrance (large prize opening 331B) of the variable prize winning device 83B pass. The ball passage 332B branches into a first branch passage 334B and a second branch passage 335B at an intermediate position, and a flow path switching member 336B is provided at this branching point, which can switch the destination of the game balls to the first branch passage 334B side and the second branch passage 335B side. The drive unit (specifically a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. When no drive signal is input from the main control device 162 (non-excited state), the flow path switching member 336B waits in a protruding position that protrudes into the ball passage 332B, and when a drive signal is input (excited state), it waits in a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided.

When the flow path switching member 336B is positioned in a protruding location, the inlet of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, the inflow of game balls that have reached the branching section into the first branch passage 334B is prevented, and these game balls flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive signal for the drive unit of the flow path switching member 336B and the drive unit is energized, the flow path switching member 336B moves to a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided, and the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branching point are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335B, and instead flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the results of a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A.

Upstream detection sensor 391d is installed in the ball passage 332B upstream of the branching point, and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are installed in the downstream section, specifically in the first branching passage 334B and the second branching passage 335B. The upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control unit 162. The main control unit 162 determines whether a ball has entered the variable prize winning device 83B based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d, and dispenses a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. Furthermore, the remaining game ball status is monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B indicates that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334B, the support mode switches from the special game state (the V-jackpot game state described in detail later) to the high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode B) after the special game state has ended. In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "advantageous ball entry section" or "V," and a ball entering the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as a "V-winning ball."

(Retained ball storage area)
Next, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 69.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, two lottery modes were provided for the lottery conducted based on the entry of the ball into the first and second operating ports 91 and 92: a low-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. In other words, the system was configured to switch the win/loss table for the operating ports that was referenced according to the lottery mode. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the win/loss lottery for the operating ports is performed by referencing the same win/loss table regardless of the game state. It also differs from the first embodiment in that it references different win/loss tables depending on where the game ball enters. The win/loss table for the operating ports in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 70.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 70(a), in the win/loss table referenced when drawing lots based on winnings in the first operating port 91A, there are three random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7", "307", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a loss (normal loss). As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/200.

As shown in Figure 70(b), in the win/loss table referenced during the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", totaling three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. Furthermore, in this win/loss table, a total of 60 values, "5", "15", "25", "35", "45"... "575", "585", and "595", correspond to special wins. All random number values that do not correspond to either jackpots or special wins correspond to losses (normal losses). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/10.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91A and 92A do not include the special misses shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this; the system may be configured to allow for special misses in the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91A, or in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 92A, or in either the lottery based on winning entries into the first or second operating port 92A.

Next, referring to Figure 71, the distribution tables for each of the operating ports 91A and 92A will be described.

(Distribution table for the operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0" to "29", 27 values from "0" to "26" correspond to 6R jackpots, and 3 values from "27" to "29" correspond to 10R jackpots. In other words, when a jackpot is won, approximately 90% of the time it will be a 6R jackpot, and the remaining 10% will be a 10R jackpot.

In contrast, in the distribution table for the second operation port 92A, 15 values from "0" to "14" of the type counter C2 (values from "0" to "29") correspond to 6R jackpots, and 15 values from "15" to "29" correspond to 10R jackpots. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, there is a 50% probability of it being a 6R jackpot and a 50% probability of it being a 10R jackpot.

There is a difference in the number of rounds during the opening/closing execution mode for 6R jackpots and 10R jackpots. The former has 6 rounds, while the latter has 10. Therefore, winning a 10R jackpot presents a chance to significantly increase your winnings.

Furthermore, in the event of a 6R or 10R jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A switches to a high-frequency support mode B game state (either the first or second special game state). This high-frequency support mode B game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the jackpot game state ends—specifically, the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A—reaches the termination threshold. When this threshold is reached, the support by high-frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 6R jackpot, the termination threshold is set to "6 rounds," and in the case of a 10R jackpot, the termination threshold is set to "100 rounds."

If a special win is achieved through a lottery based on a ball entering the second operating port 92A, the game transitions to a special win state. The variable prize entry device 83B is opened for a predetermined period of time, and the flow path switching member 336B of the variable prize entry device 83B moves from its protruding position to its retracted position. This allows a ball to enter the advantageous ball entry section 334B (V-win). This entry into the advantageous ball entry section 334B (V-win) results in a 5RV jackpot, and the game transitions to a V-jackpot state after the special win state ends (see Figure 72(a)).

After the V-jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to a game state compatible with High-Frequency Support Mode B. This High-Frequency Support Mode B game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the V-jackpot game state ends—specifically, the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A—reaches the termination threshold. When this threshold is reached, the support from High-Frequency Support Mode B ends. In the case of a 5RV jackpot, the termination threshold is set to "6 rounds."

In this embodiment, during the game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B (first special game state or second special game state), the game progresses mainly with game rounds based on winning into the second operation port 92A. Even after reaching the termination criteria number of rounds and transitioning to the game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode, game rounds related to the second operation port 92A will be executed for the remaining reserved rounds related to the second operation port 92A.

In this embodiment, among the game states in which game rounds are executed based on winning entries into the activation slot, the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, excluding the special game states described later, is referred to as the "normal game state." Furthermore, the special winning game state, the V-jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state are referred to as the "special game state."

In other words, if a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 10 spins: the number of spins until termination (6 spins) plus the maximum number of spins that can be stored in the second operation port 92A (4 spins). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is approximately 65%. Similarly, if a 10R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 10 spins: the number of spins until termination (100 spins) plus the maximum number of spins that can be stored in the second operation port 92A (4 spins). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is almost 100% (see Figure 72(b)).

In this embodiment, the configuration is the same as in the first embodiment in that when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game transitions to a game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (third special game state). This high-frequency support mode A game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the opening/closing execution mode ends, specifically the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A, reaches the termination criterion number (time reduction round: 1 in this embodiment). When this termination criterion number is reached, the game transitions to a game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal gameplay state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 5 times: the number of times the game ends (1 time) + the maximum number of reserved balls stored for the second operation port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of hitting a jackpot or special win is approximately 40%, meaning that reaching the ceiling temporarily increases the winning probability.

In this embodiment, the number of games played before reaching the ceiling is set to "200." When the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the ceiling is reset (the game count counter is reset to 0) when that game state ends. In other words, the game is configured to transition to the aforementioned chance zone every 200 games.

In this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot or V-entry. High-frequency support mode B is designed to provide more favorable support from the electric mechanism 93A than high-frequency support mode A. However, in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the termination criteria is one time, and further game ball launches become unnecessary once the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaches its upper limit. This prevents a significant increase in investment when the relief function triggered by reaching the ceiling is active.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 73 and 74, we will explain the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing, normal processing) performed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Timer interrupt handling)
As shown in Figure 73, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt processing shown in the first embodiment (see Figure 20), with the addition of the V-prize winning processing in step S2406. As will be described in detail later, this V-prize winning processing monitors whether or not a prize (V-prize) has been won in the advantageous ball entry section 334B of the variable prize winning device 83B.

(Normal processing)
As shown in Figure 74, in normal processing, the external signal output process is first executed in step S2501. In the following step S2502, the variation type counter CS is updated, and in step S2503, the game round control process is executed. A part of the game round control process in step S2503 (the support mode switching process) has been changed from the first embodiment. Details of the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be described later.

Subsequently, step S2504 executes the transition process to the special bonus game state, step S2505 executes the V distribution setting process, and step S2506 executes the transition process to the jackpot game state. Details of each of these processes from steps S2504 to S2506 will be described later.

In the following step S2507, control processing for the through gate is executed, and in step S2508, processing for the electric support is executed. Then, in step S2509, game ball launch control processing is executed. Since the processing in steps S2507 to S2509 is the same as in the first embodiment, a detailed explanation is omitted.

In step S2510, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing is reached, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S2511 to S2512).

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 75, the process for switching the support mode, which is performed as part of the game turn control process in step S2503, will be explained.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If the determination in step S2601 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round related to the second operation port 92A. If the determination in step S2602 is negative, the support mode switching process ends there. If the determination in step S2602 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, the continuation count counters in the various counter areas 434 are updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2604, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S2604 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the determination in step S2604 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag or high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 is cleared, and the switching process ends there as well. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2601, if a negative result is obtained in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter stored in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 has reached its upper limit (corresponding to 200 game counts). If a negative result is obtained in step S2606, this switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the continuation count counter is set to "1". Then, in the following step S2608, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and this switching process ends. In other words, when the ceiling is reached, the support mode quickly switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A without going through a special game state.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 76 and 77, the process of transitioning to the special winning game state in step S2504 will be explained.

(Transition process to special winning game state)
As shown in Figure 76, in the process of transitioning to a special winning game state, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The jackpot game flag is a flag that indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played. It is stored at the start of the jackpot game and erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently in progress (i.e., the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2702 to determine whether a special jackpot game is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the special jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. The special jackpot game flag indicates that a special jackpot game is currently in progress.

If it is determined that a special win game is not currently in progress (i.e., the special win game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2703, where it is determined whether or not the special win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. That is, it is determined whether or not a special win has been achieved. The special win flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when a special win is achieved in the win/loss lottery during the game round control process described above.

If it is determined that a special win flag is stored, step S2704 determines whether it is the end of the game round. If it is not the end of the game round, the transition process to this special win game state is terminated. Also, if a positive determination is made in step S2701 (determining that a jackpot game is in progress), or if a negative determination is made in step S2703 (determining that the special win flag is not stored), the transition process to this special win game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game round has ended, the special win game start process is executed in step S2705. This start process involves storing the special win game flag in the various flag storage area 435 and checking that the variable prize device 83B is in a closed state before the start of the special win game. Furthermore, this start process also executes an opening period setting process to allow the variable prize device 83B to wait without opening when the special win game begins. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the opening timer counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. This set value (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In the following step S2706, the number of rounds played in the special bonus game is set by executing a process to set "1" to the round counter RC1 located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

In the following step S2707, the opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 during the external output processing in normal processing (Figure 74). Based on the received opening command, the notification/effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode and controls various devices to execute the determined effect.

In the following step S2708, after executing the external signal setting process, the transition process to this special win state is terminated. During the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special win signal provided on the external output terminal board 213 is set to the special win signal output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the special win signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, a special win signal is output to the management control device, allowing the management control device to recognize that a special win has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S2702 (it is determined that the special winning game is in progress), the process proceeds to step S2709 to determine whether the opening waiting time has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to this special winning game state is terminated.

If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2710, where a special opening/closing process is executed to open and close the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B. The special opening/closing process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 77.

(Opening and closing process for special winning entries)
In the special prize opening/closing process, first in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit (variable prize drive unit) for the shutter 333B of the variable prize device 83B. If the large prize opening 331B is not open, in step S2802 it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S2803 it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter TC1 of the RAM 404 is "0".

If the value of round counter RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2804, where the drive unit for the shutter 333B is activated to open the variable prize winning device 83B.

In the following step S2805, the first timer counter TC1 is set to "5000" (equivalent to 10 seconds) as the opening time for the variable prize winning device 83B. Then, in step S2806, the process of setting the upper limit of the number of prizes that can be won by the variable prize winning device 83B in the special prize game is performed. Specifically, the first prize winning counter PC1, located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, is set to "10".

Subsequently, in step S2807, an open command is set, and the opening/closing process for this special win is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 during the external output processing in the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if it is determined in step S2801 that the large prize slot 331B is open, the process proceeds to step S2808, where it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", step S2809 determines whether a prize has been awarded to the variable prize device 83B. If no prize has been awarded, the special prize opening/closing process ends there.

On the other hand, if a prize has been won, a prize winning command is set in step S2810. This prize winning command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in the normal processing (Figure 74). In the following step S2811, the value of the first prize winning counter PC1 is decremented by "1". Then, in step S2812, it is determined whether the value of the first prize winning counter PC1 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the opening/closing process for this special prize is terminated.

If a positive result is obtained in step S2812 or step S2808, it means that the conditions for closing the large prize opening 331B have been met. In this case, in step S2813, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is deactivated in order to close the large prize opening 331B.

In the following step S2814, the value of the round counter RC1 is deducted by "1," and in step S2815, the ending start process is executed. This start process sets an ending waiting time for the special winning game, allowing the game to wait without starting the next round. Specifically, the ending waiting time, pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the ending timer counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The value of the ending timer counter is deducted by "1" each time a timer interrupt process is executed.

Subsequently, in step S2816, the ending command is set, and then the opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 during the external output process in the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of the transition process to the special winning game state in Figure 76, after executing the special winning opening/closing process in step S2710, it is determined in step S2711 whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". Also, in step S2712, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to this special winning game state ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the special winning game termination process is executed in step S2713 before the transition process to this special winning game state ends. Here, the special winning game termination process in step S2713 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 78.

(Ending process for special winning game)
In the termination process for a special winning game, step S2901 first determines whether or not the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This V-winning flag is stored in the V-winning process in step S2406 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 73.

Here, we will explain the V-prize winning process in step S2406 and the V-distribution setting process in step S2505 in the normal process, which is related to the V-prize winning process. First, we will explain the V-distribution setting process in step S307, referring to the flowchart in Figure 79.

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, first in step S3001, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for a special winning game. If it is the start timing, in step S3002, "500" (equivalent to 1 sec) is set in the second timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. The value set in the second timer counter TC2 (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In the following step S3003, the distribution count counter HC located in the various counter areas 434 is set to "1". The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter HC is used by the MPU 402 to identify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

If a negative result is determined in step S3001, or after the processing in step S3003 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, by understanding the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member, it is determined whether the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, which is the distribution side (V-winning side) to the advantageous ball entry section 334B. If the flow path switching member 336B is not in the retracted position, i.e., in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S3005 to determine whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", it is determined in step S3006 whether the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0".

If a negative result is obtained in step S3006, i.e., if the value of the distribution count counter HC is "1", then in step S3007, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the retracted position (V-winning side). In the subsequent step S3008, the third timer counter TC3 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 seconds). After the execution of step S3008, or if a positive result is obtained in step S3006, this distribution setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S3004, if a positive determination is made in step S3004, that is, if the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position (V-winning side), then in step S3009, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". That is, it is determined whether the period for the flow path switching member 336B to wait in the retracted position (V-winning side) has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S3009, then in step S3010, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position, and then in step S3011, the value of the distribution count counter HC is subtracted by "1". After the execution of step S3011 or if a negative determination is made in step S3009, this distribution setting process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the process for winning a V prize by referring to the flowchart in Figure 80.

(Processing for winning the V prize)
In the process for winning a V prize, step S3101 first determines whether a V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a V prize flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, where it is determined whether a V prize has occurred (whether the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 338B) based on the detection state of the V prize detection sensor 338B provided in the variable prize device 83B.

If it is determined that a V-win has occurred, step S3103 determines whether or not the validity period for the V-win is currently active. This validity period is a predetermined period; for example, the period during which a special winning game is being played or the V-side distribution period of the flow path switching member 336B are set as the validity period. If it is determined that the validity period is not active, the process proceeds to step S3104, where an error command is set as the target for transmission to the notification/performance control device 140, and then the V-win processing is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 74), and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 so that a predetermined error notification is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is still active, the process proceeds to step S3105, where the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S3106, the V-winning command is set. The V-winning command is used to notify the notification/performance control device 140 that a V-winning has occurred. The set V-winning command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing of the normal process (Figure 74). Upon receiving the V-winning command, the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, etc., so that the symbol display device 95, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 announce the occurrence of a V-winning, or perform effects celebrating the V-winning.

After step S3106 is executed, if the result in step S3101 is positive or the result in step S3102 is negative, this V-prize winning process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the termination process for the special bonus game in Figure 78, if it is determined in step S2901 that the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2902, where the V-winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. The V-winning flag is a flag used by MPU 402 to determine that a V-jackpot game should be started.

In the following step S2903, the V-winning flag, special win flag, and special win game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared. In the following step S2904, a V-winning command is set, and then the termination process for this special win game is completed. The V-winning command is a command to notify the notification/performance control device 140 that a V-jackpot game is starting and the type of V-jackpot game. The set V-winning command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output process of the normal process (Figure 74). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives the V-winning command, it controls the display control device 410, etc., so that an effect indicating the start of a V-jackpot game is executed on the symbol display device 95, etc.

On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained in step S2901 (it is determined that the V-winning flag is not stored), then in step S2905, the special win flag and special win game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are deleted, and then the termination process for this special win game is terminated.

Next, the transition process to the jackpot game state in step S2506 of the normal process (Figure 74) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 81. Note that among the various processes included in this transition process, those that are the same as those included in the transition process to the special jackpot game state described above will be explained in a simplified manner as appropriate.

(Transition process to jackpot game state)
In the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state, first in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a special jackpot game is currently being played. If it is determined that a special jackpot game is currently being played, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special jackpot game is not currently being played, the process proceeds to step S3202, where it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently in progress, step S3203 determines whether a V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. That is, it determines whether or not to start a V-jackpot game. If it is determined that a V-winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, where it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags are stored in the aforementioned flag storage area 435. That is, it determines whether or not to start a normal jackpot game (not a V-jackpot game).

If it is determined that no jackpot flags are stored, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated. However, if it is determined that the jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3205 to determine whether it is the end of the game round. If it is determined that it is not the end of the game round, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3205 that the game round has ended, or if it is determined in step S3203 that the V-winning flag has been stored, the process proceeds to step S3206 to execute the jackpot game start process. In this start process, the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the opening period setting process is executed.

In the following step S3207, the round setting process is executed. Specifically, it is determined which of the following is stored in the various flag storage area 435: the 6R jackpot flag, the 10R jackpot flag, or the 5RV jackpot flag. If it is determined that one of these flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S3208, where the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, is set. Specifically, if the 6R jackpot flag is stored, "6" is set in the round counter RC1; if the 10R jackpot flag is stored, "10" is set in the round counter RC1; and if the 5RV jackpot flag is stored, "5" is set in the round counter RC1.

After step S3207 is executed, the opening command is set in step S3208, and then the external signal setting process is executed in step S3209. After that, the process of transitioning to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S3202 that a jackpot game is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S3210 to determine whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3211, where a jackpot opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B. In the jackpot opening/closing process, if the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B is closed, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is activated, opening the large prize opening 331B, provided that the round counter RC1 is "1" or greater. Furthermore, if the large prize opening 331B is open, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is stopped, closing the large prize opening 331B, provided that a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening 331B or a predetermined number (10 balls) have entered.

After executing the opening/closing process for the jackpot in step S3211, step S3212 determines whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". Step S3213 then determines whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game is executed in step S3214, and then the transition process to the current jackpot game state is terminated. Here, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S3214 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 82.

(Transition process at the end of a jackpot game)
In the transition process at the end of a jackpot game, the first step S3301 sets the high-frequency support mode B flag in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A to high-frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a 6R jackpot or a 5RV jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R jackpot flag or a 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If a positive result is obtained in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303, where the continuation count counter in the various counter areas 434 is set to "6". This ensures that high-frequency support mode B continues until the number of games played after the jackpot game (specifically, the number of games played related to the second operation port 92A) reaches six.

On the other hand, if a negative result is determined in step S3302, that is, if the current jackpot game was triggered by a 10R jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3304, and the continuation counter is set to "100". This ensures that high-frequency support mode B continues until the number of games played after the jackpot game ends (specifically, the number of games played related to the second operation port 92A) reaches 100.

After executing the processes in steps S3303 and S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the game count counters in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). Then, the process proceeds to step S3306, where the various flags for the jackpot game state stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the transition process at the end of this jackpot is completed.

(Regarding the basic flow of the game)
Next, the basic gameplay flow of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 83. Figure 83 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

As already explained, in normal gameplay where the support mode is set to low-frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect the ball to enter the second operating port 92A. Therefore, players should aim to shoot the balls along the left route (so-called left-handed shooting) and try to get them into the first operating port 91A.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91A, a draw is performed based on that entry. If the draw results in a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot state in which the variable prize entry device 83B is opened and closed over multiple rounds. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can enter the variable prize entry device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launching handle 41 to launch game balls down the right route (so-called right-handed play). After the jackpot state ends, the game transitions to the above-mentioned chance zone (hereinafter referred to as the special game state), which is more advantageous to the player compared to the normal game state.

The special game states include a first special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operating port 92A is set to "6", and a second special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operating port 92A is set to "100". After the jackpot game state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the first special game state, and after the jackpot game state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the second special game state.

In the first special game state, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode B, making it easier to win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Only game balls flowing down the right route can win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the first special game state, a notification is issued prompting the player to continue shooting to the right even after the jackpot game has ended.

The first and second special game states will continue until the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination threshold (6 or 100 rounds). However, as already explained, the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is more favorable than the lottery based on winning at the first operation port 91A, resulting in a higher probability of winning a special prize. The actual winning probability, including special prizes, increases significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

Furthermore, the special game states include a fourth special game state in which the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode, while the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A, which were acquired during the first or second special game state, are executed based on the reserves related to said second operation port 92A. If none of the game rounds during the first or second special game state result in a jackpot or a special win (i.e., all results are losses), the game transitions to the fourth special game state.

In this embodiment, the second operation port 92A has a hold function that limits the number of held items to four. Therefore, if four hold information items related to the second operation port 92A are stored at the end of high-frequency support mode B, it becomes possible to receive four more win/loss draws based on winning into the second operation port 92A even after high-frequency support mode B has ended. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to low-frequency support mode and the internal state is that of normal gameplay, the special game state is extended (continued) by the number of held items related to the second operation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode B. Incidentally, the probability of achieving a special win or a jackpot (continuation rate) during the four win/loss draws related to the second operation port 92A is approximately 35%. Furthermore, the total continuation rate, including the number of games played during the first special game state, is approximately 65%, and the total continuation rate, including the number of games played during the second special game state, is almost 100%.

If all four rounds of play during the fourth special game state result in a normal loss, and all the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is consumed, the game will return to the normal game state. In other words, if the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is used up without any special wins or jackpots occurring, the game will be downgraded from the special game state to the normal game state. This means the actual winning probability decreases from 1/10 to 1/200. In this case, the player will return to shooting the game balls to the left and play again aiming for a jackpot based on a ball entering the first operation port 91A.

In contrast, if a special win occurs in any of the first, second, or fourth special game states, the game transitions to a special win game state. In the special win game state, a special win game is executed in which the variable prize-winning device 83B opens and closes in the high-frequency winning pattern described above. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can enter the variable prize-winning device 83B, if a special win occurs, the player will play by shooting to the right. Furthermore, if a V-win occurs during this special win game, after the special win game ends, the game transitions to a V-jackpot game state in which the variable prize-winning device 83B opens and closes over multiple rounds (5 rounds).

Incidentally, when a special winning game is executed in a high-frequency winning pattern, the opening time of the variable winning device 83B and the period during which a V-win is permitted are longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec). Therefore, as long as the game balls are continuously launched towards the right route, a V-win can be easily achieved.

After the V-jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the first special game state described above. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs in any of the first, second, or fourth special game states, the game transitions to the jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot game state was triggered by a 6R jackpot, the game transitions to the first special game state; if the jackpot game state was triggered by a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to the second special game state. In this way, by repeatedly hitting jackpots or special wins during the special game states, players have a chance to significantly increase their number of balls.

The special game states shown in this embodiment include a third special game state in which the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A, and the number of game rounds ending for the second operating port 92A becomes "1". In the third special game state, the high-frequency support mode A makes it easier to win prizes in the second operating port 92A. Only game balls flowing down the right route can win prizes in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the third special game state, a notification prompting the player to shoot to the right is issued.

Here, the game is configured such that the game count counter is reset when the above-mentioned jackpot game state or jackpot game state ends, thereby resetting the ceiling. Furthermore, in the first normal game state, if the number of games played reaches the above-mentioned ceiling, the game transitions to the third special game state.

The third special game state will continue until the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination threshold (1 round). However, as already explained, the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is more favorable than the lottery based on winning at the first operation port 91A, resulting in a higher probability of winning a special prize. The actual winning probability, including special prizes, increases significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

If a special win occurs during the third special game state, the game transitions to the special win game state described above. If a V-entry occurs during this special win game state, the game transitions to the V-jackpot game state. After the V-jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the first special game state. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs during the third special game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state described above. After this jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to either the first or second special game state.

In contrast, if none of the rounds played in the third special game state result in a jackpot or a special win (i.e., all results are losses), the game transitions to the fourth special game state. As already explained, this embodiment has a reserve function that limits the number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port 92A to four. Therefore, if four reserved balls are stored in the second operation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode A, it becomes possible to receive four more win/loss draws based on balls entering the second operation port 92A even after high-frequency support mode A has ended. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to low-frequency support mode and the game is internally in a normal game state, the above special game state is extended (continued) by the number of reserved balls in the second operation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode A. Incidentally, the probability of getting a special win or a jackpot in the four win/loss draws for the second operation port 92A (continuation rate) is approximately 35%. Furthermore, the total continuation rate, including the number of games played during the third special game state, is approximately 40%.

If all four rounds of play during the fourth special game state result in misses, and all the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is consumed, the game will return to the normal game state described above. In other words, if the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is used up without any special wins or jackpots occurring, the game will be downgraded from the special game state to the normal game state. In this case, the player will return to shooting the game balls to the left and play again, aiming for a jackpot based on a ball entering the first operation port 91A.

Furthermore, if the game ball is launched to the right route, the system is configured to avoid entering the first operation port 91A. However, immediately after transitioning to the special game state, there is a possibility that the reserved information related to the first operation port 91A acquired during the normal game state remains, and the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A has not yet been acquired. Although the system is configured to prioritize the consumption of reserved information related to the second operation port 92A over the reserved information related to the first operation port 91A, if the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A has not been acquired, the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A may be executed in the special game state. Although the lottery for the second operation port 92A has a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first operation port 91A, there is concern that it would be a significant disadvantage for the player if the high-frequency support mode ends without the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A being executed or with an insufficient number of executions. In this regard, as already explained, in this embodiment, the termination threshold number for the high-frequency support mode is set for each activation port. Therefore, even if a game round related to the first activation port 91A is executed during the special game state, this prevents the high-frequency support mode from ending before the game round related to the second activation port 92A is executed.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned chance zone (special game state) is configured to execute special effects for the chance zone over multiple game rounds. Here, the configuration that forms the basis for these special effects for the chance zone, specifically the pre-confirmation process executed in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as part of the prize entry process for the activation port (see step S2403 in Figure 73), will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84.

(Pre-confirmation process)
In the pre-check process, first, in step S3401, a win/loss determination process is performed by referring to the win/loss determination table for the operation port and the value of the winning random number counter C1 obtained in step S2403. Specifically, it is determined whether the pending information obtained this time corresponds to a big win or a special win.

If a jackpot is detected, a positive determination is made in step S3402, and the process proceeds to step S3403. Information indicating a jackpot is stored in RAM 404, and information indicating a jackpot is stored in the pending command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If a special win is indicated, a negative determination is made in step S3402, and a positive determination is made in step S3404, before proceeding to step S3405. In step S3405, information indicating a special win is stored in RAM 404, and information indicating a special win is stored in the hold command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If the result is incorrect, a negative determination is made in steps S3402 and S3404, respectively, and this pre-verification process is terminated.

In the notification and performance control device 140's MPU 442, it is possible to determine in advance whether a jackpot or special win is likely based on the information contained in the hold command received from the main control device 162.

As already explained, in this embodiment, if the number of games played after the special game state (specifically, the jackpot game state or the V-jackpot game state) ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game will transition to the third special game state. This third special game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode A, and by acquiring the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A during this third special game state, the special performance for the chance zone can be executed from the third special game state to the fourth special game state.

The special effects for the Chance Zone consist of three parts: an opening part that prompts the player to launch the game ball towards the second activation port 92A; a main part where the content of the effects is determined based on the results of all game rounds played in the third special game state and the fourth special game state that follows immediately; and an ending part that functions as a transition to the special game state after the win/loss result is displayed. The opening part begins when the game round in which the ceiling is reached ends, transitions to the main part when the first game round in the third special game state begins, and transitions to the ending part when that game round ends. After that, the ending part ends when the fourth special game state ends and the game returns to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, measures have been taken to ensure sufficient execution time for the main part of the special effects for the chance zone while avoiding an excessively long ending part. Specifically, for the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A that are executed after the number of game rounds executed after the special game state ends reaches the ceiling, the special variation display time table is referenced as the table for determining the variation display time. More specifically, the variation display time table for determining the variation display time for the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A executed immediately after reaching the ceiling is provided separately from the variation display time table referenced when determining the variation display time in other cases.

As shown in the schematic diagram in Figure 85, the display time for the variation in the second operation port 92A, which is executed immediately after reaching the ceiling (for example, the 201st game), is set to "60 seconds". For the four subsequent game rounds (the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls for the second operation port 92A) (for example, the 202nd to 205th game rounds), the display time for the variation is set to "0.5 seconds". In other words, the display time for the game round involving the second operation port 92A, executed immediately after reaching the ceiling, is longer than the sum of the display times for the four subsequent game rounds. This is a design choice to ensure sufficient video playback time, reduce the amount of data for special effects in the chance zone, avoid insufficient reserved balls for the second operation port 92A, and suppress any prolonged ending.

Next, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the gameplay flow upon entering the chance zone, referring to Figure 86. Figure 86 is a timing chart showing the gameplay flow upon entering the chance zone, illustrating the case where a special win occurs during the chance zone.

(Gameplay flow upon entering the chance zone)
At timing tf1 during normal gameplay in low-frequency support mode, a game round begins that marks the 199th game round played since the end of the special game state. At timing tf2, a game round begins that marks the 200th game round played since the end of the special game state, i.e., the ceiling is reached. Both of these game rounds result in a losing outcome. In the game round that reaches the ceiling, the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling ("1" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol) is displayed on the display screen 95a (on the active line) of the symbol display device 95, clearly indicating to the player that reaching the ceiling will trigger a transition to the chance zone.

At the timing of tf3, when the number of game rounds reaching the ceiling ends, the support mode switches to high-frequency support mode A, and the opening part of the special performance for the chance zone (third special game state) corresponding to the chance zone begins on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Specifically, at the timing of tf3, the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", and gameplay in the chance zone waits until a ball enters the second operation port 92A. In the opening part described above, the display screen 95a displays the message "If you can catch the fairy, a BONUS is guaranteed" as an indication of the start of the chance zone, and the BGM switches to one corresponding to the chance zone. Then, at the timing of tf3, a message prompting the launch of the game ball towards the right route (right-hand shooting notification) begins.

Subsequently, at the timing of tf4 when a prize is awarded to the second operating port 92A, the special performance for the chance zone transitions from the opening part to the main part. As a result, the display screen 95a shows the fairy character and the girl character chasing the fairy character. In this embodiment, after transitioning to the main part, a predetermined waiting period elapses before the final display (result display) in the main part is determined. That is, at a predetermined timing during the main part, it is decided whether the result display will indicate successful capture of the fairy or failure to capture the fairy.

In the example shown in Figure 86, the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaches its maximum limit at the timing of tf5 in the main part, specifically before the predetermined timing mentioned above. Of these reserved balls, the fourth one corresponds to a special win. Therefore, at the end of the main part, a result display indicating successful capture of the fairy is executed, clearly informing the player that they have won. The right-hand shooting notification mentioned above ends at the timing of tf5, when the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaches its maximum limit.

Subsequently, at the timing of tf6, when the game round in the third special game state ends, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode, and the special effects for the chance zone transition to the ending part. Furthermore, if the electric mechanism 93A is in the open state at the timing of tf6, it will be forcibly switched to the closed state, preventing further entries into the second operating opening 92A.

After transitioning from the third special game state to the fourth special game state, the remaining reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A are quickly consumed at timings tf6, tf7, tf8, and tf9. In the example shown in Figure 86, the last game round related to the second operation port 92A corresponds to a special win, and the game transitions to the special win game state at timing tf10, when that game round ends. At timing tf10, the special effects for the chance zone (specifically the ending part) end, and the effects for the special win game state are executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of game rounds (number of games played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a winning outcome, the game transitions to a third special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In high-frequency support mode A, it becomes possible to win in the second operation port 92A, and the judgment (lottery) based on winning in the second operation port 92A can result in not only a jackpot but also a special win. Therefore, the degree of advantage (probability of winning) in the judgment is greatly increased. In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher degree of advantage than the previous game state. By configuring the game to transition to a chance zone upon reaching the ceiling in this way, the player's desire to play can be effectively stimulated. This is desirable in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the level of attention the player receives to the game.

When the ceiling is reached, a prize is awarded by entering the second operating port 92A. This not only suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls, but also increases the probability of transitioning to a special game state (such as a jackpot game state or a special bonus game state). In this configuration, the benefits can be effectively realized even with a shorter stay in high-frequency support mode A, thus effectively suppressing the prolonged gameplay after reaching the ceiling.

The number of games played until the ceiling is reached is reset when the high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, ends. This configuration is preferable for achieving a configuration where the ceiling is shallow, the benefits of reaching the ceiling are small, and a weaker ceiling function is activated in short cycles. In other words, it is preferable for suppressing monotony in gameplay.

The number of games played related to the termination criteria is counted when a game is played using the second operation port 92A. This configuration helps to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being fully realized.

The probability of a special win in the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is 1/10. The second operation port's reserve area Rb is defined to have a number equal to the sum of the maximum number of reserve information memories and the aforementioned termination criteria count, which is equal to the reciprocal of the above probability. By defining the maximum number of memories memories and the termination criteria count in this way, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in short cycles and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

<Variation 1>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of times the third special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered is set to be less than the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered (6 times), but the invention is not limited to this. The number of times the third special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered may be set to be more than the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered, or the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered may be set to be the same as the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered.

<Modified Example 2>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of times the third special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling is set to be less than the number of times the first special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the jackpot (6 times) and the number of times the second special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling (1 time), but the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may be set to be more than the number of times the third special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling, or the number of times the first special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the jackpot and the number of times the second special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the jackpot is set to be the same as the number of times the third special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling is transitioned to

<Example 3>
In the fifth embodiment described above, when a special win occurs, the variable prize device 83B is opened in a high-frequency prize-winning mode, effectively guaranteeing a V-win. However, a first special win is also possible, in which the variable prize device 83B is opened in a high-frequency prize-winning mode, effectively guaranteeing a V-win, and a second special win is possible, in which the variable prize device 83B is opened in a low-frequency prize-winning mode, effectively making a V-win impossible.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating slot was set to 1/200, and the number of games played to reach the ceiling was set to 200. In other words, the number of games played to reach the ceiling was set to coincide with the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is also possible to change this and set the number of games played to reach the ceiling to an integer smaller than the reciprocal of the winning probability (for example, 50, 100, or 150 games).

<Example 5>
In normal gameplay mode with low-frequency support mode enabled, the game progresses based on ball entry into the first operating port 91A. In this case, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200, and the number of games required to reach the ceiling is set to be the reciprocal of this probability. It is also possible to change this and set the number of games required to reach the ceiling to be less than the reciprocal of this probability. By setting the number of games required to reach the ceiling in this way, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the probability of hitting a jackpot or a special win during the special game state (chance zone) that is entered upon reaching the ceiling is set to approximately 40%, and even if the chance zone is entered upon reaching the ceiling, the configuration is such that in about half of the cases the chance zone ends without winning either a jackpot or a special win. In other words, by setting the ceiling low, the frequency of entering the chance zone upon reaching the ceiling is increased, while the configuration is such that the advantage in the chance zone does not become excessively high, thereby suppressing monotony in the game. This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that, while the ceiling is set high, the benefits upon reaching the ceiling are strengthened to enhance the player's rescue function. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. First, the win/loss table for the operation opening will be described with reference to Figure 87.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 87(a), in the win/loss table referenced when drawing lots based on winnings in the first operating port 91A, there are three random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7", "307", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a loss (normal loss). As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/200.

As shown in Figure 87(b), in the win/loss table referenced during the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", totaling three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. Furthermore, in this win/loss table, a total of 120 values—"3", "5", "13", "15", "23", "25"... "583", "585", "593", and "595"—correspond to special wins. All random number values that do not correspond to either jackpots or special wins correspond to losses (normal losses). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/5.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91A and 92A do not include the special misses shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this; the system may be configured to allow for special misses in the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91A, or in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 92A, or in either the lottery based on winning entries into the first or second operating port 92A.

In the case of a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode B (first special game state or second special game state) after the end of the special game state (jackpot game state) by the electric mechanism 93A, similar to the fifth embodiment. However, as shown in Figure 88, the termination criterion count is set to "1" when a 6R jackpot occurs, and to "3" when a 10R jackpot occurs.

Furthermore, in the case of a special win → special win game state → V-entry → 5RV jackpot, the game state (first special game state) transitions to a high-frequency support mode B provided by the electric mechanism 93A after the special game state (jackpot game state) ends. This is also the same as the fifth embodiment. However, in the case of a 5RV jackpot, the above termination criterion count is set to "1 time".

In other words, if a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 5 times: the number of times the game ends (1 time) + the maximum number of reserved balls stored by the second operation port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is approximately 67%. Similarly, if a 10R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 7 times: the number of times the game ends (3 times) + the maximum number of reserved balls stored by the second operation port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is approximately 80%.

In this embodiment as well, if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game transitions to a game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (third special game state), similar to the first embodiment. This high-frequency support mode A game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the opening/closing execution mode ends, specifically the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A, reaches the termination criterion number (time reduction rounds: 100 rounds in this embodiment). Upon reaching this termination criterion number, the game transitions to a game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal gameplay state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 104 spins: the number of spins until termination (100 spins) + the maximum number of reserved spins stored for the second operation port 92A (4 spins). During this time, the probability of hitting a jackpot or special win is almost 100%, and the increased winning probability upon reaching the ceiling makes a jackpot or special win during the chance zone highly likely.

In this embodiment, the number of games played before reaching the ceiling is set to 600. When the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the ceiling is reset (the game count counter is reset to 0) when that game state ends. In other words, the game is configured to transition to the above-mentioned chance zone every 600 games.

(Regarding the basic flow of the game)
Next, the basic gameplay flow of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 89. Figure 89 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

In normal gameplay, when the support mode is set to low-frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect the ball to enter the second operating port 92A. Therefore, players should aim to shoot the balls along the left route (so-called left-handed shooting) and target the first operating port 91A.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91A, a draw is performed based on that entry. If the draw results in a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot state in which the variable prize entry device 83B is opened and closed over multiple rounds. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can enter the variable prize entry device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launching handle 41 to launch game balls down the right route (so-called right-handed shooting). After the jackpot state ends, the game transitions to the above-mentioned chance zone (special game state), which is more advantageous to the player compared to the normal game state.

The special game states include: a first special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is set to "1"; a second special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is set to "3"; a third special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A and the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is set to "100"; and a fourth special game state in which game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are executed based on the reserves acquired during the first to third special game states.

After a jackpot game state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the first special game state. After a jackpot game state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the second special game state. If a V-entry occurs during a special jackpot game state triggered by a special win, and the 5R V jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the first special game state. If the number of games played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: 600 games), the game transitions to the third special game state. If the number of games played in the first to third special game states without winning either a jackpot or a special win (all resulting in losses) reaches the above termination threshold, the game transitions to the fourth special game state.

The first to third special game states will continue until the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A reaches the above termination criteria number (1, 3, or 100 rounds). However, the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is more favorable than the lottery based on winning at the first operation port 91A, resulting in a higher probability of winning a special prize. The actual winning probability, including special prizes, increases significantly from 1/200 to 1/5.

Incidentally, the probability of achieving a special win or a jackpot (continuation rate) during the four draws related to the second operating port 92A is approximately 60%. Furthermore, the total continuation rate, including the rounds played during the first special game state, is approximately 67%, the total continuation rate, including the rounds played during the second special game state, is approximately 80%, and the total continuation rate, including the rounds played during the third special game state, is almost 100%.

According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a win, the game transitions to the third special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. However, even if high-frequency support mode A is activated, if the probability of actually winning remains low, the following inconveniences may occur. Specifically, even if the ceiling is reached, the period until the player receives the sufficient benefit (transition to the special game state) that they expect may be prolonged, or the chance zone including high-frequency support mode A may end before the player receives the sufficient benefit (a quick run-through occurs). This is undesirable as it significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment makes it possible to enter the second operation port 92A by transitioning from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode, and the judgment (lottery) based on entry into the second operation port 92A can result in not only a big win but also a special win. In other words, the probability of winning (probability of transitioning to the special game state) is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. Furthermore, the sum of the maximum number of reserved information items (e.g., 4) and the termination threshold count (e.g., 100 times) in the second operation slot's reserved area Rb (e.g., 104 times) is set to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of a winning result. This allows for a configuration where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain. This effectively suppresses the aforementioned problems.

Furthermore, if there is a limit to the number of plays that can be performed in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered when the ceiling is reached, the concern of the aforementioned "runaway" scenario becomes stronger. In this regard, the above configuration mitigates the impact of the limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached. In other words, even when employing high-frequency support mode A with a play limit upon reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be effectively suppressed.

When transitioning from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning can be significantly increased. This is desirable because it shortens the duration of stay in high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing the prolonged period before the aforementioned relief function upon reaching the ceiling is activated.

In normal gameplay under the low-frequency support mode, if a jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a special game state, and then to either the first or second special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B. In this configuration, the termination threshold for high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is greater than the termination threshold for high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special jackpot. Therefore, transitioning to the special game state upon reaching the ceiling is prioritized. This configuration allows the aforementioned relief function to function effectively.

In a configuration where both High-Frequency Support Mode A, triggered by reaching the ceiling, and High-Frequency Support Mode B, triggered by a winning result, are executed based on winning entries into the second operation port 92A, the benefits received when a winning result occurs during a High-Frequency Support Mode are the same. While increasing the benefits received when a winning result occurs is desirable to improve player satisfaction, there is a concern that this may lead to an overly powerful relief function upon reaching the ceiling, as the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling also increase. This concern is particularly significant in configurations where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain, as described above. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the upper limit of the number of attempts (ceiling) to be greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot (1/200), the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling can be increased while reducing the opportunities to reach the ceiling, thereby eliminating the above concern.

<Variation 1>
According to the sixth embodiment described above, in the third special game state transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling, the number of rounds to terminate is set such that the probability of hitting a jackpot or a special win during the special game state is approximately 100%, but the invention is not limited to this. In the third special game state transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling, the number of rounds to terminate may be set such that the probability of hitting a jackpot or a special win during the special game state is 95% or higher (preferably 99% or higher).

<Modified Example 2>
In order to create a configuration where reaching the ceiling makes the next big win highly likely, the following configuration is also possible. That is, the game count counter is reset when the ceiling is reached, and the number of games played to reach the ceiling and the number of games played to reach the termination criteria in the third special game state to which the player transitions upon reaching the ceiling are the same, or the number of games played to reach the termination criteria in the third special game state to which the player transitions upon reaching the ceiling is greater than the number of games played to reach the ceiling.

<Example 3>
In the third special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, which is entered upon reaching the ceiling, if a special win occurs, the display time of the changing symbols on the second operation port display unit D2 may be shortened compared to when a special win occurs under other circumstances. By shortening the display time of the changing symbols when a special win occurs during the fourth special game state, the time required to transition to the special game state is reduced, allowing the player to quickly enjoy the expected benefits.

<Modification 4>
Compared to the special game states corresponding to high-frequency support mode B (first special game state and second special game state) that are transitioned to when the ceiling is reached, the special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (third special game state) that is transitioned to when the ceiling is reached may be configured to have stronger support from the electric mechanism 93A (for example, the period during which it remains open is longer). With such a configuration, the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92A increases in high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, and the number of reserve information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second operation port increases. Therefore, the display time of the changing symbols on the display unit D2 for the operation port during the game round after reaching the ceiling (operation period for the game round) is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to being able to enjoy the above benefits can be effectively suppressed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates a mechanism to suppress monotony in gameplay when a 6R regular jackpot is achieved and the game transitions to a third normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 90. Figure 90 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
In this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 91.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 was configured to result in a special loss. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery entries based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 is configured to result in a special loss. The winning/losing table for the operating ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 92 and 93.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 92, the win/loss tables for the first operating port include a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on a win in the first operating port 91A, the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 92(a)) is referenced, and the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 92(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, which range from 0 to 599, "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the losing results (more specifically, the normal losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on the entry into the first operating port 91A, the configuration is such that the "special losing" described in the first embodiment does not occur.

As shown in Figure 93, the second operation port has two win/loss tables: one for the low-probability mode (low-probability win/loss information group) and another for the high-probability mode (high-probability win/loss information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on a win in the second operating port 92A, the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 93(a)) is referenced, and the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 93(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpot results. Furthermore, in situations where the win/loss tables for low probability mode and high probability mode are referenced during the draw based on the entry into the second operation opening 92A, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are all "5", "15", "25", "35"... "585", and "595", totaling 60 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "5", "15", "25", "35"... "585", and "595" correspond to special miss results. Finally, all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special miss correspond to a miss result (more specifically, a normal miss result).

Thus, in this embodiment, the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A is configured so that it does not result in a special loss, and the winning destination corresponding to a special loss is limited to the second operating port 92A, to which the electric mechanism 93A is attached.

Furthermore, two distribution tables are provided: one for the first operation port (see Figure 94(a)) and another for the second operation port (see Figure 94(b)). For the first operation port's distribution table, values of "0 to 14" from the type counter C2 (0 to 29) correspond to 6R regular jackpot A, while values of "15 to 29" correspond to 6R probability-changing jackpot. For the second operation port's distribution table, values of "0 to 14" from the type counter C2 (0 to 29) correspond to 6R regular jackpot B, while values of "15 to 29" correspond to 6R probability-changing jackpot.

Here, we will compare the various types of jackpots by referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 95. In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second normal game state where the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B. This second normal game state continues until the next jackpot occurs.

If a 6R regular jackpot A or 6R regular jackpot B occurs, the game transitions to a third regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As already explained, after transitioning to the third regular game state, if the number of games played during that third regular game state reaches the termination threshold, the game transitions to a first regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, the third regular game state has a limit on the number of games played. In this embodiment, the counting of games played during the third regular game state is limited to games played based on winning a prize in the second operation port 92A.

If a 6R regular jackpot A occurs, the termination threshold is set to "10 times," and if a 6R regular jackpot B occurs, the termination threshold is set to "20 times." As already explained, the maximum number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port 92A is "4." Therefore, if a 6R regular jackpot A occurs, the second operation port 92A will be played a maximum of 14 times (10 times + 4 reserved balls), and if a 6R regular jackpot B occurs, the second operation port 92A will be played a maximum of 24 times (20 times + 4 reserved balls).

In this embodiment, one of its features is that if a special error occurs during the limited-use high-frequency support mode, the termination criteria for the high-frequency support mode are overwritten (reset), effectively extending the high-frequency support mode. The following explanation, referring to Figure 96, will focus on the differences from the first embodiment regarding the processing required to achieve this function, specifically the processing for switching support modes.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S3501 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S3502 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the determination in step S3502 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, it is determined whether the result of the current game round is a special loss. If the result in step S3503 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3507, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S3507 is negative, the main switching process ends. If the result in step S3507 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3508, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the main switching process ends. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3503, if a positive result is obtained in step S3503, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. At this time, if the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode B flag is erased. The count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 remains unchanged. As a result, the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3505, the continuation count counters in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 are overwritten (reset), and this switching process is terminated. Specifically, the continuation count counter is set to "20". This effectively extends the high-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3501, if a negative result is determined in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3509. In step S3509, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for this game round is a special miss or not. If a negative result is determined in step S3509, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is determined in step S3509, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A to high-frequency support mode A. In the next step S3511, the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S3512, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set, and the switching process ends. Specifically, "20" is set in the continuation count counter. As a result, high-frequency support mode A will continue until 20 game rounds related to the second operating port 92A are executed.

(How to play the game)
Now, let's refer to Figure 97 to explain the game flow. Figure 97 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, consists of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the first operation port 91A, and the special stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the second operation port 92A.

More specifically, the special stage is a temporary stage where the player stays when transitioning from the third normal game state (corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B) or the fourth normal game state (corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode A) to the first normal game state. The maximum number of game rounds that can be played matches the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored in the reserved area Rb for the second operation port. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player moves to the special stage, provided that reserved ball information related to the second operation port 92A is stored. If no jackpot or special miss occurs in this special stage—that is, if all reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A end in normal misses—the player moves from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a support is triggered by launching a game ball to the right route, entry into the second operation port 92A is effectively avoided. Furthermore, since game balls launched to the right route cannot enter the first operation port 91A, it becomes difficult to participate in the lottery based on entry into operation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, while game balls launched to the left route avoid entry into the second operation port 92A, entry into the first operation port 91A is possible. For these reasons, aiming for the left route is more advantageous for the player than aiming for the right route. Note that if a game ball is launched to the right route during the first game state, a warning will be issued prompting the player to return the launch target to the left route.

If a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to play while minimizing investment (reduction of balls) by launching game balls to the right route. During the second normal game state, game balls launched to the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, there is approximately a 1/10 chance of a special miss in the lottery based on entry into the second operation port 92A, but special misses during the second normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, it will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

If a 6R regular jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first or second normal game state, the game transitions to a special game state and then to a third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to reduce their investment (decrease in balls) by launching game balls along the right route.

During the third normal game state, game balls launched via the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, in the lottery based on balls entering the second operation port 92A, there is approximately a 1/10 chance of a special miss. If a special miss occurs during the third normal game state, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode B to high-frequency support mode A, and the termination threshold is set to "20" rounds. In other words, the game transitions from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

If a 6R probability-changing jackpot occurs during the fourth normal game state, the game transitions to the second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. On the other hand, if a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the termination threshold is reset to "20," and the fourth normal game state is extended. In this way, by looping the fourth normal game state, players can continue playing while minimizing the decrease in their tokens (investment).

If the game progresses without any jackpots or special misses during the fourth normal game state, and the number of game rounds played (specifically, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A) reaches the termination threshold (20 rounds), the game will transition to the first normal game state. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage; if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is anything other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on winning in the second operation slot 92A will be conducted for the number of reserved balls. If the lottery based on winning in the second operation slot 92A results in a special miss, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

According to the seventh embodiment described in detail above, if a normal jackpot result occurs in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the third normal game state via a special game state. The third normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second operation port 92A. The third normal game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds played in the third normal game state reaches the termination criterion number (first termination criterion number), the game transitions to the first normal game state which corresponds to low-frequency support mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second operation port 92A. Here, in the lottery based on balls entering the second operation port 92A, a special losing result may occur. If a special losing result occurs in the third normal game state, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state without going through the special game state. The fourth normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode A. Similar to the third normal game state, game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are executed, and this state continues until the number of game rounds reaches the termination criterion (second termination criterion). If the game transitions from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A continue to progress. This makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the reduction of the player's ball count. By diversifying the gameplay in this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

If a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the termination threshold (second termination threshold) is reset. In other words, the fourth normal game state loops. Because this loop bypasses the special game state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop repeats.

The second termination criterion count is set to be the same as the first termination criterion count. Therefore, when transitioning from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state, it is possible to avoid the player effectively losing out due to the timing of a special loss result (the number of game rounds at which the judgment result occurs). This is desirable in achieving diversification of gameplay through the aforementioned loop function and effectively enhancing the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In the fourth normal gameplay state, the probability of a special losing result (1/10) is set to be higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100). This configuration makes it less likely for problems to occur, such as frequent jackpots preventing the aforementioned loop function from working properly.

<Variation 1>
In the seventh embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode B with a limited number of attempts, the system switches to high-frequency support mode A and resets the termination criteria number of attempts. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. In high-frequency support mode B, the system may not conduct a special miss lottery, or it may invalidate special misses (treating them the same as normal misses). In other words, if a special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A, the system may maintain high-frequency support mode A and overwrite (reset) the termination criteria number of attempts, while in high-frequency support mode B, the system may maintain high-frequency support mode B and not overwrite (reset) the termination criteria number of attempts. In such a configuration, if the system transitions to the third normal game state, and a special miss occurs in the remaining reserved turns of the second operation port 92A executed after the third normal game state ends, the system will transition to the fourth normal game state.

<Modified Example 2>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of times the game ends when a special miss occurs (20 times) is greater than the number of times the game ends when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs (10 times), but the game is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the game ends when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs and the number of times the game ends when a special miss occurs may be the same. Alternatively, the number of times the game ends when a special miss occurs may be less than the number of times the game ends when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs.

<Example 3>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of times to terminate when a 6R normal jackpot B (during consecutive wins) occurs (20 times) and the number of times to terminate when a special miss occurs (20 times) are set to be the same, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the number of times to terminate when a special miss occurs may be greater than the number of times to terminate when a 6R normal jackpot B occurs.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of termination criteria set when a special miss occurs is uniformly set to 20 times, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of termination criteria set differs depending on the type of special miss. For example, a first special miss may be provided in which the number of termination criteria set is a first termination criteria number (e.g., "20 times"), and a second special miss may be provided in which the number of termination criteria set is a second termination criteria number (e.g., "40 times").

<Example 5>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A is configured so that it does not result in a special loss, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may also be configured so that it can result in a special loss even in the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A.

<Modification 6>
If a normal jackpot is achieved in a game round related to the second operating port 92A, the number of rounds required to terminate the game may be set to be higher than in cases where a normal jackpot is achieved in a game round related to the first operating port 91A, or where a special miss is achieved in a game round related to the second operating port 92A. With such a configuration, if a normal jackpot is achieved during the aforementioned loop, the player's advantage increases, and an accent can be added to the gameplay during the loop.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, one of its features is that a certain number of big wins trigger a transition to a normal game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode (the fifth normal game state described later), and when the number of game spins performed in this normal game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the support mode by the electric mechanism is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 98. Figure 98 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
In this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 99.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the system was configured such that a special loss could occur based on a lottery drawing that resulted in a win at the activation ports 91 and 92. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that special losses are omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on wins at the first activation port 91 and the second activation port 92. The win/loss table for the activation ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figure 100.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 100, the success/failure tables for the operating port include a success/failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success/failure information group) and a success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability success/failure information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 100(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 100(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losing results (specifically, regular losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration prevents the "special losing" described in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operating ports is divided into a distribution table for the first operating port and a distribution table for the second operating port. The contents of the distribution tables will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 101.

As shown in Figure 101(a), the distribution table for the first operation port has the following distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability), 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability), and 2R probability variation jackpot results (game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, "10 to 19" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to 2R probability variation jackpot results.

As shown in Figure 101(b), the distribution table for the second operation port has two distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, and "10 to 29" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results.

Here, we will provide supplementary explanations for each jackpot, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 102.

If a 6R regular jackpot result occurs, the game transitions to a third regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after transitioning to the third regular game state, if the number of games played during the third regular game state reaches the termination threshold (specifically "40 games"), the game transitions to a first regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and low-frequency support mode. In other words, the third regular game state has a limit on the number of games played. In this embodiment, the counting of games played during the third regular game state is limited to games played based on winning a prize in the second operation port 92A.

If a regular 6R jackpot occurs, the aforementioned ceiling (upper limit) of "300 spins" is set at the end of the special game state. If the number of spins played after the end of the special game state reaches this ceiling, the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A switches to high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (decrease in remaining balls).

If a 6R probability-increasing jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal game state will continue until the next jackpot is achieved.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the aforementioned ceiling (upper limit) of "100 spins" will be set at the end of the special game state. However, even if the number of spins played after the end of the special game state reaches this ceiling, the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A will remain in high-frequency support mode B, i.e., the second normal game state.

In contrast, if a 2R probability-changing jackpot occurs, the game transitions to the 5th normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and supports low-frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. Furthermore, if a 2R probability-changing jackpot occurs, a ceiling (upper limit) of "100 spins" is set at the end of the special game state. If the number of spins played after the end of the special game state reaches this ceiling, the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A switches to high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (decrease in remaining balls).

When a 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the game switches to a high-probability mode, lowering the hurdle to the next jackpot. However, if the number of game rounds increases excessively in this game state (the fifth normal game state), the investment may increase, potentially reducing the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the fifth normal game state prevents such problems by reaching the ceiling early and suppressing additional investment. Furthermore, reaching the ceiling switches to high-frequency support mode A, causing the game to primarily involve game rounds related to the second operation port 92A. When a jackpot is achieved during a game round related to the second operation port 92A, it will not result in a 2R probability variation jackpot (a configuration where a certain amount of payout can be expected), thereby effectively suppressing a decline in player satisfaction. Below, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 103 and 104, the processes for achieving these functions, specifically the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the support mode switching process, will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
As shown in Figure 103, in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode (special game state) was triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S3601 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3602, where the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through gate display unit DS.

In the following step S3603, the high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referenced in the subsequent win/loss lottery for each game round.

Subsequently, in step S3604, the number of games played, which serves as the criterion for determining the ceiling, is set to "100." Then, in step S3605, the game count counter located in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is reset (cleared to 0). In step S3606, the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

Returning to the explanation of step S3601, if a negative result is obtained in step S3601, that is, if the current jackpot is not a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot or not. If a positive result is obtained in step S3607, the processes described in steps S3603 to S3606 are executed, and then this transition process ends.

If a negative result is obtained in step S3607, i.e., if this jackpot is a 6R regular jackpot, then in step S3608, the number of plays limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and in step S3609, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set. After that, in step S3610, the continuation count counter is set to "40," and in the following step S3611, "300" is set as the number of plays that will be used as the criterion for determining the ceiling.

Subsequently, in step S3605, the game count counter is reset, and in step S3606, the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, referring to Figure 104, the process for switching support modes will be explained.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S3701 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S3702 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the determination in step S3702 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the continuation count counters in the various counter areas 434 are updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3704, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S3704 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S3704 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3705, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3701, if a negative result is obtained in step S3701, i.e., if the system is in low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 has reached its upper limit, i.e., the value set in step S3604 or step S3611. If a negative result is obtained in step S3706, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S3706, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3707, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Based on this set high-frequency support mode A flag, in subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS. Furthermore, the opening time when the electric mechanism 93A switches to the open state as a support win occurs corresponds to the time for high-frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3708, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S3709, the continuation count counter is set to "400," and this switching process ends. As a result, the transition will continue in high-frequency support mode A until the number of games played reaches "400" or until a jackpot is hit.

The eighth embodiment described in detail above provides the following excellent effects.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is configured to be fewer (shorter) in the case of a probability-increasing jackpot result (specifically, a jackpot result corresponding to both High-Probability Mode and Low-Frequency Support Mode) compared to the case of a normal jackpot. Since the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in High-Probability Mode compared to Low-Probability Mode, setting a lower upper limit allows the ceiling function to exert its effect effectively. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, in normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, despite being in high-probability mode, the game progresses without a jackpot, resulting in a significant increase in investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to greatly decrease the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, in normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, by lowering the upper limit of the number of spins and transitioning to high-frequency switching mode at an earlier timing to suppress investment, the effects of game diversification (increased attention to the game) can be effectively realized.

If the aforementioned relief function upon reaching the ceiling is overly active, the technical significance of providing a normal game state corresponding to both a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode (diversification of gameplay) may be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the upper limit of the number of attempts in each game state to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of achieving a jackpot, it is possible to suitably combine gameplay diversification with the above-mentioned relief function.

As the number of stored pending information increases, the display time of the changing symbols on the operation display unit (the operation period for game rounds) is shortened. This is desirable for smoother game progression. However, assuming such a configuration, the following inconvenience may arise when applying the above-mentioned rescue function configuration. Specifically, when reaching the ceiling in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, the number of game rounds in that normal game state may progress too quickly, and the benefits of reaching the ceiling may end before the player can fully experience them. This is a concern as it may significantly reduce the player's attention to the rescue function. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, setting the termination criterion number to be greater than the upper limit number can help alleviate the above concern.

The lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A is more favorable to the player than the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A. When the ceiling is reached during normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, not only is investment reduced, but the lottery is also more favorable, providing a double safety net for the player. Furthermore, when a losing streak occurs during normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the expectation of reaching the ceiling increases. This contributes to further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A, the lottery results include a result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode. In the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the lottery results do not include a result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid situations where, while the relief function is active after reaching the ceiling during a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode, a lottery result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is drawn again, effectively negating the benefit of reaching the ceiling (a wasted draw).

<Variation 1>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the ceiling (upper limit) was set differently depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the ceiling (upper limit) to be the same regardless of the type of jackpot.

<Modified Example 2>
It is also possible to set up two types of 2R probability-changing jackpots (so-called hidden jackpots), namely 2R probability-changing jackpot A and 2R probability-changing jackpot B, and to configure the machine so that the ceiling (upper limit) for 2R probability-changing jackpot A is different from the ceiling (upper limit) for 2R probability-changing jackpot B.

<Example 3>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the ceiling (upper limit) is set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), but this may be changed as follows. That is, the ceiling (upper limit) may be set according to the operating port that triggered the jackpot. For example, if a jackpot is triggered by a ball entering the first operating port 91A, a first ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit), and if a jackpot is triggered by a ball entering the second operating port 92A, a second ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit). In this case, if the first ceiling is set lower than the second ceiling, it is possible to suppress the player's investment from becoming excessively large, and if the second ceiling is set lower than the first ceiling, the contrast of the game can be suitably enhanced.

<Modification 4>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the setting of the ceiling (upper limit) is lower when a probability variation jackpot (specifically a 2R probability variation jackpot) occurs than when a normal jackpot (specifically a 6R normal jackpot) occurs, but the system is not limited to this. The setting of the ceiling (upper limit) may be higher when a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs than when a 6R normal jackpot occurs.

<Example 5>
In a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode, when the ceiling is reached, a first termination count is set as the termination criterion count for a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. In a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode, when the ceiling is reached, a second termination count is set as the termination criterion count for a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. It is also possible to specify that the second termination count is less than the first termination count. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the rescue function from becoming a factor that incites gambling.

<Modification 6>
Similar to the first embodiment described above, the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A may be arranged together on a predetermined flow path in the game area PE, and if hold information is stored in both the first operating port hold area Ra and the second operating port hold area Rb, the configuration may be set to prioritize the hold information stored in the second operating port hold area Rb as the target for execution in the game round.

According to the configuration shown in this modified example, even if the ceiling is reached during normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, and the game transitions to normal gameplay in high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, there is no need to change the target of the game balls in order to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration where the rescue function is activated suddenly without going through a special gameplay state, the wasteful consumption of game balls is suppressed, and the satisfaction level with the rescue function can be appropriately improved.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, once the game transitioned to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode, it was configured to maintain the high probability mode until the next big win occurred (a so-called probability variation machine). In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that an upper limit is set on the number of games in which the high probability mode is maintained after transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode (a so-called ST machine).

When the lottery mode switches to high-probability mode, it is assumed that players will play with the expectation of hitting the jackpot early. However, if the game progresses without a jackpot despite this heightened expectation, it can give players the impression that their investment is being wasted. This is a concern, as the game progresses and approaches the upper limit, potentially decreasing the players' motivation to continue playing. This phenomenon is expected to be more pronounced in gaming machines with lower winning probabilities in high-probability mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates measures to address these issues. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The configuration of the game board unit in this embodiment is the same as in the first embodiment described above, and the retention function (retained ball storage area) related to the operation port is the same as in the eighth embodiment described above, so its explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, the configuration is the same as in the eighth embodiment in that the game rounds related to the second operation port 92 are executed with priority over the game rounds related to the first operation port 91.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 100, the success/failure tables for the operating port include a success/failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success/failure information group) and a success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability success/failure information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on winning entries into the operating slots 91 and 92, the win/loss table for the low probability mode (Figure 105(a)) is referenced, and there are two random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7" and "307". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7" and "307" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for the high probability mode (Figure 105(b)) is referenced during the lottery, there are six random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. Furthermore, all random numbers that do not result in a jackpot correspond to losing results (specifically, regular losing results). In other words, the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91 and 92 is configured in such a way that it does not result in the "special losing" outcome described in the first embodiment.

(Distribution table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 106(a), in the distribution table for the operation ports 91 and 92, 10R probability variation jackpot A (high probability special game result) and 10R probability variation jackpot B (high probability special game result) are set as destinations for the game result distribution. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to 10R probability variation jackpot A, and "10 to 29" corresponds to 10R probability variation jackpot B.

If a 10R probability-changing jackpot A is achieved, the game transitions to the 5th normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and supports low-frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. This high-probability mode ends when the number of game spins played after the special game state ends reaches its limit (high-probability limit: 100 spins), and the game switches back to low-probability mode.

If a 10R probability variation jackpot B is achieved, the game transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the special game state ends. This high probability mode ends when the number of game spins played after the special game state ends reaches its upper limit (high probability limit: 100 spins), and the game switches to low probability mode. Similarly, the high frequency support mode ends when the number of game spins played after the special game state ends reaches its upper limit (high support limit: 50 spins). In this embodiment, reaching the high support limit results in the aforementioned ceiling being reached, and the game switches from high frequency support mode B to high frequency support mode A. This high frequency support mode A also has an upper limit on the number of spins it can continue (50 spins in this embodiment), and the game switches to low frequency support mode when the high probability mode ends.

In the first embodiment described above, a difference was established so that the base rate (the ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched) was higher in high-frequency support mode B than in high-frequency support mode A. However, in this embodiment, the difference is established so that the base rate is higher in high-frequency support mode A than in high-frequency support mode B. The specific configuration for generating such a difference will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, with reference to Figure 107.

In low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning support in the support lottery is 1/2. When support is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1," and the opening time is set to "0.1 seconds." Furthermore, the display time for the changing pattern (normal pattern) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "10 to 20 seconds," and the display time for the confirmed pattern is set to "0.5 seconds."

In high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning support in the support lottery is 1/1.1. When support is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1" and the opening time is set to "2 seconds". Furthermore, the display time for the changing pattern (normal pattern) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds" and the display time for the confirmed pattern is set to "0.5 seconds".

In high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning support in the support lottery is 1/2. When support is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 is switched to the open state is set to "2," the opening time is set to "3 seconds," and the interval time between switching to the open state is set to "0.2 seconds." Furthermore, the display time for the changing pattern (normal diagram) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds," and the display time for the confirmed pattern is set to "0.5 seconds."

In general, the base performance increases in the order of Low-Frequency Support Mode < High-Frequency Support Mode B < High-Frequency Support Mode A. In High-Frequency Support Mode B, it is possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode, and in High-Frequency Support Mode A, it is possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls even further than in High-Frequency Support Mode B.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 108, we will explain the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed as part of the normal game state transition process (see step S404 in Figure 23), focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (special game state), first, in step S3801, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to a 10R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S3801 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A is switched to high-frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3803, the high-support continuation count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "50". The high-support continuation count counter is used to define the number of game rounds that will continue in the high-frequency support mode, and is decremented by "1" each time a game round is played during the high-frequency support mode.

After executing the setting process in step S3803, or if a negative result is determined in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, the high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the lottery mode for the draw based on winning into the operating openings 91 and 92 to high-probability mode.

In the following step S3805, the high probability continuation counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "100". The high probability continuation counter is used to define the number of game rounds that will continue in the high probability mode, and it is deducted by "1" each time a game round is played during that high probability mode.

In step S3806, the game count counters located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 are reset (cleared to 0). Then, in step S3807, the various flags for special game states stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and this transition process ends.

Next, referring to Figure 109, we will explain the switching process for the lottery mode and support mode (corresponding to the switching process for the support mode in Figure 39), which is performed as part of the normal game turn control process (step S403 in Figure 23).

(Processing for switching between lottery mode and support mode)
In the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the determination in step S3901 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, the process of updating the high probability continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is executed. Specifically, the value of the high probability continuation count counter is deducted by "1".

In the following step S3903, it is determined whether the value of the high probability continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S3903 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3904, where the high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is erased. This switches the lottery mode for the draw based on winning into the operation openings 91 and 92 from high probability mode to low probability mode.

After executing the process in step S3904, or if a negative determination is made in either step S3901 or S3903, the process proceeds to step S3905. Step S3905 determines whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B. If a positive determination is made in step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3906. Step S3906 executes the update process for the high-frequency support continuation counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. Specifically, the value of the high-frequency support continuation counter is deducted by "1".

In the following step S3907, it is determined whether the value of the high-frequency support continuation counter is "0". If the determination in step S3907 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3908, where the high-frequency support mode flag A or high-frequency support mode B flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is cleared. This switches the support mode of the electric mechanism 93 from high-frequency support mode A or B to low-frequency support mode.

After executing the process in step S3908, or if a negative determination is made in either step S3905 or S3907, the process proceeds to step S3909. In step S3909, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 has reached its upper limit (50 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S3909, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive determination is made in step S3909, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode of the electric mechanism 93 to high-frequency support mode A. Afterward, the process proceeds to step S3911, where the high-support continuation count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to 50, and the switching process ends.

(Changes in the number of balls held as the game progresses)
Next, with reference to Figure 110, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the changes in the number of balls held as the game progresses. Figure 110(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when a 10R probability variation jackpot A occurs, and Figure 110(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when a 10R probability variation jackpot B occurs.

In the example shown in Figure 110(a), at timing tg1, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to a 10R probability variation jackpot A. At timing tg2, when this special game state ends, the lottery mode switches to a high-probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From this point onward, the high-probability mode is maintained until 100 game spins have been played.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode. At timing TG3, when 50 game rounds have been played since the special game state ended, the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A. This accelerates the game's progression and suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the player is in a favorable position, and if the game progresses without a jackpot, the player's position becomes even more favorable.

Then, at the timing of TG4, when the number of game spins performed after the special game state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode, and the lottery mode switches to low-probability mode. As a result, the jackpot probability returns from 1/100 to 1/300.

In the example shown in Figure 110(b), at timing th1, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot B. At timing th2, when this special game state ends, the lottery mode switches to high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From this point onward, the high probability mode is maintained until 100 game spins have been played.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode switches to High-Frequency Support Mode B. At the timing of th3, when 50 game rounds have been played since the special game state ended, the support mode switches from High-Frequency Support Mode B to High-Frequency Support Mode A. This further accelerates the game's progression and suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the player is in a favorable state, and if the game progresses without a jackpot, the player becomes even more favorable.

Then, at the timing of th4, when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode, and the lottery mode switches to low-probability mode.

In this embodiment, after transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, the support mode switches to high-frequency support mode A when the number of game spins reaches 50 without a jackpot result. This increases the frequency of winning in the second operation slot 92. Subsequently, when the number of game spins after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the lottery mode switches to low probability mode, and the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode. With this configuration, the player's advantage during high probability mode is ensured while effectively suppressing monotony in the game.

In gaming machines of the type where the number of game spins in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode is limited (so-called ST machines), as the number of game spins approaches the limit, the likelihood of a jackpot decreases, and the player's anticipation may significantly decline. This is undesirable in terms of increasing the player's interest in the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, reaching the ceiling triggers the entry into high-frequency support mode A, which increases the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92, thereby suppressing investment.

Furthermore, similar to the first embodiment described above, the first and second operation ports 91 and 92 are arranged together in a predetermined flow path within the game area PE, while the game rounds related to the second operation port 92 are executed with priority over the game rounds related to the first operation port 91. By transitioning from a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the opportunities for game rounds related to the second operation port 92 to be executed increase. This significantly increases the player's advantage upon reaching the ceiling, and effectively enhances the level of attention given to the game after reaching the ceiling.

In high-frequency support mode A, when game balls are continuously launched toward the operation port 92, the average number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area (second operation port reserved area Rb) changes to "3.5". In high-frequency support mode B, when game balls are continuously launched toward the operation port 92, the average number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area (second operation port reserved area Rb) changes to "2.5". When the number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port reserved area Rb is "3", the display time of the changing symbols on the operation port display unit D2 is shorter compared to when the number is "2". With this configuration, by transitioning from a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached, it is possible to change the speed of game progression. This further effectively suppresses the monotony of the game.

<Variation 1>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the high-frequency support mode A, which is switched to after the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A ends, is configured to end (switch to low-frequency support mode) in conjunction with the switch to the low-probability mode of the lottery mode, but the embodiment is not limited to this.

The system may also be configured to switch from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode before switching from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. In other words, the system may transition in the following order: Special game state → Normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (5th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A (6th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (5th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (1st normal game state).

Alternatively, the system may be configured to switch from high-probability mode to low-probability mode, and then switch from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode. In other words, the system may transition in the following order: Special game state → Normal game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (5th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A (6th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to both low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A (4th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to both low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (1st normal game state).

<Modified Example 2>
In the ninth embodiment described above, it is also possible to provide 10R probability variation jackpots A1 and A2 as 10R probability variation jackpots A, with a ceiling set to 50 spins when 10R probability variation jackpot A1 occurs and a ceiling set to 20 spins when 10R probability variation jackpot A2 occurs. With such a configuration, when 10R probability variation jackpot A occurs, the timing of the upgrade (the timing of tg3 described above) can be changed depending on the type, thereby suitably realizing diversification of the game.

<Example 3>
In the ninth embodiment described above, 10R probability variation jackpots B1 and B2 are provided as 10R probability variation jackpots B. When 10R probability variation jackpot B1 occurs, the ceiling is set to 50 times and the number of continuations of high-frequency support mode B is set to 50 times. When 10R probability variation jackpot B2 occurs, the ceiling is set to 20 times and the number of continuations of high-frequency support mode B is set to 20 times. With such a configuration, when 10R probability variation jackpot B occurs, the timing of the upgrade (the timing of th3 described above) can be changed depending on the type, thereby diversifying the gameplay.

<Modification 4>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and low frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) after the end of a special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A is the same as the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state). However, the embodiment is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the number of games in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode (5th normal game state) after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A ends is greater than the number of games in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (6th normal game state).

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that the number of games played after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A ends in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and low frequency support mode (5th normal game state) is less than the number of games played in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (6th normal game state).

<Example 5>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (second normal game state) after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot B ends is the same as the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state). However, the embodiment is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the number of times a player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (second normal game state) after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot B ends is greater than the number of times a player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state).

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that the number of games played after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A ends in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (second normal game state) is less than the number of games played in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state).

<Modification 6>
In the ninth embodiment described above, a difference was made so that the base frequency of high-frequency support mode A is higher than that of high-frequency support mode B. However, this can be changed so that the base frequency of high-frequency support mode B is higher than that of high-frequency support mode A.

<Example 7>
When transitioning from high-frequency support modes A and B to high-frequency support mode A, it is optional whether or not to go through low-frequency support mode (game rounds compatible with low-frequency support mode).

<Difference 8>
In the ninth embodiment described above, when the result of a 10R probability variation jackpot is A, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A after 50 game spins have been performed in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode. When the number of game spins after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, the number of game spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is set to be the same as the number of game spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. This can be changed so that the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is greater than the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is less than the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

Furthermore, if the result of a 10R probability variation jackpot is B, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A after 50 spins in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. The game then transitions to a normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode when the number of spins after the special game state ends reaches 100. In other words, the number of spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is set to be equal to the number of spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. This can be modified so that the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is greater than the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or so that the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is less than the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Difference 9>
In the ninth embodiment described above, when the number of game spins performed after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot result reaches 100 spins, the lottery mode is configured to become the low probability mode and the support mode to become the low frequency support mode. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, it is also possible to configure the system so that the high frequency support mode A continues even after transitioning to the low probability mode. According to the configuration shown in this modified example, after the end of the special game state, the system transitions in the following order: normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B → normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A → normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode A → normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the rapid decrease in attention to the game when transitioning from high probability mode to low probability mode.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A, triggered by a special miss result, the value of the continuation counter that defines the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state is set (overwritten) to "400". This configuration allows for a swift transition from the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, without going through the first normal game state which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to low-frequency support mode, without being triggered by other game states such as the first normal game state. In other words, the configuration allows for a swift extension of the fourth normal game state.

One of the features of this embodiment is the improved behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to a low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, triggered by a special miss result. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, with reference to Figure 111.

As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 111(a), the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, and green in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling. Therefore, by checking the background color of the display screen 95a, the player can easily determine whether the current high-frequency support mode A was triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling. In the following description, high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1," and high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2." Incidentally, the support modes of high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are the same, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed to the number of game balls launched) is the same for both, as in the first embodiment.

Next, referring to the schematic diagrams in Figures 111(b) to (c), we will provide a supplementary explanation of the notification flow for the start of high-frequency support mode A.

In game rounds where a special miss occurs and the game transitions to High Frequency Support Mode A1, as shown in Figure 111(b), the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game round is displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a. Specifically, after a reach display, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed (confirmed) on one of the active lines. Then, at the start of the next game round, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in High Frequency Support Mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in game rounds where the game transitions to High-Frequency Support Mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in Figure 111(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling may be displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a during that game round. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol will be displayed (confirmed) on any of the active lines via the reach display. In contrast, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss will be displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. In this case, the background color of the display screen 95a will also remain blue.

Furthermore, in the first normal game state, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, a variable display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds) is set, similar to the game rounds corresponding to the jackpot result. In contrast, in the fourth normal game state, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, a variable display time that does not correspond to the reach display is set, referring to the variable display time table shown in Figure 27(a2).

Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 112, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the game flow when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result.

At timing ti1, a game round corresponding to a normal losing result begins, and at timing ti2, a game round corresponding to a special losing result begins. At timing ti3, when the game round corresponding to the special losing result ends, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A1. Accordingly, the continuation count counter is set to "40".

Subsequently, with each subsequent game round, the value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" and the value of the game round counter increases by "1" (see, for example, the timing of ti4). At the timing of ti5 during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special miss result, the game round that reaches the ceiling has begun. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 112, the ceiling is reached while the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special miss result is still ongoing, that is, before the value of the continuation count counter reaches "0". This game round corresponds to a normal miss result that does not correspond to the reach display, and thanks to the benefits of the high-frequency support mode, the number of reserved balls related to the operation ports 91 and 92 also remains near the upper limit. Therefore, the display time of the changing symbols in the operation port display unit and the display time of the changing symbols in the symbol display device are about 3 to 5 seconds due to the time reduction function, and the game round that reaches the ceiling also progresses quickly.

In the game round in which the ceiling is reached, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed on the display screen 95a at the timing of the confirmation display, clearly indicating to the player that the ceiling has been reached. Then, at the timing of ti6, when the game round ends, the value of the continuation count counter is overwritten to "400," and the game transitions from the 4th normal game state corresponding to the special miss result to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the ceiling reach, without passing through any other game states. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to green.

In this high-frequency support mode A, the electric mechanism 93 will frequently switch to the open state. At the timing of ti6, when the game round ending after reaching the ceiling, the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state. However, the electric mechanism 93 remains open until the opening time set at the time of switching to the open state has elapsed, and the opening time is not forcibly shortened. In other words, even if the trigger for the fourth normal game state switches from a special miss result to reaching the ceiling, as described above, the behavior of the electric mechanism 93 will not be disrupted. The prize-winning support in this fourth normal game state will end when the value of the continuation count counter reaches "0" or when a jackpot result occurs before that.

<Variation 1>
In the tenth embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, a configuration is used in combination to indicate that the ceiling has been reached by stopping and displaying a symbol combination indicating the ceiling has been reached (a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol) in the game round in which the ceiling is reached, and a configuration is used in combination to indicate that the ceiling has been reached by changing the background color of the display screen 95a from the game round following the game round in which the ceiling has been reached. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The specific configuration for indicating that the ceiling has been reached is arbitrary, and it is possible to omit one of the two configurations described above. In other words, in the game round in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, it is possible to omit the function of indicating that the ceiling has been reached by a symbol combination. Furthermore, it is possible to unify the background color of the display screen 95a between the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result and the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modified Example 2>
In the tenth embodiment described above, the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result ("20" or "40") is set to be less than the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling ("400"), but it is not limited to this. The number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result may be more than the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, or the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result may be set to be the same as the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Example 3>
If the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, it is also possible to configure the system to forcibly switch the electric mechanism 93 to the closed state.

<Embodiment 11>
If a special losing result occurs during high-frequency support mode, and that result is invalidated or otherwise prevented from enjoying its benefits, it can give the player the impression that the special losing result was a wasted draw. This is undesirable as it can reduce the player's motivation to play. In particular, if such an event occurs near the end of high-frequency support mode and is noticed by the player, the above concerns become even greater. One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates measures to address these circumstances. The following will explain these measures, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The symbols displayed as stop (confirmed) on the operation port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display section D) are provided to be unique to each lottery result based on winning into the operation ports 91 and 92. In other words, if the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a 6R normal jackpot result, the symbols corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, the symbols corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a special loss result A, the symbols corresponding to special loss result A are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a special loss result B, the symbols corresponding to special loss result B are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a normal loss result, the symbols corresponding to the normal loss result are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2 (see Figure 113(a)).

As detailed above, the display units D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit 99 are configured so that the combination of symbols displayed at stop does not differ depending on the game state. In contrast, the combination of symbols displayed at stop on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) that corresponds to a special losing result differs depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 113(b) and (c), if a special losing result occurs during normal gameplay in low-frequency support mode (first normal gameplay state), the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) will stop displaying the symbol combinations corresponding to the special losing result: "3," "1," and "4." Conversely, if a special losing result occurs during normal gameplay in high-frequency support mode (second to fourth normal gameplay states), the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) will stop displaying symbol combinations other than those mentioned above, specifically, symbol combinations corresponding to normal losing results.

Next, a supplementary explanation of the variable display time table for the operating port in this embodiment will be given with reference to Figures 114 and 115. Figure 114 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table corresponding to a normal failure result, and Figure 115 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table corresponding to a special failure result.

The variable display time table corresponding to normal miss results is the same as in the first embodiment. Specifically, Figure 114(a1) illustrates the variable display time when a complete miss occurs in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the variable display time is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the variable display time is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the first normal game state, the confirmed display time of the symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the confirmed display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 114(a2) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the display time for the variation is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the fourth normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the fourth normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the first normal game state.

Figure 114(a3) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In the second normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 114(a4) illustrates the display time for the variation when a complete miss occurs in the third normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored reserve information is "0", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the third normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the second normal game state. In the third normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Incidentally, in all four normal game states (1st to 4th), during game rounds where a losing reach display (losing reach) occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. This display time is within the same range as the display time set for game rounds corresponding to jackpot results (see Figure 28). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for jackpot results, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for losing results. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

In this embodiment as well, in the game rounds in which the ceiling is reached, a variable display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20 to 30 seconds) will be set.

Next, we will explain the variable display time table corresponding to special miss results. Figure 115(a1) shows an example of the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. When a special miss occurs in the first normal game state, the variable display time will be set to "20 to 30 seconds," regardless of the number of stored hold information. This variable display time is within the same range as the variable display time set for the game round corresponding to the jackpot result.

Figure 115(a2) illustrates the display time for special misses in the fourth normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored reserve information is "0" or "1", the display time for special misses is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "2", the display time for special misses is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "3" to "8", the display time for special misses is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for special misses in the fourth normal game state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114(a2)). Note that in the fourth normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 115(a3) illustrates the display time for special misses in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored hold information is "0", the display time for special misses is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored hold information is "1" to "8", the display time for special misses is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for special misses in the second normal game state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114(a3)). Note that in the second normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 115(a4) illustrates the display time for special misses in the third normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored hold information is "0", the display time for special misses is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored hold information is "1" to "8", the display time for special misses is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for special misses in the third normal game state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114(a4)). Note that in the third normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Furthermore, in the first normal game state, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, the display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds) is set, similar to the game rounds corresponding to the jackpot result. In contrast, in the second to fourth normal game states when the ceiling is reached during a game round, the display time that does not correspond to the reach display is set by referring to the display time table shown in Figures 114(a2) and 115(a2).

Next, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 116, the display patterns of the changing symbols in each game round will be explained.

As shown in Figure 116(a), in a game round resulting in a normal loss (complete loss) that does not correspond to a reach display, the variable display of each symbol row shown stopped on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins at the start of the game round. Afterward, without transitioning to a reach display, the symbols stop in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal loss result that does not correspond to a reach display is displayed (confirmed display). This variable display pattern is the same in the first to fourth normal game states.

As shown in Figure 116(b), in a normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (first normal game state), during a game round resulting in a special loss, the display of each symbol row stopped on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins to change at the start of the game round. Afterward, the symbols stop in the order of upper row → lower row, transitioning to a reach display. After transitioning to the reach display, the middle symbol row stops so that the symbol combination corresponding to the special loss result (the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is displayed (confirmed display). This symbol combination clearly indicates to the player that a special loss result has occurred.

As shown in Figure 116(c), in normal gameplay states (second normal gameplay state to fourth normal gameplay state) compatible with high-frequency support mode, during gameplay rounds resulting in a special losing outcome, the display of each symbol row stopped on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins to change at the start of the game round. Afterward, without transitioning to a reach display, the symbols stop in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and the symbol combination corresponding to a normal losing outcome that does not support a reach display is displayed (confirmed display). In other words, it is difficult to determine from the symbol combination whether or not the current game round resulted in a special losing outcome.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if the game progresses without a jackpot, a special miss result or reaching the ceiling can lead to a transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. Transitioning to the fourth normal game state increases the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92A, thereby suppressing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in enhancing the integrity of the game. However, if a special miss result occurs in a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, such as the fourth normal game state, that special miss result becomes invalid and is treated the same as a normal miss result. While this is desirable in suppressing the increase in gambling tendencies, there is concern that if the player becomes aware of the special miss result, it may give the player the impression that they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor in reducing the desire to play. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, if a special losing result occurs during the first normal game state, the symbol combination indicating that special losing result is displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Conversely, if a special losing result occurs during the fourth normal game state (the same applies to the second and third normal game states), the same symbol combination as in the case of a normal losing result is displayed. With this configuration, even if a special losing result occurs during the fourth normal game state (the same applies to the second and third normal game states), it can be made less conspicuous. This suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the display time for the spin will be the same as the display time for the reach indicator. Conversely, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, such as the fourth normal technique state, the display time for the spin will be the same as the display time for the non-reach indicator. In this way, even when a special miss occurs during a high-frequency support mode, the game round can be made less conspicuous, thereby further enhancing the above effect. In particular, when a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, such as the fourth normal technique state, the same display time table as when a normal miss (non-reach indicator) occurs is referenced, and the display time is set in a common manner. This allows the game round with the special miss to be blended in with the game round with the normal miss, thereby effectively enhancing the above effect.

<Variation 1>
In the 11th embodiment described above, the symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop (confirm display) when a special miss result A occurs and the symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop (confirm display) when a special miss result B occurs are unified, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop when a special miss result A occurs (the symbol combination corresponding to special miss result A) and the symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop when a special miss result B occurs (the symbol combination corresponding to special miss result B) may be different.

Furthermore, if separate symbol combinations are provided for special miss result A and special miss result B, and the type of special miss result can be identified from the symbol combination, then, when a relatively advantageous special miss result B occurs, the symbol combinations other than those corresponding to special miss result B (symbol combinations corresponding to normal miss results) may be stopped to conceal the fact that it is special miss result B. Conversely, when a relatively less advantageous special miss result A occurs, the symbol combinations corresponding to special miss result A may be stopped to clearly indicate that it is special miss result A. Alternatively, when a relatively advantageous special miss result B occurs, the symbol combinations corresponding to special miss result B may be stopped to clearly indicate that it is special miss result B. Conversely, when a relatively less advantageous special miss result A occurs, the symbol combinations other than those corresponding to special miss result A (symbol combinations corresponding to normal miss results) may be stopped to conceal the fact that it is special miss result A.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 11th embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) compatible with high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 is configured to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the normal miss. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. If a special miss occurs during a normal game state (third normal game state to fourth normal game state) compatible with high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 is configured to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the normal miss. On the other hand, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state (fourth normal game state) compatible with high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A to which the player transitions as a result of a special miss, the symbol display device 95 is configured to stop and display the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols corresponding to the special miss.

<Example 3>
If the special miss result is not explicitly shown each time, the discrepancy between the probability of the special miss result perceived by the player and the actual probability of the special miss result will become large. This is a concern as it may give players a negative impression, such as "bad luck with the game machine" or "bad luck." In light of this, it is preferable to configure the symbol display device 95 to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result depending on the number of remaining rounds in the fourth normal game state. Specifically, it is preferable to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result when the number of remaining rounds is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, while not stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result when the number of remaining rounds is less than the predetermined number.

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to configure the system to first determine whether the reserved ball information stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 corresponds to a special miss result before the decision on whether the reserved ball information corresponds to a special miss result, and to execute a pre-announcement effect (a so-called pre-read effect) according to the result of this first determination. In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the pre-announcement effect during normal gameplay in high-frequency support mode is likely to cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, in normal gameplay in high-frequency support mode, it is desirable to restrict at least one of the above-mentioned first determination and pre-announcement effect to refrain from performing the pre-announcement effect.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
As shown in the first embodiment above, in a configuration where an upper limit (termination threshold number of plays) is set for the fourth normal game state to which the player transitions upon reaching the ceiling, there is a possibility that the fourth normal game state may end without a jackpot being achieved during that state. In a configuration where the value of the game count counter that affects the ceiling function is reset (cleared to 0) only upon a jackpot, that is, in a configuration where the ceiling is not reset when the above event (hereinafter also referred to as a "runaway") occurs, the ceiling will not be reset until the next jackpot occurs, so there is a possibility that the investment will increase significantly after a runaway. Here, the gaming machine is connected to a data display device installed in the gaming hall, and it is common for the number of plays after a jackpot to be displayed on the data display device, and the administrator of the gaming hall can refer to this data display device to determine whether or not the ceiling has not been reached. However, in gaming halls, the power to the gaming machine and data display device is turned OFF after the end of business hours and turned ON in the morning of the next business day. Such a power operation (OFF → ON) resets the number of games played (clears to 0), making it difficult to determine whether the ceiling has not been reached after the power operation. This difficulty in understanding the state of the gaming machine is expected to reduce the convenience for administrators. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into consideration. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 117.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S9001, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the result in step S9001 is positive, the process proceeds to step S9002. In step S9002, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the result in step S9002 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the result in step S9002 is positive, the process proceeds to step S9003. In step S9003, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9004, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S9004 is negative, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S9004, the process proceeds to step S9005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. When the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9001, if a negative result is obtained in step S9001, proceed to step S9006. In step S9006, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive result is obtained in step S9006, proceed to step S9007. In step S9007, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative result is obtained in step S9007, proceed to step S9008. In step S9008, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9009, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative result is obtained in step S1609, this switching process ends immediately.

If a positive result is obtained in step S9009, the process proceeds to step S9015. In step S9015, it is determined whether the current High-Frequency Support Mode A was triggered by reaching the ceiling. If a negative result is obtained in step S9015, the High-Frequency Support Mode flag (High-Frequency Support Mode A flag) and the play limit flag are cleared in step S9005, and this switching process ends. In other words, when the number of plays performed during High-Frequency Support Mode A reaches the upper limit, the process switches to Low-Frequency Support Mode.

On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S9015, the process proceeds to step S9016. In step S9016, a special notification preparation flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Afterward, in step S9005, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the count limit flag are cleared, and this switching process ends. In other words, when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the process switches to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9006, if a negative determination is made in step S9006, that is, if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S9010. In step S9010, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S9010, the process proceeds to step S9011. In step S9011, it is determined whether or not the current game count corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative determination is made in step S9011, and this switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S9011 (it corresponds to a special miss) or if a positive determination is made in step S9010 (the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step S9012. In step S9012, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in the following step S9013, the game count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S9014, where the setting process for the continuation count counter is executed, and then the main switching process is terminated.

In the continuation counter setting process, if the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during the current game round, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 400 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 20 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 40 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A.

Returning to the explanation of step S9007, if the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S9014, and this switching process ends. This extends high-frequency support mode A so that it continues until 400 game plays have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of game plays for which high-frequency support mode A continues is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through other normal game states.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 118, the main processing performed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be described. As shown in the first embodiment, the main processing is initiated when the power is turned on, and after executing this main processing, the system transitions to the normal processing described above (see Figure 23).

(Main processing)
In the main processing, first, in step S9101, a startup process is performed in conjunction with power-on. Specifically, the system waits for approximately 500 msec, for example, to allow the secondary control board (dispensing control device 242, etc.) to become operational.

In the following step S9102, it is determined whether 1 second (the permission/denial period) has elapsed since the startup process in step S9101. If 1 second has not elapsed, the process in step S9102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times the process in step S9102 is executed. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S9102 to the execution of the process in step S9102 again is 0.1 msec, then when the count value reaches 10000, it is determined that 1 second has elapsed since the startup process in step S9101. The specific configuration for measuring time is arbitrary; for example, a real-time clock may be used to measure time. If it is determined in step S9102 that 1 second has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S9103.

In step S9103, access to RAM 404 is permitted. Then, in step S9104, it is determined whether the reset switch 166 on the power supply/launch control device 243 is ON. In the following step S9105, it is determined whether a power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of RAM 404. Furthermore, in step S9106, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in the following step S9107, it is determined whether this RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was cut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value at the working area address of RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data by checking whether the keyword written to a predetermined area of RAM 404 is correctly stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, when initializing RAM data upon power-on, such as at the start of a hall's operation, the reset switch 166 is pressed while the power is turned on. If the reset switch 166 is pressed (ON), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. Similarly, if no power-off information is set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is detected by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process also proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. In step S9108, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S9109, the initialization process of RAM 404 is executed. In the process of step S9108, the values of the game count counter and continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). Also, if a special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas, that special notification preparation flag is erased.

On the other hand, if the reset switch 166 is not pressed, and provided that the power outage flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area is cleared in step S9115.

After executing the process in step S9115 or step S9109, the process proceeds to step S9110. In step S9110, it is determined whether the special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the special notification preparation flag is not stored, the initial command setting process is executed in step S9111 to output an initial command to the payout control device 242. Then, in step S9112, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal operation. The MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is functioning correctly by receiving the initial command from the main control device 162.

If a positive result is obtained in step S9110, the process proceeds to step S9113. In step S9113, the special notification start process is executed. In the following step S2514, the special notification preparation flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are cleared. After that, the processes in steps S2511 and S2512 are executed, and the process transitions to normal processing. In the special notification start process of step S9113, the special notification start command is set. This special notification start command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (see Figure 23). The notification/effect control device 140 starts the special notification based on the receipt of this special notification start command.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 119(a), the special notification processing performed by the MPU 442 of the notification and effect control device 140 will be explained. The special notification processing is a process performed by the MPU 442 as part of the periodic processing.

(Special notification processing)
In the special notification process, first, in step S9201, it is determined whether or not a special notification is currently being executed. If the determination in step S9201 is negative, then in step S9202, it is determined whether or not the special notification start command has been received from the main control device 162. If the determination in step S9202 is negative, the special notification process ends there. If the determination in step S9202 is positive, the process proceeds to step S9203, where the special notification start process is executed, and then the special notification process ends. In the special notification start process in step S9203, as shown in Figure 119(b) → Figure 119(c), the annular illuminated section 26 of the front door frame 14 is fully illuminated. The hall manager of the amusement hall can easily determine whether or not the amusement machine is in the state after reaching the ceiling based on the presence or absence of illumination of the annular illuminated section 26.

Returning to the explanation of step S9201, if a positive result is obtained in step S9201, that is, if the special notification is being executed, then the process for canceling the special notification is executed in steps S9204 to S9206. Here, first referring to the flowchart in Figure 120, the special notification control process executed as part of the normal processing (see Figure 23) by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be explained.

(Special notification control processing)
In the special notification control process, first, in step S9301, it is determined whether the reset switch 166 is ON or OFF. If the determination in step S9301 is negative, the special notification control process is terminated. If the determination in step S9301 is positive, the special notification cancellation process is executed in step S9302. In the special notification cancellation process, a special notification cancellation command is set. This special notification cancellation command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (see Figure 23). In the following step S9302, the game count counters in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special notification process in Figure 119(a), step S9204 determines whether or not a special notification cancellation command has been received from the main control unit 162. If the determination in step S9204 is positive, the special notification cancellation process is executed in step S9205. In the special notification cancellation process, the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 described above is turned off, as shown in Figure 119(c) → Figure 119(b).

If a negative result is obtained in step S9204, the process proceeds to step S9206 to determine whether the performance button 35 located on the front door frame 14 was operated (whether it was turned ON or not). If a negative result is obtained in step S9206, this special notification process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S9206, the special notification cancellation process in step S9205 is executed, and then this special notification process ends.

As detailed above, if the reset switch 166 is operated (turned ON) while the special notification is active, the game count counter will be reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification will be canceled. Conversely, if the performance button 35 is operated (turned ON) while the special notification is active, the game count counter will not be reset (cleared to 0), and only the special notification will be canceled.

Furthermore, if the game continues without the special notification being canceled, the lighting effects in the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 are prioritized as the game progresses. However, if the game stops, the lighting pattern of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 returns to the pattern corresponding to the special notification (fully lit). Also, if an action-based effect is performed during gameplay, the player may operate the effect button 35. However, even if the effect button 35 is operated while the lighting effects associated with game progress are prioritized, the special notification will not be canceled; the temporarily suspended state will be maintained.

If the number of game spins (total spins) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A). In the fourth normal game state, winnings into the operating slots 91 and 92 occur frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in terms of providing relief to players. Here, the fourth normal game state transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling has an end-criteria spin count (400 spins), and even if the ceiling is reached, there is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without resulting in a jackpot (ceiling rush). This is desirable in order to avoid the benefit of reaching the ceiling becoming excessive and becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling tendencies. However, after a ceiling rush, the number of game spins stored by the game spin counter is not reset, making it impossible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power switch is turned OFF → ON without operating the reset switch 166 while the machine is still in the state after exceeding the ceiling limit, a special notification is triggered. This allows the administrator of the gaming hall to determine whether or not the machine is in the state after exceeding the ceiling limit. Supporting the determination of the state after exceeding the ceiling limit by powering on the machine in this way is desirable for improving the administrator's convenience.

If either the performance button 35 or the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification described above is active, the special notification will be canceled. Conversely, if the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is active, the number of game plays stored in the game play counter will be reset. With this configuration, the manager of the gaming hall can easily select how to respond to a gaming machine with the special notification active, depending on the operating style of the gaming hall. In other words, they can choose to either cancel only the special notification and leave the machine in a state where the ceiling has been exceeded, or reset the ceiling. This configuration allows the above effects to be achieved even more effectively.

The "first operating means," the performance button 35, is located on the front side of the gaming machine, and the "second operating means," the reset switch 166, is located on the rear side of the gaming machine. This arrangement improves convenience for the administrator while effectively avoiding the inconvenience of the player resetting the execution count.

<Variation 1>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the operating means for canceling the special notification (performance button 35) is located on the front side of the gaming machine (specifically, the front door frame 14), and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling (reset switch 166) is located on the rear side of the gaming machine (specifically, the main control device 162). However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The operating means for canceling the special notification and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling may both be located on the rear side of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the operating means for canceling special notifications and resetting the ceiling only needs to be located in a position where the player cannot operate it, for example, in a position accessible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door frame 14 or inner frame 13. It is not necessarily required that these be located on the main control device 162.

<Modified Example 2>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the performance button 35 is configured to function as both an operating means for operation-dependent performances and an operating means for canceling special notifications, but the invention is not limited to this configuration. An operating means for canceling special notifications may be provided separately from the performance button 35.

<Example 3>
If the game is played while the special notification is not canceled, it is also possible to configure the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 to prevent the light-up effects associated with the game from being executed.

<Modification 4>
As a special notification, a first special notification using the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and a second special notification using the pattern display device 95 (for example, a counter displaying the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached, and when the ceiling is not reached, the counter is fixed to a specific value such as "9999" or "0000") are executed in parallel. It is also possible to configure the system so that if the performance button 35 or reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the first special notification is canceled while the second special notification continues.

<Example 5>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the special notification is canceled if the performance button 35 is operated while the special notification is being executed, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that when the performance button 35 is operated, the mode of the special notification is switched from a mode with relatively high discernibility (a mode that is easily noticeable) to a mode with relatively low discernibility (a mode that is not easily noticeable). In such a configuration, the device that executes the special notification may be changed from the ring-shaped illuminated unit 26 to another device (for example, the pattern display device 95 or a lamp unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine).

<Modification 6>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, a special notification is performed by fully illuminating the annular illuminated section 26 of the front door frame 14, but the specific form of the special notification is arbitrary. It is sufficient that it is possible to distinguish between gaming machines that are performing the special notification and those that are not. For example, the special notification may be performed by setting the annular illuminated section 26 to a special light emission pattern. It is also possible to perform the special notification on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, or by using sound output from the speaker section 29.

<Example 7>
In amusement halls, instead of individually turning the power on and off for each gaming machine, the power is turned on and off collectively for each island of machines to shorten working time. Therefore, if the power is turned off and then on (restarted) while a special notification is in effect, the following effect can be expected. In other words, if the operation of the above-mentioned performance button 35 or reset switch 166 is not required to cancel the special notification, it becomes unnecessary to cancel the notification individually for each gaming machine, thus contributing to improved work efficiency.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system to temporarily restrict or deactivate the special notification when a ball enters the ball entry points 91, 92, etc., or when a game round begins, while the special notification is being activated.

<Difference 8>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the performance button 35 is connected to the notification and performance control device 140, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to connect the performance button 35 to the main control device 162.

<13th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the behavior when reaching the ceiling and hitting the jackpot coincide is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 121. Figure 121 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (features) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
In this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 122.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the system was configured such that a special loss could occur based on a lottery drawing that resulted in a win at the activation ports 91 and 92. However, in this embodiment, the special loss is omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on wins at the first activation port 91 and the second activation port 92, which is a difference in configuration from the first embodiment. The win/loss table for the activation ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figure 123.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 123, the success/failure tables for the operating port include a success/failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success/failure information group) and a success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability success/failure information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 123(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 123(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losing results (specifically, regular losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration prevents the "special losing" described in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operating ports is divided into a distribution table for the first operating port and a distribution table for the second operating port. The contents of the distribution tables will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 124.

As shown in Figure 124(a), the distribution table for the first operation port has the following distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability), 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability), and 2R probability variation jackpot results (game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, "10 to 19" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to 2R probability variation jackpot results.

As shown in Figure 124(b), the distribution table for the second operation port has two distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, and "10 to 29" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results.

Here, we will provide supplementary explanations for each jackpot, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 125.

If a 6R regular jackpot result occurs, the game transitions to a third regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after transitioning to the third regular game state, if the number of games played during the third regular game state reaches the termination threshold (specifically "40 games"), the game transitions to a first regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and low-frequency support mode. In other words, the third regular game state has a limit on the number of games played. In this embodiment, the counting of games played during the third regular game state is limited to games played based on winning a prize in the second operation port 92A.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a second normal game state, which corresponds to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal game state continues until the next jackpot is achieved. In contrast, if a 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a fifth normal game state, which corresponds to high probability mode and low-frequency support mode, after the special game state ends.

Here, referring to Figure 126, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the gameplay flow when reaching the ceiling and hitting a jackpot simultaneously.

In the example shown in Figure 126(a), the game progresses without a jackpot during the first normal game, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. After the special game state ends, the number of game spins reaches the upper limit (ceiling). A 6R normal jackpot occurs at this 400th spin (the spin at which the ceiling is reached). Instead of transitioning to the fourth normal game state (corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A) triggered by reaching the ceiling, the game transitions to the special game state. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state (corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B).

In the example shown in Figure 126(b), the game progresses without a jackpot during the first normal game, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. After the special game state ends, the number of game spins reaches the upper limit (ceiling). At this spin (400th spin), a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved. Instead of transitioning to the fourth normal game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode A) triggered by reaching the ceiling, the game transitions to the special game state. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode B).

In the example shown in Figure 126(c), the game progresses without a jackpot during the first normal game, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. After the special game state ends, the number of game spins reaches the upper limit (ceiling). At this spin (400th spin), a 2R probability-changing jackpot is achieved. Instead of transitioning to the fourth normal game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode A) triggered by reaching the ceiling, the game transitions to the special game state. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the fifth normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode).

As detailed above, if reaching the ceiling coincides with a 6R regular jackpot result, a 6R probability variation jackpot result, or a 2R probability variation jackpot result, the player will not receive the benefit of reaching the ceiling. In such a configuration, there is concern that the player's satisfaction will be significantly reduced because the benefit of reaching the ceiling is negated. This embodiment incorporates measures to address this issue. Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 127(a), the first variation start process, executed as part of the variation display control process (see Figure 41) in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, will be described. The first variation start process is a process for starting the performance for the game round based on the receipt of a variation start command from the main control device 162, and sets the variation display mode of the symbols, such as a reach display, as the performance for the game round.

(First variation start process)
In the first variation start process, step S9401 first reads the variation start command received, and identifies information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time from the command. Also, as already explained, when a variation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent. In step S9401, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, is identified from the identified information. Then, in step S9401, information on whether a jackpot was won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information on whether a special miss occurred, information on the type of special miss if a special miss occurred, information on whether a reach occurred if neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurred, information on whether the ceiling was reached, and information on the variation display time are obtained, and the obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S9402, based on the information obtained in step S9401, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the result of the current game round is a jackpot result (either a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result), in the following step S9411, it is determined whether the current game round will result in reaching the ceiling. If the determination in step S9411 is negative, the following step S9403 executes the jackpot performance setting process. The jackpot performance setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and the valid lines for stopping and displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and their address information. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following combinations of symbols are defined as corresponding to a jackpot: "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination (see, for example, Figure 45(a)).

As already explained, when a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the process of determining the jackpot display pattern, the system retrieves the reach display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 and determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the received variation start command and variation display time and type command. Furthermore, the system executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a positive result is obtained in step S9411, that is, if the current game round is one in which the ceiling is reached and corresponds to a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9412. In step S9412, the overlapping event setting process is executed. Details of this overlapping event setting process will be described later.

If step S9402 determines that it is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9404. Step S9404 determines whether or not the ceiling will be reached in this game round. If the ceiling is reached, a positive determination is made in step S9404, and the process proceeds to step S9407. Step S9407 executes the ceiling reach animation setting process. The ceiling reach animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed for the ceiling reach and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for the ceiling reach.

In the process of determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling that is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of symbols "1," "3," and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see Figure 45(b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variation display pattern for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The display pattern for either a normal reach display or a super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is obtained in step S9404, the process proceeds to step S9406. In step S9406, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive result is obtained in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the special miss animation setting process is executed. The special miss animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a special miss and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for the special miss.

In the process for determining the stop result for special misses, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, similar to when the ceiling is reached, the combination of symbols "1", "3", and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (see Figure 45(b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is reported via a reach display. The process for determining the variation display pattern for special misses retrieves the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443. It then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. Furthermore, it executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is determined in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9408 to execute the animation setting process for a complete miss. In the animation setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the animation setting process for a reach is executed; if a reach does not occur, the animation setting process for a non-reach is executed.

The process for setting up the effects for triggering a reach is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for a complete miss that corresponds to a reach and the effective lines for which that combination will be stopped and displayed; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss that corresponds to a reach.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss after reaching a winning combination, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a big win, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for a complete miss after a reach, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The processing for setting up the effects when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach) and the valid lines for which that combination of symbols will be displayed as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach).

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss (no reach), the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a jackpot, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the display pattern for a complete miss (no reach), the display pattern table for misses (no reach) stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the display pattern corresponding to the game result in the display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, or S9412, the process proceeds to step S9409. In step S9409, commands containing the stop result and presentation pattern information determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412 are output to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 then controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S9409, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S9410, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 127(b), the duplicate setting process in step S9412 will be explained. In the duplicate setting process, step S9501 determines whether the current jackpot result is a 2R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result. If the determination in step S9501 is positive, step S9502 executes the normal setting process. The normal setting process is the same as the jackpot performance setting process shown in step S9403 above.

In other words, in the stop result determination process that constitutes the normal setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

If the result is a regular 6R jackpot, the following combinations of symbols will be set as the stop display (confirmation display): a combination of "2", "2", "2"; a combination of "4", "4", "4"; a combination of "6", "6", "6"; or a combination of "8", "8", "8".

If the result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, one of the following combinations will be set as the stop display (confirmation display): "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol; "5" symbol, "5" symbol; or "9" symbol, "9" symbol, "9" symbol.

If a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the normal setting process, the variable display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The system then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is determined in step S9501, i.e., if the current jackpot result is a 6R probability variation jackpot, then a special setting process is executed in step S9503. The special setting process, like the normal setting process in step S9502, consists of a stop result determination process and a variation display mode determination process.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the special setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be when the same combination of symbols appears on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. The information of the determined stop result is also stored in the stop result address storage area. Then, the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "7" is set as the symbol combination to be displayed (confirmed) on the final stop line stored in the stop result address storage area.

If a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. The variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the special setting process, retrieves the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443. It then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Furthermore, it executes a process to store the address information of the determined variable display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In the following explanation, the pattern variation display mode determined in step S9503 will be referred to as the "special pattern variation display mode," and will be distinguished from the pattern variation display mode determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9502 (the "normal pattern variation display mode").

(Comparison of variable display patterns)
Here, referring to Figure 128, we will explain the difference between the display mode when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R probability variation jackpot (normal display mode) and the display mode when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 6R probability variation jackpot (special display mode). Figure 128(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 2R probability variation jackpot, and Figure 128(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 6R probability variation jackpot.

In a game round where both reaching the ceiling and achieving a 2R probability variation jackpot result occur, as illustrated in Figure 128(a), at timing tj1, when the game round begins, the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begin. At timing tj2, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the display transitions to a reach display. At timing tj3, the display unit for the operation port displays the symbols corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the symbol display device 95 displays the symbol combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result (confirmed display). This clearly indicates to the player that a 2R probability variation jackpot result has occurred. In this change display configuration, the player does not explicitly indicate that the ceiling has been reached, and the game transitions to a special game state.

The gameplay flow when reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R regular jackpot result are basically the same as in Figure 128(a), but the difference lies in the fact that the final stopping symbol combination (confirmation display) corresponds to the symbol combination of the 6R regular jackpot result. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

In a game round where reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincide, as illustrated in Figure 128(b), the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit and the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begin at the timing of tk1, when the game round starts. At timing tk2, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the display transitions to a reach display, and at timing tk3, the symbol display device 95 displays a stopped symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (temporarily stopped display). This clearly indicates to the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, at timing tk3, the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit is still continuing. At timing tk4, after the same length of time as the above-mentioned confirmation display time has elapsed from timing tk3, the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95 resumes. The period from timing tk1 to timing tk4 constitutes the first half of the special variation display mode. Considering that the ceiling has been reached during this first half, it can be said that this first half is the "ceiling reach indication part."

At timing tk4, the second half of the special variation display mode begins. At timing tk5, the symbols corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result are displayed on the operation port display unit, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is displayed (confirmed) on the symbol display device 95. The execution time for the second half is shorter than that of the first half, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. The period from timing tk4 to timing tk5 constitutes the second half of the special variation display mode. Considering that the 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated in this second half, it can also be said that this second half is the "6R probability variation jackpot result indication part."

Furthermore, the display time table for the symbol changes on the display unit for the activation port is set so that the display time for the symbol changes on the display unit for the activation port is basically the same length when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R regular jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides, and when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincides. As described above, by making the first part corresponding to the reach display relatively longer and the second part not corresponding to the reach display shorter, the sense of incongruity caused by the repetition of the symbol changes when a special symbol change display pattern is executed is reduced.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to High Frequency Support Mode A. In the fourth normal game state, entries into the activation ports 91A and 92A occur frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with gameplay. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in terms of providing relief to players. However, if the aforementioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that players' investment will be high by the time the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players do not enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it may lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in terms of increasing interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the game round that reaches the ceiling (if there are duplicates), different display effects are executed depending on whether the result is a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot. Specifically, if a 6R probability variation jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to a long-continuing high-frequency support mode) is achieved in the game round that reaches the upper limit, an effect indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. If a 2R probability variation jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low-frequency support mode) or a 6R normal jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to a short-continuing high-frequency support mode) is achieved in the game round that reaches the upper limit, an effect that does not indicate that the upper limit has been reached is executed. With this configuration, if a 6R probability-increasing jackpot results in a special game state → high-frequency support mode, the player can be led to believe that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. If a 2R probability-increasing jackpot results in a special game state → low-frequency switching mode, the player can be led to believe that no benefit occurred by concealing the ceiling reach. If a 6R probability-increasing jackpot results in a transition to a high-frequency support mode, which is much shorter than when reaching the ceiling, the player can be led to believe that no benefit occurred by concealing the ceiling reach. This configuration effectively improves player satisfaction and increases attention to the game.

<Variation 1>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the system is configured to execute normal setting processing when the result of a 6R normal jackpot, which is the trigger for transitioning to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B, coincides with reaching the ceiling. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system to execute special setting processing when the result of a 6R normal jackpot coincides with reaching the ceiling. In other words, in a game round in which reaching the ceiling and the result of a 6R normal jackpot coincide, it is also possible to configure the system to execute a special variation display mode in which the variation display of symbols is executed, consisting of a first part in which the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) and a second part in which the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is displayed as stopped (confirmed).

<Modified Example 2>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached is greater than the number of termination criteria set when a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the number of termination criteria set when a 6R normal jackpot result occurs and the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached to be the same, or the number of termination criteria set when a 6R normal jackpot result occurs is greater than the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached. By combining these configurations with the configuration shown in Modification Example 1 described above, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

<Example 3>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the second half of the special variation display mode (the part that indicates the jackpot result) is shorter than the first half (the part that indicates reaching the ceiling), but it is not limited to this. The first half and the second half may be configured to be the same length, or the second half may be configured to be longer than the first half.

Furthermore, in the latter half of the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability-changing jackpot result (a combination of "7" symbols, "7" symbols, and "7" symbols) is displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. However, it is also possible to configure the latter half of the game to display (confirm) the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability-changing jackpot result via the reach display, similar to the first half of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the variable display time table referenced when reaching the ceiling coincides with either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result is the same as the variable display time table referenced when reaching the ceiling coincides with a 6R probability variation jackpot result. In other words, the variable display time of the symbols in the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95) is the same when reaching the ceiling coincides with either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result, and when reaching the ceiling coincides with a 6R probability variation jackpot result. This may be changed as follows. In other words, a variable display time table may be provided separately for when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides, and a variable display time table may be provided separately for when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R probability variation jackpot result coincides, thereby differentiating the variable display time of the symbols in the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95) when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides. For example, the variable display time of the symbols in the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95) may be longer when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides than when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides. For example, in a configuration where a reach display is executed in both the first and second halves of the game, as shown in the modified example 3 above, it is technically significant to configure the system so that the display time for the changing symbols in the display unit for the operation port (the display time for the changing symbols in the symbol display device 95) is longer when the ceiling is reached and a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, compared to when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result is achieved.

<Example 5>
In the 13th embodiment described above, when reaching the ceiling and getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincide, the system is configured to clearly indicate reaching the ceiling and getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result by stopping and displaying the symbol combination indicating reaching the ceiling and the symbol combination indicating getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result, respectively. However, the specific configuration for indicating reaching the ceiling is arbitrary. For example, in a game round in which reaching the ceiling and getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincide, the system can be configured to display a video or still image (cut-in image of a character, etc.) on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) to indicate reaching the ceiling, or the speaker unit 29 can output a sound effect or background music indicating reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 6>
In the 13th embodiment described above, if reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the configuration is such that reaching the ceiling is clearly indicated in the first part and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result in the second part. That is, the configuration is such that reaching the ceiling → achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated, but it is not limited to this. If reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, it is also possible to configure the system so that achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated in the first part and reaching the ceiling in the second part, that is, the configuration so that achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result → reaching the ceiling is clearly indicated.

<Example 7>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the second normal game state, which is entered when a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, is configured to continue until the next jackpot is achieved, but the invention is not limited to this. The second normal game state may also be subject to a limit on the number of times it can be played, similar to the third normal game state. For example, if a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved and the game transitions to the second normal game state, the game may be configured to transition back to the first normal game state when the number of game rounds played without a jackpot after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined termination criterion number. This predetermined termination criterion number may be the same as, for example, the termination criterion number set when the ceiling is reached, or it may be greater than the said termination criterion number.

<Embodiment 14>
In the first embodiment described above, the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state, which is entered as a result of a special miss, is notified. In this embodiment, the configuration for notifying the remaining number of games differs from that of the first embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to Figure 129, the types of special miss results in this embodiment will be explained.

In this embodiment, special failure results are provided as special failure result A, special failure result B, and special failure result C. While all of special failure results A through C trigger a transition to high-frequency support mode A, there are differences in the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode A, i.e., the number of games that trigger the termination criterion.

Specifically, if the result is Special Failure A, the termination threshold is set to "20 spins," if the result is Special Failure B, the termination threshold is set to "40 spins," and if the result is Special Failure C, the termination threshold is set to "100 spins." In other words, the system favors players by increasing the number of spins required to terminate in the order of Special Failure A < Special Failure B < Special Failure C. In this configuration, when a player experiences a Special Failure, their expectation is directed towards Special Failure C.

(Game board unit 80C)
As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 130, a hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aC of the pattern display device 95C. The hold display area consists of a hold number display area Da, which is partitioned and displayed with the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of hold items when game balls enter the operating openings 91 and 92, arranged in a left-right direction, and an execution target display area Dc that can display a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game round currently being played.

In the center frame 96C of the game board unit 80C, a counter called a count display unit 88C is provided in the lower part (lower frame) of the display screen 95aC, specifically in a position closer to the first unit hold display area that constitutes the hold count display area Da (directly below the execution target display area Dc), which displays the remaining number of games until the end of high-frequency support mode A. The count display unit 88C is a segment display connected to the notification and performance control device 140, and is subject to display control by the notification and performance control device 140. When transitioning to high-frequency support mode A, the notification and performance control device 140 displays the count corresponding to the termination criterion number on the count display unit 88C and performs display control so that the number is deducted by "1" each time the game progresses. In other words, in the fourth normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A, each time the hold icon MP shifts from the hold count display area Da (specifically the first unit hold display area) to the execution target display area Dc, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is deducted by "1".

In this embodiment, the display of the remaining number of games in the count display unit 88C is not performed in game states other than the fourth normal game state, but this is not the only configuration. For example, the count display unit 88C may also be configured to display the remaining number of games in other game states, such as the third normal game state (a game state in which the number of games is limited).

Next, with reference to Figures 131 to 133, the configuration related to the display of changing symbols for each game round and an overview of said display will be explained. Figure 131 is a schematic diagram illustrating the overview of the display in the symbol display device 95C (display screen 95aC).

The pattern display device 95C is configured with three pattern rows: left, center, and right. The pattern display area on the display screen 95a is broadly divided into the left pattern display area DL, the center pattern display area DM, and the right pattern display area DR, corresponding to each of these pattern rows. The patterns in each pattern row are displayed in a periodic, scrolling direction (for example, from top to bottom). Each pattern display area DL, DM, and DR displays three patterns for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns (3x3) being displayed in the pattern display area.

As shown in Figures 132(j) to (t), the above design consists of 10 main designs: the numbers "1" through "9" and hearts, and secondary designs: pictorial designs resembling seashells.

As shown in Figure 133 (a schematic diagram showing each symbol row), the left and middle symbol rows have 10 main symbols arranged in ascending order, with sub-symbols in between. In contrast, the right symbol row has 10 main symbols arranged in descending order, with sub-symbols in between. The "heart" symbol is positioned between the "1" and "9" symbols.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 131, the display screen 95aC of the symbol display device 95C has five active lines set: the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the left-upward line L4, and the right-upward line L5. With each game, the symbol display stops in the order of left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column, and when the display of all symbol columns has finished (a confirmation display is shown), the player is clearly informed whether the result is a jackpot, a special miss, or a normal miss. Specifically, symbols "1" through "9" are jackpot symbols, and when the same combination of jackpot symbols stops and is displayed (confirmed) on any of the active lines L1 through L5, it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot (see Figure 134(a)). The "heart" symbol is a symbol used for special losing outcomes. A combination of these "heart" symbols stopping on any of the active lines L1 to L5 (confirmed) clearly indicates a special losing result (see Figure 134(b)).

Furthermore, according to the relationship between the symbol arrangement shown in Figure 133 and the active lines shown in Figure 131, even if the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol changes while the re-variation display described later is being performed, the phenomenon of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result passing through the active line is avoided. This is desirable in preventing players from mistaking a special miss result for a jackpot result.

When the aforementioned reach display occurs, the symbol display in the left reel display area DL is completed first, followed by the symbol display in the right reel display area DR. At this point, a reach line is formed when symbols with the same number are displayed on at least one of the active lines L1 to L5. While this reach line is formed, the symbol display in the middle reel display area DM is then performed, resulting in a reach display. Furthermore, if the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display in the middle symbol column is completed so that symbols identical to those forming the reach line are displayed on the reach line.

One of the features of this embodiment is that, after a reach display and the stop display of the "heart" symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result, the number of turns to terminate the game, which is set for this time, is then notified to the player using that symbol combination. Specifically, the game round performance executed by the symbol display device 95C in the game round corresponding to the special miss result has a two-part structure: the first part executes the start of symbol variation display → reach performance → temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result, and the second part notifies the player of the number of turns to terminate the game. In the game round that results in a special miss result, the outline of the performance is determined by the special miss setting process, which is part of the special miss performance setting process (see step S1907 in Figure 43) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. The special miss setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 136.

(Settings for special exceptions)
As shown in Figure 135(a), in the special miss setting process, first, in step S4001, a temporary stop line is determined for temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result. Specifically, one of the valid lines L1 to L5 is determined for temporarily stopping and displaying the "heart" symbol combination.

In the following step S4002, the pattern of symbol variation display until the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed—that is, the outline of the presentation in the first part—is determined. Specifically, one of the above-mentioned Normal Reach A-B or Super Reach A-C is determined as the symbol variation display pattern for the first part.

In the following step S4003, the pattern of symbol variation after the temporary stop (the pattern of symbol variation in the second half) and the final stop line at which the combination of "heart" symbols will be displayed (confirmed display) are determined. For the symbol variation display in the second half, all symbol rows are displayed in a synchronized scrolling manner while maintaining the combination of "heart" symbols (hereinafter also referred to as re-variation display). Each time the combination of "heart" symbols reaches the temporary stop line, the termination criterion count is added and displayed in the count display unit 88C.

However, the duration of this rotating display varies depending on the type of special miss result, i.e., the number of times the termination criteria are set. Furthermore, the final stop line where the "heart" symbol combination is displayed during the confirmation display does not necessarily coincide with the temporary stop line; a different valid line may be determined as the final stop line. Here, referring to Figure 135(b), a supplementary explanation of the relationship between special miss results and the variable display pattern is provided.

If the result of this game is a special losing result A, where 20 spins is set as the termination threshold, the number of spins in the second half will be set to be between 2 and 3. For example, if the number of spins is 2, the spinning display will end when the "heart" symbol combination has completed 2 spins. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will coincide. On the other hand, if the number of spins is 2 spins + α, the spinning display will continue even after the "heart" symbol combination has completed 2 spins and reached the temporary stop line, and will end before the "heart" symbol combination reaches the temporary stop line again. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will not coincide.

If the result of this game is a special losing result B, where 40 spins is set as the termination threshold, the number of spins in the second half will be set to be between 4 and 5. For example, if the number of spins is 4, the spinning display will end when the "heart" symbol combination has completed 4 spins. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will coincide. On the other hand, if the number of spins is 4 spins + α, the spinning display will continue even after the "heart" symbol combination has completed 4 spins and reached the temporary stop line, and will end before the "heart" symbol combination reaches the temporary stop line again. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will not coincide.

If the result of this game is a special losing result C, where the termination threshold is set to 100 spins, the number of spins in the second half will be set to 10. In this case, the spin display will end when the "heart" symbol combination has appeared 10 times. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will coincide.

Furthermore, in determining step S4002, a difference is established so that the probability of normal reaches A and B being executed increases with a higher set number of termination criteria for special misses. In other words, when a special miss occurs after a normal reach, the expectation of a higher number of termination criteria being set increases compared to when a special miss occurs after a super reach. This is a measure to ensure smooth gameplay by preventing the display time of the number of spins from becoming unnecessarily long, even when the number of spins increases in the later part of the game.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 136, we will explain the processing for the latter half of the game round's presentation related to special miss results, which is executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and presentation control device 140 (hereinafter referred to as the latter half processing for special misses). The latter half processing for special misses is a part of the processing for the first variation (see step S1805 in Figure 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and presentation control device 140, and is executed during the latter half.

(Handling of the latter half of the special case)
In the second half of the special miss processing, it is first determined whether or not the re-spinning display of the symbol combinations in the second half is in progress. If it is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S4101 and the process proceeds to step S4102. In step S4102, it is determined whether or not it is time to illuminate the active line (temporary stop line) where the "heart" symbol combination is temporarily stopped. If a positive determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103, where the active line illumination process is executed, and the second half of the processing ends. In the active line illumination process, an active line illumination command is sent to the display control device 410, and a sound effect for illuminating the active line is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the receipt of the active line illumination command, the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95C to illuminate the temporary stop line brightly. This makes the line where the symbol combination is stopped clearly visible to the player.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for the re-variation display. If a negative result is obtained in step S4104, the processing for the second half of this section ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S4104, the process proceeds to step S4105, where the re-variation display start process is executed, and then the processing for the second half of this section ends. In the re-variation display start process, a re-variation start command is sent to the display control device 410, and the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to one corresponding to the re-variation. Based on the receipt of the re-variation start command, the display control device 410 starts the re-variation display of the symbol combination currently being displayed in temporary stop mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S4101, if the re-variation display is in progress, a positive result is made in step S4101, and the process proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, it is determined whether it is time to accelerate or decelerate the re-variation display sequence while maintaining synchronization. If a positive result is made in step S4016, the process proceeds to step S4107, where the variation speed change process is executed, and then the second half of this process ends.

In this embodiment, the scrolling speed is changed such that the scrolling speed decreases as the combination of "heart" symbols approaches the temporary stop line, and increases as they move away from the temporary stop line. ROM 443 stores a speed change table that defines the relationship between the scrolling speed and the symbol's scrolling position. In step S4107, the scrolling speed is determined by referring to this speed change table. The display control device 410 changes the scrolling speed of the symbols to match the scrolling speed determined by the notification/effect control device 140.

Returning to the explanation of step S4106, if a negative result is obtained in step S4106, the process proceeds to step S4108. Step S4108 determines whether the combination of "heart" symbols has reached the active line (temporary stop line) during illumination. If a negative result is obtained in step S4108, the second half of this process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S4108, the process proceeds to step S4109 to execute the count-up process. In this count-up process, the number displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10". In other words, in this embodiment, each time the combination of "heart" symbols reaches the active line during illumination, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10".

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 137, we will explain the special loss variation termination process (hereinafter referred to as the special loss variation termination process) among the processing for game round progression related to special loss results, which is executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140. The special loss variation termination process is a part of the first variation termination process (see step S1806 in Figure 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140.

(Special error termination processing)
In the special loss termination processing, the confirmation display processing is first performed in step S4201. Specifically, a confirmation display command is sent to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the confirmation display (final stop display) is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the receipt of the confirmation display command, the display control device 410 displays the "heart" symbol combination as the final stop on the final stop line determined in step S4003.

If the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as the final stop on an active line other than the currently illuminated active line, i.e., if the temporary stop line and the final stop line do not match, a negative determination is made in step S4202, and the special loss variation termination process ends there. If the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as the final stop on an active line that is currently illuminated, i.e., if the temporary stop line and the final stop line match, an positive determination is made in step S4202, and the process proceeds to step S4202. In step S4202, a count-up process is executed. In this count-up process, the number displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10". In other words, in this embodiment, when the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as the final stop on an active line that is currently illuminated, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10".

Next, referring to Figure 138, we will explain the flow of the game sequence animation for a game round resulting in a special loss. Figure 138 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game sequence animation for a game round that resulted in special loss B during the first normal game state.

At the start of the game round (ti1), the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit and the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95C begin. This game round corresponds to special miss result B. At the start of the game round (ti2), after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game round (ti1), the "heart" symbols in the left and right symbol columns are displayed as stopped symbols (temporarily stopped symbols) on the active line L2, transitioning to a reach display.

At the subsequent timing of ti3, the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is displayed as a stopped (temporarily stopped) on the active line L2, corresponding to special miss result B. This clearly indicates to the player that a special miss result has occurred. However, in this embodiment, the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is displayed as a stopped regardless of whether special miss result A to C occurs. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine the set termination criterion number of spins from the symbol combination displayed at this point. Note that the symbol variation display on the operation port display unit continues at the timing of ti3.

At timing ti4, after the combination of "heart" symbols is displayed stopped on the active line L2, the active line L2 lights up, and "0" is displayed on the count display unit 88C (remaining count counter). At timing ti5, each symbol sequence that was previously stopped (temporarily stopped) begins to scroll synchronously, maintaining the combination of "heart" symbols. In other words, it transitions from temporary stop display to the re-fluctuating display described above.

At timing ti6, when the "heart" symbol combination completes one cycle and reaches active line L2 again, the remaining count counter value is increased from "0" to "10". Synchronous scrolling of the symbol sequence continues, and each time the "heart" symbol combination reaches active line L2, the remaining count counter value is increased from "10" to "20" to "30" (timing ti7 and ti8). At timing ti9, when the "heart" symbol combination completes its final cycle and stops on active line L2 (final stop display), the remaining count counter value is increased from "30" to "40", and the symbol variation display on the operation slot ends, with the symbol corresponding to special miss result B being displayed. Then, at timing ti10, after the confirmation display period has elapsed, the game transitions from the first normal game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A.

The fourteenth embodiment described in detail above provides the following excellent effects.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode B) via a special game state (open/close execution mode). If a special loss occurs, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state (open/close execution mode). This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level support mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony.

In particular, when a special miss occurs and the support mode changes to High-Frequency Support Mode A, the system is configured to set the termination threshold for High-Frequency Support Mode to 20, 40, or 100 spins, thereby further diversifying the gameplay. In this embodiment, when a special miss occurs, the player is clearly informed of the special miss by temporarily stopping and displaying the corresponding symbol combination (the "heart" symbol combination). Afterward, the system is configured to display the symbol combination in a loop before the final stop display, and the remaining spin counter value is updated (incremented) in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that a special miss has occurred based on the temporary stop display of the corresponding symbol combination, and then understand the termination threshold for this spin as the remaining spin counter value is updated according to the loop of the symbol combination. This configuration effectively enhances the player's attention to the game when transitioning to the normal gameplay state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss.

Furthermore, if the remaining count counter is displayed incremented each time the "heart" symbol combination completes a cycle, players will expect the cycle to continue for as long as possible. This effectively prevents the impression that the transition to the normal game state compatible with High-Frequency Support Mode A is being unnecessarily delayed.

As described above, in a configuration where the value of the remaining spins counter is updated in conjunction with the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result (the symbol combination of "heart" symbols), there is a concern that if circumstances occur during the spinning process that cause the symbol combination to break down, it will give the impression that the spinning is not performed properly, i.e., the value of the remaining spins counter will not be updated, and attention to this effect will decline prematurely. Therefore, by using a configuration that maintains the symbol combination of "heart" symbols during the spinning display, as shown in this embodiment, or more specifically, a configuration that synchronizes each row of symbols during the spinning display, such problems can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, such a configuration is preferable in order to avoid the player mistakenly believing that the display of the stopped symbol combination of "heart" symbols was a misreading.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the system is configured so that no symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is included among the other symbol combinations that pass through the active line during the lap display. This configuration effectively suppresses unnecessary hype that might lead to a jackpot, thus avoiding player misinterpretation. This is preferable in preventing a decrease in attention to the update of the remaining spin counter value linked to the special lap display.

As shown in this embodiment, aligning the stop line where the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) with the stop line that triggers the update of the remaining spins counter suppresses player confusion caused by the diversification of the presentation. This is preferable for effectively achieving the aforementioned effect of increasing attention. In this embodiment in particular, it is possible to end the spinning display when the "heart" symbol combination reaches another active line before the active line (stop line) that triggers the update of the remaining spins counter. This is preferable for realizing the diversification of the presentation.

As shown in this embodiment, if the remaining count counter value is kept hidden when the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped), and the display of the remaining count counter value is started when the symbol combination reaches the stop line after variable display, it becomes possible to make the symbol combination complete at least one cycle. This is preferable because it broadens the range of the set termination criteria count while suppressing the resulting obsolescence of the cycle display → remaining count update flow.

<Variation 1>
In the 14th embodiment described above, while the display of changing patterns in the operation port display unit is being executed, the pattern display device 95C displays a stopped (temporarily stopped) pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result and moves to the second half part, in which a special effect is performed to announce the number of times the termination criteria have been reached. However, the specific configuration for securing time to perform the special effect is arbitrary and can be changed as follows.

For example, in a game round resulting in a special miss, the display time for the confirmed outcome may be set to be longer than in other game rounds, and the special effect may be executed during the confirmed outcome display. Alternatively, in a game round resulting in special miss B, the special effect may not be executed, and instead, the special effect may be executed during the first game round after transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this case, it is preferable to set the display time for the variation in that first game round to be sufficient time to execute the special effect. If that first game round corresponds to a jackpot result, it is preferable to change (upgrade) the symbol combination displayed at the end of the special effect from the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result to the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the remaining attempts counter is increased by "10" each time the combination of "heart" symbols completes a full cycle and reaches the target line in the latter half of the game. However, it is not necessarily required to limit the value added to just one type. In the latter half of the game, it is also possible to have a configuration in which one of several candidates is added when the combination of "heart" symbols completes a full cycle and reaches the target line. For example, there may be cases where the remaining attempts counter is increased by "10" and cases where it is increased by "20".

<Example 3>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the scrolling speed of the pattern column is accelerated or decelerated during the special variation display, but the scrolling speed of the pattern column may be kept constant during the special variation display.

<Modification 4>
In the special variation display, the configuration is designed to synchronize each row of symbols as it cycles, but this is not the only configuration. It is sufficient that the configuration is such that a combination of "heart" symbols is formed when it reaches the target line, and this does not preclude a configuration in which each row of symbols cycles asynchronously so that the combination of "heart" symbols breaks down during that process.

<Example 5>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining count counter are the same active line, but the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining count counter may be different.

<Modification 6>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the special variation display was configured to synchronously scroll each row of symbols so that the combination of "heart" symbols is maintained, but it is not limited to this. It is sufficient as long as the configuration is such that the combination of "heart" symbols is formed when the target line, which triggers the count-up of the remaining spins counter, is reached, and it is also possible to make the movement of each row of symbols asynchronous.

<Example 7>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the remaining spins counter is displayed as "0" at the timing when the spinning display begins after the combination of "heart" symbols has temporarily stopped and been displayed on the active line (when a period of the same length as the confirmation display time has elapsed from the temporary stop). However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The remaining spins counter may be displayed as "0" at the timing when the combination of "heart" symbols has temporarily stopped and been displayed on the active line.

Furthermore, the initial value displayed on the remaining count counter is not limited to "0"; it can also be set to the minimum value of "10".

<Difference 8>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the remaining number of games is displayed in the count display unit 88C, but this can be changed to a configuration in which the remaining number of games is displayed in the pattern display device 95C (display screen 95aC).

<Embodiment 15>
One of the features of this embodiment is that a special notification effect is executed in a game round prior to the game round in which the conditions for transitioning to the fourth normal game state are met, in order to foreshadow the transition to the fourth normal game state. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80D (game board 80aD) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80D will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 139. Figure 139 is a front view of the game board unit 80D.

The game board 80aD has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aD, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aD is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (features) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aD is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The hold display area consists of a hold count display area Da, which is partitioned by arranging unit hold display areas horizontally, with the same number of units as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operating openings 91 and 92; and an execution target display area Dc, which can display hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the currently running game rounds. The hold count display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit hold display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit hold areas.

The game balls flowing down the left route primarily enter the first operation port 91A, and during low-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the first operation port 91A. In contrast, the game balls flowing down the right route primarily enter the second operation port 92A, and during high-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the second operation port 92A. Due to these circumstances, in most cases, the number of reserve icons displayed in the reserve count display area Da will be four or less. Therefore, the display mode of the reserve count display area Da will be based on a display mode consisting of four unit reserve display areas, as illustrated in Figure 139, and will switch to a display mode consisting of eight unit reserve display areas only when the number of reserve icons exceeds four. Note that the function to switch the display mode of the reserve count display area Da according to the situation can be omitted.

In the center frame 96A of the game board unit 80D, a counter called a count display unit 88D is provided in the lower part (lower frame) of the display screen 95aA, specifically in a position closer to the first unit hold display area that constitutes the hold count display area Da (directly below the execution target display area Dc), which displays the remaining number of games until the end of high-frequency support mode A. The count display unit 88D is a segment display connected to the notification and performance control device 140, and is subject to display control by the notification and performance control device 140. When transitioning to high-frequency support mode A, the notification and performance control device 140 displays the count corresponding to the termination criterion number on the count display unit 88D, and performs display control so that the number is deducted by "1" each time the game progresses. In other words, in the fourth normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A, each time the hold icon MP shifts from the hold count display area Da (specifically the first unit hold display area) to the execution target display area Dc, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is deducted by "1".

In this embodiment, the display of the remaining number of games in the count display unit 88D is not performed in game states other than the fourth normal game state, but this is not the only configuration. For example, the count display unit 88D may also be configured to display the remaining number of games in other game states, such as the third normal game state (a game state in which the number of games is limited).

Furthermore, a special effect device 500D is provided on the rear side of the game board 80aD. This device performs a preview of the special loss result (transition to the fourth normal game state) in game rounds executed before the game round in which the special loss result occurs. The special effect device 500D is positioned in a location that overlaps with the right route when viewed from the front of the game machine; specifically, it is located below the aforementioned game count display unit 88D and to the side of the operation port unit 82A (specifically, the first operation port 91A), and is visible from the front of the game machine through the game board 80aD. It can be said that the hold display area on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A is surrounded by the special effect device 500D, the symbol variation display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A, and the first operation port 91A where the special loss is provided. Details regarding the specific configuration of the special effect device 500D will be described later.

(Retained ball storage area)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 140.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 was configured to result in a special loss. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery entries based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is configured to result in a special loss. The winning/losing table for the operating ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 58 and 59.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 141, the win/loss tables for the first operating port include a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 141(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 141(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1, which ranges from 0 to 599, "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results.

Furthermore, in situations where the win/loss tables for low probability mode and high probability mode are referenced during the prize draw based on the entry into the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are all "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596", totaling 150 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596" correspond to special loss results. And all random number values that do not correspond to either a big win or a special loss correspond to a loss result (normal loss result).

As shown in Figure 142, the win/loss tables for the second operation port consist of a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 142(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 142(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the losing results (normal losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on the entry into the second operating port 92A, the configuration is such that the "special losing" described in the first embodiment does not occur.

Next, the pre-confirmation process (see step S306 in Figure 22) and the setting process for the hold command (see step S307 in Figure 22), which are performed as part of the timer interrupt processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, will be explained.

(Pre-confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart in Figure 143, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S4301, the number of operational reserves N and the common reserves CRN stored in the reserve count storage area of the reserve ball storage area 432A are read, and this information on the number of reserves is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Then, in step S4302, it is checked whether the reserve information obtained by this win contains information corresponding to a jackpot result or information corresponding to a special miss result. Details of this determination are the same as the win/fail determination process in step S702 above, so the explanation is omitted.

If the confirmation process in step S4302 confirms that a jackpot has been won, a positive determination is made in step S4303, and the process proceeds to step S4304. In step S4304, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. In step S4304, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the value of the acquired type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4304 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the confirmation process in step S4302 confirms that a special miss has occurred, a negative determination is made in step S4303, and a positive determination is made in step S4350, before proceeding to step S4306. In step S4306, the special miss occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Furthermore, in step S4306, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the acquired value of type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304, and the type of special miss is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4306 includes information related to the type of special miss.

If the confirmation process in step S4302 confirms that it will normally be a miss, then a negative determination is made in steps S4303 and S4350, and the process proceeds to step S4307. In step S4307, the normal miss reach confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 obtained in step S304 is obtained, and the lottery table for miss reach occurrences is referenced to check whether a miss reach will occur. If a miss reach does not occur (i.e., it is a complete miss), a negative determination is made in step S4308, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If a miss reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, and the process proceeds to step S4309. In step S4309, the miss reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4309 includes information related to the general type of miss reach (whether it is a super reach or not).

Next, we will explain the process for setting up hold commands, referring to the flowchart in Figure 144.

(Setting the pending command)
In the process of setting the hold command, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4402, and the jackpot-corresponding hold command is set. The jackpot-corresponding hold command includes information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative result is determined in step S4401, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the MPU 402 register, the process proceeds to step S4403 to determine whether or not special miss information is stored in the MPU 402 register. If special miss information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4404 to set a special miss response hold command. The special miss response hold command contains information regarding the type of special miss.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4405, where it is determined whether or not information about a near miss is stored in the register of MPU402. If information about a near miss is stored, a positive result is obtained in step S4405, and the process proceeds to step S4406, where the near miss response hold command is set. The near miss response hold command includes information related to the general type of near miss (whether or not it is a super miss). If a negative result is obtained in step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, the near miss non-response hold command (complete miss response hold command) is set.

When setting a hold command in steps S4402, S4404, and S4406, the display time for the variation is determined by referring to the value of the variation type counter CS, etc., and the information related to that variation display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the display time for the variation, the display time table is referred to, similar to the setting process for the display time shown in step S714. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140, which can then understand the variation display pattern of the symbols based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the display time for the variation may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting the game round related to that hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, the information related to the display time for the variation is not stored.

After executing one of the command setting processes in steps S4402, S4404, S4406, or S4407, step S4408 executes a process to set the number of pending items for the pending command. The pending command information is composed of multiple bytes. In step S4408, first, the pending item information stored in the MPU 402 register in step S4301 of the preceding pre-check process (Figure 143) is read. Then, the read pending item information is stored in the bits for the pending item information of the already set pending command using an operation such as logical OR. This ensures that the pending command set in one of the processes in steps S4402, S4404, S4406, or S4407 includes information to identify which pending item corresponds to that pending command. After executing the process in step S4408 as described above, this pending command setting process terminates.

In step S4408, the hold command, which includes information on the number of hold items, is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in step S401 during the next normal processing (Figure 23). Upon receiving this hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 adds information for hold notification (described later) to the hold command and transmits it to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 then executes hold display and hold notification processing based on the received hold command.

Next, the processing related to the hold notification executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140 will be explained. The processing related to the hold notification can be broadly divided into two parts: command response processing, which determines the command from the main control device 162, and hold notification performance setting processing, which determines the type of hold notification.

(Handling of pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command transmitted by the main control unit 162 is received, processing corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined interval (for example, every 2 msec).

In the process of handling pending commands, the first step is to determine whether or not a pending command has been received. Commands received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 are temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing multiple commands and reading commands in the order they were stored, ensuring that even when multiple commands are received simultaneously, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. To determine whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, the system checks whether a jackpot-related pending command has been received in the target area of the command storage area 461. This command reading configuration is the same for reading other commands, such as commands for starting variations.

When a hold command is received, the various information contained in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to store one hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area is shifted sequentially to the lower areas when a shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3, ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, as with the hold ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port), the hold information is stored chronologically regardless of the ball's destination. For more details, identify the number of pending commands included in the received command, and store the various information described above in the area corresponding to that identified number of pending commands among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444. Similarly, when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. These flags trigger the setting process for the hold notification effect (hold notification effect setting process) described below, and are erased when the hold notification effect setting process is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, the jackpot announcement performance setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the jackpot announcement performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 145. The jackpot announcement performance setting process is performed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is performed on the condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command has been received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the jackpot announcement performance is when hold information is acquired upon entry into the operation ports 91A and 92A, or when hold information is consumed as the game progresses.

(Setting and processing of the jackpot notification effect)
In the process of setting up the jackpot notification effect, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notification effect is currently being performed. If the determination in step S4501 is positive, the process of setting up the jackpot notification effect ends immediately. If the determination in step S4501 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4502.

In step S4502, it is determined whether the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 contains the jackpot notification effect restriction flag described later. If the result in step S4502 is positive, the jackpot notification effect setting process ends immediately. If the result in step S4502 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control unit 162. If the determination in step S4503 is positive, the lottery process for receiving a hold command is executed in step S4504 to determine whether or not to perform the jackpot announcement animation. If the determination in step S4503 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If the determination in step S4505 is negative, i.e., if it is determined that neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the jackpot announcement animation setting process ends there. If the determination in step S4505 is positive, the lottery process for receiving a shift command is executed in step S4506 to determine whether or not to perform the jackpot announcement animation.

After executing the lottery process in step S4504 or step S4506, the process proceeds to step S4507. In step S4507, it is determined whether or not a jackpot announcement sequence has been won. If the result in step S4507 is negative, the jackpot announcement sequence setting process ends there. If the result in step S4507 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4508. In step S4508, the jackpot announcement sequence details determination process is executed. In the following step S4509, the jackpot announcement sequence flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, and in step S4510, the special miss announcement sequence restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. The jackpot announcement sequence flag set in step S4509 will be erased when the jackpot announcement sequence ends. Note that in step S4501 above, it is determined whether or not the jackpot announcement sequence is in progress based on whether or not this jackpot announcement sequence flag is set. Subsequently, in step S4511, the process for starting the selection of the jackpot announcement is executed, and the process for setting the main jackpot announcement effect is terminated.

Next, the process for determining the details of the jackpot announcement animation in step S4508 will be explained with reference to Figures 146 and 147. Figure 146 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the details of the jackpot announcement animation, and Figure 147 is a schematic diagram showing the jackpot announcement animation.

(Details of the jackpot announcement sequence are determined)
As shown in Figure 146, in the process of determining the details of the jackpot announcement effect, the target of the change in display mode is first determined in step S4601.

The jackpot notification effect shown in this embodiment is executed by changing the manner of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to correspond to the jackpot notification effect. Specifically, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da that corresponds to the relevant game round (relevant hold) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple color patterns for the hold icon MP, more specifically, three patterns: white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3), and the color of the relevant hold icon MP is changed to a color other than white.

If the pending symbol corresponds to a jackpot result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 3 > Level 2 > Level 1. If the pending symbol corresponds to a normal loss result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3. In other words, when a jackpot予告演出 (jackpot prediction effect) is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a jackpot result.

Furthermore, the jackpot prediction effects can be broadly categorized into two types: fixed-type prediction effects where the color of the changed reserve icon MP remains until it shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and step-up type prediction effects where the color changes before shifting to the execution target display area Dc.

In step S4601, the pending icon whose color will be changed is determined. In the following step S4602, the final color (display mode) of the corresponding pending icon after it moves to the execution target display area Dc is determined. Then, based on this result, in step S4603, the initial color (display mode) is determined.

Subsequently, in step S4604, the remaining number of shifts until the remaining corresponding pending icons MP move to the execution target display area Dc is determined, and the step-up pattern described above is determined based on the determined number of shifts. Note that if the initial color and the final color match, no step-up occurs.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 performs display control of the hold display area NE, etc., based on hold commands and shift commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140. The command response processing for hold display control executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 148. The command response processing for hold display control is executed as part of a periodic process (command response processing) that is started at a predetermined interval (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Processing for commands to control the hold display)
In the command handling process for controlling the hold display, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If the determination in step S4701 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, the value of the hold count counter (hold memory count SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is incremented by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703. In step S4703, an additional flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described later, a hold icon MP is added to the hold count display area Da based on this additional flag. Afterward, the command handling process for this hold display control ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S4701, if a negative determination is made in step S4701, i.e., if no hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4704. In step S4704, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If a negative determination is made in step S4704, the command handling process for this hold display control ends immediately. If a positive determination is made in step S4704, the process proceeds to step S4705. In step S4705, the value of the hold count counter (hold memory count SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is deducted by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4705, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4706, a shift flag is set in the work RAM 474. The hold display control process described later shifts the hold icon MP based on this shift flag. Afterward, the command handling process for this hold display control ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 149, the pending display process, which is executed as part of the periodic processing by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, will be explained.

(Pending display processing)
In the pending display process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not additional flags are stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If the determination in step S4801 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the pending icon to be added this time. Specifically, based on the matters determined in the jackpot announcement effect detail determination process in Figure 146, it is determined whether or not to set the color of the pending icon to be added this time to something other than white.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4802, the normal additional processing is executed in step S4803. Specifically, if the execution target display area Dc is empty, a white hold icon MP is added and displayed in the execution target display area Dc. If the execution target display area Dc is full, a white hold icon MP is added and displayed in the unit hold display area that is the youngest (closest to the execution target display area Dc) among the unit hold display areas where a hold icon MP is not displayed (i.e., empty).

If a positive result is obtained in step S4802, a special additional processing is performed in step S4804. Specifically, if the execution target display area Dc is empty, a pending icon MP of the color determined in step S4603 (one of blue, yellow, or red) is added and displayed in the execution target display area Dc. If the execution target display area Dc is full, a pending icon MP of the color determined in step S4603 (one of blue, yellow, or red) is added and displayed in the unit pending display area that is empty and has no pending icon MP displayed (the youngest unit pending display area closest to the execution target display area Dc).

After executing the process in step S4803 or step S4804, the additional flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are cleared in step S4805, and this pending display process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4801, if a negative result is obtained in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, it is determined whether or not a shift flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If a negative result is obtained in step S4806, the current hold display process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S4806, the process proceeds to step S4807. In step S4807, based on the matters determined in the jackpot announcement effect detail determination process in Figure 146, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the hold icon displayed during this shift.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4807, a normal shift process is executed in step S4808. If a positive result is obtained in step S4807, a special shift process is performed in step S4807. Both the normal and special shift processes hide the held icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Dc, and then shift the held icon MP displayed in the held number display area Da to the execution target display area Dc. Specifically, the held icon MP displayed in the first unit held display area is moved to the execution target display area Dc, and the held icon MP displayed in other unit held display areas are moved to the unit held display area to their left. By repeating this process, the displayed held icon MP are moved to the execution target display area Dc in chronological order, and are then deleted via that execution target display area Dc. The difference between the normal and special shift processes is that the normal shift process does not change the color of any of the held icons before and after the shift, while the special shift process changes the color of the relevant held icon in accordance with the shift.

After executing the shift process in step S4808 or step S4809, the shift flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are cleared in step S4810, and this pending display process is terminated.

Here, we will explain the flow of the jackpot notification sequence with reference to Figure 150. Figure 150(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first jackpot notification sequence, which does not support step-up, and Figure 150(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second jackpot notification sequence, which supports step-up. Note that Figure 150 illustrates the case where the display mode of the reserved number display area Da consists of four unit reserved display areas (the first unit reserved display area Da1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4).

In the example shown in Figure 150(a), a hold icon MP is added to the third unit hold display area Da3 based on a win in the first operation port 91A. This hold corresponds to a jackpot result, and the color of the hold icon MP added to the third unit hold display area Da3 upon winning the jackpot予告演出 (jackpot announcement演出) is red. This jackpot announcement演出 corresponds to the first jackpot announcement演出 (jackpot announcement演出) which does not support step-up, and the color of the hold icon MP remains red as it shifts in the order of Figure 120(a2) → Figure 120(a3) → Figure 120(a4) → Figure 120(a5). By starting the jackpot announcement演出 during a game round before the game round related to the hold icon MP in question begins, the player's attention can be drawn to the game.

In the example shown in Figure 150(b), a hold icon MP is added to the third unit hold display area Da3 based on a win in the first operation port 91A. This hold corresponds to the jackpot result, and the color of the hold icon MP added to the third unit hold display area Da3 upon winning the jackpot予告演出 (jackpot announcement演出) is blue. This jackpot announcement演出 corresponds to the step-up second jackpot announcement演出, and the color of the hold icon MP changes from blue to yellow to red as it shifts in the order of Figure 120(b2) → Figure 120(b3) → Figure 120(b4) → Figure 120(b5).

As shown in Figure 120(b), the color of the hold icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color is red, it will first change to a lower-ranking color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation level, and then step up (promote) to a higher-ranking color with a higher expectation level at the timing when the hold icon MP shifts. By using these two types of jackpot予告演出 (jackpot notification effects) in combination, even if the color is low-expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a higher-expectation color before the relevant game round. This prevents the attention given to the jackpot notification effects from decreasing prematurely.

As detailed above, the jackpot prediction effect is executed by the symbol display device 95A for displaying symbols. In contrast, the special loss prediction effect is executed by a special effect device 500D, which is provided separately from the symbol display device 95A. Further explanation of the special effect device 500D is provided below with reference to Figure 151. Figure 151 is a front view of the special effect device 500D.

(Special production device 500D)
The special performance device 500D is a light-emitting performance device that projects light toward the front of the game machine through a transparent game board 80aD. In the special performance device 500, the part facing the back of the game board 80aA (opposing part 501D) is provided with a notification decoration part 511D that executes a special losing notification performance and a notification decoration part 512D that notifies that it is a special losing result.

The pre-announcement decorative unit 511D and the notification decorative unit 512D are arranged side by side, with the former on the left and the latter on the right. The pre-announcement decorative unit 511D is positioned closer to the hold count display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the operation port unit 82A than the notification decorative unit 512D. The distance from the first operation port 91A, which may result in a special miss, to the special performance device 500D (specifically the pre-announcement decorative unit 511D) is shorter than the distance from the first operation port 91A to the pattern variation display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A.

The notification decorative unit 512D can be switched between an illuminated state and an off state. When a special losing result triggers the high-frequency support mode A, the unit switches from the off state to the illuminated state to provide the notification. During high-frequency support mode A, the unit remains illuminated. When the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold and high-frequency support mode A ends, the unit switches to the off state.

The promotional decorative section 511D consists of a blue first light-emitting section 521D, a yellow second light-emitting section 522D, and a red third light-emitting section 523D. These three sections can be individually switched between illuminated and unlit states.

The special miss notification effect has three steps: Step 1, in which only the first light-emitting unit 521D is lit (see Figure 152(a)); Step 2, in which the second light-emitting unit 522D is lit (see Figure 152(b)); and Step 3, in which the third light-emitting unit 523D is lit (see Figure 152(c)). The probability of a special miss occurs changes as the game progresses through these steps. For example, the probability of a special miss is 30% when Step 1 occurs, 50% when Step 2 occurs, and 80% when Step 3 occurs. In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a special miss result, the notification decorative unit 512D ultimately lights up to indicate that a special miss occurred (see, for example, Figure 152(d)). In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a normal miss result, the notification decorative unit 511D and the notification decorative unit 512D turn off to indicate that a special miss did not occur.

Furthermore, in the special miss notification effect shown in this embodiment, the above steps do not necessarily advance every time the game progresses, and there are cases where the steps do not advance even if the game progresses. Also, the steps do not necessarily advance one by one; some steps may be skipped. Incidentally, as will be explained in detail later, even in the case of a special miss result, the special miss notification effect does not necessarily occur, and the notification decorative unit 512D may switch to the illuminated state without going through the special miss notification effect.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, special miss notification performance setting processing is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the special miss notification performance setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 153. Note that the special miss notification performance setting processing is performed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined interval (for example, a 2 msec interval) during the first normal game state.
(Special miss notification effect setting process)
In the special miss notification effect setting process, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not it is the right time to start the confirmation display in a game round corresponding to a normal miss. If the determination in step S4901 is negative, the special miss notification effect setting process ends there. If the determination in step S4901 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4902.

Step S4902 determines whether or not a jackpot notification animation is currently being executed. Specifically, it determines whether or not a jackpot notification animation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If the determination in step S4902 is positive, the special miss notification animation setting process ends immediately. If the determination in step S4902 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4903.

Step S4903 determines whether the subsequent stored holds include a hold corresponding to a special miss. If the determination in step S4903 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4904. Step S4904 determines whether the preceding holds for the hold corresponding to a special miss include one corresponding to a miss reach. If the determination in step S4904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4905. Step S4905 determines whether the preceding holds for the hold corresponding to a special miss include one corresponding to a jackpot. If the determination in step S4905 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4906. Step S4906 executes a lottery process (a lottery process corresponding to the main pre-announcement) to determine whether or not to execute the special miss notification animation corresponding to the special miss result. In this lottery process, the lottery table for the main pre-announcement stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the special miss notification animation. The probability of winning in this lottery process is 50%. In other words, approximately half of the cases where a special failure occurs are announced via a special failure warning animation, while the other half are announced without going through the special failure warning animation.

Returning to the explanation of step S4903, if a negative result is determined in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4907. In step S4907, the latest held ball is provisionally set as the held ball subject to the special miss notification effect, and it is determined whether or not the preceding held balls correspond to a miss reach. If a negative result is determined in step S4907, the process proceeds to step S4908. In step S4908, it is determined whether or not the preceding held balls correspond to a jackpot. If a negative result is determined in step S4905, the process proceeds to step S4909. In step S4909, a lottery process (a lottery process corresponding to a false premonition) is executed to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notification effect that does not correspond to a special miss result. In this lottery process, the special miss notification effect lottery table for false premonitions stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notification effect. The probability of winning in this lottery process differs depending on the variation display pattern of the provisionally set held balls. Specifically, if the display pattern is Normal Reach A to B, the probability of winning is 1%, and if the display pattern is Super Reach A to C, the probability of winning is 3%.

If the special "miss" notification effect is selected in the lottery process in steps S4906 and S4909, a positive determination is made in step S4910, and the process proceeds to step S4911 to execute the special "miss" notification effect details determination process. If the special "miss" notification effect is not selected in the lottery process in steps S4906 and S4909, or if a positive determination is made in steps S4904, S4905, S4907, and S4908, a negative determination is made in step S4910, and the special "miss" notification effect setting process ends there.

Here, we will explain the process for determining the details of the special miss notification effect, referring to the flowchart in Figure 154.

In the process of determining the details of the special miss notification effect, first, in step S5001, the final display mode of the special effect device 500D is determined. That is, it is determined which of steps 1 to 3 above to be used. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether the reserve that triggered the special miss notification effect (hereinafter referred to as "the relevant reserve") corresponds to a special miss result, and if it does not correspond to a special miss result, the variation display mode related to the relevant reserve and the number of reserves preceding the relevant reserve. For example, if the relevant reserve that triggered the special miss notification effect corresponds to a special miss result, the probability of selection increases in the order of step 1 < step 2 < step 3. If the relevant reserve does not correspond to a special miss result, the probability of selection increases in the order of step 3 < step 2 < step 1. Furthermore, if the relevant reserve when the special miss notification effect is executed corresponds to a reach display, the reach display executed by the symbol display device 95A is configured to form a reach line with "heart" symbols on at least one of the active lines.

In the following step S5002, the remaining number of shifts until the relevant hold is executed is determined. Then, in step S5003, the step-up pattern is determined based on the final display mode (steps 1 to 3) determined in step S5001 and the remaining number of shifts determined in step S5002.

For example, if the relevant game round corresponds to a special losing result and the final display mode is Step 3, the number of remaining shifts is used to determine which of the following step-up patterns to execute: Step 1 (First light-emitting unit 521D = illuminated) → Step 2 (Second light-emitting unit 522D = illuminated) → Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated); Step 1 (First light-emitting unit 521D = illuminated) → Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated); Step 2 (Second light-emitting unit 522D = illuminated) → Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated); or a pattern that starts at Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated).

Returning to the explanation in Figure 153, after executing the special miss notification effect details determination process in step S4911, the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, the special miss notification effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. The special miss notification effect flag is used by MPU 442 to determine whether or not the special miss notification effect is currently being executed. In the following step S4913, the jackpot notification effect restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. The jackpot notification effect restriction flag set in step S4913 is erased when the special miss notification effect ends. After that, the special miss notification effect start process is executed in step S4914, and this special miss notification effect setting process ends. As detailed above, in this embodiment, the special miss notification effect is configured to start in game rounds that result in a normal miss, and its start timing coincides with the timing of the confirmed display of the symbol combination in that game round.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 155, we will explain the special "miss" notification animation execution process performed as part of the periodic processing in MPU 442.

(Special failure notification sequence execution process)
In the special miss notification effect execution process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not a special miss notification effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If the determination in step S5101 is negative, the special miss notification effect execution process is terminated. If the determination in step S5101 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 95A has stopped displaying (confirmed display) the symbol combination. If the determination in step S5102 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, the system determines whether or not to trigger a step-up at this timing by referring to the step-up pattern determined in step S5003. If the determination in step S5103 is positive, the system proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, the system executes the process of adding a light-emitting target by referring to the step-up pattern determined in step S5003. For example, in the game round corresponding to the special miss result that triggered the start of this special miss notification effect, the notification decoration unit 512D is switched from the off state to the on state. After executing the process of adding a light-emitting target in step S5104, or if the determination in step S5103 is negative, the execution process of this special miss notification effect ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5102, if a negative result is determined in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5105. In step S5105, it is determined whether or not the timing for the confirmation display of the symbol combination on the symbol display device 95A is complete. If a negative result is determined in step S5105, the process proceeds to step S5106. In step S5106, a process is executed to turn off the warning decoration section 511D of the special effect device 500D. In other words, regardless of whether the game round corresponds to a special losing result, the special losing warning effect by the warning decoration section 511D ends at the timing when the confirmation display is complete.

Afterward, the special miss notification flag and the jackpot notification restriction flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 are cleared, and the special notification execution process ends. Once the jackpot notification restriction flag is cleared, the jackpot notification can be executed from then on.

Here, we will illustrate the flow of the special miss notification effect with reference to the timing chart in Figure 156. In the example in Figure 156, the transition to the fourth normal game state occurs after a special miss result during the first normal game state. The special notification effect device 500D had previously announced that this special miss result would occur in a game round prior to the relevant round.

At timing tj1, the display unit D1 for the first operation port starts showing the changing symbols, and the display device 95A also starts showing the changing symbols. At timing tj2 during this game round, a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and the number of reserved balls increases from "2" to "3". These additional reserved balls correspond to the special miss result.

For game rounds started at timing tj1, a normal losing result is expected. At the timing of the confirmed display where this result is explicitly shown (timing tj3), a special losing prediction animation is initiated. Specifically, the first light-emitting part 521D of the special animation device 500D (prediction decoration part 511D) switches from the off state to the on state (step 1).

The game rounds that started at timing tj4 also correspond to the normal losing result, and at the timing of the confirmed display where this result is explicitly shown (timing tj5), the special losing notification effect steps up from step 1 to step 2. Specifically, the second light-emitting part 522D of the special effect device 500D (notification decoration part 511D) switches from the off state to the on state.

The game rounds that started at timing tj6 also correspond to the normal losing result, and at the timing of the confirmed display where this result is explicitly shown (timing tj7), the special losing notification effect steps up from step 2 to step 3. Specifically, the third light-emitting part 523D of the special effect device 500D (preview decoration part 511D) switches from the off state to the on state.

At the subsequent timing of tj8, the game round corresponding to the special miss result that triggered this special miss予告演出 (special miss notification effect) (the relevant game round) begins. This game round corresponds to the reach display, and at timing of tj10, it transitions to the reach display. Specifically, a reach line is formed by the "heart" symbol on the symbol display device 95A. After that, at the timing of the confirmation display where the special miss result is clearly shown (timing of tj11), the notification decorative part 512D of the special effect device 500D switches from the off state to the on state.

Once the confirmation display time has elapsed and timing tj12 occurs, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, and the notification decoration unit 511D (light-emitting units 521D-523D) switches from the lit state to the unlit state. In other words, the special miss notification effect ends while the notification decoration unit 512D remains lit.

According to the 15th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode B) via a special game state (open/close execution mode). If a special loss occurs, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level high-frequency support mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony.

In this embodiment, whether or not a jackpot result is determined before the start of the game round, and a jackpot announcement animation (corresponding to the "first special animation") is executed based on the result of that determination. Similarly, whether or not a special loss result is determined before the start of the game round, and a special loss announcement animation (corresponding to the "second special animation") is executed based on the result of that determination. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game from game rounds prior to the current game round. However, in a configuration where a transition to a special game state is triggered by a jackpot result, players who are expecting to transition to the special game state will focus on the jackpot announcement animation. If a jackpot announcement animation is started while a special loss announcement animation is being executed, it is assumed that the player's attention will likely shift from the special loss announcement animation to the jackpot announcement animation. This is a concern as it may hinder the effective performance of the special loss announcement animation in increasing the player's attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if a configuration is implemented that prevents the start of a new jackpot prediction animation when a special miss prediction animation is being performed, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of prediction animations described above.

As shown in this embodiment, configuring the system so that the jackpot announcement is restricted when the special miss announcement is executed is preferable in terms of easing the constraints on the presentation mode of the special miss announcement. In other words, not only when the special miss announcement is set to start immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed even when the execution conditions for the special miss announcement are internally met, the competition between the jackpot announcement and the special miss announcement can be effectively suppressed, and the constraints on the presentation mode of the second special announcement can be effectively relaxed.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the system so that the conditions for executing the special miss notification are met during the execution of the jackpot notification, opportunities for executing the special miss notification can be favorably secured. Furthermore, by stopping the jackpot notification when the conditions for executing the special miss notification are met during the execution of the jackpot notification, the player's attention can be drawn to the special miss notification. When stopping the jackpot notification as described above, stopping the jackpot notification after the start of the special miss notification allows the stopping behavior itself to become part of the performance, resulting in a practically preferable configuration for increasing the player's attention to the game.

As mentioned above, in a configuration where the pre-announcement animation begins in a game round prior to the relevant game round, it is assumed that the player's anticipation increases at the start of the pre-announcement animation. Therefore, when using both a jackpot pre-announcement animation and a special miss pre-announcement animation, staggering the timing of the start of each animation within a game round effectively prevents the start (beginning) of each animation from being missed. In this embodiment, in particular, the jackpot pre-announcement animation is configured to start at the beginning of the game round (during the shift), while the special miss pre-announcement animation is configured to start when the game round transitions to the confirmed display. This difference in timing contributes to increasing attention to the game in each part of the game round, from the first half to the second half.

In the event of a special losing result, the game immediately transitions to the normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game round. Therefore, the switch to the support mode tends to be more abrupt compared to when a jackpot is achieved. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and lead to unnecessary investment. In this embodiment, while a jackpot result is indicated by a symbol combination displayed on the symbol display device 95A, a special losing result is suggested by a special effect device 500D, which is provided separately from the symbol display device 95A. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between jackpot and special losing results, thereby effectively preventing the various inconveniences described above.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that whether or not a special loss will occur is determined in advance (pre-determined), and a special loss notification animation is executed according to the result of this pre-determined outcome. Since this special loss notification animation is executed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the pre-determined pending information, the player can predict in advance that a special loss may occur. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described.

In a configuration where the lottery result is announced by the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display device 95A, the attention given to that game round may rapidly decrease when the player is notified that they have not won (a normal losing result). Therefore, if a special losing notification effect is initiated under such circumstances—that is, if the special losing notification effect is initiated during the confirmation display corresponding to a normal losing result—this special losing notification effect can effectively suppress the rapid decrease in attention mentioned above.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the jackpot result is announced on the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the system to start the special miss notification effect during the confirmation display, when the need to focus on the symbol display device 95A decreases, in order to prevent players from missing the notification effect.

In a configuration where hold information is acquired based on ball entry into the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), the player can focus on the operating port 91A. Therefore, by positioning the special performance device 500D closer to the operating port 91A compared to the symbol display device 95A (specifically, the variable display area ME), the chances of missing the special miss notification can be effectively reduced.

Furthermore, in a configuration where hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), the player can pay attention to the operating port 91A and the movement of the game ball toward the operating port 91A. Therefore, by positioning the special performance device 500D behind the portion of the flow path (left route) where the game ball flows toward the operating port 91A, the chances of missing the special loss notification can be effectively reduced.

By configuring the special display device 500D so that the possibility of a special incorrect result is suggested in the pre-announcement decorative unit 511D before the notification decorative unit 512D of the special display device 500D announces (explicitly displays) that the result is incorrect, the chances of the notification in the notification decorative unit 512D being missed can be effectively reduced.

As described above, in a gaming machine where the game progresses based on balls entering the activation opening 91A, the player's attention tends to be drawn to the activation opening 91A. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by forming the special performance device 500D with the notification decoration section 511D (of the two notification decoration sections 511D and 512D) positioned closer to the activation opening 91A (the activation opening that may result in a special miss), the aforementioned effect of preventing players from missing a win can be further enhanced.

When the symbols are displayed variably on the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, by configuring the display of the notification decoration unit 511D to step up (switch the display mode) when the symbol combination is displayed as confirmed (stopped), it is possible to effectively prevent the player from missing this step-up.

Furthermore, while the display of a stopped symbol combination may momentarily decrease attention to the game, as shown in this embodiment, if the display mode of the notification decoration unit 511D switches when the symbol combination is displayed as confirmed (stopped), the decrease in attention to the game can be effectively suppressed.

In gaming machines where there is an upper limit (four) on the number of reserved balls acquired and stored based on ball entry into the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), adjustments may be made to temporarily refrain from launching balls in order to avoid unnecessary ball entries. Players making such adjustments pay attention to the movement of the game balls in and around the operating port 91A, or to the display in the reserved ball count display area. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by forming the special performance device 500D with the notification decoration section 511D closer to the reserved ball count display area, the aforementioned effect of preventing missed opportunities can be further enhanced.

<Variation 1>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the symbol display device 95A is configured to determine whether or not to perform a special miss notification effect at the timing (start timing) when transitioning to the confirmed display of the symbol combination, but it is not limited to this. For example, similar to the case where it is determined whether or not to perform a jackpot notification effect, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not to perform a special miss notification effect at the timing when a reserve is newly acquired (added) based on a ball entering the first operation port 91A.

Furthermore, the timing of deciding whether or not to perform the special miss notification effect and the timing of starting the special miss notification effect do not necessarily have to coincide. It is possible to have a configuration where the timing of deciding whether or not to perform the special miss notification effect and the timing of starting the special miss notification effect are staggered; that is, a configuration where the special miss notification effect can start later than the decision to perform it. For example, it is possible to have a configuration where the decision to perform the special miss notification effect is made while the symbols are changing on the symbol display device 95A, and the special miss notification effect starts while the confirmed symbols are being displayed on the symbol display device 95A.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the step-up of the special miss notification effect by the notification effect device 00D occurs while the confirmed symbols (symbol combinations) are being displayed on the symbol display device 95A. However, it is also possible to configure the step-up of the special miss notification effect to occur while the symbols are being displayed in a variable state on the symbol display device 95A, either as an alternative or in addition to this.

<Example 3>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the special loss notification effect for the predetermined game round is avoided if a game round corresponding to a reach display can be executed before a predetermined game round. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may also be configured so that the special loss notification effect for the predetermined game round can be executed regardless of whether or not a game round corresponding to a reach display is executed before a predetermined game round.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, if a game round corresponding to a jackpot result can be played before a predetermined game round, the special loss notification animation for that predetermined game round will be avoided. However, the system is not limited to this. The system may also be configured so that the special loss notification animation for that predetermined game round can be played regardless of whether a game round corresponding to a jackpot result is played before a predetermined game round.

<Modification 4>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the execution period of the jackpot notification effect and the execution period of the special miss notification effect may partially overlap, but the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the execution period of the jackpot notification effect and the execution period of the special miss notification effect do not overlap.

<Example 5>
It is also possible to configure the system so that the jackpot notification animation and the special miss notification animation can start while one of them is in progress. For example, the system may be configured so that the special miss notification animation can start while the jackpot notification animation is in progress, but the jackpot notification animation cannot start while the special miss notification animation is in progress, or so that the jackpot notification animation can start while the special miss notification animation is in progress, but the special miss notification animation cannot start while the jackpot notification animation is in progress.

<Modification 6>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the special performance device 500D is configured to announce in a preceding game round that a special miss result, which is one of the triggers for transitioning to the fourth normal game state, will occur. Alternatively, or in addition to this, the special performance device 500D is also configured to announce in a preceding game round that reaching the ceiling, which is one of the triggers for transitioning to the fourth normal game state, will occur. Specifically, in a game round executed before the game round in which the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state, the first light-emitting unit 521D → second light-emitting unit 522D → third light-emitting unit 523D are lit in that order as the game round progresses, and the notification decoration unit 512D is switched to the lit state in the game round immediately before transitioning to the fourth normal game state (for example, at the confirmation display timing).

<Example 7>
The special non-winning animation shown in the 15th embodiment above is configured to be executed by a special animation device 500D, which is a dedicated animation device, but it is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the special non-winning animation to be executed by a symbol display device 95A, similar to the jackpot animation. For example, the same animation executed by the special animation device 500D may be executed by the symbol display device 95A. Specifically, it is also possible to configure the symbol display device 95A to display an image that mimics the special animation device 500D, and to execute the special non-winning animation by changing the display mode of this image through steps 1 to 3, etc.

<Difference 8>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the conditions for starting the jackpot announcement are not met during the special miss announcement, and the conditions for starting the special miss announcement are not met during the jackpot announcement, but the system is not limited to this. The configuration may also be such that the conditions for starting the jackpot announcement can be met even during the special miss announcement, and the conditions for starting the special miss announcement can be met even during the jackpot announcement. For example, if the conditions for starting the other announcement are met while one announcement has already started, the configuration may be such that the other announcement starts at the latest step reached at the end of the first announcement, assuming that the other announcement has been progressing behind the scenes.

<Difference 9>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the configuration prioritizes the special miss notification over the jackpot notification, but the invention is not limited to this. The configuration may also be such that the jackpot notification is restricted when the special miss notification is being performed, and the special miss notification is restricted when the jackpot notification is being performed.

<Modification 10>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the jackpot announcement sequence is interrupted if a special miss announcement sequence is initiated during the jackpot announcement sequence, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot announcement sequence may be interrupted as soon as the special miss announcement sequence is initiated, or the jackpot announcement sequence may not be interrupted, but a new jackpot announcement sequence may be prevented from being executed.

<Variation 11>
It is also possible to configure the system to prevent the above-mentioned jackpot prediction from starting not only from the reserved information that triggered the start of the special miss prediction, but also from other reserved information that follows that reserved information (other reserved information that has been stored).

<Modified example 12>
In the 15th embodiment described above, a configuration was exemplified in which a jackpot announcement animation is started at the start of a game round (during shift) and a special miss announcement animation is started when the game transitions to a confirmed win display. However, the start timing of the jackpot announcement animation and the special miss announcement animation in a game round can be changed as desired. However, in order to effectively maximize the effect of increasing attention due to the difference in timing, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the start timing of each announcement animation is divided between the first half and the second half of a game round.

<Modification 13>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the special performance device 500D is used to perform a performance that suggests a special losing result. However, instead of this, or in addition, the special performance device 500D may be used to perform a performance that suggests reaching the ceiling. In such a configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by providing multiple game counts that result in reaching the ceiling, as in the other embodiments.

<Embodiment 16>
In the 15th embodiment described above, a special pre-announcement effect (special loss pre-announcement effect) is executed in a game round prior to the game round in which a special loss result occurs. In this embodiment, the configuration related to this special loss pre-announcement effect differs from that of the 15th embodiment. Specifically, in the 15th embodiment, even if the special loss pre-announcement effect occurs, the game ends in a normal loss result and a special loss result is not necessarily confirmed. However, in this embodiment, the special loss pre-announcement effect is configured to confirm a special loss result at the time the special loss pre-announcement effect occurs (confirmation effect). Furthermore, in order to enhance the impact of the effect in order to make the special loss pre-announcement effect function as a confirmation effect, the configuration related to the pre-announcement effect device has been changed. The pre-announcement effect device in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 157 and 158. Figure 157 is a front view of the game board unit, and Figure 158 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the pre-announcement effect device.

(Special performance device 500E)
As shown in Figure 157, in a front view of the game board unit 80E, the special performance device 500E is positioned in a location that overlaps with the right route formed in the game area PE, more specifically below the count display unit 88D described above and to the side of the operation port unit 82A (more specifically the first operation port 91A).

As shown in Figure 158, the special performance device 500E comprises a performance mechanism 600E that performs a special losing prediction effect, and a base that fixes the performance mechanism 600E to the back block of the game board unit 80E. When the game board 80aE and the back block are assembled (see Figure 7), the performance mechanism 600E faces the back of the game board 80aE with only a small gap separating them. The game board 80aE is transparent, allowing the player to see the performance mechanism 600E through the game board 80aE from the front of the game machine.

The performance mechanism 600E comprises a light-emitting unit 630E and a case 660E that houses the light-emitting unit 630E. The light-emitting unit 630E consists of a light-emitting substrate 640E on which multiple light-emitting elements 641E (specifically LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651E that holds the light-emitting substrate 640E so that the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements 641E faces the front of the gaming machine. Specifically, both the light-emitting substrate 640E and the holder 651E are disc-shaped, and the light-emitting substrate 640E is fixed to the holder 651E by fitting into a recess formed in the center of the holder 651E. The light-emitting substrate 640E is connected to the notification/performance control device 140 via connection terminals such as slip rings, and the notification/performance control device 140 performs light emission control (switching between on and off states) of the light-emitting elements 641E.

The case 660E consists of a rear cover 680E that covers the light-emitting unit 630E from the rear, and a front cover 670E that covers the light-emitting unit 630E from the front, which are combined front and back. The front cover 670E is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the light from the light-emitting element 641E is emitted from the front cover 670E through the game board 80aE towards the front of the game machine.

The front cover 670E has a disc-shaped opposing portion 671E that faces the back of the light-emitting substrate 640E and the game board 80aE, and a cylindrical shaft portion 673E that rises rearward from the opposing portion 671E. A bearing hole 652E is formed in the center of the light-emitting unit 630E (light-emitting substrate 640E and holder 651E), penetrating from front to back. The shaft portion 673E is inserted through the bearing hole 652E, allowing the light-emitting unit 630E to rotate around the shaft portion 673E. In other words, the light-emitting unit 630E is housed in the case 660E in a rotatable state. Hereinafter, the central axis that serves as the rotation center of the light-emitting unit 630E will be referred to as "central axis CL1".

A circular stopper portion 672E is formed on the back of the opposing portion 671E, which abuts against the holder 651E of the light-emitting unit 630E from the front. This stopper portion 672E restricts the forward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630E. In this state, with the light-emitting unit 630E in contact with the stopper portion 672E, a gap is maintained between the light-emitting substrate 640E and the back of the opposing portion 671E, thus preventing contact between the light-emitting element 641E and the opposing portion 671E. Furthermore, a protrusion formed in the center of the holder 651E abuts against the back cover 680E, and the rearward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630E is restricted by the back cover 680E.

The rear cover 680E houses a drive mechanism 690E that rotates the light-emitting unit 630E. The drive mechanism 690E consists of a motor 691E as the drive unit and gears 653E and 692E that transmit power from the motor 691E to the light-emitting unit 630E. The motor 691E is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the motor 691E is driven and controlled by the notification/performance control device 140.

In this embodiment, the front cover 670E is a decorative cover in which a plurality of decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed on the front portion of the opposing part 671E. The decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are arranged in the rotational direction of the light-emitting unit 630E, and the positional relationship between these decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E and the light-emitting body 641E changes as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1. The decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E formed on the front cover 670E will be further explained below with reference to Figures 159 and 160. Figure 159(a) is a front view of the special effect device 500E, Figure 159(b) is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the passage path of the light-emitting body 641E and the light-diffusing and non-light-diffusing parts, and Figure 160 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the light-emitting unit 630E. Note that the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are omitted from Figure 160.

As shown in Figure 159(a), the opposing portion 671E is composed of a flat portion 701E and the decorative portions described above: the first decorative portion 711E, the second decorative portion 721E, and the third decorative portion 731E.

The first decorative section 711E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 713E that protrude forward from the flat section 701E. Each annular protrusion 713E is circular in shape centered on a central axis CL5 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL5. Small gaps (annular grooves 714E) are provided between each annular protrusion 713E, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL5.

The second decorative section 721E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 723E that protrude forward from the flat section 701E. Each annular protrusion 723E is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL6 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 724E) are provided between each annular protrusion 723E, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL5.

The third decorative section 731E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 733E that protrude forward from the flat section 701E. Each annular protrusion 733E is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL7 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 734E) are provided between each annular protrusion 733E, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL6.

While the first decorative section 711E, the second decorative section 721E, and the third decorative section 731E differ in their configuration—specifically, the distances from the central axis CL1 to the respective central axes CL5 to CL7 are different, and the diameters (inner and outer diameters) of the annular projection 713E of the first decorative section 711E, the annular projection 723E of the second decorative section 721E, and the annular projection 733E of the third decorative section 731E are different—their basic structure is the same. The following description will focus on the detailed structure of the first decorative section 711E, but the detailed structures of the second decorative section 721E and the third decorative section 731E are similar.

As shown in Figure 160, both the side surface 718E of the annular projection 713E (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 and the outer surface facing the opposite direction) are oriented in a direction intersecting the central axis CL5, and the annular projection 713E is formed to taper towards its tip (front end). When light from the light-emitting element 641E is irradiated onto the annular projection 713E of the first decorative part 711E, at least a portion of the light is diffused to other annular projections 713E and annular grooves 714E before being emitted forward through these annular projections 713E and annular grooves 714E towards the front of the gaming machine (see Figure 160(b)).

The direction of this diffusion is the radial direction (orthogonal direction) of the central axis CL5, so the light emission pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine will be linear (more specifically, band-shaped) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5 (see region BE in Figure 161). In contrast, when light from the light emitter 641E is irradiated onto the planar portion 701E (including the partitioned portion 715E partitioned by the annular protrusion 713E), the light passes directly through the opposing portion 671E and is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine with diffusion suppressed (see Figure 160(a)). In other words, the light emission pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine will be point-like (see region SE in Figure 161). In the following description, the annular protrusions 713E, 723E, 733E and the annular grooves 714E, 724E, 734E will be referred to as "light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, 732E," and the flat section 701E and the partitioned sections 715E, 725E, 735E will be referred to as "non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E" as appropriate.

The light-emitting element 641E revolves (displaces) as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates. The orbit PL of the light-emitting element 641E is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is separated from the central axis CL5 of the first decorative section 711E. Therefore, the rotation of the light-emitting unit 630E changes the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis LA of the light-emitting element 641E, causing the light-emitting element 641E to displace so as to straddle (cross behind) the light-diffusing section 712E. As a result, the linear (more specifically, band-shaped) light-emitting pattern that appears on the first decorative section 711E changes its position and orientation within the light-diffusing section 712E (see Figure 161).

Here, referring to Figure 159(b), the positional relationship between the trajectory PL of the light-emitting element 641E and the light-diffusing and non-light-diffusing sections will be explained. In Figure 159(b), the areas with dot hatching are the light-diffusing sections, and the areas without dot hatching are the non-light-diffusing sections.

First, the light-emitting elements 641E shown in this embodiment are broadly classified into first light-emitting elements 641aE, second light-emitting elements 641bE, third light-emitting elements 641cE, fourth light-emitting elements 641dE, fifth light-emitting elements 641eE, and sixth light-emitting elements 641fE, depending on their distance from the central axis CL1. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 increases in the following order: first light-emitting element 641aE < second light-emitting element 641bE < third light-emitting element 641cE < fourth light-emitting element 641dE < fifth light-emitting element 641eE < sixth light-emitting element 641fE.

The first light-emitting element 641aE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, the orbit PLa of the first light-emitting element 641aE overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light emitted by the first light-emitting element 641aE changes repeatedly in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 715E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The second light-emitting element 641bE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, its orbit PLb overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E of the first decorative section 711E, and the light-diffusing section 732E and non-light-diffusing section 701E of the third decorative section 731E, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light emitted by the second light-emitting element 641bE changes repeatedly in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 715E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The third light-emitting element 641cE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLc of the third light-emitting element 641cE overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E and non-light-diffusing section 735E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The light source (recipient) of the light emitted by the third light-emitting element 641cE changes in the following order as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates: non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 715E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 722E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 735E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E.

The fourth light-emitting element 641dE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLd of the fourth light-emitting element 641dE overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E and non-light-diffusing section 725E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E and non-light-diffusing section 735E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The light source (recipient) of the light emitted by the fourth light-emitting element 641dE repeatedly changes in the following order as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates: non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 715E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 722E → non-light diffusion section 725E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 735E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E.

The fifth light-emitting element 641eE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, its orbit PLe overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light emitted by the fifth light-emitting element 641eE changes repeatedly in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 722E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The sixth light-emitting element 641fE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, its orbit PLf overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light irradiation (supply) by the fifth light-emitting element 641eE repeatedly changes in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 722E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

Furthermore, for at least some of the light-emitting elements that supply light to the first decorative section 711E (light diffusion section 712E) (the fourth light-emitting element 641dE, the fifth light-emitting element 641eE, and the sixth light-emitting element 641fE), the diameters of the orbitals PLd, PLe, and PLf are larger than the diameter (inner and outer diameter) of the first decorative section 711E, and for all of the light-emitting elements that supply light to the second decorative section 721E (light diffusion section 722E) (the third light-emitting element 641cE, the fourth light-emitting element 641dE, the fifth light-emitting element 641eE, and the sixth light-emitting element), For 641fE, the diameters of the orbitals PLc, PLd, PLE, and PLf are larger than the diameter (inner and outer diameter) of the second decorative section 721E. Furthermore, for at least some of the light-emitting elements that supply light to the third decorative section 731E (light-diffusing section 732E) (third light-emitting element 641cE, fourth light-emitting element 641dE, fifth light-emitting element 641eE, and sixth light-emitting element 641fE), the diameters of the orbitals PLc, PLd, PLE, and PLf are larger than the diameter (inner and outer diameter) of the third decorative section 731E.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 162, the special miss notification effect by the special effect device 500E will be explained. If a reserve corresponding to a special miss result is acquired based on a win in the first operating port 91A, the player may be notified by the special miss notification effect that a special miss result will occur in the game round preceding the game round corresponding to that reserve. In the special miss notification effect, the rotation of the light-emitting unit 630E begins at the timing of the confirmed display of the symbol combination in the preceding game round. After its rotation speed reaches a steady rotation speed during the confirmed display, all light-emitting elements 641E are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the special effect device 500E displays a dotted light pattern and a linear (more specifically, a band-shaped) light pattern. This special miss notification effect will continue until the transition to the fourth normal game state. Furthermore, regarding the positional relationship between the light-emitting element 641A and the decorative elements 711E, 721E, and 731E, it is stipulated that when a dot-like light pattern is displayed by one of the light-emitting elements 641A, a linear (more specifically, band-like) light pattern is displayed by at least one of the other light-emitting elements 641A. In other words, during the special miss notification effect, the display is configured so that dot-like and linear (more specifically, band-like) light patterns are mixed at any rotation angle.

Here, after the light-emitting element 641A switches to the illuminated state, the position and shape of the light-emitting pattern change as the rotation angle of the light-emitting unit 630E changes, while the light-emitting element 641E remains illuminated. For example, as shown in Figures 162(a) → 162(b) → 162(c) → 162(d). In particular, the displacement speed of the pattern increases as the distance from the central axis CL1 to the light-emitting element 641E increases. However, patterns farther from the central axis CL1 are displayed for a longer distance compared to patterns closer to it, thus suppressing a significant decrease in visibility compared to light-emitting patterns displayed closer to the central axis CL1.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E, the light-emitting element 641E is displaced so as to pass through a predetermined trajectory PL that includes positions where light is irradiated onto the light-diffusing parts 712E, 722E, and 732E of the front cover 670E (corresponding to the "decorative cover" and "cover") and positions where light is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing parts 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E of the front cover 670E. The appearance (light-emitting pattern) of the special performance device 500D, which is a light-emitting performance device, can be greatly changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit 630E (light-emitting element 641E) is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing parts 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E or onto the light-diffusing parts 712E, 722E, and 732E. This makes it possible to suitably increase the level of attention given to the light-emitting performance using the special performance device 500D. When performing such a light-emitting effect, it is assumed that any change in the position of the decorated front cover 670E could reduce the appearance of the special effect device 500D and diminish the impact of the light-emitting effect. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment effectively suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E, one of the light-emitting units 630E and the front cover 670E. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting unit 630E rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly changed without interruption, which is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the light-emitting unit 630E to rotate while the light-emitting element 641E remains lit, it is possible to seamlessly change not only the light-emitting pattern but also the light-emitting location (position), further enhancing the aforementioned visual effects.

On the front cover 670E, the light-diffusing section is formed by a textured, uneven surface. This configuration effectively suppresses the factor that the presence of the light-diffusing section detracts from the appearance of the front cover 670E. The light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, and 732E have different arrangements in the rotational direction. The light-emitting element 641E is configured to displace from a position illuminating one of the multiple light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, and 732E to another position illuminating a different light-diffusing section, via a position illuminating the non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E, as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates. By configuring the displacement from one light-diffusing section to another via a position corresponding to the non-light-diffusing section, the contrast when changing the light emission pattern can be enhanced.

The light-emitting unit 630E is configured such that if any of the multiple light-emitting elements 641E are illuminating the non-light-diffusing area, then one of the other light-emitting elements 641E will illuminate the light-diffusing area. This configuration allows for the simultaneous display of light-emitting patterns with and without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the visual appeal of the light-emitting effect and effectively achieving the attention-grabbing effect described above.

As shown in this embodiment, by forming irregularities on the front side of the opposing portion 671E of the front cover 670E that provide light diffusion and decorative functions, and making the back side flat, the operating gap between the light-emitting unit 630E and the front cover 670E (specifically the opposing portion 671E) can be reduced, thereby promoting the thinning of the special effect device 500D.

The light irradiated onto the light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E is diffused in the direction of the arrangement of the linear light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E (in a direction intersecting a predetermined axis). As a result, the light emission pattern becomes a band-like shape extending in a direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-like light emission pattern is displaced by the operation of the light emission unit 630E, and this displacement enhances the visual impact of the light emission effect. This effectively increases the level of attention the player receives during gameplay.

As shown in this embodiment, if the optical axis is displaced so as to straddle multiple annular protrusions 713E, the annular protrusions 713E intersecting the optical axis can cause changes in the light diffusion pattern (luminescence pattern). Diversifying the luminescence pattern in this way is desirable for suppressing monotony in the luminescence effect.

In configurations where the annular protrusions 713E, which are decorative elements with uneven surfaces, also function as light diffusers, it is anticipated that the visual impact will be reduced when the front cover 670E moves. In this embodiment, however, the configuration involves operating the light-emitting unit 630E located behind the front cover 670E, thus avoiding such an inconvenience.

The light-emitting unit 630E is rotatable, allowing for continuous and repeated changes in its illumination pattern. This is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the illumination effect, thereby effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention. In particular, as shown in this embodiment, configuring the central axis CL1, which is the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit 630E, to be spaced apart from the central axes CL5 to CL7 and parallel to those axes is preferable for creating changes in the illumination pattern accompanying rotation.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the side surface 718E of the annular protrusion 713E, etc., to be inclined with respect to the central axis CL5, etc., a portion of the light from the light-emitting element 641E can be reflected and guided to other annular protrusions 713E. This is preferable for increasing the overall length of the band-shaped light-emitting pattern and emphasizing the visual difference (point-like/band-like).

Between the annular protrusions 713E, the bottom of the annular groove 714E, which acts as a "flat surface," is formed, and the rotational trajectory through which the light-emitting element 641E passes and the annular groove 714E are formed to overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. With this configuration, the shape of the light-emitting pattern (e.g., the overall length) can be changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting element 641E is irradiated onto the side surface 718E or onto the bottom of the annular groove 714E. In other words, the shape of the light-emitting pattern changes in accordance with the change in its position. Such a configuration is preferable in suppressing monotony in the light-emitting effect.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the bottom width (groove width) of each annular groove 714E to be different, it is possible to more effectively generate changes in the shape of the light-emitting pattern (e.g., the overall length) depending on the object being illuminated.

Furthermore, the length of the overlap between the trajectory of the light-emitting element 1 and the light-diffusing section as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates is different from the length of the overlap between the trajectory of other light-emitting elements as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates and the light-diffusing section. This configuration allows for a suitable implementation of different rotation ranges (angles) within which the light-emitting pattern is displayed in the light-diffusing section 1. In configurations where the cover's decoration functions as a light-diffusing section, there may be strong constraints on the shape and size of the light-diffusing section in order to achieve its decorative function. Therefore, by configuring the light-emitting section 1 as shown in this embodiment, allowing multiple light-emitting elements to pass behind it, and then differentiating their rotation ranges, the visual appeal of the light-emitting effect can be improved while effectively eliminating the resulting inconveniences.

<Variation 1>
In the 16th embodiment described above, the rotational position (phase) between the light-emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (specifically, the opposing part 671E) is changed by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E. However, this does not negate the possibility of changing this configuration and changing the rotational position (phase) between the light-emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (specifically, the opposing part 671E) by rotating the case 660E.

Furthermore, while the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are configured to be visible from the front of the game machine, they may also be formed to be invisible from the front of the game machine. For example, a translucent sticker with light-transmitting properties could be placed on the front or back of the game board 80aE, thereby obstructing the visibility of the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E, while allowing the light from the light-emitting element 641E to be visible from the front of the game machine. In the case where the case 660E is configured to rotate as described above, making the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E invisible effectively prevents the player from sensing the start of the special miss notification effect (lighting effect) before it actually begins, thus reducing the impact of the effect.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 16th embodiment described above, the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed to be circular when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. However, the specific shape of the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E can be arbitrarily changed as long as the luminous pattern is linear and at least one of its orientation and position can be changed. For example, the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E can be made elliptical or polygonal when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, while non-light-diffusing sections 715E, 725E, and 735E are provided in the central parts of the decorative sections 711E, 721E, and 731E, the design is not limited to this. These non-light-diffusing sections 715E, 725E, and 735E can also be omitted.

<Example 3>
In the 16th embodiment described above, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E was formed to increase with increasing distance from the central axis CL5, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E may be formed to decrease with increasing distance from the central axis CL5, or the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E may be formed to be constant regardless of the distance from the central axis CL5. Similar modifications may be made to the other annular grooves 724E and 734E, or the groove width setting patterns may be different for the annular grooves 714E, 724E, and 734E.

<Modification 4>
In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the annular protrusions 713E, 723E, and 733E were formed such that their cross-sections were approximately triangular, but the invention is not limited to this. The cross-sections of the annular protrusions 713E, 723E, and 733E can be arbitrarily changed as long as they can perform the function of guiding at least a portion of the light from the light-emitting element 641E to adjacent annular protrusions by reflecting it backward. For example, they can be formed to be approximately semicircular.

<Embodiment 17>
In this embodiment, a new special effect device 500F is constructed by applying the configuration of the effect mechanism 600E shown in the 16th embodiment to the special effect device 500D shown in the 15th embodiment. The following explanation will focus on the differences between the special effect device 500F in this embodiment and the 15th embodiment, with reference to Figures 163 and 164. Figure 163 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the special effect device 500F, and Figure 164 is a front view of the special effect device 500F.

(Special production device 500F)
As shown in Figure 163, the special performance device 500F comprises a performance mechanism 600F, a base for fixing the performance mechanism 600F to the back block of the game board unit 80F, and a decorative sticker 501F fixed to the back of the game board 80aF. When the game board 80aF and the back block are assembled (see Figure 7), the performance mechanism 600F faces the decorative sticker 501F of the game board 80aF with only a small gap between them. The game board 80aF is transparent, allowing the player to see the special performance device 500F, or more specifically the decorative sticker 501F, through the game board 80aF from the front of the game machine.

The performance mechanism 600F comprises a light-emitting unit 630F and a synthetic resin case 660F that houses the light-emitting unit 630F. The light-emitting unit 630F consists of a light-emitting substrate 640F on which multiple light-emitting elements 641F (specifically LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651F that holds the light-emitting substrate 640F so that the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements 641F faces the front of the gaming machine. Specifically, both the light-emitting substrate 640F and the holder 651F are disc-shaped, and the light-emitting substrate 640F is fixed to the holder 651F by fitting into a recess formed in the center of the holder 651F. The light-emitting substrate 640F is connected to the notification/performance control device 140 via connection terminals such as slip rings, and the notification/performance control device 140 performs light emission control (switching between on and off states) of the light-emitting elements 641F.

The case 660F consists of a rear cover 680F that covers the light-emitting unit 630F from the rear, and a front cover 670F that covers the light-emitting unit 630F from the front, which are combined front and back. The front cover 670F is light-transmitting, and light from the light-emitting element 641F is emitted towards the front of the game machine through the front cover 670F → decorative sticker 501F → game board 80aF.

The front cover 670F has a disc-shaped opposing portion 671F that faces the light-emitting substrate 640F and the decorative seal 501F, and a cylindrical shaft portion 673F that rises rearward from the opposing portion 671F. A bearing hole 652F is formed in the center of the light-emitting unit 630F (light-emitting substrate 640F and holder 651F), extending from front to back. The shaft portion 673F is inserted through the bearing hole 652F, allowing the light-emitting unit 630F to rotate around the shaft portion 673F. In other words, the light-emitting unit 630F is housed in the case 660F in a rotatable state. Hereinafter, the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit 630F will be referred to as "central axis CL1".

A circular stopper portion 672F is formed on the back of the opposing portion 671F, which abuts against the holder 651F of the light-emitting unit 630F from the front. This stopper portion 672F restricts the forward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630F. In this state, with the light-emitting unit 630F in contact with the stopper portion 672F, a gap is maintained between the light-emitting substrate 640F and the back of the opposing portion 671F, thus avoiding contact between the light-emitting element 641F and the opposing portion 671F. Furthermore, a protrusion formed in the center of the holder 651F abuts against the back cover 680F, and the rearward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630F is restricted by the back cover 680F.

The rear cover 680F houses a drive mechanism 690F that rotates the light-emitting unit 630F. The drive mechanism 690F consists of a motor 691F as the drive unit and gears 653F and 692F that transmit power from the motor 691F to the light-emitting unit 630F. The motor 691F is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the motor 691F is driven and controlled by the notification/effect control device 140.

As shown in Figure 164, in this embodiment, a plurality of bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are formed on the front surface of the opposing portion 671F of the front cover 670F, bulging toward the decorative seal 501F. In other words, the front surface of the opposing portion 671F is broadly divided into a flat portion 701F and bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F that bulge from the flat portion 701F. The bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are aligned in the rotational direction of the light-emitting unit 630F, and the positional relationship between these bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F and the light-emitting body 641F changes as the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1. The bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F formed on the front cover 670F will be described in more detail below. Note that the bulging sections 711F, 721F, and 731F are omitted from Figure 163.

The first bulge 711F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 713F that protrude forward from the flat portion 701F. Each annular protrusion 713F is circular in shape centered on a central axis CL5 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL5. Small gaps (annular grooves 714F) are provided between each annular protrusion 713F, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL5.

The second bulge 721F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 723F that protrude forward from the flat portion 701F. Each annular protrusion 723F is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL6 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 724F) are provided between each annular protrusion 723F, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further they are from the central axis CL5.

The third bulge 731F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 733F that protrude forward from the flat portion 701F. Each annular protrusion 733F is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL7 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 734F) are provided between each annular protrusion 733F, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL6.

Furthermore, the first bulge 711F, the second bulge 721F, and the third bulge 731F are arranged such that the distance from the central axis CL1 to the respective central axes CL5 to CL7 is the same, and their external shapes are also unified. The following description will focus on the detailed structure of the first bulge 711F, but the detailed structures of the second bulge 721F and the third bulge 731F are similar.

The sides of the annular projection 713F (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 and the outer surface facing the opposite direction) are both oriented in a direction intersecting the central axis CL5, and the annular projection 713F is formed to taper towards its tip (front end). When light from the light-emitting element 641F is irradiated onto the annular projection 713F of the first bulge 711F, at least a portion of the light is diffused to other annular projections 713F and annular grooves 714F before being emitted forward through these annular projections 713F and annular grooves 714F towards the front of the gaming machine.

The diffusion direction is the radial direction (perpendicular direction) of the central axis CL5. Therefore, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the light emission pattern is linear (band-shaped) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. In contrast, when light from the light-emitting element 641F is irradiated onto the planar portion 701F (including the partitioned portion 715F demarcated by the annular protrusion 713F), the light passes directly through the opposing portion 671F and is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine with diffusion suppressed. In other words, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the light emission pattern becomes dot-like. The principle of this change in the light emission pattern is the same as in the 16th embodiment.

In the following description, the annular protrusions 713F, 723F, 733F and the annular grooves 714F, 724F, 734F will be referred to as "light-diffusing sections 712F, 722F, 732F," while the flat section 701F and the partitioned sections 715F, 725F, 735F will be appropriately referred to as "non-light-diffusing sections 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F."

The light-emitting element 641F revolves (displaces) as the light-emitting unit 630F rotates. The orbit PL of the light-emitting element 641F is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is separated from the central axis CL5 of the first bulge 711F. Therefore, the rotation of the light-emitting unit 630F changes the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis of the light-emitting element 641F, causing the light-emitting element 641F to displace so as to straddle (cross behind) the light-diffusing section 712F. As a result, the linear light-emitting pattern that appears on the first bulge 711F changes in its position and orientation within the light-diffusing section 712F.

(Decorative sticker 501F)
Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the decorative sticker 501F attached to the back of the game board 80aF. The decorative sticker 501F is a transparent sticker material that transmits light and is provided with a decorative section 511F for announcements that executes a special losing announcement effect and a decorative section 512F for notification that it is a special losing result. The decorative section 511F corresponds to the decorative section 511D in the 15th embodiment, and the decorative section 512F corresponds to the decorative section 512D in the 15th embodiment.

The pre-announcement decorative unit 511F and the notification decorative unit 512F are arranged side by side, with the former on the left and the latter on the right. The pre-announcement decorative unit 511F is positioned closer to the hold count display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the operation port unit 82A than the notification decorative unit 512F. The distance from the first operation port 91A, which may result in a special miss, to the special performance device 500F (specifically the pre-announcement decorative unit 511F) is shorter than the distance from the first operation port 91A to the pattern variation display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A.

The notification decorative unit 512F can be switched between an illuminated state and an off state. When a special losing result occurs, it switches from the off state to the illuminated state to provide the notification. During high-frequency support mode A, it remains illuminated, and switches to the off state when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold and high-frequency support mode A ends.

The warning decoration section 511F consists of a blue first warning section 521F, a yellow second warning section 522F, and a red third warning section 523F. These three sections can be individually switched between illuminated and unilluminated states. Note that the first, second, and third warning sections 521F, 522F, and 523F correspond to the first, second, and third light-emitting sections 521D, 522D, and 523D shown in the 15th embodiment.

The special miss notification sequence has three steps: Step 1, where only the first notification unit 521F is lit; Step 2, where the second notification unit 522F is lit; and Step 3, where the third notification unit 523F is lit. The probability of a special miss occurs changes as the game progresses through these steps. For example, in Step 1, the probability of a special miss is 30%, in Step 2, it's 50%, and in Step 3, it's 80%. In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a special miss, the notification decoration unit 512F lights up to indicate a special miss. In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a normal miss, the notification decoration unit 511F and notification decoration unit 512F turn off to indicate that a special miss did not occur.

The specific configuration of the special miss notification effect shown in this embodiment is the same as in the 15th embodiment. For example, the above steps do not necessarily advance when the game round progresses; even if the game round progresses, the steps may not advance. Also, the steps do not necessarily advance one by one; some steps may be skipped. Incidentally, even in the case of a special miss result, the special miss notification effect does not necessarily occur; the notification decorative unit 512F may switch to the illuminated state without going through the special miss notification effect.

This embodiment differs from the 16th embodiment in that the visually similar animation to the special miss result confirmation animation shown in the 16th embodiment is executed as a teasing animation indicating that the special miss notification animation is about to begin (that it is a premonition). The following describes the ingenuity for executing two types of animations (special miss notification animation and teasing animation) using the special animation device 500F, with reference to Figure 164.

The light-emitting elements 641F shown in this embodiment are broadly classified into first light-emitting elements 641aF, second light-emitting elements 641bF, third light-emitting elements 641cF, fourth light-emitting elements 641dF, fifth light-emitting elements 641eF, and sixth light-emitting elements 641fF, depending on their distance from the central axis CL1. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 increases in the following order: first light-emitting element 641aF < second light-emitting element 641bF < third light-emitting element 641cF < fourth light-emitting element 641dF < fifth light-emitting element 641eF < sixth light-emitting element 641fF.

The first light-emitting element 641aF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, the entire orbit PLa of the first light-emitting element 641aF overlaps with the non-light-diffusing portion 701E of the front cover 670 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first light-emitting element 641aF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the trajectory PLa overlaps with the notification decorative section 512F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, which is a predetermined rotation position, the first light-emitting element 641aF is positioned behind the notification decorative section 512F. Note that the light-emitting unit 630F remains in standby position when the aforementioned promotional effects are not being performed.

The second light-emitting element 641bF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, its orbit PLb overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the second light-emitting element 641bF is lit, the target of the light emitted (supplyed) by the second light-emitting element 641bF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 701E.

Furthermore, the second light-emitting element 641bF is positioned so that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the trajectory PLb overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F, the second warning section 522F, and the third warning section 523F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, the second light-emitting element 641bF is positioned behind the third warning section 523F. By illuminating the second light-emitting element 641bF while it is in standby position, the third warning section 523F becomes illuminated.

The third light-emitting element 641cF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLc of the third light-emitting element 641cF overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F and non-light-diffusing section 715F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F and non-light-diffusing section 725F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F and non-light-diffusing section 735F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the third light-emitting element 641cF is lit, the target of the light emitted by the third light-emitting element 641cF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 715F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 725F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 735F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 701E.

Furthermore, the third light-emitting element 641cF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the track PLc overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F, the second notification section 522F, and the third notification section 523F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, the third light-emitting element 641cF is positioned behind the second notification section 522F and behind the notification decoration section 512F. By illuminating the third light-emitting element 641cF on the second notification section 522F side while in standby position, the second notification section 522F becomes illuminated. Also, to illuminate the notification decoration section 512F, the third light-emitting element 641cF on the notification decoration section 512F side is illuminated when the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position.

The fourth light-emitting element 641dF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLd of the fourth light-emitting element 641dF overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F and non-light-diffusing section 715F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F and non-light-diffusing section 725F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F and non-light-diffusing section 735F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is lit, the target of the light emitted by the fourth light-emitting element 641dF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 715F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 725F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 735F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 701E.

Furthermore, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the track PLd overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F, the second notification section 522F, and the third notification section 523F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is positioned behind the notification decoration section 512F. When the notification decoration section 512F is illuminated, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is illuminated with the light-emitting unit 630F in standby position.

The fifth light-emitting element 641eF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, its orbit PLe overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is lit, the target of the light emitted (supplied) by the fifth light-emitting element 641eF can be repeatedly changed in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 701F.

Furthermore, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the trajectory PLe overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F and the first warning section 521F. When the rotation position of the light-emitting unit 630F is in the standby position, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is positioned behind the notification decoration section 512F. When the notification decoration section 512F is illuminated, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is illuminated with the light-emitting unit 630F in the standby position.

The sixth light-emitting element 641fF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, its orbit PLf overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the sixth light-emitting element 641fF is lit, the target of the light emitted (supply) from the sixth light-emitting element 641fF can be repeatedly changed in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 701F.

Furthermore, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of its trajectory PLf overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F and the first warning section 521F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in the standby position, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF is positioned behind the first warning section 521F and behind the notification decoration section 512F. By illuminating the sixth light-emitting element 641fF on the side of the first warning section 521F while in the standby position, the first warning section 521F becomes illuminated. Also, to illuminate the notification decoration section 512F, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF on the side of the notification decoration section 512F is illuminated while the light-emitting unit 630F is in the standby position.

In the 15th embodiment described above, the system is configured to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notification animation at the timing of the transition to the confirmed display, and if it is decided to execute it, the special miss notification animation is started at that transition timing. In this embodiment, while the timing of the start of the special miss notification animation is the same as in the 15th embodiment, the configuration differs from the 15th embodiment in that the decision on whether or not to execute the special miss notification animation is made at an earlier timing (specifically, at the timing when the hold is acquired).

Next, the flow of the special "miss" notification effect will be explained with reference to Figures 165(a) and 165(b).

In the special miss notification sequence, the first notification section 521F, the second notification section 522F, and the third notification section 523F are switched between off and on states according to the set step-up pattern. The light emission control of each light-emitting element 641F is performed with the light-emitting unit 630F stopped in the aforementioned standby position.

For example, if a special losing result is indicated after progressing through steps 1 → 2 → 3, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF located behind the first warning unit 521F is illuminated at the timing of the confirmation display in the game round preceding the relevant game round. This causes the first warning unit 521F to illuminate (Step 1). At the timing of the confirmation display in the game round executed after the completion of Step 1, the third light-emitting element 641cF located behind the second warning unit 522F is illuminated. This causes the second warning unit 522F to illuminate (Step 2). At the timing of the confirmation display in the game round executed after the completion of Step 2, the second light-emitting element 641bF is illuminated. This causes the third warning unit 523F to illuminate (Step 3).

In the game round executed after the step-up is complete, at the timing of the confirmation display, the first light-emitting element 641aF, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF, and the second light-emitting element 641bF, the third light-emitting element 641cF, and the sixth light-emitting element 641fF that are located behind the notification decorative section 512F are newly illuminated. This causes the notification decorative section 512F to illuminate (see Figure 165(b)).

As already explained, before the special miss notification effect is executed, a pre-announcement effect may be performed. In this pre-announcement effect, the light-emitting unit 630E begins rotating during the display of the changing symbols in the game (before the timing of the confirmed symbol combination display). After the rotation speed reaches a steady speed during the display, the first light-emitting element 641aF, a portion of the third light-emitting element 641cF (located behind the second notification unit 522F in the standby position), the fourth light-emitting element 641dF, and a portion of the sixth light-emitting element 641fF (located behind the first notification unit 521F in the standby position) are illuminated. As a result, the special effect device 500E dynamically displays both dot-like and linear light-emitting patterns. In this way, by using the pre-announcement effect to draw the player's attention to the special effect device 500F before the special miss notification effect begins, the chances of missing the special miss notification effect are reduced.

<Embodiment 18>
In the first embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (fourth normal game state), thereby suppressing further investment. While such a configuration is desirable in improving the soundness of the game, there is room for improvement in drawing attention to the change in the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into consideration. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6). However, in this embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) has an asymmetrical gauge, and the arrangement of various game components provided in the game area PE has been changed. The game board unit 80B in this embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 166. Figure 166 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in the direction of its own thickness (front-to-back direction). A general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83B, a through gate 84A, etc. are provided in each opening. When game balls flow into the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83B, these game balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided in accordance with each ball entry area, and based on the detection results, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits.

Furthermore, the game board 80aB is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that entries into the general prize pockets 81, etc., occur with a suitable probability. An out-out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aB, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out-out opening 86.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, has a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A located directly below the first operating port 91A. The latter of the two operating ports 92A is equipped with an electric mechanism 93A, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). When the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A is set to low-frequency support mode, it is effectively impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Winning a prize in the second operating port 92A is permitted when the mode switches to high-frequency support mode.

The game board 80aB is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83B, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83B or the through gate 84A. Game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83B, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The hold display area consists of a hold count display area Da, which is partitioned by arranging unit hold display areas horizontally, with the same number of units as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operating openings 91 and 92; and an execution target display area Dc, which can display hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the currently running game rounds. The hold count display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit hold display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit hold areas.

The game balls flowing down the left route primarily enter the first operation port 91A, and during low-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the first operation port 91A. In contrast, the game balls flowing down the right route primarily enter the second operation port 92A, and during high-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the second operation port 92A. Due to these circumstances, in most cases, the number of reserve icons displayed in the reserve count display area Da will be four or less. Therefore, the display mode of the reserve count display area Da will be based on a display mode consisting of four unit reserve display areas, as illustrated in Figure 139, and will switch to a display mode consisting of eight unit reserve display areas only when the number of reserve icons exceeds four. Note that the function to switch the display mode of the reserve count display area Da according to the situation can be omitted.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B differs from that of the variable prize-winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. The specific configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B will be explained below with reference to Figure 167. Figure 167 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device 83B.

(Variable prize-winning device 83B)
Inside the variable prize winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B is formed through which game balls that have flowed into the entrance (large prize opening 331B) of the variable prize winning device 83B pass. The ball passage 332B branches into a first branch passage 334B and a second branch passage 335B at an intermediate position, and a flow path switching member 336B is provided at this branching point, which can switch the destination of the game balls to the first branch passage 334B side and the second branch passage 335B side. The drive unit (specifically a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. When no drive signal is input from the main control device 162 (non-excited state), the flow path switching member 336B waits in a protruding position that protrudes into the ball passage 332B, and when a drive signal is input (excited state), it waits in a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided.

When the flow path switching member 336B is positioned in a protruding location, the inlet of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, the inflow of game balls that have reached the branching section into the first branch passage 334B is prevented, and these game balls flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive signal for the drive unit of the flow path switching member 336B and the drive unit is energized, the flow path switching member 336B moves to a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided, and the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branching point are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335B, and instead flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the results of a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A.

Upstream detection sensor 391d is installed in the ball passage 332B upstream of the branching point, and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are installed in the downstream section, specifically in the first branching passage 334B and the second branching passage 335B. The upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control unit 162. The main control unit 162 determines whether a ball has entered the variable prize winning device 83B based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d, and dispenses a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. Furthermore, the remaining game ball status is monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B indicates that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334B, the lottery mode after the special game state (the V-jackpot game state described in detail later) ends is switched to a high-probability mode (a so-called V-probability machine). In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "advantageous ball entry section" or "V," and a ball entering the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as a "V-winning ball."

(Retained ball storage area)
Next, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 168.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, two lottery modes were provided for the lottery conducted based on the entry of the ball into the first and second operating ports 91 and 92: a low-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. In other words, the system was configured to switch the win/loss table for the operating ports that was referenced according to the lottery mode. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the win/loss lottery for the operating ports is performed by referencing the same win/loss table regardless of the game state. It also differs from the first embodiment in that it references different win/loss tables depending on where the game ball enters. The win/loss table for the operating ports in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 170.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 169(a), in the low-probability mode win/loss table referenced when drawing based on winnings in the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losses (normal losses). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/100.

As shown in Figure 169(b), in the high-probability mode win/loss table referenced during the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "37", "57", "97", "107"... "597", totaling 30 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losses (normal losses). This results in a jackpot probability of 1/20.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91A and 92A do not include the special misses shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this; the system may be configured to allow for special misses in the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91A, or in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 92A, or in either the lottery based on winning entries into the first or second operating port 92A.

Next, referring to Figure 170, the distribution tables for each of the operating ports 91A and 92A will be described.

(Distribution table for the operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operation port 91A, 15 values from "0" to "14" of the type counter C2 values from "0" to "29" correspond to 3R jackpot A (3R jackpot result A), and 15 values from "15" to "29" correspond to 3R jackpot B (3R jackpot result B). In other words, when a jackpot is won, there is a 50% probability each of getting 3R jackpot result A and 3R jackpot result B.

In contrast, in the distribution table for the second operation port 92A, six values from "0" to "5" of the type counter C2 (values from "0" to "29") correspond to 6R jackpot A (6R jackpot result A), while 24 values from "6" to "29" correspond to 6R jackpot B (6R jackpot result B). Therefore, when a jackpot is won, approximately 20% result in 6R jackpot A, and the remaining 80% result in 6R jackpot B.

As shown in Figure 171, there is a difference in the number of rounds during the opening/closing execution mode between the 3R jackpot result and the 6R jackpot result. The former has 3 rounds, while the latter has 6 rounds. Therefore, a 6R jackpot result presents a chance to significantly increase your winnings.

In this embodiment, the distribution mode of the flow path switching member 336B in the variable prize winning device 83B differs depending on the type of jackpot. Two distribution modes are provided: a low-frequency prize winning mode and a high-frequency prize winning mode.

In the low-frequency prize-winning mode, immediately after the shutter 333B of the variable prize-winning device 83B switches from the closed state to the open state, the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position. Immediately afterward (specifically, before the game balls flowing into the large prize-winning opening reach the branching position), the flow path switching member 336B returns to the protruding position. Specifically, the time from when the shutter 333B switches to the open state until the flow path switching member 336B returns to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game balls flowing into the large prize-winning opening 331B at the moment the shutter 333B switches to the open state to reach the distribution position. This results in a configuration that effectively avoids prize-winning in the advantageous ball-winning section 334B.

In contrast, in the high-frequency winning mode, while the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position immediately after the shutter of the variable winning device 83B switches from the closed state to the open state, similar to the low-frequency winning mode described above, the flow path switching member 336B remains in the retracted position for a predetermined time (8 seconds). This time is longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds) × maximum number of winnings (10 balls) = 6 seconds. Since almost all game balls launched to the right route reach the variable winning device 83B, a configuration is achieved in which winning into the advantageous ball entry section 334B is practically guaranteed as long as game balls are continuously launched to the right route.

For 3R jackpot result A and 6R jackpot result A, the distribution pattern of the flow path switching member 336B is a low-frequency winning pattern, while for 3R jackpot result B and 6R jackpot result B, the distribution pattern of the flow path switching member 336B is a high-frequency winning pattern. In other words, the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A results in a 50% probability transition to the high-probability mode after the special game state ends, and the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A results in an 80% probability transition to the high-probability mode after the special game state ends (see Figure 170).

Furthermore, if the result is a 3R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot A, the game state will transition to a high-frequency support mode B after the special game state ends, with the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A being high-frequency support mode B. This high-frequency support mode B game state continues until the number of game spins performed after the special game state ends—specifically, the number of spins related to the second operation port 92A—reaches the termination threshold. When this termination threshold is reached, the support from high-frequency support mode B ends. If the result is a 3R jackpot A, the termination threshold is set to "100 spins".

In contrast, if the result is a 3R jackpot B or a 6R jackpot B, after the special game state ends, the game state transitions to a high-frequency support mode B provided by the electric mechanism 93A. This high-frequency support mode B game state will continue until the next jackpot result occurs.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 172, the V-distribution setting process, which is a control process for the flow path switching member 336B executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, will be explained. The V-distribution setting process shown in this embodiment is executed as part of the large prize opening/closing process (Figure 31).

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, step S5201 first determines whether it is the start timing of the third round (V Challenge Round) in the special game state. If it is the start timing of the third round, step S5202 sets "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) in the third timer counter TC3 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. The value set in the third timer counter TC3 (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In the following step S5203, the distribution count counter HC located in the various counter areas 434 is set to "1," thereby ending this V distribution setting process. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter HC is used by the MPU 402 to identify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

Returning to the explanation of step S5201, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5204. In step S5204, it is determined whether the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0". If the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0", a positive determination is made in step S5204, and the V distribution setting process ends there. If the value of the distribution count counter HC is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S5240, and the process proceeds to step S5205.

In step S5205, the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member is used to determine whether the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, which is the distribution side (V-winning side) to the advantageous ball entry section 334B. If the flow path switching member 336B is not in the retracted position, i.e., in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S5206 to determine whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the distribution setting process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", the process proceeds to step S5207.

In step S5207, the flow path switching member 336B is moved from the protruding position to the retracted position. This switches the flow path within the variable prize-winning device 83B to the V-prize winning side. In the following step S5208, it is determined whether the current distribution pattern is a high-frequency prize-winning pattern. If the determination in step S5208 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5209, where the third timer counter TC3 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 seconds). If the determination in step S5208 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5210, where the third timer counter TC3 is set to "40" (equivalent to 0.08 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S5205, if a positive result is obtained in step S5205, that is, if the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, the process proceeds to step S5211. In step S5211, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". That is, it is determined whether the period for the flow path switching member 336B to wait in the retracted position (V-winning side) has elapsed. If a negative result is obtained in step S5211, the V-distribution setting process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S5211, the process proceeds to step S5212, and the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a prize (V-winning) in the advantageous ball entry section 334B from this point onward. After that, in step S5213, the value of the distribution count counter HC is deducted by "1", and the distribution setting process ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 173, the V-prize winning process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be explained. The V-prize winning process shown in this embodiment is executed as part of the game state transition process (Figure 30).

(Processing for winning the V prize)
In the V-prize winning process, first in step S5301, it is determined whether or not a V-prize winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a V-prize winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S5302, where it is determined whether or not a V-prize has occurred (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 338B) based on the detection state of the V-prize winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable prize winning device 83B.

If it is determined that a V-prize has been awarded, step S3303 determines whether the validity period for the V-prize is still in effect. This validity period is the period during which measurement (counting) begins as the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to its retracted position, and its length is slightly longer than the period during which the flow path switching member 336B is maintained in the retracted position.

If it is determined that the validity period has not expired, the process proceeds to step S5304, where an error command is set as the target for transmission to the notification/performance control device 140, and then the V-prize winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output process of the normal process (Figure 23), and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 so that a predetermined error notification is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is still active, the process proceeds to step S5305, where the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5306, the V-winning command is set. The V-winning command is used to notify the notification/performance control device 140 that a V-winning has occurred. The set V-winning command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing of the normal process (Figure 23). Upon receiving the V-winning command, the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, etc., so that the symbol display device 95, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 announce the occurrence of a V-winning, or perform effects celebrating the V-winning.

After step S5306 is executed, if a positive result was obtained in step S5301 or a negative result was obtained in step S5302, this V-prize winning process is terminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 174, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, will be explained. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode shown in this embodiment is executed as part of the game state transition process (Figure 30).

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S5401, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A to high-frequency support mode B. In the following step S5402, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by either the 3R jackpot result B or the 6R jackpot result B. If the determination in step S5402 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5403, where the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5404, "100" is set in the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

After executing the process in step S5404, or if a positive result is obtained in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, it is determined whether the aforementioned V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the V-winning flag is stored, a positive result is obtained in step S5405, and the process proceeds to step S5406, where the high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This sets the subsequent lottery mode to high-probability mode.

After executing the process in step S5406, or if a negative result is obtained in step S5404, the process proceeds to step S5407. In step S5407, the game count counters located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 are reset to 0. Then, in step S5408, the various flags (such as the jackpot flag) for the opening/closing execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, the pre-confirmation process (see step S306 in Figure 22) and the setting process for the hold command (see step S307 in Figure 22), which are performed as part of the timer interrupt processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, will be explained.

(Pre-confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of Figure 175, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S5501, the number of operational reserves N and the common reserves CRN stored in the reserve count storage area of the reserve ball storage area 432A are read, and this information on the number of reserves is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Then, in step S5502, it is checked whether the reserve information obtained by this win contains information corresponding to the jackpot result. Details of this determination are the same as the win/fail determination process in step S702 above, so the explanation is omitted.

If the confirmation process in step S5502 confirms that a jackpot has been hit, a positive determination is made in step S5503, and the process proceeds to step S5504. In step S5504, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Furthermore, in step S5504, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the value of the acquired type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S5504 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the confirmation process in step S5502 confirms a loss (normal loss), a negative determination is made in step S5503, and the process proceeds to step S5505. In step S5505, the normal loss reach confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3, obtained in step S304, is determined, and the lottery table for losing reaches is referenced to check whether a losing reach will occur. If a losing reach does not occur (i.e., a complete loss), a negative determination is made in step S5506, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If a losing reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S5506, and the process proceeds to step S5507. In step S5507, the losing reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S5507 includes information related to the general type of losing reach (whether it is a super reach or not).

Next, we will explain the process for setting up hold commands, referring to the flowchart in Figure 176.

(Setting the pending command)
In the process of setting the hold command, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S5602, and the jackpot-corresponding hold command is set. The jackpot-corresponding hold command includes information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5601, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the MPU 402 register, the process proceeds to step S5603, where it is determined whether or not losing reach information is stored in the MPU 402 register. If losing reach information is stored, a positive determination is made in step S5603, and the process proceeds to step S5604, where a losing reach corresponding hold command is set. The losing reach corresponding hold command includes information related to the general type of losing reach (whether or not it is a super reach). If a negative determination is made in step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5605. In step S5605, a losing reach non-corresponding hold command (complete loss corresponding hold command) is set.

When setting a hold command in steps S5602, S5604, and S5605, the display time for the variation is determined by referring to the value of the variation type counter CS, etc., and the information related to that variation display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the display time for the variation, the display time table is referred to, similar to the setting process for the display time shown in step S714. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140, which can then understand the variation display pattern of the symbols based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the display time for the variation may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting the game round related to that hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, the information related to the display time for the variation is not stored.

After executing the command setting process in steps S5602, S5604, or S5605, step S5606 executes a process to set the number of reserved items for the reserved command. The reserved command information is composed of multiple bytes. In step S4408, the reserved item information stored in the MPU402 register in step S5501 of the preceding pre-check process (Figure 175) is first read. Then, the read reserved item information is stored in the bits for the reserved item information of the already set reserved command using an operation such as logical OR. This ensures that the reserved command set in steps S5602, S5604, or S5605 includes information to identify which reserved item corresponds to that command. After executing the process in step S5606 as described above, this reserved command setting process terminates.

In step S5606, the hold command, which includes information on the number of hold items, is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in step S401 during the next normal processing (Figure 23). Upon receiving this hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 140 also adds information for hold notification (described later) to the hold command and transmits it to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 then executes hold display and hold notification processing based on the received hold command.

Next, the processing related to the hold notification executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140 will be explained. The processing related to the hold notification can be broadly divided into two parts: command response processing, which determines the command from the main control device 162, and hold notification performance setting processing, which determines the type of hold notification.

(Handling of pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command transmitted by the main control unit 162 is received, processing corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined interval (for example, every 2 msec).

In the process of handling pending commands, the first step is to determine whether or not a pending command has been received. Commands received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 are temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing multiple commands and reading commands in the order they were stored, ensuring that even when multiple commands are received simultaneously, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. To determine whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, the system checks whether a jackpot-related pending command has been received in the target area of the command storage area 461. This command reading configuration is the same for reading other commands, such as commands for starting variations.

When a hold command is received, the various information contained in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to store one hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area is shifted sequentially to the lower areas when a shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3, ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, as with the hold ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port), the hold information is stored chronologically regardless of the ball's destination. For details, the system identifies the number of pending commands included in the received command and stores the various information described above in the area corresponding to that identified number of pending commands among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444. When a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. These flags trigger the setting process for the hold notification effect described below, and are cleared when the said hold notification effect setting process is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, the jackpot announcement performance setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. The jackpot announcement performance setting process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is performed on the condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command has been received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the jackpot announcement performance is when hold information is acquired upon entry into the operation ports 91A and 92A, or when hold information is consumed as the game progresses.

The jackpot notification effect shown in this embodiment is executed by changing the manner of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to correspond to the jackpot notification effect. Specifically, as shown in Figure 177, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da that corresponds to the corresponding game round (corresponding hold) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple color patterns for the hold icon MP, more specifically, three patterns: white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3), and the color of the corresponding hold icon MP is changed to a color other than white.

If the pending symbol corresponds to a jackpot result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 3 > Level 2 > Level 1. If the pending symbol corresponds to a normal loss result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3. In other words, when a jackpot予告演出 (jackpot prediction effect) is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a jackpot result.

Furthermore, the jackpot notification effects can be broadly categorized into two types: the first jackpot notification effect (non-step-up compatible), where the color of the changed reserve icon MP is maintained until it shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and the second jackpot notification effect (step-up compatible), where the color changes before shifting to the execution target display area Dc.

In the first jackpot notification sequence, the sequence begins during a game round before the game round corresponding to the relevant reserve icon MP starts, thereby encouraging the player to focus on the game. In contrast, in the second jackpot notification sequence, the color of the reserve icon MP changes as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color is red, it will first change to a lower-ranking color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation level, and then step up (promote) to a higher-ranking color with a higher expectation level at the timing when the reserve icon MP shifts. By using these two types of jackpot notification sequences in combination, even if the color is low-expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a higher-expectation color before the relevant game round. This prevents a premature decline in attention to the jackpot notification sequence.

In the gaming machine described in detail above, the goal is to hit a jackpot. However, if the ceiling is reached without hitting a jackpot, not only is investment reduced by the high-frequency support mode A, but the probability of transitioning to the high-probability mode when a jackpot is hit, and the number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is hit are also increased. In other words, when approaching the ceiling, hitting a jackpot after reaching the ceiling increases the expectation of a large payout more than hitting a jackpot before reaching the ceiling. For these reasons, it is assumed that the tension of playing when approaching the ceiling will increase. While a moderate level of tension in gaming is desirable for increasing attention to the game, it is a concern that such a state of tension continuing for a long time will lead to fatigue for the player. In this embodiment, one of the features is that the above concern is mitigated by configuring the system so that in some cases when approaching the ceiling, the ceiling reach confirmation animation is executed in a game round before the game round in which the ceiling is reached. The following explanation, referring to the flowchart in Figure 178, describes the process for confirming the ceiling has been reached, which is executed as part of the periodic processing by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140.

(Processing for the animation confirming reaching the ceiling)
In the process for the ceiling reach confirmation animation, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the ceiling reach confirmation animation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. As will be described in detail later, the ceiling reach confirmation animation flag is stored when the ceiling reach confirmation animation starts and erased when the ceiling reach confirmation animation ends. If the determination in step S5791 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5702.

In step S5702, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a hold command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S5702 and the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated. If a hold command has been received, a positive determination is made in step S5702 and the process proceeds to step S5703. In step S5703, it is determined whether enough holds (holds equivalent to the remaining number of plays) have been secured until the ceiling is reached. If there are insufficient holds, a negative determination is made in step S5703 and the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated. If enough holds have been secured, a positive determination is made in step S5703 and the process proceeds to step S5704.

In step S5704, it is determined whether the reserves consumed before reaching the ceiling include any that correspond to a jackpot result. If the reserves corresponding to a jackpot result do not include any, a negative determination is made in step S5704, and the process proceeds to step S5705. In step S5705, a lottery process for the guaranteed win animation is executed. In the guaranteed win animation lottery process, the lottery table for guaranteed win animations stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the ceiling reach guaranteed win animation. The probability of winning in this lottery is 50%.

If the lottery in step S5705 is successful, a positive result is determined in step S5706, and the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, the process for starting the ceiling reach confirmation animation is executed. Specifically, a golden effect is displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A, and the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the background music corresponding to the ceiling reach confirmation animation.

After the ceiling confirmation animation begins, in step S5708, a jackpot announcement animation restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. This prevents any new jackpot announcement animations from starting until the ceiling confirmation animation ends. If the announcement animation restriction flag is set while a jackpot announcement animation is still pending, that animation will be canceled without being executed.

In the following step S5709, the ceiling reach confirmation演出 flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. Then, in step S5710, the launch stop indication start process is executed, and the ceiling reach confirmation演出 process ends. Upon execution of the launch stop indication start process, the words "Launch Stop" are displayed on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. Note that if enough reserves are secured up to the ceiling, regardless of whether the reserves correspond to the jackpot result or whether the ceiling reach confirmation演出 occurs, the launch stop indication start process is executed in step S5710, and then the ceiling reach confirmation演出 process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5701, if a positive result is obtained in step S5701, that is, if the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, the process proceeds to step S5711. In step S5711, it is determined whether or not the ceiling has been reached. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the final game round that would result in the ceiling reaching has ended. If a negative result is obtained in step S5711, the process proceeds to step S5712. In step S5712, it is determined whether or not the jackpot announcement performance is currently being executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S5712, the process for this ceiling reach confirmation performance ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S713.

Step S5713 determines whether it is time to cancel (cancel) the jackpot notification animation. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for cancellation, which is the timing during the confirmation display in the current game round, has been reached. If the result in step S5713 is negative, the process for the confirmed ceiling reach animation ends immediately. If the result in step S5713 is positive, the jackpot notification animation cancellation process is executed in step S5714, and then the process for the confirmed ceiling reach animation ends.

In the process of canceling the jackpot notification effect, the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect for canceling the jackpot notification effect, and the color of the reserve icon MP, which has been changed to blue, yellow, or red, is changed to white. More specifically, a dynamic display is performed in which a white effect converges from the golden effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 95aA toward the color-changed reserve icon MP, and then the color of the reserve icon MP is changed to white.

Returning to the explanation of step S5711, if a positive result is obtained in step S5711, i.e., if the ceiling has been reached, the process proceeds to step S571. In step S5715, the termination process for the indication of stopping firing is executed. As a result, the "Firing Stopped" text displayed on display screen 95aA is hidden. In the following step S5716, the termination process for the ceiling reach confirmation演出 is executed. As a result, the background music for the ceiling reach confirmation演出 output from speaker unit 29 is turned OFF. Specifically, since reaching the ceiling triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, the background music output from speaker unit 29 switches to the background music corresponding to the transitioned normal game state. Also, the golden effect displayed on the outer edge of display screen 95aA is hidden.

After executing the process to conclude the ceiling reach confirmation animation, in step S5717, the jackpot announcement animation restriction flags stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 are deleted. This releases the restriction on the jackpot announcement animation. Then, in step S5718, the ceiling reach confirmation animation flags stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 are deleted, and the process for this ceiling reach confirmation animation is terminated.

Here, we will illustrate the flow of the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) with reference to Figure 179. Figure 179 is a timing chart showing the flow of the ceiling reach confirmation演出, illustrating the case where the ceiling reach confirmation演出 begins during a jackpot予告演出 (jackpot notification performance) corresponding to a losing result (normal losing result).

At timing tk1, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "3" to "2" at the start of the 395th game round after the end of the special game state. At timing tk2 during the 395th game round, a ball enters the first operating port 91A, and the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A increases from "2" to "3". However, at timing tk2, although the number of reserved balls has increased, the number of reserved balls needed to reach the ceiling has not been secured (there are insufficient reserved balls).

At timing tk3, the number of reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A decreases from "3" to "2" as the 396th game round begins after the special game state ends. At timing tk4 during the 396th game round, a ball enters the first operation port 91A, increasing the number of reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A from "2" to "3". Immediately afterwards, at timing tk5, another ball enters the first operation port 91A, increasing the number of reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A from "3" to "4".

At the timing of tk5, the number of reserved balls increases, securing the number of reserved balls needed to reach the ceiling. All reserved balls consumed before reaching the ceiling correspond to a losing result (a normal losing result). Based on these conditions, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the ceiling-reaching confirmation animation. In the example shown in Figure 179, the lottery was won, and the ceiling-reaching confirmation animation begins at the timing of tk5. Furthermore, coinciding with the start of the ceiling-reaching confirmation animation, the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A begins to indicate that firing has stopped.

At timing tk5, the jackpot prediction animation is currently running for the 397th game round. This jackpot prediction animation is normally scheduled to continue until timing tk8, when the 397th game round ends. However, it is canceled (deactivated) when the ceiling reach confirmation animation is executed. Therefore, the jackpot prediction animation is canceled (deactivated) at a timing prior to tk8, specifically at timing tk6, during the confirmation display for the 396th game round.

At timing tk7, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "4" to "3" as the 397th game round begins after the special game state ends. At timing tk8, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "3" to "2" as the 398th game round begins after the special game state ends. At timing tk9, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "2" to "1" as the 399th game round begins after the special game state ends. Then, at timing tk10, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "1" to "0" as the 400th game round begins after the special game state ends. This 400th game round is the round in which the ceiling is reached, and at timing tk11, when this game round ends, the ceiling reach confirmation演出 and launch stop indication end, and the game transitions to the normal game state (4th normal game state) corresponding to high-frequency support mode A.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, if the game progresses without a jackpot result, which is the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (open/close execution mode), the game transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode A) when the number of game executions after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the high-frequency support mode, the electric mechanism 93A attached to the second operation port 92A frequently opens (receives balls), increasing the frequency of balls entering the second operation port 92A and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is preferable for improving the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on ball entry into the second operating port 92A is given preferential treatment to the player compared to the judgment based on ball entry into the first operating port 91A. In other words, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is enhanced by transitioning to the high-frequency support mode and having the ball enter the second operating port 92A → judgment. In such a configuration, if a jackpot result occurs just before reaching the ceiling, the player will not be able to enjoy this benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that players who expect to reach the ceiling will play the game expecting that a jackpot result will not occur at least just before reaching the ceiling. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not a transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will occur due to reaching the ceiling is determined in advance (pre-determined), and based on the result of that determination, a judgment is made before the game round in which the ceiling will be reached, and if it is determined that the transition will occur, an animation indicating the transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will be executed before the game round in which the ceiling will be reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and give a sense of security to players who expect to reach the ceiling. This is desirable in terms of improving player satisfaction and further increasing interest in the game.

As shown in this embodiment, if the system is configured to determine whether a transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode occurs when the number of stored pending information reaches the number of remaining spins until the ceiling is reached, the increase in control load caused by the implementation of special effects can be suppressed. For example, compared to a configuration that determines whether the above transition occurs each time pending information is added, the control load can be suitably reduced. Furthermore, as shown in this embodiment, configuring the system to determine whether the above transition occurs when pending information is added is also preferable for promptly initiating special effects.

In a configuration where the determination based on ball entry into the second operating port 92A, to which the electric mechanism 93A is attached, is given preferential treatment over the determination based on ball entry into the first operating port 91A, it cannot be ruled out that even after the ceiling has been confirmed in advance, game balls may be launched, resulting in further ball entry into the first operating port 91A. If hold information is acquired through such ball entry, the player may not be able to effectively enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. This is a concern as it could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, if the system is configured so that the ceiling-indicating animation continues at least until the ceiling is reached, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively suppressed, such as the animation being missed.

<Variation 1>
In the 18th embodiment described above, if reaching the ceiling is confirmed in a game round prior to the game round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling reach confirmation animation is performed to inform the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, the system is not limited to this. Alternatively, if a ceiling reach suggestion animation occurs in a game round prior to the game round in which the ceiling is reached (but within the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored), the system can be configured to indicate that reaching the ceiling is highly likely (or possible). In this case, the system can be configured to selectively execute one of several animations with different expectations of reaching the ceiling. In other words, even if some of the reserved balls that are secured for reaching the ceiling include those corresponding to a big win, the system can be configured to execute an animation that indicates that reaching the ceiling is highly likely.

<Modified Example 2>
As shown in the 18th embodiment above, in a configuration where reaching the ceiling transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, changing from a pattern where the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A are the main focus to a pattern where the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are the main focus, there is a possibility that the remaining reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A will be consumed even after transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. If such remaining reserved balls include those corresponding to a jackpot result, the player is less likely to fully enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. In light of these circumstances, when deciding whether or not to execute the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation), it is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration by determining whether or not the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A executed after transitioning to high-frequency support mode A include those corresponding to a jackpot result, and if those include those corresponding to a jackpot result, the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) is avoided. Alternatively, when deciding whether or not to execute the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) instead of this configuration, it is also possible to configure the system to determine whether or not the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A executed after transitioning to high-frequency support mode A include a jackpot result corresponding to the unfavorable jackpot result, 3R jackpot result A, and to avoid the ceiling reach confirmation演出 if a result corresponding to 3R jackpot result A is included. Incidentally, in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the system so that the ceiling reach confirmation演出 can be executed if the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A executed after transitioning to high-frequency support mode A include a jackpot result corresponding to the favorable jackpot result, 3R jackpot result B.

<Example 3>
In the 18th embodiment described above, the configuration allows the ceiling reach confirmation animation to start when the reserve for reaching the ceiling is acquired. However, the timing of the start of the ceiling reach confirmation animation can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is after the decision to execute the ceiling reach confirmation animation has been made. For example, the configuration may be such that the ceiling reach confirmation animation starts in conjunction with the start of the game round that is executed after the reserve for reaching the ceiling has been secured (for example, the next game round).

<Modification 4>
In the 18th embodiment described above, if the ceiling reach confirmation sequence starts during the jackpot announcement sequence, the jackpot announcement sequence is canceled (stopped) midway through. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the system so that the jackpot announcement sequence is not canceled (stopped) midway through if the ceiling reach confirmation sequence starts during the jackpot announcement sequence.

Furthermore, while the timing for canceling the jackpot notification animation is set to coincide with the confirmation display during the game round, the timing of cancellation is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to configure the system to cancel (stop) the jackpot notification animation at the start of the ceiling reach confirmation animation.

<Example 5>
In the 18th embodiment described above, the probability of obtaining a jackpot result corresponding to transitioning to high probability mode (3R jackpot result B) in the lottery based on entry into the first operating port 91A is set to 50%, and the probability of obtaining a jackpot result corresponding to transitioning to high probability mode (6R jackpot result B) in the lottery based on entry into the second operating port 92A is set to 80%. In other words, a difference is made so that the lottery based on entry into the second operating port 92A is more advantageous than the lottery based on entry into the first operating port 91A in terms of two elements: the probability of transitioning to high probability mode and the number of prize balls in the special game state (open/close execution mode). The specific configuration is arbitrary, as long as the player's advantage can be increased by reaching the ceiling. For example, it is also possible to configure the system so that there is no difference in the advantage of one of the two elements (probability of entering high probability mode and number of prize balls).

<Modification 6>
In the 18th embodiment described above, the system is configured to initiate a notification (suggestion to stop launching) that the launch of game balls should be suspended when the number of balls held to reach the ceiling is secured. However, this notification function can be omitted.

<Example 7>
In a system where the outcome of the draw is indicated by a "reach" display, there is a concern that the effect of the reach display being a so-called false alarm will not be effectively achieved once the ceiling reach confirmation animation is started. Taking this into consideration, it is also possible to configure the system so that even if the ceiling reach is confirmed, the ceiling reach confirmation animation is refrained from being shown if a reach display is shown in any of the game rounds played before the ceiling is reached.

<Difference 8>
In a configuration where the outcome of the win/loss lottery can be indicated by a super reach display that has a high probability of resulting in a big win, there is concern that the execution of a super reach display with a high probability of result during the ceiling reach confirmation performance will unnecessarily heighten the player's anxiety. This is expected to be a factor that reduces the player's satisfaction. Therefore, when the ceiling reach is confirmed and the ceiling reach confirmation performance is executed, the manner of the super reach display executed during the ceiling reach confirmation performance can be changed (downgraded) from a display manner with a high probability of result (e.g., super reach C) to a display manner with a low probability of result (super reach A), thereby suitably suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Furthermore, when the ceiling reach is confirmed and the ceiling reach confirmation performance is executed, it is also possible to change (downgrade) the super reach display executed during the ceiling reach confirmation performance to a normal reach, which is a display manner with an even lower probability of result.

<Embodiment 19>
As shown in the first embodiment above, increasing the triggers for transitioning to the high-frequency support mode by configuring the system to transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) triggered by a jackpot result, a special miss result, or reaching the ceiling is desirable for realizing diversification of gameplay. Here, in high-frequency support mode B, which is transitioned to triggered by a jackpot result, the probability of winning in the support lottery is changed to approximately twice that of the low-frequency support mode (specifically, 1/2 → 1/1.1). In contrast, in high-frequency support mode A, which is transitioned to triggered by a special miss result or reaching the ceiling, the probability of winning in the support lottery remains unchanged and is the same as the low-frequency support mode (specifically, 1/2 → 1/2). In such a configuration, there is room for improvement in strengthening the support function in high-frequency support mode A while avoiding excessive entry into the operating port during low-frequency support mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates measures to solve these problems. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the operating port unit 82G in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 180 to 181. Figure 180 is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80G showing the operating port unit 82G and its surroundings, and Figure 181 is a partially cross-sectional view of the game board unit 80G (a vertical cross-sectional view of the operating port unit 82G).

(Operation port unit 82G)
As shown in Figure 180, the operating port unit 82G shown in this embodiment, like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, comprises a first operating port 91G and a second operating port 92G disposed below the first operating port 91G. The second operating port 92G is equipped with an electric mechanism 93G, which serves as an opening and closing ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an opening and closing member (opening and closing means). The electric mechanism 93G comprises a pair of movable pieces 901G as left and right shutter members, a spring member (not shown) as a biasing means for biasing the movable pieces 901G to the closed position, and a solenoid-type drive unit 911G for driving the movable pieces 901G. When the drive unit 911G is energized, the movable piece 901G is displaced from the closed position to the open position against the biasing force of the spring member, and when the drive unit 911G is de-energized, it is displaced from the open position to the closed position by the biasing force of the spring member. As shown in Figure 180(a), when the movable piece 901G is in the open position, ball entry into the second operating port 92G is permitted (hereinafter referred to as the open state or auxiliary state), while as shown in Figure 180(b), when the movable piece 901G is in the closed position, ball entry into the second operating port 92G is not permitted (hereinafter referred to as the closed state or non-auxiliary state).

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the specific structure of the operating port unit 82G. The operating port unit 82G has a flat base portion 851G that covers the opening 97G (see Figure 181) formed in the game board 80aG from the front of the game machine. This base portion 851G is integrated with the game board 80a by being fixed to the game board 80a using fasteners such as screws.

As shown in Figure 181, the operating port unit 82G has a first bulge portion 861G that bulges forward and backward from the base portion 851G. In the front bulge portion of the first bulge portion 861G, which bulges forward of the base portion 851G, an inlet for game balls is formed facing upward. This inlet functions as the first operating port 91G. Furthermore, the first bulge portion 861G has a first guide passage portion 865G that guides the game balls that have flowed into the first operating port 91G to a recovery passage (specifically, the first recovery passage 802G) formed in the base body 251G of the rear block 80b.

The first retrieval passage 802G is equipped with a detection sensor (not shown) that detects game balls that have reached a predetermined detection position (winning detection position) in the first retrieval passage 802G. This detection sensor is connected to the main control unit 162, which performs a winning determination related to the first operating opening 91G based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor.

Below the first bulge 861G, a second bulge 871G is formed, separated from the first bulge 861G. Similar to the first bulge 861G, the second bulge 871G also bulges forward and backward from the base portion 851G. The forward bulge portion of the second bulge 871G, which bulges forward of the base portion 851G, consists of an opposing portion 872G that faces the base portion 851G with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of left and right connecting portions 873G that connect the opposing portion 872G and the base portion 851G. It is open in both the vertical and horizontal directions.

In the base portion 851G, a portion covered from the front of the gaming machine by the opposing portion 872G has an inlet for game balls. This inlet faces the front of the gaming machine and functions as the second operating port 92G. The second bulge portion 871G has a second guide passage portion 875G that guides the game balls flowing into the second operating port 92G to the second recovery passage 803G formed in the base body 251G of the rear block 80b.

The second retrieval passage 803G is equipped with a detection sensor 805G that detects game balls that have reached a predetermined detection position (winning detection position) in the second retrieval passage 803G. The detection sensor 805G is connected to the main control unit 162, which performs a winning determination related to the second operating opening 92G based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 805G.

Furthermore, all game balls that enter the first operating port 91G are guided to the first recovery passage 801G via the first guide passage section 865G, and all game balls that enter the second operating port 92G are guided to the second recovery passage 803G via the second guide passage section 875G.

The movable pieces 901G are arranged between the base portion 851G and the opposing portion 872G, separated to the left and right of the second operating port 92G. Specifically, through holes are formed in the base portion 851G in the portions on both the left and right sides of the second operating port 92G, extending through the thickness direction of the base portion 851G. A shaft 902G is inserted through these through holes so as to protrude into the gap between the base portion 851G and the opposing portion 872G, and the movable pieces 901G are fixed to the protruding portion (tip) of the shaft 902G. The shaft 902G extends in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction) of the game board 80aG and is pivotally supported by the base portion 851G so that its central axis coincides with the central axis of the through hole. As a result, the movable pieces 901G can rotate around the central axis CL10 of the shaft 902G and the through hole.

The shaft 902G is connected to the drive unit 911G via a link mechanism, and the driving force of the drive unit 911G is transmitted to the movable piece 901G via the link mechanism and the shaft 902G. Specifically, the driving force of the drive unit 911G causes the movable piece 901G to rotate in a first predetermined direction around the central axis CL10, switching the position of the movable piece 901G from the open position (see Figure 182(a)) to the closed position (see Figure 182(b)).

Incidentally, the link mechanism constituting the electric mechanism 93G includes a connecting section that links the two movable pieces 901G together in order to synchronize their movement when switching between the open and closed states. However, this connecting section is optional, and it is also possible to omit it and configure the mechanism so that the two movable pieces 901G operate asynchronously when switching between the open and closed states. In other words, it is possible to configure the mechanism to suppress the effect of an external force other than the power of the drive unit 911G on one of the movable pieces 901G on the other, and to allow the movement of both movable pieces 901G to be asynchronous.

As shown in Figure 182(a), the movable piece 901G extends in a direction intersecting (more specifically, perpendicular to) the central axis CL10, for example, vertically when positioned in the closed position. When the movable piece 901G is in the closed position, one end of the movable piece 901G protrudes upward through the upper opening of the second bulge 871G, and this end is close to the second bulge 871G. In this state, the gap between the movable piece 901G (the aforementioned end) and the second bulge 871G is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. That is, the gap between the first bulge 861G and the second bulge 871G is covered from both sides by the movable piece 901G, and the inflow of game balls into the specific region FE surrounded by the first bulge 861G, the second bulge 871G, and the movable piece 901G is restricted by the left and right movable pieces 901G.

Each of the left and right movable pieces 901G has a flat portion 905G formed on it, which faces each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball when in the closed position. These flat portions 905G constitute the side walls of a vertical passage that traverses the front of the second operating port 92G in the specific region FE. This vertical passage connects to the lower opening 874G of the second bulge 871G. Game balls that traverse (pass through) the front of the second operating port 92G are returned from the specific region FE to the game region PE through the lower opening 874G without flowing into the second operating port 92G.

Furthermore, the lower opening 874G is located directly above the variable prize-winning device 83, and game balls that pass through the lower opening 874G flow (fall) towards the variable prize-winning device 83 (see Figure 180). In other words, game balls returned to the game area PE from the lower opening 874G can be awarded prizes by the variable prize-winning device 83.

As shown in Figures 182(a) and 182(b), the upper ends of both movable pieces 901G (hereinafter referred to as the first end 908G) are displaced away from each other as the movable piece 901G rotates in the first predetermined direction, and the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G expands. When the movable piece 901G reaches the open position (including the maximum rotation position defined by the stopper), the gap between the movable piece 901G (specifically the first end 908G) and the first bulge 861G becomes large enough to allow the game ball to flow into the specific region FE. In other words, an inlet 921G appears between the movable piece 901G (specifically the first end 908G) and the first bulge 861G, allowing the game ball to flow into the specific region FE.

Furthermore, the lower ends of both movable pieces 901G (hereinafter referred to as the second end 909G) are displaced toward each other as the movable pieces 901G rotate from the closed position to the open position, and the gap between the second end 909G is reduced to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As shown in Figure 182(b), when the movable piece 901G is in the closed position, the flat section 905G is inclined downward toward the second operating port 92G, and the game ball that flows into the specific area FE from the inlet 921G moves toward the second end 909G along the inclination of the flat section 905G (more specifically, parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a) (hereinafter this movement will also be simply referred to as "parallel movement").

In the following explanation, in light of the flow path through which the game ball moves parallel to the surface, the side of the first end 908G in the planar section 905G will also be referred to as the "upstream side," and the side of the second end 909G in the planar section 905G will also be referred to as the "downstream side."

Here, even when the movable piece 901G is positioned in the closed position, the second end pieces 909G remain separated from each other, but the gap between them is reduced to be smaller than the diameter, or more specifically, the radius, of the game ball. In other words, a game ball that has moved parallel along the planar section 905G will, after moving to the lower end of the planar section 905G, be fitted into the gap between the two movable pieces 901G (straddling both movable pieces 901G), supported from below by those movable pieces 901G, and any further parallel movement will be restricted by the two movable pieces 901G. In the following explanation, the position of the game ball supported by both movable pieces 901G will also be referred to as the "lower limit position."

After the electric mechanism 93G is switched to the open state (more specifically, after the start of outputting the drive signal to the drive unit 911G), a predetermined open time elapses. At this point, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped, and the drive unit 911G switches from the energized state to the de-energized state (returns to its original state). With the loss of driving force from the drive unit 911G, the movable piece 901G rotates in the opposite direction to the first predetermined direction (the second predetermined direction) due to the biasing force of the spring member, returning to the closed position.

The rotation range of the movable piece 901G is defined by a stopper for the standby position and a stopper for the maximum rotation position. Specifically, when the drive unit 911G is energized, the stopper for the maximum rotation position restricts further rotation of the movable piece 901G in the first predetermined direction, and when the drive unit 911G is de-energized, the stopper for the standby position restricts further rotation of the movable piece 901G in the second predetermined direction. Incidentally, when the movable piece 901G is rotated to the open/closed position, the operating range of the first end 908G is defined to be above the central axis CL10, and the operating range of the second end 909G is defined to be above and below the central axis CL10.

The fixing point of the shaft 902G in the movable piece 901G is biased towards the second end 909G. In other words, the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G is smaller than the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G. This is a design feature to reduce the displacement of the second end 909G when switching between the closed and open states.

When the movable piece 901G rotates from the standby position (closed position) in the first predetermined direction, the gap between the second ends 909G first becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and then the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, when the closed state is maintained, the outflow of game balls from the specific region FE is restricted. Conversely, when the movable piece 901G rotates from the maximum rotation position (open position) in the second predetermined direction, the gap between the second ends 909G first becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, and then the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, when the open state is maintained, the outflow of game balls from the specific region FE is permitted.

It should be noted that this configuration is not mandatory. Alternatively, when the movable piece 901G rotates from the standby position (closed position) in a first predetermined direction, the timing at which the gap between the second ends 909G becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball may be synchronized with the timing at which the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball. Or, when the movable piece 901G rotates from the maximum rotation position (open position) in a second predetermined direction, the timing at which the gap between the second ends 909G becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball may be synchronized with the timing at which the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, as shown in Figure 183, the flat surface 905G is composed of a first surface 903G that is not inclined backward (i.e., perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 80aG) and a second surface 904G that is inclined backward (i.e., not perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 80aG). Specifically, a predetermined range of the flat surface 905G, including the edge (lower edge) of the flat surface 905G, is the second surface 904G that is inclined backward, and game balls that reach the lower limit position are supported by the second surface 904G of each movable piece 901G (see Figure 182(b)). Game balls that flow in from the inlet 921G move parallel to the second end 909G side, parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a, along the flat surface 905G, and after reaching the lower limit position, they move backward, i.e., toward the second operating port 92G, along the inclination of the second surface 904G.

As already explained, the second surface portion 904G is formed to include the edge (lower edge) of the planar portion 905G on the side of the second end portion 909G. While details will be described later, the formation range of the second surface portion 904G is smaller than that of the first surface portion 903G, and is limited to being closer to the second end portion 909G than the imaginary line FL1, which is the projection of the central axis CL10 perpendicular to the planar portion 905G.

Next, referring to Figures 184-185, we will explain the electric support process for the electric mechanism 93G, which is performed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 as part of normal processing (see step S406 in Figure 23). Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the electric support process, and Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the electric mechanism switching process.

(Processing for power supply support)
In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not support by the electric feature 93G is currently being performed (support is in progress). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S5801 and the process proceeds to step S5802. In step S5802, it is determined whether or not the display of confirmed symbols in the through-gate display unit DS has finished. If it is not the time when the display of confirmed symbols has finished, a negative determination is made in step S5802 and the process for supporting the electric feature is terminated. If it is the time when the display of confirmed symbols has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S5802 and the process proceeds to step S5803.

In step S5803, it is determined whether or not support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84. If support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S5803, and the process for the main electric support function ends there. If support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84, an positive determination is made in step S5803, and the process proceeds to step S5804. In step S5804, "2" is set to the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means of determining the number of times the electric function 93G has opened.

In the following step S5805, support flags are set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, in step S5806, the opening start process is executed, and then the main electric support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time for the opening. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric mechanism 93G begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S5801, if a positive result is obtained in step S5801, the process proceeds to step S5807. In step S5807, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S5806 has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S5807, and the main power support process ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S5807, and the process proceeds to step S5808. Now, referring to Figure 185, the power switching process in step S5808 will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device switching process, first, in step S5901, it is determined whether the electric device 93G is open (in the open state). Whether the electric device 93G is open is determined by whether the drive unit 911G for the electric device is in a driving state. If the electric device 93G is open, the process proceeds to step S5902, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric device switching process ends there. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S5903. In step S5903, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric device 93G, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S5903, the main power switch operation is terminated. If a positive result is obtained in step S5903, the process proceeds to step S5904.

In step S5904, the electric mechanism release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 911G for the electric mechanism is started, and the electric mechanism 93G is switched from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S5905, the second prize counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S5906, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) (step S5907). If it is low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds) (step S5908).

Returning to the explanation of step S5901, if a positive result is obtained in step S5901, i.e., if the electric mechanism 93G is open, the process proceeds to step S5909. In step S5909, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S5910. In step S5910, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92G based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 805G for the second operating port 92G. If no entry has occurred, the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is deducted by 1 in step S5911, and in the following step S5912, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S5912, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S5909 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the conditions for ending the opening of the electric mechanism 93G have been met. In this case, in step S5913, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped in order to switch the electric mechanism 93G to the closed state.

In the following step S5914, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC2 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC2 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S5915, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC2 value is "0". If the determination in step S5915 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5916, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "500" (equivalent to 1 sec). If the determination in step S5915 is that the round counter RC2 value is "0", the process proceeds to step S5917. In step S5917, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, the waiting time for the ending of the electric support is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation in Figure 184, after executing the electric power switch opening/closing process in step S5808, the process proceeds to step S5809. In step S5809, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the result in step S5809 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S5809 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5810, where it is determined whether the ending waiting time set in step S5917 has elapsed. If the result in step S5810 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S5810 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5811. In step S5811, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are cleared, and the electric power support process ends. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84.

As shown in Figure 186, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is set to 1/2, and the number of times the electric mechanism 83G is switched to the open state (number of openings) when a support bonus is won is set to 2. However, the time during which the open state is maintained for each opening (open time) is set to 0.2 seconds, and the interval time when switching from open state to closed state to open state is set to 1 second. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode, the display time for the changing symbols (normal symbols) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to 10 to 20 seconds, and the display time for the confirmed symbols is set to 0.5 seconds.

On the other hand, in High-Frequency Support Mode B, the probability of winning a support bonus is set to 1/1.1, and the number of times the electric mechanism 83G is switched to the open state (number of openings) when a support bonus is won is set to 2. However, the time the open state is maintained for each opening (open time) is set to 2 seconds, and the interval time when switching from open state to closed state to open state is set to 1 second. Furthermore, in High-Frequency Support Mode B, the display time for the changing symbols (normal symbols) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to 0.1 seconds, and the display time for the confirmed symbols is set to 0.5 seconds.

In contrast, in High-Frequency Support Mode A, the probability of winning a support bonus is set to 1/2, and the number of times the electric mechanism 83G is switched to the open state (number of openings) when a support bonus is won is set to 2. However, the time the open state is maintained for each opening (open time) is set to 2 seconds, and the interval time when switching from open state to closed state to open state is set to 1 second. Furthermore, in High-Frequency Support Mode A, the display time for the changing symbols (normal symbols) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to 0.1 seconds, and the display time for the confirmed symbols is set to 0.5 seconds.

In other words, when launching game balls towards the operating port unit 82G, the reduction in the number of balls held decreases in the following order: Low-frequency support mode > High-frequency support mode A > High-frequency support mode B.

Here, referring again to Figure 180, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the entry routes to the second operating port 92G. The game area PE is provided with two entry routes to the second operating port 92G: a first route R1 that bypasses the sides of the first bulge 861G from the left and right, and a second route R2 in which multiple game pins are arranged to create a downward slope toward the second bulge 871G. The game components such as game pins that constitute the first route R1 in the game area PE have a function to reduce the momentum of the game balls so that the inflow velocity (movement speed along the flat surface 905) does not become excessively high, and the inflow velocity of the game balls when they flow into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is specified to be a first predetermined velocity (including a certain degree of variation). Furthermore, the game components such as game pins that constitute the second route R2 in the game area PE also have a function to reduce the momentum of the game balls so that the inflow velocity does not become excessively high. The inflow velocity of the game balls when they flow into the inlet 921G via the second route R2 is also specified to be equivalent to the first predetermined velocity (more specifically, a second predetermined velocity that is slightly faster than the first predetermined velocity). In this embodiment, the first predetermined velocity corresponds to the "predetermined velocity."

In this embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is greater than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In other words, the first route R1 is the main route for game balls flowing into the inlet 921G. However, the movement speed of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 (the first predetermined speed mentioned above) is slower than the movement speed of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2 (the second predetermined speed mentioned above). As will be explained in detail later, this speed difference means that the probability of game balls entering the second operating opening 92G via each route is more favorable for the second route R2. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the main route for game balls entering the second operating opening 92G is the second route R2.

Furthermore, this is not an exhaustive configuration. The main route for winning at the second operating port 92G in low-frequency support mode may be designated as the first route R1. Alternatively, the product of the inflow probability at the inlet 921G and the winning probability at the second operating port 92G may be made the same for both routes R1 and R2, thus eliminating any difference in superiority or inferiority.

In this embodiment, game balls that pass through the inlet 921G do not necessarily enter the second operating port 92G. At least some of these game balls return from the specific area FE to the game area PE without entering the second operating port 92G. By utilizing this configuration, the probability of winning a support during the low-frequency support mode is set to a certain extent, while suppressing the dilution of the difference between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode due to frequent entries into the second operating port 92G during the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the driving time of the drive unit 911G in the low-frequency support mode and the driving time of the drive unit 911G in the high-frequency support mode (especially high-frequency support mode A) are defined based on the time required for game balls that flow into the inlet 921G of the operating port unit 82G at the first predetermined speed to move along the movable piece 901G. Now, with reference to Figure 187, the relationships between these various times will be explained. Figure 187(a) is a schematic diagram showing the movable piece 901G in the open position (specifically, the maximum rotation position), and Figure 187(b) is a schematic diagram showing the movable piece 901G in the closed position (specifically, the standby position).

(Relationship between transit time and driving time)
The way in which the weight of a game ball located on the flat surface 905G acts on the movable piece 901G varies greatly depending on the part of the flat surface 905G where the game ball is located, that is, depending on the support point (contact point) of the game ball on the flat surface 905G. Specifically, as shown in Figure 187(a), when the movable piece 901G is positioned at its maximum rotation position, if the game ball is located upstream of the second imaginary line FL2 on the flat surface 905G (towards the first end 908G), the weight of the game ball acts to push the movable piece 901G in a first predetermined direction, and if the game ball is located downstream of the second imaginary line FL2 on the flat surface 905G (towards the second end 909G), the weight of the game ball acts to push the movable piece 901G in a second predetermined direction.

Furthermore, the second virtual line FL2 is a line obtained by projecting the central axis CL10 perpendicularly onto the planar section 905G, and is the line obtained by projecting the central axis CL10 vertically onto the planar section 905G when the movable piece 901G is in its maximum rotation position. When the movable piece 901G is in the open position (maximum rotation position), the second virtual line FL2 is located downstream (towards the second end 909G) of the first virtual line FL1.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, most of the game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 and the second route R2 described above land within a predetermined range LE on the first surface 903G, specifically within a predetermined range LE including the edge (upper edge) on the first end 908G side. The movement speed of the game balls along the first surface 903G after landing within this predetermined range LE is defined to be the first predetermined speed described above. The following explanation will describe the relationship between the passage time and the driving time, assuming this type of inflow configuration.

The time T2 required for a game ball entering the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the second virtual line FL2 is shorter than the time the electric mechanism 93G is open (opening time TX1: 0.2 seconds) in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, a game ball that passes through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed immediately after the electric mechanism 93G opens can move downstream of the second virtual line FL2 before the opening time TX1 has elapsed.

In contrast, the time T3 required for a game ball that has entered the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the boundary portion BL between the first surface 903G and the second surface 904G is longer than the opening time TX1 of the electric mechanism 93G in low-frequency support mode. Therefore, a game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed immediately after the electric mechanism 93G has opened will reach the boundary portion BL after the opening time TX1 has elapsed. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, even if a game ball enters the inlet 921G at the right time, the opening time TX1 will have elapsed immediately after the game ball has passed the second virtual line FL2, and the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G of the electric mechanism 93G will be stopped. Then, the weight of the game ball located downstream of the second virtual line FL2 will act to push the movable piece 901G in the second predetermined direction. The game ball continues to move toward the lower limit position and reaches the second surface portion 904G. Then, as the movable piece 901G rotates from its maximum rotation position to its standby position, the game ball on the second surface portion 904G loses its support and returns from the specific area FE to the game area PE.

Furthermore, if the movement speed of the game ball upon entering the inlet 921G significantly exceeds the predetermined speed, the game ball will enter the second operating opening 92G via the second surface section 904G before losing support from the movable piece 901G. In other words, even in low-frequency support mode, some game balls have the potential to enter the second operating opening 92G.

The time T5 required from the inlet 921G until the game ball is discharged from the specific area FE is shorter than the waiting time TY1 until the movable piece 901G begins rotating towards its maximum rotation position again during the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the required time T5 is sufficiently longer than the interval time (1 sec) when the movable piece 901G is repeatedly positioned in the open position during the low-frequency support mode, and the waiting time (approximately 10 sec) during which the movable piece 901G remains in the standby position (closed position) from the previous opening to the next opening when consecutive support lottery wins occur during the low-frequency support mode. This includes the sum of the display time for the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS, the confirmation display time, and the opening and ending times for the electric mechanism 93G during the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if consecutive support lottery wins occur during the low-frequency support mode, the game ball passing through the specific area FE will not hinder the switching of the electric mechanism 93G to the open state.

Incidentally, the time required for a game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G via the second route R2 at the second predetermined speed to reach the second surface 904G is slightly longer than the output time of the drive signal during the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the drive signal output stops at the moment when a game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G via the second route R2 is positioned on the second surface 904G immediately after the electric mechanism 93G opens. As a result, game balls that have passed through the second route R2 have a higher probability of entering the second operating opening 92G. However, since the output time of the drive signal is slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the second operating opening 92G, not all game balls that flow into the inlet 921G via the second route R2 will enter the second operating opening 92G.

The time required for the movement of the game balls described above is the same for high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B. However, the time T2 required for the game balls that have entered the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the second virtual line FL2, the time T3 required for the game balls that have entered the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the boundary portion BL between the first surface 903G and the second surface 904G, and the time T4 required for the game balls that have entered the inlet 921G to move to the second operating port 92G are all shorter than the time (opening time TX2: 2 seconds) during high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B when the electric mechanism 93G is open. In other words, in high-frequency support modes A and B, even if the game ball moves downstream of the second virtual line FL2, the drive signal output to the drive unit 911G continues, and the rotation of the movable piece 901G in the second predetermined direction due to the weight of the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, in high-frequency support modes A and B, almost all of the game balls that flow into the inlet 921G will enter the second operating port 92G.

Furthermore, the time T5 required for the game balls that have entered the inlet 921G to be discharged from the specific area FE is shorter than the waiting time TY2 until the movable piece 901G starts rotating towards the maximum rotation position again during high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B. Specifically, the required time T5 is sufficiently longer than the above required time T5 for the interval time (1 sec) when the movable piece 901G is repeatedly positioned in the open position during high-frequency support modes A and B, and for the waiting time (1 sec) when the movable piece 901G is maintained in the standby position (closed position) from the previous opening to the next opening when the support lottery is won consecutively during high-frequency support modes A and B, that is, the sum of the display time for the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS, the confirmed display time, and the opening and ending times of the opening of the electric mechanism 93G during high-frequency support modes A and B (approximately 1 sec). Therefore, even if support lottery wins occur consecutively during high-frequency support modes A and B, the game balls passing through the specific area FE will not interfere with switching the electric mechanism 93G to the open state.

Next, referring to Figure 188, the movement of the electric mechanism 93G during low-frequency support mode and the flow of game balls passing through the inlet 921G will be explained.

Immediately after the electric mechanism 93G switches to the open state, the game balls that flow into the inlet 921G move parallel to the downstream side along the movable piece 901G, as shown in Figures 188(a) and 188(b). The output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G continues until the game ball crosses the aforementioned second virtual line FL2 and moves downstream, stopping when the game ball is positioned downstream of the second virtual line FL2 on the first surface 903G. When the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G stops, the movable piece 901G begins to rotate from the maximum rotation position towards the standby position due to the biasing force of the spring member described above. At this time, the weight of the game ball acts to assist this rotation (see Figure 188(c)).

In particular, when the game ball moves to the second surface 904G and is supported by the left and right movable pieces 901G, the influence of the game ball's own weight becomes significant, causing the movable pieces 901G to rotate rapidly.

At the moment the game ball reaches the second surface 904G, that is, after the required time T3 has elapsed since the game ball passed through the inlet 921G, the second surface 904G and the second guide passage 875G are still in communication, and the movement of the game ball from the second surface 904G to the second operating opening 92G is permitted. However, while the game ball is positioned on the second surface 904G, the second surface 904G descends, and the communication between the second surface 904G and the second guide passage 875G is terminated (severed). As a result, the movement of the game ball from the second surface 904G to the second operating opening 92G becomes impossible.

As shown in Figures 188(c) and 188(d), the movable piece 901G, pushed by the game ball, continues to rotate toward its standby position, expanding the gap between the second surfaces 904G to a size that allows the game ball to pass through. As a result, the game ball, which was positioned on the second surface 904G, loses its support and passes straight past the second operating opening 92G, being discharged from the specific area FE.

According to the 19th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If a jackpot is achieved, the support mode is changed via a special game state (upgraded to high-frequency support mode B). If a special miss occurs or the ceiling is reached, the support mode is changed without going through the special game state (upgraded to high-frequency support mode A). This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher support mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, both high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B are configured so that the time the electric mechanism 93G is open (open time) is longer than in low-frequency support mode. However, the probability of winning the support lottery in high-frequency support mode B via the special game state is higher than in low-frequency support mode, while the probability of winning the support lottery in high-frequency support mode A without going through the special game state is the same as in low-frequency support mode. In other words, when changing from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A without going through the special game state, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. In this configuration, if the support function in high-frequency support mode A is enhanced by increasing the probability of winning the support lottery, the opportunities to win the support lottery and the opportunities for the electric mechanism 93G to be in the open state will also increase in low-frequency support mode, where the period during which the electric mechanism 93G is open is short. In this configuration, if the electric mechanism 93G is frequently switched to the open state in a manner that effectively prevents ball entry (a manner in which the opening time is extremely short), it is likely to give players the impression that it is troublesome, and there are concerns that this will hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the electric mechanism 93G is opened in the high-frequency support mode A, the electric mechanism 93G is controlled so that game balls that have passed through the inlet 921G at a first predetermined speed via the first route R1 are guided to the second operating port 92G through the specific area FE. When the electric mechanism 93G is opened in the low-frequency support mode, the electric mechanism 93G is controlled so that game balls that have passed through the inlet 921G at a first predetermined speed via the first route R1 are returned to the game area PE through the specific area FE. In other words, even in the low-frequency support mode, by ensuring a certain amount of time (open time) for maintaining the open state and allowing game balls to flow into the electric mechanism 93G (specific area FE), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to effectively suppress excessive ball entry into the second operating port 92G due to the increased number of incoming balls, and to prevent the opportunity for balls to enter other ball entry points (variable prize-winning device 83) from being diminished due to the increased number of incoming balls into the electric prize mechanism 93G (specific area FE). This allows the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, since the movable piece 910G begins to displace toward the open position before the game ball reaches the second surface portion 904G (corresponding to the "distribution portion"), time can be gained to displace the second surface portion 904G to a position that forms a return passage. This is preferable in suppressing excessive ball entry into the second operating port 92G and ensuring the superiority of the high-frequency support mode A over the low-frequency support mode.

In low-frequency support mode, the output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is defined to be longer than the time required for the game ball, which has passed through the inlet 921G at a second predetermined speed via the second route R2, to reach the second surface 904G. This configuration, which allows for entry into the second operating opening 92G, is preferable in that it encourages attention to the movement of the movable piece 901G, even in low-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, as shown in this embodiment, by making it difficult for the ball to enter the second operating port 92G via the first route R1, which is the main inflow path to the electric mechanism 93G, a practically preferable configuration can be achieved in order to suppress excessive ball entry and ensure a clear distinction between the high-frequency support mode A and the low-frequency support mode.

In a configuration where the passage for game balls formed by the movable piece 901G of the electric mechanism 93G functions as a guide passage to the second operating port 92G and a return passage (discharge passage) to the game area PE, it is disadvantageous for the player if the switching of the electric mechanism 93G to the open state is hindered by game balls being returned (discharged). Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by defining the time from the stop of drive signal output to the start of drive signal output to be longer than the time required for game balls that have passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to be returned (discharged) to the game area PE through the passage, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and the decrease in reliability of the game machine can be prevented in order to achieve the aforementioned effect of increasing attention.

When the movable piece 901G is functioning as a return passage, the inclination of the passage bottom surface (flat portion 905G) is greater than when the movable piece 901G is functioning as a guide passage. With this configuration, when the mechanism switches to the closed state, the game balls located within the specific area FE are quickly returned (discharged) from that specific area FE to the game area PE. This is advantageous in preventing the game balls from obstructing the next opening of the electric mechanism 93G and in shortening the interval when the open state is repeated.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped and the system is switched to a closed state, even game balls that are already moving along the flow path toward the second operating port 92G can be prevented from entering the second operating port 92G. Specifically, when a game ball is located on the second surface portion 904G of the rolling surface formed by the planar portion 905G of the movable piece 901G (more specifically, the portion of the planar portion 905G that is downstream of the imaginary line FL2), the displacement (return) of the movable piece 901G to the closed position is boosted by the game ball. In other words, when the movable piece 901G returns to the closed position, the biasing force of the spring member as a biasing means and the weight of the game ball located on the second surface portion 904G can be used to quickly return the movable piece 901G to the closed position. This effectively eliminates the above-mentioned concern by suppressing frequent entries into the second operating port 92G, even if the chances of winning in the support lottery increase in the low-frequency support mode, where the period during which the electric mechanism 93G is open is short. This is desirable for increasing the attention given to the game. While it is possible to take measures such as drastically shortening the time (open time or acceptance time) of the electric mechanism 93G in the open state (e.g., 0.01 seconds) in the low-frequency support mode to effectively prevent ball entry, such frequent behavior of the electric mechanism (movable piece) is likely to give players an annoying impression, hindering the improvement of attention given to the game. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment allows for reducing the chances of ball entry into the second operating port 92G while avoiding excessively short opening times in the low-frequency support mode. This further enhances the aforementioned effect of increasing attention given to the game.

In low-frequency support mode, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped after the game ball passes the virtual line FL2. This suppresses the effect of the game ball's own weight hindering the displacement of the movable piece to the second position, thereby effectively improving the return responsiveness of the movable piece to the second position.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, the game ball that reaches the second surface portion 904G is supported in a position that straddles the gap between the left and right movable pieces 901G. This configuration, in which the game ball fits into such a gap, effectively suppresses erratic behavior of the game ball upon reaching its lower limit position and allows for the effective function of assisting the return of the movable piece 901G to its closed position (return assistance function). Furthermore, by increasing the distance from the central axis CL10 to the contact point with the game ball, the weight of the game ball can be effectively utilized.

The gap is expanded when the movable piece 901G is pushed by the game ball that is fitted into the gap. At this time, the height of the game ball supported by the movable piece 901G also changes (decreases). When this gap becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball loses its support and falls through the gap. In this configuration, by preventing the game ball from entering the second operating opening 92G through the second surface portion 904G before the gap becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the responsiveness when preventing entry can be effectively improved.

As described above, in a configuration that utilizes the weight of the game ball to assist in the return of the movable piece 901G to its closed position, it is assumed that the return assist function may not function properly if the behavior of the game ball on the movable piece 901G (rolling surface) becomes disordered. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by restricting the movement of the game ball from the second surface portion 904G to the first surface portion 903G (for example, backward movement), it is possible to suppress the failure of the return assist function to function properly.

<Variation 1>
In the 19th embodiment described above, when a game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G moves along the flat surface 905G toward the second operating port 92G, its direction of movement is changed on the second surface 904G (lower limit position) to increase the time the game ball stays on the second surface 904G. This restricts the entry of game balls that have flowed into the inlet 921G via the first path into the second operating port 92G during the low-frequency support mode to be substantially prevented, but the embodiment is not limited to this. As long as it is possible to suppress entry into the second operating port 92G during the low-frequency support mode, the specific configuration is arbitrary. For example, in order to increase the time the game ball stays on the second surface 904G in order to use the weight of the game ball to assist in the rotation (return) of the movable piece 901G to the closed position, it is also possible to configure the path of the game ball moving toward the second operating port 92G on the second surface 904G (more specifically, the part downstream of the imaginary line FL when the flat surface 905G is sloping downward toward the center) to meander. In other words, in order to suppress the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 92G during the low-frequency support mode, it is also possible to apply a deceleration structure that reduces the movement speed of the game ball moving toward the second operating port 92G on the second surface 904G (more specifically, the part downstream of the imaginary line FL when the flat surface 905G is sloping downward toward the center).

<Modified Example 2>
As shown in the 19th embodiment above, in a configuration that uses the weight of the game ball to assist in the rotation (return) of the movable piece to the closed position, further improvement in responsiveness can be achieved by efficiently utilizing the weight of the game ball with the following configuration. Specifically, as shown in Figure 189(a), the planar portion 905H of the movable piece 901H is bent so that it is convex toward the central axis CL10 when viewed from the front of the game machine, so that the pressing force of the game ball located on the second surface portion 904H is not directed toward the central axis CL10, that is, it can be efficiently utilized as a force to rotate the movable piece 901G.

<Example 3>
As shown in the 19th embodiment above, in a configuration that uses the weight of the game ball to support the rotation (return) of the movable piece to the closed position, providing a restricting part that restricts the backflow of game balls that have reached the lower limit position can contribute to further improvement of the operational stability of the electric mechanism. Specifically, as shown in Figure 189(b), the boundary between the first surface 903I and the second surface 904I is made stepped (stepped part 906I), and the movement of game balls that have moved from the first surface 903I to the second surface 904I towards the first surface 903I is restricted.

<Modification 4>
In the 19th embodiment described above, the movable piece 901G is configured such that the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G is increased, as is the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G. However, the configuration is not limited to this. The central axis CL10 may also be configured such that the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G is increased, as is the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G.

<Example 5>
In the 19th embodiment described above, a gap is created between the second ends 909G of the movable pieces 901G when they are in the open position, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the movable pieces 901G so that the second ends 909G of the movable pieces 901G come into contact with each other when they are in the open position, thereby preventing the creation of the gap. However, in a configuration that uses the weight of the game ball to assist in the displacement of the movable pieces 901G from the open position to the closed position, it is preferable to keep the contact point with the game ball as far away as possible from the central axis CL10 to efficiently utilize the weight of the game ball. In light of these circumstances, as described above, there is technical significance in configuring the movable pieces 901G so that a gap is created between the second ends 909G of the movable pieces 901G when they are in the open position.

<Modification 6>
In the 19th embodiment described above, the configuration was such that the direction of movement of the game ball would be changed so that the game ball that reached the second surface portion 904G would move toward the rear of the game machine (a configuration that functions as a guide means for guiding the game ball toward the rear of the game machine). However, it is also possible to provide an upright portion that rises from the flat portion 905G of the movable piece 901G at the edge on the side of the second end portion 909G, and to configure the configuration such that the direction of movement of the game ball would be changed so that the game ball that comes into contact with the upright portion moves toward the rear of the game machine. However, in order to smoothly return the game ball to the game area PE, it is preferable to avoid contact between the game ball flowing down the vertical passage and the irregularities on the movable piece 901G as much as possible. In view of these circumstances, there is technical significance in configuring the second surface portion 904G so that it does not protrude from the extended surface of the first surface portion 903G, as shown in the 19th embodiment described above.

<Example 7>
In the 19th embodiment described above, when the movable piece 901G is rotated to the open/closed position, the operating range of the first end 908G is defined to be above the central axis CL10, and the operating range of the second end 909G is defined to be above and below the central axis CL10. However, it is also possible to define the operating range of the second end 909G to be below the central axis CL10.

<Difference 8>
In the 19th embodiment described above, an example was given in which a solenoid is used as the drive unit for the electric mechanism 93G, but a motor such as a stepping motor may be used instead of a solenoid. In this case, it is also possible to configure the system so that the first drive control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the motor in a first direction to switch the electric mechanism from a closed state to an open state, and the second drive control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the motor in a second direction to switch the electric mechanism from an open state to a closed state. In this case, when switching to the open state, it is preferable to displace the movable piece 901G to the open position against the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring, and after switching to the open state, maintain the energized state to generate a holding torque that can restrict switching back to the closed state.

<Difference 9>
In the 19th embodiment described above, all game balls that flowed into the specific area FE from the inlet 921G and did not enter the second operation port 92G were returned to the game area PE through the lower opening 874G. However, this can be changed so that all game balls that flowed into the specific area FE from the inlet 921G and did not enter the second operation port 92G are not returned to the game area PE but are instead guided to a collection passage provided on the back side of the game board 80aG. Alternatively, all game balls that flowed into the inlet 921G and did not enter the second operation port 92G may be directed to other ball entry points such as general prize entry points, or they may be discharged directly into the collection passage without being returned to the game area PE (resulting in them becoming out balls).

<Modification 10>
In the 19th embodiment described above, the movement speed of the game balls when they flow into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is configured to be the same as the movement speed of the game balls when they flow into the inlet 921G via the second route R2, but the embodiment is not limited to this.

For example, the movement speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 may be configured to be slower than the movement speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In this case, the output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G should be determined based on the movement speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the first route, that is, the time required to reach each position in the specific region FE.

Furthermore, the system may be configured such that the speed at which the game balls move when flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is faster than the speed at which they move when flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In this case, the output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G should be determined based on the speed at which the game balls move when flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route, i.e., the time required to reach each position in the specific region FE.

<Variation 11>
In the 19th embodiment described above, the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is greater than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. However, the configuration may be such that the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is less than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In such a configuration, it is preferable, as shown in the modified example 10 above, that the speed at which the game balls move when flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is faster than the speed at which the game balls move when flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2.

<Modified example 12>
In the 19th embodiment described above, the output time of the drive signal when the support lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode and the electric mechanism 93G is switched to the receiving state is made shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 to pass through the inlet 921G and reach the second surface 904G, but the embodiment is not limited to this.

For example, when a support lottery is won during low-frequency support mode and the electric mechanism 93G is switched to the acceptance state, the output time of the drive signal may be made shorter than the time required for a game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 to reach the virtual line FL2 after passing through the inlet 921G.

Furthermore, when a support lottery is won during low-frequency support mode and the electric mechanism 93G is switched to the receiving state, the output time of the drive signal may be longer than the time required for the game ball, which has flowed into the inlet 921G via the first route R1, to pass through the inlet 921G and reach the second surface section 904G, and shorter than the time required to reach the second operating port 92G.

<Modification 13>
It is preferable to make the time required for a game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G at a first predetermined speed to be returned from the specific area FE to the game area PE shorter than the time required for a game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G at a first predetermined speed to enter the second operating opening 92G. If a game ball that has flowed into the electric mechanism 93G remains in the specific area FE for a long time, even though it is practically impossible for it to enter the second operating opening 92G, this can cause discomfort to the player. With the above configuration, such concerns can be suitably eliminated.

<Twentyth Embodiment>
In the 19th embodiment of the operating port unit 82G, a second surface portion 904G is provided on the edge of the flat portion 905G of the movable piece 901G on the side of the second end portion 909G, which slopes downward toward the second operating port 92G side (rear of the game machine) when the movable piece 901G is in the open position. This configuration changes the direction of movement of the game ball that reaches the second surface portion 904G from a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board 80aG to the thickness direction of the game board 80aG. In this embodiment, the specific configuration for changing the direction of movement of the game ball, which moves in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, to the thickness direction of the game board differs from that of the 19th embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to Figure 190, the specific configuration of the operating port unit 82J (movable piece 901J) in this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from that of the 19th embodiment. Figure 190 is a schematic diagram of the electric mechanism 93J and the second operating port 92J as seen from the front side of the game machine.

The pair of movable pieces 901J that constitute the electric mechanism 93J are formed such that when the movable pieces 901J are in their maximum rotational position (open position), the entire flat surface 905J slopes downward toward the rear. Game balls flowing in from the inlet 921J are supported by the flat surface 905J and guided toward the rear, thereby suppressing the lifting of the base 851J from the front. In other words, in this embodiment, the entire flat surface 905J of the movable piece 901J is provided with the function of guiding game balls toward the rear.

A gap is maintained between the left and right movable pieces 901J regardless of whether they are in the open or closed position. The size of this gap (gap dimension) is larger than the diameter of the game ball when the movable pieces 901J are in the closed position, and smaller than the diameter of the game ball when the movable pieces 901J are in the open position (see gap dimension LY1). When the movable pieces 901J are in the open position, the game ball, having moved to its lower limit along the flat section 905J, fits into this gap and is supported by both movable pieces 901J, moving towards the second operating opening 92J.

For game balls that have moved to the lower limit position along the flat section 905J, the upward lifting from the front of the base section 851J is suppressed during the process of reaching the lower limit position, allowing them to quickly enter the second operating opening 92J after reaching the lower limit position.

Here, when the game ball supported by both movable pieces 901J moves backward, the lower end of the trajectory it passes through (hereinafter referred to as the virtual guide surface FB) is located above the lower edge of the second operating opening 92J when the movable pieces 901J are in the open position. Under these circumstances, the game ball moving backward is allowed to enter the second operating opening 92J. In contrast, when the movable pieces 901J are in the closed position, the virtual guide surface FB is located below the lower edge of the second operating opening 92J. If a game ball that has reached the lower limit position attempts to move backward, it will get caught on the lower edge, preventing it from entering the second operating opening 92J.

In this embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode, the time required for a game ball passing through the inlet 921J at the first predetermined speed to reach the virtual line FL2 on the flat section 905J is defined to coincide with the time it takes to output a drive signal to the drive unit 911J of the electric mechanism 93J. In other words, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911J is stopped when a game ball flowing into the inlet 921J immediately after the electric mechanism 93J switches to the open state reaches the virtual line FL2. Therefore, after the output of the drive signal is stopped, the movable piece 901J is pushed in the second predetermined direction by the weight of the game ball. To put it another way, when the electric mechanism 93J switches from the open state to the closed state, the virtual guide surface FB is displaced from a position above the lower edge of the second operating port 92G to a position below it, while the size of the inlet 921J is large enough for the game ball to pass through.

While the game ball passes through the virtual line FL2 and reaches the left and right edges of the second operating port 92J, the movable piece 901J rotates in the second predetermined direction. During this time, the angle of the movable piece 901J changes by a predetermined angle (see ANG1), and the virtual guide surface FB described above descends below the lower edge of the second operating port 92J. This prevents the game ball from entering the second operating port 92J. Subsequently, as the movable piece 901J continues to rotate in the second predetermined direction, the inlet 921J becomes too large to allow the game ball to pass through (closed state), and the gap between the movable pieces 910J becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball located in the specific region FE is discharged from that region FE without entering the second operating port 92J.

<Variation 1>
In the 20th embodiment described above, the angle of inclination toward the rear in the planar portion 905J is configured to be constant between the first end 908J and the second end 909J. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and there may be differences in the angle of inclination depending on the portion. For example, the angle of inclination of the portion of the planar portion 905J that is on the second end 909J side may be greater than the angle of inclination of the portion that is on the first end 908J side.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 20th embodiment described above, when the movable piece 901J is in the open position, the virtual guide surface FB is positioned above the lower edge of the second operating port 92J, and as the movable piece 901J is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the virtual guide surface FB is displaced below the lower edge of the second operating port 92J, thereby suppressing entry into the second operating port 92J during the low-frequency support mode. However, this configuration is not essential, and it is also possible to configure the virtual guide surface FB to be positioned above the lower edge of the second operating port 92J regardless of whether the movable piece 901J is in the open or closed position.

<Example 3>
In the 20th embodiment described above, when the electric mechanism 93J switches from an open state to a closed state, the virtual guide surface FB is displaced from a position above the lower edge of the second operating port 92G to a position below it, while the size of the inlet 921J is large enough for a game ball to pass through. However, this can be changed as follows. That is, when the electric mechanism 93J switches from an open state to a closed state, the virtual guide surface FB is displaced from a position above the lower edge of the second operating port 92J to a position below it after the size of the inlet 921J has become large enough for a game ball to not pass through.

<21st Embodiment>
As described above, in a configuration where a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (fourth normal game state) is triggered by a "special miss result" or "reaching the ceiling," there is concern that the extremely long waiting time before the player can actually enjoy the benefits of transitioning to the normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A will be a factor that reduces player satisfaction. One of the features of this embodiment is that measures have been taken to avoid the extremely long waiting time before the player can actually enjoy the benefits of transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (fourth normal game state) without going through a special game state, triggered by a "special miss result" or "reaching the ceiling." The following will explain these measures, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, referring to the flowchart in Figure 191, the electric support processing performed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as part of normal processing will be explained.

(Processing for power supply support)
In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S6001, it is determined whether or not support is being provided by the electric feature 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not being provided, a negative determination is made in step S6001 and the process proceeds to step S6002. In step S6002, it is determined whether or not the display of confirmed symbols has finished in the through-gate display unit DS. If it is not the time when the display of confirmed symbols has finished, a negative determination is made in step S6002 and the process for supporting the electric feature is terminated. If it is the time when the display of confirmed symbols has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S6002 and the process proceeds to step S6003.

In step S6003, it is determined whether or not support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84. If support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S6003, and the main electric support processing ends there. If support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84, an positive determination is made in step S6003, and the process proceeds to step S6004. In step S6004, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B.

If the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, in step S6005, the round counter RC2 located in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "1," and in the subsequent step S6006, the short support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

If the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B, in step S6007, the round counter RC2 in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "2," and in the following step S6006, the long support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

After executing steps S6006 and S6008, the process proceeds to step S6009, where the opening start process is executed, and then the main electric support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time (0.5 seconds) for opening (see Figure 192). After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric device 93 begins.

Note that the waiting time for the opening is not a mandatory configuration. It is also possible to omit this waiting time and immediately switch the electric mechanism 93 to the open state when a support win occurs. Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that the waiting time for the opening differs depending on whether a short support flag or a long support flag is set.

Returning to the explanation of step S6001, if a positive result is obtained in step S6001, the process proceeds to step S6010. In step S6101, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S6009 has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S6010, and the main power support process ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S6010, and the process proceeds to step S6011. Now, referring to Figure 193, the power switching process in step S6011 will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device switching process, first, in step S6101, it is determined whether the electric device 93 is open (in the open state). Whether the electric device 93 is open or not is determined by whether the drive unit (solenoid) for the electric device is in a driven state (excited state), that is, whether it is outputting a drive signal. If the electric device 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S6102, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric device switching process ends there. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S6103. In step S6103, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric device 93, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed.

If a negative result is obtained in step S6103, the main electric device opening/closing process is terminated. If a positive result is obtained in step S6103, the process proceeds to step S6104. In step S6104, the electric device opening process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit of the electric device is started, and the electric device 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, in step S6105, "10" is set in the second prize counter PC2.

If the long support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, a positive determination is made in step S6106, and the process proceeds to step S6107, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds). On the other hand, if the short support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, a negative determination is made in step S6106, and the process proceeds to step S6108, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S6101, if a positive result is obtained in step S6101, i.e., if the electric mechanism 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S6109. In step S6109, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S6110. In step S6110, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no entry has occurred, the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S6111, and in the following step S6112, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S6112, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S6109 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the conditions for ending the opening of the electric mechanism 93 have been met. In this case, in step S6113, the drive signal being output to the drive unit of the electric mechanism 93 is stopped in order to close the electric mechanism 93.

In the following step S6114, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC2 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC2 is "0", its value is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S6115, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC2 value is "0". If the determination in step S6115 is negative, the process proceeds to step S6116, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds).
If it is determined in step S6115 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S6117.

If the long support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, a positive determination is made in step S6117, and the process proceeds to step S6118. In step S6118, the ending counter EC provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, if the short support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, a negative determination is made in step S6117, and the process proceeds to step S6119. In step S6119, the ending counter EC provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "7450" (equivalent to 14.9 seconds).

The ending counter EC is a counter referenced to determine the ending time after the electric mechanism 93 has finished opening. Its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 191, after executing the electric power switch opening/closing process in step S6011, the process proceeds to step S6012. In step S6012, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the result in step S6012 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S6012 is positive, the process proceeds to step S6013, where it is determined whether the ending waiting time set in steps S6118 and S6119 has elapsed. If the result in step S6013 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S6013 is positive, the process proceeds to step S6014. In step S6014, the support flags (short support flag and long support flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are cleared, and the electric power support process ends. This releases the restrictions on the support lottery based on winning in the through gate 84 and the restrictions on the display of changing patterns in the through gate display unit DS.

As detailed above, if you win the support lottery, a support game will begin in which the electric mechanism 93 is opened, and the next support lottery and the display of changing symbols on the through gate display unit DS will be restricted until the support game is completed. The support game consists of an opening part in which the player waits for the electric mechanism 93 to open, a main part in which the electric mechanism 93 is opened and closed, and an ending part after the opening and closing of the electric mechanism 93 is completed. The execution time of each of these parts corresponds to the opening pattern (short opening/long opening). In the case of a short opening, the opening time, which is the execution time of the opening part, is 0.5 seconds, the opening time, which is the execution time of the main part, is 0.1 seconds, and the ending time, which is the execution time of the ending part, is 14.9 seconds. In contrast, in the case of a long opening, the opening time, which is the execution time of the opening part, is 0.5 seconds, the opening and closing time, which is the execution time of the main part, is 2 seconds x 2 + 0.1 seconds, and the ending time, which is the execution time of the ending part, is 0.5 seconds. Whether to use a short or long opening is determined based on the support mode at the start of the support game, specifically whether or not support mode flags (high-frequency support mode flag A, high-frequency support mode flag B) are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and their types.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 194, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the relationship between the low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode A, and high-frequency support mode B in this embodiment.

In low-frequency support mode, the support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to low-frequency support mode. The probability of winning support in this lottery is 1/2. Simultaneously with this lottery, the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as stopped (confirmed), clearly indicating the result to the player. During low-frequency support mode, the display time for changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS is "15 seconds," and the display time for confirmed symbols is "0.5 seconds."

In High-Frequency Support Mode A, the support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A. This table is the same as the one referred to in Low-Frequency Support Mode, and the probability of winning support through this lottery is 1/2. Simultaneously with this lottery, the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as stopped (confirmed), clearly indicating the result to the player. During High-Frequency Support Mode A, the display time for changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 seconds," and the display time for confirming the symbols is also "0.5 seconds." Thus, in High-Frequency Support Mode A, although the probability of winning support is the same as in Low-Frequency Support Mode, the display time for changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS, i.e., the waiting time from winning support until the electric mechanism 93 opens, is significantly reduced.

In High-Frequency Support Mode B, the support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode B. The probability of winning support in this lottery is 1/1.1, which is more favorable than Low-Frequency Support Mode and High-Frequency Support Mode A. Simultaneously with this lottery, the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed as stopped (confirmed), clearly indicating the result to the player. In High-Frequency Support Mode A, the display time for changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 seconds," and the display time for confirming the symbols is also "0.5 seconds."

In this way, during low-frequency support mode, the display time of the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS is made longer compared to high-frequency support modes A and B. This increases the interval between the repeated switching of the electric mechanism 93 to the open state, clearly defining the difference in advantage between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support modes A and B.

As already explained, if a jackpot is achieved in the normal game state (first normal game state), which is the least favorable to the player due to its low-frequency support mode and low probability mode, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode via a special game state. In this case, the player can first enjoy the benefits of the jackpot in the special game state. Therefore, even if the transition to the high-frequency support mode, which is the other benefit, is delayed, such a time lag is unlikely to significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, it is assumed that the interruption of the normal game state by the intervention of the special game state makes the above time lag less noticeable.

In contrast, if a special miss occurs or the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state, the time lag before transitioning to high-frequency support mode A and enjoying its benefits becomes significant. This is a concern as it will lead to a decrease in player satisfaction and a major reduction in the desire to play. This inconvenience is expected to be even more pronounced when switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, as the normal game state continues without passing through a special game state. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned improvements to the support game prevent the above-mentioned time lag from becoming extremely large. Below, referring to the timing charts in Figures 195 to 197, the flow of gameplay when transitioning from a normal game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode (first normal game state) to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (fourth normal game state) will be explained according to the game situation. In the examples shown in Figures 195 to 197, the case where transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is triggered by a "special miss result" is illustrated. The basic procedure for transitioning to high-frequency port mode A, triggered by "reaching the ceiling," is the same as the example shown in Figures 195 to 197, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Pattern 1: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display of symbols corresponding to a non-winning support combination in the through-gate display unit DS is in effect.)
Figure 195(a) illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through gate is displaying a changing pattern corresponding to a losing result (non-win of support).

At timing tm1, the display unit D1 for the operation port begins displaying the changing symbols. This game round corresponds to a special losing result, and at timing tm4, the symbols corresponding to the special losing result are displayed as stopped symbols (confirmed display). At timing tm5, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A.

Here, at timing tm3, which precedes timing tm5, the display unit DS for the through-gate begins displaying the changing symbols. This changing display corresponds to a losing result (non-support win), and at timing tm6, after timing tm5, the display unit DS for the through-gate stops displaying the symbols corresponding to the non-support win (confirmation display). In other words, in the example shown in Figure 195(a), the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through-gate is displaying the changing symbols corresponding to the non-support win.

At timing tm7, when the confirmed symbol display on the through-gate display unit DS has finished, another support lottery is performed, and the symbol variation display based on the result of this support lottery begins on the through-gate display unit DS. This time, the support lottery resulted in a support win. Because the system switches to high-frequency support mode A at timing tm7, the display time for the symbol variation on the through-gate display unit DS is significantly reduced.

At timing TM8, after a 0.5-second variation display period has elapsed from timing TM7, the symbol corresponding to the support win is displayed (confirmed) on the through-gate display unit DS. Then, at timing TM9, when the confirmed display of the symbol on the through-gate display unit DS has finished, the support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93 begins.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At timing tm10, after the opening part has finished (0.5 seconds), a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric mechanism 93, causing the electric mechanism 93 to switch from a closed state to an open state (transitioning to the main part). This allows entry into the second operating opening 92. In the main part, the electric mechanism 93 switches between open state (2 seconds) → closed state (0.1 seconds) → open state (2 seconds). At timing tm11, when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part. At timing tm12, after the ending part has finished (0.5 seconds), i.e., when the support game ends (tm12), the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins.

In this scenario, a time lag occurs between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A (timing tm5) and the player actually receiving its benefits. As already explained, these benefits can be broadly categorized into two parts: the support lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A and the switching of the electric mechanism 93 to its open state (support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93).

The time lag (delay time TW1) between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A (timing tm5) and the execution of the lottery in high-frequency support mode A (timing tm6) is equal to the remaining variation display time on the through-gate display unit DS plus the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS. Considering that the maximum value of the variation display time for the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS set in low-frequency support mode is 15 seconds, the delay time TW1 will be between 0.5 seconds and 15.5 seconds.

The time lag (delay time TW2) from when the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A are met (timing of tm5) until the electric mechanism 93 opens is calculated as follows: remaining variation display time on the through-gate display unit DS + confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + variation display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A) + confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A) + execution time of the opening in support gameplay. Considering that the maximum value of the variation display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS set in Low-Frequency Support Mode is 15 seconds, the delay time TW2 will be between 2 seconds and 17 seconds. Furthermore, since the probability of winning the support lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A is 1/2, the delay time TW2 will increase accordingly if the support lottery is repeatedly unsuccessful.

(Pattern 2: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the symbols corresponding to the support win are being displayed on the through-gate display unit DS)
Figure 195(b) illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through gate is displaying a changing pattern corresponding to the winning result (support win).

At timing tn1, the display unit D1 for the operation port begins showing the changing symbols. This game round corresponds to a special miss result, and at timing tn4, the symbols corresponding to the special miss result are displayed as stopped symbols (confirmed symbols). At timing tn5, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of tn3, which precedes the timing of tn5, the display unit DS for the through-gate begins displaying the changing symbols. This changing display corresponds to a winning result (support win), and at the timing of tn6, after the timing of tn5, the display unit DS for the through-gate stops displaying (confirms) the symbols corresponding to the support win. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 195(b), the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through-gate is displaying the changing symbols corresponding to the support win.

At the timing of TN7, which is after the confirmation display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of TN6, the stop display (confirmation display) of the symbol corresponding to the support win on the through-gate display unit DS has finished, and support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93 has started.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At timing TN8, after the execution time of the opening part (0.5 seconds), a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric mechanism 93, and the electric mechanism 93 switches from the closed state to the open state (transitioning to the main part). This allows entry into the second operating opening 92. In the main part, the electric mechanism 93 switches between the open state (2 seconds) → closed state (0.1 seconds) → open state (2 seconds). At timing TN9, after the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part. At timing TN10, after the execution time of the ending part (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, i.e., at timing TN10, when the support game ends, the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins.

In this scenario, a time lag occurs between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A (timing tm5) and the player actually receiving its benefits. As already explained, these benefits can be broadly categorized into two: the support lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A and the switching of the electric mechanism 93 to its open state (support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93). In the example shown in Figure 195(b), the latter is the case.

The time lag (delay time TW3) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing of tn5) until the electric mechanism 93 opens is equal to the remaining variation display time on the through-gate display unit DS + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + the execution time of the opening in the support game. Considering that the maximum value of the variation display time for the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS set in low-frequency support mode is 15 seconds, the delay time TW2 will be between 1 and 16 seconds.

(Pattern 3: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met during the confirmation display of the symbols corresponding to the non-winning support in the through-gate display unit DS)
Figure 196(a) illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the through-gate display unit DS is displaying a symbol corresponding to a losing result (non-support win).

At timing tp1, the display unit D1 for the operation port begins displaying the changing symbols. This game round corresponds to a special miss result, and at timing tp4, the symbols corresponding to the special miss result are displayed as stopped symbols (confirmed symbols). At timing tp6, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A.

Here, at timing tp3, prior to timing tp6, the display unit DS for the through-gate begins displaying the changing symbols. This changing display corresponds to a losing result (non-support win), and at timing tp5, between timings tp4 and tp6, the display unit DS for the through-gate stops displaying (confirms) the symbol corresponding to the non-support win. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 196(a), the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through-gate is confirming the symbol corresponding to the non-support win.

At tp7, when the display of confirmed symbols on the through-gate display unit DS has finished, another support lottery is performed, and the display of changing symbols based on the result of this support lottery begins on the through-gate display unit DS. In this support lottery, support was won. Because the system switches to high-frequency support mode A at tp7, the display time of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS is significantly reduced.

At tp8, after the 0.5-second display period from tp7, the symbol corresponding to the support win is displayed (confirmed) on the through-gate display unit DS. Then, at tp9, when the confirmation display of the symbol on the through-gate display unit DS has finished, the support game using the electric mechanism 93 begins.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At tp10, after the opening part has finished (0.5 seconds), a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric mechanism 93, causing the electric mechanism 93 to switch from a closed state to an open state (transitioning to the main part). This allows entry into the second operating opening 92. In the main part, the electric mechanism 93 switches between an open state (2 seconds) → a closed state (0.1 seconds) → an open state (2 seconds). At tp11, when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part. At tp12, after the ending part has finished (0.5 seconds), i.e., when the support game ends, the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins.

In this scenario, a time lag occurs between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A (timing at tp6) and the player actually receiving its benefits. As already explained, these benefits can be broadly categorized into two parts: the support lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A and the switching of the electric mechanism 93 to its open state (support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93).

The time lag (delay time TW4) between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A (timing of tp6) and the execution of the lottery in high-frequency support mode A (timing of tp7) is equal to the remaining confirmed display time on the through-gate display unit DS. Considering that the maximum confirmed display time for the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS set in low-frequency support mode is 0.5 seconds, the delay time TW1 will be between 0 seconds and 0.5 seconds.

The time lag (delay time TW5) from when the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A are met (timing of tp6) until the electric mechanism 93 opens is calculated as follows: remaining confirmed display time on the through-gate display unit DS + display time of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A) + confirmed display time of symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A) + execution time of the opening in support gameplay. Considering that the maximum value of the display time of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS set in Low-Frequency Support Mode is 0.5 seconds, the delay time TW2 will be 1.5 seconds to 2 seconds. Furthermore, since the probability of winning the support lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A is 1/2, the delay time TW5 will increase accordingly if the support lottery is repeatedly unsuccessful.

(Pattern 4: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the symbols corresponding to the support win are being displayed on the through-gate display unit DS)
Figure 196(b) illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through gate is confirming and displaying the symbols corresponding to the winning result (support win).

At timing tq1, the display unit D1 for the operation port begins showing the changing symbols. This game round corresponds to a special losing result, and at timing tq4, the symbols corresponding to the special losing result are displayed as stopped symbols (confirmed symbols). At timing tq6, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A.

Here, at timing tq3, prior to timing tq6, the display unit DS for the through-gate begins displaying the changing symbols. This changing display corresponds to a winning result (support win), and at timing tq5, between timings tq4 and tq6, the display unit DS for the through-gate stops displaying (confirms) the symbol corresponding to the support win. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 195(b), the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through-gate is confirming the symbol corresponding to the support win.

At timing tq7, which is after the confirmation display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed from timing tq5, the stop display (confirmation display) of the symbol corresponding to the support win on the through-gate display unit DS has finished, and support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93 has started.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At timing tq8, after the opening part has finished (0.5 seconds), a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric mechanism 93, causing the electric mechanism 93 to switch from a closed state to an open state (transitioning to the main part). This allows entry into the second operating opening 92. In the main part, the electric mechanism 93 switches between open state (2 seconds) → closed state (0.1 seconds) → open state (2 seconds). At timing tq9, when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part. At timing tq10, after the ending part has finished (0.5 seconds), i.e., when the support game ends (tq10), the display of changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS begins.

In this scenario, a time lag occurs between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A (timing tm5) and the player actually receiving its benefits. As already explained, these benefits can be broadly categorized into two: the support lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A and the switching of the electric mechanism 93 to its open state (support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93). In the example shown in Figure 196(b), the latter is the case.

The time lag (delay time TW6) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing of tq6) until the electric mechanism 93 opens is equal to the remaining confirmed display time on the through-gate display unit DS plus the execution time of the opening in support gameplay. Considering that the maximum value of the changing display time for the through-gate display unit DS set in low-frequency support mode is 0.5 seconds, the delay time TW6 will be between 0.5 seconds and 1 second.

(Pattern 5: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the electric mechanism 93 is open)
Figure 197 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the electric mechanism 93 is open.

At timing tr1, the display unit D1 for the operation port begins displaying the changing symbols. This game round corresponds to a special miss result, and at timing tr5, the symbols corresponding to the special miss result are displayed as stopped symbols (confirmed display). At timing tr8, when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of tr3, prior to the timing of tr8, the display unit DS for the through gate begins to show the changing symbols. This changing display corresponds to a winning result (support win), and at the timing of tr4, prior to the timing of tr5, the display unit DS for the through gate shows the symbol corresponding to the support win stopped (confirmed display). At the timing of tr6, after the confirmation display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of tr4—specifically, at the timing of tr6 between the timing of tr5 and tr8—the display of the symbol corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS ends, and support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93 begins. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 197, the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met during support gameplay (specifically, while the electric mechanism 93 is open).

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At the timing of tr7, after the execution time of the opening part (0.5 seconds), a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric mechanism 93, and the electric mechanism 93 switches from the closed state to the open state (transitioning to the main part). This allows entry into the second operating opening 92. In the main part, the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state (0.1 seconds). At the timing of tr9, after the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part. At the timing of tr12, after the execution time of the ending part (14.9 seconds), i.e., after the support game ends, the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins.

In this scenario, a time lag occurs between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A (timing of tr8) and the player actually receiving its benefits. As already explained, these benefits can be broadly categorized into two parts: the support lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A and the switching of the electric mechanism 93 to its open state (support gameplay by the electric mechanism 93).

The time lag (delay time TW7) between the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A (timing of tr8) and the execution of the lottery in High-Frequency Support Mode A (timing of tr12) equals the remaining execution time of the support game. Considering that the maximum execution time of the support game in Low-Frequency Support Mode (short opening) is 15.5 seconds, the delay time TW1 will be between 0 seconds and 15.5 seconds.

The time lag (delay time TW8) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing of tr8) until the electric mechanism 93 opens is calculated as follows: remaining execution time of support game + display time of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + display time of confirmed symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + execution time of the opening in support game. Considering that the maximum execution time of support game in low-frequency support mode (short opening) is 15.5 seconds, the delay time TW2 will be between 1.5 seconds and 17 seconds. Furthermore, since the probability of winning the support lottery in high-frequency support mode A is 1/2, the delay time TW8 will increase accordingly if the support lottery is repeatedly unsuccessful.

In this embodiment, the average time required when the electric mechanism 93 opens once during low-frequency support mode is calculated as follows: Support non-winning probability × (Time of symbol variation display on the through-gate display unit DS + Time of confirmed symbol display on the through-gate display unit DS) + Support winning probability × (Time of symbol variation display on the through-gate display unit DS + Time of confirmed symbol display on the through-gate display unit DS + Time of support game execution). In other words, in this embodiment, the average time required is "23.25 seconds".

If we were to remove the aforementioned ending and opening sequences and instead increase the display time for the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS to ensure the above-mentioned average required time, the display time for the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS would become "23.2 seconds." In other words, if the display time for the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "23.2 seconds," the same average required time as in this embodiment can be achieved. However, when comparing this configuration with the configuration shown in this embodiment, the configuration shown in this embodiment is more advantageous in suppressing the aforementioned extremely long delay time.

The following comparison will be made with a configuration that, instead of the opening and ending sequences described above, gains time by extending the display time of the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS. Group (a) in Figures 198-201 shows the timing chart for the gameplay in the comparison target, while group (b) in Figures 198-201 shows the timing chart for the gameplay in the configuration shown in this embodiment.

(Comparison 1: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met in the latter half of the display of the changing symbols corresponding to the non-winning support in the through-gate display unit DS)
Figure 198 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to High Frequency Support Mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through gate is displaying a pattern corresponding to a losing result (non-win of support), or more specifically, when the conditions for transitioning to High Frequency Support Mode A are met in the latter half of the display (just before the end).

In the proportional relationship shown in Figure 198(a), there is no opening or ending for the support game. Therefore, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefits when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met at timing ts1 is as follows: That is, the time lag (delay time TW11) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing ts1) until the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing ts2) = remaining display time of fluctuations on the through-gate display unit DS + confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS. Furthermore, the time lag (delay time TW12) from the time the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing ts1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing ts3) is equal to the remaining fluctuation display time on the through-gate display unit DS + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + the fluctuation display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A). As described above, if the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met just before the end of the fluctuation display, and the remaining fluctuation display time is considered to be approximately 0 seconds, then the delay time TW11 = approximately 0.5 seconds and the delay time TW12 = approximately 1.5 seconds.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the support game is provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, as shown in Figure 198(b), when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met at timing tt1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefits is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW13) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing tt1) until the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing tt2) = remaining display time for fluctuations on the through-gate display unit DS + display time for confirmed symbols on the through-gate display unit DS. Furthermore, the time lag (delay time TW14) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing tt1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing tt3) is equal to the remaining display time of the through-gate display unit DS + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + the display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + the execution time of the opening in support game. As described above, if the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met just before the end of the display of the symbols, and the remaining display time of the symbols is approximately 0 seconds, then the delay time TW12 = approximately 0.5 seconds and the delay time TW13 = approximately 2 seconds.

In other words, there is no difference between delay times TW11 and TW13, and the difference between delay times TW12 and TW14 is negligible (0.5 sec).

(Comparison 2: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met during the first half of the display of the changing symbols corresponding to the non-winning support in the through-gate display unit DS)
Figure 199 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through gate is displaying a pattern corresponding to a losing result (non-win of support), or more specifically, when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met in the first half of the display (immediately after the start).

In the proportional relationship shown in Figure 199(a), there is no opening or ending for the support game. Therefore, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefits when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met at timing tu1 is as follows: That is, the time lag (delay time TW15) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing tu1) until the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing tu2) = remaining display time for fluctuations on the through-gate display unit DS + display time for confirmed symbols on the through-gate display unit DS. Furthermore, the time lag (delay time TW16) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing tu1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing tu3) is equal to the remaining fluctuation display time on the through-gate display unit DS + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + the fluctuation display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A). Assuming that the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met immediately after the start of the fluctuation display, and the remaining fluctuation display time is nearly at its maximum, the delay time TW15 is approximately 23.7 seconds, and the delay time TW16 is approximately 24.7 seconds.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the support game is provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, as shown in Figure 199(b), when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met at timing tv1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefits is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW17) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing tv1) until the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing tv2) = remaining variable display time on the through-gate display unit DS + confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS. Furthermore, the time lag (delay time TW18) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing of tv1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing of tv3) is equal to the remaining display time of the through-gate display unit DS + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + the display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + the confirmed display time of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + the execution time of the opening in support game. As described above, if the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met immediately after the start of the display of the symbols, and the remaining display time of the symbols is considered to be almost MAX, then the delay time TW17 = approximately 15.4 seconds and the delay time TW18 = approximately 16.9 seconds.

In other words, the difference between the delay times TW15 and TW16 and TW17 and TW18 is significant (7.8 seconds and 8.3 seconds, respectively).

(Comparison 3: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met during the latter half of the display of the changing symbols corresponding to the support win in the through-gate display unit DS)
Figure 200 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through gate is displaying a pattern corresponding to a winning result (support win), or more specifically, when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met in the latter half of the display (just before the end).

In the proportional relationship shown in Figure 200(a), the support game does not have an opening or ending. Therefore, the time lag (delay) until the player can enjoy the benefits when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met at timing tw1 is as follows: That is, the time lag (delay time TW12) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing tw1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing tw2) = remaining display time for the through-gate display unit DS + confirmed display time for the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS. As described above, if the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met just before the end of the display, and the remaining display time for the display is approximately 0 seconds, then the delay time TW19 = approximately 0.5 seconds.

In contrast, this embodiment includes an opening and ending sequence in the support game. Therefore, as shown in Figure 200(b), the time lag (delay) from the time the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met at timing tx1 until the player can enjoy the benefits is as follows: That is, the time lag (delay time TW20) from the time the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tx1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing tx2) = remaining display time for the through-gate display unit DS + display time for the confirmed symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + execution time of the opening sequence in the support game. As described above, if the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met just before the end of the display time, and the remaining display time is approximately 0 seconds, then the delay time TW19 = approximately 1 second.

In other words, the difference between delay time TW18 and delay time TW19 is negligible (0.5 sec).

(Comparison 4: When the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met during the first half of the display of the changing symbols corresponding to the support win in the through-gate display unit DS)
Figure 201 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the display unit DS for the through gate is displaying a pattern corresponding to a winning result (support win), specifically when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met in the first half of the pattern display (immediately after the start).

In the proportional relationship shown in Figure 201(a), the support game does not have an opening or ending. Therefore, the time lag (delay) until the player can enjoy the benefits when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met at timing ty1 is as follows: That is, the time lag (delay time TW21) from when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met (timing ty1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing ty2) = remaining display time for the through-gate display unit DS + confirmed display time for the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS. Assuming that the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met immediately after the start of the display, and the remaining display time is almost at its maximum, the delay time TW21 = approximately 23.7 seconds.

In contrast, this embodiment includes an opening and ending sequence in the support game. Therefore, as shown in Figure 201(b), the time lag (delay) from the time the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met at timing tz1 until the player can enjoy the benefits is as follows: That is, the time lag (delay TW22) from the time the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tz1) until the electric mechanism 93 opens (timing tz2) = remaining display time for the through-gate display unit DS + display time for the confirmed symbols on the through-gate display unit DS + execution time of the opening sequence in the support game. As described above, if the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met immediately after the start of the display, and the remaining display time is approximately MAX, then the delay TW22 = approximately 16 seconds.

In other words, the difference between delay time TW21 and delay time TW22 is significant (7.7 seconds).

According to the 21st embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If a jackpot result leads to a transition to a high-frequency support mode via a special game state, and a special loss result leads directly to the high-frequency support mode without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher support mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to the second normal game state or the third game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B via the special game state, a substantial payout can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, the player can enjoy the benefits of a jackpot result in the special game state. Therefore, even if the period from returning to the normal game state (especially the third normal game state) until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when a special miss occurs and the game transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, the time (delay time) before the benefits can be enjoyed, even though the game has internally transitioned to the fourth normal game state, is prolonged, reducing the smoothness of gameplay. If such delays become significant, it is a concern that they will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, in order to guarantee the superiority of the third normal game state over the first normal game state, it is undesirable for the electric mechanism 93 to frequently open in the first normal game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of opening by, for example, extending the display time of the changing symbols in the through-gate display unit DS, such measures could also increase the maximum delay time due to the longer display time of the changing symbols.

Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the open state during the first normal game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the display time of the changing symbols in the through-gate display unit DS is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay time into the changing display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay time can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the open state during the first normal game state, thereby ensuring the superiority of the fourth normal game state, while suppressing the prolonged time until the benefits of the fourth normal game state can be enjoyed (contributing to the smooth progress of the game). In particular, in this embodiment, the execution time of the ending part when the support game is started during the first normal game state is shorter than the sum of the changing display time and the confirmed display time when the changing symbol display is started on the through-gate display unit DS during the first normal game state. This configuration allows the above effects to be effectively achieved.

During the ending sequence, players are likely to get the impression that the timing of when the support game stops and the benefits become available is unnecessarily delayed. In contrast, this impression is less likely to occur while the symbol variation display is running. Therefore, if the execution time of the ending sequence when the support game starts during the first normal game state does not exceed the display time of the symbol variation display when the symbol variation display starts during the first normal game state, the opportunities for a transition to the fourth normal game state to occur during the ending sequence will be less than the opportunities for a transition to the fourth normal game state to occur during the symbol variation display on the through-gate display unit DS. This will mitigate the above concern.

If the above-mentioned delay occurs, there is a concern that it may concentrate in certain areas, leading to localized stress for the player. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging an opening part and an ending part before and after the main part, and distributing the delay function among these parts, the above concern can be mitigated.

If the game transitions to the fourth normal game state while the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS are changing (corresponding to the winning result) in the first normal game state, the support game will correspond to the fourth normal game state. By configuring the system so that the switch to the open state corresponding to the fourth normal game state is not carried over until the next support lottery and winning result, it is possible to improve player satisfaction. On the other hand, if the game transitions to the fourth normal game state while the support game has already started (during support game), it becomes necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. In this way, the support game is executed after at least one support lottery and the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS are changing, so the delay time may be longer compared to when the game transitions to the fourth normal game state during the symbol change display. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by configuring the execution time of the ending part when support game is started during the first normal game state to be shorter than the sum of the variation display time and the confirmation display time when the variation display of the symbols starts during the first normal game state, it is possible to suppress the extremely long time until the electric mechanism 93 opens (i.e., the time until the benefit can be experienced) even when a transition to the third normal game state occurs during support game and the support lottery is won and support game is executed.

Simply including an ending sequence would likely hinder smooth gameplay during the fourth normal game state. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by shortening the execution time of the ending sequence during the fourth normal game state, such concerns can be eliminated.

When a support game is started during the first normal game state, the execution time of the ending part constituting the support game is longer than the execution time of the main part constituting the support game. When a support game is started during the fourth normal game state, the execution time of the ending part constituting the support game is shorter than the execution time of the main part constituting the support game. By configuring the system so that the main part is dominant when a support game is started during the fourth normal game state, and the ending part is dominant when a support game is started during the first normal game state, the above effects can be more effectively achieved.

<Variation 1>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the execution time of the ending part during short opening (14.9 seconds) is slightly shorter than the sum of the display time (15 seconds) and the confirmed display time (0.5 seconds) of the through-gate display unit DS in low-frequency support mode (15.5 seconds). However, the system is not limited to this configuration. At least, the maximum time until the benefits of high-frequency support mode A can be enjoyed should be such that the difference between the case where the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met during the display of changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS and the case where the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met during support gameplay is perceived as the same by the player. For example, it is possible to extend that difference to 1.5 seconds (about 10% of the above sum). Furthermore, the sum of the display time (15 seconds) and the confirmed display time (0.5 seconds) of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS in low-frequency support mode (15.5 seconds) may be configured to be the same as the execution time of the ending part when a short circuit is opened (14.9 seconds).

Furthermore, while the sum of the display time (15 seconds) and the confirmed display time (0.5 seconds) of the through-gate display unit DS in low-frequency support mode (15.5 seconds) is set to be the same as the execution time of the support game during short opening (15.5 seconds), it may be changed so that the execution time of the support game during short opening is shorter than the sum of the display time (15 seconds) and confirmed display time (0.5 seconds) of the through-gate display unit DS in low-frequency support mode.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the support game, which is started when the support lottery is won, is composed of three parts: an opening part, a main part, and an ending part. However, it is also possible to change this and make the support game consist of a main part and an ending part.

Furthermore, while it is possible to structure the support gameplay into an opening part and a main part, in such a configuration, it is preferable to change the execution time of the opening part to be the sum of the execution time of the opening part and the execution time of the ending part as shown in the 21st embodiment above.

<Example 3>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the execution time of the ending part in the support game was biased to be longer than the execution time of the opening part. However, this can be changed so that the execution time of the opening part in the support game is biased to be longer than the execution time of the ending part, or the execution time of the ending part and the execution time of the opening part in the support game can be made the same length.

<Modification 4>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the execution time of the ending part of the support game was set to 14.9 seconds in all cases when the support game is executed during the low-frequency support mode, but it is not limited to this. Multiple candidates for the execution time of the ending part of the support game may be provided when the support game is executed during the low-frequency support mode. For example, it is possible to configure the system so that the execution time of the ending part differs depending on the type of support lottery win.

<Example 5>
The specific structure of the electric mechanism 93 that determines whether a prize is awarded in the second opening 92 is arbitrary. For example, the number of movable pieces as opening and closing members (shutters) may be one. It is also possible to make the movable pieces slide instead of rotate. Furthermore, the direction of operation of the movable pieces may be changed from a direction parallel to the front of the game board 80a to the direction of the thickness of the game board 80a.

<Modification 6>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the mode of the support game was set to the timing when the confirmed display of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS ends (is completed), i.e., the start timing of the support game, but it is not limited to this. For example, the opening can be made common to all support modes, and the mode of the support game (opening/closing mode and execution time of the ending part) can be set to the timing when the opening part of the support game ends, i.e., the start timing of the main part. It is also possible to set the mode of the support game to the timing when the confirmed display of the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS begins, or when the variable display of the symbols begins.

<Example 7>
The display time for confirming a symbol in the through-gate display unit DS may be shorter than the display time for confirming a symbol in the through-gate display unit DS when the symbol variation display starts during low-frequency support mode. In high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, the same as in low-frequency support mode, and even if the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met, there is a possibility of consecutive failures to win support. Therefore, if the confirmation display time is shortened as described above, the time lag from switching to high-frequency support mode A until the electric mechanism 93 is actually opened can be reduced. This is desirable in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game and reduce stress on the player.

<Difference 8>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the probability of winning the support lottery was set to be the same (1/2 in both cases) for the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the probability of winning the support lottery in the high-frequency support mode A higher than the probability of winning the support lottery in the low-frequency support mode.

<Difference 9>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the execution time of the ending part when a support game is played in high-frequency support mode A and the execution time of the ending part when a support game is played in high-frequency support mode B are the same. However, the execution time of the ending part when a support game is played in high-frequency support mode A and the execution time of the ending part when a support game is played in high-frequency support mode B may be defined separately. In other words, the execution time of the ending part may be different for high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B. In this case, it is preferable that the execution time of the ending part be shorter in high-frequency support mode A than in high-frequency support mode B.

<Modification 10>
Similar to other embodiments, a difference in the degree of advantage may be provided between the lottery based on winning in the first operating port 91 and the lottery based on winning in the second operating port 92. For example, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the lottery based on winning in the second operating port 92, which is equipped with an electric mechanism 93, higher than the degree of advantage of the lottery based on winning in the first operating port 91.

<22nd Embodiment>
In the 21st embodiment described above, when a support game is started during the low-frequency support mode, the execution time of the opening part is set to "0.5 sec". This opening part also has a function to suppress the delay time that occurs when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met. Furthermore, it is preferable to have a configuration that secures time in both the opening part and the ending part in order to alleviate localized stress. However, the existence of such an opening part can be harsh for players who are hoping for an immediate release when they win the support lottery. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes this matter into consideration. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained below with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 202, focusing on the differences from the 21st embodiment.

In this embodiment as well, the support game begins when the support lottery is won and the display of the corresponding symbols is completed. Here, if the support game starts under low-frequency support conditions, the execution time of the opening part is set to "0 seconds," and the execution time of the ending part is set to "15.4 seconds." In other words, in this embodiment, the opening does not occur during a short opening, and the main part is executed immediately. Then, by adding the execution time of the opening part, as shown in the 21st embodiment, to the execution time of the support game during a short opening, it is configured to be the same as in the 21st embodiment (15.5 seconds).

In contrast, when support gameplay begins under conditions of high-frequency support A and B, the execution time of the opening part is set to "0.8 seconds," and the execution time of the ending part is set to "0.2 seconds." In other words, in this embodiment, during long openings, the relative lengths of the execution times of the opening and ending parts are reversed.

<Variation 1>
In the 22nd embodiment described above, the execution time of the opening part in the support game for short opening was set to 0 seconds, i.e., the opening part was not executed. However, the system is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the execution time is set to be shorter than at least the execution time of the ending part (15.4 seconds) or the execution time of the opening part in the support game for long opening (0.8 seconds). This does not negate the possibility of a configuration in the support game for short opening where the opening part is executed in a short time.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 22nd embodiment described above, the execution time of the ending part in the support game compatible with long opening was set to 0.2 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the support game compatible with long opening, it is also possible to set the execution time of the ending part to 0 seconds, that is, to a configuration in which the ending part is not executed.

<23rd Embodiment>
In the 21st and 22nd embodiments described above, the opening part is executed even during long-opening. As already explained, even when the system internally switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the electric mechanism 93 must win the support lottery before it actually opens. However, in high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, the same as in low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the support lottery is lost consecutively, the time it takes for the electric mechanism 93 to open may be prolonged. This can reduce player satisfaction and hinder efforts to increase attention to the game. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into consideration. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 21st embodiment.

In this embodiment, when a support game (short opening) is started during the low-frequency support mode, the opening part is executed, similar to the 21st embodiment. In contrast, when a support game (long opening) is started during high-frequency support modes A and B, the execution time of the opening part becomes 0 seconds, effectively eliminating the need for the opening part to be executed. This configuration allows for the suppression of excessively large maximum delay times during the low-frequency support mode by utilizing the opening part, while simultaneously shortening the time from the fulfillment of the transition condition to the opening of the electric mechanism 93 when the transition condition is met during a support game and the subsequent support lottery is won, resulting in the execution of a support game corresponding to a long opening.

<24th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved through a lottery based on winnings into the operating ports 91 and 92, the game transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode via a special game state. Subsequently, if a loss (hereinafter also referred to as a "loss") is achieved through a lottery based on winnings into the operating ports 91 and 92, the game transitions to a third normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode, or a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and low frequency support mode, without going through a special game state. This configuration is one of the features of this embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, with reference to Figures 203 to 205. Figure 203 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used for winning/losing draws, etc., Figure 204(a) is a schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for low probability mode, Figure 204(b) is a schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for high probability mode, Figure 204(c) is a schematic diagram showing the fall-out table, and Figure 205 is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for big wins.

(Regarding various counters)
The MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as jackpot抽選 (lottery), setting the display on the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and setting the display of symbols on the symbol display device 95. In these lotteries and settings, as shown in Figure 203, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery, a type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot result A to 8R probability variation jackpot result D), a reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 95 is fluctuating without a win, a fall random number counter C5 is used for the fall lottery from high probability mode, a random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, a variation type counter CS is used to determine the display time of the pattern fluctuations in the operation port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 and the display time of the pattern fluctuations in the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, and an electric mechanism release counter C4 is used for a lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operation port 92 into an electric mechanism release state. These various counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS are provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, and a fall random number counter C5 is newly added to the counter group shown in the first embodiment.

Each counter C1-C5, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to its previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an operation slot reserve area RE, an execution area AE, and a total reserved ball storage area.

The operating port retention area RE comprises the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth areas. In accordance with the winning history of the first or second operating port 91, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall-off random number counter C5, stored in the lottery counter buffer 431, is stored as retention information in one of the eighth areas. This retention information corresponds to special information.

In areas 1 through 8, when multiple consecutive entries into the first or second operating port 92 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. Up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the first or second operating port 92 are retained and stored. Furthermore, a total retention count storage area is provided in the retention ball storage area 432, and this storage area contains information to identify the number of entries into the first or second operating port 91 that are being retained and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE when the display section D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 starts displaying the changing patterns. At the start of each game round, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, we will provide further explanation about the various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 204, there are two win/loss tables: a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes in its win/loss lottery means: a low probability mode (low probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

In the above lottery, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 204(a)) is referenced, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", for a total of three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 (0-599), "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpot results, resulting in a jackpot probability of 1/200.

On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 204(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", totaling six values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results, resulting in a jackpot probability of 1/100.

Furthermore, if the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot are arbitrary.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, all values other than the random number value that results in a jackpot correspond to losing results (corresponding to the "normal losing result" shown in the first embodiment), and the configuration differs from the first embodiment in that there are no special losing results.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 29, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, the distribution destination of the game results using the winning type counter C2 (i.e., the results of the win/fail lottery and the distribution lottery) is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403. The contents of the distribution table will now be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 205.

In the jackpot distribution table, the game results are allocated to one of four types: 8R probability variation jackpot result A (high probability special game result), 8R probability variation jackpot result B (high probability special game result), 8R probability variation jackpot result C (high probability special game result), and 8R probability variation jackpot result D (high probability special game result). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 17" corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot result A, "18 to 26" corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot result B, "27 to 28" corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot result C, and "29" corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot result D.

8R probability variation jackpot results A through D are all jackpot results in which, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The following three conditions are set for the termination of this high-frequency support mode: (1) a jackpot result occurs while in high-frequency support mode; (2) a fall occurs while in high-frequency support mode and the termination criteria number of rounds is reached; (3) a fall occurs while in high-frequency support mode after the termination criteria number of rounds has been reached.

In other words, if a player has already fallen out of the game before reaching the termination threshold, the system switches to low-frequency support mode upon reaching that threshold. If a player has not fallen out before reaching the termination threshold, the system switches to low-frequency support mode only if a player falls out after reaching that threshold. In other words, if the game progresses without a jackpot after transitioning to the special game state, the number of games played in high-frequency support mode is maintained until at least the termination threshold is reached. In the following explanation, the termination threshold will also be referred to as the "guaranteed number of games" or "guaranteed continuation number of games."

As shown in Figure 205, if the result is 8R probability variation jackpot A, the termination threshold is set to "100 spins". If the result is 8R probability variation jackpot B, the termination threshold is set to "200 spins". If the result is 8R probability variation jackpot C, the termination threshold is set to "500 spins". If the result is 8R probability variation jackpot D, the termination threshold is set to "1000 spins". In other words, the player's advantage (expected probability of consecutive wins) is set to increase in the order of 8R probability variation jackpot A < 8R probability variation jackpot B < 8R probability variation jackpot C < 8R probability variation jackpot D.

When the lottery mode is set to high probability mode, the chances of hitting the jackpot are higher than when it is set to low probability mode. Therefore, players play with the expectation that the lottery mode will be high probability mode. In this embodiment, by deliberately refraining from providing information that identifies the lottery mode, it is possible to allow players to predict whether the lottery mode is high probability mode or low probability mode. This aims to increase the level of attention players receive while playing.

The fall random number counter C5 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The fall random number counter C5 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first or second operation opening 91.

The random number values that result in a "fall" are stored as a fall table (win/loss information group) in the fall table storage area, which serves as a fall information group storage means in ROM 403. Here, we will explain the contents of the fall table. Note that the fall table is common regardless of the game state, such as high probability mode/low probability mode or high frequency support mode/low frequency support mode, but it is not limited to this; it is also possible to configure the system to switch reference tables depending on the game state.

In the above lottery, the random number value that results in a fall (a losing result corresponding to a fall: fall result) is "444". In other words, of the values of the fall random number counter C5 from "0 to 599", only "444" corresponds to a fall (see Figure 204(c)). When a fall occurs, the game state transitions from high probability mode to low probability mode (fall). Note that during low probability mode, the game remains in low probability mode regardless of the value of the fall random number counter C5, and during high probability mode, the game remains in high probability mode if the fall random number counter C5 is anything other than "444". In other words, in this embodiment, once the game transitions to high probability mode, it remains in high probability mode until a fall occurs due to the fall lottery.

Furthermore, considering that the probability of hitting a jackpot is 1/200 in high-probability mode, and 1/100 and 1/600 in low-probability mode, if the result is 8R probability variation jackpot result C or 8R probability variation jackpot result D, a jackpot is highly likely in the next round.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92. Then, a decision is made on whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, during gameplay rounds transitioning to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. While the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same for each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, a configuration where the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode may be used.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 95. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2, and at the start of pattern variation by the pattern display device 95.

The electric mechanism release counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric mechanism release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is conducted based on the stored value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 93 of the second operation opening 92 to the open state. Further explanation of the support mode follows.

The random number values that result in a support win are stored as a support lottery table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. Two support lottery tables are set up: a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group) and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group).

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results.

On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values excluding "4" and "304". In other words, all values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" except "4" and "304" correspond to support win results. Therefore, high-frequency support mode B is differentiated from the low-frequency support mode by resulting in support wins in almost all support lotteries.

In low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is set to 1/2. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "1," and the time the electric mechanism 93 remains open (open time) is set to "0.1 seconds." By drastically shortening the open time in this way, entry into the second operating opening 92 is effectively avoided during low-frequency support mode.

In high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/1.1. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "2". The time the electric mechanism remains in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds", and the interval time it remains in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds". By extending the open time compared to low-frequency support mode, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted during high-frequency support mode, allowing players to continue playing while minimizing the reduction in their ball count (investment). In other words, compared to low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode is configured to have a higher ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

(Regarding the various processes executed by the main control unit 162)
Next, we will explain the processes performed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to advance the game, specifically the timer interrupt process and the normal process. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 402 also performs a main process that is started when the power is turned on, and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but we will omit the explanation of these various processes.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, let's refer to the flowchart in Figure 206 and explain the timer interrupt processing. This processing is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 402.

In step S6201, the system reads the status of various prize detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e). Specifically, it reads the status of the various prize detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162, determines the status of the sensor, and saves the detection information (prize detection information).

Subsequently, in step S6202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S6203, the system updates the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric mechanism release counter C4, and fall random number counter C5. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric mechanism release counter C4, and fall random number counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum, they are reset to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S6204, the entry process for the through gate 84 is executed. In the entry process for the through gate, it is determined whether the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the flag is stored, and provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved memory items SN) is less than 4, the value of the electric mechanism release counter C4, updated in step S6203, is stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433. Then, if the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the entry detection flag is erased, and the entry process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the prize entry process for the through-gate in step S6204, the process proceeds to step S6205. In step S6205, the prize entry process for the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

After executing the prize-winning process for the through gate, the process proceeds to step S6205. In step S6205, the prize-winning process for the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. Here, the prize-winning process for the operating ports will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 207 and 208.

(Award processing for the operating port)
In the prize-winning process for the operating port, first in step S6301, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered (become a prize for) the first operating port 91. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S6302, where a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 242 to dispense three game balls.

In the following step S6303, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. In the following step S6304, the value corresponding to the first operation opening 91 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening). After that, in step S6305, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6301 that the game ball has not entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S6306. In step S6306, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (entered) the second operating opening 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating opening 92, the process proceeds to step S6307, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to dispense four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S6302 and S6307 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output processing S6501 of the normal processing described later.

In the following step S6308, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. In the following step S6309, the value corresponding to the second operation opening 92 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening). After that, in step S6305, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

Furthermore, if both steps S6301 and S6306 result in a negative determination, that is, if no ball enters either the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92, the prize-winning process will terminate immediately.

Now, referring to Figure 208, the information acquisition process in step S6305 will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S6401, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, in step S6402, the number of reserved operation memories N of the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and in step S6403, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

In the following step S6404, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS, and fall random number counter C5, which were updated in step S6203, are stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the operation slot reserve area RE, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN, which was incremented by 1 in step S6402.

In other words, if the first operation slot reserve memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variation type counter CS, and fall random number counter C5, which were updated in step S6203, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot reserve area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation slot reserve memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S6402.

Furthermore, if the second operation slot's reserved memory count RbN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variation type counter CS, and fall random number counter C5, which were updated in step S6203, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot's reserved memory area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S6402.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S6405. In step S6405, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 99. During the display update process, if the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operation port 91, the display of the hold count display section S1 for the first operation port is updated. If the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operation port 92, the display of the hold count display section S2 for the second operation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 and the reserved number related to the second operation port 92. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 92 increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S6406 and S6407, the sub-control devices, namely the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410, are notified that a prize has been awarded to the operation openings 91 and 92. A pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information indicating whether the prize was awarded to the first operation opening 91 or the second operation opening 92.

The hold command set in step S6407 will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output processing of the normal processing (step S6501), which will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 209. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and the main processing of the game is performed during normal processing. In summary, the processing in steps S6501 to S6507 is executed as a periodic process with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing in steps S6509 and S6510 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the first step, S6501, executes external signal output processing. In the external signal output processing of step S6501, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side and the hall computer.

Specifically, the system determines whether a prize ball command is set, and if so, transmits it to the payout control device 242. Furthermore, if various commands such as the variation start command, type command, variation end command, and other performance commands, as well as the hold command and the shift command (described later), are set, they are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, each time the change in the pattern is displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating the pattern confirmation is output to the hall computer. During the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer. During the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S6502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S6503, game round control processing is performed to control the gameplay in each game round. This game round control processing includes determining the jackpot, setting the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95, and controlling the display of the main display unit 99.

After executing the game turn control process in step S6503, the process proceeds to step S6504, where the game state transition process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Further details regarding the game turn control process in step S6503 and the game state transition process in step S6504 will be explained later.

In the following step S6505, control processing for the through gate is performed, including support lottery processing based on winning a prize in the through gate 84. In step S6506, support processing for the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operating opening 92, is performed to drive and control it.

Subsequently, in step S6507, the game ball launch control process is executed. In this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is energized once at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the following step S6508, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

The execution time for each process in steps S6501 to S6507 varies depending on the game state; therefore, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Thus, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control process in step S6503 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 210.

In the game round control process, first, in step S6601, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S6602 onward, namely the game round start processes in steps S6603 to S6606 and the game round progress processes in steps S6607 to S6609.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, steps S6602 and S6603 determine whether a game round is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in a variable display state. If they are in a variable display state, a negative determination is made in step S6602, and the process proceeds to step S6603. In step S6603, it is determined whether the confirmed display on the operation port display units D1 and D2 has finished. If a positive determination is made in step S503, the process proceeds to the game round start processing in steps S6604 to S6606. In the game round start processing, first in step S6604, it is determined whether the total number of starting reserved balls (common reserved ball count CRN) is "0". If the common reserved ball count CRN is "0", it means that no reserved ball information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, this game round control processing ends there.

On the other hand, if the common reserve count CRN is not "0", in step S6605, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operation port of the reserve ball storage area 432 for variable display. Furthermore, in step S6606, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the symbol display device 95, after which the game round control process ends.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the variation initiation process in step S6606, referring to the flowchart in Figure 211.

(Initiation of change process)
In the variation initiation process, first, in step S6701, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If the determination in step S6701 is positive, the process proceeds to step S6702, where the value of the continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is deducted by "1".

After the update process in step S6702 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S6701, the fall lottery process is executed in step S6703. In the fall lottery process, the information for the fall lottery, specifically the information obtained from the fall random number counter C5 and the fall table, stored in the execution area AE, is referenced to determine whether the conditions for transitioning to the low probability mode have been met. If a fall occurs, a positive determination is made in step S6704, and the fall setting process in steps S6705 to S6706 is executed.

In the fall-out setting process, step S6705 determines whether the lottery mode is in high probability mode. If the result in step S6705 is negative, the fall-out setting process ends immediately. If the result in step S6705 is positive, the process proceeds to step S6706. In step S6706, the high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is cleared. As a result, the win/loss lottery table for low probability mode will be referenced in subsequent win/loss lottery processes.

If a negative result is obtained in step S6704 (i.e., a fall is avoided), or after the above fall setting process has been executed, the process proceeds to step S6707. In step S6707, a win/failure determination process is executed. This win/failure determination process determines whether the pending information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, it identifies the information for jackpot determination, i.e., the information obtained from the winning random number counter C1, from the information stored in the execution area AE. If the win/failure lottery mode is low probability mode, the win/failure table for low probability mode stored in the win/failure table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot. If the win/failure lottery mode is high probability mode, the win/failure table for high probability mode stored in the win/failure table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the following step S6708, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination process in step S6707 corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S6709.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information from the information stored in the execution area AE, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine which of the 8R probability variation jackpot results A through D corresponds to the type determination information identified above.

If the result is 8R probability variation jackpot A, step S6710 executes the stop result setting process for 8R probability variation jackpot A. In this setting process, the information of the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

Specifically, information (8R probability variation jackpot A flag) for identifying that the result of the win/loss determination for this game round is 8R probability variation jackpot result A is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the result is 8R probability variation jackpot result B, the stop result setting process for 8R probability variation jackpot B is executed in step S6710. In this setting process, information (8R probability variation jackpot B flag) for identifying that the result of the win/loss determination for this game round is 8R probability variation jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the result is 8R probability variation jackpot C, the stop result setting process for 8R probability variation jackpot C is executed in step S6710. In this setting process, information (8R probability variation jackpot C flag) for identifying that the result of the win/loss determination for this game round is 8R probability variation jackpot result C is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the result is 8R probability variation jackpot D, step S6710 executes the stop result setting process for 8R probability variation jackpot D. In this setting process, information (8R probability variation jackpot D flag) for identifying that the win/loss judgment result for this game round is 8R probability variation jackpot D is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of step S6708, if a negative result is determined in step S6708, i.e., if it is not a jackpot, i.e., a miss, the process proceeds to step S6711. In step S6711, the stop result setting process for misses is executed. In this process, the information of the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

After executing the process in step S6710 or step S6711, the process for setting the variable display time is executed in step S6712. In this process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

After the setting process for the variable display time is executed in step S6712, the process proceeds to step S6713, where the variable start command and type command are set. The variable start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variable display time. The type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the type command includes information on 8R probability variation jackpot result A, 8R probability variation jackpot result B, 8R probability variation jackpot result C, 8R probability variation jackpot result D, loss result information, and fall-out information.

The variation start command and type command set in step S6713 are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S6501 of the normal processing (Figure 209). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls the lamp unit 26 and speaker unit 29 so that the determined performance content is executed. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance, such as the variation display pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 95, for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and transmits this determined information to the above variation start command and type command to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 so that the game performance (display performance) is executed in the manner determined by the notification/performance control device 140, based on the received variation start command and type command.

Subsequently, in step S6714, the display of the changing symbols is started on either the first operation port display unit D1 or the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this symbol change start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the display of the changing symbols, etc., to start before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

Here, with reference to Figures 212 and 213, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display time set in step S6712. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the setting method for the variable display time differs depending on the game state.

As shown in Figure 212, the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode is configured so that in game rounds resulting in a jackpot or a near miss, the variable display time is "20 to 30 seconds," regardless of the number of reserved balls. In contrast, in game rounds resulting in a complete miss (where the near miss display is not supported), the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is "0," the variable display time is "12 to 14 seconds"; if the number of reserved balls is "1," the variable display time is "12 to 13 seconds"; if the number of reserved balls is "2," the variable display time is "7 to 9 seconds"; and if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 8," the variable display time is "3 to 5 seconds."

As shown in Figure 213, when the game state is the second normal game state, which corresponds to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, or the third normal game state, which corresponds to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, the variable display time table referenced differs depending on the number of games played after the special game state ends. Specifically, the variable display time tables referenced in the second and third normal game states are broadly divided into a normal variable display time table (see Figure 213(a)) referenced when the number of games played ≠ a predetermined number (100, 200, or 500 games in this embodiment), and a special variable display time table (see Figure 213(b)) referenced when the number of games played = a predetermined number (100, 200, or 500 games in this embodiment).

When the variable display time is set by referring to the normal variable display time table, the variable display time will be "20-30 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved balls in a game round that results in a jackpot or a near miss. In contrast, in a game round that results in a complete miss (where the near miss display is not supported), the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved balls. If the number of reserved balls is "0", the variable display time will be "10-12 seconds", and if the number of reserved balls is "1-8", the variable display time will be "1-2 seconds". However, when the variable display time is set by referring to the special variable display time table, the variable display time will always be "30 seconds", regardless of the number of reserved balls or the outcome of the lottery (win or loss).

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process in Figure 210, if a positive determination is made in step S6602 or a negative determination is made in step S6603, the process proceeds to step S6607. In step S6607, it is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed for the current game round. If a negative determination is made in step S6607, the variation display process is executed in step S6608, and then the game round control process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S6607, the process proceeds to step S6609, the confirmation display process is executed, and then the game round control process ends. Now, referring to the flowchart in Figure 214, the confirmation display process in step S6609 will be explained.

(Processing for final display)
In the confirmation display process, first, in step S6801, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is currently being performed on the operation port display units D1 and D2. If the determination in step S6801 is negative, the process proceeds to step S6802. In step S6802, the confirmation display time setting process is executed. In this embodiment, in the first normal game state, the confirmation display time is set to "1 sec", and in the second and third normal game states, the confirmation display time is set to "0.5 sec".

In the following step S6803, the confirmation display start process is executed. This start process controls the display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 to stop the patterns determined in steps S6710 to S6711. Afterward, in step S6804, a variation end command is set, ending this confirmation display process. The variation end command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, etc., in step S6501 of the normal process. Based on receiving this variation end command, the notification/performance control device 140 terminates the variation display of the currently running patterns on the pattern display device 95, etc. (transitioning to the confirmation display). Note that, as will be described in detail later, this does not apply during the second normal game state or the third normal game state (during the special stage), in which case the confirmation display of the pattern combination may be executed before receiving the variation end command.

Returning to the explanation of step S6801, if a positive result is obtained in step S6801, the process proceeds to step S6805. In step S6805, it is determined whether the confirmation display time for the patterns in the operation port display units D1 and D2 has elapsed. If a negative result is obtained in step S6805, the confirmation display process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S6805, the support mode switching process is executed in step S6806, ending the confirmation display process. Now, referring to Figure 215, the support mode switching process will be explained.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S6901, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If the result in step S6901 is negative, the support mode switching process is terminated. If the result in step S6901 is positive, the process proceeds to step S6902.

In step S6902, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is "0". If the determination in step S6902 is negative, the process proceeds to step S6903. In step S6903, it is determined whether the result of this game is a fall (fall result). If the determination in step S6903 is negative, the switching process ends immediately. If the determination in step S6903 is positive, the process proceeds to step S6904, where the termination preparation flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the switching process ends. If the termination preparation flag is set when the above termination criterion count is reached, the support mode will switch from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode at the end of the game round in which the termination criterion count was reached. Furthermore, if a jackpot result occurs while the termination preparation flag is set, the termination preparation flag will be cleared at the end of the special game state.

Returning to the explanation of step S6902, if a positive result is obtained in step S6902, the process proceeds to step S6905. In step S6905, it is determined whether the termination preparation flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a positive result is obtained in step S6905, the process proceeds to step S6906 to clear the termination preparation flag. Afterward, the process proceeds to step S6907, where the high-frequency support mode flag set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is cleared, and this switching process ends. This switches the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S6905, if a negative result is obtained in step S6905, the process proceeds to step S6908. Step S6908 determines whether the result of this game is a fall (fall result). If a negative result is obtained in step S6908, this switching process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S6908, the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared in step S6907, and then this switching process ends. This switches the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Next, the game state transition process in step S6504 (see Figure 209) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 216.

(Game state transition process)
In the game state transition process, first, in step S7001, it is determined whether or not the system is in opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If it is not in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S7002, where it is determined whether or not it is the time when one game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the change display ended on either the operation port display unit D1 or D2 of the main display unit D. If it is not the time when a game round has ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If the game round has ended, a positive result is determined in step S7002, and the process proceeds to step S7003. In step S7003, it is determined whether the game result of this round (the result of the above win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 8R probability variation jackpot A flag to 8R probability variation jackpot D flags are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S7004. This start process releases the restriction on the operation of the variable prize device 83 by the locking device, allowing the opening and closing operation of the variable prize device 83 until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S7004, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in step S7001, the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag is used to determine whether or not the system is in the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following step S7005, the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, is set to "8". The round counter RC1 functions as a means of determining the number of times the variable prize device 83 has been opened. After executing the process in step S7005, the process proceeds to step S7006, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. This forces the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode to switch to the low-frequency support mode. Afterward, the opening command setting process is executed in step S7007, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S7008, before the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S7007 is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S6501 of the normal processing (Figure 209). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode of the symbol display device 95, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 140, so that the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is changed, for example, to display animated characters or background images corresponding to a jackpot.

Furthermore, the external signal set in step S7008 is also transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S6501 during normal processing (Figure 209). The hall computer can then determine that the gate is in open/close execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S7001, if it is determined in step S7001 that the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S7009. In step S7009, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S7010. Now, referring to Figure 217, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot will be explained.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
In the opening and closing process of the main prize slot, first, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the variable prize device 83 (main prize slot) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable ball entry device drive unit of the variable prize device 83. If the main prize slot is not open, in step S7102, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S7102 is positive, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S7102, the process proceeds to step S7103. In step S7103, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the main prize slot, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 206) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S7103, the main prize slot opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904, where the variable prize entry device 83 (large prize opening) is opened. Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is driven to open the large prize opening.

Subsequently, steps S7105 and S7106 are executed as setting processes for the closing conditions (setting processes for when the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning slot) are configured. Specifically, in step S7105, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S7106, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process in step S7106, in step S7107, an open command is set to indicate that the variable prize device 83 (large prize slot) has been opened, and the large prize slot opening/closing process is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S6501 of the normal process (see Figure 209). Based on the received open command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S7101, if it is determined in step S7101 that the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S7108, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S7109, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize-winning opening based on the detection signal from the detection sensor installed in the variable prize-winning device 83.

If a prize has been awarded, the output process for the prize award command is executed in step S910. This prize award command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, and the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, for example, on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, changes as a result of this prize award command.

After executing the command output process in step S7110, the process proceeds to step S7111. In step S7111, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1. In the following step S7112, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S7112, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S908 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the main prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S913, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is deactivated in order to close the variable prize entry device 83 (main prize opening).

In the following step S7114, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC1 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S7115, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC1 value is "0". If the determination in step S7115 is negative, the process proceeds to step S7116, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S7116, a closing command is set in step S7117, and the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S6501 of the normal process (Figure 209). The notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S7115, if it is determined in step S7115 that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S7118. In step S7118, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending waiting time is set for the ending of the open/close execution mode, so that the next game round is not started. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Subsequently, in step S7119, the ending command is set, and then the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S6501 of the normal process (Figure 209).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 216), after the opening and closing of the large prize slot is performed in step S7010, the process proceeds to step S7011, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends immediately. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S7112. In step S7112, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S7113, and then the game state transition process ends. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 218.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S7201, a high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for high-probability mode is referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

In the following step S7202, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S7203, where it is determined whether the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was an 8R probability variation jackpot result A. If the determination in step S7203 is positive, the continuation count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is set to "100" (step S7204).

If a negative result is obtained in step S7203, the process proceeds to step S7205, where it is determined whether the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was an 8R probability variation jackpot result B. If a positive result is obtained in step S7205, the continuation count counter in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is set to "200" (step S7206).

If a negative result is obtained in step S7205, the process proceeds to step S7207, where it is determined whether the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was an 8R probability variation jackpot result C. If a positive result is obtained in step S7207, the continuation count counter in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is set to "500" (step S7208).

If a negative result is obtained in step S7207, the process proceeds to step S7209, where the continuation count counter in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is set to "1000".

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

After executing steps S7204, S7206, S7208, and S7209, the process proceeds to step S7210, where the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

(Overview of the game)
Next, an overview of the gameplay of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 219. Figure 219 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

As already explained, the first normal game state, in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In this first normal game state, the goal is to achieve a win in the first operation opening 91 and transition to other game states such as the special game state. The game board 80a shown in this embodiment is a so-called symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), and a win in the first operation opening 91 can occur regardless of whether the game ball is launched towards the right route or the left route. In addition, through gates 84 are provided on both the right and left routes, and the configuration allows some of the game balls launched aiming for the first operation opening 91 to enter the through gates 84. However, the opening time of the electric mechanism 93 when support is won in the support lottery based on a win in the through gate 84 during the low frequency support mode is extremely short, making it practically impossible to win in the second operation opening 92. In other words, during the first normal game state, you cannot receive the benefits of the electric mechanism 93, and the number of balls you have decreases more rapidly as the game progresses.

If a jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A to 8R probability variation jackpot D) is achieved during the first normal game state, the game will transition to a special game state and then to the second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B.

In the second normal game state, the electric mechanism 93 is opened frequently, and its opening time is set to be a length that allows for a substantial entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to entry into the first operating port 91, entry into the second operating port 92 occurs, and based on this entry into the second operating port 92, a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player. As a result, during the second normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses is mitigated compared to the first normal game state, making it possible to play while suppressing investment (decrease in balls). The second normal game state corresponds to a high-probability mode, increasing the probability of a jackpot, and looping between the second normal game state and the special game state significantly increases the number of balls held.

In the following explanation, we will distinguish between "Second Normal Game State A" when the number of games played after the end of the Special Game State is less than or equal to the number of games played to determine the termination, and "Second Normal Game State B" when the number of games played after the end of the Special Game State exceeds the number of games played to determine the termination.

If a fall occurs (fall result) during the second normal game state A, the lottery mode switches from high probability mode to low probability mode, while the support mode remains in high-frequency support mode. In other words, the game transitions to the third normal game state, which corresponds to both low probability mode and high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, if a jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A to 8R probability variation jackpot D) occurs during the third normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state, which corresponds to both high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state.

In contrast, if a fall occurs (fall result) during the second normal game state B, the lottery mode switches from high probability mode to low probability mode, and the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode. In other words, the game transitions to the first normal game state, which corresponds to both low probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

As detailed above, after transitioning to the second normal game state, even if a fall occurs before reaching the termination threshold, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed until the termination threshold is reached. If a fall occurs after the termination threshold has been reached, the benefits of the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode terminate as a result of that fall.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 220, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification and effect control board 441, located in the notification and effect control device 140, is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 contains a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, a RAM 444 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM 443 and RAM 444 to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 442 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for controlling the hold display (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29, which are located on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 140 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element where the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip; a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not mandatory for the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 to be integrated into a single chip on the MPU 472; they may also be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process to identify the variation display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 95 based on the commands transmitted from the notification/effect control device 140, and also executes processing related to hold notifications, etc., and then executes drawing processing for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores JPEG image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 472. This work data and flags are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device, which acts as a liquid crystal display driver, integrated into the graphic display device 95. Because the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be described as a microcontroller chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP475 adjusts the timing of the MPU472, video RAM477, etc., to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM477 from the character ROM476 at a predetermined timing to display it on the graphic display device 95.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data, such as patterns, displayed on the pattern display device 95. This character ROM 476 holds bitmap image data of various display patterns, a color palette table referenced when determining the color representation for each dot of the bitmap image, and other similar data.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and store image data and other information in each character ROM 476. It is also possible to configure the system so that JPEG image data for background images, stored in the program ROM 473, is stored in the character ROMs 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 95. The display content of the pattern display device 95 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the general outline of the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 95a is identified by the notification/effect control device 140 by referring to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the pattern variation display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification result. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 executes a pattern variation control process as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 msec), and the general outline of the pattern variation display mode is identified in this pattern variation control process. Here, the pattern variation control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 221(a).

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, if the game state is the first normal game state, a positive determination is made in step S7301, and the first variable display control process for the first normal game state is executed in step S7302. If the game state is the second normal game state or the third normal game state, a negative determination is made in step S7301 and a positive determination is made in step S7303, and the process proceeds to step S7304. In step S7304, the second/third variable display control processes for the second and third normal game states are executed.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (second normal game state and third normal game state), the display mode of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 differs from that of the first normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and the player is clearly informed that it is either the second normal game state or the third normal game state. Specifically, in the first normal game state, symbols are displayed across the entire display screen 95a and the background image is an image of the sea (hereinafter referred to as the normal stage). In contrast, in the second and third normal game states, as shown in Figure 221(b), the symbols on the display screen 95a are displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the display screen 95a (reduced display area SE), and an image of the ally character FC (hereinafter simply referred to as character FC) is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 95a, and the background image is an image of a beach. In the second and third normal game states, this display (hereinafter referred to as the "special stage") will continue until the game transitions to the special game state or the first normal game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 222(a), after the end of the special game state, the game transitions to a special stage in conjunction with the start of the second normal game state. In the example shown in Figure 222(a1), a fall (fall result) occurs after reaching the termination threshold number of spins. This fall triggers a transition to the first normal game state, at which point the current stage switches from the special stage to the normal stage. In the examples shown in Figures 222(a2) to (a3), a fall result (miss result) occurs before reaching the termination threshold number of spins. The game transitions to the first normal game state in conjunction with the end of the guarantee due to reaching the termination threshold number of spins. In conjunction with this state transition, the current stage switches from the special stage to the normal stage.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 222(b), we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the processing for special stages, specifically the second and third variable display control processes (step S7304 in Figure 221) for determining and executing the performance content during the special stage.

(Second/Third Variable Display Control Processing)
In the second/third variable display control processing, first, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not one game round is currently being executed, that is, whether or not the variable display or confirmed display of the symbols for one game round is being executed on the symbol display device 95. If it is determined that a game round is not currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S7402, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative result is obtained in step S7402, the current fluctuation display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S7402, the second/third fluctuation initiation process described later is executed in step S7403, and then the current fluctuation display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S7401, if a positive result is obtained in step S7401, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S7404. In step S7404, it is determined whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative result is obtained in step S7404, the processing for the second/third variation is executed in step S7405, and then this variation display control process is terminated. The processing for the second/third variation is the process of executing various effects or changing the determined effects in the game round started by the processing for starting the second/third variation.

If a positive result is obtained in step S7404, the process proceeds to step S7406, where the second/third variation termination process is executed, and then the main variation display control process is terminated. In the second/third variation termination process, the variation display of the symbols and the ongoing effects are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the held information related to the current game round. This process involves driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 to perform effects corresponding to the confirmed and stopped state. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 410, and the main second/third variation termination process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95 to confirm and stop the symbols based on the received confirmation command. In this embodiment, in the second special effect (battle effect) described later, the confirmed display of the symbol combination may be executed before receiving the variation termination command.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 223, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the second/third variation initiation process in step S7403. The second/third variation initiation process is the process of initiating the game round's effects based on the receipt of a variation initiation command from the main control unit 162. In the second/third variation initiation process, settings such as the reach display are configured as part of the game round's effects.

(Processing for initiating the second/third variation)
In the second/third variation start processing, first, in step S7501, the variation start command received is read, and information on the variation display time, including whether or not a reach occurred, is obtained. Also, as already explained, when a variation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent. In step S1601, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and various information regarding the game result, such as whether it was a win or loss, is obtained from the command. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the MPU 442.

In the following step S7502, it is determined whether the number of games played after the end of the special game state is one of the specified numbers (100, 200, or 500). The RAM 44 (various counter areas 465) of the notification/performance control device 140 also has a game count counter, similar to the continuation count counter in the main control device 162, for identifying the number of games played after the end of the special game state. This game count counter is updated when a game is started in the second or third normal game state, and in step S7502, the value of this game count counter is compared with the specified number of games. If a positive determination is made in step S7502, the process proceeds to step S7503, where the performance setting process for when the specified number of games is reached is executed. The performance setting process for when the specified number of games is reached is broadly divided into a stop result determination process, which determines the symbol combination to be stopped and the valid lines for stopping that symbol combination, and a performance pattern determination process, which determines the performance pattern, such as the symbol variation display mode. Details regarding the performance patterns set by this process will be described later.

If the number of games played after the end of the special game state is not equal to the specified number of games, a negative determination is made in step S7502 and the process proceeds to step S7504. In step S7504, the value of the game count counter is referenced to determine whether the number of games played after the end of the special game state is less than the currently set guaranteed number of games (end criterion number of games). If a positive determination is made in step S7504, the process proceeds to step S7505. In step S7505, the performance setting process before reaching the guaranteed number of games is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S7504, the performance setting process after reaching the guaranteed number of games is executed. The performance setting processes before and after reaching the specified number of games are broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be stopped and the valid lines on which that combination will be stopped, and a performance pattern determination process that determines the performance pattern, such as the way the symbols are displayed. Details of the performance patterns set by these processes will be described later.

In this embodiment, the following combinations of symbols are defined as corresponding to jackpots (8R probability variation jackpot A to 8R probability variation jackpot D): "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination; and "9" symbol combination. The symbol combination is set regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, when transitioning to the special stage described above, it is difficult to identify the type of jackpot that triggered it from the display content of the symbol display device 95.

After executing any of steps S7503, S7505, or S7506, the process proceeds to step S7507. In step S7507, commands containing the stop result and presentation pattern information determined in steps S7503, S7505, and S7506 are output to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 then controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S7507, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S7508, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S7503, S7505, and S7506, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, with reference to Figures 234 and 235, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the gameplay patterns displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 for each game round.

(Performance patterns)
First, in the normal stage where the player is in the first normal game state, the player is notified that a jackpot has been achieved via normal reach A to B or super reach A to C, similar to the first embodiment described above. In other words, the performance patterns that occur in the normal stage are limited to complete misses, normal reach A and B, and super reach A to C (see Figure 44).

In contrast, in the special stages where the player is in the second and third normal game states, the game is configured to produce unique effects for that special stage instead of the normal reaches A and B and super reaches A to C. As already explained, in the special stages, a character FC is always present on the display screen 95a, and the unique effects are broadly divided into two types: Type 1 special effects, which are story-based effects primarily performed by the character FC, and Type 2 special effects, which are battle-based effects primarily performed by the character FC. In other words, the effects patterns that occur in the special stages are limited to complete misses, Type 1 special effects, and Type 2 special effects.

Here, with reference to Figure 225(a), a specific example of the first type of special effect will be explained. The first type of special effect that occurs in the special stage is a story effect corresponding to the character FC displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a. In the example shown in Figure 225(a), a female character is permanently stationed as the character FC in the corner of the display screen 95a, and a singing effect is performed as the story effect corresponding to this female character. In this effect, the female character moves to the stage and performs a song. The score is then displayed on a scoreboard at the top of the display screen 95a. A perfect score indicates a jackpot, while any score other than perfect indicates a loss.

The story is structured in three parts: Part 1, Part 2, and Part 3. The scoring is designed so that the likelihood of achieving a perfect score increases in the following order: Part 1 → Scoring, Part 1 → Part 2 → Scoring, Part 1 → Part 2 → Part 3 → Scoring.

Next, with reference to Figure 225(b), a specific example of the second type of special effect will be explained. The second type of special effect that occurs in the special stage is a battle effect corresponding to the character FC displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a. In the example shown in Figure 225(b), a female character is permanently present as the character FC in the corner of the display screen 95a, and a battle effect corresponding to this female character is executed. In this effect, a battle takes place with an enemy character, and if the female character (ally character) wins the battle, it is announced that it is a jackpot; if the female character loses, it is announced that it is a miss.

The battle sequence consists of two parts: the first part where the battle unfolds, and the second part where the outcome is revealed. Whether it's a win or a loss, the sequence progresses in the order of Part 1 → Part 2. If the battle sequence ends in defeat, there's a branching point: either transitioning to the normal stage (the first normal game state) or continuing to the special stage (the third normal game state). In other words, transitioning from the special stage to the normal stage always involves going through the second type of special sequence.

As shown in Figure 224, even in special stages, the presentation patterns set for each game round differ depending on conditions such as the game state and whether the target number of rounds for termination has been reached.

In the special stage, the animation patterns for the number of games played after the special game state ends (100th, 200th, and 500th games) are limited to the Type 2 special animations described above. Complete misses and Type 1 special animations are excluded from the setting options. In other words, the game is configured so that a Type 2 special animation occurs in every game played during the special stage that reaches the specified number of games.

In contrast, the following are the performance patterns when the number of games played after the special game state ends is not equal to the specified number of games played above.

The presentation patterns for game rounds before reaching the termination threshold are limited to complete misses and Type 1 special presentations; Type 2 special presentations are excluded from the setting options. In other words, Type 2 special presentations do not occur in game rounds before reaching the termination threshold, except for the game rounds related to the specified number of spins mentioned above. If a jackpot is achieved in a game round before reaching the termination threshold, this is announced via a Type 1 special presentation.

The game's outcome in reaching the target number of spins is limited to Type 2 special effects; complete misses and Type 1 special effects are excluded from the setting options. In other words, every spin reaching the target number of spins will result in a Type 2 special effect.

In game rounds played after reaching the termination threshold but without a fall-out, the presentation patterns are limited to complete misses and Type 1 special presentations. In other words, Type 2 special presentations do not occur in game rounds played after reaching the termination threshold but without a fall-out.

The game's presentation patterns for rounds played after reaching the termination threshold and resulting in a jackpot are limited to Type 1 and Type 2 special presentations. In other words, in rounds played after reaching the termination threshold and resulting in a jackpot, either a Type 1 or Type 2 special presentation will occur.

The presentation patterns for game rounds after reaching the termination threshold and resulting in a loss (a "fall" outcome) are limited to Type 2 special presentations. In other words, all game rounds after reaching the termination threshold and resulting in a loss (a "fall" outcome) are structured to produce a Type 2 special presentation.

As described above, when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the predetermined number, and a Type 2 special battle sequence occurs, this Type 2 special sequence can trigger a transition to the normal stage. However, if the high-frequency support mode is still guaranteed, the special stage will continue. One of the features of this embodiment is that when a Type 2 special sequence leads to a continuation of the special stage, the display of the special stage can change depending on the remaining guaranteed number of games. This change occurs in the second part of the Type 2 special sequence, where the game result is clearly indicated. The following explanation will refer to Figures 226(a) and 227. Figure 226(a) is a timing chart showing the flow when a Type 2 special sequence is executed in the game round where the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the predetermined number. Figure 227 is a schematic diagram showing the ally character FC.

In the example shown in Figure 226(a), the second type of special effect begins at timing taa1. This game round corresponds to a losing result, and at timing taa2, the player is notified that the ally character FC has lost (i.e., it is a losing result), and the game transitions from Part 1 to Part 2. The player is then informed that the game will transition to either the first normal game state or the third normal game state due to the ally character FC's defeat. In the example shown in Figure 226(a), although a fall occurred in a previous game round, transitioning to the third normal game state, the guarantee of high-frequency support mode remains. Therefore, in Part 2, it is indicated that the special stage will continue. At the timing after it is indicated that the special stage will continue (timing taa3 in Part 2), the ally character FC is changed to a different ally character FC, and at timing taa5, the game round ends and the next game round begins.

In the special stage, three characters—a girl character, a fairy character, and a boy character—are provided as ally characters (FC) that are permanently stationed (on standby) on the display screen 95a (see Figure 227). When the special stage is displayed upon transitioning from the special game state to the second normal game state, the girl character is the one that is permanently stationed. Furthermore, if a second type of special effect is executed upon reaching a predetermined number of plays, the girl character may be replaced by another character.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 226(b), the performance setting process (step S7503) performed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 as part of the second/third variation initiation process will be explained.

(Processing to set the effects when the specified number of times is reached)
In the process of setting the effects upon reaching a predetermined number of spins, first, in step S7601, it is determined whether the current spin corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S7601 is positive, the setting process for the jackpot result is executed in step S7602, and then the process of setting the effects upon reaching this predetermined number of spins is terminated.

In step S7602, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the confirmed jackpot result, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (e.g., the order and type of attacks). If a jackpot result is achieved, the game transitions to a special game state; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the special game state is displayed, and no change in character FC occurs.

If a negative result is obtained in step S7601, i.e., if the current game round corresponds to a losing result, the process proceeds to step S7603. Step S7603 determines whether the high-frequency support mode ends in the current game round. Specifically, it determines whether the guaranteed number of rounds has been used (the termination threshold has been reached) and whether a fall occurred in the current game round or a previous game round. If a positive result is obtained in step S7603, step S7604 executes the setting process for the losing result corresponding to the special stage non-continuation (termination), and then the performance setting process for reaching the specified number of rounds is terminated.

In step S7604, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result to be displayed, and also determines the details of the progression pattern of the second type of special effect (for example, the order and type of attacks). Note that if the high-frequency support mode ends, the game will transition to the normal stage; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the normal stage will be displayed, and no change in character FC will occur.

Returning to the explanation of step S7603, if a negative result is obtained in step S7603, proceed to step S7605. In step S7605, the remaining guaranteed number of plays until the currently set termination threshold is reached is calculated. Specifically, the remaining guaranteed number of plays is calculated by subtracting the number of plays after transitioning to the special game state (including the current play) from the set termination threshold. In the following step S7606, the friendly character FC to be permanently stationed in subsequent play sessions is determined.

The variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 stores a character determination table that determines which allied characters are permanently located. This table is referenced to determine which allied character (FC) will be permanently located.

The character selection table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the first set number of games (100 games) is configured as follows: If there are 100 guaranteed games remaining, the probability of selecting a female character is 80% and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 20%. If there are 400 guaranteed games remaining, the probability of selecting a female character is 60% and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 40%. If there are 900 guaranteed games remaining, the probability of selecting a female character is 30%, the probability of selecting a fairy character is 60%, and the probability of selecting a male character is 10% (see Figure 228(a)).

The character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the second set number of games (200 games) is configured such that if the remaining guaranteed number of games is 300, there is a 50% chance of selecting a female character and a 50% chance of selecting a fairy character. If the remaining guaranteed number of games is 800, there is a 30% chance of selecting a female character, a 50% chance of selecting a fairy character, and a 20% chance of selecting a male character (see Figure 228(b)).

The character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the third set number of games (500 games) is configured so that the probability of selecting a male character is 100% (see Figure 228(c)).

In other words, the change in the allied character FC from a female character to a fairy character or a male character suggests that there are more guaranteed spins remaining. To put it another way, the probability of hitting the jackpot during the special stage (the probability of a winning streak) increases in the order of female character < fairy character < male character.

Returning to the explanation in Figure 226(b), after determining the allied character FC to be displayed permanently in step S7606, the setting process for the failure result corresponding to the continuation of the special stage is executed in step S7607, and then the performance setting process for when the specified number of times is reached is terminated.

In step S7607, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result to be displayed, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (for example, the order and type of attacks). If the ally character FC determined in step S7606 differs from the currently displayed ally character FC, a progression pattern corresponding to the character change in the second part is determined. If the ally character FC determined in step S7606 matches the currently displayed ally character FC, a progression pattern corresponding to the continued display of the ally character FC in the second part is determined.

Here, referring to Figure 229, we will illustrate the flow of events when a Type 2 special effect is performed during the game round in which the prescribed number of plays is reached, and when the ally character FC is changed during that Type 2 special effect.

In the second type of special effect, after the symbol combination in the upper right corner transitions to a reach display, an enemy character is added to the display screen 95a, and it is clearly indicated that the enemy character and the ally character FC (a female character in Figure 229), who is always present on the display screen 95a, will encounter each other and a battle will begin. During the battle, the ally character FC and the enemy character will repeatedly engage in offense and defense. If this round of play corresponds to a jackpot, a message indicating that the ally character FC won after the offense and defense will be displayed. If this round of play corresponds to a loss and the high probability mode is maintained, a message indicating that the offense and defense ended in a draw will be displayed. If this round of play corresponds to a loss and the low probability mode is maintained, a message indicating that the enemy character won (and the ally character FC lost) will be displayed.

Figure 229 illustrates a case where the number of game spins reaching the predetermined number corresponds to a loss, and although the game is in low probability mode, the third normal game state continues even after the predetermined number of spins is reached; in other words, the special stage continues. Therefore, after the above battle, an indication is displayed that the enemy character has won, meaning the player character FC has lost, informing the player that it was a loss and that they have fallen back into low probability mode. Specifically, after the player character FC falls at the enemy character's feet, the word "LOSE" is displayed.

After the defeat of the allied character FC indicates that the game result is a loss, the images of the enemy character and allied character FC disappear, and the message "Not yet!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 95a as a cut-in message indicating that the special stage will continue. Afterward, the allied character FC that will be the next to be displayed permanently is shown, replacing the "Not yet!" message in the center of the display screen 95a. In the example shown in Figure 229, the allied character determined based on the remaining guaranteed turns is a fairy character, and the fairy character is displayed instead of the "Not yet!" message. This indicates that the allied character FC that will be permanently displayed has been changed as a result of this Type 2 special effect.

The fairy character displayed in the center of display screen 95a will be reduced in size and displayed in the lower right corner (permanent position) of display screen 95a during the game round (specifically, during the display of confirmed symbols on the operation slot display unit). From this point onward, the game will continue in the special stage with the fairy character in standby (permanent) position.

The 24th embodiment described in detail above provides the following excellent effects.

In the gaming machine of the type shown in this embodiment, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second normal game state that is compatible with both a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. After transitioning to the second normal game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of the high frequency support mode until the termination threshold number is reached, regardless of whether a fall-out occurs. With this configuration, the player can aim to transition to the next special game state (consecutive wins) while keeping investment low. Here, during the second and third normal game states, the current stage is a special stage. If the number of game rounds played during the special stage reaches a predetermined number, a second type of special effect occurs. This second type of special effect clearly indicates whether the current game state is the second or third normal game state, that is, whether a fall-out occurred before reaching the predetermined number of rounds. Since the second normal game state is more advantageous for the player than the third normal game state, it is assumed that players who expect to transition to a special game state (consecutive wins) will pay attention to the second type of special effect, hoping that the second normal game state is continuing. Here, the revelation that the player has already lost their winning streak through a Type 2 special effect is a concern as it could reduce the player's interest in the subsequent gameplay. In this embodiment, when a Type 2 special effect occurs, the display pattern of the special stage (the resident ally character FC) is determined and changed based on the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) required to reach the current game's termination threshold. In other words, the display pattern of the special stage can change as a result of a Type 2 special effect. By indicating the remaining number of games through the display pattern of the special stage, it is possible to prevent the gameplay after a Type 2 special effect from becoming monotonous. This contributes to increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the specified number of plays is set to 100, 200, and 500, and the termination criteria number is set to 100, 200, 500, and 1000. For example, if a Type 2 special effect is executed in a play session where the number of plays after the special play state ends is 100 (the first specified number), then patterns such as remaining guaranteed plays = 0, 100, 400, and 900 may occur. By including multiple options for the termination criteria number and specified number of plays where the specified number < termination criteria number, the aforementioned effect of increasing attention can be effectively achieved.

Furthermore, if the display of the current stage (special stage) can change as a result of the second special effect, there is a concern that the change in display when the special stage ends could confuse players. Therefore, it is preferable to eliminate this concern by ensuring that the display of the special stage does not change when the special effect ends.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when a special stage is in progress, the display screen 95a is set to have a female character, a fairy character, and a male character as ally characters that remain (resident). When the display mode of the special stage (the resident ally character) changes to the male character following the second special effect, the expectation of having more guaranteed spins remaining increases compared to when it changes to the fairy character. With this configuration, after the second special effect, the player can proceed with the game while estimating the remaining guaranteed spins from the ally character FC displayed (on standby) on the special stage. This configuration allows for the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be effectively achieved.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the system to change the resident ally character FC after the judgment result is announced in the second type of special effect (the latter half of the sequence), the coordination between the display of the special stage and the second type of special effect can be strengthened. Furthermore, by changing the ally character FC before moving to the next game round, it is possible to appropriately secure time for changing the ally character FC.

As mentioned above, in a configuration where a Type 2 special effect is triggered upon reaching a predetermined number of spins, the opportunity to be notified that a jackpot has been won via the Type 2 special effect is less frequent compared to when the Type 2 special effect is triggered upon a jackpot. In other words, the fact that a Type 2 special effect almost always results in a loss hinders efforts to increase attention to the Type 2 special effect.

In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, in the game round in which the second type of special effect is performed, if the ally character FC changes, the latter part of the game is executed in accordance with the change in the ally character FC, and if the ally character FC does not change, the latter part of the game is executed without corresponding to the change in the ally character FC. By incorporating the change in the ally character FC as part of the second type of special effect, the monotony of the second type of special effect can be suitably suppressed. This is preferable in order to increase the level of attention given to the second type of special effect.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the second type of special effect triggers a branching point where the player can transition to a special game state, continue the special stage, or be demoted to the normal stage. This configuration aims to increase attention to the second type of special effect. By changing the ally character FC under these circumstances, where attention is expected to be heightened, the likelihood of the change being overlooked can be effectively suppressed.

Using the same ally character FC (Focus Character) for both the display effects in special stages and the second type of special effects strengthens the coordination between those effects and effectively mitigates any inconsistencies that might arise when changing the ally character FC triggered by the second type of special effect.

The system includes three candidate termination counts: a second termination count of 200, a third termination count of 500, and a fourth termination count of 1000. The first predetermined count is 100. The difference between the second termination count and the first predetermined count is configured to be greater than or equal to the first predetermined count. This configuration prevents the duration of the special stage execution in the changed form from becoming extremely short, even if the special stage display (ally character FC) changes during the first predetermined count. This effectively prevents the function indicating the remaining guaranteed count from becoming obsolete due to the change function. It is also possible to configure the system so that the difference between the second termination count and the first predetermined count is greater than the first predetermined count.

<Variation 1>
In the 24th embodiment described above, when a jackpot is hit, the game transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode via a special game state, but the game is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to have a regular jackpot in addition to a probability-changing jackpot, and when a regular jackpot is hit, the game transitions to a third normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. In such a configuration, it is preferable to have multiple regular jackpots with different set termination criteria counts. For example, it is preferable to have a regular jackpot A that occurs after 100 termination criteria counts, a regular jackpot B that occurs after 200 termination criteria counts, a regular jackpot C that occurs after 500 termination criteria counts, and a regular jackpot D that occurs after 1000 termination criteria counts.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 24th embodiment described above, some of the various termination criteria counts that can be set were set to a predetermined number, but it is also possible to set some or all of the predetermined number to a number different from the termination criteria count.

<Example 3>
In the 24th embodiment described above, an example was given in which the Type 2 special effect performed when the specified number of game rounds is reached is a battle effect, but the specific content of the Type 2 special effect is arbitrary. It is sufficient that the system notifies the player that the special stage will continue during the Type 2 special effect, and that the display of subsequent special stages can change depending on the remaining guaranteed number of rounds. For example, the Type 2 special effect can be configured to perform a mission effect that determines whether or not a predetermined mission can be cleared, or a gathering effect that brings together predetermined members.

<Modification 4>
In the 24th embodiment described above, when the second special effect is executed in the game round in which the prescribed number of plays is reached, the configuration is such that the ally character FC may be changed or the ally character FC may not be changed, but it is not limited to this. When the second special effect is executed in the game round in which the prescribed number of plays is reached, the configuration in which the ally character FC is changed is not excluded.

<Example 5>
In the 24th embodiment described above, the remaining guaranteed number of rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode is calculated by comparing it with the counter value. However, the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as the ally character FC can be determined according to the remaining guaranteed number of rounds when a Type 2 special effect is performed in the round in which the predetermined number of rounds is reached. For example, it is also possible to configure the system to determine the ally character FC based on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to the special stage in this case.

<Modification 6>
In the 24th embodiment described above, when the second special effect is executed in the number of game rounds that reach the specified number, the configuration is such that the ally character FC to be permanently displayed is determined according to the remaining guaranteed number of rounds, but the embodiment is not limited to this.

If the second special effect is executed during the game round in which the specified number of rounds is reached, the background image may be determined according to the remaining guaranteed rounds. For example, if three background images are provided for the special stage—a daytime beach background image, an evening beach background image, and a nighttime beach background image—the background images could be configured such that if the remaining guaranteed rounds are greater than the judgment criterion, the daytime beach background image < evening beach background image < nighttime beach background image are more likely to be selected, and if the remaining guaranteed rounds are less than the judgment criterion, the background images could be configured to be selected in the order of nighttime beach background image < evening beach background image < daytime beach background image.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system to determine the type of effect display to be added to the display screen 95a based on the remaining number of guaranteed plays. For example, it is possible to provide blue, yellow, and red effect images as effect images for special stages, and configure the system so that when the remaining number of guaranteed plays is greater than the judgment criterion, the blue effect image is more likely to be selected in the order of blue < yellow < red effect image, and when the remaining number of guaranteed plays is less than the judgment criterion, the red effect image is more likely to be selected in the order of red < yellow < blue effect image.

<Example 7>
If a Type 2 special effect is performed in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of rounds after the end of the special game state, and the subsequent reserve information includes reserve information corresponding to a jackpot, it is possible to configure the system so that the ally character FC is not changed. The fact that the special stage ends immediately after the ally character FC is changed may give players the impression that the function of changing the ally character FC is bothersome. Therefore, as shown in this modified example, it is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience by configuring the system to avoid changing the ally character FC when the subsequent reserve information includes information corresponding to a jackpot.

<Difference 8>
In the 24th embodiment described above, the current stage becomes a special stage when transitioning to the second normal game state, and the current stage becomes a normal stage when transitioning to the first normal game state. In other words, the current stage is a special stage in all game rounds while in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the current stage a normal stage (fake) in some game rounds while in the second normal game state and the third normal game state.

<Embodiment 25>
In the 24th embodiment described above, if a Type 2 special effect occurs in the number of game rounds that reach the specified number of rounds, and the special stage continues after the Type 2 special effect, the configuration is such that the ally character FC to be permanently displayed on the display screen 95a in the subsequent special stage is determined according to the remaining guaranteed number of rounds. In this embodiment, the configuration for determining the ally character FC and the presentation style of the Type 2 special effect differ from those of the 24th embodiment described above. First, the presentation style of the Type 2 special effect in this embodiment that occurs in the special stage will be explained, focusing on the differences from the presentation style of the Type 2 special effect shown in the 24th embodiment.

In the Type 2 special effect shown in the 24th embodiment above, the display screen 95a is configured to indicate a jackpot by displaying the word "WIN," to indicate a loss and that the user is in high probability mode by displaying the word "DRAW," and to indicate a loss and that the user is in low probability mode by displaying the word "LOSE." In other words, the configuration clearly indicates whether the lottery mode is in low probability mode or not when a loss occurs. In contrast, in the Type 2 special effect of this embodiment, the display screen 95a is configured to indicate a jackpot by displaying the word "WIN," and to indicate a loss and that the user is in high probability mode or a loss and that the user is in low probability mode by displaying the word "LOSE." In other words, the configuration is such that it is difficult to determine whether the lottery mode is in low probability mode or not when a loss occurs from the displayed win/loss text.

Next, the configuration for determining the ally character FC will be explained with reference to Figures 230 and 231. Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the animation setting process when a predetermined number of times is reached, which is executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 as part of the second/third variation start processing. Figure 231 is a schematic diagram showing the character determination table referenced when determining the ally character FC.

(Processing to set the effects when the specified number of times is reached)
In the process of setting the performance when a predetermined number of rounds is reached in this embodiment, first, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the current round of play corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S7701 is positive, the setting process for the jackpot result is executed in step S7702, and then the process of setting the performance when a predetermined number of rounds is reached is terminated.

In step S7702, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the confirmed jackpot result, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (e.g., the order and type of attacks). If a jackpot result is achieved, the game transitions to a special game state; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the special game state is displayed, and no change occurs in the ally character FC.

If a negative result is obtained in step S7701, i.e., if the current game round corresponds to a losing result, the process proceeds to step S7703. Step S7703 determines whether the high-frequency support mode ends in the current game round. Specifically, it determines whether the guaranteed number of rounds has been used (the termination threshold has been reached) and whether a fall occurred in the current game round or a previous game round. If a positive result is obtained in step S7703, step S7704 executes the setting process for the losing result corresponding to the special stage non-continuation (termination), and then the performance setting process for reaching the specified number of rounds is terminated.

In step S7704, the setting process determines the symbol combinations corresponding to the losing results to be displayed, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (e.g., the order and type of attacks). Note that if the high-frequency support mode ends, the game transitions to the normal stage; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the normal stage is displayed, and no change occurs in the ally character FC.

Returning to the explanation of step S7703, if a negative result is obtained in step S7703, proceed to step S7705. In step S7705, the remaining guaranteed number of plays until the set termination threshold is reached is calculated. Specifically, the remaining guaranteed number of plays is calculated by subtracting the number of plays after transitioning to the special game state (including the current play) from the set termination threshold.

In the following step S7706, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is high probability mode. If the determination in step S7706 is positive, the process proceeds to step S7707. In step S7707, the allied character determination table for high probability mode, stored in the variable display pattern table memory area 452 of ROM 443, is referenced to determine the allied character FC that will be displayed as a permanent (standby) character in subsequent special stages.

On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained in step S7706, that is, if the current lottery mode is low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S7708. In step S7708, the allied character determination table for low probability mode, stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443, is referenced to determine the allied character to be permanently present in subsequent special stages.

After executing steps S7707 and S7708, step S7709 executes the setting process for the failure result in the special stage continuation, and then the performance setting process for when the specified number of times is reached is terminated.

In the setting process of step S7709, the combination of symbols corresponding to the losing result to be displayed is determined, and the details of the progression pattern of the second type of special effect (for example, the order and type of attacks) are determined. If the ally character FC determined in steps S7707 and S7708 differs from the currently displayed ally character FC, a progression pattern corresponding to the change in the ally character FC in the second part is determined. If the ally character FC determined in steps S7707 and S7708 matches the currently displayed ally character FC, a progression pattern corresponding to the continued display of the ally character FC in the second part is determined.

Here, referring to Figure 231, we will provide supplementary explanations regarding the character determination tables for low-probability mode and high-probability mode.

As shown in Figure 231(a), the character determination tables for low probability mode are broadly divided into three types: one referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the first specified number of games (100 games), another referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the second specified number of games (200 games), and a third referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the third specified number of games (500 games).

The character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the first set number of games (100 games) is defined as follows: If the remaining guaranteed games are 100, the probability of selecting a female character is 90% and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 10%. If the remaining guaranteed games are 400, the probability of selecting a female character is 70% and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 30%. If the remaining guaranteed games are 900, the probability of selecting a female character is 30%, the probability of selecting a fairy character is 60%, and the probability of selecting a male character is 10% (see Figure 231(a1)).

The character selection table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the second set number of games (200 games) is defined as follows: If the remaining guaranteed games are 300, the probability of selecting a female character is 60%, and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 40%. If the remaining guaranteed games are 800, the probability of selecting a female character is 30%, the probability of selecting a fairy character is 50%, and the probability of selecting a male character is 20% (see Figure 231(a2)).

The character selection table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the third set number of games (500 games) is configured so that the probability of selecting a male character is 100% (see Figure 231(a3)).

As shown in Figure 231(b), the character determination table for high probability mode is also broadly divided into three categories, similar to the character determination table for low probability mode: a character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the first specified number of games (100 games), a character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the second specified number of games (200 games), and a character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the third specified number of games (500 games).

The character selection table referenced when the number of games played after the end of the special game state equals the first set number of games (100 games) is defined as follows: If the remaining guaranteed games are 100, the probability of selecting a female character is 70% and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 30%. If the remaining guaranteed games are 400, the probability of selecting a female character is 50% and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 50%. If the remaining guaranteed games are 900, the probability of selecting a female character is 30%, the probability of selecting a fairy character is 60%, and the probability of selecting a male character is 10% (see Figure 231 (b1)).

The character selection table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the second set number of games (200 games) is defined as follows: If the remaining guaranteed games are 300, the probability of selecting a female character is 40% and the probability of selecting a fairy character is 60%. If the remaining guaranteed games are 800, the probability of selecting a female character is 30%, the probability of selecting a fairy character is 50%, and the probability of selecting a male character is 20% (see Figure 231(b2)).

The character selection table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the third set number of games (500 games) is configured so that the probability of selecting a male character is 100% (see Figure 231 (b3)).

As detailed above, when the allied character FC changes from a female character to a fairy character or a male character, it suggests that there are more guaranteed spins remaining, and therefore a high probability of being in high-probability mode. In other words, the likelihood of hitting the jackpot (the likelihood of consecutive wins) during the special stage increases in the order of female character < fairy character < male character.

In the gaming machine of the type shown in this embodiment, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second normal game state that corresponds to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. After transitioning to the second game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of the high frequency support mode until the termination criteria number is reached, regardless of whether a fall occurs. With this configuration, the player can aim to transition to the next special game state (consecutive wins) while keeping investment to a minimum. Here, the stage the player is in becomes a special stage during the second and third normal game states. If a Type 2 special effect occurs during the special stage, the Type 2 special effect indicates whether the game state is the second or third normal game state, that is, whether a fall occurred before the occurrence of the Type 2 special effect. Since the second normal game state is more advantageous for the player than the third normal game state, it is assumed that players who expect to transition to a special game state (consecutive wins) will pay attention to the Type 2 special effect, expecting the second normal game state (high probability mode) to continue. In this embodiment, when a Type 2 special effect occurs, the display pattern of the special stage (ally character FC) is determined and changed based on the remaining number of games to reach the current termination threshold (remaining guaranteed games) and the current lottery mode. In other words, the display pattern of the special stage (ally character FC) can change as a result of a Type 2 special effect. The player can infer the remaining guaranteed games and lottery mode, i.e., the probability of entering the special game state before returning to the first normal game state, from the ally character FC, thus preventing the game from becoming monotonous after the Type 2 special effect. This contributes to increasing the player's interest in the game.

When aiming for a special game state (jackpot), the relationship between the lottery mode and the remaining guaranteed spins can change as the game progresses. In other words, there may be situations where the expectation is focused on having many remaining guaranteed spins, and situations where the expectation is focused on the lottery mode being in high probability mode. Therefore, if one of the ally character FCs that can be determined when the remaining guaranteed spins are less than a predetermined number and the lottery mode is in high probability mode is the same as one of the ally character FCs that can be determined when the remaining guaranteed spins are more than a predetermined number and the lottery mode is in low probability mode, then it is possible to suppress excessive diversification of the special stage display patterns (types of ally character FCs) while achieving the aforementioned effect of increasing attention.

The more remaining guaranteed spins there are, the more likely it is to result in a male character. Furthermore, when the lottery mode is set to high probability, the result is more likely to be a male character compared to when it's set to low probability. The remaining guaranteed spins and the lottery mode are both parameters that encourage the change to a male character. Having a male ally character (FC) is more advantageous for the player than having a female or fairy character, and this design prevents the second type of special effect from becoming excessively complex while strengthening the emphasis of the aforementioned suggestive function.

<Variation 1>
In the 25th embodiment described above, when the remaining guaranteed number of spins is 900 upon reaching the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins), the configuration is such that there is no difference in the selection probability of an ally character FC between the character selection table for low probability mode and the character selection table for high probability mode. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. Similar to the cases where the remaining guaranteed number of spins is 100 or 400, a difference may be made such that the character selection table for high probability mode has a higher probability of selecting a character with a higher expected value than the character selection table for low probability mode.

Similarly, when the second set of guaranteed spins (200 spins) is reached and there are 800 spins remaining, the character selection probability is configured so that there is no difference between the character selection table for low probability mode and the character selection table for high probability mode. However, this is not the only configuration. Similar to the case where there are 300 guaranteed spins remaining, a difference may be established so that the character selection table for high probability mode has a higher probability of selecting a more desirable ally character FC than the character selection table for low probability mode.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 25th embodiment described above, the influence of the lottery mode in character selection was configured to be about the same as when the remaining guaranteed number of attempts was 300, but it is not limited to this. The influence of the lottery mode in character selection may be configured to be about the same as when the remaining guaranteed number of attempts was 100, or it may be configured to be about the same as when the remaining guaranteed number of attempts was 400.

<Example 3>
The contribution rate of the lottery mode in character selection may be defined by considering that the difference between the jackpot probability in low probability mode (1/200) and the jackpot probability in high probability mode (1/100) is twice as large. For example, when comparing the same number of remaining guaranteed spins (e.g., 100, 300, 400 spins), the probability of selecting a fairy character with a high advantage in high probability mode may be defined as twice the probability of selecting that fairy character in low probability mode.

<Modification 4>
When a Type 2 special effect is executed and the ally character FC is determined, the following effects can be expected by making the contribution of the remaining guaranteed number of spins higher than the contribution of the type of lottery mode. Regarding the lottery mode, after switching from high probability mode to low probability mode, it does not switch back to high probability mode without going through a special game state. For this reason, it is undesirable for the influence of the lottery mode to become strong when determining the ally character FC while the game is internally in low probability mode. Therefore, by setting the contribution of the type of lottery mode < the contribution of the remaining guaranteed number of spins as described above, it is possible to add emphasis to the configuration in which the ally character FC is determined solely by the remaining guaranteed number of spins, while also suitably avoiding the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Furthermore, when a Type 2 special effect is executed, the contribution of the type of lottery mode used to determine the ally character FC (Final Character) is higher than the contribution of the remaining guaranteed spins. This can have the following effects: In a configuration where the ally character FC is determined based on the remaining guaranteed spins, there is a concern that the patterns of ally character FC changes will become repetitive as the number of remaining guaranteed spins decreases. In this regard, if the contribution of the lottery mode type is less than the contribution of the remaining guaranteed spins, even if the display changes to a high-expectation pattern as the game progresses and the remaining guaranteed spins decrease, the impression that it is a false alarm can be reduced. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game by changing the display pattern of the special stage.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that the contribution of the remaining guaranteed turns and the type of lottery mode to determining the display method (ally character FC) of the special stage is changed according to the remaining guaranteed turns.

<Example 5>
When changing the Ally Character FC (Fan Club) triggered by a Type 2 special effect, it is possible to configure the system to narrow down the selection of Ally Character FC candidates according to the lottery mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively avoid the display of the special stage after the change (Ally Character FC) becoming drastically different from the actual gameplay situation.

<Embodiment 26>
In the 24th embodiment described above, the remaining guaranteed number of high-frequency support modes is indicated by the ally character FC, which is permanently displayed on the display screen 95a during the special stage, that is, the expected probability of hitting the jackpot while in the special stage is indicated. The expected probability of hitting the jackpot during the special stage depends not only on the support mode but also on the lottery mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into consideration. First, the presentation patterns of the second type of special effect in this embodiment that occurs in the special stage will be explained, focusing on the differences from the presentation patterns of the second type of special effect shown in the 24th embodiment.

In the second type of special effect shown in the 24th embodiment described above, the display screen 95a is configured to indicate that a jackpot has been won by displaying the word "WIN", to indicate that it is a loss and in high probability mode by displaying the word "DRAW", and to indicate that it is a loss and in low probability mode by displaying the word "LOSE". In other words, the configuration is designed to clearly indicate whether the lottery mode is in low probability mode or not when a fall occurs. In contrast, in the second type of special effect in this embodiment, the display screen 95a is configured to indicate that a jackpot has been won in the same way as the 24th embodiment, but the correspondence between the words "DRAW" and "LOSE" differs from that of the 24th embodiment. As will be described in detail later, when the word "DRAW" is displayed on the display screen 95a, it is confirmed that either the special stage corresponding to the second normal game state or the special stage corresponding to the third normal game state will continue, but neither the enemy character nor the ally character will change. In contrast, if the word "LOSE" is displayed on screen 95a, it includes both the possibility that the special stage ends in the current game round, and the possibility that either the special stage corresponding to the second normal game state or the special stage corresponding to the third normal game state will continue. Furthermore, if the special stage continues without transitioning to the first normal game state, either the enemy character or the ally character will change. In other words, when the words "DRAW" or "LOSE" are displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the lottery mode is low probability mode or high probability mode from those words alone.

Next, referring to Figure 232, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the 24th embodiment. Figure 232 is a schematic diagram showing the display content of the display screen 95a in the special stage.

As shown in Figure 232, in the special stage, a partition image DG extending vertically is displayed in the center of the display screen 95a. This partition image DG divides the display area into a first display area FE, which includes a reduced display area SE of the pattern group, and a second display area EE, which does not include the reduced display area SE. A seaside background image is displayed in both the first display area FE and the second display area EE.

The first display area (FE) shows the allied character FC, which is correlated with the remaining guaranteed number of turns in the special stage. In contrast, the second display area (EE) shows the enemy character EC, which will be the opponent of the allied character FC in the second type of special effect (battle effect) that occurs in the special stage. As will be explained in more detail later, the enemy character EC displayed in the second display area (EE) is correlated with the lottery mode. When the second type of special effect occurs, the effect progresses through the battle between the allied character FC displayed in the first display area (FE) and the enemy character EC displayed in the second display area (EE).

The enemy characters EC include a turtle, a crab, and a shark. The probability of encountering a high-probability mode increases in the order of shark < crab < turtle. Initially, upon transitioning to a special stage, the turtle character is displayed in the second display area EE.

The enemy character EC displayed in the second display area EE may also change when a Type 2 special effect occurs, similar to the ally character FC displayed in the first display area FE, leading to the continuation of the special stage. The following describes the character change process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, specifically the effect setting process upon reaching a predetermined number of occurrences, referring to the flowchart in Figure 233.

(Processing to set the effects when the specified number of times is reached)
In the process of setting the effects upon reaching a predetermined number of spins, first, in step S7801, it is determined whether the current spin corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S7801 is positive, the setting process for the jackpot result is executed in step S7802, and then the process of setting the effects upon reaching this predetermined number of spins is terminated.

In step S7802, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the confirmed jackpot result, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (for example, the order and type of attacks). If a jackpot result is achieved, the game transitions to a special game state; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the special game state is displayed, and no character change occurs.

If a negative result is obtained in step S7801, i.e., if the current game round corresponds to a losing result, the process proceeds to step S7803. Step S7803 determines whether the high-frequency support mode ends in the current game round. Specifically, it determines whether the guaranteed number of rounds has been used (the termination threshold has been reached) and whether a fall occurred in the current game round or a previous game round. If a positive result is obtained in step S7803, step S7804 executes the setting process for the losing result corresponding to the special stage non-continuation (termination), and then the performance setting process for reaching the specified number of rounds is terminated.

In step S7804, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result to be displayed, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (e.g., the order and type of attacks). Note that if the high-frequency support mode ends, the game transitions to the normal stage; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the normal stage is displayed, and no character changes occur.

Returning to the explanation of step S7803, if a negative result is obtained in step S7803, proceed to step S7805. In step S7805, the remaining guaranteed number of plays until the currently set termination threshold is reached is calculated. Specifically, the remaining guaranteed number of plays is calculated by subtracting the number of plays after transitioning to the special game state (including the current play) from the set termination threshold. In the following step S7806, the allied character to be permanently present in subsequent play sessions is determined.

The variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 stores a character determination table that determines the allied characters. The allied characters to be permanently displayed are determined by referring to this table. Note that this table is the same as the table described in the 24th embodiment (see Figure 228), so its explanation is omitted.

After executing the process in step S7806, the process proceeds to step S7807. In step S7807, it is determined whether the newly determined ally character FC is different from the ally character FC that was previously designated as a permanent resident. If the newly determined ally character FC is different from the ally character FC that was previously designated as a permanent resident, a positive determination is made in step S7807, and the process proceeds to step S7808. As will be explained in detail later, step S7807 also executes an enemy character determination process to determine which enemy character will be permanently resident in the second display area EE for subsequent game rounds.

After executing the decision process in step S7808, or if a negative result is determined in step S7807 (i.e., if the newly determined ally character FC is different from the ally character FC that was previously the permanent target), the process proceeds to step S7809. Subsequently, in step S7809, the setting process for the failure result corresponding to the continuation of the special stage is executed, and then the performance setting process for reaching the specified number of times is terminated. In the setting process of step S7809, the combination of symbols corresponding to the failure result to be displayed is determined, and the details of the progression pattern of the second type of special performance (e.g., the order and type of attacks) are determined.

Thus, in this embodiment, the enemy character EC can only be changed if the ally character FC is not changed, thus avoiding the change of both enemy and ally characters during the second type of special effect.

Here, we will explain the enemy character determination process in step S7808. The variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 stores an enemy character determination table for determining the enemy character. In step S7808, this table is referenced to determine the enemy character to be permanently displayed.

The enemy character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the first predetermined number of games (100 games) is defined as follows: When the lottery mode is high probability mode, the probability of selecting a turtle character as the enemy character is 60%, the probability of selecting a crab character is 30%, and the probability of selecting a shark character is 10%. Conversely, when the lottery mode is low probability mode, the probability of selecting a turtle character as the enemy character is 50%, the probability of selecting a crab character is 30%, and the probability of selecting a shark character is 20% (see Figure 234(a)).

The enemy character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the second set number of games (200 games) is defined as follows: When the lottery mode is high probability mode, the probability of selecting a turtle character as the enemy character is 70%, the probability of selecting a crab character is 25%, and the probability of selecting a shark character is 5%. Conversely, when the lottery mode is low probability mode, the probability of selecting a turtle character as the enemy character is 5%, the probability of selecting a crab character is 25%, and the probability of selecting a shark character is 70% (see Figure 234(b)).

The enemy character determination table referenced when the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the third set number of games (500 games) is configured such that, in the high-probability lottery mode, the probability of selecting a turtle character as the enemy character is 80%, and the probability of selecting a crab character is 20%. The shark character is excluded from the candidates. Conversely, in the low-probability lottery mode, the probability of selecting a crab character as the enemy character is 20%, and the probability of selecting a shark character is 80%. The turtle character is excluded from the candidates (see Figure 234(c)).

Based on the above configuration, the enemy characters permanently residing in the second display area EE are differentiated such that the probability of being in high-probability mode increases in the order of shark character < crab character < turtle character. Considering that the enemy character is initially the turtle character when transitioning to a special stage, it is assumed that players hoping for consecutive wins will expect the enemy character not to change to another character (i.e., the turtle character to remain) when the second type of special effect occurs.

As shown in the schematic diagram in Figure 235, in special stages, the combination of ally characters and enemy characters indicates the likelihood of hitting the jackpot during the special stage. Specifically, the likelihood of hitting the jackpot is highest when the enemy character is a turtle and the ally character is a boy, while the likelihood is lowest when the enemy character is a shark and the ally character is a girl.

Here, with reference to Figure 236, the flow of the second type of special effect in this embodiment will be illustrated.

In the second type of special effect, as the display transitions to the reach display, the divider image DG separating the first display area FE and the second display area EE disappears, and a message is displayed indicating that a battle has begun between the ally character FC (the girl character in the example of Figure 236) who was permanently stationed in the first display area FE and the enemy character (the crab character in the example of Figure 236) who was permanently stationed in the second display area EE. After that, the battle between the ally character and the enemy character continues, with the characters moving across the first and second display areas FE and EE.

If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot, the word "WIN" will be displayed across both display areas FE and EE to indicate a jackpot, and then the game will transition to a special game state. If the current game round corresponds to a loss and the special stage (high-frequency support mode) ends during this round, the word "LOSE" will be displayed across both display areas FE and EE to indicate that the special stage will not continue, and then the game will transition to the normal stage (low-frequency support mode).

In contrast, if the current game round results in a loss and the special stage (high-frequency support mode) continues, the progression pattern will differ depending on whether or not the ally character FC or enemy character EC has changed.

Specifically, if neither the ally character nor the enemy character changes—that is, if both characters remain the same after the second special effect—the word "DRAW" will be displayed across both display areas FE and EE. Afterward, the divider image DG separating the first display area FE and the second display area EE will be redisplayed, and the ally character FC will be displayed in the first display area FE, while the enemy character EC will be displayed in the second display area EE. The game then proceeds to the next round while maintaining this display.

If either the ally character or the enemy character changes, meaning only one of the two characters remains after the second special effect, the word "LOSE" will be displayed across both display areas FE and EE. Afterward, the divider image DG separating the first display area FE and the second display area EE will be redisplayed, and the ally character FC will be displayed in the first display area FE, while the enemy character EC will be displayed in the second display area EE. At this point, either the ally character FC or the enemy character EC will be changed to a different character than the one previously displayed.

In the gaming machine of the type shown in this embodiment, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second normal game state that is compatible with both a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. After transitioning to the second normal game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of the high frequency support mode until the end criterion number of spins is reached, regardless of whether a fall-out occurs. With this configuration, the player can aim to transition to the next special game state (consecutive wins) while keeping investment low. Here, during the second and third normal game states, the current stage is a special stage. If a second type special effect occurs during the special stage, the second type special effect will inform the player whether the special stage will continue or not. Here, in this embodiment, during the special stage, an ally character FC (corresponding to the "first effect image") which is correlated with the remaining guaranteed spins until the end criterion number is reached, and an enemy character EC (corresponding to the "second effect image") which is correlated with the lottery mode are displayed, respectively. The remaining guaranteed spins and the lottery mode are indicated by these ally character FC and enemy character EC. The above-mentioned Type 2 special effect utilizes the permanently stationary allied character FC and enemy character EC for display. This strengthens the transition from the special stage to the Type 2 special effect, effectively mitigating the abruptness of the Type 2 special effect.

The second type of special effect is an effect that includes a synchronized display (battle display) in which the ally character FC and enemy character EC are synchronized in the effect execution area BE (corresponding to the "predetermined area") of the display screen 95a. By configuring the ally character FC and enemy character EC to be synchronized in the effect execution area BE in this way, the relationship between these two effect images can be strengthened.

The second type of special effect occurs when transitioning from a special stage (second normal game state and third normal game state) to a special game state, or when transitioning from a special stage to the first normal game state. In such a configuration, it is assumed that players will pay a high level of attention to the second type of special effect. While this allows for diversification and enhanced impact of the display effect by executing it across a wide area, there is a concern that the friendly character FC and enemy character EC used in the special stage may become distracting if they are left as they are. On the other hand, while this concern can be resolved by hiding the friendly character FC and enemy character EC during the second type of special effect, it is undesirable to turn off the suggestive function provided by the special stage. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, the various concerns mentioned above can be effectively eliminated by using the friendly character FC and enemy character EC, which are always present during the second type of special effect.

The second type of special effect includes a special display that emphasizes one of the predetermined characters, either the ally character FC or the enemy character EC, and uses this special display to inform the player of whether they have won or lost. This configuration effectively prevents the second type of special effect from becoming monotonous while also effectively suppressing an overload of information provided to the player through the display screen 95a. In particular, the remaining guaranteed spins represent the remaining number of draws (judgments) under the second or third normal game state, and these numbers inevitably decrease as the game progresses. Therefore, it is assumed that the player's attention is more likely to be drawn to the ally character FC, which is correlated with the remaining guaranteed spins, compared to the enemy character EC, which is correlated with the draw mode. Thus, in the second type of special effect, by using a special display that emphasizes the ally character FC to inform the player of a win, it is effectively possible to prevent a decrease in the impact of the display effect due to the special display being missed.

Dividing the display screen 95a with a partition image DG to separate the first display area FE for friendly characters FC and the second display area EE for enemy characters EC is preferable in order to diversify the display modes of each effect image while suppressing the resulting difficulty in distinguishing between friendly characters FC and enemy characters EC.

As mentioned above, there is technical significance in separating the first display area FE for allied characters FC and the second display area EE for enemy characters EC using the partition image DG (dividing the screen). In the second type of special effect, by hiding the partition image DG and expanding the areas where each effect image is displayed, a more impactful effect becomes possible. Furthermore, by ensuring that at least a portion of these expanded areas overlap, this effect can be more effectively achieved.

When the partition image DG is hidden and the display areas of the two visual effects images (ally character FC and enemy character EC) are expanded and overlapping, users may become confused if these visual effects images are simultaneously changed to other images. Therefore, by allowing each visual effect image to be changed while avoiding overlapping timing, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be effectively suppressed.

If a Type 2 special effect occurs during a special stage, the game will notify whether or not a jackpot has been won. In this configuration, there is a concern that if a Type 2 special effect results in a loss, the player's attention to the displayed effects will drastically decrease. In this embodiment, during the special stage, a friendly character FC (corresponding to the "first correlation image") correlated with the remaining guaranteed number of spins until the game reaches its completion threshold, and an enemy character EC (corresponding to the "second correlation image") correlated with the lottery mode are displayed. These friendly character FCs and enemy character ECs suggest the remaining guaranteed number of spins and the lottery mode. Furthermore, if a loss is notified by the Type 2 special effect, the friendly character FCs and enemy character ECs may be changed. Thus, if the special stage continues after a Type 2 special effect, the friendly character FCs and enemy character ECs can be changed—that is, the information that forms the basis of the prediction can be updated. This configuration helps to prevent the display effects from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

In game rounds where a Type 2 special effect is performed, extending the duration of the game round's actions is advantageous in increasing attention to the Type 2 special effect. Therefore, by using the display time of the game round in which the Type 2 special effect is performed to change the ally character FC and enemy character EC, sufficient time can be appropriately secured for changing the ally character FC and enemy character EC. This is preferable for enhancing the impact of the changes to the ally character FC and enemy character EC. Furthermore, when a Type 2 special effect is performed, the player's attention tends to be directed towards the display screen 95a. Under these circumstances, a configuration that changes the correlated images, namely the ally character FC and enemy character EC, is preferable in preventing players from missing the changes.

In particular, if the second type of special effect is configured to change the correlated images, namely the ally character FC and the enemy character EC, after the judgment result is announced (second part), it is possible to effectively suppress the rapid decline in attention to the display effect when a jackpot is not achieved.

As shown in this embodiment, restricting the changes to only one of the two correlated images—the first correlated image (ally character FC) and the second correlated image (enemy character EC)—is preferable in order to ensure opportunities for changing the correlated images while suppressing the oversight of such changes.

In a configuration where the special stage serves as a chance zone for a big win (consecutive wins), players tend to focus on the remaining guaranteed number of spins the special stage will continue. As shown in this embodiment, if the change of the first correlation image, the ally character FC, is prioritized over the change of the second correlation image, the enemy character EC, then the players' anticipation regarding the remaining guaranteed spins can be effectively heightened. In particular, considering that the remaining guaranteed spins decrease as the game progresses, prioritizing the change of the ally character FC to ensure opportunities for change has technical significance.

<Variation 1>
In the 26th embodiment described above, when transitioning to a special stage triggered by the end of a special game state, the enemy character EC displayed in the second display area EE is set to the turtle character, which has the highest expected probability of being in high-probability mode. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The enemy character EC displayed initially may be set to a crab character or a shark character. In this case, when the second type of special effect is executed in the game round that reaches the predetermined number of rounds, the enemy character EC will remain the same or rank up, and the expectation of a change in the enemy character EC can be suitably enhanced.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 26th embodiment described above, when a Type 2 special effect is performed in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays, the configuration is such that only one of the ally character FC or enemy character EC can be changed, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that both the ally character FC and enemy character EC can be changed when a Type 2 special effect is performed in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays. However, in such a configuration, there is concern that changes that cause both the ally character FC and enemy character EC to be downgraded will significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, when both the ally character FC and enemy character EC are changed, it is preferable to configure the system so that if both the ally character FC and enemy character EC are downgraded, one of them (especially the enemy character EC which is correlated with the lottery mode) is not changed.

<Example 3>
In the 26th embodiment described above, when a Type 2 special effect is performed in the game round in which a predetermined number of plays is reached, the configuration is such that the change of the ally character FC takes precedence over the change of the enemy character EC. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system so that when a Type 2 special effect is performed in the game round in which a predetermined number of plays is reached, the change of the enemy character EC takes precedence over the change of the ally character FC. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that the change of the ally character FC is permitted only if the enemy character EC is not changed.

<Modification 4>
In the 26th embodiment described above, when a Type 2 special effect is performed in the game round that reaches a predetermined number of rounds, and when either the ally character FC or the enemy character EC is changed as a result of the Type 2 special effect, the word "LOSE" is displayed on the display screen 95a before the character change occurs. It is also possible to change this so that when either the ally character FC or the enemy character EC is changed, the word "DRAW" is displayed in the same way as when the character is not changed, and a branching point for character change/continuation occurs after the display of this word.

<Example 5>
It is also possible to configure the system so that if the word "DRAW" is displayed on the display screen 95a, the continuation of the special stage corresponding to the second normal game state is confirmed.

<Modification 6>
In the 26th embodiment described above, the system is configured to transition to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode regardless of which jackpot is hit, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system to transition to a third normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode when a predetermined jackpot is hit. In this case, it is preferable that the number of times the termination criteria are set to make it difficult to distinguish between the third normal game state and the second normal game state be the same as when transitioning to the second normal game state. For example, the types of jackpots may be 8R probability variation jackpot results A to D and 8R normal jackpot results A to D, and the number of times the termination criteria are set to 100 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result A, 200 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result B, 500 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result C, and 1000 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result D. By applying the configuration shown in Modification 1 above to this configuration, and diversifying the enemy characters displayed at the beginning of the transition to the special stage, it is possible to further suppress the monotony of the gameplay.

<Example 7>
If a Type 2 special effect causes either the ally character FC or the enemy character EC to be changed to a character with a lower expectation level, it is also possible to configure the system so that the other character is not changed to a character with a lower expectation level as a result of the same Type 2 special effect. As shown in this modified example, configuring the system so that the ally character FC and the enemy character EC do not simultaneously rank down as a result of the Type 2 special effect is preferable in order to suppress a rapid decline in the player's motivation to play as a result of the Type 2 special effect.

<Difference 8>
In the 26th embodiment described above, the display screen 95a is provided with a reduced display area SE as a pattern display area for displaying a combination of patterns corresponding to the notification result from the operation port display unit, after which multiple patterns are displayed variably. One of the first correlated image, the ally character FC, and the second correlated image, the enemy character EC, are given a difference so that they have more opportunities to be changed than the other, and the other is displayed in a position closer to the reduced display area SE than the other, which can be expected to have the following effects. By displaying the correlated image that has more opportunities to be changed in a position closer to the reduced display area SE than the correlated image that has fewer opportunities to be changed, user satisfaction can be improved to a suitable degree.

<Embodiment 27>
In the 24th embodiment described above, a Type 2 special effect (battle effect) that triggers a change in the ally character FC occurs only in the number of gameplay rounds that reach a predetermined number in the special stage. The configuration related to the Type 2 special effect in this embodiment is distinctive. First, the presentation style of the Type 2 special effect in this embodiment that occurs in the special stage will be explained, focusing on the differences from the presentation style of the Type 2 special effect shown in the 24th embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to Figure 237, the distinctive configuration in this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 24th embodiment. Figure 237 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game situation and the types of effects that may occur.

In the special stage, the presentation patterns for the game rounds where the number of games played after the special game state ends equals the specified number of games (100th, 200th, and 500th game rounds) are limited to the Type 2 special presentation described above. Complete misses and Type 1 special presentations are excluded from the setting options. In other words, the game is configured so that a Type 2 special presentation occurs in every game round where the specified number of games is reached during the special stage. Conversely, when the number of games played after the special game state ends does not equal the specified number of games, the presentation patterns are complete misses, Type 1 special presentations, and Type 2 special presentations. Therefore, during the special stage, a Type 2 special presentation can occur in game rounds other than those where the specified number of games is reached.

Here, with reference to Figure 238, a supplementary explanation regarding the set variable display time will be provided. In this embodiment, as with the 24th embodiment described above, the setting method for the variable display time differs depending on the game state. Note that the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode is the same as in the 24th embodiment, and therefore its explanation is omitted (see Figure 212).

As shown in Figure 238, when the game state is the second normal game state, which corresponds to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, or the third normal game state, which corresponds to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, the variable display time table referenced differs depending on the number of games played after the special game state ends. Specifically, the variable display time tables referenced in the second and third normal game states are broadly divided into a normal variable display time table (see Figure 238(a)) referenced when the number of games played ≠ a predetermined number (100, 200, or 500 games in this embodiment), and a special variable display time table (see Figure 238(b)) referenced when the number of games played = a predetermined number (100, 200, or 500 games in this embodiment).

When the variable display time is set by referring to the normal variable display time table, the variable display time will be "20-30 or 35 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved balls in a game round that results in a jackpot or a near miss. In contrast, in game rounds that result in a complete miss (where the near miss display is not supported), the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved balls. If the number of reserved balls is "0", the variable display time will be "10-12 seconds", and if the number of reserved balls is "1-8", the variable display time will be "1-2 seconds". However, when the variable display time is set by referring to the special variable display time table, the variable display time will always be "35 seconds", regardless of the number of reserved balls or the outcome of the lottery (win or loss).

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned Type 2 special effect is executed when the display time for the variation becomes "35 seconds" while in a special stage (second normal game state or third normal game state). In other words, the decision of whether or not to execute the Type 2 special effect in a special stage is left to the main control device 162. In the following description, the Type 2 special effect executed in a game round other than the one in which the predetermined number of rounds is reached in a special stage will be referred to as the "special battle effect," and will be appropriately distinguished from the Type 2 special effect executed in the game round in which the predetermined number of rounds is reached.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 239, the setting process for special battle effects performed by the MPU 442 of the notification and effect control device 140 will be explained. The setting process for special battle effects is performed by the MPU 442 of the notification and effect control device 140 as part of the second/third variation start process (see Figure 223).

(Settings for special battle sequences)
In the setting process for special battle sequences, first, in step S7901, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S7901 is positive, the setting process for the jackpot result is executed in step S7902, and then the setting process for sequences when the specified number of rounds is reached is terminated.

In step S7902, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the confirmed jackpot result, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (e.g., the order and type of attacks). If a jackpot result is achieved, the game transitions to a special game state; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the special game state is displayed, and no character change occurs.

If a negative result is obtained in step S7901, i.e., if the current game round corresponds to a losing result, proceed to step S7903. Step S7903 determines whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. If a positive result is obtained in step S7903, proceed to step S7904. Step S7904 determines whether the guarantee for the high-frequency support mode has ended. Specifically, it determines whether the guaranteed number of rounds has been used (the termination threshold number has been reached) and whether a drop occurred in the current game round or a previous game round. If a positive result is obtained in step S7904, step S7905 executes the setting process for the losing result corresponding to the non-continuation (termination) of the special stage, and then the performance setting process for reaching this specified number of rounds is terminated.

In step S7905, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result to be displayed, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (e.g., the order and type of attacks). Note that if the low probability mode is active and the guarantee has ended, the game transitions to the normal stage; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the normal stage is displayed, and no character changes occur.

If a negative result is obtained in step S7903 (indicating high probability mode) or in step S7904 (indicating continued guarantee), the game proceeds to step S7906. In step S7906, the remaining guaranteed turns until the currently set termination threshold is reached is calculated. Specifically, the remaining guaranteed turns are calculated by subtracting the number of turns played after transitioning to the special game state (including the current turn) from the set termination threshold. In the following step S7907, the rank-up lottery process for the permanently resident ally character is executed. The ROM 443's variable display pattern table memory area 452 stores the ally character FC rank-up lottery table, and this table is referenced to perform the rank-up lottery for the permanently resident ally character FC. If the game transitions to a special stage upon the end of the special game state, a female character will be displayed as the ally character FC, and if the rank-up lottery is successful, it will be changed to a higher-ranking ally character FC (an ally character FC with a greater expectation for the remaining guaranteed turns).

In the rank-up lottery table referenced when the currently displayed ally character FC is a female character, the probability of winning is 0% when the remaining guaranteed attempts are "0" to "100", 5% when it's "101" to "200", 10% when it's "201" to "300", 20% when it's "301" to "400", 40% when it's "401" to "500", and 80% when it's "500" to "1000" (see Figure 240(a)).

In contrast, in the rank-up lottery table referenced when the currently displayed ally character FC is a fairy character, the probability of winning is 0% when the remaining guaranteed number of attempts is "0" to "100", 0% when it is "101" to "200", 5% when it is "201" to "300", 10% when it is "301" to "400", 20% when it is "401" to "500", and 40% when it is "500" to "1000" (see Figure 240(b)).

In other words, in any rank-up lottery table, the more guaranteed attempts you have remaining, the higher your chances of winning a rank-up. Note that if the currently displayed ally character is the highest-ranking ally character (a male character), no further rank-ups will occur.

If the rank-up lottery in step S7909 is successful, a positive check is performed in step S7908, and the process proceeds to step S7909. In step S7909, a process is performed to determine the new ally character to be permanently assigned. The variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 stores the ally character rank-up distribution table, and this table is referenced to distribute the ally characters to be permanently assigned.

As shown in Figure 241, if the currently displayed Ally Character FC is a female character and the rank-up lottery is won, the newly permanently assigned Ally Character FC will be either a Fairy character or a male character.

In the distribution table referenced when the currently displayed ally character FC is a female character, the probability of becoming a fairy character is 100% when the remaining guaranteed number of times is between "101" and "200", 90% when it is between "201" and "300" times and 10% when it is a male character, 80% when it is between "301" and "400" times and 20% when it is a male character, 70% when it is between "401" and "500" times and 30% when it is a male character, and 60% when it is between "501" and "1000" times and 40% when it is a male character. In other words, the more guaranteed number of times remaining, the more likely it is that a rank-up skip will occur.

Returning to the explanation in Figure 239, after executing the process in step S7909, or if a negative result is determined in step S7908, the process proceeds to step S7910. After executing the setting process for the failure result corresponding to the continuation of the special stage, the performance setting process for reaching the specified number of times is terminated.

In the setting process of step S7910, the combination of symbols corresponding to the confirmed losing result is determined, and the details of the progression pattern of the second type of special effect (for example, the order and type of attacks) are also determined. If a rank-up occurs, the progression pattern corresponding to the character change in the second part is determined; if a rank-up does not occur, the progression pattern corresponding to the continued display of the character in the second part is determined.

<Variation 1>
In the 27th embodiment described above, when a Type 2 special effect occurs in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays, either an upgrade or a downgrade of the ally character FC may occur. However, when a Type 2 special effect (special battle effect) occurs in a game round other than the one that reaches a predetermined number of plays, an upgrade of the ally character FC may occur, but a downgrade may not occur. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system so that when a Type 2 special effect (special battle effect) occurs in a game round other than the one that reaches a predetermined number of plays, either an upgrade or a downgrade of the ally character FC may occur. In other words, it is also possible to configure the system so that there is no difference between the Type 2 special effect in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays and the Type 2 special effect in other game rounds.

<Modified Example 2>
The system may be configured to have the same probability of a change in the Ally Character FC when a Type 2 special effect occurs in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays, and when a Type 2 special effect occurs in a game round other than the one that reaches a predetermined number of plays, or the probabilities may be configured to be different. In particular, for the latter case, the system may be configured so that when a Type 2 special effect occurs in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays, the probability of a change in the Ally Character FC is higher than when a Type 2 special effect occurs in a game round other than the one that reaches a predetermined number of plays.

<Example 3>
In the 27th embodiment described above, the probability of winning the rank-up lottery is varied depending on the remaining number of guaranteed wins, but the invention is not limited to this. The probability of winning the rank-up lottery may be constant regardless of the remaining number of guaranteed wins.

<Embodiment 28>
In the special battle sequence shown in the 27th embodiment described above, the configuration allows for an upgrade in the rank of allied character FC as a result of the special battle sequence. In this embodiment, similar to the 26th embodiment, allied character FC and enemy character EC are always displayed in the special stage, and one of its features is that an upgrade in the rank of enemy character EC can occur as a result of the special battle sequence. The configuration for displaying the rank-up of allied character FC is the same as in the 27th embodiment described above, and the configuration for the permanent display of enemy character EC is the same as in the 26th embodiment described above, so a description will be omitted.

In the second type of special effect shown in the 24th embodiment described above, the display screen 95a is configured to indicate that a jackpot has been won by displaying the word "WIN", to indicate that it is a loss and in high probability mode by displaying the word "DRAW", and to indicate that it is a loss and in low probability mode by displaying the word "LOSE". In other words, the configuration is designed to clearly indicate whether the lottery mode is in low probability mode or not when a fall occurs. In contrast, in the second type of special effect in this embodiment, the display screen 95a is configured to indicate that a jackpot has been won in the same way as the 24th embodiment, but the correspondence between the words "DRAW" and "LOSE" differs from that of the 24th embodiment. As will be described in detail later, when the word "DRAW" is displayed on the display screen 95a, it is confirmed that either the special stage corresponding to the second normal game state or the special stage corresponding to the third normal game state will continue, but neither the enemy character nor the ally character will change. In contrast, if the word "LOSE" is displayed on screen 95a, it includes both the possibility that the special stage ends in the current game round, and the possibility that either the special stage corresponding to the second normal game state or the special stage corresponding to the third normal game state will continue. Furthermore, if the special stage continues without transitioning to the first normal game state, either the enemy character or the ally character will change. In other words, when the words "DRAW" or "LOSE" are displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the lottery mode is low probability mode or high probability mode from those words alone.

Next, referring to Figure 242, the setting process for special battle effects in this embodiment will be described.

(Settings for special battle sequences)
In the setting process for special battle sequences, first, in step S8001, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S8001 is positive, the setting process for the jackpot result is executed in step S8002, and then the setting process for sequences when the specified number of rounds is reached is terminated.

In step S8002, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the confirmed jackpot result, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (for example, the order and type of attacks). If a jackpot result is achieved, the game transitions to a special game state; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the special game state is displayed, and no character change occurs.

If a negative result is obtained in step S8001, i.e., if the current game round corresponds to a losing result, proceed to step S8003. Step S8003 determines whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. If a positive result is obtained in step S8003, proceed to step S8004. Step S8004 determines whether the guarantee for the high-frequency support mode has ended. Specifically, it determines whether the guaranteed number of rounds has been used (the termination threshold number has been reached) and whether a drop occurred in the current game round or a previous game round. If a positive result is obtained in step S8004, step S8005 executes the setting process for the losing result corresponding to the non-continuation (termination) of the special stage, and then the performance setting process for reaching this specified number of rounds is terminated.

In step S8005, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result to be displayed, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (e.g., the order and type of attacks). Note that if the low probability mode is active and the guarantee has ended, the game transitions to the normal stage; therefore, in the second part, a video indicating the transition to the normal stage is displayed, and no character changes occur.

If a negative result is obtained in step S8003 (indicating high probability mode) or in step S8004 (indicating continued guarantee), the game proceeds to step S8006. In step S8006, the remaining guaranteed number of plays until the currently set termination threshold is reached is calculated. Specifically, the remaining guaranteed number of plays is calculated by subtracting the number of plays after transitioning to the special game state (including the current play) from the set termination threshold. In the following step S8007, the rank-up lottery process for the permanently resident ally character is executed. The ROM 443's variable display pattern table memory area 452 stores the ally character rank-up lottery table, and this table is referenced to perform the rank-up lottery for the permanently resident ally character. When transitioning to a special stage triggered by the end of the special game state, a female character is displayed as the ally character FC, and if the rank-up lottery is successful, it will be changed to a higher-ranking ally character.

In the rank-up lottery table referenced when the currently displayed ally character FC is a female character, the probability of winning is 0% when the remaining guaranteed attempts are "0" to "100", 5% when it's "101" to "200", 10% when it's "201" to "300", 20% when it's "301" to "400", 40% when it's "401" to "500", and 80% when it's "500" to "1000" (see Figure 240(a)).

In contrast, in the rank-up lottery table referenced when the currently displayed ally character FC is a fairy character, the probability of winning is 0% when the remaining guaranteed number of attempts is "0" to "100", 0% when it is "101" to "200", 5% when it is "201" to "300", 10% when it is "301" to "400", 20% when it is "401" to "500", and 40% when it is "500" to "1000" (see Figure 240(b)).

In other words, in any rank-up lottery table, the more guaranteed attempts you have remaining, the higher your chances of winning a rank-up. Note that if the currently displayed ally character is the highest-ranking ally character (a male character), no further rank-ups will occur.

If the rank-up lottery in step S8007 is successful, a positive check is performed in step S8008, and the process proceeds to step S8009. In step S8009, a process is performed to determine the new ally character to be permanently assigned. The variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 stores the ally character rank-up distribution table, and this table is referenced to distribute the ally characters to be permanently assigned.

As shown in Figure 241, if the currently displayed Ally Character FC is a female character and the rank-up lottery is won, the newly permanently assigned Ally Character FC will be either a Fairy character or a male character.

In the distribution table referenced when the currently displayed ally character FC is a female character, the probability of becoming a fairy character is 100% when the remaining guaranteed number of times is between "101" and "200", 90% when it is between "201" and "300" times and 10% when it is a male character, 80% when it is between "301" and "400" times and 20% when it is a male character, 70% when it is between "401" and "500" times and 30% when it is a male character, and 60% when it is between "501" and "1000" times and 40% when it is a male character. In other words, the more guaranteed number of times remaining, the more likely it is that a rank-up skip will occur.

Returning to the explanation in Figure 242, after executing the process in step S8009, the process proceeds to step S8013. After executing the setting process for the failure result in the special stage continuation, the process for setting the effects upon reaching the specified number of rounds is terminated.

In step S8013, the setting process determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result to be displayed, and also determines the details of the progression pattern for the second type of special effect (for example, the order and type of attacks). If a rank-up occurs, the progression pattern corresponding to the character change in the second part is determined; if a rank-up does not occur, the progression pattern corresponding to the continued display of the character in the second part is determined.

Returning to the explanation of step S8008, if a negative result is obtained in step S8008, that is, if the rank-up lottery for the ally character FC is unsuccessful (including cases where no further rank-up occurs), the process proceeds to step S8010. In step S80101, the rank-up lottery process for the enemy character EC is executed. The variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 stores the rank-up lottery table for the enemy character EC, and the rank-up lottery for the permanently resident enemy character EC is performed by referring to this table. When transitioning to a special stage is triggered by the end of the special game state, the shark character is displayed as the enemy character EC, and if the rank-up lottery is successful, it will be changed to a higher-ranking enemy character EC (an enemy character EC with a high probability of being in high-probability mode).

If the current lottery mode is low probability mode, the rank-up lottery table for low probability mode is referenced (see Figure 243(a)). This table specifies that the probability of winning is 0% if the currently displayed enemy character is a turtle, 10% if it is a crab, and 30% if it is a shark.

If the current lottery mode is high probability mode, the rank-up lottery table for high probability mode is referenced (see Figure 243(b)). This table specifies that the probability of winning is 0% if the currently displayed enemy character is a turtle, 20% if it is a crab, and 50% if it is a shark.

In other words, the system is designed so that rank-ups are more likely to occur during high-probability mode than during low-probability mode.

If the rank-up lottery in step S8010 is successful, a positive check is performed in step S8011, and the process proceeds to step S8012. In step S8012, a process is performed to determine the enemy character EC to be permanently assigned. The variable display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 stores the enemy character EC rank-up distribution table, and this table is referenced to distribute the enemy character EC to be permanently assigned.

If the currently displayed enemy character EC is a crab character and you win the rank-up lottery, regardless of whether the lottery mode is low probability mode or high probability mode, the newly permanently resident enemy character EC will be a turtle character (see Figure 244(a)).

In the distribution table referenced when the currently displayed enemy character EC is a shark character, the probability of obtaining a turtle character is 30% and the probability of obtaining a crab character is 70% when the lottery mode is high probability mode. When the lottery mode is low probability mode, the probability of obtaining a turtle character is 10% and the probability of obtaining a crab character is 90%.

In other words, when the shark character is displayed, if you win the rank-up lottery for the enemy character EC, the high-probability mode is more likely to result in a rank-up skipping a level compared to the low-probability mode.

After determining the enemy character EC in step S8012, the process in step S8013 is executed, and then the setting process for this special battle sequence is terminated.

<Variation 1>
In the 28th embodiment described above, when transitioning to a special stage triggered by the end of a special game state, the enemy character EC displayed in the second display area EE is set to the shark character, which has the lowest expected probability in high-probability mode. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The enemy character EC displayed initially may also be set to a turtle character or a crab character.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 28th embodiment described above, when a Type 2 special effect occurs in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays, the enemy character EC may rank up or down, whereas when a Type 2 special effect (special battle effect) occurs in a game round other than the one that reaches a predetermined number of plays, the enemy character EC may rank up, but may not rank down. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which, when a Type 2 special effect (special battle effect) occurs in a game round other than the one that reaches a predetermined number of plays, the enemy character EC may rank up or down. In other words, it is also possible to have a configuration in which there is no difference between the Type 2 special effect in a game round that reaches a predetermined number of plays and the Type 2 special effect in other game rounds.

<Example 3>
In the 28th embodiment described above, when a Type 2 special effect (special battle effect) is executed in a game turn other than the game turn in which the prescribed number of turns is reached, the configuration is such that only one of the ally character FC or enemy character EC can be changed, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that both the ally character FC and enemy character EC can be changed when the special battle effect is executed.

<Modification 4>
In the 28th embodiment described above, when a Type 2 special effect (special battle effect) is executed in a game turn other than the game turn in which the prescribed number of turns is reached, the configuration is such that the change of the ally character FC takes precedence over the change of the enemy character EC. However, the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that the change of the enemy character EC takes precedence over the change of the ally character FC. Specifically, it is also possible to configure the system so that the change of the ally character FC is permitted only if the enemy character EC is not changed.

<Example 5>
In the 28th embodiment described above, the system is configured to transition to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode regardless of which jackpot is hit, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system to transition to a third normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode when a predetermined jackpot is hit. In this case, it is preferable that the number of times the termination criteria are set to make it difficult to distinguish between the third normal game state and the second normal game state be the same as when transitioning to the second normal game state. For example, if there are 8R probability variation jackpot results A to D and 8R normal jackpot results A to D as types of jackpots, the number of times the termination criteria are set to 100 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result A, to 200 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result B, to 500 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result C, and to 1000 times when the result is 8R normal jackpot result D. By applying the configuration shown in Modification 1 above to this configuration, and diversifying the enemy character EC displayed at the beginning of the transition to the special stage, it is possible to further suppress the monotony of the gameplay.

<29th Embodiment>
In the 26th embodiment described above, a second type of special effect is performed using the ally character FC displayed in the first display area FE of the display screen 95a and the enemy character EC displayed in the second display area EE while staying in a special stage. This embodiment is characterized by the configuration related to this second type of special effect. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 26th embodiment.

As shown in Figure 245, the first display area FE to the right of the boundary DL in the central part of the display screen 95a contains a permanent display area FCE where the friendly character FC is permanently displayed, and the second display area EE to the left of the boundary DL contains a permanent display area ECE where the enemy character EC is permanently displayed.

On display screen 95a, a battle animation execution area BE is formed, spanning the first display area FE and the second display area EE. In special stages, allied characters FC are generally permanently located in the permanent display area FCE, and enemy characters EC are permanently located in the permanent display area ECE. When the above-mentioned Type 2 special animation (battle animation) is executed, each character FC and EC moves to the battle animation execution area BE to engage in battle.

Here, we will explain the flow of the Type 2 Special Performance by referring to Figures 246 to 249. In a game round in which the Type 2 Special Performance is executed, the start of a battle is indicated by the movements (actions) of the ally character FC and the enemy character EC. In the example shown in Figure 246, an effect is added to the ally character FC due to its action. This effect is maintained until the battle is resolved, and it serves as a chance-up element that gives the ally character FC an advantage in that battle.

When the battle begins, a message announcing the start of the battle (in this embodiment, the word "WARNING") is displayed in the battle animation execution area BE, spanning across the first display area FE and the second display area EE. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of this message began, the background image is hidden while the ally character FC and enemy character EC remain displayed.

Immediately after the background image disappears, as shown in Figure 247, the allied character FC and enemy character EC displayed in the permanent display areas FCE and ECE, along with the message displayed in the battle animation execution area BE, disappear. The allied character FC and enemy character EC are then enlarged and displayed in the battle animation execution area BE. This signals the start of the battle (battle announcement).

After the battle announcement, the background image will reappear on display screen 95a. The ally character FC, which was enlarged in the battle animation execution area BE, will be displayed in a reduced size in the permanent display area FCE of the first display area FE. The enemy character EC, which was enlarged in the battle animation execution area BE, will be displayed in a reduced size in the permanent display area ECE of the second display area EE. Any effects attached to the ally character FC will remain.

In this display state, the partition image DG is hidden, and the background image (beach) displayed in the first display area FE and the second display area EE is a continuous sequence. This clearly indicates that the obstacle preventing movement across the boundary DL of each character FC and EC has been removed.

Afterward, the allied character FC and enemy character EC move from the permanent display areas FCE and ECE to the battle animation execution area BE, where they repeatedly engage in offense and defense. Following this battle, the game results, such as a jackpot, are clearly displayed based on the outcome of the battle.

Here, if the game round in which the Type 2 special effect is performed corresponds to a losing result, and the special stage continues after the end of that game round, the ally character FC or enemy character EC may change. Below, an example of when the enemy character EC changes will be shown with reference to Figure 248, and an example of when the ally character FC changes will be shown with reference to Figure 249.

In the example shown in Figure 248, the word "LOSE" is displayed in the battle animation execution area BE, clearly indicating a loss. At this point, the winning enemy character EC remains in the battle animation execution area BE, while the losing ally character FC remains ejected from the display screen 95a. Subsequently, the ally character FC (the female character) that was ejected from the display screen 95a returns to the battle animation execution area BE. At this time, the ally character FC is displayed in a position overlapping the enemy character EC from the front, while the enemy character EC is hidden behind the ally character FC.

Subsequently, a turtle character is added as an enemy character EC to the permanent display area ECE of the second display area EE, from outside the display screen 95a. The ally character FC (the female character), which was enlarged in the battle animation execution area BE, also shrinks and returns to the permanent display area FCE of the first display area FE. Then, the display area of display screen 95a is divided by the partition image DG. As a result, the combination of permanently displayed characters changes to a different combination than before the start of the second special animation, and the second special animation ends.

In the example shown in Figure 249, the word "LOSE" is displayed in the battle animation execution area BE, clearly indicating a loss. This display is the same as in the example shown in Figure 248, and at this point, it is difficult to determine whether the special stage continues or which characters are changed. Once the loss is indicated, the winning enemy character EC remains in the battle animation execution area BE, while the losing ally character FC remains ejected from the display screen 95a. Subsequently, a different ally character FC (a boy character) is displayed in the battle animation execution area BE, distinct from the ally character FC (a girl character) that was ejected from the display screen 95a. At this point, the changed ally character FC is displayed in a position overlapping the enemy character EC from the front, and the enemy character EC is hidden behind the ally character FC.

Subsequently, the enemy character EC (the crab character), which had been hidden behind the allied character FC, moves to the permanent display area ECE in the second display area EE. The allied character FC (the boy character), which had been enlarged and displayed in the battle animation execution area BE, also shrinks and moves to the permanent display area FCE in the first display area FE. Then, the display area of screen 95a is divided by the partition image DG. As a result, the combination of characters displayed permanently changes to a different combination than before the start of the second special animation, and the second special animation ends.

During special stages, the first type of character, the allied character FC, is displayed in the first display area FE of the display screen 95a, and the second type of character, the enemy character EC, is displayed in the second display area EE. When a second type of special effect is executed while the allied character FC and enemy character EC are displayed (on standby, resident) on the display screen 95a, the allied character FC displayed in the first display area FE and the enemy character EC displayed in the second display area EE become invisible and are displayed in the effect execution area BE in the center of the display screen 95a. Then, the allied character FC and enemy character EC move within the effect execution area BE as the second type of special effect progresses. Thus, by moving each character that is normally resident (on standby) to the performance execution area BE and proceeding with the Type 2 special performance through dynamic display in the performance execution area BE, players will focus on the game expecting the Type 2 special performance to occur (dynamic display of the character) while their favorite character is displayed in the special stage, thereby effectively suppressing monotony in the gameplay of the special stage.

In this embodiment, when the friendly character FC is displayed in the first display area FE, its movement is suppressed or it appears static compared to when it is displayed in the performance execution area BE. Similarly, when the enemy character EC is displayed in the second display area EE, its movement is suppressed or it appears static compared to when it is displayed in the performance execution area BE. With this configuration, the movement of each character FC and EC becomes more active when they move from the first display area FE/second display area EE to the performance execution area BE (execution of the second type of special performance). This configuration can attract the attention of players who expect dynamic movements of the characters FC and EC.

By providing multiple ally character FCs and enemy character ECs, the variations in Type 2 special effects (battle effects) using these ally character FCs and enemy character ECs can be increased. This is desirable for increasing player attention through the diversification of Type 2 special effects. Even when Type 2 special effects occur during special stages, the timing of when a Type 2 special effect corresponding to the ally character FC x enemy character EC combination that the player expects will occur will be limited. This is desirable for enhancing the dynamism of gameplay.

The size of the performance execution area BE is larger than the combined size of the resident display area FCE (the display area for allied characters in the first display area FE) and the resident display area ECE (the display area for enemy characters in the second display area EE). Therefore, when displaying allied characters FC and enemy characters EC in the performance execution area BE, these characters are enlarged. This configuration, which enlarges the characters FC and EC when moving them from the resident display areas FCE and ECE (for standby/resident display) to the performance execution area BE (for performance execution), enhances the impact at the start of the second type of special performance.

The movement range of the allied character FC and the enemy character EC within the animation execution area BE overlap. As described above, in a configuration where both allied and enemy character FCs and ECs are dynamically displayed within the animation execution area BE, overlapping the movement ranges of each character FC and EC within the animation execution area BE allows for dynamic movement and larger display of these characters. This is desirable for increasing attention to special animations.

When a Type 2 special effect is initiated, a start indication image (the word "WARINING") is displayed in the effect execution area BE of the display screen 95a, thereby diverting the player's attention from the ally character FC and enemy character EC. Subsequently, by displaying the ally character FC and enemy character EC in the effect execution area BE as the start indication image ends, even if a temporary period (blank) is created where each character FC and EC is hidden, this blank period can be made less noticeable. This is advantageous in strengthening the connection between the character display in the respective permanent display areas FCE and ECE and the character display in the effect execution area BE.

As shown in this embodiment, by placing the performance execution area BE between the left and right permanent display areas FCE and ECE, and displaying the word "WARNING," which is the start indication image for the second type of special performance, such that at least a portion of the start indication image is located within the performance execution area BE, when the display of the start indication image ends, each character FC and EC will be displayed in the same performance execution area BE as the start indication image. This effectively prevents the player from losing sight of the character FC and EC, even when they are temporarily hidden at the start of the second type of special performance.

<Variation 1>
The configuration may also be such that the "WARNING" text, which is the start indication image shown in the 29th embodiment above, is displayed so as to overlap both resident display areas FCE and ECE.

<Modified Example 2>
It is also possible to configure the system so that when the start indication image displayed on the display screen 95a is hidden, the display screen 95a is darkened. By darkening the display screen 95a, all images such as the start indication image and background image are hidden, which effectively reduces the sense of incongruity caused by the disappearance of the characters FC and EC that were displayed in the left and right permanent display areas FCE and ECE.

<30th Embodiment>
In the 29th embodiment described above, the ally character FC and enemy character EC are permanently displayed in the permanent display areas FCE and ECE, and the movement of the characters in these permanent display areas FCE and ECE indicates the start of a battle. The configuration related to the indication of the start of a battle is a distinctive feature of this embodiment. The distinctive configuration of this embodiment will be explained below with reference to Figures 250 to 252, focusing on the differences from the 29th embodiment. Figure 250 is a flowchart showing the flow of the second type of special effect, Figure 251 is a schematic diagram showing the range of movement of the characters in each part, and Figure 252 is a schematic diagram showing the display at the start of the second type of special effect.

As already explained, the second type of special effect consists of two parts. As shown in Figure 250, the first part consists of a search part where the allied character FC and enemy character EC search for their opponent, an encounter part where both characters FC and EC meet, and a battle part where the characters FC and EC fight. In the search part, the allied character FC searches for the enemy character EC while moving within the first display area FE, and the enemy character EC searches for the allied character FC while moving within the second display area EE. When the allied character FC finds the enemy character EC, there is a difference in the chances of a big win or continuation of the special stage compared to when the allied character FC is found by the enemy character EC.

As shown in Figure 251(a), during the exploration phase, both friendly characters FC and enemy characters EC avoid crossing the boundary DL. However, as a type of taunting animation for discovering an opponent, the divider image DG may shift left or right from the boundary DL in accordance with the character's movement.

In the battle phase, as shown in Figure 251(b), the divider image DG is hidden, and the split display on the display screen 95a is disabled. In this state, the movement range of the allied character FC is expanded so that it can move across the boundary DL into both the first display area FE and the second display area EE. Similarly, the movement range of the enemy character EC is also expanded so that it can move across the boundary DL into both the first display area FE and the second display area EE. The battle phase consists of multiple attack phases (up to three phases, from the first to the third attack phase), and in each attack phase, the attacking character crosses the boundary DL and enters the opponent's area. Then, for example, if the character is defeated by an attack or ejected from their own area outside the display screen 95a, it is clearly indicated that they have lost.

Here, referring to Figure 252, we will illustrate the flow from the exploration part to the battle part in the second type of special effect.

At a predetermined timing after the start of a game round involving the second type of special effect, the friendly character FC moves toward the partition image DG. When the friendly character FC pushes the partition image DG toward the enemy character EC, the partition image DG is displaced toward the enemy character EC, expanding the first display area FE, which is the friendly character FC's territory, and shrinking the second display area EE, which is the enemy's territory. In other words, the occupied area on the display screen 95a changes.

Subsequently, the partition image DG is pushed to a predetermined position in the second display area EE, causing the partition image DG and the background image to become invisible. The ally character FC is then enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 95a (battle animation execution area BE) (enemy encounter part). During this time, the enemy character EC remains in standby in the permanent display area ECE. If the game transitions to the battle part in this pattern, there is a chance of a big win or continuation of a special stage.

Furthermore, if the enemy character EC pushes the partition image DG towards the friendly character FC, the partition image DG will shift towards the enemy character EC, expanding the second display area EE (the enemy character EC's territory) and shrinking the first display area FE (the enemy territory). In other words, the occupied area on the display screen 95a changes.

Subsequently, the partition image DG is pushed to a predetermined position in the first display area FE, causing the partition image DG and the background image to become invisible, and the enemy character EC is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 95a (battle animation execution area BE). At this time, the ally character FC remains in standby in the permanent display area FCE. If the game transitions to the battle part in this pattern, it becomes a critical situation that could end the special stage.

After the character is enlarged during the enemy encounter phase, a battle start notification will be displayed. At this time, the enlarged character will shrink and move to the notification display area, while the character displayed in the permanent display area will enlarge and move to the notification display area.

During special stages, the first display area FE of the display screen 95a displays the ally character FC, which is a first-type character, and the second display area EE displays the enemy character EC, which is a second-type character. In special stages, the display area in which these characters FC and EC are displayed is divided by a partition image DG into the first display area FE for the ally character FC and the second display area EE for the enemy character EC. This configuration helps to prevent difficulty in distinguishing between the two characters FC and EC. However, the presence of such a partition image DG can reduce the degree of freedom of the second-type special effects performed using both characters FC and EC. In this embodiment, when a second-type special effect is performed during a special stage, the partition image DG is hidden, and the movement range of each character FC and EC is expanded to encompass the entire first display area FE and second display area EE → display screen 95a, and these characters FC and EC are dynamically displayed across the entire display screen 95a. Thus, by hiding the partition image DG during the execution of the second type of special effect in a special stage, and simultaneously expanding the movement range of the dynamic display of each character FC and EC, it is possible to clearly show the player how the effect is progressing while enhancing the impact of the special effect. This contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

When the partition image DG is displayed on the display screen 95a, the movement range of the friendly character FC on the display screen 95a is restricted to the first display area FE, and the movement range of the enemy character EC on the display screen 95a is restricted to the second display area EE. By configuring the dynamic display range in this way, even in a configuration where multiple character FCs and ECs are simultaneously displayed in a constantly (standby) state and these character FCs and ECs are displayed dynamically, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from losing sight of the character FC or EC they wish to focus on.

After the start of the second type of special effect, that is, after the movement range of each character's FC and EC is expanded, the movement range of an allied character's FC when it is dynamically displayed and the movement range of an enemy character's EC when it is dynamically displayed will overlap in at least a portion of their respective movement ranges. This configuration, which overlaps the movement ranges, allows for even more dynamic character movements and larger character displays even with the expanded movement ranges. This is advantageous in increasing attention to the special effect.

When the allied character FC and enemy character EC are waiting (permanently residing) in the first display area FE and the second display area EE, respectively, the correlation between their movements is weak. However, when the second type of special effect is executed, the correlation between their movements strengthens. This configuration effectively encourages players, who anticipate the coordinated movement of both characters FC and EC, to focus their attention on the special effect.

When a Type 2 special effect is initiated after a change in the position of the partition image DG linked to an ally character FC, the Type 2 special effect will proceed in a way that is advantageous to the ally character FC. Similarly, when a Type 2 special effect is initiated after a change in the position of the partition image DG linked to an enemy character EC, the Type 2 special effect will proceed in a way that is advantageous to the enemy character EC. This configuration effectively prevents the presentation patterns of Type 2 special effects from becoming monotonous during special stages. It is sufficient to differentiate the Type 2 special effect based on the change in the position of the partition image DG; it is also possible to differentiate the display method of the introductory display at the start of the Type 2 special effect rather than the content of the battle.

As described above, in a configuration where the position of the partition image DG is shifted in conjunction with the characters FC and EC, by hiding the partition image DG at the shifted position, it becomes clear which character's movement (FC or EC) is the starting point for expanding the movement range, thereby allowing the various effects described above to be effectively achieved.

<Variation 1>
At least when the second type of special effect begins, the system is configured to display allied character FC and enemy character EC in an enlarged state. However, it is also acceptable to configure the system to display each character in an enlarged state during battle, compared to their normal (standby) state.

<Modified Example 2>
When a Type 2 special effect is about to begin, a start indication image (see Embodiment 29 above) that suggests the start of the Type 2 special effect may be displayed across the partition image DG, and the partition image DG may be hidden while the start indication image is displayed. If the start indication image is displayed across the partition image DG, and the partition image DG is hidden before the start indication image is hidden, the abruptness of the movement range of each character FC, EC when the partition image DG is hidden can be suppressed. In addition, if the partition image DG is hidden while the player's attention is being drawn to the start indication image, the chances of the player missing the display → hiding of the partition image DG can be suppressed.

<31st Embodiment>
The following describes in detail, based on the drawings, a 31st embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of amusement machine. In this embodiment, the main configuration of the pachinko machine is the same as that of the pachinko machine shown in the first embodiment. The explanation of these common configurations will be omitted as appropriate. Figure 253 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 254 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and Figures 255 and 256 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded state. In Figure 255, for convenience, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in Figure 253, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main unit 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

As shown in Figure 254, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting elongated frame materials on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame overall. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10; it may also be installed on the island equipment of the gaming hall.

The main body of the gaming machine 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a manner that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 18 is provided at the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. These upper support fittings 17 and 18 constitute a support mechanism, and this support mechanism allows the main body of the gaming machine 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side being the rotation base end and the right side being the rotation tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 255 and 256).

As shown in Figures 255 and 256, the main body of the gaming machine 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 positioned in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 positioned behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in a front view of the gaming machine, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Figure 253, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame 20 whose outer shape is almost identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window 21 is formed in the central part of the frame 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be seen from the front, and this window 21 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds these glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that divides the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear sections, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, while the game area PE is double-covered from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23.

Furthermore, it is not necessarily required to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Moreover, the number of glass panels is arbitrary; it may be one or three or more. However, in light of improving safety and security, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and arrange them facing each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use transparent synthetic resin panel members instead of glass panels.

Various light-emitting means, such as lamps, are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a ring-shaped illuminated section 26 containing LEDs or other light-emitting means is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The ring-shaped illuminated section 26 lights up or flashes in accordance with changes in the game state, such as during a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Furthermore, an error indicator lamp section 27, which lights up in the event of an error or malfunction, is provided at the center of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and at the very top of the pachinko machine 10. Prize ball lamp sections 28, which light up during prize ball payout, are provided to the left and right of the error indicator lamp section 27. Additionally, speaker sections 29, which output sound effects, background music, etc., according to the game state, are provided in positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see Figure 255).

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 are arranged vertically, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 33, opening upwards, is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34, also opening upwards, is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 254). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described later), aligning them in a line, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism (described later). The lower tray 34 has the function of storing excess game balls in the upper tray 33 and also functions as a receptacle for game balls that were launched by the game ball launching mechanism but did not reach the game area PE (see Figure 255) and are returned to the player.

In the upper bulge 31, a special effect button 35, operated by the player, is located in front of the upper tray 33. This special effect button 35 is connected to a notification and effect control device 140, which executes corresponding effects based on the operation of the special effect button 35.

To the right of the lower bulge 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided, protruding toward the player. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described later. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (rotation) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases. When this amount of operation is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount, the game ball reaches the game area PE. Furthermore, by adjusting this amount of operation, the player can choose to launch the game balls to either the right or left route, as described later.

As shown in Figure 255, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door-side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion is formed at its upper corner, projecting rearward and opening upward. This receiving portion is partitioned left and right by a partition wall, thereby separating the entrance portion of the front door-side upper tray passage from the entrance portion of the front door-side lower tray passage. The upstream side of both the front door-side upper tray passage and the front door-side lower tray passage leads to a game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Game balls entering the front door-side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the front door-side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14, at the pivot end, protruding shafts are provided at its upper and lower ends. These protruding shafts constitute the assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 257. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, as with Figure 255, the configuration within the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted in Figure 257 for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, which has an outer shape similar to that of the outer frame 11, being roughly rectangular. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a small gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The fascia board is positioned below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 rests on the fascia board. A small clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 to prevent mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base end (left side in Figure 257) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown in the illustration, the support brackets 71 and 72 have shafts, and bearing portions provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can rotate relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotating end side of the inner frame base body 50 (right side in Figure 257). The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later) and has front door hook members 76 scattered along its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has a hook receiving member 49 (see Figure 255) provided on the back of the front door frame 14 and slits formed to protrude towards the front side of the inner frame 13, corresponding to each front door hook member 76. The front door hook members 76 protruding through these slits engage with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable state. Furthermore, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 that extends to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 engage with a hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, thereby locking the main body of the gaming machine 12 in a closed position relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base 50 (locking device 75) is equipped with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is separate from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77 and the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is positioned adjacent to the locking unit. Turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right (clockwise) unlocks the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the left (counterclockwise) unlocks the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11.

A recessed area 51 for housing the game board unit 80K is formed in the central part of the inner frame base body 50. The recessed area 51 is recessed at the rear of the game machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80K, and the game board unit 80K is fixed in place by a manual locking mechanism, fitted into this recessed area 51 from the front of the game machine. A roughly rectangular window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the recessed area 51, through which the rear configuration of the game board unit 80K (reported later, the rear block 80bK) protrudes to the rear of the inner frame 13. This window opening 52 is almost entirely covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80K mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80K)
The game board unit 80K is formed by integrating a game board 80aK, which is mainly made of wooden board material, and a rear block 80bK, which is provided on the rear side of the game board 80aK and has various game components (variable display device, control device, movable performance mechanism, etc.) mounted on the base body 251.

The game area PE, through which the game balls flow, is formed on the front of the game board 80aK. As already explained, the game area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the game board 80aK is slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls; that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE do not line up front to back at the same point within the game area PE. This suppresses ball jamming in the game area PE. Note that the game board 80aK is not limited to wood; it can also be made of synthetic resin.

The following describes the game board unit 80K (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80aK) based on Figures 258 and 259. Figure 258 is a front view of the game board unit 80K, and Figure 259 is a rear perspective view of the game board unit 80K.

The game board 80aK has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in the direction of its own thickness (front-to-back direction). As shown in Figure 258, each opening is equipped with a general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable prize entry device 83, a through gate 84, etc. When a game ball enters the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, or the variable prize entry device 83, these game balls are detected by detection sensors provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection result, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. In addition, an out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aK (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86. In the following explanation, to clearly distinguish it from the entry of game balls into the out-out opening 86, the entry of game balls into the general prize-winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable prize-winning device 83 will also be referred to as "winning."

Furthermore, the game board 80aK is equipped with numerous game pins 87, windmills 94, and other game components to appropriately distribute the flow paths of the game balls. These various configurations of game pins 87, windmills, etc., differentiate the flow paths of the game balls, resulting in a reasonable probability of winning prizes in the general prize winning slots 81, etc.

A central opening is formed in the middle of the game board 80aK, and a transparent opening cover is attached to cover this central opening from the back of the game board unit 80K. Behind this central opening are the variable display unit 85K and other components belonging to the rear block 80bK, allowing the variable display unit 85K and other components to be visible from the front of the game machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An operating port unit 82 and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 includes a first operating port 91 located below the variable display unit 85K, and a second operating port 92 located below the first operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is equipped with an electric mechanism 93, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). The electric mechanism 93 comprises a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is switchable between an open state (assist state) that allows ball entry into the second operating port 92 and a closed state (non-assist state) that prevents ball entry.

Furthermore, the electric mechanism 93 may be configured such that, when in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the second operating opening 92, and when switched to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the second operating opening 92 than when it is closed.

Upstream from the second operating port 92, specifically to the side of the variable display unit 85K, the above-mentioned through gate 84 is located. When a support lottery triggered by the passage of a game ball through gate 84 is won, the electric mechanism 93 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, if a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls will be dispensed, and if a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls will be dispensed. However, the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable prize-winning device (special ball-entry device or special ball-entry means) 83 is equipped with a large prize-winning opening and a shutter that can be switched between an "allowing" state, which permits ball entry into the large prize-winning opening, and a "blocking" state, which prevents ball entry. In the following description, the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "allowing" state will be referred to as the "open state," and the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "blocking" state will be referred to as the "closed state."

Furthermore, the variable prize-winning device 83 may be configured such that, when it is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83, and when it switches to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83 than when it is closed.

In the normal game state described later, an internal lottery is performed based on the entry of balls into the operating ports 91 and 92. If the internal lottery is won (for example, a jackpot is achieved), the game transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The variable prize entry device 83 is maintained in the closed state and is configured to be switched to the open state when the game transitions to the special game state. In the special game state, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or after a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have been entered, one round is defined as the switching to the open state being repeated for multiple rounds (for example, 6 rounds) with a maximum limit.

The game board 80aK is provided with a center frame 96 surrounding the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80aK from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the game board 80aK, so that the gap between the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, collisions between the game ball flowing down the game area PE and the symbol display device 95 are avoided, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into the right route, which bypasses the variable display unit 85 (specifically the center frame 96) from the right side, and the left route, which bypasses it from the left side. In this embodiment, the various game components provided in the game area PE are arranged symmetrically (a so-called symmetrical gauge), and there is no difference in advantage or disadvantage between the right and left routes. The configuration allows game balls launched from either the right or left route to enter the operating ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable prize winning device 83.

A stage is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 96, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls flowing in through an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 are discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. The stage is configured to make it relatively easier for game balls that reach the stage to flow into the first operation port 91, specifically, to flow into the first operation port 91 more easily than game balls that do not pass through the stage, thus contributing to increased player attention to the movement of game balls on this stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, restricting game balls that reach the stage from moving toward the rear block 80bK (variable display unit 85K).

At the right end of the game board 80aK, a game area partitioning member 98 is provided, along with the guide rail 100 (described later), to demarcate the game area PE. The game area partitioning member 98 is equipped with a stopper member and a main display unit 99, which collide with game balls flying along the guide rail 100. The stopper member is a buffer member positioned near the tip of the guide rail 100. Upon impact with this stopper member, the game ball's momentum is reduced before it flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the main display unit 99. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, with a portion of it positioned to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D, which displays predetermined patterns and other information. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in Figure 258(b), the main display unit D comprises a first operation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the first operation port 91, and a second operation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the second operation port 92. In the first operation port display unit D1, a change in the pattern is triggered by a win in the first operation port 91, and as a result of stopping this change in the pattern display, the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the change in the first operation port display unit D1 is stopped, and after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state.

The display unit D2 for the second operation slot triggers a change in the symbol display upon entry into the second operation slot 92. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is clearly displayed as the change in the display stops. If the result of the internal lottery based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the display unit D2 for the second operation slot stops the change in the display. After a predetermined symbol is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into either of the operating ports 91 or 92, a variation display is initiated on the corresponding operating port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display stops (confirms). This state is maintained until the confirmed display time elapses, which constitutes one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration where a single display area is provided and a variation display is performed in that single display area regardless of which operating port 91 or 92 wins, one game round can be defined as the variation display starting in that single display area, displaying a predetermined stop result, stopping (confirms), and maintaining that state until the confirmed display time elapses.

In this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92 is limited to four times each (a total of eight balls). The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a first operation port retention count display section S1 and a second operation port retention count display section S2, respectively, which display the number of balls held in the first and second operation ports 91 and 92.

Furthermore, in addition to the operation port display units D1 and D2, the main display unit 99's main display section D is also equipped with a through-gate display unit DS that displays the lottery results based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84. The through-gate display unit DS triggers a change in the pattern display upon winning a prize in the through-gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of this change display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is clearly displayed (a confirmation display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is a support win, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through-gate display unit DS, the change display stops, and after the confirmation display is completed, the system transitions to the electric mechanism open state. In the electric mechanism open state, the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operation port 92, is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times. The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a hold count display section SS that shows the number of held balls.

The main display unit D, as detailed above, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and its visibility is ensured because the game balls do not move in front of these various display units.

To explain the configuration of the inner frame 13 again using Figure 257, below the game board unit 80K in the inner frame base body 50, there is a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls positioned at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball feeding device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch standby position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby integrating it with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle, tilted upwards toward the game board unit 80K. The launch rail 112 has a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross-section, and the game ball fits into this groove, thereby defining its front-to-back position.

A ball stopper is positioned near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112 to hold the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 in the aforementioned launch standby position. The solenoid 111 is positioned further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension and retraction direction, causing the game ball, positioned in the launch standby position, to be launched towards the game board unit 80K, specifically towards the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80K.

The guide rail 100, together with the game area partitioning member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80K (specifically the front surface of the plate), partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are positioned opposite each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and these two rails 101 and 102 partition a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that is open on the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the game area PE. The game ball, launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111, is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). Furthermore, in the game board unit 80K, a reverse return prevention member 106 is attached to the front of the exit portion 105, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. This prevents subsequent game balls from being obstructed by game balls that have already reached the game area PE.

The rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 are arc-shaped, centered approximately in the middle of the game area PE. Therefore, game balls passing through the guide passage 103 are easily moved (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within them. In other words, when a game ball is launched to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide passage 103 effectively constitutes the passage area (path) through which the game ball passes, while the area along the inner rail 101 effectively becomes an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in Figure 257, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80K. In other words, the two rails 100 and 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset to the left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80K. This brings both rails 100 and 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80K while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is located below the gap formed in this manner. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 fails to reach the game area PE and returns to the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, these foul balls will enter the foul ball passage through the gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged into the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This suppresses interference between foul balls and the next game ball to be launched.

In the inner frame base 50, a through hole is formed to the left of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14), extending through the inner frame base 50 in the front-to-back direction. A passage forming member 121 is installed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body-side upper tray passage 122 and a main body-side lower tray passage 123. The upstream sides of these main body-side upper tray passages 122 and 123 lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Furthermore, a receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45, attached to the front door frame 14, fits into the lower part of the passage forming member 121. Below the main body-side upper tray passage 122 is the front door-side upper tray passage, and below the main body-side lower tray passage 123 is the front door-side upper tray passage.

In the inner frame base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening/closing member 124 is attached to open and close the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force closes each opening/closing member 124, preventing game balls from falling out of the passages 122 and 123. Conversely, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by a receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage are connected, and the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage are also connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base 50 and game board unit 80K) will be described based on Figures 259 and 260. Figure 260 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 260, a bearing bracket 132 is attached to the pivot base end (right side in Figure 260) on the back of the inner frame base body 50. The bearing bracket 132 has bearing portions 133 formed at vertically spaced intervals, and these bearing portions 133 allow the back pack unit 15 to rotatably attach to the inner frame 13. Furthermore, multiple fixing levers 134 are provided on the back of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in the closed position.

As already explained, a window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess (game board housing section) 51 in the inner frame base 50, penetrating in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and opening to the rear side of the inner frame base 50. This window opening 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80K housed in the housing recess 51. Various components such as control devices are mounted on the rear side of the game board unit 80K (rear block 80bK), and these components are exposed to the rear side of the inner frame 13 through the window opening 52. Now, with reference to Figure 259, the configuration of the rear side of the game board unit 80K will be described.

As already explained, a rear block 80bK is attached to the back of the game board 80aK. The rear block 80bK has a roughly box-shaped base 251 that opens towards the game board 80a side. This base 251 is fixed to the back of the game board unit 80K, thereby integrating the game board 80aK and the rear block 80bK.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area for arranging movable performance mechanisms, etc., while the rear side is the area for arranging control devices for controlling these various components and the variable display unit 85K. More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes to the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 258) and the control device for driving the variable display unit 85K (notification/performance control device 140) are mounted on this protruding portion. The variable display unit 85K and the notification/performance control device 140 are arranged overlapping in the front-to-back direction (the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50), with the variable display unit 85K at the front and the notification/performance control device 140 at the rear.

The notification and performance control device 140 includes a notification and performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device (described later). The notification and performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

Below the notification and performance control device 140, a main control unit 160 is provided, covering the base body 251 from the rear. The main control unit 160 comprises a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80K (specifically, the rear block 80bK), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function for controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function for monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit). This main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The circuit board box 163 comprises a box base (front case) with a roughly rectangular shape and a box cover (back case) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a box sealing section 164, thereby sealing the circuit board box 163. Multiple box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short side of the circuit board box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be configured in any way that makes it impossible to open the box base and the box cover, but the box base and the box cover are made impossible to open by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to reseal the box even after it has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. When the main control board inside malfunctions or when the main control board needs to be inspected, the connection between the box sealing section with the locking pin inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. After that, if the sealing process is to be repeated, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is kept in the circuit board box 163, it will be easy to detect unauthorized opening by examining the circuit board box 163.

The circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are indestructibly connected by a base seal 165. Specifically, the base seal 165, like the box seal 164, has a locking hole and a locking pin. The insertion of the locking pin into the locking hole ensures that the circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are irremovably connected. This makes it easier to detect if the circuit board box 163 has been illegally removed.

On the front of the base body 251, in the portion facing the lower rear of the game board unit 80K, a collection passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general prize entry point 81, the operating point unit 82, and the variable prize entry device 83, and converges at a single point downstream. As a result, game balls that enter the general prize entry point 81, etc., are all collected below the game board unit 80K via the collection passage. In other words, the base body 251 is equipped with the function of collecting game balls that enter the various prize entry points.

Below the game board unit 80K is a discharge passage, which will be described later. Game balls collected below the game board unit 80K via the collection passage are guided into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out-out opening 86 also leads to the discharge passage; game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots are guided into the discharge passage via the out-out opening 86.

Furthermore, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80bK is equipped with detection sensors for each of the aforementioned ball entry sections: a general prize entry sensor for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize entry opening 81, and operation opening detection sensors for detecting game balls that have entered the operation openings 91 and 92. These various detection sensors constitute the prize entry detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from each detection sensor to the main control unit 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described based on Figures 261 and 262. Figure 261 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 262 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in Figure 261, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as its main body, and the dispensing mechanism 202, discharge passage panel, and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to this back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and, as shown in Figure 262, has a base portion 211 to which the dispensing mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the top are closed and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board has various output terminals, through which various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 262, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the locking pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported relative to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 has multiple insertion points through which the fixing lever 134 provided on the inner frame 13 is inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the base portion 211 from the rear when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion points.

The dispensing mechanism 202 is positioned on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The dispensing mechanism 202 includes a tank 221 located at the top of the back pack 201, with an upward opening. Game balls supplied from the island equipment in the gaming hall are continuously replenished into this tank 221. A tank rail 222, gently sloping downstream, is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223, extending vertically, is connected downstream of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the downstream end of the case rail 223. Game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 225 located on the base 211 of the back pack 201 via a dispensing passage (not shown) located downstream of the dispensing device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later. Its inner opening connects to the upper tray 33 via the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage, while its outer opening connects to the lower tray 34 via the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage.

The lower end of the base portion 211 is fitted with a discharge passage panel and a control unit 204, which are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from front to back. The discharge passage panel has a discharge passage formed on the side facing the control unit 204, which is open to the rear. This opening in the discharge passage is closed by the control unit 204. The discharge passage is designed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the gaming hall, etc. Game balls guided from the aforementioned recovery passage, etc., to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through this discharge passage.

The control unit assembly 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base 241, on which the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. These two devices, the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243, are arranged in a front-to-back configuration, with the payout control device 242 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the dispensing control device 242, a dispensing control board for controlling the dispensing device 224 is housed within a circuit board box 244, and a state reset switch 245 provided on the dispensing control board protrudes outside the circuit board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state reset switch 245 will resolve the ball jam.

The power supply and launch control device 243 houses the power supply and launch control board within the circuit board box 246. The power supply and launch control board generates and outputs the necessary power for various control devices, and further controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 and the ball feeding device 113, which constitute the game ball launch mechanism 110.

Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is equipped with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power to the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state and an off state.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a data storage function, so that even if a power outage occurs, it will retain the state it was in at the time of the outage, and when power is restored, it will return to that state. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, such as when a gaming hall closes for the day, the state before the shutdown is stored. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 provided on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main unit 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the rear of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, these various switches are difficult to operate when the main unit 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone without the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheat) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Variable display unit 85K)
As already explained, in this embodiment, the results of the lottery based on winnings in the operating ports 91 and 92 are announced by a variable display unit 85K mounted on the game board unit 80K, and the configuration of this variable display unit 85K is a distinctive feature. As shown in Figure 263, the variable display unit 85K consists of a pattern display device 500K that displays (variablely displays) patterns in a variable manner when winnings are triggered in the operating ports 91 and 92, a hold display device 600K that displays the number of holds related to the operating ports 91 and 92, an auxiliary display device 700K which is a dot display, a movable performance device 800K which is a movable performance device, and a frame on which these various components are mounted. When viewed from the front of the game machine, the pattern display device 500K → hold display device 600K → auxiliary display device 700K → auxiliary display device 700K are arranged from top to bottom. The pattern display device 500K in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 264 and 265. Figure 264(a) is a front view of the pattern display device 500K, Figure 264(b) is a perspective view of the pattern display device 500K, and Figure 265 is an exploded perspective view of the pattern display device 500K. For convenience, the front cover 501K, which constitutes the front part of the pattern display device 500K, is not shown in Figure 264 and other figures.

(Pattern display device 500K)
As shown in Figure 264, the pattern display device 500K comprises a roughly box-shaped housing 521K that is open to the front of the gaming machine, and a plurality (specifically three) of drum units 523K housed in the housing 521K in a row on the left and right. The housing 521K is colored and opaque, and is designed to shield from light from the outside of the housing 521K so that light does not shine into the inside through the material of the housing 521K.

The housing 521K of the drum unit 523K has an opening 522K that faces the front of the gaming machine, and a front cover 501K is attached to cover this opening 522K. The front cover 501K is decorated with characters and other designs (printed on it), and a colorless, transparent window 502K is formed in its central part. Through this window 502K, a portion of each drum unit 523K can be seen from the front of the gaming machine (see the dashed line in Figure 264(a)).

As shown in Figure 265, the drum unit 523K comprises a plate-shaped base body 524K that constitutes the mounting portion to the housing 521K, and a rotating body (drum) 525K held by the base body 524K. When the base body 524K is fixed to the housing 521K, the internal area of the housing 521K is divided into three equal parts on the left and right sides by the base body 524K, corresponding to each drum unit 523K.

The rotating body 525K is mounted on the base body 524K via a motor 526K. Specifically, the motor 526K is fixed to the base body 524K, and the rotating body 525K is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 526K. The output shaft of the motor 526K extends in the direction of parallel installation (left-right direction) of the drum unit 523K, and the rotating body 525K rotates around the axis of this output shaft. The motor 526K is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the drive control is performed by the notification/performance control device 140. The motor 526K is a stepping motor, and the rotational position of the rotating body 525K can be adjusted by the number of pulses of the output drive signal.

The rotating body 525K is composed of a circular frame 531K that forms the framework of the rotating body 525K and a substantially cylindrical decorative sheet 532K that covers the outer circumference of the frame 531K. The base body 524K is equipped with a backlight 581K located behind (inside) the decorative sheet 532K to illuminate the decorative sheet 532K, and a position detection sensor 527K that detects the rotational position of the rotating body 525K.

The backlight 581K is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, which controls the illumination, such as turning it on and off. As will be described in detail later, the decorative sheet 532K has multiple patterns in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 525K. These patterns are light-transmitting, and the light from the backlight 581K is projected forward through these patterns.

The position detection sensor 527K is also connected to the notification and effect control device 140. The notification and effect control device 140 determines the rotational position of the rotating body 525K based on the detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor 527K. If the rotational position of the rotating body 525K is shifted due to external forces or malfunctions, the rotational position of the rotating body 525K is corrected (modified) based on the determined position information.

(Pending display device 600K)
Next, the hold display device 600K will be described with reference to Figure 266(a). Figure 266(a) is a front view of the hold display device 600K.

The hold display device 600K is provided with a hold display area SE consisting of an execution target display unit 601K that displays the hold corresponding to the game round currently being played by the pattern display device 500K, and a hold number display unit 602K in which the same number of unit hold display units as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operation openings 91 and 92 are arranged in a left-right direction.

More specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the operating openings 91 and 92 is 8. Correspondingly, the reserved ball display device 600K is equipped with a reserved ball display unit 602K consisting of a first unit reserved ball display unit 602aK, a second unit reserved ball display unit 602bK, a third unit reserved ball display unit 602cK, a fourth unit reserved ball display unit 602dK, a fifth unit reserved ball display unit 602eK, a sixth unit reserved ball display unit 602fK, a seventh unit reserved ball display unit 602gK, and an eighth unit reserved ball display unit 602hK. The execution target display unit 601K is located below the left-hand pattern row (left drum 523LK). To the right of the execution target display unit 601K, the unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK are arranged from left to right in the following order: 1st unit hold display unit 602aK, 2nd unit hold display unit 602bK, 3rd unit hold display unit 602cK, 4th unit hold display unit 602dK, 5th unit hold display unit 602eK, 6th unit hold display unit 602fK, 7th unit hold display unit 602gK, and 8th unit hold display unit 602hK.

The execution target display unit 601K and the first unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK each have one LED (light-emitting part) as a light source. On the front surface of the hold display device 600K, light-transmitting parts with a predetermined pattern (rectangular in this embodiment) are formed in the areas corresponding to these LEDs. The light-transmitting parts have the function of diffusing transmitted light, and the light from the LEDs is diffused through the light-transmitting parts before being emitted towards the front of the gaming machine. Each LED is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, which controls the illumination of each LED according to the number of holds. Specifically, the LEDs are illuminated (lit or blinked) to display a number of patterns corresponding to the current number of holds. In the following description, the patterns (rectangular patterns) displayed on each display unit 601K, 602aK to 602hK by the illumination of the LEDs are also referred to as "hold patterns."

For example, when a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 1, the first unit reserved indicator 602aK lights up, and the other unit reserved indicators 602bK to 602hK remain off. Similarly, when a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 4, the first unit reserved indicator 602aK to the fourth unit reserved indicator 602dK lights up, and the other unit reserved indicators 602eK to 602hK remain off. Figure 266(a) illustrates the case where the number of reserved balls in the operating slots 91 and 92 is 3. In the following explanation, "number of reserved balls" will also be referred to simply as "number of reserved balls."

As will be explained in detail later, the display colors of the reserved symbols in this embodiment include not only the basic display color "white," but also special display colors "blue," "yellow," and "red." By changing the display color of the reserved symbol to a special display color in a game round prior to the game round related to the reserved symbol, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated in advance. The display colors of the reserved symbols are differentiated so that the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of "white" → "blue" → "yellow" → "red" (see Figure 266(b)). Incidentally, although the reserved symbols are basically displayed with a light, they may flash if certain conditions are met. This flashing display is intended to indicate to the player that the display color may change.

(Auxiliary display device 700K)
Next, the auxiliary display device 700K will be described with reference to Figure 267. Figure 267 is a front view of the auxiliary display device 700K.

The auxiliary display device 700K is a dot matrix display having a horizontally elongated display screen 701K. The display screen 701K is positioned on the same plane as the display surface of the hold display device 600K, and is arranged vertically alongside the hold display device 600K. The display screen 701K consists of multiple LEDs 705K arranged vertically and horizontally, and these LEDs 705K are connected to the notification/effect control device 140. The notification/effect control device 140 displays various information such as characters and images on the display screen 701K by individually controlling the illumination of each LED 705K.

(Movable production device 800K)
Next, the movable performance device 800K will be described with reference to Figure 268(a). Figure 268(a) is a front view of the movable performance device 800K.

The movable display device 800K comprises a base body fixed to the frame of the variable display unit 85K, and a movable decorative body 801K pivotally supported by the base body. The base body is equipped with a stepping motor 815K, which is the drive unit for the movable decorative body 801K. The operation of this stepping motor 815K causes the movable decorative body 801K to rotate around a central axis CLK extending in the front-to-back direction (a direction perpendicular to the arrangement of the various devices 500K, 600K, and 700K). In the following description, the central axis CLK will also be referred to as the "rotational central axis CLK."

The stepping motor 815K is connected to the notification and effect control device 140, which controls the drive of the stepping motor 815K. Specifically, the drive control is performed to change the posture (rotation position) of the movable decorative body 801K in conjunction with the changing display of symbols on the symbol display device 500K. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the movable effect device 800K shown in this embodiment may also be linked with the auxiliary display device 700K and the hold display device 600K attached to the movable effect device 800K, thereby realizing diversification of display effects in the variable display unit 85K.

The movable ornament 801K comprises a main body 810K that is pivotally supported, and a protruding portion 811K that extends from the main body 810K. The front surface of the main body 810K is decorated with an animal motif, and the front surface of the protruding portion 811K is decorated with a staff motif.

The main body 810K of the movable decorative unit 801K contains a light-emitting substrate 805K. The light-emitting substrate 805 is connected to a notification/performance control device 140, which controls the illumination of each light-emitting element mounted on the light-emitting substrate 805. The light-emitting elements mounted on the light-emitting substrate 805K are broadly classified into first light-emitting elements, second light-emitting elements, and third light-emitting elements, each with a different light supply destination.

The front portion (decorative portion) of the main body 810K is light-transmitting and functions as a first light-emitting portion that emits light from the first light-emitting element. In the following description, the main body 810K will also be referred to as the "first light-emitting portion 810K." The front portion (decorative portion) of the protruding portion 811K is provided with a second light-emitting portion 812K, which is located at the base end of the protruding portion 811K and emits light from the second light-emitting element of the light-emitting substrate 805K, and a third light-emitting portion 823K, which is located at the tip end of the protruding portion 811K and emits light from the third light-emitting element of the light-emitting substrate 805K. In other words, the movable decorative body 801K is provided with three light-emitting portions 810K, 812K, and 813K, which can be individually switched on/off.

When the first light-emitting unit 810K, the second light-emitting unit 812K, and the third light-emitting unit 813K are illuminated, four colors are provided for illumination: the normal illumination color "white" and the special illumination colors "blue," "yellow," and "red," similar to the hold symbols displayed on the hold display device 600K (see Figure 268(b)). When an effect using the movable performance device 800K is executed, the illumination color of the movable decorative body 801K may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the movement of the movable display device 800K, referring to Figure 269. Figure 269 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movable display device 800K and the other display devices 500K, 600K, and 700K.

The movable display device 800K (movable decorative body 801K) has three main rotational positions: standby position, preparation position, and performance position. The standby position is the rightmost position within the rotational range (operational range) of the movable decorative body 801K. When positioned in this standby position, overlap between the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K and the other display devices 500K, 600K, and 700K is avoided. When no performance related to the movable display device 800K is being executed, the movable decorative body 801K is basically configured to remain in this standby position.

The preparation position is the leftmost position within the rotational range (operating range) of the movable decorative body 801K. Even when positioned in this preparation position, overlap between the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K and the other display devices 500K, 600K, and 700K is avoided. In some performances related to the movable performance device 800K, the movable decorative body 801K may rotate in a first direction (clockwise) to move from the standby position to the preparation position before the execution of the main part of the performance.

The performance positions are defined as positions set on the trajectory connecting the standby position and the preparation position, and are broadly classified into the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, and 12th performance positions. These 1st to 12th performance positions are arranged in the rotational direction of the movable decorative body 801K around the rotational axis CLK.

When positioned in the first performance position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K overlaps with the auxiliary display device 700K from the front, while overlapping with the left variable display area DL of the left drum 523LK, the execution target display unit 601K of the hold display device 600K, and the hold count display unit 602 is avoided. Figure 269(a) illustrates the state in which the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in the first performance position.

When positioned in the second performance location, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the left variable display area DL of the left drum 523LK, and the execution target display section 601K of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (third light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the execution target display section 601K, making it difficult to see the hold symbols displayed on the execution target display section 601K. In contrast, the overlap with the left variable display area DL is minimized so that the overlap with the symbols displayed in the left variable display area DL is maintained so that the symbols remain visible.

When positioned in the third performance location, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the left variable display area DL of the left drum 523LK, and the first unit hold display section 602aK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (third light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the first unit hold display section 602aK, making it difficult to see the hold image displayed in the first unit hold display section 602aK. In contrast, the overlap with the left variable display area DL is minimized so that the overlap with the image displayed in the left variable display area DL is maintained so that the image is still visible.

When positioned in the fourth performance position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the left variable display area DL of the left drum 523LK, and the second unit hold display section 602bK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (third light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the second unit hold display section 602bK, making it difficult to see the hold image displayed in the second unit hold display section 602bK. In contrast, the overlap with the left variable display area DL is limited so that the overlap with the image displayed in the left variable display area DL is maintained so that the image is visible. Figure 269(b) illustrates the state in which the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in the fourth performance position.

When positioned at the fifth performance location, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the medium-variable display area DM of the medium drum 523MK, and the third unit hold display section 602cK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (third light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the third unit hold display section 602cK, making it difficult to see the hold symbols displayed in the third unit hold display section 602cK. In contrast, the overlap with the medium-variable display area DM is minimized so that the overlap with the symbols displayed in the medium-variable display area DM is maintained and the symbols remain visible.

When positioned at the sixth performance location, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the medium-variable display area DM of the medium drum 523MK, and the fourth unit hold display section 602dK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (third light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the fourth unit hold display section 602dK, making it difficult to see the hold symbols displayed in the fourth unit hold display section 602dK. In contrast, the overlap with the medium-variable display area DM is minimized so that the overlap with the symbols displayed in the medium-variable display area DM is maintained so that the symbols remain visible.

The seventh performance position is located midway between the standby position and the preparation position. When positioned at this seventh performance position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K and the medium-variable display area DM of the medium drum 523MK. In this state, the overlap between the tip portion of the protruding portion 811K (third light-emitting portion 813K) and the medium-variable display area DM is kept to a minimum to ensure the visibility of the symbols displayed in the medium-variable display area DM.

When positioned at the eighth performance location, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the right variable display area DR of the right drum 523RK, and the fifth unit hold display section 602eK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (third light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the fifth unit hold display section 602eK, making it difficult to see the hold image displayed in the fifth unit hold display section 602eK. In contrast, the overlap with the right variable display area DR is minimized so that the overlap with the image displayed in the right variable display area DR is maintained so that the image is still visible.

When positioned at the ninth performance location, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the right variable display area DR of the right drum 523RK, and the sixth unit hold display section 602fK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (third light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the sixth unit hold display section 602fK, making it difficult to see the hold image displayed in the sixth unit hold display section 602fK. In contrast, the overlap with the right variable display area DR is minimized so that the overlap with the image displayed in the right variable display area DR is sufficient to ensure the visibility of the image.

When positioned at the 10th performance position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the right variable display area DR of the right drum 523RK, and the 7th unit hold display section 602gK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (3rd light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the 7th unit hold display section 602gK, making it difficult to see the hold image displayed in the 7th unit hold display section 602gK. In contrast, the overlap with the right variable display area DR is minimized so that the overlap with the image displayed in the right variable display area DR is maintained so that the image is still visible.

When positioned at the 11th performance position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with the auxiliary display device 700K, the right variable display area DR of the right drum 523RK, and the 8th unit hold display section 602hK of the hold display device 600K. In this state, the tip portion (3rd light-emitting portion 813K) of the protruding portion 811K covers most of the 8th unit hold display section 602hK, making it difficult to see the hold image displayed in the 8th unit hold display section 602hK. In contrast, the overlap with the right variable display area DR is minimized so that the overlap with the image displayed in the right variable display area DR is maintained so that the image is still visible.

When positioned at the 12th performance position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K overlaps with the auxiliary display device 700K from the front, while overlapping with the left variable display area DL of the left drum 523LK, the execution target display unit 601K of the hold display device 600K, and the hold count display unit 602 is avoided.

As will be explained in more detail later, when the movable display device 800K and other display devices 500K, 600K, and 700K perform a coordinated display (coordinated display), the stepping motor 815K is driven in such a way that the movable decorative body 801K passes through the first to twelfth display positions, or remains stationary at those positions.

Furthermore, the specific configurations of the pattern display device 500K, the hold display device 600K, and the auxiliary display device 700K are arbitrary; for example, they can be changed to liquid crystal display devices equipped with liquid crystal displays, or to dot matrix or 7-segment type display devices.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the block shown in Figure 270.

The main control board 401, located in the main control unit 162, is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is a component that incorporates a ROM 403 for storing various control programs and fixed-value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 403, and various counter circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and random number generators. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 or RAM 404, may be provided by separate components.

The MPU 402 is equipped with both input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the dispensing control device 242, and various detection sensors, all located on the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, the following are connected: ball entry detection sensor 391a for detecting ball entry into the general prize entry opening 81, ball entry detection sensor 391b for detecting ball entry into the variable prize entry device 83, ball entry detection sensor 391c for detecting ball entry into the first operation opening 91, ball entry detection sensor 391d for detecting ball entry into the second operation opening 92, and ball entry detection sensor 391e for detecting ball entry into the through gate 84. The MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each entry point. Furthermore, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot lottery based on ball entry into the first operation opening 91 and the second operation opening 92, and also executes a support lottery based on ball entry into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based, for example, the result of determining whether a ball has entered the prize-winning ball entry section, such as the aforementioned operating ports 91 and 92. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a ball has entered the general prize port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the variable prize device 83, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the first operating port 91, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output; and if a ball has entered the second operating port 92, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

The notification and performance control device 140 receives various commands from the main control device 162, including commands for starting the variation, type commands, ending the variation, opening commands, and ending commands. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting these commands. Details of these commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and this predetermined number of bytes contains various information.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a variable prize drive unit that opens and closes the shutter of the variable prize device 83, an electric prize drive unit that opens and closes the electric prize mechanism 93 of the second operating opening 92, and a main display unit 99. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 402 performs drive control of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit so that the variable prize device 83 is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the support lottery for the electric prize mechanism 93 is won, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the electric prize mechanism drive unit so that the electric prize mechanism 93 is opened and closed. The MPU 402 also controls the display of the main display unit D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402. Through this external output terminal board 213, information regarding ball entry into various ball entry points and lottery results such as jackpots is output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to monitor the status of the pachinko machine 10 and the gameplay situation.

The power outage monitoring board 405 acts as a relay between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243. The power outage monitoring board 405 is equipped with the function of monitoring the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loaned balls via the payout device 224 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming arcade. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies this generated operating power through a predetermined power path. Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, which is driven when predetermined launching conditions are met.

The notification and performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification and performance control board that has an MPU (Multi-Purpose Unit) installed. The MPU contains a ROM (Map Module) that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM (Memory for Temporarily Storing Various Data, etc., During the Execution of the Control Programs Stored in the ROM), and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM and RAM to be integrated into a single chip for the MPU; they may be configured as separate chips. The MPU of the notification and performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, and the variable display unit 85K (symbol display device 500K, hold display device 600K, auxiliary display device 700K, movable performance device 800K) located on the game board unit 80K, based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

For example, the notification and performance control device 140 executes drive control of the symbol display device 500K based on commands input from the main control device 162. In this case, the notification and performance control device 140 determines the pattern of symbol variation display on the symbol display device 500K (e.g., whether or not a reach occurs and the content of the reach performance) and the pattern of symbol stop display (the type of symbol combination to be displayed when the variation display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as jackpot抽選 (jackpot lottery), setting the display on the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 500K. Specifically, as shown in Figure 271, it uses a random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 500K is fluctuating without a win, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time of the symbol fluctuations in the display sections D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit 99 and the display time of the symbol fluctuations in the symbol display device 500K. Furthermore, it uses an electric mechanism release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operation port 92 into the electric mechanism release state.

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an operation slot reserve area RE, an execution area AE, and a total reserved ball storage area.

The operating port retention area RE comprises the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth areas. In accordance with the winning history of the first or second operating port 91, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 is stored as retention information in one of the eighth areas. This retention information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in areas 1 through 8, if multiple consecutive entries into the first or second operating port 91 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. Furthermore, up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the first or second operating port 92 are retained and stored. The retained ball storage area 432 also has a total retained count storage area, which stores information to identify the number of entries into the first or second operating port 91 that are being retained and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE when the display section D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 starts displaying the changing patterns. At the start of each game round, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, we will provide further explanation about the various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 272, two win/loss tables are set: a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes in its win/loss lottery means: a low probability mode (low probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

Under the circumstances where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 272(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 272(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 (ranging from 0 to 599), "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. Incidentally, if the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot are arbitrary.

Next, the winning type counter C2 will be explained. The winning type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 29, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple winning results are set. These multiple winning results differ in two conditions: (1) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) the support mode by the electric mechanism 93 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

As support modes provided by the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operating port 92, when comparing situations where game balls are continuously launched in the same manner towards the game area PE, a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency at which the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 opens per unit time is relatively high or low.

The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first or second operating port 91, it is stored in the operating port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432.

The distribution destination of game results for the winning type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 273(a). Figure 273(a) is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for jackpots.

As shown in Figure 273(a), the distribution table for jackpots sets the distribution destinations for game results as follows: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot results, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability variation jackpot results.

A 6R regular jackpot result is a jackpot result where, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played during this high-frequency support mode reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to the special game state), and the game switches back to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set at 40 games (see Figure 273(b)).

A 6R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot where, after the end of the special game state (open/close execution mode), the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result and the transition to the special game state, and switches to the low-frequency support mode upon the start of the special game state (see Figure 273(b)).

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92. Then, a decision is made on whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, during gameplay rounds transitioning to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. While the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same for each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, a configuration where the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode may be used.

Here, "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 500K capable of displaying (or changing) the variation of symbols (pictures), where, in a game round where the game result corresponds to an open/close execution mode, the stop display result after the variation display can become a special display result. This state is intended to make the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the aforementioned special display result, from the start of the variation display (or changing display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 500K until the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, this is a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the symbol display device 500K, a potential winning combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are then displayed in a variable state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying potential reach symbol combinations that correspond to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a pre-set active line in the symbol display device 500K. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

Here, with reference to Figure 274, the configuration and overview of the display of the changing symbols for each game round will be explained. Figure 274 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the overview of the display in the symbol display device 500K. In the following explanation, the configuration related to the left drum will be distinguished by adding "L" to the end of the identification code, the configuration related to the middle drum will be distinguished by adding "M" to the end of the identification code, and the configuration related to the right drum will be distinguished by adding "R" to the end of the identification code.

The symbol display device 500K has three symbol rows: left, center, and right. Corresponding to these symbol rows are the left variable display area DL, the center variable display area DM, and the right variable display area DR. In the symbol display device 500K, the symbols in each symbol row are displayed with periodicity, scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom). Each variable display area DL, DM, and DR displays three symbols stationary for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed stationary in a 3x3 grid.

As shown in Figures 275(j) to 275(s), the symbols consist of nine main symbols, numbered "1" through "9," and secondary symbols, which are pictures resembling seashells. The main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are "high-probability symbols." Matching these high-probability symbols triggers a special game state called a jackpot, and then transitions to the high-probability state. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are "low-probability symbols." Matching these low-probability symbols also triggers a jackpot, but does not transition to the high-probability state.

As shown in Figure 276 (a schematic diagram showing the decorative sheets of each drum in plan view), the left and middle pattern rows consist of nine main patterns arranged in descending order, flanked by secondary patterns. In contrast, the right pattern row consists of nine main patterns arranged in ascending order, flanked by secondary patterns.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 274, the symbol display device 500K has five active lines: upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, left-upward line L4, and right-upward line L5. During each game, the symbol display stops in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row. Once the display of all symbol rows has finished with a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed in any of the active lines L1 to L5, the auxiliary display device 700K displays a jackpot video as a result of the jackpot.

When the aforementioned reach display occurs, the symbol display in the left reel display area DL is completed first, followed by the symbol display in the right reel display area DR. At this point, a reach line is formed when symbols with the same number are displayed on at least one of the active lines L1 to L5. While this reach line is formed, the symbol display in the middle reel display area DM is then performed, resulting in a reach display. Furthermore, if the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display in the middle symbol column is completed so that symbols identical to those forming the reach line are displayed on the reach line.

Furthermore, the manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 500K is not limited to the above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of pattern display in each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of pattern display in each pattern row may be set to horizontal.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 271, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 95. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2, and at the start of pattern variation by the pattern display device 95.

The electric mechanism release counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric mechanism release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is conducted based on the stored value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 to the open state.

The random number values that result in a support win are stored as a support lottery table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. Two support lottery tables are set up: a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group) and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group).

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results.

On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values excluding "4" and "304". In other words, all values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" except "4" and "304" correspond to support win results. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode is differentiated from the low-frequency support mode by resulting in support wins in almost all support lotteries.

In low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is set to 1/2. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "1," and the time the electric mechanism 93 remains open (open time) is set to "0.1 seconds." By drastically shortening the open time in this way, entry into the second operating opening 92 is effectively avoided during low-frequency support mode.

In high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/1.1. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "2". The time the electric mechanism remains in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds", and the interval time it remains in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds". By extending the open time compared to low-frequency support mode, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted during high-frequency support mode. In high-frequency support mode, the frequency of entry into the second operating port 92 is higher than in low-frequency support mode, allowing players to continue playing while further reducing the decrease in their ball count (investment). In other words, compared to low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode is configured to have a higher ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

(Regarding the various processes executed by the main control unit 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 402 within the main control unit 162 for the advancement of the game will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 402 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the explanation of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, let's refer to the flowchart in Figure 277 and explain the timer interrupt processing. This process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 402.

In step S101A, the system reads the status of various prize detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e). Specifically, it reads the status of the various prize detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162, determines the status of the sensor, and saves the detection information (prize detection information).

Subsequently, in step S102A, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S103A, the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric mechanism release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric mechanism release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S104A, the entry process for the through gate 84 is executed. In the entry process for the through gate, it is determined whether the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the flag is stored, and provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric feature reserve area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved items SN) is less than 4, the value of the electric feature release counter C4, updated in step S103A, is stored in the electric feature reserve area 433. Then, if the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the entry detection flag is erased, and the entry process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the prize entry process for the through-gate in step S104A, the process proceeds to step S105A. In step S105A, the prize entry process for the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for the operating port)
Here, the prize-winning process for the operating port will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 278 and 279.

In step S201A, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered (become a prize in) the first operating opening 91. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S202A, where a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 242 to dispense three game balls.

In the following step S203A, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. In the following step S204A, the value corresponding to the first operation opening 91 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening). After that, in step S205A, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201A that the game ball has not entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S206A. In step S206A, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (entered) the second operating opening 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating opening 92, the process proceeds to step S207A, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to dispense four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202A and S207A is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401A of the normal processing described later.

In the following step S208A, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. In the following step S209A, the value corresponding to the second operation opening 92 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening). After that, in step S205A, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

Furthermore, if both steps S201A and S206A result in a negative outcome, i.e., if no ball enters either the first or second operating port 91, the prize-winning process will terminate immediately.

Now, referring to Figure 279, the information acquisition process in step S205A will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301A, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, in step S302A, the number of reserved operation memories N of the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and in step S303A, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

In the subsequent step S304A, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103A, are stored in the first available memory area of the operating slot reserve area RE, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN, which was incremented by 1 in step S302A.

In other words, if the first operation slot reserve memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103A, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot reserve area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation slot reserve memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302A.

Furthermore, if the second operation slot's reserved memory count RbN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, updated in step S103A, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302A.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305A. In step S305A, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 99. During the display update process, if the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operation port 91, the display of the hold count display section S1 for the first operation port is updated. If the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operation port 92, the display of the hold count display section S2 for the second operation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 and the reserved number related to the second operation port 92. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 92 increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S306A and S307A, the notification/performance control device 140, which is the sub-control device, is made to recognize that a prize has been won in the operation openings 91 and 92. A pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information indicating whether the prize was won in the first operation opening 91 or the second operation opening 92.

The hold command set in step S307A will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output processing of the normal processing (step S401A), which will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 280. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, has been executed, and the main processes of the game are executed during normal processing. In summary, the processes in steps S401A to S407A are executed as periodic processes with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes in steps S409A and S410A are executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the external signal output process is first executed in step S401A. In the external signal output process of step S401A, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side and the hall computer.

Specifically, the system determines whether a prize ball command is set, and if so, transmits it to the payout control device 242. Furthermore, if various commands such as the variation start command, type command, variation end command, and other performance commands, as well as the hold command and the shift command (described later), are set, they are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, each time the change in the pattern is displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating the pattern confirmation is output to the hall computer. During the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer. During the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402A, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S403A, game round control processing is performed to control the gameplay in each game round. This game round control processing includes determining the jackpot, setting the display of changing symbols by the symbol display device 500K, and controlling the display of the main display unit 99.

After executing the game turn control process in step S403A, the process proceeds to step S404A, where the game state transition process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Further details regarding the game turn control process in step S403A and the game state transition process in step S404A will be explained later.

In the following step S405A, a control process for the through-gate is executed, including a support lottery process based on the entry into the through-gate 84. In step S406A, a support process for the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operating opening 92, is executed. Details of the through-gate control process in step S405A and the electric mechanism support process in step S406A will be described later.

Subsequently, in step S407A, the game ball launch control process is executed. During this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is energized once at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the following step S408A, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

The execution time for each process in steps S401A to S407A varies depending on the game state; therefore, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Thus, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control process in step S403A will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 281 to 283.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 281, it is determined in step S501A whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502A onward, namely the game round start processes in steps S503A to S506A and the game round progress processes in steps S507A to S509A.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, steps S502A and S503A determine whether a game round is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in a variable display state. If they are in a variable display state, step S502A performs a negative determination and proceeds to step S503A. In step S503A, it is determined whether the confirmed display on the operation port display units D1 and D2 has finished. If the determination in step S503A is positive, the system proceeds to the game round start processing in steps S504A to S506A. In the game round start processing, first in step S504A, it is determined whether the total number of starting reserved balls (common reserved ball count CRN) is "0". If the common reserved ball count CRN is "0", it means that no reserved ball information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, this game round control processing ends there.

On the other hand, if the common reserve count CRN is not "0", step S505A executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operation port of the reserve ball storage area 432 for variable display. Furthermore, step S506A executes a variable start process to initiate the variable display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the symbol display device 500K, after which the game round control process ends.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S505A and the variation start process in step S506A. First, we will explain the data setting process in step S505A with reference to the flowchart in Figure 282.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601A, the number of operation hold memory N stored in the hold memory area that is the target of this setting process, as well as the common hold memory CRN, are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of hold information stored in the operation port hold area RE (see Figure 271), i.e., the number of operation hold memory N, is "0". If the number of operation hold memory N is "0", the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of operation hold memory N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the data (hold information) stored in the second to eighth areas of the operation port hold area RE are shifted sequentially to the lower areas. As a result, when data from area 1 is moved to execution area AE, for example, the data within each area is shifted as follows: area 2 → area 1, area 3 → area 2, area 4 → area 3, area 5 → area 4, area 6 → area 5, area 7 → area 6, area 8 → area 7, and so on.

In the following step S604A, a shift command is set, which is information that allows the notification and effect control device 140 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the operation port holding area RE. After this, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604A is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 140 in step S401A of the normal process (Figure 280).

(Initiation of change process)
Next, the variation start process in step S506A will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 283.

In the variation initiation process, the first step, S701A, executes the update process for the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The game count counter is reset to 0 upon transitioning to the special game state, and incremented by "1" each time the update process in step S701A is executed. The MPU 402 can identify the number of games played after the special game state ends by referring to the value of this game count counter.

In the following step S702A, a win/loss determination process is performed based on the entry into the operating ports 91 and 92. This win/loss determination process determines whether the held information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, it grasps the information for jackpot determination from the information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the winning random number counter C1. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is low probability mode, the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot. If the win/loss lottery mode is high probability mode, the win/loss table for high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the following step S703A, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination process in step S702A corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S704A.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information from the information stored in the execution area AE, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R probability variation jackpot result.

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, a positive determination is made in step S705A, and the process proceeds to step S706A, where the stop result setting process for the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. If it is a 6R regular jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S705A, and the process proceeds to step S707A, where the stop result setting process for the 6R regular jackpot is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S703A, if a negative result is obtained in step S703A, i.e., if it is not a jackpot, proceed to step S708A. In step S708A, the stop result setting process for a loss is executed.

In the stop result setting processes of steps S706A, S707A, and S708A, the information regarding the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In steps S706A and S707A, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R regular jackpot is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706A, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707A, the 6R regular jackpot flag is stored. Furthermore, in step S708A, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a loss is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S708A, the loss flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S706A, S707A, or S708A, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S709A. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

After the setting process for the variable display time is executed in step S709A, the process proceeds to step S710A, where the variable start command and type command are set. The variable start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variable display time. The type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the type command includes information on the game result, such as information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R normal jackpot result, and the loss result.

The variation start command and type command set in step S710A are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401A of the normal processing (Figure 280). Based on the received variation start command and type command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance for that game round, such as the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26, the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29, and the variation display pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K. It then controls the lamp unit 26, speaker unit 29, and variable display unit 85K to execute the determined performance.

Subsequently, in step S711A, the display of the changing symbols is started on either the first operation port display unit D1 or the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this symbol change start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the display of the changing symbols, etc., to start before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

(Setting the variable display time)
Next, an overview of the setting process for the variable display time (step S709A) will be described. As already explained, in this embodiment, reserve information is acquired based on balls entering the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, and based on the acquired reserve information, the variable display and confirmation display of the patterns and symbols for the game round are executed. Here, the variable display time for the patterns and symbols is set according to the current game state, the result of the win/loss lottery based on balls entering the operation ports 91 and 92, the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, etc. Regarding the variable display time, when comparing a win result with a loss result, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a loss result where no reach display occurs, the display time is set to become shorter as the number of stored reserve information increases.

Returning to the explanation of the game turn control process (Figure 281), if the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 are showing a variable display or a confirmed display, the process proceeds to step S507A. Step S507A determines whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) in RAM 404 has become "0". This value is deducted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 277) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display processing is executed in step S508A. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the corresponding display unit D1 or D2 for the operation port is changed. After that, the game round control processing ends. If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display processing is executed in step S509A, and then the game round control processing ends. Details of this confirmation display processing will be described later.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404A will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 284.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801A, it is determined whether or not the system is in opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If it is not in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802A, where it is determined whether or not the game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the change display ended on either the operation port display unit D1 or D2 of the main display unit D. If the game round has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the game round has ended, a positive result is determined in step S802A, and the process proceeds to step S803A. In step S803A, it is determined whether the game result of this round (the result of the above win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether either the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If neither of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S804A. This start process releases the restriction on the operation of the variable prize device 83 by the locking device, allowing the opening and closing operation of the variable prize device 83 until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S804A, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in step S801A, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress based on the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag.

In the following step S805A, the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means of determining the number of times the variable prize device 83 has been opened. After executing the process in step S805A, the process proceeds to step S806A, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. This forces the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode to switch to the low-frequency support mode. Subsequently, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807A, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S808A, after which the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S807A is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401A of the normal processing (Figure 280). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode on the symbol display device 500K. Based on the opening command received from the main control device 162, the notification/performance control device 140 executes display control of the auxiliary display device 00K to execute the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a display corresponding to a jackpot (e.g., animated display of characters).

Furthermore, the external signal set in step S808A is also transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S401A of the normal processing (Figure 280). The hall computer can then determine that the gate is in open/close execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S801A, if it is determined in step S801A that the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S809A. In step S809A, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S810A. Here, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot will be explained with reference to Figure 285.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
In the opening and closing process of the main prize slot, first, in step S901A, it is determined whether or not the variable prize device 83 (main prize slot) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable ball entry device drive unit of the variable prize device 83. If the main prize slot is not open, in step S902A, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S902A is positive, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S902A, the process proceeds to step S903A. In step S903A, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the main prize slot, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 277) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S903A, the main prize slot opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904A, and the opening process of the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is executed. Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball-winning device is set to drive in order to open the large prize-winning opening.

Subsequently, the process for setting the closing conditions (settings for when the gate is open) for the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning gate) is executed in steps S905A and S906A. Specifically, in step S905A, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S906A, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process in step S906A, in step S907A, an open command is set to indicate that the variable prize device 83 (large prize slot) has been opened, and the opening and closing process for this large prize slot is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S401A of the normal process (see Figure 280). Based on the received open command, the notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S901A, if it is determined in step S901A that the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908A, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909A, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize-winning opening based on the detection signal from the detection sensor installed in the variable prize-winning device 83.

If a prize has been awarded, the award command output process is executed in step S910A. This award command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, and the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, for example, executed on the auxiliary display device 700K, changes as a result of this award command.

After executing the command output process in step S910A, the process proceeds to step S911A. In step S911A, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1. In the following step S912A, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S912A, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S908A (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the large prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S913A, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is deactivated in order to close the variable prize entry device 83 (large prize opening).

In the following step S914A, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC1 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S915A, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC1 value is "0". If the determination in step S915A is negative, the process proceeds to step S916A, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S916A, a closing command is set in step S917A, and the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S401A of the normal process (Figure 280). The notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S915A, if it is determined in step S915A that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918A. In step S918A, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending waiting time is set for the ending of the open/close execution mode, so that the next game round is not started. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Subsequently, in step S919A, the ending command is set, and then the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401A of the normal process (Figure 280).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 284), after executing the opening and closing of the large prize slot in step S810A, the process proceeds to step S811A, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends immediately. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812A. In step S812A, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S813A, and then the game state transition process ends. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 286.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S1001A, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S1001A is positive, the process proceeds to step S1002A, where a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for high probability mode will be referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

Subsequently, a high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on this set high-frequency support mode flag, in the subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001A, if the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was a 6R regular jackpot, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 (step S1004A), and the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "40". After that, the process proceeds to step S1003A, where the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode.

After executing the process in step S1003A, the process proceeds to step S1006A, where the value of the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is cleared (reset). Then, in step S1007A, the various flags (such as the jackpot flag) for the opening/closing execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

(Processing for power supply support)
Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 287 and 288, the power supply support process in step S406A, which is performed as part of the normal process, will be described.

In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S1101A, it is determined whether or not support is currently being provided by the electric feature 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not currently being provided, a negative determination is made in step S1101A and the process proceeds to step S1102A. In step S1102A, it is determined whether or not the display of confirmed symbols has finished in the through-gate display unit DS. If the display of confirmed symbols has not finished, a negative determination is made in step S1102A and the process for supporting the electric feature ends. If the display of confirmed symbols has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102A and the process proceeds to step S1103A.

In step S1103A, it is determined whether or not support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84. If support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S1103A, and the process for this electric support function ends there. If support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84, a positive determination is made in step S1103A, and the process proceeds to step S1104A. In step S1104A, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1105A, and "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means of determining the number of times the electric function 93 has opened. If it is the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1106A, and "2" is set in the round counter RC2.

After executing steps S1105A and S1106A, the process proceeds to step S1107A, where support flags are set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S1108A, the opening start process is executed, and the main electric device support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time for the opening. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric device 93 begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S1101A, if a positive result is obtained in step S1101A, the process proceeds to step S1109A. In step S1109A, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S1108A has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S1109A, and the main power support processing ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S1109A, and the process proceeds to step S1110A. Now, referring to Figure 288, the power switching process in step S1110A will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device switching process, first, in step S1201A, it is determined whether the electric device 93 is in the open state. Whether the electric device 93 is in the open state is determined by whether the electric device drive unit is in the drive state. If the electric device 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1202A, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric device switching process ends there. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1203A. In step S1203A, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric device 93, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 277) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1203A, the main power switch operation is terminated. If a positive result is obtained in step S1203A, the process proceeds to step S1204A.

In step S1204A, the electric mechanism release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit (solenoid) is started, switching the electric mechanism 93 from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S1205A, the second prize counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S1206A, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is the high-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) (step S1207A). If it is the low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S1201A, if a positive result is obtained in step S1201A, i.e., if the electric mechanism 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1209A. In step S1209A, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1210A. In step S1210A, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no entry has occurred, the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is deducted by 1 in step S1211A, and in the following step S1212A, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S1212A, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1209A (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the conditions for ending the opening of the electric mechanism 93 have been met. In this case, in step S1213A, the output of the drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit is stopped in order to close the electric mechanism 93 (second operating opening 92).

In the following step S1214A, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC2 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC2 is "0", its value is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S1215A, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC2 value is "0". If the determination in step S1215A is negative, the process proceeds to step S1216A, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds).

If the value of the round counter RC2 is determined to be "0" in step S1215A, the process proceeds to step S1217A. In step S1217A, the ending start process is executed. This start process sets the waiting time for the ending of the electric support system. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counters located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation in Figure 287, after executing the power switch opening/closing process in step S1110A, the process proceeds to step S1111A. In step S1111A, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative result is obtained in step S1311, the power support process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S1111A, the process proceeds to step S1112A, where it is determined whether the ending waiting time set in step S1217A has elapsed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1112A, the power support process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S1112A, the process proceeds to step S1113A. In step S1113A, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the power support process ends. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification and performance control device 140)
Next, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 289, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration related to the notification and performance control device 140.

The notification and effect control board 441, located in the notification and effect control device 140, is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 contains a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, a RAM 444 that temporarily stores various data and flags during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM 443 and RAM 444 to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 442 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for controlling the hold display (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, and to the variable display unit 85K located on the game board unit 80K (specifically, the symbol display device 500K, the hold display device 600K, the auxiliary display device 700K, and the movable effect device 800K).

The MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to determine the variation display pattern and the hold notification performance pattern for each game round. The following describes the variation display control process performed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140 as part of periodic processing, referring to the flowchart in Figure 290. The variation display control process is for determining and executing the details of the performance pattern for each game round, including the variation display pattern of the symbols.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1301A, it is determined whether or not a game round is in progress, that is, whether or not the variable display of symbols for one game round is being executed on the symbol display device 500K. If it is determined that a game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1302A, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If the determination in step S1302A is negative, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1302A is positive, the variable start process is executed in step S1303A, and then the variable display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301A, if a positive result is obtained in step S1301A, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1304A. In step S1304A, it is determined whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative result is obtained in step S1304A, the variation in progress processing is executed in step S1305A, and then this variation display control process is terminated. The variation in progress processing is the process for executing various effects during the game round started by the variation start processing.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1304A, the process proceeds to step S1306A. In step S1306A, the variation termination process is executed, and then this variation display control process ends. The variation termination process terminates the variation display and the ongoing effects in accordance with the lottery result for that game round (confirming the result). Specifically, the symbol display device 500K is controlled to display the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result as a confirmed (final stop) display. This process involves driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 to perform the effects corresponding to the confirmed display. Afterward, this variation termination process ends.

(Processing to initiate change)
Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 291, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the variation initiation process in step S1303A. The variation initiation process is the process of starting the game round's effects based on the receipt of the variation initiation command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the variation initiation process, the variation display mode, such as the reach display, and the combination of symbols to be displayed as the confirmed display are determined as the effects for the game round.

In the process for initiating the variation, first, in step S1401A, the variation start command received is read, and from this command, information regarding whether a reach occurred and information regarding the variation display time are identified. Also, as already explained, when the variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 162, a type command is also transmitted. In step S1401A, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and from this command, information regarding the game result, such as information regarding a probability variation jackpot result, information regarding a normal jackpot result, or information regarding a losing result, is identified. Then, in step S1401A, from the identified information, information regarding whether a jackpot was won, information regarding the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information regarding whether a reach occurred if a jackpot was not won, and information regarding the variation display time are obtained, and this obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S1402A, based on the information obtained in step S1401A, it is determined whether the result of the game round currently being played corresponds to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, i.e., a probability-increasing jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, the jackpot-specific animation setting process is executed in the following step S1403A.

The jackpot setting process determines the final stopping result of the jackpot symbols (the final stopping result determination process is performed). In the final stopping result determination process, if it is a probability variation jackpot, the stopping result where the same specific symbol combination (main symbol with an odd number) is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round. If it is a normal jackpot, the stopping result where the same non-specific symbol combination (main symbol with an even number) is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

The type of main symbol displayed when a jackpot is achieved, and the active lines L1 to L5, are randomly determined by a lottery or similar process. The final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 contains the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined by the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area of RAM 654. At this time, a process is also executed to store the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

Furthermore, the jackpot display setting process determines the variation display pattern for the jackpot symbols (the variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, if a jackpot is achieved, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display pattern determination process for reach displays, the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the performance pattern for normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the variation display time of the variation start command received and the game result of the type command is determined. The address information of the determined variation display pattern is then stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444. Note that in the variation display pattern determination process described below, the corresponding variation display pattern table is retrieved from the variation display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443, and the performance pattern corresponding to the variation display time and game result is determined. The address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is then stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1402A that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1404A. In step S1404A, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the process proceeds to step S1405A, where the process for setting up the reach's animation is executed. In the process for setting up the reach's animation, the outline of the animation and the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end are determined. The process for determining the outline of the animation is the same as the process in step S1403A above, so the explanation is omitted. This process corresponds to a losing reach, so the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end is determined so that it does not result in a jackpot. In other words, the stopping result for this round is determined to be a combination of losing reach symbols that is formed on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. In this case, the type of losing reach symbol combination and the valid lines L1 to L5 are determined randomly by a lottery or the like. Furthermore, in making this decision, the stopping result on the active lines is determined such that no identical combination of symbols occurs on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the symbols in the same middle symbol row as those forming the reach line stop at a position shifted either forward or backward relative to the reach line. Afterward, the information of the determined stopping result is stored in the stopping result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S1404A that a reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1406A. In step S1406A, the outline of the animation for a complete miss and the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any of the processes in steps S1403A, S1405A, or S1406A, the process proceeds to step S1407A. In step S1407A, the display control (variable display control) of the symbol display device 500K is performed to execute the effects for the current game round. This causes each drum unit 523K to begin rotating. Furthermore, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S1403A, S1405A, and S1406A, the drive control of the speaker unit 29, lamp unit 26, etc., is initiated to start the effects for the game round.

In this embodiment, the patterns of symbol variation are broadly classified into three types: complete miss, normal reach, and super reach. For normal reach and super reach, the pattern of symbol variation until transitioning to the reach display is common, and at least until transitioning to the reach display, it is not explicitly stated whether the pattern will transition to a normal reach or a super reach.

When comparing normal reaches and super reaches, there is a difference in the scrolling speed of the middle symbol after the reach display transition. Specifically, in the case of a normal reach, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol is set to be lower than in the case of a super reach. Compared to a normal reach, a super reach has a higher expectation of resulting in a jackpot and transitioning to a special game state. Therefore, it is assumed that players who expect to transition to the special game state will pay attention to the changing symbol display in the hope of transitioning to a super reach. In addition, in a super reach, images such as characters may be displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K, or the movable performance device 800K may operate.

The following provides a supplementary explanation of the pattern display mode in the pattern display device 500K, referring to Figure 292. Figure 292 is a schematic diagram illustrating the pattern display mode when a reach is displayed corresponding to a losing result.

When a game round begins based on a winning entry into the activation slots 91 and 92, the symbols in each variation display area DL, DM, and DR begin to change. More specifically, a scrolling display begins, traversing each variation display area DL, DM, and DR vertically from top to bottom.

Subsequently, the symbols are displayed in the order of left symbol column → right symbol column. In the example shown in Figure 292, as shown in Figures 292(b) → 292(c), two winning lines are formed by the "7" symbol displayed on active line L4 and the "6" symbol displayed on active line L5.

Immediately after the reach line is formed, at a predetermined timing, as shown in Figure 292(d), the scrolling speed of the middle symbol column becomes the first steady speed (low speed). Thereafter, as shown in Figures 292(d) to 292(e), the scrolling display of the middle symbol column continues in the middle variable display area DM, and finally, as shown in Figure 292(f), the "4" symbol stops and is displayed in the middle of the middle variable display area DM, clearly indicating to the player that it is a losing result.

In this embodiment, during some game rounds involving normal and super reaches, the middle reel row may stop briefly before re-spinning and changing positions (hereinafter referred to as "special spin display"). When such a special spin display occurs, the probability of a jackpot increases in both normal and super reaches. Details regarding the special spin display will be described later.

(Regarding the notice of postponement)
In this embodiment, a performance related to a hold notification that suggests the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 is executed with a predetermined probability before the start of the game round related to the hold information. Because a performance corresponding to hold information that has not yet been subject to drawing is executed at a timing before the game round related to that hold information begins, players can not only check the drawing results of the hold information corresponding to the currently ongoing game round, but also check or predict the results when the hold information that will later become subject to drawing becomes subject to drawing, according to the content of the performance, thereby diversifying the game. This can increase the level of attention players receive to the game.

This hold notification is broadly divided into two types: one that is executed by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols in the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 500K, and another that is executed by changing the display pattern of the hold symbols in the hold display area SE (execution target display unit 601K and hold number display unit 602K) of the hold display device 600K. The following describes the configuration that forms the basis of the hold notification and the hold display control processing (hold display control command response processing) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, referring to the flowchart in Figure 293(a) and the schematic diagram in Figure 293(b). The hold display control command response processing is executed as part of a periodic process that is started at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Processing for commands to control the hold display)
As shown in Figure 293(a), in the command handling process for hold display control, first in step S1501A it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control unit 162. If the determination in step S1501A is positive, then in step S1502A the value of the hold count counter (hold count SN) provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 is incremented by 1.

After executing the update process in step S1502A, the process proceeds to step S1503A, where additional flags are set in the various flag storage areas 466 of RAM 444, and the command-responding process for this hold display control ends. MPU 442 executes the hold display addition process based on these additional flags. The aforementioned hold memory count SN corresponds to the hold information storage area 467 of RAM 444. When setting the display of hold symbols in the hold display addition process, hold display information is set in the unit area corresponding to the hold memory count SN in the hold information storage area 467. In the execution target display unit 601K and the hold count display unit 602K (each unit hold display unit 602aK to 602hK) of the hold display device 600K (hold display area SE), hold symbols are added and displayed according to the data written to each unit area.

For example, as shown in Figure 293(b1), when a hold command is received while the hold symbols are displayed in the execution target display unit 601K, the first unit hold display unit 602aK, and the second unit hold display unit 602bK, that is, when the hold memory count SN = "2", the hold memory count SN changes from "2" to "3", and the hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold information storage area 467. As a result, as shown in Figure 293(b2), the hold symbol is displayed in the third unit hold display unit 602cK.

Returning to the explanation of step S1501A, if a negative result is obtained in step S1501A, the process proceeds to step S1504A. In step S1504A, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a negative result is obtained in step S1504A, the command handling process for this hold display control is terminated.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1504A, the process proceeds to step S1505A. In step S1505A, the value of the hold counter (hold memory count SN) located in the hold counter area of RAM 444 is deducted by 1.

Subsequently, in step S1506A, a shift flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, and the command handling process for this hold display control ends. MPU 442 executes the shift process based on this shift flag. During the shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit area Rc1 of the hold information storage area 467 is moved to the execution area BE, and the hold display information set in the first unit area Rc1 to the eighth unit area Rc8 is sequentially shifted to the lower areas.

Specifically, the pending display information from the first unit area is moved to the execution area BE, and the pending display information within each unit area is shifted as follows: second unit area Rc2 → first unit area Rc1, third unit area Rc3 → second unit area Rc2, fourth unit area Rc4 → third unit area Rc3, fifth unit area Rc5 → fourth unit area Rc4, sixth unit area Rc6 → fifth unit area Rc5, seventh unit area Rc7 → sixth unit area Rc6, eighth unit area Rc8 → seventh unit area Rc7.

For example, as shown in Figure 293(b1), when a shift command is received while the execution target display unit 601K, the first unit hold display unit 602aK, and the second unit hold display unit 602bK are displaying hold symbols, i.e., when the hold memory count SN = "2", the hold memory count SN changes from "2" to "1". Consequently, the hold display information in the execution area BE is erased, the hold display information in the first unit area Rc1 is shifted to the execution area BE, and the hold display information in the second unit area Rc2 is shifted to the first unit area Rc1. As a result, as shown in Figure 293(b3), the hold symbols are displayed in the execution target display unit 601K and the first unit hold display unit 602aK.

As already explained, the display modes (display colors) for the hold symbols include the normal display mode (normal display color) of "white" and special display modes (special display colors) of "blue," "yellow," and "red." When setting the hold display information, the display color is determined based on factors such as whether or not a hold notification has been issued.

Next, the processing related to the hold notification executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be explained. The processing related to the hold notification includes a pre-confirmation process for the hold notification (step S306A in Figure 279) and a hold command setting process (step S307A in Figure 279). These processes are configured to be executed as part of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 277), specifically as part of the entry process for the operating ports (see Figure 278), or more specifically, as part of the information acquisition process in step S205A. In other words, the pre-confirmation process and the hold command setting process are executed based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92.

(Pre-confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of Figure 294, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S1601A, the number of operational reserves N and the common reserves CRN stored in the reserve count storage area of the reserve ball storage area 432 are read, and this information on the number of reserves is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Then, in step S1602A, it is checked whether the reserve information obtained by this win contains information corresponding to the jackpot result. Details of this determination are the same as the win/fail determination process in step S702A above, so the explanation is omitted.

If the confirmation process in step S1602A confirms that a jackpot has been hit, a positive determination is made in step S1603A, and the process proceeds to step S1604A. In step S1604A, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Furthermore, in step S1604A, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304A, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU402 in step S1604A includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the hit/fail confirmation process in step S1602A confirms a loss, a negative determination is made in step S1603A and the process proceeds to step S1605A. In step S1605A, a normal loss-type reach confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3, acquired in step S304A, is obtained, and the lottery table for losing reaches is referenced to check whether a losing reach will occur. If a losing reach does not occur (i.e., a complete loss), a negative determination is made in step S1606A, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If a losing reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S1606A, and the process proceeds to step S1607A. In step S1607A, the losing reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of MPU402 in step S1607A includes information related to the general type of losing reach (e.g., whether it is a super reach or not).

Next, we will explain the process for setting up hold commands, referring to the flowchart in Figure 295.

(Setting the pending command)
In the process of setting the hold command, first, in step S1701A, it is determined whether or not jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S1702A, and the jackpot-corresponding hold command is set. The jackpot-corresponding hold command contains information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1701A, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the MPU 402 register, the process proceeds to step S1703A, where it is determined whether or not losing reach information is stored in the MPU 402 register. If losing reach information is stored, a positive determination is made in step S1703A, and the process proceeds to step S1704A, where a losing reach corresponding hold command is set. The losing reach corresponding hold command includes information related to the general type of losing reach (whether or not it is a super reach, etc.).

When setting a hold command in steps S1702A and S1704A, the display time for the variation is determined by referring to the value of the variation type counter CS, etc., and the information related to the display time for the variation is stored in the hold command. In determining the display time for the variation, the display time table is referred to, similar to the setting process for the display time for the variation shown in step S709A. The hold command thus set is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140, which can then understand the variation display pattern of the symbols based on the hold command.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1703A, the process proceeds to step S1705A. In step S1705A, a non-missing reach hold command (complete miss hold command) is set. As explained earlier, in the case of a complete miss, the display time may change depending on the number of hold information stored when the game round related to that hold information begins. Therefore, when setting a complete miss hold command, the information related to the display time is not stored.

After executing one of the command setting processes in steps S1702A, S1704A, or S1705A, step S1706A executes a process to set the number of reserved items for the reserved command. The reserved command information is composed of multiple bytes. In step S1706A, the reserved item information stored in the MPU 402 register in step S1601A of the preceding pre-verification process (Figure 294) is first read. Then, the read reserved item information is stored in the bits for the reserved item information of the already set reserved command using an operation such as logical OR. This ensures that the reserved command set in one of the processes in steps S1702A, S1704A, or S1705A includes information to identify which reserved item corresponds to that command. After executing the process in step S1706A as described above, this reserved command setting process terminates.

In step S1706A, the hold command, which includes information on the number of hold items, is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in step S401A during the next normal processing (Figure 280). Upon receiving this hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. Furthermore, based on the received hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 executes processes such as hold display and hold notification.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, setting processing for the hold notification performance is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area 467. Here, the setting processing for the hold notification performance will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 296. The hold notification performance setting processing is performed as part of the hold display control processing (processing that controls the illumination of the light-emitting part for the hold symbols), which is a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle). It is executed before the main processing for illumination control in the hold display control processing, provided that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command has been received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the hold notification performance is when hold information is acquired upon entry into the operation openings 91 and 92, or when hold information is consumed as the game progresses.

(Settings for pending notification effect)
In the setting process for the hold notification effect, first, in step S1801A, it is determined whether a Type 2 or Type 3 hold notification effect is set, or in other words, whether a Type 2 or Type 3 hold notification effect is currently being executed or is awaiting execution. As already explained, in this embodiment, two types of notification effects with different notification modes are provided as hold notification effects. Specifically, there is an explicit hold notification that clearly indicates the game round (hereinafter referred to as the relevant game round) related to the hold information (hereinafter referred to as the relevant hold or relevant hold information) that triggered the hold notification before the relevant game round occurs, and a non-explicit hold notification that keeps the relevant hold and the relevant game round hidden until the relevant game round occurs. Details will be described later, but the non-explicit hold notification effects are broadly classified into a Type 1 explicit hold notification effect that is not linked to the movable effect device 800K, and a Type 2 explicit hold notification effect and a Type 3 explicit hold notification effect that are linked to the movable effect device 800K. For convenience, in the following explanation, the Type 1 explicit hold notification effect will also be referred to as the "Type 1 hold notification effect," the Type 2 explicit hold notification effect as the "Type 2 hold notification effect," and the Type 3 explicit hold notification effect as the "Type 3 hold notification effect."

If a positive result is obtained in step S1801A, the setting process for this hold notification effect is terminated. If a negative result is obtained in step S1801A, the process proceeds to step S1802A. In step S1802A, it is determined whether the additional flags mentioned above are stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If a positive result is obtained in step S1802A, the lottery process for receiving the hold command is executed in step S1803A to determine whether or not to perform the hold notification effect.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1802A, the process proceeds to step S1804A. In step S1804A, it is determined whether or not the shift flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If a negative result is obtained in step S1804A, i.e., if it is determined that neither the additional flag nor the shift flag is stored, the setting process for this hold notification effect ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S1804A, the lottery process for receiving the shift command is executed in step S1805A to determine whether or not to perform the hold notification effect.

After executing the lottery process in step S1803A or step S1805A, the process proceeds to step S1806A. In step S1806A, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been selected for the hold notification. If the result in step S1806A is negative, the setting process for this hold notification effect ends immediately. If the result in step S1806A is positive, the process proceeds to step S1807A. In step S1807A, the type of hold notification effect (hold notification pattern) is determined. After that, the storage process for the hold notification effect pattern is executed in step S1808A, and then the setting process for this hold notification effect ends.

In step S1807A, the process for determining the hold notification animation pattern first sorts between explicit and implicit hold notification animations. If an implicit hold notification animation is selected, the implicit animation pattern determination process is executed; if an explicit hold notification animation is selected, the explicit animation pattern determination process is executed. Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the explicit hold notification animation pattern determination process by referring to the flowchart in Figure 297.

(Process to determine the pattern for the explicit hold notification)
In the process of determining the explicit hold notification pattern, first, in step S1901A, the final display mode (display color) of the hold symbol related to the hold is determined. The display modes (display colors) of the hold symbol include the normal display mode, "white," and the special display modes, "blue,""yellow," and "red." If the result of the game round confirmed in advance is a jackpot, the display mode of the hold symbol is more likely to be determined in the order of "blue"<"yellow"<"red," and if the result of the game round confirmed in advance is a loss, the display mode of the hold symbol is more likely to be determined in the order of "red"<"yellow"<"blue."

In the following step S1902A, the remaining number of shifts until the relevant game round is determined. Then, in step S1903A, the display pattern of each game round (presence or absence of a reach display, etc.) up to the relevant game round (relevant hold) is determined.

After performing the preparatory processes in steps S1901A to S1903A, the process proceeds to step S1904A. In step S1904A, it is determined whether or not there are any symbols corresponding to a "losing reach" display within the current game round. If there are symbols corresponding to a "losing reach" display, a positive determination is made in step S1904A, and the process proceeds to step S1905A to execute the first lottery. If there are no symbols corresponding to a "losing reach" display, a negative determination is made in step S1904A, and the process proceeds to step S1906A to execute the second lottery.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 298, the types (patterns) of explicit hold notification effects will be explained. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, three types of explicit hold notification effects are provided: Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3. All three types of hold notification effects share the common feature of indicating the likelihood of a jackpot result by changing the display pattern of the hold symbol shown on the hold display device 600K. Four colors are set for the display pattern (display color) of the hold symbol: "white," "blue," "yellow," and "red." Of these colors, "white" is the normal display color, and when Type 1 to Type 3 hold notification effects are executed, the hold symbol changes to another color, i.e., a special display color ("blue," "yellow," or "red").

The first type of hold notification effect is a hold notification effect that is not linked to the movable effect device 800K, while the second and third types of hold notification effects are hold notification effects that are linked to the movable effect device 800K. In the following explanation, the second and third types of hold notification effects will also be referred to as special hold notification effects to distinguish them from the first type of hold notification effect.

In both the Type 1 and Type 2 lottery processes, if the corresponding hold is a jackpot result, the selection of the Type 1 hold notification animation is more likely to occur in the order of Type 2 < Type 3 hold notification animation. If the corresponding hold is a losing result, the selection of the Type 3 hold notification animation is more likely to occur in the order of Type 2 < Type 1 hold notification animation. In other words, the system is configured so that the expectation level increases in the order of Type 1 < Type 2 < Type 3 hold notification animation. In contrast, the Type 1 lottery process has a higher probability of producing a special hold notification animation than the Type 2 lottery process. In other words, if a game round corresponding to a losing reach display is played before the start of the relevant game round, the probability of the special hold notification animation being played increases.

If the special hold notification effect is not won in the lottery process in steps S1905A and S1906A, the process for determining the first type of hold notification effect pattern is executed in step S1908A, and then the process for determining this explicit hold notification effect pattern ends. If the special hold notification effect is won in the lottery process in steps S1905A and S1906A, the process for determining the second/third type of hold notification effect pattern is executed in step S1909A, and then the process for determining this explicit hold notification effect pattern ends.

(Types of explicit hold notification effects)
Here, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 298, the types (patterns) of explicit hold notification effects will be explained. As described above, in this embodiment, there are three types of explicit hold notification effects: Type 1 hold notification effect, Type 2 hold notification effect, and Type 3 hold notification effect. All three types of hold notification effects share the common feature of indicating the likelihood of a big win by changing the display pattern of the hold image displayed on the hold display device 600K.

The first type of hold notification effect is a hold notification effect that does not work in conjunction with the movable effect device 800K, and is designed to have a lower probability of winning compared to the second and third types of hold notification effects. Furthermore, in this first type of hold notification effect, the display of the hold symbols changes when new hold information is added or when a shift occurs.

The first type of hold notification effect is broadly classified into first type of hold notification effect A and first type of hold notification effect B, depending on the pattern of change in the display manner (display color) of the hold symbol. In first type of hold notification effect A, after the color of the hold symbol changes, that color of the hold symbol is maintained until the corresponding game round (until it moves to the execution target display unit 601K) (see Figure 299(a) group). In contrast, in first type of hold notification effect B, the color of the hold symbol changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color it changes to is red, it will first change to a lower-ranking color with a lower expectation level (blue or yellow), and then step up (promote) to a higher-ranking color with a higher expectation level when the hold symbol shifts, etc. (see Figure 299(b) group). By using both first type of hold notification effect A and first type of hold notification effect B, even if the color becomes low-expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a higher-expectation color before the corresponding game round. This suppresses the early decline in attention to the hold notification effect.

The Type 2 Reserved Ball Notification演出 (pre-announcement effect) is a reserved ball notification effect that works in conjunction with the movable effect device 800K. It is designed to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot compared to the Type 1 Reserved Ball Notification Effects, but a lower probability compared to the Type 3 Reserved Ball Notification Effects. Furthermore, this Type 2 Reserved Ball Notification Effects are broadly divided into Type 2 Reserved Ball Notification Effects A and Type 2 Reserved Ball Notification Effects B, depending on their start timing.

Regarding the Type 2 Reserve Notification演出 A, the start timing is specified to coincide with the display of the changing symbols on the symbol display device 500K. Regarding the Type 2 Reserve Notification Notification演出 B, the start timing is specified to coincide with the final stop display (confirmation display) of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K.

Furthermore, similar to the Type 1 Reserved Symbol予告演出 (Pre-announcement演出), the display of the reserved symbol may change only once or multiple times in both Type 2 Reserved Symbol予告演出 A and Type 2 Reserved Symbol予告演出 B. When the display of the reserved symbol changes multiple times, at least one change, including the initial change, is synchronized with the movable display device 800K.

The third type of reserved ball notification effect is also a reserved ball notification effect that works in conjunction with the movable effect device 800K, and is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot compared to the first and second types of reserved ball notification effects. Furthermore, this third type of reserved ball notification effect is broadly divided into third type reserved ball notification effect A and third type reserved ball notification effect B, depending on the timing of its start.

Regarding the third-type hold notification effect A, the start timing is specified to coincide with the display of the changing symbols on the symbol display device 500K. Regarding the third-type hold notification effect B, the start timing is specified to coincide with the final stop display (confirmation display) of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K.

Furthermore, regarding the Type 3 Reserve Pre-announcement Effects A and B, similar to the Type 1 Reserve Pre-announcement Effects, the display of the reserve symbol may change only once or multiple times. When the display of the reserve symbol changes multiple times, at least one change, including the initial change, is synchronized with the movable effect device 800K.

(Type 2 Reserve Notification Production A)
The flow of the Type 2 Reserve Notification演出 A will be explained below with reference to Figures 300 to 302. Figure 300 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when the Type 2 Reserve Notification Performance A is executed, and Figures 301 and 302 are schematic diagrams showing the state of the variable display unit 85K when the Type 2 Reserve Notification Performance A is executed.

In the example shown in Figure 300, at the timing of taa1, the number of reserved balls changes from "3" to "2," and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display unit D1 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K begin (see Figure 301(a)). In the lottery for the reserved ball notification effect performed during this shift, the second reserved ball was selected as the Type 2 reserved ball notification effect A.

At the timing of taa2, which occurs after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the timing of taa1, a message prompting attention to the movable display device 800K (specifically, the words "LOOK!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K of the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 301(b)).

At the timing of the subsequent taa3, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K changes to an arrow (specifically a downward-pointing arrow) indicating the movable performance device 800K. In conjunction with this, the appearance of the movable performance device 800K changes. Specifically, the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable decorative body 801K switches from off to on, becoming red (see Figure 301(c)).

In this embodiment, the movable display device 800K is configured to be used for purposes other than the hold notification effect. When the first light-emitting unit 810K of the movable display device 800K is lit, it is unclear whether the current effect is linked to the symbol display device 500K or the hold display device 600K. At a predetermined timing after the first light-emitting unit 810K is lit (between the timing of taa2 and taa3), a message indicating that the hold notification effect is starting (specifically, the words "Hold Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K. This message clearly indicates that the change in the movable display device 800K constitutes part of the hold notification effect.

At the timing of the subsequent taa4, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the first direction (clockwise). The protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the corresponding hold symbol, which is the hold symbol that triggered the hold notification effect in this instance. For this hold notification effect, the second hold is the corresponding hold, and the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the hold symbol displayed on the second unit hold display unit 602bK (see Figure 302(e)). This movement clearly indicates to the player that the target of the hold change is the second hold symbol. In conjunction with this operation of the movable display device 800K, the message ("Hold Change!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K disappears.

The relevant reserved symbol, which is subject to the reserved symbol change, is mostly hidden behind the movable decorative body 801K (protruding part 811K), making it difficult to see. At the subsequent timing of taa5, the color of the reserved symbol changes to the same color as the first light-emitting part 810K (specifically red) behind the protruding part 811K (see Figure 302(f)). At this timing, the first light-emitting part 810K also remains illuminated in red.

At the timing of taa6 after the color of the held symbol has changed, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise), returning the movable decorative body 801K to its standby position. This prevents overlap between the movable decorative body 801K and the held symbol, and clearly indicates to the player that the color of the held symbol has changed to red (see Figure 302(g)).

At timing taa7, after the movable decorative element 801K has returned to its original position and before timing taa8, when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed (confirmed), the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable decorative element 801K is off (see Figure 302(h)). At timing taa9, when the confirmation display of the symbol combination is complete, the reserved symbols shift, and the next game round begins. At this time, the relevant reserved symbols remain red as they move from the second unit reserved display unit 602bK to the first unit reserved display unit 602aK.

(Type 3 Hold Notification Production A)
Next, the flow of the third type hold notification effect A will be explained with reference to Figures 303 to 305. Figure 303 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when the third type hold notification effect A is executed, and Figures 304 and 305 are schematic diagrams showing the state of the variable display unit 85K when the third type hold notification effect A is executed.

In the example shown in Figure 303, at the timing of tab 1, the number of reserved balls changes from "3" to "2," and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display unit D1 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K begin (see Figure 304(a)). In the lottery for the reserved ball notification effect performed during this shift, the second reserved ball was selected as the third reserved ball notification effect A.

At the timing of tab2, which is after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the timing of tab1, a message indicating that the hold notification effect has started (specifically, the words "Hold Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K of the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 304(b)).

At the timing of the following tab 3, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the first direction (clockwise). The protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the corresponding hold symbol, which is the hold symbol that triggered the hold notification effect in this instance. For this hold notification effect, the second hold is the corresponding hold, and the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the hold symbol displayed on the second unit hold display unit 602bK (see Figure 304(c)). This movement clearly indicates to the player that the target of the hold change is the second hold symbol. In conjunction with this operation of the movable display device 800K, the message ("Hold Change!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K disappears.

The relevant symbols subject to the hold change are mostly hidden behind the movable decorative body 801K (the third light-emitting part 813K of the protruding part 811K), making them difficult to see. At this point, the first light-emitting part 810K, the second light-emitting part 812K, and the third light-emitting part 813K are all still off. At the timing of tab 4, the third light-emitting part 813K lights up red (see Figure 304(d)).

At the timing of the subsequent tab 5, the color of the corresponding hold symbol is changed to the same color (specifically red) as the third light-emitting part 813K behind the protruding part 811K (third light-emitting part 813K) (see Figure 305(e)). At this timing, the third light-emitting part 813K is also maintained in a red illuminated state.

At the timing of tab 6, after the color of the held symbol has changed, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise), returning the movable decorative body 801K to its standby position. This prevents overlap between the movable decorative body 801K and the held symbol, and clearly indicates to the player that the color of the held symbol has changed to red (see Figure 305(f)).

After the movable decorative element 801K returns to its original position, and before the timing of tab 8 when the symbol combination is stopped (confirmed), at the timing of tab 7, the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative element 801K is off (see Figure 305(g)). At the timing of tab 9, when the confirmation display of the symbol combination is complete, the reserved symbols shift, and the next game round begins. At this time, the relevant reserved symbols remain red as they move from the second unit reserved display unit 602bK to the first unit reserved display unit 602aK.

(Special variation display effect)
In this embodiment, a special variation display effect is provided as an effect related to the second type of hold notification effect B and the third type of hold notification effect B using the movable effect device 800K. The special variation display effect is a variation display effect in which, during one game round, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is temporarily stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display), the symbols are displayed in a variation display again, and then the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the current game is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display). This effect can occur in both the normal reach and the super reach described above. When the special variation display effect occurs, it often leads to a jackpot, so this special variation display effect is one of the effects with a high expectation of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 306, the special variable display effects are broadly classified into a first special variable display effect that is not linked to the movable display device 800K, and a second and third special variable display effect that are linked to the movable display device 800K. First, the first special variable display effect will be explained with reference to Figures 307 and 308. Figures 307 and 308 are schematic diagrams illustrating the state of the variable display unit 85K when the first special variable display effect is executed.

(First special variation display effect)
As shown in Figures 307(a) and 307(b), the player is informed that a new round of play has begun when the held symbols shift and the display of each symbol column starts to change. After that, the symbols stop in the order of left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column, and the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line. This temporary stop display is via a reach display, and the symbol combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed is the symbol combination corresponding to a losing reach display. Specifically, as shown in Figure 307(c), the combination of "7", "8", and "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line.

After the display temporarily stops and a predetermined waiting time (the same length as the confirmation display time in this embodiment) has elapsed, a message indicating the occurrence of a special variation display (specifically, the characters "!!!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K (see Figure 307(c)). Immediately after this message is displayed, the middle symbol row, which was previously stopped, begins to vary (see Figure 308(d)), and the message disappears after the variation display of the middle symbol row begins (see Figure 308(e)). The game rounds shown in Figure 308 correspond to the jackpot result, and the middle symbol row stops to display a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, clearly indicating that a jackpot has occurred (see Figure 308(f)).

Furthermore, while the first special variation display effect shown in this embodiment is configured to re-display the middle symbol row while maintaining the left and right symbol rows in a stopped state (not re-displaying them), it is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the left and right symbol rows to re-display together with the middle symbol row. Incidentally, this technical concept can also be applied to the second and third special variation display effects.

Next, the second special variable display effect will be explained with reference to Figures 309 to 311. Figure 309 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the second special variable display effect, and Figures 310 and 311 are schematic diagrams illustrating the state of the variable display unit 85K when the second special variable display effect is executed.

(Second special variation display effect)
In the example shown in Figure 309, at the timing of tac1, the number of reserved balls changes from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display unit D1 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K are started (see Figure 310(a)). This clearly indicates to the player that a new round of play has started.

Subsequently, the left and right rows of symbols are displayed in sequence, and at the timing of tac2, the display transitions to a "reach" (near miss). At the timing of tac3, after the transition to the "reach" display, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped). Specifically, as shown in Figure 310(b), the combination of "7", "8", and "7" symbols is temporarily displayed on the active line.

At the timing of tac4, after the stop display has appeared and a predetermined waiting time (the same length as the confirmed display time in this embodiment) has elapsed, a message prompting attention to the movable display device 800K (specifically, the words "LOOK!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K of the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 310(b)).

At the timing of the subsequent tac5, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K changes to an arrow (specifically a downward-pointing arrow) indicating the movable display device 800K. In conjunction with this, the appearance of the movable display device 800K changes. Specifically, the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable decorative body 801K switches from off to on, becoming red (see Figure 310(c)).

As already explained, in this embodiment, the movable display device 800K is also used for the hold notification effect. When the first light-emitting unit 810K of the movable display device 800K is lit, it is unclear whether the current effect is linked to the symbol display device 500K or to the hold display device 600K. At a predetermined timing after the first light-emitting unit 810K is lit (between the timing of tac5 and tac6), a message indicating that a hold change has occurred (specifically, the words "Hold Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K. This message clearly indicates that the change in the movable display device 800K constitutes part of the effect related to the hold change.

At the timing of the subsequent tac6, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at the second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the first direction (clockwise), crossing the hold display area SE and moving to the preparation position, which is the rightmost limit position. Following this movement, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K is changed to a message correlated with the expected value of the performance. These messages include, for example, "CHANCE!", "BIG CHANCE!", and "Super Hot!", with the expected value of a big win increasing in the order of "CHANCE!" < "BIG CHANCE!" < "Super Hot!". In the example shown in Figure 311(e), "Hold Change!" is changed to "CHANCE!".

The movable decorative body 801K stops in its preparation position. At the timing of tac7, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable performance device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in a second direction (counterclockwise). Immediately afterward, at the timing of tac8, the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the relevant reserve symbol, which is the reserve symbol that triggered the current reserve change. For this performance, the relevant reserve is the one related to the currently ongoing game round, and the protruding part 811K stops in a position overlapping with the reserve symbol displayed on the execution target display unit 601K (see Figure 311(f)). This movement clearly indicates to the player that the target of the reserve change is the reserve symbol corresponding to the current game round. In conjunction with this operation of the movable performance device 800K, the message ("CHANCE!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K disappears.

The relevant reserve symbol, which is subject to the reserve symbol change, is mostly hidden behind the movable decorative body 801K (protruding part 811K), making it difficult to see. At the subsequent timing of tac9, the color of the relevant reserve symbol changes to the same color as the first light-emitting part 810K (specifically, red) behind the protruding part 811K. At this timing, the first light-emitting part 810K also remains illuminated in red.

At the timing of tac10, after the color of the held symbol has changed, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in a second direction (counterclockwise), returning the movable decorative body 801K to its standby position. This avoids overlap between the movable decorative body 801K and the held symbol, clearly indicating to the player that the color of the held symbol has turned red (see Figure 311(g)). Immediately following at the timing of tac11, the display of the middle symbol row, which had been stopped, begins to change. For this game round, this corresponds to a jackpot result, and at the timing of tac12, the middle symbol row is stopped to display a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, clearly indicating that a jackpot has been achieved (see Figure 311(h)).

Next, the third special variable display effect will be explained with reference to Figures 312 to 314. Figure 312 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the third special variable display effect, and Figures 313 and 314 are schematic diagrams illustrating the state of the variable display unit 85K when the third special variable display effect is executed.

(Third special variation display effect)
In the example shown in Figure 312, at the timing of tad1, the number of reserved balls changes from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display unit D1 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K are started (see Figure 313(a)). This clearly indicates to the player that a new round of play has started.

Subsequently, the left and right rows of symbols are displayed in sequence, and at timing tad2, the display transitions to a "reach" (near-win) state. At timing tad3, after transitioning to the "reach" state, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped). Specifically, as shown in Figure 313(b), the combination of "7", "8", and "7" symbols is temporarily displayed on the active line.

At timing tad4, after a predetermined waiting time (the same length as the confirmation display time in this embodiment) has elapsed since the display temporarily stopped, a message indicating that a hold change has occurred (specifically, the words "Hold Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K of the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 313(b)).

At the timing of the subsequent tad5, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at the second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the first direction (clockwise), crossing the hold display area SE and moving to the rightmost position, the preparation position. Following this movement, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K is changed to a message correlated with the expected value of the performance. In the example shown in Figure 313(c), "Hold Change!" is changed to "BIG CHANCE!".

The movable decorative body 801K stops in the preparation position. At the timing of tad6, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable performance device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise). At the timing of tad7 immediately afterward, the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the relevant reserved symbol, which is the reserved symbol that triggered the reserved symbol change in this instance. For this performance, the reserved symbol is the one currently in progress, and the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the reserved symbol displayed on the execution target display unit 601K (see Figure 313(d)). This movement clearly indicates to the player that the target of the reserved symbol change is the reserved symbol corresponding to the current game. Furthermore, in conjunction with the operation of the movable display device 800K, the message ("BIG CHANCE!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K will disappear.

The relevant symbols subject to the hold change are mostly hidden behind the movable decorative body 801K (protruding part 811K), making them difficult to see. At the subsequent timing of tad8, the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative body 801K lights up red (see Figure 314(e)).

At the subsequent timing of tad9, the color of the corresponding hold symbol changes to the same color (specifically red) as the third light-emitting unit 813K behind the protruding unit 811K (see Figure 314(f)). At this timing, the first light-emitting unit 810K also remains illuminated in red.

Immediately after the color of the held symbol changes, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in a second direction (counterclockwise), returning the movable decorative body 801K to its standby position. This avoids overlap between the movable decorative body 801K and the held symbol, clearly indicating to the player that the color of the held symbol has turned red (see Figure 314(g)). Immediately afterward, at timing tad11, the display of the middle symbol row, which had been stopped, begins to change. For this game round, this corresponds to a jackpot result, and at timing tad12, the middle symbol row is stopped to display a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, clearly indicating that a jackpot has been achieved (see Figure 314(h)).

Regarding the aforementioned Type 2 Reserve Notification Effect B, the process leading up to the indication of the relevant reserve is basically the same as that of the Type 2 Special Variation Display Effect, making it difficult to distinguish whether the effect is Type 2 Reserve Notification Effect B or Type 2 Special Variation Display Effect before the relevant reserve is indicated. Similarly, regarding the aforementioned Type 3 Reserve Notification Effect B, the process leading up to the indication of the relevant reserve is basically the same as that of the Type 3 Special Variation Display Effect, making it difficult to distinguish whether the effect is Type 3 Reserve Notification Effect B or Type 3 Special Variation Display Effect before the relevant reserve is indicated.

The following explanation of the Type 2 Reserve Notification演出 B will be given with reference to Figures 315 to 317. Figure 315 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the Type 2 Reserve Notification Notification B, and Figures 316 and 317 are schematic diagrams illustrating the state of the variable display unit 85K when the Type 2 Reserve Notification Notification B is executed.

(Type 2 Reserve Notification Production B)
In the example shown in Figure 315, at the timing of tae1, the number of reserved balls changes from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display unit D1 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K are started (see Figure 316(a)). This clearly indicates to the player that a new round of play has started.

Subsequently, the left and right symbol rows are displayed in sequence, and at timing tae2, the display transitions to a "reach" (winning) state. At timing tae3, after transitioning to the "reach" state, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display). Specifically, as shown in Figure 316(b), the combination of "7", "8", and "7" symbols is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) on the active line.

At timing tae4, after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the confirmation display (in this embodiment, the same length as the normal confirmation display time (the confirmation display time for the image)), a message prompting attention to the movable display device 800K (specifically, the words "LOOK!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K of the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 316(b)).

At the timing of the subsequent tae5, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K changes to an arrow (specifically a downward-pointing arrow) indicating the movable performance device 800K. In conjunction with this, the appearance of the movable performance device 800K changes. Specifically, the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable decorative body 801K switches from off to on, becoming red (see Figure 316(c)).

As already explained, when the first light-emitting unit 810K of the movable display device 800K is lit, it is unclear whether the current display is linked to the symbol display device 500K or to the hold display device 600K. At a predetermined timing after the first light-emitting unit 810K is lit (between the timing of tae5 and tae6), a message indicating that a hold change has occurred (specifically, the words "Hold Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K. This message clearly indicates that the change in the movable display device 800K constitutes part of the display related to the hold change.

At the timing of the subsequent tae6, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at the second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the first direction (clockwise), crossing the hold display area SE and moving to the preparation position, which is the rightmost position. Following this movement, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K is changed to a message correlated with the expected value of the performance. These messages include, for example, "CHANCE!", "BIG CHANCE!", and "Super Hot!", with the expected value of a jackpot increasing in the order of "CHANCE!" < "BIG CHANCE!" < "Super Hot!". In the example shown in Figure 317(e), "Hold Change!" is changed to "CHANCE!".

The movable decorative body 801K stops in its preparation position. At the timing of tae7, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable performance device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in a second direction (counterclockwise). Immediately afterward, at the timing of tae8, the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the corresponding hold symbol, which is the hold symbol that triggered the hold change in this instance. For this hold notification effect, the second hold is the corresponding hold, and the protruding part 811K stops in a position overlapping with the hold symbol displayed on the second unit hold display unit 602bK (see Figure 317(f)). This movement clearly indicates to the player that the target of the hold change is the second hold symbol. In conjunction with this operation of the movable performance device 800K, the message ("Hold Change!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K disappears.

The relevant reserve symbol, which is subject to the reserve symbol change, is mostly hidden behind the movable decorative body 801K (protruding part 811K), making it difficult to see. At the subsequent timing of tae9, the color of the relevant reserve symbol changes to the same color as the first light-emitting part 810K (specifically, red) behind the protruding part 811K. At this timing, the first light-emitting part 810K also remains illuminated in red.

At the timing of tae10 after the color of the held symbol has changed, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise), returning the movable decorative body 801K to its standby position. This prevents overlap between the movable decorative body 801K and the held symbol, and clearly indicates to the player that the color of the held symbol has changed to red (see Figure 317(g)).

At the timing of tae11, the first light-emitting unit 810K turns off, and at the timing of tae12, the symbol corresponding to the losing result is displayed (confirmed) on the operation port display unit D1. Then, at the timing of tae13, when the confirmation display of the symbols and symbol combinations is complete, the next game round begins. At this time, the reserved symbols shift, but the reserved symbols that have been changed to red remain red as they move to the first unit reserved display unit 602aK.

Next, the Type 3 Reserve Notification演出 B will be explained with reference to Figures 318 to 320. Figure 318 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of Type 3 Reserve Notification Performance B, and Figures 319 and 320 are schematic diagrams illustrating the state of the variable display unit 85K when Type 3 Reserve Notification Performance B is executed.

(Type 3 Reserve Notification Production B)
In the example shown in Figure 318, at the timing of taf1, the number of reserved balls changes from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display unit D1 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K are initiated (see Figure 319(a)). This clearly indicates to the player that a new round of play has begun.

Subsequently, the left and right symbol rows are displayed in sequence, and at timing taf2, the display transitions to a "reach" (winning) state. At timing taf3, after transitioning to the "reach" state, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display). Specifically, as shown in Figure 319(b), the combination of "7", "8", and "7" symbols is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) on the active line.

At the timing of taf4, after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the confirmation display (in this embodiment, the same length of time as the normal confirmation display time (the confirmation display time for the image)), a message indicating that a hold change has occurred (specifically, the words "Hold Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K of the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 319(b)).

At the timing of the subsequent taf5, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at the second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the first direction (clockwise), crossing the hold display area SE and moving to the preparation position, which is the rightmost limit position. Following this movement, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K is changed to a message correlated with the expected value of the performance. In the example shown in Figure 319(c), "Hold Change!" is changed to "BIG CHANCE!".

The movable decorative body 801K stops in the preparation position. At the timing of taf6, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable performance device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise). At the timing of taf7 immediately afterward, the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the relevant reserve symbol, which is the reserve symbol that triggered the reserve change in this case. For this reserve notification performance, the second reserve is the relevant reserve, and the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the reserve symbol displayed on the second unit reserve display unit 602bK (see Figure 319(d)). This movement clearly indicates to the player that the target of the reserve change is the second reserve symbol. Furthermore, in conjunction with the operation of the movable display device 800K, the message ("BIG CHANCE!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K will disappear.

The relevant symbols subject to the hold change are mostly hidden behind the protruding part 811K (specifically the third light-emitting part 813K) of the movable decorative body 801K, making them difficult to see. At the subsequent timing of taf8, the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative body 801K is illuminated in red (see Figure 320(e)).

At the subsequent timing of taf9, the color of the corresponding hold symbol changes to the same color (specifically red) as the third light-emitting unit 813K behind the protruding unit 811K (see Figure 320(f)). At this timing, the first light-emitting unit 810K also remains illuminated in red.

Immediately after the color of the held symbol changes, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at a second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative element 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise), returning the movable decorative element 801K to its standby position. This prevents overlap between the movable decorative element 801K and the held symbol, clearly indicating to the player that the color of the held symbol has changed to red (see Figure 320(g)).

At the timing of tae10, the third light-emitting unit 813K turns off, and at the timing of taf11, the symbol corresponding to the losing result is displayed (confirmed) on the operation port display unit D1. Then, at the timing of taf12, when the confirmation display of the symbols and symbol combinations is complete, the next game round begins. At this time, the reserved symbols shift, but the reserved symbols that have been changed to red remain red as they move to the first unit reserved display unit 602aK.

According to the 31st embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

The primary function of the 600K hold display device is to clearly indicate to the player the number of stored hold information, i.e., the remaining number of holds. In recent years, a technology has been proposed that pre-identifies whether stored hold information corresponds to a jackpot (pre-identification), and then changes the appearance of the hold symbol (display pattern such as color and design) before the corresponding game round begins (for example, during a previous game round) to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. This increases attention to the hold symbol (the game round to be played later). However, hold symbols are generally displayed small to allow for coexistence with other information provided to the user. Due to these circumstances, there are limitations to increasing the impact of changes in the display pattern of hold symbols, and there is a concern that the aforementioned effect of increasing attention may not be fully realized if the change in display pattern is overlooked.

In the second type hold notification effects A and B and the third type hold notification effects A and B shown in this embodiment, the above concerns are suitably resolved by using the movable effect device 800K, which is attached to the hold display device 600K, to suggest (notify) the hold symbol that will be changed, or to suggest (notify) the appearance of the hold symbol after the change. In other words, by scaling up the hold notification effect using the movable effect device 800K, it is possible to realize a novel and unprecedented effect. This strengthens the impact of the hold notification effect and allows the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be suitably achieved.

Specifically, the light emission patterns (light emission colors) of the light-emitting parts 810K, 812K, and 813K of the movable decorative body 801K are correlated with the display patterns (display colors) of the reserved symbols. More specifically, the reserved symbols are available in four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red, and the probability of a jackpot increases in this order. Similarly, the light-emitting parts 810K, 812K, and 813K are also available in four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red, and the probability of a jackpot increases in this order.

In the second type of hold notification effect, with the movable decorative body 801K positioned in standby, the first light-emitting unit 810K illuminates (lights up) in either blue, yellow, or red, indicating (notifying) which color the hold symbol will be. Subsequently, the movable decorative body 801K moves to one of the effect positions, indicating (notifying) the relevant hold (relevant hold symbol) that triggers this hold notification effect. After the relevant hold symbol is indicated, the display color of that hold symbol changes to the same color as the first light-emitting unit 810K. This sequence prevents the change in the hold symbol's display color from being missed and prevents the hold notification effect from becoming monotonous.

In particular, in a configuration where the reserved symbol is shifted from the right side to the left side (towards the execution target display unit 601K), there is a difference in the display frequency of the reserved symbol between the side closer to the execution target display unit 601K and the side further away. In this embodiment, when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in the standby position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is located to the left of the reserved display device 600K. In the second type reserved symbol notification effect B and the third type reserved symbol notification effect B, the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in a preparation position where the protruding portion 811K is located to the right of the reserved display device 600K before the reserved symbol is specified, and then moves from this preparation position to each effect position. In this way, by increasing the movement distance of the protruding portion 811K when specifying the reserved symbol, the specification operation is made more noticeable.

In both the Type 2 and Type 3 hold notification effects, when the corresponding hold symbol is selected, the movable decorative element 801K (specifically, the protruding part 811K) moves to approach the corresponding hold symbol. This configuration allows for easy guidance of the player's gaze, which is focused on the movable decorative element 801K, to the corresponding hold symbol. This is preferable in preventing players from missing the moment the display color of the hold symbol changes.

In particular, when a specific reserved symbol is selected, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to overlap with that reserved symbol from the front of the game machine, thus avoiding confusion regarding the target.

In the Type 2 hold notification effect, the first light-emitting unit 810K is turned off before the movable decorative unit 801K returns from the effect position to the standby position. This configuration effectively prevents the misunderstanding that another Type 2 hold notification effect will occur after the unit returns to the standby position.

In the second type of hold notification effect, the configuration involves turning off the first light-emitting unit 810K after the display color of the hold symbol has changed. That is, by changing the display color of the hold symbol while the first light-emitting unit 810K is emitting blue, yellow, or red light, it is possible to effectively suppress the difficulty in discerning the correlation between the light-emitting color of the movable decorative body 801K (first light-emitting unit 810K) and the display color of the hold symbol.

Increasing the operating speed (rotation speed) of the movable decorative body 801K is desirable for enhancing the impact of the Type 2 and Type 3 hold notification effects. However, there is a concern that the constraints related to the operating speed will be too strong in preventing the light-emitting color of the first light-emitting unit 810K from being missed. In this regard, in this embodiment, by making the main body 810K, which is the rotation center, the light-emitting unit 810K, the chance of missing the light-emitting color can be suppressed even when the movable decorative body 801K rotates vigorously, and the constraints related to the operating speed can be suitably alleviated.

Incidentally, since the light-emitting section 810K is larger than the held image, the effect of suppressing missed images, as described above, can be exhibited even more effectively.

In the third type of hold notification effect, the player is first informed of the hold symbol to be changed by positioning the movable decorative element 801K in one of the effect positions. Then, before moving to the next game round (before the shift), with the movable decorative element 801K in the effect position, the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative element 801K is illuminated in either blue, yellow, or red. After the third light-emitting part 813K illuminates, the display color of the hold symbol changes to the same color as the first light-emitting part 810K. This sequence prevents the change in the display color of the hold symbol from being overlooked and suppresses monotony in the hold notification effect. Furthermore, by changing the display color of the hold symbol before the shift, the correlation between the light-emitting color of the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative element 801K and the display color of the hold symbol is made less clear, effectively preventing player confusion.

The third light-emitting section 813K is configured to cover most of the relevant reserved symbol and, when positioned in the display area, extend vertically from the reserved symbol. Therefore, by making the third light-emitting section 813K and the reserved symbol the same color, it is possible to create the illusion that the reserved symbol has been enlarged in a cross shape.

<Variation 1>
In the 31st embodiment described above, when the Type 2 and Type 3 reserved symbol notification effects are initiated, the color of one of the reserved symbols will always change, but the system is not limited to this. The Type 2 and Type 3 reserved symbol notification effects may also include false effects in which the color of the reserved symbols does not change, so that even when the Type 2 and Type 3 reserved symbol notification effects are initiated, there may be cases in which the color of neither of the reserved symbols changes.

<Modified Example 2>
In the Type 2 Reserve Prediction演出 (Pre-announcement演出) shown in the 31st embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the light-emitting color of the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable decorative body 801K matches the display color of the corresponding reserved symbol after the change. However, it is also possible to configure the system to create a case where the light-emitting color of the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable decorative body 801K does not match the display color of the corresponding reserved symbol after the change (more specifically, a case where the display color of the corresponding reserved symbol after the change is a color that indicates an even higher level of expectation than the light-emitting color of the first light-emitting part 810K).

Furthermore, in the third type of hold notification effect shown in the 31st embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the light-emitting color of the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative body 801K matches the display color of the corresponding hold symbol after the change. However, it is also possible to configure the system to create a case where the light-emitting color of the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative body 801K does not match the display color of the corresponding hold symbol after the change (more specifically, a case where the display color of the corresponding hold symbol after the change is a color that indicates an even higher level of expectation than the light-emitting color of the third light-emitting part 813K).

<Example 3>
The second and third types of hold notification effects shown in the 31st embodiment described above may be configured to occur in overlap with other hold notification effects (explicit hold notification effects and implicit hold notification effects), or they may be configured to avoid overlapping hold notification effects. However, since the second and third types of hold notification effects are hold notification effects that involve the operation of the movable effect device 800K, it is preferable to configure them so that the timing of operating the movable effect device 800K does not overlap for multiple types of hold notification effects.

<Modification 4>
The preparation position of the movable decorative body 801K in the movable display device 800K shown in the 31st embodiment above may be changed as desired. However, when temporarily putting the movable decorative body 801K into standby, it is desirable to set the preparation position to a position that avoids overlap with the reserved number display unit 602K or the execution target display unit 601K.

<Example 5>
In the 31st embodiment described above, when the movable decorative body 801K of the movable performance device 800K is stationary in the performance position, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K covers most of the held image. The protruding portion 811K may be made of a transparent synthetic resin or the like, so that the held image located behind it can be seen through the protruding portion 811K. For example, the protruding portion 811K may be made of a light guide plate, and a light source for the protruding portion 811K may be provided in the main body 810K, and light from the light source may be supplied to the protruding portion 811K (second light-emitting portion 812K or third light-emitting portion 813K). In this case, it is preferable to set the brightness of the second light-emitting unit 812K and the third light-emitting unit 813K to be higher than the brightness of the reserved image when they are lit (illuminated), so that when the third light-emitting unit 813K is off, the reserved image behind it is easily visible, and when the third light-emitting unit 813K is lit, the reserved image behind it is difficult or impossible to see.

Furthermore, if the light-emitting unit 813K is set to emit light in a special color (blue, yellow, or red), and then the display color of the reserved symbol to be changed is changed from the normal color to the special color, the light from the special-colored light-emitting unit 813K mixes with the light from the normal-colored reserved symbol, increasing the likelihood that the emitted color will be different from what was intended. Therefore, it is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem by setting the brightness of the light-emitting unit 813K when it is emitting a special color to be higher than the brightness of the reserved symbol when it is emitting a normal color (white).

<Modification 6>
In the movable performance device 800K shown in the 31st embodiment described above, the movement path of the movable decorative body 801K is configured to be the same for the outward and return journeys when performing the second type of hold notification performance and the third type of hold notification performance. However, it is also possible to configure the movement path of the movable decorative body 801K to be different for the outward and return journeys when performing the second type of hold notification performance and the third type of hold notification performance. For example, when ending the second type of hold notification performance and the third type of hold notification performance, it is also possible to configure the device to lower the movable decorative body 801K to move it away from the outward movement path, rotate the movable decorative body 801K to change its orientation, and then raise the movable decorative body 801K to return it to the standby position.

<Example 7>
In the third type of hold notification effect shown in the 31st embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is rotated to a position that overlaps with the relevant hold symbol, and then the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative body 801K is made to light up in the color of the changed hold symbol. However, this can also be changed as follows. That is, it is also possible to configure the movable decorative body 801K to rotate to a position that overlaps with the relevant hold symbol after the third light-emitting part 813K is made to light up in the color of the changed hold symbol.

<Difference 8>
In the Type 2 Reserve Prediction演出 (Pre-announcement演出) shown in the 31st embodiment described above, the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable decorative body 801K is illuminated in the color of the corresponding reserve after the change, and then the movable decorative body 801K is rotated to a position that overlaps with the corresponding reserve image. After the positioning to the overlapping position is completed, the color of the corresponding reserve image is changed. In this case, in order to visually emphasize that the color of the corresponding reserve image is changed to match the color of the first light-emitting part 810K, it is also possible to provide another light-emitting part (for example, a second light-emitting part 812K) between the first light-emitting part 810K and the reserve image, and to illuminate in the order of first light-emitting part 810K → second light-emitting part 812K, it is possible to create the appearance that the light is moving towards or extending towards the reserve image. For example, the configuration could be as follows: first light-emitting unit 810K is turned on → second light-emitting unit 812K is turned on → first light-emitting unit 810K is turned off → third light-emitting unit 813K is turned on → second light-emitting unit 812K is turned off → the color of the held image is changed → third light-emitting unit 813K is turned off.

<Difference 9>
In the Type 2 and Type 3 hold notification effects shown in the 31st embodiment described above, the light-emitting color of the light-emitting units 810K and 813K is matched with the display color of the hold symbol. However, the method of clearly indicating the correlation between the two by matching the light-emitting mode and the display mode is not limited to color. For example, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting units 810K and 813K may be provided with multiple light-emitting modes having different flashing speeds (flashing cycles), and the display modes of the hold symbol may be provided with multiple display modes having the same flashing speed as the light-emitting units 810K and 813K, thereby clearly indicating the correlation between the two by matching the flashing speeds.

<Modification 10>
In the 31st embodiment described above, the rotation angle of the movable decorative body 801K of the movable performance device 800K is set to approximately 160 degrees, and the movable decorative body 801K is configured to swing from side to side, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The movable decorative body 801K may also be made capable of rotating around the central axis CLK.

<Variation 11>
In the 31st embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K of the movable display device 800K is made rotatable, but it is also possible to make the movable decorative body 801K slidable. In this case, the sliding direction is arbitrary and may be the same direction as the arrangement direction (up and down direction) of the pattern display device 500K, the hold display device 600K, and the auxiliary display device 700K, or it may be a direction that intersects with said arrangement direction.

<Modified example 12>
In the 31st embodiment described above, a hold display device 600K and an auxiliary display device 700K are placed between the pattern display device 500K and the movable performance device 800K. However, the arrangement of each device 500K, 600K, 700K, and 800K is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to place the auxiliary display device 700K between the hold display device 600K and the pattern display device 500K. It is also possible to place the movable performance device 800K above or to the side of the pattern display device 500K.

<Modification 13>
The hold display device 600K and the auxiliary display device 700K shown in the 31st embodiment above can also be liquid crystal displays. Furthermore, the pattern display device 500K can also be a liquid crystal display.

<32nd Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the third type of hold notification effect B described above differs from that of the 31st embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to Figures 321 to 324, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the 31st embodiment. Figure 321 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the third type of hold notification effect B in the 32nd embodiment, and Figures 322 to 324 are schematic diagrams illustrating the state of the variable display unit 85K when the third type of hold notification effect B is executed.

(Type 3 Reserve Notification Production B)
In the example shown in Figure 321, at the timing of tag1, the number of reserved items changes from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display unit D1 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K are started (see Figure 322(a)). This clearly indicates to the player that a new round of play has started.

Subsequently, the left and right symbol rows are displayed in sequence, transitioning to a "reach" display. At the timing of tag3 after transitioning to the "reach" display, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display). Specifically, as shown in Figure 322(b), the combination of "7", "8", and "7" symbols is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display) on the active line.

At the timing of tag 4, after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the confirmation display (in this embodiment, the same length of time as the normal confirmation display time (the confirmation display time for the image)), a message indicating that a hold change has occurred (specifically, the words "Hold Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K of the variable display unit 85K (see Figure 322(b)).

At the timing of tag 5, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at the second rotational speed (low-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the first direction (clockwise), crossing the hold display area SE and moving to the rightmost position, the preparation position. Following this movement, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K is changed to a message correlated with the expected value of the performance. In the example shown in Figure 322(c), "Hold Change!" is changed to "BIG CHANCE!".

The movable decorative body 801K stops in the preparation position. At the timing of tag 6, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable performance device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise). At the timing of tag 7 immediately following, the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the relevant reserve symbol, which is the reserve symbol that triggered the reserve change in this case. For this reserve notification performance, the second reserve is the relevant reserve, and the protruding part 811K stops in a position where it overlaps with the reserve symbol displayed on the second unit reserve display unit 602bK (see Figure 322(d)). This movement clearly indicates to the player that the target of the reserve change is the second reserve symbol. Furthermore, in conjunction with the operation of the movable display device 800K, the message ("BIG CHANCE!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K will disappear.

The relevant symbols subject to the hold change are mostly hidden behind the protruding part 811K (specifically the third light-emitting part 813K) of the movable decorative body 801K, making them difficult to see. At the timing of tag 8, the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative body 801K lights up red (see Figure 323(e)).

At the timing of the subsequent tag 9, the color of the corresponding hold symbol is changed to the same color (specifically red) as the third light-emitting unit 813K behind the protruding unit 811K (see Figure 323(f)). At this timing, the first light-emitting unit 810K is also maintained in a red state.

At the timing of tag 10, after the color of the held symbol has changed, the symbol corresponding to the losing result is confirmed and displayed on the operation port display unit D1. At the timing of tag 11, when the confirmation display of the symbol on the operation port display unit D1 and the confirmation display of the symbol combination on the symbol display device 500K are completed, the next game round begins. At this time, the held symbol that has been changed to red shifts from the second unit held symbol display unit 602bK to the first unit held symbol display unit 602aK, and in conjunction with this, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable performance device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise direction), and the protruding part 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is displaced. In other words, the movable decorative body 801K operates in conjunction with (more specifically, in synchronization with) the shift of the held symbol. More specifically, the protruding portion 811K is displaced from a position overlapping the second unit hold display portion 602bK to a position overlapping the first unit hold display portion 602aK (see Figure 323(g)). After that, the movable decorative body 801K remains stationary in the position overlapping the first unit hold display portion 602aK until the next game round begins.

The newly started game rounds also correspond to losing results. At the timing of tag12, the symbol display device 500K displays the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result as the final stop (confirmation display) (see Figure 323(h)).

At the timing of tag 13, when the confirmation display of the pattern on the operation port display unit D1 and the confirmation display of the pattern combination on the pattern display device 500K are completed, the next game round begins. At this time, the corresponding reserved pattern, which has been changed to red, shifts from the first unit reserved display unit 602aK to the execution target display unit 601K. In conjunction with this, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable performance device 800K rotates at a first rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in a second direction (counterclockwise), and the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K is displaced. In other words, the movable decorative body 801K operates in conjunction with (more specifically, in synchronization with) the shift of the corresponding reserved pattern. More specifically, the protruding portion 811K is displaced from a position overlapping the first unit reserved display unit 602aK to a position overlapping the execution target display unit 601K (see Figure 324(i)).

At the timing of tag 14, after the start of the game round related to the relevant hold, the stepping motor 815K (see Figure 268) of the movable display device 800K rotates at the second rotational speed (high-speed rotation), causing the movable decorative body 801K to rotate in the second direction (counterclockwise), returning the movable decorative body 801K to its standby position. This avoids overlap between the movable decorative body 801K and the relevant hold symbol, and clearly indicates to the player that the color of the relevant hold symbol has turned red. At the timing of tag 15, after the return to the standby position is complete, the third light-emitting unit 813K turns off (see Figure 324(j)).

Then, at the timing of tag 16, the display transitions to a reach display (see Figure 324(k)), and at the timing of tag 17, the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result are stopped and displayed (confirmed) on the operation port display unit D1, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 500K (see Figure 324(l)).

<Variation 1>
In the 32nd embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is returned to its standby position during the game round related to the hold that triggered the hold notification effect, but the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the movable decorative body 801K to remain in a position that overlaps with the execution target display unit 601K until the game round related to the hold that triggered the hold notification effect ends (a configuration in which the return to the standby position is avoided).

Furthermore, in the 32nd embodiment described above, the movable decorative element 801K is returned to its standby position before the transition to the reach display in the game round related to the hold that triggered the hold notification effect. However, it is also possible to configure the movable decorative element 801K to return to its standby position at the time of or after the transition to the reach display in the game round related to the hold that triggered the hold notification effect.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 32nd embodiment described above, the movable performance device 800K is configured to operate (rotate) in synchronization with the shift of the corresponding reserved symbol until it reaches the execution target display unit 601K. The movement of the movable performance device 800K does not necessarily have to perfectly follow the movement of the shift of the corresponding reserved symbol. It is also possible to configure the operation (rotation) of the movable performance device 800K to slightly precede the movement of the shift of the corresponding reserved symbol, or to configure the operation (rotation) of the movable performance device 800K to slightly lag behind the movement of the shift of the corresponding reserved symbol.

<Example 3>
In the 32nd embodiment described above, the color of the relevant reserve symbol is changed during the game round in which the third type of reserve notification effect is initiated, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to change the color of the relevant reserve symbol after it has shifted to the execution target display unit 601K. In other words, it is also possible to have a system in which the reserve symbol that is the target of the reserve change is announced in advance, but the color to be changed is not explicitly shown until the game round related to that reserve.

<33rd Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable display unit 85K described above differs from that of the 31st and 32nd embodiments. Hereinafter, with reference to Figure 325, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the variable display unit 85K shown in the 31st embodiment. Figure 325 is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit 85K in this embodiment viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, the movable decorative body 801K has a circular outer shape at the tip of the protruding portion 811K, i.e., the outer shape of the third light-emitting portion 813K when viewed from the front. The size of the third light-emitting portion 813K is specified to be slightly larger than the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved number display portion 602K. When the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at each performance position corresponding to each unit reserved display portion, the entire reserved symbol is covered by the third light-emitting portion 813K. The protruding portion 811K (third light-emitting portion 813K) is configured so that the area behind the protruding portion 811K is not visible. Therefore, the reserved symbol covered by the third light-emitting portion 813K cannot be seen from the front of the game machine.

The unit hold display units of the hold display device 600K, specifically the execution target display unit 601K and the hold count display unit 602K, are arranged along the trajectory PLK through which the third light-emitting unit 813K passes when the movable decorative unit 801K rotates around the rotation center axis CLK. More specifically, they are arranged side by side on the said trajectory PLK. When the above-described third-type hold notification effect is executed, the movable decorative unit 801K rotates so that the third light-emitting unit 813K is positioned to cover the entire hold symbol in question. At this time, overlapping of other hold symbols adjacent to the hold symbol with the third light-emitting unit 813K is avoided.

In the example shown in Figure 325, the third type of hold notification effect is executed targeting the hold symbol displayed in the second unit hold display unit 602bK. The third light-emitting unit 813K of the movable effect device 800K lights up (illuminates) red after being positioned to cover the second hold symbol. In other words, the movable effect device 800K is taking over the hold display function of the second unit hold display unit 602bK.

<Variation 1>
In the 33rd embodiment described above, the outer shape of the third light-emitting part 813K is circular. However, the specific shape of the third light-emitting part 813K is arbitrary, as long as it can cover (hide) one of the reserved symbols when multiple reserved symbols are displayed. For example, the outer shape of the third light-emitting part may be elliptical, polygonal (for example, a quadrilateral, the same as the reserved symbol), or heart-shaped.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 33rd embodiment described above, the tip of the protruding portion 811K is made into a light-emitting portion (third light-emitting portion 813K), and the color of the tip can be changed to the same color as the set color of the reserved image (white, blue, yellow, red), but it is not limited to this. In order to indicate which color the reserved image that is the target of the announcement will be when the movable performance device 800K is made into a display device, it is also possible to omit the light-emitting function of the tip of the protruding portion 811K and to color (paint) the tip to a predetermined color (for example, red). However, in such a configuration, the color that is clearly indicated by the operation of the movable performance device 800K becomes unambiguous, and it becomes difficult to increase the opportunities to perform the third type reserved announcement performance, etc. Therefore, it is preferable to make the tip of the protruding portion 811K into a light-emitting portion and to make it possible to change the light-emitting color in various ways, as shown in the above embodiment.

<34th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the third type of hold notification effect B differs from that of the 31st to 33rd embodiments. Specifically, one of the features of the third type of hold notification effect B shown in this embodiment is that multiple start timing patterns are provided, and the probability of a big win can change depending on the start timing. The following describes this characteristic configuration with reference to Figure 326.

The third type of hold notification effect B is similar to the 31st embodiment in that it is basically configured to start in a game round that is executed before the relevant game round and is related to the losing reach display. However, in this embodiment, the third type of hold notification effect B has four timings for its start (specifically, the timing of the operation of the movable effect device 800K and the timing of the color change of the hold symbol): a timing during a game round that is before the game round related to the losing reach display (more specifically, a game round related to a complete loss) (at0), a timing before the transition to the reach display in the game round related to the losing reach display (at1), a timing after the transition to the reach display and during the first part of the reach display in the game round related to the losing reach display (at2), and a timing after the transition to the reach display and during the second part of the reach display in the game round related to the losing reach display (at2).

In this embodiment, the "first half" refers to the timing before the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed in the symbol display device 500K, while the "second half" refers to the timing after the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed in the symbol display device 500K.

If the timing of at0 is selected, during the game round that corresponds to a complete miss and is executed before the game round that corresponds to the miss reach display, specifically during the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 500K, the movable performance device 800K operates and the color of the corresponding reserved symbol is changed. Specifically, during the symbol variation display, the movable decorative body 801K rotates to a position that overlaps with the corresponding reserved symbol, the third light-emitting unit 813K lights up to a predetermined color, and then the color of the reserved symbol is changed to match the color of the third light-emitting unit 813K.

If the AT1 timing is selected, during the next game round corresponding to the losing reach display, specifically during the part before the reach display on the symbol display device 500K (the period when all symbol rows are displayed in a variable state), the movable display device 800K operates and the color of the corresponding reserved symbol is changed. Specifically, during the variable display of the symbols, the movable decorative body 801K rotates to a position that overlaps with the corresponding reserved symbol, the third light-emitting unit 813K lights up to a predetermined color, and then the color of the reserved symbol is changed to match the color of the third light-emitting unit 813K.

If the AT2 timing is selected, during the next game round corresponding to the losing reach display, specifically during the first half of the game after the symbol display device 500K transitions to the reach display (the period when all symbol rows are displayed in a variable state), the movable display device 800K operates and the color of the corresponding reserved symbol changes. Specifically, during the variable symbol display, the movable decorative body 801K rotates to a position that overlaps with the corresponding reserved symbol, the third light-emitting unit 813K lights up to a predetermined color, and then the color of the reserved symbol changes to match the color of the third light-emitting unit 813K.

If the AT3 timing is selected, during the next game round corresponding to the losing reach display, specifically during the latter part of the game after the symbol display device 500K transitions to a reach display (the period when all symbol rows are displayed as stopped), the movable display device 800K will operate and the color of the corresponding reserved symbol will change. Specifically, during the symbol variation display, the movable decorative body 801K rotates to a position that overlaps with the corresponding reserved symbol, the third light-emitting unit 813K lights up to a predetermined color, and then the color of the reserved symbol changes to match the color of the third light-emitting unit 813K.

The example shown in Figure 326 illustrates the outline of the presentation pattern determination table, which is referenced when a game round corresponding to a complete loss may be executed before the losing reach display. In this table, the start timing is assigned according to the final display color of the relevant reserved symbol.

When "blue" is set as the final display color for the held symbols, the probability of it occurring at timing 0 is 50%, at timing 1 is 30%, at timing 2 is 20%, and at timing 3 is 0%.

When "yellow" is set as the final display color for the held symbols, the probability of it occurring at timing 0 is 10%, at timing 1 is 30%, at timing 2 is 50%, and at timing 3 is 10%.

When "red" is set as the final display color for the held symbols, the probability of it occurring at timing 0 is 0%, at timing 1 is 20%, at timing 2 is 30%, and at timing 3 is 50%.

In this embodiment, in the third type of hold notification effect B, regardless of which of the timings at0 to at3 is selected, a message suggesting the hold notification effect (for example, the words "Hold Change") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K at the timing when the third type of hold notification effect B is selected. Considering that the color of the hold symbol is defined so that the probability of a big win increases in the order of "blue" < "yellow" < "red," the start timing is delayed (closer to the corresponding game round) for colors with a higher probability of winning. In other words, the period from when the above message is displayed until the operation of the movable effect device 800K and the change of the color of the corresponding hold symbol occur is made longer.

<Variation 1>
In the 34th embodiment described above, the expectation of a big win increases as the period from winning the third type of reserved notification effect B (from the time a message suggesting the reserved notification effect is displayed) to the operation of the movable effect device 800K and the change of color of the corresponding reserved symbol occurs. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the embodiment so that the expectation of a big win increases as the period from winning the third type of reserved notification effect B (from the time a message suggesting the reserved notification effect is displayed) to the operation of the movable effect device 800K and the change of color of the corresponding reserved symbol occurs.

<Modified Example 2>
The technical concept shown in the 34th embodiment above can also be applied to the third type of hold notification effect A. That is, if the third type of hold notification effect B is selected, the auxiliary display device 700K is configured to display a message suggesting the hold notification effect at that time.
The system is configured such that the longer the time between the operation of the movable display device 800K and the change of color of the corresponding reserved symbol, the higher the probability of a jackpot. It is also possible to configure the system so that the longer the time between this point and the operation of the movable display device 800K and the change of color of the corresponding reserved symbol, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

<Example 3>
The technical concept shown in the 34th embodiment described above can also be applied to the Type 2 Reserve Notification Performance B. That is, in the case of the Type 3 Reserve Notification Performance B, the first light-emitting part 810K of the movable performance device 800K is lit (illuminates) at that timing, and the longer the period from this timing until the operation of the movable performance device 800K and the change of color of the corresponding reserved symbol occur, the higher the expectation of a jackpot result.

<Embodiment 35>
In the Type 2 and Type 3 hold notification effects shown in the 31st to 34th embodiments described above, the movable decorative body 801K of the movable effect device 800K is positioned to overlap with the hold symbol (effect position) and the color of the hold symbol is changed. In this embodiment, although the hold notification effect is performed in cooperation with the movable effect device 800K, similar to the 31st to 34th embodiments, a hold notification effect is provided in which the specific manner of cooperation differs from that of the Type 2 and Type 3 hold notification effects. This hold notification effect is one of the explicit hold notification effects in which the hold that triggered the start of the effect is clearly indicated. The explicit hold notification effect will be described below with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 327 to 328. For the sake of explanation, in this embodiment, the explicit hold notification effect will be referred to as the special explicit hold notification effect.

(Special indication hold notification effect)
The special indicator hold notification effect is initiated in a game round prior to the game round to which the hold pertains. Specifically, as shown in Figures 327(a) and 327(b), the corresponding hold symbol flashes rapidly to indicate which game round is being targeted. In addition, the display modes for notifying the change of the hold symbol include the flashing display (slow flashing display) shown in the 31st embodiment described above, and a high-speed flashing display. Of these, the high-speed flashing display is a display mode that suggests the cooperation of the movable performance device 800K.

In the special indicator hold notification effect, the timing for the coordinated action by the movable effect device 800K is set as follows: (1) the game round preceding the relevant game round, (2) the timing before the transition to the reach display in the relevant game round, (3) the timing during the first half of the reach display in the relevant game round, and (4) the timing during the second half of the reach display in the relevant game round. The longer the period from the start of the flashing hold symbol display to the coordinated action by the movable effect device 800K, the higher the expected outcome of a jackpot. The relationship between the timing of occurrence and the expected outcome is the same as in the 34th embodiment described above (see Figure 326), so a detailed explanation is omitted. Figures 327 to 328 illustrate the case where the coordinated action with the movable effect device 800K occurs during the first half of the reach display in the relevant game round.

As shown in Figures 327(c) and 327(d), at the start of the corresponding game round, the flashing reserved symbols shift from the reserved symbol count display unit 602K (specifically the first unit reserved symbol display unit 602aK) to the execution target display unit 601K. In conjunction with this, the symbol display device 500K begins displaying the variable (scrolling) display of each symbol column that was previously stopped. Subsequently, the symbols are displayed in the order of left column → right column, and a reach line with "7" symbols is formed on the active line.

The examples shown in Figures 327 and 328 correspond to a Super Reach, and at a predetermined timing after transitioning to the Reach display, a character image corresponding to that Super Reach (specifically, a female character image) is displayed in the central area of the auxiliary display device 700K (the position below the middle symbol row during the variable display).

As shown in Figures 328(e) and 328(f), at the timing after the middle symbol row, which is being displayed in a variable state, switches from high-speed variable state to low-speed variable state, the movable decorative body 801K of the movable performance device 800K rotates to the central position (specifically, the seventh performance position described above) that divides the auxiliary display device 700K into left and right halves. When the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in the central position, its protruding portion 811K overlaps the middle variable display area DM, pointing to the middle symbol row. This suggests a change in the movement of the middle symbol row. In accordance with the movement of the movable decorative body 801K, the character image displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K moves from the central area to the right-hand area of the auxiliary display device 700K. Afterward, the movable decorative body 801K temporarily remains stationary at the central position.

As shown in Figure 328(g), while the movable ornament 801K is stationary in the central position, the character image that has moved to the right-hand region begins to move towards the central region, and in accordance with the movement of the character image, the movable ornament 801K rotates from the central position to the standby position. In other words, it is represented as if the protruding portion 811K of the movable ornament 801K is being pushed by the character image, causing the movable ornament 801K to rotate.

The rotation of the movable ornament 801K causes its protruding portion 811K to displace so as to cross in front of the corresponding reserved symbol displayed on the execution target display unit 601K. The reserved symbol flashes rapidly and then lights up as the protruding portion 811K passes in front of it, and its color changes from white to red. This suggests a high probability of a jackpot in this game round.

Then, as shown in Figure 328(h), the middle symbol row switches from a slow-speed fluctuation display to a high-speed fluctuation display as the movable decorative element 801K returns to its standby position. After that, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result for this game round is displayed.

Furthermore, even if the timing of the coordinated action by the movable display device 800K is set as (1) a game round prior to the relevant game round, (2) the timing before the transition to the reach display in the relevant game round, or (3) the timing during the latter part of the reach display in the relevant game round, the display mode of the relevant reserved symbol will change during the process (return trip) as the movable decorative body 801K rotates to the central position and returns to the standby position.

<36th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the movable display device differs from that of the movable display device shown in the 31st embodiment, etc. The movable display device and its related characteristic configurations in this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 31st embodiment. First, the movable display device 800K will be described with reference to Figure 329. Figure 329 is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit 85K in this embodiment, viewed from the front.

(Movable production device 800K)
The movable performance device 800K includes a movable decorative body 801K and a stepping motor that rotates the movable decorative body 801K around a central axis CLK. The main body 810K of the movable decorative body 801K is decorated to resemble an animal character, and the protruding part 811K that extends from the main body 810K is decorated to resemble a flag.

The flag portion of the protruding part 811K is a display 814K (specifically, a liquid crystal display) facing forward on the gaming machine. This display 814K is connected to a notification and performance control device 140, and the notification and performance control device 140 controls the display of the display 814K.

The movable display device 800K shown in this embodiment also contributes to increasing attention to the game through cooperation with other devices constituting the variable display unit 85K (symbol display device 500K, hold display device 600K, auxiliary display device 700K). For example, a first chance-up effect and a second chance-up effect are provided as coordinated effects in which the movable display device 800K and the symbol display device 500K work together. The first chance-up effect will be described below with reference to Figures 330 to 331.

(First chance-up effect)
When a game round begins, the symbol display on the symbol display device 500K begins displaying the changing symbols at the start of the symbol display on the operation port display units D1 and D2. There are two patterns for starting the symbol display: a normal start pattern in which each row of symbols starts displaying the changing symbols simultaneously, and a special start pattern in which each row of symbols starts displaying the changing symbols sequentially. The special start pattern is broadly divided into a linked special start pattern that is linked to the movable performance device 800K, and a non-linked special start pattern that is not linked to the movable performance device 800K. The linked special start pattern is set to have a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the non-linked special start pattern. This linked special start pattern is the first chance-up performance described above.

In the game round involving the first chance-up effect, the symbol variation display does not begin immediately at the start of the game round; instead, the variation display is delayed. Specifically, in Figure 330(a), the confirmation display for the previous game round is executed. During this confirmation display, a message (specifically, the words "CHANCE!") indicating that the next game round (the relevant game round) will have a special start pattern is displayed on the display 814K of the movable effect device 800K (see Figure 330(b)).

If the game round corresponds to a non-linked special start pattern, the movable ornament 801K remains in its standby position, and the display starts to change in the order of left symbol column → middle symbol column → right symbol column. If the game round corresponds to a linked special start pattern (first chance-up effect), each symbol column remains stopped even after the game round starts, and in this state, the movable ornament 801K begins to rotate clockwise at the second speed (slow speed) (see Figure 330(c)).

As shown in Figures 330(c) to 330(d), the display of the left pattern column (left variable display area DL) begins to change when the movable decorative element 801K (specifically, the display 814K) passes in front of the left pattern column. Subsequently, as shown in Figures 330(d) to 331(e), the display of the middle pattern column (middle variable display area DM) begins to change when the movable decorative element 801K (specifically, the display 814K) passes in front of the middle pattern column. Then, as shown in Figures 331(e) to 331(f), the display of the right pattern column (right variable display area DR) begins to change when the movable decorative element 801K (specifically, the display 814K) passes in front of the right pattern column.

After the display of all symbol sequences has begun, the movable decorative element 801K is rotated counterclockwise at a first speed (high speed) to return to its standby position, as shown in Figures 331(f) and 331(g). After the return to the standby position is complete, the message displayed on the display 814K is hidden.

In the first chance-up effect described in detail above, the movable ornament 801K does not stop in front of the reserved symbol (reserved display area SE) but crosses in front of the reserved display area SE. Therefore, even if the reserved symbol (reserved display area SE) is temporarily obscured by being hidden behind the movable ornament 801K, the movement of the movable ornament 801K does not substantially confuse the player. In contrast, in the second chance-up effect described above, the movable ornament 801K may stop in front of the reserved symbol (reserved display area SE), that is, in a position that overlaps with the reserved symbol (reserved display area SE). The reserved symbol has a function that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot result depending on its display pattern (color, etc.), and a longer period during which the reserved symbol is difficult or impossible to see can confuse the player. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into consideration. The second chance-up effect incorporating this innovation will be explained below with reference to Figures 332 to 333.

(Second chance-up effect)
In the game's spin-by-spin animation, when the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) after a reach display, the middle symbol row that ends the last to be displayed can either be slow-spinned and then stopped, or fast-spinned and then stopped. Of these, when the middle symbol row is slow-spinned and then stopped, there are two stopping patterns: a normal stopping pattern in which the same symbols as those forming the reach line (symbols that make up the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) stop just before reaching the reach line or after passing the reach line, and a special stopping pattern in which the same symbols as those forming the reach line (symbols that make up the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) re-accelerate and then stop just before reaching the reach line or after passing the reach line. These special stopping patterns are broadly divided into linked special stopping patterns that are linked to the movable animation device 800K and unlinked special stopping patterns that are not linked to the movable animation device 800K, and the linked special stopping patterns are set to have a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the unlinked special stopping patterns. This linked special stopping pattern is the second chance-up effect mentioned above.

In the second chance-up sequence, the game transitions to a reach display after the start of the sequence (see Figure 332(a) → Figure 332(b)). After the transition to the reach display, the middle reel row moves at a slow speed (see Figure 332(c)). Subsequently, when the same symbols as the left and right symbols forming the reach line (symbols that constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) pass through the reach line, the movable ornament 801K begins to rotate clockwise at the first speed (high speed).

The movable decorative unit 801K stops when the display 814K overlaps with a portion of the central pattern row (central variable display area DM). At this stopping point, an image resembling flames is displayed on the display 814K (see Figure 332(d)).

Regarding display 814K, it is positioned to span across the pattern display device 500K (medium-variable display area DM) and the hold display device 600K (hold display area SE). The flame-like image is also displayed to span across both the pattern display device 500K (medium-variable display area DM) and the hold display device 600K (hold display area SE).

In this case, the display 814K overlaps with a portion of the hold count display section 602K (hold display area SE) of the hold display device 600K, specifically the unit hold display section where hold symbols are displayed and the unit hold display section where hold symbols are not displayed, from the front of the gaming machine. This overlapping portion is hidden by the display 814K and is therefore not visible.

As shown in Figure 332(d), the lower part of the display 814K displays a pseudo-image representing the hold symbol, which is hidden behind the display and therefore not visible, and a pseudo-image representing the unit hold display section, which is also hidden behind the display and not visible. The display characteristics (color, etc.) of the pseudo-image representing the hold symbol are identical to those of the actual hold symbol.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the flame-like image was displayed on the display 814K, the middle symbol sequence, which was being displayed in a variable manner, is re-accelerated (see Figure 333(e)). After the middle symbol sequence is re-accelerated, the flame-like image disappears, while the pseudo-image remains displayed. Then, just before the return operation of the movable ornament 801K begins, the pseudo-image also disappears (see Figures 333(f) → 333(g) → 333(h)).

Subsequently, the display of the middle symbol row continues to fluctuate at least until the movable decorative element 801K returns to its standby position. After the movable decorative element 801K has returned to its standby position, the display of the middle symbol row fluctuates, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result of this round is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display).

<Variation 1>
In the 36th embodiment described above, the process for displaying a pseudo-image on the display 814K may be changed as follows. That is, in the second chance-up effect, while the movable ornament 801K is in a standby position, an image for starting the effect is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the entire display 814K) including the part that overlaps with the hold display area SE after the movable ornament 801K moves to the effect position, and after it is placed in the effect position, the display switches from the predetermined image for starting the effect to the flame image and the pseudo-image.

Furthermore, instead of starting the display of the animation start image when the movable decorative body 801K is in the standby position, the display of the animation start image may be started when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in the animation position.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 36th embodiment described above, the process for ending the display of the pseudo-image on the display 814K may be changed as follows. That is, in the second chance-up effect, while the movable ornament 801K is positioned at the effect location, the flame image and pseudo-image are switched to an effect termination image, and the movable ornament 801K begins to return to its standby position while maintaining the display of the effect termination image. The effect termination image may be hidden on the way back to the standby position, or it may be hidden after returning to the standby position.

<Example 3>
In the 36th embodiment described above, an image resembling flames is displayed above the simulated image, but the system is not limited to this. The simulated image and the image resembling flames may be displayed superimposed on each other. In such a configuration, it is preferable to ensure the visibility of the simulated image by setting the layer of the simulated image in front of the layer of the image resembling flames.

<Modification 4>
In the second chance-up effect shown in the 36th embodiment described above, an example was given in which the display 814K of the movable decorative body 801K stops at a position that overlaps with the number of reserved symbols display unit 602K. It is also possible to modify this so that the display 814K of the movable decorative body 801K stops at a position that overlaps with the execution target display unit 601K. In this case, it is preferable that the display 814K displays a pseudo-image of the reserved symbols displayed on the execution target display unit 601K.

<Example 5>
The size of the display 814K shown in the 36th embodiment above may be changed as desired. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 334(a), the display 814K may be expanded to a size that can cover the execution target display unit 601K and the hold count display unit 602K. In such a configuration, when displaying pseudo-images while the entire execution target display unit 601K and the hold count display unit 602K are covered by the display 814K, the display mode of the pseudo-image for the hold pattern (shape: heart) and the display mode of the pseudo-image for the unit hold display unit (shape: heart) may be changed from the display mode of the actual hold pattern (shape: rectangle) and the display mode of the unit hold display unit (shape: rectangle) (see Figure 334(a) → Figure 334(b)).

<Embodiment 37>
In this embodiment, in addition to the first to third type hold notification effects shown in the 31st embodiment, a fourth type hold notification effect is provided as an explicit hold notification effect that clearly indicates the game round (hereinafter referred to as the relevant game round) related to the hold information that triggered the hold notification (hereinafter referred to as the relevant hold or relevant hold information) before the relevant game round occurs. The configuration of this fourth type hold notification effect is distinctive. The following describes the distinctive configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the 31st embodiment.

In this embodiment, the movable display device 800K is configured such that a display 814K is mounted on the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K, similar to the 36th embodiment. However, the display 814K is enlarged to be wider than the display 814K shown in the 36th embodiment. Specifically, the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the central display position corresponding to the middle symbol row, so that the entire retained number display unit 602K (from the first unit retained display unit 602aK to the eighth unit retained display unit 602hK) is covered by the display 814K. In other words, when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the central display position (see Figure 337(d)), the retained number display unit 602K is obstructed by the movable decorative body 801K.

Incidentally, when the movable decorative element 801K is positioned in the central display area, overlap between the movable decorative element 801K (specifically the display 814K) and the execution target display unit 601K is avoided. In other words, the visibility of the reserved symbols displayed on the execution target display unit 601K is not subject to regulation.

(Type 4 Hold Notification演出)
As shown in Figure 335(a), the fourth type of hold notification effect is one of the hold notification effects that work in conjunction with the movable effect device 800K, and is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot compared to the first to second type of hold notification effects, and to be equivalent to the probability of winning a jackpot of the third type of hold notification effect. Furthermore, the start timing of the fourth type of hold notification effect is specified to be during the final stop display (confirmation display) of the symbols on the symbol display device 500K.

Furthermore, similar to the Type 1 Reserve Prediction演出 (prediction effect), the display of the reserve symbol may change only once or multiple times. When the display of the reserve symbol changes multiple times, at least one change, including the initial change, is synchronized with the movable display device 800K.

The movable display device 800K shown in this embodiment, like the 36th embodiment described above, contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game through its cooperation with the symbol display device 500K, which is another device constituting the variable display unit 85K. For example, a first chance-up effect and a second chance-up effect are provided as coordinated effects in which the movable display device 800K and the symbol display device 500K work together. The second chance-up effect is one of the effects that has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot (making a jackpot highly likely), and is expected to significantly increase the player's expectations compared to the first chance-up effect.

However, there is a concern that such highly anticipated effects may rapidly decrease a player's motivation to play if, after raising their expectations, a second chance-up effect is followed by a clear indication of a loss. This embodiment addresses this issue by incorporating features that prevent a rapid decline in a player's motivation to play, even when a second chance-up effect is followed by a clear indication of a loss.

Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 335(b), in the second chance-up effect, the movable effect device 800K operates after the transition to the reach display. Specifically, the movable decorative element 801K rotates to the central effect position, which is one of the effect positions. Afterward, with the movable decorative element 801K positioned at the central effect position, the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is displayed (confirmed display), and the movable decorative element 801K returns from the central effect position to the standby position. As will be described in detail later, if the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is displayed after the second chance-up effect, the display mode of the reserved symbols hidden behind the movable decorative element 801K of the movable effect device 800K may change from the normal display mode to a special display mode. This reserved symbol notification effect is the fourth type reserved symbol notification effect described above, and it is executed in conjunction with a part of the second chance-up effect corresponding to the losing result.

Here, referring to Figure 336, the process for rewriting the explicit hold notification effect pattern, which is executed as part of the periodic processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, will be described. The process for rewriting the explicit hold notification effect pattern is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after step S1407A) in the variation start process shown in the 31st embodiment (step S1303A in Figure 291).

(Processing for rewriting explicit hold notification pattern)
In the process for rewriting the explicit hold notification effect pattern, first, steps S2001A to S2004A determine whether the prerequisites for rewriting the explicit hold notification effect pattern are met. Specifically, step S2001A determines whether the first type hold notification effects A and B are set. If the determination in step S2001A is positive, the process proceeds to step S2002A.

Step S2002A determines whether the display color of the relevant reserve symbol, which is the target of the Type 1 Reserve Notification演出 A and B, remains white, that is, whether it has not yet been changed to a special display mode. If the determination in Step S2002A is positive, the process proceeds to Step S2003A.

Step S2003A determines whether the current game round (the round currently in progress) corresponds to a losing result. If the determination in Step S2003A is positive, proceed to Step S2004A.

Step S2004A determines whether the current game round (the one currently in progress) corresponds to the second chance-up effect. If a negative result is obtained in Step S2004A, or if a negative result is obtained in any of the above steps S2001A to S2003A, the above preconditions are not met, and the process for rewriting the main hold notification effect pattern ends. If all of the above steps S2001A to S2004A result in a positive result, the above preconditions are met, and the process proceeds to Step S2005A.

In step S2005A, it is determined whether the relevant game round (relevant reserve) that is the target of the Type 1 Reserve Notification演出 corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S2005A is positive, the rewrite lottery process for the jackpot result is executed in step S2006A. In this rewrite lottery process, the rewrite lottery table for jackpot results stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine by lottery whether or not to rewrite the Type 1 Reserve Notification演出 to a Type 4 Reserve Notification演出. The probability of winning this lottery is approximately 60%.

If a negative result is determined in step S2005A, that is, if the relevant game round (relevant reserve) that is the target of the Type 1 Reserve Notification演出 corresponds to a losing result, then a rewrite lottery process for the losing result is executed in step S2007A. In this rewrite lottery process, the rewrite lottery table for losing results stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine by lottery whether or not to rewrite the Type 1 Reserve Notification演出 to a Type 4 Reserve Notification演出. The probability of winning this lottery is lower than when the relevant reserve corresponds to a jackpot result, approximately 20%.

After executing the rewrite lottery process in steps S2006A and S2007A, the process proceeds to step S2008A. If the rewrite lottery is unsuccessful, the process for rewriting the main reserved notification pattern ends. On the other hand, if the rewrite lottery is successful, the pattern rewrite process is executed in step S2009A, and then the process for rewriting the main reserved notification pattern ends. In the rewrite process in step S2009A, the reserved notification effect targeting the relevant reserved symbol is rewritten from the first type reserved notification effect A and B to the fourth type reserved notification effect. As a result, the display mode of the reserved symbol changes from the normal display mode to the special display mode during this game round (specifically, at the end of the second chance-up effect).

Furthermore, in the fourth type of hold notification演出 (pre-announcement effect), the step-up sequence set in the first type of hold notification effect is mostly omitted, and the display changes directly to the final form upon activation.

(Second chance-up effect)
Now, with reference to Figures 337 and 338, we will explain the flow of the second chance-up sequence.

In the game's spin-by-spin animation, when the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) after a reach display, there are two types of stop patterns for the middle symbol row that ends the last to be displayed: slow-speed spin → stop, and high-speed spin → stop. Of these, when the middle symbol row is slow-speed spin → stop, there are two stop patterns: a normal stop pattern where the symbols that form the reach line (the symbols that make up the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) stop just before reaching the reach line or after passing the reach line; and a special stop pattern where the symbols that form the reach line (the symbols that make up the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) re-accelerate and stop just before reaching the reach line or after passing the reach line. These special stop patterns are broadly divided into linked special stop patterns that are linked to the movable animation device 800K, and unlinked special stop patterns that are not linked to the movable animation device 800K. Linked special stop patterns are set to have a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than unlinked special stop patterns. This linked special stop pattern is the second chance-up effect described above, and the occurrence of this second chance-up effect makes a big win highly likely.

In the second chance-up sequence, the game transitions to a reach display after the start of the sequence (see Figure 337(a) → Figure 337(b)). Specifically, a reach line is formed when two identical symbols (left and right symbols) stop and are displayed on the lower line L3. After the transition to the reach display, the middle symbol column moves at a slow speed (see Figure 337(c)). Subsequently, at the moment when the same symbols as the left and right symbols forming the reach line (symbols that constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) pass through the reach line, the movable ornament 801K begins to rotate clockwise at the first speed (high speed).

The movable decorative element 801K stops at a position where the display 814K overlaps with a portion of the middle symbol row (middle variable display area DM) (the central display position described above). As a result, the lower part of the middle symbol row (middle variable display area DM) of the symbol display device 500K, specifically the lower line L3, the hold number display section 602K of the hold display device 600K, and a portion of the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K are covered by the display 814K. On the display 814K, an image resembling flames is displayed in accordance with the stopping timing of the movable decorative element 801K (see Figure 337(d)).

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned in the central display area, the display 814K is stationary, straddling both the symbol display device 500K (mid-variation display area DM) and the hold display device 600K (hold number display section 602K). The flame-like image is also displayed so as to straddle both the symbol display device 500K (mid-variation display area DM) and the hold display device 600K (hold display area SE).

In this configuration, the display 814K overlaps with the hold count display section 602K of the hold display device 600K, specifically all of the first unit hold display sections 602aK to the eighth unit hold display sections 602hK, from the front of the gaming machine. This overlapping portion is hidden by the display 814K and is therefore not visible. However, the execution target display section 601K avoids overlap with the display 814K and is visible from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the hold symbols displayed on the execution target display section 601K (the hold symbols corresponding to the current game round) are not obstructed from view.

After a predetermined time has elapsed since the flame-like image was displayed on display 814K, the rotating middle symbol sequence is re-accelerated (see Figure 338(e)). After the middle symbol sequence is re-accelerated, the flame-like image displayed on display 814K disappears, while a substitute image representing the middle symbol sequence is displayed on display 814K, scrolling in sync with the middle symbol sequence. In other words, the symbols hidden by display 814K in the middle symbol sequence are now displayed on display 814K. At this time, for example, the substitute image may be enhanced by adding effects or other means.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 338(f), the middle symbol row is displayed as the final stop, and in synchronization with this, an image resembling the symbol displayed on the display 814K is also displayed in front of the lower line (reach line). In the examples shown in Figures 337 to 338, the current game round corresponds to a losing result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display). An image resembling the symbol corresponding to the middle symbol row from the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is also displayed on the reach line on the display 814K. This clearly indicates to the player that a losing result has occurred.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 338(g), the image mimicking the pattern displayed on the display 814K disappears, and the movable decorative element 801K returns from its central display position to its standby position. This avoids overlap between the movable decorative element 801K and the pattern display device 500K, making the pattern combination corresponding to the losing result, which is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display) on the pattern display device 500K, visible (see Figure 338(h)).

(Second chance-up effect × Fourth type reserve notification effect)
Next, referring to Figures 337 to 339, we will explain the flow when the second chance-up effect and the fourth type of reserve notification effect are linked.

In game rounds involving the second chance-up effect and the fourth type of reserve notification effect, the game transitions to a reach display after the start of the game round (see Figure 337(a) → Figure 337(b)). Specifically, a reach line is formed when two identical symbols (left and right symbols) stop and are displayed on the lower line L3. After the transition to the reach display, the middle symbol column moves at a slow speed (see Figure 337(c)). Subsequently, at the moment when the same symbols as the left and right symbols forming the reach line (symbols that constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) pass through the reach line, the movable ornament 801K begins to rotate clockwise at the first speed (high speed).

The movable decorative element 801K stops at a position where the display 814K overlaps with a portion of the middle symbol row (middle variable display area DM) (the central display position described above). As a result, the lower part of the middle symbol row (middle variable display area DM) of the symbol display device 500K, specifically the lower line L3, the hold number display section 602K of the hold display device 600K, and a portion of the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K are covered by the display 814K. On the display 814K, an image resembling flames is displayed in accordance with the stopping timing of the movable decorative element 801K (see Figure 337(d)).

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned in the central display area, the display 814K is stationary, straddling both the symbol display device 500K (mid-variation display area DM) and the hold display device 600K (hold number display section 602K). The flame-like image is also displayed so as to straddle both the symbol display device 500K (mid-variation display area DM) and the hold display device 600K (hold display area SE).

In this configuration, the display 814K overlaps with the hold count display section 602K of the hold display device 600K, specifically all of the first unit hold display sections 602aK to the eighth unit hold display sections 602hK, from the front of the gaming machine. This overlapping portion is hidden by the display 814K and is therefore not visible. However, the execution target display section 601K avoids overlap with the display 814K and is visible from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the hold symbols displayed on the execution target display section 601K (the hold symbols corresponding to the current game round) are not obstructed from view.

After a predetermined time has elapsed since the flame-like image was displayed on display 814K, the rotating middle symbol sequence is re-accelerated (see Figure 338(e)). After the middle symbol sequence is re-accelerated, the flame-like image displayed on display 814K disappears, while a substitute image representing the middle symbol sequence is displayed on display 814K, scrolling in sync with the middle symbol sequence. In other words, the symbols hidden by display 814K in the middle symbol sequence are now displayed on display 814K. At this time, for example, the substitute image may be enhanced by adding effects or other means.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 339(a), the middle symbol sequence is displayed as the final stop, and simultaneously, an image resembling the symbols displayed on the display 814K is also displayed in sync with it. In the example shown in Figure 339, the current game round corresponds to a losing result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display). An image resembling the symbol corresponding to the middle symbol sequence from the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is also displayed on the reach line on the display 814K. This clearly indicates to the player that a losing result has occurred.

Immediately after the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display), the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is changed from the normal display mode to a special display mode. In the example shown in Figure 339, the reserved symbol displayed on the second unit reserved display unit 602bK is the reserved symbol in question, and the display mode of this reserved symbol has been changed to red (see Figure 339(b)). However, since the second unit reserved display unit 602bK is covered from the front of the game machine by the display 814K, it is difficult to visually confirm the above change in display mode at this point. In other words, the display mode of the reserved symbol is secretly changed behind the display 814K.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 339(g), the image mimicking the pattern displayed on the display 814K disappears, and the movable decorative element 801K returns from its central display position to its standby position. This avoids overlap between the movable decorative element 801K and the pattern display device 500K, making the entire pattern combination displayed on the pattern display device 500K (confirmed display) visible (see Figures 339(b) → 339(c) → 339(d)).

Furthermore, this movement sequentially eliminates the overlap between the display 814K and the hold count display unit 602K (first unit hold display unit 602aK to eighth unit hold display unit 602hK). Specifically, when the movable decorative body 801K is returned from the central display position to the standby position, the overlap between the movable decorative body 801K (display 814K) and the unit hold display unit (hold pattern) is eliminated in the following order (same direction as the shift direction: newest first): eighth unit hold display unit 602hK → seventh unit hold display unit 602gK → sixth unit hold display unit 602fK → fifth unit hold display unit 602eK → fourth unit hold display unit 602dK → third unit hold display unit 602cK → second unit hold display unit 602bK → first unit hold display unit 602aK. As a result, it becomes clear during the return process of the movable decorative body 801K that the display mode of the hold symbol shown in the second unit hold display unit 602bK has changed to a special display mode.

Furthermore, the rotation speed of the movable ornament 801K when it moves from the central performance position to the standby position is slower than the rotation speed when it moves from the standby position to the central performance position.

According to the 37th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, a symbol display device is equipped that displays changing symbols (variable display) when a winning ball enters an activation slot located in the game area. By using this symbol display device to perform various effects, the machine aims to increase the player's attention. In recent years, movable effect devices have been placed around the symbol display device, and synchronized effects are implemented by linking the symbol display device and the movable effect device, further increasing the player's attention.

Here, the aforementioned linked animation is often positioned as an exciting animation that significantly increases the expectation of a jackpot when it occurs. This is a desirable configuration for improving player satisfaction when a jackpot is achieved and for increasing attention to the game. However, after greatly building up the player's expectations using a movable animation device, if the linked animation leads to a clear indication of a losing result (the final stopping display of the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result), it can significantly decrease the player's motivation to play.

In this regard, in this embodiment, if the second chance-up effect, which is one of the linked effects, is executed in a game round corresponding to a losing result, a fourth type of reserve notification effect may occur. Specifically, when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in the central effect position and the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is displayed as the final stop, the display mode of the reserve symbols behind the movable decorative body 801K may change from the normal display mode to a special display mode. In this case, the reserve symbols whose display mode has been changed become visible from the front of the game machine as the overlap with the movable decorative body 801K is released during the process of the movable decorative body 801K returning from the effect position to the standby position. In other words, when the movable decorative body 801K returns, the overlap with the reserve symbols is released, and the reserve symbols whose display mode has been changed come into the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the movable decorative body 801K. In this way, by encouraging attention to the subsequent game round, the above-mentioned concerns can be effectively eliminated.

Furthermore, the movable decorative element 801K is opaque and colored, and is designed so that the area behind it is not visible. With this configuration, even if the display mode of the held symbol changes behind the movable decorative element 801K, the fact that the display mode has changed can be concealed until the movable decorative element is displaced to a position where it does not overlap with the held symbol. This configuration allows for a simple design that enhances the impact of the held symbol with its changed display mode coming into view.

The movable decorative element 801K, positioned in the central display area, is configured to overlap with multiple (all) unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK. This configuration increases the number of potential hold symbols that overlap with the movable decorative element 801K, making it easier to change the display pattern of the hold symbols when the second chance-up effect leads to a loss. This is preferable for achieving the various effects described above while suppressing imbalances in the presentation caused by unrealistic presentation settings.

The unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK are arranged horizontally, and when returning from the central display position to the standby position, the movable decorative unit 801K rotates from right to left. This configuration ensures that when the movable decorative unit 801K returns from the central display position to the standby position, the overlap with each unit hold display unit 602aK to 602hK is released one by one. With this configuration, each hold symbol comes into view in accordance with the movement of the movable decorative unit 801K. In other words, the change in the display pattern of each hold symbol can be confirmed one by one. This effectively suppresses the rapid decline in the player's expectation when the second chance-up display results in a miss.

The movable decorative element 801K rotates from right to left when returning from the central display position to the standby position, and the direction of the shift of the reserved symbols is also from right to left. With this configuration, when the movable decorative element 801K returns to the standby position, the reserved symbols become visible in chronological order. This is desirable for quickly indicating the number of reserved symbols to the player at the time of return. This configuration, which quickly indicates the number of reserved symbols, makes it easier for the player to understand how many reserved symbols may be subject to a change in display during this return.

The rotation speed of the movable ornament 801K when it moves from the central display position to the standby position is slower than the rotation speed when it moves from the standby position to the central display position. When starting the second chance-up effect (outbound), the impact of the effect can be enhanced by quickly moving the movable ornament 801K from the standby position to the central display position. On the other hand, when returning the movable ornament 801K from the central display position to the standby position at the end of the second chance-up effect (return path), the rotation speed of the movable ornament 801K is slower than in the outbound path. This configuration allows the above function (the function of prompting the player to sequentially check each of the reserved symbols to be changed) to be effectively performed.

When the second chance-up effect is executed in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and it has already been decided that the display pattern of the reserved symbols will be changed in a game round that takes place after that round (first reserved symbol notification effects A and B), the pre-set timing of the change in the display pattern is changed to the game round in which the second chance-up effect is executed (specifically, the timing before the movable decorative element 801K, located in the central effect position, returns to its standby position). In this way, when it is decided that the display pattern will be changed before the second chance-up effect, and the timing of that change falls within a game round that takes place after the game round in which the second chance-up effect is executed, the timing of that change is brought forward to the game round related to the second chance-up effect, thereby enabling suitable coexistence with other display pattern change patterns.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the system to avoid the overlap between the shift of the held symbols and the return of the movable decorative element 801K, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in understanding the effects caused by overlapping movements and to effectively demonstrate the effects of changing the display mode of the held symbols.

<Variation 1>
In the 37th embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is configured to quickly return from the central performance position to the standby position without stopping midway when the second chance-up performance ends. However, the movement of the movable decorative body 801K when it returns can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the movable decorative body 801K may be temporarily stopped each time one overlap with each unit hold display unit 602aK to 602hK is resolved, thereby increasing the interval between when one hold symbol becomes visible and when the next hold symbol becomes visible.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 37th embodiment described above, the display color of the relevant reserved symbol is changed when the display 814K is positioned in the central display area, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the display 814K is positioned in the central display area and the relevant reserved symbol is displayed in a high-speed flashing display (to clearly indicate that the display color will change), and the display color is changed when the display 814K has finished returning to its original position or at a predetermined timing after it has finished returning to its original position.

<Example 3>
In the 37th embodiment described above, the configuration was such that the rewriting from the first type of reserved symbol notification effect to the fourth type of reserved symbol notification effect was performed, with one of the conditions being that the display mode of the reserved symbol in question was the normal display mode. In addition to this, the configuration may also be such that even if the display mode of the reserved symbol in question is already in a special display mode, the rewriting to the fourth type of reserved symbol notification effect is possible if there are still remaining step-ups scheduled to be performed.

Furthermore, regarding the Type 4 Reserved Ball Notification演出 (pre-announcement effect), instead of or in addition to the configuration that assumes rewriting from the Type 1 Reserved Ball Notification Effects, it is also possible to configure it so that when the above-mentioned Type 2 Chance-Up Effects occur under circumstances where no Reserved Ball Notification Effects are set, it is decided whether or not to newly set up the Type 4 Reserved Ball Notification Effects.

<Modification 4>
In the 37th embodiment described above, when the rewrite is performed to the fourth type of hold notification effect, the display color of the corresponding hold symbol changes instantly to the final display color. In addition to or instead of this, the fourth type of hold notification effect can be configured to follow the step-up set in the first type of hold notification effect, and the change resulting from the first step can be made to occur in the fourth type of hold notification effect.

<Example 5>
In the 37th embodiment described above, the occurrence of a second chance-up animation corresponding to a losing result was set as a prerequisite for executing the fourth type of reserve notification animation, but it is not limited to this. The occurrence of the second chance-up animation corresponding to a losing result multiple times in a row may also be set as a prerequisite for executing the fourth type of reserve notification animation. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the system so that the above-mentioned fourth type of reserve notification animation can occur when one of the other animations with a high expectation of a big win result (for example, a super reach) is a linked animation with the movable animation device 800K → and the result is a clear indication of a losing result.

<Modification 6>
In the 37th embodiment described above, when the movable decorative body 801K is returned from the central display position to the standby position upon the end of the second chance-up performance, the overlap with the movable decorative body 801K (display 814K) is resolved in the following order: eighth unit hold display unit 602hK → seventh unit hold display unit 602gK → sixth unit hold display unit 602fK → fifth unit hold display unit 602eK → fourth unit hold display unit 602dK → third unit hold display unit 602cK → second unit hold display unit 602bK → first unit hold display unit 602aK (same direction as the shift direction: newest first). This may be changed as follows. In other words, as shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 340, when the movable decorative body 801K returns from the central display position to the standby position, it is also possible to configure the system so that the overlap between all the unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK and the movable decorative body 801K (display 814K) is simultaneously resolved by lowering the movable decorative body 801K straight down (a configuration that synchronizes the timing of visibility). In other words, at least when the movable decorative body 801K returns to the standby position, it is also possible to configure the system so that the movable decorative body 801K is displaced in a direction perpendicular (intersecting) to the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK (vertical direction).

As shown in this modified example, if the configuration allows multiple unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK to be visible simultaneously upon return to the standby position, the time required to confirm whether the display mode has changed can be shortened, thereby preventing prolonged waiting times for the movable decorative unit 801K to return. This is a desirable configuration for facilitating smooth gameplay.

<Example 7>
As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 341, the direction in which the movable decorative body 801K returns from the central display position to the standby position upon the end of the second chance-up performance may be opposite to the direction in which the reserved symbols in the reserved display device 600K shift. That is, the standby position and the preparation position may be reversed, and when the movable decorative body 801K returns from the central display position to the standby position upon the end of the second chance-up performance, it is also possible to configure the system so that the overlap with the movable decorative body 801K (display 814K) is resolved in the order of first unit reserved display unit 602aK → second unit reserved display unit 602bK → third unit reserved display unit 602cK → fourth unit reserved display unit 602dK → fifth unit reserved display unit 602eK → sixth unit reserved display unit 602fK → seventh unit reserved display unit 602gK → eighth unit reserved display unit 602hK (opposite direction to the shift direction: oldest first).

<Difference 8>
In a game round where it has already been decided that the display pattern of the reserved symbols will be changed (first reserved symbol notification effects A and B), if the second chance-up effect is executed, it is also possible to configure the system to delay the change in the display pattern of the reserved symbols until at least the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in the central effect position.

<Difference 9>
In the second chance-up effect shown in the 37th embodiment described above, the movable ornament 801K is configured to return from the central effect position to the standby position after the final stop display of the symbol combination. However, the timing of the return of the movable ornament 801K is not limited to this. The movable ornament 801K may be configured to return to the standby position when at least one (for example, the middle symbol row) is being displayed in a changing state. Furthermore, the period from the start of the second chance-up effect to the start of the return of the movable ornament 801K may differ between the second chance-up effect corresponding to a jackpot result and the second chance-up effect corresponding to a loss result (for example, the latter having a shorter period than the former).

<Modification 10>
In the 37th embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is of the rotatable type, but it is also possible to change this and make the movable decorative body 801K a sliding type. In this case, it is preferable to configure the sliding direction (displacement direction) of the movable decorative body 801K to be aligned with the arrangement direction of the unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK. More specifically, it is preferable to configure the device so that the displacement direction when the movable decorative body 801K returns from the central display position to the standby position matches the shift direction of the hold symbols.

<Embodiment 38>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable display unit 85K described above differs from that of the 31st embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to Figure 342, the characteristic configuration of the variable display unit 85K in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the variable display unit 85K shown in the 31st embodiment. Figure 342 is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit 85K in this embodiment viewed from the front.

(Pattern display device 500K)
Of the variable display unit 85K, which consists of a pattern display device 500K, a hold display device 600K, an auxiliary display device 700K, and a movable performance device 800K, the basic configuration of the pattern display device 500K is the same as that of the pattern display device 500K shown in the 31st embodiment, but "heart" symbols have been added to the left pattern column, the middle pattern column, and the right pattern column. Specifically, "heart" symbols have been added between the "3" and "4" symbols, between the "6" and "7" symbols, and between the "9" and "1" symbols (not shown). Details of the role of these "heart" symbols in this embodiment will be described later.

(Pending display device 600K)
In the hold display device 600K shown in this embodiment, the unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK of the execution target display unit 601K and the hold count display unit 602K are arranged in a line on a virtual circle centered on the rotation center axis CLK of the movable decorative body 801K. In other words, the unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK of the execution target display unit 601K and the hold count display unit 602K are arranged in an arc shape centered on the rotation center axis CLK, and the distance from each hold pattern displayed on the execution target display unit 601K, etc. to the rotation center axis CLK is set to be constant. When multiple hold patterns are displayed on the hold display device 600K, these hold patterns will be lined up on the virtual circle centered on the rotation center axis CLK.

(Auxiliary display device 700K)
The auxiliary display device 700K shown in this embodiment is similar to the auxiliary display device 700K shown in the 31st embodiment in that it is a horizontally elongated strip, but both its upper and lower edges are arc-shaped around the rotational axis CLK of the movable decorative body 801K. The distance from the upper edge to the execution target display unit 601K and the unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK of the hold number display unit 602K is constant, and it can be said that these execution target display units 601K, etc. are arranged along the upper edge.

(Movable production device 800K)
In the movable performance device 800K shown in this embodiment, the length of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K can be changed in multiple stages (LV0, LV1, LV2) according to the progress of the performance. The state in which the protruding portion 811K is shortest (the state in which the amount of protrusion from the main body 810K is smallest) is the basic state LV0 of the protruding portion 811K. When the movable decorative body 801K rotates around the rotation center axis CLK while in this basic state, the tip portion 813K of the protruding portion 811K is displaced in front of the auxiliary display device 700K along the upper edge of the auxiliary display device 700K. In other words, when the movable decorative body 801K is rotated while the protruding portion 811K is maintained in the basic state LV0, the trajectory through which the tip portion 813K of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding portion 811) passes overlaps with the auxiliary display device 700K, while avoiding overlap with the pattern display device 500K and the hold display device 600K.

When the movable decorative body 801K rotates around the pivot axis CLK while the protruding portion 811K is in the first extended state LV1, which is longer than the basic state LV0, the tip portion 813K of the protruding portion 811K is displaced in front of the hold display device 600K along the hold display area SE (see Figure 343(a)). In other words, when the movable decorative body 801K is rotated while the protruding portion 811K is maintained in the first extended state LV1, the trajectory of the tip portion 813K of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding portion 811) overlaps with the hold display device 600K, while avoiding overlap with the pattern display device 500K and the auxiliary display device 700K.

When the movable decorative body 801K rotates around the pivot axis CLK while the protruding portion 811K is in the second extended state LV2, which is longer in overall length than the first extended state LV1, the tip portion 813K of the protruding portion 811K is displaced in front of the pattern display device 500K (see Figure 343(b)). In other words, when the movable decorative body 801K is rotated while the protruding portion 811K is maintained in the second extended state LV2, the trajectory of the tip portion 813K of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding portion 811) overlaps with the auxiliary display device 700K, while avoiding overlap with the hold display area SE of the hold display device 600K and the auxiliary display device 700K.

In this embodiment, the target object is clearly indicated to the player by the object that the tip 813K of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding portion 811K) overlaps with. Here, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 344, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the relationship between the rotational position of the movable decorative body 801K (the performance position) and the target object. Note that, similar to the movable decorative body 801K shown in the 31st embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K in this embodiment also has a first performance position to a twelfth performance position set as its performance positions.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the third performance location, the left row of symbols on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the first unit held display unit 602aK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the first unit held display unit 602aK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the left row of symbols becomes the linking targets.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the fourth performance location, the left symbol column on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the second unit held display unit 602bK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the second unit held display unit 602bK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the left symbol column becomes the linking target.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the fifth performance location, the middle symbol row on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the third unit held display unit 602cK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the third unit held display unit 602cK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the middle symbol row becomes the linking target.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the sixth performance position, the middle symbol row on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the fourth unit held display unit 602dK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the fourth unit held display unit 602dK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the middle symbol row becomes the linking target.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the eighth performance position, the middle symbol row on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the fifth unit held display unit 602eK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the fifth unit held display unit 602eK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the left symbol row becomes the linking target.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the ninth performance position, the middle symbol row on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the sixth unit held display unit 602fK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the sixth unit held display unit 602fK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the middle symbol row becomes the linking target.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the 10th performance position, the right symbol column on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the 7th unit held display unit 602gK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the 7th unit held display unit 602gK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the right symbol column becomes the linking target.

When the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the 11th performance position, the right symbol column on the symbol display device 500K and the held symbols displayed on the 8-unit held symbol display unit 602hK become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the protruding part 811K is in the first extended state LV1, the held symbols displayed on the 8th-unit held symbol display unit 602hK become the linking targets, and if the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the right symbol column becomes the linking target.

Furthermore, when the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the second, seventh, or twelfth performance position, the pattern rows on the pattern display device 500K become candidates for linking. Specifically, if the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the second performance position and the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the left pattern row becomes the linking target; if the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the seventh performance position and the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the middle pattern row becomes the linking target; and if the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the twelfth performance position and the protruding part 811K is in the second extended state LV2, the right pattern row becomes the linking target.

Incidentally, regardless of which movable decorative element 801K is positioned at which performance location, the auxiliary display device 700K may be included as a linked component.

In this embodiment, a continuous variation display effect (so-called pseudo-consecutive) is provided as one of the effects when the movable decorative body 801K and the pattern row are coordinated. The continuous variation display effect is an effect in which, during one game round, the pattern combination corresponding to the continuous variation display effect is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), and then all patterns in the pattern row are displayed again. This variation display effect executes the pattern variation display in multiple stages until the pattern combination corresponding to the current game result is finally stopped (confirmed). This continuous variation display effect can occur in both the normal reach and super reach described above.

As shown in Figure 345(a), the symbol combinations corresponding to the continuous variation display are those in which one of the stopped left, middle, or right symbols is the "heart" symbol. As already explained, the left, middle, and right symbol rows include the "heart" symbol in addition to the main symbols from "1" to "9". If a symbol combination containing the "heart" symbol is stopped (or temporarily stopped) during gameplay, the start or continuation of the continuous variation display is confirmed. Note that while Figure 345(a) shows cases where the "heart" symbol is included in the symbol combinations corresponding to complete misses, it is also possible to configure the system so that the "heart" symbol is included in the symbol combinations corresponding to losing reaches.

Regarding the continuous variation display effect, multiple patterns (1 to 3 times in this embodiment) are provided for the number of consecutive unit effects consisting of a temporary stop display followed by a variation display. The more consecutive effects (continuation counts) there are, the higher the probability that the jackpot result will be revealed after this effect, i.e., the higher the expectation of a jackpot (see Figure 345(b)).

The continuous variation display effect can be broadly categorized into two patterns: one in which the symbol display device 500K and the movable effect device 800K work in conjunction, and another in which they do not. Below, with reference to Figures 346 and 347, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the flow of the continuous variation display effect when the symbol display device 500K and the movable effect device 800K do not work together. Figures 346 and 347 illustrate the flow of a game round in which the jackpot result is revealed after a continuous variation display effect that occurs twice in a row.

As shown in Figures 346(a) and 346(b), at the start of a game round, the held symbols displayed on the held symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K (left side), and the variable display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins. At a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figure 346(c), a symbol combination including the "heart" symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The presence of the "heart" symbol in the stopped and displayed symbol combination suggests to the player that the continuous variable display effect has begun. Furthermore, at the timing when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 500K, the characters "×2" are displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K as a message indicating that the next variable display is the second, including the initial variable display.

After a predetermined pause time (the same length as the confirmed display time for the symbols in the activation display unit in this embodiment) has elapsed since the symbol combination including the "heart" symbol was temporarily displayed, the variable display of each symbol row resumes (see Figure 346(d)). At a predetermined timing after the variable display resumes, as shown in Figure 347(e), the symbol combination including the "heart" symbol is again temporarily displayed. The presence of the "heart" symbol in the displayed variable combination suggests to the player that the continuous variable display effect will continue. Furthermore, at the moment the symbol combination is displayed temporarily on the symbol display device 500K, the characters "×3" are displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K as a message indicating that the next variable display is the third, including the initial variable display.

After the second temporary stop display, a predetermined stop display time (in this embodiment, the same length as the confirmed display time for the symbols in the operation port display unit) has elapsed, at which point the variation display of each symbol row resumes (see Figure 347(f)). After the predetermined variation time has elapsed since the variation display resumed, the display transitions to a "reach" display, as shown in Figure 347(g). In the game round shown in Figure 347, the jackpot result is revealed after a consecutive variation display sequence that occurs twice in a row. Specifically, after the "reach" display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display), clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot has been won.

Here, referring to Figure 348, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the number of consecutive occurrences when the continuous variation display effect is executed. Note that the explanation for cases where the number of consecutive occurrences is 0, i.e., when the continuous variation display effect does not occur, will be omitted.

If the number of consecutive spins is 1 (i.e., the second spin in a game), the probability of a jackpot is the same as when the number of consecutive spins is 0, and the game may or may not transition to a reach display. If the number of consecutive spins is 2 (i.e., the third spin in a game), a transition to a reach display is guaranteed. In this case, the reach display can be either a normal reach or a super reach. The probability of a jackpot is higher when the number of consecutive spins is 2 than when the number of consecutive spins is 1. If the number of consecutive spins is 3 (i.e., the fourth spin in a game), not only is a transition to a reach display guaranteed, but development into a super reach is also guaranteed, making a jackpot highly likely.

As already explained, the continuous variation display effect can be broadly divided into two cases: one in conjunction with the movable display device 800K and one in which it does not. Below, with reference to Figures 349 to 351, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the flow of the continuous variation display effect when it is in conjunction with the movable display device 800K. Figures 349 to 351 illustrate the flow of a game round in which the jackpot result is revealed after a continuous variation display effect that occurs once. In the following explanation, the continuous variation display effect in conjunction with the movable display device 800K will be referred to as "Continuous Variation Display Effect A" as appropriate.

(Flow of continuous variation display effect A)
As shown in Figures 349(a) and 349(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the variable display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins. At a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figure 349(c), the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is temporarily stopped and displayed. This symbol combination does not include the "heart" symbol, which corresponds to the continuous variable display effect A.

When the symbol combination in question is temporarily stopped and a predetermined stop display time (in this embodiment, the same length as the confirmed display time of the symbol on the operation port display unit) has elapsed, the auxiliary display device 700K displays a message "!" as an indication that the movable performance device 800K is about to operate. However, although this message indicates the operation of the movable performance device 800K, it also corresponds to performances other than the continuous variation display performance A (for example, the fifth type of hold notification performance A described later). Therefore, it is difficult for a player who sees this message at this point to determine (identify) whether the continuous variation display performance A or the fifth type of hold notification performance A will occur.

Immediately after the message is displayed, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotation center axis CLK, while the protruding part 811K remains in the basic state LV0. It moves from the standby position to the performance position (specifically, the third performance position corresponding to the left symbol column and the first unit hold display section 602aK) (see Figure 349(d)). Even when stopped at the third performance position, the protruding part 811K remains in the basic state LV0.

In the example shown in Figure 349, since the auxiliary display device 700K does not execute a linked animation when moving to the third animation position, the linked target of the movable animation device 800K will be either the symbol display device 500K or the hold display device 600K.

After the movable decorative element 801K is positioned at the third display location, as shown in Figures 349(d) to 350(e), the tip 813K of the protruding portion 811K is displaced toward the left row of symbols that is temporarily stopped. This movement causes the protruding portion 811K to transform from its basic state LV0 to the second extended state LV2, overlapping with the variable display area of the left row of symbols.

In conjunction with the deformation of this protruding portion 811K, the left symbol column scrolls upward, and the left symbol that was stopped on the active line changes to a "heart" symbol (see Figure 350(f)). Note that while the left symbol column changes, the middle and right symbol columns remain stopped.

The presence of a "heart" symbol in the stopped symbol combination indicates to the player that continuous variation display effect A has begun. Furthermore, at the moment the symbol combination is stopped on the symbol display device 500K, the text "×2" is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K as a message indicating that the next variation display is the second, including the initial variation display.

After the change to the "heart" pattern, the protruding portion 811K returns from the second extended state LV2 to the basic state LV0, as shown in Figure 350(g), while the above message is displayed.

After the protruding part 811K returns to its basic state LV0, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the rotation center axis CLK while the protruding part 811K remains in the basic state LV0, returning from the performance position (third performance position) to the standby position (see Figure 350(h)). In conjunction with this return, the above message disappears and the display of each symbol sequence resumes.

After the variable display resumes and a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the display transitions to a "reach" display, as shown in Figure 350(i). In the game round shown in Figure 350, the jackpot result is revealed after a continuous variable display sequence A, which consists of one consecutive sequence. Specifically, after the "reach" display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display), clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot has been won (see Figure 351(j)).

As detailed above, the continuous variation display effect A, which is linked to the movable performance device 800K, is configured such that after the movable decorative body 801K is placed at the performance position, the movable decorative body 801K (specifically the protruding part 811K) deforms to enter a second extended state LV2, thereby clearly indicating that the linked target of the movable performance device 800K is the symbol display device 500K, that is, that the continuous variation display effect A will occur or continue. Here, in order to make it difficult to determine whether the linked target when the movable decorative body 801K is placed at the performance position is the symbol display device 500K until the movable decorative body 801K (protruding part 811K) actually deforms, a fifth type of hold notification effect A is provided that is paired with the continuous variation display effect A linked to the movable performance device 800K. This fifth type of hold notification effect A is one of the explicit hold notification effects, and is configured so that the display manner of the hold symbols changes in accordance with the deformation of the movable decorative body 801K. The following explanation will describe the flow of the Type 5 Reserve Notification演出A, referring to the schematic diagrams in Figures 352 and 353. Figures 352 and 353 illustrate the flow from the start of the Type 5 Reserve Notification Notification A to the transition to the corresponding game round.

(Flow of the fifth type of hold notification effect A)
As shown in Figures 352(a) and 352(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the variable display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins. At a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figure 352(c), the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display). However, at this point, it is difficult to distinguish whether the stop display is the final stop display or a temporary stop display.

When a predetermined stop display time (the same length as the confirmed display time for the symbols in the operation port display unit in this embodiment) has elapsed since the final stop display (confirmation display) of the symbol combination, the auxiliary display device 700K displays a message "!" as an indication of the operation of the movable performance device 800K. However, although this message indicates the operation of the movable performance device 800K, it also corresponds to performances other than the Type 5 Reserve Notification Performance A (for example, the Continuous Variation Display Performance A described above). Therefore, it is difficult for a player who sees this message at this point to determine (identify) whether the Type 5 Reserve Notification Performance A or the Continuous Variation Display Performance A will occur.

Immediately after the message is displayed, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotation center axis CLK while the protruding part 811K remains in the basic state LV0, moving from the standby position to the performance position (specifically, the third performance position corresponding to the left pattern column and the first unit hold display unit 602aK) (see Figure 352(d)). Even when stopped at the third performance position, the protruding part 811K remains in the basic state LV0. At this point, the number of held symbols is "2," and the held symbols are displayed in the execution target display unit 601K, the first unit hold display unit 602aK, and the second unit hold display unit 602bK.

In the example shown in Figure 352, since the auxiliary display device 700K does not execute a linked animation when moving to the third animation position, the linked target of the movable animation device 800K will be either the symbol display device 500K or the hold display device 600K.

After the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the third display position, as shown in Figures 352(d) to 353(e), the tip 813K of the protruding portion 811K is displaced toward the first unit hold display unit 602aK (i.e., the hold symbol displayed in the first unit hold display unit 602aK). This movement causes the protruding portion 811K to transform from its basic state LV0 to the first extended state LV1, and the tip 813K of the protruding portion 811K overlaps with the hold symbol displayed in the first unit hold display unit 602aK.

In conjunction with the deformation of the protruding portion 811K, the display mode of the hold symbol shown in the first unit hold indicator 602aK changes from the normal display mode to a special display mode. In the example shown in Figure 353, the hold symbol displayed in the first unit hold indicator 602aK changes from white to red.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 353(f), the movable decorative body 801K remains in the third performance position while the protruding portion 811K switches from the first extended state LV1 to the basic state LV0. Then, while maintaining the protruding portion 811K in the basic state LV0, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the rotation center axis CLK, returning from the performance position (third performance position) to the standby position (see Figure 353(g)). Immediately after this return, the display of each symbol sequence resumes, the reserved symbol displayed in the first unit reserved display unit 601aK shifts to the execution target display unit 601K, and the reserved symbol displayed in the second unit reserved display unit 601bK shifts to the first unit reserved display unit 601aK. During this process, the color of the corresponding reserved symbol remains red.

Figures 352 and 353 illustrate cases where the reserved color step-up does not occur, but this is not the only example. Even in the fifth type reserved color notification effect A, it is possible to configure it so that the step-up occurs as the game progresses.

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between the symbol display device and the movable effect device is used to increase the player's attention. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable effect devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects themselves may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of increasing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the movable display device 800K is linked to the symbol display device 500K and the hold display device 600K, respectively. Specifically, when the fifth type of hold notification display (corresponding to the "linked display") linked to the hold display device 600K is executed, the movable decorative body 801K rotates to the display position while remaining in the basic state LV0 (corresponding to the "first form"), and then switches to the first extended state LV1 (corresponding to the "second form") at that display position. In contrast, when the continuous variation display display (corresponding to the "linked display") linked to the symbol display device 500K is executed, the movable decorative body 801K rotates to the display position while remaining in the basic state LV0, and then switches to the second extended state (corresponding to the "third form") at that display position. In other words, the process of displacement from the standby position to the performance position is standardized, and after reaching the performance position, a branching occurs in either the first extended state LV1 (where the linked target is the hold display device 600K) or the second extended state LV2 (where the linked target is the symbol display device 500K). By achieving this standardization of the linked performance, the above concerns can be mitigated. Furthermore, by standardizing the movement in part, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the movable performance device 800K from becoming excessively complex due to the diversification of linked performances. This is preferable when allowing peripheral devices such as the symbol display device 500K and the hold display device 600K to coexist with the movable performance device 800K in a limited area.

The movable ornament 801K is configured to pass through the first extended state LV1 when switching from the basic state LV0 to the second extended state LV2. In the continuous variation display effect linked with the pattern display device 500K, the movable ornament 801K is switched from the basic state LV0 to the second extended state LV2 without being stopped in the first extended state LV1. By configuring it so that it passes through the first extended state LV1 during the transition (process) from the basic state LV0 to the second extended state LV2, it is possible to achieve the attention-grabbing effect described above while suppressing excessive complexity in the configuration related to the deformation (form switching) of the movable ornament 801K. Here, when performing linked effects using the movable ornament 801K, it is assumed that the impact of the effect will decrease as the movement of the movable ornament 801K becomes slower. Therefore, when transitioning from the basic state LV0 to the second extended state LV2, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated by configuring the system to switch directly to the second extended state LV2 without pausing (stopping) in the first extended state LV1.

The movable decorative element 801K is configured such that, when in its basic state (LV0) at the performance position, it avoids overlapping with either the symbol display device 500K or the hold display device 600K. When it reaches its first extended state (LV1) at the performance position, the tip 813K of the movable decorative element 801K overlaps with the hold display device 600K. When it reaches its second extended state (LV2) at the performance position, the tip 813K of the movable decorative element 801K overlaps with the symbol display device 500K.

According to the above configuration, during the fifth hold notification effect, the movable decorative body 801K is moved to the effect position and then extended to the first extended state LV1, thereby clearly indicating that the linked target is the hold display device 600K via the tip 813K of the movable decorative body 801K. During the continuous variation display effect, the movable decorative body 801K is moved to the effect position and then extended to the second extended state LV2, thereby clearly indicating that the linked target is the symbol display device 500K via the tip 813K of the movable decorative body 801K. This configuration effectively suppresses the potential for the diversification of linked effects to confuse players.

The movable ornament 801K is configured such that the direction of displacement of the tip 813K (lateral direction) when it moves from the standby position to the performance position is different from the direction of displacement of the tip 813K (vertical direction) when it switches from the basic state LV0 to the first extended state LV1 and the second extended state LV2. This configuration allows for dynamic movement by increasing the travel distance of the tip 813K, while simultaneously preventing the movable ornament 813K from becoming excessively large.

The movable decorative element 801K is configured to remain in its basic state (LV0) for a predetermined period of time after being moved from its standby position to the performance position. This predetermined period is longer than the operation time required to move the movable decorative element 801K from the standby position to the performance position.

When operating the movable display device 800K, the shorter the time from the start to the completion of the operation, the smaller the time lag before the linked display is executed on the symbol display device 500K and the hold display device 600K. In other words, the display can proceed more quickly. On the other hand, when generating the aforementioned branching, the player pays attention to which branch will occur, so there is technical significance in ensuring a certain amount of time when the branching occurs. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by shortening the operation time when displacing from the standby position to the display position to enhance the impact of the movement, while maintaining the basic state LV0 in the standby position and ensuring a longer interval (predetermined time), the above two problems can be suitably solved.

The fifth hold notification effect changes the display pattern of the hold symbols that are statically displayed on the hold display device 600K, while the continuous variation display effect changes the variation display pattern of the pattern sequence that is dynamically displayed on the pattern display device 500K. The display area of the symbols targeted for synchronization on the hold display device 600K is smaller than the display area of the pattern sequence symbols targeted for synchronization on the pattern display device 500K. By making the shape change of the movable ornament 801K small (one stage) in the fifth hold notification effect, where the static display pattern is changed, and making the shape change of the movable ornament 801K large (two stages) in the continuous variation display effect, the contrast between the two synchronized effects can be enhanced.

The branching of the form switching described above occurs at the performance position. Therefore, by configuring the system to indicate the start of operation at a position overlapping with the movable decorative element 801K when it is positioned at the performance position, it is possible to effectively suppress the oversight of the branching point without explicitly indicating where it occurs. This is preferable because it simplifies the indication of operation start (reduces the amount of information), thereby facilitating understanding of the indication.

<Variation 1>
In the 38th embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is configured to cooperate with the hold display device 600K when it is in a first extended state LV1, and with the pattern display device 500K when it is in a second extended state LV2. However, the invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, it is also possible to configure the movable decorative body 801K to cooperate with the hold display device 600K when it is in a second extended state LV2, and with the pattern display device 500K when it is in a first extended state LV1. In this case, for example, the vertical positions of the hold display device 600K and the pattern display device 500K may be reversed.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 38th embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is deformed by changing the length of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K. However, the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as the movable decorative body 801K can be deformed. For example, it is also possible to mount the protruding portion 811K on the main body portion 810K so that it can be displaced relative to the main body portion 810K, and deform the movable decorative body 801K by displacing the protruding portion 811K relative to the main body portion 810K.

<Example 3>
In the 38th embodiment described above, the movable display device 800K is linked to a continuous variation display effect A that is completed within one game round, but the invention is not limited to this. The movable display device 800K may also be linked to a chance symbol予告 effect that stops a chance symbol when the symbols are finally stopped (confirmed) in a game round prior to the relevant game round. For example, it is also possible to temporarily stop and display a simple losing symbol, and then operate the movable display device 800K to change the stopped symbol combination to a chance symbol in accordance with that operation.

<Modification 4>
In the 38th embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is configured to branch into two cases after moving from the standby position to the performance: when it connects to the symbol display device 500K (when the continuous variation display performance A starts or continues) and when it connects to the hold display device 600K (when the linked hold notification performance A is executed). However, the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the movable decorative body 801K to branch into two cases after moving from the standby position to the performance: when it connects to the symbol display device 500K (when the continuous variation display performance A starts or continues) and when it connects to the auxiliary display device 700K. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the movable decorative body 801K to branch into two cases after moving from the standby position to the performance: when it connects to the hold display device 600K (when the hold notification performance is executed) and when it connects to the auxiliary display device 700K.

<Embodiment 39>
In the 38th embodiment described above, in the continuous variation display effect A and the fifth type of hold notification effect A, which are linked with the movable effect device 800K, the shape of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding part 811K) changes after moving from the standby position to the effect position. In other words, first, by moving to a predetermined effect position, the pattern rows that are candidates for linking and the hold symbols that are candidates for linking are narrowed down, and then it is made clear which of the pattern rows (pattern display device 500K) and the hold symbols (hold display device 600K) is the target of linking. In this embodiment, the movement of the movable decorative body 801K when the continuous variation display effect and the fifth type of hold notification effect are executed differs from the 38th embodiment, and the flow of narrowing down the linking candidates → making the target of linking clearer is the reverse of the 38th embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 38th embodiment. First, the continuous variation display effect B in this embodiment will be described.

(Continuous fluctuation display effect B)
In this embodiment, as with the 38th embodiment, when the continuous variation display effect B is started or continued, a combination of symbols including the "heart" symbol (see Figure 345(a)) is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line. In this continuous variation display, if coordination with the movable effect device 800K occurs, the timing of the operation of the movable effect device 800K differs from that of the 38th embodiment. Specifically, in the 38th embodiment, the movable effect device 800K operates when the symbol sequence is stopped (temporarily stopped), but in this embodiment, the movable effect device 800K operates while at least one symbol sequence (for example, all symbol sequences) is in the process of variation.

Furthermore, while this embodiment is similar to the 38th embodiment in that the display of all symbol sequences begins before the next game round when a symbol combination including the "heart" symbol is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped), it differs from the 38th embodiment in that the probability of moving to the next display (the probability of consecutive displays) is indicated depending on which "heart" symbol is displayed as stopped. In other words, even when a symbol combination including the "heart" symbol is displayed as stopped, the expected continuation rate of the consecutive display effect B is indicated by the symbol sequence in which the "heart" symbol is displayed as stopped, which is another difference from the 38th embodiment.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 354, the probability of continuation is higher when the "heart" symbol stops in the middle symbol row than when it stops in the left symbol row, and even higher when it stops in the right symbol row. As shown in the 38th embodiment, a difference is provided so that the probability of a big win increases with the number of consecutive occurrences (see Figure 345(b)). Therefore, it is assumed that players who focus on the continuous variation display effect B will expect the "heart" symbol to stop in the middle or right symbol row.

The following provides supplementary explanation regarding the flow of the continuous variation display effect B when it is linked with the movable display device 800K, referring to Figures 355 to 357. Figures 355 to 357 illustrate the flow of a game round in which the jackpot result is revealed after the continuous variation display effect B, which occurs once in a row.

(Flow of continuous variation display effect B)
As shown in Figures 355(a) and 355(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the variable display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins. At a predetermined timing after the variable display has started, specifically at a predetermined timing while all symbol rows are being displayed in a variable state, the auxiliary display device 700K displays a message "!" as an indication of the operation of the movable performance device 800K. However, although this message indicates the operation of the movable performance device 800K, it also corresponds to performances other than the continuous variable display performance B (for example, the fifth type reserved notification performance B described later). For this reason, it is difficult for a player who sees this message at this point to determine (identify) whether the continuous variable display performance B or the fifth type reserved notification performance B will occur.

Immediately after the message is displayed, as shown in Figure 355(c) → Figure 355(d), the tip portion 813K of the protrusion 811K extends. This movement indicates that the protrusion 811K has transformed from its basic state LV0 to the second extended state LV2, suggesting that the target of this interaction is the pattern display device 500K.

Subsequently, as shown in Figures 355(d) to 356(e), the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK while the protruding portion 811K remains in the second extended state LV2, moving from the standby position to the performance position (specifically, the fifth performance position corresponding to the middle symbol row). As a result, the tip portion 813K of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding portion 811K) overlaps with the middle symbol row. Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable decorative body 801K, the middle symbol row stops and displays with the "heart" symbol positioned on the active line. The display of the "heart" symbol in the middle symbol row slightly increases the expectation of continuation of the continuous variation display performance B compared to when it stops on the left symbol.

Immediately afterward, the right and left symbol rows are displayed as stopped, and the presence of a "heart" symbol in the stopped symbol combination suggests to the player that continuous variation display effect B has begun. After the symbol combination containing the "heart" symbol is displayed as stopped, the protruding part 811K returns from the second extended state LV2 to the basic state LV0 (see Figure 356(f)). Then, while maintaining the protruding part 811K in the basic state LV0, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the rotation center axis CLK, returning from the effect position (third effect position) to the standby position (see Figure 356(g)). In conjunction with this return, the characters "×2" are displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K as a message indicating that the next variation display is the second variation display, including the first one. This message disappears when the variation display of each symbol row resumes (see Figure 36(h)).

Furthermore, similar to the 38th embodiment, it is also possible to configure the system to display the characters "×2" on the auxiliary display device 700K as a message indicating that the next variation display is the second variation display, including the initial one, when a pattern combination including the "heart" pattern is displayed in a stopped state. This message may also be hidden after the variation display for each pattern sequence resumes.

After the variable display resumes and a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the display transitions to a "reach" display, as shown in Figure 357(i). In the game round shown in Figure 357, the jackpot result is revealed after a continuous variable display sequence B, which consists of one consecutive sequence. Specifically, after the "reach" display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display), clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot has been won (see Figure 357(j)).

As detailed above, the continuous variation display effect B, which is linked to the movable display device 800K, is configured such that when the movable decorative body 801K is in a standby position, the movable decorative body 801K (specifically the protruding part 811K) deforms to enter the second extended state LV2, clearly indicating that the movable display device 800K is linked to the symbol display device 500K, that is, that continuous variation display effect B will occur or continue. However, at this point, it is not clear which symbol row the "heart" symbol will stop on (the chance-up element), and the symbol row on which the "heart" symbol will stop on is revealed when the movable decorative body 801K actually moves. This configuration encourages players who are expecting the continuation of continuous variation display effect B to pay further attention to it.

Next, we will explain the fifth type of reserve notification effect B, which is paired with the continuous variation display effect B. The fifth type of reserve notification effect B is also one of the explicit reserve notification effects, and is configured so that the display of the reserve symbol changes in accordance with the deformation of the movable decorative body 801K. The flow of the fifth type of reserve notification effect B will be explained below with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 358 to 359. Figures 358 to 359 illustrate the flow from the start of the fifth type of reserve notification effect B to the transition to the corresponding game round.

(Flow of the fifth type of hold notification B sequence)
As shown in Figures 358(a) and 358(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the variable display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins. At a predetermined timing after the variable display has started, specifically at a predetermined timing while all symbol rows are being displayed in a variable state, the auxiliary display device 700K displays a message "!" as an indication of the operation of the movable performance device 800K. However, although this message indicates the operation of the movable performance device 800K, it also corresponds to performances other than the fifth type reserved symbol notification performance B (for example, continuous variable display performance B). Therefore, it is difficult for a player who sees this message at this point to determine (identify) whether the continuous variable display performance B or the fifth type reserved symbol notification performance B will occur.

Immediately after the message is displayed, as shown in Figure 358(c) → Figure 358(d), the tip portion 813K of the protrusion 811K extends. This movement indicates that the protrusion 811K has transformed from its basic state LV0 to the first extended state LV1, suggesting that the target of this interaction is the hold display device 600K.

Subsequently, as shown in Figures 358(d) to 359(e), the movable decorative body 801K rotates in a first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK while the protruding portion 811K remains in the first extended state LV1, moving from the standby position to the performance position (specifically, the third performance position corresponding to the first unit hold display unit 602aK). As a result, the tip portion 813K of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding portion 811K) is displaced toward the first unit hold display unit 602aK (i.e., the hold image displayed on the first unit hold display unit 602aK). This movement causes the protruding portion 811K to transform from the basic state LV0 to the first extended state LV1, and the tip portion 813K of the protruding portion 811K overlaps with the hold image displayed on the first unit hold display unit 602aK.

In conjunction with the deformation of the protruding portion 811K, the display mode of the hold symbol shown in the first unit hold indicator 602aK changes from the normal display mode to a special display mode. In the example shown in Figure 359, the hold symbol displayed in the first unit hold indicator 602aK changes from white to red.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 359(g), the movable decorative body 801K remains in the third performance position while the protruding portion 811K switches from the first extended state LV1 to the basic state LV0. Then, while maintaining the protruding portion 811K in the basic state LV0, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the rotation center axis CLK, returning from the performance position (third performance position) to the standby position. After the movable decorative body 801K has returned to the standby position, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed in the final stop display (confirmation display) (see Figure 359(h)).

Subsequently, after a predetermined confirmation display time has elapsed since the final stop display, the display of each symbol sequence begins to change. The reserved symbols displayed in the first unit reserved display unit 601aK shift to the execution target display unit 601K, and the reserved symbols displayed in the second unit reserved display unit 601bK shift to the first unit reserved display unit 601aK.

Furthermore, regarding the fifth type of hold notification effect B, similar to the fifth type of hold notification effect A, it may be configured so that a step-up of the hold color occurs, or it may be configured so that a step-up does not occur.

<Variation 1>
In the 39th embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is configured to cooperate with the hold display device 600K when it is in a first extended state LV1, and with the pattern display device 500K when it is in a second extended state LV2, but the invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, it is also possible to configure the movable decorative body 801K to cooperate with the hold display device 600K when it is in a second extended state LV2, and with the pattern display device 500K when it is in a first extended state LV1. In this case, for example, the vertical positions of the hold display device 600K and the pattern display device 500K may be reversed.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 39th embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is deformed by changing the length of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K. However, the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as the movable decorative body 801K can be deformed. For example, it is also possible to mount the protruding portion 811K on the main body portion 810K so that it can be displaced relative to the main body portion 810K, and deform the movable decorative body 801K by displacing the protruding portion 811K relative to the main body portion 810K.

<Example 3>
In the 39th embodiment described above, the movable display device 800K is linked to a continuous variation display effect B that is completed within one game round, but the invention is not limited to this. The movable display device 800K may also be linked to a chance symbol予告 effect that stops a chance symbol when the symbols are finally stopped (confirmed) in a game round prior to the relevant game round. For example, it is also possible to temporarily stop and display a simple losing symbol, and then operate the movable display device 800K to change the stopped symbol combination to a chance symbol in accordance with that operation.

<40th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration relating to the coordination between the pattern display device 500K, the auxiliary display device 700K, and the movable performance device 800K differs from that of the 31st embodiment. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the 31st embodiment. First, with reference to Figure 360, the variable display unit 85K in this embodiment will be described.

As shown in Figure 360, in this embodiment, the movable display device 800K has an enlarged overall length of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K. This allows the operating range of the movable decorative body 801K to overlap with the entire display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K when the movable decorative body 801K rotates within the range from the standby position to the preparation position.

Furthermore, a 2.5 performance position is provided at the performance position of the movable decorative body 801K, which is located between the execution target display unit 601K and the first unit hold display unit 602aK. When the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the 2.5 performance position, the tip 813K of the protruding part 811K overlaps with the variable display area of the left symbol row (left variable display area DL). This 2.5 performance position corresponds to the left symbol designation position, which designates the left symbol row as the linking target. When the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the 6th performance position, the tip 813K of the protruding part 811K overlaps with the variable display area of the middle symbol (middle variable display area DM). This 6th performance position corresponds to the left symbol designation position, which designates the middle symbol row as the linking target. When the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the 12th performance position, the tip 813K of the protruding part 811K overlaps with the variable display area of the right symbol (right variable display area DR). This 12th performance position corresponds to the right symbol column designation position, which designates the right symbol column as the target for linking.

In this embodiment, the auxiliary display device 700K may execute a special message display animation in conjunction with the movable animation device 800K. This special message display animation is one of the premonition animations (suggestion animations), and various messages related to the pattern of symbol variation and the probability of a jackpot are displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K. The relationship between the displayed messages and the pattern of symbol variation and the probability of a jackpot will be explained below with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 361.

The messages displayed on the 700K auxiliary display device screen through special message display effects include "Super Hot," "?", "NEXT!", "NEXT?", "Reach!", and "Reach?".

The display of "Super Hot" on the auxiliary display device 700K suggests a high probability of winning a jackpot during that game round. Conversely, the display of "?" on the auxiliary display device 700K suggests that some kind of special effect will occur during that game round. However, the probability of winning a jackpot when "?" is displayed is significantly lower than when "Super Hot" is displayed.

If the auxiliary display device 700K displays "NEXT!" as the message, the occurrence or continuation of the continuous variation display effect is confirmed. The continuous variation display effect is the same as that shown in the 38th embodiment described above, so its explanation is omitted. In contrast, if the auxiliary display device 700K displays "NEXT?" as the message, there is approximately a 60% probability that the continuous variation display effect will occur or continue. In other words, while there is a high probability of the continuous variation display effect occurring, unlike the case of "NEXT!", there is also a possibility that the continuous variation display effect will not occur or continue.

If the auxiliary display device 700K displays the message "Reach!", the transition to the reach display is confirmed. Conversely, if the auxiliary display device 700K displays the message "Reach?", there is approximately a 60% probability of transitioning to the reach display. In other words, while there is a high probability of transitioning to the reach display, unlike the "Reach!" case, the reach display may not occur.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 362, the behavior of the auxiliary display device 700K and the movable display device 800K when a special message display effect is executed will be explained. Note that Figure 362 illustrates the behavior when the message "NEXT!" is displayed, but the behavior for other messages such as "Reach!" is similar.

As shown in Figures 362(a) and 362(b), when the special message display effect is initiated, the second light-emitting part 812K and the third light-emitting part 813K of the movable decorative body 801K (protruding part 811K) first emit light in one of the following colors: white, blue, yellow, or red, entering a lit state. A correlation is established between the light-emitting color of the second light-emitting part 812K and the displayed message. For example, when the displayed message is "Super Hot," "NEXT!", or "Reach!", the likelihood of the light-emitting color being set is set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red. When the displayed message is "?", "NEXT?", or "Reach?", the likelihood of the light-emitting color being set is set in the order of red < yellow < blue < white. In the example shown in Figure 362(b), the light-emitting color of the second light-emitting part 812K and the third light-emitting part 813K is red.

After the second light-emitting unit 81K and the third light-emitting unit 813K have emitted light, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK while maintaining its luminous state, moving from the standby position to the ready position. At this time, the display range (display area) of the message on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K changes in accordance with the movement of the movable decorative body 801K. Specifically, the area to the left of the protrusion 811K on the display screen becomes the message display area, and this area expands in accordance with the movement of the movable decorative body 801K (see Figures 362(b) → 362(c) → 362(d)). In other words, the protrusion 811K defines the boundary between the message display area and the non-display area, and the number of displayed characters increases as (1) characters are displayed behind the protrusion 811K, and (2) the position of the protrusion 811K shifts, making the characters visible. For example, as shown in Figure 362, when "NEXT!" is displayed, the characters are added in the following order: "N" → "E" → "X" → "T" → "!".

The protruding portion 811K has a certain width, and the addition of characters is performed behind the protruding portion 811K. The protruding portion 811K then moves to a position where it no longer overlaps with the displayed characters, making the characters visible from the front of the gaming machine. This enhances the coordination between the movement of the movable decorative body 801K and the display of the message.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the flow of the special message display animation, referring to Figures 363 to 365. Figures 363 to 365 illustrate an example where the special message display animation triggers a continuous variation display animation, and the fact that a jackpot result was achieved through this continuous variation display animation is clearly indicated.

(Flow of special message display effects)
As shown in Figure 363(a) → Figure 363(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins to change.

The change display begins when the left symbol column (out of the left, middle, and right symbol columns) is stopped. As shown in Figure 363(c), the left symbol stopped on the active line consists of sub-symbols and the "7" symbol, and does not include the "heart" symbol, which corresponds to the start and continuation of the continuous change display effect. In other words, at this point, the development into the continuous change display effect is not yet determined.

After the left reel column stops, the movable decorative element 801K is positioned in standby mode, and the protruding part 811K (second light-emitting part 812K and third light-emitting part 813K) lights up in red. This illumination suggests to the player that a special message display effect may be initiated. However, as will be explained in detail later, in this embodiment, other premonitory effects (suggestive effects) may be initiated after a similar event (movable decorative element 801K is positioned in standby mode and the protruding part 811K lights up). In other words, at this point, it is difficult for a player who sees this event to determine whether the special message display effect or another effect (for example, the second stop-time linked effect described later) will occur.

At a predetermined timing after the second light-emitting unit 812K and the third light-emitting unit 813K begin to emit light, the movable decorative body 801K, with its protruding portion 811K emitting light, rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK. In conjunction with this, a message is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K. In Figure 364(e), the movable decorative body 801K is in the process of moving towards its preparation position, and the display area of the auxiliary display device 700K (display screen) is divided into left and right halves by the protruding portion 811K. Part of the message (the letter "N" in "NEXT!") is displayed in the left-hand portion of these divided areas.

Subsequently, the area to the left of the protrusion 811K gradually expands in accordance with the movement of the movable decorative element 801K, and the number of displayed characters increases. The entire message is displayed before the movable decorative element 801K reaches its preparation position. In the example shown in Figure 364, the message displayed is "NEXT!" (see Figure 364(f)). At this point, the changing display of the middle and right symbol rows continues.

After a message suggesting a continuous variation display effect is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K's screen, the left and middle symbol rows are displayed as stopped (see Figures 364(g) and 364(h)). In the example shown in Figure 364, the "heart" symbol constituting the middle symbol row is displayed as stopped on the active line; that is, the symbol combination including the "heart" symbol is displayed as stopped on the active line, suggesting the start of the continuous variation display effect.

When the symbol combination is temporarily paused and a predetermined pause time has elapsed, the movable decorative body 801K, whose protrusion 811K is emitting light, is in a ready position, and with the above message still displayed, all symbol sequences resume their variable display (see Figure 365(i)).

Subsequently, the protruding portion 811K turns off, and the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the rotational axis CLK. During this rotation, the characters constituting the message are hidden sequentially from left to right, so that the display area shrinks in accordance with the movement of the protruding portion 811K (see Figures 365(i) → 365(j) → 365(k)).

After the variable display resumes and a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the display transitions to a "reach" display, as shown in Figure 365(k). In the game round shown in Figure 365, the jackpot result is revealed after a continuous variable display sequence that repeats once. Specifically, after the "reach" display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display), clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot has been won (see Figure 365(l)).

As detailed above, regarding the special message display effect that works in conjunction with the movable display device 800K, when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned in standby, the protruding part 811K (specifically, the second light-emitting part 812K and the third light-emitting part 813K) of the movable decorative body 801K lights up, creating a state of illumination. This creates the possibility of an effect being executed in conjunction with the movable display device 800K and the pattern display device 500K. However, in this embodiment, a second stop-time coordination effect that works in conjunction with the pattern display device 500K is provided as another premonition effect (suggestion effect) branching off from this point. In other words, at this point, it is difficult to identify (distinguish) either the pattern display device 500K or the auxiliary display device 700K as a candidate for coordination.

The second stop-time linked effect is paired with the special message display effect described above and is one of the premonitory (suggestive) effects that occur when the left row of symbols stops. The left row of symbols stops in accordance with the movement of the movable effect device 800K. This movement is configured to trigger the start or continuation of the reach display or continuous variation display effect (see Figure 366). Here, the flow of the second stop-time linked effect will be explained with reference to Figures 367 to 369. Figures 367 to 369 illustrate the case where the second stop-time linked effect triggers the continuous variation display effect, and it is explicitly shown that a jackpot result was achieved through this continuous variation display effect.

(Flow of the linked performance when the second stop occurs)
As shown in Figures 367(a) and 367(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins to change.

After the display of variations begins, the left symbol column is the first to stop and display among the left, middle, and right symbol columns. As shown in Figure 367(c), the left symbols that stop and display on the active line are sub-symbols and "7" symbols, and do not include the "heart" symbol which corresponds to the start and continuation of the continuous variation display effect. In other words, at this point, the development into the continuous variation display effect is not yet determined.

After the left reel symbol column stops, the movable decorative element 801K is positioned in standby mode, and the protruding part 811K (second light-emitting part 812K and third light-emitting part 813K) lights up red (see Figure 367(d)). This illumination suggests to the player that the special message display effect or the second stop-time linked effect described above may be initiated. However, at this point, it is difficult for the player to determine (identify) whether the special message display effect or the second stop-time linked effect will occur.

At a predetermined timing after the second light-emitting unit 812K and the third light-emitting unit 813K begin to emit light, the movable decorative body 801K, with its protruding portion 811K emitting light, rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK. As shown in Figures 367(d) → 368(e) → 368(f), the movable decorative body 801K stops when it reaches the 12th display position. That is, it stops at a position where the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K overlaps with the left pattern row (left variable display area DL). For the left pattern row, the variable display ends (stops) in accordance with the stopping timing of the movable decorative body 801K.

In the example shown in Figure 368, the second stop-time linked effect triggers the start of the continuous variation display effect. For the left row of symbols, the "heart" symbol is displayed so that it is positioned on the active payline.

In this embodiment, the 10th to 12th performance positions are all designated positions that specify the left symbol column. In the second stop-time linked performance, the configuration determines whether to stop the movable decorative element 801K at one of the 10th to 12th performance positions in accordance with the timing when the "heart" symbol in the left symbol column reaches the active line. Specifically, by providing multiple possible stopping positions for the movable decorative element 801K when stopping in accordance with the left symbol column, it is made easier to synchronize with the timing when the "heart" symbol in the left symbol column stops on the active line. This prevents the configuration related to the symbol variation display control from becoming overly complex due to the introduction of the second stop-time linked performance.

After the second stop, when the left row of symbols is displayed as stopped, the middle row of symbols is displayed as stopped. This means that a combination of symbols including the "heart" symbol is temporarily displayed as stopped on an active payline, suggesting the start of a continuous variation display (see Figure 368(g)).

When the symbol combination has temporarily stopped displaying and a predetermined stop display time has elapsed, the movable decorative body 801K, with its protruding portion 811K still emitting light, remains in its ready position, and all symbol sequences resume their variable display (see Figure 368(h)).

Subsequently, the protruding part 811K turns off, and the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the pivot axis CLK (see Figures 369(i) to 369(j)).

After the variable display resumes and a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the display transitions to a "reach" display, as shown in Figure 369(k). In the game round shown in Figure 365, the jackpot result is revealed after a continuous variable display sequence that results in one consecutive display. Specifically, after the "reach" display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display), clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot has been won (see Figure 369(l)).

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, the movable display device 800K is linked to the pattern display device 500K and the auxiliary display device 700K, respectively. By using multiple display devices that are linked to each other, the monotony of the linked performance can be suppressed, thereby effectively enhancing the effect of increasing attention to the game. However, if the number of linked devices is simply increased, it becomes necessary to have the various devices 500K, 700K, and 800K coexist in a limited area, which strengthens the constraints on the operating range of the movable decorative body 801K of the movable display device 800K. Stronger constraints on the operating range are undesirable because they impair the dynamism of the movement and reduce the impact of the linked performance. In this embodiment, the movable decorative body 801K is made displaceable in a direction (horizontal direction) that intersects the parallel arrangement direction (vertical direction) of the pattern display device 00K and the auxiliary display device 700K. Furthermore, the direction in which the movable decorative body 801K (specifically the protruding part 811K) is displaced when executing the second stop-time linked performance linked with the pattern display device 500K is the same as the direction in which the movable decorative body 801K (specifically the protruding part 811K) is displaced when executing the special message display performance linked with the auxiliary display device 700K is the same. This allows for a favorable relaxation of constraints related to the operating range compared to the case where separate operating paths are provided considering the linkage with each display device 500K and 700K. Therefore, the above concerns can be eliminated, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

The movable decorative element 801K is configured to overlap both the pattern display device 500K and the auxiliary display device 700K when positioned at the performance position (for example, the second performance position to the twelfth performance position). When coordinating the movable decorative element and the display devices, overlapping them during synchronized performances enhances the sense of unity. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by configuring the movable decorative element 801K, positioned at the performance position, to overlap both the pattern display device 500K and the auxiliary display device 700K, the aforementioned enhancement of unity can be achieved in both the special message display performance and the second stop synchronized performance.

The driving mode of the movable decorative element 801K when it is displaced from the standby position to the performance position during the special message display effect is different from the driving mode of the movable decorative element 801K when it is displaced from the standby position to the performance position during the second stop-time linked effect. In order to achieve diversification of linked effects by using both the special message display effect and the second presentation-time linked effect, differentiating the driving mode (operation mode) of the movable decorative element 801K when the special message display effect is executed and when the second stop-time linked effect is executed ensures diversity even in the process of displacement to the performance position. This is preferable in preventing the linked effects from becoming obsolete due to the standardization of the displacement direction.

Specifically, the special message display effect is an effect in which the display on the auxiliary display device 700K is sequentially changed to a display mode corresponding to the position of the movable decorative body 801K as the movable decorative body 801K is displaced toward the effect position, and the second stop-time linked effect is an effect in which the display on the pattern display device 500K is changed at the timing when the movable decorative body 801K reaches the effect position. The rotation speed of the movable decorative body 801K is specified to be relatively fast when the second stop-time linked effect is executed, and relatively slow when the special message display effect is executed. For the second stop-time linked effect, the "timing" at which the movable decorative body 801 completes its displacement is a key point of interest, and for the special message display effect, the "period" during which the movable decorative body 801K is displaced is a key point of interest. For the former, by relatively slowing the rotation speed of the movable decorative body 801K, the effect of the effect can be suitably improved by emphasizing the relationship between the movement of the movable decorative body 801K and the change in the display on the auxiliary display device 700K. In contrast, with the latter approach, the rotation speed of the movable decorative element 801K directed towards the performance position can be relatively increased, thereby enhancing the impact of the display change and thus improving the performance effect.

<Variation 1>
In the 40th embodiment described above, the forward movement speed (message display speed) and the return movement speed (message erasure speed) of the movable ornament 801K when the special message display effect is executed are set to the same speed. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and the forward movement speed and the return movement speed may be different. For example, the forward movement speed may be faster than the return movement speed, or the forward movement speed may be slower than the return movement speed.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 40th embodiment described above, examples were given of cases where the special message display effect develops into a continuous variation display effect, and cases where the second stop-time linkage effect develops into a continuous variation display effect, but the destination of the development is arbitrary.

<Example 3>
As a special message display effect, a special display effect is provided in which a first message is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the second display position, a special display effect is provided in which a second message is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the seventh display position, and a special display effect is provided in which a third message is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the twelfth display position. As a second stop-time linkage effect, a linkage effect is provided in which the left symbol column of the symbol display device 500K is stopped when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the second display position, a linkage effect is provided in which the middle symbol column of the symbol display device 500K is stopped when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the seventh display position, and a linkage effect is provided in which the right symbol column of the symbol display device 500K is stopped when the movable decorative body 801K is positioned at the twelfth display position. As shown in this modified example, a second performance position, a seventh performance position, and a twelfth performance position are provided in a direction (horizontal direction) that intersects with the parallel arrangement direction (vertical direction) of the pattern display device 500K and the auxiliary display device 700K, and each of these performance positions can be linked with the pattern display device 500K and the auxiliary display device 700K, thereby further effectively suppressing monotony in the linked performance.

<41st Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the coordinated performance of the pattern display device 500K, the hold display device 600K, the auxiliary display device 700K, and the movable performance device 800K is a distinctive feature. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 370 to 374, focusing on the differences from the 31st embodiment.

As shown in Figure 370(a), in this embodiment, a first stop notification effect is provided as a coordinated effect involving the three components: the pattern display device 500K, the auxiliary display device 700K, and the movable effect device 800K. A sixth type of hold notification effect is also provided as a coordinated effect involving the three components: the hold display device 600K, the auxiliary display device 700K, and the movable effect device 800K. Both the first stop notification effect and the sixth type of hold notification effect share a common flow: the auxiliary display device 700K provides guidance on the effect category → the movable effect device 800K provides guidance on the target → the action is executed on the target (pattern display device 500K, hold display device 600K). The first stop notification effect will now be explained with reference to Figures 370 to 372.

(First stop notification effect)
In the 500K symbol display device, the symbol rows are generally stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row during each game round. In other words, the target of the first stop (first stop) is basically the left symbol row. However, in some game rounds, the right symbol row or the middle symbol row may be the first to be stopped and displayed. In other words, the target of the first stop is not limited to the left symbol row, and the right symbol row or the middle symbol row may also be the target of the first stop. In the following explanation, the stopping pattern when the target of the first stop is the left symbol row will be distinguished as the "normal stopping pattern," and the stopping pattern when the right symbol row or the middle symbol row is the target of the first stop will be distinguished as the "special stopping pattern."

The special stopping patterns are designed to have a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the normal stopping patterns. More specifically, the probability of a jackpot is increased in the order of left symbol column < right symbol column < right symbol column for the first stop. Therefore, it is assumed that players will pay attention to the symbol changes, hoping that the right or middle symbol column will be the target of the first stop (resulting in a special stopping pattern). Incidentally, most special stopping patterns occur after a first stop予告演出 (pre-announcement effect). Now, referring to Figures 371 and 372, the flow of the first stop予告演出 will be explained.

(Flow of the first stop notification sequence)
As shown in Figures 371(a) and 371(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins to change.

When the variable display begins and all symbol sequences continue to display in a variable state, a message (specifically, the word "STOP!") indicating that one of the symbol sequences will stop will be displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K as a message for the first stop notification effect (see Figure 371(c)).

After this message is displayed, the movable ornament 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotation center axis CLK, while maintaining the display of the message. This positions the movable ornament 801K at the designated location for the symbol sequence targeted for the first stop in this first stop notification effect. In sync with this positioning, the symbol sequence targeted for the first stop is displayed in a stopped state. In other words, as soon as the movable ornament 801K stops at the effect position, the display of the symbol sequence specified by the movable ornament 801K also stops.

In the example shown in Figure 371, the target of the first stop is the right-hand pattern row. The movable decorative element 801K stops when it reaches the 11th performance position, and the right-hand pattern row specified by the movable decorative element 801K is displayed. Note that, in this embodiment as well, the relationship between the pattern row and the performance position that designates that pattern row is the same as in the 39th embodiment described above, so the explanation is omitted.

Subsequently, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K disappears, and the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the rotational axis CLK. This returns the movable decorative body 801K from the performance position to the standby position (see Figure 372(e)).

After the movable decorative element 801K returns to its standby position, the right row of symbols stops and transitions to the reach display, as shown in Figure 372(f). In the game round shown in Figure 372, after the reach display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display), clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot has been won (see Figure 372(g)). Next, the sixth type of hold notification effect will be explained.

(Type 6 Reserve Pre-announcement演出)
The sixth type of hold notification effect is one of the explicit hold notification effects, and the corresponding hold symbol is explicitly indicated by changing the display manner of the corresponding hold symbol. Furthermore, the sixth type of hold notification effect is a hold notification effect in which the movable effect device 800K and the hold display device 600K work together, and the corresponding hold symbol is specified by the movable decorative body 801K. Now, with reference to Figures 373 and 374, the flow of the sixth type of hold notification effect will be explained.

(Flow of the Type 6 Hold Notification演出)
As shown in Figures 373(a) and 373(b), at the start of a game round, the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the display of each symbol row that is stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins to change.

When the variable display begins and all symbol rows continue to display in a variable manner, a message (specifically, the words "Reserve Change!") is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K's screen as a message for the sixth type of reserve notification effect, informing the user that the display pattern of one of the reserve symbols will change (see Figure 373(c)).

After this message is displayed, the movable ornament 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK, while maintaining the display of the message. This positions the movable ornament 801K to the designated location for the reserved symbol that was the target of the change in this sixth type reserved symbol notification effect. In sync with this positioning, the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol changes to a special display mode (specifically, "red"). In other words, the display mode of the reserved symbol designated by the movable ornament 801K changes simultaneously with the movable ornament 801K stopping at the effect position.

In the example shown in Figure 373, the held symbol displayed in the second unit held symbol display unit 602bK is the corresponding held symbol, and the movable decorative body 801K stops when it reaches the fourth performance position. At the same time, the display mode of the held symbol specified by the movable decorative body 801K changes from the normal display mode to a special display mode (specifically, "red"). Note that in this embodiment as well, the relationship between the execution target display unit 601K, the held symbol count display unit 602K, and the performance positions that specify them is the same as in the 39th embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

Subsequently, the message displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K disappears, and the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) around the rotational axis CLK. This returns the movable decorative body 801K from the performance position to the standby position (see Figures 374(e) → 374(f)).

After the movable decorative element 801K returns to its standby position, as shown in Figure 374(g), the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display). After the confirmation display ends, the held symbols displayed on the held display device 600K are shifted to the execution target display unit 601K side (left side), and the variable display of each symbol row displayed as stopped on the symbol display device 500K begins.

As shown in this embodiment, by providing multiple types of linked effects and multiple components that are linked to each effect, it is possible to prevent the linked effects from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the enjoyment of the gaming machine. However, if the linked effects become too diverse, the number of linked patterns will increase, potentially confusing players. This is a concern as it may hinder the effect of increasing attention.

In this regard, when a linked performance is executed, the type (category) of the linked performance is first indicated. Since this indication (category indication) is performed before the movement of the movable ornament 801, it is possible to predict (narrow down) the movement of the movable ornament 801K to some extent based on the indicated content. After this indication, the movable ornament 801K moves, and the components (linking patterns) that are linked in the current linked performance are indicated. Thus, with a configuration where category indication by the auxiliary display device 700K → component indication by the movable ornament 801K is performed, players can enjoy the linked performance with a certain degree of understanding, and the above concerns can be effectively alleviated. Therefore, the level of attention given to the game can be effectively increased.

If the components being linked are revealed before the category is taught, the overall picture of the performance may be revealed prematurely based on the relationship between the components and the category. This is a concern as it could diminish the appeal of the linked performance. Therefore, to achieve the above effect, it is preferable, as shown in this embodiment, that the components being linked are not explicitly shown until the type of linked performance is taught by the auxiliary display device 700K and the components being linked are taught by the movable decorative body 801K.

By configuring the system to allow players to simultaneously view the information (category) provided by the auxiliary display device 700K and the information (component) provided by the movable decorative element 801K, it is possible to assist players in understanding the system. Furthermore, instead of completely separating the components targeted by one linked performance from those targeted by other linked performances, even if at least some overlap, the system retains the information provided by the auxiliary display device 700K, thereby effectively avoiding player misunderstanding. In other words, even if the components targeted by each linked performance overlap, the difficulty in understanding the linked performance can be effectively suppressed.

When the auxiliary display device 700K teaches a category, it is undesirable for the player, who is intently watching the teaching, to miss the movement of the movable decorative element 801K (for example, the flow of component designation). Therefore, by configuring the system to teach the category in a portion that overlaps with the operating range of the movable decorative element 801K in the linked performance, the above concern can be suitably resolved.

<Variation 1>
In the 41st embodiment described above, the movable decorative body 801K is operated while a message indicating the operation category (performance category) is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to operate the movable decorative body 801K after the message has been hidden.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 41st embodiment described above, a message indicating the operation category (performance category) is displayed at a position overlapping with the operating area of the movable decorative body 801K. However, the position in which this message is displayed is arbitrary, and it is also possible to display it at a position that does not overlap with the operating area of the movable decorative body 801K. In addition, it is also possible to output the message from the speaker unit 29 instead of displaying it.

<Example 3>
In the sixth type of hold notification effect, a correlation may be established between the color of the message ("Hold Change!") displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K and the display pattern (display color) of the corresponding hold symbol after the change. For example, in the sixth type of hold notification effect, if the color of the corresponding hold symbol is changed to "red" in conjunction with the movable ornament 801K, the displayed message may be shown in "red," and in the sixth type of hold notification effect, if the color of the corresponding hold symbol is changed to "blue" in conjunction with the movable ornament 801K, the displayed message may be shown in "blue."

<Modification 4>
In the sixth type of hold notification effect shown in the 41st embodiment described above, the hold symbol displayed on the execution target display unit 601K may be the target of the change.

<Example 5>
In the first stop notification effect shown in the 41st embodiment described above, the expected probability of a jackpot result differs depending on the sequence of symbols targeted for the first stop, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability of transitioning to a reach display may differ depending on the sequence of symbols targeted for the first stop, or the probability of starting a continuous variation display effect (see the 38th embodiment) may differ depending on the sequence of symbols targeted for the first stop.

<Modification 6>
In this embodiment, the category is indicated by the auxiliary display device 700K. Alternatively, the category can be indicated by the movable performance device 800K (movable decorative body 801K). For example, similar to the movable decorative body 801K shown in the 38th embodiment above, the protruding part 811K can be made of an extendable type, and by setting the protruding part 811K to a first extended state LV1, it is possible to indicate that the linked target is the hold display device 600K, and by setting the protruding part 811K to a second extended state LV2, it is possible to indicate that the linked target is the pattern display device 500K.

<42nd Embodiment>
In the 37th embodiment described above, if it is clearly indicated that the result is a loss after a game round performance with a high expectation of a big win, specifically a second chance-up performance in cooperation with the movable performance device 800K, a fourth type of reserve notification performance is generated to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. In this embodiment as well, efforts have been made to solve the problem of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play when it is clearly indicated that the result is a loss after a game round performance with a high expectation of a big win, similar to the 37th embodiment. However, the specific configuration for solving this problem differs from that of the 37th embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the above improvements, specifically the configuration related to the cooperation of the symbol display device 500K, the auxiliary display device 700K, and the movable performance device 800K, will be described, focusing on the differences from the 37th embodiment.

In this embodiment, two performance modes are provided for each game round: a normal performance mode and a special performance mode. In the special performance mode, the auxiliary display device 700K indicates information correlated with the reach display (specifically, the possible development of the reach display, i.e., the probability of a big win) in any game round in which a reach display occurs. If a super reach corresponding to a losing result is executed during the normal performance mode, the performance mode switches from the normal performance mode to the special performance mode, triggered by a part of this event. The performance mode switching process, executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, will now be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 375. The performance mode switching process is executed as part of the periodic process for ending the variation (see step S1306A in Figure 290).

(Processing for switching between performance modes)
In the process for switching the performance mode, first, in step S2101A, it is determined whether the current performance mode is a special performance mode. If the result in step S2101A is negative, the process proceeds to step S2102A. In step S2102A, it is determined whether it is the end of the game round corresponding to the display of a losing super reach. If the result in step S2102A is negative, the process for switching the performance mode ends. If the result in step S2102A is positive, the process proceeds to step S2103A. In step S2103A, it is determined whether a subsequent hold has been secured. If the result in step S2103A is negative, the process for switching the performance mode ends. If the result in step S2103A is positive, the process proceeds to step S2104A.

In step S2104A, a special performance mode transition lottery process is executed. This lottery process is configured such that the winning probability differs depending on whether the executed super reach and subsequent reserves contain items corresponding to the jackpot result. Specifically, the winning probability increases in the order of Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C < Super Reach linked with the movable performance device 800K (hereinafter referred to as Special Super Reach), and the winning probability is higher when subsequent reserves contain items corresponding to the jackpot result than when they do not.

If the lottery process in step S2104A results in a non-win, a negative determination is made in step S2105A, and the process for switching to this performance mode ends there. If the lottery process in step S2104A results in a win, a positive determination is made in step S2105A, the processes in steps S2106A to S2107A are executed, and then the process for switching to this performance mode ends.

Step S2106A executes a transition process to a special effect mode. Upon execution of this transition process, the words "READY!" are displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K (see Figure 376(a)). This display continues until a predetermined condition is met, at which point the display switches to an image resembling a school of blue fish (see Figure 376(b)). Then, in conjunction with the display of the image resembling a school of fish, the protruding parts 811K (second light-emitting part 812K and third light-emitting part 813K) of the movable decorative body 801K illuminate (light up) in red.

When an image resembling a school of fish is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K's screen, a "reach" indicator will appear during either the current game round or a subsequent game round related to a stored hold. When the above predetermined conditions are met, the image will switch at either the start of the game round related to the hold corresponding to the reach indicator, or at the start of an earlier game round; however, the timing of this switch is random.

The image of a school of fish displayed on the 700K auxiliary display screen scrolls from left to right across the screen. The number of fish images constituting the scrolling school of fish is specified to remain constant at all points during the scrolling display.

When a reach display (normal reach, super reach, special super reach) occurs during the special performance mode, the above scrolling display is temporarily stopped, and the movable decorative body 801K of the movable performance device 800K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK. This rotation causes the protruding part 811K of the movable decorative body 801K to divide the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K (specifically, the display area showing an image resembling a school of fish) into left and right halves. In this display area, the color of the fish images located to the left of the protruding part 811K is changed from blue to the same color as the protruding part 811K of the movable decorative body 801K ("red"). In other words, red fish images are displayed to the left of the protruding part 811K, and blue fish images are displayed to the right of the protruding part 811K (see Figure 377(a)). In this embodiment, the proportion of red fish images among the numerous fish images displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K indicates the likelihood of a big win (more specifically, the potential outcome).

As shown in Figure 377(b), when the movable ornament 801K stops at a position where the rotation angle = first angle ANG1, approximately 30% of the fish images displayed on the screen turn red. In this display configuration, the next development will be a normal reach or higher. When the movable ornament 801K stops at a position where the rotation angle = second angle ANG2 (a larger angle than the first angle ANG1), approximately 65% of the fish images displayed on the screen turn red. In this display configuration, the next development will be a super reach or higher. When the movable ornament 801K stops at a position where the rotation angle = third angle ANG3 (a larger angle than the second angle ANG2), approximately 80% of the fish images displayed on the screen turn red. In this display configuration, the next development will be a special super reach or higher. When the movable ornament 801K stops at a position where its rotation angle equals the fourth angle ANG4 (a larger angle than the third angle ANG3), all the fish images displayed on the screen turn red. This display configuration indicates a guaranteed jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 375, step S2107A performs a process to restrict some linked effects. As mentioned above, when a reach display occurs in the special effect mode, the movable effect device 800K will operate. Therefore, the process restricts the occurrence of linked effects by the movable effect device 800K between the start of the game and the timing of development to a super reach, etc.

Returning to the explanation of step S2101A, if a positive result is obtained in step S2101A, that is, if the current performance mode is the special performance mode, the process proceeds to step S2108A. In step S2108A, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the game round corresponding to the reach display has ended. If a negative result is obtained in step S2108A, the process for switching the performance mode ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S2108A, the process proceeds to step S2109A. In step S2109A, the process for transitioning to the normal performance mode is performed. In other words, the performance mode switches to the normal performance mode when the game round related to the reach display ends during the special performance mode. After that, the linked performance is canceled in step S2110A, and then the process for switching the performance mode ends.

Here, referring to the schematic diagrams in Figures 378 to 381, we will explain the transition to the special performance mode and the flow of gameplay within the special performance mode. Figures 378 to 381 illustrate a case where the performance mode switches from the normal performance mode to the special performance mode after a super reach corresponding to a losing result is executed, and a jackpot result occurs in the second game round after the execution of the super reach.

(Flow of special effects mode)
In Figure 378(a), the display of changing symbols has begun. This round corresponds to a losing result, and after the super reach shown in Figure 378(b), the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 378(c)). Just before the confirmation display for this round ends, the word "READY!" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K to indicate the transition to the special performance mode. At this point, four reserved symbols are stored, and the third of these four reserved symbols corresponds to the reach display.

For the first game round immediately following the transition to the special effects mode, the game corresponds to a losing result (complete miss) where the reach display is not supported. Therefore, as shown in Figures 378(d) to 379(e), the "READY!" text will continue to be displayed during that game round.

The next game round will also result in a loss (complete miss) without a reach display, but at the start of this round, the display on the auxiliary display device 700K switches from the text "READY!" (still image) to an image of a school of fish (moving image) (see Figure 379(f)). This suggests that a reach display will occur in this game round or a subsequent game round. The image of the school of fish scrolls from left to right at a predetermined speed (slow).

Subsequently, as shown in Figures 379(g) and 379(h), the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed without going through the reach display, and after the confirmation display time has elapsed, the next game round begins. This newly started game round corresponds to the reach display, and at the timing of the transition from the left symbol's stop display to the reach display, the movable decorative element 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK (see Figure 380(i)). In accordance with this movement of the movable decorative element 801K, the color of the fish image located to the left of the protruding part 811K of the movable decorative element 801K is sequentially changed from blue to red. Then, at the timing when the rotation angle of the movable decorative element 801K reaches the second angle ANG2, the movable decorative element 801K stops, and the scrolling display of the image resembling a school of fish stops. Then, at the timing when the movable decorative element 801K stops, the right symbol column stops, and the game transitions to the reach display.

Furthermore, the rotational speed of the movable decorative element 801K is specified so that the movement speed of the protruding part 811K is faster than the scrolling speed of the image resembling a fish.

As shown in Figures 380(i) and 380(j), at a predetermined timing after the transition to the reach display, the movable decorative element 801K rotates further in the first direction (clockwise) around the rotational axis CLK. In accordance with this movement of the movable decorative element 801K, the image resembling a school of fish, which was previously displayed as stationary, also scrolls in the same direction. At this point, when the movable decorative element 801K reaches the preparation position, it stops, but the scrolling display of the fish image continues, and subsequent images are not displayed, thus ending the display of the fish image on the auxiliary display device 700K. The rotation speed of the movable decorative element 801K when rotating towards the standby position is specified so that the movement speed of the protruding part 811K is the same as the scrolling speed of the fish image.

After the display of the image resembling a school of fish on the auxiliary display device 700K has finished, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise) and returns from the ready position to the standby position. On the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K, when the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K passes through the central part of the display screen, a character image corresponding to the super reach (a female character image in Figure 381(m)) is displayed in that central part.

After that, following a Super Reach, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) (see Figure 381(n)).

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, an image resembling a school of fish (corresponding to a "special image") may be displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K (corresponding to a "special display unit"), which is installed alongside the pattern display device 500K. This separate image is displayed so as to overlap with the operating area of the movable decorative body 801K during the linked performance. When the linked performance is executed while this image is displayed, the image resembling a school of fish changes in accordance with the movement of the movable decorative body 801K. In other words, under the special conditions described above, the linked target of the movable decorative body 801K can be extended to the auxiliary display device 700K. By achieving such an innovative linkage, the effect of increasing attention to the game can be effectively realized.

When the linked animation is executed while an image resembling a school of fish is displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K, the image is changed to an image that suggests a high probability of a jackpot. This configuration effectively enhances the coordination between the movable decorative body 801K, the symbol display device 500K, and the auxiliary display device 700K.

In a system where a significant change in the image, resembling a school of fish, increases the expectation of a jackpot, it is assumed that players hoping for a jackpot will pay close attention to the animation, anticipating a major image change. Thus, linking the degree of change with the level of expectation effectively enhances the impact of a significant image change.

<Variation 1>
In the 42nd embodiment described above, when the display on the auxiliary display device 700K changes from the words "READY!" to an image resembling a school of fish, the occurrence of a reach display is confirmed in either the current game round or a subsequent game round related to a stored hold. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system so that the transition to a reach display is not confirmed even when an image resembling a school of fish is displayed. In this case, if a predetermined number of game rounds are played after the image resembling fish is displayed without a reach display occurring, the display is changed back to the words "READY!".

<Modified Example 2>
In the 42nd embodiment described above, the scrolling direction (rightward) of the image resembling a school of fish displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K and the movement direction (rightward) of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K when changing the color of the fish image are specified to be the same direction, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The scrolling direction (rightward) of the image resembling a school of fish displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K and the movement direction (rightward) of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K when changing the color of the fish image may be specified to be opposite directions.

<Example 3>
In the 42nd embodiment described above, the scrolling display of the fish image is stopped when the color change of the fish image displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K is completed, that is, when the rotation of the movable decorative body 801K stops. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The scrolling display of the fish image may continue even when the rotation of the movable decorative body 801K stops.

<Modification 4>
In the 42nd embodiment described above, a difference was made so that the movement speed of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K when it passes in front of the image resembling a school of fish was faster than the scrolling speed of the image resembling a school of fish. However, this may be changed as follows. That is, the movement speed of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K when it passes in front of the image resembling a school of fish may be set to be the same as the scrolling speed of the image resembling a school of fish. Alternatively, a difference may be made so that the movement speed of the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative body 801K when it passes in front of the image resembling a school of fish is slower than the scrolling speed of the image resembling a school of fish. When adopting these modifications, it is preferable to change the color of the fish image when the protruding portion 811K stops at a predetermined position, rather than gradually changing the color of the fish image in accordance with the movement of the protruding portion 811K.

<Example 5>
In the 42nd embodiment described above, the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K is switched from the words "READY!" to an image resembling a school of fish in a game round prior to the game round in which the reach is displayed, but the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K to be switched from the words "READY!" to an image resembling a school of fish only in the game round in which the reach is displayed.

<Modification 6>
The special performance mode described in the 42nd embodiment above is configured to terminate when the number of game rounds related to the reach display is executed, but it is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure it to terminate when the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the special performance mode reaches the upper limit.

<43rd Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the continuous variation display effect differs from that of the 38th embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 38th embodiment, with reference to Figure 382.

In the 38th embodiment, the pattern display device 500K consisted of three pattern rows: a left pattern row, a middle pattern row, and a right pattern row, with the display direction (scroll direction) of each pattern row being vertical. In contrast, the pattern display device 500L shown in this embodiment consists of three pattern rows: an upper pattern row, a middle pattern row, and a lower pattern row, with the display direction (scroll direction) of each pattern row being horizontal. More specifically, each pattern row is configured to scroll from left to right.

In this embodiment as well, a continuous variation display effect occurs during gameplay. In this continuous variation display effect, just before the third stopping symbol row (the middle symbol row in the example shown in Figure 382) stops, the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the first direction (clockwise), causing the protruding portion 811K to pass in front of the symbol display device 500L from left to right. More specifically, each symbol row is decelerated before stopping, switching from high-speed scrolling display to low-speed scrolling display. The movable decorative body 801K is configured to rotate in the first direction just before the middle symbol row stops in low-speed scrolling display mode.

The movement speed of the protruding portion 811K is faster than the display speed of the middle symbol row. Specifically, it is the same speed as the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row before it was decelerated, and each symbol row is accelerated to follow the protruding portion 811K. As a result, the display mode of the middle symbol row, which was just before stopping, and the display modes of the upper and lower symbol rows, which were stopped, become high-speed scrolling displays again.

Although not shown in the illustration, the auxiliary display device 700K in this embodiment is configured to display an image resembling a flower field over multiple game rounds. When the movable decorative body 801K rotates in the first direction, moving from the standby position to the preparation position, the display screen of the auxiliary display device 700K displays the blue text "NEXT!" instead of the image resembling a flower field. In other words, the display content of the auxiliary display device 700K is updated in accordance with the movement of the protruding part 811K.

In this embodiment, the color of the "NEXT!" text changes according to the number of consecutive occurrences, indicating the number of consecutive occurrences. Specifically, it changes to blue for 1 consecutive occurrence, yellow for 2 consecutive occurrences, red for 3 consecutive occurrences, and rainbow colors for 4 consecutive occurrences.

Subsequently, while all the pattern rows are scrolling, the movable decorative element 801K rotates in the second direction (counterclockwise), returning from the ready position to the standby position. During this return movement, the protruding portion 811K of the movable decorative element 801K crosses in front of the "NEXT!" text displayed on the auxiliary display device 700K's screen. The rotation speed of the movable decorative element 801K during this return movement is slower than its rotation speed during the forward movement.

In this case, the color of the "NEXT!" text generally remains the same, but the "NEXT!" text may change to a higher color (red in Figure 382(d)) in the order of "!" → "T" → "X" → "E" → "N" in accordance with the movement of the protruding part 811K. In this way, by stepping up the color of the text before the number of consecutive occurrences increases, the configuration allows for an advance indication of how long the continuous variation display will continue.

Furthermore, if the color of the "NEXT!" text changes first, the main body 810K (first light-emitting part 810K) of the movable decorative unit 801K emits light in the same color as the "NEXT!" text, thereby preventing the user from missing the color change of the "NEXT!" text.

<Variation 1>
In the 43rd embodiment described above, the movable decorative element 801K is operated immediately before the third stop to transition all rows of symbols to high-speed scrolling display in conjunction with the movable decorative element 801K. However, it is also possible to configure the system to temporarily stop displaying all rows of symbols before transitioning to high-speed scrolling display.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 43rd embodiment described above, the movement speed of the protrusion 811K when the movable decorative body 801K is rotated in the first direction is specified to be the same as the scrolling speed of the pattern row during high-speed scrolling. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The movement speed of the protrusion 811K when the movable decorative body 801K is rotated in the first direction only needs to be faster than the scrolling speed during low-speed scrolling, and it may be slower or faster than the scrolling speed during high-speed scrolling.

<Example 3>
In the 43rd embodiment described above, the rotation speed when rotating the movable decorative body 801K in the second direction on the return journey is slower than the rotation speed when rotating it in the first direction on the forward journey, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The rotation speed on the forward journey and the rotation speed on the return journey may be the same, or the rotation speed on the return journey may be faster than the rotation speed on the forward journey.

<44th Embodiment>
The following describes in detail, based on the drawings, a 44th embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of amusement machine. Figure 383 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 384 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded view. For convenience, the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 384. Incidentally, in the following description, even components that are assigned the same reference numerals as in the above embodiments will be treated as unique reference numerals in this embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main unit 12 that is rotatably mounted forward to the outer frame 11. The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10; the outer frame 11 may be installed on the island equipment of the gaming hall.

As shown in Figure 384, the main unit of the gaming machine 12 comprises an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 positioned in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 positioned behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main unit 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in a front view, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported within the inner frame 13, allowing it to rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the rear pack unit 15 is rotatably supported within the inner frame 13, allowing it to rotate backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body of the gaming machine 12 is equipped with a locking device at its rotating tip. This device has the function of locking the main body 12 to the outer frame 11, preventing it from being opened, and also locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, preventing it from being opened. These locking states can be released by using an unlocking key to unlock the cylinder lock 78, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the main unit 12 of the gaming machine will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost identical to that of the outer frame 11. A roughly oval-shaped window opening 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window opening 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on Figure 385. Figure 385 is a front view of the game board 24.

(Game board 24)
The game board 24 is fitted with an inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 so as to demarcate a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and these inner rail section 25 and outer rail section 26 constitute a guide rail that serves as a guide means. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27, which is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, are guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 comprises a launching rail 27a extending toward a guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 66a (described later) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation of the launching operation device (or launching handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, thereby launching the game balls.

The game board 24 has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in the front-to-back direction, formed by router processing. Each opening is provided with a general prize entry point 31, a variable prize entry device 32, a first operation opening (or first starting ball entry point) 33, a second operation opening (or second starting ball entry point) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special symbol display unit 37 as the main display unit, and a general symbol display unit 38 as the prize display unit. Note that there are multiple general prize entry points 31, variable prize entry devices 32, and first operation openings 33.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are dispensed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general prize entry point 31, the variable prize entry device 32, the first operation opening 33, or the second operation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed. Specifically, if a ball enters the first operation opening 33, three prize balls are dispensed; if a ball enters the second operation opening 34, one prize ball is dispensed; if a ball enters the general prize entry point 31, ten prize balls are dispensed; and if a ball enters the variable prize entry device 32, ten prize balls are dispensed.

However, the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 may be the same as the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34, or the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 may be less than the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34. Furthermore, the number of prize balls for each of the multiple first operating ports 33 may differ. Additionally, the number of prize balls related to at least one variable prize-winning device 32 may be the same as or less than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports, etc. The number of prize balls for each of the multiple variable prize-winning devices 32 may also differ.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various prize slots are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 24a. Furthermore, the game board 24 is equipped with numerous nails 24b to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction of the game balls' descent, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills.

Here, "ball entry" refers to a game ball passing through a predetermined opening, and includes not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the mode in which the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of a game ball into the out opening 24a, the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 31, the variable prize device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34, and the through gate 35 will also be expressed as "prize entry."

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central part of the game area PE. Because the peripheral edge (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, the area through which the game balls launched into the game area PE can flow is defined. Specifically, the game area PE is divided into an upper area PE1, which is above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36; a left area PE2, which is continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the left of the variable display unit 36; a right area PE3, which is continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36; and a lower area PE4, which is continuous below both the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 and below the variable display unit 36.

When a player performs a first launch operation by rotating the launching device 28 with a rotation amount within a first range that is less than the standard rotation amount, the game ball will start to flow down to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper region PE1 → left region PE2 → lower region PE4. On the other hand, when a player performs a second launch operation by rotating the launching device 28 with a rotation amount within a second range that is greater than or equal to the standard rotation amount, the game ball will start to flow down to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper region PE1 → right region PE3 → lower region PE4. In other words, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the launching device 28, the player can play the game so that the game balls flow down the left-side area PE2, or so that they flow down the right-side area PE3.

Of the multiple first operating ports 33, the lower first operating port 33A is installed in the lower region PE4. The lower first operating port 33A is open upwards, and no opening or closing mechanism is provided. Under conditions where game balls are launched in the same manner, the probability of a ball entering the lower first operating port 33A remains constant regardless of the game state. Furthermore, the lower first operating port 33A is positioned directly below the stage formed in the variable display unit 36. Game balls that flow onto the stage via the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36 and are discharged from the center of the stage outside the variable display unit 36 are more likely to enter the lower first operating port 33A. A detection sensor 330 is provided in the lower first operating port 33A, and this detection sensor 330 detects game balls that have entered the lower first operating port 33A.

Here, as described above, since the lower first operating port 33A is provided in the lower region PE4, it is possible for the game ball to enter the lower first operating port 33A whether the launching device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2 or so that the game ball flows down the right region PE3. However, since the entrance to the guidance passage to the stage is provided for the left region PE2 but not for the right region PE3, it is easier for the game ball to enter the lower first operating port 33A when it flows down the left region PE2 compared to when it flows down the right region PE3. In addition, the arrangement of game components and nails 24b in the left region PE2 and the right region PE3 is set so that it is easier for the game ball to enter the lower first operating port 33A when it flows down the left region PE2 compared to when it flows down the right region PE3. Furthermore, it is set so that game balls flowing down the right region PE3 are almost never able to enter the lower first operating port 33A. In other words, the lower first operating port 33A is positioned in such a location that it is easier to enter the target when the launch control device 28 is operated during the first launch operation than when it is operated during the second launch operation.

Of the multiple first operating ports 33, the right first operating port 33B is located in the right-side area PE3. When the launching device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left-side area PE2, entry into the right first operating port 33B is impossible. However, when the launching device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right-side area PE3, entry into the right first operating port 33B is possible. In other words, the right first operating port 33B is positioned such that it is easier to enter the ball using the second launching operation of the launching device 28 than using the first launching operation.

The configuration of the right first operating port 33B will be explained with reference to Figure 386. Figures 386(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the longitudinal cross-section of the right first operating port 33B.

The right first operating port 33B is an opening large enough for game balls to pass through when opened in the front-to-back direction. The right first operating port 33B is equipped with an electric mechanism 331 that can switch between an open state that makes it easy for game balls to enter the right first operating port 33B and a closed state that makes it difficult or impossible for game balls to enter. More specifically, the electric mechanism 331 consists of an opening/closing mechanism 332 that defines the movement of game balls in the front-to-back direction in the right first operating port 33B, and a receiving mechanism 333 that receives game balls flowing down from above the right first operating port 33B from below and guides them towards the right first operating port 33B (rear of the game machine). The opening/closing mechanism 332 has an opening/closing member 334 that can switch between a closed state, where game balls cannot pass through the right first operating opening 33B, and an open state, where game balls can pass through. The opening/closing mechanism 332 is driven by a drive unit 335 via a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between the open and closed states. When the opening/closing member 334 is in the open state, it is positioned behind the right first operating opening 33B (the front of the game board 24), and more specifically, above the ball discharge passage leading from the right first operating opening 33B. When the opening/closing member 334 is in the closed state, it blocks the right first operating opening 33B and becomes flush with the front of the game board 24. In other words, regardless of whether the opening/closing member 334 is positioned in the open or closed state, it does not protrude forward beyond the front of the game board 24.

The receiving mechanism 333 includes a receiving member 336 that can be switched between a receiving state, which receives only one game ball flowing down from above the right first operation opening 33B and guides the received game ball to the right first operation opening 33B, and a non-receiving state, which is unable to receive game balls flowing down from above. The receiving member 336 is switched between the receiving state and the non-receiving state by being driven by a drive unit 337 through a link mechanism (not shown). When the receiving member 336 is in the receiving state, it protrudes forward from the right first operation opening 33B (the front of the game board 24) and is able to receive only one game ball flowing down from above. On the other hand, when the receiving member 336 is in the non-receiving state, it is positioned behind the right first operation opening 33B (the front of the game board 24), and more specifically, it is positioned at the bottom of the ball discharge passage leading from the right first operation opening 33B. In other words, when the receiving member 336 is in the receiving position, it protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the game board 24, and when it is not in the receiving position, it is positioned behind the front surface of the game board 24.

In the following explanation, the state in which the opening/closing mechanism 332 is in the open position and the receiving mechanism 333 is in the receiving position is also referred to as the support state of the electric mechanism 331, and the state in which the opening/closing mechanism 332 is in the closed position and the receiving mechanism 333 is in the non-receiving position is also referred to as the non-support state of the electric mechanism 331. When the electric mechanism 331 is in the support state, ball entry into the right first operating opening 33B is permitted, and when the electric mechanism 331 is in the non-support state, ball entry into the right first operating opening 33B is restricted. In other words, when the electric mechanism 331 is in the support state, the rate of ball entry into the right first operating opening 33B improves, and when the electric mechanism 331 is in the non-support state, the rate of ball entry into the right first operating opening 33B decreases.

Here, when the electric mechanism 331 is in the support state, the receiving member 336 can only receive one game ball flowing down from above, and that game ball is guided to the rear of the game board 24. In other words, when the electric mechanism 331 is in the support state, only one game ball is allowed to enter the right first operating port 33B; no more than that is permitted. This prevents the rate of balls entering the right first operating port 33B from becoming too high when the electric mechanism 331 is in the support state. Furthermore, by limiting the number of balls that can enter to one when in the support state, the phenomenon of multiple balls entering at once is avoided, allowing the ball entry rate to be achieved as designed, and also reducing the difference in ball entry rates between the support state and the non-support state.

Furthermore, because the opening/closing mechanism 332 and receiving mechanism 333 in the right first operating port 33B and the electric mechanism 331 are configured as described above, when the electric mechanism 331 is in a non-supported state, the flow of game balls in front of the right first operating port 33B is not obstructed by the right first operating port 33B or the electric mechanism 331. In other words, when the electric mechanism 331 is in a supported state, game balls flowing in front of the right first operating port 33B are guided to the right first operating port 33B by the electric mechanism 331, but when it is in a non-supported state, they flow downstream of the right first operating port 33B without interference from the electric mechanism 331. Therefore, when the electric mechanism 331 is in a non-supported state, the ball entry rate at the downstream ball entry point can be expected to be as designed, without interference from the electric mechanism 331.

Furthermore, in terms of changing the rate of ball entry into the right first operating port 33B, the configuration is not limited to the above-described electric mechanism 331, and other configurations are also possible, for example, the configuration of an existing electric tulip. Moreover, the switching between a state where ball entry is more likely and a state where ball entry is less likely may be performed by a change in the right first operating port 33B itself. Alternatively, the right first operating port 33B may be an opening that opens in the front-to-back direction, and the forward/backward movement of the game ball may be permitted/restricted by the opening/closing of an opening/closing member, thereby permitting/restricting ball entry into the right first operating port 33B.

In the ball discharge passage leading from the right first operation opening 33B, a detection sensor 338 is installed at a position where game balls are guaranteed to pass. This detection sensor 338 detects game balls that have entered the right first operation opening 33B.

In the right-side area PE3, a through gate 35 is provided upstream of the right first operating port 33B. That is, when the launching device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left-side area PE2 (when the first launching operation is performed), entry into the through gate 35 is impossible. However, when the launching device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right-side area PE3 (when the second launching operation is performed), entry into the through gate 35 is possible. The through gate 35 has a vertically penetrating through-hole (not shown), and game balls that enter the through gate 35 flow down the game area PE after entering. This allows game balls that enter the through gate 35 to enter the downstream entry point (for example, the right first operating port 33B). A detection sensor 35a is provided in the through gate 35, and this detection sensor 35a detects game balls that have entered the through gate 35.

Based on the ball entering the through gate 35, the electric mechanism 331 in the right first operating port 33B is switched from a non-supported state to a supported state. Specifically, an internal lottery is conducted triggered by the ball entering the through gate 35, and the pattern changes are displayed on the general display unit 38 located in the lower right corner of the game board 24, which is an area outside the game area PE where game balls do not pass. If the result of the internal lottery is a support win and the corresponding stop result is displayed and the pattern change display ends, the system transitions to support execution mode. In support execution mode, the electric mechanism 331 enters a support state in a predetermined manner.

The general-purpose display unit 38 is configured as a segment display unit in which multiple segment light-emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, an organic EL display unit, a CRT or dot matrix display unit, or other types of display devices. Furthermore, the patterns displayed in the general-purpose display unit 38 may include configurations in which multiple types of characters are displayed in a variable manner, configurations in which multiple types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner, configurations in which multiple types of characters are displayed in a variable manner, or configurations in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed.

Furthermore, a regular ball hold display unit 41 is provided adjacent to the regular ball display unit 38. Up to four game balls are held when they enter the through gate 35, and the number of held balls is displayed by the illumination of the regular ball hold display unit 41.

In the right-side region PE3, a second operating port 34 is provided downstream of the right first operating port 33B. The second operating port 34 is open upwards, and no opening or closing mechanism is provided. Under the same conditions, the probability of a ball entering the second operating port 34 remains constant regardless of the game state. However, as described above, since the right first operating port 33B is located upstream of the second operating port 34, the probability of a ball entering the second operating port 34 is lower in conditions where it is easier for a ball to enter the right first operating port 33B (when the electric mechanism 331 is providing support) compared to conditions where it is more difficult for a ball to enter the right first operating port 33B (when the electric mechanism 331 is not providing support). A detection sensor 340 is provided in the second operating port 34, and this sensor detects when a ball enters the second operating port 34.

A jackpot lottery is triggered by a ball entering the first operating port 33 (lower first operating port 33A, right first operating port 33B) or the second operating port 34. The lottery results are then clearly displayed through the display effects on the special display unit 37 and the symbol display device 42 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special display unit 37, it is provided with a first special display unit 37a and a second special display unit 37b. In the first special display unit 37a, a jackpot lottery is conducted triggered by a ball entering the first operating port 33 (either the lower first operating port 33A or the right first operating port 33B), resulting in a display of changing symbols or a predetermined display. The result corresponding to the lottery is then displayed. Similarly, in the second special display unit 37b, a jackpot lottery is conducted triggered by a ball entering the second operating port 34, resulting in a display of changing symbols or a predetermined display. The result corresponding to the lottery is then displayed.

The first special display unit 37a and the second special display unit 37b are configured as segment displays in which multiple segment light-emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but are not limited to this. They may also be configured as other types of display devices such as liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, CRTs, or dot matrix displays. Furthermore, the patterns displayed in the first special display unit 37a and the second special display unit 37b may include configurations that display multiple types of characters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors.

Regarding the pattern display device 42 in detail, it is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and its display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 42 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device; it may be other display devices with a display screen, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or it may be a dot matrix display device.

In the symbol display device 42, when a winning combination is made into either of the first operating ports 33 (lower first operating port 33A or right first operating port 33B), the first special symbol display unit 37a will display a changing pattern or a predetermined display accordingly. Similarly, when a winning combination is made into the second operating port 34, the second special symbol display unit 37b will display a changing pattern or a predetermined display accordingly. Furthermore, the symbol display device 42 performs not only display effects triggered by winning combinations into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode when a jackpot is won.

The display content when the pattern changes are displayed on the pattern display device 42 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 387. Figure 387 shows the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42.

The patterns, a type of design, consist of nine main patterns, each numbered from "1" to "9," and secondary patterns, which are shell-shaped illustrations. More specifically, the main patterns are composed of nine different character patterns, such as octopuses, each numbered from "1" to "9."

As shown in Figure 387(a), the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 as multiple display areas: upper, middle, and lower. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is composed of main and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 has nine main patterns, "1" to "9," arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern placed between each main pattern. The lower pattern row Z3 has nine main patterns, "1" to "9," arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern placed between each main pattern.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols each. In contrast, the middle symbol row Z2 has nine main symbols arranged in ascending order from "1" to "9," with an additional main symbol "4" placed between the "9" and "1" symbols. Each of these main symbols is then flanked by one sub-symbol. Therefore, the middle symbol row Z2 consists of 10 main symbols, totaling 20 symbols.

As shown in Figure 387(b), the display screen 42a displays three symbols for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5(a), the display screen 42a has five active lines: the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5.

When a symbol variation is displayed on the display screen 42a based on a prize being awarded to the first or second operation port 33, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 begin to scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. Then, the display switches from variation to standby in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 displayed statically. Furthermore, when the symbol variation display ends, if it corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode described later, and if the system is set to the high-frequency support mode described later after the opening/closing execution mode, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines. If it corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode described later, and if the system is set to the low-frequency support mode described later after the opening/closing execution mode, the same even-numbered symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines.

Furthermore, based on a winning entry into either of the operating ports 33 or 34, the display on either of the special display units 37a or 37b and the symbol display device 42 begins, and the period until the predetermined result is displayed and the display ends constitutes one game round. The manner in which the symbols are displayed in the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary; the number of symbol rows, the direction of symbol display in each row, and the number of symbols in each row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the symbols displayed in the symbol display device 42 are not limited to the symbols described above; for example, a configuration where only numbers are displayed as symbols is also possible.

At the bottom of the display screen 42a, there are special symbol hold display areas Ga for the first operation port 33 and Gb for the second operation port 34. The special symbol hold display area Ga for the first operation port is provided with a number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 arranged horizontally, corresponding to the maximum number of holdable balls when a game ball enters the first operation port 33. Specifically, the maximum number of holdable balls when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 is 4, and correspondingly, the special symbol hold display area Ga is set with the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4.

The special symbol hold display area Gb for the second operation port is provided with a number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 arranged horizontally, corresponding to the maximum number of holdable balls when a game ball enters the second operation port 34. Specifically, the maximum number of holdable balls when a game ball enters the second operation port 34 is 4, and correspondingly, the special symbol hold display area Gb is set with the first unit hold display area Gb1, the second unit hold display area Gb2, the third unit hold display area Gb3, and the fourth unit hold display area Gb4.

Each of these areas displays one hold icon (a hold symbol or hold image).

Furthermore, at the bottom of the display screen 42a, the execution target display areas GA and GB are set in parallel with the special symbol hold display areas Ga and Gb. The execution target display area GA for the first operation port displays information corresponding to the game round hold information in the currently running first special symbol display unit 37a. The execution target display area GB for the second operation port displays a hold icon corresponding to the game round hold information in the currently running second special symbol display unit 37b.

In this pachinko machine 10, the game rounds in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the game rounds in the second special symbol display unit 37b may be executed in parallel. Specifically, if the game rounds in the first special symbol display unit 37a based on a win in the first operation port 33 and the game rounds in the second special symbol display unit 37b based on a win in the second operation port 34 overlap, the game rounds in each special symbol display unit 37a and 37b of the special symbol display unit 37 will be executed in parallel. On the other hand, the game rounds based on the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 will be executed in accordance with the game rounds of either the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. In other words, although the game rounds in the respective special symbol display units 37a and 37b are executed overlappingly, the game rounds in the symbol display device 42 are executed in such a way that they correspond to only one of the game rounds being executed overlappingly in the special symbol display units 37a and 37b.

Furthermore, on the front side of the variable display unit 36, below the pattern display device 42, a special symbol hold display unit 43 is provided, as shown in Figure 385. The special symbol hold display unit 43 comprises a first special symbol hold display unit 43a and a second special symbol hold display unit 43b. The first special symbol hold display unit 43a corresponds to the first operation port 33, and the second special symbol hold display unit 43b corresponds to the second operation port 34. Up to four game balls are held when they enter the first operation port 33 (lower first operation port 33A or right first operation port 33B), and the number of held balls is displayed by the illumination of the first special symbol hold display unit 43a. Similarly, up to four game balls are held when they enter the second operation port 34, and the number of held balls is displayed by the illumination of the second special symbol hold display unit 43b.

Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for the first and second operation ports 33 is not limited to the four mentioned above; it may be more or less. Also, it is not necessary for the maximum number of reserved balls for the first and second operation ports 33 to be the same; they may be different. Additionally, at least one of the first and second operation ports 33 may be configured so that the number of balls won is not reserved. In these cases, the special feature reserved ball display unit 43 should be provided accordingly, depending on the number of reserved balls (or whether or not they are reserved).

If a jackpot is won in the lottery based on a ball entering the first or second operating port 33, the system switches to an opening/closing execution mode in which a ball can enter the variable prize device 32. The variable prize device 32 is located in the right-side area PE3, downstream of the through gate 35 and upstream of the right first operating port 33B. In other words, the variable prize device 32 cannot enter a prize when the launching operation device 28 is operated to allow the game ball to flow down the left-side area PE2 (when the first launching operation is performed), but it can enter a prize when the launching operation device 28 is operated to allow the game ball to flow down the right-side area PE3 (when the second launching operation is performed). The variable prize device 32 is provided with a first variable prize device 32A and a second variable prize device 32B, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable prize devices 32A and 32B, which are opened at predetermined timings, are switched between. The first variable prize-winning device 32A and the second variable prize-winning device 32B are arranged such that the first variable prize-winning device 32A is upstream of the second variable prize-winning device 32B.

First, the first variable prize-winning device 32A will be explained with reference to Figure 388. Figures 388(a) and (b) are longitudinal cross-sectional views of the first variable prize-winning device 32A.

The first variable prize winning device 32A has a large prize winning opening (or special prize winning opening) 321 that is open in the front-to-back direction and large enough for game balls to pass through. It also includes an opening/closing member 322 that switches the large prize winning opening 321 between a closed state where game balls cannot pass and an open state where game balls can pass. The opening/closing member 322 is driven by a drive unit 323 through a link mechanism (not shown) to open. Furthermore, the first variable prize winning device 32A has a prize passing section 324 formed at a position through which game balls that enter the device 32A via the large prize winning opening 321 will always pass. A detection sensor 325 for the large prize winning opening is provided such that a detection area exists at the location of the prize passing section 324. The detection sensor 325 for the large prize winning opening individually detects game balls that enter the first variable prize winning device 32A.

Next, the second variable prize-winning device 32B will be explained with reference to Figure 7. Figure 389(a) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second variable prize-winning device 32B as seen from the side, and Figure 389(b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second variable prize-winning device 32B as seen from the rear.

As shown in Figure 389(a), the second variable prize winning device 32B has a distribution inlet 351 that is open in the front-rear direction and large enough for game balls to pass through. It also includes a distribution member 352 that switches the distribution inlet 351 between a closed state where game balls cannot pass and an open state where game balls can pass. The distribution member 352 is opened by being driven by a drive unit 353 for the distribution inlet via a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution inlet 351 constitutes the entrance to the guide passage 354, and game balls flowing in from the distribution inlet 351 flow downstream through the guide passage 354.

As shown in Figure 389(b), the guide passage 354 branches into two at an intermediate point, comprising an upstream region 355 located upstream of the branching point, a V-prize area (or usable area) 356 located downstream of the branching point, and a discharge area (or unused area) 357 located downstream of the branching point. A shutter 358 is provided at the branching point as a means of distributing game balls that have reached the branching point from the upstream region 355 to either the V-prize area 356 or the discharge area 357. When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 359, game balls that have reached the branching point flow into the discharge area 357. When the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter drive unit 359, game balls that have reached the branching point flow into the V-prize area 356.

A detection sensor 361 for counting is provided such that a detection area exists at a position through which game balls flowing into the upstream area 355 must pass. Based on the detection of game balls by the counting sensor 361, the payout of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the second variable prize device 32B is executed. In addition, a detection sensor 362 for V-entry is provided such that a detection area exists at a position through which game balls flowing into the V-entry area 356 must pass. Based on the detection of game balls by the V-entry detection sensor 362, the win/loss lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a predetermined lottery mode. More specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, at a predetermined timing (the 5th round), the game is switched from round game using the first variable prize device 32A to round game using the second variable prize device 32B. Then, after switching to round play using the second variable prize-winning device 32B, when a game ball is detected by the V-prize detection sensor 362, the win/loss lottery mode is set to a high-probability mode with a higher winning probability than usual after the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, a detection sensor 363 for discharge is provided such that a detection area exists at a position through which all game balls flowing into the discharge area 357 must pass. Based on the detection results of the discharge detection sensor 363 and the detection results of the V-prize detection sensor 362, it is determined whether or not game balls remain in the second variable prize-winning device 32B.

Incidentally, in this pachinko machine 10, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 359 is set so that a game ball that enters the second variable prize entry device 32B is guided to the V prize entry area 356 with 100% probability. However, the specific probability of guidance is arbitrary and may be lower than 100%. Furthermore, by making the probability of guidance to the V prize entry area 356 different, the probability of being set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode may be different. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, as types of opening/closing execution modes (types of jackpot results that triggered it), there is an opening/closing execution mode in which a mode in which entry into the second variable prize entry device 32B occurs at a predetermined timing during the opening/closing execution mode is switched, and an opening/closing execution mode in which no switching occurs. When the switching occurs, a game ball that enters the second variable prize entry device 32B is guided to the V prize entry area 356 with almost 100% probability (to the extent that it will almost always go in if you aim for it). This configuration allows for a switch to occur regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode, and when this switch occurs and the player aims for the second variable prize-winning device 32B, the probability of being guided to the V-prize-winning area 356 differs depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode. Even in this way, it is possible to differentiate the probability of being set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode (the type of jackpot result that triggered it). For example, even if a round switch by the second variable prize-winning device 32B occurs in the opening/closing execution mode, if the probability of being guided to the V-prize-winning area 356 is set to 0%, it is possible to effectively achieve a game result where the high-probability mode is not set after that opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, if the probability of being guided to the V-prize-winning area 356 is set to 50%, a chance of entering the high-probability mode afterward arises regardless of the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, thus making the opening/closing execution mode (especially during the rounds triggered by the second variable prize-winning device 32B) highly engaging.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the second variable prize-winning device 32B is formed in such a way that it is possible to visually determine from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the winning game balls are allocated to the V-prize area 356 or the discharge area 357. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the second variable prize-winning device 32B is formed to be colored transparent or colorless transparent.

The gauge configuration in the right-side area PE3 will be explained in more detail, again with reference to Figure 385. In the right-side area PE3, the ball entry points 35, 35A, 35B, 32B, and 34 are arranged from upstream in the following order: through gate 35, first variable prize entry device 32A, second variable prize entry device 32B, right first operation port 33B, and second operation port 34. Of these, the through gate 35, first variable prize entry device 32A, second variable prize entry device 32B, and right first operation port 33B are positioned so that game balls launched toward the right-side area PE3 will always pass through them. Specifically, in the right-side area PE3, nails 24b are arranged to surround the through gate 35, first variable prize entry device 32A, second variable prize entry device 32B, and right first operation port 33B from the left and right directions, and a guide passage W1 is formed by these nails 24b so as to restrict game balls from bypassing the through gate 35, etc. In addition to/instead of the nails 24b, the guide passage W1 may be formed using resin or the like. Furthermore, the guide passage W1 only needs to have the function of guiding the game balls to the respective ball entry sections 35, 35A, 35B, 32B, and 34, and may be configured in a way that allows for some balls to spill out.

As described above, the through gate 35 is a pass-through type ball entry point through which balls are discharged to the game area PE after entering a prize. Game balls launched toward the right-side area PE3 pass through the through gate 35 (enter a prize) and are then led toward the first variable prize entry device 32A. The first variable prize entry device 32A, the second variable prize entry device 32B, and the right first operating port 33B are all configured to be displaceable between an open state (supported state) and a closed state (unsupported state). If they are in the open state, balls enter, and if they are in the closed state, balls pass through. In other words, when a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the first variable prize entry device 32A, if the first variable prize entry device 32A is in the open state, the game ball enters the first variable prize entry device 32A and does not reach the second variable prize entry device 32B or the right first operating port 33B which are downstream. On the other hand, when a game ball reaches the first variable prize device 32A, if the first variable prize device 32A is closed, the game ball passes through the first variable prize device 32A and is led to the second variable prize device 32B. Then, when the game ball reaches the second variable prize device 32B, if the second variable prize device 32B is open, the game ball enters the second variable prize device 32B; if it is closed, it is led to the right first operation port 33B.

Downstream of the right first operating port 33B, nails 24b are arranged to guide game balls toward the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively, forming a branching passage W2. The passage guiding towards the second operating port 34 is called the right branching passage W3, and the passage guiding towards the out port is called the left branching passage W4. These branching passages W3 and W4 may be formed from resin or other materials. In the right branching passage W3, the nails 24b are arranged so that all flowing game balls are guided toward the second operating port 34. As already explained, the second operating port 34 does not have a switching member to switch whether or not game balls can enter. Therefore, when game balls that have passed through the right first operating port 33B are diverted to the right branching passage W3, all of these game balls enter the second operating port 34 regardless of the game state. Note that the right branching passage W3 may be configured to allow spilled balls to occur.

The left branch passage W4 has nails 24b arranged so that the flowing game balls are mainly guided toward the out-out opening 24a. Therefore, when game balls that have passed through the right first operating opening 33B are diverted to the left branch passage W4, these game balls are mainly discharged through the out-out opening 24a. Furthermore, some of the game balls diverted to the left branch passage W4 are guided toward the lower first operating opening 33A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls can enter other entry points (e.g., the general prize entry opening 31) from the left branch passage W4. Alternatively, all game balls diverted to the left branch passage W4 may be guided toward the out-out opening 24a.

In branching passage W2, the distribution rate between the right branching passage W3 and the left branching passage W4 is 50% each. In other words, half of the game balls that pass through the right first operation opening 33B enter the second operation opening 34, and the other half are discharged through the out opening 24a.

Furthermore, a distribution member may be provided in branch passage W2 to determine whether to guide passengers into the right branch passage W3 or the left branch passage W4. In this case, the distribution member should be made to perform periodic operations so that the distribution rates for each branch passage W3 and W4 are the same as described above.

Furthermore, the distribution rate in branching passage W2 is not limited to the above. For example, the rate of distribution to the right branching passage W3 may be more or less than 50%, or it may be configured so that 100% of the balls are distributed to the right branching passage W3. Also, instead of all game balls distributed to the right branching passage W3 entering the second operation opening 34, a configuration may be made in which some balls spill out along the way, and a predetermined percentage (for example, 70%) of the game balls that pass through the right first operation opening 33B are distributed to the right branching passage W3, taking this spillage rate into account (taking the spilled balls into account, the number of balls entering the second operation opening 34 is 50% of the game balls that pass through the right first operation opening 33B).

The game board 24, configured as described above, is attached to the resin base 21, and a front door frame 14 is provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in Figures 383 and 384, the front door frame 14 has a window 61 that allows almost the entire game area PE to be viewed from the front. The window 61 is roughly elliptical in shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted into it. The window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this; it may also be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, or it may be made of colored and transparent material as long as the game area PE can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62.

Various light-emitting means, such as lamps, are provided around the window section 61. A display light-emitting unit 63 is located to the right of the window section 61 as part of the various lamps. An error light-emitting unit 64 is also provided above the window section 61. Furthermore, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 are provided to output sound effects and other signals corresponding to the game state.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulge 66 and a lower bulge 67 are arranged vertically, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 66a, opening upwards, is provided inside the upper bulge 66, and a lower tray 67a, also opening upwards, is provided inside the lower bulge 67. The upper tray 66a has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described later) and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a single line. The lower tray 67a has the function of storing any game balls that are left over in the upper tray 66a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the main unit 12 of the gaming machine will be described.

As shown in Figure 384, the main control device 81, which is responsible for the primary control of the game, is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 81 consists of a main control board housed in a board box.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, to which the dispensing mechanism 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The dispensing mechanism 73 comprises a tank 75 into which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the gaming hall are continuously replenished, and a dispensing device 76 for dispensing the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 76 are discharged into the upper tray 66a or lower tray 67a through a dispensing passage located downstream of the dispensing device 76. The dispensing mechanism 73 is supplied with, for example, a 24-volt AC main power supply and is equipped with a back-pack circuit board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control unit 74 comprises a payout control device 77 that controls the payout device 76, and a power supply/launch control device 78 that generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices, and controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the launching device 28. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged front to back, with the payout control device 77 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition to the payout mechanism 73 and the control unit assembly 74, the back pack 72 is also equipped with an external terminal board 79. The external terminal board 79 is located on the back of the pachinko machine 10, at the upper corner portion on the pivot base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 79 is a circuit board that outputs predetermined signals to allow the gaming hall's management computer to recognize the status of the pachinko machine 10.

(Electrical configuration)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 390.

The main control unit 81 comprises a main control board 201 that controls the main aspects of gameplay, and a power supply monitoring board (power outage monitoring board) 205 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 201 is equipped with an MPU 202. The MPU 202 contains a ROM 203 and a RAM 204.

ROM 203 is configured to utilize a memory that does not require external power supply for storage (i.e., a non-volatile storage means), such as NOR-type flash memory or NAND-type flash memory, in read-only mode. This ROM 203 stores various control programs and fixed-value data executed by MPU 202.

The RAM 204 is configured to utilize memory such as SRAM or DRAM, which requires an external power supply for memory retention (i.e., volatile memory), for both reading and writing. It enables random access and, when compared with the ROM 203 for the same data capacity, has a faster read time. The RAM 204 temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control program stored in the ROM 203.

Furthermore, the MPU 202 or main control board 201 is equipped with interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and other components in addition to the above-mentioned elements. Note that it is not mandatory for the ROM 203 and RAM 204 to be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 202; they may be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 202 is equipped with input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power supply monitoring board 205, a payout control device 77, and various prize detection sensors 35a, 325, 330, 338, 340, 361, 362, and 363. A power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to the power supply monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power supply monitoring board 205. Furthermore, based on the detection results of the various prize detection sensors 35a, 325, 330, 338, 340, 361, 362, and 363, the MPU 202 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry point. The MPU 202 also executes a jackpot lottery based on ball entry into the first operation opening 33 (lower first operation opening 33A, right first operation opening 33B) or the second operation opening 34, and executes a support lottery based on ball entry into the through gate 35.

The output side of the MPU 202 is connected to the power supply monitoring board 205, the payout control device 77, and the performance control device 82. The payout control device 77 outputs a prize ball command, for example, based on the result of the ball entry determination in the ball entry section. The performance control device 82 outputs various commands, including variation commands, type commands, final stop commands, opening commands, and ending commands. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 202 is connected to the drive units 323, 353, and 359 for the variable prize winning device 32 (first variable prize winning device 32A, second variable prize winning device 32B), the drive units 335 and 337 for the electric prize mechanism 331, the first special display unit 37a, the second special display unit 37b, and the general display unit 38. The main control board 201 is equipped with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. The external terminal board 79 is provided with multiple external terminals (output terminals). For example, there are eight external terminals, each handling different types of information output to the management computer. These multiple external terminals include terminals for outputting an open/close execution signal indicating that the system is in open/close execution mode, and terminals for outputting a high-frequency signal indicating that the system is in high-frequency support mode. The MPU 202 sets information in the external output buffer provided in the RAM 204 according to the progress of the game. Then, based on the information set in the external output buffer, it sets the signal output settings to the external terminal board 79, allowing the management computer of the game hall to recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10. Each external terminal is configured using a photocoupler to enable the transmission of electrical signals from the main control device 81 to the management computer while preventing the reverse flow.

The power supply monitoring board 205 acts as a relay between the main control board 201 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls via the payout device 76 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming hall. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 201, the payout control device 77, etc., and supplies this generated operating power through a predetermined power path. Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 27, and drives the game ball launching mechanism 27 based on the identification of a predetermined launch operation for the launch operation device 28.

The performance control device 82 drives and controls the display light-emitting unit 63, error light-emitting unit 64, and speaker unit 65, which are installed on the front door frame 14, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. The display control device 212 executes display control of the pattern display device 42 based on commands input from the performance control device 82.

(Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using MPU202)
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU202 will be explained with reference to Figure 391.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information to perform tasks such as jackpot lottery, support lottery for the electric mechanism 331, setting the display of the first special symbol display unit 37a and the second special symbol display unit 37b, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 42, and setting the display of the general symbol display unit 38. Specifically, it uses a winning random number counter C1 used for lotteries such as jackpot occurrence, a winning type counter C2 used for lotteries of the type of jackpot result, a reach random number counter C3 used for reach occurrence lotteries when the symbol display device 42 is fluctuating without a win, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in each special symbol display unit 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 42, and an electric mechanism release counter C4 used for a support lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric mechanism 331 into a support state. The above counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204.

Each counter, C1-C4, CINI, and CS, is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals.

The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232, which is provided as an information storage means for acquiring reserved information for the jackpot lottery, when a prize is awarded to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. The reserved ball storage area 232 comprises the first special symbol reserved area RA, the first reserved number storage area NA, and the first execution area RAE, which are areas for storing reserved information based on prize awards to the first operation port 33, and the second special symbol reserved area RB, the second reserved number storage area NB, and the second execution area RBE, which are areas for storing reserved information based on prize awards to the second operation port 34.

The first special feature reserve area RA comprises the first area RA1, the second area RA2, the third area RA3, and the fourth area RA4. In accordance with the winning history at the first operation port 33, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are stored as reserve information on the special feature side in one of the areas RA1 to RA4.

In this case, when multiple consecutive entries into the first operating port 33 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of RA1 → RA2 → RA3 → RA4 in the first area RA1 to the fourth area RA4. Because of these four areas RA1 to RA4, up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the first operating port 33 can be stored as reserve information. Furthermore, the number of reserve information entries stored in each area RA1 to RA4 is stored as numerical information in the first reserve count storage area NA. The numerical information in the first reserve count storage area NA is then updated in accordance with increases or decreases in the reserve information.

Furthermore, the number of items that can be stored in the first special feature holding area RA is not limited to four; it can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or even a single item.

The first execution area RAE is the area where the held information for determining win/loss and distribution is stored when the first special symbol display unit 37a starts displaying variations. Specifically, when the first special symbol display unit 37a starts displaying variations, the held information stored in the first area RA1 of the first special symbol held area RA is moved to the first execution area RAE. Then, based on the held information moved to the first execution area RAE, the win/loss and distribution determination for one game round is performed.

The areas RB, NB, and RBE related to the hold information based on winning at the second operation port 34 have the same configuration as the areas RA, NA, and RAE related to the hold information based on winning at the first operation port 33.

In other words, the second special feature reserve area RB comprises the first area RB1, the second area RB2, the third area RB3, and the fourth area RB4. According to the winning history at the second operation port 34, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are stored as reserve information on the special feature side in one of the areas RB1 to RB4.

In this case, when multiple consecutive entries into the second operating port 34 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 RB1 → Area 2 RB2 → Area 3 RB3 → Area 4 RB4. Because of these four areas RB1 to RB4, up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the second operating port 34 can be stored as reserve information. Furthermore, the number of reserved information entries stored in each area RB1 to RB4 is stored as numerical information in the second reserved number storage area NB. The numerical information in the second reserved number storage area NB is then updated in accordance with the increase or decrease in reserved information.

Furthermore, the number of items that can be stored in the second special feature holding area RB is not limited to four; it can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or even a single item.

The second execution area RBE is the area where the held information for determining win/loss and distribution is stored when the second special symbol display unit 37b starts displaying variations. Specifically, when the second special symbol display unit 37b starts displaying variations, the held information stored in the first area RB1 of the second special symbol held area RB is moved to the second execution area RBE. Then, based on the held information moved to the second execution area RBE, the win/loss and distribution determination for one game round is performed.

As described above, by providing execution areas RAE and RBE corresponding to the respective special feature holding areas RA and RB, the determination of whether the holding information is correct or incorrect based on the entry into the first operation port 33 and the determination of whether the holding information is correct or incorrect based on the entry into the second operation port 34 can be performed in parallel in their respective execution areas RAE and RBE.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved area RA of the RAM 204, and when a game ball enters the second operation opening 34, it is stored in the second special symbol reserved area RB of the RAM 204.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 221, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 203. The contents of the win/loss table will now be explained using Figure 392. As shown in Figure 392, the win/loss tables include the first special symbol win/loss table (first win/loss information group for low probability) in low probability mode (Figure 392(a)), the first special symbol win/loss table (first win/loss information group for high probability) in high probability mode (Figure 392(b)), the second special symbol win/loss table (second win/loss information group for low probability) in low probability mode (Figure 392(c)), and the second special symbol win/loss table (second win/loss information group for high probability) in high probability mode (Figure 392(d)). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes in its win/loss lottery mechanism: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state). For each mode, there is a win/loss table for the first special symbol based on the retained information from the entry into the first operation port 33, and a win/loss table for the second special symbol based on the retained information from the entry into the second operation port 34.

Here, in gameplay where the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referenced in any special symbol win/loss table, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 2, as shown in Figures 392(a) and 392(c). Furthermore, in gameplay where the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referenced during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 20, as shown in Figures 392(b) and 392(d). Note that the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary if the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. However, it is preferable that the winning probability for each special symbol is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

Furthermore, in each lottery mode, any random number other than the value that results in a jackpot will result in either a special win or a loss. The special win will be explained later.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 29, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple winning outcomes are set. These multiple winning outcomes are set by creating differences in two conditions: (1) the support mode of the electric mechanism 331 of the right first operating port 33B after the opening/closing execution mode has ended, and (2) the manner of opening/closing control of each variable prize entry device 32A, 32B during the opening/closing execution mode.

In the electric mechanism 331 of the right first operating port 33B, the support modes are set to be low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency at which the electric mechanism 331 of the right first operating port 33B is open per unit time is relatively high or low when comparing situations where game balls are continuously launched in a similar manner to the game area PE (situations where the second launch operation is performed so that the balls flow down the right area PE3).

Specifically, in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric mechanism opening state in the electric mechanism opening lottery using the electric mechanism opening counter C4 is the same (for example, 1/2 in both modes). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric mechanism 331 opens when the electric mechanism opening state is won is set to be higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for each instance is also set to be longer. In this case, when the electric mechanism opening state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric mechanism 331 opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for one instance. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time required between the electric mechanism opening lottery and the next electric mechanism opening lottery is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the right first operating port 33B is higher than in low-frequency support mode. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the lower first operating port 33A or second operating port 34 is higher than in right first operating port 33B, but in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the right first operating port 33B is higher than in lower first operating port 33A or second operating port 34. Furthermore, when a ball enters the right first operating port 33B, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode, players can play while minimizing the reduction in their ball count.

Furthermore, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode in terms of the frequency of the electric mechanism opening per unit time is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration that increases the probability of winning the electric mechanism opening state in the electric mechanism opening lottery may also be used. Moreover, the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating one or any combination of the following conditions: number of times, opening time, and winning probability.

The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved area RA of the RAM 204, and when a game ball enters the second operation opening 34, it is stored in the second special symbol reserved area RB of the RAM 204.

The distribution destinations of game results for the winning type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using Figure 393. The distribution table consists of a distribution table for the first special symbol, which constitutes the first distribution information group (see Figure 393(a)), and a distribution table for the second special symbol, which constitutes the second distribution information group (see Figure 393(b)).

In the distribution table for the first special symbol, as shown in Figure 393(a), the distribution destinations for the game result are set to either a jackpot result without a V (result of no transition to high probability) or a jackpot result with the first V (result of transition to the first high probability). In the distribution table for the second special symbol, as shown in Figure 393(b), the distribution destinations for the game result are set to either a jackpot result with the first V (result of transition to the first high probability) or a jackpot result with the second V (result of transition to the second high probability).

Here, we will explain the manner of opening and closing control of each variable prize-winning device 32A, 32B in the opening and closing execution mode of this pachinko machine 10.

The opening and closing execution modes for this pachinko machine 10 during a jackpot are set as follows: a normal opening and closing execution mode in which only the opening and closing control by the first variable prize-winning device 32A is performed, and a V-probability variation opening and closing execution mode in which both the opening and closing control by the first variable prize-winning device 32A and the opening and closing control by the second variable prize-winning device 32B are performed. In the normal opening and closing execution mode, the large prize-winning opening 321 of the first variable prize-winning device 32A is opened and closed five times, and each opening continues until 30 seconds (first period) have elapsed or until the number of prizes entering the large prize-winning opening 321 reaches eight (first number). On the other hand, in the V-probability change opening/closing execution mode, the large prize opening 321 in the first variable prize winning device 32A is opened and closed four times, and then the distribution entrance 351 in the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened and closed once. Both openings remain open until 30 seconds (first period) have elapsed, or until the number of prizes entering the open side of the large prize opening 321 and distribution entrance 351 reaches eight (first number).

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for winning in both the first variable prize winning device 32A and the second variable prize winning device 32B is 10, and the number of prize balls obtained in the normal opening/closing execution mode and the V-probability variation opening/closing execution mode is the same. On the other hand, in the normal opening/closing execution mode, the balls only win in the first variable prize winning device 32A, while in the V-probability variation opening/closing execution mode, the balls win in both the first variable prize winning device 32A and the second variable prize winning device 32B. Therefore, in the V-probability variation opening/closing execution mode, the balls may flow into the V-prize area 356 based on the balls winning in the second variable prize winning device 32B (detected by the V-prize detection sensor 362). Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, the win/loss lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is determined by whether or not the game balls are detected by the V-prize detection sensor 362 during the opening/closing execution mode.

More specifically, if a game ball is detected by the V-entry detection sensor 362 during the opening/closing execution mode, the subsequent win/loss lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until the lottery result is a jackpot win and the game transitions to the jackpot state. On the other hand, if a game ball is not detected by the V-entry detection sensor 362 during the opening/closing execution mode, the subsequent win/loss lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until the lottery result is a jackpot win and the game transitions to the jackpot state.

In other words, if the jackpot result transitions to the normal opening/closing execution mode, the subsequent win/loss lottery mode transitions to a low probability mode. Conversely, if the jackpot result transitions to the V-probability opening/closing execution mode, the subsequent win/loss lottery mode may transition to a high probability mode. As described above, in this embodiment, game balls that enter the second variable prize entry device 32B are guided to the V-prize entry area 356 with 100% probability. If a jackpot result transitions to the V-probability opening/closing execution mode and a ball enters the second variable prize entry device 32B, the subsequent win/loss lottery mode is set to transition to a high probability mode with 100% probability. In short, in this pachinko machine 10, the high or low probability of the subsequent win/loss lottery mode is determined by the type of opening/closing execution mode transitioned to, and the win/loss lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is not determined by the type of jackpot result.

To explain in more detail the jackpot results shown in the distribution table in Figure 11, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the level of the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode are set to be different.

A jackpot result without a "V" sign transitions to the normal opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, a jackpot result without a "V" sign effectively transitions the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to a low-probability game state consisting of a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode.

The first V-symbol win result transitions to the V-symbol probability change opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the first V-symbol win result effectively transitions the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to a probability change game state (hereinafter referred to as the first probability change state) consisting of a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode.

The result of a jackpot with a second V triggers a transition to the V-probability change opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. In other words, the result of a jackpot with a second V effectively transitions the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to a probability change game state (hereinafter referred to as the second probability change state) which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode.

As described above, when the support mode is set to high-frequency support mode, the electric mechanism 331 is more likely to enter a support state, and as a result, the probability of winning in the right first operating port 33B increases. Therefore, in the second probability variation state, which is high-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball in the second launch operation so that it flows down the right area PE3, rather than in the first launch operation to flow down the left area PE2 and aim for the lower first operating port 33A. This allows the player to receive the win/loss lottery on the first special symbol side without significantly reducing their remaining balls.

On the other hand, even if the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, that is, even if the electric mechanism 331 is less likely to enter a support state and the probability of winning in the right first operating port 33B is low, if the game ball is launched by the second launch operation so that it flows down the right-side area PE3, the game ball can enter the second operating port 34. As described above, when the game ball is launched by the second launch operation, the game ball passes through the guidance passage W1 and reaches the branching passage W2. In this embodiment, the branching passage W2 is configured to branch half of the game balls that arrive to the right branching passage W3 on the second operating port 34 side. Furthermore, in this embodiment, each passage W1 to W3 is formed in such a way that spilled balls are less likely to occur. Therefore, even in low-frequency support mode, half of the game balls launched by the second launch operation enter the second operating port 34 and can be subject to the win/loss lottery on the second special symbol side.

Therefore, even in low-probability modes such as the low-probability game state or the first high-probability state, performing the first firing operation allows the player to receive a win/loss lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the lower first operating port 33A, and performing the second firing operation allows the player to receive a win/loss lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second operating port 34.

As shown in Figure 392, the probability of a jackpot is the same for both the first and second special symbols, regardless of the win/loss mode level. However, the probabilities of special wins are set differently for each of the two tables.

Here, a special win result is a game result in which the opening and closing control (opening and closing of the large prize opening 321) by the first variable prize entry device 32A is performed once, and the game transitions to an opening and closing execution mode in which this single opening continues until 6 seconds (second period) have elapsed or until the number of prize balls entering the large prize opening 321 reaches 3 (second number). In other words, in a special win result, the opening period of the large prize opening 321 is shorter and the number of openings and closings is set to be fewer than in the opening and closing execution mode of any other big win result, resulting in fewer prize balls being awarded. In this embodiment, when the launching conditions are met (when the launching operation device 28 is operated), it is set so that one game ball is launched towards the game area PE every 0.6 seconds. As described above, the opening time of the large prize opening 321 based on a special win result is set to be longer than the product of the launching cycle and the prize limit number of balls (3 balls). Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode based on a special win result, it is expected that the prize limit number of game balls will enter, and the corresponding prize balls can be obtained.

As shown in Figure 392, the first special symbol win/loss table and the second special symbol win/loss table are set such that, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode, the probability of a special win is higher in the second special symbol win/loss table than in the first special symbol win/loss table. Therefore, as described above, even in low probability modes such as the low probability game state or the first high probability state, performing the second launch operation allows the player to receive a win/loss lottery for the second special symbol based on the entry into the second operation port 34. Consequently, if a special win occurs, the player can obtain prize balls from the entry into the first variable prize entry device 32A (effectively 3 prize balls x 10 prize balls = 30 prize balls).

However, in this embodiment, the probability of a special win in the second special symbol win/loss table is set to 1/30, and the prize ball awarded for entering the second operating port 34 is set to 1. Assuming a game played in a low-probability state where the player aims for the second operating port 34, i.e., performs the second launch operation to launch game balls, in order to get a special win (30 prize balls) by getting a ball into the second operating port 34, it is necessary to launch at least approximately 60 game balls on average (1/2 x 1/30), which is more than the number of prize balls obtained from the special win. Furthermore, the probability of a jackpot occurring in a low-probability game state is set at 1 in 300. To obtain a jackpot (400 prize balls, 5 rounds x 8 balls x 10 rounds) by getting balls into the second operating port 34, at least approximately 600 game balls (1/2 x 1/300) must be launched on average. This means the number of balls launched to achieve the jackpot is greater than the number of prize balls received. Therefore, the benefit of operating the second launching mechanism in a low-probability game state is low, and the payout base, calculated by subtracting the prize balls received from balls entering the second operating port 34 (prize balls from the second operating port 34 + prize balls based on the opening/closing mode) from the number of balls launched, becomes negative.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display time for each winning/losing lottery is varied, thereby differentiating the efficiency (speed) of each winning/losing lottery. The configuration is described below.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the win/loss lottery for the first special symbol and the win/loss lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. The results of both win/loss lotteries are reported by the corresponding special symbol display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 42, which displays the changes of each symbol. The duration of these changes is set by referring to the change display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 each time a win/loss lottery trigger occurs. In this embodiment, the selected change display time table is set separately for each game state, each win/loss lottery trigger, and each game result.

As shown in Figure 394, in the variable display time tables for low probability game states (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), when the game result is a loss, the variable display time for the second special symbol (Figure 394(d)) is set to be longer than when the variable display time table for the first special symbol (Figure 394(b)) is selected. More specifically, when the variable display time table for the second special symbol is selected when a loss occurs, a variable display time of 6000 seconds is set, and one game round will take more than one hour (100 minutes). For example, if the operating hours of the game hall are 10 hours, even if you play aiming for the second operation opening 34 in the low probability game state, you will only be able to play six times (draws). In contrast, when the variable display time table for the first special symbol is selected, the longest duration selected is 90 seconds, regardless of whether it's a big win, a special win (Figure 394(a)), or a loss (Figure 394(b)). Therefore, the efficiency of gameplay in a low-probability state is higher on the first special symbol side than on the second special symbol side, and aiming for the lower first operating port 33A with the first firing operation is more efficient than aiming for the second operating port 34 with the second firing operation.

On the other hand, in the variable display time table during the first probability variation state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), as shown in Figure 395, when the game result is a loss, the variable display time is set to be longer when the variable display time table for the first special symbol (Figure 395(b)) is selected than when the variable display time table for the second special symbol (Figure 395(d)) is selected. In other words, the relationship between the low probability game state and the length of the variable display time is reversed. Therefore, the efficiency of play in the first probability variation state is higher on the second special symbol side than on the first special symbol side, and aiming for the second operation port 34 by performing the second firing operation is more efficient than aiming for the lower first operation port 33A by performing the first firing operation. Furthermore, in the first probability variation state, the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, so the probability of a jackpot result is also higher (see Figure 392). In that case, by aiming for the second operation port 34, it is expected that a jackpot result will be achieved with a relatively small number of plays. Furthermore, as described above, the win/loss table for the second special symbol, based on winning in the second operating port 34, has a higher probability of resulting in a special win than the win/loss table for the first special symbol. Therefore, during the first probability variation state, by performing the second launch operation and winning in the second operating port 34, it is possible to participate in the win/loss lottery for the second special symbol without significantly reducing the number of balls held.

In the second probability variation state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), as shown in Figure 396, when the game result is a loss, the variable display time for the second special symbol (Figure 396(d)) is set to be longer than when the variable display time table for the first special symbol (Figure 396(b)) is selected. In other words, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed between the first probability variation state and the second probability variation state. Therefore, the efficiency of play in the second probability variation state is higher on the first special symbol side than on the second special symbol side. However, in the second probability variation state, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, so aiming for the right first operation port 33B will result in a higher ball entry rate than aiming for the lower first operation port 33A. More specifically, the electric mechanism 331 installed in the right first operating port 33B frequently enters a support state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the right first operating port 33B. By obtaining the prize balls (3 balls) associated with this entry into the right first operating port 33B, it becomes possible to participate in the winning/losing draw on the first special symbol side without significantly reducing the number of balls held.

Returning to the explanation of each counter (Figure 391), the reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved area RA of the RAM 204, and when a game ball enters the second operation opening 34, it is stored in the second special symbol reserved area RB of the RAM 204. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach (see Figures 394 to 396).

Here, "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 42 capable of displaying (or changing) the variation (or variable) of symbols (pictures), where the stop display result after the variation display is a special display result during a game round in which the opening and closing execution mode of the variable prize winning devices 32A and 32B is activated, that makes the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the special display result, from the start of the variation (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 42 until the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, this refers to a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, combinations of symbols that have the potential to form a winning combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode are displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in a variable state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying combinations of reach symbols that have the potential to form a winning combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a pre-set active line within the display screen of the symbol display device 42. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display content in Figure 387, first, high-speed fluctuation display begins for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is being displayed. Subsequently, the fluctuation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 switches from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, which makes it easy or possible for the player to recognize the displayed symbol. Then, as the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 switches from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display. Subsequently, the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed when the main symbols with the same number assigned to any of the active lines L1 to L5 are stopped and displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 switches from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and if the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 ends when the main symbols with the same number assigned to the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line.

Furthermore, the reach display includes methods such as displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, then showing the remaining symbol variations in the remaining symbol rows, and displaying predetermined characters as animations in the background screen to create a reach effect, or displaying the combination of reach symbols in a reduced size or hidden, and then displaying predetermined characters as animations across almost the entire display screen to create a reach effect. Additionally, the decision of whether or not to display a pre-announcement using predetermined images, such as predetermined characters, when a reach display is being shown or before a reach display may be made using a reach random number counter C3 or other counters.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 391, the variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b of the special figure display unit 37, and the variation display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 42. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. The variation type counter CS is then stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special symbol reserve area RA of the RAM 204, and when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is stored in the second special symbol reserve area RB of the RAM 204.

The electric mechanism release counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 250, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 250). The electric mechanism release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area R of the RAM 204 when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 331 to the open state based on the value of the stored electric mechanism release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric mechanism 331 is controlled to the open state; if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric mechanism 331 is not controlled to the open state.

As already explained, in the MPU 202, the variation display time in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is determined using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in each execution area RAE and RBE. The variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used for this determination. Furthermore, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is determined using the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 stored in each execution area RAE and RBE. The stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for this determination.

(Regarding the various processes executed by the main control unit 81)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 202 within the main control unit 81 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 202 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but these processes will not be explained.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 397. This processing is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 202.

In step S101B, the system performs reading operations for various detection sensors. Specifically, it reads the status of various detection sensors connected to the main control unit 81, determines the status of the sensors (detection information from the sensors), and stores the detection information (prize entry detection information). For example, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the large prize entry opening 321, the prize entry detection flag for the large prize entry opening is stored. If a prize is awarded to the second variable prize entry device 32B (the game ball is detected by the counting detection sensor 361), the prize entry detection flag for the second variable prize entry device 32B is stored. Furthermore, if it is determined that a game ball has passed through the V prize entry area 356, the V prize detection flag is stored. Finally, if it is determined that a game ball has passed through the discharge area 357, the discharge detection flag is stored. Note that in configurations without other sensors, such as those without the second variable prize entry device 32B, the system can omit the reading operations for those sensors.

Subsequently, in step S102B, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 204.

In the following step S103B, the system updates the random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric mechanism release counter C4. Specifically, the random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric mechanism release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are reset to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S104B, the entry processing for the through gate 35 is executed. In the entry processing for the through gate, it is determined whether the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the RAM 204. If the flag is stored, and provided that the number of reserved items stored in the electric item reserve area R is less than 4, the value of the electric item release counter C4, updated in step S103B, is stored in the electric item reserve area R. Furthermore, the display (display of the number of reserved items) in the regular display reserve unit 41 is updated to correspond to the number of reserved items updated by this acquisition. Finally, the entry detection flag is cleared, and the entry processing for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the prize entry process for the through-gate in step S104B, the process proceeds to step S105B. In step S105B, the prize entry process for the operating ports 33A, 33B, and 34 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for the operating port)
Here, we will explain the prize-winning process for the activation port by referring to the flowchart in Figure 398.

In step S201B, it is determined whether a game ball has entered either of the first operating ports 33A or 33B (starting entry) based on the detection status of the detection sensors corresponding to the lower first operating port 33A and the right first operating port 33B. If it is determined that a game ball has entered either of the first operating ports 33A or 33B, in step S202B, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 77 to dispense 3 game balls. In the following step S203B, the value stored in the reserve number storage area (first reserve number storage area NA) of the first special feature reserve area RA is read, and it is determined whether the first start reserve storage number RaN stored in the first special feature reserve area RA is less than the maximum number that can be stored (in this embodiment, "4"). If it is less than the maximum number, in step S204B, the process of adding 1 to the first start reserve storage number RaN is executed. Subsequently, in step S205B, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. In the following step S206B, confirmation processing for the first reserve notification is performed. This processing outputs information to the performance control device 82 indicating that a win has occurred in the first operation ports 33A and 33B, and also outputs information about the game rounds (win/loss determination, whether a reach occurred, whether a notification effect occurred, etc.) related to the reserve information acquired based on the win in the first operation ports 33A and 33B to the performance control device 82.

If a negative result is obtained in either step S201B or step S203B, or after the processing in step S206B is executed, the process proceeds to step S207B. In step S207B, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 (start entry) based on the detection status of the detection sensor corresponding to the second operation port 34. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the second operation port 34, a prize ball command is set in step S208B to dispense one game ball to the payout control device 77. In the following step S209B, the value stored in the reserve number storage area (second reserve number storage area NB) of the second special figure reserve area RB is read, and it is determined whether or not the second start reserve storage number RbN stored in the second special figure reserve area RB is less than the maximum number that can be stored (in this embodiment, "4"). If it is less than the maximum number, in step S210B, the process of adding 1 to the first start reserve storage number RaN is executed. Subsequently, in step S211B, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. In the following step S212B, confirmation processing for the second reserve notification is performed. This processing outputs information to the performance control device 82 indicating that a ball has entered the second operation port 34, and also outputs information about the game rounds (win/loss determination, whether a reach occurred, whether a notification effect occurred, etc.) related to the reserve information acquired based on this ball entry into the second operation port 34 to the performance control device 82. If a negative determination is made in either step S207B or step S209B, or after the processing in step S212B is performed, the ball entry processing for this operation port is terminated.

The prize ball commands set in steps S202B and S208B are transmitted to the payout control device 77 via the external output processing of the normal operation described later. Similarly, the hold information commands (hold commands) set in steps S206B and S212B are also transmitted to the performance control device 82 via the external output processing of the normal operation. These hold commands contain information indicating which of the first operation ports 33A, 33B, and second operation port 34 the hold command is based on. Upon receiving these hold commands, the performance control device 82 executes processing to change the display in the special feature hold display areas Ga and Gb in accordance with the increase in the number of hold balls.

Specifically, if the command received by the display control device 212 via the performance control device 82 corresponds to a win in either of the first operation ports 33A or 33B, the system executes a process to display the reserve icon in the special symbol reserve display area Ga for the first operation port, which is set on the display screen 42a. In the special symbol reserve display area Ga for the first operation port, the reserve icons are displayed sequentially from the right. For example, if the first start reserve memory count RaN for the first operation port is 1, the reserve icon is displayed in the first unit reserve display area Ga1 at the far right, and if the first start reserve memory count RaN is 4, the reserve icons are displayed in all unit reserve display areas Ga1 to Ga4. Furthermore, if the command received by the display control device 212 via the performance control device 82 corresponds to a win in the second operation port 34, the system executes a process to display the reserve icon in the special symbol reserve display area Gb for the second operation port, which is set on the display screen 42a. In the special feature hold display area Gb for the second operation port, hold icons are displayed sequentially from left to right. For example, if the second start hold memory count RbN for the second operation port is 1, the hold image is displayed in the leftmost first unit hold display area Gb1. If the start hold memory count RbN is 4, hold icons are displayed in all unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 399. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, has been executed, and the main processes of the game are executed during normal processing. In summary, the processes in steps S301B to S307B are executed as periodic processes with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes in steps S309B and S310B are executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the first step, S301B, executes external output processing. In the external output processing of step S301, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 77. Furthermore, if performance commands such as variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, or hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the performance control device 82.

Next, in step S302B, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 204.

In the subsequent step S303B, a first game round control process is executed to control the gameplay in each game round based on the winning entry into either of the first operating ports 33A or 33B. This first game round control process includes determining the jackpot on the first special symbol side, setting the display of the changing symbols on the symbol display device 42, and controlling the display of the first special symbol display unit 37a.

After executing the first game round control process in step S303B, the process proceeds to step S304B, where the second game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round based on the entry into the second operation opening 34. This second game round control process includes determining the jackpot on the second special symbol side, setting the display of symbol variations by the symbol display device 42, and controlling the display of the second special symbol display unit 37b.

After executing the game round control processing in steps S303B and S304B, the game state transition processing is executed in step S305B. This game state transition processing changes the game state to modes such as opening/closing execution mode, high probability mode, or high frequency support mode. Details of the processing in steps S303B to S305B will be described later.

In the following step S306B, a process for supporting the electric mechanism 331, located in the right first operating port 33B, is executed. This process uses numerical information obtained from the electric mechanism release counter C4 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area R of the RAM 204 to perform an electric mechanism release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric mechanism 331. If the electric mechanism is opened, the opening and closing process of the electric mechanism 331 is executed. Furthermore, the display control of the general diagram display unit 38 is performed to indicate the lottery result of the electric mechanism release lottery.

As explained earlier, the electric mechanism 331 offers two support modes: a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode. The game transition process transitions to one of these modes. If the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 after this process, the game enters high-frequency support mode. If the flag is not set, the game enters low-frequency support mode.

In the processing for electric support, the system determines whether it is in high-frequency support mode by checking whether the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204. If it is in high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric device 331 opens when the electric device opening state is triggered is set to be greater than in low-frequency support mode, and the duration of each opening is set to be longer. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, when the electric device opening state is triggered and the electric device 331 opens multiple times, the closing time between the end of one opening state and the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the duration of a single opening.

Incidentally, when the system switches to the open/close execution mode, even if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode.

Subsequently, in step S307B, the game ball launch control process is executed. In this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 78, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 27 is energized once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S308B, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal process is reached, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

In other words, step S309B updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, 1 is incremented in the random number initial value counter CINI, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of RAM 204. Furthermore, step S310B updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, 1 is incremented in the variation type counter CS, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S301B to S307B changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

Next, the first game round control process in step S303 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 400 to 404.

(First game round control processing)
In the first game round control process, step S401B first determines whether or not the game is in open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag (open/close execution state information) is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. This open/close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is transitioned to open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is erased when the open/close execution mode is terminated in the same game state transition process.

If the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S402B onward, namely the game round start process from steps S403B to S407B and the game round progress process from steps S408B to S414B. In other words, if the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the game round on the first special symbol side will not start, regardless of whether or not a winning combination has been achieved in either of the first operating ports 33A or 33B.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, step S402B determines whether the first special display unit 37a is currently displaying a variable. This determination is made by checking whether the first variable display flag (first variable display information) is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first variable display flag is stored when the variable display is initiated for the first special display unit 37a and is erased when the variable display ends.

If the first special display unit 37a is not showing a variable display, the process proceeds to steps S403B to S407B for starting the game round. In the game round start process, step S403B first determines whether the first start reserve memory count RaN is "0". If the first start reserve memory count RaN is "0", it means that no winning entries have occurred in either the lower first operation port 33A or the right first operation port 33B. Therefore, the first game round control process ends there.

If the first start hold memory count RaN is not "0", step S404B determines whether the second winning flag or the special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204. The second winning flag is stored when a jackpot is won in the lottery on the second special symbol side, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode based on that jackpot ends. The special winning flag is stored based on a special winning result, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode based on that special winning result ends. If the second winning flag or the special winning result flag is stored, the first game round control process ends as is.

In other words, in this embodiment, while the lottery systems for the first and second special symbols can be executed in parallel, the system is configured to restrict the start of the other lottery system's rounds if a jackpot is won in one system. This prevents situations where a player, despite having won a jackpot in one system, is unable to concentrate on the jackpot due to concern about the results of the other system.

Furthermore, the system is configured to restrict the start of game rounds in the other lottery system based not only on jackpot results in the other lottery system, but also on special jackpot results. This prevents situations where the opening and closing execution modes overlap, such as when a game round resulting in a special jackpot begins in the other lottery system while a game round resulting in a special jackpot is being played.

Thus, in this embodiment, while the system is configured to allow multiple lottery systems to be implemented in parallel, it also allows for setting results that can restrict other systems. In other words, these multiple lottery systems can be implemented in parallel or independently, improving the efficiency of the lottery and enhancing the gameplay experience through parallel lotteries, while also allowing for the highlighting of the lottery system that is intended to attract attention.

If the second winning flag or special winning flag is not stored in step S404B, step S405B executes a first data setting process to set the data stored in the first special symbol hold area RA for variable display. Furthermore, step S406B executes a first variable start process to initiate variable display on the first special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 42. Then, in step S407B, after setting the variable command and type command to initiate these variable displays, the first game round control process ends. The variable command and type command are transmitted to the performance control device 82 via the external output process of the normal process. Based on the received variable command and type command, the performance control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to initiate game round performances such as the variable display of symbols on the display screen 42a.

Here, the first data setting process in step S405B and the first variation start process in step S406B will be explained in detail below. First, the first data setting process will be explained with reference to Figure 401.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S501B, the process of subtracting "1" from the first start hold memory count RaN is executed. In the following step S502B, the data stored in the first area RA1 of the first special effect hold area RA is moved to the first execution area RAE. In the following step S503B, the process of shifting the data stored in the memory area of the first special effect hold area RA is executed. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first area RA1 to the fourth area RA4 sequentially to the lower areas, clearing the data in the first area RA1 and shifting the data within each area in the following order: second area RA2 → first area RA1, third area RA3 → second area RA2, fourth area RA4 → third area RA3, and so on. After that, in step S504, the first shift command (first shift occurrence information), which is information to make the sub-control device, the performance control device 82, recognize that the data shift in the first special effect hold area RA has taken place, is set. In this case, a first shift command containing information that the hold area targeted for the data shift corresponds to the first special effect hold area RA, that is, that it corresponds to either of the first operation ports 33A or 33B, is selected from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and this selected first shift command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The first shift command set in step S504B is transmitted to the performance control device 82 during the external output processing in normal operation. Based on the received first shift command, the performance control device 82 executes processing to change the display in the first special symbol hold display section 43a of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first special symbol hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 42, corresponding to the decrease in the number of held symbols.

Next, the first variation initiation process in step S406B will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 402.

(Processing to initiate the first change)
In the first variation initiation process, step S601B first determines whether the win/loss lottery mode is in high probability mode. Specifically, it determines whether the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204. The high probability mode flag is stored in the opening/closing execution mode for V probability variation based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the V prize area 356 of the second variable prize entry device 32B, and is erased if any jackpot result occurs thereafter.

If the game is not in high probability mode, step S602B retrieves the win/loss table for low probability mode, and step S604B determines whether the outcome is correct. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set as a jackpot in the first special symbol win/loss table for low probability mode. On the other hand, if the game is in high probability mode, step S602B retrieves the win/loss table for high probability mode, and step S604B determines whether the outcome is correct. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set as a jackpot in the first special symbol win/loss table for high probability mode.

After the processing in step S604B, steps S605B to S616B execute processes to set the game result for the current game round, as well as processes to set the stop result when the variable display executed on the first special display unit 37a in the current game round is terminated. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information groups) stored in the stop result table storage area 224, which serves as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, are referenced.

Specifically, in step S605B, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S604B is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, steps S606B to S612B execute processes to set the game result and stop result in the case of a jackpot win.

In step S606B, the process of storing the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204 is executed. The first winning flag is stored when a jackpot is won in the lottery on the first special symbol side, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode based on that jackpot ends. As will be described in detail later, the storage of this first winning flag triggers the process of restricting the start of the second special symbol side's game rounds and stopping the display of variations.

In the following step S607B, a distribution determination is made by referring to the distribution table for the first special display unit. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the first execution area RAE falls within the numerical range of the no-V jackpot result or the numerical range of the first V-included jackpot result.

In step S608B, based on the processing result of step S607B, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot with the first V flag. If it is a jackpot with the first V flag, the process proceeds to step S609B, where a stop result setting process for a jackpot with the first V flag is executed to end the display of the first special symbol display unit 37a with the stop result indicating that a jackpot with the first V flag has occurred. Furthermore, in step S610B, the first V flag, which indicates that the current game result is a jackpot with the first V flag, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204.

If a negative result is determined in step S608B, it means that the current jackpot result is a jackpot without a V. In this case, in step S611B, a stop result setting process for a jackpot without a V is executed to terminate the display of the first special symbol display unit 37a while the stop result resulting in a jackpot without a V is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a. Furthermore, in step S612B, a normal flag, which indicates that the current game result is a jackpot without a V, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204.

If it is determined in step S605B that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S613B to determine whether the current losing result is a special win result. If it is a special win result, the process proceeds to step S614B, where a special win stop result setting process is executed to terminate the fluctuation display of the first special symbol display unit 37a with the stop result that will result in a special win displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a. Also, in step S615B, a special win flag, which indicates that the current game result is a special win result, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If it is determined in step S613B that the result is not a special win result, it means that the current lottery result is a losing result. In this case, in step S616B, a losing stop result setting process is executed to terminate the fluctuation display of the first special symbol display unit 37a with the stop result that will result in a regular losing result displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a.

After executing any of the processes in steps S610B, S612B, S615B, and S616B, the process proceeds to step S617B. In step S617B, the first variation display time setting process is executed. Then, in step S618B, the variation display in the first special figure display unit 37a is started, and the first variation start process is terminated.

Here, the setting process for the first variation display time in step S617B will be explained with reference to Figure 403.

(Setting process for the first variation display time)
In step S701B, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is not the high-frequency support mode but the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S702B, where it is determined whether the current win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. If, in step S702B, it is determined that it is not the high-probability mode but the low-probability mode, that is, it is the low-probability game state which is both the low-frequency support mode and the low-probability mode, then in step S703B, the variable display time table for the low-probability game state is obtained.

The variable display time table for the low probability game state is set up as shown in Figure 394, with a variable display time table for when there is a jackpot result or a special jackpot result (Figure 394(a)) and a variable display time table for when there is a loss result (Figure 394(b)). Based on the results of the processes in steps S610B, S612B, and S615B described above, the corresponding variable display time table is selected. That is, if any of the first V flag, normal flag, or special jackpot flag is stored, the variable display time table in Figure 394(a) is obtained, and if none of the flags are stored (i.e., it is a loss result), the variable display time table in Figure 394(b) is obtained. In each variable display time table, the variable display time is set to differ depending on the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS, and the first start reserved memory count RaN at the start of the variation, which are among the reserved information. More specifically, whether or not a reach occurs is basically determined by the reach random number counter C3. Comparing the display time of fluctuations when a reach does not occur and when one does occur, a longer display time is more likely to be selected when a reach occurs than when one does not. Also, when a reach occurs, the type of reach differs depending on the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS. The types of reaches are set as normal reaches A and B and super reaches A to C. Normal reaches A and super reaches A to C are reaches that have the same display time of fluctuation regardless of the number of first start reserve memory counts RaN. The display time of fluctuations is set to get longer in the order of normal reach A, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, with super reach C having the longest display time of fluctuation. On the other hand, in the case of normal reach B and when a reach does not occur, a shorter display time is more likely to be selected as long as the value of the first start reserve memory count RaN is high. In this embodiment, the longer the selected variation display time, the higher the probability of a jackpot or special win.

If a negative result is obtained in step S701B and a positive result is obtained in step S702B, that is, if it is the first probability variation state in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode, then the variation display time table for the first probability variation state is obtained in step S704B.

The variable display time table for the first probability variation state is set up as shown in Figure 395, with a variable display time table for when there is a jackpot result or a special jackpot result (Figure 395(a)) and a variable display time table for when there is a loss result (Figure 395(b)). Based on the results of the processes in steps S610B, S612B, and S615B described above, the corresponding variable display time table is selected. That is, if any of the first V flag, normal flag, or special jackpot flag is stored, the variable display time table in Figure 395(a) is obtained, and if none of the flags are stored (i.e., it is a loss result), the variable display time table in Figure 395(b) is obtained. In the variable display time table during the first probability variation state, long-duration and short-duration modes, which are relatively long or short, are determined according to the game result, regardless of the reach random number counter C3, variation type counter CS, and the first start reserve memory count RaN at the start of variation. In other words, if either a jackpot or special jackpot is achieved, a short-duration 10-second variation display time is selected; if a loss occurs, a long-duration 6000-second variation display time is selected. That is, in the first probability variation state, the efficiency of the first special symbol side is set to be low, except in cases where either a jackpot or special jackpot is achieved.

If a positive result is obtained in step S701B, i.e., if the game is in high-frequency support mode, it means that the current game state is the second probability variation state. In this case, the variation display time table for the second probability variation state is obtained in step S705B.

The variable display time table for the second probability variation state, as shown in Figure 396, has two tables: one for when the result is either a big win or a special win (Figure 396(a)), and another for when the result is a loss (Figure 396(b)). Based on the results of steps S610B, S612B, and S615B, the corresponding variable display time table is selected. The distribution of variable display times in these tables is basically the same as that in the low probability game state. That is, the variable display time is set to differ depending on the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the first start reserve memory count RaN at the start of the variation, all of which are part of the reserve information. However, in the variable display time table for the second probability variation state, shorter times are more likely to be selected than in the low probability game state, and this is set to increase the efficiency of the lottery system on the first special symbol side.

After executing any of the processes from step S703B to step S705B, the system refers to the variable display time table obtained in each process and executes a process in step S706 to set the variable display time for the current game round on the first special symbol side, before ending the first variable display time setting process. The various counter areas 233 of RAM 204 are provided with a first elapsed counter and a second elapsed counter, which separately count the variable display time for the game rounds on the first special symbol side and the game rounds on the second special symbol side. These elapsed counters are decremented by 1 every predetermined period (2 msec), and the MPU 202 can determine the remaining variable display time for the current game round by referring to these elapsed counters. Then, in step S706B, the system inputs numerical information corresponding to the currently selected variable display time into the first elapsed counter, which counts the variable display time for the game rounds on the first special symbol side.

Returning to the explanation of the first game round control process (Figure 402), if it is determined in step S402B that the first special symbol display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the process proceeds to step S408B. In step S408B, the first elapsed counter is referenced to determine whether the variable display time for the current game round on the first special symbol side has elapsed. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, in step S409B, it is determined whether the second winning flag is stored in the RAM 204, that is, whether any jackpot results have occurred in the lottery system on the second special symbol side. If the second winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S410B, where the variable display processing is executed, and then the first game round control process ends. The variable display processing is the process of performing the variable display (light emission control of the light emission unit) on the first special symbol display unit 37a.

If it is determined in step S409B that the second winning flag is stored, the forced termination processes in steps S411B and S412B are performed. These processes will be explained in detail later.

If the display time for the variation has elapsed in step S408B and it is the end of the game round for the first special symbol, the process proceeds to step S413B. In step S413B, the variation termination process is executed. In this process, the first special symbol display unit 37a is controlled so that the stop result set in one of the processes described in steps S609B, S611B, S614B, and S616B is displayed. Then, in step S414, the variation termination command is set, and the first game round control process is terminated. The variation termination command is sent to the performance control device 82 via the external output process in normal processing. Based on the receipt of the variation termination command, the performance control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the variation display of the currently running symbols ends with the stop result corresponding to the game result.

Here, the processing for forced termination in steps S411B and S412B will be explained. In this embodiment, in addition to the case where the variable display time set at the start of the game round has elapsed, there is also a case where the game round ends midway. As described above, in this embodiment, both the first and second special symbol lottery systems are executed in parallel, and the case where the game round ends in addition to the case where the variable display time has elapsed is when a jackpot result occurs in the other lottery system.

In other words, in the forced termination process of step S411B, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 404, a process is executed to overwrite the game result of the game round currently being played in step S801B to a losing result. Here, in this embodiment, although both lottery systems are executed in parallel, the system is configured so that a jackpot result cannot occur simultaneously in both lottery systems. That is, as in step S404B above, at the start of the lottery on the first special symbol side, a determination process is performed to determine whether a jackpot has occurred in the other lottery system on the second special symbol side. If a jackpot has occurred, the lottery on the first special symbol side is not performed. The second game round control process on the second special symbol side will be described later, but it basically has the same processing configuration as the first special symbol side, and similarly, if a jackpot has occurred on the first special symbol side, the lottery on the second special symbol side is not performed. In this way, when a game round is terminated midway and the result is overwritten to a losing result, i.e., when the process in step S801B is performed, the jackpot result is not erased, and the player is not disadvantaged.

After executing the process in step S801B, the value of the first elapsed counter is set to 0 in step S802B. This makes the display time of the game rounds on the first special symbol side 0. After that, this forced termination process is terminated. After executing the forced termination process in step S411B, a forced termination command is set in step S412B and then the first game round control process is terminated. The forced termination command is output to the performance control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The performance control device 82 performs a process to forcibly terminate the game round that is currently running based on the receipt of the forced termination command. However, the forced termination command is set when a jackpot occurs in the other lottery system (the second special symbol side in the above case). Therefore, based on the receipt of the forced termination command, the performance control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to terminate the game round by stopping the display of the currently running symbols as a jackpot result. In this way, it is possible to avoid a drastic decrease in the motivation to play for a player who was enjoying a game round by having their enjoyment taken away midway through.

(Second game round control processing)
Next, the second game round control process in S304B during normal operation will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 405 to 408. Since the second game round control process is basically the same as the first game round control process, the differences will be explained primarily.

As shown in Figure 405, in the second game round control process, first, in step S901B, it is determined whether or not the system is in the opening/closing execution mode, similar to step S401B. If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the second game round control process ends immediately. In step S902B, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol display unit 37b is in the process of displaying a variation. If it is not in the process of displaying a variation, in step S903B, it is determined whether or not the hold information for the second special symbol is stored by referring to the second start hold memory count RbN. If the hold information for the second special symbol is stored, in step S904B, it is determined whether or not the first winning flag or the special win flag is stored. If neither is stored, the second data setting process is executed in step S905B, the second variation start process is executed in step S906, and then in step S907B, the variation command and type command are set as targets for transmission to the performance control device 82, before the second game round control process ends.

The second data setting process in step S905B corresponds to the first data setting process described above. That is, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 406, step S1001B performs a subtraction process for the second start-up hold memory count RbN, and step S1002B moves the hold information from the first area RB1 in the second special feature hold area RB to the second execution area RBE. Then, in step S1003B, shift processing is performed for each area RB1 to RB4, and in step S1004B, the second shift command (second shift occurrence information) is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 82, before the second data setting process ends. The performance control device 82, based on the received second shift command, executes processing to change the display in the second special feature hold display section 43b of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second special feature hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 42 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

The second variation initiation process in step S906B corresponds to the first variation initiation process described above. That is, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 407, steps S1101B to S1105B execute a process to determine the game result for the current game round on the second special symbol side. In this case, unlike step S602B, step S1102B obtains the win/loss table for the second special symbol in low probability mode, and unlike step S603B, step S1103B obtains the win/loss table for the second special symbol in high probability mode. As already explained, while the probability of a jackpot is the same in the lottery systems for the first and second special symbols, the probability of a special win differs in each lottery system. More specifically, the probability of a special win is higher on the second special symbol side than on the first special symbol side.

After the win/loss determination process in step S1104B, step S1105B determines whether the result of the current game round on the second special symbol side is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1106B, where the second winning flag is stored in RAM 204. This process makes it possible to either make a positive determination in step S404B and restrict the start of the game round on the first special symbol side, or make a positive determination in step S409B and forcibly terminate the game round on the first special symbol side.

In step S1107B, the distribution determination process is executed. Unlike step S607B, this process retrieves the distribution table for the second special symbol and determines the type of jackpot result. As already explained, the distribution table for the second special symbol does not have a distribution set for jackpot results without a V; it is set to distribute to either the first V-present jackpot result or the second V-present jackpot result.

In step S1108B, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is a jackpot result with a first V. If it is a jackpot result with a first V, processing for jackpot results with a first V is performed in steps S1109B and S1110B. The processing in steps S1109B and S1110B is the same as the processing in steps S609B and S610B.

If it is determined in step S1108B that the result is not a first V-type jackpot, it means that the current jackpot result is a second V-type jackpot. In this case, step S1111B executes the stop result setting process for a second V-type jackpot. Specifically, the process is performed to terminate the display of the second special symbol display unit 37b when the stop result resulting in a second V-type jackpot is displayed on the second special symbol display unit 37b. Furthermore, in step S1112B, the second V flag, which is information indicating that the current game result is a second V-type jackpot, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1105B, the incorrect processing is performed in steps S1113B to S1116B. These processes are the same as those in steps S613B to S616B, so their explanation is omitted.

After executing any of the processes in steps S1110B, S1112B, S1115B, and S1116B, the process proceeds to step S1117B. In step S1117B, the process for setting the second variation display time is executed. Then, in step S1118B, the process for starting the variation display is executed, and after that, the process for starting the second variation is terminated.

The process of setting the second variation display time in step S1117B corresponds to the process of setting the first variation display time described above. That is, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 408, the current game state is determined by the determination process in step S1201B whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode, and the determination process in step S1202B whether or not it is in high-probability mode. Then, if it is in a low-probability game state, the variation display time table for the low-probability game state is obtained in step S1203B; if it is in the first probability variation state, the variation display time table for the first probability variation state is obtained in step S1204B; and if it is in the second probability variation state, the variation display time table for the second probability variation state is obtained in step S1205B. After that, the process of setting the variation display time to the second elapsed counter is executed in step S1206B, and then the process of setting the second variation display time is terminated.

However, the optimal display time for each game state differs between the first and second special symbols. Specifically, in the second special symbol state, during low-probability gameplay, a short duration of 10 seconds is selected for jackpot and special win results, while a longer duration of 6000 seconds is selected for any other result (miss). Therefore, during low-probability gameplay, the efficiency of the second special symbol display is reduced, except in cases of jackpot or special win results.

In other words, in a low-probability game state, the game progresses faster when playing on the first special symbol side than when playing on the second special symbol side. Furthermore, the right first operation port 33B has a low winning rate in the low-probability game state (low-frequency support mode), and is designed to rarely result in winning. Therefore, comparing a game played on the first special symbol side using the first firing mode (left-handed shooting) aiming at the lower first operation port 33A with a game played using the second firing mode (right-handed shooting) aiming at the right first operation port 33B, aiming at the lower first operation port 33A with the first firing mode is a more favorable game mode for progressing the game on the first special symbol side than playing with the second firing mode.

Here, according to the second launching mode, while entry into the right first operating port 33B cannot be expected, entry into the second operating port 34 can be expected. Furthermore, if the game on the second special symbol side is played based on entry into the second operating port 34, the probability of winning or losing the jackpot is the same as in the game on the first special symbol side, but the probability of getting a special win result is higher than in the game on the first special symbol side. For this reason, it is conceivable that players might try to proceed with the game on the second special symbol side or the game on the first special symbol side while obtaining prize balls through the opening and closing execution mode based on the special win result. However, as mentioned above, the display time for the variation of the game round on the second special symbol side is set to 6000 seconds if it is a loss, so if the result is a loss in the first game round on the second special symbol side, the next opportunity to receive a win or loss draw on the second special symbol side will be 6000 seconds later, making the benefit of receiving a win or loss draw on the second special symbol side in order to aim for a special win result very low. From this perspective, in a low-probability game state, aiming for the lower first operating port 33A in the first firing mode is a game that is likely to be advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the first probability variation state on the second special symbol side, the display time of the variation is set to differ depending on the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the number of second start reserved memories RbN at the start of the variation, all of which are part of the reserved information. However, in the variation display time table for the first probability variation state, shorter times are more likely to be selected than the variation display time on the first special symbol side in the low probability game state, and the efficiency of the lottery system on the second special symbol side in the first probability variation state is set to be higher than the efficiency of the lottery system on the first special symbol side in the low probability game state.

In other words, if a player attempts to play the game on the first special symbol side during the first probability variation state by generating entries into the first operation ports 33A and 33B, the variation display time will be set to 6000 seconds unless it is a jackpot or special win result, making it practically difficult to continue playing. That is, even if the probability of winning or losing increases as in the first probability variation state, it becomes difficult to conduct the required number of draws within the typical operating hours of a gaming hall (for example, 13 hours from 9 am to 10 pm). Therefore, if a player desires a jackpot result during the first probability variation state, it is reasonable to assume they would play the recommended game (playing the second special symbol side, not the first special symbol side).

Furthermore, even during the first probability variation state, for example, in situations where the transition from a low probability game state to the first probability variation state has just occurred, it is conceivable that no balls have entered the second operation port 34 and therefore no reserve information exists for the second special symbol side. In this case, only the game rounds on the first special symbol side will proceed, but as mentioned above, if the result is a loss, a long display time (6000 seconds) will be set, so it can be said that sufficient time is secured for the reserve information on the second special symbol side to be acquired. Also, the display time set for the game rounds on the second special symbol side during the first probability variation state is at most 30 seconds, and the total display time for the game rounds on the second special symbol side, which is the denominator of the probability of winning or losing, is shorter than the display time for the losing game rounds on the first special symbol side. Therefore, during the first probability variation state, the system is set so that a big win result (special win result) is more likely to occur in the win/loss lottery on the second special symbol side while the losing game rounds on the first special symbol side are being executed.

However, if a jackpot is achieved on the first spin of the first special symbol after transitioning to the first probability variation state, and there is no reserve information on the second special symbol side, the distribution table for the first special symbol side will be referenced. As a result, even in the first probability variation state, there is a possibility of being allocated a jackpot without a V, in which case the game will transition to the low probability game state without going through the second probability variation state. Therefore, it is thought that players will hope that a jackpot will not be achieved on the first spin of the first special symbol side after transitioning to the first probability variation state, and will play in a way that avoids the situation where there is no reserve information on the second special symbol side. In this regard, the game is configured to go through an opening/closing execution mode before transitioning to the first probability variation state, and the recommended gameplay in the opening/closing execution mode is gameplay using the second firing method (right-hand shooting). Also, if gameplay is performed using the second firing method, entry into the second operating port 34 can be expected. Therefore, if the opening/closing execution mode is performed according to the recommended gameplay, it is assumed that a winning combination will occur in the second operation opening 34 during the opening/closing execution mode, and that when transitioning to the first probability variation state, the reserve information on the second special symbol side will have accumulated.

In the second probability variation state on the second special symbol side, similar to the low probability game state, a short duration of 10 seconds is selected if the result is a jackpot or special win, while a longer duration of 6000 seconds is selected for any other losing result. Therefore, in the second probability variation state, the efficiency of the second special symbol side is set to be low, except in cases where the result is a jackpot or special win.

In other words, when a ball enters the right first operating port 33B in the second firing pattern during the second probability variation state, a ball may also enter the second operating port 34. However, in the second special symbol game round based on this ball entering the second operating port 34, a 6000-second variation display time is selected unless it is a jackpot or special win result, making it practically difficult to advance the second special symbol game round. In other words, even if the probability of winning or losing increases as in the second probability variation state, it becomes difficult to conduct the denominator of the probability for the second special symbol lottery within the typical operating hours of a gaming hall (for example, 13 hours from 9 am to 10 pm). Furthermore, even during the second probability variation state, for example, in situations that have just transitioned from the first game state to the second probability variation state, it is conceivable that a ball has not entered the right first operating port 33B and therefore there is no reserve information for the first special symbol. In this case, only the game rounds on the second special symbol side will proceed. However, as mentioned above, if the result is a loss, a long display time (6000 seconds) will be set, ensuring sufficient time for the hold information on the first special symbol side to be acquired. Furthermore, the display time set for the game rounds on the first special symbol side during the second probability variation state is at most 30 seconds. The total display time for the game rounds on the first special symbol side, which is the denominator of the probability of winning or losing, is shorter than the display time for the losing game rounds on the second special symbol side. Therefore, during the second probability variation state, the system is set to make it easier to achieve a jackpot result (special win result) in the win/loss lottery on the first special symbol side while the losing game rounds on the second special symbol side are being executed.

However, if a jackpot is achieved on the first spin of the second special symbol sequence after transitioning to the second probability variation state, and there is no reserve information from the first special symbol sequence, the distribution table for the second special symbol sequence will be referenced. However, since the distribution table for the second special symbol sequence is more advantageous to the player than the distribution table for the first special symbol sequence, this situation is desirable for the player. Therefore, even if the spins of the second special symbol sequence are prioritized during the second probability variation state, it is considered that this will not cause any inconvenience to the player.

Returning to the explanation of the second game round control process (Figure 405), if step S902B determines that the second special symbol display unit 37b is currently displaying a variation, step S908B refers to the second elapsed counter to determine whether the variation display time set at the start of the game round has elapsed. If the variation display time has not elapsed, step S909B determines whether the first winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. This process corresponds to the process in step S409B described above, and is a process to determine whether a jackpot occurred in the lottery on the first special symbol side during the execution of a game round that resulted in a loss on the second special symbol side.

If it is determined in step S909B that the first winning flag is not stored, the system executes a variable display process in step S910B to display the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 37b, and then terminates the second game round control process. If it is determined in step S909B that the first winning flag is stored, the system executes a forced termination process in step S911B. This process is the same as the process in Figure 404, and in step S801B, the system executes a process to rewrite the game result of the currently running game round (in this case, the game round on the second special symbol side) to a losing result, and in step S802B, the system executes a process to clear the variable display time. This process forcibly terminates the currently running game round on the second special symbol side. Then, in step S912B, the system sets the forced termination command as the target to be sent to the performance control device 82, and terminates the second game round control process. The performance control device 82 forcibly terminates the display of the changing symbols for the first special symbol that is currently being executed, and controls the display control device 212 to show a stop result corresponding to the jackpot result, thus ending the game round.

If it is determined in step S908B that the display time for the variation has elapsed, the variation termination process is executed in step S913B, and then the variation termination command is sent in step S914B, ending the second game round control process. The processes in steps S913B and S914B are the same as those in steps S413B and S414B described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first game round control process and the second game round control process enable the independent execution of game rounds for the two lottery systems. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs in one lottery system, the system is configured to restrict the start of game rounds in the other lottery system or to forcibly terminate any ongoing game rounds. This configuration makes it possible to suppress a decrease in attention to each jackpot result, even when multiple lottery systems are running in parallel.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the case where a jackpot result is obtained in one lottery system and the other lottery system is forcibly terminated. As described above, when the other lottery system is forcibly terminated, the remaining time for the variable display is set to 0, and the variable display ends at that point. In this case, the game result of the system that was forcibly terminated is rewritten to a losing result. Therefore, in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the second special symbol display unit 37b, the system that was forcibly terminated displays a stop result corresponding to the losing result without waiting for the variable display time to end, and the game round ends. Furthermore, after that, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode of the system that had the jackpot result, so the game round of the system that was forcibly terminated does not start. Therefore, the display on the special symbol display units 37a and 37b of the system that was forcibly terminated remains as a losing result.

On display screen 42a, if a forced termination occurs, the game rounds for each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 that are currently running are overwritten with the stop result corresponding to the jackpot result, and the variation display ends. In this case, the variation display time for the side with the jackpot result is added, and the variation display ends. That is, for example, if a game round with a losing result for the first special symbol is being played, and a game round with a jackpot result for the second special symbol occurs simultaneously, the game rounds with losing results for each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 on the first special symbol side will be overwritten with the game rounds of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 that result in a jackpot on the second special symbol side. In this way, in a configuration where both lottery systems overlap, the variation display for each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 itself will be kept to one, thus avoiding the issue of the player's attention being dispersed.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S305B of the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 409 to 411.

First, in step S1301B, it is determined whether or not the system is in opening/closing execution mode. If it is not in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1302B, where it is determined whether either the first winning flag (first V flag) or the second winning flag (second V flag), or a special winning flag, is stored in RAM 204. If neither flag is stored, the game state transition process ends. If either flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1303B, where it is determined whether or not it is the end timing for the variation display of the corresponding game round. The timing determined in this process includes the end timing when the variation display time set at the start of the game round has elapsed and the game round ends, and the end timing when a jackpot occurs in one lottery system during the variation display of one lottery system's game round, forcing the game round with the variation display to end. If it is neither of these end timings, the game state transition process ends.

If either of the termination timings is reached, the process proceeds to step S1304B, where the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In this start process, an opening waiting time (start waiting period) is set to allow the system to wait without starting to open the large prize opening 321 of the first variable prize device 32A for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the opening waiting time information, pre-stored in the ROM 203, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information set differs depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode, and the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to any jackpot result is longer than that for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a special jackpot result. For example, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to any jackpot result, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 1 sec, while in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a special jackpot result, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 0.2 sec. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In the following step S1305B, the presence or absence of a special win flag is checked in order to set the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. If the special win flag is not stored and the current opening/closing execution mode is based on any jackpot result, then in step S1306B, the round counter RC located in the various counter area 233 of RAM 204 is set to "5," and in step S1307B, the jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204. The round counter RC is used to count the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode, and the jackpot flag is a flag that allows MPU 202 to understand that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode was any jackpot result.

If it is determined in step S1305B that the special win flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1308B. In step S1308B, the round counter RC is set to "1". Then, in step S1309, the special win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204. The special win flag is a flag that allows the MPU 202 to recognize that the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode was a special win result.

After executing the processing in step S1305B or step S1309B, an opening command is set in step S1310B. This set opening command is transmitted to the performance control device 82 during the external output processing in normal operation. This opening command includes information about the type of game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the performance control device 82 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode on the symbol display device 42, and this determined display mode is output from the performance control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the performance control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 42 so that the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode (for example, video display) is displayed.

In the following step S1311B, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether either the first V flag or the second V flag is stored in the RAM 204. If either flag is stored, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal on the external terminal board 79 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, if the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, during the external signal setting process, if a special win flag is stored in the RAM 204, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special win signal provided on the external terminal board 79 is set to the special win signal output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the special win signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, a special win signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can detect that an opening/closing execution mode has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

If it is determined in step S1301B that the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1312B. In step S1312B, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S1313B. Here, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 410.

First, in step S1401B, it is determined whether the main prize opening 321 or the distribution inlet 351 is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 323 of the first variable prize device 32A and the drive unit 353 of the second variable prize device 32B. If the main prize opening 321 and the distribution inlet 351 are not open, in step S1402B, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC is "0", and in step S1403B, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is "0".

If the value of the round counter RC is "0" or the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the main prize slot opening/closing process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1404B, where it is determined whether either the V flag (first V flag or second V flag) is stored in RAM 204. That is, it is determined whether the game result that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was either a jackpot result with the first V flag or a jackpot result with the second V flag.

If any of the V flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S1405B, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC is "1" and whether the round about to begin is the final round of the current opening/closing execution mode. If it is not the final round, or if no V flags are stored in step S1404B, the first opening process is executed in step S1406B. In the first opening process, the drive unit 323 of the first variable prize device 32A is driven and controlled to open the large prize opening 321. This allows the prize to be awarded to the first variable prize device 32A.

On the other hand, if step S1405B determines that this is the final round of the current opening/closing execution mode, step S1407B executes the second opening process. In the second opening process, the drive unit 353 of the second variable prize-winning device 32B is controlled to open the distribution inlet 351. This allows the second variable prize-winning device 32B to accept the prize.

After executing the process in step S1406B or step S1407B, step S1408B determines whether or not a jackpot flag is stored in RAM 204. That is, it determines whether or not the game result that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was a jackpot result. If the opening/closing execution mode was triggered by a jackpot result, step S1409B sets the timer counter TC to "15000". This process determines the period for which the open state of the jackpot entry opening 321 or distribution entry opening 351 is maintained, and the value set in step S1409B corresponds to 30 seconds (long-term open). In the following step S1410B, "8" is set in the prize entry counter PC provided in the various counter areas 233 of RAM 204. The prize entry counter PC is a counter for counting the number of prizes that enter the variable prize entry devices 32A and 32B. Step S1408B is the process of setting the maximum number of winning balls (8 balls, first number) in one round of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

If the jackpot flag is not stored in step S1408B, and the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is a special jackpot result, then in step S1411B, the timer counter TC is set to "3000". The value set in step S1411B corresponds to 6 seconds (short-term opening). In the following step S1412B, the prize counter PC is set to "3". The value set in step S1412B corresponds to the maximum number of prizes (3, second prize) for the opening/closing execution mode based on the special jackpot result.

After executing the process in step S1410B or step S1412B, the open command is set as the output target for the performance control device 82 in step S1413B, and then the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. The open command contains information on which of the variable prize devices 32A and 32B should be opened. Based on the received open command, the performance control device 82 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the variable prize devices 32A and 32B that are to be opened, and controls various devices so that the determined performance content is executed.

Furthermore, if the large prize opening 321 or the distribution opening 351 is open in step S1401B, the process proceeds to step S1414B, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", in step S1415B, it is determined whether a prize has been awarded to either of the variable prize award devices 32A or 32B. Specifically, it is determined whether the passage of a game ball has been detected based on the detection status of the detection sensor 325 for the large prize opening or the detection sensor 361 for counting. If no prize has been awarded, the large prize opening opening/closing process ends. On the other hand, if a prize has been awarded, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S1416B.

In the following step S1417B, it is determined whether or not a game ball has flowed into the V-prize area 356 based on the detection status of the V-prize detection sensor 362. If a ball has flowed into the V-prize area 356, in step S1418B, the process of storing the V-prize flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is executed. The V-prize flag is a flag that allows the MPU 202 to recognize that a V-prize (a game ball flowing into the V-prize area 356) has occurred in this opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S1417B that no V-win has occurred, or after the processing in step S1418B has been executed, step S1419 determines whether the value of the win counter PC is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main win slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If the value of the timer counter TC is "0" in step S1414B, or if the value of the prize counter PC is "0" in step S1419B, it means that the condition for closing the main prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S1420, the corresponding drive units 323 and 353 are deactivated in order to close the main prize opening 321 or the distribution inlet 351.

In the following step S1421B, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1, and in step S1422B, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", in step S1423B, the timer counter TC is set to "1000" (i.e., 2 seconds). Then, in step S1424B, a closing command is set, and the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the performance control device 82 via the external output processing in normal operation. Based on the received closing command, the performance control device 82 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the closing of the variable prize devices 32A and 32B, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content.

If the value of the round counter RC is determined to be "0" in step S1422B, the ending start process is executed in step S1425B. In this start process, an ending waiting time is set for the ending of the open/close execution mode, so that the next game round is not started. Specifically, the ending waiting time information, pre-stored in ROM 203, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Subsequently, in step S1426B, after setting the ending command, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the performance control device 82 during the external output processing in normal operation. The performance control device 82 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode on the symbol display device 42, and this determined display mode is output from the performance control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 42 to display the content corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode (for example, video display) based on the display content command received from the performance control device 82.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 409), after the opening and closing of the large prize slot is performed in step S1313B, it is determined in step S1314B whether the value of the round counter RC is "0". Also, in step S1315B, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1316B, the termination process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1317B, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the termination process for the opening/closing execution mode, various flags that triggered the opening/closing execution mode (such as the first winning flag and the second winning flag) are erased, and the performance control device 82, etc., is controlled to perform the performance for the termination of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 411.

First, in step S1501B, a flag clearing process is performed to erase information used to identify the game state. Specifically, if the jackpot flag, special jackpot flag, high-frequency support flag, or high-probability mode flag are stored in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204, they are cleared. If they are not already stored, the state is maintained. In the following step S1502B, it is determined whether the second V flag is stored in RAM 204. If the second V flag is stored, in step S1503B, the high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204. This sets the support mode to high-frequency support mode. Also, in step S1503B, a high-frequency support command is output to the performance control device 82. This allows the performance control device 82 to understand that the support mode has been set to high-frequency support mode.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1502B, or after the processing in step S1503B is executed, the process proceeds to step S1504B. In step S1504B, it is determined whether or not the V-winning flag is stored. If the V-winning flag is stored, in step S1505B, the process of storing the high-probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204 is executed. This sets the win/loss lottery mode to high-probability mode. Also in step S1505B, a high-probability command is output to the performance control device 82. This allows the performance control device 82 to understand that the win/loss lottery mode has been set to high-probability mode.

The performance control device 82 can determine that the game state is transitioning to the second probability variation state by receiving both the high-frequency support command and the high-probability command at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, it can determine that the game state is transitioning to the first probability variation state by receiving the high-frequency support command but not the high-probability command. Finally, it can determine that the game state is transitioning to the low-probability game state by not receiving either the high-frequency support command or the high-probability command.

In this case, the performance control device 82 performs a process to change the target of the variation display of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 in accordance with the transition of the game state. That is, based on the transition of the game state to a low probability game state or a second probability change state, the target of the variation display of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a is set to target the variation display of the first special symbol side, which is considered a recommended game. Also, based on the transition of the game state to a first probability change state, the target of the variation display of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a is set to target the variation display of the second special symbol side, which is also considered a recommended game. The player can identify whether the variation display of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is targeting the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side by differences in, for example, the background, the type of variation character, sound effects, and lighting patterns. Furthermore, while the target number of game rounds is the same for both the low-probability game state and the second-probability variation state on the first special symbol side, these can be distinguished by the player through differences in, for example, the type of background, the type of fluctuating characters, sound effects, and lighting patterns. This allows the player to understand the difference in the degree of advantage between the low-probability game state and the second-probability variation state.

Returning to the explanation of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, if a negative determination is made in step S1504B, or after the process in step S1505B is executed, the process of clearing each game result flag (including flags for each game round such as the first winning flag, second winning flag, first V flag, second V flag, normal flag, special winning flag, etc., as well as V-winning flags used during the opening/closing execution mode) is executed in step S1506B, and then this transition process ends.

If steps S1503B and S1505B are performed, the game is set to the second probability variation state (high-frequency support mode and high-probability mode). If step S1505B is performed without step S1503B being performed, the game is set to the first probability variation state (low-frequency support mode and high-probability mode). If neither step S1503B nor step S1505B is performed, the game is set to the low-probability game state (low-frequency support mode and low-probability mode).

(Game details)
The content of the game realized by the above configuration will be explained with reference to Figure 412.

As shown in Figure 412(a), the game state can be set to either a low-probability game state or a probability-variable game state (first probability-variable state and second probability-variable state). In the low-probability game state, the win/loss lottery mode is the low-probability mode, and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. As described above, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to win prizes in both the lower first operation port 33A and the second operation port 34. However, the variation display time is more likely to be set shorter for the lower first operation port 33A than for the second operation port 34. In other words, if a prize is won in the second operation port 34, the variation display time is set to such an extent that it is practically difficult to receive the number of lotteries equivalent to the denominator of the winning probability. Therefore, in the low-probability game state, the lower first operation port 33A is more efficient to use than the second operation port 34, and it is preferable to aim for the left-side area PE2 in the first launch operation.

Based on the entry into the lower first operating port 33A, a win/loss lottery is held on the first special symbol side. If the lottery results in a jackpot, it is divided into either a jackpot without a V or a jackpot with the first V. If the result is a jackpot without a V, the game is set to a low probability game state after the opening/closing execution mode, and no transition of game state occurs. On the other hand, if the result is a jackpot with the first V, although the support mode remains the low-frequency support mode, an entry into the second variable prize entry device 32B is permitted during the opening/closing execution mode, so a V entry may occur. If a V entry occurs, the win/loss lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. In this case, since the support mode remains the low-frequency support mode as described above, there is no change in the fact that it is possible to enter either the lower first operating port 33A or the second operating port 34 compared to the low probability game state. However, when set to the high probability mode, the referenced variable display time table switches, and the second operating port 34 is more likely to be set to a shorter time than the lower first operating port 33A. As a result, by aiming the second operating port 34 in the second firing operation to cause the right-side area PE3 to flow down, it becomes possible to frequently receive the win/loss lottery on the second special symbol side.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol side's win/loss lottery based on winning in the second operating port 34, the probability of a special win is set higher than in the first special symbol side's win/loss lottery. While a special win doesn't yield as many prize balls as a jackpot, it allows for the entry of a predetermined number of balls (3) into the first variable prize device 32A, resulting in a prize of 30 balls. As a result, in the first probability variation state, aiming for the second operating port 34 allows for gameplay without significantly reducing the number of balls held.

If the draw for winning based on a ball entering the second operating port 34 results in a jackpot, the distribution table for the second special symbol is referenced, and the result is allocated to either a jackpot with a V in the first slot or a jackpot with a V in the second slot. If the result is a jackpot with a V in the first slot, the player should continue playing, aiming for the second operating port 34, as described above. On the other hand, if the result is a jackpot with a V in the second slot, the support mode is set to high-frequency support mode. When set to high-frequency support mode, it becomes easier to enter the right first operating port 33B, and by performing the second launch operation so that the ball flows down the right-side area PE3, it becomes possible to play in a way that allows you to obtain a draw for the first special symbol without significantly reducing your ball count. Furthermore, similar to the jackpot with a V in the first slot, since V entries are more likely to occur during the opening/closing execution mode, the win/loss draw mode is more likely to be set to high-probability mode.

As described above, in the low probability game state, a first V-symbol jackpot result triggers the acquisition of at least two probability states (essentially states that easily transition to the opening/closing execution mode): the first and second probability states (see Figure 412(b)). In other words, since the first probability state does not result in a V-symbol jackpot, and V-symbol jackpots are only awarded in the second probability state, it is not possible to transition from the first probability state to the low probability game state without going through the second probability state. Moreover, in the first probability state, a first V-symbol jackpot result makes it possible to acquire two more probability states. In the second probability state, a first V-symbol jackpot result also makes it possible to acquire two more probability states. Therefore, the expectation of winning a first V-symbol jackpot result in the low probability game state can be increased, and the game's appeal can be enhanced.

(Base comparison)
In the first and second probability variation states, the base (the ratio of balls fired to balls awarded: also called the payout base), which is calculated by subtracting the number of prize balls that would be obtained from the number of balls fired in the recommended gameplay mode, is set to be the same or approximately the same. Specifically, as shown in Figure 413(a), in the first probability variation state, when playing the game aiming for the second operation opening 34, the prize ball awarded for entering the second operation opening 34 is 1, so the number of balls held does not increase based on entering the second operation opening 34 (Figure 413(a) omits the increase in prize balls awarded for entering the second operation opening 34). On the other hand, in the second special prize draw conducted based on entering the second operation opening 34, if a special win result is obtained, entry into the first variable prize device 32A is permitted, and prize balls can be obtained based on that.

In other words, when game balls are launched towards the second operating port 34 during the first probability variation state, approximately half (specifically, about 45%) will enter the second operating port 34. Therefore, if 100 game balls are launched, approximately 45 of them will enter the second operating port 34, resulting in approximately 45 prize balls (45 prize balls entered x 1 prize ball). Furthermore, in the win/loss lottery on the second special symbol side, there is a 1 in 30 chance of a special win, resulting in approximately 30 prize balls (3 prize balls entered x 10 prize balls). Therefore, when 100 game balls are launched, it can be expected that approximately 45 prize balls will be obtained. In addition, some of the game balls that do not enter the second operating port 34 will enter the lower first operating port 33A or the general prize port 31, and the prize balls obtained from this will be approximately 5 when 100 balls are launched (assuming that the 55 balls that did not enter the second operating port 34 flow downstream). As a result, when game balls are launched towards the second operating port 34 during the first probability variation state (the second launch operation is performed), approximately 95 prize balls can be obtained when 100 balls are launched, resulting in a base rate of approximately 95% (the ratio of the number of balls launched to the number of prize balls).

Furthermore, when considering the prize balls awarded in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 34 and the lower first operating port 33A, the ratio of the number of balls launched to the number of prize balls exceeds 100%. Therefore, in the first probability-increasing state, players can increase their ball count by aiming for the second operating port 34.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 413(b), in the second probability variation state, when playing by aiming for the right first operation port 33B, the probability of achieving a special win is lower, unlike in the first probability variation state (Figure 31(b) omits the fact that a special win will occur). On the other hand, in the second probability variation state, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and since the prize ball awarded for a ball entering the right first operation port 33B is 3, it is possible to increase (avoid a decrease in) the number of balls held based on a ball entering the right first operation port 33B.

In other words, in the second probability variation state, when a game ball is launched aiming at the right first operation port 33B, approximately 18% of the balls will enter the right first operation port 33B. Therefore, when 100 game balls are launched, approximately 18 of them will enter the right first operation port 33B, resulting in approximately 54 prize balls (18 balls entered x 3 prize balls). In addition, when a game ball is launched aiming at the right first operation port 33B, any game balls that do not enter the right first operation port 33B may enter the second operation port 34. Therefore, when 100 game balls are launched, of the approximately 82 game balls that did not enter the right first operation port 33B, approximately 45%, or about 37 game balls, will enter the second operation port 34, resulting in approximately 37 prize balls (37 balls entered x 1 prize ball). Furthermore, assuming that approximately 45 game balls flowed down, not entering the right first operation port 33B or the second operation port 34, and instead entered the lower first operation port 33A or the general prize port 31, approximately 4 prize balls can be added. As a result, when game balls are launched towards the right first operation port 33B (the second launch operation) during the second probability variation state, approximately 95 prize balls can be obtained when 100 balls are launched. The base rate, which is the ratio of balls launched to prize balls, is approximately 95%, which is the same as or approximately the same as when the second launch operation is performed during the first probability variation state.

Furthermore, when considering the prize balls awarded in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 34 and the lower first operating port 33A, the ratio of the number of balls launched to the number of prize balls exceeds 100%. Therefore, even in the second probability variation state, players can increase their ball count by aiming for the right first operating port 33B.

<Variation 1>
In the 44th embodiment described above, if a jackpot result without a V (normal jackpot result) occurs, the system transitions to a low-probability game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode. Here, it is also possible to provide a first low-probability state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode and a second low-probability state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode as the low-probability game state, and if a jackpot result without a V (normal jackpot result) occurs, the system transitions to the second low-probability state, which has an upper limit on the number of support rounds (for example, 100 rounds).

<Modified Example 2>
In the 44th embodiment described above, the base in the first probability variation state and the base in the second probability variation state were set to be the same or nearly the same, but a clear difference may be provided between the two. The difference may be set so that the base in the first probability variation state is higher than the base in the second probability variation state, or the difference may be set so that the base in the first probability variation state is lower than the base in the second probability variation state.

<Embodiment 45>
In the 44th embodiment described above, the first V-shaped jackpot was set as the trigger (return route or upgrade route) for returning from the second probability variation state to the first probability variation state. This embodiment differs from the 44th embodiment in that it suppresses monotony in gameplay by providing other return routes in addition to this return route. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 414 and 415, focusing on the differences from the 44th embodiment. Configurations common to the 44th embodiment will not be described.

In this embodiment, two special winning results are provided: Special Winning Result A and Special Winning Result B. Both Special Winning Result A and Special Winning Result B trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening and closing behavior of the variable prize winning device during this mode is the same. Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by Special Winning Result A or Special Winning Result B, the opening and closing control (opening and closing of the large prize winning opening 321) by the first variable prize winning device 32A is performed once, and this single opening continues until 6 seconds (second period) have elapsed or until the number of winning balls in the large prize winning opening 321 reaches 3 (second number).

The opening time of the first variable prize device 32A (large prize opening 321) based on special win results A and B is set to be longer than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the prize limit (3 balls). Therefore, in this opening/closing execution mode, the prize limit number of game balls can be expected to enter, and the corresponding prize balls can be obtained. However, in special win results A and B, the opening period of the first variable prize device 32A (large prize opening 321) is set to be shorter and the number of openings and closings is set to be fewer than in the case of a jackpot result, and the number of prize balls obtained is less than in the case of a jackpot result.

As shown in Figure 414, the first special prize win/loss table is configured such that a special prize result A occurs when the value of the winning random number counter C1 is "157" or "457", and a special prize result B occurs when the value of the winning random number counter C1 is "257" or "357". In other words, there are two random numbers corresponding to both special prize result A and special prize result B, and the probability of achieving either special prize result A or special prize result B by entering the first operation opening 33 is 1/300 for both.

In contrast, the second special symbol win/loss table is configured such that when the value of the winning random number counter C1 is "8", "37", "68" ... "573", it results in special win result A, but not special win result B. In other words, there are a total of 20 random number values corresponding to special win result A and 0 random number values corresponding to special win result B. Therefore, the probability of achieving special win result A by entering the second operation opening 34 is 1/30, and the probability of achieving special win result B is 0.

As shown in Figure 415, if special win result A occurs in the second probability variation state, the system returns to the second probability variation state via the opening/closing execution mode. Conversely, if special win result B occurs in the second probability variation state, the system transitions to the first probability variation state via the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, special win result B triggers the termination of the high-frequency support mode, and an additional return route (upgrade route) from the second probability variation state to the first probability variation state is added. To put it another way, after transitioning to the second probability variation state (after demotion), the system returns to (upgrades to) the first probability variation state triggered by either (1) a V-winning jackpot result, or (2) special win result B occurring before a jackpot result.

When returning to the first probability variation state via an opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a jackpot result, it is necessary to trigger a V-entry area, etc., and a certain amount of time is required to complete the opening/closing execution mode. In contrast, for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to special jackpot result B, opening the V-entry area, etc., is unnecessary, and the required time is extremely short. In other words, the return to the first probability variation state can be completed much more quickly compared to when a jackpot result occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to suddenly return from the second probability variation state to the first probability variation state, effectively suppressing monotony in gameplay.

In this embodiment, the time required for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is longer than the execution time for one game round corresponding to the reach display, while the time required for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to special jackpot result B is shorter than the execution time for one game round corresponding to the reach display.

<Variation 1>
In the 45th embodiment described above, the operation mode of the variable prize device in the opening/closing execution mode transitioned to in response to special win result A and the operation mode of the variable prize device in the opening/closing execution mode transitioned to in response to special win result B are made common, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The operation mode of the variable prize device in the opening/closing execution mode transitioned to in response to special win result A and the operation mode of the variable prize device in the opening/closing execution mode transitioned to in response to special win result B may be made different. For example, the execution time of the opening/closing execution mode transitioned to in response to special win result B (specifically, the opening time of the variable prize device) may be shorter than the execution time of the opening/closing execution mode transitioned to in response to special win result A (specifically, the opening time of the variable prize device).

<Modified Example 2>
In the 45th embodiment described above, the configuration includes special winning result A and special winning result B as a result of the lottery based on winning into the first operating port 33, but it is not limited to this. It is sufficient that special winning result B is provided as a result of the lottery based on winning into the first operating port 33, and special winning result A can be omitted.

<Example 3>
In the second probability variation state, during a game round in which a special win result B is obtained through a lottery based on entry into the first operating port 33, the system may be configured to notify the player that the result is special win B in a way that makes it identifiable, or it may be configured to notify the player in a way that makes it difficult or impossible to identify. For example, if the result is special win B, the system may be configured to clearly indicate that the result is special win B by displaying the symbol combination corresponding to special win B as the final stop (confirmation display), or it may be configured to not clearly indicate that the result is special win B by displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result as the final stop (confirmation display).

<46th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the animation performed when returning (upgrading) from the second probability state to the first probability state is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 45th embodiment. Configurations common to the 45th embodiment will not be explained.

As shown in Figure 416, the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42 is set to display three pattern rows: left, center, and right. The pattern display area on the display screen 42a is broadly divided into the left pattern display area DL, the center pattern display area DM, and the right pattern display area DR, corresponding to each of these pattern rows. The patterns in each pattern row are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (e.g., from top to bottom). Each pattern display area DL, DM, and DR displays three patterns for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns being displayed in a 3x3 arrangement within the pattern display area. These patterns include nine main patterns, represented by the numbers "1" through "9," and secondary patterns, which are pictorial representations of seashells (see Figures 417(j) to 417(s)).

The display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 has five active lines set: upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, left-upward line L4, and right-upward line L5. During each game, the symbol display stops in the order of, for example, left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column. When the display of all symbol columns has finished (a confirmation display is shown), the player is notified whether a jackpot has been won. Specifically, symbols "1" through "9" are jackpot symbols, and a jackpot result is clearly indicated when the same jackpot symbol combination is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) on any of the active lines L1 through L5.

When the above-described reach display occurs, the symbol display first ends in one of the variable display areas (e.g., left variable display area DL), and then, after the symbol display has ended in another variable display area (e.g., right variable display area DR), a reach line is formed when the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on at least one of the active lines L1 to L5. While this reach line is formed, the symbol display continues in the remaining variable display area (e.g., middle variable display area DM), resulting in a reach display. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display in the remaining symbol row (e.g., middle symbol row) ends so that the same symbol that forms the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line.

As already explained, in the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. If a jackpot is achieved through the lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33, the result will be either a jackpot with a first V or a jackpot without a V.

As shown in Figure 418, in the low probability game state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first V-winning jackpot when the same odd-numbered symbol combination, specifically "1 1 1", "3 3 3", "5 5 5", "7 7 7", or "9 9 9", is displayed as the final stop, and the result is a non-V-winning jackpot when the same even-numbered symbol combination, specifically "2 2 2", "4 4 4", "6 6 6", or "8 8 8", is displayed as the final stop. In other words, when the low probability game state results in a first V-winning jackpot and transitions to the first probability variation state (requiring a V-win), the same odd-numbered symbol combination is displayed as the final stop to indicate this, and when the result is a non-V-winning jackpot and the low probability game state loops (not requiring a V-win), the same even-numbered symbol combination is displayed as the final stop to indicate this.

In the following explanation, the combinations of identical odd-numbered symbols mentioned above will be referred to as "Type 1 symbol combinations," and the combinations of identical even-numbered symbols mentioned above will be referred to as "Type 2 symbol combinations."

In the first probability variation state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game primarily involves rounds related to the second operating port 34. If a jackpot is achieved through the lottery based on ball entry into the second operating port 34, the result will be either a first V-type jackpot or a second V-type jackpot.

As shown in Figure 418, in the first probability variation state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first V-winning jackpot by displaying the first type symbol combination at the final stop, and the display of the second type symbol combination at the final stop clearly indicates that the result is a second V-winning jackpot. In other words, if the first probability variation state results in a first V-winning jackpot and the first probability variation state loops (requiring a V-win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the first type symbol combination at the final stop. If the result is a second V-winning jackpot and the player is demoted to the second probability variation state (requiring a V-win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the second type symbol combination at the final stop.

In contrast, in the second probability variation state, which corresponds to both high probability mode and high frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. If a jackpot result is obtained through the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the result will be either a jackpot with a first V or a jackpot without a V.

As shown in Figure 418, in the second probability variation state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first-type jackpot with a V symbol by displaying the first-type symbol combination at the final stop, and that the result is a second-type jackpot without a V symbol by displaying the second-type symbol combination at the final stop. In other words, if the second probability variation state results in a first-type jackpot with a V symbol and returns to (promotes) the first probability variation state (requires a V symbol win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the first-type symbol combination at the final stop. If the result is a second-type jackpot without a V symbol and demotes to a low probability game state (does not require a V symbol win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the second-type symbol combination at the final stop.

Thus, in this embodiment, the combinations of symbols are differentiated so that, in both the low-probability and high-probability game states, the combinations of symbols of type 1 are more advantageous to the player than the combinations of symbols of type 2.

Next, referring to Figure 419, we will explain the combination of symbols that will be displayed on the display screen 42a when a special winning result (Special Winning Result A and Special Winning Result B) is obtained through the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 33 and 34.

In the lottery based on winning at the first activation port 33, there is a possibility of special winning result A or special winning result B as described above (see Figure 414). During the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first activation port 33. However, if special winning result A or special winning result B occurs during this low probability game state, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result (losing symbol combination) is displayed, and the display screen 42a does not explicitly indicate that special winning result A or special winning result B occurred.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay mainly involves the second operation port 34. Therefore, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first operation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses with the primary focus being on the game rounds related to the first activation port 33. If a special win result A or special win result B is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first activation port 33 during this second probability variation state, the display screen 42a will show a combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "5" symbol as the final stop, clearly indicating that it is either special win result A or special win result B (see Figure 419(b)). Specifically, the final stop display of any of the following combinations will indicate that it is either special win result A or special win result B: "1 3 5", "1 5 3", "3 5 1", "3 1 5", "5 1 3", or "5 3 1".

In the following explanation, the above-mentioned pattern combinations of "1 3 5", "1 5 3", "3 5 1", "3 1 5", "5 1 3", and "5 3 1" will be referred to as "Type 3 pattern combinations".

In the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34, there is a possibility of a special win result A, as described above (see Figure 414). In the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during this low probability state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the rounds played at the first operating port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses with the primary focus being on rounds played through the second activation port 34. If a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during this first probability variation state, the above-mentioned third-type symbol combination is displayed on the display screen 42a at the final stop, clearly indicating that it is a special win result A.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay primarily involves the first activation port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the second probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first activation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

This embodiment is similar to the 45th embodiment in that it provides a special route that returns (upgrades) to the first probability variation state if a special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a win in the first operation opening 33 during the second probability variation state. However, one of its features is that when such a return (upgrade) via the special route occurs, that is, when a special win result A or special win result B is obtained during the second probability variation state, a symbol conversion effect (including false alarms) that suggests a change in the symbol sequence displayed on the display screen 42a is executed. The flow of this symbol conversion effect will be explained below with reference to Figures 420 to 423.

In the example shown in Figure 420, a special win result is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first operating slot 33 during the second probability variation state. In the game round related to this special win result, after a reach display, the third type of symbol combination, which corresponds to the special win result, is displayed as the final stop.

After the third type of symbol combination is displayed as the final stop, as shown in Figure 421, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode while the third type of symbol combination remains displayed as stopped. After transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, the displayed symbol combination flashes and swings up and down. This flashing and swinging display functions as a warning indicator for a change in the symbol sequence.

At a predetermined timing after the teasing display begins, specifically when the ending sequence in the opening/closing execution mode is triggered, the flashing symbols begin scrolling slightly before the return to the bonus state.

If the trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode is special win result A, i.e., transitioning from opening/closing execution mode to the second probability variation state, the symbol sequence will remain as the basic symbol sequence (without being changed) and will begin scrolling in the forward direction (downward). Conversely, if the trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode is special win result B, i.e., transitioning from opening/closing execution mode to the first probability variation state, the symbol sequence will change to the special symbol sequence and will begin scrolling in the reverse direction (upward). The scrolling speed (display speed) when scrolling begins in this way is high (low discrimination mode), making it difficult to determine whether or not the symbol sequence has been changed.

If subsequent reserved symbols are secured, the game transitions to a probability variation state while continuing the scrolling display. During the first spin in this probability variation state, the scrolling speed decreases to a slower speed (high-discrimination mode), making it easier to visually distinguish between the basic and special symbol sequences. Conversely, if no subsequent reserved symbols are secured, the symbol sequence continues to move at high speed while waiting for a winning entry into the payout slot. Furthermore, if the symbol scrolling direction is reversed, the scrolling direction switches to forward after the first spin executed following the transition from the opening/closing execution mode to the probability variation state.

Incidentally, if the system enters the opening/closing execution mode → probability variation state when no subsequent holds are secured, the system may be configured to forcibly terminate the scrolling display of the symbol sequence at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode ends or earlier. In this case, it is preferable that the symbol combination displayed as the stop is the same as the symbol combination that was last displayed before the current scrolling display began.

If the symbol sequence changes from the basic symbol sequence to the special symbol sequence, the display of that special symbol sequence will continue until the next jackpot result is reached. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by that jackpot result ends and the game transitions to a probability variation state, the symbol sequence displayed on the display screen 42a in that probability variation state will revert to the basic symbol sequence.

Here, referring to Figures 422 and 423, the difference between basic symbol sequences and special symbol sequences will be explained.

In the basic symbol rows shown in Figure 422, the left and middle symbol rows consist of nine main symbols—"1," "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," "8," and "9"—arranged in ascending order (forward direction only), with secondary symbols in between. The right symbol row consists of nine main symbols—"1," "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," "8," and "9"—arranged in descending order (forward direction only), with secondary symbols in between. In other words, each symbol row is composed of even-numbered and odd-numbered symbol groups.

In contrast, the special symbol rows shown in Figure 423 consist of five main symbols—"1," "3," "5," "7," and "9"—arranged in ascending order (forward direction only) with secondary symbols in between. The right symbol row, on the other hand, consists of five main symbols—"1," "3," "5," "7," and "9"—arranged in descending order (forward direction only) with secondary symbols in between. In other words, both symbol rows are composed of odd-numbered symbols, omitting even-numbered symbols compared to the basic symbol rows.

The display of a special symbol sequence suggests to the player that the "reach" display and final stop display for the even-numbered symbol combination (Type 2 symbol combination) will not occur, meaning the probability variation state will not end with the next big win.

While transitions between the low-probability game state, the first-probability state, and the second-probability state are primarily triggered by jackpot results, this embodiment allows for state transitions even in the case of special jackpot results. Specifically, if special jackpot result B occurs during the second-probability state, the lottery mode remains unchanged, but the support mode changes from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode, resulting in a promotion to the first-probability state. Since the first-probability state is configured to transition to the low-probability game state via the second-probability state, the possibility of the high-probability mode ending is lower compared to the second-probability state (increasing the expectation of a loop in high-probability mode). Here, if the game progresses to the first probability variation state as a result of a first V-shaped jackpot during the second game state, this is indicated by the final stop display of the first type symbol combination on the display screen 42a. If the game transitions to the first probability variation state as a result of a special jackpot B, the symbol sequence displayed on the display screen 42a changes from a normal symbol sequence to a special symbol sequence, indicating the transition to the first probability variation state. In this way, a configuration where multiple different indication functions are displayed depending on the symbol group can suppress monotony in the game and effectively improve the player's attention to the game.

The display of special symbol sequences during the first probability-increasing state continues until the next jackpot is achieved. This configuration effectively enhances player satisfaction.

Special win result B is a result that does not affect the lottery mode. Therefore, compared to a regular win result, control for ball entry into the V-winning area is unnecessary, allowing for a quick transition to the first probability variation state. This is desirable for differentiating the symbol display for each transition route to the first probability variation state. For example, it is desirable to make the transition to the first probability variation state triggered by special win result B less noticeable, thereby enhancing the impact when the symbol sequence is changed.

<Variation 1>
In the 46th embodiment described above, the configuration may also include the history display function (excluding the special history display change function) shown in the 47th embodiment described later. Even when an unfavorable history is displayed to the player, the configuration allows for the possibility of overturning it through the aforementioned symbol conversion effect, thereby effectively increasing the player's attention to the game.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 46th embodiment described above, when a special win occurs during the second probability variation state, the configuration is such that this is clearly indicated by displaying the third type symbol combination as the final stop; however, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that when a special win occurs during the second probability variation state, the losing symbol combination is displayed as the final stop, without clearly indicating this. By making it difficult or impossible to distinguish between losing results and special win results in this way, the impact when a symbol conversion effect occurs can be suitably enhanced.

<Example 3>
In the embodiment described in 46 above, the symbol conversion effect is configured to occur after a teasing display, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the symbol sequence to be converted abruptly from a basic symbol sequence to a special symbol sequence without going through the teasing display.

In this configuration, the symbol sequence may be converted from the basic symbol sequence to the special symbol sequence at the timing of the transition from the second probability variation state to the first probability variation state via the opening/closing execution mode, for example, during the first game round after the transition to the second probability variation state. In other words, the timing of the symbol conversion is not limited to the opening/closing execution mode; it may also occur after returning to the first probability variation state (after the upgrade).

<Modification 4>
If a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the system may be configured to perform a conversion from the basic symbol row to the special symbol row during the game round related to that special win result B.

<Example 5>
In the 46th embodiment described above, the special symbol sequence was constructed by excluding the even-numbered symbols that make up the basic symbol sequence, but the invention is not limited to this. The special symbol sequence may also be constructed by replacing the even-numbered symbols that make up the basic symbol sequence with odd-numbered symbols.

Furthermore, it is not always necessary to reuse the same symbols used in the basic symbol sequence for the symbols used in the special symbol sequence. For example, it is possible to use dedicated symbols (such as character symbols or alphabet symbols) separate from the symbols used in the basic symbol sequence.

<Modification 6>
In the 46th embodiment described above, the display of the special symbol sequence was configured not to include fake displays (so-called false alarms), but this can be changed to a configuration that includes fake displays (so-called false alarms) in the display of the special symbol sequence. Specifically, it is also possible to configure the machine to temporarily convert the symbol sequence to a special symbol sequence when the game state is in the second probability variation state. In such a configuration, if a jackpot result without a V occurs while the special symbol sequence is displayed, it may confuse the player and reduce the reliability of the game machine. In light of these circumstances, when displaying a fake special symbol sequence, it is preferable to first identify (confirm in advance) that there are no reserved symbols in each stored reserve that correspond to a jackpot result without a V, and to configure the machine to start the fake display on the condition that there are no reserved symbols that correspond to a jackpot result without a V.

<Example 7>
In the 46th embodiment described above, the switching from the basic symbol sequence to the special symbol sequence is completed in one go. However, it is also possible to use a configuration in which the number of even-numbered symbols constituting the symbol sequence is reduced in stages (for example, a configuration in which the number is reduced with each game round, or a configuration in which the number is reduced according to the number of cycles of the symbol sequence).

<Difference 8>
In the 46th embodiment described above, the background (the stage to stay, described later) is the same for both the first and second probability variation states during the high probability mode. However, the background displayed when entering the first probability variation state and the background displayed when entering the second probability variation state may be different. However, it is preferable that the background from the second probability variation state is carried over when transitioning to the first probability variation state triggered by special win result B.

<Embodiment 47>
In this embodiment, the animation performed when returning (upgrading) from the second probability state to the first probability state is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 45th embodiment. Configurations common to the 45th embodiment will not be explained.

As shown in Figure 424, the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42 is set to display three pattern rows: left, center, and right. The pattern display area on the display screen 42a is broadly divided into the left pattern display area DL, the center pattern display area DM, and the right pattern display area DR, corresponding to each of these pattern rows. The patterns in each pattern row are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (e.g., from top to bottom). Each pattern display area DL, DM, and DR displays three patterns for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns (3x3) being displayed in the pattern display area. These patterns include a total of 10 main patterns consisting of the numbers "1" through "9" and the "CAHNCE" pattern, as well as a secondary pattern resembling a seashell (see Figures 425(j) to (t)).

The display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 has five active lines set: upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, left-upward line L4, and right-upward line L5. During each game, the symbol display stops in the order of, for example, left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column. When the display of all symbol columns has finished (a confirmation display is shown), the player is notified whether a jackpot has been won. Specifically, symbols "1" through "9" are jackpot symbols, and a jackpot result is clearly indicated when the same jackpot symbol combination is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) on any of the active lines L1 through L5.

When the above-described reach display occurs, the symbol display first ends in one of the variable display areas (e.g., left variable display area DL), and then, after the symbol display has ended in another variable display area (e.g., right variable display area DR), a reach line is formed when the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on at least one of the active lines L1 to L5. While this reach line is formed, the symbol display continues in the remaining variable display area (e.g., middle variable display area DM), resulting in a reach display. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display in the remaining symbol row (e.g., middle symbol row) ends so that the same symbol that forms the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line.

As already explained, in the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. If a jackpot is achieved through the lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33, the result will be either a jackpot with a first V or a jackpot without a V.

As shown in Figure 426(a), in the low probability game state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first V-winning jackpot when the final stop display is one of the following combinations of odd-numbered symbols: "1 1 1", "3 3 3", "5 5 5", "7 7 7", or "9 9 9". Conversely, the result is a non-V-winning jackpot when the final stop display is one of the following combinations of even-numbered symbols: "2 2 2", "4 4 4", "6 6 6", or "8 8 8". In other words, if a jackpot with a first V occurs during a low-probability game state, and the game transitions to the first probability variation state (requiring a V-entry), this is clearly indicated by the final stop displaying the same odd-numbered symbol combination. If a jackpot without a V occurs, and the low-probability game state loops (no V-entry required), this is clearly indicated by the final stop displaying the same even-numbered symbol combination.

In the following explanation, the combinations of identical odd-numbered symbols mentioned above will be referred to as "Type 1 symbol combinations," and the combinations of identical even-numbered symbols mentioned above will be referred to as "Type 2 symbol combinations."

In the first probability variation state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game primarily involves rounds related to the second operating port 34. If a jackpot is achieved through the lottery based on ball entry into the second operating port 34, the result will be either a first V-type jackpot or a second V-type jackpot.

As shown in Figure 426(a), in the first probability variation state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first V-winning jackpot by displaying the first type symbol combination at the final stop, and the display of the second type symbol combination at the final stop clearly indicates that the result is a second V-winning jackpot. In other words, if the first probability variation state results in a first V-winning jackpot and the first probability variation state loops (requiring a V-win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the first type symbol combination at the final stop. If the result is a second V-winning jackpot and the player is demoted to the second probability variation state (requiring a V-win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the second type symbol combination at the final stop.

In contrast, in the second probability variation state, which corresponds to both high probability mode and high frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. If a jackpot result is obtained through the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the result will be either a jackpot with a first V or a jackpot without a V.

As shown in Figure 426(a), in the second probability variation state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first-type jackpot with a V symbol by displaying the first-type symbol combination at the final stop, and that the result is a second-type jackpot without a V symbol by displaying the second-type symbol combination at the final stop. In other words, if the second probability variation state results in a first-type jackpot with a V symbol and returns to (promotes) the first probability variation state (requires a V symbol win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the first-type symbol combination at the final stop. If the result is a second-type jackpot without a V symbol and demotes to a low probability game state (does not require a V symbol win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the second-type symbol combination at the final stop.

Thus, in this embodiment, the combinations of symbols are differentiated so that, in both the low-probability and high-probability game states, the combinations of symbols of type 1 are more advantageous to the player than the combinations of symbols of type 2.

Next, referring to Figure 426(b), we will explain the combination of symbols that will be displayed on the final stop screen 42a when a special winning result (Special Winning Result A and Special Winning Result B) is obtained through the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 33 and 34.

In the lottery based on winning at the first activation port 33, there is a possibility of special winning result A or special winning result B as described above (see Figure 414). In the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first activation port 33. However, if special winning result A or special winning result B occurs during this low probability game state, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result (completely losing symbol combination) is displayed, and the display screen 42a does not explicitly indicate that special winning result A or special winning result B occurred. Note that the completely losing symbol combination is a losing symbol combination displayed without going through the reach display, and is distinguished from the reach-losing symbol combination, which is a losing symbol combination displayed via the reach display.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay mainly involves the second operation port 34. Therefore, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first operation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses with the primary focus being on rounds played using the first activation port 33. If a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first activation port 33 during this second probability variation state, the display screen 42a will show a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol (hereinafter referred to as the fourth type of symbol combination) as the final stop, clearly indicating that it is a special win result A. The fourth type of symbol combination includes, for example, a combination of "5", "CHANCE", and "5", or a combination of "7", "CHANCE", and "7".

On the other hand, if a special win result B is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33 during the second probability variation state, the combination of symbols that resulted in a failed reach will be displayed on the display screen 42a at the final stop. This makes it difficult to determine from the displayed symbol combination whether the current game round corresponds to a losing result or to special win result B.

In the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34, there is a possibility of a special win result A, as described above (see Figure 414). In the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during this low probability state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the rounds played at the first operating port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses with the primary focus being on rounds involving the second operation port 34. If a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second operation port 34 during this first probability variation state, the above-mentioned combination of Type 4 symbols is displayed on the display screen 42a at the final stop, clearly indicating that it is a special win result A.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay primarily involves the first activation port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the second probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first activation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In this embodiment, one of its features is the inclusion of a history display function that shows the history of jackpots until the game returns to the low-probability state after transitioning from a low-probability game state to a probability-increasing game state. This history display function will be described below with reference to Figures 424 and 427.

As shown in Figure 424, the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42, specifically the upper left corner of the variable display area ME, is provided with a history information display area HE capable of displaying jackpot history information. The display of history information in this history information display area HE is ON during high-probability game states and OFF during low-probability game states. In this embodiment, past history information is erased when the game transitions to a low-probability game state.

As shown in Figure 427, the history information display area HE has a previous-previous area EA that displays the type of the previous-previous jackpot, a previous area EB that displays the type of the last jackpot, and a current area EC that displays the type of the current jackpot. These areas EA to EC are arranged horizontally.

The previous-previous-round area EA is divided into upper and lower sections. The upper section of the previous-previous-round area EA displays the words "Previous-Previous-Round." The lower section of the previous-previous-round area EA is a symbol display unit PA, which displays the single symbol that constituted the symbol combination displayed at the end of the previous-previous-round jackpot, serving as information (history information) to identify that combination. The image data for the symbols displayed in the symbol display unit PA is the same as that used for the symbols that make up the variable display area ME (scrolling display), and the scrolling symbols are displayed in a reduced size. In the example shown in Figure 427(a), the first-type symbol combination, specifically the "7" symbol combination, was displayed at the end of the previous-previous-round jackpot. The "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the symbol display unit PA as information (history information) to identify this combination.

The previous area EB is also divided into upper and lower sections, with the word "Previous" displayed in the upper section. The lower section of the previous area EB is a symbol display unit PB, which displays the single symbol that made up the symbol combination that was displayed at the end of the previous jackpot, serving as information (history information) to identify that combination. The image data of the symbols displayed in the symbol display unit PB is the same image data used for the symbols that make up the variable display area ME (scrolling display), and the scrolling symbols are displayed in a reduced size. In the example shown in Figure 427(a), the first type symbol combination, specifically the "5" symbol combination, was displayed at the end of the previous jackpot, and the "5" symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the symbol display unit PB as information (history information) to identify it.

In this instance, the area EC is also divided into upper and lower sections. The upper section of this area EC displays the word "This Time." The lower section of this area EC is a symbol display PC that displays the one symbol that made up the symbol combination that was displayed at the end of the previous jackpot, serving as information (history information) to identify that combination. The image data of the symbols displayed on the symbol display PC is the same image data used for the symbols that make up the symbol sequence displayed (scrolled) in the variable display area ME, and the symbols for scrolled display are displayed in a reduced state. In the example shown in Figure 427(a), the game is in the first probability variation state and has not yet hit a jackpot, so the symbol display PC is blank.

Here, referring to Figure 427(b), we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the relationship between the symbols displayed in the previous area EB (symbol display section PB) during the probability variation game state and the current game state.

If the previous display in Area EB showed one of the following symbols ("1", "3", "5", "7", or "9"), the current game state is confirmed to be the first probability variation state. Conversely, if the previous display in Area EB showed one of the following symbols ("2", "4", "6", or "8"), the current game state is confirmed to be the second probability variation state.

This embodiment is similar to the 45th embodiment in that it provides a special route that returns (upgrades) to the first probability variation state when a special win result B is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first operation opening 33 during the second probability variation state. However, when such a return (upgrade) via a special route can occur, that is, when a special win result B is obtained during the second probability variation state, instead of explicitly showing the special win result B, the return (upgrade) to the first probability variation state is notified by executing a special history display change effect that changes the history display in the history information display area HE. Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 428, the flow of the special history display change effect (also simply called the history change effect) will be explained. Figure 428 illustrates the case where a special win result B is obtained in the second probability variation state, and the return (upgrade) to the first probability variation state occurs.

During the second probability variation state, at the timing of tba1, the game round corresponding to special win result B begins. Specifically, the display of changing symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of changing symbol sequences in the symbol display device 42 begin. At this point, the history information display area HE displays the symbol "7" as the history information for the round before last, and the symbol "4" as the history information for the previous round.

At timing TBA2, which is after a predetermined time has elapsed since timing TBA1, the display of changing symbols on the display screen 42a has transitioned to a reach display. Then, at timing TBA3, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed in its final stop position. At timing TBA3, the display of changing symbols on the first special symbol display unit 37a continues, while the display of the final stop position of the symbol combination on the display screen 42a precedes it.

At the timing of tba4, which is after the time corresponding to the confirmed display time of the symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a has elapsed from the timing of tba3, the words "CONVERT CHALLENGE" are displayed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 42a as a message indicating the start of the special change effect for the history display. Immediately afterward, at the timing of tba5, the symbols corresponding to special win result B are displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display) in the first special symbol display unit 37a, and the symbols displayed in the previous area EB of the history information display area HE begin to be displayed in a variable state (rotating display). At the timing of tba6, which is after the confirmed display time of the symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a has elapsed, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. During this variable display, the symbol combinations that are displayed in a stopped state in the variable display area ME remain in the stopped state.

At the timing of tba7 after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol that was being variably displayed (rotating) in the previous area EB of the history information display area HE is stopped, and the symbol changes from the "4" symbol to the "Super" symbol. In this embodiment, this "Super" symbol is a special symbol for the history information display area HE that is not displayed in the variable display area ME, and the display of this "Super" symbol suggests that the probability variation state is the first probability variation state (see Figure 427(b)).

At the timing of tba8, after the history information in the history information display area HE has been changed, the opening/closing execution mode ends and the system transitions to the first probability variation state. Accordingly, the display of changing symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of changing symbol rows on the display screen 42a begin. Note that the history information changed at the timing of tba7 continues to be displayed even in the first probability variation state.

In this embodiment, even if the history information change animation is initiated, the history is not necessarily changed; in approximately half of the cases, the history is not changed. Specifically, in some game rounds where a losing super reach occurs during the second probability variation state, a fake history information change animation occurs that does not correspond to a history change. The following describes the flow of the fake history display special change animation executed in game rounds involving losing super reaches, referring to the timing chart in Figure 429.

During the second probability variation state, at the timing of TBB1, the game round corresponding to the losing result begins. Specifically, the display of changing symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of changing symbol sequences in the symbol display device 42 begin. At this point, the history information display area HE displays the symbol "7" as the history information for the round before last, and the symbol "4" as the history information for the previous round.

At the timing of TBB2, which is after a predetermined time has elapsed since TBB1, the symbol variation display on display screen 42a transitions to a reach display. Subsequently, it develops from a normal reach to a super reach, and at the timing of TBB3, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop. At this TBB3 timing, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display unit 37a continues, while the final stop display of the symbol combination on display screen 42a precedes it.

At the timing of TBB4, which is the time elapsed from TBB3 to the time corresponding to the confirmed display time of the symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a, the words "CONVERT CHALLENGE" are displayed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 42a as a message indicating the start of the special change effect for the history display. Immediately afterward, at the timing of TBB5, the symbols displayed in the previous area EB of the history information display area HE begin to be displayed in a variable (rotating) state. During this variable display, symbol combinations that are displayed as stationary in the variable display area ME remain in the stationary state.

At timing tbb6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display (rotation display) of the symbols in the previous area EB of the history information display area HE began, the symbols corresponding to the losing result are displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display) on the first special symbol display unit 37a, and the symbols that were being displayed in a variable state (rotation display) in the previous area EB of the history information display area HE are also displayed in a stopped state. The special change effect of the history display shown in Figure 429 is a fake effect, and the variable-displayed symbols are ultimately displayed in their original state (the "4" symbol). In other words, no change in the history has occurred.

Subsequently, at the timing of tbb7, when the confirmed display time for the symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a has elapsed, the display of the changing symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of the changing symbol sequence on the display screen 42a begin.

If the system is configured to display past history information in the history information display area HE, players can predict how many times the high-probability game state will loop based on this history information. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game. However, since the type of jackpot result is explicitly shown in the history information, there is a possibility that unfavorable history will continue to be displayed to the player. This can be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment is configured so that the number of loops increases when special jackpot result B occurs, and when special jackpot result B occurs, the displayed history information is changed. Even if unfavorable history is displayed, there is room for modification of the history, which effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience.

A configuration that displays multiple historical records can contribute to increased player satisfaction by providing more data for predicting future trends. However, if the number of historical records displayed increases, the number of records that can be modified may also increase, raising concerns that the modification function may confuse players. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, by making only the most recent historical record among the displayed past records subject to modification, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated.

The historical information that was changed as a result of special win B is configured to remain displayed in its changed state until at least the next big win occurs. This effectively prevents the aforementioned effects from being properly realized due to oversight or other reasons.

<Variation 1>
In the 37th embodiment described above, when a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the even-numbered symbols displayed in the symbol display units PA and PB are changed (replaced) with "Super" symbols to indicate that the first probability variation state is in progress. However, the embodiment is not limited to this.

For example, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, it is possible to configure the system to indicate that the first probability variation state is in effect by changing (replacing) the even-numbered symbols displayed in the symbol display units PA and PB with odd-numbered symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 430, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, it is possible to indicate that the system is in the first probability variation state by adding a specific image or character (in Figure 430, the word "SUPER") to the even-numbered symbols displayed in the symbol display units PA and PB. In this case, by unifying the image or character added to each even-numbered symbol, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of symbols that need to be memorized.

<Modified Example 2>
As shown in Figure 431, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, it is also possible to add area ED to the history information display area HE to indicate that it is the first probability variation state.

<Example 3>
In the 37th embodiment described above, the past history is modified during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by special win result B, but the timing of modifying the past history is arbitrary. For example, the past history may be modified during the game round related to special win result B, or the past history may be modified after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by special win result B has ended.

<Modification 4>
In the 37th embodiment described above, the history information display area HE is provided with the previous-previous area EA, the previous area EB, and the current area EC. However, it is sufficient to have at least an area corresponding to the previous area EB, and it is not necessarily required to have all three areas EA to EC together.

<Example 5>
In the 37th embodiment described above, a special history change animation (false animation) may occur in some of the game rounds in which a reach display corresponding to a losing result is executed, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, a special history change animation (false animation) may occur in game rounds in which a special winning result A is obtained. It is not necessary to include a false animation in the special history change animation, and it is also possible to make the special history change animation a confirmed animation in which the change in the history is confirmed.

<Modification 6>
In the history information display area HE shown in the 37th embodiment above, the configuration is such that the same symbols that make up the final stopped symbol combination are displayed, but it is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure it so that the "〇" symbol is displayed when the result is a jackpot with a first V, and the "△" symbol is displayed when the result is a jackpot with a second V, and so that the final stopped symbol combination is not identified in detail.

<Example 7>
In the 37th embodiment described above, only the previous history information was subject to modification when the special winning result B occurred, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the invention to change all displayed history information to odd-numbered symbols.

<Embodiment 48>
In this embodiment, the animation performed when returning (upgrading) from the second probability state to the first probability state is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 45th embodiment. Configurations common to the 45th embodiment will not be explained.

As shown in Figure 432, the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42 is set to display three pattern rows: left, center, and right. The pattern display area on the display screen 42a is broadly divided into the left pattern display area DL, the center pattern display area DM, and the right pattern display area DR, corresponding to each of these pattern rows. The patterns in each pattern row are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (e.g., from top to bottom). Each pattern display area DL, DM, and DR displays three patterns for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns being displayed in a 3x3 arrangement within the pattern display area. These patterns include 11 main patterns consisting of the numbers "1" through "9," the "CAHNCE" pattern, and the "V" pattern, as well as a secondary pattern resembling a seashell (see Figures 433(j) to (u)).

The display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 has five active lines set: upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, left-upward line L4, and right-upward line L5. During each game, the symbol display stops in the order of, for example, left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column. When the display of all symbol columns has finished (a confirmation display is shown), the player is notified whether a jackpot has been won. Specifically, symbols "1" through "9" are jackpot symbols, and a jackpot result is clearly indicated when the same jackpot symbol combination is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) on any of the active lines L1 through L5.

When the above-described reach display occurs, the symbol display first ends in one of the variable display areas (e.g., left variable display area DL), and then, after the symbol display has ended in another variable display area (e.g., right variable display area DR), a reach line is formed when the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on at least one of the active lines L1 to L5. While this reach line is formed, the symbol display continues in the remaining variable display area (e.g., middle variable display area DM), resulting in a reach display. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display in the remaining symbol row (e.g., middle symbol row) ends so that the same symbol that forms the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line.

As already explained, in the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. If a jackpot is achieved through the lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33, the result will be either a jackpot with a first V or a jackpot without a V.

As shown in Figure 434(a), in the low probability game state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first V-winning jackpot when the final stop display is one of the following combinations of odd-numbered symbols: "1 1 1", "3 3 3", "5 5 5", "7 7 7", or "9 9 9". Conversely, the result is a non-V-winning jackpot when the final stop display is one of the following combinations of even-numbered symbols: "2 2 2", "4 4 4", "6 6 6", or "8 8 8". In other words, if a jackpot with a first V occurs during a low-probability game state, and the game transitions to the first probability variation state (requiring a V-entry), this is clearly indicated by the final stop displaying the same odd-numbered symbol combination. If a jackpot without a V occurs, and the low-probability game state loops (no V-entry required), this is clearly indicated by the final stop displaying the same even-numbered symbol combination.

In the following explanation, the combinations of identical odd-numbered symbols mentioned above will be referred to as "Type 1 symbol combinations," and the combinations of identical even-numbered symbols mentioned above will be referred to as "Type 2 symbol combinations."

In the first probability variation state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game primarily involves rounds related to the second operating port 34. If a jackpot is achieved through the lottery based on ball entry into the second operating port 34, the result will be either a first V-type jackpot or a second V-type jackpot.

As shown in Figure 434(a), in the first probability variation state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first V-winning jackpot by displaying the first type symbol combination at the final stop, and the display of the second type symbol combination at the final stop clearly indicates that the result is a second V-winning jackpot. In other words, if the first probability variation state results in a first V-winning jackpot and the first probability variation state loops (requiring a V-win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the first type symbol combination at the final stop. If the result is a second V-winning jackpot and the player is demoted to the second probability variation state (requiring a V-win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the second type symbol combination at the final stop.

In contrast, in the second probability variation state, which corresponds to both high probability mode and high frequency support mode, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. If a jackpot result is obtained through the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the result will be either a jackpot with a first V or a jackpot without a V.

As shown in Figure 434(a), in the second probability variation state, the display screen 42a clearly indicates that the result is a first-type jackpot with a V symbol by displaying the first-type symbol combination at the final stop, and that the result is a second-type jackpot without a V symbol by displaying the second-type symbol combination at the final stop. In other words, if the second probability variation state results in a first-type jackpot with a V symbol and returns to (promotes) the first probability variation state (requires a V symbol win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the first-type symbol combination at the final stop. If the result is a second-type jackpot without a V symbol and demotes to a low probability game state (does not require a V symbol win), this is clearly indicated by the display of the second-type symbol combination at the final stop.

Thus, in this embodiment, the combinations of symbols are differentiated so that, in both the low-probability and high-probability game states, the combinations of symbols of type 1 are more advantageous to the player than the combinations of symbols of type 2.

Next, referring to Figure 434(b), we will explain the combination of symbols that will be displayed on the display screen 42a when a special winning result (Special Winning Result A and Special Winning Result B) is obtained through the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 33 and 34.

In the lottery based on winning at the first activation port 33, there is a possibility of special winning result A or special winning result B as described above (see Figure 414). In the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first activation port 33. However, if special winning result A or special winning result B occurs during this low probability game state, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result (completely losing symbol combination) is displayed, and the display screen 42a does not explicitly indicate that special winning result A or special winning result B occurred. Note that the completely losing symbol combination is a losing symbol combination displayed without going through the reach display, and is distinguished from the reach-losing symbol combination, which is a losing symbol combination displayed via the reach display.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay mainly involves the second operation port 34. Therefore, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first operation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay primarily involves the first activation port 33. If a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first activation port 33 during this second probability variation state, the display screen 42a may either show a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol (hereinafter referred to as the fourth type of symbol combination) as the final stop, or it may show a symbol combination including the "V" symbol (hereinafter referred to as the fifth type of symbol combination). Examples of fourth type symbol combinations include the combination of "5", "CHANCE", and "5", or the combination of "7", "CHANCE", and "7". Examples of fifth type symbol combinations include the combination of "5", "V", and "5", or the combination of "7", "V", and "7".

On the other hand, if the lottery based on the entry into the first operating port 33 during the second probability variation state results in special win result B, the display screen 42a will show a symbol combination including the "V" symbol (a fifth-type symbol combination) as the final stop. In other words, if a fifth-type symbol combination is displayed as the final stop during the second probability variation state, it becomes difficult to determine from the displayed symbol combination whether the current game round corresponds to special win result A or special win result B.

In the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34, there is a possibility of a special win result A, as described above (see Figure 414). In the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during this low probability state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the rounds played at the first operating port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses with the primary focus being on rounds involving the second operation port 34. If a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second operation port 34 during this first probability variation state, the above-mentioned combination of Type 4 symbols is displayed on the display screen 42a at the final stop, clearly indicating that it is a special win result A.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay primarily involves the first activation port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the second probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first activation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In this embodiment, one of its features is the inclusion of a V-stock display function that, when transitioning from a low-probability game state to a probability-increasing game state, displays V-stock information indicating the remaining number of jackpots until transitioning back to the low-probability game state. The V-stock display function will be described below with reference to Figures 432 and 435.

As shown in Figure 432, the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42, specifically the upper left corner of the variable display area ME, is provided with a V-stock information display area SE capable of displaying the aforementioned V-stock information. The display of V-stock information in this V-stock information display area SE is ON during high-probability game states and OFF during low-probability game states.

As shown in Figure 435, the V-stock information display area SE has a history information display area EX that displays the type of the previous jackpot, and a V-stock icon display area SX that displays the V-stock icon. Both areas EX and SX are arranged side-by-side.

The history information display area EX is divided into two sections, upper and lower. The upper section of the history information display area EX displays the word "Previous". The lower section of the history information display area EX is the symbol display unit PX, which displays the single symbol that made up the symbol combination that was displayed at the end of the previous jackpot, as information (history information) to identify that combination. The image data of the symbols displayed in the symbol display unit PX is the same image data used for the symbols that make up the variable display (scroll display) in the variable display area ME, and the symbols for the scroll display are displayed in a reduced state. In the example shown in Figure 435(a), the first type of symbol combination, specifically the "7" symbol combination, was displayed at the end of the previous jackpot, and the "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced state in the symbol display unit PX as information (history information) to identify it.

The V-stock icon display area SX is divided into left and right sections. The left section of the V-stock icon display area SX is the first display area S1, and the right section is the second display area S2. Each of the first and second display areas S2 can display one V-stock icon. As shown in Figure 435(b), the display of one V-stock icon in the V-stock icon display area SX (first display area S1) suggests that one jackpot is possible, while the display of two V-stock icons in the V-stock icon display area SX (first and second display areas S2) suggests that two jackpots are possible.

This embodiment is similar to the 45th embodiment in that it provides a special route that returns (upgrades) to the first probability variation state if the lottery based on the entry of a ball into the first operating port 33 during the second probability variation state results in a special win B. However, a distinctive feature is the V-stock acquisition animation that occurs when such a return (upgrade) via this special route occurs, i.e., when a special win B occurs during the second probability variation state. The V-stock acquisition animation occurs when (1) a V-winning jackpot is achieved, (2) a special win B is achieved, or (3) a special win A is achieved. In (1) and (2), a V-stock icon is added during the V-stock acquisition animation, while in (3), no V-stock icon is added. The flow of the V-stock acquisition animation will be explained below with reference to the timing charts in Figures 436 to 438.

(If you get a V and hit the jackpot)
During the low probability game state, at the timing of tbc1, the game round corresponding to the first V-winning jackpot result is started. Specifically, the display of changing symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of changing symbol rows (scrolling display) in the symbol display device 42 are started.

At the timing of TBC2, which is after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of TBC1, the symbol variation display on the display screen 42a transitions to a reach display. At the subsequent timing of TBC3, the symbols corresponding to the first V and jackpot result are displayed stopped on the first special symbol display unit 37a, and the first type symbol combination (specifically, the "7" symbol combination) corresponding to the first V and jackpot result is displayed as the final stop on the display screen 42a.

At the timing of TBC4, after the confirmed display time for the symbols on the first special display unit 37a and the symbol combinations on the display screen 42a has elapsed from the timing of TBC3, the game transitions from a low-probability game state to an open/close execution mode corresponding to the first V-winning jackpot result. After transitioning to the open/close execution mode, the symbol combinations displayed on the display screen 42a are hidden, and instead, an image prompting the player to operate the performance button and a message image indicating the start of the V-stock acquisition performance (specifically, the words "V CHALLENGE") are displayed. When the performance button is operated by the player, or when the time for accepting the performance button operation has elapsed without the performance button being operated, a "V" image is displayed on the display screen 42a, and immediately afterward, this image changes to a "V x 2 Loop" image.

Subsequently, the text "×2 Loop" displayed on display screen 42a disappears, and the single large "V" image splits into two smaller "V" images, specifically the two V-stock icons mentioned above. At this point, the text "Previous" and the "7" symbol appear in the history information display area EX of the V-stock information display area SE. Then, the two V-stock icons displayed in the center of display screen 42a move to the first display area S1 and the second display area S2 of the V-stock icon display area SX. This suggests to the player that there are two more chances to win the jackpot.

At the subsequent timing of tbc4, the aforementioned symbol combination, which had been hidden, is redisplayed in the variable display area ME of display screen 42a. The text "VV Standby" (a text overlay) appears in the upper right corner of display screen 42a, indicating that two jackpots may occur, and the V-stock acquisition sequence concludes. In other words, the V-stock acquisition sequence is completed during the opening/closing execution mode.

At the timing of tbc5, the opening/closing execution mode ends and the game transitions to the first probability variation state. Even in the first probability variation state, the display of the history and V-stock icons in the V-stock information display area SE of the display screen 42a, which was started during the opening/closing execution mode, and the display of the text overlay in the upper right corner of the display screen 42a are carried over.

Furthermore, the V-stock acquisition animation will also occur if a jackpot with a first V is achieved during a probability-increasing game state (first and second probability-increasing states), and the flow of this V-stock acquisition animation is the same as that shown in Figure 436. During a probability-increasing game state, the history and V-stock icons are displayed in the V-stock information display area SE on the display screen 42a, but when the V-stock acquisition animation begins, the various images in the V-stock information display area SE are hidden. Incidentally, if a jackpot with a second V is achieved during a probability-increasing game state (first and second probability-increasing states), the V-stock acquisition animation will not occur.

(If you win the special prize B)
At the timing of tbd1 during the second probability variation state, the game round corresponding to special win result B is started. Specifically, the display of changing symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of changing symbol rows (scrolling display) in the symbol display device 42 are started.

At the timing of TBD2, which is after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of TBD1, the symbol variation display on the display screen 42a has transitioned to a reach display. At the subsequent timing of TBD3, the symbol corresponding to special win result B is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display unit 37a, and the fifth symbol combination corresponding to special win result B (specifically, the combination of "7", "V", and "7") is displayed as the final stop on the display screen 42a. At this point, it is difficult to distinguish whether the current game result is special win result A or special win result B from the final stopped symbol combination.

At the timing of tbd3, and after the confirmed display time for the symbols on the first special display unit 37a and the symbol combinations on the display screen 42a has elapsed, at the timing of tbd4, the system transitions from the second probability variation state to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to special win result B. After transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol combinations displayed on the display screen 42a are hidden, and instead, an image prompting the operation of the performance button and a message image indicating the start of the V-stock acquisition performance (specifically, the words "V CHALLENGE") are displayed.

In the second probability variation state, the history and V-stock icons are displayed in the V-stock information display area SE of the display screen 42a, and a text message indicating the remaining number of big wins is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 42a. However, when the V-stock acquisition animation begins, the various images in the V-stock information display area SE are hidden. The number of V-stock icons displayed is linked to the content of the text message; when there is one V-stock icon, the text message is "V-Standby," indicating that one big win is possible.

When the player operates the effect button, or when the operation acceptance time for the effect button has elapsed without the effect button being operated, the image of "V" is displayed on the display screen 42a, and immediately afterward, this image changes to the image of "V x 2 Loop".

Subsequently, the text "×2 Loop" displayed on display screen 42a disappears, and the single large "V" image splits into two smaller "V" images, specifically the two V-stock icons mentioned above. At this point, the text "Previous" and the "4" symbol reappear in the history information display area EX of the V-stock information display area SE. However, the V-stock icons that were displayed in the V-stock icon display area SX remain hidden. Then, the two V-stock icons displayed in the center of display screen 42a move to the first display area S1 and the second display area S2 of the V-stock icon display area SX. This suggests to the player that there are two more chances to win the jackpot.

At the subsequent timing of tbd5, the aforementioned symbol combination, which had been hidden, is redisplayed in the variable display area ME of display screen 42a. The text "VV Standby" (a text overlay) appears in the upper right corner of display screen 42a, indicating that two jackpots may occur, and the V-stock acquisition sequence concludes. In other words, the V-stock acquisition sequence is completed during the opening/closing execution mode.

In the example shown in Figure 437, the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing tbd5, and the game transitions to the first probability variation state. Even in the first probability variation state, the display of the history and V-stock icons in the V-stock information display area SE of the display screen 42a, which was started during the opening/closing execution mode, and the display of the ticker in the upper right corner of the display screen 42a are carried over.

Thus, the V-stock acquisition animation shown in this embodiment is the same for both jackpot and special jackpot wins.

(If you win the special prize A)
During the second probability variation state, at the timing of tbe1, the game round corresponding to special win result A is started. Specifically, the display of changing symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of changing symbol rows (scrolling display) in the symbol display device 42 are started.

At timing tbe2, which is after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tbe1, the symbol variation display on display screen 42a has transitioned to a reach display. At timing tbe3, the symbol corresponding to special win result A is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a, and the fifth symbol combination corresponding to special win result A (specifically, the combination of "7", "V", and "7") is displayed as the final stop on display screen 42a. At this point, it is difficult to distinguish whether the current game result is special win result A or special win result B from the final stopped symbol combination.

At the timing of tbe4, after the confirmed display time for the symbols on the first special display unit 37a and the symbol combinations on the display screen 42a has elapsed from the timing of tbe3, the system transitions from the second probability variation state to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to special win result B. After transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol combinations displayed on the display screen 42a are hidden, and instead, an image prompting the operation of the performance button and a message image indicating the start of the V-stock acquisition performance (specifically, the words "V CHALLENGE") are displayed.

In the second probability variation state, the history and V-stock icons are displayed in the V-stock information display area SE on the display screen 42a. However, when the V-stock acquisition animation begins, the various images in the V-stock information display area SE are hidden.

When the player operates the performance button, or when the performance button is not operated and the operation acceptance time for the performance button has elapsed, the display screen 42a will display a "Too bad" image as a message indicating that the V-stock acquisition failed. Afterward, the previously hidden symbol combinations, the history in the V-stock information display area SE, the V-stock icon, and the text in the upper right corner of the display screen 42a will reappear, and the V-stock acquisition performance will end. In other words, the V-stock acquisition performance is configured to be completed during the opening/closing execution mode.

In the example shown in Figure 438, at the timing of tbe5, the opening/closing execution mode ends and the system transitions to the second probability variation state. Even in the second probability variation state, the history and V-stock icon display in the V-stock information display area SE from the previous second probability variation state, as well as the display of the text overlay in the upper right corner of the display screen 42a, are carried over.

If the V-stock information display area SE is configured to show the same number of V-stock icons as the remaining number of possible wins, players can predict how long the high-probability game state will continue (loop) based on these stock icons. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game.

In the configuration described in this feature, transitioning from the second probability variation state to the first probability variation state provides at least one grace period before transitioning to the low probability game state corresponding to the low probability mode. Here, by unifying the V-stock acquisition animation performed when looping the first probability variation state and the V-stock acquisition animation performed when upgrading from the second probability variation state to the first probability variation state as a special win result B, it is possible to enhance the contrast of gameplay by differentiating the degree of advantage between the first and second probability variation states, while maintaining a sense of unity in terms of animation throughout the high probability game state. This is desirable in suppressing interruptions in the flow of animation and enhancing the exhilarating feeling during the high probability game state.

In this embodiment, the transition from the low-probability game state to the first probability-changing state serves as the entry point to the high-probability game state loop. Here, the same V-stock acquisition animation is executed in the case of a first V-stock jackpot during the low-probability game state, a special jackpot B during the second probability-changing game state, and a first V-stock jackpot during the first probability-changing state. This configuration allows for a consistent visual presentation throughout the high-probability game state. This is desirable because it suppresses interruptions in the flow of the animations and enhances the sense of exhilaration during the high-probability game state.

The difference between the number of remaining stocks indicated during the V-stock acquisition animation and the number of remaining stocks indicated during the V-stock acquisition animation may differ depending on the trigger for the V-stock acquisition animation. Therefore, by hiding the currently displayed number of remaining stocks (V-stock icon) when executing the V-stock acquisition animation, and then indicating the remaining stocks (V-stock icon) again, complete standardization of the V-stock acquisition animation can be effectively achieved.

By configuring the V-stock acquisition animations to be executed during the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to effectively avoid constraints arising between the common V-stock acquisition animations and the animations for each individual game round.

If a jackpot result with a second V occurs during the first probability variation state (V passing through), the game transitions to the second probability variation state. In this case, the remaining stock count effectively decreases. On the other hand, if a special jackpot result A occurs during the second probability variation state, the game remains in the second probability variation state, and the remaining stock count effectively carries over. In other words, the remaining number of spins is the same for these two patterns. Therefore, by configuring these two patterns to execute a common V stock acquisition animation (failure), the consistency of the animation during loops can be increased.

<Variation 1>
In the probability variation game state, it is also possible to configure the game to include a battle sequence as part of the game's presentation, in which the type of jackpot is indicated by the outcome of a battle between an enemy character and an ally character. For example, if the ally character wins, it is indicated that it is a first-type jackpot, and if the enemy character wins, it is indicated that it is a second-type jackpot or a jackpot without a jackpot. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide an area on the display screen 42a where a special icon (for example, a support character icon or a weapon icon) is displayed to indicate that the ally character's victory is confirmed when the battle develops, and to configure the game to display the special icon in this area when the special jackpot result B is obtained.

<Modified Example 2>
If a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state and two V stock icons are displayed, the V stock information display area SE may be configured to continue displaying the one V stock icon currently displayed in the V stock information display area SE while adding a new V stock icon to the said V stock information display area SE. In conjunction with this, if a first V-winning big win occurs during the first probability variation state and two V stock icons are displayed, the V stock information display area SE may be configured to continue displaying the V stock icons that have decreased from two to one due to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode while adding a new V stock icon to the said V stock information display area SE.

<Example 3>
In the 48th embodiment described above, the V-stock acquisition animation is performed during the opening/closing execution mode. However, the V-stock acquisition animation may also be performed during the game round that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, or it may be performed throughout the game round that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and throughout the opening/closing execution mode.

<49th Embodiment>
In the 48th embodiment described above, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the V-stock acquisition animation is executed during the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by the special win result B. In this embodiment, in addition to this configuration, the V-stock acquisition animation can occur in the probability variation game state (first probability variation state) that is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends, which is a difference in configuration from the 48th embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained below with reference to Figures 439 and 440, focusing on the differences from the 48th embodiment.

First, referring to Figure 439(a), we will explain the combination of symbols that are displayed on the final stop screen 42a when a special winning result (Special Winning Result A and Special Winning Result B) is obtained through the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 33 and 34.

In the lottery based on winning at the first activation port 33, there is a possibility of special winning result A or special winning result B as described above (see Figure 414). In the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first activation port 33. However, if special winning result A or special winning result B occurs during this low probability game state, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result (completely losing symbol combination) is displayed, and the display screen 42a does not explicitly indicate that special winning result A or special winning result B occurred. Note that the completely losing symbol combination is a losing symbol combination displayed without going through the reach display, and is distinguished from the reach-losing symbol combination, which is a losing symbol combination displayed via the reach display.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay mainly involves the second operation port 34. Therefore, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first operation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A or special win result B is obtained in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operation port 33 during the first probability variation state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses with the primary focus being on the game rounds related to the first activation port 33. If a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first activation port 33 during this second probability variation state, the display screen 42a will show a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol (hereinafter referred to as the fourth type of symbol combination) as the final stop. Examples of fourth type symbol combinations include combinations such as "5", "CHANCE", and "5", or "7", "CHANCE", and "7".

On the other hand, if a special win result B is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33 during the second probability variation state, the display screen 42a may either show a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol (a fourth-type symbol combination) as the final stop, or it may show a symbol combination including the "V" symbol (hereinafter referred to as a fifth-type symbol combination). Examples of fifth-type symbol combinations include combinations such as "5", "V", and "5", or "7", "V", and "7". In other words, if a fourth-type symbol combination is displayed as the final stop during the second probability variation state, it is difficult to determine from the displayed symbol combination whether this game round corresponds to special win result A or special win result B.

In the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34, there is a possibility of a special win result A, as described above (see Figure 414). In the low probability game state, the game progresses so that the game mainly involves rounds related to the first operating port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during this low probability state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the rounds played at the first operating port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A occurs in the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

In the first probability variation state, the game progresses with the primary focus being on rounds involving the second operation port 34. If a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second operation port 34 during this first probability variation state, the above-mentioned combination of Type 4 symbols is displayed on the display screen 42a at the final stop, clearly indicating that it is a special win result A.

In contrast, during the second probability variation state, the game progresses so that the gameplay primarily involves the first activation port 33. Therefore, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the second probability variation state, the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to a losing result (see Figure 404). The display screen 42a then displays the symbol combination corresponding to the gameplay involving the first activation port 33 at the final stop. In other words, even if a special win result A is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the second activation port 34 during the low probability state, this fact is not explicitly indicated on the display screen 42a.

Here, referring to Figure 439(b), we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the distribution of the final stopping symbol combination when a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state. Specifically, we will explain the special setting process for the final stopping symbol combination executed by the MPU of the performance control device 82. This special setting process for the final stopping symbol combination is executed as part of the periodic game round processing, and is executed when a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state.

In the special setting process for the final stop symbol combination, first, in step S1601B, it is determined whether subsequent reserves have been secured. Specifically, in the first probability variation state, which is the destination state, the main game progression is from the game rounds related to the first operation port 33 to the game rounds related to the second operation port 34. In the processing of step S1601B, it is determined whether at least one reserve related to the second operation port 34 has been secured. If the determination in step S1601B is positive, the process proceeds to step S1602B.

In step S1602B, it is determined whether the subsequent held balls include those corresponding to a jackpot result. Specifically, in the first probability variation state, the main game progression shifts from the first operation port 33 to the second operation port 34. In step S1602B, it is determined whether the held balls related to the second operation port 34 include those corresponding to a jackpot result. If the result in step S1602B is negative, the process proceeds to step S1603B.

In step S1603B, it is determined whether the subsequent held symbols include those corresponding to a losing reach. Specifically, in the first probability variation state, the main game progression shifts from the first operation port 33 to the second operation port 34. In step S1603B, it is determined whether the held symbols related to the second operation port 34 include those corresponding to a losing reach. If the determination in step S1603B is positive, the process proceeds to step S1604B.

In step S1604B, the fourth type of symbol combination is set as the final stop symbol combination. If a negative result is obtained in step S1601B, a positive result in step S1602B, or a negative result in step S1603B, the process proceeds to step S1605B, where the fifth type of symbol combination is set as the final stop symbol combination.

In this embodiment, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the fourth type of symbol combination is set as the final stop symbol combination under the following three conditions: (1) subsequent reserves are secured, (2) the subsequent reserves do not include any that correspond to a big win, and (3) the subsequent reserves include any that correspond to a losing reach. If any of these three conditions are not met, the fifth type of symbol combination is set as the final stop symbol combination. The V-stock acquisition animation performed when the fifth type of symbol combination is set as the final stop symbol combination is the same as the V-stock acquisition animation shown in the 48th embodiment described above.

Next, we will explain the V-stock acquisition animation that is performed when the fourth type of symbol combination is set as the final stopping symbol combination. Unlike the V-stock acquisition animation performed when the fifth type of symbol combination is set as the final stopping symbol combination, this V-stock acquisition animation is performed not during the game round resulting in special win result B, or during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by that special win result B, but during the game round in the first probability variation state that is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Specifically, it is performed during the game round corresponding to a losing reach among the reserves related to the second operation port 34 that were secured at the start of the game round related to special win result B. Now, referring to the timing chart in Figure 440, we will explain the flow of the V-stock acquisition animation performed when the fourth type of symbol combination is set as the final stopping symbol combination.

During the second probability variation state, at the timing of tbf1, a game round corresponding to special win result B is started. Specifically, the display of changing symbols on the first special symbol display unit 37a and the display of changing symbol sequences on the symbol display device 42 are started. At the start of this game round, the final stopping symbol combination for this game round is set. In the example shown in Figure 440, four reserves are secured related to the second operation port 34, and none of these four reserves correspond to a jackpot result. Furthermore, the third of these four reserves corresponds to a losing reach. Based on these factors, the fourth type of symbol combination is set as the final stopping symbol combination for this game round.

At the timing of TBF2, which is after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of TBF1, the symbol variation display on the display screen 42a transitions to a reach display. After that, it develops from a normal reach to a super reach, and at the timing of TBF3, the fourth type of symbol combination is displayed as the final stop on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, and the symbol corresponding to special win result B is displayed as the stop on the first special symbol display unit 37a. In the example shown in Figure 440, the fourth type of symbol combination displayed as the final stop is the combination of "7" symbol, "CHANCE" symbol, and "7" symbol.

At the timing of tbf4, after the confirmed display time for the symbols in the first special symbol display unit 37a has elapsed from the timing of tbf3, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. At the timing of tbf5, when the ending part of the opening/closing execution mode begins, the time from the start of the ending part to the timing when the symbol variation display in the second special symbol display unit 37b for the third held symbol ends is calculated. Then, the time required to execute the V-stock acquisition animation (maximum required time) is subtracted from this calculated time to calculate the remaining time until the V-stock acquisition animation begins.

At the timing of tbf5, the message "Timer Started" appears on display screen 42a to indicate that the timer effect has begun. The text overlay in the upper right corner of display screen 42a switches from showing the remaining number of jackpots to showing the timer. This timer decreases as time progresses, and the V-stock acquisition effect begins when it finally reaches "0".

At the timing of tbf6, the system transitions from the opening/closing execution mode to the first probability variation state. Consequently, the game rounds related to the second operation port 34 begin. Specifically, the display of changing symbols on the second special symbol display unit 37b and the display of changing symbol sequences on the symbol display device 42 begin. Incidentally, regarding the symbols displayed on the display screen 42a, the linked target switches from the game rounds related to the first operation port 33 to the game rounds related to the second operation port 34 upon transitioning to the first probability variation state.

Subsequently, two game rounds without reach display support are executed (see timings tbf6-tbf8), and the third game round begins at timing tbf8. Specifically, the display of changing symbols in the second special symbol display unit 37b and the display of changing symbol sequences in the symbol display device 42 begin. This game round supports reach display, and the V-stock acquisition animation that was reserved for this game round is executed.

At the timing of TBF9, which is after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of TBF8, the symbol variation display on the display screen 42a transitions to a reach display. After that, it develops from a normal reach to a super reach, and at the timing of TBF10, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42. Note that at the timing of TBF10, the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display unit 37b continues.

At the timing of tbf11, which is the time elapsed from tbf10 to the time corresponding to the confirmed display time of the symbols in the second special symbol display unit 37b, the symbol combination displayed on the display screen 42a disappears, and in its place, an image prompting the operation of the performance button and a message image indicating the start of the V-stock acquisition performance (specifically, the words "V CHALLENGE") are displayed. At this timing, the timer displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 42a becomes "0".

When the player operates the effect button, or when the operation acceptance time for the effect button has elapsed without the player operating it, the image "V" is displayed on the display screen 42a, and immediately afterward, this image changes to the image "V x 2 Loop". Note that the example shown in Figure 440 describes the case where the player operates the effect button at the timing of tbf 12.

Subsequently, the text "×2 Loop" displayed on display screen 42a disappears, and the single large "V" image splits into two smaller "V" images, specifically the two V-stock icons mentioned above. At this point, the text "Previous" and the "7" symbol appear in the history information display area EX of the V-stock information display area SE. Then, the two V-stock icons displayed in the center of display screen 42a move to the first area S1 and the second area S2 of the V-stock icon display area SX. This suggests to the player that there are two more chances to win the jackpot.

Subsequently, the previously hidden symbol combination reappears in the variable display area ME of the display screen 42a, and the text "VV Standby" (a text overlay) appears in the upper right corner of the display screen 42a as a message indicating that two jackpots may occur, marking the end of this V-stock acquisition sequence. Specifically, this V-stock acquisition sequence ends at the same time as the variable display of the symbols in the second special symbol display unit 37b ends (the timing of tbf13).

The sequence of events shown in Figure 440 can also occur when special win result A is achieved during the second probability variation state. In other words, the post-announcement V-stock acquisition sequence described above is not guaranteed to succeed; the post-announcement V-stock acquisition sequence that occurs when special win result A is achieved may result in a V-stock acquisition failure.

<Variation 1>
In the 49th embodiment described above, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the configuration is such that the fourth type of symbol combination is set as the final stop symbol combination, provided that no subsequent reserves (reserves related to the second operation port 34) include a reserve corresponding to a big win, i.e., a V-stock acquisition performance that is announced after the fact is executed. If a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, even if a reserve corresponding to a big win is included in the subsequent reserves (reserves related to the second operation port 34), the configuration is such that the fourth type of symbol combination is set as the final stop symbol combination, provided that a reserve corresponding to a losing reach is included before the reserve corresponding to the big win, i.e., a V-stock acquisition performance that is announced after the fact is executed.

Furthermore, the setting conditions for the V-stock acquisition animation, which is announced after the fact, may not take into account whether or not a jackpot has been won. In this case, if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result starts before the timer displayed on the display screen 42a reaches zero, it is preferable to have an acceleration animation that speeds up the timer's countdown during that game round, and then set the timer to zero. The V-stock acquisition animation should then start at the moment the timer reaches zero (i.e., an earlier start time for the V-stock acquisition animation).

<Modified Example 2>
In the 49th embodiment described above, the V-stock acquisition animation for post-announcement is configured to be executed in the game round corresponding to the reach display in order to secure the execution time for the V-stock acquisition animation. However, as long as the execution time for the V-stock acquisition animation can be secured, the V-stock acquisition animation may also be executed in game rounds other than the game round corresponding to the reach display (for example, game rounds corresponding to a complete miss, i.e., game rounds that do not correspond to a reach display).

<Example 3>
In the 49th embodiment described above, the remaining time until the V-stock acquisition animation starts is calculated at the start of the ending part in the opening/closing execution mode, but the timing of calculating the remaining time is arbitrary. For example, the remaining time may be calculated at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. First, the display screen 42a displays "Timer Start" to indicate the timing of the V-stock acquisition animation to start, and the remaining time is calculated while this display is ongoing.

<Embodiment 50>
In the 47th and 48th embodiments described above, if a special win result B is obtained through a lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33 during the second probability variation state, the number of V-stock icons displayed in the V-stock information display area SE increases after a V-stock acquisition animation, thereby indicating to the player that the number of big wins has increased. In this embodiment, the number of big wins is indicated by the number of V-stock icons, similar to the 47th embodiment, but the animation that occurs when a special win result B is obtained during the second probability variation state differs from the 47th embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained below with reference to Figure 441, focusing on the differences from the 47th embodiment. Configurations common to the 47th embodiment will not be explained.

First, this embodiment differs from the 47th embodiment in that, when a special win result A or special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the symbol combination corresponding to the aforementioned losing result is displayed on the display screen 42a at the final stop. As a result, it is difficult to distinguish between a losing result, special win result A, and special win result B by looking at the displayed symbol combination at the final stop.

As already explained, the V-stock icons displayed in the V-stock information display area SE increase or decrease in response to a jackpot. For example, if a jackpot with a second V occurs during the first probability variation state, the number of V-stock icons decreases from "2" to "1". Conversely, if a jackpot without a V occurs during the second probability variation state, the display in the V-stock information display area SE ends, effectively reducing the number of V-stock icons from "1" to "0".

In this embodiment, when a predetermined trigger occurs during the second probability variation state, a hold effect is executed that restricts the display of the V-stock information display area SE, specifically the decrease (consumption) of V-stock icons. This results in a jackpot occurring without the V-stock icons being consumed.

As shown in Figure 441(a), the hold animation can be broadly divided into two types: the first hold animation, which occurs during some of the game rounds corresponding to losing results (specifically, game rounds corresponding to losing super reach) and during the second probability variation state, and during game rounds corresponding to special winning result A; and the second hold animation, which occurs during game rounds corresponding to special winning result B during the second probability variation state.

Both the first and second hold animations share the common feature of displaying an effect EF surrounding the V-stock information display area SE on the display screen 42a, and the word "HOLD" as a message indicating that the V-stock icon will not decrease. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the first and second hold animations based solely on their appearance (see Figure 441(b)).

The second hold sequence, triggered by special win result B, continues until the next big win, whereas the first hold sequence, triggered by special win result A, etc., ends before the next big win. Specifically, the first hold sequence, triggered by special win result A, requires that subsequent holds related to the first operation port 33 are secured and none of those holds correspond to a big win. Furthermore, the first hold sequence, triggered by a losing result (more specifically, a losing result corresponding to a losing super reach), requires that subsequent holds related to the first operation port 33 are secured and none of those holds correspond to a big win, and that the execution lottery for the first hold sequence is won.

Furthermore, the first hold animation is designed to continue for at least multiple game rounds. At the start of the first hold animation, an upper limit (5 to 10 rounds in this embodiment) is set for the number of game rounds in which the first hold animation will continue. If a game round corresponding to a jackpot begins before the set upper limit is reached, the first hold animation will be forcibly terminated during that jackpot round or an earlier game round.

<Embodiment 51>
In this embodiment, the animation performed when returning (upgrading) from the second probability state to the first probability state is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 45th embodiment. Configurations common to the 45th embodiment will not be explained.

First, in this embodiment, when special win result A or special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the display screen 42a shows the symbol combination corresponding to the aforementioned losing result, rather than the symbol combination specific to the special win result. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the losing result, special win result A, and special win result B by looking at the displayed symbol combination.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 442(a), multiple performance stages are provided, each with a different background image displayed on the display screen 42a of the pattern display device 42 and background music (BGM) output from the speaker unit 65. Specifically, there is a daytime stage where the player remains when in a low-probability game state, and evening and night stages where the player remains when in a probability-increasing game state (first probability-increasing state and second probability-increasing state).

The evening stage is the stage the player stays in when in the second probability variation state. If a first V (Big Win) occurs while in the evening stage, a shutter effect is triggered during the opening/closing execution mode, displaying an image resembling a shutter across the entire display screen 42a. The player then switches from the evening stage to the night stage.

Furthermore, if a special winning result B occurs while in the evening stage, the system switches the current stage from the evening stage to the night stage via a shutter effect, where an image resembling a shutter is displayed across the entire display screen 42a during the opening/closing execution mode (see Figure 442(b)).

In contrast, if a special win result A occurs while in the evening stage, a shutter effect is executed, displaying an image resembling a shutter across the entire display screen 42a during the opening/closing execution mode. However, the stage remains the evening stage after the shutter effect ends. Similarly, in some cases where a losing super reach occurs, a shutter effect is executed, displaying an image resembling a shutter across the entire display screen 42a during the final stopping display of the symbol combination. However, the stage remains the evening stage after the shutter effect ends.

<Embodiment 52>
In this embodiment, the animation performed when returning (upgrading) from the second probability state to the first probability state is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 45th embodiment. Configurations common to the 45th embodiment will not be explained.

In this embodiment, multiple performance stages are provided, each with a different background image displayed on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 and different background music (BGM) output from the speaker unit 65. Specifically, there is a normal stage (background image: beach) where the player stays when in a low-probability game state, and a special stage (background image: underwater) where the player stays when in a probability-increasing game state.

If a second V-winning jackpot occurs during the first probability variation state, a special notification indicating the possibility of the probability variation game state ending will be initiated on the display screen 42a and the speaker unit 65 when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second V-winning jackpot result ends, i.e., when transitioning to (demoting to) the second probability variation state. Specifically, as shown in Figure 443(a), the word "CAUTION" is displayed at the top of the display screen 42a and an alert sound is output from the speaker unit 65.

This special notification is generally designed to continue until the next jackpot occurs, after which it is deactivated. Specifically, if the next jackpot result is a jackpot with a first V (presumably a symbol), the special notification is deactivated before transitioning to the first probability state (return, upgrade) via the opening/closing execution mode, specifically during the game round related to that first V-predicted jackpot. If the next jackpot result is a jackpot without a V (presumably a symbol), the special notification is deactivated before transitioning to the low probability game state (demotion) via the opening/closing execution mode, specifically during the game round related to that jackpot without a V (presumably a symbol).

In this embodiment, one of the features is that a release animation is performed that can cancel the special notification described above before the next jackpot occurs. If the special notification is canceled after this release animation, the special notification will not occur again, at least until the next jackpot occurs, even if the player is still in the special stage (even if in a probability-increasing game state). This eliminates the player's anxiety about the probability-increasing game state potentially ending.

This release animation can be broadly divided into two types: the main release animation, which is triggered by special win result B during the second probability variation state, and the fake release animation, which is triggered by some of the game rounds related to a losing super reach during the second probability variation state, or by special win result A. In the main release animation, the special notification mentioned above is released or restricted, while in the fake release animation, the special notification is not released or restricted, and continues even after the fake release animation.

Here, referring to Figures 444 and 445, the flow from special notification to the main release sequence will be explained.

In the example shown in the timing chart of Figure 444, during the first probability variation state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, the lottery result based on the entry into the second operation port 34 results in a second V-type jackpot. At timing tbg1, the symbols corresponding to the second V-type jackpot result are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 37b, and the second type symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42. At timing tbg2, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second V-type jackpot result.

At the timing of TBG3, when this opening/closing execution mode ends, the game transitions to the second probability variation state, which is compatible with both the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. As already explained, in the second probability variation state, the game progresses mainly through the game rounds related to the first operation port 33. At the timing of TBG3, the display of changing symbols on the first special symbol display unit 37a begins, and the scrolling display of the symbol rows on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 begins.

If the game transitions from the first probability variation state to the second probability variation state after the opening/closing execution mode, the aforementioned current stage remains a special stage, but the special notification indicating the possibility of the probability variation game state ending is initiated. Specifically, the word "CAUTION" is displayed at the top of the display screen 42a, and an alert sound is emitted from the speaker unit 65 (see Figures 445(a) and 445(b)).

As already explained, this special notification generally continues until the next jackpot occurs, specifically until the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed at the final stop. However, if the specific conditions mentioned above are met, it is deactivated, and the special notification is restricted until the next jackpot. In the example shown in Figure 444, the special jackpot result B occurs in the third game after entering the second probability variation state.

At the timing of tbg5, when the game round related to special win result B begins, the display of changing symbols on the first special symbol display unit 37a begins, and the scrolling display of the symbol sequence on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 begins. At this point, the special notification described above continues (see Figure 445(c)).

Subsequently, at timing TBG6, the display transitions to a reach indicator. At timing TBG7, the first special symbol display unit 37a displays the symbols corresponding to special win result B, while the display screen 42a displays the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result at its final stop (see Figure 445(d)). By displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result at its final stop, it becomes difficult to determine from that symbol combination whether the current game round corresponds to special win result B.

Subsequently, at the timing of tbg8, when the confirmed display of the symbols in the first special display unit 37a is complete, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. In this opening/closing execution mode, the system remains in the special stage described above, giving the impression that it is still in a probability variation game state. Immediately after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, a female character is displayed in the center of the display screen 42a (variable display area ME) (see Figure 445(e)). Afterward, the special notification is deactivated in accordance with the character's movement, and the character disappears after the special notification is deactivated (see Figures 445(f) → 445(g)). In other words, the special notification is deactivated at a predetermined timing during the opening/closing execution (timing of tbg9).

At the timing of tbg10, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game transitions to the first probability variation state. The second special symbol display unit 37b begins displaying the changing symbols, and the scrolling display of the symbol rows on the display screen 42a begins. Even after the game resumes in the probability variation state, the current stage remains a special stage, and the special notification remains deactivated. Furthermore, the special notification is restricted at least until the next jackpot.

Furthermore, while the first half of the aforementioned fake release animation (final stopping of symbols → character appearance) follows the same flow as the first half of the main release animation, it differs from the main release animation in that the character movement related to the release of the special notification does not occur, and the special notification remains unreleased.

During a high-probability game state, a special notification is issued suggesting a downgrade from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, thereby increasing the tension of the game during the high-probability state. This is advantageous in preventing monotony when the high-probability state continues for a long time, such as through a loop. In the configuration shown in this embodiment, if the special winning result B occurs, which does not affect the lottery mode, the special notification is restricted. By restricting the special notification and creating a section where no excitement occurs, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned tension from becoming excessively high. This is desirable in reducing player fatigue and increasing attention to the game.

If the special winning result B occurs, the game returns from the second probability-increasing state to the first probability-increasing state, thus delaying the transition to the low-probability game state. Furthermore, once the game returns to the first probability-increasing state, it remains in that state until a big win occurs. Therefore, the regulation of special notifications can be maintained until the next big win occurs, resulting in a practically desirable configuration.

<Variation 1>
In the 52nd embodiment described above, the special notification is terminated only when special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state. This can be changed so that the special notification is terminated midway through in some cases when a losing reach display is executed during the second probability variation state, or when special win result A occurs. In such a configuration, if the special notification is terminated due to a losing reach display or special win result A during the second probability variation state, the special notification should be restarted (revived) during that second probability variation state. In other words, the function of restricting the special notification until the next jackpot should be limited to when the special notification is terminated due to special win result B.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 52nd embodiment described above, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the special notification is canceled during the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special win result B. However, the system is not limited to this. The special notification may be canceled during the game round related to the special win result B. In this case, the special notification may be canceled during the scrolling display of the symbol sequence (before the final stop of the symbol combination), or during the display of the final stop of the symbol combination. Furthermore, the special notification may be canceled during the first probability variation state that is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends (for example, during the first game round in the first probability variation state).

<Example 3>
It is also possible to set up a system with two special stages, a first special stage and a second special stage, where the basic stage of play in a probability variation state is the first special stage, and the special notification occurs only in the first special stage. If the special notification is canceled in the first special stage, the system transitions to the second special stage, and the second special stage continues at least until the next jackpot. In this case, if the first jackpot result occurs in the second special stage, it is also possible to configure the system so that the second special stage remains even in subsequent probability variation states. Furthermore, if the second special stage occurs before or after the opening/closing execution mode, the display of the background image and output of the BGM for the second special stage may continue even during the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first jackpot result.

<Embodiment 53>
In this embodiment, the animation performed when returning (upgrading) from the second probability state to the first probability state is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 45th embodiment. Configurations common to the 45th embodiment will not be explained.

In this embodiment, similar to the 52nd embodiment described above, multiple performance stages are provided, each with a different background image displayed on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 and different background music (BGM) output from the speaker unit 65. Specifically, there is a normal stage (background image: beach) where the player remains when in a low-probability game state, and a special stage (background image: underwater) where the player remains when in a probability-increasing game state.

As shown in Figure 446(a), a hold display area is provided at the bottom of the display screen 42a to display hold icons (hold symbols or hold images) during special stages. This hold display area consists of an execution target display area Da, which integrates the display functions of the execution target display areas GA and GB, and a hold count display area Db, which integrates the display functions of the special symbol hold display areas Ga and Gb and consists of four unit hold display areas. Each of the execution target display area Da and unit hold display areas can display one hold icon, and the hold icons displayed in the unit hold display areas shift one by one towards the execution target display area Da as the game progresses.

In the first probability variation state, the hold icons displayed in the execution target display area Da and the hold count display area Db correspond to the hold information related to the second operation port 34. In the second probability variation state, the hold icons displayed in the execution target display area Da and the hold count display area Db correspond to the hold information related to the first operation port 33. The correspondence is thus changed.

As shown in Figure 446(b), hold icons are broadly classified into normal hold icons and special hold icons. Both normal and special hold icons are star-shaped, but their colors differ. Specifically, normal hold icons are white, while special hold icons are black.

The special hold icon is displayed only in special stages (the first and second probability-increasing states), meaning it is not displayed in normal stages. In most cases, if a jackpot is achieved while the special hold icon is displayed in the execution target display area Da (i.e., during the game round related to the special hold icon), the probability-increasing game state ends. In other words, the special hold icon is designed to suggest that if a jackpot occurs, the probability-increasing game state is highly likely to end. Players hoping for the continuation of the probability-increasing game state will play hoping the special hold icon does not appear, thus increasing the tension during the probability-increasing game state. Note that when a hold icon is added to the hold display area, it will be either a normal hold icon or a special hold icon, and will remain in that form until the corresponding hold is consumed.

In this embodiment, if a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state, the display of new special reserve icons (additional displays) will be restricted until the next big win occurs. By creating such a safe zone, excessive tension among players is suppressed.

Furthermore, if a special win result B occurs in the second probability variation state, the reserve icon displayed in the reserve display area will change from one corresponding to the reserve related to the first operation port 33 to one corresponding to the reserve related to the second operation port 34. In this embodiment, in both the first and second probability variation states, a star-shaped reserve icon is uniformly displayed, and even when transitioning from the second probability variation state to the first probability variation state, the shape of the reserve icon does not change. Also, if the launch of game balls towards the right route continues, the number of reserves related to both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 will both remain near their upper limits, and even if the correspondence with the reserve icon changes, the number of reserve icons will remain "4" → "4". In light of these circumstances, the configuration is designed to carry over the type of displayed reserve icon. Even if a special win result B occurs while a special reserve icon is displayed, the special reserve icon remains in the reserve display area, thereby suppressing the exposure of the change in game state (second probability variation state → first probability variation state).

<Variation 1>
If a special hold icon is displayed in the hold display area and a special win result B occurs, the configuration may be configured to change the special hold icon to a normal hold icon.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 53rd embodiment described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33 during the low probability game state, the system transitions to the low probability game state or the first probability variation game state via the opening/closing execution mode. However, it is also possible to configure the system to transition to the second probability variation game state. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 33 during the second probability variation state, the system transitions to the low probability game state or the first probability variation game state via the opening/closing execution mode. However, it is also possible to configure the system to transition to the second probability variation game state. Note that the configuration shown in this modified example 2 may be applied to each of the 44th to 52nd embodiments described above.

<Example 3>
In the 53rd embodiment described above, the display of a new special reserve icon is restricted only when a special win result B occurs during the second probability variation state. It is also possible to change this and restrict the display of a new special reserve icon in some cases when a losing reach display is executed during the probability variation game state, or when a special win result A occurs. If such a configuration is adopted, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the restriction on the display of a new special reserve icon is lifted during the probability variation game state if it is triggered by a losing reach display or special win result A during the probability variation game state.

<Modification 4>
Special stages are provided as the first special stage and the second special stage. Basically, the stage where the player stays during the probability variation game state is the first special stage, and the special reserve icon is displayed only in the first special stage. If the display of a new special reserve icon is restricted in the first special stage, the player moves to the second special stage, and the second special stage can be configured to continue at least until the next jackpot. In this case, if the first V-winning jackpot result occurs in the second special stage, it is also possible to configure the game so that the next probability variation game state will also be the second special stage. Furthermore, if the second special stage occurs before or after the opening/closing execution mode, the display of the background image and the output of the BGM for the second special stage may continue even during the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first V-winning jackpot result.

<Embodiment 54>
The following describes in detail, based on the drawings, a 54th embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of amusement machine. Figure 447 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 448 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and Figures 449 and 450 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded state. Note that, for convenience, the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 449.

As shown in Figure 447, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main unit 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

As shown in Figure 448, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting elongated frame materials on all four sides, forming an overall rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10; it may also be installed on the island equipment of the gaming hall.

The main body of the gaming machine 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a manner that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 18 is provided at the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. These upper support fittings 17 and 18 constitute a support mechanism, and this support mechanism allows the main body of the gaming machine 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side being the rotation base end and the right side being the rotation tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 449 and 450).

As shown in Figures 3 and 450, the main body of the gaming machine 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 positioned in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 positioned behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in a front view of the gaming machine, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Figure 447, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is almost identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central part of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be seen from the front, and this window portion 21 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds these glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that divides the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear sections, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, while the game area PE is double-covered from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23.

Furthermore, it is not necessarily required to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Moreover, the number of glass panels is arbitrary; it may be one or three or more. However, in light of improving safety and security, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and arrange them facing each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use transparent synthetic resin panel members instead of glass panels.

Various light-emitting means, such as lamps, are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a ring-shaped illuminated section 26 containing LEDs or other light-emitting means is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The ring-shaped illuminated section 26 lights up or flashes in accordance with changes in the game state, such as during a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Furthermore, an error indicator lamp section 27, which lights up in the event of an error or malfunction, is provided at the center of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and at the very top of the pachinko machine 10. Prize ball lamp sections 28, which light up during prize ball payout, are provided to the left and right of the error indicator lamp section 27. Additionally, speaker sections 29, which output sound effects, background music, etc., according to the game state, are provided in positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see Figure 449).

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 are arranged vertically, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 33, opening upwards, is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34, also opening upwards, is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described later), arranging them in a line, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism (described later). The lower tray 34 has the function of storing excess game balls in the upper tray 33 and also functions as a receptacle for game balls that were launched by the game ball launching mechanism but did not reach the game area PE (see Figure 3) and are returned to the player.

In the upper bulge 31, a special effect button 35, operated by the player, is located in front of the upper tray 33. This special effect button 35 is connected to a notification and effect control device 140, which executes corresponding effects based on the operation of the special effect button 35.

To the right of the lower bulge 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided, protruding toward the player. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described later. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (rotation) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases. When this amount of operation is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount, the game ball reaches the game area PE. Furthermore, by adjusting this amount of operation, the player can choose to launch the game balls to either the right or left route, as described later.

As shown in Figure 449, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door-side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving opening is formed at its upper corner, projecting rearward and opening upward. This receiving opening is partitioned left and right by a partition wall, thereby separating the entrance portion of the front door-side upper tray passage from the entrance portion of the front door-side lower tray passage. The upstream side of both the front door-side upper tray passage and the front door-side lower tray passage leads to a game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Game balls entering the front door-side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the front door-side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14, at the pivot end, protruding shafts are provided at its upper and lower ends. These protruding shafts constitute the assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 451. Figure 451 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, as with Figure 449, the configuration within the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted in Figure 451 for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, which has an outer shape similar to that of the outer frame 11, being roughly rectangular. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a small gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The fascia board is positioned below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 rests on the fascia board. A small clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 to prevent mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base end (left side in Figure 451) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown in the illustration, the support brackets 71 and 72 have shafts, and bearing portions provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can rotate relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotating end side (right side in Figure 451) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later) and has front door hook members 76 scattered along its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has a hook receiving member 49 (see Figure 449) provided on the back of the front door frame 14, and slits are formed to protrude towards the front side of the inner frame 13, corresponding to each front door hook member 76. The front door hook members 76 that protrude through these slits engage with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable state. Furthermore, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 that extends to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 engage with a hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, thereby locking the main body of the gaming machine 12 in a closed position relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base 50 (locking device 75) is equipped with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is separate from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77 and the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is positioned adjacent to the locking unit. Turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right (clockwise) unlocks the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the left (counterclockwise) unlocks the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11.

A recessed area 51 for housing the game board unit 80L is formed in the central part of the inner frame base body 50. The recessed area 51 is recessed at the rear of the game machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80L, and the game board unit 80L is fixed in place by a manual locking mechanism, fitted into this recessed area 51 from the front of the game machine. A roughly rectangular window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the recessed area 51, through which the rear configuration of the game board unit 80L (rear block 80bL, described later) protrudes to the rear of the inner frame 13. This window opening 52 is almost entirely covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80L mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80L)
The game board unit 80L is formed by integrating a game board 80a, which is mainly made of wooden board material, and a rear block 80bL, which is provided on the rear side of the game board 80a and has various game components (variable display device, control device, movable performance mechanism, etc.) mounted on the base body 251.

The game area PE, through which the game balls flow, is formed on the front of the game board 80a. As already explained, the game area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls; that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE do not line up front to back at the same point in the game area PE. This suppresses ball jamming in the game area PE. Note that the game board 80a is not limited to wood; it can also be made of synthetic resin.

The following description will explain the game board unit 80L (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) based on Figures 452 and 453. Figure 452 is a front view of the game board unit 80L, and Figure 453 is a rear perspective view of the game board unit 80L.

The game board 80a has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in its own thickness direction (front-to-back direction). As shown in Figure 452, each opening is equipped with a general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable prize entry device 83, a through gate 84, etc. When a game ball enters the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, or the variable prize entry device 83, these game balls are detected by detection sensors provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection result, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. In addition, an out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86. In the following explanation, to clearly distinguish it from the entry of game balls into the out-out opening 86, the entry of game balls into the general prize-winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable prize-winning device 83 will also be referred to as "winning."

Furthermore, the game board 80a is equipped with numerous game pins 87, windmills 94, and other game components to appropriately distribute the flow paths of the game balls. These various configurations of game pins 87, windmills, etc., differentiate the flow paths of the game balls, resulting in a reasonable probability of winning prizes in the general prize winning slots 81, etc.

A central opening is formed in the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached to cover this central opening from the rear side of the game board unit 80L. Behind this central opening, the variable display unit 85 and other components belonging to the rear block 80bL are located, and these components can be viewed from the front of the game machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An operating port unit 82 and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 includes a first operating port 91 located below the variable display unit 85, and a second operating port 92 located below the first operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is equipped with an electric mechanism 93, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). The electric mechanism 93 comprises a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is switchable between an open state (assist state) that allows ball entry into the second operating port 92 and a closed state (non-assist state) that prevents ball entry.

Furthermore, the electric mechanism 93 may be configured such that, when in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the second operating opening 92, and when switched to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the second operating opening 92 than when it is closed.

Upstream from the second operating port 92, specifically to the side of the variable display unit 85, is the through gate 84. When a support lottery is triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 84, the electric mechanism 93 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, if a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls will be dispensed, and if a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls will be dispensed. However, the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable prize-winning device (special ball-entry device or special ball-entry means) 83 is equipped with a large prize-winning opening and a shutter that can be switched between an "allowing" state, which permits ball entry into the large prize-winning opening, and a "blocking" state, which prevents ball entry. In the following description, the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "allowing" state will be referred to as the "open state," and the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "blocking" state will be referred to as the "closed state."

Furthermore, the variable prize-winning device 83 may be configured such that, when it is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83, and when it switches to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83 than when it is closed.

In the normal game state described later, an internal lottery is performed based on the entry of balls into the operating ports 91 and 92. If the internal lottery is won (for example, a jackpot is achieved), the game transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The variable prize entry device 83 is maintained in the closed state and is configured to be switched to the open state when the game transitions to the special game state. In the special game state, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or after a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have been entered, one round is defined as the switching to the open state being repeated for multiple rounds (for example, 6 rounds) with a maximum limit.

Next, a supplementary explanation of the variable display unit 85 will be provided. The variable display unit 85 has a symbol display device 95 that displays symbols variably (variable display) when a prize is awarded in the operating ports 91 and 92. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and its display content is controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, symbols are displayed, for example, in a row at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are displayed variably by scrolling horizontally. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on a pre-set active line, and the game transitions to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). Note that the symbol display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device; it may also be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 96 is provided on the game board 80a so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the game board 80a, so that the gap between the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, collisions between the game ball flowing down the game area PE and the symbol display device 95 are avoided, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into the right route, which bypasses the variable display unit 85 (specifically the center frame 96) from the right side, and the left route, which bypasses it from the left side. In this embodiment, the various game components provided in the game area PE are arranged symmetrically (a so-called symmetrical gauge), and there is no difference in advantage or disadvantage between the right and left routes. The configuration allows game balls launched from either the right or left route to enter the operating ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable prize winning device 83.

Behind the center frame 96 is a movable display device 97L. This display device 97L is configured to operate when performing synchronized effects that work in conjunction with the images displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95. Further details about the display device 97L will be described later.

A stage is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 96, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls flowing in through an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 are discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. The stage is configured to make it relatively easier for game balls that reach the stage to flow into the first operation port 91, specifically, to flow into the first operation port 91 more easily than game balls that do not pass through the stage, thus contributing to increased player attention to the movement of game balls on this stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, restricting game balls that reach the stage from moving toward the rear block 80bL (variable display unit 85).

The activation ports 91 and 92 are positioned closer to the variable display unit 85. Since a win in the activation ports 91 and 92 can trigger a transition to a special game state, players are expected to pay attention to whether or not a win occurs in the activation ports 91 and 92, and also to the symbol display device 95 to determine whether or not a transition to the special game state occurs. Placing the activation ports 91 and 92 closer to the variable display unit 85 is a design choice to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 85.

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partitioning member 98 is provided, which, together with the guide rail 100 (described later), demarcates the game area PE. The game area partitioning member 98 is equipped with a stopper member and a main display unit 99, which the game balls flying along the guide rail 100 will collide with. The stopper member is a buffer member positioned near the tip of the guide rail 100. Upon impact with this stopper member, the game ball's momentum is reduced before it flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the main display unit 99. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, with a portion of it positioned to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D, which displays predetermined patterns and other information. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in Figure 452(b), the main display unit D comprises a first operation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the first operation port 91, and a second operation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the second operation port 92. The first operation port display unit D1 displays a changing pattern triggered by a win in the first operation port 91, and as a result of stopping this changing pattern display, the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the changing pattern display in the first operation port display unit D1 stops, and after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state.

The display unit D2 for the second operation slot triggers a change in the symbol display upon entry into the second operation slot 92. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is clearly displayed as the change in the display stops. If the result of the internal lottery based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the display unit D2 for the second operation slot stops the change in the display. After a predetermined symbol is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into either of the operating ports 91 or 92, a variation display is initiated on the corresponding operating port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display stops (confirms). This state is maintained until the confirmed display time elapses, which constitutes one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration where a single display area is provided and a variation display is performed in that single display area regardless of which operating port 91 or 92 wins, one game round can be defined as the variation display starting in that single display area, displaying a predetermined stop result, stopping (confirms), and maintaining that state until the confirmed display time elapses.

In this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92 is limited to four times each (a total of eight balls). The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a first operation port retention count display section S1 and a second operation port retention count display section S2, respectively, which display the number of balls held in the first and second operation ports 91 and 92.

Furthermore, in addition to the operation port display units D1 and D2, the main display unit 99's main display section D is also equipped with a through-gate display unit DS that displays the lottery results based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84. The through-gate display unit DS triggers a change in the pattern display upon winning a prize in the through-gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of this change display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is clearly displayed (a confirmation display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is a support win, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through-gate display unit DS, the change display stops, and after the confirmation display is completed, the system transitions to the electric mechanism open state. In the electric mechanism open state, the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operation port 92, is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times. The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a hold count display section SS that shows the number of held balls.

The main display unit D, as detailed above, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and its visibility is ensured because the game balls do not move in front of these various display units.

To explain the configuration of the inner frame 13 again using Figure 451, below the game board unit 80L in the inner frame base body 50, there is a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls positioned at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball feeding device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch standby position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby integrating it with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle, tilted upwards toward the game board unit 80L. The launch rail 112 has a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross-section, and the game ball fits into this groove, thereby defining its front-to-back position.

A ball stopper is positioned near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112 to hold the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 in the aforementioned launch standby position. The solenoid 111 is positioned further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension and retraction direction, causing the game ball, positioned in the launch standby position, to be launched towards the game board unit 80L, specifically towards the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80L.

The guide rail 100, together with the game area partitioning member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80L (specifically the front surface of the plate), partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102, which are positioned opposite each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and these two rails 101 and 102 partition a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the game area PE. The game ball, launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111, is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). Furthermore, in the game board unit 80L, a reverse return prevention member 106 is attached to the front of the exit portion 105, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. This prevents subsequent game balls from being obstructed by game balls that have already reached the game area PE.

The rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 are arc-shaped, centered approximately in the middle of the game area PE. Therefore, game balls passing through the guide passage 103 are easily moved (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within them. In other words, when a game ball is launched to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide passage 103 effectively constitutes the passage area (path) through which the game ball passes, while the area along the inner rail 101 effectively becomes an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in Figure 451, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80L. In other words, the two rails 100 and 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset to the left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80L. This brings both rails 100 and 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80L while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is located below the gap formed in this manner. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 fails to reach the game area PE and returns as a foul ball through the guidance passage 103, these foul balls will enter the foul ball passage through the gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged into the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 447, etc. This suppresses interference between foul balls and the next game ball to be launched.

In the inner frame base 50, a through hole is formed to the left of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14), extending through the inner frame base 50 in the front-to-back direction. A passage forming member 121 is installed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body-side upper tray passage 122 and a main body-side lower tray passage 123. The upstream sides of these main body-side upper tray passages 122 and 123 lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Furthermore, a receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45, attached to the front door frame 14, fits into the lower part of the passage forming member 121. Below the main body-side upper tray passage 122 is the front door-side upper tray passage, and below the main body-side lower tray passage 123 is the front door-side upper tray passage.

In the inner frame base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening/closing member 124 is attached to open and close the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force closes each opening/closing member 124, preventing game balls from falling out of the passages 122 and 123. Conversely, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by a receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage are connected, and the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage are also connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base 50 and game board unit 80L) will be described based on Figures 453 and 454. Figure 454 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 454, a bearing bracket 132 is attached to the pivot base end (right side in Figure 454) on the back of the inner frame base body 50. The bearing bracket 132 has bearing portions 133 formed at vertically spaced intervals, and these bearing portions 133 allow the back pack unit 15 to rotatably attach to the inner frame 13. Furthermore, multiple fixing levers 134 are provided on the back of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in the closed position.

As already explained, a window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess (game board housing section) 51 in the inner frame base 50, penetrating in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and opening to the rear side of the inner frame base 50. This window opening 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80L housed in the housing recess 51. Various components such as control devices are mounted on the rear side of the game board unit 80L (rear block 80bL), and these components are exposed to the rear side of the inner frame 13 through the window opening 52. Now, with reference to Figure 453, the configuration of the rear side of the game board unit 80L will be described.

As already explained, a rear block 80bL is attached to the back of the game board 80a. The rear block 80bL has a roughly box-shaped base 251 that opens towards the game board 80a. This base 251 is fixed to the back of the game board unit 80L, thereby integrating the game board 80a and the rear block 80bL.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area for arranging the movable display device 97L and other components described above, while the rear side is the area for arranging the control devices that control these various components and the variable display unit 85 (pattern display device 95).

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50. The aforementioned pattern display device 95 (see Figure 452) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 95 are mounted on this protruding portion. These pattern display device 95 and display control device are arranged in a stacked configuration in the front-to-back direction (the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50), with the pattern display device 95 at the front and the display control device at the rear. Furthermore, a notification/effect control device 140 is mounted on the rear of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification and performance control device 140 includes a notification and performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device (described later). The notification and performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

Below the notification and performance control device 140, a main control unit 160 is provided, covering the base body 251 from the rear. The main control unit 160 comprises a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80L (specifically, the rear block 80bL), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function for controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function for monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit). This main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The circuit board box 163 comprises a box base (front case) with a roughly rectangular shape and a box cover (back case) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a box sealing section 164, thereby sealing the circuit board box 163. Multiple box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short side of the circuit board box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be configured in any way that makes it impossible to open the box base and the box cover, but the box base and the box cover are made impossible to open by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to reseal the box even after it has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. When the main control board inside malfunctions or when the main control board needs to be inspected, the connection between the box sealing section with the locking pin inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. After that, if the sealing process is to be repeated, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is kept in the circuit board box 163, it will be easy to detect unauthorized opening by examining the circuit board box 163.

The circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are indestructibly connected by a base seal 165. Specifically, the base seal 165, like the box seal 164, has a locking hole and a locking pin. The insertion of the locking pin into the locking hole ensures that the circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are irremovably connected. This makes it easier to detect if the circuit board box 163 has been illegally removed.

On the front of the base body 251, in the portion facing the lower rear of the game board unit 80L, a collection passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general prize entry point 81, the operating point unit 82, and the variable prize entry device 83, and converges at a single point downstream. As a result, game balls that enter the general prize entry point 81, etc., are all collected below the game board unit 80L via the collection passage. In other words, the base body 251 is equipped with the function of collecting game balls that enter the various prize entry points.

Below the game board unit 80L is a discharge passage, which will be described later. Game balls collected below the game board unit 80L via the collection passage are guided into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out-out opening 86 also leads to the discharge passage; game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots are guided into the discharge passage via the out-out opening 86.

Furthermore, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80bL is equipped with detection sensors for each of the aforementioned ball entry points: a general prize entry point detection sensor for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize entry point 81, and operation point detection sensors for detecting game balls that have entered the operation points 91 and 92. These various detection sensors constitute the prize entry detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from each detection sensor to the main control unit 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described based on Figures 455 and 456. Figure 455 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 456 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in Figure 455, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as its main body, and the dispensing mechanism 202, discharge passage panel, and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to this back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and, as shown in Figure 456, has a base portion 211 to which the dispensing mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the top are closed and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board has various output terminals, through which various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 456, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the locking pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported relative to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 has multiple insertion points through which the fixing lever 134 provided on the inner frame 13 is inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the base portion 211 from the rear when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion points.

The dispensing mechanism 202 is positioned on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The dispensing mechanism 202 includes a tank 221 located at the top of the back pack 201, with an upward opening. Game balls supplied from the island equipment in the gaming hall are continuously replenished into this tank 221. A tank rail 222, gently sloping downstream, is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223, extending vertically, is connected downstream of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the downstream end of the case rail 223. Game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 225 located on the base 211 of the back pack 201 via a dispensing passage (not shown) located downstream of the dispensing device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later. Its inner opening connects to the upper tray 33 via the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage, while its outer opening connects to the lower tray 34 via the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage.

The lower end of the base portion 211 is fitted with a discharge passage panel and a control unit 204, which are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from front to back. The discharge passage panel has a discharge passage formed on the side facing the control unit 204, which is open to the rear. This opening in the discharge passage is closed by the control unit 204. The discharge passage is designed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the gaming hall, etc. Game balls guided from the aforementioned recovery passage, etc., to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through this discharge passage.

The control unit assembly 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base 241, on which the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. These two devices, the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243, are arranged in a front-to-back configuration, with the payout control device 242 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the dispensing control device 242, a dispensing control board for controlling the dispensing device 224 is housed within a circuit board box 244, and a state reset switch 245 provided on the dispensing control board protrudes outside the circuit board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state reset switch 245 will resolve the ball jam.

The power supply and launch control device 243 houses the power supply and launch control board within the circuit board box 246. The power supply and launch control board generates and outputs the necessary power for various control devices, and further controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 and the ball feeding device 113, which constitute the game ball launch mechanism 110.

Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is equipped with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power to the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state and an off state.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a data storage function, so that even if a power outage occurs, it will retain the state it was in at the time of the outage, and when power is restored, it will return to that state. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, such as when a gaming hall closes for the day, the state before the shutdown is stored. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 provided on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main unit 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the rear of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, these various switches are difficult to operate when the main unit 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone without the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheat) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the block shown in Figure 457.

The main control board 401, located in the main control unit 162, is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is a component that incorporates a ROM 403 for storing various control programs and fixed-value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 403, and various counter circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and random number generators. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 or RAM 404, may be provided by separate components.

The MPU 402 is equipped with both input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the dispensing control device 242, and various detection sensors, all located on the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, the following are connected: ball entry detection sensor 391a for detecting ball entry into the general prize entry opening 81, ball entry detection sensor 391b for detecting ball entry into the variable prize entry device 83, ball entry detection sensor 391c for detecting ball entry into the first operation opening 91, ball entry detection sensor 391d for detecting ball entry into the second operation opening 92, and ball entry detection sensor 391e for detecting ball entry into the through gate 84. The MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each entry point. Furthermore, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot lottery based on ball entry into the first operation opening 91 and the second operation opening 92, and also executes a support lottery based on ball entry into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based, for example, the result of determining whether a ball has entered the prize-winning ball entry section, such as the aforementioned operating ports 91 and 92. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a ball has entered the general prize port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the variable prize device 83, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the first operating port 91, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output; and if a ball has entered the second operating port 92, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

The notification and performance control device 140 receives various commands from the main control device 162, including commands for starting the variation, type commands, ending the variation, opening commands, and ending commands. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting these commands. Details of these commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and this predetermined number of bytes contains various information.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a variable prize drive unit that opens and closes the shutter of the variable prize device 83, an electric prize drive unit that opens and closes the electric prize mechanism 93 of the second operating opening 92, and a main display unit 99. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 402 performs drive control of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit so that the variable prize device 83 is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the support lottery for the electric prize mechanism 93 is won, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the electric prize mechanism drive unit so that the electric prize mechanism 93 is opened and closed. The MPU 402 also controls the display of the main display unit D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402. Through this external output terminal board 213, information regarding ball entry into various ball entry points and lottery results such as jackpots is output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to monitor the status of the pachinko machine 10 and the gameplay situation.

The power outage monitoring board 405 acts as a relay between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243. The power outage monitoring board 405 is equipped with the function of monitoring the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loaned balls via the payout device 224 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming arcade. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies this generated operating power through a predetermined power path. Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, which is driven when predetermined launching conditions are met.

The notification and performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification and performance control board that has an MPU (Multi-Purpose Unit) installed. The MPU contains a ROM (Remote Control Module) that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM (Memory for Temporarily Storing Various Data During Execution of the Control Programs Stored in the ROM), and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM and RAM to be integrated into a single chip for the MPU; they may be configured as separate chips. The MPU of the notification and performance control device 140 controls the operation of the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, as well as the performance device 97L located on the game board unit 80L, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 410.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on commands input from the notification and performance control device 140. In this case, the notification and performance control device 140 determines the pattern of symbol variation on the symbol display device 95 (for example, whether a reach occurs and the content of the reach performance) and the pattern of symbol stop display (the type of symbol combination to be displayed when the variation display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, we will explain the configuration and content of the display of the changing symbols for each game round. In the following explanation, please refer to Figures 458 and 459 as appropriate. Figures 458 and 459 are schematic diagrams illustrating the display content on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. For the sake of clarity, the background image and other details displayed on the display screen 95a are omitted in Figure 459 and other figures.

The display control device 410 is equipped with a character ROM. This character ROM pre-stores data for nine main symbols, each numbered "1" through "9" (see Figures 458(a) to (i)), and data for sub-symbols without numbers (see Figure 458(j)).

As shown in Figure 458(a), the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up: upper, middle, and lower. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is composed of main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 95a, the patterns in each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

The upper symbol row Z1 consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in descending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. The lower symbol row Z3 also consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in ascending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. Therefore, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are composed of 18 symbols each. In contrast, the middle symbol row Z2 consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in ascending order, with an additional main symbol "4" placed between the "9" and "1" symbols, and one secondary symbol between each of these main symbols. Thus, the middle symbol row Z2 consists of 10 main symbols, totaling 20 symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 459(b), the display screen 95a displays three symbols for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. The display screen 95a also has five active lines: the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5. The display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Once the display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has finished with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed, indicating either a normal jackpot or a probability-increasing jackpot.

Furthermore, considering that the display of variations in each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 can be referred to as the first symbol row (or first picture row), the lower symbol row Z3 as the second symbol row (or second picture row), and the middle symbol row Z2 as the third symbol row (or third picture row).

Of the main symbols listed above, those with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are considered "specific symbols," while those with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are considered "non-specific symbols." In the case of a probability-increasing jackpot, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed. In the case of a regular jackpot, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed.

Furthermore, the manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 95 is not limited to those described above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row may be set to vertical.

Below the lower part of the display screen 95a, specifically below the variable display area ME which is composed of variable display areas for the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows, is a hold display area. The hold display area consists of a hold count display area Da, where the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operation openings 91 and 92 are arranged horizontally, and an execution target display area Dc, which can display hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the game rounds currently being played in the variable display area ME.

More specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the activation openings 91 and 92 is 8. Correspondingly, the reserved ball display area Da is configured with the following areas: the 1st unit reserved ball display area, the 2nd unit reserved ball display area, the 3rd unit reserved ball display area, the 4th unit reserved ball display area, the 5th unit reserved ball display area, the 6th unit reserved ball display area, the 7th unit reserved ball display area, and the 8th unit reserved ball display area.

For example, when a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 1, the predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area. When a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 4, the predetermined reserved images (reserved icons) are displayed in the first to fourth unit reserved display areas, respectively. Figure 459(b) illustrates the case where the number of reserved balls in the operating slots 91 and 92 is 3. In the following explanation, "number of reserved balls" will also be simply referred to as "number of reserved balls."

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as jackpot抽選 (jackpot lottery), setting the display on the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 95. Specifically, as shown in Figure 460, it uses a random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 95 is fluctuating towards a miss, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time of the symbol fluctuations in the display sections D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit 99 and the display time of the symbol fluctuations in the symbol display device 95. Furthermore, it uses an electric mechanism release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operation port 92 into the electric mechanism release state.

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an operation slot reserve area RE, an execution area AE, and a total reserved ball storage area.

The operating port retention area RE comprises the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth areas. In accordance with the winning history of the first or second operating port 91, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 is stored as retention information in one of the eighth areas. This retention information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in areas 1 through 8, if multiple consecutive entries into the first or second operating port 91 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. Furthermore, up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the first or second operating port 92 are retained and stored. The retained ball storage area 432 also has a total retained count storage area, which stores information to identify the number of entries into the first or second operating port 91 that are being retained and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE when the display section D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 starts displaying the changing patterns. At the start of each game round, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, we will provide further explanation about the various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 461, two win/loss tables are set: a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes in its win/loss lottery means: a low probability mode (low probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

Under the circumstances where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 461(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 461(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 (ranging from 0 to 599), "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. Incidentally, if the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot are arbitrary.

Next, the winning type counter C2 will be explained. The winning type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 29, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple winning results are set. These multiple winning results differ in two conditions: (1) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) the support mode by the electric mechanism 93 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

As support modes provided by the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operating port 92, when comparing situations where game balls are continuously launched in the same manner towards the game area PE, a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency at which the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 opens per unit time is relatively high or low.

The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first or second operating port 91, it is stored in the operating port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432.

The distribution of game results for the winning type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 462(a). Figure 462(a) is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for jackpots.

As shown in Figure 462(a), the distribution table for jackpots sets the distribution destinations for game results as follows: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability-increasing jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot results, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability-increasing jackpot results.

A 6R regular jackpot result is a jackpot result where, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played during this high-frequency support mode reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to the special game state), and the game switches back to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set at 40 games (see Figure 462(b)).

A 6R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot where, after the end of the special game state (open/close execution mode), the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result and the transition to the special game state, and switches to the low-frequency support mode upon the start of the special game state (see Figure 462(b)).

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92. Then, a decision is made on whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, during gameplay rounds transitioning to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. While the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same for each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, a configuration where the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode may be used.

Here, "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 95 capable of displaying (or changing) the variation of symbols (pictures), where, in a game round where the game result corresponds to an open/close execution mode, the stop display result after the variation display can become a special display result. This state is intended to make the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the special display result, occurring between the start of the variation display (or changing display) of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 95 and the display of the stop display result.

In other words, this is a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the symbol display device 95, a potential winning symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in a variable state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying potential reach symbol combinations that correspond to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a preset active line in the symbol display device 95. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 460, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 95. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2, and at the start of pattern variation by the pattern display device 95.

The electric mechanism release counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric mechanism release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is conducted based on the stored value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 to the open state.

The random number values that result in a support win are stored as a support lottery table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. Two support lottery tables are set up: a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group) and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group).

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results.

On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values excluding "4" and "304". In other words, all values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" except "4" and "304" correspond to support win results. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode is differentiated from the low-frequency support mode by resulting in support wins in almost all support lotteries.

In low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is set to 1/2. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "1," and the time the electric mechanism 93 remains open (open time) is set to "0.1 seconds." By drastically shortening the open time in this way, entry into the second operating opening 92 is effectively avoided during low-frequency support mode.

In high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/1.1. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "2". The time the electric mechanism remains in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds", and the interval time it remains in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds". By extending the open time compared to low-frequency support mode, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted during high-frequency support mode. In high-frequency support mode, the frequency of entry into the second operating port 92 is higher than in low-frequency support mode, allowing players to continue playing while further reducing the decrease in their ball count (investment). In other words, compared to low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode is configured to have a higher ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

(Regarding the various processes executed by the main control unit 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 402 within the main control unit 162 for the advancement of the game will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 402 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the explanation of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, let's refer to the flowchart in Figure 463 and explain the timer interrupt processing. This processing is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 402.

In step S101C, the system performs a reading process for various prize detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e). Specifically, it reads the status of the various prize detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162, determines the status of the respective sensors, and saves the detection information (prize detection information).

Subsequently, in step S102C, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the subsequent step S103C, the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric mechanism release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric mechanism release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S104C, the entry process for the through gate 84 is executed. In the entry process for the through gate, it is determined whether the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the flag is stored, and provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved memory items SN) is less than 4, the value of the electric mechanism release counter C4, updated in step S103A, is stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433. Then, if the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the entry detection flag is erased, and the entry process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the prize-winning process for the through gate in step S104C, the process proceeds to step S105C. In step S105C, the prize-winning process for the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for the operating port)
Here, the prize-winning process for the operating port will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 464 and 465.

In step S201C, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered (become a prize in) the first operating opening 91. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S202C, where a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 242 to dispense three game balls.

In the following step S203C, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. In the following step S204C, the value corresponding to the first operation opening 91 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening). After that, in step S205A, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20CA that the game ball has not entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S206C. In step S206C, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (entered) the second operating opening 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating opening 92, the process proceeds to step S207C, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to dispense four game balls. The prize ball commands set in steps S202C and S207C are transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output processing S401C of the normal processing described later.

In the following step S208C, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation port 92. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the second operation port 92. In the following step S209C, the value corresponding to the second operation port 92 is read from the reserve number storage area, and this value is set as the reserve number RbN for the second operation port (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve number RbN for the second operation port). After that, in step S205C, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

Furthermore, if both steps S201C and S206C result in a negative determination, that is, if no ball enters either the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92, the prize-winning process will terminate immediately.

Now, referring to Figure 465, the information acquisition process in step S205C will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301C, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, in step S302C, the number of reserved operation memories N of the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and in step S303C, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

In the subsequent step S304C, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103C, are stored in the first available memory area of the operating slot reserve area RE, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN, which was incremented by 1 in step S302C.

In other words, if the first operation slot reserve memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103C, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot reserve area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation slot reserve memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302C.

Furthermore, if the second operation port's reserved memory count RbN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, updated in step S103C, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation port's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation port's reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302A.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305C. In step S305C, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 99. During the display update process, if the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operation port 91, the display on the hold count display section S1 for the first operation port is updated. If the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operation port 92, the display on the hold count display section S2 for the second operation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 and the reserved number related to the second operation port 92. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 92 increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S306C and S307C, the notification/performance control device 140, which is the sub-control device, is made to recognize that a prize has been awarded to the operation openings 91 and 92. A pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information indicating whether the prize was awarded to the first operation opening 91 or the second operation opening 92.

The hold command set in step S307C will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output processing of the normal processing (step S401C), which will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 466. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, has been executed, and the main processes of the game are executed during normal processing. In summary, the processes in steps S401C to S407C are executed as periodic processing with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes in steps S409C and S410C are executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the external signal output process is first executed in step S401A. In the external signal output process in step S401C, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side and the hall computer.

Specifically, the system determines whether a prize ball command is set, and if so, transmits it to the payout control device 242. Furthermore, if various commands such as the variation start command, type command, variation end command, and other performance commands, as well as the hold command and the shift command (described later), are set, they are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, each time the change in the pattern is displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating the pattern confirmation is output to the hall computer. During the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer. During the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402C, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S403C, game round control processing is performed to control the gameplay in each game round. This game round control processing includes determining the jackpot, setting the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95, and controlling the display on the main display unit 99.

After executing the game turn control process in step S403A, the process proceeds to step S404C, where the game state transition process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Further details regarding the game turn control process in step S403C and the game state transition process in step S404C will be explained later.

In the subsequent step S405C, control processing for the through gate is executed, including support lottery processing based on winning a prize in the through gate 84. In step S406C, support processing for the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operating opening 92, is executed. Details of the through gate control processing in step S405C and the electric mechanism support processing in step S406C will be described later.

Subsequently, in step S407C, the game ball launch control process is executed. During this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is energized once at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S408C, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

The execution time for each process in steps S401C to S407C varies depending on the game state; therefore, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Thus, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control process in step S403C will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 467 to 469.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 467, it is determined in step S501C whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502C onward, namely the game round start process in steps S503C to S506C and the game round progress process in steps S507C to S509C.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, steps S502C and S503C determine whether a game round is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in a variable display state. If they are in a variable display state, a negative determination is made in step S502C, and the process proceeds to step S503C. In step S503C, it is determined whether the confirmed display on the operation port display units D1 and D2 has finished. If a positive determination is made in step S503C, the process proceeds to the game round start processing in steps S504C to S506C. In the game round start processing, first in step S504C, it is determined whether the total number of starting reserved balls (common reserved ball count CRN) is "0". If the common reserved ball count CRN is "0", it means that no reserved ball information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, this game round control processing ends there.

On the other hand, if the common reserve count CRN is not "0", in step S505C, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operation port of the reserve ball storage area 432 for variable display. Furthermore, in step S506C, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the symbol display device 95, after which the game round control process ends.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S505C and the variation start process in step S506C. First, we will explain the data setting process in step S505C with reference to the flowchart in Figure 468.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601C, the number of operation hold memory N stored in the hold memory area that is the target of this setting process, as well as the common hold memory CRN, are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of hold information stored in the operation port hold area RE (see Figure 460), i.e., the number of operation hold memory N, is "0". If the number of operation hold memory N is "0", the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of operation hold memory N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE (step S602C). Then, the data (hold information) stored in the second to eighth areas of the operation port hold area RE are shifted sequentially to the lower areas (step S603C). As a result, when data from area 1 is moved to execution area AE, for example, the data within each area is shifted as follows: area 2 → area 1, area 3 → area 2, area 4 → area 3, area 5 → area 4, area 6 → area 5, area 7 → area 6, area 8 → area 7, and so on.

In the following step S604C, a shift command is set, which is information that allows the notification and effect control device 140 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the operation port retention area RE. After this, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604C is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 140 in step S401C of the normal process (Figure 466).

(Initiation of change process)
Next, the variation start process in step S506C will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 469.

In the variation initiation process, the first step, S701C, executes the update process for the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The game count counter is reset to 0 upon transitioning to the special game state, and incremented by "1" each time the update process in step S701A is executed. The MPU 402 can identify the number of games played after the special game state ends by referring to the value of this game count counter.

In the following step S702C, a win/loss determination process is executed based on the entry into the operating ports 91 and 92. This win/loss determination process determines whether the held information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, it grasps the information for jackpot determination from the information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the winning random number counter C1. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is low probability mode, the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot. If the win/loss lottery mode is high probability mode, the win/loss table for high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the following step S703C, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination process in step S702C corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S704C.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information from the information stored in the execution area AE, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R probability variation jackpot result.

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, a positive determination is made in step S705C, and the process proceeds to step S706C, where the stop result setting process for the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. If it is a 6R regular jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S705C, and the process proceeds to step S707C, where the stop result setting process for the 6R regular jackpot is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S703C, if a negative result is obtained in step S703C, i.e., if it is not a jackpot, proceed to step S708C. In step S708C, the stop result setting process for a loss is executed.

In the stop result setting processes of steps S706C, S707C, and S708C, the information regarding the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In steps S706C and S707C, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R regular jackpot is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706C, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707C, the 6R regular jackpot flag is stored. Furthermore, in step S708C, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a loss is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S708C, the loss flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S706C, S707C, or S708C, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S709C. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

After the setting process for the variable display time is executed in step S709C, the process proceeds to step S710C, where the variable start command and type command are set. The variable start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variable display time. The type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the type command includes information on the game result, such as information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R normal jackpot result, and the loss result.

The variation start command and type command set in step S710C are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401C of the normal processing (Figure 466). Based on the received variation start command and type command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance for that game round, such as the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26, the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29, and the variation display pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 95. It then controls the lamp unit 26, speaker unit 29, performance device 97L, etc., to execute the determined performance.

Subsequently, in step S711C, the display of the changing symbols is started on either the first operation port display unit D1 or the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this symbol change start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the display of the changing symbols, etc., to start before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

(Setting the variable display time)
Next, an overview of the setting process for the variable display time (step S709C) will be described. As already explained, in this embodiment, reserve information is acquired based on balls entering the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, and based on the acquired reserve information, the variable display to confirmation display of the patterns and symbols for the game round is executed. Here, the variable display time for the patterns and symbols is set according to the current game state, the result of the win/loss lottery based on balls entering the operation ports 91 and 92, the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, etc. Regarding the variable display time, when comparing a jackpot result with a loss result, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a loss result where no reach display occurs, the display time is set to become shorter as the number of stored reserve information increases.

Returning to the explanation of the game turn control process (Figure 467), if the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 are showing a variable display or a confirmed display, the process proceeds to step S507C. In step S507C, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) in RAM 404 has become "0". This value is deducted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 463) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display processing is executed in step S508C. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the corresponding display unit D1 or D2 for the operation port is changed. After that, the game round control processing ends. If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display processing is executed in step S509A, and then the game round control processing ends.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404C will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 470.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801C, it is determined whether or not the system is in opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If it is not in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802C, where it is determined whether or not the game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the change display ended on either the operation port display unit D1 or D2 of the main display unit D. If the game round has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the game round has ended, a positive result is determined in step S802C, and the process proceeds to step S803C. In step S803C, it is determined whether the game result of this round (the result of the above win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether either the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If neither of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S804C. This start process releases the restriction on the operation of the variable prize device 83 by the locking device, allowing the opening and closing operation of the variable prize device 83 until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S804C, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in step S801C, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress based on the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag.

In the following step S805C, the round counter RC1 located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means of determining the number of times the variable prize winning device 83 has been opened. After executing the process in step S805C, the process proceeds to step S806C, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. This forces the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode to switch to the low-frequency support mode. Afterward, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807C, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S808C, before the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S807C is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401C of the normal processing (Figure 466). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode on the symbol display device 95. Based on the opening command received from the main control device 162, the notification/performance control device 140 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 to execute the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a display corresponding to a jackpot (e.g., animated display of characters).

Furthermore, the external signal set in step S808C is also transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S401C during normal processing (Figure 466). The hall computer can then determine that the gate is in open/close execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S801C, if it is determined in step S801C that the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S809C. In step S809C, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S810C. Now, referring to Figure 471, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot will be explained.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
In the opening and closing process of the main prize slot, first, in step S901C, it is determined whether or not the variable prize device 83 (main prize slot) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable ball entry device drive unit of the variable prize device 83. If the main prize slot is not open, in step S902C, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S902C is positive, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S902C, the process proceeds to step S903C. In step S903C, it is determined whether the value of timer counter TC1 is "0". Timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the main prize slot, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 463) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S903C, the main prize slot opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904C, where the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is opened. Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball-winning device is driven to open the large prize-winning opening.

Subsequently, the process for setting the closing conditions (settings for when the opening is enabled) for the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning slot) is executed in steps S905C and S906C. Specifically, in step S905C, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S906C, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process in step S906C, in step S907C, an open command is set to indicate that the variable prize device 83 (large prize slot) has been opened, and the large prize slot opening/closing process is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401C of the normal process (see Figure 466). Based on the received open command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S901C, if it is determined in step S901C that the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908C, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909C, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize-winning opening based on the detection signal from the detection sensor installed in the variable prize-winning device 83.

If a prize has been awarded, the award command output process is executed in step S910C. This award command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, and the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, for example, executed by the symbol display device 95, changes as a result of this award command.

After executing the command output process in step S910C, the process proceeds to step S911C. In step S911C, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1. In the following step S912C, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S912C, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S908C (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the main prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S913C, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is deactivated in order to close the variable prize entry device 83 (main prize opening).

In the following step S914C, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC1 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S915C, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC1 value is "0". If the determination in step S915C is negative, the process proceeds to step S916C, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S916C, a closing command is set in step S917C, and the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S401C of the normal process (Figure 466). The notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S915C, if it is determined in step S915C that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918C. In step S918C, the ending start process is executed. This start process sets an ending waiting time for the opening/closing execution mode, allowing the system to wait without starting the next game round. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Subsequently, in step S919C, the ending command is set, and then the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401C of the normal process (Figure 466).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 470), after executing the opening and closing of the large prize slot in step S810C, the process proceeds to step S811C, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends immediately. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812C. In step S812C, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S813C, and then the game state transition process ends. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 472.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S1001C, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S1001C is positive, the process proceeds to step S1002C, where a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for high probability mode will be referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

Subsequently, a high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on this set high-frequency support mode flag, in the subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001C, if the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was a 6R regular jackpot, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 (step S1004A), and the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "40". After that, the process proceeds to step S1003C, where the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode.

After executing the process in step S1003C, the process proceeds to step S1006C, where the value of the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is cleared (reset). Then, in step S1007C, the various flags (such as the jackpot flag) for the opening/closing execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

(Processing for power supply support)
Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 473 and 474, the power supply support process in step S406C, which is performed as part of the normal process, will be described.

In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S1101C, it is determined whether or not support is currently being provided by the electric feature 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not currently being provided, a negative determination is made in step S1101C and the process proceeds to step S1102A. In step S1102C, it is determined whether or not the display of confirmed symbols has finished in the through-gate display unit DS. If the display of confirmed symbols has not finished, a negative determination is made in step S1102A and the process for supporting the electric feature ends. If the display of confirmed symbols has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102C and the process proceeds to step S1103C.

In step S1103C, it is determined whether or not support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84. If support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S1103C, and the process for this electric support function ends there. If support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84, an positive determination is made in step S1103C, and the process proceeds to step S1104C. In step S1104C, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1105C, and "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means of determining the number of times the electric function 93 has opened. If it is the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1106C, and "2" is set in the round counter RC2.

After executing steps S1105C and S1106C, the process proceeds to step S1107C, where support flags are set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S1108C, the opening start process is executed, and the main electric support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time for the opening. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric mechanism 93 begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S1101C, if a positive result is obtained in step S1101C, the process proceeds to step S1109C. In step S1109C, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S1108C has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S1109C, and the main power support process ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S1109C, and the process proceeds to step S1110C. Now, referring to Figure 474, the power switching process in step S1110C will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device opening and closing process, first, in step S1201C, it is determined whether the electric device 93 is open (in the open state). Whether the electric device 93 is open or not is determined by whether the electric device drive unit is in a driving state or not. If the electric device 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1202C, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric device opening and closing process is terminated. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1203C.

In step S1203C, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2, located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404, is "0". The timer counter TC2 is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric mechanism 93, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 463) is executed. If the determination in step S1203C is negative, the electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If the determination in step S1203C is positive, the process proceeds to step S1204C.

In step S1204C, the electric mechanism release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit (solenoid) is started, switching the electric mechanism 93 from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S1205C, the second prize counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S1206C, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is the high-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) (step S1207C). If it is the low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S1201C, if a positive result is obtained in step S1201C, i.e., if the electric mechanism 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1209C. In step S1209C, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1210C. In step S1210C, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no entry has occurred, the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is deducted by 1 in step S1211C, and in the following step S1212C, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S1212C, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1209C (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the conditions for ending the opening of the electric mechanism 93 have been met. In this case, in step S1213C, the output of the drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit is stopped in order to close the electric mechanism 93 (second operating opening 92).

In the following step S1214C, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC2 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC2 is "0", its value is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S1215C, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC2 value is "0". If the determination in step S1215C is negative, the process proceeds to step S1216C, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds).

If the value of the round counter RC2 is determined to be "0" in step S1215C, the process proceeds to step S1217C. In step S1217C, the ending start process is executed. This start process sets the waiting time for the ending of the electric support system. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counters located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 473, after executing the electric power switch opening/closing process in step S1110C, the process proceeds to step S1111C. In step S1111C, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the result in step S1111C is negative, the electric power support process ends immediately. If the result in step S1111C is positive, the process proceeds to step S1112C, where it is determined whether the ending waiting time set in step S1217C has elapsed. If the result in step S1112C is negative, the electric power support process ends immediately. If the result in step S1112C is positive, the process proceeds to step S1113C. In step S1113C, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the electric power support process ends. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification and performance control device 140)
Next, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 475, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification and effect control board 441, located in the notification and effect control device 140, is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 contains a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, a RAM 444 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM 443 and RAM 444 to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 442 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for controlling the hold display (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, the performance devices 97L (specifically the left-side movable performance device 800L and the right-side movable performance device 900L) located on the game board unit 80L, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element where the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip; a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not mandatory for the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 to be integrated into a single chip on the MPU 472; they may also be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process to identify the variation display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 95 based on the commands transmitted from the notification/effect control device 140, and also executes processing related to hold notifications, etc., and then executes drawing processing for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores JPEG image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 472. This work data and flags are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device, which acts as a liquid crystal display driver, integrated into the graphic display device 95. Because the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be described as a microcontroller chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP475 adjusts the timing of the MPU472, video RAM477, etc., to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM477 from the character ROM476 at a predetermined timing to display it on the graphic display device 95.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data, such as patterns, displayed on the pattern display device 95. This character ROM 476 holds bitmap image data of various display patterns, a color palette table referenced when determining the color representation for each dot of the bitmap image, and other similar data.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and store image data and other information in each character ROM 476. It is also possible to configure the system so that JPEG image data for background images, stored in the program ROM 473, is stored in the character ROMs 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 95. The display content of the pattern display device 95 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the general outline of the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 95a is identified by the notification/effect control device 140 by referring to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the pattern variation display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification result. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 executes a pattern variation control process as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 msec), and the general outline of the pattern variation display mode is identified in this pattern variation control process. Now, the pattern variation control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 476.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1301C, it is determined whether or not a game round is in progress, that is, whether or not the variable display of symbols for one game round is being executed on the symbol display device 95. If it is determined that a game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1302C, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1302C, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1302C, the variable start process is executed in step S1303C, and then the variable display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301C, if a positive result is obtained in step S1301C, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1304C. In step S1304C, it is determined whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative result is obtained in step S1304C, the variation display control process is terminated after executing the variation in progress processing in step S1305C. The variation in progress processing is the process for executing various effects during the game round started by the variation start processing.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1304C, the process proceeds to step S1306C. In step S1306C, the variation termination process is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. The variation termination process terminates the variation display and the ongoing effects to correspond to the lottery result for that game round (confirming the outcome). Specifically, the symbol display device 95 is controlled to display the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result as a confirmed (final stop) display. This process involves driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 to perform the effects corresponding to the confirmed display. Afterward, this variation termination process is terminated.

(Processing to initiate change)
Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 477, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the variation initiation process in step S1303C. The variation initiation process is a process that starts the game round's effects based on the receipt of the variation initiation command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the variation initiation process, the variation display mode, such as the reach display, and the combination of symbols to be displayed as the confirmed display for the game round are determined.

In the process for initiating the variation, first, in step S1401C, the variation start command received is read, and from this command, information regarding whether a reach occurred and information regarding the variation display time are identified. Also, as already explained, when the variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 162, a type command is also transmitted. In step S1401C, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and from this command, information regarding the game result, such as information regarding a probability variation jackpot result, information regarding a normal jackpot result, or information regarding a losing result, is identified. Then, in step S1401C, from the identified information, information regarding whether a jackpot was won, information regarding the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information regarding whether a reach occurred if a jackpot was not won, and information regarding the variation display time are obtained, and this obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S1402C, based on the information obtained in step S1401C, it is determined whether the result of the game round starting now corresponds to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, i.e., a probability-increasing jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, the jackpot-specific animation setting process is executed in the following step S1403C.

The jackpot setting process determines the final stopping result of the jackpot symbols (the final stopping result determination process is performed). In the final stopping result determination process, if it is a probability variation jackpot, the stopping result where the same specific symbol combination (main symbol with an odd number) is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round. If it is a normal jackpot, the stopping result where the same non-specific symbol combination (main symbol with an even number) is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

The type of main symbol displayed when a jackpot is achieved, and the active lines L1 to L5, are randomly determined by a lottery or similar process. The final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 contains the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined by the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area of RAM 654. At this time, a process is also executed to store the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

Furthermore, the jackpot display setting process determines the variation display pattern for the jackpot symbols (the variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, if a jackpot is achieved, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display pattern determination process for reach displays, the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the performance pattern for normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the variation display time of the variation start command received and the game result of the type command is determined. The address information of the determined variation display pattern is then stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444. Note that in the variation display pattern determination process described below, the corresponding variation display pattern table is retrieved from the variation display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443, and the performance pattern corresponding to the variation display time and game result is determined. The address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is then stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1402C that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1404C. In step S1404C, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S1405C, where the process for setting up the reach's animation is executed. In the process for setting up the reach's animation, the outline of the animation and the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end are determined. The process for determining the outline of the animation is the same as in step S1403C above, so the explanation is omitted. This process corresponds to a losing reach, so the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end is determined so that it does not result in a jackpot. In other words, the stopping result for this round is determined to be a combination of losing reach symbols that is formed on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. In this case, the type of losing reach symbol combination and the valid lines L1 to L5 are determined randomly by a lottery or the like. Furthermore, in making this decision, the stopping result on the active lines is determined such that no identical combination of symbols occurs on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the symbols in the same middle symbol row as those forming the reach line stop at a position shifted either forward or backward relative to the reach line. Afterward, the information of the determined stopping result is stored in the stopping result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S1404C that a reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1406C. In step S1406C, the outline of the animation for a complete miss and the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any of the processes in steps S1403C, S1405C, or S1406C, the process proceeds to step S1407C. In step S1407C, the display control (variation display control) of the symbol display device 95 is performed to execute the effects for the current game round. This initiates the variation display of each symbol row. Furthermore, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S1403C, S1405C, and S1406C, the drive control of the speaker unit 29, lamp unit 26, and effect device 97L is initiated to start the effects for the game round.

In this embodiment, the patterns of symbol variation are broadly classified into three types: complete miss, normal reach, and super reach. For normal reach and super reach, the pattern of symbol variation until transitioning to the reach display is common, and at least until transitioning to the reach display, it is not explicitly stated whether the pattern will transition to a normal reach or a super reach.

When comparing normal reaches and super reaches, there is a difference in the scrolling speed of the middle symbol after the reach display transition. Specifically, in the case of a normal reach, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol is set to be lower than in the case of a super reach. Super reaches have a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot and transitioning to a special game state compared to normal reaches. Therefore, it is assumed that players hoping to transition to a special game state will pay attention to the symbol changes in anticipation of a super reach. Furthermore, in a super reach, character images may be displayed on the symbol display device 95, or the performance device 97L may operate.

This embodiment features a distinctive configuration related to the performance device 97L mounted on the game board unit 80L and the performances using the performance device 97L. The performance device 97L is composed of a pair of independently operating movable performance devices 800L and 900L. The performances using the performance device 97L are basically coordinated performances in which at least one of the pair of movable performance devices 800L and 900L is linked to an image (still image or video) displayed on the display screen 95a. Further explanation of the performance device 97L will be provided below with reference to Figure 478. Figure 478 is a front view of the performance device 97L, and for convenience, the external shape of the game board 80a and the external shape of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 are shown by dashed lines.

(Production device 97L)
Each movable performance position 800L, 900L constituting the performance device 97L has a movable decorative body 810L, 910L that can move between a standby position where the overlap with the display screen 95a is kept relatively small and a performance position where the overlap with the display screen 95a is relatively large. The above-mentioned linked performance includes a performance in which both movable performance devices 800L, 900L work together (hereinafter referred to as the linked performance), in which both movable decorative bodies 810L, 910L are placed in the performance position, and the movable decorative bodies 810L, 910L placed in the performance position cause a decoration resembling the letter "V" to appear (be formed) in front of the display screen 95a.

When the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L are positioned in their standby locations, they face each other across the variable display area of the pattern on the display screen 95a. Specifically, the standby position of one movable decorative element 810L coincides with the left edge (leftmost part) of the display screen 95a, while the standby position of the other movable decorative element 910L coincides with the right edge (rightmost part) of the display screen 95a, resulting in a significant distance between them.

In the following explanation, the left movable decorative element 810L will be referred to as "left movable decorative element 810L," the movable performance device 800L equipped with the left movable decorative element 810L will be referred to as "left movable performance device 800L," the right movable decorative element 910L will be referred to as "right movable decorative element 910L," and the movable performance device 900L equipped with the right movable decorative element 910L will be referred to as "right movable performance device 900L," as appropriate.

(Left side movable production device 800L)
The left-side movable decorative unit 810L is attached to the base 820L via two arms 821L and 822L, and the base 820L is fixed to the rear block 80bL, thereby unitizing it with the rear block 80bL. In addition to the arms 821L and 822L, the base 820L is equipped with a drive unit 830L (stepping motor) for the left-side movable decorative unit 810L, and a power transmission mechanism 840L consisting of multiple gear members that transmits power from the drive unit 830L to one of the arms 821L (hereinafter referred to as the first arm 821L). The drive unit 830L is connected to a notification and performance control device 140, and the operation of the drive unit 830L (specifically, the direction of rotation and rotation speed) is controlled by the notification and performance control device 140.

The first arm 821L has one end pivotally supported by the base 820L, and the other end is connected to the left-side movable decorative body 810L. A link groove extending longitudinally along the middle portion of the first arm 821L is formed, and a shaft portion provided on the main gear of the power transmission mechanism 840L engages with this link groove. When the main gear rotates due to the power of the drive unit 830L, the first arm 821L also rotates clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view of the gaming machine, around its lower end (the pivot point on the base 820L). Following this movement of the first arm 821L, the left-side movable decorative body 810L also rotates clockwise (forward direction) and counterclockwise (reverse direction) in a front view of the gaming machine.

Here, the connection point between the left movable decorative body 810L and the first arm 821L also has a pivot structure with a central axis extending in the front-rear direction, allowing the left movable decorative body 810L to rotate around this connection point. This rotation around the connection point can change the posture (orientation) of the left movable decorative body 810L. However, this change in the posture of the movable decorative body 810L is controlled by the second arm 822L. Specifically, the left movable decorative body 810L is elongated and, when positioned in the standby position, is vertical, that is, aligned with the left edge of the display screen 95a (vertical posture). As the left movable decorative body 810L moves from the standby position to the performance position, it gradually tilts to the right. However, the tilt (angle of inclination) of the left movable decorative body 810L, with the standby position as the reference (0°), is controlled by the second arm 822L to be slightly larger than the rotation angle of the first arm 821L. Furthermore, the left-side movable decorative element 810L is restricted from further rotation by a stopper 825L, etc., when it reaches the performance position, and is configured so that the above-mentioned tilt angle is maximized when it is positioned at this performance position.

(Right side movable production device 900L)
The right-side movable display device 900L has a guide rail 920L that defines the direction of movement of the right-side movable decorative body 910L to be the same as the direction in which the movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L are installed side by side (horizontal direction, left-right direction). The guide rail 920L consists of an upper rail 921L disposed above the display screen 95a and a lower rail 925L disposed below the display screen 95a. The upper rail 921L is equipped with a slider 922L that is slidably mounted in the left-right direction, a drive unit 930L (stepping motor) for the right-side movable decorative body 910L, and a power transmission mechanism 940L consisting of multiple gear members that slides the slider 922L left and right using the power of the drive unit 930L. The drive unit 930L is connected to the notification and display control device 140, and the operation of the drive unit 930L (specifically the direction of rotation and rotation speed) is controlled by the notification and display control device 140.

The upper end of the right-side movable decorative element 910L is fixed to the slider 922L via the link section 915L, and the right-side movable decorative element 910L is suspended by the upper rail 921L. The link section 915L pivotally supports the right-side movable decorative element 910L so that it can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The posture of the right-side movable decorative element 910L changes as it rotates around the link section 915L.

A slider 926L is mounted on the lower rail 925L, allowing it to slide horizontally. This slider 926L is box-shaped with an open top, and the lower end of the right-side movable decorative element 910L is inserted into this open section. However, the slider 926L and the right-side movable decorative element 910L are not fixed to each other. The slider 926L is slightly larger than the lower end of the right-side movable decorative element 910L, and a gap is maintained between the slider 926L and the lower end of the right-side movable decorative element 910L that does not hinder the rotation of the right-side movable decorative element 910L around the link section 915L.

When the drive unit 930L operates and the slider 922L moves, the right movable decorative element 910L also slides in the same direction, following the movement of the slider 922L. In this case, if the movement speed of the right movable decorative element 910L is fast, the movement of the lower end of the right movable decorative element 910L will lag behind the movement of the upper end, causing the posture of the right movable decorative element 910L to change. Specifically, the right movable decorative element 910L is elongated, similar to the left movable decorative element 810L, and when positioned in the standby position, it is oriented vertically, that is, along the right edge of the display screen 95a (vertical posture). The movement speed of the right movable decorative element 910L during the process of moving from the standby position to the performance position is extremely fast, and due to the aforementioned lag, the posture of the right movable decorative element 910L tilts to the left. However, the tilt (angle of inclination) of the right-side movable decorative element 910L, relative to the standby position (0°), is restricted by the lower rail 925L and slider 926L to not exceed a predetermined angle (30° in this embodiment). The right-side movable decorative element 910L changes its posture to achieve this predetermined angle immediately after starting movement from the standby position, and then maintains that posture while moving towards the performance position.

The guide rail 920L is equipped with a stopper to prevent further sliding of the right-side movable decorative element 910L once it reaches the performance position. This stopper consists of an upper stopper 923L, located on the upper rail 921L and contacting the slider 922L, and a lower stopper 927L, located on the lower rail 925L and contacting the slider 926L. The upper stopper 923L and the lower stopper 927L are positioned laterally so that the right-side movable decorative element 910L maintains a tilted position at the predetermined angle once it reaches the performance position. In other words, for the right-side movable decorative element 910L, a difference is provided such that the travel distance of the upper end (slider 922L) is shorter than the travel distance of the lower end (slider 926L) when moving from the standby position to the performance position.

In contrast, when the movement speed of the right-side movable decorative element 910L is extremely slow, there is almost no delay in the movement of the lower end, and the posture of the right-side movable decorative element 910L becomes vertical, similar to the standby position. In other words, the right-side movable decorative element 910L shown in this embodiment is configured so that its posture during movement can vary depending on the movement speed of the right-side movable decorative element 910L.

Next, referring to Figure 479, we will explain the linked performance, which is one of the linked performances using the performance device 97L. This linked performance is a chance-up performance that is executed after the transition to the reach display, and when this linked performance is executed, the expected probability of a jackpot result in that game round increases significantly.

The movable decorative elements 810L and 910L generally remain in their standby positions, maintaining a vertical orientation, when no coordinated performance is being performed. During gameplay rounds in which a coordinated performance occurs, at a predetermined timing after the transition to the reach display, the right-side movable decorative element 910L begins moving from its standby position towards the performance position (see Figure 479(a) → Figure 479(b)). At this timing, the left-side movable decorative element 810L remains in its standby position.

During the forward movement of the synchronized performance, the movement speed of the right-side movable ornament 910L is set to its maximum, and the right-side movable ornament 910L moves at high speed towards the performance position. Therefore, the movement of the lower end of the right-side movable ornament 910L lags behind the movement of the upper end, causing the right-side movable ornament 910L to tilt to the left. In other words, the posture of the right-side movable ornament 910L changes from a vertical posture to a tilted posture (see Figure 479(b)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the right-side movable ornament 910L began its sliding movement, the left-side movable ornament 810L begins moving from its standby position towards the performance position (see Figure 479(b) → Figure 479(c)). In other words, the timing of the left-side movable ornament 810L's movement start is set to be later than the timing of the right-side movable ornament 910L's movement start.

Regarding the left-side movable ornament 810L, its movement speed toward the performance position is lower than that of the right-side movable ornament 910L. Therefore, during movement toward the performance position, the tilt does not instantaneously reach its maximum, but rather increases gradually.

In this embodiment, the performance position is set to be between the central part and the left edge of the display screen 95a. That is, the left movable decorative element 810 and the right movable decorative element L converge not in the central part of the display screen 95a, but slightly to the left (see Figure 479(d)). Thus, the movement distance from the standby position to the performance position is set such that the movement distance of the right movable decorative element 910L (D2) is longer than the movement distance of the left movable decorative element 810L (D1).

Here, although the movement paths of the left movable decorative unit 810L from the standby position to the performance position and the movement path of the right movable decorative unit 910L from the standby position to the performance position are offset in the front and back, they partially overlap when viewed from the front of the game machine. Furthermore, the left-right positional relationship of both movable decorative units 810L and 910L is reversed (swapped) just before reaching the performance position. Specifically, as shown in Figures 479(c) to 479(d), the left movable decorative unit 810L and the right movable decorative unit 910L pass each other just before reaching the performance position, and when they reach the performance position, the left movable decorative unit 810L is on the right and the right movable decorative unit 910L is on the left. In this state, the left movable decorative unit 810L is tilted to the right, and the right movable decorative unit 910L is tilted to the left. Then, the upper ends of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L separate to the left and right, and their lower ends overlap front and back, forming a decoration that resembles the letter "V". On the display screen 95a, a red effect image surrounding this decoration is added as the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L reach their respective display positions.

As shown in Figure 478, the left movable decorative element 810L and the right movable decorative element 910L differ not only in size but also in design (decorative pattern). This configuration allows players to distinguish between the left and right movable decorative elements 810L and 910L based on their appearance. This is a design feature to prevent the aforementioned reversal of the left and right positions from being overlooked.

Furthermore, while the right-side movable ornament 910L starts moving earlier and travels faster than the left-side movable ornament 810L, its travel distance is longer. Taking advantage of this relationship, the timing of the left-side movable ornament 810L's start of movement is specified so that both movable ornaments 810L and 910L reach their performance positions simultaneously.

When comparing the left-side movable ornament 810L and the right-side movable ornament 910L, the left-side movable ornament 810L is larger (in both size and weight) than the right-side movable ornament 910L. Such a large movable ornament can be more difficult to stop instantly at a desired position compared to a smaller movable ornament. Disruption of the movable ornament's movement upon reaching the desired position is undesirable as it reduces the impact of the synchronized performance. In this embodiment, the movement speed of the relatively larger left-side movable ornament 810L is made slower than that of the relatively smaller right-side movable ornament 910L, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Next, with reference to Figures 480 and 481, the movement of each movable decorative element after the synchronized performance has ended will be explained.

After the synchronized performance ends, the left-side movable ornament 810L begins moving to its standby position before the right-side movable ornament 910L (see Figure 480(a) → Figure 480(b)). The movement speed of the left-side movable ornament 810L is lower than its movement speed during the outward journey.

Subsequently, while the left movable decorative unit 810L is moving, the right movable decorative unit 910L begins moving toward its standby position, lagging behind the left movable decorative unit 810L. The movement speed of the right movable decorative unit 910L is slower than its movement speed on the outward journey and slower than its movement speed on the return journey of the left movable decorative unit 810L. By keeping the movement speed low, the delay in the movement of the lower end of the right movable decorative unit 910L is suppressed, and the posture of the right movable decorative unit 910L returns from an inclined posture to a vertical posture (see Figure 480(b) → Figure 480(c)). As this posture change is completed, the left movable decorative unit 810L returns to its standby position, and both movable decorative units 810L and 910L become parallel.

As shown in Figures 480(d) to 481(e), the right-side movable decorative element 910L continues to move even after the left-side movable decorative element 810L returns to its standby position, but its posture during this movement remains essentially vertical. It then stops moving when it reaches the standby position while maintaining this posture (see Figure 481(f)).

Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 482, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the movement of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L when the synchronized performance is executed.

In game rounds where the linked animation is executed, the display transitions to a "reach" state at timing tca0. At timing tca1, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the transition to the "reach" state, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 930L (stepping motor) of the right-side movable animation device 900L begins. This drive signal is compatible with high-speed rotation, and as the drive unit 930L rotates at high speed, the right-side movable decorative element 910L begins to move at high speed from its standby position to the animation position.

Immediately following the timing of tca2, the tilt of the right-side movable decorative element 910L begins to change, and when the tilt of the right-side movable decorative element 910L reaches its maximum (30°), the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 830L (stepping motor) of the left-side movable performance device 800L begins. This drive signal is compatible with high-speed rotation, and as the drive unit 830L rotates at high speed, the left-side movable decorative element 810L begins to move at high speed from the standby position to the performance position.

Furthermore, the left-side movable decorative element 810L and the right-side movable decorative element 910L differ in their drive system (sliding/rotating) and gear ratio. While the drive units 830L and 930L are both controlled to rotate at the same speed, the movement speed of the left-side movable decorative element 810L is slower than that of the right-side movable decorative element 910L.

As the left movable ornament 810L continues to move to the right and the right movable ornament 910L continues to move to the left, the left-right positional relationship between the two movable ornaments 810L and 910L is reversed. Immediately after this reversal, at the timing of tca3, both movable ornaments 810L and 910L reach their performance positions, and the output of drive signals to the respective drive units 830L and 930L is stopped. At the moment both movable ornaments 810L and 910L reach their performance positions, an effect image is displayed on the display screen 95a, outlining the "V" shape formed by the movable ornaments 810L and 910L. Thereafter, the tilt of the left movable ornament 810L and the tilt of the right movable ornament 910L are maintained at their maximum until the timing of tca4, which marks the end of the synchronized performance.

At the timing of TCA4, the drive signal output to the drive unit 830L of the left-side movable display device 800L begins, and the movement of the left-side movable decorative unit 810L towards its standby position begins, preceding that of the right-side movable decorative unit 910L. This drive signal corresponds to medium-speed rotation, and as the drive unit 830L rotates at medium speed, the left-side movable decorative unit 810L begins moving at medium speed from its standby position towards its display position.

Immediately following the timing of tca5, specifically just before the left-right relative position of the right movable decorative element 910L and the left movable decorative element 810L returns to its original position, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 930L of the right movable performance device 900L begins, and the movement of the right movable decorative element 910L toward its standby position begins. This drive signal is compatible with low-speed rotation, and as the drive unit 930L rotates at a low speed, the right movable decorative element 910L begins to move slowly from its standby position toward its performance position.

As the right-side movable decorative element 910L moves at a low speed, its tilt gradually decreases, and as it separates from the lower stopper 927L, the posture of the right-side movable decorative element 910L changes from a tilted posture to a vertical posture. At the timing of tca6, when this change is completed, the left-side movable decorative element 810L has returned to its standby position, and the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 830L is stopped.

Subsequently, the right-side movable decorative unit 910L continues to move independently. During this movement, the right-side movable decorative unit 910L maintains a vertical position. At the timing of tca7, when the right-side movable decorative unit 910L returns to its standby position, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 930L is stopped.

According to the 54th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

By using multiple movable decorative units 810L and 910L in combination to perform synchronized effects (equivalent to "special effects"), that is, by performing synchronized combinations of separated pieces, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while suppressing the resulting constraints on the placement of movable decorative units, etc., and improving the operating speed. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through synchronized effects.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the performance position is particularly biased towards the standby position of the left-side movable decorative element 810L. In other words, the distance traveled to the performance position is greater for the right-side movable decorative element 910L than for the left-side movable decorative element 810L. By moving one of the movable decorative elements (the right-side movable decorative element 910L) more significantly, the impact of the synchronized performance can be enhanced.

Here, during the forward movement at the start of the linked performance, by setting the start timing of the right-side movable ornament 910L to precede the start timing of the left-side movable ornament 810L, the effects of uneven movement distance (for example, delay in the arrival of the farther movable ornament) can be suppressed. This is desirable for improving the appearance during the combined performance. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that the movement of the left-side movable ornament 810L begins while the right-side movable ornament 910L is moving toward the performance position during the forward movement, the linked performance can be advanced quickly.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the relative positions of the left movable decorative element 810L and the right movable decorative element 910L are reversed when the synchronized performance is executed. Specifically, the left-right relative positions of the left movable decorative element 810L and the right movable decorative element 910L are reversed. This configuration allows for increased movement distance of each movable decorative element 810L and 910L, enhancing the impact of the synchronized performance. Furthermore, it prevents the combined form from being revealed from the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L positioned in standby positions. This allows for an even more favorable expression of the aforementioned effect of increasing attention.

Even if the relative positions of the two movable decorative units 810L and 910L are reversed during the execution of the synchronized performance, the overlapping configuration of a portion (lower end) of the left movable decorative unit 810L and a portion (lower end) of the right movable decorative unit 910L enhances the sense of unity between the two movable units.

During the process of positioning both movable decorative units 810L and 910L at the performance location, the movement of both units 810L and 910L continues from the time the left and right movable decorative units 810L and 910L overlap in the front view of the game machine until their positioning at the performance location is complete. By configuring the system so that the relative positions of the two movable decorative units 810L and 910L are dynamically reversed, the time required from overlap to completion of the swap can be shortened. This shortened time allows for a more effective enhancement of the impact of the combined effect in the synchronized performance.

The left-side movable decorative element 810L and the right-side movable decorative element 910L differ in at least a portion of their appearance when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By making at least a portion of the appearance of the two movable decorative elements 810L and 910L different in this way, it is possible to prevent the issue of the relative positional relationship between the left-side movable decorative element 810L and the right-side movable decorative element 910L being reversed during the execution of the linked performance.

<Variation 1>
In the 54th embodiment described above, a left movable decorative body 810L and a right movable decorative body 910L are provided as a "pair of movable bodies," and the appearance of the left movable decorative body 810L and the right movable decorative body 910L are made different so that the player can distinguish between them. However, it is also possible to configure the left movable decorative body 810L and the right movable decorative body 910L so that they are not different or substantially different (a configuration in which the difference is such that the player cannot distinguish between them or it is difficult for the player to do so), so that the left movable decorative body 810L and the right movable decorative body 910L cannot be distinguished or it is difficult for the player to distinguish between them.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 54th embodiment described above, the operation period of the left movable decorative body 810L and the operation period of the right movable decorative body 910L partially overlap on the return journey when each movable decorative body 810L and 910L is returned to the standby position after the linked performance ends. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that the operation periods of the left movable decorative body 810L and the operation periods of the right movable decorative body 910L do not overlap, by having the left movable decorative body 810L return from the performance position to the standby position, and then having the right movable decorative body 910L change its posture and move.

<Example 3>
In the 54th embodiment described above, when the synchronized performance is executed, the left and right movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L are configured to reach the performance position simultaneously. However, the invention is not necessarily limited to this configuration, and the left and right movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L may be configured to reach the performance position at different times. For example, the left movable decorative body 810L may reach the performance position before the right movable decorative body 910L, or the right movable decorative body 910L may reach the performance position before the left movable decorative body 810L.

<Modification 4>
In the 54th embodiment described above, when executing the synchronized performance, the movement of the right movable decorative element 910L, which has a longer movement distance from the standby position to the performance position, is started first among the left and right movable decorative elements 810L and 910L. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system to start the movement of the left and right movable decorative elements 810L and 910L simultaneously. In this case, for example, the movement speed of the right movable decorative element 910L, which has a longer movement distance, can be increased to widen the difference in movement speed with that of the left movable decorative element 810L, thereby aligning the timing of arrival at the performance position.

<Modification 6>
In the 54th embodiment described above, the left-side movable display device 800L is of the rotatable type and the right-side movable display device 900L is of the sliding type. However, it is also possible to have the left-side movable display device be of the sliding type and the right-side movable display device be of the rotatable type. Furthermore, it is also possible to have both movable display devices be of the rotatable type, or both movable display devices be of the sliding type.

<Example 7>
In the 54th embodiment described above, one of the pair of movable decorative elements was placed on the left side of the display screen 95a and the other on the right side of the display screen 95a. However, this may be changed so that one of the pair of movable decorative elements is placed below the display screen 95a and the other is placed above the display screen 95a.

<Difference 8>
In the 54th embodiment described above, the performance position, which is the junction of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L, was set to overlap with the display screen 95a, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the performance position to a position that does not overlap with the display screen 95a.

<Difference 9>
In the 54th embodiment described above, the number of movable decorative elements to be combined was set to two (movable decorative elements 810L and 910L), but the number of movable decorative elements to be combined is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to combine three movable decorative elements, or to combine four or more movable decorative elements.

<Modification 10>
In the linked performance shown in the 54th embodiment described above, the left and right pair of movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L move from the standby position to the performance position, reversing the left-right positional relationship of these movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L. However, it is also possible to configure the performance so that the left-right positional relationship is maintained.

<Variation 11>
In the 54th embodiment described above, the size (size and weight) of the left movable decorative body 810L is made larger than the size (size and weight) of the right movable decorative body 910L, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The size of the right movable decorative body 910L may be made larger than the size of the left movable decorative body 810L. In this case, it is preferable to reverse the front-to-back positional relationship between the left movable decorative body 810L and the right movable decorative body 910L, so that in the performance position, the right movable decorative body 910L overlaps the left movable decorative body 810L from the front of the game machine.

Furthermore, while the size (size and weight) of the right-side movable ornament 910L, which has a relatively longer movement distance in the synchronized performance, was initially made smaller than that of the left-side movable ornament 810L, which has a relatively shorter movement distance, it is also possible to change this and make the size (size and weight) of the right-side movable ornament 910L, which has a relatively longer movement distance in the synchronized performance, larger than that of the left-side movable ornament 810L, which has a relatively shorter movement distance.

<Embodiment 55>
In the performance device 97L shown in the 54th embodiment described above, when a pair of left and right movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L are placed at the performance position during the synchronized performance, the relative positions of these movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L are swapped on the left and right sides. One of the features of this embodiment is that, in addition to the synchronized performance, a new synchronized performance using the performance device 97L can be performed. Hereinafter, with reference to Figures 483 to 485, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 54th embodiment. In the following explanation, the new synchronized performance added in this embodiment will be distinguished as the first synchronized performance, and the synchronized performance shown in the 54th embodiment will be distinguished as the second synchronized performance, and the configuration that is common with the 54th embodiment, such as the configuration related to the second synchronized performance, will be omitted from the explanation. Figure 483 is a schematic diagram comparing the synchronized performances, Figure 484 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first synchronized performance, and Figure 485 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second synchronized performance.

The performance positions (first performance positions) of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L in the first linked performance are set separately from the performance positions (second performance positions) related to the second linked performance. The first performance positions are located on the movement path of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L toward the second performance positions. When moving from the standby position to the second performance position, each movable decorative element 810L and 910L is configured to pass through (bypass) the first performance position. In other words, as shown in Figure 483, the first performance positions are set so that the movement distance of each movable decorative element 810L and 910L is shorter compared to the second performance positions.

The first linked animation, like the second linked animation, is a chance-up animation that is executed after the transition to the reach display. This chance-up animation increases the likelihood of the reach display leading to a jackpot. However, there is a difference in the likelihood of a jackpot: the first linked animation is less likely than the second linked animation. The second linked animation, which has a relatively longer movement distance, is differentiated to have a higher likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot when the first linked animation occurs is approximately 50%, while when the second linked animation occurs, a jackpot is guaranteed.

As shown in Figure 484, when the first linked performance is executed, each movable decorative element 810L and 910L moves from its standby position to the first performance position. Even when positioned in this first performance position, a portion of both movable decorative elements 810L and 910L overlap when viewed from the front of the game machine. However, in the display form of the decoration formed by the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L positioned in the first performance position (first display form), the upper ends of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L overlap when viewed from the front of the game machine, while their lower ends are separated to the left and right. In other words, a decoration resembling an upwardly convex mountain is formed. In this first display form, the left-right positional relationship of each movable decorative element 810L and 910L is the same as when they are positioned in their standby position.

Figures 484 and 485 both illustrate cases where a jackpot result is announced after a reach display. Here, if the reach display corresponds to the first or second linked performance, the flashing of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L after the transition to the reach display suggests the possibility of developing into the first or second linked performance. However, the flashing pattern is common to both the first and second linked performances, making it difficult to distinguish between the first and second linked performances based solely on the flashing pattern of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the flashing of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L began, the right-side movable decorative element 910L will begin moving toward the performance position, and immediately afterward, the left-side movable decorative element 810L will begin moving toward the performance position. This time lag is the same for both the first and second linked performances.

If the current reach display corresponds to the first linked animation, the movement distance of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L will be relatively shorter, and both movable decorative elements 810L and 910L will stop at the first animation position, resulting in the first display mode. This suggests to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot in this round. Conversely, if the current reach display corresponds to the second linked animation, the movement distance of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L will be relatively longer, bypassing the first animation position and proceeding to the second animation position. Both movable decorative elements 810L and 910L will stop at the second animation position, resulting in the second display mode, suggesting that a jackpot will be achieved in this round.

In this configuration, players expecting a jackpot are expected to anticipate the occurrence of the second linked animation. Since the second linked animation involves the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L first moving towards the first animation position, movement towards the first animation position does not necessarily equate to the first linked animation. This effectively encourages players anticipating the second linked animation to pay attention to the movement of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L.

According to the 55th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

By combining a first linked effect that combines two movable decorative units 810L and 910L while maintaining their relative positions (combining them without reversing their relative positions), and a second linked effect that combines the two movable decorative units 810L and 910L with their relative positions reversed, it is possible to achieve diversification of effects using the movable decorative units 810L and 910L while suppressing complexity of the configuration.

The two movable decorative elements 810L and 910L are configured to assume a first display form when positioned at the first performance position and a second display form when positioned at the second performance position. By having different appearances in the first and second display forms, the effect of increasing attention through the diversification of the performances described above can be more effectively achieved.

In this embodiment, in both the first and second display modes, a portion of the left movable decorative element 810L and a portion of the right movable decorative element 910L overlap when viewed from the front of the game machine. This allows both the first and second linked effects to function as a combined effect. In particular, by differentiating the overlapping portions (lower ends) of the two movable decorative elements 810L and 910L in the first display mode and the overlapping portions (upper ends) in the second display mode, the differences between the two display modes can be further emphasized.

When the left-side movable decorative element 810L and the right-side movable decorative element 910L are positioned at the second performance position, they are configured to pass through the first performance position. With this configuration, when the synchronized performance is executed, it becomes difficult to visually determine which display form will be used until partway through the process. This branching allows for a degree of slowing down of the movement of the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L, providing room for enjoyment as to whether the first or second synchronized performance will occur. This is preferable in terms of reducing the load on the movable performance device while enhancing entertainment value through diversification of performances.

<Variation 1>
In the 55th embodiment described above, the first and second linked effects are configured to be executed (started) at a predetermined timing during the reach display, making it difficult to identify in advance which linked effect will be performed. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The timing at which the first linked effect is executed (started) and the timing at which the second linked effect is executed (started) may be clearly separated during a game round. For example, it is also possible to configure either the first or second linked effect as a transition suggestion effect that indicates a transition to the reach display, and to execute it at a timing before the timing at which the transition to the reach display is possible, that is, before the two rows of symbols are stopped and displayed. It is also possible to configure either the first or second linked effect as a re-spin suggestion effect that indicates a re-spin display, and to execute it at a timing after all rows of symbols have been stopped and displayed.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 55th embodiment described above, the movement speed of each movable ornament 810L, 910L was set to be the same when the first linked performance is executed and when the second linked performance is executed. However, this may be changed as follows. That is, a difference may be made so that the movement speed of each movable ornament 810L, 910L when the second linked performance is executed, which is a linked performance in which the movement distance of each movable ornament 810L, 910L is relatively long (forward journey), is faster than the movement speed of each movable ornament 810L, 910L when the first linked performance is executed, which is a linked performance in which the movement distance of each movable ornament 810L, 910L is relatively short (forward journey). Alternatively, a difference may be made so that the movement speed of each movable ornament 810L, 910L is slower than the movement speed of each movable ornament 810L, 910L when the first linked performance is executed, which is a linked performance in which the movement distance of each movable ornament 810L, 910L is relatively short (forward journey).

<Example 3>
In the 55th embodiment described above, a difference was made such that the second linked performance, in which the left-right positional relationship of the pair of left and right movable decorative elements 810L and 910L is reversed when they are placed in the performance position, has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the first linked performance, in which the left-right positional relationship is not reversed. However, the invention is not limited to this. A difference may also be made such that the second linked performance, in which the left-right positional relationship of the pair of left and right movable decorative elements 810L and 910L is reversed when they are placed in the performance position, has a lower probability of resulting in a jackpot than the first linked performance, in which the left-right positional relationship is not reversed.

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to make the movement distance of either the left-side movable decorative element 810L or the right-side movable decorative element 910L the same for both the first linked performance and the second linked performance.

<Embodiment 56>
One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates a device 97L, as shown in the 54th embodiment above, to further enhance the attention given to the game. Specifically, when it is announced that a jackpot has been achieved after the linked performance (hereinafter referred to as the first linked performance), the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state) after the end of the game round. One of the features of this embodiment is that, on the return journey when both movable decorative bodies 810L and 910L move from the performance position to the standby position after the end of the linked performance, a new linked performance (hereinafter referred to as the second linked performance) is executed using the right movable decorative body 910L, which has a longer travel distance, and the image displayed on the display screen 95a (opening image in the opening/closing execution mode). Hereinafter, we will first refer to Figures 486 and 487(a) to provide a supplementary explanation of the configuration that forms the basis of this invention. Figure 486 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the right movable decorative body 910L and the display area of the display screen 95a, and Figure 487(a) is a schematic diagram showing the right movable decorative body 910L.

As already explained, the right-side movable display device 900L is provided with a link section 915L for changing the orientation of the right-side movable decorative element 910L. Since this link section 915L does not contribute to the formation of the "V" shaped decoration, it does not have the same decoration (design) or illumination function as the main body 911L of the right-side movable decorative element 910L. In other words, the link section 915L is designed to have an extremely simple appearance.

In the second linked performance described above, moving the right-side movable decorative element 910L at a low speed makes it easier to secure the performance duration, dramatically improving the degree of freedom of the second linked performance. However, there is a concern that the presence of the link section 915L becomes more noticeable at low speeds, significantly degrading the appearance of the second linked performance. In this regard, one of the features of this embodiment is that measures have been taken to make the presence of the link section 915L less noticeable when the second linked performance is executed.

Specifically, when the second linked performance is executed, the display area of the display screen 95a is configured to display images of different properties in the upper area UE, which mainly overlaps with the passage path of the link section 915L, and the lower area LE, which mainly overlaps with the passage path of the main body 911L of the left movable decorative body 810L. The lower area LE displays a video of fireworks launching, including a beach background image, while the upper area UE displays only a background image of a completely dark night sky. In other words, the video of fireworks launching is not displayed in the upper area UE.

The link portion 915L shown in this embodiment has a simple appearance without any decorative elements, as described above, and its color is black. Therefore, when the right-side movable decorative element 910L moves during the second linked performance, the link portion 915L crosses in front of the black background. This makes the presence of the link portion 915L less conspicuous.

Here, the main body 911L of the right-side movable decorative unit 910L incorporates a light-emitting substrate 913L on which multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) are mounted. The front portion 912L of the main body 911L (the part where the decoration is formed) is provided with light-transmitting properties, and the light-emitting substrate 913L is positioned so that the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements faces the front of the gaming machine (towards the front portion 912L). Light from the light-emitting elements is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine through the front portion 912L of the main body 911L. In this main body 911L, the light display is executed in conjunction with the fireworks display video, enabling an integrated performance linked to the video. Here, with reference to Figure 487(a), a supplementary explanation of the configuration related to the light display of the right-side movable decorative unit 910L will be provided.

The front portion 912L of the right-side movable decorative body 910L has multiple (9) light-emitting sections LP1 to LP9 arranged in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the right-side movable decorative body 910L, and these light-emitting sections LP1 to LP9 can be illuminated individually. In the following description, the light-emitting sections LP1 to LP9 will be appropriately distinguished as follows, from bottom to top: 1st light-emitting section LP1, 2nd light-emitting section LP2, 3rd light-emitting section LP3, 4th light-emitting section LP4, 5th light-emitting section LP5, 6th light-emitting section LP6, 7th light-emitting section LP7, 8th light-emitting section LP8, and 9th light-emitting section LP9.

In the second linked performance, light emission control is performed so that the light emission patterns of the light emission units LP1 to LP9 become the light emission patterns for the second linked performance. This light emission control is broadly divided into control pattern A and control pattern B, and in the second linked performance, it is configured to switch in the order of control pattern A → control pattern B → control pattern A → ... In control pattern A, as shown in Figure 487(b), one of the light emission units LP1 to LP9 is ON (lit), and the other light emission units are OFF (off). The units that are turned ON shift (switch) in the order of the lowest-ranking first light emission unit LP1 → second light emission unit LP2 → third light emission unit LP3 → fourth light emission unit LP4 → fifth light emission unit LP5 → sixth light emission unit LP6 → seventh light emission unit LP7 → eighth light emission unit LP8 → highest-ranking ninth light emission unit LP9. For control pattern B, all light-emitting units LP1 to LP9 flash for a predetermined period. In other words, in the right-side movable decorative unit 910L, when the second linked effect is executed, the light-emitting targets shift in the following order: 1st light-emitting unit LP1 → 2nd light-emitting unit LP2 → 3rd light-emitting unit LP3 → 4th light-emitting unit LP4 → 5th light-emitting unit LP5 → 6th light-emitting unit LP6 → 7th light-emitting unit LP7 → 8th light-emitting unit LP8 → the highest-level 9th light-emitting unit LP9. This pattern of all light-emitting units LP1 to LP9 flashing is then repeated until the standby position is reached.

In this way, the luminous pattern is displayed on the right-side movable ornament 910L in an upward shifted manner. However, this shift speed (the movement speed of the luminous pattern) is faster than the movement speed of the right-side movable ornament 910L towards its standby position.

Next, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the flow of the second linked performance, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 488. Note that Figure 488(a) shows the state immediately after the first linked performance (linked performance) has ended, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a, and the display of the effect image for the performance device 97L has ended.

As shown in Figure 488(a), the first linked animation shown in this embodiment continues at least until the display of confirmed symbol combinations is completed in the relevant game round. Once the confirmed display is complete and the game transitions from the normal game state to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state), the opening animation in the opening/closing execution mode begins. The second linked animation shown in this embodiment functions as this opening animation.

In the opening sequence, a video of fireworks being launched is displayed in the lower area LE of the display screen 95a. In this video, images resembling fireworks shells are launched (ascended) upwards, and when these images reach a predetermined height, they transform into images that appear to explode and open. These images are displayed simultaneously at multiple positions in the left-right direction, making the fireworks launch video visible across almost the entire lower area LE of the display screen 95a.

During the first linked performance, the movable decorative units 810L and 910L, positioned at the performance location, are illuminated in red at that location. However, they turn off when transitioning to the second linked performance. Specifically, the left movable decorative unit 810L turns off when it returns to its standby position. When the right movable decorative unit 910L begins to move slowly from the performance location to the standby position, its posture changes from a tilted position to a vertical position.

At the moment the orientation changes to vertical, the illumination pattern of the right-side movable decorative element 910L switches to an illumination pattern corresponding to the second linked effect, and the aforementioned illumination pattern is displayed as moving from bottom to top. Then, at the moment the illumination pattern reaches the top, all illumination units PL1 to PL9 flash, creating an illumination pattern that mimics the opening of fireworks. In this embodiment, the speed at which the illumination pattern is moved (shifted) upward by the right-side movable decorative element 910L is faster than the speed at which the fireworks image is moved upward on the display screen 95a, thereby enhancing the sense of perspective in the second linked effect.

Subsequently, the display continues to mimic fireworks with the same illumination pattern, while moving towards the standby position. The display terminates upon reaching the standby position. At this point, the video display in the lower area LE of the display screen 95a continues. At a predetermined timing before the opening sequence ends, the fireworks display video ends, and the message "GREAT LUCKY" is displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating the start of the round game.

By executing a first linked performance that coordinates the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L positioned at the performance location with the image displayed on the display screen 95a, it is possible to increase the player's attention. Here, in order to enhance the impact of the first linked performance, it is important to significantly change the appearance before and after the performance. To create such a significant change, it is preferable to greatly separate the performance location and the standby location, thereby increasing the range of movement of at least one of the movable decorative elements.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the right-side movable decorative element 910L is returned from the performance position to the standby position, a second linked performance may be executed, which coordinates the light-emitting parts PL1 to PL9 of the right-side movable decorative element 910L with the image displayed on the display screen 95a. The second linked performance is executed while the right-side movable decorative element 910L is moving, effectively eliminating the drawbacks of increasing the range of movement of the right-side movable decorative element 910L. This is because the second linked performance allows for the use of the large range of movement of the right-side movable decorative element 910L, contributing to improved performance flexibility and visual appeal. In other words, the configuration shown in this embodiment enhances the impact of the first linked performance while suppressing the rapid decline in attention after the first performance through the second linked performance executed afterward.

The right-side movable decorative element 910L is positioned closer to the right edge of the display screen, while its performance position is positioned closer to the left edge. By setting the positional relationship between the performance position and the standby position in this manner, the right-side movable decorative element 910L can be configured to cross a large area in front of the display screen 95a when executing the first and second linked performances. This allows the various effects described above to be effectively achieved.

For the first linked performance, the movable decorative element 910L is positioned at the performance location and executed. Therefore, during the first linked performance, moving the movable decorative element 910L at a relatively fast speed (first speed) can effectively enhance the impact at the start of the first linked performance. In contrast, for the second linked performance, coordination between the movable decorative element 910L, which is moving towards the standby position, and the image displayed on the display screen 95a is crucial. Therefore, when returning to the standby position, moving the movable decorative element 910L at a relatively low speed (second speed) enhances the coordination function in the second linked performance and reduces the likelihood of missing the performance.

The right-side movable decorative element 910L has multiple light-emitting sections PL1 to PL9 arranged in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) intersecting the direction of movement of the right-side movable decorative element 910L (horizontal direction). By controlling the light emission of these light-emitting sections PL1 to PL9, it is possible to change the light emission pattern of the right-side movable decorative element 910L so that the light emission pattern shifts upward. By aligning the direction of movement of the light emission pattern and the fireworks images, the coordination between the right-side movable decorative element 910L and the display screen 95a in the second synchronized performance can be suitably realized.

The movement speed of the right-side movable decorative element 910L during its return journey to the standby position is set to be lower than both the movement speed of the luminous pattern and the movement speed of the firework image. This configuration allows the appearance of the second linked effect to be enlarged in a direction intersecting the movement direction of the movable decorative element 910L as time progresses. This effectively suppresses the monotony of the second linked effect and allows for a longer execution time of the second linked effect.

The images of the fireworks displayed on the display screen 95a are shown at multiple different positions in the direction of movement of the movable decorative unit 910L on the right side. The display period for one fireworks image partially overlaps with the display period for other fireworks images. This configuration prevents the above-mentioned coordination from failing due to all fireworks images being hidden behind the movable decorative unit 910L.

The brightness of the light-emitting parts PL1 to PL9 of the right-side movable decorative unit 910L is configured to be higher than the brightness of the display screen 95a (the brightness of the fireworks image) during the execution of the second linked performance. This enhances the three-dimensional effect of the second linked performance between the foreground movable decorative unit 910L and the background display screen 95a.

When the second linked performance is executed, the left movable decorative element 810L is moved to the standby position while the right movable decorative element 910L is positioned at the performance location. After the right movable decorative element 810L has returned to the standby position, the movement of the right movable decorative element 910L towards the standby position begins. In this way, by retracting the left movable decorative element 810L to the standby position before the movement of the right movable decorative element 910L, which is responsible for the second linked performance, a suitable display area (visible area) for images and other elements related to the second linked performance can be secured on the display screen 95a.

The right-side movable display device 900L prevents the posture in the return journey (display position → standby position) from being determined based on the posture in the forward journey (standby position → display position), or vice versa. This increased freedom in posture determination allows for a posture that considers the posture of the movable body at the display position during the forward journey, and a posture that considers the posture of the movable body at the standby position during the return journey. This allows for a more favorable flow of movement → stop → coordinated display of the movable decorative body 910L, and a more favorable flow of movement → stop → completion of retraction of the movable decorative body 910L. This is desirable for increasing attention to the game using the movable decorative body 910L. Furthermore, differentiating the posture of the movable decorative body 910L during the forward and return journeys is also desirable for preventing monotony in the movement of the movable decorative body 910L.

The orientation of the right-side movable ornament 910L is configured such that it assumes an inclined position when its sliding speed is high, and a vertical position when its sliding speed is low. Furthermore, the sliding speed of the right-side movable ornament 910L is set to high during the forward movement when the first linked performance is executed, and to low during the return movement after the first linked performance. By configuring the orientation of the right-side movable ornament 910L to depend on its sliding speed, and then individually setting the sliding speeds for the forward and return movements, the above technical concept can be realized with a simple configuration.

During the outward journey of the first linked performance, the right-side movable decorative element 910L reaches the performance position while maintaining an inclined posture, and at that position, it is configured to maintain that inclined posture. During the return journey after the completion of the first linked performance, the right-side movable decorative element 910L reaches the standby position while maintaining an upright posture, and at that standby position, it is configured to maintain that upright posture. In this way, by matching the posture of the right-side movable decorative element 910L during the outward journey to its posture at the performance position (the posture during the performance), a smooth transition from the outward movement to the first linked performance becomes possible. Furthermore, by matching the posture of the right-side movable decorative element 910L during the return journey to its posture at the standby position (the posture while standby), a smooth transition from the return movement to the completion of the retreat becomes possible.

When the right-side movable ornament 910L moves at high speed, a delay occurs in its movement at the lower end, causing a change in its posture. Conversely, when the right-side movable ornament 910L moves at low speed, this delay is reduced, and changes in posture become less likely (it is easier to maintain a vertical posture). When executing the first linked performance, it is preferable to quickly position the right-side movable ornament 910L at the performance position, and high-speed sliding movement is advantageous. In particular, it assumes an inclined posture during the process of reaching the performance position, eliminating the need to adjust its posture after reaching the performance position. This allows the first linked performance to proceed quickly, contributing to an enhanced impact. Conversely, when returning to the standby position after the first linked performance, the right-side movable ornament 910L moves at low speed, allowing for a favorable extension of the execution period for the second linked performance using the return path.

<Variation 1>
A display unit is provided on the front of the right-side movable decorative unit 910L to display an image identical or similar to the fireworks image displayed on the display screen 95a, thereby realizing a coordinated performance during the outward journey by displaying the fireworks image on both the display screen 95a and the display unit of the right-side movable decorative unit 910L.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 56th embodiment described above, the shift speed of the luminous pattern of the right movable decorative body 910L was set to be faster than the movement speed of the right movable decorative body 910L on the return journey. However, this can be changed, and the shift speed of the luminous pattern may be set to be the same as the movement speed of the right movable decorative body 910L on the return journey, or the shift speed of the luminous pattern may be set to be slower than the movement speed of the right movable decorative body 910L on the return journey.

<Example 3>
In the 56th embodiment described above, the shift speed of the light-emitting pattern of the right-side movable decorative element 910L is set to be faster than the rising speed of the fireworks image displayed on the pattern display device 95a, but the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the shift speed of the light-emitting pattern of the right-side movable decorative element 910L to be slower than the rising speed of the fireworks image displayed on the display screen 95a, or to match the shift speed of the light-emitting pattern of the right-side movable decorative element 910L with the rising speed of the fireworks image displayed on the display screen 95a.

<Modification 4>
In the 56th embodiment described above, a second linked performance was performed by the display screen 95a and the right-side movable decorative body 910L as an opening performance in the opening/closing execution mode, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system to perform the second linked performance as a performance for each game round. That is, the system may be configured to perform the first linked performance followed by the second linked performance during one game round. In such a configuration, for example, when the right-side movable decorative body 910L passes in front of a symbol combination that is currently displayed, the symbol combination is overwritten with a different symbol combination. Specifically, the system may be configured so that a symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is overwritten with a symbol combination corresponding to a winning result, or so that a symbol combination corresponding to a normal winning result is overwritten with a symbol combination corresponding to a probability-increasing winning result. Of course, it is preferable to use a fake performance in conjunction with a performance in which the above overwriting does not occur in accordance with the movement of the right-side movable decorative body 910L.

<Example 5>
In the combinations of configurations shown in each of the 55th and 56th embodiments, in particular, for the second linked performance in which the distance traveled by the right movable decorative body 910L on the return journey is relatively long, a coordinated performance is performed using the image displayed on the display screen 95a and the luminous pattern of the right movable decorative body 910L on the return journey, whereas for the first linked performance in which the distance traveled by the right movable decorative body 910L on the return journey is relatively short, a coordinated performance is not performed using the image displayed on the display screen 95a and the luminous pattern of the right movable decorative body 910L on the return journey.

<Modification 6>
In the 56th embodiment described above, the luminous pattern displayed on the right-side movable decorative body 910L was rectangular in shape. However, by making the luminous pattern circular, the correlation between the luminous pattern and the image of the fireworks can be strengthened.

<Embodiment 57>
One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates a device 97L, as shown in the 54th embodiment above, to further enhance the attention given to the game. Specifically, if it is announced that the result is a loss after the linked performance (hereinafter referred to as the first linked performance), the second linked performance may be executed after the first linked performance has finished. This second linked performance functions as one of the suggestive performances that indicates the likelihood of a big win in the subsequent hold, and the configuration of this second linked performance is distinctive.

In this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot is indicated by multiple play stages with different background images and background music (BGM). These multiple play stages are broadly categorized into three types: the daytime stage, where a background image of a daytime beach (daytime stage image) is displayed on the display screen 95a and BGM evoking a daytime beach is output from the speaker unit 28; the evening stage, where a background image of an evening beach (evening stage image) is displayed on the display screen 95a and BGM evoking an evening beach is output from the speaker unit 28; and the nighttime stage, where a background image of a nighttime beach (nighttime stage image) is displayed on the display screen 95a and BGM evoking a nighttime beach is output from the speaker unit 28. The system is configured to allow players to remain in the same stage over multiple play rounds (see Figure 489). The play stage may change at the end or beginning of a play round via a stage change animation, with the likelihood of a jackpot increasing in the order of daytime stage < evening stage < nighttime stage.

As a stage change effect, there are two types: a normal stage change effect that does not involve the 97L effect device, and a special stage change effect, which is a second-stage linked effect that does involve the 97L effect device. The special stage change effect is differentiated from the normal stage change effect in that it has a higher probability of changing to a higher stage. In other words, while in the daytime stage, there is a higher probability of changing to the evening or night stage, and while in the evening stage, there is a higher probability of changing to the night stage.

The following explanation, referring to Figures 490 and 491, describes the configuration that forms the basis for the stage change animation, including the special stage change animation (second linked animation), specifically the processing related to the announcement executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162. The announcement processing includes a pre-announcement process (step S306C in Figure 465) and a hold command setting process (step S307C in Figure 465). These processes are configured to be executed as part of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 463), specifically as part of the entry process for the activation port (see Figure 464), or more specifically, as part of the information acquisition process in step S205C. In other words, the pre-announcement process and the hold command setting process are executed based on the entry of a ball into activation ports 91 and 92.

(Pre-confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of Figure 490, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S1501C, the number of operational reserves N and the common reserves CRN stored in the reserve count storage area of the reserve ball storage area 432 are read, and this information on the number of reserves is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Then, in step S1502C, it is checked whether the reserve information obtained by this win contains information corresponding to the jackpot result. Details of this determination are the same as the win/fail determination process in step S702C above, so the explanation is omitted.

If the confirmation process in step S1502C confirms that a jackpot has been hit, a positive determination is made in step S1503C, and the process proceeds to step S1504C. In step S1504C, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. In step S1504C, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304C, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S1504C includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the hit/fail confirmation process in step S1502C confirms a loss, a negative determination is made in step S1503C and the process proceeds to step S1505C. In step S1505C, the normal loss-triggered reach confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3, acquired in step S304C, is obtained, and the lottery table for losing reaches is referenced to determine whether a losing reach will occur. If a losing reach does not occur (i.e., a complete loss), a negative determination is made in step S1506C, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If a losing reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S1506C, and the process proceeds to step S1507C. In step S1507C, the losing reach information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S1507C includes information related to the general type of losing reach (e.g., whether it is a super reach).

Next, we will explain the process for setting up hold commands by referring to the flowchart in Figure 491.

(Setting the pending command)
In the process of setting the hold command, first, in step S1601C, it is determined whether or not jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S1602C, where the jackpot-corresponding hold command is set. The jackpot-corresponding hold command includes information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1601C, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the MPU 402 register, the process proceeds to step S1603C, where it is determined whether or not losing reach information is stored in the MPU 402 register. If losing reach information is stored, a positive determination is made in step S1603C, and the process proceeds to step S1604C, where a losing reach corresponding hold command is set. The losing reach corresponding hold command includes information related to the general type of losing reach (e.g., whether or not it is a super reach).

When setting a hold command in steps S1602C and S1604C, the display time for the variation is determined by referring to the value of the variation type counter CS, etc., and the information related to that variation display time is stored in the hold command. In determining the display time for the variation, the display time table is referred to, similar to the setting process for the display time shown in step S709C. The hold command thus set is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140, which can then understand the variation display pattern of the symbols based on the hold command.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1603C, the process proceeds to step S1605C. In step S1605C, a non-missing reach hold command (complete miss hold command) is set. As previously explained, in the case of a complete miss, the display time may change depending on the number of hold information stored when the game round related to that hold information begins. Therefore, when setting a complete miss hold command, the information related to the display time is not stored.

After executing one of the command setting processes in steps S1602C, S1604C, or S1605C, step S1606C executes a process to set the number of reserved items for the reserved command. The reserved command information is composed of multiple bytes. In step S1606C, first, the reserved item information stored in the MPU 402 register in step S1501C of the preceding pre-verification process (Figure 490) is read. Then, the read reserved item information is stored in the bits for the reserved item information of the already set reserved command using an operation such as logical OR. This ensures that the reserved command set in one of the processes in steps S1602C, S1604C, or S1605C includes information to identify which reserved item corresponds to that reserved command. After executing the process in step S1606C as described above, this reserved command setting process terminates.

In step S1606C, the hold command, which includes information on the number of hold items, is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in step S401C during the next normal processing (Figure 466). Upon receiving this hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. Furthermore, based on the received hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 executes processes such as hold display and hold notification.

In the notification and performance control device 140, the MPU 442 performs processing related to the pre-announcement performance based on the information stored in the pending information storage area 467. The processing related to the pre-announcement performance can be broadly divided into two parts: command response processing, which determines commands from the main control device 162, and pre-announcement performance setting processing, which determines the type of pre-announcement.

(Handling of pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command transmitted by the main control unit 162 is received, processing corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined interval (for example, every 2 msec).

In the process of handling pending commands, the first step is to determine whether or not a pending command has been received. Commands received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 are temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing multiple commands and reading commands in the order they were stored, ensuring that even when multiple commands are received simultaneously, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. To determine whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, the system checks whether a jackpot-related pending command has been received in the target area of the command storage area 461. This command reading configuration is the same for reading other commands, such as commands for starting variations.

When a hold command is received, the various information contained in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to store one hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area is shifted sequentially to the lower areas when a shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3, ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, as with the hold ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port), the hold information is stored chronologically regardless of the ball's destination. For details, the system identifies the number of pending commands included in the received command and stores the various information described above in the area corresponding to that identified number of pending commands among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444. Similarly, when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. These flags trigger the setting process for the hold notification effect (hold notification effect setting process) described below, and are erased when the hold notification effect setting process is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, the jackpot announcement performance setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. The jackpot announcement performance setting process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is performed on the condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command is received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the jackpot announcement performance is when hold information is acquired upon entry into the operation ports 91A and 92A, or when hold information is consumed as the game progresses.

In this embodiment, the jackpot notification features include a hold icon change feature that alters the color of the hold icon, and the stage change feature described above. The jackpot notification feature setting process determines whether or not to perform the notification feature, and then determines the type of notification feature to execute and its details from among these various features.

Here, we will explain the flow of the stage change animation with reference to Figures 492 to 494. Figure 492 is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a normal stage change animation, while Figures 493 and 494 are schematic diagrams illustrating the flow of a special stage change animation. Note that the normal stage change animation can be performed either after the start of a game round or at the end of a game round (during the confirmation display). Figure 492 illustrates the case where the animation is performed at the end of a game round (during the confirmation display).

(Stage normal change effect)
In Figure 492(a), the player is in the daytime stage and a symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is displayed as confirmed. As shown in Figure 492(a) → Figure 492(b), at a predetermined timing during the confirmed display, an image resembling a shutter appears on the display screen 95a, and the background image and symbol combination become temporarily invisible. Then, as shown in Figure 492(b) → Figure 492(c), when the image resembling a shutter disappears, the symbol combination that was displayed as confirmed is redisplayed, while the background image changes to the night stage image. After the confirmed display ends, as shown in Figure 492(c), the next game round starts in the night stage, suggesting that there is a high probability of a big win in subsequent game rounds.

Next, the special stage change effect will be explained with reference to Figures 493 and 494. The special stage change effect is an effect that is executed after the completion of the first linked effect when it is performed in a game round corresponding to a losing result. Similar to the first linked effect, it is executed through the coordinated operation of the effect device 97L and the display screen 95a.

(Special stage change effect)
In Figure 493(a), the symbol variation display begins in the game round corresponding to the losing result. At this point, subsequent reserves have already been secured, and these subsequent reserves include those corresponding to the jackpot result. At a predetermined timing after the symbol variation display begins, the display transitions to a reach display, and after the transition to the reach display, the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L begin to light up (flashing white) to indicate that the first linked performance will occur (see Figures 493(b) and 493(c)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the indication of the first linked performance began, both movable decorative elements 810L and 910L are positioned at the performance location, forming a decoration resembling the letter "V" that overlaps the display screen 95a from the front, and the display color of both movable decorative elements 810L and 910L lights up in red. Although not shown in the illustration, a red effect image is also added to the display screen 95a, surrounding the movable decorative elements 810L and 910L. This development to the first linked performance significantly increases the expectation of a jackpot.

However, in this particular game round, the result is a losing outcome, and ultimately, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the stop (confirmation display) (see Figure 493(d) → Figure 493(e)). At this point, the current stage is the daytime stage, and the daytime stage image is displayed as the background image on display screen 95a.

At a predetermined timing after transitioning to the confirmed display, the left-side movable ornament 810L returns first from the performance position to the standby position. This return operation is performed while the right-side movable ornament 910L is stopped in the performance position. When the left-side movable ornament 810L returns to the standby position, it passes through the area to the left of the right-side movable ornament 910L on the display screen 95a. In conjunction with this movement, a portion of the background image displayed on the display screen 95a, specifically the area to the left, changes from the daytime stage image to the nighttime stage image. In other words, on the display screen 95a, the area to the left of the right-side movable ornament 910L displays the nighttime stage image, and the area to the right of the right-side movable ornament 910L displays the daytime stage image, resulting in two stage images being displayed on the display screen 95a, with the right-side movable ornament 910L as the dividing line (see Figures 493(e) → 493(f)).

In this configuration, the boundary portion BL between the daytime and nighttime stage images is tilted to the left, similar to the right-side movable decorative element 910L, and the right-side movable decorative element 910L covers almost the entire boundary portion BL, making it difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. However, this is not the only configuration; it is also possible to configure the entire boundary portion BL to be completely invisible from the front of the gaming machine.

After the two stage images are displayed side by side, the right-side movable ornament 910L begins to move slowly from its performance position to its standby position. As this movement begins, the orientation of the right-side movable ornament 910L changes from an inclined position to a vertical position. In this vertical position, the movable ornament 910L straddles the upper and lower edges of the display screen 95a, completely dividing the display area of the screen 95a into left and right sections. In accordance with this change in the orientation of the right-side movable ornament 910L, the orientation and position of the stage image boundary portion BL also change, maintaining its hidden state behind the right-side movable ornament 910L (see Figures 493(f) → 494(g)).

Subsequently, the display ranges of the daytime and nighttime stage images are changed in accordance with the movement of the right-side movable ornament 910L. In other words, the area where the nighttime stage image is displayed on the display screen 95a gradually increases. The right-side movable ornament 910L continues to move toward the standby position while maintaining its vertical orientation, but the boundary portion BL of both stage images also moves (shifts) toward the standby position in synchronization with the movement of the right-side movable ornament 910L (see Figures 494(g) → 494(h) → 494(i)).

Here, regarding the special stage change effect, the stage change is not always successful, and it may fail. If the stage change fails, the synchronization between the movement of the right-side movable ornament 910L and the movement of the boundary section BL is released at one of several positions before the right-side movable ornament 910L reaches its standby position. The boundary section BL then moves independently towards the left edge of the display screen 95a, and the background image displayed on the display screen 95a becomes only the daytime stage image.

In the example shown in Figure 494, a successful stage change animation is illustrated. The movement of the boundary section BL continues until the right-side movable ornament 910L reaches its standby position. At the moment the right-side movable ornament 910L reaches its standby position, the daytime stage image display ends, and the background image on the display screen 95a switches entirely to the nighttime stage image.

After the stage change is complete, both movable decorative elements 910L will turn off, and the display of changing symbol sequences will begin in conjunction with the start of the next game round.

By using multiple movable decorative units 810L and 910L in combination to perform the first linked performance (combined performance), that is, by combining subdivided pieces to perform the first linked performance, it is possible to enlarge the movable performance device while suppressing the constraints related to placement and other factors that result from this, and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through the first linked performance.

In this configuration, during the outward journey when the first linked performance is executed, the right-side movable ornament 910L, which has a relatively higher movement speed, starts moving earlier than the left-side movable ornament 810L, which has a relatively lower movement speed. Conversely, during the return journey after the first linked performance ends, the right-side movable ornament 910L, which has a relatively lower movement speed, starts moving later than the left-side movable ornament 810L, which has a relatively higher movement speed. This configuration significantly alters the relationship between the two movable ornaments 810L and 910L between the outward and return journeys, preventing the movement of the movable ornaments from becoming monotonous.

In particular, on the outward journey, by significantly increasing the travel distance of the right-side movable decorative element 910L, it is easy to achieve a configuration that shifts the performance position towards the standby position of the left-side movable decorative element 810L. In other words, the constraints on the performance position can be alleviated. Furthermore, on the return journey, while quickly returning the left-side movable decorative element 810L to its standby position, it becomes possible to create a new performance (second linked performance) utilizing the movement of the right-side movable decorative element 910L, which has traveled a longer distance. In this case, since the movement speed of the right-side movable decorative element 910L is reduced, the execution period of this new performance can be secured, thereby increasing the flexibility of the performance. For these reasons, it can effectively contribute to increasing the attention given to the game.

Executing a first linked performance, which coordinates the movable decorative units 810L and 910L positioned at the performance location with the image (effect image) displayed on the display screen 95a, is preferable for increasing attention to the game. After the linked performance ends, the movable decorative units 810L and 910L need to be returned to their standby positions. On the return journey, two stage images are displayed side by side on the display screen 95a. The boundary portion BL between these two stage images is positioned behind the right-hand movable decorative unit 910L, making it appear as if the night stage image and day stage image are displayed separately, with the right-hand movable decorative unit 910L in between. By covering the boundary portion BL between the two different stage images with the right-hand movable decorative unit 910L, the sense of incongruity that occurs at the boundary portion BL between images when two different stage images are displayed side by side can be effectively reduced. With this configuration, attention to the game can be promoted by the stage images even on the return journey of the right-hand movable decorative unit 910L, and the rapid decline in attention to the game after the end of the first linked performance can be suppressed.

The right-side movable decorative element 910L assumes a vertical position during the return journey, thereby straddling the upper and lower edges of the display screen 95a. This allows the right-side movable decorative element 910L to effectively suppress the exposure of the boundary portion BL. Furthermore, a configuration in which the position of the right-side movable decorative element 910L is changed when the first linked performance ends and it returns to its standby position prevents the function of covering the boundary portion BL of the stage image from reducing the degree of freedom of the first linked performance (and thus preventing the first linked performance from becoming obsolete).

In the second linked performance (special stage change performance), while the daytime stage image is displayed on the display screen 95a, a portion of the displayed daytime stage image is changed to a nighttime stage image, thereby displaying the daytime and nighttime stage images side by side. By displaying one of the stage images (daytime or nighttime) in advance and then changing a portion of that image to the other, the sense of incongruity when starting the parallel display can be effectively reduced.

Furthermore, the performance position is biased towards the standby position of the left-side movable ornament 810L. In other words, the distance traveled to the performance position is greater for the right-side movable ornament 910L than for the left-side movable ornament 810L. By moving one of the movable ornaments (the right-side movable ornament 910L) more significantly, the impact of the first combined performance can be enhanced. Here, by configuring the system so that the movement speed of the right-side movable ornament 910L is higher than that of the left-side movable ornament 810L during the outward journey, the effect of the bias in movement distance can be suppressed. In other words, the decrease in the visual appeal of the above combined performance can be suppressed.

During the return journey after the completion of the first linked performance, the second linked performance is executed by the right-side movable ornament 910L and the stage image displayed on the display screen 95a. During the return journey in which the second linked performance is executed, the movement speed of the left-side movable ornament 810L is set to be faster than that of the right-side movable ornament 910L. Furthermore, by setting the start timing of the left-side movable ornament 810L's operation to precede that of the right-side movable ornament 910L during the second linked performance, a rapid return of the left-side movable ornament 810L to its standby position can be achieved. This effectively avoids the left-side movable ornament 810L obstructing the view of the right-side movable ornament 910L or the stage image.

The timing difference between the start of operation of both movable decorative units 810L and 910L during the outward journey is smaller than the timing difference between the start of operation of both movable decorative units 810L and 910L during the return journey. When executing the first linked performance, a large timing difference between the arrival of both movable decorative units 810L and 910L at the performance position is a concern as it would significantly degrade the visual appeal of the performance. In contrast, during the return journey, it is preferable to ensure a certain period of time to complete the retraction of the left-side movable decorative unit 810L before executing the second linked performance, etc. Therefore, there is technical significance in relatively reducing the timing difference during the outward journey and relatively increasing the timing difference during the return journey.

<Variation 1>
In the special stage change effect shown in the 57th embodiment above, the movement speed of the right movable decorative body 910L is synchronized with the movement speed of the boundary portion BL of the stage image, thereby synchronizing the movement of the boundary portion BL with the movement of the right movable decorative body 910L. However, the effect is not limited to this. In the special stage change effect, it is also possible to configure the effect to detect the position of the right movable decorative body 910L, and then synchronize the movement of the boundary portion BL with the movement of the right movable decorative body 910L by moving the boundary portion BL based on this detection result.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 57th embodiment described above, when the sequence progresses from the first linked performance to the second linked performance (stage special change performance), the left movable decorative element 810L moves to the standby position by passing in front of the right movable decorative element 910L which is stopped at the performance position. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when the second linked performance (stage special change performance) is executed after the completion of a performance in which the positions of the two movable decorative elements 810L and 910L do not change, as in the first linked performance shown in the 55th embodiment described above, the left movable decorative element 810L may move to the standby position by not passing in front of the right movable decorative element 910L which is stopped at the performance position.

<Example 3>
In the 57th embodiment described above, when the first linked performance ends and the left movable decorative body 810L returns to the standby position, the background image of the portion of the display screen 95a located to the left of the right movable decorative body 910L is changed from a daytime stage image to a nighttime stage image in accordance with the movement of the left movable decorative body 810L. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The background image of the portion of the display screen 95a located to the left of the right movable decorative body 910L may be changed to a nighttime stage image at the timing just before the left movable decorative body 810L returns from the performance position to the standby position, or it may be changed to a nighttime stage image at the timing when the left movable decorative body 810L returns to the standby position.

<Modification 4>
In the 57th embodiment described above, the second linked performance is configured to function as a stage change performance for ranking up from a lower stage to a higher stage. However, it is also possible to configure it to function as a stage change performance for ranking down from a higher stage to a lower stage, either as an alternative or in addition to this. Specifically, it is also possible to configure it so that in some cases when the first linked performance occurs during the night stage, the first linked performance → second linked performance occurs, and if the transition to a lower stage (day stage or evening stage) does not occur in the second linked performance, the night stage continues. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that a big win in the pending state is confirmed by maintaining the night stage image.

<Example 5>
In the 57th embodiment described above, the right-side movable decorative element 910L is configured to move in a vertical position spanning the upper and lower edges of the display screen 95a during the return journey after the first linked performance has ended, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this configuration. The size and orientation of the right-side movable decorative element 910L can be arbitrarily changed as long as the player perceives that the display area for the changing symbols on the display screen 95a is divided into left and right sections by the right-side movable decorative element 910L. For example, it is also possible to configure the right-side movable decorative element 910L to maintain a tilted position to the left even during the return journey.

<Embodiment 58>
The 58th embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), a type of amusement machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 495 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and Figures 496 and 497 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded state. Note that, for convenience, the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 496.

As shown in Figure 495, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main unit 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting elongated frame materials on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame overall. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10; it may also be installed as part of the island equipment in the gaming hall.

The main body of the gaming machine 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a manner that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 18 is provided at the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. These upper support fittings 17 and 18 constitute a support mechanism, and this support mechanism allows the main body of the gaming machine 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 496 and 497).

As shown in Figures 496 and 497, the main body of the gaming machine 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 positioned in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 positioned behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in a front view of the gaming machine, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Figure 495, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is almost identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central part of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be seen from the front, and this window portion 21 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds these glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that divides the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear sections, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, while the game area PE is double-covered from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23.

Furthermore, it is not necessarily required to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Moreover, the number of glass panels is arbitrary; it may be one or three or more. However, in light of improving safety and security, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and arrange them facing each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use transparent synthetic resin panel members instead of glass panels.

Various light-emitting means, such as lamps, are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a ring-shaped illuminated section 26 containing LEDs or other light-emitting means is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The ring-shaped illuminated section 26 lights up or flashes in accordance with changes in the game state, such as during a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Furthermore, an error indicator lamp section 27, which lights up in the event of an error or malfunction, is provided at the center of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and at the very top of the pachinko machine 10. Prize ball lamp sections 28, which light up during prize ball payout, are provided to the left and right of the error indicator lamp section 27. Additionally, speaker sections 29, which output sound effects, background music, etc., according to the game state, are provided in positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see Figure 496).

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 are arranged vertically, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 33, opening upwards, is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34, also opening upwards, is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described later), aligning them in a line, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism (described later). The lower tray 34 has the function of storing excess game balls in the upper tray 33 and also functions as a receptacle for game balls that were launched by the game ball launching mechanism but did not reach the game area PE (see Figure 496) and are returned to the player.

In the upper bulge 31, a special effect button 35, operated by the player, is located in front of the upper tray 33. This special effect button 35 is connected to a notification and effect control device 140, which executes corresponding effects based on the operation of the special effect button 35.

To the right of the lower bulge 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided, protruding toward the player. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described later. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (rotation) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases. When this amount of operation is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount, the game ball reaches the game area PE. Furthermore, by adjusting this amount of operation, the player can choose to launch the game balls to either the right or left route, as described later.

As shown in Figure 496, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door-side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving opening is formed at its upper corner, projecting rearward and opening upward. This receiving opening is partitioned left and right by a partition wall, thereby separating the entrance portion of the front door-side upper tray passage from the entrance portion of the front door-side lower tray passage. The upstream side of both the front door-side upper tray passage and the front door-side lower tray passage leads to a game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Game balls entering the front door-side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the front door-side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14, at the pivot end, protruding shafts are provided at its upper and lower ends. These protruding shafts constitute the assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 498. Figure 498 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, as with Figure 496, the configuration within the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted in Figure 498 for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, which has an outer shape similar to that of the outer frame 11, being roughly rectangular. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a small gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The fascia board is positioned below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 rests on the fascia board. A small clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 to prevent mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base end (left side in Figure 498) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown in the illustration, the support brackets 71 and 72 have shafts, and the bearing portion provided on the front door frame 14 is inserted into these shafts, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can rotate relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotating end side of the inner frame base body 50 (right side in Figure 498). The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later) and has front door hook members 76 scattered along its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has a hook receiving member 49 (see Figure 496) provided on the back of the front door frame 14, and slits are formed to protrude towards the front side of the inner frame 13, corresponding to each front door hook member 76. The front door hook members 76 that protrude through these slits engage with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable state. Furthermore, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 that extends to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 engage with a hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, thereby locking the main body of the gaming machine 12 in a closed position relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base 50 (locking device 75) is equipped with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is separate from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77 and the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is positioned adjacent to the locking unit. Turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right (clockwise) unlocks the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the left (counterclockwise) unlocks the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11.

A recessed area 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central part of the inner frame base body 50. The recessed area 51 is recessed towards the rear of the game machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is secured by a manual locking mechanism while fitted into this recessed area 51 from the front of the game machine. A roughly rectangular window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the recessed area 51, through which the rear configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b, described later) protrudes to the rear of the inner frame 13. Almost the entire area of this window opening 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is formed by integrating a game board 80a, which is mainly made of wooden board material, and a rear block 80b, which is provided on the rear side of the game board 80a and has various game components (variable display device, control device, movable performance mechanism, etc.) mounted on the base body 251.

The game area PE, through which the game balls flow, is formed on the front of the game board 80a. As already explained, the game area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls; that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE do not line up front to back at the same point in the game area PE. This suppresses ball jamming in the game area PE. Note that the game board 80a is not limited to wood; it can also be made of synthetic resin.

The following describes the game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) based on Figures 499 and 500. Figure 499 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 500 is a rear perspective view of the game board unit 80.

The game board 80a has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in its own thickness direction (front-to-back direction). As shown in Figure 452, each opening is equipped with a general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable prize entry device 83, a through gate 84, etc. When a game ball enters the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, or the variable prize entry device 83, these game balls are detected by detection sensors provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection result, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. In addition, an out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86. In the following explanation, to clearly distinguish it from the entry of game balls into the out-out opening 86, the entry of game balls into the general prize-winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable prize-winning device 83 will also be referred to as "winning."

Furthermore, the game board 80a is equipped with numerous game pins 87, windmills 94, and other game components to appropriately distribute the flow paths of the game balls. These various configurations of game pins 87, windmills, etc., differentiate the flow paths of the game balls, resulting in a reasonable probability of winning prizes in the general prize winning slots 81, etc.

A central opening is formed in the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached to cover this central opening from the rear side of the game board unit 80L. Behind this central opening, the variable display unit 85 and other components belonging to the rear block 80bL are located, and these components can be viewed from the front of the game machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An operating port unit 82 and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 includes a first operating port 91 located below the variable display unit 85, and a second operating port 92 located below the first operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is equipped with an electric mechanism 93, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). The electric mechanism 93 comprises a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is switchable between an open state (assist state) that allows ball entry into the second operating port 92 and a closed state (non-assist state) that prevents ball entry.

Furthermore, the electric mechanism 93 may be configured such that, when in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second operating opening 92, and when switched to the open state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second operating opening 92 than when it is closed.

Upstream from the second operating port 92, specifically to the side of the variable display unit 85, is the aforementioned through gate 84. When a support lottery is triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 84, the electric mechanism 93 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, if a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls will be dispensed, and if a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls will be dispensed. However, the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable prize-winning device (special ball-entry device or special ball-entry means) 83 is equipped with a large prize-winning opening and a shutter that can be switched between an "allowing" state, which permits ball entry into the large prize-winning opening, and a "blocking" state, which prevents ball entry. In the following description, the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "allowing" state will be referred to as the "open state," and the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "blocking" state will be referred to as the "closed state."

Furthermore, the variable prize-winning device 83 may be configured such that, when it is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83, and when it switches to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83 than when it is closed.

In the normal game state described later, an internal lottery is performed based on the entry of balls into the operating ports 91 and 92. If the internal lottery is won (for example, a jackpot is achieved), the game transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The variable prize entry device 83 is maintained in the closed state and is configured to be switched to the open state when the game transitions to the special game state. In the special game state, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or after a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have been entered, one round is defined as the switching to the open state being repeated for multiple rounds (for example, 6 rounds) with a maximum limit.

Next, a supplementary explanation of the variable display unit 85 will be provided. The variable display unit 85 has a symbol display device 95 that displays symbols variably (variable display) when a prize is awarded in the operating ports 91 and 92. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and its display content is controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, symbols are displayed, for example, in a row at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are displayed variably by scrolling horizontally. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on a pre-set active line, and the game transitions to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). Note that the symbol display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device; it may also be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 96 is provided on the game board 80a so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the game board 80a, so that the gap between the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, collisions between the game ball flowing down the game area PE and the symbol display device 95 are avoided, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into the right route, which bypasses the variable display unit 85 (specifically the center frame 96) from the right side, and the left route, which bypasses it from the left side. In this embodiment, the various game components provided in the game area PE are arranged symmetrically (a so-called symmetrical gauge), and there is no difference in advantage or disadvantage between the right and left routes. The configuration allows game balls launched from either the right or left route to enter the operating ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable prize winning device 83.

Behind the center frame 96, a movable display device is positioned. This display device is configured to operate when performing synchronized effects or other actions that work in conjunction with the images displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95.

A stage is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 96, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls flowing in through an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 are discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. The stage is configured to make it relatively easier for game balls that reach the stage to flow into the first operation port 91, specifically, to flow into the first operation port 91 more easily than game balls that do not pass through the stage, thus contributing to increased player attention to the movement of game balls on this stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, restricting game balls that reach the stage from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 85).

The activation ports 91 and 92 are positioned closer to the variable display unit 85. Since a win in the activation ports 91 and 92 can trigger a transition to a special game state, players are expected to pay attention to whether or not a win occurs in the activation ports 91 and 92, and also to the symbol display device 95 to determine whether or not a transition to the special game state occurs. The placement of the activation ports 91 and 92 closer to the variable display unit 85 is a design choice to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 85.

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partitioning member 98 is provided, which, together with the guide rail 100 (described later), demarcates the game area PE. The game area partitioning member 98 is equipped with a stopper member and a main display unit 99, which the game balls flying along the guide rail 100 will collide with. The stopper member is a buffer member positioned near the tip of the guide rail 100. The game balls that collide with this stopper member have their momentum weakened before flowing down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game balls.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the main display unit 99. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, with a portion of it positioned to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D, which displays predetermined patterns and other information. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in Figure 499(b), the main display unit D comprises a first operation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the first operation port 91, and a second operation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the second operation port 92. In the first operation port display unit D1, a change in the pattern is triggered by a win in the first operation port 91, and as a result of stopping this change in the pattern display, the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the change in the first operation port display unit D1 is stopped, and after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state.

The display unit D2 for the second operation slot triggers a change in the symbol display upon entry into the second operation slot 92. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is clearly displayed as the change in the display stops. If the result of the internal lottery based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the display unit D2 for the second operation slot stops the change in the display. After a predetermined symbol is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into either of the operating ports 91 or 92, a variation display is initiated on the corresponding operating port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display stops (confirms). This state is maintained until the confirmed display time elapses, which constitutes one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration where a single display area is provided and a variation display is performed in that single display area regardless of which operating port 91 or 92 wins, one game round can be defined as the variation display starting in that single display area, displaying a predetermined stop result, stopping (confirms), and maintaining that state until the confirmed display time elapses.

In this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92 is limited to four times each (a total of eight balls). The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a first operation port retention count display section S1 and a second operation port retention count display section S2, respectively, which display the number of balls held in the first and second operation ports 91 and 92.

Furthermore, in addition to the operation port display units D1 and D2, the main display unit 99's main display section D is also equipped with a through-gate display unit DS that displays the lottery results based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84. The through-gate display unit DS triggers a change in the pattern display upon winning a prize in the through-gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of this change display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is clearly displayed (a confirmation display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is a support win, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through-gate display unit DS, the change display stops, and after the confirmation display is completed, the system transitions to the electric mechanism open state. In the electric mechanism open state, the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operation port 92, is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times. The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a hold count display section SS that shows the number of held balls.

The main display unit D, as detailed above, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and its visibility is ensured because the game balls do not move in front of these various display units.

To explain the configuration of the inner frame 13 again using Figure 498, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, there is a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls positioned at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball feeding device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch standby position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby integrating it with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle, tilted upwards toward the game board unit 80. The launch rail 112 has a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross-section, and the game ball fits into this groove, thereby defining its front-to-back position.

A ball stopper is positioned near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112 to hold the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 in the aforementioned launch standby position. The solenoid 111 is positioned further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension and retraction direction, causing the game ball, positioned in the launch standby position, to be launched towards the game board unit 80, specifically towards the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with the game area partitioning member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically the front surface of the plate), partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102, which are positioned opposite each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and these two rails 101 and 102 partition a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the game area PE. The game ball, launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111, is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). Furthermore, in the game board unit 80, a reverse return prevention member 106 is attached to the front of the exit portion 105, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. This prevents subsequent game balls from being obstructed by game balls that have already reached the game area PE.

The rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 are arc-shaped, centered approximately in the middle of the game area PE. Therefore, game balls passing through the guide passage 103 are easily moved (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within them. In other words, when a game ball is launched to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide passage 103 effectively constitutes the passage area (path) through which the game ball passes, while the area along the inner rail 101 effectively becomes an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in Figure 498, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. In other words, the two rails 100 and 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset to the left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. This brings both rails 100 and 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80 while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is located below the gap formed in this manner. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 fails to reach the game area PE and returns as a foul ball through the guidance passage 103, these foul balls will enter the foul ball passage through the gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged into the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 448, etc. This suppresses interference between foul balls and the next game ball to be launched.

In the inner frame base 50, a through hole is formed to the left of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14), extending through the inner frame base 50 in the front-to-back direction. A passage forming member 121 is installed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body-side upper tray passage 122 and a main body-side lower tray passage 123. The upstream sides of these main body-side upper tray passages 122 and 123 lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Furthermore, a receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45, attached to the front door frame 14, fits into the lower part of the passage forming member 121. Below the main body-side upper tray passage 122 is the front door-side upper tray passage, and below the main body-side lower tray passage 123 is the front door-side upper tray passage.

In the inner frame base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening/closing member 124 is attached to open and close the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force closes each opening/closing member 124, preventing game balls from falling out of the passages 122 and 123. Conversely, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by a receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage are connected, and the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage are also connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base 50 and game board unit 80) will be described based on Figures 500 and 501. Figure 501 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 501, a bearing bracket 132 is attached to the pivot base end (right side in Figure 501) on the back of the inner frame base body 50. The bearing bracket 132 has bearing portions 133 formed at vertically spaced intervals, and these bearing portions 133 allow the back pack unit 15 to rotatably attach to the inner frame 13. Furthermore, multiple fixing levers 134 are provided on the back of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in the closed position.

As already explained, a window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess (game board housing section) 51 in the inner frame base 50, penetrating in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and opening to the rear side of the inner frame base 50. This window opening 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various components such as control devices are mounted on the rear side of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these components are exposed to the rear side of the inner frame 13 through the window opening 52. Now, with reference to Figure 500, the configuration of the rear side of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As already explained, a rear block 80b is attached to the back of the game board 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base 251 that opens towards the game board 80a. This base 251 is fixed to the back of the game board unit 80, thereby integrating the game board 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area for arranging the movable display devices and other components described above, while the rear side is the area for arranging the control devices that control these various components and the variable display unit 85 (pattern display device 95).

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the aforementioned pattern display device 95 (see Figure 499) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 95 are mounted on this protruding portion. These pattern display device 95 and display control device are arranged in a stacked configuration in the front-to-back direction (the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50), with the pattern display device 95 at the front and the display control device at the rear. Furthermore, a notification/effect control device 140 is mounted on the rear of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification and performance control device 140 includes a notification and performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device (described later). The notification and performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

Below the notification and performance control device 140, a main control unit 160 is provided, covering the base body 251 from the rear. The main control unit 160 comprises a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function for controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function for monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit). This main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The circuit board box 163 comprises a box base (front case) with a roughly rectangular shape and a box cover (back case) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a box sealing section 164, thereby sealing the circuit board box 163. Multiple box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short side of the circuit board box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be configured in any way that makes it impossible to open the box base and the box cover, but the box base and the box cover are made impossible to open by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to reseal the box even after it has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. When the main control board inside malfunctions or when the main control board needs to be inspected, the connection between the box sealing section with the locking pin inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. After that, if the sealing process is to be repeated, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is kept in the circuit board box 163, it will be easy to detect unauthorized opening by examining the circuit board box 163.

The circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are indestructibly connected by a base seal 165. Specifically, the base seal 165, like the box seal 164, has a locking hole and a locking pin. The insertion of the locking pin into the locking hole ensures that the circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are irremovably connected. This makes it easier to detect if the circuit board box 163 has been illegally removed.

On the front of the base body 251, in the portion facing the lower rear of the game board unit 80, a collection passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general prize slot 81, the operating slot unit 82, and the variable prize slot 83, and converges at a single point downstream. As a result, game balls that enter the general prize slot 81, etc., are all collected below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. In other words, the base body 251 is equipped with the function of collecting game balls that enter the various prize slots.

Below the game board unit 80 is a discharge passage, which will be described later. Game balls collected below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage are guided into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out-out opening 86 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots are guided into the discharge passage via the out-out opening 86.

Furthermore, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is equipped with detection sensors for each of the aforementioned ball entry sections: a general prize entry sensor for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize entry opening 81, and operation opening detection sensors for detecting game balls that have entered the operation openings 91 and 92. These various detection sensors constitute the prize entry detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from each detection sensor to the main control unit 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described based on Figures 502 and 503. Figure 502 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 503 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in Figure 502, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as its main body, and the dispensing mechanism 202, discharge passage panel, and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to this back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and, as shown in Figure 503, has a base portion 211 to which the dispensing mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the top are closed and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board has various output terminals, through which various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 503, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the locking pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported relative to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 has multiple insertion points through which the fixing lever 134 provided on the inner frame 13 is inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the base portion 211 from the rear when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion points.

The dispensing mechanism 202 is positioned on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The dispensing mechanism 202 includes a tank 221 located at the top of the back pack 201, with an upward opening. Game balls supplied from the island equipment in the gaming hall are continuously replenished into this tank 221. A tank rail 222, gently sloping downstream, is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223, extending vertically, is connected downstream of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the downstream end of the case rail 223. Game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 225 located on the base 211 of the back pack 201 via a dispensing passage (not shown) located downstream of the dispensing device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later. Its inner opening connects to the upper tray 33 via the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage, while its outer opening connects to the lower tray 34 via the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage.

The lower end of the base portion 211 is fitted with a discharge passage panel and a control unit 204, which are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from front to back. The discharge passage panel has a discharge passage formed on the side facing the control unit 204, which is open to the rear. This opening in the discharge passage is closed by the control unit 204. The discharge passage is designed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the gaming hall, etc. Game balls guided from the aforementioned recovery passage, etc., to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through this discharge passage.

The control unit assembly 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base 241, on which the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. These two devices, the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243, are arranged in a front-to-back configuration, with the payout control device 242 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the dispensing control device 242, a dispensing control board for controlling the dispensing device 224 is housed within a circuit board box 244, and a state reset switch 245 provided on the dispensing control board protrudes outside the circuit board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state reset switch 245 will resolve the ball jam.

The power supply and launch control device 243 houses the power supply and launch control board within the circuit board box 246. The power supply and launch control board generates and outputs the necessary power for various control devices, and further controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 and the ball feeding device 113, which constitute the game ball launch mechanism 110.

Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is equipped with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power to the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state and an off state.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a data storage function, so that even if a power outage occurs, it will retain the state it was in at the time of the outage, and when power is restored, it will return to that state. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, such as when a gaming hall closes for the day, the state before the shutdown is stored. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 provided on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main unit 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the rear of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, these various switches are difficult to operate when the main unit 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone without the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheat) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the block shown in Figure 504.

The main control board 401, located in the main control unit 162, is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is a component that incorporates a ROM 403 for storing various control programs and fixed-value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 403, and various counter circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and random number generators. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 or RAM 404, may be provided by separate components.

The MPU 402 is equipped with both input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the dispensing control device 242, and various detection sensors, all located on the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, the following are connected: ball entry detection sensor 391a for detecting ball entry into the general prize entry opening 81, ball entry detection sensor 391b for detecting ball entry into the variable prize entry device 83, ball entry detection sensor 391c for detecting ball entry into the first operation opening 91, ball entry detection sensor 391d for detecting ball entry into the second operation opening 92, and ball entry detection sensor 391e for detecting ball entry into the through gate 84. The MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each entry point. Furthermore, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot lottery based on ball entry into the first operation opening 91 and the second operation opening 92, and also executes a support lottery based on ball entry into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based, for example, the result of determining whether a ball has entered the prize-winning ball entry section, such as the aforementioned operating ports 91 and 92. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a ball has entered the general prize port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the variable prize device 83, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the first operating port 91, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output; and if a ball has entered the second operating port 92, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

The notification and performance control device 140 receives various commands from the main control device 162, including commands for starting the variation, type commands, ending the variation, opening commands, and ending commands. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting these commands. Details of these commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and this predetermined number of bytes contains various information.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a variable prize drive unit that opens and closes the shutter of the variable prize device 83, an electric prize drive unit that opens and closes the electric prize mechanism 93 of the second operating opening 92, and a main display unit 99. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 402 performs drive control of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit so that the variable prize device 83 is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the support lottery for the electric prize mechanism 93 is won, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the electric prize mechanism drive unit so that the electric prize mechanism 93 is opened and closed. The MPU 402 also controls the display of the main display unit D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402. Through this external output terminal board 213, information regarding ball entry into various ball entry points and lottery results such as jackpots is output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to monitor the status of the pachinko machine 10 and the gameplay situation.

The power outage monitoring board 405 acts as a relay between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243. The power outage monitoring board 405 is equipped with the function of monitoring the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loaned balls via the payout device 224 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming arcade. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies this generated operating power through a predetermined power path. Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, which is driven when predetermined launching conditions are met.

The notification and performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification and performance control board that has an MPU (Multi-Purpose Unit) installed. The MPU contains a ROM (Remote Control Module) that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM (Memory for Temporarily Storing Various Data During Execution of the Control Programs Stored in the ROM), and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM and RAM to be integrated into a single chip for the MPU; they may be configured as separate chips. The MPU of the notification and performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, as well as the movable performance devices located on the game board unit 80L, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 410.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on commands input from the notification and performance control device 140. In this case, the notification and performance control device 140 determines the pattern of symbol variation on the symbol display device 95 (for example, whether a reach occurs and the content of the reach performance) and the pattern of symbol stop display (the type of symbol combination to be displayed when the variation display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, we will explain the configuration and content of the display of the changing symbols for each game round. In the following explanation, please refer to Figures 505 and 506 as appropriate. Figures 505 and 506 are schematic diagrams illustrating the display content on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. For the sake of clarity, Figure 506 omits some images, such as the background image and hold images (hold icons), displayed on the display screen 95a.

The display control device 410 is equipped with a character ROM. This character ROM pre-stores data for nine types of symbols, each numbered "1" through "9" (see Figures 505(a) to (i)). These symbols are constructed by combining multiple image data; details about these symbols will be described later.

As shown in Figure 506(a), the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up: left, middle, and right. On the display screen 95a, the patterns in each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom). The left pattern row Z1 and the middle pattern row Z2 consist of nine main patterns, "1" to "9," arranged in descending numerical order, while the right pattern row Z3 consists of nine main patterns, "1" to "9," arranged in ascending numerical order.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 506(b), the display screen 95a displays three symbols for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. Additionally, one active line L is set in the middle section of the display screen 95a. Then, for example, if the display stops in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on the active line L, and the display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has finished, a jackpot video is displayed, indicating either a normal jackpot result or a probability variation jackpot result.

Furthermore, considering that the display of variations in each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row Z1 can be referred to as the first symbol row (or first picture row), the right symbol row Z3 as the second symbol row (or second picture row), and the middle symbol row Z2 as the third symbol row (or third picture row).

Of the main symbols listed above, those with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are considered "specific symbols," while those with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are considered "non-specific symbols." In the case of a probability-increasing jackpot, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed. In the case of a regular jackpot, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed.

Furthermore, the manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 95 is not limited to those described above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of pattern display within each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of pattern display within each pattern row may be set to horizontal.

On the left and right edges of the display screen 95a, next to the variable pattern display area ME, there are reserved display areas. The reserved display area consists of a reserved number display area, where the same number of unit reserved display areas as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operation openings 91 and 92 are arranged vertically, and an execution target display area capable of displaying reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the game rounds currently being played in the variable display area ME.

More specifically, when a game ball enters the activation openings 91 and 92, the maximum number of balls held is 4 in each opening. Correspondingly, the left and right holding count display areas are set as the first unit holding display area, the second unit holding display area, the third unit holding display area, and the fourth unit holding display area, respectively.

For example, when a game ball enters the activation opening 91 and the number of reserved balls is 1, a predetermined reserved image (reservation icon) is displayed in the first unit reserved display area of the reserved ball count display area on the left. When a game ball enters the activation opening 91 and the number of reserved balls is 4, predetermined reserved images (reservation icons) are displayed in the first to fourth unit reserved display areas of the reserved ball count display area on the left. In the following explanation, "reserved ball count" will also be simply referred to as "reservation count."

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as jackpot抽選 (jackpot lottery), setting the display on the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 95. Specifically, as shown in Figure 507, it uses a random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 95 is fluctuating towards a miss, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time of the symbol fluctuations in the display sections D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit 99 and the display time of the symbol fluctuations in the symbol display device 95. Furthermore, it uses an electric mechanism release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operation port 92 into the electric mechanism release state.

Each counter C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an operation port reserved area RE having a first operation port reserved area Ra and a second operation port reserved area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved ball storage area.

Each of the operating port's hold areas Ra and Rb comprises a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. In accordance with the winning history of the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 is stored as hold information in one of the first to fourth areas. This hold information corresponds to special information.

For example, if multiple consecutive entries occur in the first operating port 91, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the first area → second area → third area → fourth area of the first operating port's holding area Ra. Similarly, if multiple consecutive entries occur in the second operating port 92, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the first area → second area → third area → fourth area of the second operating port's holding area Rb. In other words, up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 are stored in reserve. Furthermore, the reserved ball storage area 432 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, which stores information to identify the number of entries stored in the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE when the display section D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 starts displaying the changing patterns. At the start of each game round, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, we will provide further explanation about various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 508, two win/loss tables are set: a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes in its win/loss lottery means: a low probability mode (low probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

Under the circumstances where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 508(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 508(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 (ranging from 0 to 599), "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. Incidentally, if the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot are arbitrary.

Next, the winning type counter C2 will be explained. The winning type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 29, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple winning results are set. These multiple winning results differ in two conditions: (1) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) the support mode by the electric mechanism 93 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

As support modes provided by the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operating port 92, when comparing situations where game balls are continuously launched in the same manner towards the game area PE, a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency at which the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 opens per unit time is relatively high or low.

The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first or second operating port 91, it is stored in the operating port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432.

The distribution of game results for the winning type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 509(a). Figure 509(a) is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for jackpots.

As shown in Figure 509(a), the distribution table for jackpots sets the distribution destinations for game results as follows: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability-changing jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot results, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability-changing jackpot results.

A 6R regular jackpot result is a jackpot result where, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played during this high-frequency support mode reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to the special game state), and the game switches back to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to 40 games (see Figure 509(b)).

A 6R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot where, after the end of the special game state (open/close execution mode), the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result and the transition to the special game state, and switches to the low-frequency support mode upon the start of the special game state (see Figure 509(b)).

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92. Then, a decision is made on whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, during gameplay rounds transitioning to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. While the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same for each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, a configuration where the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode may be used.

Here, "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 95 capable of displaying (or changing) the variation of symbols (pictures), where, in a game round where the game result corresponds to an open/close execution mode, the stop display result after the variation display can become a special display result. This state is intended to make the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the special display result, occurring between the start of the variation display (or changing display) of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 95 and the display of the stop display result.

In other words, this is a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the symbol display device 95, a potential winning symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in a variable state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying potential reach symbol combinations that correspond to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a preset active line L in the symbol display device 95. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 507, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 95. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2, and at the start of pattern variation by the pattern display device 95.

The electric mechanism release counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric mechanism release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is conducted based on the stored value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 to the open state.

The random number values that result in a support win are stored as a support lottery table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. Two support lottery tables are set up: a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group) and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group).

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results.

On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values excluding "4" and "304". In other words, all values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" except "4" and "304" correspond to support win results. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode is differentiated from the low-frequency support mode by resulting in support wins in almost all support lotteries.

In low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is set to 1/2. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "1," and the time the electric mechanism 93 remains open (open time) is set to "0.1 seconds." By drastically shortening the open time in this way, entry into the second operating opening 92 is effectively avoided during low-frequency support mode.

In high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/1.1. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "2". The time the electric mechanism remains in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds", and the interval time it remains in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds". By extending the open time compared to low-frequency support mode, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted during high-frequency support mode. In high-frequency support mode, the frequency of entry into the second operating port 92 is higher than in low-frequency support mode, allowing players to continue playing while further reducing the decrease in their ball count (investment). In other words, compared to low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode is configured to have a higher ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

(Regarding the various processes executed by the main control unit 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 402 within the main control unit 162 for the advancement of the game will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 402 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the explanation of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, let's refer to the flowchart in Figure 510 and explain the timer interrupt processing. This process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 402.

In step S101D, the system performs a reading process for various prize detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e). Specifically, it reads the status of the various prize detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162, determines the status of the respective sensors, and saves the detection information (prize detection information).

Subsequently, in step S102D, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the subsequent step S103D, the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric mechanism release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric mechanism release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S104D, the entry process for the through gate 84 is executed. In the entry process for the through gate, it is determined whether the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the flag is stored, and provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved memory items SN) is less than 4, the value of the electric mechanism release counter C4, updated in step S103D, is stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433. Then, if the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the entry detection flag is erased, and the entry process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the prize entry process for the through gate in step S104D, the process proceeds to step S105D. In step S105D, the prize entry process for the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for the operating port)
Here, we will explain the prize-winning process for the operating port by referring to the flowchart in Figure 511.

In step S201D, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered (become a prize in) the first operating opening 91. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S202D, where a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 242 to dispense three game balls.

In the following step S203D, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. In the following step S204D, the value corresponding to the first operation opening 91 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening). After that, in step S205D, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201D that the game ball has not entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S206D. In step S206D, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (entered) the second operating opening 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating opening 92, the process proceeds to step S207D, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to dispense four game balls. The prize ball commands set in steps S202D and S207D are transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401D of the normal processing described later.

In the following step S208D, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. In the following step S209D, the value corresponding to the second operation opening 92 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening). After that, in step S205D, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

Furthermore, if both steps S201D and S206D result in a negative determination, that is, if no ball enters either the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92, the prize-winning process will terminate immediately.

Now, referring to Figure 512, the information acquisition process in step S205D will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301D, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, in step S302D, the number of reserved operation memories N of the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and in step S303D, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

In the subsequent step S304D, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103D, are stored in the first available memory area of the operating slot reserve area RE, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN, which was incremented by 1 in step S302D.

In other words, if the first operation slot reserve memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103D, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot reserve area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation slot reserve memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302D.

Furthermore, if the second operation port's reserved memory count RbN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, updated in step S103D, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation port's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302D.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305D. In step S305D, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 99. During the display update process, if the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operation port 91, the display on the hold count display section S1 for the first operation port is updated. If the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operation port 92, the display on the hold count display section S2 for the second operation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 and the reserved number related to the second operation port 92. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 92 increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S306D and S307D, the notification/performance control device 140, which is the sub-control device, is made to recognize that a prize has been awarded to the operation openings 91 and 92. A pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information indicating whether the prize was awarded to the first operation opening 91 or the second operation opening 92.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307D will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process of the normal process (step S401D), which will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 513. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, has been executed, and the main processes of the game are executed during normal processing. In summary, the processes in steps S401D to S407D are executed as periodic processes with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes in steps S409D and S410D are executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the external signal output process is first executed in step S401D. In the external signal output process of step S401D, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side and the hall computer.

Specifically, the system determines whether a prize ball command is set, and if so, transmits it to the payout control device 242. Furthermore, if various commands such as the variation start command, type command, variation end command, and other performance commands, as well as the hold command and the shift command (described later), are set, they are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, each time the change in the pattern is displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating the pattern confirmation is output to the hall computer. During the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer. During the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402D, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S403D, game round control processing is performed to control the gameplay in each game round. This game round control processing includes determining the jackpot, setting the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95, and controlling the display on the main display unit 99.

After executing the game turn control process in step S403D, the process proceeds to step S404D, where the game state transition process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Further details regarding the game turn control process in step S403D and the game state transition process in step S404D will be explained later.

In the subsequent step S405D, a control process for the through-gate is executed, including a support lottery process based on the entry into the through-gate 84. In step S406D, a support process for the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operating opening 92, is executed. Details regarding the through-gate control process in step S405D and the electric mechanism support process in step S406D will be described later.

Subsequently, in step S407D, the game ball launch control process is executed. During this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is energized once at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S408D, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

The execution time for each process in steps S401D to S407D varies depending on the game state; therefore, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Thus, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control process in step S403D will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 514 to 516.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 514, it is determined in step S501D whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502D onward, namely the game round start process from steps S503D to S506D and the game round progress process from steps S507D to S509D.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, steps S502D and S503D determine whether a game round is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in a variable display state. If they are in a variable display state, a negative determination is made in step S502D, and the process proceeds to step S503D. In step S503D, it is determined whether the confirmed display in the operation port display units D1 and D2 has finished. If a positive determination is made in step S503D, the process proceeds to the game round start processing in steps S504D to S506D. In the game round start processing, first in step S504D, it is determined whether the total number of starting reserved balls (common reserved ball count CRN) is "0". If the common reserved ball count CRN is "0", it means that no reserved ball information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, this game round control processing ends there.

On the other hand, if the common reserve count CRN is not "0", in step S505D, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operation port of the reserve ball storage area 432 for variable display. Furthermore, in step S506D, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the symbol display device 95, after which the game round control process ends.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S505D and the variation start process in step S506D. First, we will explain the data setting process in step S505D with reference to the flowchart in Figure 515.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601D, the number of operation hold memory N stored in the hold memory area that is the target of this setting process, as well as the common hold memory CRN, are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of hold information stored in the operation port hold area RE (see Figure 507), i.e., the number of operation hold memory N, is "0". If the number of operation hold memory N is "0", the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of operation hold memory N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE (step S602D). Then, the data (hold information) stored in the second to eighth areas of the operation port hold area RE are shifted sequentially to the lower areas (step S603D). As a result, when data from area 1 is moved to execution area AE, for example, the data within each area is shifted as follows: area 2 → area 1, area 3 → area 2, area 4 → area 3, area 5 → area 4, area 6 → area 5, area 7 → area 6, area 8 → area 7, and so on.

In the following step S604D, a shift command is set, which is information that allows the notification and effect control device 140 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the operation port holding area RE. After this, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604D is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 140 in step S401D of the normal process (Figure 513).

(Initiation of change process)
Next, the variation initiation process in step S506D will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 516.

In the variation initiation process, the first step, S701D, executes the update process for the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The game count counter is reset to 0 upon transitioning to the special game state, and incremented by "1" each time the update process in step S701D is executed. The MPU 402 can identify the number of games played after the special game state ends by referring to the value of this game count counter.

In the following step S702D, a win/loss determination process is executed based on the entry into the operating ports 91 and 92. This win/loss determination process determines whether the held information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, it grasps the information for jackpot determination from the information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the winning random number counter C1. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is low probability mode, the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot. If the win/loss lottery mode is high probability mode, the win/loss table for high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the following step S703D, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination process in step S702D corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S704D.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information from the information stored in the execution area AE, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R probability variation jackpot result.

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, a positive determination is made in step S705D, and the process proceeds to step S706D, where the stop result setting process for the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. If it is a 6R regular jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S705D, and the process proceeds to step S707D, where the stop result setting process for the 6R regular jackpot is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S703D, if a negative result is obtained in step S703D, i.e., if it is not a jackpot, proceed to step S708D. In step S708D, the stop result setting process for a loss is executed.

In the stop result setting processes of steps S706D, S707D, and S708D, the information regarding the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In steps S706D and S707D, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R regular jackpot is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706D, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707D, the 6R regular jackpot flag is stored. Furthermore, in step S708D, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a loss is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S708D, the loss flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S706D, S707D, or S708D, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S709D. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

After the setting process for the variable display time is executed in step S709D, the process proceeds to step S710D, where the variable start command and type command are set. The variable start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variable display time. The type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the type command includes information on the game result, such as information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R normal jackpot result, and the loss result.

The variation start command and type command set in step S710D are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401D of the normal processing (Figure 466). Based on the received variation start command and type command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance for that game round, such as the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26, the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29, and the variation display pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 95. It then controls the lamp unit 26, speaker unit 29, performance device 97L, etc., to execute the determined performance.

Subsequently, in step S711D, the display of the changing symbols is started on either the first operation port display unit D1 or the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this symbol change start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the display of the changing symbols, etc., to start before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

(Setting the variable display time)
Next, an overview of the setting process for the variable display time (step S709D) will be described. As already explained, in this embodiment, reserve information is acquired based on balls entering the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, and based on the acquired reserve information, the variable display to confirmation display of the patterns and symbols for the game round is executed. Here, the variable display time for the patterns and symbols is set according to the current game state, the result of the win/loss lottery based on balls entering the operation ports 91 and 92, the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, etc. Regarding the variable display time, when comparing a jackpot result with a loss result, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a loss result where no reach display occurs, the display time is set to become shorter as the number of stored reserve information increases.

Returning to the explanation of the game turn control process (Figure 514), if the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 are showing a variable display or a confirmed display, the process proceeds to step S507D. Step S507D determines whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) in RAM 404 has become "0". This value is deducted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 510) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display processing is executed in step S508D. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the corresponding display unit D1 or D2 for the operation port is changed. After that, the game round control processing ends. If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display processing is executed in step S509D, and then the game round control processing ends.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404D will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 517.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801D, it is determined whether or not the system is in opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If it is not in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802D, where it is determined whether or not the game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the change display ended on either the operation port display unit D1 or D2 of the main display unit D. If the game round has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the game round has ended, a positive result is determined in step S802D, and the process proceeds to step S803D. In step S803D, it is determined whether the game result of this round (the result of the above win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether either the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If neither of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S804D. This start process releases the restriction on the operation of the variable prize device 83 by the locking device, allowing the opening and closing operation of the variable prize device 83 until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S804D, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in step S801D, the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag is used to determine whether or not the system is in the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following step S805D, the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means of determining the number of times the variable prize device 83 has been opened. After executing the process in step S805D, the process proceeds to step S806D, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. This forces the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode to switch to the low-frequency support mode. Afterward, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807D, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S808D, before the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S807D is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401D of the normal processing (Figure 513). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode on the symbol display device 95. Based on the opening command received from the main control device 162, the notification/performance control device 140 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 to execute the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a display corresponding to a jackpot (e.g., animated display of characters).

Furthermore, the external signal set in step S808D is also transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S401D during normal processing (Figure 513). The hall computer can then determine that the gate is in open/close execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S801D, if it is determined in step S801D that the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S809D. In step S809D, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S810D. Now, referring to Figure 518, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot will be explained.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
In the opening and closing process of the main prize slot, first, in step S901D, it is determined whether or not the variable prize device 83 (main prize slot) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable ball entry device drive unit of the variable prize device 83. If the main prize slot is not open, in step S902D, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S902D is positive, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S902D, the process proceeds to step S903D. In step S903D, it is determined whether the value of timer counter TC1 is "0". Timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the main prize slot, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 510) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S903D, the main prize slot opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904D, and the opening process of the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is executed. Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball-winning device is set to drive in order to open the large prize-winning opening.

Subsequently, the process for setting the closing conditions (settings for when the opening is enabled) for the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning slot) is executed in steps S905D and S906D. Specifically, in step S905D, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S906D, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process in step S906D, in step S907D, an open command is set to indicate that the variable prize device 83 (large prize slot) has been opened, and the opening and closing process for this large prize slot is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S401D of the normal process (see Figure 513). Based on the received open command, the notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S901D, if it is determined in step S901D that the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908D, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909D, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize-winning opening based on the detection signal from the detection sensor installed in the variable prize-winning device 83.

If a prize has been awarded, the output process for the prize award command is executed in step S910D. This prize award command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, and the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, for example, executed by the symbol display device 95, changes as a result of this prize award command.

After executing the command output process in step S910D, the process proceeds to step S911D. In step S911D, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1. In the following step S912D, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S912D, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S908D (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the main prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S913D, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is deactivated in order to close the variable prize entry device 83 (main prize opening).

In the following step S914D, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC1 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S915D, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC1 value is "0". If the determination in step S915D is negative, the process proceeds to step S916D, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S916D, a closing command is set in step S917D, and the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S401D of the normal process (Figure 513). The notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S915D, if it is determined in step S915D that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918D. In step S918D, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending waiting time is set for the ending of the open/close execution mode, so that the next game round is not started. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Subsequently, in step S919D, the ending command is set, and then the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401D of the normal process (Figure 513).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 517), after executing the opening and closing of the large prize slot in step S810D, the process proceeds to step S811D, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends immediately. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812D. In step S812D, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S813D, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process ends. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 519.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S1001D, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S1001D is positive, the process proceeds to step S1002D, where a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for high probability mode will be referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

Subsequently, a high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on this set high-frequency support mode flag, in the subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001D, if the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was a 6R regular jackpot, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 (step S1004D), and the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "40". After that, the process proceeds to step S1003D, where the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode.

After executing the process in step S1003D, the process proceeds to step S1006D, where the value of the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is cleared (reset). Then, in step S1007D, the various flags (such as the jackpot flag) for the opening/closing execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

(Processing for power supply support)
Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 520 and 521, the power supply support process in step S406D, which is performed as part of normal processing, will be described.

In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S1101D, it is determined whether or not support is currently being provided by the electric feature 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not currently being provided, a negative determination is made in step S1101D and the process proceeds to step S1102D. In step S1102D, it is determined whether or not the display of confirmed symbols has finished in the through-gate display unit DS. If the display of confirmed symbols has not finished, a negative determination is made in step S1102D and the process for supporting the electric feature ends. If the display of confirmed symbols has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102D and the process proceeds to step S1103D.

In step S1103D, it is determined whether or not support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84. If support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S1103D, and the process for this electric support function ends there. If support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84, an positive determination is made in step S1103D, and the process proceeds to step S1104D. In step S1104D, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1105D, and "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means of determining the number of times the electric function 93 has opened. If it is the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1106D, and "2" is set in the round counter RC2.

After executing steps S1105D and S1106D, the process proceeds to step S1107D, where support flags are set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S1108D, the opening start process is executed, and the main electric device support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time for the opening. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric device 93 begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S1101D, if a positive result is obtained in step S1101D, the process proceeds to step S1109D. In step S1109D, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S1108D has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S1109D, and the main power support process ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S1109D, and the process proceeds to step S1110D. Now, referring to Figure 521, the power switching process in step S1110D will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device opening and closing process, first, in step S1201D, it is determined whether the electric device 93 is open (in the open state). Whether the electric device 93 is open or not is determined by whether the electric device drive unit is in a driving state or not. If the electric device 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1202D, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric device opening and closing process is terminated. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1203D.

In step S1203D, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2, located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404, is "0". The timer counter TC2 is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric mechanism 93, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 510) is executed. If the determination in step S1203D is negative, the electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If the determination in step S1203D is positive, the process proceeds to step S1204D.

In step S1204D, the electric mechanism release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit (solenoid) is started, switching the electric mechanism 93 from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S1205D, the second prize counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S1206D, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is the high-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) (step S1207D). If it is the low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S1201D, if a positive result is obtained in step S1201D, i.e., if the electric mechanism 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1209D. In step S1209D, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1210D. In step S1210D, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no entry has occurred, the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is deducted by 1 in step S1211D, and in the following step S1212D, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S1212D, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1209D (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the conditions for ending the opening of the electric mechanism 93 have been met. In this case, in step S1213D, the output of the drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit is stopped in order to close the electric mechanism 93 (second operating opening 92).

In the following step S1214D, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC2 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC2 is "0", its value is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S1215D, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC2 value is "0". If the determination in step S1215D is negative, the process proceeds to step S1216D, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds).

If the value of the round counter RC2 is determined to be "0" in step S1215D, the process proceeds to step S1217D. In step S1217D, the ending start process is executed. This start process sets the waiting time for the ending of the electric support system. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counters located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 520, after executing the electric power switch opening/closing process in step S1110D, the process proceeds to step S1111D. In step S1111D, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the result in step S1111D is negative, the electric power support process ends immediately. If the result in step S1111D is positive, the process proceeds to step S1112D, where it is determined whether the ending waiting time set in step S1217D has elapsed. If the result in step S1112D is negative, the electric power support process ends immediately. If the result in step S1112D is positive, the process proceeds to step S1113D. In step S1113D, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the electric power support process ends. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification and performance control device 140)
Next, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 522, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification and effect control board 441, located in the notification and effect control device 140, is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 contains a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, a RAM 444 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM 443 and RAM 444 to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 442 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for controlling the hold display (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, the performance devices 97L (specifically the left-side movable performance device 800L and the right-side movable performance device 900L) located on the game board unit 80L, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element where the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip; a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not mandatory for the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 to be integrated into a single chip on the MPU 472; they may also be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process to identify the variation display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 95 based on the commands transmitted from the notification/effect control device 140, and also executes processing related to hold notifications, etc., and then executes drawing processing for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores JPEG image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 472. This work data and flags are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device, which acts as a liquid crystal display driver, integrated into the graphic display device 95. Because the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be described as a microcontroller chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP475 adjusts the timing of the MPU472, video RAM477, etc., to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM477 from the library ROM476 at a predetermined timing to display it on the graphic display device 95.

The library ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing image data such as patterns and backgrounds displayed on the pattern display device 95. This library ROM 476 stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, a color palette table referenced when determining the color representation for each dot of the bitmap image, and other similar data.

Furthermore, the image format stored in library ROM 476 is not limited to bitmap format; other formats such as JPEG are also possible.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 95. The display content of the pattern display device 95 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the general outline of the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 95a is identified by the notification/effect control device 140 by referring to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the pattern variation display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification result. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 executes a pattern variation control process as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 msec), and the general outline of the pattern variation display mode is identified in this pattern variation control process. Now, the pattern variation control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 523.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1301D, it is determined whether or not a game round is in progress, that is, whether or not the variable display of symbols for one game round is being executed on the symbol display device 95. If it is determined that a game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1302D, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1302D, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1302D, the variable start process is executed in step S1303D, and then the variable display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301D, if a positive result is obtained in step S1301D, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1304D. In step S1304D, it is determined whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative result is obtained in step S1304D, the variation display control process is terminated after executing the variation in progress processing in step S1305D. The variation in progress processing is the process for executing various effects during the game round started by the variation start processing.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1304D, the process proceeds to step S1306D. In step S1306D, the variation termination process is executed, and then this variation display control process ends. The variation termination process terminates the variation display and the ongoing effects to correspond to the lottery result for that game round (confirming the result). Specifically, the symbol display device 95 is controlled to display the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result as a confirmed result (final stop display). This process involves driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 to perform the effects corresponding to the confirmed display. Afterward, this variation termination process ends.

(Processing to initiate change)
Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 524, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the variation initiation process in step S1303D. The variation initiation process is a process that starts the game round's effects based on the receipt of the variation initiation command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the variation initiation process, the variation display mode, such as the reach display, and the combination of symbols to be displayed as the confirmed display for the game round are determined.

In the process for initiating the variation, first, in step S1401D, the variation start command received is read, and from this command, information regarding whether a reach occurred and information regarding the variation display time are identified. Also, as already explained, when the variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 162, a type command is also transmitted. In step S1401D, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and from this command, information regarding the game result, such as information regarding a probability variation jackpot result, information regarding a normal jackpot result, or information regarding a losing result, is identified. Then, in step S1401D, from the identified information, information regarding whether a jackpot was won, information regarding the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information regarding whether a reach occurred if a jackpot was not won, and information regarding the variation display time are obtained, and this obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S1402D, based on the information obtained in step S1401D, it is determined whether the result of the game round starting now corresponds to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, i.e., a probability-increasing jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, the jackpot-specific animation setting process is executed in the following step S1403D.

The jackpot setting process determines the final stopping result of the jackpot symbols (the final stopping result determination process). In the final stopping result determination process, if it is a probability variation jackpot, the stopping result where the same specific symbol combination (main symbol with an odd number) is formed on the active line L is determined as the stopping result for this game round. If it is a normal jackpot, the stopping result where the same non-specific symbol combination (main symbol with an even number) is formed on the active line L is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

When a jackpot is achieved, the type of main symbol displayed at the stop is randomly determined by a lottery or similar process. The information of the determined stop result is then stored in the stop result address storage area. In the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined by each stop result determination process is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

Furthermore, the jackpot display setting process determines the variation display pattern for the jackpot symbols (the variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, if a jackpot is achieved, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display pattern determination process for reach displays, the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the performance pattern for normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the variation display time of the variation start command received and the game result of the type command is determined. The address information of the determined variation display pattern is then stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444. Note that in the variation display pattern determination process described below, the corresponding variation display pattern table is retrieved from the variation display pattern table storage area 452 of ROM 443, and the performance pattern corresponding to the variation display time and game result is determined. The address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is then stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1402D that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1404D. In step S1404D, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S1405D, where the process for setting up the reach's animation is executed. In the process for setting up the reach's animation, the outline of the animation and the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end are determined. The process for determining the outline of the animation is the same as the process in step S1403D above, so the explanation is omitted. This process corresponds to a losing reach, so the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end is determined so that it does not result in a jackpot. In other words, the stopping result for this round is determined to be a combination of losing reach symbols that is formed on the active line L. In this case, the type of losing reach symbol combination is determined randomly by a lottery or the like. Furthermore, in making this decision, the stopping result on the active line is determined such that no identical combination of symbols occurs on the active line L, and the symbols in the same middle symbol row as those forming the reach line stop at a position shifted either forward or backward relative to the reach line. Subsequently, the information of the determined stopping result is stored in the stopping result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S1404D that a reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1406D. In step S1406D, the outline of the animation for a complete miss and the combination of symbols to be stopped at the end are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any of the processes in steps S1403D, S1405D, or S1406D, the process proceeds to step S1407D. In step S1407D, the display control (variation display control) of the symbol display device 95 is performed to execute the effects for the current game round. This initiates the variation display of each symbol row. Furthermore, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S1403D, S1405D, and S1406D, the drive control of the speaker unit 29, lamp unit 26, movable effect devices, etc., is initiated (the effects for the game round begin).

In this embodiment, the pattern display modes are linked to the display time set by the main control device 162, and are broadly classified into three types: complete miss (shortest display time), normal reach (longer display time than complete miss), and super reach (longest display time). Here, since the jackpot result is notified to the player via the reach display, it is assumed that the player's attention increases when the reach display (normal reach or super reach) appears. In particular, the super reach is differentiated from the normal reach in that it has a higher expectation of resulting in a jackpot and transitioning to a special game state. Therefore, it is assumed that players expecting to transition to a special game state will pay attention to the pattern display, hoping for a transition (development) to a super reach. The super reach is configured to develop from the normal reach, and is differentiated from the normal reach by the additional display of girl or boy characters on the pattern display device 95.

As shown in Figure 525, in this embodiment, the pattern of symbol variation before transitioning to the reach display, more specifically the pattern of variation until the left and right symbols stop, may suggest the occurrence of a normal reach or a super reach. In other words, the pattern of symbol variation is classified into four types from the viewpoint of suggesting the occurrence of a reach: normal variation, first special variation, second special variation, and third special variation. The probability of selecting these variation patterns (second type variation) is set to increase in the order of third special variation < second special variation < first special variation < normal variation, and basically, the normal variation is applied in most game rounds. For each game round, the choice of which of the following displays—normal variation display, first special variation display, second special variation display, or third special variation display—is determined in steps S1403D, S1405D, and S1406D, after the details of the first type variation display mode have been determined. In other words, the second type variation display mode is dependent on the outcome of the jackpot lottery.

The normal variation display corresponds to all outcomes: complete miss, normal reach, and super reach. The probability of transitioning to a reach display is lower compared to the first to third special variation displays. The first special variation display occurs less frequently than the normal variation display, but when it does occur, the probability of transitioning to a reach display increases significantly (e.g., 5% → 80%). The second special variation display occurs less frequently than the normal and first special variation displays, but when it occurs, a transition to a reach display is guaranteed. In other words, the second special variation display is excluded from the setting options in game rounds resulting in a complete miss. The third special variation display occurs less frequently than the normal, first, and second special variation displays, but when it occurs, a transition to a super reach is guaranteed. In other words, the third special variation display is excluded from the setting options in game rounds resulting in a complete miss or a normal reach.

As will be explained in more detail later, the transparency of each symbol displayed on screen 95a can be changed. While in normal variation displays, each symbol remains opaque from the start to the end of a game round, in the first to third special variation displays, the transparency of the symbols changes so that they become semi-transparent/opaque between the start and end of a game round. Furthermore, the timing of the change from semi-transparent to opaque differs between the first to third special variation displays. Compared to the first special variation display, the timing of the change from semi-transparent to opaque is later in the second special variation display, and even later in the third special variation display.

Next, with reference to Figures 505, 526, and 527, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the configuration of each symbol displayed on the display screen 95a. Figure 526(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the symbols displayed at the final stop (confirmation display), Figure 526(b) is a schematic diagram showing the symbols broken down into their parts, and Figure 527 is a schematic diagram showing the library ROM.

As shown in Figure 505, each of the symbols "1" through "9" (main symbols or display symbols) is composed of unique parts (unique images) specific to each symbol and common parts (common images) common to all symbols.

The unique image consists of a numerical image P1 and a character image P2, both of which are assigned the function of identification information to identify the pattern. For example, in the example shown in Figure 526, the numerical image P1 is set to "1" and the character image P2 is set to "octopus". The numerical image P1 is stored in the numerical image storage area 481 of the library ROM 476, and the character image P2 is stored in the character image storage area 482 of the library ROM 476 (see Figure 527).

Unlike the unique images, the common image does not have a design recognition function. This common image consists of a rear decoration image P3, which is displayed behind the character image P2; a base image P4, which is displayed below the character image P2 and behind the number image P1; and an effect image P6, which is displayed to form the upper surface of the base image P5. As illustrated in Figure 526, the rear decoration image P3 is an image resembling a backrest and crystals, the base image P4 is an image resembling a table, and the effect image P5 is an image resembling a magic circle. The rear decoration image P3 is stored in the rear decoration image P3 section of the library ROM 476, the base image P4 is stored in the base image storage area 484 of the library ROM 476, and the effect image P5 is stored in the effect image storage area 485 of the library ROM 476 (see Figure 527).

The numerical image P1, character image P2, rear decoration image P3, base image P4, and effect image P5, as detailed above, all have individually adjustable transparency, allowing for visibility of the background through these semi-transparent images. The background is dynamically displayed by scrolling in a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the scrolling direction of the symbols as the game progresses (time elapses), thus preventing monotony in the background display. In this embodiment, images of the sea and a beach are displayed as the background, and these images scroll horizontally. The background scrolling speed is set to be slower than the scrolling speed of the symbols, specifically, slower than the scrolling speed of the symbols that are displayed at a constant speed (high-speed scrolling, low-speed scrolling).

The background images displayed are stored in the background image storage area 488 of the library ROM 476. While the background images include images of fish and birds, during gameplay, specific fish images (e.g., sunfish) or bird images (e.g., owls) may be displayed, blending in with these other images. These specific fish and bird images are so-called "chance-up" elements, and their display suggests the occurrence of a super reach or a jackpot. These specific fish and bird images (chance-up images) are stored in the chance-up image storage area 489 of the library ROM 476. As described above, making the number image P1, character image P2, rear decoration image P3, base image P4, and effect image P5 semi-transparent, allowing the background (including the chance-up image) to be seen through the symbols, is preferable in preventing players from missing these chance-up images.

In game rounds where the first to third special variation displays are set, the display of each symbol that was stopped in the previous game round switches from a visually appealing normal display to a simplified display with a simpler appearance at the start of the game round. Specifically, in the simplified display, some of the images that make up the symbols in the normal display (hereinafter also referred to as the symbol composition images) are hidden, and the symbol composition images that are the subject of display are changed from the normal display to a simplified display in which some patterns and shapes are omitted, or they are changed from opaque to semi-transparent. Through these changes in display, the player is made aware that the game round is not a normal variation display, but corresponds to one of the first to third special variation displays. However, at this point, the first and second special variation displays are indistinguishable (unspecified) based on their content. As the game progresses, the display branches into the first, second, and third special variation displays, allowing the player to identify which of these three special variation displays is currently being shown.

(First special variation display)
Here, referring to the timing charts in Figures 528 to 530 and the schematic diagrams in Figures 531 to 537, the flow of the game round corresponding to the first special variation display and normal reach described above will be explained. Note that the game rounds exemplified in Figure 528 etc. correspond to losing results, and the player is notified that a losing result has occurred when the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) on the active line L. Note that, for the sake of explanation, the timing charts in Figures 528 to 530 are shown separately, with the behavior of the left symbol in Figure 528, the behavior of the right symbol in Figure 529, and the behavior of the middle symbol in Figure 530.

In the example shown in the timing chart of Figure 528, the game round begins at timing tda1. Specifically, the display of the changing symbols begins on the operation port display unit D1 of the main display unit 99, and the display of the changing symbols for each symbol row begins on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 (see Figures 531(a) and 531(b)). However, at this point, while the action for the start of each symbol change has begun, the scrolling display downwards (in the scrolling direction) has not yet begun. In other words, the start of the scrolling display is delayed to allow a short period of time until the above-mentioned action for the start of the change is completed.

From the timing of tda2 onward, while each of the nine symbols displayed on the display screen 95a remains stationary in its respective position, the display manner of these symbols changes. Specifically, the effect image P5, which constitutes the upper surface of the base image P4, is enlarged in the direction intersecting the scroll direction (left-right direction), and the brightness of the effect image P5 switches from a LOW level to a HI level. This emphasizes the effect image P5. Furthermore, the character image P2 moves in the opposite direction to the scroll direction (upward). In other words, the character appears as if it has jumped upward (see Figure 531(b)).

Immediately after the character image P2 begins to rise, the enlarged effect image P5 also begins to rise, following the character image P2. The character image P2 stops rising when it reaches its upper limit (a position close to the image above it) and remains stationary at that upper limit. At timing tda2, the effect image P5 strikes the character image P2, which is stationary at the upper limit, from below. Then, it passes through the character image P2 and rises above it (see Figure 531(c) → Figure 531(d)).

Here, the display mode of character image P2 changes in accordance with the movement of effect image P5 as it passes through it. Specifically, the portion of character image P2 above effect image P5 remains opaque, while the portion below effect image P5 (the portion through which effect image P5 passes) becomes semi-transparent in accordance with the movement of effect image P5. Furthermore, in the opaque portion of character image P2, a shading pattern (shadows or shadows) is displayed based on the degree of light, and this shading pattern makes character image P2 appear three-dimensional. This shading pattern is omitted when the transparency changes from opaque to semi-transparent. Additionally, the outline remains in the portion of character image P2 below effect image P5, while some of the structural lines indicating the detailed shape inside the outline are omitted. Note that the brightness of the outline and structural lines that remain displayed is changed from a LOW level to a HI level to prevent a drastic decrease in the identifiability of character image P2.

Incidentally, the brightness of effect image P5 is reduced from a high level to a low level when it passes through character image P2 (at the timing of tda3). This is a technique to shift the player's attention from effect image P5 to character image P2.

At the timing of tda4, the effect image P5 has passed through and is no longer visible. The character image P2 then becomes semi-transparent, allowing the background image to be visible through almost its entire surface (see Figure 531(d) → Figure 532(a)).

In this embodiment, the area ratio between the normally displayed portion (opaque with shading patterns, etc.) and the simplified displayed portion (semi-transparent without shading patterns, etc.) in the character image P2 changes continuously as the effect image P5 increases (over time). Specifically, the normally displayed portion decreases and the simplified displayed portion increases over time.

Furthermore, as the effect image P5 rises, the displayed portion of the rear decorative image P3 also gradually shrinks. Specifically, the portion above the effect image P5 continues to be displayed, while the portion below the effect image P5 is omitted (hidden). Then, before the effect image P5 reaches its upper limit, the entire rear decorative image P3 becomes hidden (see Figure 531(c) → Figure 531(d)).

In this way, by changing the display mode of the pattern from the normal display mode to the simplified display mode, the display of the character image P2 is simplified, and the rear decorative image P3 and effect image P5 are hidden. This switching (change) of the pattern display mode is performed for each of the left, middle, and right patterns located on the active line L, and the switching movements are configured to be synchronized (see Figures 529 and 530). Furthermore, in each pattern row, this is performed not only for the pattern located on the active line L, but also for the pattern below that pattern and the pattern above that pattern, and the switching movements of these patterns are also configured to be synchronized. In other words, the switching of the display mode is performed simultaneously for at least all patterns stationary on the display screen 95a (see Figures 531(b) → 531(c) → 531(d)).

Subsequently, at the timing of tda5, the scrolling display of each pattern row begins (see Figure 532(b) → Figure 532(c)). The scrolling display accelerates rapidly to a steady speed (high speed) (see Figure 532(c)), and this high-speed scrolling display continues for a while. When the high-speed scrolling display begins at the timing of tda5, the previously opaque number image P1 and base image P4 switch from opaque to semi-transparent, making the background visible throughout the entire pattern.

At timing tda6, after a predetermined display time has elapsed since the high-speed scrolling display of the pattern column began, the scrolling speed of the left pattern column switches from high speed to low speed, and the left pattern column transitions to low-speed scrolling display (see Figure 532(c) → Figure 532(d)). In other words, the scrolling speed of the left pattern column is reduced in preparation for the stopping display of the left pattern. At this time, the effect image P5, which was temporarily hidden, is redisplayed in a position that constitutes the upper surface of the base image P4. Subsequently, at timing tda7, the transparency of the number image P1 and the base image P4 is reduced, making them opaque.

At the subsequent timing of tda8, the character image P2 switches (changes) from simplified display to normal display. Specifically, in the variable display area of the left symbol on the display screen 95a, linear boundary images BL are displayed in two locations, at the bottom and top. Each symbol constituting the left symbol row continues to descend, traversing these boundary images BL vertically (see Figure 533(a) → Figure 533(b)).

For the symbols constituting the left-hand pattern column, the portion above the boundary image BL that overlaps with the symbol itself remains in simplified display mode, while the portion below the boundary BL (i.e., the portion that passes the boundary BL) changes from simplified display to normal display mode. In other words, for the left-hand pattern, normal and simplified displays temporarily coexist with the boundary BL as the dividing line. The area ratio between the normally displayed portion and the simplified displayed portion changes continuously as the left-hand pattern scrolls (over time). Specifically, the normally displayed portion increases while the simplified displayed portion decreases (see Figure 533(c) → Figure 533(d)). Then, at the timing of tda9, after the transition period from tda8, the entire character image P2 returns to normal display mode (see Figure 533(d)).

At the timing of tda10, immediately after the left symbol returns to its normal display, the scrolling display of the left symbol column ends, and the pre-set symbol (the "1" symbol in the example shown in Figure 534) stops and is displayed on the active line L. At this time, a bouncing action is performed by the character image P2 as a symbol stopping action on the active line L. Specifically, the character image P2 floats slightly upward and falls to its initial position on the base image P4. In conjunction with this stopping action, the previously hidden rear decoration image P3 is displayed again, and at the timing of tda12, the display mode of all the stopped left symbols switches from the simplified display mode to the normal display mode (see Figure 534(b) → Figure 534(c)).

Going back in time slightly, at the timing of tda10, when the scrolling display of the left symbol finishes, the scrolling speed of the right symbol column switches from high speed to low speed, and the right symbol column transitions to low-speed scrolling display (see Figure 533(d) → Figure 534(a)). In other words, the scrolling speed of the right symbol column is reduced in preparation for the stopping display of the right symbol. At this time, the effect image P5, which was temporarily hidden, reappears in the position that constitutes the upper surface of the base image P4. After that, at the timing of tda11, the transparency of the number image P1 and the base image P4 is reduced, making them opaque.

At the subsequent timing of tda13, the switching (change) from the simplified display to the normal display of the character image P2 begins. Specifically, in the variable display area of the right symbol on the display screen 95a, linear boundary images BL are displayed in two places, at the bottom and top, and each symbol constituting the right symbol row continues to descend by traversing these boundary images BL (see Figures 534(c) → 534(d) → 535(a)).

For the symbols constituting the right-hand pattern column, the portion above the boundary image BL that overlaps with the symbol itself remains in simplified display mode, while the portion below the boundary BL (i.e., the portion that has passed the boundary BL) changes from simplified display to normal display mode. In other words, for the right-hand pattern, normal and simplified displays temporarily coexist with the boundary BL as the dividing line. The area ratio between the normally displayed portion and the simplified displayed portion changes continuously as the right-hand pattern scrolls (as time progresses). Specifically, the normally displayed portion increases while the simplified displayed portion decreases (see Figures 534(d) → 535(a) → 535(b)). Then, at the timing of tda14, after the transition period from tda13, the entire character image P2 returns to normal display mode (see Figure 535(b)).

At the timing of tda15, immediately after the right symbol returns to its normal display, the scrolling display of the right symbol column ends, and the pre-set symbol (the "1" symbol in the example shown in Figure 535) stops and is displayed on the active line L. This forms a reach line with the left and right symbols, transitioning to the reach display described above. At this time, a bouncing action is performed by the character image P2 as a symbol stopping action on the active line L. Specifically, the character image P2 floats slightly upward and falls to its initial position on the base image P4. In conjunction with this stopping action, the previously hidden rear decoration image P3 is displayed again, and at the timing of tda16, the display mode of both the stopped left symbols switches from the simplified display mode to the normal display mode (see Figure 535(d) → Figure 536(a)).

Going back in time again, at the timing of tda15, when the scrolling display of the right symbol finishes, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol column switches from high speed to low speed, and the middle symbol column transitions to a low-speed scrolling display (see Figure 535(b) → Figure 535(c)). In other words, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol column is reduced in preparation for the middle symbol to stop display. At this time, the effect image P5, which was temporarily hidden, reappears in the position that constitutes the upper surface of the base image P4. Subsequently, at the timing of tda18, after the timing of tda17, which is the timing for development to a super reach, the transparency of the number image P1 and base image P4 is reduced, making them opaque.

At the subsequent timing of tda19, the character image P2 switches (changes) from simplified display to normal display. Specifically, linear boundary images BL are displayed in two locations, at the bottom and top, within the variable display area of the central symbol on the display screen 95a. Each symbol constituting the central symbol row continues to descend, traversing these boundary images BL vertically (see Figures 536(a) → 536(b) → 536(c)).

For the symbols constituting the middle symbol row, the portion above the boundary image BL that overlaps with the symbol itself remains in simplified display mode, while the portion below the boundary BL (i.e., the portion that has passed the boundary BL) changes from simplified display to normal display mode. In other words, for the middle symbol, normal and simplified displays temporarily coexist with the boundary BL as the dividing line. The area ratio between the normally displayed portion and the simplified displayed portion changes continuously as the middle symbol scrolls (as time progresses). Specifically, the normally displayed portion increases while the simplified displayed portion decreases (see Figures 536(b) → 536(c) → 536(d)). Then, at the timing of tda20, after the transition period from tda19, the entire character image P2 returns to normal display mode (see Figure 536(d)).

Immediately after the right symbol returns to its normal display at the timing of tda21, the scrolling display of the middle symbol column ends, and the pre-set symbol (the "2" symbol in the example shown in Figure 537) stops and is displayed on the active line L. At this time, a bouncing action is performed by the character image P2 as a symbol stopping action on the active line L. Specifically, the character image P2 floats slightly upward and falls to its initial position on the base image P4 (see Figure 537(b) → Figure 537(c)). In conjunction with this stopping action, the rear decorative image P3, which had been hidden, is displayed again, and at the timing of tda22, the display mode of all the stopped middle symbols switches from the simplified display mode to the normal display mode (see Figure 537(c) → Figure 537(d)). At this timing, the symbol combination corresponding to the game result (losing result) for this game round is displayed as the final stop display.

The second special variation display will be explained, focusing on its differences from the first special variation display described in detail above. Figure 538 will be referred to as appropriate in the following explanation. Figure 538 is a schematic diagram illustrating a part of the flow of the second special variation display.

(Second special variation display)
In the second special variation display, as illustrated in Figure 538(a), when the scrolling display of the left symbol column is completed, the character image P2 constituting the left symbol remains in simplified display mode and the rear decorative image P3 remains hidden. In other words, in a game round in which the special variation display is applied, if the switch from the simplified display to the normal display of the left symbol does not begin before the left symbol stops, the first special variation display is negated, and either the second or third special variation display is determined.

After the left symbol is displayed in a stationary state, the right symbol is displayed in a stationary state. However, the switching of the display modes of the left and right symbols begins while the right symbol column is in a slow-scrolling display state. Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 538(b), multiple linear boundary images BL extending to the left and right are displayed in the variable display area of the left symbol column and the variable display area of the right symbol column. Here, the display position of the boundary images BL displayed in the variable display area of the right symbol column is fixed, similar to the case of the first special variable display, and the right symbol continues to descend by traversing these boundary images BL vertically. In contrast, the boundary images BL displayed in the variable display area of the left symbol column move upward. The speed of this movement is the same as the scrolling speed of the right symbol column during slow-scrolling display. In other words, in the variable display area of the left symbol column, the relative position between the left symbol and the boundary images BL changes as the boundary images BL move in place of the stationary left symbol. Specifically, in character image P2, the portion above the boundary image BL that overlaps with character image P2 is displayed in a simplified format, while the portion below it is displayed in a normal format. As the boundary image BL rises, the portion displayed in the simplified format decreases, while the portion displayed in the normal format increases.

In the second special variation display shown in this embodiment, the switching of the display mode of the left symbol and the switching of the display mode of the right symbol are synchronized. That is, the start timing, end timing, and switching speed of the switching are all the same. As illustrated in Figures 538(b) and 538(c), after both the left and right character images P2 switch from simplified display to normal display, the scrolling display of the right symbol ends, and a reach line is formed. At this point, when the right symbol column stops, a stop action (bound action) occurs in both the left and right character images P2, and the rear decorative images P3 are redisplayed in conjunction with this stop action. The stop action and the redisplay of the rear decorative images P3 are synchronized between the left and right symbols, and the switching to the simplified display mode of the left symbol and the switching to the simplified display mode of the right symbol are completed simultaneously. (See Figure 538(d)).

The third special variation display will be explained, focusing on its differences from the second special variation display described in detail above. Figure 539 will be referred to as appropriate in the following explanation. Figure 539 is a schematic diagram illustrating a part of the flow of the third special variation display.

(Third Special Variation Display)
In the third special variation display, as illustrated in Figure 539(a), when the scrolling display of the left pattern column is completed, the character image P2 constituting the left pattern remains in a simplified display state and the rear decorative image P3 remains hidden. In this respect, it is the same as the second special variation display.

After the left symbol stops, the right symbol will then stop. In the second special variation display described above, the switching of the display modes for the left and right symbols began while the right symbol column was scrolling slowly. However, in the third special variation display, as shown in Figures 539(a) and 539(b), the scrolling of the right symbol column ends before the switching of display modes begins. That is, at the point when the scrolling of the right symbol column ends, the character image P2 constituting the right symbol remains in a simplified display state, and the background decorative image P3 remains hidden. At this point, it becomes clear that this game round corresponds to the third special variation display.

Subsequently, as illustrated in Figure 539(c), multiple linear boundary images BL extending horizontally are displayed in the variable display areas of the left and right pattern columns. These boundary images BL all move upward at the same speed. Specifically, this movement speed is the same as the scrolling speed during slow-speed scrolling of the patterns. In the variable display areas of the left and right pattern columns, the relative positions of the left and right patterns and the boundary images BL change as the boundary images BL move in place of the stationary left and right patterns. As the boundary images BL move, the area ratio between the simplified display and the normal display in the character image P2 changes. Specifically, in the character image P2, the area above the boundary image BL overlapping with the character image P2 is simplified, while the area below it is normally displayed. As the boundary images BL rise, the simplified display area decreases and the normally displayed area increases.

In the third special variable display shown in this embodiment, as illustrated in Figures 539(c) and 539(d), the switching of the display mode of the left symbol and the switching of the display mode of the right symbol are synchronized. That is, the start timing, end timing, and switching speed of the switching are all the same. After both the left and right character images P2 switch from simplified display to normal display, the scrolling display of the right symbol ends, and a reach line is formed. At this point, when the right symbol column stops, a stop action (bound action) occurs in both the left and right character images P2, and the rear decorative images P3 are redisplayed in conjunction with this stop action. The stop action and the redisplay of the rear decorative images P3 are synchronized between the left and right symbols, and the switching to the simplified display mode of the left symbol and the switching to the simplified display mode of the right symbol are completed simultaneously. (See Figure 538(d)).

According to the 58th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

In game rounds where the first special variation display is applied, if the pattern sequence is displayed with high-speed scrolling on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, each pattern constituting that sequence will be displayed in a simplified form. Simplifying the display form during high-speed scrolling is preferable in preventing the identification of individual patterns from becoming excessively difficult. Conversely, when the patterns transition to low-speed scrolling, pattern identification becomes easier. By changing the pattern display form to a normal display form with a good appearance in conjunction with this transition to low-speed scrolling, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's attention through the design of the patterns. In light of these circumstances, it is also possible to refer to the high-speed scrolling display as a low-identity scrolling display (low-identity variation display) and the low-speed scrolling display as a high-identity scrolling display (high-identity variation display).

Having both a standard display mode and a simplified display mode (a simplified version of the standard display mode) for the symbols is preferable in suppressing the misconception that the symbols have been replaced with different ones before and after the display mode switch. In this embodiment, in particular, the display mode switching process is clearly indicated to the player both when switching from the standard display mode to the simplified display mode and when switching from the simplified display mode to the standard display mode, further effectively suppressing the aforementioned misconception.

When switching between display modes, making the visual difference before and after the switch significant can enhance the impact of the change. However, simply increasing the difference in display modes can confuse players. In this embodiment, the display mode changes continuously (gradually) when switching between the normal and simplified display modes, and this process is not omitted. Therefore, while increasing the difference in display modes, it is possible to effectively suppress the potential for this to confuse players.

Regarding the symbolic image components that make up a pattern, a portion of the unique image (number image P1) specific to that pattern is avoided simplification regardless of whether the pattern is displayed in its normal or simplified form. By making the shape and size of the number image P1 common to both display forms, it is possible to prevent players from mistakenly believing that the pattern is completely different before and after the display form change.

When switching the display mode of the pattern from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode, the display position of the character image P2 changes, thereby altering the area ratio between the simplified and normal display portions of the character image P2. This configuration, which changes the appearance of the pattern, allows for a novel behavior when switching the pattern display mode. This further enhances the effect of using the pattern (pattern display device 95) to increase attention to the game.

Regarding character image P2, the size of the simplified display portion and the normal display portion are changed in the direction of the pattern's scrolling, i.e., in the direction intersecting the pattern arrangement direction. This configuration prevents the area of focus for the player from expanding in the direction intersecting the scrolling direction when the area ratio is changed as described above, thereby enabling suitable coexistence with other pattern rows.

The number image P1, which forms part of the pattern along with the character image P2, is configured to maintain the same size regardless of the pattern's position in the scrolling direction. By ensuring that some of the images constituting the pattern remain unchanged in size, these images can be used as a visual reference (indicator) when determining changes in area ratio.

The aforementioned change in area ratio occurs during slow-speed scrolling of the image, but not during high-speed scrolling. This configuration effectively reduces the chance of missing the change in area ratio, thereby allowing the various effects described above to be effectively achieved.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, by including a display mode in which the background can be seen through the pattern, it is possible to enlarge the pattern while suppressing the loss of the background display function. This is advantageous, for example, when diversifying the effects by displaying icons or characters for effect in the background, as it alleviates constraints on the display position of those images. Here, during slow scrolling, the semi-transparent portion of the character image P2 gradually shrinks, indicating that stopping is imminent and suggesting the pattern to be displayed on the active line L. In this suggestion, the portion of the background visible through the pattern gradually shrinks. In this way, the player's attention can be drawn back from other images such as the background to the pattern, thus effectively demonstrating the suggestion function.

The design consists of a number image P1, a character image P2, a background decoration image P3, a base image P4, and an effect image P5. When the design begins to scroll, the background decoration image P3 is hidden, simplifying the design. When the design stops, the background decoration image P3 is displayed, significantly changing the design's appearance. However, when the design changes from a flashy state to a simpler state, the visual appeal of the design may decrease. In this regard, when the design is displayed in a simplified form, the decrease in player attention due to the reduced visual appeal can be effectively suppressed by increasing the player's attention through an action at the start of the design's variation.

<Variation 1>
In the 58th embodiment described above, each design was composed of a unique image specific to each design (digit image P1, character image P2) and a common image common to all designs (rear decoration image P3, base image P4, effect image P5), but the design is not limited to this. It is sufficient as long as the design identification function can be ensured, and the common image can be omitted.

Furthermore, when switching between the normal and simplified display modes of the design, instead of using a configuration that combines images that are subject to simplified display and images that are not, it is also possible to configure the system so that all images are subject to simplified display when switching between the normal and simplified display modes.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 58th embodiment described above, when switching the display mode of the pattern from the normal display mode to the simplified display mode, the shading (shadow, gradient) of the character image P2 is turned off. However, the relationship between the normal display mode and the simplified display mode may be changed as follows. That is, for example, the character image may be switched from a realistic image to a stylized image, or it may be switched to an extracted image (wireframe image) in which only the outline of the character image is extracted.

Furthermore, in the simplified display configuration, the character image was changed from opaque to semi-transparent to allow visibility of the background and other elements through the character image. However, the function for switching transparency can be omitted.

<Example 3>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the display mode of the character images constituting the pattern is returned from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode during slow scrolling of the pattern, but the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display mode of the character images constituting the pattern to return from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode during high-speed scrolling of the pattern.

Furthermore, while the system is configured to return the symbol to its normal display mode by switching the rear decorative image P3, which constitutes the symbol, from a hidden state to a displayed state when the symbol is stopped, it is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system to return the symbol to its normal display mode by switching the rear decorative image P3 from a hidden state to a displayed state during scrolling display.

<Modification 4>
When the game transitions to a Super Reach, the left and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and a character such as a girl is displayed in the center of the display screen 95a. In this case, as shown in Figure 540(a), the middle symbol may be displayed with the character image P2 shown, while the other images (number image P1, rear decoration image P3, base image P4, effect image P5) are hidden, resulting in a simplified display mode. When the middle symbol stops and the Super Reach ends (see Figure 540(b)), the reduced display of the left and right symbols is canceled, and each symbol returns to the active line L (see Figure 540(c)). At this time, the display mode of the middle symbol can be configured to switch from the simplified display mode to the normal display mode.

<Example 5>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the display mode of the character image P2 is changed in order to switch from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode in order to transition from a high-speed scrolling display to a low-speed scrolling display, and during the low-speed scrolling, that is, while the display mode of the pattern is scrolling at a constant speed. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 541, the display mode of the character image P2 may be changed from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode while the pattern is being decelerated toward the active line L.

<Modification 6>
In the second and third special variation displays shown in the 58th embodiment described above, the timing for switching the display mode of the symbols from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode is determined by the notification and performance control device 140. Alternatively, or in addition to these second and third special variation displays, it is also possible to configure the system so that the display mode of the symbols is switched from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode triggered by the player's operation (for example, operation of the performance button 35).

For example, in a situation where the left symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L in its simplified display mode, and the right symbol is displayed in its simplified display mode while fluctuating, the player may be prompted to operate the performance button 35. If the performance button 35 is operated during this prompt, the display mode of the left symbol may be changed from the simplified display mode to the normal display mode, and the display mode of the right symbol may also be changed from the simplified display mode to the normal display mode. In this case, by synchronizing the changes in the display modes of the left and right symbols, similar to the second special fluctuation display described above, the impact of the display mode change can be effectively enhanced.

<Example 7>
In the first special variable display shown in the 58th embodiment described above, the action of the symbol when starting the variable display of a symbol that is currently stopped, specifically the start action (corresponding to a special action) which is a preceding operation for switching the display mode, and the action of the symbol when stopping the variable display, specifically the stop action (corresponding to a special action) which is a preceding operation for switching the display mode, are configured to be different, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the start action and the stop action the same.

<Difference 8>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the character image P2 is moved in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction of the pattern during the initial action. The direction in which the character image P2 is moved during the initial action may be changed to the same direction as the scrolling direction, or to a direction that intersects with the scrolling direction. The direction in which the character image P2 is moved during the stopping action may also be changed to a direction that intersects with the scrolling direction.

<Difference 9>
In the 58th embodiment described above, when switching between a normal display mode and a simplified display mode for the pattern, the area ratio of the simplified display portion and the normal display portion of the character image P2 changes. In other words, the distinction between the simplified display portion and the normal display portion changes. The boundary between the simplified display portion and the normal display portion is configured to be displaced in the same direction as the scroll direction, but the simplified display portion and the normal display portion may be configured to coexist on the left and right, and the boundary between the simplified display portion and the normal display portion may be configured to be displaced in a direction intersecting the scroll direction (for example, the horizontal direction).

<Modification 10>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the switching between the normal display mode and the simplified display mode is synchronized for the group of symbols constituting the left symbol column, but this does not negate the possibility of staggering the timing of the display mode switching for each symbol constituting the left symbol column. Similarly, the switching between the normal display mode and the simplified display mode is synchronized for the group of symbols constituting the middle symbol column, but this does not negate the possibility of staggering the timing of the display mode switching for each symbol constituting the middle symbol column. Furthermore, the switching between the normal display mode and the simplified display mode is synchronized for the group of symbols constituting the right symbol column, but this does not negate the possibility of staggering the timing of the display mode switching for each symbol constituting the right symbol column.

<Variation 11>
In the 58th embodiment described above, when changing the character image P2 between simplified display and normal display, the display mode is changed so that the ratio of the simplified display portion to the normal display portion increases/decreases continuously. However, the display mode may also be changed so that the ratio of the simplified display portion to the normal display portion increases/decreases in stages.

<Modified example 12>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row, but the order in which the symbols are stopped is arbitrary. It is also possible to configure the system to stop multiple symbol rows (for example, the left symbol row and the right symbol row) simultaneously. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to synchronize the changes in the display patterns of the left and right symbol rows.

<Modification 13>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the pattern is displayed in a scrolling manner, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the pattern in the pattern display area of the display screen 95a can be configured to rotate horizontally or vertically, and the pattern displayed in the pattern display area can be replaced with the next pattern with each rotation.

<Modification 14>
The above-mentioned special variation display (e.g., the first special variation display) may be applied to game rounds played when the number of reserved balls related to the operating ports 91 and 92 is less than or equal to a predetermined number less than the upper limit, while the above-mentioned special variation display (e.g., the first special variation display) may not be applied to game rounds played when the number of reserved balls is greater than the predetermined number.

<Modified example 15>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the timing of starting the scrolling display of the symbols is delayed in game rounds in which the first to third types of special variation displays are applied, compared to game rounds in which the normal variation display is applied. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that the scrolling display of the symbols starts at the start of the game round, even in game rounds in which the first to third types of special variation displays are applied.

<Variation 16>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the display mode of the pattern is switched from the normal display mode to the simplified display mode before the high-speed scrolling display starts. However, it is also possible to switch the display mode of the pattern from the normal display mode to the simplified display mode during the high-speed scrolling display.

<Variation 17>
In the 58th embodiment described above, the direction of scrolling of the pattern sequence and the direction of scrolling of the background were different, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the direction of scrolling of the pattern sequence and the direction of scrolling of the background to be the same.

<Variation 18>
The system may be configured so that the above-mentioned first to third special variation displays are applied only in normal gameplay states compatible with low-frequency support mode. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the above-mentioned first to third special variation displays are also applied in normal gameplay states compatible with high-frequency support mode. For example, the system may be configured so that the above-mentioned first to third special variation displays are applied as one of the chance-up effects in some cases when transitioning to a reach display.

<Modified example 19>
It is also possible to configure the system so that the character image P2 is changed from normal display to simplified display in certain sections of the movement path when displaying a sequence of patterns in a scrolling manner.

<Modified example 20>
In configurations where some images of each design are hidden by an action after the stop display, it is also possible to target the rear decorative image P3 with the action.

<Modified example 21>
As a switching pattern for switching the display mode of the pattern from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode, a switching pattern may be added that skips the stopping action and switches directly to the normal display mode.

<Modified example 22>
Regarding the relationship between the execution time (runtime) of the bound action of character image P2, which is a stop action, and the execution time (runtime) of the jump action of character image P2, which is a start action, it is preferable to configure it so that the former is longer than the latter, but this does not necessarily mean that a configuration in which the latter is longer than the former is not permissible.

<Modification 23>
Depending on the game state and display mode during play, the starting and stopping actions may be omitted (restricted) as appropriate. For example, in high-frequency support mode, the display time for the changing symbols for each spin is significantly reduced. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode, it is advisable to omit at least one of the starting and stopping actions to prevent the behavior of the symbols from becoming difficult to understand due to the reduced display time.

<Modification 24>
If a so-called pre-announcement effect that hints at the outcome of a later game is performed during the current game round, and if the announcement effect is linked to the display of changing symbols, it is possible to omit the above-mentioned start and stop actions to extend the execution period of the announcement effect.

<Modified Example 25>
If a so-called pseudo-continuous variation display occurs during a game round in which the pattern of changing symbols → temporary stop display → changing symbols is executed multiple times in a row, it is preferable to configure the system so that the above-mentioned starting action and stopping action are omitted.

<Modified example 26>
It is also possible to configure the system so that a so-called button stock effect is executed at a point in time when the display mode of the symbols switches from a simplified display mode to a normal display mode, thereby triggering the execution of an effect linked to the operation of an effect button (an operation-responsive effect). For example, if there are three or more display modes for the symbols, each with a gradual difference in the expected probability of a jackpot, and an effect button is operated at a predetermined timing while the stock is active, the display mode of the symbols can be switched to another display mode (a display mode with a higher probability of success) as a result of that operation.

<Modification 27>
The technical concept described in the 58th embodiment above can also be applied to symbols other than those used to indicate the game result for each game round. For example, it may be applied to images that are displayed separately from the symbols during a game round.

<Embodiment 59>
The 59th embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), a type of amusement machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 542 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and Figures 543 and 544 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded state. Note that, for convenience, the components within the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 543.

As shown in Figure 542, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main unit 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting boards on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a mandatory component of the pachinko machine 10; the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall.

The main body of the gaming machine 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a manner that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 18 is provided at the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. These upper support fittings 17 and 18 constitute a support mechanism, and this support mechanism allows the main body of the gaming machine 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side being the rotation base end and the right side being the rotation tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 543 and 544).

As shown in Figure 543, the main body of the gaming machine 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 positioned in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 positioned behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in a front view, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported within the inner frame 13, allowing it to rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front. The rear pack unit 15 is also rotatably supported within the inner frame 13, allowing it to rotate backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the leading end when viewed from the front (see Figure 544).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Figure 543, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame 20 whose outer shape is almost identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window 21 is formed in the central part of the frame 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be seen from the front, and this window 21 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds these glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that divides the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear sections, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, while the game area PE is double-covered from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23.

Furthermore, it is not necessarily required to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Moreover, the number of glass panels is arbitrary; it may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and to position them facing each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of glass panels.

As shown in Figure 542, various light-emitting means, such as lamps, are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a ring-shaped illuminated section 26 containing LEDs or other light-emitting means is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The ring-shaped illuminated section 26 lights up or flashes in response to changes in the game state, such as during a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Furthermore, an error indicator lamp section 27, which lights up in the event of a predetermined error, is provided at the center of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and at the very top of the pachinko machine 10. Prize ball lamp sections 28, which light up during prize ball payouts, are provided on its left and right sides. Additionally, speaker sections 29, which output sound effects corresponding to the game state, are provided in positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28.

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 are arranged vertically, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 33, opening upwards, is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34, also opening upwards, is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described later), arranging them in a line, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism (described later). The lower tray 34 has the function of storing any excess game balls in the upper tray 33.

To the right of the lower bulge 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided, protruding toward the front. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism, which will be described later.

As shown in Figure 543, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door-side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving opening is formed at its upper corner, projecting rearward and opening upward. This receiving opening is partitioned left and right by a partition wall, thereby separating the entrance to the front door-side upper tray passage from the entrance to the front door-side lower tray passage. Game balls entering the front door-side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the front door-side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14, at the pivot base end, projection shafts are provided at its upper and lower ends. These projection shafts constitute the assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Furthermore, on the rear side of the front door frame 14, at the pivot tip end, as shown in Figure 2, multiple hook fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged in a vertical direction. These hook fittings 49 constitute the locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 543 and 544. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50, which has an outer shape that is roughly rectangular, similar to the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a small gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The fascia board is positioned below the resin base 50 (more specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 rests on top of the fascia board.

Support brackets 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base side on the front surface of the resin base 50. The support brackets 51 and 52 have axial holes, and the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 is inserted into these axial holes, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can rotate relative to the inner frame 13.

The front of the resin base 50, on the rotating end side, is provided with insertion holes for inserting the hook fittings 49 located on the back of the front door frame 14. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in Figure 544, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook fittings 49 engage with the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion holes, locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable state. The locking device 55 also has an inner frame hook member 57 extending to the rear of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 57 catch on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, locking the main part of the game machine 12 in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. The locking device 55 is configured such that turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 to the right unlocks the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 to the left unlocks the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11.

A roughly oval-shaped window opening 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and this window opening 54 is closed from the rear by the game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 consists of a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front surface of the plywood, and its front surface is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window opening 54. A game area PE is formed on this exposed part, i.e., the front surface of the game board 60, through which the game balls flow. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to wood; it can also be made of synthetic resin.

The following describes the game board 60 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE) based on Figure 545. Figure 545 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in the direction of its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry opening 61, an operating ball entry section 62, 63, a variable prize entry device 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. When a ball enters an entry section such as the general prize entry opening 61, the operating ball entry section 62, 63, or the variable prize entry device 64, 65, this is detected by a detection sensor, and based on the detection result, the player is granted a reward such as the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls.

Specifically, when a ball enters the general prize entry slot 61, 10 game balls are dispensed; when a ball enters the activated ball entry slot 62, 2 game balls are dispensed; when a ball enters the activated ball entry slot 63, 1 game ball is dispensed; when a ball enters the upper variable prize entry device 64, 10 game balls are dispensed; and when a ball enters the lower variable prize entry device 65, 5 game balls are dispensed.

An outlet 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60. Game balls that do not enter the various ball entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "ball entry" means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the case where the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening. In the following description, to clearly distinguish it from the entry of game balls into the outlet 68, ball entry into the general prize entry point 61, the operating ball entry points 62 and 63, the variable prize entry devices 64 and 65, and the through gate 66 will also be referred to as "prize entry."

Furthermore, the game board 60 is equipped with numerous nails 69 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These nails 69 and windmills, among other components, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that entry into the general prize pockets 61, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability. Note that the general prize pockets 61 are located only on the left route (described later). Game balls launched on the left route can enter the general prize pockets 61, while game balls launched on the right route (described later) cannot enter the general prize pockets 61.

The variable display unit 67 is positioned in the center of the game board 60, and the ball entry sections 62, 63, etc., are arranged around the variable display unit 67. In the following description, the ball entry section 62 will be referred to as the "first ball entry section 62," the ball entry section 63 as the "second ball entry section 63," the opening of the first ball entry section 62 as the "first opening 62a," and the opening of the second ball entry section 63 as the "second opening 63a," as appropriate.

The first operating ball entry section 62 is broadly divided into a lower operating ball entry section 62L located below the variable display unit 67 and a right operating ball entry section 62R located to the right of the variable display unit 67. Of these, the right operating ball entry section 62R is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 71, which serves as an opening/closing ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

The electric mechanism 71 comprises a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter. The shutter's position can be changed by the drive unit, allowing switching between an open state (receiving state) where balls can enter the right-side operating ball entry section 62R (the right operating opening 62aR constituting the first operating opening 62a) and a closed state (non-receiving state) where ball entry is impossible. Furthermore, the electric mechanism 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 62R may be switchable between a state where ball entry into the right operating opening 62aR is easy and a state where ball entry is more difficult.

In the game area PE (the right route, which will be described in detail later), the through gate 66 is positioned upstream of the right-side operating ball entry section 62R, specifically to the side (right) of the variable display unit 67. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass through vertically. Game balls that enter the through gate 66 are not discharged from the game area PE but flow downstream within the game area PE. If a winning combination is determined by a lottery triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 66, the electric mechanism 71 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

On the right route, the upper variable prize-winning device 64 is positioned between the through gate 66 and the right-side operating ball entry section 62R. The upper variable prize-winning device 64 has a large upper prize-winning opening that allows multiple game balls to enter simultaneously, and is equipped with an opening/closing mechanism to open and close this large upper prize-winning opening. This opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large prize-winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state or acceptance state) where game balls can or easily enter, and a closed state (non-auxiliary state or non-acceptance state) where entry is impossible or difficult. Furthermore, the shutter is connected to a variable prize-winning drive unit (specifically a solenoid), and under normal circumstances, the shutter remains in the closed state. It is switched to the open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or opening/closing execution state).

On the right route, downstream of the right-side operating ball entry section 62R, the lower variable prize entry device 65 is positioned. The lower variable prize entry device 65 has a large lower prize entry opening that allows multiple game balls to enter simultaneously, and is equipped with an opening/closing mechanism to open and close this large lower prize entry opening. This opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large prize entry opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (acceptance state) where game balls can enter and a closed state (non-acceptance state) where balls cannot enter. Furthermore, the shutter is connected to a variable prize entry drive unit (specifically a solenoid), and under normal circumstances, the shutter remains in the closed state. It is switched to the open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or opening/closing execution state).

Here, the "open/close execution mode" refers to the mode entered when a jackpot or special win occurs. In this open/close execution mode, the variable prize winning device 65 is set to open for a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, or 3 rounds in this embodiment), with one round defined as the elapsed of a predetermined period (30 seconds or 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) or the winning of a predetermined number of balls (6 balls in this embodiment).

As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the special game state to which the player transitions when a jackpot or special jackpot is achieved is broadly divided into two types: one corresponding to the first jackpot mode and one corresponding to the second jackpot mode, each with a different variable prize-winning device to be opened and opening/closing mechanism. When a jackpot is achieved, the player transitions to the special game state corresponding to the first jackpot mode. In the special game state corresponding to the first jackpot mode (first special game state), the upper variable prize-winning device 64 is set as the target to be opened, and the opening is repeated for a maximum of multiple rounds, with one round defined as the elapsed time (specifically 30 seconds) or the occurrence of a predetermined number of balls (specifically 6 balls). In contrast, when a special jackpot is achieved, the player transitions to the special game state corresponding to the second jackpot mode. In the special game state corresponding to the second prize mode (second special game state), the lower variable prize device 65 is set as the target for opening, and the second special game state ends when either a predetermined opening time (specifically 0.8 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number of balls (specifically 6 balls) have entered the device. Thus, the first special game state is set to have a relatively high frequency of prize entries, while the second special game state is set to have a relatively low frequency of prize entries, resulting in a difference in the number of prize balls that can be won.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a pattern display device 75 that displays a variable pattern (variable display) triggered by a ball entering the operating ball entry sections 62 and 63.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. In the central part of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, symbols are displayed, for example, arranged at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are displayed in a variable manner by scrolling horizontally. When a jackpot or special win occurs, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and stopped on a pre-set active line, and the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode described above. Note that the symbol display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device; it may also be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

Furthermore, a center frame 76 is positioned around the pattern display device 75 within the variable display unit 67. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from its front side. In this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the game board 60, resulting in a gap between the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 that is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game ball from colliding with the pattern display device 75 as it flows through the game area PE, and also divides the flow path of the game ball through the game area PE into two main routes: a right route that bypasses the variable display unit 67 (specifically the center frame 76) from the right, and a left route that bypasses it from the left.

Furthermore, the right-side operating ball entry section 62R, the second operating ball entry section 63, the variable prize winning devices 64 and 65, and the through gate 66 are located on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from entering these right-side operating ball entry section 62R, the second operating ball entry section 63, the variable prize winning devices 64 and 65, and the through gate 66. On the other hand, the first operating ball entry section 62 is located on the left route, and game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from entering the first operating ball entry section 62 (the lower operating opening 62aL that constitutes the first operating opening 62a). The player can advance the game to their advantage by selecting the launch destination (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route or the left route according to the game situation. As will be described in detail later, in the game machine shown in this embodiment, the speaker section 29 and the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 suggest to the player the route on which the game ball should be launched according to the game state.

A main display unit 81 is mounted on a protective member for the guide rail 100, which is located outside the game area PE. The front of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically the rear glass panel 23), which allows the game area PE to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. A main display section D, which displays predetermined patterns, is provided on this facing portion. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in Figure 545(b), the main display unit D comprises a first operation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery results based on balls entering the first operation port 62 (first operation port 62a), and a second operation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery results based on balls entering the second operation port 63 (second operation port 63a).

In the display unit D1 for the first operating port, a change in the pattern is displayed as a trigger when a ball enters the first operating port 62 (first operating port 62a). The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the ball entering the first operating port 62 is clearly displayed as the change in the pattern display stops. If the result of the internal lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 62 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the change in the display unit D1 for the first operating port stops, a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, and then the machine transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the display unit D2 for the second operation slot, a change in the pattern is displayed as a trigger when a ball enters the second operation ball entry section 63. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the ball entering the second operation ball entry section 63 (second operation slot 63a) is clearly displayed as the result of the change in the pattern display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the ball entering the second operation ball entry section 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot or a special win, the change in the display unit D2 for the second operation slot stops, and after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode described above according to the result.

Here, based on a ball entering either of the operating ball entry sections 62 or 63, a variable display is initiated on the corresponding operating port display section D1 or D2, and one game round is considered to occur when the predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display stops. However, one game round is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration where a single display area is provided and a variable display is performed on that single display area regardless of which operating ball entry section 62 or 63 occurs, one game round is considered to occur when the variable display is initiated on that single display area and stops while displaying the predetermined stop result (more specifically, until the confirmation display ends).

The main display unit 81's main display section D is equipped with a first operation port retention count display section S1 and a second operation port retention count display section S2. The first operation port retention count display section S1 corresponds to the first operation port 62a, and the number of times a game ball enters the first operation port 62a is retained up to a maximum of four times. The number of retained balls is displayed by the illumination of the first operation port retention count display section S1. The second operation port retention count display section S2 corresponds to the second operation port 63a, and the number of times a game ball enters the second operation port 63a is retained up to a maximum of four times. The number of retained balls is displayed by the illumination of the second operation port retention count display section S2.

The main display unit 81's main display section D is equipped with a through-gate display section DS in addition to the various display sections mentioned above. The through-gate display section DS displays a changing pattern triggered by a ball entering the through-gate 66. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the ball entering the through-gate 66 is clearly displayed as the stopping of this pattern. If the result of the internal lottery based on the ball entering the through-gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric mechanism open state, the through-gate display section DS displays a predetermined stopping result, the pattern stops, and then the machine transitions to the electric mechanism open state. In the electric mechanism open state, the electric mechanism 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 62R is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 66 is retained up to a maximum of four times. The main display unit 81's main display section D is provided with a through gate retention count display section SS that displays the number of retained balls.

To explain the configuration of the inner frame 13 again using Figure 543, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided below the mounting area of the game board 60 on the resin base 50. This mechanism launches game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41. The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly consists of a solenoid 111 that launches game balls positioned at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball feeding device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch standby position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, thereby integrating it with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle, tilted upwards toward the game board 60. A ball stopper is positioned near the downstream end (i.e., lower end) of the launch rail 112 to hold the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 in the aforementioned launch standby position. The solenoid 111 is positioned further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension and retraction direction, causing the game ball, positioned in the launch standby position, to be launched towards the game board 60, specifically towards the guide rail 100 attached to the game board 60.

The guide rail 100 demarcates the game area PE so that its outer shape is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102, positioned opposite each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. These two rails 101 and 102 demarcate a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion open to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located at the top of the game area PE. The game ball, launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111, is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, it is possible to launch the game ball to either the area to the left of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (left route) or the area to the right of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (right route).

Furthermore, in the game board 60, a reverse-return prevention member 106 is attached to the front of the exit section, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning to the guide passage 103. This prevents subsequent game balls from being obstructed by game balls that have already reached the game area PE.

The guide rail 100 (see Figure 545(a)) and the launch rail 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board 60. In other words, the two rails 100 and 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset to the left and right near the lower edge of the game board 60. This brings both rails 100 and 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board 60 while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

Below the gap formed in this manner, a foul ball passage 46 is provided. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and instead returns to the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, these foul balls will enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. The foul ball passage 46 connects to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage 46 are discharged into the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This suppresses interference between foul balls and the next game ball to be launched.

In the resin base 50, a through-hole is formed to the left of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14), extending through the resin base 50 in the front-to-back direction. A passage-forming member 121 is installed in this through-hole. The passage-forming member 121 is screw-fastened to the resin base 50 and has a main body-side upper tray passage and a main body-side lower tray passage. The upstream ends of these main body-side upper tray passages and main body-side lower tray passages lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Furthermore, the receiving portion of the passage-forming unit 45, attached to the front door frame 14, fits into the lower part of the passage-forming member 121. Below the main body-side upper tray passage is the front door-side upper tray passage, and below the main body-side lower tray passage is the front door-side upper tray passage.

In the resin base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening/closing member 124 is attached to open and close the upper tray passage on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the main body side. The opening/closing member 124 is supported so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at its lower end, and is further provided with a biasing member that biases it to a forward position that closes the upper tray passage on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the main body side. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises up as shown in the figure, closing the upper tray passage on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the main body side. This prevents the inconvenience of game balls spilling out if the front door frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the upper tray passage on the main body side or the lower tray passage on the main body side. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by a receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this configuration, the upper tray passage on the main unit side and the upper tray passage on the front door side are connected, and furthermore, the lower tray passage on the main unit side and the lower tray passage on the front door side are connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described based on Figure 544.

On the rear side of the resin base 50, at the pivot end, bearing brackets 132 are arranged vertically side by side. Each bearing bracket 132 has a bearing portion formed at a vertical spacing, and these bearing portions allow the back pack unit 15 to rotatably attach to the inner frame 13.

Multiple locking brackets 135 are provided on the back of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking brackets 135 as described above. Now, the configuration of the back of the game board 60 will be explained.

A display control device is mounted on a variable display unit 67 located in the center of the game board 60, covering the variable display unit 67 from behind (illustration omitted). Behind the display control device, a notification and effect control unit 142 is mounted, overlapping the display control device. The notification and effect control unit 142 comprises a notification and effect control device 143 and a mounting base 144, with the notification and effect control device 143 mounted on the mounting base 144.

The notification and performance control device 143 is equipped with a notification and performance control board that controls sound, lamp displays, and the display control device according to instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. The notification and performance control board is housed in a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in Figure 544, a collection plate 150 is provided on the back of the game board 60, below the variable display unit 67. The collection plate 150 is equipped with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have entered various prize slots, and a detection mechanism for detecting the entry of game balls into various prize slots, etc.

The game ball retrieval mechanism is explained as follows: The collection plate 150 is provided with individual retrieval passages corresponding to various ball entry points, such as the general prize entry point 61. These retrieval passages descend from these entry points along the back of the game board 60, defining the trajectory of the game balls. Each retrieval passage converges near the bottom of the game board 60, and all game balls that pass through the entry points, such as the general prize entry point 61, are collected at the bottom of the game board 60 via these retrieval passages. The exits of each retrieval passage are open downwards, and beyond these exits (more specifically, below the game board 60) are discharge passages, which will be described later. The game balls collected at the bottom of the game board 60 via the retrieval passages are guided to the discharge passages. Similarly, the out-out opening 68 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not enter any prize entry points are also guided to the discharge passage via the out-out opening 68.

To explain the detection mechanism, the collection plate 150 is equipped with detection sensors that correspond individually to various ball entry points, such as the general prize entry point 61. These various detection sensors are positioned along the collection passages leading to the ball entry points, such as the general prize entry point 61, and detect the passage of game balls within the defined ball drop path in these collection passages. More specifically, each detection sensor detects the entry of a game ball into the ball entry point, such as the general prize entry point 61, by detecting the ball passing through a detection area located along the collection passage. Specifically, magnetic sensors are employed to detect changes in the magnetic field that occur when a game ball passes through the detection area.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control unit 160 (more specifically, the main control unit) located on the rear side of the game board 60, and the detection signals from these sensors are output to the main control unit. The main control unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main control unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the manifold plate 150 from the rear, and consists of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control unit 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control unit 162 has a main control board that has a function to control the main game (main control circuit) and a function to monitor the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit). This main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The circuit board box 163 comprises a box base (front case) with a roughly rectangular shape and a box cover (back case) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing mechanism, thereby sealing the circuit board box 163. Multiple sealing mechanisms are provided on the long side of the circuit board box 163, and at least one of them is used for the sealing process.

The sealing section can be configured in any way that makes it impossible to open the box base and the box cover, but the box base and the box cover are made impossible to open by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole that makes up the sealing section. The sealing process by the sealing section prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to reseal the box even after it has been opened. In other words, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the multiple sealing sections. When the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the contained main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connection between the sealing section in which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing sections is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. After that, when resealing, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing section. If a record of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is kept in the circuit board box 163, it will be easy to detect unauthorized opening by examining the circuit board box 163.

Multiple connecting pieces are provided on one short side of the circuit board box 163, protruding laterally. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one with multiple connected pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the connecting pieces and connected pieces.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described based on Figures 543 and 544.

As shown in Figure 543, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the rear pack unit 15. The rear pack unit 15 includes a rear pack 201, to which the dispensing mechanism 202, discharge passage panel, and control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and, as shown in Figure 544, has a base portion 211 to which the dispensing mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the top are closed and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 on its upper right side. The external terminal plate 213 is equipped with various output terminals, through which various signals are output to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Furthermore, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower locking pins at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting these locking pins into the bearing fittings 132 (more specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported relative to the inner frame 13. Additionally, the rotating tip of the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener for fastening to a fastening hole in the inner frame 13. By fitting this fastener into the fastening hole, the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The dispensing mechanism 202 is positioned on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The dispensing mechanism 202 includes a tank 221 located at the top of the back pack 201, with an upward opening. Game balls supplied from the island equipment in the gaming hall are sequentially replenished into this tank 221. Below the tank 221, a tank rail is connected, sloping gently downstream. A case rail extending vertically is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A dispensing device 222 is provided at the downstream end of the case rail. Game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section located on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a dispensing passage located downstream of the dispensing device 222.

The game ball distribution unit has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later. The inner opening is connected to the upper tray 33 via the upper tray passage on the main body side and the upper tray passage on the front door side, and the outer opening is connected to the lower tray 34 via the lower tray passage on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the front door side.

As shown in Figure 544, the discharge passage panel and the control unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from front to back. The discharge passage panel 203 has a discharge passage formed on the side facing the control unit 204, which is open to the rear. This opening in the discharge passage is closed by the control unit 204. The discharge passage is designed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the amusement hall, and the game balls, guided from the aforementioned collection passage to the discharge passage, are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through this discharge passage.

The control unit assembly 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base, on which the payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are mounted. These two devices are arranged front to back, with the payout control device 181 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the dispensing control device 181, a dispensing control board for controlling the dispensing device 222 is housed within a circuit board box, and a state reset switch provided on the dispensing control board protrudes outside the circuit board box. For example, when a dispensing error occurs in the dispensing device 222, such as a ball jam, pressing the state reset switch will resolve the ball jam.

The power supply and launch control device 191 houses a power supply and launch control board within a circuit board box. This board generates and outputs the necessary power for various control devices, and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. The power supply and launch control device 191 is also equipped with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a data storage function, allowing it to retain its state at the time of a power outage and to return to that state upon power restoration. Therefore, for example, if the power is shut off using the normal procedure, such as when the amusement hall closes for the day, the state before the shutdown is retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the right-side operating ball entry section 62R, the second operating ball entry section 63, and the variable prize-winning devices 64 and 65, all located on the right route, is distinctive. The following provides supplementary explanations of these various ball entry sections with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 546 to 549. Figure 546 is a front view of the upper variable prize-winning device 64, Figure 547 is a front view of the ball entry unit, Figure 548(a) is a perspective view of the right-side operating ball entry section 62R from the front, Figure 548(b) is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure in the right-side operating ball entry section 62R, and Figure 548 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between passage length and passage time.

(Upper variable prize winning device 64)
The upper variable prize winning device 64 has a housing 310 in which a ball passage 312 through which game balls pass is formed, and this housing 310 is attached to the game board 60 so as to bulge out from the front of the game board 60 toward the front of the game machine. The housing 310 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the game balls flowing down the ball passage 312 can be seen through the outer part of the housing 310.

In the portion of the housing 310 that bulges outwards toward the front of the game board 60, a large upper prize opening 311 is formed, which constitutes the entrance to the ball passage 312. The large upper prize opening 311 faces the middle section (the vertically extending portion) of the right route from the side of the game machine (right side), and a shutter 315 is positioned to cover the large upper prize opening 311 from the side (right side) of the ball flow area in the right route.

The shutter 315 is pivotally supported so as to be able to rotate parallel to the front of the game board 60. This rotation around the pivot point allows it to shift between a closed position, which prevents game balls from entering the large upper prize opening 311, and an open position, which allows game balls to enter the large upper prize opening 311.

The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main control unit 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control unit 162. The shutter 315 is configured to remain in the closed position when the main control unit 162 is not outputting a drive signal (de-energized state).

When the shutter 315 is positioned in the open position (open state), approximately half of the flow area (flow path) in the middle section of the right route is interrupted by the shutter 315, and almost all of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the upper variable prize device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper large prize opening 311.

The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at an intermediate point. A flow path switching member 316 is provided at this branching point, which can switch the destination of the game balls between the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314. The drive unit (specifically a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. When the main control device 162 is not outputting a drive signal (de-energized state), the flow path switching member 316 is configured to wait in a protruding position, extending into the ball passage 312.

When the flow path switching member 316 is positioned in a protruding location, the inlet of the second branch passage 314 is blocked by the flow path switching member 316. In this state, the inflow of game balls that have reached the branching section into the second branch passage 314 is prevented, and these game balls flow into the first branch passage 313.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive signal for the drive unit of the flow path switching member 316, the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 312 is avoided, and the entrance portion of the second branch passage 314 is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that have reached the branching point are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 313, and instead flow into the second branch passage 314.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is predetermined depending on the type of jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot result (described later), the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and is then configured to return to the protruding position immediately afterward. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game balls that have entered the upper jackpot opening 311 to reach the branching section. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot result, inflow into the second branching passage 314 is effectively avoided.

In contrast, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot (as described later), the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position. However, it is stipulated that it will then remain in the protruding position until the shutter 315 returns to the closed position. Therefore, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, most of the game balls that flowed into the upper prize entry opening 311 will flow into the second branch passage 314.

Upstream detection sensors 317 are installed in the ball passage 312 upstream of the branching point, while downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are installed in the downstream section, specifically in the first branching passage 313 and the second branching passage 314. The upstream detection sensors 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are connected to the main control unit 162. The main control unit 162 determines whether a ball has entered the upper variable prize winning device 64 based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 317, and dispenses a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. Furthermore, the remaining game balls are monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensors 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318 and 319.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, if it is determined that a ball has entered the second branch passage 314 during the opening/closing execution mode based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 318 attached to the first branch passage 313, the lottery mode switches from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As will be described in detail later, in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the low probability mode, allowing the player to play the game more advantageously. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the second branch passage 314 will be referred to as the "advantageous ball entry section 314".

Most of the game balls launched along the right route that pass through the upper variable prize-winning device 64 will head towards the ball-entry unit 70 located downstream of the upper variable prize-winning device 64 along the right route. The ball-entry unit 70 is formed by integrating the right-side operating ball-entry section 62R, the second operating ball-entry section 63, and the lower variable prize-winning device 65, which constitute the first operating ball-entry section 62 described above. The ball-entry unit 70 will now be described with reference to Figure 547.

(Ball entry unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321, which constitutes a part of the right route (more specifically, the downstream region), is formed, and the housing 320 is fixed to the game board 60 in a state that it bulges forward beyond the front surface of the game board 60. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) to the center (left side) of the game area PE. The upper right part of the bulging portion of the housing 320 is formed so that the entrance portion 321a of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) faces upward, and the lower left part is formed so that the exit portion 321b of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) faces left.

The exit portion 321b is located directly below the lower operating ball entry portion 62L, which constitutes the first operating ball entry portion 62. Game balls flowing out from the exit portion 321b are guided below the lower operating ball entry portion 62L. This prevents game balls that have passed through the ball passage 321 from entering the lower operating ball entry portion 62L.

Furthermore, the housing 320 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, the game balls flowing down the ball passage 321) can be seen from the front of the game machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity between the right-side operating ball entry section 62R, the second operating ball entry section 63, and the lower variable prize entry device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque, and the internal structure may be made difficult or impossible to see.

Regarding the right route, it branches into two flow paths above the ball entry unit 70. Specifically, it branches into an inner route through which the game balls flow down toward the entrance portion 321a of the ball passage 321, and an outer route through which the game balls flow down along the upper surface of the ball entry unit 70 (housing 320).

A second operating port 63 is positioned at the top of the housing 320, with the second operating port 63a facing the center (left side) of the game area PE. As will be described in detail later, a portion of the game balls flowing down the outer route flows into the second operating port 63a. Furthermore, game balls that have passed through this outer route are guided downstream (downward) from the lower operating port 62L that constitutes the first operating port 62, thus preventing them from entering the lower operating port 62L.

The aforementioned ball passage 321 has defined passage width and height to prevent multiple game balls from passing through the same location simultaneously, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is created at an intermediate position in the direction of the passage. Specifically, the ball passage 321 consists of a horizontally elongated upstream passage section 322 that forms the upstream portion of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the game machine, and a horizontally elongated downstream passage section 324 that forms the downstream portion of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the game machine. These sections are offset vertically and horizontally so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side, creating a difference in height. The upstream passage section 322 and the downstream passage section 324 are connected by an intermediate passage section 323 (corresponding to a "connecting passage section") that extends vertically.

The upstream passage section 322 is adjacent to the right-side operating ball entry section 62R. Specifically, the right operating opening 62aR of the right-side operating ball entry section 62R is open upward, and the upstream passage section 322 is formed so as to cross above the right operating opening 62aR. The electric mechanism 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 62R has a shutter 331 that can slide forward and backward (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and an electric mechanism drive unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331. The electric mechanism drive unit 332 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driven state (de-excited state) where no drive signal is output from the main control device 162, the shutter 331 is positioned in a closed position, covering the right operating opening 62aR from above. When a drive signal is output and the electric mechanism drive unit 332 enters a driven state (excited state), the shutter 331 moves (retracts) to an open position that does not cover the right operating opening 62aR.

Here, when the shutter 331 is in the closed position, the shutter 331 forms the bottom of the upstream passage 322, i.e., the rolling surface of the game ball. More specifically, as shown in Figure 548(a), the housing 320 is provided with an upstream bottom 322a that forms the bottom upstream of the right operating port 62aR in the passage direction of the upstream passage 322, and a downstream bottom 322b that forms the bottom downstream of the right operating port 62aR. These upstream bottom 322a, downstream bottom 322b, and shutter 331 form the rolling surface of the game ball. In the following description, the region in the upstream passage 322 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331, i.e., the region in the upstream passage 322 facing the right operating port 62aR across the shutter 331, is referred to as the "first specific region SE1" (see Figure 549).

When the shutter 331 is positioned in the open position and the upstream passage section 322 (specifically the rolling surface) is interrupted, a game ball that reaches the first specific area SE1 will find it difficult to move in the direction of the upstream passage section 322 and will flow into the right operating opening 62aR.

In this embodiment, the first specific region SE1 is designed to decelerate the game ball passing through it, thereby increasing the chances of it entering the right-hand opening 62aR. This design will be explained below with reference to Figure 548(b). In Figure 548(b), the path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated using a dashed line.

The front wall portion 335 and the rear wall portion 336 of the housing 320, which demarcate the passage of the upstream passage portion 322, are provided with protruding portions 335a and 336a that project toward the first specific area SE1. The protruding portions 335a and 336a extend vertically perpendicular to the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. In the following description, the protruding portion 335a provided on the front wall portion 335 will be referred to as the "front protruding portion 335a," and the protruding portion 336a provided on the rear wall portion 336 will be referred to as the "rear protruding portion 336a."

The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall portion 336 and the front protrusion portion 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall portion 335 and the rear protrusion portion 336a is also set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. Multiple front protrusion portions 335a (two in this embodiment) are arranged in the direction of the upstream passage portion 322 (guide direction) with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. Similarly, multiple rear protrusion portions 336a (two in this embodiment) are arranged in the direction of the upstream passage portion 322 (guide direction) with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. By arranging these front and rear protrusion portions 335a and 336a alternately, the flow path of the game ball is designed to meander back and forth relative to the direction of the upstream passage portion 322.

Here, the sum of the protrusion amounts of the front projection 335a, the rear projection 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball is configured to be greater than the passage width of the upstream passage 322 (D3 < D). This prevents the game ball from running through the first specific area SE1 while avoiding collision with the projections 335a and 336a.

Game balls passing through the upstream passage 322 collide with the protruding sections 335a and 336a. Such collisions reduce (decelerate) the speed of the game balls in the first specific region SE1. In other words, the first specific region SE1 of the upstream passage 322 functions as a deceleration section that forcibly slows down the game balls. By configuring the system to decelerate game balls passing through the upstream passage 322 in this way, the time required for the game balls to pass through the first specific region SE1 is extended compared to the case where the protruding sections 335a and 336a are absent.

Furthermore, the protruding sections 335a and 336a are positioned to be offset towards the intermediate passage section 323 in the first specific region SE1. This configuration ensures that the game balls decelerate directly upstream of the intermediate passage section 323.

Game balls that do not flow into the right-hand opening 62aR continue to move along the ball passage 321, and most of them reach the downstream passage section 324. Now, referring again to Figure 547, the downstream passage section 324 and its associated lower variable prize winning device 65 will be described.

The lower large prize opening 341 of the lower variable prize device 65 is open upwards, and a downstream passage 324 is formed so as to cross above the lower large prize opening 341. The lower variable prize device 65 comprises a shutter 345 that can slide forward and backward (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive unit for the shutter 345 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driven state (de-excited state) where no drive signal is output from the main control device 162, the shutter 345 is positioned in a closed position covering the lower large prize opening 341 from above. When a drive signal is output and the drive unit enters a driven state (excited state), it moves (retracts) to an open position that does not cover the lower large prize opening 341.

Here, when the shutter 345 is in the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom of the downstream passage section 324, i.e., the rolling surface for the game balls. More specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom that forms the bottom of the downstream passage section 324 downstream of the lower large prize opening 341 in the passage direction, and the rolling surface for the game balls is formed by this downstream bottom and the shutter 345. In the following explanation, the region in the downstream passage section 324 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345, i.e., the region in the downstream passage section 324 facing the lower large prize opening 341 across the shutter 345, is referred to as the "second specific region SE2".

When the shutter 345 is positioned in the open position, and the downstream passage section 324 (specifically the rolling surface) is interrupted, game balls that reach the second specific area SE2 will find it difficult to move in the direction of the downstream passage section 324 and will flow into the lower large prize opening 341.

Furthermore, the second specific region SE2 also has a deceleration section consisting of protruding sections 375a and 376a (see Figure 549), but the specific configuration of this deceleration section is the same as that of the first specific region SE1, so the explanation will be based on that.

The aforementioned intermediate passage section 323 extends upward from the upstream end of the shutter 345. The left-hand passage wall forming the intermediate passage section 323 is located on the extension of the upstream passage section 322. Game balls passing through the upstream passage section 322 change direction upon impact with this left-hand passage wall and then fall through the intermediate passage section 323 towards the shutter 345.

An opening is formed in the right-hand passage wall that forms the intermediate passage 323, allowing game balls to pass through. A portion of the game balls passing through the intermediate passage 323 flow into this opening. Between the right-hand operating ball entry section 62R and the lower variable prize entry device 65, an discharge passage is formed through which the game balls that flow into the opening are discharged from the ball entry unit 70. A portion of the game balls flowing down the ball passage 321 are discharged from the ball entry unit 70 via the opening → discharge passage before reaching the lower variable prize entry device 65 (shutter 345). Game balls passing through this discharge passage are guided to the back of the game board 60, thus preventing them from moving to the out-out opening 68.

Next, referring to Figure 549, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the relationship between the length of each section of the ball passage 321 and the time required for the game ball to pass through. Figure 549 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the ball entry unit 70 viewed from the front. In the following explanation, the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 will be referred to as "required time T1," and the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 will be referred to as "required time T2."

The degree of deceleration in the first specific area SE1 is defined as follows: Specifically, the time T1 required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is defined to be longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec). As will be described in detail later, when the upper variable prize entry device 64 is maintained in the closed state, approximately half of the game balls launched to the right route are allocated to the inner route, and almost all of these allocated game balls reach the first specific area SE1. Taking these circumstances into consideration, the time T1 required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is defined to be slightly longer than twice the launch cycle (1.2 sec) (specifically, 1.3 sec). This is a measure to generate approximately one ball entry when the right-side operating ball entry section 62R is open during high-frequency support mode.

The degree of deceleration in the second specific area SE2 is defined as follows: Specifically, the time T2 required for the game ball to pass through the second specific area SE2 is defined to be longer than the game ball's launch cycle (0.6 sec). As described above, under conditions where both the upper variable prize-winning device 64 and the right-side operating ball-entry section 62R are kept closed, approximately half of the game balls launched to the right route are allocated to the inner route, and almost all of these allocated game balls reach the second specific area SE2. Taking these circumstances into consideration, the time T1 required for the game ball to pass through the second specific area SE2 is defined to be slightly longer than twice the launch cycle (1.2 sec) (specifically, 1.3 sec). This is a measure to generate approximately one ball entry when the lower variable prize-winning device 65 is open during the low-frequency support mode.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 550.

The main control board 601, located in the main control unit 162, is equipped with an MPU 602. The MPU 602 contains a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, a RAM 604 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 603, and various counter circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and random number generators. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and RAM 604, may be provided by separate components.

The MPU 602 is provided with both input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, the dispensing control device 181, and various detection sensors, all of which are located on the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605. Furthermore, as part of the various detection sensors, the following are connected: detection sensor 391a for the general prize entry opening 61, detection sensor 391b for the first operating ball entry section 62, detection sensor 391c for the second operating ball entry section 63, detection sensors 317-318 for the upper variable prize entry device 64, detection sensor 391d for the lower variable prize entry device 65, and detection sensor 391e for the through gate 66. Based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors 317-318 and 391a-391e, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each entry section. The MPU 602 also performs a jackpot lottery based on ball entry into the first operating ball entry section 62 (first operating opening 62a) and the second operating ball entry section 63 (second operating opening 63a).

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, and a notification/performance control device 143 (specifically, the notification/performance control board 651). The payout control device 181 outputs a prize ball command, for example, based on the result of the prize ball entry determination to the prize ball entry section. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. Furthermore, when a win is detected in the general prize slot 61, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output; when a win is detected in the upper large prize slot 311, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 104 game balls is output; when a win is detected in the lower large prize slot 341, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 5 game balls is output; when a win is detected in the first operating slot 62a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 2 game balls is output; and when a win is detected in the second operating slot 63a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball is output.

The notification and performance control device 143 outputs various commands, including a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced when outputting these commands. Details of these commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and this predetermined number of bytes contains various information.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the following: an electric mechanism drive unit 332 that drives the electric mechanism 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 62R; a variable prize drive unit 451 that drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable prize entry device 64; a flow path switching drive unit 452 that drives the flow path switching member 316 of the upper variable prize entry device 64; a variable prize drive unit 461 that drives the shutter 345 of the lower variable prize entry device 65; and the main display unit 81. The main control board 601 is equipped with various driver circuits, and the MPU 602 performs drive control of these various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit 451 of the upper variable prize device 64 and the variable prize drive unit 461 of the lower variable prize device 65 so that the upper large prize opening 311 and the lower large prize opening 341 are opened and closed. Furthermore, for example, during each game round, the MPU 602 controls the display of the first operation opening display unit D1 and the second operation opening display unit D2 in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is equipped with output terminals for signal output during state transitions, including a jackpot signal output terminal. For example, if the game result is a jackpot, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side via the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, under normal circumstances, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot occurs. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power outage monitoring board 605 acts as a relay between the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch control device 191, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 191, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls via the payout device 222 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming arcade. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 601, the payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a predetermined power path.

Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 (specifically the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, the power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launching handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the amount of operation (rotation) of the game ball launching handle 41, and the launch strength (launch speed) of the game balls by the game ball launching mechanism 110 is determined based on the information from this operation level detection sensor. The touch sensor is configured to output information when a player is touching the game ball launching handle 41, and the power supply and launch control device 191 is configured to determine whether or not a player is touching the game ball launching handle 41 based on this information. Based on information from the touch sensor, the system determines that the player is touching the ball launching handle 41, and if the operation level detection sensor also determines that the ball launching handle 41 is being operated, then the launch of the balls is permitted.

Furthermore, information from the touch sensor is transmitted via the power supply/launch control device 191 to the main control device 162, and subsequently to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710.

The notification and performance control device 143 comprises a notification and performance control board 651 equipped with an MPU 652. The MPU 652 contains a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 653.

The notification and performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 installed on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. Specifically, the notification and performance control device 143 determines the pattern of change in the pattern display device 75 and the final stopping pattern of the pattern to be displayed (for example, the type of pattern combination) based on various commands input from the main control device 162. It also determines whether a reach occurs and the content of the reach performance, and then transmits the determined content to the display control device 710 by adding it to the above commands.

The display control device 710 has a display control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU contains a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM (memory for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM), a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, and a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the pattern display device 75) based on commands input from the notification and performance control device 143.

Here, we will explain the display content of the pattern display device 75. In the central portion (variable display area) of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, three rows of patterns are set: upper, middle, and lower. On the display screen 75a, the patterns in each of these rows are displayed in a variable manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, from left to right) with periodicity.

Furthermore, the display screen 75a displays three symbols stopped for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed. The symbols stop changing in the order of the top symbol row → bottom symbol row → middle symbol row. Once the symbol changes for all symbol rows have finished and a predetermined combination of symbols has formed on the active lines, a video or other visual representation indicating the transition to a special game state corresponding to the jackpot or special win result is displayed.

Furthermore, considering that the display of variations in each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row can be referred to as the first symbol row, the lower symbol row as the second symbol row, and the middle symbol row as the third symbol row.

Incidentally, the manner in which the patterns are displayed on the pattern display device 75 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of the pattern display within each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the pattern display within each pattern row may be set to vertical.

The symbol change/stop display in the central part of the display screen 75a is configured to switch between a mode corresponding to the number of game rounds related to the first operation port 62a and a mode corresponding to the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 63a, depending on the type of normal game state. Specifically, in the first, third, and fourth normal game states described later, the symbol change/stop display in the central part of the display screen 75a corresponds to the number of game rounds related to the first operation port 62a, while in the second normal game state, the symbol change/stop display in the central part of the display screen corresponds to the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 63a.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. This hold display area is divided into sections, each containing four unit hold display areas, the same number as the maximum number of holdable balls (4 balls) when a game ball enters the first or second operation opening 62a or 63a. These sections are arranged horizontally.

Specifically, the reserved ball display area is configured with a first unit reserved ball display area, a second unit reserved ball display area, a third unit reserved ball display area, and a fourth unit reserved ball display area. For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the activation opening is 1, the predetermined reserved ball image (reserved ball icon) is displayed only in the first unit reserved ball display area. If the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the activation opening 62a is 4, the predetermined reserved ball image (reserved ball icon) is displayed in all of the first to fourth unit reserved ball display areas. Note that the display/hide status of these reserved ball images switches depending on the type of game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state, described later). Specifically, in each normal game state, a significant difference in the display time of the fluctuations is created so that the game rounds primarily performed switch between those related to winning at the first operation opening 62a and those related to winning at the second operation opening 63a. Regarding the reserved images, those corresponding to the primary operation opening during gameplay are displayed, while others are hidden. Incidentally, this does not apply to the reserved number display sections S1 and S2 in the main display unit D; the display of the reserved number is never omitted in any normal game state.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 551, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 as described above will be explained.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as a lottery for transitioning to a special game state (open/close execution mode), setting the display on the main display unit 81 (main display section D), and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 75. Specifically, it uses a random number counter C1 used for the lottery for big wins and special wins, a win type counter C2 used to determine the type of win when a big win occurs, a random number counter C3 used for the lottery for the occurrence of a reach display when the symbol display device 75 is fluctuating, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time of the fluctuation of the symbols in the operation openings D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 and the display time of the fluctuation of the symbols on the symbol display device 75. Furthermore, it uses an open random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric mechanism 71 attached to the right-side operation ball entry section 62R.

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 604.

The RAM 604 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 632 consisting of a first operation port reserved area Ra, a second operation port reserved area Rb, a first execution area AE1 for the first operation port reserved area Ra, a second execution area AE2 for the second operation port reserved area Rb, and a total reserved ball storage area. The values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in this reserved ball storage area 632 in chronological order, according to the history of game balls entering the first operation port 62a or the second operation port 63a.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of "0" to "99," and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "99"). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62a or the second operation opening 63a. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62a, it is stored in the first operation opening reserved area Ra of the RAM 604, and when a game ball enters the second operation opening 63a, it is stored in the second operation opening reserved area Rb of the RAM 604.

The random numbers that result in a jackpot and the random numbers that result in a special jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 603. Here, the contents of the win/loss table will be explained using the schematic diagrams in Figures 552 and 553. The win/loss table includes a win/loss table group for the first operation port 62a (see Figure 552) and a win/loss table for the second operation port 63a (see Figure 553). In the lottery based on ball entry into the first operation port 62a, the win/loss table for the first operation port 62a is referenced, and in the lottery based on ball entry into the second operation port 63a, the win/loss table for the second operation port 63a is referenced.

(Validity table for the first operating port)
First, let's refer to Figure 552(a) and explain the case when the lottery mode is set to low probability mode. When the win/loss table for low probability mode is referenced during the lottery, there is one random number value that results in a big win (i.e., winning information), and zero random number values that result in a special win (i.e., winning information). All other random number values correspond to losing results. As a result, the probability of a big win is 1/100 and the probability of a special win is 0/100.

Next, referring to Figure 552(b), we will explain the case where the lottery mode is set to high probability mode. When the win/loss table for high probability mode is referenced during the lottery, the number of random numbers resulting in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) is 10, and the number of random numbers resulting in a special jackpot (i.e., winning information) is 0. All other random numbers correspond to losing results. As a result, the jackpot probability is 10/100 and the special jackpot probability is 0/100.

(Validity table for the second operating port)
First, let's refer to Figure 553(a) and explain the case when the lottery mode is set to low probability mode. When the win/loss table for low probability mode is referenced during the lottery, there is one random number value that results in a big win (i.e., winning information), and 50 random number values that result in a special win (i.e., winning information). All other random number values correspond to losing results. As a result, the probability of a big win is 1/100, the probability of a special win is 50/100, and the probability of losing is 49/100.

Next, referring to Figure 553(b), we will explain the case where the lottery mode is set to high probability mode. When the win/loss table for high probability mode is referenced during the lottery, there are 10 random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information), 50 random numbers that result in a special jackpot (i.e., winning information), and all other random numbers correspond to losing results. As a result, the jackpot probability is 10/100, the special jackpot probability is 50/100, and the losing probability is 40/100.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 551, the winning type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of "0" to "99," and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "99"). The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62a or the second operation opening 63a. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62a, it is stored in the first operation opening reserved area Ra of the RAM 604, and when a game ball enters the second operation opening 63a, it is stored in the second operation opening reserved area Rb of the RAM 604.

The distribution destination of game results for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 622, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in ROM 603. In this embodiment, the type of jackpot result is determined by referring to the win type counter C2 and the distribution table. The jackpot results include 3R probability variation jackpot result A, 3R probability variation jackpot result B, 2R probability variation jackpot result A, 2R probability variation jackpot result B, 2R normal jackpot result A, and 2R normal jackpot result B.

The distribution tables for each operating port are broadly divided into a distribution table for the first operating port 62a and a distribution table for the second operating port 63a.

(Distribution table for the first operating port)
As shown in Figure 554(a), for the distribution table for the first operation port, of the values of the winning type counter C2 from "0" to "29", a total of 15 values from "0" to "14" correspond to 3R normal jackpot results, a total of 14 values from "15" to "28" correspond to 3R probability variation jackpot result A, and "29" corresponds to 3R probability variation jackpot result B.

(Distribution table for the second operating port)
As shown in Figure 554(b), for the distribution table for the second operation port, of the values of the winning type counter C2 from "0" to "29", a total of 15 values from "0" to "14" correspond to 3R probability variation jackpot result A, a total of 14 values from "15" to "29" correspond to 3R probability variation jackpot result A, and "29" corresponds to 3R probability variation jackpot result B.

As shown in Figure 555(a), the 3R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a time-saving game state corresponding to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. This time-saving game state continues until the number of game rounds played reaches a predetermined number (100 rounds in this embodiment), and upon reaching the predetermined number, it transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode described above.

Result A of the 3R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot result that transitions to the first high-probability game state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. Result B of the 3R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot result that transitions to the second high-probability game state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. Both the first and second high-probability game states continue until the next jackpot result occurs. More specifically, the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to "99999," and the system is configured to effectively continue until the next jackpot result occurs.

Furthermore, for the 3R regular jackpot results, 3R probability variation jackpot result A, and 3R probability variation jackpot result B, the winning mode, which is the control mode in the special game state, corresponds to the high-frequency winning mode. The high-frequency winning mode is a winning mode where the target of opening is the upper variable winning device 64 and the opening time is 30 seconds (see Figure 555(b)), and the round game is repeated three times. In these special game states corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, approximately 420 winning balls are awarded to the player by continuously firing game balls towards the right route.

Here, if a ball enters the second operating opening 63a, a special win result occurs in approximately half of the game rounds. When a special win result occurs, the winning mode transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode. The low-frequency winning mode is a winning mode in which the target of opening is the lower variable winning device 65 and the opening time is 0.8 seconds (see Figure 555(b)), and approximately one game ball enters the lower large winning opening 341 after one round of gameplay is executed. In the special game state corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, approximately five prize balls are awarded to the player by continuing to launch game balls toward the right route. Note that the special win result does not have a function to change the type of lottery mode or support mode. In other words, basically, after the special game state corresponding to the special win result ends, the game returns to the normal game state before transitioning to that special game state, and the configuration does not have a substantial effect on switching between lottery modes or support modes. In the following explanation, the special game state entered as a result of a jackpot will be referred to as the "First Special Game State," and the special game state entered as a result of a special win will be referred to as the "Second Special Game State," as appropriate.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 551, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62a or the second operation opening 63a. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62a, it is stored in the first operation opening reserved area Ra of the RAM 604, and when a game ball enters the second operation opening 63a, it is stored in the second operation opening reserved area Rb of the RAM 604. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state).

Here, "reach display" refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of displaying (or varying) the variation of symbols (pictures), where, in a game round where the game result corresponds to an open/close execution mode, the stop display result after the variation display can become a special display result. This state is intended to make the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the special display result, occurring between the start of the variation display (or variation display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and the display of the stop display result.

In other words, this refers to a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, combinations of symbols that have the potential to form a winning combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode are displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in a variable state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying combinations of symbols that have the potential to form a winning combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a pre-set active line within the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

To further explain the display content on display screen 75a, first, the symbol variation display ends in the right symbol column, and then, when the symbol variation display ends in the left symbol column, a reach line is formed when a main symbol with a number that constitutes a winning symbol combination is displayed to stop on one of the active lines. When this reach line is formed, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol column is performed, indicating a reach. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol column ends, with the main symbols forming the reach line, along with the main symbols with numbers that constitute a winning symbol combination, being displayed to stop on the reach line.

Furthermore, the reach display includes methods such as displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, then showing the remaining symbol variations in the remaining symbol rows, and displaying predetermined characters as animations in the background screen to create a reach effect, or displaying the combination of reach symbols in a reduced size or hidden, and then displaying predetermined characters as animations across approximately the entire display screen 75a to create a reach effect. Additionally, the decision of whether or not to display a pre-announcement using predetermined images, such as predetermined characters, when a reach display is being shown or before a reach display may be made using a reach random number counter C3 or other counters.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time of the patterns in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 (when the pattern variation by the pattern display device 75 begins).

The opening random number counter C4 for the electric mechanism 71 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 249, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The opening random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism memory area 633 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, an opening lottery (support lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 71 to the open state, by referring to the value of the stored opening random number counter C4 and the support lottery table (win/loss information group) stored in the win/loss table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. Note that the probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (specifically 25/250), indicating that high-frequency support mode is more favorable.

(Regarding the various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 602 within the main control unit 162 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 602 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but these processes will not be explained.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, the timer interrupt handling process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 556. This process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 602.

In step S101E, the reading process for various detection sensors (for example, the above-mentioned detection sensors 317-319, 391a-391e) is executed. That is, the status of the various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the status of the detection sensors (detection information from the detection sensors) is determined and the detection information (award detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a ball has entered the first operating port 62a, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the first operating port in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the second operating port 63a, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the second operating port in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the upper variable winning device 64, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the upper large winning port in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the advantageous ball entry section 314, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the advantageous ball entry section in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the lower variable winning device 65, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the lower large winning port in its various flag storage area 635.

Subsequently, in step S102E, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

In the following step S103E, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the near-miss random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the near-miss random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

Subsequently, in step S104E, the prize entry process for the through gate 66 is executed, and in the following step S105E, the prize entry process for the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed, after which this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for those who pass through)
In the prize-winning process for the pass-through in step S104E, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has entered the pass-through gate 66. If the game ball has entered the pass-through gate 66 and the number of reserved bonus items SN is less than the upper limit (specifically 4), the number of reserved bonus items SN is incremented by 1, and the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first empty memory area of the electronic bonus item memory area 633 of RAM 604. After that, the prize-winning process is terminated.

If it is determined that the game ball has not entered through gate 66, or if it is determined that the ball has entered through gate 66 but the number of reserved slots SN has reached its limit, the entry process will end without storing the value of the open random number counter C4.

Furthermore, during the prize-winning process for through-gates, the display control process for the through-gate reserve count display unit SS of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, for the through-gate reserve count display unit SS, which consists of four light-emitting elements (LEDs), the light-emitting control process is executed so that the same number of light-emitting elements as the prize reserve memory count SN are lit.

(Award processing for the operating port)
In the prize entry process for the operating port in step S105E, first, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (first operating port 62a) (starting prize entry) by checking whether the prize entry detection flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If it is determined that the prize entry detection flag is stored, that is, if a detection signal is received indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (first operating port 62a), a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out two game balls. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (first operating port 62a) to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC is aware that a prize has entered the first operating port 62 (first operating port 62a).

Subsequently, the value stored in the reserve count memory area Ra for the first operation port (start reserve memory count) is updated (incremented by 1). Next, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and the main prize winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize detection flag for the first operating port is not stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, but the prize detection flag for the second operating port is stored, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to dispense one game ball. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 during the external output processing of the normal processing described later.

Next, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section 63 (second opening 63a). This allows the hall computer HC to recognize that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section 63 (second opening 63a).

Subsequently, the value stored in the reserve count memory area Rb for the second operation port (start reserve memory count) is updated (incremented by 1). Next, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and the main prize winning process is terminated.

If no game ball enters either the first ball entry section 62 or the second ball entry section 63, the prize-winning process will be terminated.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 557. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, has been executed, and the main processes of the game are executed during normal processing. In summary, the processes in steps S201E to S207E are executed as periodic processes with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes in steps S209E and S210E are executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, step S201E transmits output data, such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing, to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, it determines whether a prize ball command exists, and if a prize ball command is set, it transmits it to the payout control device 181. Furthermore, if commands corresponding to game round effects, such as the variation start command, type command, and variation end command, or commands corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode effects, are set, they are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143. Additionally, output settings for the external terminal board 213 are configured according to the information set in the external output buffer of RAM 604.

Next, in step S202E, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

In the following step S203E, game round control processing is executed to advance the game for each round. This game round control processing includes determining whether a win or loss occurs, determining the type of jackpot, setting the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 75, and controlling the display of operation ports D1, D2, etc., on the main display unit 81 (main display section D).

Subsequently, in step S204E, a game state transition process is executed to change the game state. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to modes such as the open/close execution mode or the high probability mode.

In the following step S205E, a process for supporting the electric mechanism 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 62R is executed. This electric mechanism support process uses information stored in the electric mechanism memory area of the RAM 604 to determine whether or not to open the electric mechanism 71, and then performs the opening and closing process of the electric mechanism 71 and the display control of the through-gate display unit DS.

In the following step S206E, the game ball launch control process is executed. In this process, based on the condition that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 191, indicating that a launch operation has been performed on the game ball launch handle 41, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is energized once every predetermined launch period (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE. In other words, unless an irregular launch such as a stop-and-go launch is performed, the launch of game balls is repeated at a predetermined cycle, provided that a launch operation has been performed.

In the following step S207E, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The power outage flag is set when the power outage monitoring board 605 confirms the occurrence of a power outage and a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602. This flag is then erased in the next main processing step.

If the power outage flag is not set, it means that the last of the multiple processes that are repeatedly executed has finished. Therefore, in step S208E, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal process is reached, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S209E, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210E, the variation type counter CS is updated.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201E to S206E changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207E that the power outage flag is set, a power outage has occurred, and the power outage processing from step S211E onward is executed. Specifically, in step S211E, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S212E, the RAM judgment value is calculated and saved, and in step S213E, access to RAM 604 is prohibited. After that, an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

(Game round control processing)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 559 to 562, a supplementary explanation of the game turn control process in step S203E will be given. As shown in Figure 558, in the game turn control process shown in this embodiment, first, in step S301E, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag (open/close execution state information) is stored in the open/close execution mode flag storage area (open/close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The open/close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is transitioned to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is erased when the open/close execution mode is terminated in the same game state transition process.

If a positive result is obtained in step S301E, the game round control process ends immediately. If a negative result is obtained in step S301E, the game round control process for the game round related to the entry of a ball into the first operating ball entry section 62 (first operating opening 62a) is executed in step S302E (first operating opening corresponding game round control process, first operating opening control process), and then the game round control process for the game round related to the entry of a ball into the second operating ball entry section 63 (second operating opening 63a) is executed in step S303E (second operating opening corresponding game round control process, second operating opening control process), after which the game round control process ends. The basic flow of these two control processes is the same. Below, the control process for the first operating opening will be explained first with reference to Figures 559 and 560, and then the control process for the second operating opening will be explained with reference to Figures 561 and 562, focusing on the differences from the control process for the first operating opening.

(Control processing for the first operating port)
As shown in Figure 559, in the control process for the first operating port, first in step S401E, it is determined whether or not a game round is currently underway for the first operating port 62a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D1 for the first operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the process of changing display to confirmed display, that is, whether or not one game round is currently being played. This determination is made by checking whether or not the game round flag (game round information) for the first operating port is stored in the game round flag storage area (changing display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game round flag for the first operating port is stored when the changing display is started on the display unit D1 for the first operating port, and is erased when the image is stopped and the confirmed display ends.

If the game is not currently in progress, a negative determination is made in step S401E, and the process proceeds to step S402E. In step S402E, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in progress for the second operation port 63a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D2 for the second operation port of the main display unit 81 is in the process of displaying a variation or a confirmed result, i.e., whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by checking whether or not the game round flag (variation display information) for the second operation port is stored in the game round flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game round flag for the second operation port is stored when the variation display is started on the display unit D2 for the second operation port, and is erased when the symbols corresponding to the lottery result (game result) are displayed and the confirmed result display ends.

If a positive result is obtained in step S402E, the process proceeds to step S403E. In step S403E, it is determined whether the game round related to the second operation port 63a corresponds to a jackpot result. If a positive result is obtained in step S403E, the control process for the first operation port ends. If a negative result is obtained in step S403E or step S402E, the process proceeds to step S404E. In step S404E, the total number of reserved balls in the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced, and it is determined whether the number of reserved balls stored in the first operation port (specifically, the number of reserved balls related to the first operation port 62a) is "0". If the number of reserved balls stored in the first operation port (RaN) is "0", the game round control process ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls stored in the first operation port (RaN) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S405E. In step S405E, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the first operation port, the first operation port's reserved memory count RaN is first decremented by 1. Then, the data stored in the first area of the first operation port's reserved area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see Figure 551), and the data stored in the storage area of the first operation port's reserved area Ra is shifted.

This data shift process sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower areas. The data in the first area is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the first operation port's hold count display unit S1 is turned off. In this off-lighting process, unlike the lighting process performed when hold information is added, the LEDs in the first operation port's hold count display unit S1 are turned off sequentially from the bottom.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, step S406E executes the first operation port variation start process (first operation port variation start process) to initiate the display of the changing patterns on the first operation port display unit D1 and the pattern display device 75, and then the game round control process ends. Now, referring to Figure 560, the first operation port variation start process in step S406E will be explained.

(Variation start process for the first operating port)
In the first operation port variation start process, first, a win/fail determination process is executed in step S501E. In the win/fail determination process, the win/fail table for the first operation port is referred to and it is determined whether the information for win/fail determination, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the win random number counter C1, among the information stored in the first execution area AE1 matches the jackpot numerical information mentioned above. If the determination result in step S501E is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502E and the process proceeds to step S503E.

In step S503E, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the information for type determination, specifically the numerical information obtained from the winning type counter C2, is identified from the information stored in the first execution area AE1. Furthermore, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of ROM 603, it is determined which of the following groups the identified type determination information belongs to: the information group corresponding to the 3R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 3R probability variation jackpot result A, or the information group corresponding to the 3R probability variation jackpot result B.

In step S504E, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit D (first operation port display unit D1) of the main display unit 81 in the current game round is identified from the jackpot result stop result table pre-stored in the ROM 603, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 604. This jackpot result stop result table has multiple images set to be displayed on the main display unit D, and in step S504E, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Also in step S504E, information for the MPU 602 to identify whether the current game result is a 3R normal jackpot result, a 3R probability variation jackpot result A, or a 3R probability variation jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the result is a regular 3R jackpot, the 3R regular flag is stored; if the result is a 3R probability variation jackpot A, the 3R probability variation A flag is stored; and if the result is a 3R probability variation jackpot B, the 3R probability variation B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S504E, the process proceeds to step S505E. In step S505E, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the second operation port 63a is currently being executed. If the determination in step S505E is positive, the process proceeds to step S506E. In step S506E, a forced termination flag for the second operation port 63a is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round related to the second operation port 63a (symbol variation display) is being executed, the game round related to the second operation port 63a (symbol variation display) will be forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if the game round related to the first operation port 62a corresponds to a jackpot result and the game round related to the second operation port 63a can be executed beyond the timing at which the confirmation display is made in that game round, the game round related to the second operation port 63a will be shortened and will terminate at the same time as the game round related to the first operation port 62a. In such cases, the symbols displayed during the game round related to the second operating port 63a will correspond to a losing result.

Returning to the explanation of step S502E, if the judgment result in step S501E is a false result, a negative judgment is made in step S502E, and the process proceeds to step S507E. In step S507E, the stop result setting process for false results is executed.

Specifically, in the game round related to the start of this variation, the symbol to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit D (first operation port display unit D1) of the main display unit 81 is identified from the stop result table for losing results pre-stored in the ROM 603, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing steps S506E and S507E, or if a negative result is obtained in step S505E, the process proceeds to step S508E. Step S508E executes the setting process for the variable display time (display duration). Details of this setting process will be described later.

After executing the setting process for the variable display time in step S508E, the variable start command and type command are set in step S509E. The variable start command includes information about the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrences differs from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrences. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information about whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the sub-control device, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the variable display time information. In this respect, it can be said that the variable start command contains information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also directly include information indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process in step S509E, the process proceeds to step S510E, where the variable display of the first operation slot display unit D1 in the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variable start process for the first operation slot is terminated. In step S510, a game-in-progress flag for the first operation slot is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processing that a game round (e.g., variable display) related to the first operation slot 62a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 559, if a positive result is obtained in step S401E, that is, if it is determined that the game is currently in progress related to the first operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S407E. In step S407E, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the symbols corresponding to the special winning result in the game round related to the second operating port 63a. If a negative result is obtained in step S407E, the process proceeds to step S408E. In step S408E, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the game round related to the second operating port 63a and corresponding to the jackpot result. If negative results are obtained in both steps S407E and S408E, the process proceeds to step S409E.

In step S409E, it is determined whether the variable display time set in step S508E has elapsed. If the determination in step S409E is negative, the variable display processing is executed in step S410E, and then the control processing for the first operation port is terminated. In the variable display processing in step S410E, the image is displayed in a variable manner by turning each LED constituting the first operation port display unit D1 on/off.

If a positive result is obtained in step S409E, the process proceeds to step S412E. In step S412E, the variation termination process is executed. In the variation termination process, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed to stop displaying the symbols on the first operation port display unit D1 in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, the confirmation display of the symbols corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the game rounds flags for the first operation port, stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, are erased when the confirmation display is completed.

In the following step S413E, after setting the variation termination command, the game round control process ends. The variation termination command set in step S413E is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201E of the normal process (Figure 557). Based on the receipt of the variation termination command, the notification/performance control device 143 executes a process to terminate the performance for that game round. Furthermore, the variation termination command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification/performance control device 143. Upon receiving the variation termination command, the display control device 710 displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the game results for that game round on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 (final stop display). Alternatively, the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently terminate the performance for a game round without transmitting the variation termination command.

Subsequently, in step S414E, the game count counter is updated, and in the following step S415E, it is determined whether the game count counter is "0". If the determination in step S415E is negative, the control process for this first operation port is terminated. The game count counter defines the upper limit of the number of games for which the high-frequency support mode is executed, and the number corresponding to the type of jackpot is set at the end of each jackpot.

If a positive result is obtained in step S415E, the process proceeds to step S416E, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 is cleared, and a high-frequency support mode termination command is set in step S417E. This high-frequency support mode termination command is output to the notification/performance control device 143 and the hall computer HC during the external output processing of normal processing. Based on the receipt of the high-frequency support mode termination command, the notification/performance control device 143 displays an indication corresponding to the termination of the high-frequency support mode.

If a positive result is obtained in either step S407E or step S408E, the stop symbol rewriting process is executed in step S410E, and after executing the processes in steps S412E to S417E, the control process for this first operation port is terminated.

Next, the control process for the second operating port will be described with reference to Figures 561 and 562.

(Control processing for the second operating port)
As shown in Figure 561, in the control process for the second operation port, first in step S601E, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the second operation port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D2 for the second operation port of the main display unit 81 is in the process of changing display to confirmed display, that is, whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not the game round flag (changing display information) for the second operation port is stored in the game round flag storage area (changing display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game round flag for the second operation port is stored when the changing display is started on the display unit D2 for the second operation port, and is erased when the image is stopped and the confirmed display ends.

If the game is not currently in progress, a negative determination is made in step S601E, and the process proceeds to step S602E. In step S602E, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in progress related to the first operation port 62a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D1 for the first operation port of the main display unit 81 is in the "variable" to "confirmed" display state, that is, whether or not one game round is currently being played.

If a positive result is obtained in step S602E, the process proceeds to step S603E. In step S603E, it is determined whether the game round related to the first operation port 62a corresponds to a jackpot result. If a positive result is obtained in step S603E, the control process for the second operation port ends. If a negative result is obtained in step S603E, or if a negative result was obtained in step S602E, the process proceeds to step S604E. In step S604E, the total number of reserved balls in the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced, and it is determined whether the number of reserved balls stored in the reserved balls, RbN for the second operation port (specifically, the number of reserved balls related to the right operation port 62aR), is "0". If the number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port RbN is "0", the game round control process ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port RbN is not "0", the process proceeds to step S605E. In step S605E, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the second operation port 63a, first, the number of reserved memory slots RbN for the second operation port is decremented by 1. Then, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second operation port is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see Figure 551), and the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second operation port is shifted.

This data shift process sequentially shifts the data stored in areas 1 through 4 to the lower areas. The data in area 1 is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: area 2 → area 1, area 3 → area 2, area 4 → area 3, and so on. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold count indicator for the second operation port is turned off. In this off-lighting process, unlike the lighting process performed when hold information is added, the LEDs in the hold lamp section for the second operation port are turned off sequentially from bottom to top.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S606E, the second operation port variation start process (second operation port variation start process) is executed to start the variation display of the symbols on the main display unit 81 (main display section D) and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 75, and then this game round control process is terminated.

Now, referring to Figure 562, the second operation port variation start process in step S606E will be described.

(Variation start process for the second operating port)
In the process to start the fluctuation for the second operating port, first, a win/fail determination process is performed in step S701E. In the win/fail determination process, the win/fail table for the second operating port is referred to and it is determined whether the information for win/fail determination, i.e., the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2 matches the jackpot numerical information or special win numerical information mentioned above. If the determination result in step S701E is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702E and the process proceeds to step S703E.

In step S703E, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the numerical information obtained from the winning type counter C2, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of ROM 603 are referenced to determine whether the identified type determination information belongs to the information group corresponding to 2R probability variation jackpot result A or the information group corresponding to 2R probability variation jackpot result B.

In step S704E, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit D (second operation port display unit D2) of the main display unit 81 during the game round is identified from the jackpot result stop result table pre-stored in the ROM 603, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 604. This jackpot result stop result table contains multiple images to be displayed on the main display unit D, and in step S704E, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Furthermore, in step S704E, information for the MPU 602 to identify whether the current game result is a 2R probability variation jackpot result A or a 2R probability variation jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot result A, the 2R probability variation A flag is stored, and if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot result B, the 2R probability variation B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S704E, the process proceeds to step S705E. In step S705E, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the first operation port 62a is currently being executed. If the determination in step S705E is positive, the process proceeds to step S706E. In step S706E, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round related to the first operation port 62a (symbol variation display) is being executed, the game round related to the first operation port 62a (symbol variation display) will be forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if the game round related to the second operation port 63a corresponds to a jackpot result and the game round related to the first operation port 62a (corresponding to a losing result) can be executed beyond the timing at which the confirmation display in that game round is performed, the game round related to the first operation port 62a will be shortened and will terminate at the same time as the game round related to the second operation port 63a. In such cases, the symbols displayed during the game round related to the first operating port 62a will correspond to a losing result.

Returning to the explanation of step S702E, if the result of the judgment in step S701E is a special correct result, then a negative judgment is made in step S702E and a positive judgment in step S707E, and the process proceeds to step S708E.

In step S708E, the process for setting the stop result for a special win is executed. Specifically, the symbol to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit D (second operation port display unit D2) of the main display unit 81 during the current game round is identified from the special win result stop result table pre-stored in the ROM 603, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 604. This special win result stop result table contains multiple symbols to be displayed on the main display unit D, and in step S703E, information indicating the symbol corresponding to the special win result is stored in the RAM 604. If the game result is a special win, a special win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. After that, the process proceeds to step S705.

If the judgment result in step S701E is a "failure," a negative judgment is made in steps S702E and S707E, and the process proceeds to step S709E. In step S709E, a stop result setting process for failures is executed. Specifically, the image to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit D (second operation port display unit D2) of the main display unit 81 during the current game round is identified from the stop result table for failures pre-stored in the ROM 603, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the process in step S706E or step S709E, or if a negative determination is made in step S705E, the process proceeds to step S710E. In step S710E, the process for setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed. Details regarding this variable display time setting process will be described later.

After executing the setting process for the variable display time in step S710E, the variable start command and type command are set in step S711E. The variable start command includes information about the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrences differs from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrences. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information about whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the sub-control device, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the variable display time information. In this respect, it can be said that the variable start command contains information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also directly include information indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process in step S711E, the process proceeds to step S712E. The variable display on the second operation port display unit D2 in the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variable start process for the second operation port is terminated. In step S712E, a game-in-progress flag for the second operation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This allows subsequent processing to identify that a game round (e.g., variable display) related to the second operation port 63a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 561, if a positive determination is made in step S601E, that is, if it is determined that the game round related to the second operating port 63a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S608E. In step S608E, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round related to the first operating port 62a and corresponding to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S608E, the process proceeds to step S609E.

In step S609E, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed. If the determination in step S609E is negative, the variable display processing is executed in step S610E, and then the control processing for the second operation port is terminated. In the variable display processing in step S610E, the various LEDs constituting the second operation port display unit D2 are turned on/off to display the image in a variable manner.

If a positive result is obtained in step S609E, the process proceeds to step S612E. In step S612E, the variation termination process is executed. During the variation termination process, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed to stop the display of the image on the second operation port display unit D2 in a predetermined manner.

In the following step S613E, a variation termination command is set. The variation termination command set in step S613E is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201E of the normal processing (Figure 557). Based on the receipt of the variation termination command, the notification/performance control device 143 executes a process to terminate the performance for that game round. Furthermore, the variation termination command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification/performance control device 143. Upon receiving the variation termination command, the display control device 710 displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the game results of that game round on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 (final stop display). Alternatively, the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently terminate the performance for a game round without transmitting a variation termination command.

After setting the variation termination command in step S613E, the game count counter update process is executed in step S614E, and in the following step S615E, it is determined whether the game count counter is "0". If the determination in step S615E is negative, the control process for this second operation port is terminated. The game count counter defines the upper limit of the number of games for which the high-frequency support mode is executed, and the number corresponding to the type of jackpot is set at the end of each jackpot.

If a positive result is obtained in step S615E, the process proceeds to step S616E, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 is cleared, and a high-frequency support mode termination command is set in step S617E. This high-frequency support mode termination command is output to the notification/performance control device 143 and the hall computer HC during the external output processing of normal processing. Based on the receipt of the high-frequency support mode termination command, the notification/performance control device 143 displays an indication corresponding to the termination of the high-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S608E, if a positive result is obtained in step S608E, the process proceeds to step S611E. That is, if it is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the first operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S611E. In step S611E, the stop result is rewritten.

In the process of rewriting the stop result, it is first determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special win result. If it does not correspond to a special win result, the rewriting of the stop symbol (the symbol corresponding to a losing result) determined in the second operation slot variation start process is avoided. On the other hand, if the current game result corresponds to a special win result, the stop symbol (the symbol corresponding to a special win result) determined in the second operation slot variation start process is rewritten to the symbol corresponding to a losing result. After executing the process in step S611E, the processes in steps S612E to S617E are executed, and then this second operation slot control process is terminated.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204E will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 563 to 567. As already explained, in this embodiment, there is a normal game state in which the game progresses based on balls entering the operating ports 62a and 63a, and a special game state (open/close execution mode) in which the variable prize winning devices 64 and 65 are opened. The normal game state consists of a low probability game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric mechanism 71 is a low frequency support mode, a first high probability game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric mechanism 71 is a high frequency support mode, and a second high probability game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric mechanism 71 is a low frequency support mode. Switching between these low probability game state, time-saving game state, first high probability game state, and second high probability game state is done via a special game state corresponding to the jackpot result.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801E, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If it is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802E, where it is determined whether or not the game round (specifically, the confirmation display) has ended. If it is not the end of the game round, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the game round has ended, or more specifically, if the predetermined stop display time (confirmation display time) has elapsed since the end of the variation display, the process proceeds to step S803E to determine whether the game result of this round (the result of the above-mentioned win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the above-mentioned 3R probability variation A flag, 3R probability variation B flag, 3R normal flag, or special win flag is stored in RAM 604. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S804E. In this start process, first, an opening waiting time (start waiting time) is set to allow the variable prize-winning devices 64 and 65 to wait without starting to open them for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the opening waiting time information, pre-stored in ROM 603, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of RAM 604.

In this embodiment, the opening waiting time (opening time) differs depending on the type of win. Specifically, the opening waiting time for a jackpot is 5 seconds, while the opening waiting time for a special win is shorter, specifically 8 milliseconds.

In the following step S805E, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S805E is positive, the process proceeds to step S806E, where the round counter RC, located in the various counter areas 634 of RAM 604, is set to a value corresponding to the current jackpot result. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 3R jackpot, "3" is set to the round counter RC. The round counter RC is decremented with each round, and the special game state ends when the value of the round counter RC reaches "0".

In the following step S807E, if a high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared. This ensures that the support mode remains in low-frequency support mode during the special game state corresponding to the jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of step S805E, if a negative result is obtained in step S805E, that is, if the special game state is triggered by a special win result, the process proceeds to step S808E. In step S808E, the second prize mode flag (low-frequency prize mode flag) is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Then, in step S809E, the round counter is set to "1". In subsequent processing, based on the fact that the second prize mode flag is set, it is determined that the current special game state corresponds to a special win result.

After executing the processing in step S807E or step S809E, the process proceeds to step S810E. In step S810E, the opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201E of the normal processing (Figure 557). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode on the symbol display device 75, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. The display control device 710 executes display control of the symbol display device 75 based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 143, so that the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is changed, for example, to display animated characters, background images, etc., as display content corresponding to a jackpot.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S810E, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811E, and the game state transition process ends. In the external signal setting process in step S811E, it is determined whether any of the above-mentioned jackpot flags and special jackpot flags are stored in RAM 604. If either flag is stored, a signal indicating that a jackpot or special jackpot has occurred is output to the game hall's management control device (hall computer HC). Upon receiving this external signal, the management control device understands that the game has transitioned to a special game state (open/close execution mode).

Returning to the explanation of step S801E, if the system is in opening/closing execution mode, a positive result is made in step S801E, and the process proceeds to step S812E. In step S812E, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S813E.

Here, we will explain the opening and closing process of the grand prize slot by referring to the flowcharts in Figures 564 to 566.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
As shown in Figure 564, in the opening and closing process of the big prize slot, first, in step S901E, it is determined whether or not the second prize mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. If the determination in step S901E is negative, the process proceeds to step S902E, and the first opening and closing process is executed. The first opening and closing process is executed when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) corresponding to the big win result is in place, i.e., the first special game state.

(First opening/closing process)
As shown in Figure 565, in the first opening/closing process, first, in step S1001E, it is determined whether or not the upper variable prize device 64 (upper large prize opening 311) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 451 of the upper variable prize device 64. If the upper large prize opening 311 is not open, in step S1002E, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the determination in step S1002E is positive, the first opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1002E, the process proceeds to step S1003E. In step S1003E, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1, located in the various counter areas 634 of RAM 604, is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time and interval time (interval time between rounds) of the upper prize winning slot 311. Its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 556) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1003E, this first opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1004E, where the opening process for the upper variable prize device 64 (upper large prize opening 311) is executed. Specifically, the variable prize drive unit 451 is driven to open the upper large prize opening 311.

Subsequently, as a setting process for the closing conditions (setting process for when the upper variable prize winning device 64 (upper large prize winning opening 311)) is executed, steps S1005E to S1006E are performed. Specifically, in step S1005E, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S1006E, the prize winning counter PC is set to "6".

In the following step S1007E, it is determined whether or not this is the first round (Round 1) of the current special game state. If the determination in step S1007E is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1008E. In step S1008E, it is determined whether or not this special game state corresponds to a probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, if either 3R probability variation flag A or 3R probability variation flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1008E. Conversely, if the 3R normal flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, a negative determination is made in step S1008E.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1008E, the probability variation channel switching process is executed in step S1009E. In the probability variation channel switching process, a drive signal is output to the channel switching drive unit 452 to move the channel switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the duration for which the output of the drive signal continues is set. This duration is the same as the maximum opening time of the upper large prize entry opening 311. Therefore, when game balls are continuously launched along the right route, in most cases, a prize will be awarded to the advantageous ball entry section 314, and the transition to the high probability mode will be confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1008E, the normal flow path switching process is executed in step S1010E. In the normal flow path switching process, similar to the probability variation flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the duration for which the output of the drive signal continues is set. This duration is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper large prize opening 311. More specifically, a time shorter than the time required for a game ball flowing into the upper large prize opening 311 to reach the advantageous ball entry section 314 (more specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319) is set. Therefore, even when game balls are continuously launched along the right route, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 is basically avoided.

After the flow path switching process is executed in steps S1009E and S1010E, or if a negative determination is made in step S1007E, the process proceeds to step S1011E. In step S1011E, an open command is set to indicate that the upper variable prize device 64 (upper large prize opening 311) has been opened, and this first opening/closing process ends. This set open command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201E of the normal process (see Figure 557). Based on the received open command, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001E, if it is determined in step S1001E that the upper variable prize device 64 (upper large prize opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012E. In step S1012E, it is determined whether or not it is time to return the flow path switching member 316 to its protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the duration set in steps S1009E and S1010E has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S1012E, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013E, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to its protruding position.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1012E, or after the recovery process in step S1013E is executed, the process proceeds to step S1014E. In step S1014E, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1015E, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the upper prize-winning opening 311 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317 installed in the upper variable prize-winning device 64.

If a prize has been awarded, the award command output process is executed in step S1016E. This award command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, which then changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the award command.

After executing the command output process in step S1016E, the process proceeds to step S1017E. In step S1017E, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1. In the following step S1018E, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize gate opening and closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S1018E, i.e., if the value of the prize counter PC is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1014E (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the large prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S1019E, the variable prize drive unit 451 is deactivated in order to close the upper variable prize device 64 (upper large prize opening 311).

In the following step S1020E, it is determined whether the flow path switching member 316 is in the retracted position. If the determination in step S1020E is positive, in step S1021E, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

After executing the recovery process in step S1021E, or if a negative determination is made in step S1020E, the process proceeds to step S1022E, where the round counter RC is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round counter RC is not "0", it is decremented by 1; if the value of the round counter RC is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S1023E, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC value is "0". If the determination in step S1023E is negative, the process proceeds to step S1024E, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S1024E, a closing command is set in step S1025E, and this first opening/closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S201E of the normal process (Figure 557). The notification/effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined effect.

Returning to the explanation of step S1023E, if the value of the round counter RC is determined to be "0" in step S1023E, the process proceeds to step S1026E. Step S1026E executes the ending start process. In this start process, an ending waiting time (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set to allow the system to wait without starting the next game round for the ending of the open/close execution mode. Specifically, the ending waiting time information, pre-stored in ROM 603, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of RAM 604.

Subsequently, in step S1027E, the ending command is set, and then this first opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201E of the normal process (Figure 557).

Returning to the explanation of Figure 564, if a positive result is obtained in step S901E, the second opening/closing process in step S903E is executed. The second opening/closing process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 566.

(Second opening/closing process)
In the second opening/closing process, first, in step S1101E, it is determined whether or not the lower variable prize device 65 (lower large prize opening 341) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 461 of the lower variable prize device 65. If the lower large prize opening 341 is not open, the process of opening the lower variable prize device 65 (lower large prize opening 341) is executed in step S1102E. Specifically, the variable prize drive unit 461 is driven to open the lower large prize opening 341.

Subsequently, the process for setting the closing conditions (settings for when the opening is enabled) for the lower variable prize winning device 65 (lower large prize winning opening 341) is executed, specifically in steps S1103E to S1104E. In step S1103E, the timer counter TC1 is set to "400" (equivalent to 0.8 seconds), and in the following step S1104E, the prize winning counter PC is set to "6".

Returning to the explanation of step S1101E, if it is determined in step S1101E that the lower variable prize entry device 65 (lower large prize entry opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105E, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106E, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the lower large prize entry opening 341 based on the detection signal from the ball entry detection sensor installed in the lower variable prize entry device 65.

If a prize has been awarded, the award command output process is executed in step S1107E. This award command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, which then changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the award command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107E, the process proceeds to step S1108E. In step S1108E, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1. In the following step S1109E, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the second opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S1109E, i.e., if the value of the prize counter PC is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1105E (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the large prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S1110E, the variable prize drive unit 461 is deactivated in order to close the lower variable prize device 65 (lower large prize opening 341).

In the following step S1111E, the ending initiation process is executed. This initiation process sets an ending waiting time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment) to allow the system to wait without starting the next game round for the ending of the open/close execution mode. Specifically, the ending waiting time information, pre-stored in the ROM 603, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Subsequently, in step S1112E, the ending command is set, and then the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201E of the normal process (Figure 557).

Returning to the explanation in Figure 563, after executing the opening and closing process of the large prize slot in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814E. In step S814E, it is determined whether the round counter RC is "0". If the result in step S814E is negative, the game state transition process ends. If the result in step S814E is positive, the process proceeds to step S815E. In step S815E, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S816E, and then the game state transition process ends. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained with reference to Figure 567.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, it is first determined whether the current special game state corresponds to the first prize mode. If it corresponds to the first prize mode, a positive determination is made in step S1201E and the process proceeds to step S1202E. In step S1202E, it is determined whether a ball entered the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the current special game state. If a ball entered the advantageous ball entry section 314, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1203E. As a result, in subsequent normal game states, the lottery mode for determining wins or losses becomes the high probability mode.

After executing the process in step S1203E, or if a negative result is obtained in step S1202E, the process proceeds to step S1204E. In step S1204E, it is determined whether the current special game state corresponds to a transition to high-frequency support mode. If a positive result is obtained in step S1204E, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 in step S1205E, and in the following step S1206E, the game count counter in the various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is set to a value corresponding to the current jackpot result. The game count counter is decremented each time a game is played, and when the value of the game count counter becomes "0", the system transitions from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

After executing the process in step S1206E, or if a negative result is obtained in both steps S1201E and S1204E, the process proceeds to step S1207E. In step S1207E, the various flags for special game states (e.g., winning mode flags and jackpot flags) stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 are erased, and this transition process ends.

Next, referring to Figures 568 to 570, the power supply support process executed in step S205E of the normal process (see Figure 557) will be described. Figure 568 is a flowchart showing the power supply support process, Figure 569 is a schematic diagram comparing the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and Figure 570 is a flowchart showing the power supply switching process.

(Processing for power supply support)
In the process for supporting the electric device, first, in step S1301E, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the support flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support flag is stored when the electric device 71 attached to the right operating port 62aR is switched to the open state and is erased when it is returned to the closed state.

If the "Support in Progress" flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302E, where it is determined whether the "Support Winning Flag" is stored in the "Support Winning Flag Storage Area" located in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The "Support Winning Flag" is stored when the opening lottery (which determines whether to open the electric mechanism 71) is successful, and is erased when the "Support in Progress" flag is stored.

If the support selection flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1303E, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 in the various counter areas 634 of RAM 604 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main support process is terminated.

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1304E, where it is determined whether or not it is the end of the pattern change display on the through-gate display unit DS. If it is the end of the pattern change display, in step S1305E, a "miss" display is set and the timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 seconds), after which the main power support processing is terminated. Once the "miss" display is set, the pattern change display on the through-gate display unit DS ends with the "miss" display stopped, and this "miss" display continues for 0.5 seconds (see Figure 569).

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end of the variable display timing, the process proceeds to step S1306 to determine whether the value of the bonus item retention memory count SN is greater than "0". If the value of the bonus item retention memory count SN is "0", the main electric bonus support process ends. If the value of the bonus item retention memory count SN is greater than "0", the process proceeds to step S1307E to determine whether the support mode is in high-frequency support mode.

If the system is in high-frequency support mode, a positive determination is made in step S1307E, and the process proceeds to step S1308E. In step S1308E, a lottery (open lottery) is held to determine whether or not to provide support using the electric mechanism 71. Specifically, the value stored in the mechanism's reserved ball storage area of the electric mechanism memory area 633 is shifted, and the open lottery is performed by referring to the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the lottery table for high-frequency support mode stored in the win/fail table memory area 621 of ROM 603. Simultaneously with the open lottery, the timer counter TC2 is set to "750" (equivalent to 1.5 seconds). The timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt is activated. From this point onward, the display of the changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", i.e., for 1.5 seconds (see Figure 569).

In the following step S1309E, it is determined whether the result of the opening lottery in step S1308E is a winning result (support win). If it is not a support win, the main support processing is terminated. If it is a support win, in step S1310E, the support win flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, and the main support processing is terminated.

If the system is in low-frequency support mode, a negative determination is made in step S1307E, and the process proceeds to step S1311E. In step S1311E, a lottery (open lottery) is held to determine whether or not to provide support using the electric mechanism 71. Specifically, the value stored in the mechanism's reserved ball storage area of the electric mechanism memory area 633 is shifted, and the open lottery is performed by referring to the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the lottery table for low-frequency support mode stored in the win/fail table memory area 621 of ROM 603. Simultaneously with the open lottery, the timer counter TC2 is set to "60000" to "180000" (i.e., corresponding to 120 to 360 seconds). From there, the display of the changing symbols on the through-gate display unit DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", i.e., for 120 to 360 seconds (see Figure 569).

In the following step S1312E, it is determined whether the result of the opening lottery in step S1311E is a winning result (support win). If it is not a support win, the main support processing ends. If it is a support win, in step S1313E, the support win flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, and the main support processing ends.

Furthermore, the probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (specifically 50/250), indicating that high-frequency support mode offers a more favorable outcome.

Returning to the explanation of step S1302E in Figure 568, if the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, a positive determination is made in step S1302E, and the process proceeds to step S1314E to determine whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the pattern change display on the through-gate display unit DS is in progress, and the main electric support process ends there. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the winning display is set in step S1315E. As a result, the pattern change display on the special feature display unit 44 ends with the winning display stopped. In the following step S1316E, the support in progress flag is set in the various flag storage area 635, the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and then the main electric support process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301E, if a positive result is obtained in step S1301E, that is, if the "Supported" flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317E, where the electric device opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric device 71 is executed, and then the electric device support process ends. The electric device opening/closing process will be explained below with reference to Figure 570.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device opening and closing process, first, in step S1401E, it is determined whether or not the electric device 71 is open. Whether or not the electric device 71 is open is determined by whether or not the electric device drive unit 332 is in a driving state. If the electric device 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402E, where it is determined whether or not the number of winning entries after opening the attached right operating port 62aR of the electric device 71 has reached the upper limit (10 in this embodiment). If the determination in step S1402E is negative, the process proceeds to step S1403E, where it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric device opening/closing process is terminated. However, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or if step S1402E determines that the number of winning combinations has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404E. In step S1404E, a closing process is performed to switch (return to the closed) state of the electric device 71. Then, in step S1405E, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 635 are cleared, and the main electric device opening/closing process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1401E, if the electric mechanism 71 is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401E, and the process proceeds to step S1406E. In step S1406E, it is determined whether the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If the timer counter TC2 is "0", the opening process to switch the electric mechanism 71 to the open state is executed in step S1407E.

Subsequently, in step S1408E, it is determined whether or not the system is in high-frequency support mode. If it is in high-frequency support mode, in step S1409E, the timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 seconds), and then the main power supply switching process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in low-frequency support mode, in step S1410E, the timer counter TC2 is set to "40" (equivalent to 0.08 seconds), and then the main power supply switching process is terminated.

(Relationship between game state and display time of fluctuations)
As already explained, in this embodiment, hold information is acquired based on balls entering the first operation port 62a and the second operation port 63aR, and based on the acquired hold information, the display of changing patterns and symbols during the game round is executed. Here, the display time for the changing patterns and symbols is set according to the game state. The configuration related to setting the display time for changing patterns, etc. (the setting process for the display time for changing patterns in the change start process for the first operation port (see Figure 560) and the setting process for the display time for changing patterns in the change start process for the second operation port (see Figure 562)) will be explained in more detail below with reference to Figures 571 to 575. Figure 571 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the display time for changing patterns in the change start process for the first operation port (the setting process for the display time for changing patterns for the first operation port), Figure 572 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the display time for changing patterns for the second operation port, and Figures 573 to 575 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the game state and the display time for changing patterns.

(Setting process for variable display time for the first operating port)
As shown in Figure 571, in the variable display time setting process for the first operation port, first, in step S1501E, it is determined whether or not the game is in the low probability game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. If the determination in step S1501E is positive, the setting process for the low probability game state is executed in step S1502E, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the low probability game state, the table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the low probability game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. The variable display time is then set according to the number of reserved balls stored in the first operation port reserved area Ra in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the win/loss lottery, and whether or not a reach occurred.

Regarding the display time for fluctuations, the system is configured so that the display time for a losing result tends to be longer than that for a winning result. In the case of a losing result where no reach display occurs (a complete loss), the display time becomes shorter as the number of stored reserve information increases. Figure 573(a1) illustrates the display time for a complete loss in a low-probability game state. For example, if the number of stored reserve information is "0" or "1", the display time for fluctuations is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "2", the display time for fluctuations is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "3" or "4", the display time for fluctuations is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the low-probability normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the first operation port display unit D1 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Incidentally, in game rounds where a losing reach display occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 40 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. This display time is within the same range as the display time set in game rounds corresponding to a jackpot (see Figure 574 (a1)). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for a jackpot, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for a losing result. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 571, if a negative result is obtained in step S1501E, the process proceeds to step S1503E. In step S1503E, it is determined whether the game is in the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, corresponding to the above-mentioned time-saving game state. If a positive result is obtained in step S1503E, the time-saving game state setting process is executed in step S1504E, and then this variation display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the shortened game mode, the system selects the table corresponding to the current game round from the various variable display time tables for the shortened game mode stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 and sets the variable display time.

In the time-saving game state, similar to the low probability game state, the display time for a losing result tends to be longer than that for a winning result. In the case of a losing result where no reach display occurs (a complete loss), the display time for the changing symbols decreases as the number of stored reserve information increases. Figure 573(a2) illustrates the display time for a complete loss in the time-saving game state. For example, if the number of stored reserve information is "0", the display time for the changing symbols is set to "5 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "1" or "2", the display time for the changing symbols is set to "1 second". If the number of stored reserve information is "3" or "4", the display time for the changing symbols is set to "0.5 seconds". In other words, the display time for a complete loss is generally shorter compared to the low probability game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode, the display time for confirming the symbols on the first operation port display unit D1 and the display time for confirming the symbols on the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Incidentally, in game rounds where a losing reach display occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 40 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. This display time is within the same range as the display time set in game rounds corresponding to a jackpot (see Figure 574 (a2)). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for a jackpot, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for a losing result. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1503E in Figure 571, the process proceeds to step S1505E. In step S1505E, it is determined whether the game is in the first high-probability game state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode. If a positive result is obtained in step S1505E, the setting process for the first high-probability game state is executed in step S1506E, after which the main variation display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first high-probability game state, the table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first high-probability game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of ROM 603, and the variable display time is set. Note that the setting method for the variable display time in the first high-probability game state is basically the same as for the time-saving game state, so a detailed explanation is omitted (see Figures 573(a3) and 574(a3)).

If a negative result is obtained in step S1505E of Figure 571, the process proceeds to step S1507E, where the setting process for the second high-probability game state is executed, and then the current variable display time setting process is terminated. In the setting process for the second high-probability game state, the table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the second high-probability game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of ROM 603, and the variable display time is set.

In the second high-probability game state, unlike the low-probability game state, the time-saving game state, and the first high-probability game state, the selection of the variation display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored reserve information and the results of the win/loss lottery. Specifically, in the second high-probability game state, for every game round, the variation display time is configured to be "600 seconds" and the confirmed display time to be "0.5 seconds" (see Figures 573(a4) and 574(a4)), resulting in a longer variation display time compared to the low-probability game state, the time-saving game state, and the first high-probability game state.

As will be explained in more detail later, in the second high-probability game state, by launching the game balls towards the right route formed in the game area PE, the game progresses more favorably for the player compared to aiming for the left route. Most of the game balls launched towards the right route enter the second operation port 63a. Furthermore, in the second high-probability game state, the display time for the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a becomes extremely long. This allows for the execution of numerous game rounds related to the second operation port 63a while one game round related to the first operation port 62a is being executed, and the game progresses primarily based on the held information related to the second operation port 63a.

(Setting process for variable display time for the second operating port)
As shown in Figure 572, in the variable display time setting process for the second operation port, first, in step S1601E, it is determined whether or not the game is in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. If the determination in step S1601E is positive, the setting process for the low probability game state is executed in step S1602E, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the low-probability game state, the system selects the table corresponding to the current game round from the various variable display time tables for the low-probability game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of ROM 603, and sets the variable display time. Note that the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the second operation port is a different table from the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the first operation port.

In the low probability game state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port reserved area Rb in the reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604, the result of the win/loss lottery, and whether or not a reach occurs, the selection of the variation display time is limited to one. Specifically, in the low probability game state, for every game round, the variation display time is configured to be "600 seconds" and the confirmed display time is "1 second" (see Figures 573(b1), 574(b1), and 575(b1)). In the low probability game state, game balls launched to the right route can enter the second operation port 63a, but the prize ball that can be obtained by entering the second operation port 63a is "1", and it is necessary to wait 600 seconds for the lottery result based on entering the second operation port 63a to be determined. This suppresses the act of launching game balls to aim for the right route in the low probability game state in order to gain an advantage in the game.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 572, if a negative result is obtained in step S1601E, the process proceeds to step S1603E. In step S1603E, it is determined whether the game is in a time-saving game state corresponding to both low probability mode and high frequency support mode. If a positive result is obtained in step S1603E, the time-saving game state setting process is executed in step S1604E, after which this variation display time setting process ends.

In the setting process for the shortened game state, the table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the shortened game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set. Note that the setting method for the variable display time in the shortened game state is basically the same as for the low probability game state, so a detailed explanation is omitted (see Figures 573(b2), 574(b2), and 575(b2)).

If a negative result is obtained in step S1603E, the process proceeds to step S1605E. In step S1605E, it is determined whether the game is in the first high-probability game state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode. If a positive result is obtained in step S1605E, the setting process for the first high-probability game state is executed in step S1606E, after which the current variation display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first high-probability game state, the table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first high-probability game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of ROM 603, and the variable display time is set. Note that the setting method for the variable display time in the first high-probability game state is basically the same as for the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state, so a detailed explanation is omitted (see Figures 573(b3), 574(b3), and 575(b3)).

If a negative result is obtained in step S1605E, the process proceeds to step S1607E, where the setting process for the second high-probability game state is executed, and then the current variation display time setting process is terminated.

In the second high-probability game state, in the case of a losing result where no reach display occurs (a complete loss), the display time for the variation decreases as the number of stored reserve information increases. Figure 573(b4) illustrates the display time for a complete loss in the second high-probability game state. For example, if the number of stored reserve information is "0", the display time for the variation is set to "5 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "1" or "2", the display time for the variation is set to "1.5 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "3" or "4", the display time for the variation is set to "0.5 seconds". Furthermore, in the second high-probability game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the second operation port display unit D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "1 second".

Incidentally, in game rounds where a losing reach display occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 40 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. This display time is within the same range as the display time set in game rounds corresponding to a jackpot (see Figure 574 (b4)). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for a jackpot, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for a losing result. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

Furthermore, in the second high-probability game state, if a special win occurs, the display time for the variation is set to "1.5 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. The variation display time of "1.5 seconds" is not compatible with the reach display; therefore, in the second normal game state, if a special win occurs, the fact that it is a special win is clearly indicated without going through the reach display.

In this embodiment, although the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a and the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a are executed simultaneously, as described above, a significant difference is made between the display time of the fluctuations for the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a and the display time of the fluctuations for the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a in the low probability game state, time-saving game state, first high probability game state, and second high probability game state. This configuration allows the primary target for game progression to switch. Specifically, in the low probability game state, time-saving game state, and first high probability game state, the game progresses with the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a being the primary target, while in the second high probability game state, the game progresses with the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a being the primary target.

(How to play the game)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be explained with reference to Figures 554, 576, and 577. Figure 576 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game, and Figure 577 is a schematic diagram comparing the game states. In the following explanation, Figure 576 will be the main focus, with references to Figures 554 and 577 as appropriate.

(Low probability game state)
In the low-probability game state, which is compatible with both the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, a jackpot lottery is executed when a ball enters the first operating port 62a (specifically the lower operating port 62aL) located in the game area PE (left route). The low-probability game state shown in this embodiment is a game state set to have the lowest advantage for the player among the low-probability game state, time-saving game state, first high-probability game state, and second high-probability game state.

If a jackpot is achieved during low-probability gameplay, the game transitions to the first special gameplay state (open/close execution mode). In the first special gameplay state, the advantageous ball entry section 314 is opened according to the type of jackpot. If a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special gameplay state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special gameplay state becomes the high-probability mode.

As already explained, in the low-probability game state, the lottery results based on the entry into the first operating port 62a include a 3R normal jackpot result, a 3R probability variation jackpot result A, and a 3R probability variation jackpot result B. The breakdown of these is 50% for the 3R normal jackpot result, approximately 47% for the 3R probability variation jackpot result A, and approximately 3% for the 3R probability variation jackpot result B. Therefore, in most cases where a jackpot occurs, it will be either a 3R normal jackpot result or a 3R probability variation jackpot result A (see Figure 554).

In the first special game state, which is triggered by a 3R regular jackpot result, even if the game ball continues to be launched towards the right route, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 is generally avoided. If the first special game state ends without any balls entering the advantageous ball entry section 314, the game transitions to a time-saving game state corresponding to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the first special game state.

In the first special game state, triggered by a 3R probability variation jackpot result A, continuing to launch game balls towards the right route will generally result in balls entering the advantageous ball entry section 314. If balls enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the game will transition to the first high-probability game state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, after the first special game state ends.

In the first special game state, triggered by the 3R probability variation jackpot result B, continuing to launch game balls towards the right route will generally result in balls entering the advantageous ball entry section 314. When balls enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the game transitions to the second high-probability game state, which corresponds to both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, after the first special game state ends. The second high-probability game state is set to provide the highest advantage for the player among the low-probability game state, time-saving game state, first high-probability game state, and second high-probability game state. The 3R probability variation jackpot result B constitutes a direct hit route that bypasses the time-saving game state and the first high-probability game state.

In the low-probability game state, the symbols displayed on the display screen 75a (central portion) of the symbol display device 75 are associated with the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a. In other words, in the low-probability game state, the game round animation corresponding to the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. To put it another way, the symbols displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a are not associated with the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a. Furthermore, if a game ball is launched towards the right route during the low-probability game state, a warning sound is emitted from the speaker unit 29, and the message "Please shoot to the left" is displayed on the display screen 75a, prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the left route.

(Shortened game mode)
The shortened play state is compatible with the high-frequency support mode, and most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right operating port 62aR (first operating port 62a). This makes it possible to play while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, compared to the low probability play state.

During the shortened play state, the display time for the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 63a is the same as in the low-probability play state, while the display time for the number of game rounds related to the first operation port 62a is significantly shortened (see Figure 577). This, combined with the benefits of the high-frequency support mode, facilitates smoother game progression.

The time-saving game mode corresponds to a low-probability mode, with a jackpot probability of 1/100. However, this time-saving game mode continues until the number of plays reaches a predetermined 100 times, and the probability of hitting a jackpot before reaching that number is approximately 65%. In other words, in most cases when transitioning to the time-saving game mode, a jackpot can be hit again before reaching the predetermined number of plays.

In the time-saving game state, the distribution of results when a jackpot is achieved through a lottery based on entry into the first operating port 62a is the same as in the low-probability game state. If a 3R normal jackpot is achieved, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state is avoided, and after the end of the first special game state, the time-saving game state is restored, with the number of spins reset to 100. If a 3R probability variation jackpot result A is achieved, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state transitions to the first high-probability game state. If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B is achieved, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state transitions to the second high-probability game state.

In the time-saving game state, the game continues until the number of plays in that state reaches a predetermined number (100 plays). If the number of plays without a jackpot is reached, the game transitions (demotes) to the low-probability game state.

In the time-saving game state, the symbols displayed on the display screen 75a (central portion) of the symbol display device 75 are associated with the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the game round animation corresponding to the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. To put it another way, the symbols displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a are not associated with the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a. Furthermore, during the time-saving game state, the message "Please shoot to the right" is displayed on the display screen 75a, prompting the player to shoot the game balls to the right.

(First high-probability game state)
In the first high-probability game state, the relationship between the display time of the number of game rounds related to each operating port 62a, 63a is the same as in the time-saving game state, and the game proceeds mainly with the number of game rounds related to the first operating port 62a. The first high-probability game state also corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right operating port 62aR (first operating port 62a). As a result, similar to the time-saving game state, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held compared to the low-probability game state.

If a jackpot is achieved during the first probability variation game state based on a draw for entry into the first operation port 62a, the distribution is the same as in the low probability game state and the time-saving game state. If a 3R normal jackpot is achieved, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state is avoided, and after the end of the first special game state, the game enters the time-saving game state with a set number of 100 spins. If a 3R probability variation jackpot result A is achieved, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state will cause the game to transition back to the first high probability game state. If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B is achieved, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state will cause the game to transition to the second high probability game state.

In the first high-probability game state, the game essentially continues until the next big win occurs. Therefore, after transitioning to the first high-probability game state, the game will generally either be downgraded to the time-saving game state, loop through the first high-probability game state, or be promoted to the second high-probability game state. In other words, the goal is to loop through the first high-probability game state while aiming for promotion to the second high-probability game state.

In the first high-probability game state, the symbols displayed on the display screen 75a (central portion) of the symbol display device 75 are associated with the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a. In other words, in the first high-probability game state, the game round animation corresponding to the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. To put it another way, the symbols displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a are not associated with the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a. Furthermore, during the first high-probability game state, the message "Please shoot to the right" is displayed on the display screen 75a, prompting the player to shoot the game balls to the right.

(Second high probability game state)
During the second high-probability game state, the display time for the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a is significantly shortened, and the display time for the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a is significantly extended (see Figure 577). As a result, the relationship between the length of the display time for each round is reversed compared to the low-probability game state, the time-saving game state, and the first high-probability game state. In other words, the primary focus of game progression shifts from the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a to the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a.

In the second high-probability game state, by launching game balls towards the right route, approximately 1/5 of the game balls will enter the second operating port 63a. In the lottery based on entries into the second operating port 63a, the majority of results are special wins. When a special win occurs, the lower variable prize entry device 65 is quickly opened, and approximately one game ball enters the device with each opening. This results in a higher number of prize balls awarded relative to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate) compared to the low-probability game state, allowing the player to continue playing while minimizing the depletion of their game balls by launching them towards the right route. Furthermore, in this embodiment, to emphasize the advantages of the second high-probability game state, the depletion of game balls is further reduced compared to the time-saving game state and the first high-probability game state.

In the second high-probability game state, based on the lottery results from ball entry into the second operation port 63a, there are two outcomes: 3R probability variation jackpot result A and 3R probability variation jackpot result B. The breakdown of these two outcomes is 50% for 2R probability variation jackpot result A and 50% for 2R normal jackpot result B (see Figure 554). If 3R probability variation jackpot result A occurs, the game is downgraded to the first high-probability game state when a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state. If 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs, the game loops back to the second high-probability game state when a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state. In other words, once the game transitions to the second high-probability game state, the high-probability mode effectively continues even after the next jackpot, and there is no downgrade to the low-probability game state or the time-saving game state. In other words, it becomes an opportunity to increase your ball count by repeatedly hitting jackpots in a short period of time.

In the second probability variation game state, the symbols displayed on the display screen 75a (central portion) of the symbol display device 75 are associated with the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a. In other words, in the second probability variation game state, the game round animation corresponding to the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. To put it another way, the symbols displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a are not associated with the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a. Furthermore, during the second probability variation game state, the message "Please shoot to the right" is displayed on the display screen 75a, prompting the player to shoot the game balls to the right.

As detailed above, the normal game states shown in this embodiment are configured so that the player's advantage increases in the order of Low Probability Game State < Time-Saving Game State < First Probability Change Game State < Second Probability Change Game State. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special loop game state corresponding to a high probability mode, consisting of the First Probability Change Game State and the Second Probability Change Game State, provides a great opportunity to significantly increase the number of balls held. The main route to transition to the Second High Probability Game State is via the Low Probability Game State → Time-Saving Game State or the First Probability Change Game State → Second Probability Change Game State.

(Electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710)
Next, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 578, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710.

The notification and effect control board 651, installed in the notification and effect control device 143, is equipped with an MPU 652. The MPU 652 contains a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 652, a RAM 654 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 653, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM 653 and RAM 654 to be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 652; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 652 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for hold display control (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for opening and closing execution modes (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 652 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29, which are located on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 710. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 143 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 710 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 710 includes an MPU 672, which is a chip-integrated element containing a program ROM 673 and a work RAM 674; a display control board 671 on which a video display processor (VDP) 675, a character ROM 676, and a video RAM 677 are mounted. Note that it is not mandatory for the program ROM 673 and work RAM 674 to be integrated into a single chip on the MPU 672; they may be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 672 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 143, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 675 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 675). More specifically, the MPU 672 executes a process to identify the variation display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 75 based on the commands transmitted from the notification/effect control device 143, and also executes processing related to hold notifications, etc., and then executes drawing processing for the VDP 675 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

The program ROM 673 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 672, and also stores JPEG image data for background images. The work RAM 674 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 672. This work data and flags are stored in various areas of the work RAM 674.

The VDP675 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device, which acts as a liquid crystal display driver, integrated into the graphic display device 75. Because the VDP675 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be described as a microcontroller chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP675 adjusts the timing of the MPU672, video RAM677, etc., to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM677 from the character ROM676 at a predetermined timing to display it on the graphic display device 75.

The character ROM 676 serves as an image data library for storing character data, such as patterns, displayed on the pattern display device 75. This character ROM 676 holds bitmap image data of various display patterns, a color palette table referenced when determining the color representation for each dot of the bitmap image, and other similar data.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide multiple character ROMs 676 and store image data and other information in each character ROM 676. It is also possible to configure the system so that JPEG image data for background images, stored in the program ROM 673, is stored in the character ROMs 676.

The video RAM 677 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75. The display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 677.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the general outline of the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 75a is identified by the notification/effect control device 143 by referring to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the pattern variation display mode are determined by the display control device 710 based on the result of this identification. Specifically, the MPU 642 of the notification/effect control device 143 executes a pattern variation control process as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 msec), and the general outline of the pattern variation display mode is identified in this pattern variation control process. Now, the pattern variation control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 579.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, if the game state is a low probability game state, a positive determination is made in step S1701E, and the low probability variable display control process for the low probability game state is executed in step S1702E. If the game state is a time-saving game state, a negative determination is made in step S1701E and a positive determination is made in step S1703E, and the time-saving variable display control process is executed in step S1704E. If the game state is a first high probability game state, negative determinations are made in steps S1701E and S1703E and a positive determination is made in step S1705E, and the process proceeds to step S1706E to execute the first high probability variable display control process. If the game state is the second high probability game state, a negation check is performed in steps S1701E, S1703E, S1705E, and S1707E, and the process proceeds to step S1708E, where the second high probability variation display control process is executed.

While the general outlines of the low-probability, time-saving, first-high-probability, and second-high-probability variable display control processes are largely the same, they differ in (1) the corresponding game rounds (game rounds related to the first operation port 62a and game rounds related to the second operation port 63a), (2) the types of game round effects set, and (3) the main sets of symbols used. The following describes the outlines of these variable display control processes and the game round effects executed for each game round, referring to Figures 580 to 583.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
As shown in the flowchart of Figure 580, in the variable display control process, first, in step S1801E, it is determined whether or not one game round is currently being executed, that is, whether or not the variable display or confirmed display of the symbols for one game round is being executed on the symbol display device 75. If it is determined that a game round is not currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S1802E, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1802E, the current fluctuation display control process will terminate. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S1802E, the fluctuation start process described later will be executed in step S1803E, and then the current fluctuation display control process will terminate.

Returning to the explanation of step S1801E, if a positive result is obtained in step S1801E, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1804E. In step S1804E, it is determined whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative result is obtained in step S1804E, the variation display control process is terminated after executing the variation in progress processing in step S1805E. The variation in progress processing is the process of executing various effects or changing determined effects during the game round started by the variation start processing.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1804E, the process proceeds to step S1806E, where the variation termination process is executed, and then the variation display control process ends. In the variation termination process, the variation display of the symbols and the ongoing effects are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the held information for that game round. This process involves driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 to perform effects corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 710, and the variation termination process ends. The MPU 672 of the display control device 710 controls the symbol display device 75 to confirm and stop the symbols based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing to initiate change)
Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 581, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the variation initiation process in step S1803E. The variation initiation process is the process of starting the game round's effects based on the receipt of a variation initiation command from the main control device 162. In the variation initiation process, settings such as the reach display are made as part of the game round's effects.

In the variation start process, first, in step S1901E, the variation start command received is read, and from this command, information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time are identified. Also, as already explained, when the variation start command is sent from the main control unit 162, a type command is also sent. In step S1901E, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and from this command, various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, normal jackpot result, special jackpot result, loss result, and ceiling reach information, is identified. Then, in step S1901E, from the identified information, information on whether a jackpot was won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information on whether a special jackpot was won, information on whether a reach occurred if neither a jackpot nor a special jackpot was won, and information on the variation display time are obtained, and this obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 652.

In the following step S1902E, based on the information obtained in step S1901E, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the result of the current game is a jackpot result (3R normal jackpot result, 3R probability variation jackpot result A, 3R probability variation jackpot result B), the jackpot performance setting process is executed in the following step S1903E. The jackpot performance setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as corresponding to a jackpot: a combination of "1" symbol, "1" symbol, and "1" symbol; a combination of "2" symbol, "2" symbol, and "2" symbol; a combination of "3" symbol, "3" symbol, and "3" symbol; a combination of "4" symbol, "4" symbol, and "4" symbol; a combination of "5" symbol, "5" symbol, and "5" symbol; a combination of "6" symbol, "6" symbol, and "6" symbol; a combination of "7" symbol, "7" symbol, and "7" symbol; a combination of "8" symbol, "8" symbol, and "8" symbol; and a combination of "9" symbol, "9" symbol, and "9" symbol.

As already explained, when a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the process of determining the jackpot display pattern, the system retrieves the reach display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 and determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the received variation start command and variation display time and type command. Furthermore, the system executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

If step S1902E determines that it is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1904E. Step S1904E determines whether the current game round corresponds to a special win. If the determination in step S1904E is positive, the process proceeds to step S1905E. Step S1905E executes the special win animation setting process. The special win animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of special win symbols to be displayed and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the special win symbols.

In the process for determining the stop result for a special win, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a special win is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

As will be explained in detail later, in this embodiment, the following combinations of symbols are defined as corresponding to a special win: the combination of "1," "3," and "5"; the combination of "3," "5," and "7"; the combination of "5," "7," and "1"; and the combination of "7," "1," and "3."

In the event of a special win, the result is notified without going through the reach display. The special win variation display pattern determination process retrieves the special win variation display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653, and determines the display time of the variation start command received and the performance pattern corresponding to the game result of the type command. Furthermore, the process of storing the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654 is executed.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1904E, the process proceeds to step S1906E to determine whether the current game round corresponds to a losing reach. If a positive result is obtained in step S1906E, the process proceeds to step S1907E to execute the animation setting process for generating a losing reach.

The process for setting the animation for a losing reach is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing reach to be displayed and the valid line for displaying that symbol combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols corresponding to the losing reach. In the variation display pattern determination process for losing reaches, the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 is retrieved, and the animation pattern for normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the variation display time of the variation start command received and the game result of the type command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

In the process of determining the stop result for a losing reach, the stopping symbols are determined so that they do not result in either a jackpot combination or a special win combination. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

If a negative result is determined in step S1906E, the process proceeds to step S1908E, where the animation setting process for a complete miss is executed. This animation setting process for a complete miss is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a complete miss and the valid lines on which that combination will be displayed; and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match either the symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result or the symbol combination corresponding to a special win result. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for complete misses, the variable display pattern table for non-reach misses stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 is retrieved, and the display time of the variable start command received and the performance pattern corresponding to the game result of the command are determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

After executing any of the processes in steps S1903E, S1905E, S1907E, or S1908E, the process proceeds to step S1909E. In step S1909E, commands containing information about the stop result and presentation pattern determined in steps S1903E, S1905E, S1907E, and S1908E are output to the display control device 710 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 672 of the display control device 710 then controls the display of the symbol display device 75 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S1909E, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S1910E, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S1903E, S1905E, S1907E, and S1908E, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, the configuration and content of the symbol variation display for each game round will be explained based on the schematic diagrams in Figures 582 and 583. Figure 582 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, and Figure 583 is a schematic diagram illustrating the symbol variation display mode executed in the variation display area ME of the display screen 75a. Note that the background image and other elements displayed on the display screen 75a are omitted in Figures 582 and 583.

The character ROM 676 of the display control device 710 pre-stores data for eight main symbols numbered "1" through "8" (see Figures 585(a) to (h)) and data for sub-symbols without numbers (see Figure 585(i)).

As shown in Figure 582(a), the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up: upper, middle, and lower. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is composed of main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 75a, the patterns in each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

The upper symbol row Z1 consists of eight main symbols, "1" through "8," arranged in descending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. The lower symbol row Z3 consists of eight main symbols, "1" through "8," arranged in ascending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. The middle symbol row Z2 consists of eight main symbols, "1" through "8," arranged in ascending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. In other words, each symbol row from Z1 to Z3 consists of 16 symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 582(b), the display screen 75a displays three symbols for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. The display screen 75a also has five active lines: the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5 (see Figure 582(a)). The display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Once the display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has finished with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed, indicating either a normal jackpot or a probability-increasing jackpot.

Furthermore, considering that the display of variations in each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 can be referred to as the first symbol row, the lower symbol row Z3 as the second symbol row, and the middle symbol row Z2 as the third symbol row.

Of the main symbols listed above, those with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are considered "specific symbols," while those with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are considered "non-specific symbols." In the case of a probability-increasing jackpot, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed. In the case of a regular jackpot, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed.

Furthermore, the manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 75 is not limited to those described above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row may be set to vertical.

Below the lower part of the display screen 75a, specifically below the variable display area ME which is composed of a variable display area for the upper symbol row, a variable display area for the middle symbol row, and a variable display area for the lower symbol row, is a hold display area NE. The hold display area NE consists of four hold count display areas Da, each containing the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operating openings 62a and 63a, arranged horizontally; and an execution target display area Dc capable of displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game round currently being played in the variable display area ME.

More specifically, when a game ball enters each of the operating ports 62a and 63a, the maximum number of balls held is 4 in each port. Correspondingly, the held ball display area Da is configured with a first unit held ball display area, a second unit held ball display area, a third unit held ball display area, and a fourth unit held ball display area.

During low-probability gameplay, time-saving gameplay, and the first high-probability gameplay state, a reserve icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls related to the operation port 62a is displayed in the reserve display area NE. During the second high-probability gameplay state, a reserve icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls related to the operation port 63a is displayed in the reserve display area NE. For example, if a ball enters the operation port 62a while in low-probability gameplay and the number of reserved balls is 1, the reserve icon is displayed only in the first unit reserve display area. If a game ball enters the operation port 62a and the number of reserved balls is 4, the reserve icons are displayed in the first to fourth unit reserve display areas, respectively. Figure 582(b) illustrates the case where there are 3 reserved balls related to the operation port 62a while in low-probability gameplay. In the following explanation, "number of reserved balls" will also be simply referred to as "number of reserved balls."

(Display method)
The variable display modes of the symbols executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a are broadly classified into five types: non-reach miss (complete miss), normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. The variable display times for these variable display modes are set to be different, and based on the information related to the variable display time attached to the command from the main control device 162, it is possible to grasp an overview of the variable display mode for each game round.

Specifically, the display time for non-reach misses is "0.5 sec to 14 sec" (with differences depending on the game state, number of reserved balls, etc.), the display time for normal reach A is "20 sec", the display time for normal reach B is "25 sec", which is longer than the display time for normal reach A, and the display time for super reach A to C is "30 to 40 sec", which is longer than the display time for normal reach A and B. For example, if the information regarding the display time of the variation attached to the command from the main control device 162 is "20 sec", the notification and performance control device 143 will understand that normal reach A should be executed, and if the information regarding the display time of the variation attached to the command from the main control device 162 is "25 sec", the notification and performance control device 143 will understand that normal reach B should be executed. In contrast, if the information regarding the variable display time attached to the command from the main control unit 162 is "30 sec," the decision of which of Super Reach A to C to execute is left to the notification and performance control unit 143.

In this determination, during gameplay rounds corresponding to a jackpot, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A. During gameplay rounds corresponding to a complete miss, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, during gameplay rounds corresponding to a jackpot result, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. During gameplay rounds corresponding to a miss, the selection order is more likely to be Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In short, the probability of winning a jackpot increases as the display time increases, and this probability increases in the order of Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C.

Furthermore, regarding the game rounds corresponding to special misses, the selection order is made more likely in the following sequence: Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. In game rounds where the ceiling is reached, the selection rates are evenly distributed so that Super Reach C = Super Reach B = Super Reach A.

Here, the display patterns for normal reach A and B will be explained with reference to Figure 583(a). When normal reach A or B is selected, the display of all stopped symbol rows begins to change (scroll display), then the display of the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) ends (stops), and then the display of the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3) ends (stops). With the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stopped in this state, a reach line is formed when the main symbols with the same number on any of the active lines L1 to L5 (see Figure 582(a)) are stopped. Then, with the reach line formed, the display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) changes, resulting in a reach display (reach change display). After the reach display is formed, the display of the middle symbol row Z2 ends by stopping it. Then, if the same symbols that make up the winning combination stop on the winning line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won. If any other symbols stop on the same winning line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the combination of symbols that was finally displayed remains the same for a predetermined period. In other words, the current game round continues until the display period has elapsed, and once that period has elapsed, the game is allowed to move on to the next round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the display time of the middle symbol sequence Z2 after the reach line is formed is ensured, thereby maintaining the difference in display time between normal reach A and normal reach B. However, the method of setting this difference is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in display time by setting a difference in the time from when the display of the symbols starts until the reach line is formed.

Next, based on the display patterns of Normal Reach A and B described above, the display patterns of Super Reach A, B, and C will be explained. As shown in Figures 583(b) to (c), Super Reach A, B, and C form the reach lines described above through the same process as Normal Reach A and B. After the reach lines are formed, the reach effect is performed by displaying predetermined characters as animations in conjunction with the display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a fairy is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME); in Super Reach B, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a boy is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME); and in Super Reach C, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a girl is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME).

In this embodiment, the display control mode in the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 is configured to switch according to the game state. The stage where the player stays changes according to these display control modes (game state), thereby preventing monotony in the game. Each stage differs in the background music output from the speaker unit 29, the background image displayed on the display screen 75a, and the set of symbols used. Now, with reference to Figure 584, the stages for each display control mode will be described.

When the game is in a low-probability state, the above display control mode becomes the first display mode. In this first display mode, during the daytime beach stage, the background displayed on the display screen 75a becomes an image (video) of the daytime beach, and symbol group A is set as the symbol group displayed on the display screen 75a.

When the game is in a time-saving mode, the display control mode changes to the second display mode. In this second display mode, during the daytime beach stage, the background displayed on screen 75a becomes the nighttime beach image (video), and symbol group A is set as the variable symbol group displayed on screen 75a.

When the game is in the first high-probability game state, the display control mode changes to the third display mode. In the sea stage where the game is currently in this third display mode, the background displayed on the display screen 75a becomes an image (video) of the sea, and symbol group A is set as the symbol group displayed on the display screen 75a.

When the game is in the second high-probability state, the display control mode changes to the fourth display mode. In the underwater stage where the game is currently in this fourth display mode, the background displayed on the display screen 75a becomes an underwater image (video), and symbol group B is set as the symbol group displayed on the display screen 75a.

Here, referring to Figures 585 and 589, the differences between pattern group A and pattern group B will be explained.

As shown in Figure 585, pattern group A consists of specific patterns (odd-numbered patterns) such as "1," "3," "5," and "7," non-specific patterns (even-numbered patterns) such as "2," "4," "6," and "8," and sub-patterns resembling seashells.

The "1" symbol, which makes up the pattern group A, consists of the number "1" and a red "octopus" character image (see Figure 585(a)), the "2" symbol consists of the number "2" and a light blue "pufferfish" character image (see Figure 585(b)), the "3" symbol consists of the number "3" and a green "turtle" character image (see Figure 585(c)), the "4" symbol consists of the number "4" and a blue "shark" character image (see Figure 585(d)), The "5" symbol consists of the number "5" and a purple "shrimp" character image (see Figure 585(e)), the "6" symbol consists of the number "6" and an orange "anglerfish" character image (see Figure 585(f)), the "7" symbol consists of the number "7" and a light blue "dugong" character image (see Figure 585(g)), and the "8" symbol consists of the number "8" and a yellow "angelfish" character image (see Figure 585(h)).

In contrast, as shown in Figure 586, while the total number of symbols in symbol group B is the same as in symbol group A, it consists of specific symbols (odd-numbered symbols) such as "1," "3," "5," and "7," along with sub-symbols resembling shells. It does not include the non-specific symbols (even-numbered symbols) that make up symbol group A: "2," "4," "6," and "8." Specifically, symbol group B is created by replacing the non-specific symbols (even-numbered symbols) in symbol group A with specific symbols (odd-numbered symbols), resulting in two of each of "1," "3," "5," and "7."

The replaced specific symbols are all gold, differentiating them from the other specific symbols common to symbol group A. In other words, symbol group B consists of a "1" symbol (see Figure 586(a)) consisting of a "1" number image and a red "octopus" character image, a "1" symbol (see Figure 586(b)) consisting of a "1" number image and a gold "octopus" character image, a "3" symbol (see Figure 586(c)) consisting of a "3" number image and a green "turtle" character image, and a "3" symbol (see Figure 586(d)) consisting of a "3" number image and a gold "turtle" character image. The design consists of three patterns: a "5" pattern (see Figure 586(e)) consisting of the number "5" and a purple "shrimp" character image; a "5" pattern (see Figure 586(f)) consisting of the number "5" and a golden "shrimp" character image; a "7" pattern (see Figure 586(g)) consisting of the number "7" and a light blue "dugong" character image; and a "7" pattern (see Figure 586(h)) consisting of the number "7" and a golden "dugong" character image. In the following explanation, the standard-colored specific patterns will be referred to as "First Specific Patterns," and the golden specific patterns as "Second Specific Patterns," as appropriate.

Here, referring to Figure 587, we compare the pattern sequences composed of pattern group A and those composed of pattern group B. Figure 587(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a pattern sequence composed of pattern group A (ascending order), and Figure 587(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a pattern sequence composed of pattern group B (descending order).

In the low probability game state, time-saving game state, and first high probability game state, the symbol group A used has the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 reversed. Specifically, in both the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols are arranged in ascending order, specifically in the following circular pattern: "1" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "2" symbol (non-specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "3" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "4" symbol (non-specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "5" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "6" symbol (non-specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "7" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "8" symbol (non-specific symbol) → sub-symbol (see Figure 587(a)). Furthermore, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged in descending order of numbers, specifically as follows: "8" symbol (non-specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "7" symbol (first specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "6" symbol (non-specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "5" symbol (first specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "4" symbol (non-specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "3" symbol (first specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "2" symbol (non-specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "1" symbol (first specific symbol) → secondary symbol, forming a circular pattern (illustration omitted).

In contrast, the symbol group B used in the second high-probability game state also has the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 reversed. Specifically, in both the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols are arranged in ascending order, specifically in the following order: "1" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "1" symbol (second specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "3" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "3" symbol (second specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "5" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "5" symbol (second specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "7" symbol (first specific symbol) → sub-symbol → "7" symbol (second specific symbol) → sub-symbol (see Figure 587(b)). Furthermore, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged in descending order of numbers, specifically as follows: "7" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "7" symbol (first designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "5" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "5" symbol (first designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "3" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "3" symbol (first designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "1" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "1" symbol (first designated symbol) → secondary symbol, forming a circular pattern (illustration omitted).

Next, referring to Figure 588(a), we will explain the symbol combinations that are displayed as the final stop (confirmation display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 when a jackpot result is achieved in each game state (display mode).

(Symbol combinations that are confirmed to be displayed in the first display mode)
When a 3R regular jackpot is achieved in a low-probability game state where the display control mode is set to the first display mode, the first type symbol combination, which is a combination of identical non-specific symbols, is confirmed and displayed on one of the active lines. The first type symbol combinations are defined as a combination of three "2" symbols (non-specific symbols), a combination of three "4" symbols (non-specific symbols), a combination of three "6" symbols (non-specific symbols), and a combination of three "8" symbols (non-specific symbols).

On the other hand, in a low-probability game state where the display control mode is set to the first display mode, if a 3R probability variation jackpot result A occurs, the second type of symbol combination, which is a combination of the same first specific symbol, will be displayed on the active line. The following are defined as the second type of symbol combinations: a combination of three "1" symbols (first specific symbols), a combination of three "3" symbols (first specific symbols), a combination of three "5" symbols (first specific symbols), and a combination of three "7" symbols (first specific symbols).

In this embodiment, a direct route is provided that allows transition to the second high-probability game state even in the low-probability game state. Specifically, the configuration allows for a 3R probability variation jackpot result B even in the low-probability game state. When a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs in the low-probability game state, the aforementioned second type symbol combination is displayed as confirmed. In other words, at this point, it is difficult to distinguish whether a 3R probability variation jackpot result B or a 3R probability variation jackpot result A has been won from the confirmed symbol combination. When a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs, if a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the special game state transitioned to as a result of the 3R probability variation jackpot result B, the player is notified of the transition to the second high-probability game state.

(Symbol combinations that are confirmed and displayed in the second display mode)
If a 3R regular jackpot is achieved in the time-saving game state where the display control mode is the second display mode, the above-mentioned first-type symbol combination, which is the same combination of non-specific symbols, will be confirmed and displayed on the 1 active line. On the other hand, if a 3R probability variation jackpot A is achieved during the second display mode, the above-mentioned second-type symbol combination, which is the same combination of first-specific symbols, will be confirmed and displayed on the 1 active line.

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the second display mode, the aforementioned second type symbol combination will be displayed as confirmed. In other words, at this point, it is difficult to distinguish whether a 3R probability variation jackpot result B or 3R probability variation jackpot result A was won from the confirmed symbol combination. If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs, and a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the special game state triggered by that 3R probability variation jackpot result B, the player will be notified of the transition to the second high probability game state.

(Symbol combinations that are confirmed to be displayed in the third display mode)
If a 3R regular jackpot is achieved in the first high-probability game state where the display control mode is the third display mode, the above-mentioned first type symbol combination, which is the same non-specific symbol combination, will be confirmed and displayed on the 1 active line. On the other hand, if a 3R probability variation jackpot A is achieved during the third display mode, the above-mentioned second type symbol combination, which is the same first specific symbol combination, will be confirmed and displayed on the 1 active line.

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the third display mode, the aforementioned second-type symbol combination will be displayed as confirmed. In other words, at this point, it is difficult to distinguish whether a 3R probability variation jackpot result B or 3R probability variation jackpot result A was won from the confirmed symbol combination. If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs, and a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the special game state triggered by that 3R probability variation jackpot result B, the player will be notified of the transition to the second high-probability game state.

(Symbol combinations that are confirmed to be displayed in the fourth display mode)
In the second high-probability game state, where the display control mode is the fourth display mode, the result will basically be either 3R probability variation jackpot result A or 3R probability variation jackpot result B, and the configuration is such that a 3R normal jackpot result is avoided. If 3R probability variation jackpot result A occurs during the fourth display mode, the above-mentioned second type symbol combination, which is the same first specific symbol combination, will be displayed on the 1 active line.

On the other hand, if a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the fourth display mode, the third type symbol combination, which is a combination of the same second specific symbol, will be displayed on the active line 1. The following are defined as the third type symbol combinations: three "1" symbols (second specific symbol), three "3" symbols (second specific symbol), three "5" symbols (second specific symbol), and three "7" symbols (second specific symbol).

As shown in Figure 588(b), if a special win occurs during the fourth display mode, the fourth type of symbol combination, which is a combination of the second specific symbols, will be displayed on the active line 1. The following fourth type of symbol combinations are specified: the combination of "1" (second specific symbol), "3" (second specific symbol), and "5" (second specific symbol); the combination of "3" (second specific symbol), "5" (second specific symbol), and "7" (second specific symbol); the combination of "5" (second specific symbol), "7" (second specific symbol), and "1" (second specific symbol); and the combination of "7" (second specific symbol), "1" (second specific symbol), and "3" (second specific symbol).

As already explained, in this embodiment, the player's advantage increases in the order of low probability game state < time-saving game state < first high probability game state < second high probability game state. When transitioning to the second high probability game state, the lottery mode remains in high probability mode for the next jackpot, regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, transitioning to the second high probability game state ensures that a demotion to the low probability mode is avoided at least once. The second high probability game state is the underwater stage. It is assumed that players, while in other stages, play hoping to transition to the underwater stage, and after transitioning to the underwater stage, play hoping to continue in that stage. Here, referring to Figure 589, the flow of gameplay after transitioning to the underwater stage will be explained further.

When the game transitions to the second high-probability game state, the underwater stage is set as the stage for the game's presentation. In this underwater stage, each symbol row consists of the symbol group B described above, comprising the first specific symbol, the second specific symbol, and the sub-symbols. In other words, non-specific symbols are not displayed on the display screen 75a.

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the second high-probability game state, the above-mentioned third-type symbol combination will be confirmed after a reach display. After the special game state triggered by the 3R probability variation jackpot result B ends, the game returns to the underwater stage. This clearly indicates to the player that the high-probability mode will not end with the next jackpot. After that, the underwater stage will continue (loop) until a 3R probability variation jackpot result A occurs.

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result A occurs during the underwater stage, the above-mentioned combination of second-type symbols will be confirmed after a reach display. After the special game state triggered by this 3R probability variation jackpot result A ends, the game will transition (demoted) to the surface stage corresponding to the first high-probability game state.

In this sea-based stage, most jackpots result in either a 3R regular jackpot or a 3R probability variation jackpot (A). Each symbol row in the sea-based stage consists of the aforementioned symbol group A, comprising a non-specific symbol, a first specific symbol, and a sub-symbol. Therefore, the second specific symbol is not displayed on the display screen 75a.

In the sea stage corresponding to the first high-probability game state, the goal is to repeatedly win 3R probability-changing jackpot result A, aiming for 3R probability-changing jackpot result B, which triggers an upgrade to the underwater stage. If 3R probability-changing jackpot result A occurs during the sea stage, a reach display will appear, followed by a confirmed display of the above-mentioned second-type symbol combination. After the special game state triggered by this 3R probability-changing jackpot result A ends, the player returns to the sea stage (loop). On the other hand, if 3R normal jackpot result occurs during the sea stage, a reach display will appear, followed by a confirmed display of the above-mentioned first-type symbol combination. After the special game state triggered by this 3R normal jackpot result ends, the player transitions to the beach (night) stage (demotion).

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the sea stage, the above-mentioned combination of Type 2 symbols will be confirmed after a reach display, and the game will transition (upgrade) to the underwater stage after a pre-announcement sequence during the special game state triggered by the 3R probability variation jackpot result A.

Next, we will explain the transition process to the underwater stage, referring to Figure 590. Figure 590 illustrates the case where a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the first high-probability game state.

During the first high-probability game state (while in the sea stage), at the timing of tea1, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 begins displaying the changes in each symbol sequence consisting of symbol group A, coinciding with the start of a game round related to the first operation port 62a. This game round corresponds to the 3R probability variation jackpot result B, and at the timing of the following tea2, the second type symbol combination is confirmed after a reach display. At the timing of tea3, after the confirmation display ends, the game transitions to a special game state, and an opening display (display of the words "SUPER LUCKY") indicating the start of the special game state is executed on the display screen 75a. If a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during this special game state, the game state transitioned to after the special game state ends becomes the second high-probability game state.

After this ball entry occurs, at the timing of tea4 during the special game state, a message indicating the continuation of the high probability mode (for example, the words "Next Continuation Confirmed") will be displayed on the display screen 75a. At the timing after this message is displayed, and at the timing of tea5 when the ending of the special game state begins, the stage that was the player's previous stage (the sea stage) and the confirmed symbols will be displayed. Then, after a predetermined stage switching sequence, the player will transition from the sea stage to the underwater stage (at the timing of tea6).

At the subsequent timing of tea7, the special game state ends and the game transitions to the second high-probability game state. If game balls are launched along the right route, some of them enter the second operation port 63a, so in most cases, a reserve related to the second operation port 63a is secured before the special game state ends. When the game transitions to the second high-probability game state with a reserve related to the second operation port 63a secured, the display of the changing symbols (special symbol 2) on the operation port display unit begins immediately, while the display of the changing symbols on the display screen 75a is slightly delayed. Specifically, at the timing of tea7, a change animation is performed that changes the group of symbols constituting the symbol sequence from symbol group A to symbol group B. Specifically, the non-specific symbols rotate horizontally at the stop display position, and after rotation, they switch to the second specific symbols. This animation emphasizes that the continuation of the high-probability mode is confirmed.

When transitioning to the second high-probability game state, it is preferable that the symbols displayed on the display screen 75a during the game round that triggered the transition to the special game state include at least one non-specific symbol. Considering this, in this embodiment, when a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs outside of the underwater stage, the symbol stop display pattern is determined such that the symbols displayed include at least one non-specific symbol.

In this embodiment, when the display mode switches from the first to third display modes to the fourth display mode and the current stage transitions to the underwater stage, the symbol sequence changes from a sequence composed of symbol group A (first specific symbol, non-specific symbol) to a sequence composed of symbol group B (first specific symbol, second specific symbol). This suggests that in the underwater stage, the first type of symbol combination, which consists of non-specific symbols, will not occur. Such a configuration enhances player satisfaction upon transitioning to the underwater stage and effectively encourages player attention during gameplay.

<Variation 1>
In the 59th embodiment described above, the complexity of the control related to the variable display was suppressed by making the number of symbols the same in the pattern sequence consisting of pattern group A and the pattern sequence consisting of pattern group B, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, pattern group A may consist of nine main symbols (see Figure 591), while pattern group B may consist of ten main symbols (see Figure 592). In other words, when changing the pattern sequence that makes up the pattern sequence displayed on the display screen 75a from pattern group A to pattern group B, it is possible not only to replace the non-specific symbols in pattern group A with second specific symbols, but also to add second specific symbols to the pattern sequence.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 59th embodiment described above, the pattern change animation is performed while the pattern change display (scrolling display) of the pattern row is stopped (in a stationary state), but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the invention to perform the pattern change animation while the pattern change display (scrolling display) is in progress. However, as shown in the modified example 1 above, if the number of patterns constituting the pattern row increases by changing the pattern group from pattern group A to pattern group B, it becomes necessary to control the number of patterns while making the change animation process visible, which may result in a strong sense of visual incongruity. Therefore, when this modified example is combined with modified example 1, it is preferable to mitigate the aforementioned incongruity by, for example, performing a high-speed pattern change display (high-speed scrolling display) so that the patterns are temporarily invisible, and then performing the change display during that time.

<Example 3>
In the 59th embodiment described above, an example was given of a configuration in which the symbol change animation is performed after the special game state has ended, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system to perform the symbol change animation during the special game state (for example, during the ending).

<Modification 4>
Figure 590 illustrates an example of changing a non-specific symbol to a second specific symbol when both a first specific symbol and a non-specific symbol are displayed on the display screen 75a, but the system is not limited to this. It is sufficient to have a configuration in which the non-specific symbols to be changed are displayed on the display screen 75a and then changed to the second specific symbol; it is not necessarily required to perform the change animation while both the first specific symbol and the non-specific symbol are displayed.

<Example 5>
In the 59th embodiment described above, the change animation is performed with multiple non-specific symbols to be changed displayed on the display screen 75a. However, this does not negate the possibility of performing the change animation with only one non-specific symbol to be changed displayed on the display screen 75a.

<60th Embodiment>
In the 59th embodiment described above, in the first high-probability game state, the game may be downgraded to a low-probability mode if a jackpot is hit next time, while in the second high-probability game state, the game is configured to loop into a high-probability mode if a jackpot is hit next time, thereby enhancing the contrast of the gameplay. In the underwater stage for special effects associated with the second high-probability game state, the sequence of symbols displayed on the display screen 75a is composed of a symbol group A consisting of specific symbols (first specific symbol and second specific symbol), and by clearly demonstrating its superiority, the player's satisfaction in the underwater stage is increased. In this embodiment, the timing of changes in the symbol groups constituting the sequence of symbols and the types of symbol groups used differ from the 59th embodiment described above. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the 59th embodiment. The explanation of configurations common to the 59th embodiment will be omitted as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the system is configured to determine the set of symbols that make up the symbol sequence based on the stored hold information when transitioning to the highest stage, the underwater stage. The following provides a supplementary explanation of the process for pre-confirming the contents of the hold information, specifically the prize entry process for the activation port (step S105E) executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162.

(Award processing for the operating port)
In the prize-winning process for the operating port, it is first determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62a, a prize-winning command is set in the payout control device 181 to dispense two game balls. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a prize has been won in the first operating port 62a to the hall computer on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a prize has been won in the first operating port 62a. Next, a value corresponding to the first operating port 62a is read from the reserve number storage area FE, and this value is set as the first operating port reserve number RaN. After that, the operating port information acquisition process is executed to end this prize-winning process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first operation opening 62a, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second operation opening 63a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 63a, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to dispense one game ball. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a prize has been awarded to the second operation opening 63a to the hall computer on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a prize has been awarded to the second operation opening 63a. Next, the value corresponding to the second operation opening 63a is read from the reserve number storage area FE, and this value is set as the reserve number RbN for the second operation opening. After that, the operation opening information acquisition process is executed, and this prize award process is terminated. In the following explanation, the reserve number RaN for the first operation opening and the reserve number RbN for the second operation opening will also be simply referred to as the reserve number N.

If no prize is awarded in either the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a, the prize awarding process will be terminated.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process described above, first, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the operation port that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 62a and the second operation port 63a, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, the number of reserved operation memories N for the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and the total number of reserved operation memories stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

Next, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103E above, are stored in the first available memory area of the reserve area RE for the operation slot, and in the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN.

In other words, if the first operation slot's reserved memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103E, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation slot's reserved memory count N.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved memory slots RbN for the second operation slot is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS, which were updated in step S103E, are stored in the first available memory area of the reserved memory area RE for the operation slot, i.e., the area corresponding to the number of reserved memory slots N.

After storing the hold information, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 81. In the display update process, if the current prize is awarded to the first operation port 62a, the display on the hold count display section S1 for the first operation port is updated; if the current prize is awarded to the second operation port 63a, the display on the hold count display section S2 for the second operation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 62a and the reserved number related to the second operation port 63a. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 62a increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 63a increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

Next, the system executes a pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes to make the sub-control device (notification/performance control device 143) recognize that a prize has been awarded to the operation ports 62a and 63a, and to execute the hold notification, etc., and then terminates this information acquisition process. The hold command includes information on whether the prize was awarded to the first operation port 62a or the second operation port 63a.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 593, the pre-check process for the operating port described above will be explained.

(Pre-confirmation process)
In the pre-check process, first, in step S2001E, the value of the winning random number counter C1 acquired this time is compared with the win/loss table for the operating slot stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of ROM 603 to check whether a jackpot has occurred. If it is confirmed that a jackpot has not occurred, the pre-check process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that a jackpot has occurred, a positive determination is made in step S2002E and the process proceeds to step S2003E.

In step S2003E, the type of jackpot is confirmed by referring to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained this time and the distribution table for the operation slot stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of ROM 603. If it is confirmed that a normal jackpot has occurred, a positive judgment is made in step S2004E, and the process proceeds to step S2005E, where the normal jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If it is confirmed that a probability variation jackpot A has occurred, a negative judgment is made in step S2004E and a positive judgment is made in step S2006E, and the process proceeds to step S2007E, where the probability variation jackpot A occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If it is confirmed that a probability variation jackpot B has occurred, negative judgments are made in steps S2004E and S2006E, and the process proceeds to step S2008E, where the probability variation jackpot B occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602, and this pre-confirmation process ends.

Although not illustrated, the pre-check process, if it is confirmed that no jackpots occur, checks for the occurrence of a losing reach by referring to the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS obtained this time, along with the lottery table and variation display time table for losing reaches stored in ROM 603. If a losing reach occurs, its type is confirmed. If it is confirmed that a losing reach has occurred, the information about the occurrence of the losing reach is stored in the register of MPU 602.

In the above-mentioned process for setting the hold command, if the MPU 602 register contains information about the occurrence of a normal jackpot, the hold command corresponding to the normal jackpot is set. If the MPU 602 register contains information about the occurrence of a probability variation jackpot A, the hold command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot A is set. If the MPU 602 register contains information about the occurrence of a probability variation jackpot B, the hold command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot B is set.

If the MPU602 register does not contain information about a big win, it checks whether it contains information about a losing reach. If it does, it sets a "losing reach" hold command as the hold command. The "losing reach" hold command includes information about the general type of losing reach (for example, whether it is a super reach or not). If neither information about a big win nor information about a losing reach is contained, it sets a "losing reach non-hold command" (completely losing hold command) as the hold command.

Next, we will explain the pending command handling process executed by the MPU 651 of the notification and performance control device 143.

(Handling of pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command is received from the main control unit 162, processing corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined interval (for example, every 2 msec).

In the processing of pending commands, the first step is to determine whether or not a pending command has been received. Commands received by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 are temporarily stored in the command storage area 661 of the RAM 654 (see Figure 578). This command storage area 661 is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing multiple commands and allowing reading from commands stored earlier. This ensures that even when multiple commands are received simultaneously, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. To determine whether or not a pending command has been received, the system checks whether the pending command is present in the area of the command storage area 661 being read. This command reading configuration is the same for reading other commands, such as commands for starting fluctuations.

When a hold command is received, the various information contained in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 667 (see Figure 578). The hold information storage area 667 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to store one hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area is shifted sequentially to the lower areas when a through gate shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the execution area CE is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: first area Rc1 → execution area BE, second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3, ..., eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the notification and performance control device 143's hold information storage area 667, the hold ball storage area 632 (specifically, the operation port hold area RE) of the main control device 162 is configured to store hold information chronologically. Specifically, the information regarding the number of hold balls included in the currently received through-gate hold command is identified, and the various types of information described above are stored in the area corresponding to the identified number of hold balls among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 666 of RAM 654. When a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area.

In the MPU 642 of the notification and performance control device 143, processing for changing the symbol group when transitioning to the underwater stage is executed based on the information stored in the pending information storage area 667. The processing for changing the symbol group when transitioning to the underwater stage will be explained below with reference to Figure 594.

(Processing for changing the pattern group when transitioning to the underwater stage)
In the process for changing the symbol group when transitioning to the underwater stage, first, in step S2101E, it is determined whether or not the change of the symbol group is currently being delayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change delay flag is set in the various flag storage area 666 of RAM 654. If there is no delay, the process proceeds to step S2102E. In step S2102E, it is determined whether or not the currently stored reserve information for the first operation port includes information corresponding to a normal jackpot. If there is no information corresponding to a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2104E, where it is determined whether or not the currently stored reserve information for the second operation port includes information corresponding to a probability variation jackpot B. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a probability variation jackpot B is waiting as the next jackpot.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2140E, the process proceeds to step S2105E, where the group of symbols constituting the symbol sequence is changed to symbol group B (see Figure 586), and then the modification process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S2104E, the process proceeds to step S2106E, where the group of symbols constituting the symbol sequence is changed to symbol group C, and then the modification process ends.

Here, we will explain the pattern group C with reference to Figures 595 and 596. Note that Figure 596(a) shows the pattern sequence composed of pattern group A for comparison.

As shown in Figure 595, the C pattern group consists of the "1" pattern (see Figure 595(a)), which is a second specific pattern consisting of the number "1" and a golden "octopus" character image; the "3" pattern (see Figure 595(b)), which is a second specific pattern consisting of the number "3" and a golden "turtle" character image; the "5" pattern (see Figure 595(c)), which is a second specific pattern consisting of the number "5" and a golden "shrimp" character image; the "7" pattern (see Figure 595(d)), which is a second specific pattern consisting of the number "7" and a golden "dugong" character image; and sub-patterns (see Figure 595(e)). The number of patterns is fewer than in pattern groups A and B.

Symbol group C consists entirely of second-specified symbols, and does not include non-specified symbols or first-specified symbols.

In the symbol sequences composed of symbol group C, the order of the symbols is reversed between the upper symbol sequence Z1 and the lower symbol sequence Z3 and the middle symbol sequence Z2. Specifically, in both the lower symbol sequence Z3 and the middle symbol sequence Z2, the numbers are arranged in ascending order, specifically in the following circular pattern: "1" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "3" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "5" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "7" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "1" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "3" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "5" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol → "7" symbol (second specific symbol) → secondary symbol (see Figure 596(b)). Furthermore, the upper symbol sequence Z1 is arranged in descending order of numbers, specifically as follows: "7" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "5" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "3" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "1" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "7" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "5" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "3" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol → "1" symbol (second designated symbol) → secondary symbol, forming a circular pattern (illustration not shown). The number of symbols constituting this sequence is the same as that of symbol sequences composed of symbol group A and symbol group B.

Returning to the explanation of the modification process in Figure 594, if a positive determination is made in step S2103E, that is, if the pending information for the first operation port at the timing of transitioning to the underwater stage includes information corresponding to a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2107E, where the modification delay process is executed, and then this modification process ends.

In this embodiment, the underwater stage corresponds to the second high-probability game state. In the second high-probability game state, the display time for the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a becomes extremely long at 600 seconds, and the game proceeds mainly around the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a. In the game rounds related to the second operation port 63a, there is a considerable probability of a special win result, and as a result of the special win result, the game result (lottery result) of the game rounds related to the first operation port 62a is forcibly rewritten to a losing result. Therefore, even if the reserve information for the first operation port 62a includes information corresponding to a normal jackpot, it is practically possible to avoid a normal jackpot during the second high-probability game state. However, in this embodiment, the transition to the underwater stage changes the symbol sequence to one composed of symbol group B or symbol group C, and symbols corresponding to normal jackpot results are excluded from the display target. Therefore, if a regular jackpot occurs after a change to a pattern sequence composed of pattern group B or pattern group C, it could undermine confidence in this pachinko machine. The aforementioned change delay processing is a measure taken with these circumstances in mind.

This change delay process sets the change delay flag in the various flag storage area 666 of RAM 654 and displays an alert on the display screen 75a. Specifically, the word "CAUTION" is displayed at the top and bottom of the display screen 75a, and the word "Right Shot" prompting the player to fire the game ball towards the right route is highlighted. These displays will continue until a normal jackpot occurs during the second high-probability game state (underwater stage) and the change delay flag is cleared.

Returning to the explanation of step S2101E, if the change is delayed, a positive result is made in step S2101E and the process proceeds to step S2108E. In step S2108E, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round related to the second operation port. If a negative result is made in step S2108E, the change process ends there. If a positive result is made in step S2108E, the process proceeds to step S2109E.

In step S2109E, it is determined whether the hold information for the second operation port includes information corresponding to a jackpot. If the determination in step S2109E is negative, the modification process ends immediately. If the determination in step S2109E is positive, the process proceeds to step S2110E. In step S2110E, the delay release process is executed. In the delay release process, the change delay flags set in the various flag storage area 666 of RAM 654 are cleared, and the alert display on the display screen 75a is terminated. After that, the process proceeds to step S2105E, where the process of changing the group of symbols constituting the symbol sequence to symbol group B is executed, and then the modification process ends.

Now, referring to Figure 597, the relationship between the symbol groups A, B, and C in this embodiment and the game state (stage of stay) will be explained.

In low-probability gameplay mode, which is compatible with low-frequency support mode, the game stays on the beach (daytime) stage. In this stage, the game's animation is executed using symbol sequences composed of symbol group A, and it is not possible to change to symbol group B or symbol group C.

In the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, the game stays on the beach (night) stage. In this stage, the game's animations are executed using symbol sequences composed of symbol group A, and it is not possible to change to symbol group B or symbol group C.

In the first high-probability game state, which is compatible with both high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, the player remains on the sea stage. In this stage, the game's animations are primarily executed using symbol sequences composed of symbol group A. However, as will be explained in detail later, unlike the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state, if a probability-increasing jackpot A or probability-increasing jackpot B occurs during this first high-probability game state, the symbol sequences constituting the animations may change from symbol group A to symbol group B.

In the second high-probability game state, which is compatible with both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the player remains in the underwater stage. In this stage, the game's animation is primarily performed using symbol sequences composed of symbol group B. However, as will be explained in detail later, if a probability-increasing jackpot B occurs during this second high-probability game state, the symbol sequences constituting the game's animation may change from symbol group B to symbol group C.

Thus, in this embodiment, the group of symbols constituting the symbol sequence may be changed as part of the game round's presentation, regardless of the stage change accompanying the end of the special game state. Specifically, in some game rounds where a reach display is executed as part of the game round's presentation in the underwater stage and the surface stage, a special character may be displayed on the display screen 75a after the transition to the reach display. Two types of special characters are provided: Special Character A and Special Character B. For Special Character A, the probability of the symbol group changing (upgrading) at the time of its display is 80%, while for Special Character B, the probability of the symbol group changing (upgrading) at the time of its display is 100%.

As shown in Figure 598(a), Special Character A is a special character that is displayed only on the sea stage where the symbol sequence consists of Symbol Group A. The probability of it changing from Symbol Group A to Symbol Group B is 40%, the probability of it changing from Symbol Group A to Symbol Group C is 40%, and the probability of it remaining as Symbol Group A (failure to upgrade) is 20%. In contrast, Special Character B is a special character that is displayed only on the sea stage where the symbol sequence consists of Symbol Group A and the underwater stage where the symbol sequence consists of Symbol Group B. The probability of it changing from Symbol Group A or Symbol Group B to Symbol Group C is 100%.

Here, we will explain the process when the set of symbols constituting a pattern is changed by special character A.

In the example shown in Figure 598(b1), a special character A, a fish character, is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a at the timing after the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have stopped and the display has transitioned to a reach. When this special character A performs a predetermined action (for example, jumping), an effect (not shown) is added to the stopped main symbols (first specific symbol and non-specific symbol) in conjunction with it, and these main symbols begin to rotate horizontally at their stopping positions. The rotation speed is specified to be so fast that the symbols are difficult to distinguish visually. The symbol group is changed during this high-speed rotation. Then, when the effect weakens, the rotation speed decreases, the symbols become visible, and the player is clearly informed that the symbol group has been changed. In the example shown in Figure 598(b1), the symbol group constituting the symbol row has been changed from symbol group A to symbol group B. Specifically, the winning line is formed by the "1" symbol (first specific symbol) and the "2" symbol (non-specific symbol). The "1" symbol remains unchanged, while the "2" symbol is changed (upgraded) to the "3" symbol (second specific symbol). In other words, this change animation clearly indicates that, at least in the game round in which it occurs, a regular jackpot will not occur. The changed symbol group will revert to its original state at the end of the game round, or more precisely, at the beginning of the next game round. Thus, in that the symbol group reverts to its original state at the end of the game round, this differs from the symbol group changes that occur during stage changes.

In the example shown in Figure 598(b2), after the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have stopped and the display has transitioned to a reach, a girl character, special character B, is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a. When this special character B performs a predetermined action (for example, a punch), an effect (not shown) is added to the stopped main symbols (first specific symbol and non-specific symbol) in conjunction with this, and these main symbols begin to rotate horizontally at their stopping positions. The rotation speed is specified to be so fast that the symbols are difficult to distinguish visually. The symbol group is changed during this high-speed rotation. Then, when the effect weakens, the rotation speed decreases, the symbols become visible, and the player is clearly informed that the symbol group has been changed. In the example shown in Figure 598(b2), the symbol group constituting the symbol row has been changed from symbol group A to symbol group C. Specifically, the winning line is formed by the "1" symbol (first specific symbol) and the "2" symbol (non-specific symbol). The "1" symbol (first specific symbol) is changed (upgraded) to the "1" symbol (second specific symbol), and the "2" symbol (non-specific symbol) is changed (upgraded) to the "3" symbol (second specific symbol). In other words, it is clearly stated that in the game round in which this effect occurs, at least a regular jackpot and a probability variation jackpot A will not occur. The changed symbol group will revert to its original set when the game round ends, or more specifically, at the beginning of the next game round. Thus, in that the symbol group reverts to its original state at the end of the game round, it differs from the symbol group changes that occur when the stage changes.

Here, referring to Figures 599 and 600, we will explain the case where a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during a low probability game state or a time-saving game state.

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during a low probability game state or a time-saving game round, the game transitions to a special game state and then to a second high probability game state. In this case, the stage change and symbol group change sequence is as follows: As shown in Figure 599, in a game round with a 3R probability variation jackpot result B, the sequence is as follows: symbol scrolling display begins (step S11E) → progresses to reach display (step S12E) → confirmation display of the second type symbol combination (step S13E) → transition to special game state (step S14E) → stage upgrade animation occurs during the special game state (step S15E) → switches to the underwater stage (step S16E) → symbol upgrade (step S17E) → symbol scrolling display begins (step S18E).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 600, during the ending of the special game state, a message indicating an upgrade to the underwater stage is displayed on the display screen 75a, and the background image is actually changed to an image for the underwater stage. However, at this point, the symbols remain unchanged. When the special game state ends and the game transitions to the second high-probability game state, the special character (for example, special character A) is displayed at the beginning of the game round in the second high-probability game state, that is, while all symbol rows are displayed in a stopped state.

When this special character A performs a predetermined action (for example, jumping), an effect (not shown in the illustration) is added to the stationary main symbols (first specific symbol and non-specific symbol) in conjunction with this action, and these main symbols begin to rotate horizontally at their stopping positions. The rotation speed is specified to be so fast that the symbols are difficult to distinguish visually. The symbol group is changed during this high-speed rotation. Then, when the effect weakens, the rotation speed decreases, the symbols become visible, and the player is clearly informed that the symbol group has been changed. In the example shown in Figure 600, the symbol group constituting the symbol row is changed from symbol group A to symbol group B. Specifically, the "1" symbol (first specific symbol) and the "2" symbol (non-specific symbol) are stopped on the active line, and the "1" symbol (first specific symbol) remains as the "1" symbol (first specific symbol), while the "2" symbol (non-specific symbol) is changed (upgraded) to the "3" symbol (second specific symbol). Furthermore, the changed symbol group will not revert to the lower-ranking symbol group A until the second high-probability game state (underwater stage) ends, even after this game round has finished.

Next, referring to Figures 601 and 602, we will explain the case where a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the first high-probability game state.

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the first high probability game state, the game transitions to the second high probability game state via a special game state. In this case, the flow of stage changes and symbol group changes can be broadly divided into the following two patterns. That is, as shown in Figure 601, one pattern is: Symbol scrolling display starts (step S21E) → develops into reach display (step S22E) → confirmation display of the second type symbol combination (step S13E) → transition to special game state (step S14E) → stage upgrade performance occurs during the special game state (step S15E) → switches to the underwater stage (step S16E) → symbol group change (step S17E) → symbol scrolling display starts (step S26E). The other pattern is as follows: Symbol scrolling display begins (Step S21E) → Development to reach display (Step S22E) → Symbol upgrade (Step S23E) → Confirmation display of the third type symbol combination (Step S23E) → Transition to special game state (Step S24E) → Stage upgrade animation occurs during special game state (Step S26E) → Switch to underwater stage (Step S27E) → Symbol scrolling display begins (Step S28E). Note that the former pattern follows the same main flow as Figure 600, so the explanation is omitted.

The latter pattern will be explained further below using Figure 602. In the first high-probability game state, during a game round in which the result is a 3R probability variation jackpot B, the above-mentioned special character (for example, special character A) is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a at the timing after the upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 have stopped and the game has transitioned to the reach display. When this special character A performs a predetermined action (for example, jumping), an effect (not shown) is added to the stopped main symbols (first specific symbol and non-specific symbol) in conjunction with it, and these main symbols begin to rotate horizontally at their stopping positions. The rotation speed is specified to be so fast that the symbols are difficult to distinguish by sight. The symbol group is changed during this high-speed rotation. Then, when the effect weakens, the rotation speed decreases, the symbols become visible, and the fact that the symbol group has been changed is clearly indicated to the player. In the example shown in Figure 602, the symbol group constituting the symbol row has been changed from symbol group A to symbol group B. Specifically, the winning line is formed by the "1" symbol (first specific symbol) and the "2" symbol (non-specific symbol). The "1" symbol (first specific symbol) remains the "1" symbol (first specific symbol), while the "2" symbol (non-specific symbol) is changed (upgraded) to the "3" symbol (second specific symbol). In other words, it is clearly stated that a regular jackpot will not occur in the game round in which this animation occurs.

Subsequently, when special character A performs a specific action (e.g., approaching), the middle symbol row Z2 switches from high-speed to low-speed display in conjunction with this action. The middle symbol row Z2 has already been changed to symbol group C during the aforementioned symbol group change, and the decrease in speed clearly indicates that the symbol group in middle symbol row Z2 has also changed. Then, after the third type symbol combination is confirmed and displayed on the active line, the game transitions to a special game state. During the ending of the special game state, a message indicating promotion to the underwater stage is displayed on display screen 75a, and the background image is actually changed to an image for the underwater stage. The symbol group remains the same as the symbol combination confirmed and displayed in the previous game round. In other words, the symbol row remains composed of symbol group B. Note that the changed symbol group will not revert to the lower symbol group, symbol group A, even after this game round ends, until the second high-probability game state (underwater stage) ends.

Next, referring to Figures 603 and 604, we will explain the case where a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the second high-probability game state.

If a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the second high probability game state, the game returns to the second high probability game state via a special game state. In this case, the current stage remains the underwater stage, and except for the special cases mentioned above, the symbol group that makes up the symbol sequence will be either symbol group B or symbol group C. Here, if a 3R probability variation jackpot result B occurs during the second high probability game state, the third type of symbol combination, which is a combination of the second specific symbols, will be displayed as a stop in the game round, and these patterns can be broadly divided into the following two types. Specifically, as shown in Figure 603, one pattern is: the scrolling display of the symbols begins (step S31E) → progresses to a reach display (step S32E) → the third type symbol combination is confirmed (step S33E) → transitions to a special game state (step S34E); and the other pattern is: the scrolling display of the symbols begins (step S31E) → progresses to a reach display (step S32E) → symbols are upgraded (step S36E) → the third type symbol combination is confirmed (step S37E) → transitions to a special game state (step S24E).

The latter pattern will be explained further using Figure 604. In the second high-probability game state, during a game round that results in a 3R probability variation jackpot B, a special character B, a girl character, is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a at the timing after the upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 stop and the game transitions to the reach display. When this special character B performs a predetermined action (for example, a punch), an effect (not shown) is added to the stopped main symbols (first specific symbol and second specific symbol) in conjunction with it, and these main symbols begin to rotate horizontally at their stopping positions. The rotation speed is set so that the symbols are difficult to distinguish visually. The symbol group is changed during this high-speed rotation. Then, when the effect weakens, the rotation speed decreases, the symbols become visible, and the player is clearly informed that the symbol group has been changed. In the example shown in Figure 604, the symbol group constituting the symbol row is changed from symbol group B to symbol group C. Specifically, the "1" symbol (first designated symbol) and the "3" symbol (second designated symbol) form a winning line. The "1" symbol (first designated symbol) is changed (upgraded) to the "1" symbol (second designated symbol), while the "3" symbol (second designated symbol) remains the "3" symbol (second designated symbol). In other words, it is clearly stated that in the game round in which this animation occurs, at least a regular jackpot and a probability-increasing jackpot A will not occur.

Subsequently, when special character B performs a specific action (e.g., approaching), the middle symbol row Z2 switches from high-speed to low-speed display in conjunction with this action. The middle symbol row Z2 has already been changed to symbol group C during the aforementioned symbol group change, and the decrease in speed reveals that the middle symbol row Z2 has also been changed to symbol group C. Then, after the third type symbol combination is confirmed and displayed on the active payline, the game transitions to a special game state. During the ending of the special game state, a message indicating the continuation of the underwater stage is displayed on display screen 75a, and the background image changes to the image for the underwater stage. The symbol group is displayed in a state where the symbol combination confirmed and displayed in the previous game round has been changed to symbol group B.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, when a reach line is formed using a non-specific symbol and a first specific symbol, and a reach display is shown, if a special character appears, the non-specific symbol with a lower advantage may be changed to a second specific symbol with a higher advantage than the first specific symbol. When such a change occurs, it is suggested that at least a symbol combination consisting of non-specific symbols (first type symbol combination) is avoided, and furthermore, the possibility of a symbol combination consisting of second specific symbols (third type symbol combination) is suggested. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player's attention to the game's presentation, and even if the reach display includes a non-specific symbol with a low expectation level, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from waning prematurely.

<Embodiment 61>
The pachinko machine shown in this embodiment differs from the 59th embodiment in its specific configuration for suppressing monotony in gameplay. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine in this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 59th embodiment, with reference to Figure 605. Figure 605 is a front view of the game board 60 in this embodiment. Note that the same configurations as in the 59th embodiment will be omitted from the explanation as appropriate.

The game board 60 has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 61, an activated ball entry unit 62, a special electric ball entry unit 64, a variable prize entry device 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. When a ball enters one of the entry points (general prize entry point 61, activated ball entry unit 62, special electric ball entry unit 64, variable prize entry device 65, etc.), this is detected by a detection sensor, and based on the detection result, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls or other benefits.

An outlet 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60. Game balls that do not enter any of the entry points are discharged from the game area PE through this outlet 68. Here, "entry" means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the case where the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening. In the following description, to clearly distinguish it from the entry of game balls into the outlet 68, entry into the general prize entry point 61, the activated ball entry unit 62, the special electric ball entry unit 64, the variable prize entry device 65, and the through gate 66 will also be referred to as "winning."

Furthermore, the game board 60 is equipped with numerous nails 69 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These nails 69 and windmills differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that entry into the general prize pockets 61, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability. Note that the general prize pockets 61 are located only on the left route, which will be described later. Game balls launched on the left route can enter the general prize pockets 61, while game balls launched on the right route, which will be described later, cannot enter the general prize pockets 61.

The variable display unit 67 is located in the center of the game board 60, and the ball entry unit 62 is located below the variable display unit 67. The specific configuration of the ball entry unit 62 will now be described with reference to Figure 606. Figure 606 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the ball entry unit 62.

(Operation ball entry unit 62)
An inlet 62a is formed at the top of the housing that constitutes the outer shell of the operating ball entry unit 62, and the inlet is open to the upper side (towards the variable display unit 67). The housing has a guide passage 62c that guides the game balls that flow into the inlet 62a to a recovery passage provided on the back side of the game board 60. The guide passage 62c branches into a first branch passage 62d and a second branch passage 62e at an intermediate position.

At the branching point in the guide passage 62c, a distribution means 62g is provided to alternately distribute game balls that reach the branching point to the first branching passage 62d and the second branching passage 62e. The distribution means 62g is switchable between a first guidance state, which guides game balls that reach the branching point to the first branching passage 62d, and a second guidance state, which guides them to the second branching passage 62e. This distribution means 62g is configured to switch from one guidance state to the other based on the guidance of the game balls. Therefore, game balls flowing into the inlet 62a are sequentially distributed to the first branching passage 62d and the second branching passage 62e.

A detection sensor 391b for detecting game balls is installed in the first branching passage 62d (hereinafter also referred to as the "first operating opening 62d"), and a detection sensor 391c for detecting game balls is installed in the second branching passage 62e (hereinafter also referred to as the "second operating opening 62e"). These detection sensors 391b and 391c are connected to the main control unit, which determines whether balls have entered each branching passage 62d and 62e, i.e., whether or not a prize has been awarded at each operating opening 62d and 62e, based on the detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 391b and 391c.

In the game area PE (the right route, which will be described in detail later), the through gate 66 is positioned to the side (right) of the variable display unit 67, and the special electric ball entry unit 64 is positioned downstream of the through gate 66. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass through vertically, and game balls that enter the through gate 66 are not discharged from the game area PE but flow downstream within the game area PE. If a winning result is obtained in the lottery (the lottery shown in the diagram) triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 66, the state of the electric mechanism constituting the special electric ball entry unit 64 is switched for a predetermined period of time. The special electric ball entry unit 64 will be described below with reference to Figure 607.

(Special electric ball input unit 64)
The special ball entry unit 64 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 322 through which game balls pass is formed, and this housing 320 is attached to the game board 60 so as to bulge out from the front of the game board 60 toward the front of the game machine. The housing 320 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and game balls flowing down the ball passage 322 can be seen through the outer part of the housing 320.

In the portion of the housing 320 that bulges outwards toward the front of the game board 60, an entry point 321 is formed, which constitutes the entrance to the ball passage 322. The entry point 321 faces the middle section (the vertically extending portion) of the right route from the side (left) of the game machine, and the wing member 325 is arranged to cover the entry point 321.

The wing member 325 is pivotally supported so as to be able to rotate parallel to the front surface of the game board 60. This rotation around the pivot point allows it to shift between a closed position, which prevents game balls from entering the ball entry opening 321, and an open position, which allows game balls to enter the ball entry opening 321.

The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the blade member 325 is connected to the main control unit 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control unit 162. The blade member 325 is configured to remain in the closed position when the main control unit 162 is not outputting a drive signal (de-energized state).

When the wing member 325 is positioned in the open position (open state), approximately half of the flow region (flow path) in the middle section of the right route is interrupted by the wing member 325, and almost all of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the special electric ball entry unit 64 (ball passage 322) through the ball entry opening 321.

The ball passage 322 branches into a first branch passage 323 and a second branch passage 324 at an intermediate point. A flow path switching member 326 is provided at this branching point, which can switch the destination of the game balls between the first branch passage 323 and the second branch passage 324. The drive unit (specifically a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 326 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. When the main control device 162 is not outputting a drive signal (de-energized state), the flow path switching member 326 is configured to wait in a protruding position, extending into the ball passage 322.

When the flow path switching member 326 is positioned in a protruding location, the inlet of the second branch passage 324 is blocked by the flow path switching member 326. In this state, the inflow of game balls that have reached the branching section into the second branch passage 324 is prevented, and these game balls flow into the first branch passage 323.

When a drive signal is output from the main control device 162 to the drive unit for the flow path switching member 326, the flow path switching member 326 moves to a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 322 is avoided, and the entrance portion of the second branch passage 324 is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that have reached the branching point are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 323, and instead flow into the second branch passage 324.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 326 is predetermined by the type of lottery result (winning result) based on the ball entering the through gate 66. Specifically, in the case of a normal winning result A, as described later, the flow path switching member 326 moves to the retracted position as the vane member 325 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 326 is specified to return to the protruding position immediately afterward. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 326 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball that has entered the ball entry opening 321 to reach the branching section. Therefore, in the case of a normal winning result A, inflow into the second branching passage 324 is substantially avoided.

In contrast, if the result is as shown in the general diagram (Result B), the flow path switching member 326 moves to the retracted position as the vane member 325 moves from the closed position to the open position. However, it is stipulated that the member will remain in the retracted position until at least the vane member 325 returns to the closed position. Therefore, if the result is as shown in the general diagram (Result B), most of the game balls that flow into the ball entry port 321 will flow into the second branching passage 324.

Upstream detection sensors 327 are installed in the ball passage 322 upstream of the branching point, while downstream detection sensors 328 and 329 are installed in the downstream section, specifically in the first branching passage 323 and the second branching passage 324. The upstream detection sensors 327 and the downstream detection sensors 328 and 329 are connected to the main control unit 162. The main control unit 162 determines whether a ball has entered the special ball entry unit 64 based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 327, and if a ball has entered, it dispenses a predetermined number (3) of game balls. Furthermore, the main control unit 162 monitors the remaining game balls in the special ball entry unit 64 based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensors 327 and the downstream detection sensors 328 and 329.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when it determines that a prize has been awarded in the second branch passage 324 based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 328 attached to the first branch passage 323, the game state is switched from the normal game state to the special game state (open/close execution mode). In other words, the second branch passage 324 shown in this embodiment corresponds to a so-called V-prize entry point, and a prize being awarded in the second branch passage 324 is one of the triggers for transitioning to the special game state. For the sake of explanation, the second branch passage 324 will be referred to as the "advantageous ball entry section 324" below.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 605(a), the variable prize-winning device 65 is located downstream of the special electric ball entry unit 64 on the right route. The variable prize-winning device 65 has a large prize-winning opening that allows multiple game balls to enter simultaneously, and is equipped with an opening/closing mechanism to open and close this large prize-winning opening. This opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large prize-winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (acceptance state) where game balls can enter and a closed state (non-acceptance state) where balls cannot enter. Furthermore, the shutter is connected to a shutter drive unit (specifically a solenoid), and under normal circumstances, the shutter remains in the closed state. It is switched to the open state when a lottery is won based on ball entry into the operating openings 62d and 62e, transitioning to a special game state (open/close execution mode), or when a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 324, transitioning to a special game state (open/close execution mode).

The special game state (open/close execution mode) is a mode that is entered when a jackpot is hit. In this special game state, for example, the shutter of the variable prize winning device 65 is set to open for a predetermined number of rounds (up to 6 rounds in this embodiment), with the passage of a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) or the arrival of a predetermined number of prizes (10 prizes in this embodiment) considered as one round.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that displays the symbols in a variable manner (variable display) triggered by a winning entry into the operating ports 62d and 62e or into the through gate 66.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. In the central part of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, rows of symbols are displayed arranged at the top, middle, and bottom, and these rows of symbols are displayed in a variable manner by scrolling horizontally. When a win occurs in a lottery based on entry into the operating holes 62d and 62e or a lottery based on entry into the through gate 66, each row of symbols is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination on a pre-set active line, after which the game transitions to the special game state described above. Note that the symbol display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device; it may also be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

Furthermore, a center frame 76 is positioned around the pattern display device 75 within the variable display unit 67. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from its front side. In this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the game board 60, resulting in a gap between the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 that is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game ball from colliding with the pattern display device 75 as it flows through the game area PE, and also divides the flow path of the game ball through the game area PE into two main routes: a right route that bypasses the variable display unit 67 (specifically the center frame 76) from the right, and a left route that bypasses it from the left.

Furthermore, the special electric ball entry unit 64, variable prize entry device 65, and through gate 66 described above are located on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from entering these units. On the other hand, the operational ball entry unit 62 is located on the left route, and game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from entering the operational ball entry unit 62 (operation openings 62d, 62e). The player can choose the launch destination (ball flow path) from the right route or left route depending on the game situation, thereby allowing them to play the game to their advantage. In this embodiment, the speaker unit 29 and the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 indicate to the player which route the game ball should be launched from, depending on the game state.

In addition to the special game state described above, there is also a normal game state. The normal game state is broadly divided into two types: a first normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode in which ball entry into the special ball entry unit 64 is less supported, and a second normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode in which ball entry into the special ball entry unit 64 is more easily supported.

A main display unit 81 is mounted on a protective member for the guide rail 100, which is located outside the game area PE. The front of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically the rear glass panel 23), which allows the game area PE to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. A main display section D, which displays predetermined patterns, is provided on this facing portion. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in Figure 605(b), the main display unit D comprises a first operation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery results based on winning at the first operation port 62d, and a second operation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery results based on winning at the second operation port 63e.

In the first operation port display unit D1 (special symbol display unit), the symbol (special symbol 1) changes in response to a prize being won in the first operation port 62d. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the prize being won in the first operation port 62d is then clearly displayed as the result of the stopping of this change in the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize being won in the first operation port 62d is a jackpot, the change in the display unit D1 stops, a predetermined symbol is displayed as the result of the stop, and then the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode described above.

In the second operation port display unit D2 (special symbol display unit), the symbol (special symbol 2) changes when a prize is awarded in the second operation port 62e. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the prize being awarded in the second operation port 62e is clearly displayed as the result of the stopping of this change in the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize being awarded in the second operation port 62e is a jackpot, the change in the display unit D2 stops, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a result of the stop, and then the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode described above according to the result.

The main display unit 81's main display section D is equipped with a first operation port reserve count display section S1 and a second operation port reserve count display section S2. The first operation port reserve count display section S1 corresponds to the first operation port 62d, and the number of times a game ball enters the first operation port 62d is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the illumination of the first operation port reserve count display section S1. The second operation port reserve count display section S2 corresponds to the second operation port 63e, and the number of times a game ball enters the second operation port 63e is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the illumination of the second operation port reserve count display section S2.

The main display unit 81's main display section D is equipped with a through-gate display section DS (normal pattern display section) in addition to the various display sections mentioned above. The through-gate display section DS displays a changing pattern (normal pattern) triggered by a win in the through-gate 66. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the win in the through-gate 66 is clearly displayed as the change in the pattern display stops. If the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the through-gate 66 is a normal pattern win, the through-gate display section DS displays a predetermined stop result, the changing pattern display stops, and then the system transitions to the electric power release state. In the electric power release state, the feather member 325 attached to the special electric ball entry unit 64 is opened in a predetermined manner, allowing the ball to enter the special electric ball entry unit 64.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times. The main display unit 81's main display section D is provided with a through gate hold count display section SS that displays the number of held balls.

Here, based on a winning entry into either of the operating ports 62d or 62e, a variable display is initiated on the corresponding operating port display units D1 or D2. The period from when the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display stops (more specifically, until the confirmation display is completed) constitutes one game round. Similarly, based on a winning entry into the through gate, a variable display is initiated on the corresponding through gate display unit DS. The period from when the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display stops (more specifically, until the confirmation display is completed) also constitutes one game round. In the following explanation, game rounds related to the operating ports 62d and 62e (operating port display units D1 and D2) will be appropriately distinguished as "special feature game rounds," and game rounds related to the through gate 66 (through gate display unit DS) will be appropriately distinguished as "general feature game rounds."

(Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 608.

The main control board 601, located in the main control unit 162, is equipped with an MPU 602. The MPU 602 contains a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, a RAM 604 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 603, and various counter circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and random number generators. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and RAM 604, may be provided by separate components.

The MPU 602 is provided with both input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, the dispensing control device 181, and various detection sensors, all of which are located on the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605. Furthermore, as part of the various detection sensors, the following are connected: detection sensor 391a for the general prize entry opening 61, detection sensor 391b for the first operating opening 62d, detection sensor 391c for the second operating opening 62e, detection sensors 327-329 for the special electric ball entry unit 64, detection sensor 391d for the variable prize entry device 65, and detection sensor 391e for the through gate 66. Based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors 327-329 and 391a-391e, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry section. The MPU 602 also performs a lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot based on ball entry into the first operating opening 62d and the second operating opening 62e, and a lottery for the occurrence of a regular prize based on ball entry into the through gate 66.

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, and a notification/performance control device 143 (specifically, the notification/performance control board 651). The payout control device 181 outputs a prize ball command, for example, based on the result of the prize ball entry determination to the prize ball entry section. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. Furthermore, when a win is detected in the general prize slot 61, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output. Similarly, when a win is detected in the large prize slot, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output. When a win is detected in the first operation slot 62d, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 2 game balls is output. When a win is detected in the second operation slot 63e, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 2 game balls is output. When a win is detected in the special electric ball entry unit 64, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output.

The notification and performance control device 143 outputs various commands, including a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced when outputting these commands. Details of these commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and this predetermined number of bytes contains various information.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the following: an opening/closing drive unit 451, which drives the wing member 325, an electric component constituting the special electric ball entry unit 64; a flow path switching drive unit 452, which drives the flow path switching member 326, an electric component constituting the special electric ball entry unit 64; a shutter drive unit 461, which drives the shutter of the variable prize winning device 65; and a main display unit 81. The main control board 601 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 602 performs drive control of the various drive units through these driver circuits. For example, in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode), the MPU 602 performs drive control of the shutter drive unit 461 of the variable prize winning device 65 so that the large prize winning opening is opened and closed. Furthermore, for example, during each game round, the MPU 602 executes display control for the first operation port display unit D1, the second operation port display unit D2, and the through gate display unit DS of the main display unit D of the main display unit 81.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is equipped with output terminals for signal output during state transitions, including a jackpot signal output terminal. For example, when the game result is a jackpot or when a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 324, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side via the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, under normal circumstances, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot occurs. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power outage monitoring board 605 acts as a relay between the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch control device 191, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 191, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls via the payout device 222 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming arcade. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 601, the payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a predetermined power path.

Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 (specifically the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, the power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launching handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the amount of operation (rotation) of the game ball launching handle 41, and the launch strength (launch speed) of the game balls by the game ball launching mechanism 110 is determined based on the information from this operation level detection sensor. The touch sensor is configured to output information when a player is touching the game ball launching handle 41, and the power supply and launch control device 191 is configured to determine whether or not a player is touching the game ball launching handle 41 based on this information. Based on information from the touch sensor, the system determines that the player is touching the ball launching handle 41, and if the operation level detection sensor also determines that the ball launching handle 41 is being operated, then the launch of the balls is permitted.

Furthermore, information from the touch sensor is transmitted via the power supply/launch control device 191 to the main control device 162, and subsequently to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710.

The notification and performance control device 143 comprises a notification and performance control board 651 equipped with an MPU 652. The MPU 652 contains a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 653.

The notification and performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 installed on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. Specifically, the notification and performance control device 143 determines the pattern of change in the pattern display device 75 and the final stopping pattern of the pattern to be displayed (for example, the type of pattern combination) based on various commands input from the main control device 162. It also determines whether a reach occurs and the content of the reach performance, and then transmits the determined content to the display control device 710 by adding it to the above commands.

The display control device 710 has a display control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU contains a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM (memory for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM), a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, and a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the pattern display device 75) based on commands input from the notification and performance control device 143.

Here, we will explain the configuration and content of the display of the changing symbols for each game round. In the following explanation, please refer to Figures 609 to 611 as appropriate. Figures 609 to 611 are schematic diagrams illustrating the display content on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM of the display control device 710 pre-stores data for nine main symbols, each numbered "1" through "9" (see Figures 609(a) to (i)), and data for sub-symbols without numbers (see Figure 609(j)).

As shown in Figure 610, the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up: upper, middle, and lower. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 consists of main and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 75a, the patterns in each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a periodic, scrolling manner in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

The upper symbol row Z1 consists of nine main symbols, numbered "1" through "9," arranged in descending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. The middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 also consist of nine main symbols, numbered "1" through "9," arranged in ascending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. Each of the symbol rows Z1 through Z3 consists of 18 symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 611, the display screen 75a displays three symbols for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. The display screen 75a also has five active lines: the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5 (see Figure 610). The display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Once the display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has finished with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a winning video is displayed, indicating either a jackpot or a regular win.

Furthermore, considering that the display of variations in each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 can be referred to as the first symbol row, the lower symbol row Z3 as the second symbol row, and the middle symbol row Z2 as the third symbol row.

Incidentally, the manner in which the changing patterns are displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing pattern display within each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the changing pattern display within each pattern row may be set to vertical.

The symbol change/stop display in the central part of the display screen 75a is configured to switch between a mode corresponding to the game rounds related to the operation ports 62d and 62e and a mode corresponding to the game rounds related to the through gate 66, depending on the type of normal game state. Specifically, in the first normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the symbol change/stop display in the central part of the display screen 75a corresponds to the game rounds related to the operation ports 62d and 62e (special symbol game rounds), and in the second normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the symbol change/stop display in the central part of the display screen 75a corresponds to the game rounds related to the through gate 66 (normal symbol game rounds). In other words, in this embodiment, the same symbols are used to perform the game round effects in both the first and second normal game states.

In the first normal game state where the support mode is set to low-frequency support mode, if a jackpot is achieved through a lottery based on balls entering the operating ports 62d and 62e, one of the following symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result will be displayed on the display screen 75a: a combination of three "1" symbols, a combination of three "2" symbols, a combination of three "3" symbols, a combination of three "4" symbols, a combination of three "5" symbols, a combination of three "6" symbols, a combination of three "7" symbols, a combination of three "8" symbols, or a combination of three "9" symbols (see Figure 612(a)). In contrast, in the second normal game state where the support mode is set to high-frequency support mode, when a normal symbol win result is obtained through a lottery based on ball entry into the through gate 66, one of the following symbol combinations corresponding to that normal symbol win result will be displayed on the display screen 75a (see Figure 612(b)). In other words, the symbol combinations that are displayed are common to both the game rounds related to the operation ports 62d and 62e and the game rounds related to the through gate 66.

Below the lower part of the display screen 75a, specifically below the variable display area ME which comprises the variable display area for the upper row of symbols, the variable display area for the middle symbol, and the variable display area for the lower symbol, is a reserved display area NE. This reserved display area NE displays the number of reserved symbols associated with each normal game state.

Specifically, when the game state is the first normal game state, as shown in Figure 611(a), the reserve display area NE is set so that the number of unit reserve display areas (8 units) equal to the sum of the maximum number of reserves (4 units) for each of the operation openings 62d and 62e (8 units) are arranged horizontally.

The hold count display area Da consists of the first unit hold display area Da1, the second unit hold display area Da2, the third unit hold display area Da3, the fourth unit hold display area Da4, the fifth unit hold display area Da5, the sixth unit hold display area Da6, the seventh unit hold display area Da7, and the eighth unit hold display area Da8. For example, if the number of holds related to the operation ports 62d and 62e is one, the hold icon MP1 (a predetermined hold image) is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1. If the number of holds related to the operation ports 62d and 62e is four, the hold icon MP1 is displayed in each of the first to fourth unit hold display areas Da4.

Furthermore, in the first normal game state, the hold display area NE is set to display the execution target display area Db, which displays the hold icon MP1 corresponding to the special game round being executed (currently being executed), adjacent to the hold count display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1).

When a special feature game round ends and the game moves to the next special feature game round, the reserved icon MP1 displayed in the reserved number display area Da (specifically, the first unit reserved display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db, and the reserved icon MP1 displayed in each unit reserved display area Da1 to Da8 shifts to the lower end.

When the game state is in the second normal game state, as shown in Figure 611(b), the reserve display area NE is set so that the same number of unit reserve display areas (4) as the maximum number of reserves (4) when a game ball enters the through gate 66 are arranged horizontally.

The hold count display area Dc consists of the first unit hold display area Dc1, the second unit hold display area Dc2, the third unit hold display area Dc3, and the fourth unit hold display area Dc4. For example, if the number of holds related to the through gate 66 is 1, the hold icon MP2 (a predetermined hold image) is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dc1. If the number of holds related to the through gate 66 is 4, the hold icon MP2 is displayed in each of the first to fourth unit hold display areas Dc4.

Furthermore, in the second normal game state, the hold display area NE is set to display the execution target display area Dd, which displays the hold icon MP2 corresponding to the currently running (executing) normal game round, adjacent to the hold count display area Dc (specifically, the first unit hold display area Dc1).

When a regular game round ends and the game moves to the next one, the reserved icon MP2 displayed in the reserved number display area Dc (first unit reserved display area Dc1) moves to the execution target display area Dd, and the reserved icon MP2 displayed in each unit reserved display area Dc1 to Dc4 shifts to the lower end.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 613, the configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine configured as described above will be explained.

The MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as drawing lots for jackpots, drawing lots for regular wins, setting the display on the main display unit 81 (main display section D), and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 75.

Specifically, the system includes a random number counter C1 used for the lottery to determine the occurrence of a jackpot, a type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot when one occurs, a random number counter C3 used for the lottery to determine the occurrence of a reach display when the symbol display device 75 is fluctuating in a losing pattern, a random number initial value counter CN1 used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the display time of the pattern fluctuations in the operation ports D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 and the display time of the pattern fluctuations in the symbol display device 75.

Furthermore, the system includes a random number counter C4 used for the lottery of normal wins, a win type counter C5 used to determine the type of win when a normal win occurs, a reach random number counter C6 used for the lottery of reach displays when the symbol display device 75 changes without a win, a random number initial value counter CN2 used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4, and a change type counter CS2 used to determine the change display time of the symbols in the operation ports D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 and the change display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 75.

Each counter, C1-C6, CN1-CN2, and CS1-CS2, is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 604.

(Random numbers for special diagrams)
The RAM 604's reserved ball storage area 632 is provided with a reserved area RE and an execution area AE for the operation port (special symbol). The reserved area RE consists of a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. In accordance with the winning history at the operation ports 62d and 62e, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as reserved information in one of the areas Ra1 to Ra8.

In areas 1 (Ra1) through 8 (Ra8), when multiple consecutive entries into the operating ports 62d and 62e occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the following order: Area 1 (Ra1) → Area 2 (Ra2) → Area 3 (Ra3) → Area 4 (Ra4) → Area 5 (Ra5) → Area 6 (Ra6) → Area 7 (Ra7) → Area 8 (Ra8). With these eight areas (Ra1 through Ra8), up to four entries each for the first operating port 62d and the second operating port 62e, meaning a total of eight entries for the operating ports 62d and 62e, can be stored in reserve. Furthermore, the reserved ball storage area 632 is provided with a reserved ball storage area FE, which stores information to identify the number of reserved balls acquired and stored based on entries into the first operating port 62d and the second operating port 62e.

For example, if balls enter only one of the first or second operating port 62d, and the number of balls entering either port is four or more, the maximum number of stored entries related to balls entering the operating ports is limited to four. However, as long as the distribution means 62g, as described earlier, causes the game balls to alternately enter the first and second operating ports 62e, the maximum number of stored entries related to balls entering the operating ports is increased to eight. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the number of stored reserved information from capping at four.

The execution area AE is the area used to move the values stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE when the display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D begin displaying the changing patterns. At the start of each game round (special feature game round), a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE. Further explanation of the counters related to the special features follows.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, "0" to "299," and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 299). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CN1 at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CN1 is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "299"). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62d or the second operation opening 62e.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 603. When this win/loss table is referenced, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) is only "7," and all other values correspond to losing results. This results in a jackpot probability of 1/300 (see Figure 614(a)).

The winning type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of "0" to "29," and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "29"). The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62d or the second operation opening 63e, it is stored in the reserve area RE of the RAM 604's reserve ball storage area 632.

The distribution destination of game results for the winning type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 622, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. In this embodiment, the type of jackpot result is determined by referring to the winning type counter C2 and the distribution table. Two types of jackpot results are provided: jackpot result A and jackpot result B.

Regarding the distribution table for the first operation port, of the values of the winning type counter C2 from "0" to "29", 15 values ("0", "2", and "4" through "28") correspond to jackpot result A, and 15 values ("1", "3", and "5" through "29") correspond to jackpot result B (see Figure 614(b)).

Jackpot result A is a jackpot result that transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. This second normal game state continues until the number of game rounds (normal game rounds) reached a predetermined number (10 rounds in this embodiment). Upon reaching this predetermined number, the system transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode described above.

Jackpot result B is a jackpot result that transitions to a second normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. This second normal game state continues until the next jackpot occurs. More specifically, the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to "99999," and it is configured to continue effectively until the next jackpot occurs.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 613, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the first operation opening 62d or the second operation opening 62e. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state).

Here, "reach display" refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of displaying (or varying) the variation of symbols (pictures), where, in a game round where the game result corresponds to an open/close execution mode, the stop display result after the variation display can become a special display result. This state is intended to make the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the special display result, occurring between the start of the variation display (or variation display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and the display of the stop display result.

In other words, this refers to a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, combinations of symbols that have the potential to form a winning combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode are displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in a variable state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying combinations of symbols that have the potential to form a winning combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a pre-set active line within the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

To further explain the display content on display screen 75a, first, the symbol variation display ends in the right symbol column, and then, when the symbol variation display ends in the left symbol column, a reach line is formed when a main symbol with a number that constitutes a winning symbol combination is displayed to stop on one of the active lines. When this reach line is formed, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol column is performed, indicating a reach. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol column ends, with the main symbols forming the reach line, along with the main symbols with numbers that constitute a winning symbol combination, being displayed to stop on the reach line.

Furthermore, the reach display includes methods such as displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, then showing the remaining symbol variations in the remaining symbol rows, and displaying predetermined characters as animations in the background screen to create a reach effect, or displaying the combination of reach symbols in a reduced size or hidden, and then displaying predetermined characters as animations across approximately the entire display screen 75a to create a reach effect. Additionally, the decision of whether or not to display a pre-announcement using predetermined images, such as predetermined characters, when a reach display is being shown or before a reach display may be made using a reach random number counter C3 or other counters.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time of the patterns in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 75. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 (when the pattern variation by the pattern display device 75 begins).

(Random numbers for general diagrams)
The RAM 604's electronic memory area 633 is provided with a hold area SE and an execution area CE for the through gate. The hold area SE consists of a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4. In accordance with the winning history of the through gate 66, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C4, the winning type counter C5, and the reach random number counter C6 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as hold information in one of the areas Rc1 to Rc4.

In areas 1 (Rc1) through 4 (Rc4), when multiple consecutive entries into the through gate 66 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 1 (Rc1) → area 2 (Rc2) → area 3 (Rc3) → area 4 (Rc4). Furthermore, the electric control memory area 633 is provided with a reserved number memory area GE, which stores information to identify the number of reserved items acquired and stored based on entries into the through gate 66.

The execution area CE is the area used to move the values stored in the first area Rc1 of the hold area SE when the display unit DS for the through-gate of the main display unit D starts displaying the changing patterns. At the start of one game round (normal pattern game round), a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area CE. The following provides supplementary explanations regarding the counters related to the normal pattern.

The winning random number counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range, for example, "0" to "49," and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 49). In particular, when the winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CN2 at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C4. The random number initial value counter CN2 is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C4 (value = "0" to "49"). The winning random number counter C4 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve area SE of the electronic memory area 633 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the through gate 66.

The random numbers that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 603. This win/loss table is broadly divided into a win/loss table for low-frequency support mode and a win/loss table for high-frequency support mode. When the win/loss table for low-frequency support mode is referenced, the only random number value that results in a regular jackpot (i.e., winning information) is "7," and all other values correspond to losing results. This results in a jackpot probability of 1/50 (see Figure 615(a)). In contrast, when the win/loss table for high-frequency support mode is referenced, the number of random numbers that result in a regular jackpot (i.e., winning information) is "3," "7," "13," "17," "23," "27," "33," "37," "43," and "47"—10 values in total—and all other values correspond to losing results. This results in a jackpot probability of 1/5 (see Figure 615(b)).

The winning type counter C5 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of "0" to "29," and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "29"). The winning type counter C5 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve area SE of the RAM 604's electronic memory area 633 when a game ball enters the through gate 66.

The distribution destination of game results for the winning type counter C5 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 622, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. In this embodiment, the type of normal winning result is determined by referring to the winning type counter C5 and the distribution table. Normal winning results include normal winning result A and normal winning result B.

For the distribution table for the through gate, of the values of the winning type counter C5 from "0" to "29", three values ("9", "19", and "29") correspond to the normal winning result B, while the remaining 27 values correspond to the normal winning result A (see Figure 616(a)).

Normal win result A is a normal win result that transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the special game state (open/close execution mode), which is entered after a prize is won in the advantageous ball entry section 324, ends. This second normal game state continues until the next big win occurs. More specifically, the above-mentioned specified number is set to "99999", and it is configured to continue in effect until the next big win occurs.

Normal win result B is a normal win result that transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode after the special game state (open/close execution mode), which is entered as a result of a ball entering the advantageous ball entry section 324, ends.

Here, the difference between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode will be explained with reference to Figure 616(b).

In low-frequency support mode, the display time for the pattern (normal diagram) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to 300-600 seconds, the confirmation display time to 0.5 seconds, the opening time for the special electric ball entry unit 64 to open to 0.1 seconds, and the remaining open time to 0.1 seconds. In high-frequency support mode, the display time for the pattern (normal diagram) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to 10-30 seconds, the confirmation display time to 1 second, the opening time for the special electric ball entry unit 64 to open to 3 seconds, and the remaining open time to 3 seconds.

Furthermore, the time required from the launch operation of the game ball until the launched game ball reaches the special ball entry unit 64 is longer than the time from when the symbol corresponding to the normal winning result is confirmed and displayed during high-frequency support mode until the special ball entry unit 64 closes. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode, if the game ball is launched to the right route after visually determining whether the result is normal winning result A or normal winning result B, the game ball will not reach the special ball entry unit 64 in time for its opening period. In other words, it is practically difficult to determine the normal winning result and only trigger a prize in the advantageous ball entry section 324 if the result is normal winning result A.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 613, the reach random number counter C6 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C6 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve area SE of the electronic device memory area 633 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the through gate 66. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table memory area of the ROM 603, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state).

The variation type counter CS2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) and the variation display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 75. The variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS2 is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the through-gate display unit DS (when the symbol variation by the symbol display device 75 begins).

(Regarding the various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 602 within the main control unit 162 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 602 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but these processes will not be explained.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, the timer interrupt handling will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 617. This process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 602.

In step S101F, the reading process for various detection sensors (for example, the above-mentioned detection sensors 327-329, 391a-391e) is executed. That is, the status of the various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the status of the detection sensors (detection information from the detection sensors) is determined and the detection information (prize winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a ball has entered the first operating port 62d, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the first operating port in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the second operating port 62e, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the second operating port in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the special electric ball entry unit 64, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the special electric ball entry unit in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the advantageous ball entry section 324, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the advantageous ball entry section in its various flag storage area 635. If it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 65, the RAM 604 stores a winning detection flag for the large winning port in its various flag storage area 635.

Subsequently, in step S102F, the random number initial value counters CN1 and CN2 are updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counters CN1 and CN2 are incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the random number initial value counters CN1 and CN2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

In the following step S103F, the winning random number counters C1 and C4, the winning type counters C2 and C5, and the near-win random number counters C3 and C6 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counters C1 and C4, the winning type counters C2 and C5, and the near-win random number counters C3 and C6 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

Subsequently, in step S104F, the award processing for the through gate 66 is executed upon winning a prize. Then, in the following step S105F, the award processing for the operating ports 62d and 62e is executed upon winning a prize, after which this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for those who pass through)
Here, the prize-winning process for the through gate will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 618 and 619.

In step S201F, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 66. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 66, the process proceeds to step S202F, where an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that an entry into the through gate 66 has occurred to the hall computer on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to recognize that an entry into the through gate 66 has occurred. In the following step S203F, the value corresponding to the through gate 66 is read from the reserve number storage area GE, and this value is set as the through gate reserve number M (also called the general reserve number M). After that, in step S204F, the through gate information acquisition process is executed, and then this entry process ends. In the following explanation, the through gate reserve number M will also be simply referred to as the reserve number M.

Now, referring to Figure 619, the information acquisition process in step S204F will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301F, it is determined whether the number of through-gate reserved memories M stored in the reserved memory area GE of the electric operation memory area 633 is less than the upper limit (in this embodiment, "4"). If the number of through-gate reserved memories M is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, the number of through-gate reserved memories M is increased by 1 in step S302F. This number of through-gate reserved memories M is decreased by 1 each time a game round (normal game round) related to the through-gate 66 is executed.

In the subsequent step S303F, the values of the winning random number counter C4, winning type counter C5, reach random number counter C6, and variation type counter CS2, which were updated in step S103F, are stored as hold information in the first available memory area of the hold area SE for the through gate, that is, the memory area corresponding to the number of through gate hold memories M, which was incremented by 1 in step S302F.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S304F. In step S304F, a display update process is performed on the through-gate hold count display unit SS of the main display unit 81. The through-gate hold count display unit SS is composed of four LEDs, and the number of lit LEDs matches the number of holds related to the through-gate 66. If the number of holds related to the through-gate 66 increases due to this win, the number of lit LEDs on the through-gate hold count display unit SS is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S305F and S306F, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the sub-control device, is notified that a prize has been awarded in the through gate 66. The pre-confirmation process and the setting process for the hold command, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends.

The hold command for the through gate, set in the hold command setting process in step S306F, will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 in the external output process of the normal process (step S601F), which will be described later.

Next, the prize-winning process for the operating port (step S105F) will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 620 and 621.

(Award processing for the operating port)
In the prize-winning process for the operating port, first, in step S401F, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first operating port 62d. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 62d, the process proceeds to step S402F, where a prize-winning command is set in the payout control device 181 to dispense two game balls.

In the following step S403F, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a prize has been won in the first operating port 62d. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a prize has been won in the first operating port 62d. In the following step S404F, the value corresponding to the first operating port 62d is read from the reserve number storage area FE, and this value is set as the reserve number RaN for the first operating port. After that, in step S405F, the information acquisition process for the operating port is executed, and this prize winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S401F that the game ball has not entered the first operating opening 62d, the process proceeds to step S406F. In step S406F, it is determined whether or not the game ball entered the second operating opening 62e. If it is determined that the game ball entered the second operating opening 62e, the process proceeds to step S407F, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 181 to dispense two game balls. The prize ball commands set in steps S402F and S407F are transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process S601F of the normal processing described later.

In the following step S408F, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a prize has been won in the second operating port 62e. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a prize has been won in the second operating port 62e. In the following step S409F, the value corresponding to the second operating port 62e is read from the reserve number storage area FE, and this value is set as the reserve number RbN for the second operating port. After that, in step S405F, the information acquisition process for the operating port is executed, and this prize winning process is completed. In the following explanation, the reserve number RaN for the first operating port and the reserve number RbN for the second operating port will also be simply referred to as the reserve number N.

Furthermore, if both steps S401F and S406F result in a negative determination, that is, if no prize is awarded to either the first operating port 62d or the second operating port 62e, the prize awarding process will terminate immediately.

Now, referring to Figure 621, the information acquisition process in step S405F will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S501F, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the operation port that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 62d and the second operation port 62e, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, in step S502F, the number of reserved operation memories N for the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and in step S503F, the total number of reserved operation memories stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

In the subsequent step S504F, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which were updated in step S103F, are stored in the first memory area of the empty memory area of the reserve area RE for the operation slot, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN, which was incremented by 1 in step S502F.

In other words, if the first operation slot's reserved memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, updated in step S103F, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation slot's reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S502F.

Furthermore, if the second operation port's reserved memory count RbN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which were updated in step S103F, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation port's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S502F.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S505F. In step S505F, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 81. During the display update process, if the current winning destination is the first operating port 62d, the display on the first operating port hold count display section S1 is updated; if the current winning destination is the second operating port 62e, the display on the second operating port hold count display section S2 is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 62d and the reserved number related to the second operation port 62e. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 62d increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 62e increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S506F and S507F, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the sub-control device, is made aware that a prize has been awarded to the operation openings 62d and 62e. The pre-confirmation process and the setting of the hold command, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information indicating whether the prize was awarded to the first operation opening 62d or the second operation opening 62e.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S507F will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 in the external output process of the normal process (step S601F), which will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 622. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and the main processing of the game is performed during normal processing. In summary, the processing in steps S601F to S608F is executed as a periodic process with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing in steps S610F and S611F is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the external signal output process is first executed in step S601F. In the external signal output process of step S601F, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side and the hall computer.

Specifically, the system determines whether a prize ball command is present and, if one is set, transmits it to the payout control device 181. Furthermore, if various commands such as a variation start command, type command, variation end command, and other performance commands, as well as a hold command and the shift command (described later), are set, they are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, each time the change in the pattern display (specifically, the confirmation display) is completed on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating pattern confirmation is output to the hall computer. During the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer. During the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S602F, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

In the following step S603F, a special symbol game round control process is executed to control the gameplay in each game round (special symbol game round) related to the operating ports 62d and 62e. This special symbol game round control process includes determining the jackpot, setting the outline of the symbol variation display by the symbol display device 75, and controlling the display of the main display unit 81.

After executing the special game round control process in step S603F, the process proceeds to step S604F, where the game state transition process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high-frequency support mode, etc. Further details regarding the game round control process in step S603F and the game state transition process in step S604F will be explained later.

In the following step S605F, a general-purpose game round control process is executed to control the gameplay in each game round (general-purpose game round) related to the through gate 66. This general-purpose game round control process includes general-purpose win determination, setting the outline of the symbol variation display by the symbol display device 75, and display control of the main display unit 81.

After executing the normal game round control process in step S605F, the process proceeds to step S606F, where the electric support process for driving and controlling the electric mechanism of the special electric ball entry unit 64 is executed. Details regarding the normal game round control process in step S605F and the electric support process in step S606F will be described later.

In the following step S607F, the V-prize entry process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this V-prize entry process determines whether or not to generate a jackpot based on the ball entering the advantageous ball entry section 324.

Subsequently, in step S608F, the game ball launch control process is executed. In this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 191, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is energized once at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the following step S609F, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing is reached, the random number initial value counters CN1 and CN2 and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated.

The execution time for each process in steps S601F to S608F varies depending on the game state; therefore, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Thus, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counters CN1 and CN2 using this remaining time, the random number initial value counters CN1 and CN2 (i.e., the initial values of the winning random number counters C1 and C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

(Special game round control processing)
Next, the special game round control process in step S603F will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 623 to 625.

In the special game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 623, it is determined in step S701F whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in open/close execution mode, the process from step S702F onward, namely the special game round start process from steps S703F to S706F and the special game round progress process from steps S707F to S710F, is not executed, and the special game round control process is terminated.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, steps S702F and S703F determine whether a special feature game round is in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 are in a variable display state. If they are in a variable display state, a negative determination is made in step S702F, and the process proceeds to step S703F. In step S703F, it is determined whether the confirmed display of the symbols (special feature) in the operation port display units D1 and D2 has finished. If a positive determination is made in step S703F, the process proceeds to steps S704F to S706F for starting the special feature game round. In the special feature game round start process, first in step S704F, it is determined whether the total number of starting reserved balls (common reserved ball count CRN) is "0". If the common reserved ball count CRN is "0", it means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, this special feature game round control process ends there.

On the other hand, if the common reserve count CRN is not "0", in step S705F, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operation port of the reserve ball storage area 632 for variable display. Furthermore, in step S706F, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variable display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 81 (and in addition, the variable display of the symbol display device 75 if it is in the first normal game state), after which this special symbol game round control process ends.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S705F and the special feature variation start process in step S706F. First, we will explain the data setting process in step S705F with reference to the flowchart in Figure 624.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S801F, the number of operation hold memory N stored in the hold memory area FE that is the target of this setting process (RaN or RbN) and the common hold memory CRN are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE for the operation port, i.e., the number of operation hold memory N, is "0". If the number of operation hold memory N is "0", the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of operation hold memory N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE for the operation port is moved to the execution area AE (step S802F). Then, the data (hold information) stored in the second area Ra2 to the eighth area Ra8 of the hold area RE are shifted sequentially to the lower areas (step S803F). As a result, for example, when data from area 1 Ra1 is moved to execution area AE, the data within each area is shifted as follows: area 2 Ra2 → area 1 Ra1, area 3 Ra3 → area 2 Ra2, area 4 Ra4 → area 3 Ra3, area 5 Ra5 → area 4 Ra4, area 6 Ra6 → area 5 Ra5, area 7 Ra7 → area 6 Ra6, area 8 Ra8 → area 7 Ra7.

In the following step S804F, a shift command is set, which is information that allows the notification and performance control device 143 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the hold area RE for the operation port. After this, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S804F is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 143 in step S601F of the normal process (Figure 622).

(Special pattern variation start process)
Next, the special feature variation start process in step S706F will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 625.

In the special feature variation initiation process, first, in step S901F, a win/loss determination process is performed based on the entry of balls into the operating ports 62d and 62e. This win/loss determination process determines whether the held information referenced in this variation initiation process corresponds to a jackpot. Specifically, it grasps the information for jackpot determination, i.e., the information obtained from the win random number counter C1, from the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, by referring to the win/loss table for operating ports (for special features) stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of ROM 603, it determines whether the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

If the result of the win/loss determination process in step S901F corresponds to a jackpot occurrence, a positive determination is made in the following step S902F, and the process proceeds to step S903F, where the jackpot type determination process is executed. In this type determination process, the information for type determination, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2, is identified from the information stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to jackpot A (jackpot result A) or jackpot B (jackpot result B).

If the result is jackpot A, a positive determination is made in step S904F, and the process proceeds to step S905F, where the stop result setting process for jackpot A is executed. If the result is jackpot B, a negative determination is made in step S904F, and the process proceeds to step S906F, where the stop result setting process for jackpot B is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S902F, if a negative result is obtained in step S902F, i.e., if it is not a jackpot, proceed to step S907F. In step S907F, the stop result setting process for a loss is executed.

In the stop result setting processes of steps S905F, S906F, and S907F, the information regarding the pattern (special design) to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 81 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 624 of the ROM 603, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 604.

In steps S905F and S906F, information for determining whether the result of the special feature game round is either a jackpot A or a jackpot B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the jackpot A flag is stored in step S905F, and the jackpot B flag is stored in step S906F. Furthermore, in step S907F, information for determining whether the result of the special feature game round is a loss is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the loss flag is stored in step S907F.

After executing any of the processes in steps S905F, S906F, or S907F, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S908F. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of ROM 603 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS1 value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 634 of RAM 604.

As already explained, in this embodiment, hold information is acquired based on winnings in the first operation port 62d and the second operation port 62e. Based on this acquired hold information, the display of changing symbols (special symbols) and symbols during the special symbol game round is executed. Here, the display time for changing symbols and symbols is set according to the current game state, the result of the current lottery based on winnings in operation ports 62d and 62e, and the number of hold information items stored in the hold area RE for the operation ports. Furthermore, when comparing the display time for a winning result with a losing result, the former tends to be longer than the latter. In the case of a losing result where no reach display occurs, the display time can become shorter as the number of stored hold information items increases.

After the setting process for the display time of the variation is executed in step S908F, the process proceeds to step S909F, where the variation start command for the special symbol (special symbol variation start command) and the type command for the special symbol (special symbol type command) are set. The special symbol variation start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time. The special symbol type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the special symbol type command includes information on jackpot result A, jackpot result B, and loss result.

The special symbol variation start command and special symbol type command set in step S909F are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S601F of the normal processing (Figure 622). Based on the received special symbol variation start command and special symbol type command, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the details of the game performance for that game round, such as the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26, the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29, and the display pattern of the symbol variation on the symbol display device 75. It then controls the lamp unit 26, speaker unit 29, etc., to execute the determined performance.

Subsequently, in step S910F, the display of the changing symbols (special symbols) is started on either the first operation port display unit D1 or the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 81, and then this special symbol variation start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the system so that the display of changing symbols, etc., is started before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

Returning to the explanation of the special feature game round control processing (Figure 623), if the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 81 are showing a variable display or a confirmed display, the process proceeds to step S707F. Step S707F determines whether the variable display time for the special feature has elapsed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the special feature variable display time counter (variable display time information) in RAM 604 has become "0". This value is deducted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (Figure 617) is activated.

If the time for displaying the special feature's variation has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S708F to determine whether a ball has entered the advantageous ball entry section 324 (hereinafter also referred to as the "special start opening 324") of the special electric ball entry unit 64. Specifically, it is determined whether the V-winning flag, described later, is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the V-winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S709F to execute the special feature variation display process. In the special feature variation display process, the display mode of the corresponding display section D1 and D2 for the operation opening is changed. After that, the special feature game round control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S707F that the display time for the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol confirmation display process is executed in step S710F, and then the control process for this special symbol game round is terminated. As a result, the symbol (pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of this special symbol game round is displayed (confirmed) on the corresponding display unit D1 or D2 for the operation port.

In this embodiment, there is a possibility that a win will occur in the special electric start port 324 during the special symbol game round (more specifically, during the special symbol variation display). In this case, a positive determination is made in step S708F, and the process proceeds to step S711F, where the lottery result for this special symbol game round, i.e., the confirmed displayed symbol, is rewritten to correspond to a losing result. After rewriting to a losing result in step S711F, the special symbol confirmation display processing is executed in step S710F, and the control process for this special symbol game round ends.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S604F will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 626.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S1001F, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is not in a special game state, the process proceeds to step S1002F, where it is determined whether or not the timing for one special game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the change display ended on either the operation port display unit D1 or D2 of the main display unit D.

If the special feature game round has ended, a positive result is determined in step S1002F, and the process proceeds to step S1003F. In step S1003F, it is determined whether the result of this special feature game round (the result of the above win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state) (a jackpot result). Specifically, it is determined whether either the jackpot A flag or the jackpot B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1005F. This start process releases the restriction on the operation of the variable prize device 85 by the locking device, allowing the opening and closing operation of the variable prize device 85 until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S1005F, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and the waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in step S1001F, the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag is used to determine whether or not the system is in the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following step S1006F, the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604, is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means of determining the number of times the variable prize device 85 has been opened. After executing the process in step S1006F, the process proceeds to step S1007F, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased. This forces the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode to switch to the low-frequency support mode. Subsequently, the opening command setting process is executed in step S1008F, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S1009F, after which the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S1008F is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S601F of the normal processing (Figure 622). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined performance content. This performance content includes the display mode on the symbol display device 75. Based on the opening command received from the main control device 162, the notification/performance control device 143 executes display control of the symbol display device 75 to execute the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a display corresponding to a jackpot (e.g., animated display of characters).

Furthermore, the external signal set in step S1009F is also transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S601F during normal processing (Figure 622). The hall computer can then determine that the gate is in open/close execution mode based on this external signal.

In this embodiment, the transition to the special game state (open/close execution mode) is triggered not only by a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 62d and 62e, but also by an entry into the special electric start port 324. Even if the special game round has not ended in step S1002F, or if it is confirmed in step S1003F that the jackpot A flag and jackpot B flag are not stored, the game state transition process does not end there. Instead, in step S1004F, it is determined whether a V-entry, i.e., an entry into the special electric start port 324, has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether the V-entry flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If it is determined in step S1004F that the V-entry flag is not set, the game state transition process ends there. If it is determined in step S1004F that the V-entry flag is set, the processes in steps S1005F to S1009F are executed, and then the game state transition process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001F, if it is determined in step S1001F that the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step S1010F. In step S1010F, it is determined whether the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the opening and closing of the main prize slot is executed in step S1011F. Here, the opening and closing of the main prize slot will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 627.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
In the opening and closing process of the main prize slot, first, in step S1101F, it is determined whether or not the variable prize device 85 (main prize slot) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the shutter drive unit 461 of the variable prize device 85. If the main prize slot is not open, in step S1102F, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S1102F is positive, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1102F, the process proceeds to step S1103F. In step S1103F, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the main prize slot, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 617) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1103F, the main prize slot opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1104F, where the variable prize winning device 85 (large prize winning slot) is opened. Specifically, the shutter drive unit 461 is driven to open the large prize winning slot.

Subsequently, as a setting process for the closing conditions corresponding to the variable prize winning device 85 (large prize winning slot) (setting process for when it is open), steps S1105F and S1106F are executed. Specifically, in step S1105F, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S1106F, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process in step S1106F, in step S1107F, an open command is set to indicate that the variable prize device 85 (large prize slot) has been opened, and the opening and closing process for this large prize slot is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 143 in step S601F of the normal process (see Figure 622). Based on the received open command, the notification and performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S1101F, if it is determined in step S1101F that the variable prize-winning device 85 (large prize-winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S1108F, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1109F, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize-winning opening based on the detection signal from the detection sensor installed in the variable prize-winning device 85.

If a prize has been awarded, the award command output process is executed in step S1110F. This award command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, and the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, for example, executed by the symbol display device 75, changes as a result of this award command.

After executing the command output process in step S1110F, the process proceeds to step S1111F. In step S1111F, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1. In the following step S1112F, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S1112F, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1108F (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the main prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S1113F, the shutter drive unit 461 is deactivated in order to close the variable prize device 85 (main prize opening).

In the following step S1114F, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC1 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S1115F, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC1 value is "0". If the determination in step S1115F is negative, the process proceeds to step S1116F, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S1116F, a closing command is set in step S1117F, and the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 143 in step S1101F of the normal process (Figure 622). The notification and performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S1115F, if the value of the round counter RC1 is determined to be "0" in step S1115F, the process proceeds to step S1118F. In step S1118F, the ending start process is executed. This start process sets an ending waiting time for the opening/closing execution mode, allowing the system to wait without starting the next game round. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, pre-stored in the ROM 603, is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Subsequently, in step S1119F, the ending command is set, and then the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S601F of the normal process (Figure 622).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 626), after executing the opening and closing of the large prize slot in step S1011F, the process proceeds to step S1012F, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends immediately. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1013F. In step S1013F, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1014F, and then the game state transition process ends. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 628.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S1201F, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by a jackpot result (jackpot result A or jackpot result B). If the determination in step S1201F is positive, the process proceeds to step S1202F. In step S1202F, it is determined whether the trigger for the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode was jackpot result A. If it is jackpot result A, the determination in step S1202F is positive, and the process proceeds to step S1203F, where the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. After that, in step S1204F, "10" is set in the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 634 of RAM 604.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a normal game is played, and the high-frequency support mode ends when the value of the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the number of games that can be played during the high-frequency support mode) (the termination criterion mentioned above).

After executing the process in step S1204F, or if a negative determination is made in step S1202F, the process proceeds to step S1205F, where the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Based on this set high-frequency support mode flag, the subsequent electric support processing refers to the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode during the support lottery. The variable display time table for high-frequency support mode is then referenced as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the symbols (special symbols) in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the symbols (normal symbols) in the through-gate display unit DS.

Subsequently, in step S1206F, the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

Returning to the explanation of step S1201F, if the trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode is a win in the special electric start gate 324, a negative determination is made in step S1201F, and the process proceeds to step S1207F. In step S1207, it is determined whether the normal win result that triggered the win in the special electric start gate 324 is normal win result A. If it is normal win result A, in step S1205F, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, and then the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) in step S1206F are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped. On the other hand, if the normal win result that triggered the win in the special electric start gate 324 is normal win result B, a negative determination is made in step S1207F, and the process proceeds to step S1206F, where the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

(General game round control processing)
Next, the general game round control process in step S605F will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 629 to 631.

In the normal game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 629, it is determined in step S1301F whether or not support is in progress (normal game win in progress). If support is in progress, the normal game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S1302F onward, namely the normal game round start process from steps S1302F to S1306F and the normal game round progress process from steps S1307F to S1309F.

If support is not currently active, steps S1302F and S1303F determine whether a normal game round is in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the through-gate display unit DS of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display state. If it is in a variable display state, a negative determination is made in step S1302F and the process proceeds to step S1303F. In step S1303F, it is determined whether the confirmed display of the pattern (normal symbol) on the through-gate display unit DS has finished. If a positive determination is made in step S1303F, the process proceeds to steps S1304F to S1306F for starting a normal game round. In the normal game round start process, first in step S1304F, it is determined whether the number of reserved memories M related to the through-gate 66 is "0". If the number of reserved memories M is "0", it means that no reserved information is stored in the electric operation memory area 433. Therefore, this normal game round control process ends there.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved symbols M is not "0", in step S1305F, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserved area SE for the through gate of the electric power memory area 633 for variable display. Furthermore, in step S1306F, a normal symbol variation start process is executed to start the variable display of the through gate display unit DS in the main display unit 81 (and in addition, the variable display of the symbol display device 75 if it is in the second normal game state), after which the normal symbol game round control process ends.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S1305F and the graph change start process in step S1306F. First, we will explain the data setting process in step S1305F with reference to the flowchart in Figure 630.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S1401F, the number of reserved items M stored in the reserved item storage area GE is deducted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of reserved items M stored in the reserved area SE for the through gate is "0". If the number of reserved items M is "0", the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved items M is not "0", the data (reserved information) stored in the first area Rc1 of the reserved area SE for the through gate is moved to the execution area CE (step S1402F). Then, the data (reserved information) stored in the second area Rc2 to the fourth area Rc4 of the reserved area SE are shifted sequentially to the lower areas (step S1403F). As a result, for example, when data from area 1 Rc1 is moved to execution area CE, the data within each area is shifted, such as from area 2 Rc2 to area 1 Rc1, from area 3 Rc3 to area 2 Rc2, and from area 4 Rc4 to area 3 Rc3.

In the following step S1404F, a shift command is set, which is information that allows the notification and effect control device 143 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the hold area SE for the through gate. After this, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S1404F is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143 in step S601F of the normal process (Figure 622).

(Process to start normal graph variation)
Next, the process of starting the general diagram change in step S1306F will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 631.

In the process of initiating a regular graph change, first, in step S1501F, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. If the count limit flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1502F, where the value of the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is deducted by 1. After executing the update process in step S1502F, or if a negative determination is made in step S1501F, the process proceeds to step S1503F.

In step S1503F, a win/loss determination process is executed based on the entry into the through gate 66. This win/loss determination process determines whether the pending information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a regular win. Specifically, it grasps the information for regular win determination from the information stored in the execution area CE, i.e., the information obtained from the win random number counter C4. Then, by referring to the win/loss table for the through gate (for regular wins) stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of ROM 603, it determines whether the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a regular win.

If the result of the success/failure determination process in step S1503F corresponds to a successful outcome, a positive determination is made in the following step S1504F, and the process proceeds to step S1505F, where the determination process for the type of successful outcome is executed. In this type determination process, the information for type determination, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C5, is identified from the information stored in the execution area CE. Furthermore, the distribution table for successful outcomes stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to successful outcome A (successful outcome A) or successful outcome B (successful outcome B).

If the result is A, a positive determination is made in step S1506F, and the process proceeds to step S1507F, where the stop result setting process for A is executed. If the result is B, a negative determination is made in step S1506F, and the process proceeds to step S1508F, where the stop result setting process for B is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1504F, if a negative result is obtained in step S1504F, i.e., if it is not a normal win, proceed to step S1509F. In step S1509F, the stop result setting process for a loss is executed.

In the stop result setting processes of steps S1507F, S1508F, and S1509F, the information regarding the pattern (normal diagram) to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 81 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 624 of the ROM 603, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 604.

In steps S1507F and S1508F, information for determining whether the result of the current round of normal gameplay is either a normal gameplay win A or a normal gameplay win B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, in step S1507F, the normal gameplay win A flag is stored, and in step S1508F, the normal gameplay win B flag is stored. Furthermore, in step S1509F, information for determining whether the result of the current round of normal gameplay is a loss is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, in step S1509F, the loss flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S1507F, S1508F, or S1509F, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S1510F. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of ROM 603 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS2 value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 634 of RAM 604.

As already explained, in this embodiment, hold information is acquired based on the entry into the through gate 66, and based on this acquired hold information, the display of symbols (normal symbols) and symbol variations to confirmation displays during normal symbol game rounds are executed. Here, the display time for symbols and symbol variations is set according to the current game state, the result of the current lottery based on the entry into the through gate 66, the number of hold information stored in the hold area SE for the through gate, etc. Furthermore, when comparing the display time for normal symbol wins and losses, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a loss where no reach display occurs, the display time can become shorter as the number of stored hold information increases.

After the setting process for the variable display time is executed in step S1510F, the process proceeds to step S1511F, where the variable start command for the normal display (normal display variable start command) and the type command for the normal display (normal display type command) are set. The normal display variable start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variable display time. The normal display type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the normal display type command includes information on normal display win result A, normal display win result B, and loss result information.

The regular symbol variation start command and regular symbol type command set in step S1511F are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S601F of the normal processing (Figure 622). Based on the received regular symbol variation start command and regular symbol type command, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the details of the game performance for that game round, such as the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26, the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29, and the symbol variation display pattern on the symbol display device 75. It then controls the lamp unit 26, speaker unit 29, etc., to execute the determined performance.

Subsequently, in step S1512F, the display of the changing pattern (normal pattern) is started on the through-gate display unit DS of the main display unit 81, and then the normal pattern change start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the system so that the display of the changing pattern, etc., is started before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

Returning to the explanation of the general display game turn control process (Figure 629), if the through-gate display unit DS in the main display unit 81 is in a variable display state or a confirmed display state, the process proceeds to step S1307F. In step S1307F, it is determined whether the variable display time for the general display has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the general display variable display time counter (variable display time information) in RAM 604 has become "0". This value is deducted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 617) is activated.

If the time for displaying the regular display variation has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1308F, where the regular display variation display process is executed. During this process, the display mode on the through-gate display unit DS is changed. Afterward, the regular game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1307F that the display time for the regular symbol has elapsed, the process for confirming the regular symbol display is executed in step S1309F, and then the control process for this regular symbol game round is terminated. As a result, the symbol (pattern) corresponding to the lottery result for this regular symbol game round is displayed (confirmed) on the through-gate display unit DS.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 632 and 633, the power supply support process in step S606F, which is performed as part of normal processing, will be described.

(Processing for power supply support)
In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S1601F, it is determined whether or not the electric feature of the special electric ball entry unit 64 is providing support. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If support is not being provided, a negative determination is made in step S1601F and the process proceeds to step S1602F. In step S1602F, it is determined whether or not the display of the confirmed pattern (normal pattern) in the through gate display unit DS has finished. If the display of the confirmed pattern has not finished, a negative determination is made in step S1602F and the process for supporting the electric feature ends. If the display of the confirmed pattern has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602F and the process proceeds to step S1603F.

In step S1603F, it is determined whether the lottery (support lottery or regular lottery) based on the entry into the through gate 66 resulted in a regular win. If the result is a loss, a negative determination is made in step S1603F, and the main electric support processing ends there. If the lottery based on the entry into the through gate 66 resulted in a regular win, an positive determination is made in step S1603F, and the process proceeds to step S1604F. In step S1604F, "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The round counter RC2 functions as a means of determining the number of times the special electric ball entry unit 64 has opened.

After executing the process in step S1604F, the process proceeds to step S1605F, where support flags are set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Then, in step S1606F, the opening start process is executed, and the main electric device support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time for the opening. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric device will begin.

Returning to the explanation of step S1601F, if a positive result is obtained in step S1601F, the process proceeds to step S1607F. In step S1607F, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S1606F has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S1607F, and the main power support process ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S1607F, and the process proceeds to step S1608F. Now, referring to Figure 633, the power switching process in step S1608F will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric function switching process, first, in step S1701F, it is determined whether the vane member 325, which is an electric mechanism of the special electric ball entry unit 64, is open (in the open state). Whether the vane member 325 is open or not is determined by whether the opening/closing drive unit 451 is in the driving state. If the vane member 325 is open, the process proceeds to step S1702F, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric function switching process is terminated. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1703F. In step S1703F, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2, which is provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604, is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric mechanism, and its value is deducted by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 617) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1703F, the main power switch operation is terminated. If a positive result is obtained in step S1703F, the process proceeds to step S1704F.

In step S1704F, the power supply release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the opening/closing drive unit 451 (solenoid) is started, switching the vane member 325 from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S1705F, "10" is set in the second prize counter PC2. In the following step S1706F, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is the high-frequency support mode, "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter TC2 (step S1507F); if it is the low-frequency support mode, "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds) is set in the timer counter TC2 (step S1708F).

Returning to the explanation of step S1701F, if a positive result is obtained in step S1701F, i.e., if the wing member 325 is open, the process proceeds to step S1709F. In step S1709F, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1710F. In step S1710F, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the special electric ball entry unit 64 based on the detection signal from the upstream detection sensor 327. If no entry has occurred, the main electric machine opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is deducted by 1 in step S1711F, and in the following step S1712F, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric machine opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S1712F, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1709F (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for ending the opening of the vane member 325 has been met. In this case, in step S1713F, the output of the drive signal to the opening/closing drive unit 451 is stopped in order to close the vane member 325.

In the following step S1714F, the ending initiation process is executed. This initiation process sets the waiting time for the ending of the electric support system. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, pre-stored in the ROM 603, is set in the waiting time counter located in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 632, after executing the power supply switching process in step S1608F, the V distribution setting process in step S1609F is executed. Here, the V distribution setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 634.

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, first, in step S1801F, it is determined whether or not it is time to start support by the blade member 325. If it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1802F, where it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the determination in step S1802F is positive, the process proceeds to step S1803F, where "1000" (corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the third timer counter TC3 provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. On the other hand, if it is in low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1804, where "30" (corresponding to 0.6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter TC3. The value set in the third timer counter TC3 (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, i.e., every 2 msec.

After executing the process in step S1803F or step S1804F, the process proceeds to step S1805F, where the output of a drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is initiated, displacing the flow path switching member 326 to the retracted position (V-entry side), and then the V-distribution setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1801F, if it is not the support start timing, a negative determination is made in step S1801F and the process proceeds to step S1806F. In step S1806F, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If it is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S1806F and the V distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S1806F and the process proceeds to step S1807F. In step S1807F, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is terminated, the flow path switching member 326 is displaced to the protruding position (disengaged side), and then the V distribution setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 632, after executing the V distribution setting process in step S1609F, the process proceeds to step S1610F. In step S1610F, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative result is obtained in step S1610F, the main electric support process is terminated. If a positive result is obtained in step S1610F, the process proceeds to step S1611F, where it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending set in step S1714F has elapsed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1611F, the main electric support process is terminated. If a positive result is obtained in step S1611F, the process proceeds to step S1612F. In step S1612F, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 are erased, and the main electric support process is terminated. This releases the lottery restriction for winning a regular prize based on entry into the through gate 66. Furthermore, upon the end of support, other flags related to electric power support will also be deleted, and various counters related to electric power support will be reset.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 635, the process for winning a prize in step S607F of the normal process will be explained.

(Processing for winning the V prize)
In the V-winning process, first, in step S1901F, it is determined whether or not a V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a V-winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1902F, where it is determined whether or not a V-winning has occurred (whether or not a game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 329) based on the detection state of the V-winning detection sensor 329 provided in the special electric start port 324 of the special electric ball entry unit 64.

If a V-win is determined to have occurred, the V-win will be valid if the following three requirements are met: (1) It is during the V-win acceptance period from the start of support until 3 seconds have elapsed since the end of support (Step S1903F: Affirmative judgment), (2) It is not in a special game state (open/close execution mode) (Step S1904F: Negative judgment), and (3) The display units D1 and D2 for the operation port are not currently displaying the confirmed symbols (special symbols) corresponding to the jackpot result (Step S1905F: Negative judgment).

If the above three requirements are met, the V-winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 in step S1907F, the V-winning command is set in step S1908F, and then the V-winning process is terminated.

The V-winning command is a command used to notify the notification and performance control device 143 that a V-winning has occurred. The set V-winning command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 143 via the external output processing of normal processing (Figure 622). Upon receiving the V-winning command, the notification and performance control device 143 controls the display control device 710, etc., so that the symbol display device 75, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 announce the occurrence of a V-winning, or perform celebratory effects for the V-winning.

Furthermore, if a negative result is determined in step S1903F, that is, if a V-prize is awarded outside the acceptance period, not only is the V-prize invalidated, but an error command is set as the target for transmission to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S1904F, and the V-prize award processing is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 143 in the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 622), and the notification/performance control device 143 controls the display control device 710, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 so that a predetermined error notification is executed.

(Relationship between game state and display time of fluctuations)
As already explained, in this embodiment, based on winnings in the operating ports 62d and 62e, reserve information (special symbol reserves) is acquired, and based on the acquired reserve information, special symbol game rounds are executed. Based on winnings in the through gate 66, reserve information (regular symbol reserves) is acquired, and based on the acquired reserve information, regular symbol game rounds are executed. Here, the display time for the variation of the symbols (special symbol, regular symbol) in the main display unit D and the display time for the variation of the symbols in the display screen 75a are set according to the game state. The following provides supplementary explanations regarding the configuration related to the setting of the variation display time, etc. Specifically, the setting method for the variation display time in the variation display time setting process in the variation start process for special symbols and the setting method for the variation display time in the variation start process for regular symbols.

(Setting the variable display time for the operating port)
In the process of setting the variable display time for special features, the variable display time table corresponding to the current special feature game round is selected from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of ROM 603, and the variable display time is set.

For example, in the first normal game state compatible with low-frequency support mode, during a special symbol game round that results in a complete miss without a reach display, if the number of reserved information (special symbol reserved) stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 is "0" or "1", the variation display time is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the variation display time is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" or "4", the variation display time is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". Furthermore, the confirmed display time for the symbols (special symbols) in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the confirmed display time for the symbols in the symbol display device 75 are specified to be "1 second" (see Figure 636).

In special game rounds where a losing reach display occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 40 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information (see Figure 636). This display time is within the same range as the display time set in game rounds corresponding to jackpot results (see Figure 637). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for jackpot results, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for losing results. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

In the second normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode, the variable display time table referenced differs between the first 1-8 special symbol game rounds and the 9th and subsequent special symbol game rounds.

For the first eight special game rounds, the variable display time table is set to "0.5 sec" for both the variable display time and the confirmed display time, regardless of the number of stored reserve information or the outcome of the lottery. In contrast, for the ninth and subsequent special game rounds, the variable display time is set to "60 sec" for both the variable display time and the confirmed display time, regardless of the number of stored reserve information or the outcome of the lottery (see Figures 636 and 637).

(Processing for setting the variable display time for through gates)
In the process of setting the variable display time for the regular display, the variable display time is set by selecting the table corresponding to the current regular display game round from among the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

For example, in the first normal game state compatible with low-frequency support mode, the variable display time table referenced is defined such that, regardless of the lottery result per normal draw or the number of reserved information stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 of the reserved area SE, the variable display time for any normal draw game round is set to "15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 seconds," and the confirmed display time is set to "0.5 seconds" (see Figures 638 and 639).

Furthermore, while the regular game rounds may progress during the special game state, the same variable display time table used during the first regular game state is referenced during the special game state.

In the second normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode, the variable display time table referenced differs between the first (initial) normal game round and subsequent (non-initial) normal game rounds.

The variable display time table referenced during the first round of normal gameplay is specified to always have a variable display time of "20 seconds" and a confirmed display time of "0.5 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information or the outcome of the lottery (see Figures 638 and 639).

In contrast, the variable display time table referenced in subsequent normal game rounds is defined as follows: Specifically, in normal game rounds that result in a complete miss without a reach display, if the number of reserved information (normal symbol reserved) stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the variable display time is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3", the variable display time is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "4", the variable display time is set to "1 second", and the confirmed display time is set to "0.5 seconds" (see Figure 638).

Furthermore, for the variable display time table referenced in subsequent normal game rounds, in normal game rounds where a reach display corresponding to a losing result (a losing reach) occurs, the variable display time will be set to "20 to 40 seconds" regardless of the number of stored reserve information (see Figure 638). This variable display time is within the same range as the variable display time set in game rounds corresponding to jackpot results (see Figure 639). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for jackpot results, and a relatively shorter time is more likely to be set for losing results. In other words, a difference is made so that a reach display with a longer variable display time has a higher probability of a jackpot than a reach display with a shorter variable display time.

(How to play the game)
Next, referring to the block diagram in Figure 640, the basic flow of gameplay in the pachinko machine shown in this embodiment will be explained.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the game state is broadly divided into a normal game state and a special game state (open/close execution mode). Furthermore, the normal game state includes a first normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode and a second normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode. The second normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state.

In the first normal game state, a jackpot lottery is executed when a ball enters the operating ball entry unit 62 located in the game area PE (left route), i.e., when a ball enters the first operating port 62d or the second operating port 62e. In the first normal game state, the sequence of symbols displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 corresponds to the special symbol game round, and the result of the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated using these sequence of symbols. If a jackpot result is obtained from the lottery based on balls entering the operating ports 62d and 62e, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed on the display screen 75a as the final stop (confirmation display), and then the game transitions to the special game state. After the end of the special game state, the game transitions (upgrades) to the second normal game state, which is compatible with the high-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, during the first normal game state, even if a player wins the lottery for a regular win based on a ball entering the through gate 66, it is difficult to enter the special electric start port 324, and therefore, transitioning to the special game state cannot be expected. In other words, a difference has been created so that it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball to the left route than to launch it to the right route.

During the special game mode, the variable prize-winning device 65 located on the right route opens, and game balls launched on the right route enter this variable prize-winning device 65, increasing the number of balls held. A through gate 66 is located upstream of the variable prize-winning device 65 on the right route, and balls are expected to enter the through gate 66 during the special game mode.

During the special game state, the progress of special symbol game rounds is restricted, but the progress of regular symbol game rounds is not. Even if a regular symbol win occurs during the special game state, opening the special electric ball entry unit 64 and resulting in a ball entering the special electric start port 324, that win will be invalid. Furthermore, during the special game state, the display screen 75a shows videos and other content specific to the special game state, and the display of symbol changes related to regular symbol game rounds is not executed, thus ensuring that the fact of a regular symbol win is not conspicuous.

In the second normal game state, the game is played by launching the game balls towards the through gate 66 located on the right route, which makes it possible to play the game more advantageously than launching the game balls towards the left route. Specifically, when a game ball launched on the left route enters the through gate 66, a lottery for a regular win is performed. In high-frequency support mode, the probability of a regular win is significantly more favorable than the lottery for a big win based on entry into the operating ports 62d and 62e. Specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for a big win based on entry into the operating ports 62d and 62e is 1/300, while in high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lottery for a regular win based on entry into the through gate 66 is 1/5. When a regular win occurs, the special electric ball entry unit 64 opens, and entry into the special electric start port 324 becomes possible. If a winning combination is achieved in the special electric start slot 324, the game transitions to a special play state (open/close execution mode), providing another chance to significantly increase your winnings.

In the second normal game state, the sequence of symbols displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 corresponds to the normal game rounds, and the result of the normal win lottery is clearly indicated using these sequence of symbols. If a normal win result is obtained through the lottery based on entry into the through gate 66, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal win result is displayed on the display screen 75a as the final stop (confirmation display), and then the special electric ball entry unit 64 opens. If an entry into the special electric start port 324 occurs, this is clearly indicated on the display screen 75a, and the game transitions to the special game state. However, until at least an entry into the special electric start port 324 occurs, the type of normal win result is not clearly indicated on the display screen 75a, making it difficult to identify which normal win result it is from the confirmed symbol combination, etc.

Here, if a regular win occurs and the ball enters the special electric start port 324, the subsequent game flow differs depending on the type of regular win. Specifically, regular win results are broadly divided into two types: Result A, where the high-frequency support mode continues even after the special game state ends, and Result B, where the high-frequency support mode does not continue after the special game state ends (downgraded to low-frequency support mode).

If the result is Normal Win A, the game transitions to a special game state triggered by a ball entering the special electric start slot 324. After the special game state ends, the game returns to the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high-frequency support mode. When the game transitions to the second normal game state in this manner, it continues until the next jackpot (the next ball entering the special electric start slot 324), thus offering a chance for consecutive wins. Conversely, if the result is Normal Win B, the game transitions to a special game state triggered by a ball entering the special electric start slot 324. After the special game state ends, the game returns to the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. In this case, the game aims for a jackpot result again through a lottery based on balls entering the activation slots 62d and 62e.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won through a lottery based on winning at the operating ports 62d and 62e, the result is distributed to either jackpot result A or jackpot result B. For jackpot result A, a limit is placed on the number of normal game spins in the second normal game state, which is entered after the special game state ends. The goal is to achieve a normal win within this limit. In contrast, for jackpot result B, there is no practical limit on the number of normal game spins in the second normal game state, which is entered after the special game state ends; therefore, a normal win will basically occur. This configuration allows for greater diversification of the gameplay.

Next, referring to the block diagram in Figure 641, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration related to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710.

(Electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710)
The notification and effect control board 651, provided in the notification and effect control device 143, is equipped with an MPU 652. The MPU 652 contains a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 652, a RAM 654 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 653, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not a requirement that the ROM 653 and RAM 654 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 652; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 652 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for hold display control (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for opening and closing execution modes (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 652 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29, which are located on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 710. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 143 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 710 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 710 includes an MPU 672, which is a chip-integrated element containing a program ROM 673 and a work RAM 674; a display control board 671 on which a video display processor (VDP) 675, a character ROM 676, and a video RAM 677 are mounted. Note that it is not mandatory for the program ROM 673 and work RAM 674 to be integrated into a single chip on the MPU 672; they may be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 672 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 143, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 675 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 675). More specifically, the MPU 672 executes a process to identify the variation display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 75 based on the commands transmitted from the notification/effect control device 143, and also executes processing related to hold notifications, etc., and then executes drawing processing for the VDP 675 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

The program ROM 673 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 672, and also stores JPEG image data for background images. The work RAM 674 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 672. This work data and flags are stored in various areas of the work RAM 674.

The VDP675 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device, which acts as a liquid crystal display driver, integrated into the graphic display device 75. Because the VDP675 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be described as a microcontroller chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP675 adjusts the timing of the MPU672, video RAM677, etc., to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM677 from the character ROM676 at a predetermined timing to display it on the graphic display device 75.

The character ROM 676 serves as an image data library for storing character data, such as patterns, displayed on the pattern display device 75. This character ROM 676 holds bitmap image data of various display patterns, a color palette table referenced when determining the color representation for each dot of the bitmap image, and other similar data.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide multiple character ROMs 676 and store image data and other information in each character ROM 676. It is also possible to configure the system so that JPEG image data for background images, stored in the program ROM 673, is stored in the character ROMs 676.

The video RAM 677 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75. The display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 677.

In this embodiment, the general outline of the pattern variation display on the display screen 75a is determined by the notification/performance control device 143 by referring to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the pattern variation display are determined by the display control device 710 based on the determination result. Specifically, in the MPU 642 of the notification/performance control device 143, game round processing is executed as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 msec), and the general outline of the pattern variation display is determined during this game round processing.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 642, in the game round processing, first, in step S2001F, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in a special game state, a negative determination is made in step S2001 and the game round processing ends. If it is not in a special game state, the process proceeds to step S2002F, where it is determined whether or not it is in the first normal game state.

When in the first normal game state, the first variation display control process is executed. In the first variation display control process, the content of the game round's presentation is determined based on various commands for special symbols received from the main control device 162, such as the special symbol variation start command and the special symbol type command. In other words, in the first variation display control process, various commands for normal symbols, such as the normal symbol variation start command and the normal symbol type command, are excluded from the reference targets when setting the presentation. In the first variation display control process executed in the first normal game state, the variation display pattern of the symbols in the variation display area ME in the center of the display screen 75a and the confirmed symbol combinations are determined based on the hold information related to the special symbol game round.

In the MPU 672 of the display control device 710, the details of the variable display mode are determined based on instructions from the notification/performance control device 143, and the display control of the pattern display device 75 is performed according to the determined content.

Furthermore, the MPU 672 of the display control device 710 displays the game result of the special symbol game round in a simplified display area MEX (see Figure 643(a)) located in the upper left corner of the display screen 75a. Specifically, during the special symbol game round, the letters C and F are displayed alternately. If the special symbol game round results in a jackpot, the letter C is stopped displaying at the timing when the symbols are confirmed and displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2. If the special symbol game round results in a loss, the letter F is stopped displaying at the timing when the symbols are confirmed and displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2002F, the process proceeds to step S2004F to determine whether the pseudo-ending is currently being displayed. If the pseudo-ending is currently being displayed, the game round processing ends immediately. If the pseudo-ending is not currently being displayed, the second variation display control process is executed in step S2005F, and then the game round processing ends.

In the second variation display control process, the content of the game round's presentation is determined based on various commands for the normal display received from the main control device 162, such as the normal display variation start command and the normal display type command. In other words, in the second variation display control process, various commands for special displays, such as the special display variation start command and the special display type command, are excluded from the reference targets when setting the presentation. In the second variation display control process executed in the second normal game state, the variation display pattern of the symbols in the variation display area ME in the center of the display screen 75a and the confirmed symbol combinations are determined based on the hold information related to the normal display round.

In the MPU 672 of the display control device 710, the details of the variable display mode are determined based on instructions from the notification/performance control device 143, and the display control of the pattern display device 75 is performed according to the determined content.

Furthermore, the MPU 672 of the display control device 710 displays the game result of the normal game round in a simplified display area MEY (see Figure 643(b)) located in the upper right corner of the display screen 75a. Specifically, during the normal game round, the letters X and Z are displayed alternately. If the normal game round results in a normal win, the letter X is stopped displaying at the timing when the symbols are confirmed and displayed on the through-gate display unit DS. If the normal game round results in a loss, the letter Z is stopped displaying at the timing when the symbols are confirmed and displayed on the through-gate display unit DS.

Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 643(b), we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the coordination between the operation port display units D1 and D2, the through gate display unit DS, and the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a.

At timing tf1 during the first normal game state, the special symbol game round corresponding to the jackpot result begins. At timing tf1, the variable display of symbols begins on the operation port display unit (e.g., operation port display unit D1), and the variable display (scrolling display) of the symbol row begins in the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a. At timing tf2, when the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result are confirmed and displayed on the operation port display unit, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is confirmed and displayed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a. Then, at timing tf3, when the confirmed display ends, the game transitions from the first normal game state to the special game state (open/close execution mode), and an opening video indicating the start of the special game state is displayed on the display screen 75a.

In other words, in the first normal game state, the display of the changing symbols in the variable display area ME is linked to the display unit for the operation port, but this linkage is canceled when transitioning to the special game state.

During the special game state, game balls are launched towards the right route, resulting in entry into the through gate 66. As a result, as shown in the timings of tf4 and tf5, a normal game round is initiated during the special game state, triggered by entry into the through gate 66. However, during the special game state, a video for the jackpot is displayed on the display screen 75a, and the display in the variable display area ME is not synchronized with the normal game round. Therefore, during the special game state, the normal game round proceeds quietly. Furthermore, since the support mode is set to low-frequency support mode during the special game state, the possibility of a normal win during a normal game round is low. Even if a normal win occurs and the special electric ball entry unit 64 opens, the opening period is extremely short, making its behavior unlikely to be noticed by the player.

At timing tf7, the special game state ends and the game transitions to the second normal game state. In the pachinko machine shown in this embodiment, the end of the special game state does not trigger the end of the normal game round. Therefore, a normal game round started during the special game state (low-frequency support mode) may continue across the end of the special game state, i.e., the transition timing to the second normal game state. In the example shown in Figure 643(b), a normal game round started at timing tf5 (before timing tf7) ends at timing tf8 (after timing tf7). This discrepancy in the end timings of the special game state and the normal game round may cause a discrepancy when coordinating the display of the variable display area ME with the normal game round in the second special game state.

Furthermore, when the special game state ends, the restrictions on the special symbol game rounds are lifted, and the special symbol game rounds will begin immediately. In the second normal game state, the symbols displayed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a correspond to the normal symbol game rounds. If a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol game round while a normal symbol game round is in progress, the game round animation related to the normal symbol game round will end prematurely, raising concerns about a strong sense of incongruity in the game round animation.

In this embodiment, one of the features is that, taking these circumstances into consideration, measures have been taken to reduce the sense of incongruity at the start of the collaboration. Specifically, the ending display of the special game state is continued beyond the end timing of the special game state, depending on the situation. Specifically, one of the features is that the ending display is performed by executing the first fixed part and then transitioning to the second variable part depending on the situation. The ending setting process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 644. The ending setting process is a process executed as part of periodic processing during the special game state.

(Processing for setting the ending)
In the ending setting process, first, in step S2101F, it is determined whether or not it is the start time for the ending in the special game state. Specifically, if an ending command is received from the main control device 162, a positive determination is made in step S2101F. If it is not the start time for the ending, the ending setting process ends immediately. If it is the start time for the ending, the process proceeds to step S2102F.

In step S2102F, it is determined whether the number of reserved data points M is "0". Specifically, the RAM 654 of the notification/performance control device 143 is provided with a first area Re1 to a fourth area Re4 and an execution area CE as storage areas for storing data (reserved information) included in the reserved commands for through gates received from the main control device 162 (see Figure 641). The number of reserved data points M is determined based on the number of data (reserved information) stored in these storage areas, and it is determined whether the number of reserved data points is "0".

Furthermore, when the notification/performance control device 143's MPU 672 receives a normal diagram variation start command, if the normal diagram hold memory count M is "0", it stores the data (hold information) obtained from the normal diagram variation start command in the execution area CE. If the normal diagram hold memory count M is not "0", it stores the data (hold information) obtained from the normal diagram variation start command in the empty areas of the first area Re1 to the fourth area Re4. Then, when the next normal diagram game round begins, the data (hold information) stored in the first area Re1 is shifted to the execution area CE, and the data (hold information) stored in the second area Rc2 to the fourth area Rc4 are sequentially shifted to the lower areas.

If a positive result is obtained in step S2102F, the process proceeds to step S2103F to determine if the total number of special symbol holds, known as the common hold count CRN, is "0". Specifically, the RAM 654 of the notification/performance control device 143 is provided with storage areas for data (hold information) included in the special symbol hold command received from the main control device 162, consisting of the first area Rd1 to the eighth area Rd8 and the execution area BE (see Figure 641). The common hold count CRN is determined based on the number of data (hold information) stored in these storage areas, and it is determined whether the common hold count CRN is "0".

Furthermore, when the notification/performance control device 143's MPU 672 receives a special symbol variation start command, if the common reserve count CRN is "0", it stores the data (reserve information) obtained from the special symbol variation start command in the execution area BE. If the common reserve count CRN is not "0", it stores the data (reserve information) obtained from the special symbol variation start command in the empty areas of the first area Rd1 to the eighth area Re8. Then, when the next special symbol game round begins, the data (reserve information) stored in the first area Rd1 is shifted to the execution area BE, and the data (reserve information) stored in the second area Rd2 to the eighth area Rd8 are sequentially shifted to the lower areas.

If a positive result is obtained in step S2103F, that is, if both the number of regular symbols and the number of special symbols held are "0", the process proceeds to step S2104F, and the first setting process is executed. The first ending display, which is set by the first setting process, is constructed solely by the first part, Part A, described above, and the ending display ends at the same time as the special game state ends.

The first type of ending display will be explained below with reference to Figures 645(a) and 646. Figure 645(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow when the first type of ending display is executed, and Figure 646 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the first type of ending display.

(First type ending displayed)
As shown in Figure 645(a), at the timing of tfa1 during the special game state, the round game in that special game state has ended and the ending has begun. At this timing, the normal symbol reserve is "0", and the normal symbol game round is not currently being played. The special symbol reserve is also "0", and the possibility of the special symbol game round starting with the end of the special game state is low. At the timing of tfa1, the first type ending display is set based on these conditions, and at the timing of tfa1, the words "see you!" are displayed on the display screen 75a as an image corresponding to the first part A of the first type ending display (see Figure 646).

At the timing of TFA2, which marks the end of the special game state, the first ending display has finished, and the display screen 75a shows an image of the sea stage as the background image corresponding to the second normal game state, along with three rows of symbols. At this point, the normal symbol reserve is "0" and the normal symbol game round has not yet started, so the three rows of symbols remain stationary. When a ball enters the through gate 66 at the subsequent TFA3 timing, the normal symbol game round begins. Accordingly, the display of each row of symbols that was stationary on display screen 75a begins to change (scroll display).

Here, the ending time in the special game state is approximately 3 seconds, which is considerably shorter than the normal symbol variation display time (15 to 20 seconds) set when a normal symbol game round is started during low-frequency support mode. If a normal symbol game round is started during the ending, the remaining time for the normal symbol game round from the end of the ending is determined, and the game round presentation, including the symbol variation display pattern, is set according to that remaining time. This game round presentation begins after the variable symbol display on the through-gate display unit DS at the timing when the special game state ends.

Returning to the explanation of the ending setting process in Figure 644, if a negative result is obtained in step S2103F, that is, if the normal symbol hold is "0" while the special symbol hold is stored, the process proceeds to step S2105F, where the second setting process is executed. The second type of ending display, which is set by the second setting process, is constructed from the first part (Part A) and the second part (Part A) described above, and is configured so that the pseudo-ending display (also called the pseudo-ending display) continues even after the end of the special game state.

The second type of ending display will be explained below with reference to Figures 645(b) and 647. Figure 645(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow when the second type of ending display is executed, and Figure 647 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the second type of ending display.

(Second ending display)
As shown in Figure 645(b), at the timing of tfb1 during the special game state, the round game in that special game state has ended and the ending has begun. At this point, the number of regular symbol reserves is "0", and the regular symbol game rounds are not currently being played. On the other hand, the number of special symbol reserves is "4", and with the end of the special game state, at least four special symbol game rounds will be played. At the timing of tfb1, the second type ending display is set based on these conditions, and at the timing of tfb1, the words "see you!" are displayed on the display screen 75a as an image corresponding to the first part A of the second type ending display (see Figure 647).

At the timing of tfb2, when the special game state ends, the ending display shifts from Part 1A to Part 2A. Specifically, the "see you!" text disappears, and a shutter image is displayed on screen 75a, covering the entire variable display area ME. This means that at this point, the background image and the image of the symbol sequence are not visible. This shutter image is a slightly swaying animation, suggesting the possibility of the shutter image opening. The special game round is executed while this shutter image is displayed.

The execution time (display time) of Part A 2 is set to be longer than the time required to process the special symbol reserves stored at the time of transitioning to the ending. In other words, if all special symbol reserves correspond to losing results, each special symbol game round will be processed during the execution of Part A 2. Furthermore, if a special symbol reserve includes one corresponding to a jackpot result, the shutter image will open when the special symbol game round related to that special symbol reserve is executed, displaying the words "Not yet!" in the background to give the impression that the jackpot is continuing. The video corresponding to the special game state will then begin displaying without showing the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result.

In the example shown in Figure 645(b), a winning combination occurs at the through gate 66 while Part A 2 is being executed, and a normal game round begins. However, the ending display is not interrupted by the start of the normal game round; instead, the ending display ends at tfb4, when the execution time for Part A 2 has elapsed. At this point, the shutter image opens, and the display screen 75a shows the image of the sea stage as the background image corresponding to the second normal game state, along with three symbol rows. At this point, although the normal game has already started, the three symbol rows remain stationary. Immediately afterward, at tfb5, the variable display (scrolling display) of the three symbol rows begins, delayed from the start of the normal game round.

Returning to the explanation of the ending setting process in Figure 644, if a negative determination is made in step S2102F, that is, if the number of normal symbol reserves is not "0", that is, if a normal symbol game round is currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S2106F. In step S2106F, after the first part of the ending display has finished, that is, after the special game state has ended, the remaining display time (hereinafter, remaining time) for the currently ongoing normal symbol game round is calculated. Then, in step S2107F, it is determined whether the remaining time calculated in step S2106F is shorter than the standard time. This standard time is defined as the time required to consume the special symbol reserves after transitioning to the second normal game state (8 seconds in this embodiment) when the total number of special symbol reserves is the upper limit of 8.

If the remaining time is shorter than the standard time, the process proceeds to step S2108F to execute the third setting process. The third type of ending display, which is set by the third setting process, is constructed from the first part (Part 1B) and the second part (Part 2B) described above. This configuration allows the pseudo-ending display (also called a pseudo-ending display) to continue even after the end of the special game state.

The third type of ending display will be explained below with reference to Figures 648(a) and 649. Figure 648(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow when the third type of ending display is executed, and Figure 649 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the third type of ending display.

(Third type ending displayed)
As shown in Figure 648(a), at the timing of tfc1 during the special game state, the round game in that special game state has ended and the ending has begun. At this timing, the normal symbol reserve is stored and the normal symbol game rounds are in progress. On the other hand, the special symbol reserve is also set to "4", and the situation is such that the special symbol game rounds will be executed at least 4 times as the special game state ends. Furthermore, the remaining time for the currently running normal symbol game rounds to continue after the special game state ends (see timing of tfc2 to timing of tfc3) is shorter than the standard time (8 seconds). At the timing of tfc1, the third type ending display is set based on these conditions, and at the timing of tfc1, the words "Continue?" are displayed on the display screen 75a as an image corresponding to the first part B of the third type ending display (see Figure 649).

Here, if the remaining time is shorter than the standard time, that standard time is set as the execution time for Part B of the third ending display. In other words, the system is configured so that the maximum number of special game rounds up to the memory limit are consumed during Part B.

At the timing of tfc2, which marks the end of the special game state, the ending display shifts from Part 1B to Part 2B. Specifically, the "Continue?" text disappears, and the display screen 75a shows a video of a girl singing on a platform in the center of the variable display area ME, while the background image is carried over from the round game (see Figure 649). A scoring counter is displayed at the top of the display screen 75a, and in Part 2B, the expected probability of the jackpot continuing is indicated by the scoring result of the girl's singing. In this embodiment, although the special game state has actually ended, the game returns to a jackpot without transitioning to the sea stage corresponding to the second normal game state, making it appear as if the jackpot is continuing.

The scoring result, i.e., whether or not the game continues, is displayed before the timing of tfc4, which represents the elapsed time mentioned above. Specifically, if any of the special symbol game rounds correspond to a jackpot result, or if a regular symbol game round ending during Part B corresponds to a regular symbol win result, the scoring result will display "100.00 points." If all of the special symbol game rounds correspond to losses and no regular symbol win results occur during Part B, the scoring result will display a score less than "100.00 points."

In the example shown in Figure 648(a), although the regular game rounds are completed during Part B, these rounds correspond to a losing result, and each special game round played during Part B also corresponds to a losing result. Therefore, the display screen 75a shows a score less than "100.00 points".

At the timing of tfc4, when the ending display finishes, the display screen 75a will show an image of the sea stage as the background image corresponding to the second normal game state, and three rows of symbols will be displayed. At this point, although the normal game has already started, the three rows of symbols remain stationary. Immediately following at the timing of tfc5, the display of the three rows of symbols will begin to change (scroll display) with a delay from the start of the normal game round.

Returning to the explanation of the ending setting process in Figure 644, if a negative determination is made in step S2107F, that is, if the remaining time calculated in step S2106F is the same as or longer than the reference time, the process proceeds to step S2109F, where the fourth setting process is executed. The fourth type of ending display, which is set by the fourth setting process, is constructed using the first part (Part 1B) and the second part (Part 2B) described above, and is similar to the third type of ending display in that it is configured to continue as a pseudo-ending display (also called a pseudo-ending display) even after the end of the special game state.

The fourth type of ending display will be explained below with reference to Figures 648(b) and 649. Figure 648(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow when the fourth type of ending display is executed.

(Fourth type ending displayed)
As shown in Figure 648(b), at the timing of tfd1 during the special game state, the round game in that special game state has ended and the ending has begun. At this timing, the normal symbol reserve is stored and the normal symbol game rounds are in progress. On the other hand, the special symbol reserve is also set to "4", and the situation is such that the special symbol game rounds will be executed at least 4 times as the special game state ends. Furthermore, the remaining time for the currently running normal symbol game rounds to continue even after the special game state ends (see timing of tfd2 to timing of tfd3) is longer than the standard time (8 seconds). At the timing of tfd1, the fourth type ending display is set based on these conditions, and at the timing of tfd1, the words "Continue?" are displayed on the display screen 75a as an image corresponding to the first part B of the fourth type ending display (see Figure 649).

Here, if the remaining time is longer than the standard time, the remaining time is set as the execution time for Part B of the fourth ending display. In other words, the system is configured so that the maximum number of special symbol game rounds is consumed during Part B, and Part B ends in conjunction with the confirmation display of the number of regular symbol game rounds.

While the basic flow of the ending display is the same for both the above-mentioned Type 3 ending display and this Type 4 ending display, separate musical pieces have been created to accommodate the difference in the length of Part B of the second half.

At the timing of tfd2, when the special game state ends, the ending display shifts from Part 1B to Part 2B. Specifically, the "Continue?" text disappears, and the display screen 75a shows a video of a girl singing on a platform in the center of the variable display area ME, while the background image is carried over from the round game (see Figure 649). A scoring counter is displayed at the top of the display screen 75a, and in Part 2B, the expected probability of the jackpot continuing is indicated by the scoring result of the girl's song. In this embodiment, although the special game state has actually ended, the game returns to a jackpot without transitioning to the sea stage corresponding to the second normal game state, making it appear as if the jackpot is continuing.

The scoring result, i.e., whether or not the game continues, is displayed before the timing of tfd3, which indicates the remaining time elapsed. Specifically, if any of the special feature game rounds correspond to a jackpot result, or if the regular feature game round ending with Part 2 B corresponds to a regular feature win result, the scoring result will display "100.00 points." If all of the special feature game rounds correspond to losses and the regular feature game round ending with Part 2 B does not result in a regular feature win, the scoring result will display a score less than "100.00 points."

In the example shown in Figure 648(b), the regular game rounds that end with Part B 2 correspond to losing results, and each special game round played during Part B 2 also corresponds to losing results. Therefore, the display screen 75a shows a score less than "100.00 points".

At the timing of tfd3, when the ending display finishes, the display screen 75a will show an image of the sea stage as the background image corresponding to the second normal game state, and three rows of symbols will be displayed. At this point, although the normal game has already started, the three rows of symbols remain stationary. Immediately afterward, at the timing of tfd4, the display of the three rows of symbols will begin to change (scroll display), delayed from the start of the normal game round.

As shown in this embodiment, having a configuration that can store multiple pieces of reserved information acquired based on winning entries into the operating ports 62d and 62e is preferable for facilitating the smooth progress of the game in the first normal game state. Here, by using both a first normal game state where special symbol games are the main focus and a second normal game state where regular symbol games are the main focus, and by transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state via a special game state when a jackpot is achieved, the game can be diversified. This is advantageous in strengthening the contrast of the game and suppressing monotony. In the second normal game state, the support mode corresponds to a high-frequency support mode, making it possible to play by passing the game ball through the through gate 66 and aiming for the special electric ball entry unit 64 (special electric start port 324). This is preferable in significantly changing the flow of the game. However, as mentioned above, in the case of a configuration that stores multiple reserved information (special symbol reserved), game rounds (special symbol game rounds) corresponding to the reserved information (special symbol reserved) can continue to progress even after transitioning to the second normal game state. In other words, although the transition to the second normal game state should ideally significantly change the flow from the first normal game state, this flow may be disrupted by the remaining special symbol reserved. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if a winning entry into the special electric start port 324 occurs while game round operations are being performed in the second normal game state, the variable display of the symbols ends when symbols corresponding to the losing result are displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the game state transitions from the second normal game state to the special game state based on the winning entry into the special electric start port 324, then it is possible to effectively suppress disruptions in the behavior of the game machine due to overlapping special game states, etc. Furthermore, this configuration effectively avoids giving players the impression that they have lost the right to transition to a special game state, when in reality they would have had two chances to do so. For these reasons, the configuration shown in this embodiment effectively enhances the game's appeal by diversifying the gameplay.

<Variation 1>
In the 61st embodiment described above, the execution time (length) of the ending display is determined based on the calculation result of the remaining time until the end of the special symbol game round, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, if the display time for the variation or the display time for the confirmation of the special symbol game round is uniquely determined, it is also possible to configure the system to determine the execution time (length) of the ending display from the number of remaining special symbol reserves.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 61st embodiment described above, the type of ending display is determined at the timing of the transition to the ending display during the special game state, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine the type of ending display at the timing of the end of the special game state. For example, the type of ending display may be determined based on the number of reserved special game rounds and the contents of those reserved rounds at the timing of the end of the special game state.

<Example 3>
Regarding the Type 2 and Type 3 ending displays mentioned above, it is also possible to configure the ending display to terminate when all reserved spins related to the special game rounds have been consumed, if the ending display started during the special game state is triggered by that event.

<Embodiment 62>
In this embodiment, although the main configuration is the same as in the 61st embodiment described above, the configuration related to the game round presentation executed in each game round is distinctive. Below, the configuration related to the game round presentation in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the 61st embodiment described above. First, referring to the flowchart in Figure 650, the second variable display control process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143 will be described. The second variable display control process is a process executed by the MPU 652 as part of the game round processing (see Figure 642) and corresponds to step S2005F, but the configuration for starting the game round presentation for the regular game round when the pseudo-ending display ends is omitted from the description.

(Second variation display control processing)
In the second variation display control process, first, in step S2201F, it is determined whether or not one game round (normal pattern game round) related to the through gate 66 is currently being executed, and whether or not the variation display or confirmation display of the pattern (normal pattern) is being executed on the through gate display unit DS. If it is determined that it is not a normal pattern game round, the process proceeds to step S2202F, where it is determined whether or not a normal pattern variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2202F, this fluctuation display control process terminates immediately. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S2202F, the fluctuation start process is executed in step S2203F, and then this second fluctuation display control process terminates.

Returning to the explanation of step S2201F, if a positive result is obtained in step S2201F, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2204F. In step S2204F, it is determined whether or not a "normal display change end" command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative result is obtained in step S2204F, the process for during the change is executed in step S2205F, and then this second change display control process is terminated. The process for during the change is the process of executing various effects or changing determined effects during the game round started by the change start process.

If a positive result is obtained in step S2204F, the process proceeds to step S2206F, where the variation termination process is executed, and then this second variation display control process is terminated. In the variation termination process, the variation display of the symbols and the ongoing effects are terminated (confirmed) to correspond to the held information related to the current round of normal gameplay. In this process, the effects corresponding to the confirmation display are performed by driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26.

(Processing to initiate change)
Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the processing for initiating the variation in step S2203F. The variation initiation processing is the process of starting the game round's effects based on the receipt of the normal diagram variation start command from the main control device 162. In the variation initiation processing, settings such as the reach display are made as effects for the normal diagram game round.

In the variation initiation process, the received "Normal Diagram Variation Initiation Command" is first read, and from this command, information regarding whether a reach occurred and information regarding the variation display time are identified. Furthermore, as already explained, when the "Normal Diagram Variation Initiation Command" is transmitted from the main control unit 162, a "Normal Diagram Type Command" is also transmitted. The "Normal Diagram Type Command," received along with the "Normal Diagram Variation Initiation Command," is read, and from this command, various information related to the game result (information regarding normal diagram wins and losses) is identified. Then, from the identified information, information regarding whether a normal diagram win occurred, information regarding whether a reach occurred if a normal diagram win was not achieved, and information regarding the variation display time are obtained, and this obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 652.

Next, based on the information gathered, it is determined whether the result of the current round of normal gameplay corresponds to a normal win result. If the result of this round is a normal win result, the normal win animation setting process is executed. The normal win animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for the normal win to be stopped and displayed, and the valid lines for which that combination will be stopped and displayed; and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for the normal win.

In the process for determining the stop result for a regular symbol win, the stop result for this round of regular symbol play is determined to be the result where the same combination of symbols appears on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following combinations of symbols are defined as corresponding to a regular win: "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination.

When a normal win occurs, the result is notified via a reach display, etc. In the process of determining the variation display pattern for a normal win, the variation display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 653, is retrieved. The display time for the variation start command received and the performance pattern for either a normal reach display or a super reach display corresponding to the game result in the normal win type command are then determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

If the current game round corresponds to a losing reach, the game executes the animation setting process for generating a losing reach. This animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination corresponding to the losing reach to be displayed and the valid line for displaying that symbol combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols corresponding to the losing reach. In the variation display pattern determination process for losing reaches, the game retrieves the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 653, and determines the animation pattern for normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the variation display time of the normal symbol variation start command received this time and the game result of the normal symbol type command. Furthermore, the game executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

In the process of determining the stop result for a losing reach, the stopping symbols are determined so as not to result in a combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

If the current game round corresponds to a complete loss, the system will execute the animation setting process for complete losses. This process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed for a complete loss and the valid lines on which that combination will be displayed, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete loss.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss, the stop symbols are determined so as not to correspond to a symbol combination that would result in a normal win. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for complete misses, the variable display pattern table for non-reach misses stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 is retrieved, and the display time of the received normal diagram variation start command and the performance pattern corresponding to the game result of the normal diagram type command are determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

Subsequently, the system outputs commands containing information about the determined stop result and presentation pattern to the display control device 710 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 672 of the display control device 710 then controls the display of the symbol display device 75 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

Then, after executing the process to start the game round's effects, the main variation start process is terminated. Specifically, based on the determined effects pattern, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started, and the game round's effects begin.

When this type of game round presentation is performed, the player's attention to the presentation increases when it progresses to a reach display. However, it is assumed that the player's attention will be lower for game rounds that do not progress to a reach display and result in a complete loss (normal game rounds). In this embodiment, even when a normal game round resulting in a complete loss is performed, a preview presentation is executed during the previous game round to increase the player's attention.

Here, we will explain the various processes required to implement the aforementioned preview effect. First, we will explain the pre-confirmation process for the through-gate (see step S305F in Figure 619) and the setting process for the hold command for the through-gate (step S306F in Figure 619), which are executed as part of the timer interrupt processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162.

(Pre-check process for through gates)
As shown in the flowchart in Figure 651, in the pre-check process for the through gate, first, in step S2301F, the value of the winning random number counter C4 acquired this time is checked against the win/loss table for the through gate stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of ROM 603 to check whether there is a normal win. If it is confirmed that there is a normal win, a positive determination is made in step S2302F and the process proceeds to step S2306F, where the occurrence information of the normal win is stored in the register of MPU 602 and this pre-check process ends.

If it is confirmed that the regular drawing is not a winning combination, a negative determination is made in step S2302F and the process proceeds to step S2303F. In step S2303F, the value of the reach random number counter C6 and the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained this time are referenced with the lottery table for losing reaches and the variation display time table stored in ROM 603 to check whether a losing reach has occurred. If a losing reach has occurred, its type is confirmed.

If it is confirmed that no losing reach occurs, a negative determination is made in step S2304F and this pre-check process ends. If it is confirmed that a losing reach occurs, a positive determination is made in step S2304F and the process proceeds to step S2305F, where the information about the occurrence of the losing reach is stored in the register of MPU 602 and this pre-check process ends. The information stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S2305F includes information related to the general type of losing reach (for example, whether or not it is a super reach).

Next, the setting process for the through-gate hold command in step S306F will be explained.

(Setting the hold command for through gates)
In the process of setting the hold command for the through gate, it is first determined whether the occurrence information for the general diagram is stored in the register of the MPU602. If the occurrence information for the general diagram is stored, the hold command corresponding to the general diagram is set as the hold command for the through gate.

On the other hand, if the MPU 602 register does not contain information about the occurrence of a normal reach, it is determined whether the MPU 602 register contains information about the occurrence of a losing reach. If information about a losing reach is stored, a losing reach response hold command is set as a hold command for the through gate. The losing reach response hold command includes information about the general type of losing reach (for example, whether it is a super reach or not).

If neither information about a regular win nor information about a losing reach is stored, the "losing reach non-compatible hold command" (completely losing hold command) is set as the hold command for the through gate.

Next, we will explain the processing related to the pre-announcement effect executed by the MPU 651 of the notification and effect control device 143. The processing related to the pre-announcement effect can be broadly divided into two parts: command response processing, which determines commands from the main control device 162, and pre-announcement effect setting processing, which determines the type of pre-announcement effect.

(Processing for holding commands for through gates)
In the processing for handling through-gate hold commands, when a through-gate hold command is received from the main control unit 162, processing corresponding to the information contained in the received hold command is executed. The through-gate hold command processing is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined interval (for example, every 2 msec).

In the processing for handling through-gate hold commands, the first step is to determine whether or not a through-gate hold command has been received. Commands received by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 are temporarily stored in the command storage area 661 of the RAM 654 (see Figure 641). This command storage area 661 is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing multiple commands and reading commands in the order they were stored, ensuring that even when multiple commands are received simultaneously, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. To determine whether or not a through-gate hold command has been received, the system checks whether the through-gate hold command is present in the area of the command storage area 661 being read. This command reading configuration is the same for reading other commands, such as the command for starting a normal display change.

When a hold command for the through gate is received, various information contained in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 667 (see Figure 641). The hold information storage area 667 has four areas, Re1 to Re4, and is configured to store one piece of hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area is shifted sequentially to the lower areas when a shift command for the through gate is received from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the execution area CE is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: Re1 → execution area CE, Re2 → Re1, Re3 → Re2, Re4 → Re3. In the hold information storage area 667 of the notification and performance control device 143, the hold information is stored chronologically, similar to the hold ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port) of the main control device 162. For details, the system identifies the number of pending commands included in the received through-gate pending command and stores the various information described above in the area corresponding to that identified number of pending commands among the first area Re1 to the fourth area Re4.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned through-gate hold command is received, a through-gate hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 666 of RAM 654. Similarly, when a through-gate shift command is received, a through-gate shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area. These flags trigger the setting process for the preview effect (preview effect setting process) described below, and are erased when the preview effect setting process is completed.

In the MPU 642 of the notification and performance control device 143, the normal winning notification performance setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area 667. The normal winning notification performance setting process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is executed on the condition that the above-mentioned through-gate hold command or through-gate shift command is received. In other words, in this embodiment, two triggers for executing the normal winning notification performance are defined: when hold information for normal game rounds is acquired upon entry into the through-gate 66, or when hold information for normal game rounds is consumed as the game progresses.

(Normal drawing bonus notification effect setting process)
In the process of setting up the regular win notification effect, it is first determined whether or not the regular win notification effect is currently being performed. If the regular win notification effect is currently being performed, the process of setting up the regular win notification effect is terminated. If the regular win notification effect is not being performed, it is determined whether or not a through-gate hold command has been received from the main control device 162. If a through-gate hold command has been received, the lottery process for when the through-gate hold command is received is executed to determine whether or not to perform the regular win notification effect.

If a through-gate hold command has not been received, the system determines whether a through-gate shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If neither a through-gate hold command nor a through-gate shift command has been received, the system terminates the regular winning animation setting process. If a through-gate shift command has been received, the system executes the lottery process for when the shift command is received to determine whether or not to perform the regular winning animation.

If the lottery process for the regular winning prediction effect is unsuccessful, the regular winning prediction effect setting process ends immediately. If the lottery process for the regular winning prediction effect is successful, the regular winning prediction effect details determination process is executed, the regular winning prediction effect flags are set in the various flag storage area 666 of RAM 644, and the regular winning prediction effect setting process ends.

In this embodiment, multiple notification sequences with different notification patterns are provided as regular win notification sequences, and these include the first and second notification sequences described below. In the regular win notification sequence detail determination process, it is first determined which of these multiple notification sequences to execute.

The first notification effect, which is one of the regular winning notification effects, is executed by changing the manner of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a) to correspond to the regular winning notification effect, as shown in Figure 652(a). Specifically, the hold icon MP2 displayed in the hold number display area Dc that corresponds to the corresponding game round (corresponding hold) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple color patterns for the hold icon MP2, more specifically, three patterns: white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3), and the color of the corresponding hold icon MP2 is changed to a color other than white.

If the held symbol corresponds to a normal win result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 3 > Level 2 > Level 1. If the held symbol corresponds to a loss result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3. In other words, when a normal win予告演出 (preview animation) is performed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a normal win result.

Furthermore, the first type of preview animation can be broadly categorized into two types: a fixed-type preview animation where the color of the changed hold icon MP2 remains until it shifts to the execution target display area Dd, and a step-up type preview animation where the color changes before shifting to the execution target display area Dd.

If the first pre-announcement effect is selected during the detailed determination process for the regular win notification effect, the pending icon MP2 to be changed in color is determined. Next, the final color (display mode) after the corresponding pending icon MP2 moves to the execution target display area Dd is determined. Finally, based on this result, the initial color (display mode) is determined.

Subsequently, the system determines the remaining number of shifts until the corresponding pending icon MP2 moves to the execution target display area Dd, and then determines the step-up pattern described above based on that determined number of shifts. Note that if the initial color and the final color match, no step-up occurs.

In the first予告演出 (preview sequence) described in detail above, the relevant reserved ball that triggered the sequence is clearly indicated to the player. In contrast, in the second preview sequence, the relevant reserved ball that triggered the sequence is not clearly indicated, making it difficult for the player to identify which round of the game the preview refers to.

The second prediction effect, one of the regular win prediction effects, is executed by selecting a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed (confirmed) in the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a), as shown in Figure 652(b). Specifically, a combination of symbols that corresponds to a complete miss without a reach display and that stops and displays three of the same symbols without multiple identical symbols on a single active line (hereinafter also referred to as a "chance combination") is displayed before the regular game round related to the relevant reserve. This suggests that the probability of a regular win result in one of the subsequent regular game rounds is high.

Furthermore, the second予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) cannot be applied to normal game rounds where a reach display is executed, as it requires the formation of the aforementioned chance combination. In other words, when setting the second pre-announcement effect, the system determines whether it is a normal game round where a chance combination can be formed. If a chance combination cannot be formed, the second pre-announcement effect is excluded from the options.

Here, regarding the second予告演出 (second予告演出), there are two patterns that differ in the process of stopping and displaying (confirming) the above-mentioned chance symbols. Specifically, there is a normal second予告演出, which is a pattern in which the row of symbols is displayed (scrolled) in the standard scroll direction (horizontal direction), and then the above-mentioned chance symbols are displayed as they are at the final stop (confirming). There is a special second予告演出, which is a pattern in which the row of symbols is displayed (scrolled) in the standard scroll direction, and then a combination of symbols that does not correspond to a chance symbol and corresponds to a complete miss (hereinafter also called a miss) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then those groups of symbols are displayed in a special scroll direction different from the standard scroll direction (for example, vertical direction), and then the above-mentioned chance symbols are displayed as the final stop (confirming). When the relevant reserve that triggered the normal symbol win予告演出 corresponds to a normal symbol win result, the special second予告演出 is more likely to be selected than the normal second予告演出, and when the relevant reserve that triggered the normal symbol win予告演出 corresponds to a miss result, the normal second予告演出 is more likely to be selected than the special second予告演出. As a result, the probability of achieving a winning outcome is higher with the special second予告演出 (special second予告演出) than with the normal second予告演出 (special second予告演出).

Here, we will explain the flow of the special second予告演出 (special second予告演出) using the schematic diagram in Figure 653. The example shown in Figure 653 illustrates the case where the special second予告演出 is executed in a normal game round immediately preceding a normal game round that results in a normal win. For the flow when the normal second予告演出 is executed, please refer to the route indicated by the dashed arrow.

In the normal game round following the setting of the special second pre-announcement effect, the symbols are displayed in a variable (scrolled) manner in the standard scroll direction, and then the symbols are temporarily stopped to indicate a losing combination. During this process, the background image displayed on screen 75a flows slowly in the standard scroll direction. The temporarily stopped symbols first oscillate slightly in the standard scroll direction, and then slightly oscillate slightly in the special scroll direction. This suggests the possibility of transitioning to the special second pre-announcement effect. After this premonition display, the variable (scrolled) display of the symbols in the special scroll direction begins.

In the display of changing symbols in the special scrolling direction, the left, center, and right groups of symbols begin to change simultaneously, and are configured to synchronize their movements. Furthermore, the movement speed of the left, center, and right groups of symbols is specified to be a speed (medium-low speed) that allows the player to visually identify individual symbols, and is kept lower than the maximum speed in the standard scrolling direction (the speed at which symbol identification becomes difficult or impossible). While this special scrolling display of changing symbols is in progress, the background image continues to flow slowly in the standard scrolling direction. In other words, the direction in which the background image flows does not change in the special scrolling direction.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a chance-up event may occur where the scrolling direction changes midway through the display of the pattern group in a special scrolling direction.

When the symbol rows are displayed in the standard scrolling direction, the symbols located on the active lines in the upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and lower symbol row Z3 are regularly changed in ascending or descending order. In contrast, when the symbols are displayed in the special scrolling direction, the symbols located on the active lines in the left, center, and right symbol rows are irregularly changed. This makes it difficult for the player to predict which symbol will next appear on the active line.

After the special scrolling display is completed, unlike when the display temporarily stops, the left, center, and right rows of symbols stop simultaneously, forming the aforementioned chance combination. This enhances the impact when the chance combination is formed.

After that, the game transitions to the round that triggered the special second pre-announcement sequence, and the symbol combination corresponding to the regular winning result is displayed in that round.

In the example shown in Figure 653, a configuration is illustrated where a chance combination is formed (displayed at the final stop) after a special scrolling pattern is displayed. However, the special second pre-announcement feature includes a so-called false alarm, in which, after a special scrolling pattern is displayed, a symbol combination that does not correspond to a chance combination is displayed at the final stop.

As detailed above, by temporarily stopping and displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss in the variable display area ME before the final stop display (confirmation display), and while maintaining the state in which multiple symbol combinations including that symbol combination have been formed, the symbol group is changed from the horizontal direction, which was the previous variable display direction, to a vertical direction, and then displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a chance event, which is one of the multiple symbol combinations that have been formed, as the final stop display in the variable display area ME, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed in the variable display area ME is upgraded. This configuration, with its unprecedented and innovative display effects, can dramatically increase the level of attention given to the game.

By scrolling the background image vertically along with the symbols when displaying a vertically changing set of symbols, it's possible to give the player the impression that the symbols themselves are stationary. In other words, it's possible to create a display effect that makes it seem as if the player is searching for symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations within a stationary set of symbols.

In horizontal scrolling of patterns, players can predict which patterns will eventually reach the scrolling display area ME. In contrast, vertical scrolling occurs with pattern combinations already formed, making prediction of the outcome even easier. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by making it difficult to predict which pattern combinations will eventually reach the scrolling display area ME when scrolling vertically, the aforementioned pattern combination changing function (swapping function) can be effectively prevented from becoming obsolete.

<Embodiment 63>
In the special second予告演出 (preview effect) shown in the 62nd embodiment described above, the group of symbols that were displayed in a variable (scrolled) direction in the standard scroll direction are temporarily stopped, and then the group of symbols are displayed in a variable (scrolled) direction different from the standard scroll direction. One of the features of this embodiment is that efforts have been made to further enhance the impact of this special second preview effect. The above efforts will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the 62nd embodiment.

In the special second予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in this embodiment, the sequence of events (first half) until a combination of symbols that does not correspond to a chance symbol and is completely losing is temporarily displayed is the same as the special second予告演出 shown in the 62nd embodiment (see Figure 653).

On the other hand, the flow of the latter half of the special second予告演出 (preview effect) shown in the 62nd embodiment differs from that shown. Specifically, in the latter half of the special second preview effect shown in the 62nd embodiment, the group of symbols that were initially stopped are displayed in a special scrolling direction. At this time, the background image maintains the same display manner as the first half of the special second preview effect, and by changing the positional relationship between the background image and the group of symbols, the player is given the impression that the group of symbols is being displayed in a changing manner.

In contrast, in the latter half of the special second予告演出 (preview effect) shown in this embodiment, the display screen 75a is treated as if it were a camera frame (virtual frame), and the movement of this virtual frame makes it appear as if the objects displayed there are changing. In other words, the symbols themselves appear to remain in a stationary state. Specifically, at least in the latter half of the special second preview effect, a background image and other symbols are prepared outside the area displayed on the display screen 75a, and by shifting the area displayed on the display screen 75a to this outside area, the symbols displayed in the variable display area ME appear to be changing.

More specifically, numerous other symbol rows are arranged parallel to and at equal intervals from the vertically aligned upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and lower symbol row Z3. Furthermore, the background image is displayed on the display screen 75a by cropping (picking up) a portion of a single large image data (a single image). The pickable range is limited to a portion of this image except for this special second予告演出 (preview effect). In the latter half of the special second preview effect, this restriction is removed, and the pickable range is expanded to the entire image data. By changing the display to show this expanded portion on the display screen 75a, the following visual effect is produced: In this latter half, by moving the background image and the symbol group together while maintaining their positional relationship, it is possible to make it appear as if the displayed symbol group is changing while the symbol group remains stationary.

Figure 654(a) shows the procedure for setting the special second pre-announcement effect in this embodiment. When setting the special second pre-announcement effect, first, in step S11F, the combination of symbols forming the chance symbol is determined. Next, in step S12F, the display position, or change position, for displaying the chance symbol within the expanded range (excluding the initial position) as described above is determined.

The setting for this change position is such that the further it is from the initial position of the virtual frame, the higher the probability of a normal win. In other words, when a special second-stage予告演出 (preview) is triggered by a corresponding hold corresponding to a normal win, the distance between the initial position and the change position is more likely to be greater than when a special second-stage予告演出 is triggered by a corresponding hold corresponding to a loss.

Furthermore, to make the difference between the first and second parts of the special second preview sequence clearer, the change position is set so that it does not coincide with the initial position in the reference scroll direction. In other words, the movement from the initial position to the change position is defined to include movement in a direction different from the reference scroll direction at least.

In the following step S13F, the movement route of the virtual frame is determined when replacing (changing) the group of symbols displayed in the variable display area ME. Then, in step S14F, the arrangement of the symbols in the other symbol rows that are vertically aligned with the upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and lower symbol row Z3 is determined. Note that the upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and lower symbol row Z3 are reused for the other symbol rows, and the scroll position in the reference scroll direction is determined individually. This suppresses the increase in data volume related to the special second予告演出 (preview effect).

Subsequently, in step S15F, the restriction on the display range of the background image is removed. Removing this restriction allows the display range to be set from the entire image data. In the example shown in Figure 655, eight rows of patterns are added in the vertical direction (Y direction), but the number of pattern rows added is arbitrary. However, it is preferable that the pattern rows do not extend beyond the expanded display range of the image data.

In the example shown in Figure 655, the initial position of the virtual frame is coordinate (X, Y) = (0, 0), and the position of the virtual frame when displaying a chance symbol is coordinate (X, Y) = (2, 4). Three movement routes are provided for moving from the initial position to the changed position: Route A, Route B, and Route C. The movement distance increases in the order of Route A < Route B < Route C.

The setting for this change position is such that the longer the virtual frame movement distance, the higher the probability of a normal win. In other words, when a special second-stage予告演出 (preview animation) is triggered by a corresponding hold corresponding to a normal win, a longer movement distance is more likely to be selected than when a special second-stage予告演出 is triggered by a corresponding hold corresponding to a loss (see Figure 654(b)).

In the latter half of the special second予告演出 (preview sequence), the symbol combinations displayed on screen 75a change while maintaining the positional relationship between the symbol combinations and the background image. In other words, the sequence progresses as if searching for a winning combination from a predetermined set of symbol combinations. This innovative presentation enhances the impact of the special second preview sequence and contributes to increasing attention to it.

<Embodiment 64>
In the special second予告演出 (preview effect) shown in the 63rd embodiment described above, the system is configured to search for a winning combination from among a large number of symbol combinations. One of the features of this embodiment is that a symbol search effect is constructed by using the special second preview effect and other similar effects to find a predetermined symbol combination. The symbol search effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 63rd embodiment.

As shown in Figure 656, the symbol search animation consists of three animations: (1) a special second-notification animation corresponding to a chance symbol, (2) a special continuous variation animation corresponding to a special symbol, and (3) a special win animation corresponding to a jackpot.

The sequence of these three effects is consistent from the start of the changing symbol sequence display until the symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is difficult to determine which of the above (1) to (3) the current effect corresponds to.

The special continuous variation effect is a unit effect consisting of variation and stopping that is repeated multiple times during one game spin. The transition to the next unit display is confirmed when the special symbols mentioned above stop. The more times this unit display is repeated, the higher the probability of a normal win. The special symbols are: a combination of symbols where the "1," "3," and "4" symbols are located on the active line; a combination of symbols where the "3," "4," and "1" symbols are located on the active line; and a combination of symbols where the "4," "1," and "3" symbols are located on the active line.

The special winning animation is an animation in which the symbols stop in the ME (Metal Effects) variable display area without going through the reach display, after a symbol combination corresponding to the normal winning result has been formed. However, in some cases of this special winning animation, the search may continue for a long time if a favorable symbol combination cannot be found. In other words, if the search time exceeds a predetermined time, a normal winning result is confirmed.

In the symbol search animation, the expected value increases in the following order: symbol combinations corresponding to chance symbols < symbol combinations corresponding to special symbols < symbol combinations corresponding to regular symbols.

Here, referring to Figure 657, we will explain the movement routes when performing the symbol search animation. In the symbol search animation, there are broadly four types of movement routes: one that reaches the target position (change position) without passing through any of the positions where the symbol combinations corresponding to the chance symbols, the special symbols, or the regular winning symbols are located; one that reaches the target position (change position) by passing through one of these locations; one that reaches the target position (change position) by passing through two of these locations; and one that reaches the target position (change position) after passing through all of these locations. Figure 657 illustrates a movement route that first passes through the position where the symbol combinations corresponding to the special symbols are located, then passes through the position where the symbol combinations corresponding to the chance symbols are located, and finally completes the search at the position where the symbol combinations corresponding to the regular winning symbols are located.

When setting up such movement routes, the configuration tends to move from low-probability symbol combinations to high-probability symbol combinations, and the longer the movement, the higher the expectation of a regular win.

<Embodiment 65>
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the progression of the game differs from that of the fifth embodiment described above. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution tables for each operating port will be described.

(Distribution table for the operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operating port, 15 values from "0" to "14" of the type counter values from "0" to "29" correspond to 6R jackpot A (6R jackpot result A), and 15 values from "15" to "29" correspond to 6R jackpot B (6R jackpot result B). In other words, if a jackpot is won in the lottery based on entry into the first operating port, 50% of the time it will be 6R jackpot A, and the remaining 50% will be 6R jackpot B.

In contrast, in the distribution table for the second activation port, all 30 values from "0" to "29" of the type counter C2 correspond to 6R jackpot B. Therefore, if a jackpot is won through the lottery based on entry into the second activation port, there is a 100% probability that it will be a 6R jackpot B.

For both 6R jackpot A and 6R jackpot B, the number of rounds during the opening/closing execution mode is 6, and the advantage level of the opening/closing execution mode is the same for both. However, the support mode in the first special game state that is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends differs depending on whether it is triggered by 6R jackpot A or 6R jackpot B.

The support modes shown in this embodiment are diversified by varying (1) the display time of the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit, and (2) the probability of winning a support prize in the lottery based on winning a prize at the through-gate. These modes are broadly classified into a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode.

(Types of support modes)
The low-frequency support mode is a support mode in which the display time for fluctuations is relatively longer (e.g., 60 seconds to 120 seconds) and the probability of winning is relatively lower (e.g., 1/5).

The first high-frequency support mode is a support mode in which the fluctuation display time is relatively short (e.g., 10 to 15 seconds), and the winning probability is relatively low (e.g., 1/5), similar to the low-frequency support mode.

The second high-frequency support mode, like the first high-frequency support mode, is a support mode in which the fluctuation display time is relatively shorter (e.g., 10 to 15 seconds), and the probability of winning is relatively higher (e.g., 1/2).

In other words, the advantage for the player is differentiated in the following order: Low-frequency support mode < First high-frequency support mode < Second high-frequency support mode.

The aforementioned 6R jackpot A is a jackpot that transitions to the first special game state A, which corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The aforementioned 6R jackpot B is a jackpot that transitions to the first special game state B, which corresponds to the second high-frequency support mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode.

Both the first special game state A and the first special game state B are configured to terminate when the number of times the symbol variation display to confirmation display on the through-gate display unit reaches the maximum of 10 times, and then transition to the normal game state compatible with the low-frequency support mode.

Here, in the win/loss table referenced when drawing based on winnings in the first operating slot, there are two random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7" and "307". In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7" and "307" correspond to jackpots. On the other hand, in the win/loss table referenced when drawing based on winnings in the second operating slot, there are two random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7" and "307". In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7" and "307" correspond to jackpots. Furthermore, in this win/loss table, a total of 100 numbers, "5", "15", "25", "35", "45"... "575", "585", and "595", correspond to special wins. Any random number value that does not correspond to either a jackpot or a special jackpot corresponds to a loss (a regular loss). In other words, the probability of winning in the lottery based on entry into the first activation slot is 1/300, while the probability of winning (a jackpot or special jackpot) in the lottery based on entry into the second activation slot is approximately 1/3.

In the first special game state A and the second special game state B, the goal of the game is to win a support bonus through a lottery based on ball entry into the through gate, and to win a 6R jackpot B through a lottery based on ball entry into the second activation slot. The probability of winning in the lottery based on ball entry into the second activation slot is the same for both the first special game state A and the second special game state B. The actual superiority or inferiority between these two states depends on the type of support mode.

In this embodiment, a distinctive feature is the special effect that is executed when the game is in the first special game state A or the second special game state B. This special effect begins on the display screen of the symbol display device when the symbol variation display on the through-gate display unit starts. This special effect ends when the confirmed symbol display on the through-gate display unit finishes if the support lottery based on the entry into the through-gate is a non-support win. However, if the support lottery based on the entry into the through-gate is a support win, this special effect continues even after the confirmed symbol display on the through-gate display unit finishes, and ends when the confirmed symbol display on the second operation port display unit finishes.

The special effects are broadly divided into two parts: the first part, which is linked to the symbol display on the through-gate display unit, and the second part, which is linked to the symbol display on the second operation port display unit. In the first part, a battle sequence between allies and enemies is performed. If the result is a support win, the ally wins the battle sequence and the game proceeds to the second part. In the second part, another battle sequence between allies and enemies is performed. If the result is a special win or a jackpot, the ally wins the battle sequence and the special effects end. However, if the lottery based on entry into the through-gate does not result in a support win, or if the lottery based on entry into the second operation port results in a loss, the enemy wins and the battle sequence ends.

In both Special Game State A and Special Game State B, if the support win result is → 6R jackpot result B, the game will transition to the opening/closing execution mode after the special animation described above. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game will transition back to Special Game State B.

<Variation 1>
In the 65th embodiment described above, the upper limit (10 times) in the first special game state A and the upper limit (10 times) in the first special game state B were set to be the same, but the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to set different upper limits for the first special game state A and the first special game state B.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 65th embodiment described above, the display time for the pattern variation in the through-gate display unit when in the first high-frequency support mode is specified to be 10 to 15 seconds, and the display time for the pattern variation in the through-gate display unit when in the second high-frequency support mode is specified to be 10 to 15 seconds, but the embodiment is not limited thereto. The display time for the pattern variation in the through-gate display unit when in the first high-frequency support mode and the display time for the pattern variation in the through-gate display unit when in the second high-frequency support mode only needs to be shorter than the display time for the pattern variation in the through-gate display unit when in the low-frequency support mode, and the specific length can be changed arbitrarily.

<Example 3>
It is also possible to configure the game so that a 6R jackpot A can be achieved through a lottery based on winning in the second activation slot. However, in order to enhance the excitement of the game, it is better to make the proportion of 6R jackpot A smaller than the proportion of 6R jackpot B, and to favor the lottery based on winning in the second activation slot so that the next special game state B is more likely.

<Modification 4>
In the 65th embodiment described above, the special effect is set to start in conjunction with the start timing of the changing display of the pattern in the through gate display unit. However, it is also possible to set up the special effect to start before the start timing of the changing display of the pattern.

<Other Embodiments>
Furthermore, the implementation is not limited to the descriptions of each embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied to each of the above embodiments in combination. In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In the above embodiments, the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state were common. However, the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state may be provided separately. That is, the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the first normal game state and the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the fourth normal game state may be different.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state when switching from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the electric mechanism 93 is forcibly switched to the closed state to prevent further winnings into the second operating port 92. To prevent further winnings into the second operating port 92 after switching to the low-frequency support mode, it is also possible to configure the system to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode before the game round that triggers the switch (the game round in which the termination criterion is reached) ends. Specifically, it is possible to configure the system to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at a predetermined timing during the variation display in the game round in which the termination criterion is reached, or to configure the system to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the confirmation display begins in the game round in which the termination criterion is reached.

(3) In a configuration where a special loss occurs in the lottery based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91 and 92, it is possible to differentiate the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 from the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the second operating port. For example, the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 may be lower than the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the second operating port, or the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 may be higher than the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the second operating port.

(4) If the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, the game transitions from the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss (e.g., the 4th normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (e.g., the 1st normal game state) based on reaching the termination criteria number of spins, and then transitions to the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. However, whether or not to include the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in this way is optional. For example, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, it is also possible to configure the game to shift from the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss (e.g., the 4th normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by reaching the ceiling (e.g., the 4th normal game state) based on reaching the termination criteria number of spins. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during a high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, it is possible to configure the system to continue the high-frequency support mode game state without intervening with a low-frequency support mode game state (for example, the first normal game state) when the termination criteria number of spins is reached.

(5) If a special miss occurs during a game round that would otherwise reach the ceiling, the system may be configured to transition to high-frequency support mode upon reaching the ceiling (a configuration that prioritizes reaching the ceiling), or it may be configured to transition to high-frequency support mode upon a special miss (a configuration that prioritizes special misses).

(6) In the above embodiments, the game count counter is updated regardless of whether a game round related to the first operation port 91 or a game round related to the second operation port 92 is executed. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system so that the game count counter is updated when a game round related to the first operation port 91 is executed, but not when a game round related to the second operation port 92 is executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the system so that the game count counter is updated when a game round related to the second operation port 92 is executed, but not when a game round related to the first operation port 91 is executed.

(7) In the above embodiments, when the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (ceiling), the game count by the game count counter begins after the high-frequency support mode A, triggered by reaching the ceiling, has ended. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, when the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (ceiling), it is also possible to configure the system so that the game count by the game count counter begins from the game immediately following the ceiling.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the game count counter is configured to be updated (subtracted by "1") at the start of each game round. However, the timing of the game count counter update is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated (subtracted by "1") at the timing when the confirmation display is executed or when each game round ends.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the base (the ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched) was set so that the number of balls held would slightly decrease in either High Frequency Support Mode A or High Frequency Support Mode B, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the base so that the number of balls held would slightly increase in at least one of the support modes.

(10) The placement of the variable prize-winning device 83 in the game area PE is arbitrary. For example, if the game ball flow paths in the game area PE include a left route that bypasses the variable display unit 85 located in the center of the game board 80a from the left, and a right route that bypasses it from the right, the variable prize-winning device 83 may be placed on one of the routes, and the path of game balls launched on the other route may be restricted so that they cannot reach the variable prize-winning device 83.

(11) In the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 are initiated based on the win/loss lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. However, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display of changing patterns on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 to begin prior to the win/loss lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS is initiated based on the support lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. However, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display of changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS to begin prior to the support lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162.

(13) It is also possible to configure the system so that the effects linked to the through-gate display unit DS are executed on other display devices such as a pattern display device, and the results of the support lottery are notified to the player through these effects.

(14) In the embodiments described in the 31st to 43rd examples above, the auxiliary display device 700K, located near the movable display device 800K, is used to provide various display effects and indications of the operation of the movable display device 800K. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to use the auxiliary display device 700K as a display device dedicated solely to indicating the operation of the movable display device 800K.

(15) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines different from the embodiments described above, such as pachinko machines in which an electric mechanism opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other mechanisms, arrangement ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

Furthermore, this invention can also be applied to non-paper-scissors gaming machines, such as slot machines equipped with multiple reels each bearing multiple symbols circumferentially. The reels begin rotating upon insertion of a medal and operation of a start lever. After the reels stop due to operation of a stop switch, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through the display window, the player is awarded a bonus, such as a medal payout.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines, in which the gaming machine body, supported by an outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-up device, and the reels start rotating when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage unit have been taken in by the take-up device.

<Regarding the group of inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the embodiments described above, showing their effects and other aspects as necessary. For ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiments will be indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the invention is not limited to these specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features AA>
The following set of features AA is based on the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The features AA described below are based on the background technology described above, which states that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AA1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
A first transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first determination information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result), and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result), the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state will differ depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is possible to suppress excessive investment before transitioning to the special game state (suppressing a decrease in the desire to play), or by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the contrast in gameplay can be strengthened. In particular, by configuring the system to quickly switch to the third switching mode when the judgment result corresponds to a second judgment information that does not trigger a large payout (a trigger for transitioning to a special game state), player satisfaction can be improved.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AA2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first gaming state, transitions to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result), and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result), the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state will differ depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is possible to suppress excessive investment before transitioning to the special game state (suppressing a decrease in the desire to play), or by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the contrast in gameplay can be strengthened. In particular, by configuring the system to quickly switch to the third game state (third switching mode) when the judgment result corresponds to a second judgment information that does not trigger a large payout (a trigger for transitioning to a special game state), player satisfaction can be improved.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AA3. The determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination by the determination means is provided as a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
In both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the second determination information by the determination means is the same.
The first game state corresponds to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
The gaming machine according to feature AA2, characterized in that the third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode and the low probability mode.

If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the first game state, the game will transition to the third game state without going through the special game state. In this case, the judgment mode remains the low probability mode, but the switching control mode changes from the first switching mode to the third switching mode. This makes it possible to aim for the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing investment, thus providing a kind of player relief function. Since this relief function is activated without going through the special game state as described above, the time required for this function to be activated can be minimized, thus reducing the impression to the player that the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

Feature AA4. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AA1 to Feature AA3, characterized in that the transition period by the second transition means is configured to be shorter than the transition period by the first transition means.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, the switching control mode is promptly changed to the third switching mode, thereby reducing the time lag before the player can enjoy the benefits of the rescue function described above. This is desirable in suppressing a decline in the player's motivation to play, as they are aiming for the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (transition to a special game state).

Feature AA5. The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a lottery (support lottery) is won based on the passing of a game ball through a passage section (e.g., through gate 84) provided in the game area.
The second switching mode is configured such that the probability of winning in the lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA4, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured such that the probability of winning in the lottery is the same as in the first switching mode, but the time required from winning in the lottery until the acceptance state is reached is shortened.

As shown in this feature, when switching from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, the probability of winning in the lottery based on passage through the passage section is changed. When switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the time required from winning to acceptance is shortened without changing the probability of winning. By using different parameters to differentiate between the second and third switching modes in this way, the technical concept shown in feature AA1, etc., can be suitably realized.

Feature AA6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AA1 to AA5, characterized in that the second switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the third switching mode.

According to Feature AA6, in the second switching mode, compared to the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the payout mechanism to the number of game balls launched—that is, the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls dispensed by the number of game balls launched (hereinafter referred to as the "base")—becomes higher, making it possible to play while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls held. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information and the game transitions to the second switching mode via the special game state, there is a chance to win a large number of game balls. In contrast, in the third switching mode, although the above base is more favorable than in the first switching mode, the degree is kept lower than in the second switching mode, thus preventing the relief function from becoming excessive. With this configuration, the contrast of the game can be enhanced by using multiple switching modes in combination.

Feature AA7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AA1 to AA5, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the second switching mode.

According to Feature AA7, by switching to the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing mechanism to the number of game balls launched—that is, the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls dispensed by the number of game balls launched (hereinafter referred to as the "base")—becomes higher compared to the second switching mode. This makes it possible to continue playing while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls held. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the system transitions to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, a large payout cannot be expected at that point, but it is possible to wait for an opportunity to obtain a large payout corresponding to the judgment result of the first judgment information while significantly suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls held. With such a configuration, the soundness of the game can be suitably improved.

Feature AA8. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AA1 to Feature AA7, characterized in that when the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode reaches the termination criterion number (e.g., 40 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the machine transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By setting an upper limit (termination threshold) on the number of games played in a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, a return from the third switching mode to the first switching mode becomes possible, effectively suppressing the decrease in tension during gameplay after entering the third switching mode.

Feature AA9. The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
In both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the second determination information by the determination means is the same.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state (for example, a first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A second game state (for example, a third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode,
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
The first transition means is configured to transition to the second game state via the special game state when the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state.
The second transition means is configured to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained in the first game state.
A third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state when the number of game rounds in the second game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 rounds) without the number of rounds of game play in the second game state reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information,
A gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA8, characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds executed in the third gaming state reaches the termination criterion number (for example, 40 rounds) without the number of game rounds executed in the third gaming state reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to this feature, an upper limit (termination threshold) is set for the number of games played in the third game state, and upon reaching this limit, a downgrade (return) from the third game state to the first game state may occur. This configuration effectively suppresses the decrease in tension during gameplay after transitioning to the third game state.

Furthermore, termination criteria are set for both the second and third game states. By providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of games played, both via and without special game states, the game can be diversified. In this configuration, it is preferable to configure the base in the third switching mode such that the difference between the base in the second switching mode and the base in the first switching mode is smaller.

Feature AA10. The gaming machine according to Feature AA9, characterized in that it has means for setting the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the fourth transition means, to be less than the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the third transition means.

As shown in this feature, setting the number of rounds required to terminate the third game state to be less than the number of rounds required to terminate the second game state is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transitions to the third game state and thus increasing the frequency of transitions between game states. This is desirable in suppressing monotony in the game.

Feature AA11. The gaming machine according to Feature AA9, characterized in that it has means for setting the termination criterion number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the fourth transition means, to be the same number as the termination criterion number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the third transition means.

As shown in this feature, by aligning the number of turns required to terminate the third game state with the number of turns required to terminate the second game state, it is possible to make it appear as if there are multiple routes to transition to the same game state (second game state, third game state). This is desirable in achieving diversification of gameplay while avoiding causing confusion for players.

Feature AA12. A fifth transition means that, in the first game state, when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit without the result corresponding to the first judgment information, transitions to the third game state.
When the system transitions to the third game state by the fifth transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the system is further equipped with a sixth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state during the time-saving mode), which transitions the system to the first game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AA9 to AA11, characterized in that the sixth transition means sets the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state, to be greater than the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state, by the fourth transition means.

According to the configuration described in this feature, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the first game state, or if the number of game rounds reached the upper limit (ceiling) during the first game state, the game transitions to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this way, by setting the trigger for transitioning to the third game state as a judgment result that does not correspond to transitioning to a special game state or reaching the ceiling, and by providing relief to the player through the third game state, it is possible to contribute to curbing excessive investment. In particular, by setting the termination criterion number set when reaching the ceiling relatively high and the termination criterion number set when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is relatively low, it is possible to suitably achieve both diversification of gameplay and enhancement of the relief function.

Feature AA13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
A second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for transitioning to the third gaming state when, in the first gaming state, the number of game rounds played after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, or if the number of game plays reaches the maximum number (ceiling reached) during the first game state, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs depending on whether the trigger is a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, or reaching the ceiling. This enables further diversification of gameplay. In particular, by making the trigger for transitioning to the third game state a judgment result that does not correspond to transitioning to the special game state or reaching the ceiling, and providing relief to the player in the third game state, it is possible to contribute to suppressing excessive investment.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AA14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A means for transitioning to the second game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for transitioning to the third gaming state when, in the first gaming state, the number of game rounds played after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state. If the number of game rounds reached the upper limit (ceiling reached) during the first game state, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs depending on whether the trigger is a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or reaching the ceiling. This enables further diversification of gameplay. In particular, by setting the trigger for transitioning to the third game state as reaching the ceiling and providing relief to the player in the third game state, it is possible to contribute to suppressing excessive investment.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AA1 to AA12 above may also be applied to features AA13 to AA14.

<Characteristics Group A and B>
The following features A and B were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Features AB1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state via the special game state,
When the first type of game state results in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result), a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state.
After transitioning to the second type of game state by the second transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 rounds) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) is provided to transition to the first type of game state.
The system includes a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) which causes the system to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends does not result in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds),
The fourth transition means is configured to delay the transition to the second type of game state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of game rounds, at least until the number of game rounds in the second type of game state reaches the termination criterion number, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number during the second type of game state transitioned by the second transition means.

According to feature AB1, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the upper limit of the number of games played after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and reaching the ceiling are used in combination as triggers for transitioning to the second type of game state, the following concerns arise. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the second type of game state is forcibly terminated due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, some of the benefits that the player would have originally enjoyed will be lost, and there are concerns that the player's satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration described in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 game state, the transition to the Type 2 game state triggered by reaching the ceiling will be delayed until at least the number of game rounds played in that Type 2 game state reaches the termination threshold. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature is a game machine comprising: a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed; a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation; and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable prize entry device 83) provided in the game area, wherein a special information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which is the ball entry section. A function to perform the following: an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function to perform lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result); and a game rotation operation (pictures on the operation opening display units D1 and D2) prior to or based on the determination by the determination means. The system includes a game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result), and the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information Based on the corresponding determination result and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state), a variable ball entry unit (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry unit that can switch between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the accepting state, and when the game state is transitioned, the variable The system includes a control means for a variable ball entry section that switches the ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), a variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the accepting state, and a control means for a variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes processing for electric device support in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and the first switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism is a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first A second type switching mode (high-frequency support mode) is provided, in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than in the type switching mode. When a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided, which transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode without going through the special game state. The first transition means transitions the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode When transitioning to a game state, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from a fourth normal game state to a first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode when the number of game rounds in the predetermined game state reaches the termination threshold number (e.g., 40 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling: e.g., 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. The gaming machine also includes a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state upon reaching the ceiling), and the third transition means is configured to delay the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode, triggered by reaching the upper limit number of game rounds, until at least the number of game rounds in the predetermined game state reaches the termination criterion number.

Features AB2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
When the first game state results in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (a special miss result), a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state,
In the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) transitions to the first game state.
The system includes a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) which causes the system to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends does not result in a judgment corresponding to the first judgment information and reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds),
The fourth transition means is configured to delay the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of game rounds, at least until the number of game rounds in the third game state reaches the termination criterion number, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number during the transition to the third game state by the second transition means.

According to Features A and B2, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the upper limit of the number of games played after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the third switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and reaching the ceiling are used in combination as triggers for transitioning to the third game state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the third game state is forcibly terminated due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, it is feared that some of the benefits that the player would have originally enjoyed will be lost, and the player's satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration described in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling will be delayed until at least the number of game rounds played in that third game state reaches the termination threshold. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Feature AB3. The gaming machine according to Feature AB2, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third game state by the fourth transition means is configured to be the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third game state by the second transition means.

As shown in Features A and B2, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state and the game transitions to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, the switching behavior of the variable mechanism can be made identical to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being less significant compared to the previous behavior.

Feature A4. The termination criterion count is the first termination criterion count.
In the third game state transitioned by the fourth transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the third game state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and reaches the second termination criterion round (for example, 400 rounds), the system is provided with a fifth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature),
The gaming machine according to feature AB2 or feature AB3, characterized in that the first termination criterion count is set to be less than the second termination criterion count.

If the system has the delay function shown in Features A and B2, it is anticipated that if the benefits of reaching the ceiling end immediately after a significant delay, it could diminish the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the first termination criterion count < the second termination criterion count, excessive delays can be suppressed, and the impression that the benefits after reaching the ceiling are insignificant can be avoided.

Feature AB5. The fourth transition means is configured such that, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, it transitions to the third game state triggered by the third transition means reaching the termination criterion number, after which the game transition is triggered by the third transition means to the first game state, and then transitions to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit. This is the gaming machine according to any one of Features AB2 to AB4.

As shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the system is configured to transition from the third game state to the first game state and then return to the third game state. This adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent it from becoming monotonous.

Feature AB6. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information.
The fourth transition means is configured such that, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, it transitions to the third game state triggered by the third transition means when the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaches the termination criterion count, and then transitions to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit.
A gaming machine according to any one of features AB2 to AB4, characterized in that, under circumstances where the transition to the third game state by the fourth transition means is delayed, the number of games played during the first game state transitioned to by the third transition means is set to be less than the upper limit of special information that can be stored by the acquired information storage means.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the system transitions from the third game state to the first game state and then returns to the third game state. This configuration adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent monotony. Furthermore, in a configuration that includes the first game state, the repeated game rounds in the first game state may give the player the impression that the enjoyment of benefits is being unfairly delayed. This impression is particularly strong when the number of stored special information rounds becomes zero due to the intervention of the first game state, interrupting the continuous progression of game rounds. In this regard, by limiting the number of game rounds performed in the intervening first game state to less than the upper limit of stored special information, the interruption of the continuous progression of game rounds upon return to the third game state can be avoided, effectively eliminating the above concern.

Feature AB7. The fourth transition means is configured such that, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, it transitions to the third game state after the transition by the third transition means triggered by the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaching the termination criterion, and after one game round played in the first game state, it transitions to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit. This is the configuration of the gaming machine according to any one of Features AB2 to AB4.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the system transitions from the third game state to the first game state and then returns to the third game state. This configuration adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent monotony. Furthermore, in a configuration that includes the first game state, the repeated game rounds in the first game state may give the player the impression that the enjoyment of the benefits is being unfairly delayed. This concern can be effectively addressed by a configuration that returns to the third game state after one game round.

Feature AB8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AB5 to AB7, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means for notifying the player that the game is about to transition to the third game state while the transition to the third game state is being delayed by the fourth transition means.

Ensuring an opportunity to notify the player that the game is transitioning to the third game state during the first game state is preferable, as it encourages players to focus on each game round during the third game state before the transition to the first game state.

Feature AB9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information.
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means that can set the operation period of the game round operation according to the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The gaming machine according to feature AB8, characterized in that the operation period setting means is configured to set a predetermined operation period for game rounds performed during the first game state in which the transition to the third game state is delayed by the fourth transition means, regardless of the number of special information items stored in the acquired information storage means.

As shown in Features A, B, and 5, in a configuration that returns to the third game state via the first game state, variations in the operation duration of game-time operations performed during the first game state can lead to the following problems. Specifically, if the operation duration is relatively short, there may be insufficient time to inform the player of the transition to the third game state. If the operation duration is relatively long, it may give the player the impression that the transition to the third game state is being unfairly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for game rounds during the first game state where the transition to the third game state is delayed, a predetermined operation duration is set regardless of the number of special information items stored in the acquired information storage means. By making the operation duration constant, the above concerns can be resolved.

Feature AB10. The fourth transition means is configured such that, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, the game transitions to the third game state without passing through any other game states after the end of the third game state, triggered by the reaching of the upper limit. This is the characteristics of the game machine according to any one of Features AB2 to AB4.

As shown in this feature, by creating a configuration that seamlessly connects the third game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, the two benefits can be combined into one, thereby enhancing the impact.

Feature AB11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AB2 to AB10, characterized in that, during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit, and while the transition to the third game state by the fourth transition means is delayed, the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, and the transition to the fourth transition means triggered by reaching the upper limit becomes invalid.

As described in this feature, configuring the system so that the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is invalidated when the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information while a transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is imminent is preferable in order to prevent excessive relief functions for the player.

Feature AB12. When the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system is equipped with a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect indicating that the system will transition to the third game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AB2 to AB11, characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to execute the special performance in the game round in which the upper limit is reached when the upper limit is reached during the first game state, while not executing the special performance in the game round in which the upper limit is reached when the upper limit is reached when the third game state transitioned to by the second transition means.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the first game state, a special animation will be performed during that spin, promptly informing the player that the game will transition to the third game state. Conversely, if the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the third game state, the special animation will be avoided during that spin. In this way, by deliberately omitting the special animation when the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the third game state, which was triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, before the end of that game state.

Feature AB13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AB2 to AB11, characterized in that, if the upper limit of the number of plays is reached during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, the machine includes means for notifying the player that the game state will transition to the third game state in a game play session that occurs after the game play session in which the upper limit was reached, and before the game play session that transitions to the third game state triggered by the upper limit being reached by the fourth transition means.

As described in this feature, if the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the third game state, the player will be notified of the transition to the third game state (ceiling reached) in the game spins before the transition to the third game state, triggered by reaching the ceiling in the game spins executed after the ceiling is reached. This configuration encourages players to expect that the third game state will be effectively extended even in game spins other than those where the ceiling could be reached.

Feature AB14. When the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system is equipped with a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect indicating that the system will transition to the third game state.
The special performance execution means is configured such that, if the upper limit is reached during the third game state and the number of game rounds played during the third game state is greater than a predetermined number, the special performance is executed in the game round in which the upper limit is reached; on the other hand, if the upper limit is reached during the third game state and the number of game rounds played during the third game state is less than a predetermined number, the special performance is executed in a game round played after the game round in which the upper limit is reached. This is the gaming machine according to any one of features AB2 to AB11.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling reached) is reached during the third game state, which is transitioned to based on the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, the timing of this can affect the player's impression. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, the player might get the impression that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information was a wasted spin. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the timing of the special effect, i.e., the timing of the ceiling reach notification, can be varied according to the number of spins performed during that third game state (the number of spins performed up to that point), thereby eliminating the above concern.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AB3 to AB14 may also be applied to feature AB1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature group AA may also be applied to features AB1 to AB14.

<Characteristics AC Group>
The following set of features AC is based on the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The features AC are based on the background technology described above, which states that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AC1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state via the special game state,
In the Type 2 game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the Type 2 game state reaches the first termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the Type 1 game state.
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the second type gaming state, which has been transitioned to by the third transition means, reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the second type gaming state reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) and transitioning to the first type gaming state.

According to feature AC1, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in the first type of game state, the game transitions to the second type of game state via a special game state. The second type of game state corresponds to a high-frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second type of game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first type of game state which corresponds to a low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second type of game state to the first type of game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the game will quickly transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction of the player's remaining balls. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature AC2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination threshold (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) is provided to transition back to the first game state.
In the first game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioned by the third transition means reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioning to the first determination information reaches the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to feature AC2, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in the first game state, the game transitions to the second game state via a special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds executed in the second game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the game will transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction of the player's remaining balls. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature AC3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91) located in the first flow path (left route) in the game area, and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92) located in the second flow path (right route) in the game area.
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination threshold (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) is provided to transition back to the first game state.
In the first game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioned by the third transition means reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioning to the first determination information reaches the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to feature AC3, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in the first game state, the game transitions to the second game state via a special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and by launching game balls to the second route, the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section increases, suppressing the reduction of the player's ball count. The second game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first game state, which corresponds to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to get balls into the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the game will transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction of the player's remaining balls. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature AC4. The gaming machine according to Feature AC2 or Feature AC3, characterized in that the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is configured to more likely result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information than to a judgment corresponding to the first judgment information.

As described above, when transitioning from the second or third game state to the first game state, the number of game rounds related to the second ball entry unit is executed, up to the number of special information items stored in the second memory means. In these game rounds, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. Even if the judgment result does not correspond to the first judgment information, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information by looping the high-frequency switching mode described above. With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

Feature AC5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AC2 to Feature AC4, characterized in that, during the second and third gaming states, if the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the second determination information, the determination result becomes invalid.

According to feature AC5, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second/third game state, that judgment result becomes invalid. Conversely, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section when transitioning from the second/third game state to the first game state, that judgment result triggers a transition to the third game state. With this configuration, the presence or absence of the above loop depends on the maximum number of special information items that can be stored related to the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, when adjusting the advantage by increasing or decreasing the number of rounds required to terminate in the second/third game state, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and to suitably improve the degree of freedom in setting the number of rounds required to terminate.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AC2 to AC4, characterized in that, during the second and third game states, the determination means is configured to avoid obtaining a determination result corresponding to the second determination information."

Feature AC6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AC2 to Feature AC5, characterized in that the second termination criterion count is defined to be the same as the first termination criterion count.

The configuration described in this feature is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the game states before and after the first game state as being identical, when the game progresses from the second game state to the first game state and then to the third game state.

Feature AC7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AC2 to Feature AC6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

The configuration described in this feature is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the game states before and after the first game state as being identical, when the game progresses from the second game state to the first game state and then to the third game state.

Furthermore, the "switching mode" described in this feature consists of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the system is switched to the open state, and the interval period between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" indicates that more of these three elements are identical or similar than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AG2 to AG4, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature AC8. A pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the second storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the second storage means becomes the subject of the determination,
A gaming machine according to any one of features AC2 to AC6, characterized in that, in the second and third gaming states, a special performance execution means is provided to execute a special performance based on the result of the prior identification means with respect to special information subject to determination after the transition from the second and third gaming states to the first gaming state.

Immediately after transitioning from the second or third game state to the first game state, the remaining reserved game rounds related to the second ball entry section are executed. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during these game rounds, the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state. Here, as shown in this feature, in the second/third game state, it is possible to pre-determine whether the remaining reserved game rounds will result in the judgment information corresponding to the second judgment information, and by performing a special effect based on that result, the attention given to whether or not the aforementioned loop occurs can be increased.

Feature AC9. The gaming machine according to Feature AC8, characterized in that the prior identification means is configured to perform the identification during the final game round in the second and third game states when transitioning from the second and third game states to the first game state.

If the above identification is performed in the final game round of the second/third game state, the special effect will be executed when the number of special information items stored in the second memory means reaches the maximum number of items that can be stored. This allows the function of suggesting the continuation of the loop through the special effect to be effectively utilized.

Feature AC10: The gaming machine according to Feature AC9, characterized in that the special performance is initiated before the identification by the aforementioned identification means in the final game round.

According to feature AC10, by initiating the special performance prior to identification by the prior identification means, the constraints on the execution period of the special performance can be relaxed, and the obsolescence of the special performance can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features AC4 to AC10 may also be applied to Feature AC1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AB may also be applied to feature AC1 to AC10.

<Characteristic AD Group>
The following group of features A and D were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AD1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
A special effect execution means that executes a special effect that suggests transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the first transition means,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to determine the performance mode of the special performance depending on whether or not the upper limit is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the player transitions.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, balls enter the second starting ball entry section more frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in terms of providing relief to players. However, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game may also transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. In this case, a special effect is executed. The type of special effect is determined depending on whether or not the ceiling is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest reaching the ceiling when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, or conversely, to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the ceiling, thereby contributing to increased attention to the game through diversification of gameplay.

Feature AD2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a special effect execution means that, when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is performed by the first transition means, executes a special effect that suggests transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to determine the performance mode of the special performance based on the number of times the termination criterion is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the player is transitioned, and the remaining number of times the upper limit is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, balls enter the second starting ball entry section more frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game may also transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. In this case, a special performance is executed. The performance style of the special performance is determined based on the number of games played to reach the termination criterion in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the game transitions, and the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. With such a configuration, for example, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, it is possible to also suggest that the ceiling has been reached, or conversely, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the ceiling has been reached, thereby contributing to increased attention to the game through diversification of gameplay.

Feature AD3. The special performance execution means is the first execution means,
As the aforementioned special effects, a first special effect and a second special effect are provided, each with a different performance style.
The system includes a second execution means that, when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the third transition means, executes the second special performance as a performance that suggests the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
The gaming machine according to feature AD2, characterized in that the first execution means has means for executing the second special performance when the set termination criterion count is greater than the remaining number of games until the upper limit is reached.

According to Feature AD3, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the ceiling is reached during a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by that judgment result, the same special performance (second special performance) that is normally executed when the ceiling is reached will be performed. This configuration makes it appear as if the ceiling is variable.

Feature AD4. The gaming machine according to Feature AD3, characterized in that the first execution means has means for executing the first special performance when the set termination criterion count is less than the remaining number of games until the upper limit is reached.

According to Feature AD4, if the set termination threshold number of plays is less than the number of plays until the ceiling is reached, the first special effect will be executed instead of the second special effect. This is preferable for achieving the mimicry effect shown in Feature AD3.

Feature AD5. The gaming machine according to Feature AD3 or Feature AD4, characterized in that the second execution means does not execute the second special performance when the third transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the second special performance is executed by the first execution means.

As shown in Feature AD5, if the ceiling is reached during a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special effect is not executed, and the ceiling has not been explicitly indicated. This allows the mimicry effect shown in Feature AD3 to be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature AD6. The third transition means is configured such that, if the upper limit is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode upon reaching the termination criterion count, and then transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
When the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the system includes a state indicating means that indicates the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AD3 to AD5, characterized in that the state indicating means is configured to indicate the state across the three game states when the upper limit number of times is reached during the second switching mode and the third transition means transitions from the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode via the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

According to Feature AD6, when the system cycles from the second switching mode to the first switching mode and back to the second switching mode, continuing to suggest the second switching mode even during the first switching mode allows the mimicry effect shown in Feature AD3 to be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature AD7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AD2 to Feature AD6, characterized in that the first transition means has means for setting one of the number of termination criteria, including the first termination criterion count and the second criterion count, which have different numbers, as the termination criterion count when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

As shown in Feature AD7, by using a configuration that combines the first termination criterion count and the second termination criterion count, the pseudo-variable ceiling function shown in Feature AD2, etc., can be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature AD8. The first termination criterion count is less than the upper limit count.
The gaming machine according to feature AD7, characterized in that the second termination criterion count is equal to or greater than the upper limit count.

According to feature AD8, when the first termination criterion count is set, whether or not the ceiling is reached during the second switching mode depends on the remaining number of attempts until the ceiling is reached. If the second termination criterion count is set, the ceiling may be reached during the second switching mode. This configuration effectively suppresses the failure of the function to properly perform the pseudo-variable ceiling using the second judgment information.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features AD3 to AD8 above may also be applied to Feature AD1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AC may also be applied to feature AD1 to feature AD8.

<Characteristics of Group AE>
The following feature group AE was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AE1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes special win game state transition processing or jackpot game state transition processing) is provided to transition the game state to a special game state (special win game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83B) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83B using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is configured to switch the variable ball entry section to the receiving state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined information (for example, a special win result or a jackpot result) and the game transitions to the special game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The predetermined information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a regular jackpot) and a second piece of information that is more advantageous to the player than the first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot with a probability increase).
The determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is configured to more easily result in a determination corresponding to the second information than the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
A gaming machine characterized by having a special transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information being reached, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. In the high-frequency switching mode, balls can enter the second starting ball entry section, and the judgment (lottery) based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section can result not only in the judgment result corresponding to the first information, but also in the judgment result corresponding to the second information which is more advantageous to the player than the first information. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the judgment is greatly increased. In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher degree of advantage than the previous game state. By configuring the game to transition to a chance zone upon reaching the ceiling in this way, the player's desire to play can be effectively stimulated. This is desirable in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the level of attention the player receives to the game.

Feature AE2. A game board (game board 80aB) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes the transition process to the special game state or the transition process to the jackpot game state) is provided to transition the game state to a special game state (a special winning game state or a big winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83B) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83B using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned predetermined information includes a first piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special win result) and a second piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a big win result).
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result), and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for switching the variable ball entry unit to the acceptance state in a first control mode,
The system includes means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control mode when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second information and becomes a second determination result (jackpot result), and the system transitions to the special game state, or when the first determination result occurs and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V-winning area) of the variable ball entry section,
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The second determination result can occur in either the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, whereas the first determination result can occur only in the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
A gaming machine characterized by having a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal gaming state to the third special gaming state when the ceiling is reached) which causes the game to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the number of rounds played reaching the predetermined information.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information being reached, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. In the high-frequency switching mode, balls can enter the second starting ball entry section, and the judgment (lottery) based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section can result in a judgment not only corresponding to the first information but also to the second information. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the judgment (probability of winning or probability of transitioning to the special game state) is greatly increased. In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher degree of advantage than the previous game state. By configuring the game to transition to a chance zone upon reaching the ceiling in this way, the player's desire to play can be effectively stimulated. This is desirable in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the level of attention the player receives.

Furthermore, upon reaching the ceiling, balls enter the second starting ball entry point, which not only suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls but also increases the probability of transitioning to a special game state. This configuration allows the benefits to be effectively realized even with a shorter duration in the second switching mode, thus effectively suppressing the prolonged gameplay after reaching the ceiling.

Feature AE3. The special transition means is a first special transition means,
After transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches the termination criterion number (for example, 1 round) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information being obtained, a second special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third special game state to the fourth special game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving measures) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to feature AE2, further comprising a resetting means (a ceiling resetting function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the upper limit number of plays when the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode using the second special transition means.

According to feature AE3, the number of games played until the ceiling is reached is reset when the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. This configuration is preferable for achieving a configuration where the ceiling is shallow, the benefits of reaching the ceiling are small, and a weaker ceiling function is activated in short cycles. In other words, it is preferable for suppressing monotony in gameplay.

Feature AE4. The system includes an execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) that tracks the number of game rounds executed without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means.
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter reaches the value corresponding to the termination criterion count.
The gaming machine according to feature AE3, characterized in that the execution count counter is updated (counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit, but is not updated (not counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit.

As shown in Feature AE4, by configuring the system so that the termination criterion count is updated when a ball enters the second starting ball entry area, it is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being fully realized.

Feature AE5. The game machine according to any one of Features AE2 to AE4, characterized in that the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined to be smaller than the reciprocal of the probability (for example, approximately 1/200) of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information by the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By defining the upper limit of the number of occurrences in the manner described in this feature, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE4, characterized in that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information by the determination means is m/N (for example, approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined such that M < N/m."

Feature AE6. The game machine according to any one of Features AE2 to AE4, characterized in that the number of games played (integer), which is the upper limit, is defined to be less than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability (for example, approximately 1/200) of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information obtained by the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By defining the upper limit of the number of occurrences in the manner described in this feature, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE4, characterized in that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information by the determination means is m/N (for example, approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined such that M ≤ N/m."

Feature AE7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AE2 to AE6, characterized in that the sum (integer) of the upper limit of the number of special information items to be stored in the second storage means and the number of termination criteria items is defined to be less than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/10) of the determination result corresponding to the first information in the determination by the determination means.

By defining the memory limit and termination criteria count in the manner described in this feature, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in short cycles and suppressing monotony in gameplay can be more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE6, characterized in that the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first information in the determination by the determination means is y/X (for example, 1/10), and the sum S (integer) of the upper limit number of special information to be stored in the second storage means and the number of termination criteria is defined such that S ≤ X/y."

Feature AE8. The termination criterion count is the first termination criterion count,
When a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal game state to the first special game state or the second special game state triggered by a jackpot result) is obtained,
The system includes a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from a first special game state or a second special game state to a fourth special game state triggered by the time reduction) which, after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first transition means, does not result in a determination result corresponding to the first and second information and the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a second termination criterion number (for example, 6 rounds, 100 rounds), and transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE7, characterized in that the first termination criterion count is set to be less than the second termination criterion count.

As shown in Feature AE8, by reducing the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached (the first termination criteria) compared to the number of termination criteria set when the judgment result corresponding to the second information (the second termination criteria), it is possible to ensure the superiority of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the goal in the game) while effectively utilizing the relief function upon reaching the ceiling.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AE3 to AE8 above may also be applied to feature AE1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AD may also be applied to feature groups AE1 to AE8.

<Features of AF Group>
The following set of features AF were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AF1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes the transition process to the special game state or the transition process to the jackpot game state) is provided to transition the game state to a special game state (a special winning game state or a big winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83B) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83B using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned predetermined information includes a first piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special win result) and a second piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a big win result).
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result), and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for switching the variable ball entry unit to the acceptance state in a first control mode,
The system includes means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control mode when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second information and becomes a second determination result (jackpot result), and the system transitions to the special game state, or when the first determination result occurs and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V-winning area) of the variable ball entry section,
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second determination result can occur in either the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, whereas the first determination result can occur only in the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
A first special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal game state to the third special game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided, which causes the game to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and reaches the upper limit (ceiling),
After transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 100 rounds) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, a second special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third special game state to the fourth special game state triggered by the time reduction consumption) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sum (integer) of the upper limit number of special information to be stored in the second storage means and the number of termination criteria is defined to be at least the reciprocal of the probability (for example, about 1/5) of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means.

In the configuration shown in this feature, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. However, even if the game enters the high-frequency switching mode, if the probability of the result corresponding to the predetermined information remains low, the following problems may occur. Specifically, even if the ceiling is reached, the period until the player receives the sufficient benefit they expect (transition to the special game state) may be prolonged, or the high-frequency switching mode may end before the player receives the sufficient benefit (a "runaway" occurs). This is undesirable as it significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, transitioning from the low-frequency switching mode to the high-frequency switching mode makes it possible for the ball to enter the second starting ball entry section. Based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, the judgment (lottery) can result not only in the second judgment result corresponding to the second information, but also in the first judgment result corresponding to the first information. In other words, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information, i.e., the probability of transitioning to a special game state, is significantly increased upon reaching the ceiling. Furthermore, since the sum of the upper limit of the number of special information items that can be stored in the second storage means (e.g., four) and the number of times the termination criterion is reached (e.g., 100 times) (e.g., 104 times) is set to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information, a configuration in which transitioning to a special game state is highly likely or substantially guaranteed upon reaching the ceiling can be suitably realized. This effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned problems.

Furthermore, if there is a limit to the number of plays possible in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, for example, the concern about the aforementioned "runaway" scenario becomes stronger. In this regard, the above configuration mitigates the impact of the limit on the number of plays upon reaching the ceiling. In other words, even when employing a high-frequency switching mode with a play limit upon reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be effectively suppressed.

Feature AF2. The gaming machine according to Feature AF1, characterized in that, in the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, the probability of obtaining the first determination result (e.g., 1/5) is defined to be higher than the probability of obtaining the second determination result (e.g., 1/200).

According to Feature AF2, when transitioning from low-frequency switching mode to high-frequency switching mode, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to predetermined information can be significantly increased. This is preferable for activating the relief function upon reaching the ceiling as shown in Feature AF1, as it shortens the stay period in high-frequency switching mode and suppresses the prolonged period before the above-mentioned sufficient benefits are granted.

Feature AF3. The system includes an execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) that tracks the number of game rounds executed without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means.
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter reaches the value corresponding to the termination criterion count.
The gaming machine according to feature AF1 or feature AF2, characterized in that the execution count counter is updated (counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit, while it is not updated (not counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AF3, the number of game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section are counted by the execution count counter, while the number of game rounds related to the first starting ball entry section are not counted by the execution count counter. By configuring the system so that the number of game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section determines whether the termination threshold has been reached, a configuration can be suitably realized in which the transition to a special game state is highly likely or substantially confirmed upon reaching the ceiling.

Feature AF4. The termination criterion count is the first termination criterion count (for example, 100 times),
When a second determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal game state to the first special game state or the second special game state triggered by a jackpot result) is obtained,
The system includes a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from a first special game state or a second special game state to a fourth special game state triggered by the time reduction) which, after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first transition means, does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a second termination criterion number (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds), and transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AF1 to AF3, characterized in that the first termination criterion count is set to be greater than the second termination criterion count.

In a predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, if the second judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode via a special game state. In the configuration described in this feature, the number of times the high-frequency switching mode terminates upon reaching the ceiling is greater than the number of times the high-frequency switching mode terminates upon reaching the second judgment result, thus prioritizing the transition to the special game state upon reaching the ceiling. Such a configuration allows the relief function described in feature AF1, etc., to be effectively utilized.

Feature AF5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AF1 to AF4, characterized in that the upper limit number of games played, M (an integer), is defined to be greater than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) of obtaining the second determination result in the determination by the determination means.

As shown in Feature AF1, in a configuration where both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by a judgment result corresponding to predetermined information are executed based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode are the same. While it is desirable to increase the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained in order to improve player satisfaction, there is a concern that this may lead to an overly powerful relief function upon reaching the ceiling, as the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling will also increase. This concern is particularly significant in configurations where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain, as shown in Feature AF1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by making the upper limit of the number of plays (ceiling) greater than the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the second judgment result, it is possible to increase the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling while reducing the opportunities to reach the ceiling, thereby eliminating the above concern.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of the features AF1 to AF4, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the second determination result in the determination by the determination means is m/N (for example, 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined such that M > N/m."

Feature AF6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AF1 to AF4, characterized in that the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means.

As shown in Feature AF1, in a configuration where both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by a judgment result corresponding to predetermined information are executed based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode are the same. While it is desirable to increase the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained in order to improve player satisfaction, there is a concern that this may lead to an overly powerful relief function upon reaching the ceiling, as the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling will also increase. This concern is particularly significant in configurations where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain, as shown in Feature AF1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit of the number of plays (ceiling) to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the second judgment result, it is possible to increase the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling while reducing the opportunities to reach the ceiling, thereby eliminating the above concern.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of the features AF1 to AF4, characterized in that the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means is m/N (for example, 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (an integer), is defined such that M ≥ N/m."

Feature AF7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AF1 to AF6, characterized in that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode transitioned by the special transition means, the operation period of the game cycle operation is shortened compared to when the determination result corresponding to the first information occurs under other circumstances.

As shown in Feature AF7, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode after reaching the ceiling, the operation period of the game cycle operation when the first judgment result is obtained is shortened, thereby reducing the time required to transition to the special game state. This allows the player to quickly enjoy the expected benefits.

Feature AF8. The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The game cycle control means is configured to execute the game cycle operation such that the operation period of the game cycle operation becomes shorter as the amount of special information stored in the second storage means increases.
The high-frequency switching modes include a first high-frequency switching mode and a second high-frequency switching mode which is set such that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first high-frequency switching mode, thereby making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first high-frequency switching mode.
If the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, or if the game ball passes through the predetermined area (V-winning area) of the variable ball entry section as a result of the first determination result, the means is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high-frequency switching mode via the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AF1 to AF7, characterized in that the special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information.

According to feature AF8, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by the first judgment result → passage through the predetermined area or the second judgment result. In other words, in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of ball entry into the second starting ball entry section increases, and the amount of special information stored in the second memory means increases. Therefore, the operation period for game-specific actions in the game round after reaching the ceiling is shortened, effectively suppressing the prolonged period between reaching the ceiling and enjoying the above-mentioned benefits.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AE may also be applied to feature groups AF1 to AF8.

<Characteristics of the AG Group>
The following group of features A and G were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AG1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state via the special game state,
In the second type of game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 10 or 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) is provided to transition to the first type of game state.
The system includes a means for resetting the number of times the termination criteria are reached (for example, resetting to 20 times) when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) occurs in the second type of game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination criterion count resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special game state.

According to Feature AG1, if the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, the game transitions to the second type of game state via the special game state. The second type of game state corresponds to the high-frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second type of game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of times the game is played in the second type of game state reaches the termination criterion, the game transitions to the first type of game state which corresponds to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the judgment based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section may result in a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the second type of game state, the termination criterion is reset without going through the special game state. This causes the second type of game state (high-frequency switching mode) to loop (extend). This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction of the number of balls held. By diversifying the gameplay in this way, it can contribute to increasing the level of attention given to the game.

Feature AG2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination threshold (for example, 10 or 20 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) is provided to transition back to the first game state.
In the second game state, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state upon the end of the game round in which the judgment result was obtained,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioned by the third transition means reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioning to the first determination information reaches the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to feature AG2, if the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, the game transitions to the second game state via a special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and if the number of times the game is played in the second game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the judgment based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section may result in a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the second game state, the game transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state. The third game state corresponds to the third switching mode, and like the second game state, game rounds related to the second ball entry mechanism are executed. This state continues until the number of game rounds reaches the second termination threshold. If the game state transitions from the second to the third game state, the game rounds related to the second ball entry mechanism continue. This makes it possible to aim for the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls held. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the level of attention given to the game.

Feature AG3. In the third game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is equipped with termination criterion count reset means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 to reset the continuation count counter) for resetting the second termination criterion count.
The gaming machine according to feature AG2, characterized in that the termination criterion count resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special game state.

According to feature AG3, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached during the third game state, the second termination criterion count is reset. In other words, the third game state loops. Since this loop does not pass through the special game state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

Feature AG4. The gaming machine according to Feature AG2 or Feature AG3, characterized in that the second termination criterion count is defined to be the same number as the first termination criterion count or greater than the first termination criterion count.

According to feature AG4, when transitioning from the second game state to the third game state, the timing of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the number of game rounds in which that judgment result occurs) can be used to avoid the player actually losing money. This is desirable in order to achieve diversification of gameplay through the aforementioned loop function and to effectively enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Feature AG5. The gaming machine according to Feature AG3 or Feature AG4, characterized in that, in the third game state, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information by the judgment means is defined to be higher than the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

According to feature AG5, during the loop, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. This configuration makes it less likely for problems to occur, such as the loop function failing to work properly due to frequent occurrences of judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information.

Feature AG6. A fifth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) that, when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained in the third game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the fifth transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the third termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system includes a sixth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature), which transitions the system back to the first game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AG3 to AG5, characterized in that the third termination criterion count is set to be the same number as or greater than the second termination criterion count.

According to feature AG6, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the aforementioned loop, the number of termination criteria (third termination criteria) in the second game state that follows will be equal to or greater than the second termination criteria. With this configuration, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the loop, the player's advantage increases after the special game state ends compared to during the loop, adding an element of excitement to the gameplay during the loop.

Feature AG7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AG2 to Feature AG6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

The configuration described in this feature is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the transition from the second game state to the third game state as being identical.

Furthermore, the "switching mode" described in this feature consists of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the system is switched to the open state, and the interval period between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" indicates that more of these three elements are identical or similar than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AG2 to AG6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature AG8. The determination mode performed by the determination means includes a low-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AG3 to AG7, characterized in that the determination mode in the second game state is the low probability mode.

According to feature AG8, it is possible to suppress the over-retention of the loop function due to frequent occurrences of judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information during the aforementioned loop. This allows for diversification of gameplay while suppressing an increase in gambling tendencies.

Feature AG9. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
In the aforementioned second type of game state, if the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a transition means for transitioning to the first type of game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the consumption of the time-saving feature),
The system includes a means for resetting the number of times the termination criteria are reached (for example, resetting to 20 times) when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is reached in the second type of game state.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination criterion count resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special game state.

According to Feature AG9, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached during the Type 2 game state, the termination criterion count is reset. In other words, the Type 2 game state loops. Since this loop does not pass through the Special Game State, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated. Therefore, it can diversify the gameplay and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AG3 to AG8 above may also be applied to features AG1 and AG9.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AF may also be applied to feature groups AG1 to AG9.

<Characteristics of the AH group>
The following features AH group were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AH1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state, and the upper limit number of times is set.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a normal jackpot result) that serves as a trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and a second piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a probability variation jackpot result) that serves as a trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode.
The game machine is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is configured to set a first number (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first information, and to set a second number (for example, 100 times) which is less than the first number, as the upper limit number when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second information.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is the first number (e.g., 300 rounds) if the judgment result corresponds to the first information, and a second number (less than the first) if the judgment result corresponds to the second information. In the high-probability mode, the game transitions to the special game state earlier than in the low-probability mode. By setting a lower upper limit, the effect of the ceiling function can be effectively utilized. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature AH2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state, and the upper limit number of times is set.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result), and a second piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 2R probability variation jackpot result).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upper limit number of times setting means is configured such that the upper limit number of times set when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first information is less than the upper limit number of times set when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second information.

If the number of game rounds (gameplay count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is configured to be fewer (shorter) when the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information compared to when the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information. In the high-probability mode, the game transitions to the special game state earlier than in the low-probability mode, so by setting a lower upper limit, the effect of the ceiling function described above can be effectively utilized. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature AH3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state, and the upper limit number of times is set.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result), and a second piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 2R probability variation jackpot result).
The game machine is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is configured to set a first number (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first information, and to set a second number (for example, 100 times) which is less than the first number, as the upper limit number when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second information.

If the number of game rounds (gameplay count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is configured to be fewer (shorter) when the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information compared to when the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information. In the high-probability mode, the game transitions to the special game state earlier than in the low-probability mode, so by setting a lower upper limit, the effect of the ceiling function described above can be effectively utilized. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, in a predetermined game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode, even though the game is in high-probability mode, the game progresses without producing a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, resulting in a significant increase in investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to be a major factor in reducing the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, in a predetermined game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode, by lowering the above-mentioned upper limit and transitioning to high-frequency switching mode at an earlier timing to suppress investment, the effects of game diversification (the effect of increasing attention to the game) can be appropriately demonstrated.

Feature AH4. The gaming machine according to Feature AH3, characterized in that the first number of spins is greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the low-probability mode, and the second number of spins is greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the high-probability mode.

If the relief function triggered by reaching the ceiling, as shown in Feature AH3, is overly active, the technical significance of providing predetermined game states corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode (diversification of gameplay) may be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit of the number of attempts in each game state to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it is possible to suitably achieve both gameplay diversification and the above-mentioned relief function.

Feature AH5. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple (for example, four) pieces of special information.
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means (a function that executes a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that can set the operation period of the game round operation according to the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The operation period setting means is configured such that the operation period becomes shorter as the amount of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode, which has been transitioned to by the special transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the system is provided with means to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to feature AH3 or feature AH4, characterized in that the number of times the termination criteria are set to be greater than the second number of times.

A configuration that shortens the operation period for game rounds by increasing the amount of special information stored is desirable for smooth game progression. However, assuming such a configuration, applying the configuration shown in feature AH3, etc., may result in the following inconveniences. Specifically, when reaching the ceiling in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, and transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, the number of game rounds in that predetermined game state may progress too quickly, causing the benefits of reaching the ceiling to end before the player can fully experience them. This is a concern as it may significantly reduce the player's attention to the relief function. In this regard, as shown in this feature, setting the termination criterion number to be greater than the upper limit number (second number) can help alleviate the above concern.

Feature AH6. In the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, which is transitioned to when the first count is reached, the first termination count is set as the termination criterion count in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, which is transitioned to when the first count is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the second termination count is set as the termination criterion count in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode.
A gaming machine according to any one of features AH3 to AH5, characterized in that the first termination criterion count and the second termination criterion count are specified to be the same number.

According to Feature AH6, using a first termination criterion count and a second termination criterion count is preferable for simplifying the game's configuration. Even with this configuration, during high-probability mode, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is increased. Therefore, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information increases while the above-mentioned relief function is active. Consequently, the above-mentioned inconveniences that may occur in a predetermined game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode can be made less likely to occur.

Feature AH7. In the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, when the first count is reached, the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode is transitioned to, and in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, when the first count is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode is transitioned to, and the second termination count is set as the termination count.
A gaming machine according to any one of features AH3 to AH5, characterized in that the second number of termination criteria is set to be less than the first number of termination criteria.

According to feature AH7, by making the number of times the second termination criterion is reached less than the number of times the first termination criterion is reached, the rescue function can be suppressed as a factor that incites gambling tendencies.

Feature AH8. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) in which the determination by the determination means is more favorable to the player than that of the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AH3 to AH7, characterized in that the variable mechanism is configured to switch between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to be entered than in the accepting state.

According to Feature AH8, the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting entry area is more favorable to the player than the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting entry area. When the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, not only is investment reduced, but the judgment result is also favorable, thus providing a double relief function for the player. Furthermore, when a losing streak occurs in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the expectation of reaching the ceiling increases. This contributes to further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature AH9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AH3 to AH8, characterized in that the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section includes a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency switching mode, while the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section does not include a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency switching mode.

According to Feature AH9, it is possible to avoid situations where, during a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the ceiling is reached and the relief function is activated, but then a judgment result occurs that triggers a transition back to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, effectively negating the benefit of reaching the ceiling (a wasted draw).

Feature AH10. The first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged on a predetermined flow path in the game area.
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AH3 to AH9, characterized in that the determination means is configured to prioritize the special information stored in the second storage means as the subject of the determination when special information is stored in both the first storage means and the second storage means.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even if the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, and the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, there is no need to change the target of the game balls in order to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration where the rescue function is activated suddenly without going through a special game state, the wasteful consumption of game balls is suppressed, and the satisfaction level with the rescue function can be appropriately improved.

Feature AH11. The high-frequency switching mode is the first high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A),
A second high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) is provided as a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which is set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than that of the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined judgment information includes a third piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) that serves as a trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AH3 to AH10, characterized in that the second high-frequency switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the first high-frequency switching mode.

According to feature AH11, when the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and first high frequency switching mode, where the loss of game balls is reduced compared to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and second high frequency switching mode. This configuration emphasizes the advantage of reaching the ceiling and allows for a significant change in the rhythm of the game when the ceiling is reached.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AG may also be applied to feature AH1 to AH11.

<Features of AI Groups>
The following AI features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AI1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 50 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it is equipped with a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached).

According to Feature AI1, during a predetermined game state corresponding to both the high-probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without achieving a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to both the high-probability mode and the third switching mode without passing through the special game state. This configuration effectively suppresses monotony in the game while ensuring the player's advantage during the high-probability mode.

Feature AI2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
The high probability mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 rounds) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number, without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
The system includes means for switching to the third switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state does not result in a determination corresponding to the predetermined determination information and reaches a third reference number (for example, 50 rounds).
A gaming machine characterized in that the third reference number is defined to be greater than or equal to the second reference number and less than or equal to the first reference number.

According to Feature AI2, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to both high probability mode and second switching mode, the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds executed does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the second reference number. The high probability mode ends when it reaches the first reference number. Here, if the number of game rounds executed after the special game state ends does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the third reference number, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is greater than or equal to the second reference number and less than or equal to the first reference number, so the switching control mode switches to the third switching mode while in high probability mode. With this configuration, the player's advantage in high probability mode is ensured while effectively suppressing monotony in the game.

Feature AI3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
The high probability mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 rounds) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number, without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
The system includes means for switching the switching control mode to the third switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state does not result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and is less than the first reference number (for example, 50 rounds).
A gaming machine characterized in that the third reference number of rounds is set to be the same as the second reference number of rounds.

According to Feature AI3, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to both high probability mode and second switching mode, the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds executed does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the second reference number. The high probability mode ends when it reaches the first reference number. Here, if the number of game rounds executed after the special game state ends does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the third reference number, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is the same as the second reference number, meaning the switching control mode switches from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during high probability mode. This configuration effectively suppresses monotony in gameplay while ensuring the player's advantage during high probability mode.

Feature AI4. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
A first transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a first reference number (for example, 100 rounds) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions the lottery mode to the low probability mode without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state becomes a second reference number (for example, 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number, without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode is transitioned to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.

According to Feature AI4, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to both high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game rounds executed does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the second reference number, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. If it reaches the first reference number, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. This configuration effectively suppresses monotony in gameplay while ensuring the player's advantage during high probability mode.

Feature AI5. The gaming machine according to Feature AI4, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the second switching mode.

As shown in Feature AI4, in a type of gaming machine (so-called ST machine) where an upper limit (first reference count) is set on the number of game rounds in a predetermined game state corresponding to a high probability mode, the likelihood of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information decreases as the number of game rounds approaches the first reference count, and the player's expectations may decrease significantly. This is undesirable in terms of increasing the player's attention to the game. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature allows the machine to switch to the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached, increasing the frequency of balls entering the second starting ball entry area and suppressing investment. In this way, by using the ceiling function to further favor the switching control mode in the latter half, the weakness of ST machines (a significant decrease in expectations towards the end) can be overcome.

The configuration described in this feature is a game machine comprising: a game board (game board 80aA) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed; a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation; and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area, wherein a special information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 acquires the hold information) that acquires special information (hold information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which is the ball entry section. A function to execute processing; an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function to execute lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result); and a game rotation operation (in the operation port display units D1 and D2) prior to or based on the determination by the determination means. The game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that the game cycle operation is performed for each game cycle according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the game state is set to a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means has been completed. A special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the regular game state; a variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) that serves as the ball entry section and can be switched between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a closed state in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the open state; and a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function that executes opening/closing processing of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that switches the variable ball entry section between the open state and the closed state when the game transitions to the special game state.
The system includes a variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between an open state in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a closed state in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the open state, and a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric mechanism support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a setting that makes the period in which the variable mechanism is in the open state longer than in the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) are provided, wherein the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than in the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than in the second switching mode, and a judgment mode (lottery mode) is provided for which the judgment is performed by the judgment means, wherein the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively low and the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively high, and the predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B), and the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state does not result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information until the first reference number (for example, 100 times) The game machine is characterized by comprising: a first transition means that, when the situation occurs, transitions the lottery mode to the low probability mode without going through the special game state; and a second transition means that, when the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state becomes a second reference number (for example, 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions the switching control mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.

Feature AI6. The gaming machine according to Feature AI4 or Feature AI5, characterized in that the second transition means is configured to transition from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the game round in which the second reference number of rounds is reached.

The configuration shown in Feature AI6 allows for smooth gameplay by seamlessly connecting high-support elements.

Feature AI7. The second transition means is configured such that, after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state, if the number of game rounds executed after the transition does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the second reference number (e.g., 50 rounds), the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode upon the end of the game round in which the second reference number was reached, and then transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode in the next game round, as described in Feature AI4 or Feature AI5.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AI7, when the relief function is activated upon reaching the ceiling, the switching control mode changes via the first switching mode to the third switching mode. This configuration enhances the impact when the switching control mode is changed.

Feature AI8. The gaming machine according to Feature AI7, characterized in that the second reference number is defined to be less than or equal to the first termination reference number, and greater than or equal to the difference between the first reference number and the second reference number.

According to the configuration described in this feature, by shortening the duration of game rounds in high-probability mode and corresponding to the third switching mode compared to the duration of game rounds in high-probability mode and corresponding to the second switching mode, it is possible to dramatically increase the attention given to the advantageous state transitioning after the end of the special game state.

Feature AI9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means that can set the operation period of the game round operation according to the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AI4 to AI5, characterized in that in the third switching mode, the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when game balls are continuously launched toward the starting ball entry section is greater than the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when game balls are continuously launched toward the starting ball entry section in the second switching mode.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the game's progression speed can be changed by transitioning from a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and a second switching mode to a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and a third switching mode, triggered by reaching the ceiling. This further effectively suppresses monotony in the gameplay.

Feature AI10. The starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section and a second starting ball entry section in which the determination by the determination means is more favorable to the player than the first starting ball entry section.
The variable mechanism is configured to switch between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the accepting state.
Both the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path in the game area.
The gaming machine according to feature AI9, characterized in that the determination means is configured to perform the determination in the order in which the balls enter the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section.

According to the configuration described in this feature, reaching the ceiling triggers a transition from a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and the second switching mode to a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and the third switching mode, thereby increasing the opportunities for game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section to be executed. This significantly increases the player's advantage upon reaching the ceiling, and effectively enhances the level of attention given to gameplay after reaching the ceiling.

Feature AI11. When the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode by the second transition means reaches the third reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode is transitioned to the first switching mode without going through the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AI4 to AI10, characterized in that the third reference number is specified to be greater than the first reference number.

According to the configuration described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions in the following order: high probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode → high probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → low probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → low probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode. This configuration helps to suppress the rapid decline in attention to the game when the game transitions to the low probability mode after reaching the ceiling and entering the third switching mode.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AI5 to AI11 above may also be applied to features AI1 to AI3.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AH may also be applied to feature AI1 to AI10.

<Characteristics of Group AJ>
The following features AJ group were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AJ1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, and in the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state is reached without obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result and reaching the ceiling) is obtained,
If, after transitioning to the second type of game state by the first transition means, the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 or 400 rounds) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) is provided to transition back to the first type of game state.
The gaming machine is characterized by having a resetting means (a function that overwrites the value of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the number of remaining game rounds that will reach the termination criterion number in the second type of game state when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number during the second type of game state transition triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

According to Feature AJ1, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the upper limit of the number of games played after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and reaching the ceiling are used together as triggers for transitioning to the second type of game state, the following concerns arise. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state and the ceiling is invalidated, some of the benefits that the player could have enjoyed will be lost, and there are concerns that player satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state, the number of remaining games played is reset. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Furthermore, the "resetting means" described in this feature may be configured such that the number of remaining game rounds executed when transitioning to the Type 2 game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is the same as the number of remaining game rounds executed when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the maximum number during the Type 2 game state. Alternatively, the number of remaining game rounds executed when transitioning to the Type 2 game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is different from the number of remaining game rounds executed when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the maximum number during the Type 2 game state.

Feature AJ2. The gaming machine according to Feature AJ1, characterized in that, when the number of remaining game rounds is reset by the resetting means, the second game state is maintained without passing through any other game states other than the second game state.

According to Feature AJ2, if the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 game state and the remaining number of game rounds is reset, the Type 2 game state will continue without transitioning to another game state as a result of the reset. This is preferable in suppressing disruptions to the rhythm of gameplay during the Type 2 game state.

Feature AJ3. The gaming machine according to Feature AJ1 or Feature AJ2, characterized in that the number of remaining game rounds to be executed by the resetting means is configured to be greater than the number of remaining game rounds to be executed when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state.

According to feature AJ3, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the number of remaining game rounds due to reaching the ceiling, thereby contributing to improved player satisfaction.

Feature AJ4. The game round control means includes an operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the game round operation,
The aforementioned operating period includes a first operating period (for example, 20 seconds to 30 seconds) and a second operating period shorter than the first operating period (for example, 3 seconds to 14 seconds).
The gaming machine according to any one of features AJ1 to AJ3, wherein the operation period setting means is configured to set the second operation period as the operation period for the number of games in which the upper limit is reached during the second type of game state.

As shown in Feature AJ4, by configuring the system to set a second operation period as the operation period when the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state, it is possible to effectively suppress the disruption of smooth game progression caused by the reset function.

Feature AJ5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AJ1 to AJ4, characterized in that, when the remaining number of game rounds is reset by the resetting means while the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state, the acceptance state is maintained until the acceptance period set upon switching to the acceptance state has elapsed.

As shown in Feature AJ5, even if a reset is performed while the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state, the forced termination of the acceptance state can be avoided, thereby effectively preventing interruptions to the smooth flow of gameplay.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AI may be applied to features AJ1 to AJ5.

<Features of the AK Group>
The following feature group A and K were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AK1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is provided with means to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result),
In the aforementioned second type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is configured to invalidate that judgment result.
The game includes a display and effect execution means (symbol display device 95, notification and effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
As the aforementioned display effects, a first display effect and a second display effect are provided.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normally a false result),
A means for executing the second display effect when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information while the game is in the first type of game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing the first display effect when, under the conditions of the second type of game state, the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result).

According to Feature AK1, even if the trigger for transitioning to a special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to a Type 2 game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in terms of improving the integrity of the game. However, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the Type 2 game state, that judgment result becomes invalid. While this is desirable in suppressing the increase in gambling tendencies, there is a concern that if the player becomes aware of this result, it may give the player the impression that they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor in reducing the desire to play. In this configuration, if the judgment result from the judgment means does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal miss result), the first display effect is executed. If the judgment result from the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) while in the first type of game state, the second display effect is executed. If the judgment result from the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) while in the second type of game state, the first display effect is executed. With this configuration, even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information during the second type of game state, it can be made less noticeable. This suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature AK2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is provided with means to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result),
In the aforementioned second type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is configured to invalidate that judgment result.
The game includes a display and effect execution means (symbol display device 95, notification and effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the multiple patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The game round control means is configured to control the predetermined notification means so that if a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during a game round in which either the first type of game state or the second type of game state is in play, the notification result corresponding to the determination result is obtained.
The display screen is provided with a first symbol combination (a symbol combination that normally indicates a losing result) and a second symbol combination (a symbol combination that indicates a special losing result) as the final symbol combinations to be displayed.
The display control means is
If the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (usually a wrong result), the means for stopping the display of the first pattern combination,
A gaming machine characterized by having means to stop displaying the second symbol combination when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) while the game is in the first type of game state, and means to stop displaying the first symbol combination when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) while the game is in the second type of game state.

According to Feature AK2, even if the trigger for transitioning to a special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to a Type 2 game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in terms of improving the integrity of the game. However, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the Type 2 game state, that judgment result becomes invalid. While this is desirable in suppressing the increase in gambling tendencies, there is a concern that if the player becomes aware of this result, it may give the player the impression that they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor in reducing the desire to play. In this configuration, if the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (a normal miss), the first symbol combination is displayed as stopped. If the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information (a special miss) while in the first type of game state, the second symbol combination is displayed as stopped. Similarly, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information (a special miss) while in the second type of game state, the first symbol combination is displayed as stopped. This configuration makes it less conspicuous even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information during the second type of game state. This suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature AK3. The game round control means includes an operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the game round operation,
The aforementioned operating period includes a first operating period (for example, 20 seconds to 30 seconds) and a second operating period shorter than the first operating period (for example, 3 seconds to 14 seconds).
The aforementioned operating period setting means is
A means for setting the first operation period as the operation period when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information under the conditions of the first type of game state,
In the situation where the second type of game state is in progress, if the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normally a losing result), means for setting the second operation period as the operation period,
The gaming machine according to feature AK1 or feature AK2, further comprising means for setting the second operating period as the operating period when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) while the game is in the second type of game state.

According to the configuration described in this feature, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) occurs during the first type of game state, the operation period becomes the first operation period. If a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal miss result) occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period becomes the second operation period. If a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period becomes the second operation period. By setting the operation period in this way, it is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity caused by the operation period and to suitably exhibit the effects shown in feature AK1, etc.

Feature AK4. The second operating period is a variable period that is variable within a predetermined range (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec),
The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The gaming machine according to feature AK3, characterized in that, when the determination result by the determination means is in the state of the second type of game, and the determination result is either a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normal failure result) or a determination result that corresponds to the second determination information (special failure result), and the second operation period is set as the operation period, the operation period becomes shorter as the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means increases.

In the second type of game state, balls frequently enter the starting ball entry area. Therefore, if the system is configured so that when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period is shortened according to the number of special information items, similar to when a judgment result not corresponding to the predetermined judgment information occurs, then the game round in which the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs can proceed smoothly and quickly, and the opportunities for the player to notice the notification result in the predetermined notification means can be effectively reduced.

Feature AK5. A pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination,
In the aforementioned first type of game state, a special performance execution means executes a special performance based on the result specified by the aforementioned prior identification means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features AK1 to AK4, characterized in that, when the game is in the second type of game state, it is equipped with a regulating means that restricts either the identification by the prior identification means or the special performance by the special performance execution means.

By executing special effects (preview effects, pre-reading effects) targeting the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information using the pre-identification means (so-called pre-reading), the monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. However, in such a configuration, if the special effect occurs during the second type of game state, it not only confuses the player but also significantly reduces the reliability of the special effect. Therefore, it is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by configuring the system to restrict either the above-mentioned identification or the special effect during the second type of game state.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AJ may also be applied to feature groups AK1 to AK5.

<Characteristics of the AL group>
The following feature group AL was developed in consideration of the background technology, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues, which state that "while the above-mentioned type of gaming machine can increase attention to gaming machines by promoting the diversification of games, there are concerns that this may lead to new problems such as increased complexity in the management of gaming machines in gaming halls."

Feature AL1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
A first execution count storage means (a game count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) stores the number of times the game was played after the special game state ended,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, the first reset means resets (clears to 0) the number of executions stored in the first execution count storage means (a function that clears the game count counter to 0 by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 in normal processing, which is a periodic process),
When the number of executions stored in the first execution count storage means reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times), a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) causes the system to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state,
A second execution count storage means (a continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) stores the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the transition was made by the first transition means,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, when the number of executions stored in the second execution count storage means reaches the termination criterion number (for example, 400 times), a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction consumption) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
When a predetermined reset operation (turning on the reset switch 166) is performed in conjunction with the power being turned on to the gaming machine, a second reset means (a function in which the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 clears the game count counter to 0 in the main processing executed at startup) resets (clears to 0) the number of executions stored in the first execution count storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising notification means (annular illuminated section 26 of the front door frame 14 and notification/performance control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (special notification) when the power is turned on without the predetermined reset operation and the game state before the power was cut off was the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode transitioned by the second transition means.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, balls enter the starting ball entry section more frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, to which the game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling, has an termination criterion number of rounds, and even if the ceiling is reached, there is a possibility that the predetermined game state will end without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during that predetermined game state (hereinafter also referred to as "ceiling rush"). This is desirable in order to avoid the benefit of reaching the ceiling becoming excessive and becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling. However, after a ceiling rush, the number of rounds stored in the first round count storage means is not reset, and it becomes impossible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power of the game machine is turned OFF → ON without performing a predetermined reset operation while in the state after a ceiling rush, a predetermined notification is executed. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to determine whether or not the machine has reached its maximum payout limit. Supporting the determination of the machine's state after reaching the maximum payout limit by simply turning on the power is desirable in terms of improving the manager's convenience.

Feature AL2. First operating means (performance button 35) and second operating means (reset switch 166),
The system includes a notification cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification when either the first operating means or the second operating means is operated while the predetermined notification is being performed.
The gaming machine according to feature AL1, characterized in that the execution count stored in the first execution count storage means is reset when the second operating means is operated while the predetermined notification is being performed.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the manager of the amusement hall can easily select how to respond to amusement machines that are displaying a predetermined notification, depending on the operating style of the amusement hall. In other words, they can choose to either cancel only the predetermined notification and leave the machine in a state where it has exceeded its ceiling limit, or to reset the ceiling limit. This configuration allows the effects described in feature AL1 to be more effectively realized.

Feature AL3. The gaming machine according to Feature AL2, characterized in that the first operating means is located on the front side of the gaming machine, and the second operating means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, by arranging the second operating means for resetting and canceling the notification on the back of the gaming machine and the first operating means for canceling the notification on the front of the gaming machine, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators while making it less likely for the player to reset the number of executions.

Feature AL4. The notification cancellation means is the first notification cancellation means,
The gaming machine according to feature AL2 or feature AL3, further comprising a second notification cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification when the power is cut off and then turned back on while the predetermined notification is being performed.

In gaming halls, numerous gaming machines are often installed in island-style setups. A larger number of machines means a greater number of machines triggering the aforementioned notification. Therefore, as described in this feature, if the notification is deactivated by turning the power OFF and then ON while the notification is active, it eliminates the need to perform the deactivation operation individually for each gaming machine, further improving the convenience for administrators.

Feature AL5. The notification means provides the predetermined notification by setting a light-emitting display unit (ring-shaped illuminated unit 26) provided on the front of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) to a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, fully lit).
A gaming machine according to any one of features AL1 to AL4, characterized in that it is provided with a regulating means for regulating the predetermined notification when the number of game rounds is progressing by the game round control means.

To make the designated notification as conspicuous as possible, there is technical merit in displaying the notification on a light-emitting display unit located on the front of the gaming machine. However, if the designated notification is missed or otherwise not canceled, the notification will continue even during the gaming hall's operating hours. In the configuration described in this feature, the designated notification is restricted at least while the game is in progress. This allows for the use of the light-emitting display unit for purposes such as visual effects. This is preferable in that it suppresses the missed notification while simultaneously suppressing the resulting decrease in the effectiveness of the visual effects.

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as follows: "The notification means provides the predetermined notification by setting the light-emitting display unit (ring-shaped illuminated unit 26) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine to a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, fully lit)."
The game machine according to any one of features AL1 to AL4, characterized in that the predetermined notification is canceled when a game round is started by the game round control means.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AK may also be applied to feature groups AL1 to AL5.

<Characteristics of the AM Group>
The following group of features AM were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AM1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a means for transitioning to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot),
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, balls enter the starting ball entry area frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, there is a possibility that the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information will be reached in the game rounds in which the ceiling is reached. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the above-mentioned duplication occurs, different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, if the result corresponds to the first information in the game rounds in which the upper limit is reached, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed, and if the result corresponds to the second information in the game rounds in which the upper limit is reached, a second display effect that does not indicate that the upper limit has been reached is executed. This configuration helps to prevent the game's presentation from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing player engagement.

Furthermore, the description of "predetermined judgment information" can also be rephrased as follows: "The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first set of information that gives the player a relatively high advantage (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second set of information that gives the player a relatively low advantage (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot)."

Feature AM2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state or a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the system is provided with means to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached).
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot),
When the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, the means for transitioning to the second type of game state via the special game state,
When the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the second information, the means for transitioning to the first type of game state via the special game state,
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, balls enter the starting ball entry area frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. However, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players cannot enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in order to increase the level of attention given to the game. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information in the game round in which the ceiling is reached (if there is a duplicate), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, in a game where the maximum number of plays is reached, if the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a high-frequency switching mode after the special game state ends), a first display effect indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a low-frequency switching mode after the special game state ends), a second display effect that does not indicate that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. With this configuration, when the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information and results in a special game state → high-frequency switching mode, the player can be led to believe that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. Conversely, when the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information and results in a special game state → low-frequency switching mode, the player can be led to believe that there was no benefit at all by not explicitly indicating that the ceiling has been reached. This configuration effectively improves player satisfaction and increases attention to the game.

Feature AM3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a means for transitioning to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached),
The system includes a means for transitioning to the first type of game state when the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state transitioned by the second transition means reaches the first termination criterion round (for example, 400 rounds) without the number of game rounds reaching the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information,
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R normal jackpot),
The determination means provides a means for transitioning to the second type of game state via the special game state when the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and a determination result corresponding to the second information.
The second type of game state, which is transitioned to after a judgment result corresponding to the first information, continues until the next judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information. On the other hand, the second type of game state, which is transitioned to after a judgment result corresponding to the second information, transitions back to the first type of game state when the next judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, or when the number of game rounds executed in the second type of game state becomes less than the first termination criterion number (for example, 40 rounds) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
The game includes a display and effect execution means (symbol display device 95, notification and effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, balls enter the starting ball entry area frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. However, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players cannot enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in order to increase the level of attention given to the game. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information in the game round in which the ceiling is reached (if there is a duplicate), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, in a game where the maximum number of plays is reached, if the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a high-frequency switching mode for long continuation after the special game state ends), the first display animation indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a high-frequency switching mode for short continuation after the special game state ends), the second display animation that does not indicate that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. With this configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information, resulting in a special game state → high-frequency switching mode for long continuation, the player can be led to believe that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. If the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information, resulting in a special game state → high-frequency switching mode for short continuation, the player can be led to believe that there was no benefit at all by not explicitly indicating that the ceiling has been reached. This configuration effectively improves player satisfaction and increases attention to the game.

Furthermore, the description in this feature that states "the second type of game state to which the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained is continued until the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained next, while the second type of game state to which the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained next is configured to transition to the first type of game state when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained next, or when the number of game rounds executed in the second type of game state becomes less than the first termination criterion number (for example, 40 rounds) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained" should be changed to "the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained In the transitioned Type 2 game state, if the number of game rounds reaches a second termination criterion number (e.g., 9999 rounds) that is greater than the first termination criterion number without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the system transitions back to the Type 1 game state. Conversely, in the transitioned Type 2 game state after the judgment result corresponding to the second information, if the number of game rounds reaches a third termination criterion number (e.g., 40 rounds) that is greater than the first termination criterion number without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the system transitions back to the Type 1 game state. This configuration can also be changed to:

Feature AM4. The display performance execution means is configured such that, in the first display performance, it performs a performance indicating that the upper limit has been reached, and then performs a performance indicating that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been obtained, whereas in the second display performance, the performance indicating that the upper limit has been reached is not performed, and instead, a performance indicating that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been obtained is performed. This is the gaming machine according to any one of Features AM1 to AM3.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the first display animation, executed when the judgment result corresponding to the first piece of information is reached, explicitly states that the ceiling has been reached, and then explicitly states that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been reached. With this configuration, the explicit statement that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been reached leads to a special game state, thus minimizing any sense of incongruity in the animation and making it appear as if two benefits are being granted.

Feature AM5. A game board (game board 80aA) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot),
A first transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the second information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode via the special game state,
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this predetermined game state, balls enter the starting ball entry section frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. However, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players cannot enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in order to increase the level of attention given to the game. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information in the number of games played that reaches the ceiling (if there is a duplicate), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, in the game rounds in which the maximum number of plays is reached, if the judgment result corresponds to the first information (i.e., the judgment result that results in the second switching mode after the special game state ends), the first display effect indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the judgment result corresponds to the second information (i.e., the judgment result that results in the first switching mode after the special game state ends) in the game rounds in which the maximum number of plays is reached, the second display effect that does not indicate that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. With this configuration, when the judgment result corresponds to the first information and results in the special game state → high-frequency switching mode (second switching mode), the player can be made to imagine that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. When the judgment result corresponds to the second information and results in the special game state → low-frequency switching mode (first switching mode), the player can be made to imagine that there is no benefit at all by not indicating that the ceiling has been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively improve player satisfaction and increase attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AM1 to M4 above may also be applied to feature AM5.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AL may also be applied to feature AM1 to AM3.

<Characteristics of the AN group>
The following group of features A and N were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AN1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the multiple patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special variable display means (a function that executes processing for re-variation display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140), which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be changed again before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has been displayed in a predetermined position after variable display by the special variable display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been obtained by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the system is configured to display a variable display again before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this variable display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated each time the symbol combination reaches a predetermined position, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of rounds required to terminate the current round. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature AN2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern rows (left pattern row, middle pattern row, right pattern row) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern rows and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized in that it has an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the movement of the predetermined combination of symbols when the predetermined combination of symbols is being displayed in a loop by the special loop display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping display (temporary stop display) of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of turns required to terminate the game. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature AN3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern rows (left pattern row, middle pattern row, right pattern row) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern rows and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has completed a cycle by the special cycle display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated according to the number of cycles of the predetermined combination of symbols, allowing the player to estimate or understand the current number of cycles until the game ends. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature AN4. The gaming machine according to Feature AN2 or Feature AN3, characterized in that the special lap display means is configured to perform the lap display in such a way that the predetermined combination of patterns is maintained.

As shown in Feature AN2, in a configuration where correlation information is updated by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols in a circular pattern, there is a concern that if circumstances occur during the circular process that cause the predetermined combination of symbols to break down, it may give the impression that the circular process is not being performed properly, i.e., that the correlation information is not being updated, leading to a premature decline in attention to the animation. Therefore, by configuring the circular display to maintain the predetermined combination of symbols, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such problems can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, such a configuration is preferable in that it avoids the misunderstanding by players that the display of the predetermined combination of symbols was merely a misreading.

Feature AN5. The gaming machine according to Feature AN2 or Feature AN3, characterized in that the special rotation display means is configured to perform the rotation display by synchronizing the multiple rows of symbols.

As shown in Feature AN2, in a configuration where correlation information is updated by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols in a circular pattern, there is a concern that if circumstances occur during the circular process that cause the predetermined combination of symbols to break down, it may give the impression that the circular process is not being performed properly, i.e., that the correlation information is not being updated, leading to a premature decline in attention to the animation. Therefore, by configuring the circular display to synchronize each sequence of symbols, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such problems can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, such a configuration is preferable in that it avoids the misunderstanding by the player that the display of the predetermined combination of symbols was merely a misreading.

Feature AN6. The gaming machine according to Feature AN4 or Feature AN5, characterized in that the other symbol combinations displayed in the special rotation display do not include the symbol combination corresponding to the first judgment information.

According to feature AN6, unnecessary hype that might suggest an upgrade to the result corresponding to the first judgment information can be suppressed, thereby effectively avoiding player misinterpretation. This is desirable in preventing a decrease in attention to the updates of correlation information linked to the special lap display.

Feature AN7. The correlation information notification means is configured to display the remaining number of times the termination criterion number of times will be reached as the correlation information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AN2 to AN6, characterized in that the information updating means is configured to add and display the remaining number of rounds as an update each time the predetermined combination of patterns is completed.

As shown in Feature AN7, if the remaining number of rounds is displayed incremented each time a predetermined combination of symbols completes a cycle, the player will expect the cycle to continue for as long as possible. This effectively suppresses the impression that the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is being unnecessarily delayed by this effect.

Feature AN8. The display control means has a lap count setting means that sets the number of laps using the special lap count display means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features AN2 to AN7, characterized in that the means for setting the number of laps is configured such that the number of laps increases as the number of set termination criteria increases.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AN8, the player expects the circling motion to continue for as long as possible, and this effectively suppresses the impression that the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is unnecessarily delayed by the aforementioned presentation.

Feature AN9. The display screen of the pattern display means is provided with multiple active lines.
The special stop display means is configured to set one of the multiple active lines as a stop line for displaying the predetermined combination of patterns.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AN2 to AN8, characterized in that the correlation information notification means is configured to update the correlation information when the predetermined combination of patterns reaches the stop line by the rotational display by the special rotational display means.

As shown in this feature, by aligning the stop line where a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed (temporarily stopped) with the stop line that triggers the update of correlation information, it is possible to suppress player confusion caused by the diversification of the presentation. This is preferable for effectively achieving the aforementioned effect of increasing attention.

Feature AN10. The gaming machine according to Feature AN9, characterized in that the special stop indicator means is configured to set the stop line such that at least one effective line is secured in front of the stop line in the rotational direction of the pattern.

According to the configuration described in this feature, it becomes possible to terminate the loop display when a predetermined combination of symbols reaches another valid line preceding the valid line (stop line) that triggers the update of correlation information. This is desirable for achieving diversification of the presentation.

Feature AN11. The game machine according to Feature AN9 or Feature AN10, characterized in that the correlation information notification means remains hidden when the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed by the special stop display means, and begins displaying the correlation information when the predetermined pattern combination reaches the stop line after variable display.

As shown in this feature, if the correlation information is kept hidden when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped), and the display of the correlation information is started when the predetermined combination of symbols reaches the stop line after being displayed in a variable manner, it becomes possible to make the predetermined combination of symbols complete at least one cycle. This is preferable because it broadens the range of the set termination criteria number of cycles while suppressing the resulting obsolescence of the cycle display → correlation information update flow.

Feature AN12. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the multiple patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special variable display means (a function that executes processing for re-variation display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140), which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be changed again before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has been displayed in a predetermined position after variable display by the special variable display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been obtained by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the system is configured to display a variable display again before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this variable display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated each time the symbol combination reaches a predetermined position, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of rounds required to terminate the current round. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature AN13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized in that it has an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the movement of the predetermined combination of symbols when the predetermined combination of symbols is being displayed in a loop by the special loop display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping display (temporary stop display) of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of turns required to terminate the game. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature AN14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has completed a cycle by the special cycle display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated according to the number of cycles of the predetermined combination of symbols, allowing the player to estimate or understand the current number of cycles until the game ends. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AN2 to N11 above may also be applied to features AN1, AN12 to AN14.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AM may also be applied to feature AN1 to AN14.

<Characteristics of the AO Group>
The following group of features AO were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AO1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a first prior identification means (a function that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the first determination information,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes processing for the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a restrictive means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140's MPU 442 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the other of the first special performance and the second special performance when one of them is being performed.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the current game round. However, the parallel execution of two types of special performances with different underlying results can be a source of confusion for players. This is undesirable when aiming to increase the level of attention to the game through special performances. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated by configuring the system to prevent the execution of one special effect while the other is being performed. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special effects described above.

Furthermore, the "regulatory measures" described in this feature are designed to avoid overlap between the first and second special performances, and include configurations that restrict the commencement of the other special performance while one is in progress, and configurations that forcibly terminate (cancel) the first special performance if the other special performance begins while the first special performance is in progress.

Feature AO2. The gaming machine according to Feature AO1, characterized in that the regulatory means is configured to prevent the other of the first and second special performances from starting when special information triggers the start of either the first or second special performance.

If both the first and second special effects are triggered by special information 1, one special effect will negate the other. This is a concern as it could confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by avoiding the execution of both the first and second special effects triggered by special information 1, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature AO1, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to prevent the other of the first and second special performances from starting based on special information that triggers the commencement of either the first or second special performance, or other special information that follows said special information."

Feature AO3. The gaming machine according to Feature AO1 or Feature AO2, characterized in that the regulating means starts the regulation when either the first special performance or the second special performance is performed by the first special performance execution means or the second special performance execution means, and terminates the regulation when the special performance ends.

As shown in this feature, configuring the system so that the execution of one special effect restricts the execution of the other is preferable for easing the constraints on the execution methods of the special effects. In other words, not only when the special effect starts immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed even if the execution conditions for the special effect are internally met, the two types of special effects can be suitably coexisted, and the constraints on the execution methods of the special effects can be suitably relaxed.

Feature AO4. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a first prior identification means (a function that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the first determination information,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes the processing of the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a restricting means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means when the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the game round in question. However, in a configuration in which the game transitions to a special game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, players who expect to transition to a special game state will focus on the first special performance. If the first special performance is initiated while the second special performance is in progress, it is highly likely that the player's attention will shift from the second to the first special performance. This is a concern as it may hinder the effectiveness of the second special performance in increasing player attention. In this regard, as shown in this feature, a configuration that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means from executing the second special performance while the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means can effectively eliminate the above concern. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special performances described above.

Furthermore, the "regulatory measures" described in this feature are designed to avoid overlap between the first and second special performances, and include configurations that restrict the initiation of a new first special performance and configurations that forcibly terminate (cancel) a first special performance that is currently running.

Feature AO5. The gaming machine according to Feature AO4, characterized in that the regulatory means is configured to prevent the first special performance from starting as a result of special information that triggered the start of the second special performance, or other special information that follows said special information.

If both the first and second special effects are triggered by special information 1, one special effect will negate the other. This is a concern as it could confuse players. In particular, in configurations where the first special effect is more anticipated than the second, the execution of the second special effect can reduce the reliability (expected value) of the first special effect. This can significantly reduce attention to the first special effect. Therefore, as shown in this feature, a configuration that restricts the initiation of the first special effect from being triggered by special information that initiated the second special effect, or by other special information following that information, can effectively suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems. For example, even if new special information is acquired before the second special effect ends, it is advisable to restrict the execution of the first special effect triggered by that new information.

Feature AO6. The gaming machine according to Feature AO4 or Feature AO5, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to start the regulation when the second special performance is performed by the second special performance execution means, and to end the regulation when the second special performance is completed.

As shown in this feature, configuring the system so that the first special performance is restricted when the second special performance is executed is preferable in terms of easing the constraints on the performance mode of the second special performance. In other words, not only when the second special performance is set to start immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed even when the execution conditions for the second special performance are internally met, the competition between the first and second special performances can be suitably suppressed, and the constraints on the performance mode of the second special performance can be suitably relaxed.

Feature AO7. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AO1 to Feature AO6, characterized in that, when the second special performance is executed by the second special performance execution means while the first special performance is being executed by the first special performance execution means, the machine is equipped with a cancellation means to cancel the first special performance.

If the system is configured so that the conditions for executing the second special performance can be met while the first special performance is running, then the opportunity to execute the second special performance can be appropriately secured. Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the second special performance are met while the first special performance is running, the first special performance can be stopped, thereby encouraging the player to focus on the second special performance.

Feature AO8. The gaming machine according to Feature AO7, characterized in that the cancellation means is configured to cancel the first special performance after the start of the second special performance when the second special performance is initiated by the second special performance execution means while the first special performance is being executed by the first special performance execution means.

As shown in Feature AO7, when canceling the first special effect, canceling the first special effect after the start of the second special effect allows the cancellation itself to become part of the effect, resulting in a practically desirable configuration for increasing attention to the game.

Feature AO9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AO1 to AO8, characterized in that, when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the machine is configured such that the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is more advantageous to the player than when the judgment result is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in Feature AO9, if the game is configured such that the advantage increases when the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the player will expect the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information to change to the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, thereby effectively increasing attention to the second special effect.

In particular, when combined with Feature AO7 or Feature AO8, if the Second Special Performance begins during the First Special Performance, the First Special Performance is canceled. In other words, the cancellation of the First Special Performance increases the expectation of a judgment result corresponding to the Second Judgment Information, thereby allowing the effect of canceling the First Special Performance to be more effectively realized.

Feature AO10. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AO1 to Feature AO9, characterized in that the timing at which the first special effect is initiated by the first special effect execution means in the game round is different from the timing at which the second special effect is initiated by the second special effect execution means in the game round.

As shown in Feature AO1, etc., in a configuration where the special effect begins before the relevant game round, it is assumed that the player's anticipation increases at the start of the special effect. Therefore, when using the first and second special effects in combination, if the timing of when the special effects begin in each game round is staggered, it is possible to effectively prevent the start (beginning) of each special effect from being missed.

Feature AO11. The gaming machine according to Feature AO10, characterized in that either the first special effect start timing or the second special effect start timing occurs in the first half of the game round, and the other occurs in the second half of the game round.

As shown in Feature AO10, by differentiating the start timing of the first and second special effects, and dividing them so that one occurs in the first half of the game round and the other in the second half, it is possible to suppress a decline in attention to the game throughout the entire game round.

Feature AO12. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a first prior identification means (a function that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the first determination information,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes processing for the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a restrictive means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140's MPU 442 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the other of the first special performance and the second special performance when one of them is being performed.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the current game round. However, the parallel execution of two types of special performances with different underlying results can be a source of confusion for players. This is undesirable when aiming to increase the level of attention to the game through special performances. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated by configuring the system to prevent the execution of one special effect while the other is being performed. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special effects described above.

Feature AO13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a first prior identification means (a function that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the first determination information,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes processing for the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a restricting means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means when the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the game round in question. However, in a configuration in which the game transitions to a special game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, players who expect to transition to a special game state will focus on the first special performance. If the first special performance is initiated while the second special performance is in progress, it is highly likely that the player's attention will shift from the second to the first special performance. This is a concern as it may hinder the effectiveness of the second special performance in increasing player attention. In this regard, as shown in this feature, a configuration that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means from executing the second special performance while the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means can effectively eliminate the above concern. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special performances described above.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AO2 to AO3 and features AO5 to AO11 may also be applied to features AO12 to AO13.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AN may be applied to features AO1 to AO13.

<Features AP Group>
The following set of feature APs was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AP1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140 to execute processing for a special miss notification performance) that performs a special performance in the special display unit to suggest or clearly indicate that the result of the determination by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and lead to unnecessary investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

Feature AP2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit by executing a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the prior identification means when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"). Since a special effect is executed according to the result of this pre-determination, the player can predict in advance whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature AP3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the specified special information, at least before the start of a game round related to the special information specified by the prior identification means, when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In this feature, the determination of whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"), and a special performance is executed according to the result of this pre-determination. Since this special performance is executed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that was the subject of the pre-determination, the player can predict in advance that there is a possibility of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature AP4. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AP1 to Feature AP3, characterized in that the special control means has means for initiating the special effect when the pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state on the pattern display unit.

In a configuration where the result is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed in the symbol display section, the player's attention to the game may rapidly decrease when they are notified that they have not won. Therefore, if a special effect is initiated under such circumstances, this special effect can effectively suppress the rapid decline in attention mentioned above.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is announced on the symbol display unit, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display unit. Therefore, by configuring the system to start the special effect during the stop display period when the need to focus on the symbol display unit decreases, the chances of missing the special effect can be reduced.

Feature AP5. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AP1 to Feature AP3, characterized in that the special control means has means to wait for the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit to stop before starting the special effect if the conditions for executing the special effect are met during the variable display of the symbols.

In a configuration where the result is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed in the symbol display section, the player's attention to the game may rapidly decrease when they are notified that they have not won. Therefore, if a special effect is initiated under such circumstances, this special effect can effectively suppress the rapid decline in attention mentioned above.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is announced on the symbol display unit, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display unit. Therefore, if the conditions for executing a special effect are met while the symbols are being displayed variably on the symbol display unit, a configuration that waits for the symbols to stop before starting the special effect can help prevent players from missing the special effect.

Feature AP6. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AP1 to Feature AP5, characterized in that the special display unit is positioned such that the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the special display unit is smaller than the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the pattern display unit.

In a configuration where special information is acquired based on ball entry into the starting ball entry area, players may focus their attention on the starting ball entry area. Therefore, by positioning the special display area closer to the starting ball entry area compared to the pattern display area, the chances of missing special effects can be effectively reduced.

Feature AP7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AP1 to Feature AP6, characterized in that the special display unit is located behind the portion of the flow path (left route) in which the game balls flow down toward the starting ball entry section within the game area, which is closer to the starting ball entry section.

In a configuration where special information is acquired based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, players can pay attention to the starting ball entry section and the movement of the game ball toward that section. Therefore, by positioning the special display section behind the part of the flow path (left route) where the game ball flows toward the starting ball entry section, the chances of missing the special effect can be effectively reduced.

Feature AP8. The special display unit comprises a first display unit (preview decorative unit 511D, 511F) that suggests that the result may correspond to the second determination information, and a second display unit (notification decorative unit 512D, 512F) that clearly indicates that the result corresponds to the second determination information.
The special control means has a configuration that, when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second information, executes a first display (preview display) on the first display unit that suggests there is a possibility of the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, and then executes a second display (result display) on the second display unit that clearly indicates that the determination result is corresponding to the second determination information, and when the determination result by the determination means is not a determination result corresponding to the second information, executes the first display on the first display unit as a special effect, while not executing the second display on the second display unit, as a special effect, the gaming machine according to any one of features AP1 to AP7.

If the first display unit suggests the possibility of a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information before the second display unit explicitly indicates that the result corresponds to the second judgment information, the chances of the second display unit being overlooked can be effectively reduced.

Feature AP9. The gaming machine according to Feature AP8, characterized in that the special display unit is formed such that the distance from the first display unit to the starting ball entry unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the starting ball entry unit.

In gaming machines where gameplay progresses based on ball entry into the starting ball entry area, players' attention tends to be drawn to this area. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming a special display area where the first display unit is positioned closer to the starting ball entry area (the starting ball entry area where the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is provided), the effect of preventing players from missing information, as shown in feature AP8, can be more effectively achieved.

Feature AP10. The first display unit is provided with a plurality of display modes, each with a different expected degree of determination corresponding to the second determination information.
The gaming machine according to feature AP8 or feature AP9, characterized in that the special control means has means for switching the display mode of the first display unit when the pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit.

When the symbols are displayed variably on the symbol display unit, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display unit. Therefore, by configuring the display unit to switch the display mode while the symbol combination is displayed in a stationary state, the likelihood of the player overlooking the change in display mode can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, while the display of the symbol combinations may momentarily decrease attention to the game, as shown in this feature, if the display mode of the first display unit is switched when the symbol combinations are displayed in a stopped state, the decrease in attention to the game can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AP1 to AP7, characterized in that, as the display mode of the special display unit in the special performance, there are multiple display modes with different expected values for the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, and the special control means can switch the display mode of the special display unit while the pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state on the pattern display unit."

Feature AP11. The number of special information items that can be stored in the acquired information storage means is limited (for example, four).
The pattern display unit is provided with a storage count display unit (a reserved display area of the pattern display device 95A) that displays the number of special information items stored in the acquired information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AP8 to AP10, characterized in that the special display unit is formed such that the distance from the first display unit to the memory count display unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the memory count display unit.

In gaming machines where there is an upper limit on the amount of special information acquired and stored based on ball entry into the starting ball entry section, adjustments may be made to temporarily refrain from launching balls in order to avoid unnecessary ball entries. Players making such adjustments pay attention to the movement of the game balls in and around the starting ball entry section, or to the display on the stored ball count display section. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming the special display section so that the first display section is closer to the stored ball count display section, the effect of preventing missed information, as shown in feature AP8, can be more effectively achieved.

Feature AP12. In the first game state, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system has means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AP1 to AP11, characterized in that the special control means has means for executing the special performance at least in the number of games played before the number of games played in which the upper limit is reached.

As shown in Feature AP12, if the system is configured to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode upon reaching the upper limit of play rounds, excessive investment can be suppressed and the soundness of the game can be enhanced. Even in such cases, by configuring the system so that the special effects described above are executed from the previous play round, the frequency of special effects (success patterns) can be appropriately increased to encourage the recognition that the occurrence of a special effect indicates a possibility of transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature AP13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140 to execute processing for a special miss notification performance) that performs a special performance in the special display unit to suggest or clearly indicate that the result of the determination by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and lead to unnecessary investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

Feature AP14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit by executing a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the prior identification means when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"). Since a special effect is executed according to the result of this pre-determination, the player can predict in advance whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature AP15. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the specified special information, at least before the start of a game round related to the special information specified by the prior identification means, when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In this feature, the determination of whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"), and a special performance is executed according to the result of this pre-determination. Since this special performance is executed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that was the subject of the pre-determination, the player can predict in advance that there is a possibility of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AP4 to AP12 above may also be applied to features AP13 to AP15.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AO may be applied to feature AP1 to feature AP15.

<Characteristic AQ Group>
The following set of features AQ was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AQ1. A gaming machine comprising a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) provided with light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F), and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein the light from the light-emitting unit is emitted forward of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover, and a light-emitting performance device (special performance device 500E, 500F) is provided,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a drive means (drive mechanisms 690E, 690F and notification/performance control device 140) for driving the light-emitting unit so that the light-emitting unit is displaced within a predetermined operating range that includes a first position in which light from the light-emitting element is irradiated onto a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting section, and a second position in which light from the light-emitting element is irradiated onto a non-light-diffusing region (non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light-transmitting section.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AQ1, by driving the light-emitting unit, the light-emitting element is displaced within a predetermined operating range that includes a first position where light is irradiated onto the light-diffusing region of the decorative cover, and a second position where light is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing region of the decorative cover. The appearance (light-emitting pattern) of the light-emitting device can be significantly changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting element) is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing region or the light-diffusing region. This effectively enhances the attention given to the light-emitting effect using the device. When performing such a light-emitting effect, changes in the position of the decoration itself are expected to degrade the appearance of the light-emitting device and reduce the impact of the light-emitting effect. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature effectively suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by moving the light-emitting unit among the decorative cover and light-emitting unit.

Feature AQ2. A gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting display device (special display device 500E, 500F) having a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein light from the light-emitting unit is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover,
The light-emitting unit is equipped with a driving means (driving mechanism 690E and notification/performance control device 140) for rotating it in a predetermined direction.
The light-emitting unit is configured to rotate in a predetermined direction so that the light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F) provided on the light-emitting unit pass through a predetermined path (trajectory PLa to PLf) which includes a first position where light is irradiated onto a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting section, and a second position where light is irradiated onto a non-light-diffusing region (non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light-transmitting section.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AQ2, by rotating the light-emitting unit, the light-emitting element is displaced to pass through a predetermined path that includes a first position where light is irradiated into the light-diffusing region of the decorative cover, and a second position where light is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region of the decorative cover. The appearance (light-emitting pattern) of the light-emitting device can be significantly changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting element) is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region or the light-diffusing region. This effectively enhances the attention given to the light-emitting effect using the device. When performing such a light-emitting effect, changes in the position of the decoration itself are expected to degrade the appearance of the light-emitting device and reduce the impact of the light-emitting effect. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature effectively suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by rotating the light-emitting unit among the decorative cover and light-emitting unit. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting unit rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly changed without interruption, which is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained attention-grabbing effect.

Feature AQ3. The gaming machine according to Feature AQ2, characterized in that the driving means is configured to rotate the light-emitting unit while the light-emitting element is maintained in an illuminated state.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the light-emitting unit to rotate while the light-emitting element remains lit, it is possible to seamlessly change not only the light-emitting pattern but also the location (position) of the light-emitting element, further enhancing the visual effect shown in feature AQ2.

Feature AQ4. The gaming machine according to Feature AQ2 or Feature AQ3, characterized in that the light-diffusing region is an uneven decoration provided on the decorative cover.

As shown in this feature, by creating a light-diffusing region through uneven decoration, it is possible to effectively suppress the fact that the presence of the light-diffusing region detracts from the appearance of the decorative cover.

Feature AQ5. The light diffusion regions are provided in multiple locations, with different arrangements in the predetermined direction.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AQ2 to AQ4, characterized in that the light-emitting element is configured to be displaced via the second position from a first position that irradiates light to one of the plurality of light-diffusing regions as the light-emitting unit rotates, to another first position that irradiates light to another of the light-diffusing regions.

According to feature AQ5, by configuring the system so that displacement from one light-diffusing region to another passes through a second position corresponding to a non-light-diffusing region, the contrast when changing the emission pattern can be enhanced.

Feature AQ6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AQ2 to Feature AQ5, characterized in that the emission pattern when light is irradiated into the light-diffusing region is linear, and the emission pattern when light is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region is dotted.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the luminescence pattern to vary between dots and lines, the appearance can be significantly altered.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features AQ2 to AQ5, characterized in that the light emission pattern when light is irradiated into the light-diffusing region is different from the light emission pattern when light is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region."

Feature AQ7. Having multiple light-emitting elements,
The light-emitting unit is configured such that if any of the plurality of light-emitting elements is located at the second position, any of the other light-emitting elements is located at the first position, as described in any one of features AQ2 to AQ6.

The configuration described in this feature allows for the simultaneous display of luminous patterns with and without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the visual appeal of the luminous effect and effectively achieving the attention-grabbing effect mentioned above.

Feature AQ8. The light-transmitting portion has a planar shape that intersects with the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AQ2 to AQ7, characterized in that the surface of the light-transmitting portion facing the light-emitting unit is flat, and the surface of the light-transmitting portion facing away from the light-emitting unit is decorated with an uneven surface.

As shown in Feature AQ8, by forming irregularities on the front side of the light-transmitting section that provide light diffusion and decorative functions, and making the back side flat, the operating gap between the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover can be reduced, thereby promoting a thinner light-emitting display device.

Feature AQ9. A gaming machine comprising a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein the light from the light-emitting unit is emitted forward of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover, and a light-emitting performance device (special performance device 500E, 500F) is provided,
One of the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover is a movable body that can rotate about an axis (central axis CL1) extending in the direction in which the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover are arranged side by side.
The movable body is equipped with a driving means (driving mechanism 690E and notification/performance control device 140) for rotating the movable body about the axis,
The movable body is configured such that, by rotating about the axis, it enters a first state in which light from the light-emitting body is irradiated onto the light-diffusing regions (light-diffusing regions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting portion, and a second state in which light from the light-emitting body is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing regions (non-light-diffusing regions 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light-transmitting portion.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AQ9, the relationship between the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover changes as the movable body rotates, switching between a relationship where light is irradiated into the light-diffusing region and a relationship where light is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region. Because the appearance (light emission pattern) of the light-emitting device changes significantly depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting body) is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region or the light-diffusing region, the level of attention drawn to the light-emitting effect using the device can be effectively increased. Furthermore, by making the movable body rotatable, the light emission pattern can be repeatedly changed without interruption, which is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention.

Feature AQ10. The gaming machine according to Feature AQ9, characterized in that the driving means is configured to rotate the movable body while the light-emitting element is maintained in an illuminated state.

According to Feature AQ10, by configuring the light-emitting unit to rotate while the light-emitting element remains lit, it is possible to seamlessly change not only the light-emitting pattern but also the location (position) of the light-emitting element, further enhancing the visual effects shown in Feature AQ2.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AQ3 to AQ8 above may also be applied to features AQ1 and AQ9 to AQ10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AP may be applied to feature AQ1 to AQ10.

<Features of AR Group>
The following AR features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AR1. A gaming machine comprising a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) on which light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F) are provided, and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein the light-emitting device (special effect device 500E, 500F) is configured such that light from the light-emitting unit is emitted forward through the cover,
The light-emitting unit and the cover are movable bodies that operate while maintaining the distance relationship between the light-emitting unit and the cover.
The system includes a drive mechanism (drive mechanism 690E and notification/performance control device 140) for operating the movable body,
The cover is provided with a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing portions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in which a plurality of linear light-diffusing portions (for example, annular protrusions 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F) are arranged radially with respect to a predetermined axis extending in the direction in which the light-emitting unit and the cover are installed side by side.
The light-emitting unit is configured such that the optical axis of the light-emitting element faces the direction of parallel arrangement.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the driving means is configured to drive the movable body such that the distance from the predetermined axis to the optical axis of the light-emitting body changes while maintaining the overlap between the optical axis of the light-emitting body and the light-diffusing region in the parallel arrangement direction.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AR1, light irradiated onto the light diffusion region is diffused in the direction of the arrangement of the linear light diffusion parts (a direction intersecting a predetermined axis). This results in a band-shaped (linear) light emission pattern extending in a direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-shaped light emission pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and this displacement enhances the visual impact of the light emission effect. This effectively increases the level of attention given to the game.

Feature AR2. A gaming machine comprising a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) equipped with light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F), and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein the light from the light-emitting unit is emitted forward through the cover, and the gaming machine is equipped with a light-emitting effect device (special effect device 500E, 500F),
The light-emitting unit is provided with a driving means (driving mechanism 690E and notification/effect control device 140) that operates it while maintaining the distance relationship with the cover,
The cover is provided with a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing portions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in which a plurality of linear light-diffusing portions (e.g., annular protrusions) are arranged radially with respect to a predetermined axis extending in the direction in which the light-emitting unit and the cover are installed side by side.
The light-emitting unit is configured such that the optical axis of the light-emitting element faces the direction of parallel arrangement.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the driving means is configured to drive the light-emitting unit such that the distance from the predetermined axis to the light-emitting element's optical axis changes while maintaining the overlap between the optical axis of the light-emitting element and the light-diffusing region in the parallel arrangement direction.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AR2, light irradiated onto the light diffusion region is diffused in the direction of the arrangement of the linear light diffusion parts (a direction intersecting a predetermined axis). This results in a band-shaped (linear) light emission pattern extending in a direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-shaped light emission pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and this displacement enhances the visual impact of the light emission effect. This effectively increases the level of attention given to the game.

Feature AR3. The gaming machine according to Feature AR2, characterized in that, when the light-emitting unit is driven by the driving means, the optical axis of the light-emitting element is displaced so as to straddle the plurality of light-diffusing sections in accordance with the operation of the light-emitting unit.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the optical axis to be displaced across multiple light-diffusing sections, it is possible to create variations in the light diffusion pattern (luminescence pattern) depending on the light-diffusing section intersecting the optical axis. Diversifying the luminescence pattern in this way is desirable for suppressing monotony in the light-emitting effect.

Feature AR4. The gaming machine according to Feature AR2 or Feature AR3, characterized in that the light-diffusing portion is a textured decoration formed on the cover.

According to Feature AR4, in a configuration where the uneven decorative surface also functions as a light diffuser, it is anticipated that the visual impact will be reduced when the cover moves. However, in combination with Feature AR2, the configuration involves operating the light-emitting unit located behind the cover, rather than the cover itself, thus avoiding such problems.

Feature AR5. The light-emitting unit is rotatable.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AR2 to AR4, characterized in that the rotational central axis (central axis CL1) of the light-emitting unit is separated from the predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis.

By making the light-emitting unit rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly and seamlessly changed. This is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention. In particular, as shown in this feature, configuring the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit to be spaced away from a predetermined axis and parallel to that predetermined axis is preferable for creating changes in the light-emitting pattern that accompany rotation.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the light diffusion section to be arc-shaped, and to make the radius of the path (trajectory PLa to PLf) through which the light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates, different from the radius of the light diffusion section.

Feature AR6. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AR2 to Feature AR5, characterized in that the light-diffusing portion is in the shape of a protrusion or groove.

As shown in this feature, by making the light-diffusing portion into a ridge or groove shape, a configuration that diffuses light in the direction of the arrangement of the light-diffusing portion can be suitably realized through three-dimensional decoration.

Feature AR7. The gaming machine according to Feature AR6, characterized in that the light-diffusing portion is formed such that all of its side surfaces (side surfaces 718E) are inclined surfaces that are inclined with respect to the predetermined axis.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the side surface of the light-diffusing section to be inclined with respect to a predetermined axis, some of the light from the light-emitting element can be reflected and guided to other light-diffusing sections. This is preferable for increasing the overall length of the band-shaped light-emitting pattern, thereby emphasizing the visual difference (point-like/band-like).

Feature AR8. A flat surface is formed between the light-diffusing sections.
The gaming machine according to feature AR7, characterized in that the rotating trajectory through which the light-emitting element passes and the planar portion are formed to overlap when viewed in the direction of the rotational axis.

The configuration shown in Feature AR8 allows the shape of the luminescent pattern (e.g., the overall length) to be changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting element is shone on an inclined surface or a flat surface. In other words, the shape of the luminescent pattern changes in accordance with the change in its position. Such a configuration is preferable for suppressing monotony in the luminescent effect.

Feature AR9. The light diffusion section has a first light diffusion section, a second light diffusion section, and a third light diffusion section.
The gaming machine according to feature AR8, characterized in that the width of the planar portion formed between the first light-diffusing portion and the second light-diffusing portion is different from the width of the planar portion formed between the second light-diffusing portion and the third light-diffusing portion.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the width (length in the direction of arrangement) of each planar section to be different, it is possible to more effectively generate changes in the shape of the luminescent pattern (e.g., the overall length) depending on the object being illuminated.

Feature AR10. The light-emitting unit is rotatable.
The rotational axis (central axis CL1) of the light-emitting unit is separated from the predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis.
The light-emitting body comprises a first light-emitting body and a second light-emitting body having a different distance from the rotational center axis from the first light-emitting body.
A gaming machine according to any one of features AR2 to AR9, characterized in that the length of the portion that overlaps with the light diffusion region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory (e.g., trajectory PLe) through which the first light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates is different from the length of the portion that overlaps with the light diffusion region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory (e.g., trajectory PLg) through which the second light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates.

By making the light-emitting unit rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly and seamlessly changed. This is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention. In particular, as shown in this feature, configuring the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit to be spaced away from a predetermined axis and parallel to that predetermined axis is preferable for creating changes in the light-emitting pattern that accompany rotation.

Furthermore, by configuring the light-emitting unit so that the length of the portion overlapping the light-diffusing region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory through which the first light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates is different from the length of the portion overlapping the light-diffusing region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory through which the second light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates, a configuration that differs the rotation range (angle) over which the light-emitting pattern is displayed in the first light-diffusing region can be suitably realized. In a configuration where the cover's decoration functions as a light-diffusing section, there may be strong constraints on the shape and size of the light-diffusing section in order to perform its decorative function. Therefore, by configuring the light-emitting section so that multiple light-emitting elements can pass behind the first light-diffusing region as shown in this feature, and by differentiating the rotation ranges, the appearance of the light-emitting effect can be improved while suitably eliminating the inconveniences caused by this.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the light diffusion section to be arc-shaped, and to make the radius of the trajectory (trajectory PLa to PLf) through which the light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates different from the radius of the light diffusion section. It is also possible to define the "trajectory" as a "predetermined path" in this feature.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AR3 to AR10 above may also be applied to feature AR1.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AQ may be applied to feature AR1 to AR10.

<Characteristic AS Group>
The following set of features AS was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AS1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to Feature AS1, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

In this configuration, specifically, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs via a special transition means is determined before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit, based on the result of a determination by the prior determination means. If it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit. This configuration suppresses excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and provides a sense of security to players who are anticipating reaching the ceiling. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and further increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Furthermore, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" may be changed to "Special effect execution means that, based on the determination result by the transition determination means, executes a special effect before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit." Incidentally, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" can also be changed to "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit."

Feature AS2. A game board (game board 80aB) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the first storage means is configured to be more favorable to the player than the determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the second storage means.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to Feature AS2, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the second starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player compared to the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section. In other words, by transitioning to the second switching mode and having the ball enter the second starting ball entry section → judgment, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is enhanced. In such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information just before reaching the ceiling, the player will not be able to enjoy this benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that players who expect to reach the ceiling will play the game expecting that the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, at least just before reaching the ceiling. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by a special transition means is determined before the number of games that will reach the upper limit, based on the result of the prior identification means, and if it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of games that will reach the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and give a sense of security to players who expect to reach the ceiling. This is desirable in terms of improving player satisfaction and further increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Furthermore, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" may be changed to "Special effect execution means that, based on the determination result by the transition determination means, executes a special effect before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit." Incidentally, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" can also be changed to "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit."

Feature AS3. The game machine according to Feature AS2, characterized in that the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will occur if the prior identification means determines that all game rounds performed up to the upper limit of play result in a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, and determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will not occur if the prior identification means determines that any of the game rounds performed up to the upper limit of play result in a determination result that corresponds to the predetermined determination information.

As shown in Feature AS3, if it is determined in advance that all game rounds performed before reaching the upper limit will result in a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, then it is determined that a state transition by the special transition means will occur. Conversely, if it is determined in advance that any of the game rounds performed before reaching the upper limit will result in a judgment result that corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, then it is determined that a state transition by the special transition means will not occur. This configuration allows for a suitable implementation of the technical concept shown in Feature AS2.

Feature AS4. The game machine according to Feature AS2 or Feature AS3, characterized in that the transition determination means includes a memory count determination means that determines whether the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the number of remaining game rounds until the upper limit is reached, and if the memory count determination means determines that the number of special information has reached the corresponding number, it determines whether a transition by the special transition means occurs.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to determine whether a transition by a special transition mechanism occurs when the number of special information items stored reaches the number of remaining executions that would otherwise reach the upper limit, the increase in control load caused by the implementation of special effects can be suppressed. For example, compared to a configuration that determines whether a transition by a special transition mechanism occurs each time special information is added, the control load can be significantly reduced.

Feature AS5. The gaming machine according to Feature AS4, characterized in that the memory count determination means is configured to determine whether the memory count has reached the corresponding number when special information is acquired by the special information acquisition means.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to determine whether a transition by a special transition mechanism occurs when special information is added, the special effects can be initiated quickly.

Feature AS6. The predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (jackpot result A, which is a jackpot result corresponding to the low probability mode) and second judgment information (jackpot result B, which is a jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode),
The judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is configured to be more favorable to the player than the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AS2 to AS5, characterized in that the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is configured to more easily result in a determination corresponding to the second determination information than the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section.

As shown in this feature, in a gaming machine where the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is more advantageous to the player than the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode increases the benefits when the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information. In such a configuration, by using a special effect to inform the player early that the ceiling has been reached, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of situations where the player is unable to effectively enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. Specifically, even after the ceiling has been reached, if the launch of game balls toward the first starting ball entry section continues, the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information may occur in the game round related to the special information obtained (the game round after reaching the ceiling), but the occurrence of such inconveniences can be effectively suppressed.

Feature AS7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AS2 to Feature AS6, characterized in that the special effect is initiated in a game round before the game round in which the maximum number of occurrences is reached, and continues at least until the game round in which the maximum number of occurrences is reached.

In a configuration where the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, which is equipped with a variable mechanism, is given preferential treatment over the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, it cannot be ruled out that even after the maximum number of rounds (ceiling) has been determined in advance, game balls may be launched, resulting in further ball entry into the first starting ball entry section. If special information is obtained through such ball entry, the player may not be able to effectively enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. This is a concern as it could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, if the system is configured so that the special effect continues at least until the ceiling is reached, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively suppressed, such as the special effect being overlooked.

Feature AS8. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AS2 to Feature AS7, characterized in that the special effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect when a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, and when none of the game rounds executed up to the upper limit of the number of rounds are corresponding to a reach display, which is one of the game round effects executed in parallel with the game round operation.

In a configuration where a "reach" display indicates that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information has been reached, there is a concern that the start of a special effect will make it obvious that the reach display is a so-called false effect, thus diminishing the effect of the reach display in increasing attention to the game. This is also expected to reduce the reliability of the reach display. Therefore, in this feature, if the reach display is executed before the ceiling is reached when the upper limit of the number of plays has been confirmed, the special effect is refrained from being executed. This allows the special effect function and the reach display function to coexist appropriately.

Feature AS9. As one of the game round effects that is performed in parallel with the game round operation, there is a first reach display mode and a second reach display mode which has a lower probability of resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information than the first reach display mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AS2 to AS7, characterized in that when a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, and any of the game rounds performed before the upper limit is reached corresponds to a reach display of the second reach display mode, the machine is provided with means to change the reach display mode to the first reach display mode.

In a configuration where the reach display indicates that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information will be achieved, there is a concern that the execution of the reach display in the second reach display mode, which has a higher expectation level, during a special performance may unnecessarily heighten the player's anxiety. This could be a factor in reducing player satisfaction. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the maximum number of plays (ceiling) is confirmed to be reached and a special performance is executed, the reach display mode executed during the special performance can be changed from the second reach display mode, which has a relatively higher expectation level, to the first display mode, which has a relatively lower expectation level, thereby effectively suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature AS10. Includes a suggestion performance execution means that performs a suggestion performance based on the result of prior identification by the prior identification means, which suggests that the relevant special information will result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information before the determination means becomes the subject of the determination,
A gaming machine according to any one of features AS2 to AS9, characterized in that, after the special performance is initiated by the special performance execution means, the suggestion performance by the suggestion performance execution means is restricted from being performed until at least the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit has ended.

In a configuration where suggestive effects indicate that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information will be reached, there is a concern that players may become confused if these suggestive effects overlap with the special effects mentioned above. This is undesirable as it can be a drawback of diversifying the effects. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above concern can be suitably resolved by configuring the system to prevent the suggestive effects from being executed while the special effects are running.

Feature AS11. The system includes a suggestion presentation execution means that, based on the result of prior identification by the prior identification means, performs a suggestion presentation that indicates that the relevant special information will result in a determination corresponding to the predetermined determination information before the determination means becomes the subject of the determination,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect while the suggestive effect is being executed.
A gaming machine according to any one of features AS2 to AS10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for canceling the suggestive performance if the special performance is started before the suggestive performance ends.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to allow special effects to be executed even during suggestive effects, opportunities for special effects to be executed can be appropriately secured. As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to stop the suggestive effects when special effects begin, the player can be given the impression that the special effects have negated the suggestive effects (an impression that an advantage has been guaranteed), thereby appropriately improving player satisfaction.

Feature AS12. The gaming machine according to Feature AS11, characterized in that the timing of the cancellation of the suggestive effect by the cancellation means is configured to occur at a predetermined timing after the start of the special effect.

As shown in this feature, by shifting the timing of the suggestion effect's termination to a later timing than the special effect's start, it becomes possible to suppress the oversight of the suggestion effect's termination and to optimally exhibit the effect shown in feature AS11.

Feature AS13. A game board (game board 80aB) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to feature AS13, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

In this configuration, specifically, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs via a special transition means is determined before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit, based on the result of a determination by the prior determination means. If it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit. This configuration suppresses excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and provides a sense of security to players who are anticipating reaching the ceiling. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and further increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Feature AS14. A game board (game board 80aB) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the first storage means is configured to be more favorable to the player than the determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the second storage means.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to feature AS14, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the second starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player compared to the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section. In other words, by transitioning to the second switching mode and having the ball enter the second starting ball entry section → judgment, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is enhanced. In such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information just before reaching the ceiling, the player will not be able to enjoy this benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that players who expect to reach the ceiling will play the game expecting that the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, at least just before reaching the ceiling. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by a special transition means is determined before the number of games that will reach the upper limit, based on the result of the prior identification means, and if it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of games that will reach the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and give a sense of security to players who expect to reach the ceiling. This is desirable in terms of improving player satisfaction and further increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Furthermore, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" may be changed to "Special effect execution means that, based on the determination result by the transition determination means, executes a special effect before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit." Incidentally, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" can also be changed to "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features AS3 to AS12 above may also be applied to Features AS1, AS13, and AS14.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AR may be applied to feature AS1 to AS14.

<Features of AT Group>
The following set of AT features was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AT1. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901I) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
The variable mechanism has a predetermined passage formed by the movable piece through which game balls flowing in from the inlet portion of the variable mechanism (for example, the inlet 921G) pass.
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding game balls located in the predetermined passage to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while it functions as a return passage for returning game balls located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding them to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state.
The control means for the variable mechanism controls the variable mechanism so that, when the switching control mode is set to the first switching mode and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state, the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through the predetermined passage; and when the switching control mode is set to the third switching mode and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state, the control means controls the variable mechanism so that the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

As shown in this feature, using the first, second, and third switching modes in combination can help prevent the game from becoming monotonous. While the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode remains the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery remains unchanged. In such a configuration, frequent switching of the variable mechanism (movable piece) to the acceptance state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the acceptance period described later is extremely short) is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and is a concern as it may hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through a predetermined passage. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to effectively suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing in, and the loss of opportunities for balls to enter other ball entry sections such as the variable ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing into the variable mechanism. This allows the aforementioned effect of improving attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Feature AT2. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The variable mechanism has a predetermined passage formed by the movable piece through which game balls flowing in from the inlet portion of the variable mechanism (for example, the inlet 921G) pass.
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding game balls located in the predetermined passage to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while it functions as a return passage for returning game balls located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding them to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state.
The control means for the variable mechanism controls the variable mechanism so that, when the switching control mode is set to the first switching mode and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state, the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through the predetermined passage; and when the switching control mode is set to the third switching mode and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state, the control means controls the variable mechanism so that the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, although the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode without going through the special game state is the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. In this configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased to enhance the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery and the opportunities for the variable mechanism to enter the accepting state will also increase in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is short. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) frequently switches to the accepting state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the accepting period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and there are concerns that this will hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through a predetermined passage. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to effectively suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing in, and the loss of opportunities for balls to enter other ball entry sections such as the variable ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing into the variable mechanism. This allows the aforementioned effect of improving attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AT3. The variable mechanism has a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and when a drive signal is output from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit, the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the acceptance state, and when the output of the drive signal from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit is stopped, the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the non-acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism is,
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state while the switching control mode is the first switching mode, an output period is set during which a drive signal is output to the drive unit so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage.
The gaming machine according to feature AT1 or feature AT2, characterized in that when the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state while the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is set so that the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

The movable piece shown in this feature is maintained in the first position while the drive signal is output, and is displaced to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means when the drive signal output is stopped. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, the drive signal output period is set so that the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. When the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, the drive signal output period is set so that the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through a predetermined passage. This allows the effects shown in feature AT1, etc., to be optimally exhibited.

Feature AT4. The variable mechanism is configured such that when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is positioned on a specific part of the movable piece (for example, the second surface portion 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.
When a game ball is located in a non-specific portion of the movable piece (the portion upstream of the imaginary line FL2 in the planar portions 905G to 905I), the movable piece is pushed by the game ball in a direction opposite to the direction of biasing by the biasing means.
The specified portion and the non-specified portion are such that the non-specified portion is located on the entrance portion side and the specified portion is located on the starting ball entry portion side.
The gaming machine according to feature AT3, characterized in that, when the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state under the condition that the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is defined to be longer than the required period for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner to pass through the non-specific portion.

According to the configuration described in this feature, in the first switching mode, the output of the drive signal is stopped after the game ball passes through the non-specific section. This suppresses the effect of the game ball's own weight hindering the displacement of the movable piece to the second position, thereby suitably improving the return responsiveness of the movable piece to the second position.

Feature AT5. The variable mechanism is configured such that when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is positioned on a specific part of the movable piece (for example, the second surface portion 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.
The gaming machine according to feature AT3 or feature AT4, characterized in that, when the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state under the condition that the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is defined to be longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner to reach the specific portion.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the output of the drive signal is stopped when the game ball reaches a specific part. This causes the movable piece to be displaced to the second position by both the weight of the game ball and the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby suitably increasing the displacement speed of the movable piece. This is preferable for improving the return responsiveness of the movable piece to the second position.

Feature AT6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AT3 to Feature AT5, characterized in that, in any of the first, second, and third switching modes, the period from when the output of the drive signal is stopped until the output of the drive signal is started again is longer than the required period for the game balls that have passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner to be discharged into the game area through the predetermined passage.

As shown in Feature AT1, etc., in a configuration where a predetermined flow path formed by the movable piece of the variable mechanism functions as both a guide passage and a discharge passage, it is disadvantageous for the player if the switch to the receiving state is hindered by the game balls being discharged. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by defining the period from the stop of drive signal output to the start of drive signal output to be longer than the required period from when the game balls pass through the inlet of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner until they are discharged into the game area through the predetermined passage, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and the decrease in reliability of the game machine in achieving the effects shown in Feature AT1, etc. can be prevented.

Feature AT7. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AT1 to Feature AT6, characterized in that the required time from when a game ball passes through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner until it is discharged into the game area through the predetermined passage is shorter than the required time from when a game ball passes through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner until it enters the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

If a game ball that has entered the variable mechanism remains in the designated passage for an extended period, even though it cannot enter the starting ball entry section, this can cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is preferable to configure the system so that the time required for the ball to be discharged into the game area through the designated passage is shorter than the time required for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section through the designated passage.

Feature AT8. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AT1 to Feature AT7, characterized in that when the predetermined passage functions as the discharge passage, the inclination of the passage bottom surface is greater than when the predetermined passage functions as the guide passage.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the machine switches to a non-receiving state, the game balls located within a predetermined passage are quickly ejected from that passage. This is advantageous in preventing the game balls from interfering with the next switching to the receiving state of the variable mechanism and in shortening the interval when the open state is repeated.

Feature AT9. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901I) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The variable mechanism has a predetermined passage formed by the movable piece through which the game balls that flow in from the inlet portion of the variable mechanism pass.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first mode.
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding game balls located in the predetermined passage to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while it functions as a return passage for returning game balls located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding them to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state.
The control means for the variable mechanism is,
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state while the switching control mode is set to the first mode, an output period is set during which a drive signal is output to the drive unit so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state while the switching control mode is set to the second mode, the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is set so that the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the second mode and set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through a predetermined passage. When the variable mechanism is in the first mode and set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, even in the first mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to effectively suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing in, and the impairment of opportunities for balls to enter other ball entry sections such as the variable ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing into the variable mechanism. This allows the aforementioned effect of improving attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Feature AT10. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901J) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the said flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The variable mechanism has a predetermined passage formed by the movable piece through which the game balls that flow in from the inlet portion of the variable mechanism pass.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first mode.
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding game balls located in the predetermined passage to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while it functions as a return passage for returning game balls located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding them to the start ball entry section when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state.
The control means for the variable mechanism controls the variable mechanism so that, when the switching control mode is set to the first mode and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state, the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through the predetermined passage; and when the switching control mode is set to the second mode and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state, the control means controls the variable mechanism so that the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the second mode and set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the entrance of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through a predetermined passage. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the entrance of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, even in the first mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to effectively suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing in, and the loss of opportunities for balls to enter other ball entry sections such as the variable ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing into the variable mechanism. This allows the aforementioned effect of improving attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AT3 to AT8 above may also be applied to features AT9 to AT10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AS may be applied to feature AT1 to feature AT10.

<Features of AU Group>
The following set of features AUs were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Features AU1 (main). A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901I) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface sections 904G to 904I) that distributes game balls to a first flow path (winning route) that guides game balls to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide game balls to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface sections 903G to 903I) that guides game balls that have passed through the inlet section (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is positioned in the second position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the second flow path.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured such that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the period for outputting the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period for the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution portion, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the period for outputting the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period for the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution portion.

As shown in this feature, using the first, second, and third switching modes in combination can help prevent the game from becoming monotonous. While the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode remains the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery remains unchanged. In such a configuration, frequent switching of the variable mechanism (movable piece) to the acceptance state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the acceptance period described later is extremely short) is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and is a concern as it may hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through the first flow path. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing the inflow of game balls into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to suitably suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section caused by an increase in the number of balls entering. This allows the aforementioned effect of improving attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, since the movable piece (distribution section) begins to displace toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to gain time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. This is preferable in suppressing excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Feature AU2. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface sections 904G to 904I) that distributes game balls to a first flow path (winning route) that guides game balls to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide game balls to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface sections 903G to 903I) that guides game balls that have passed through the inlet section (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is positioned in the second position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the second flow path.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured such that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the period for outputting the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period for the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution portion, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the period for outputting the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period for the game balls that have passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution portion.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, although the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode without going through the special game state is the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. In this configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased to enhance the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery and the opportunities for the variable mechanism to enter the accepting state will also increase in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is short. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) frequently switches to the accepting state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the accepting period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and there are concerns that this will hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through the first flow path. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing the inflow of game balls into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to suitably suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section caused by an increase in the number of balls entering. This allows the aforementioned effect of improving attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, since the movable piece (distribution section) begins to displace toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to gain time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. This is preferable in suppressing excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Incidentally, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" shown in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AU3. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901I) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface sections 904G to 904I) that distributes game balls to a first flow path (winning route) that guides game balls to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide game balls to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface sections 903G to 903I) that guides game balls that have passed through the inlet section (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is positioned in the second position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the second flow path.
The game area has a first inflow passage (first route R1) and a second inflow passage (second route R2) formed as inflow passages for flowing into the entrance portion of the variable mechanism.
The speed at which the game balls move when they enter the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inflow passage is configured to be slower than the speed at which they move when they enter the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inflow passage.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured such that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage to reach the distribution unit, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage to reach the distribution unit.

As shown in this feature, using the first, second, and third switching modes in combination can help prevent the game from becoming monotonous. While the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode remains the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery remains unchanged. In such a configuration, frequent switching of the variable mechanism (movable piece) to the acceptance state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the acceptance period described later is extremely short) is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and is a concern as it may hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls entering the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage are guided to the starting ball entry section via the first flow path. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls entering the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage are prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing game balls to enter, the deterioration of the player's impression can be suppressed. Furthermore, excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls entering can be effectively suppressed. This allows the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, since the movable piece (distribution section) begins to displace toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to gain time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. This is preferable in suppressing excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Feature AU4. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface sections 904G to 904I) that distributes game balls to a first flow path (winning route) that guides game balls to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide game balls to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface sections 903G to 903I) that guides game balls that have passed through the inlet section (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is positioned in the second position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the second flow path.
The game area has a first inflow passage (first route R1) and a second inflow passage (second route R2) formed as inflow passages for flowing into the entrance portion of the variable mechanism.
The speed at which the game balls move when they enter the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inflow passage is configured to be slower than the speed at which they move when they enter the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inflow passage.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured such that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage to reach the distribution unit, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage to reach the distribution unit.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, although the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode without going through the special game state is the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. In this configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased to enhance the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery and the opportunities for the variable mechanism to enter the accepting state will also increase in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is short. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) frequently switches to the accepting state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the accepting period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and there are concerns that this will hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls entering the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage are guided to the starting ball entry section via the first flow path. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls entering the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage are prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing game balls to enter, the deterioration of the player's impression can be suppressed. Furthermore, excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls entering can be effectively suppressed. This allows the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, since the movable piece (distribution section) begins to displace toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to gain time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. This is preferable in suppressing excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Incidentally, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" shown in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AU5. The gaming machine according to Feature AU3 or Feature AU4, characterized in that, when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal by the control means for the variable mechanism is defined to be longer than the required time for the game balls that have passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the second inflow passage to reach the distribution section.

In the configuration described in this feature, game balls that enter the variable mechanism via the second inflow passage may enter the starting ball entry section. This configuration, which allows for ball entry into the starting ball entry section even during the first switching mode, is preferable for drawing attention to the movement of the movable piece, etc., even in the first switching mode.

Feature AU6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AU3 to Feature AU5, characterized in that the number of game balls flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage is greater than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the second inflow passage.

By making it difficult for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section through the first flow path, which is the main inflow passage to the variable mechanism, the effects shown in feature AU3, etc., can be suitably exhibited.

Feature AU7. The variable mechanism has a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and is configured such that when a drive signal is output from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit, the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the acceptance state, and when the output of the drive signal from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit is stopped, the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the non-acceptance state.
The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located on the distribution portion of the movable piece, the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the game ball pushing the movable piece is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means, as described in any one of features AU3 to AU6.

As shown in this feature, when a game ball is located in the distribution section while the drive vibration output is stopped, the game ball pushes the movable piece to its second position. This configuration allows for the suppression of game balls entering the starting ball entry section via the first inflow passage into the variable mechanism while maintaining the maximum possible output period of the drive signal in the first switching mode.

Feature AU8. The variable mechanism is configured such that when a game ball is located in a predetermined part of the guide section (the part upstream of the virtual line FL2), the game ball acts to push the movable piece to the first position.
The gaming machine according to feature AU7, characterized in that when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal by the control means for the variable mechanism is defined to be shorter than the required period for the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage to reach the distribution section, and longer than the required period for the game ball to pass through the predetermined portion.

By defining the output period of the drive signal during the first switching mode to be shorter than the required time for the game ball, which has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage, to reach the distribution section, and longer than the required time for the game ball to pass through the predetermined portion, it is possible to suppress the effect of the weight of the game ball located on the movable piece hindering the displacement of the movable piece to the second position, thereby improving the responsiveness when switching to the non-acceptance state.

Feature AU9. The variable mechanism has a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and when a drive signal is output from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit, the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the acceptance state, and when the output of the drive signal from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit is stopped, the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the non-acceptance state.
The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and the movable piece is located in a specific part including the distribution unit (a part downstream of the virtual line FL2), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AU3 to AU6, characterized in that when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal by the control means for the variable mechanism is defined to be shorter than the required period for the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first flow path to reach the distribution section, and longer than the required period for the game ball to reach the specific section at the specific section.

As shown in this feature, in a configuration where the weight of the game ball pushes the movable piece to its second position, initiating the displacement to the second position by the weight and biasing force of the game ball prior to reaching the distribution section allows for a favorable improvement in responsiveness when switching to the non-acceptance state.

Feature AU10 (zero). A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface sections 904G to 904I) that distributes game balls to a first flow path (winning route) that guides game balls to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide game balls to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface sections 903G to 903I) that guides game balls that have passed through the inlet section (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is positioned in the second position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the second flow path.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured such that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance portion to reach the starting ball entry portion, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution portion, and the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for the game ball to reach the starting ball entry portion.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, although the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode without going through the special game state is the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. In this configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased to enhance the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery and the opportunities for the variable mechanism to enter the accepting state will also increase in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is short. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) frequently switches to the accepting state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the accepting period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and there are concerns that this will hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are guided to the starting ball entry section through the first flow path. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls passing through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner are prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing the inflow of game balls into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to suitably suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section caused by an increase in the number of balls entering. This allows the aforementioned effect of improving attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, since the movable piece (distributing piece) begins to displace toward the second position while the game ball is positioned on the distribution piece, it is possible to suppress disturbances in the behavior of the movable piece due to changes in velocity during the displacement process. This is desirable for improving the operational stability of the movable piece.

Incidentally, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" shown in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AU11. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, wherein the receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the non-receiving state is achieved when the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface sections 904G to 904I) that distributes game balls to a first flow path (winning route) that guides game balls to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide game balls to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface sections 903G to 903I) that guides game balls that have passed through the inlet section (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is positioned in the second position, the distribution section is located at the position that forms the second flow path.
In the game area, a first inflow passage (first route R1) and a second inflow passage (second route R2) are formed as inflow passages for flowing into the entrance portion of the variable mechanism.
The speed at which the game balls move when they enter the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inflow passage is configured to be slower than the speed at which they move when they enter the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inflow passage.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured such that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion via the first inflow passage to reach the starting ball entry section, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the drive unit is driven and controlled such that the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period for a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion via the first inflow passage to reach the distribution section, and the period for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period for the game ball to reach the starting ball entry section.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, although the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode without going through the special game state is the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. In this configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased to enhance the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery and the opportunities for the variable mechanism to enter the accepting state will also increase in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is short. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) frequently switches to the accepting state in a manner that effectively makes ball entry impossible (a manner in which the accepting period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, and there are concerns that this will hinder efforts to increase the player's attention to the game.

In the configuration described above, when the variable mechanism is in the third switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls entering the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage are guided to the starting ball entry section via the first flow path. When the variable mechanism is in the first switching mode and is set to the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that game balls entering the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage are prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, even in the first switching mode, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is maintained in the receiving state and allowing game balls to enter, the deterioration of the player's impression can be suppressed. Furthermore, excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls entering can be effectively suppressed. This allows the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be even more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, since the movable piece (distributing piece) begins to displace toward the second position while the game ball is positioned on the distribution piece, it is possible to suppress disturbances in the behavior of the movable piece due to changes in velocity during the displacement process. This is desirable for improving the operational stability of the movable piece.

Incidentally, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" shown in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AU5 to AU9 above may also be applied to features AU10 to AU11.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AT may be applied to feature groups AU1 to AU11.

<Features of AV Group>
The following set of features AV is based on the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The features AV described below are based on the background technology described above, which states that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature AV1. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (for example, the operating port 92) as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901J) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows game balls to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that makes it more difficult for game balls to flow into the flow path than the first position, a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece. The variable mechanism is configured such that a drive signal is output from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit, causing the movable piece to displace from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the acceptance state, and the output of the drive signal from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit is stopped, causing the movable piece to displace from the first position to the second position due to the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the non-acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
When the movable piece is positioned in the first position, it forms a rolling surface for the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry section.
The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located on a specific part of the movable piece (a part of the movable piece 901G to 901J that is downstream of the virtual line FL2, for example, the second surface part 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.

As shown in this feature, using the first, second, and third switching modes in combination can help prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Here, although the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. Therefore, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to enhance the support function in the third switching mode, the opportunities to win the support lottery will also increase in the first switching mode, where the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is shorter, and the opportunities for balls to enter the starting ball entry area will also increase. This is expected to hinder the enhancement of the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the system switches to a non-receiving state, it is possible to suppress the entry of game balls that are already moving along the path toward the starting ball entry section into the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when a game ball is located on a specific part of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball pushes the movable piece to move (return) to the second position. In other words, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the biasing force of the biasing means and the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific part) can be used to quickly return the movable piece to the second position. As a result, even if the number of winning opportunities in the support lottery increases in the first switching mode, which has a short period of time in the receiving state of the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress frequent entry of game balls into the starting ball entry section and effectively eliminate the above concerns. This is desirable in order to increase the level of attention given to the game. While it is possible to drastically shorten the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state (receiving period) in the first switching mode (e.g., 0.01 seconds) to effectively prevent ball entry, frequent behavior of such variable mechanisms (movable pieces) is likely to give players a nuisance and hinder efforts to increase attention to the game. In this regard, the configuration described in this feature allows for reducing the opportunities for ball entry into the starting ball entry section while avoiding an excessively short receiving period during the first switching mode. This further enhances the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to the game.

Feature AV2. A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (for example, the operating port 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901J) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows game balls to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents game balls from flowing into the flow path from the first position, a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece. The variable mechanism is configured such that a drive signal is output from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit, causing the movable piece to displace from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the acceptance state. The output of the drive signal from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit is stopped, causing the movable piece to displace from the first position to the second position due to the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the non-acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when it wins a predetermined support lottery, thereby switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
When the movable piece is positioned in the first position, it forms a rolling surface for the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry section.
The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located on a specific part of the rolling surface (a part of the movable pieces 901G to 901J that is downstream of the virtual line FL2, for example, the second surface part 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, although the second and third switching modes are configured so that the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than in the first switching mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the third switching mode without going through the special game state is the same as in the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the probability of winning the support lottery is maintained without change. Therefore, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to enhance the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will also increase in the first switching mode, where the period of time the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is short, and the chances of balls entering the starting ball entry section will also increase. This is expected to hinder the enhancement of the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the system is switched to a non-accepting state, it is possible to suppress the entry of game balls that are already moving along the flow path toward the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when a game ball is located on a specific part of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the displacement (return) of the movable piece to the second position is pushed by the game ball. In other words, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the biasing force of the biasing means and the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific part) can be used to quickly return the movable piece to the second position. This effectively eliminates the aforementioned concern by suppressing frequent ball entry into the starting ball entry section, even if the chances of winning in the support lottery increase in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is short. This is desirable for increasing the attention given to the game. While it is possible to take measures such as making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state (acceptance period) extremely short (e.g., 0.01 seconds) in the first switching mode to effectively prevent ball entry, such frequent behavior of the variable mechanism (movable piece) is likely to give players an impression of annoyance, hindering the improvement of attention given to the game. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature allows for reducing the chances of ball entry into the starting ball entry section while avoiding an excessively short acceptance period during the first switching mode. This further enhances the aforementioned effect of increasing attention given to the game.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AV3. The game machine according to Feature AV1 or Feature AV2, characterized in that the variable mechanism has a deceleration means (second end 909G to 909J) for slowing down the game ball that has reached the specific part.

As shown in Feature AV1, etc., in a configuration that utilizes the weight of the game ball located in a specific area to assist the return of the movable piece to its second position, the return assistance function can be stably performed by decelerating the game ball that has reached the specific area. This suppresses excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry area.

Feature AV4. The movable piece is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable about a central axis (central axis CL10) extending in the thickness direction of the game board, and is configured to be displaced from the second position to the first position by rotating about the central axis in a first direction (first predetermined direction), and displaced from the first position to the second position by rotating about the central axis in a second direction (second predetermined direction) which is the opposite direction to the first direction.
The rolling surface is configured to have a downward slope toward the starting ball entry section when the movable piece is positioned in the first position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AV1 to AV3, characterized in that the specified portion is formed in a specific range on the rolling surface that is between the central axis and the end on the starting ball entry side, and includes the end on the rolling surface on the starting ball entry side.

When the movable piece is rotatable, by forming the aforementioned specific portion so that the end on the rolling surface on the ball entry side is included between the central axis and the end on the ball entry side, the function of supporting the return of the movable piece to the second position by the weight of the game ball (return assist function) can be effectively achieved.

Feature AV5. The starting ball entry section opens to the front of the gaming machine.
The movable piece is located in front of the starting ball entry section and is arranged on the left and right sides of the starting ball entry section,
The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the movable pieces are positioned in the first position, a gap smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the specific parts of each movable piece.
The gaming machine according to feature AV4, characterized in that the aforementioned specific portion is inclined backward so as to guide the game ball fitted into the gap toward the opening.

According to the configuration shown in Feature AV5, the game ball that reaches a specific section is supported at a position straddling those movable pieces and guided to the starting ball entry section via those specific sections. This configuration, in which the game ball fits into such a gap, suppresses irregularities in the game ball's behavior at the specific section, allowing the aforementioned return assist function to be effectively performed. Furthermore, by increasing the distance from the center of rotation to the contact point with the game ball on the rolling surface, the weight of the game ball can be effectively utilized.

Feature AV6. The gaming machine according to Feature AV5, characterized in that the gap is expanded by the rotation of the movable piece positioned in the first position in the second direction, and before the gap expands to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball, entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section through the specific part becomes impossible.

The gap is expanded when the movable piece is pushed by the game ball that is fitted into the gap. At this time, the height of the game ball supported by the movable piece also changes (decreases). When this gap becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball loses its support and falls through the gap. In this configuration, by preventing the game ball from entering the starting ball entry section through a specific part before the gap becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the responsiveness when preventing entry can be effectively improved.

Feature AV7. The game machine according to any one of Features AV1 to AV6, characterized in that the movable piece has a restricting portion (e.g., a stepped portion 906I) formed on the rolling surface that restricts the return of the game ball to a non-specific portion (e.g., the first surface portion 903I) other than the specific portion when the game ball reaches the specific portion.

As shown in Feature AV1, in a configuration that utilizes the weight of the game ball to assist the return of the movable piece to its second position, it is assumed that the return assistance function may not function properly if the behavior of the game ball on the movable piece (rolling surface) becomes erratic. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by implementing a configuration that restricts the reverse movement of the game ball once it reaches a specific part, it is possible to suppress the failure of the return assistance function to function properly.

Feature AV8. The gaming machine according to Feature AV7, characterized in that the regulating portion is a step formed at the boundary between the specific portion and the non-specific portion.

As shown in this feature, by creating a stepped boundary between the specific and non-specific parts, the return of game balls that have reached the specific part to the non-specific part can be restricted with a simple configuration.

Feature AV9. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AV1 to Feature AV8, characterized in that the specific portion is formed such that, when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the upward-facing component is larger than that of the non-specific portion, which is the portion of the rolling surface other than the specific portion.

As shown in this feature, when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the component of the specific portion of the rolling surface that faces upward is larger than that of the non-specific portion. This configuration allows the weight of the game ball to be efficiently converted into a force that rotates the movable piece.

Feature AV10 (zero). A game board (game board 80aG) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The variable mechanism includes a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901J) that can be displaced between a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of game balls into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of game balls into the flow path, a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece. The variable mechanism is configured such that a drive signal is output from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit, causing the movable piece to displace from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the acceptance state. The output of the drive signal from the control means for the variable mechanism to the drive unit is stopped, causing the movable piece to displace from the first position to the second position due to the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the non-acceptance state.
When the movable piece is positioned in the first position, it forms a rolling surface for the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry section.
The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located on a specific part of the movable piece (a part of the movable piece 901G to 901J that is downstream of the virtual line FL2, for example, the second surface part 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.

In the configuration described in this feature, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the system switches to a non-receiving state, it is possible to suppress the entry of game balls that are already moving along the path toward the starting ball entry section into the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when a game ball is located in a specific part of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball pushes the movable piece to move (return) to the second position. In other words, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the biasing force of the biasing means and the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific part) can be used to quickly return the movable piece to the second position. Furthermore, depending on the game situation, it is possible to take measures such as making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state (receiving period) extremely short (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) to effectively prevent ball entry. However, it is a concern that such frequent behavior of the variable mechanism (movable piece) may give players the impression that it is bothersome, hindering efforts to increase attention to the game. In this respect, the configuration described in this feature allows for a certain degree of acceptance time while reducing the number of opportunities for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AV3 to AV9 above may also be applied to feature AV10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AU may be applied to feature AV1 to feature AV10.

<Features of the AW Group>
The following feature group AW was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game."

Feature AW1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first mode.
The second mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second mode (for example, a fourth normal game state) is provided.
The system includes a special transition means that, when a special condition (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) is met in the first game state, transitions to the second game state without going through the special game state.
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the support game is started during the first game state, the execution period of the ending part is configured to be the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state, or a period shorter than that sum.

As shown in this feature, a configuration that changes the switching control mode without going through a special game state diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. When a special condition is met and the game transitions from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period before the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, reducing the smoothness of gameplay. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the second game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the second game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the second game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). In particular, in this feature, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started during the first game state. This configuration allows the above effects to be effectively achieved.

Feature AW2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when special conditions (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) are met in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state, or a period shorter than said sum.

As shown in this feature, if the system is configured such that the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained, and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when special conditions are met, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to the smooth progress of the game). In particular, in this feature, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started during the first game state, or a period shorter than that sum. With such a configuration, the above effects can be suitably achieved.

Feature AW3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state, or a period shorter than said sum.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to the smooth progress of the game). In particular, in this feature, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started during the first game state, or a period shorter than that sum. With such a configuration, the above effects can be suitably achieved.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AW4. The gaming machine according to Feature AW2 or Feature AW3, characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is shorter than the variable display period when the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state.

During the ending sequence, players are likely to get the impression that the timing of when the support game stops and the benefits become available is being unnecessarily delayed. In contrast, this impression is less likely to occur while the variable symbol display is in progress. Therefore, if the execution period of the ending sequence when the support game starts during the first game state does not exceed the variable symbol display period when the variable symbol display starts during the first game state, the opportunities for the transition to the third game state via the second transition means to occur during the ending sequence will be less frequent than the opportunities for it to occur during the variable symbol display. This will mitigate the above concerns.

Feature AW5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AW2 to AW4, characterized in that, when the support game is started during the first game state, the duration of the support game is configured to be the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state, or a period shorter than that sum.

As shown in this feature, if the execution period of the support game does not exceed the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period, the effects shown in feature AW2, etc., can be suitably achieved.

Feature AW6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AW2 to AW5, characterized in that the sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same length as, or shorter than, the sum of, the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state.

As shown in the configuration of this feature, by determining the execution period of the main part and the ending part in accordance with the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period, the smoothing effect shown in feature AW2, etc., can be more effectively achieved.

Feature AW7. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature AW2 to Feature AW6, characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state is shorter than the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state.

If an ending sequence is included, it is anticipated that its presence may hinder smooth gameplay in the third game state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by shortening the execution period of the ending sequence in the third game state, such concerns can be eliminated.

Feature AW8. The support game includes an opening part which is executed before the main part and in which the variable mechanism is kept in a non-accepting state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AW2 to AW7, characterized in that when the support game is started during the first game state, the sum of the execution period of the opening part, the execution period of the main part, and the execution period of the ending part is configured to be the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state.

If the delay described in Feature AW2 occurs, there is a concern that the concentration of this delay in a portion of the game could significantly increase player stress. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by placing an opening part and an ending part before and after the main part, and dividing the delay period between these parts, the above concern can be mitigated.

Feature AW9. When the support game is started during the first game state, the execution period of the ending part is configured to be shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state.
In the second and third game states, the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit is shorter than in the first game state.
If the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result is being performed in the symbol display unit, the support game will be adapted to the third game state.
A gaming machine according to any one of features AW2 to AW8, characterized in that, if the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed and the system transitions to the third game state by the second transition means, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

If the game transitions to the third game state while the symbols are being displayed variably in the first game state (corresponding to the winning result), the support game will correspond to the third game state. By configuring the system so that the switch to the acceptance state corresponding to the third game state is not carried over until the next support lottery and winning result, it is possible to improve player satisfaction. On the other hand, if the game transitions to the third game state while the support game has already started (during the support game), it becomes necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. In this way, the support game is executed after at least one support lottery and variability display of symbols, so the delay period may be longer compared to when the game transitions to the third game state during the variability display. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the execution period of the ending part when a support game is started during the first game state to be shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started during the first game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state from becoming extremely long, even when a transition to the third game state occurs during the support game and the support game is executed after winning the subsequent support lottery.

Feature AW10. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the support game is started during the first game state, the sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part is configured to be the same length as, or shorter than, the sum of, the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit during the first game state.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display period and the ending period (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while also suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to the smooth progress of the game). Moreover, in this feature in particular, the sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same length as, or shorter than, the sum of, the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started during the first game state. This configuration allows the above effects to be effectively achieved.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AW4 to AW9 above may also be applied to features AW1 and AW10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AV may be applied to feature AW1 to feature AW10.

<Features of the AX Group>
The following set of features A and B were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game."

Feature AX1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first mode.
The second mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second mode (for example, a fourth normal game state) is provided.
The system includes a special transition means that, when a special condition (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) is met in the first game state, transitions to the second game state without going through the special game state.
If the game transitions to the third game state via the second transition means during the support game, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. Similarly, if the game transitions to the third game state via the second transition means during the variable display of the symbols, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the support game is the same as or approximately the same as the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the symbols.

As shown in this feature, a configuration that changes the switching control mode without going through a special game state diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. When a special condition is met and the game transitions from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period before the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, reducing the smoothness of gameplay. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, if the game transitions to a second game state during support gameplay, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the second game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. Similarly, if the game transitions to a second game state during variable symbol display, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the second game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. In this configuration, the above delay period is greatly influenced by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. In other words, the longer the remaining time at the time of transition, the greater the delay period, and the shorter the remaining time, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, by configuring the system so that the longest required period for transitioning to the second game state during support gameplay and the longest required period for transitioning to the second game state during variable symbol display are the same or approximately the same, it is possible to suppress the delay period becoming extremely long (the above maximum value becoming extremely large) in either the case where the transition occurs during support gameplay or during variable display, thereby contributing to smoother game progression. This is preferable for effectively demonstrating the increased attention given to the game due to the diversification of gameplay.

Incidentally, "approximately the same" means that the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the support game, and the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the symbols, are perceived by the player as being the same, and this includes cases where the difference is kept to approximately 10%.

Feature AX2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when special conditions (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) are met in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
If the game transitions to the third game state via the second transition means during the support game, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. Similarly, if the game transitions to the third game state via the second transition means during the variable display of the symbols, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the support game is the same as or approximately the same as the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the symbols.

As shown in this feature, if the system is configured such that the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained, and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when special conditions are met, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, if the game transitions to the third game state during support gameplay, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. Similarly, if the game transitions to the third game state during variable symbol display, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. In this configuration, the above delay period is greatly influenced by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. In other words, the longer the remaining time at the time of transition, the greater the delay period, and the shorter the remaining time, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, by configuring the system so that the longest required period for transitioning to the third game state during support gameplay and the longest required period for transitioning to the third game state during variable symbol display are the same or approximately the same, it is possible to suppress the situation where the delay period becomes extremely long (the above maximum value becomes extremely large) in either the case where the transition occurs during support gameplay or during variable display, thereby contributing to smoother game progression. This is preferable for effectively demonstrating the increased attention given to the game due to the diversification of gameplay.

Furthermore, "approximately the same" means that the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the support game, and the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the symbols, are perceived by the player as being the same, and this includes cases where the difference is kept to approximately 10%.

Feature AX3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
If the game transitions to the third game state via the second transition means during the support game, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. Similarly, if the game transitions to the third game state via the second transition means during the variable display of the symbols, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the support game is the same as or approximately the same as the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the symbols.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, if the game transitions to the third game state during support gameplay, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. Similarly, if the game transitions to the third game state during variable symbol display, the time required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state will differ depending on the timing of the transition. In this configuration, the above delay period is greatly influenced by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. In other words, the longer the remaining time at the time of transition, the greater the delay period, and the shorter the remaining time, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, by configuring the system so that the longest required period for transitioning to the third game state during support gameplay and the longest required period for transitioning to the third game state during variable symbol display are the same or approximately the same, it is possible to suppress the situation where the delay period becomes extremely long (the above maximum value becomes extremely large) in either the case where the transition occurs during support gameplay or during variable display, thereby contributing to smoother game progression. This is preferable for effectively demonstrating the increased attention given to the game due to the diversification of gameplay.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Incidentally, "approximately the same" means that the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the support game, and the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the symbols, are perceived by the player as being the same, and this includes cases where the difference is kept to approximately 10%.

Feature AX4. If the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the result of the support lottery is being performed in the symbol display unit, the support game will be adapted to the third game state.
If the system transitions to the third game state via the second transition means while the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game will remain corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game will correspond to the third game state.
The gaming machine according to feature AX2 or feature AX3, characterized in that the longest required period when transitioning to the third gaming state during the support game is shorter than the longest required period when transitioning to the third gaming state during the variable display of the symbols.

If the game transitions to the third game state while the symbols are being displayed variably in the first normal game state (corresponding to the winning result), the support game will correspond to the third game state. By configuring the system so that the switch to the acceptance state corresponding to the third game state is not carried over until the next support lottery and winning result, player satisfaction can be improved. Conversely, if the game transitions to the third game state while the support game has already started (during support gameplay), the game must win the subsequent support lottery to execute the support game. Thus, since the support game is executed after at least one support lottery and variable symbol display, the period until the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state may be longer compared to the case where the game transitions to the third game state during variable display. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during support gameplay is shorter than the longest required period when transitioning to the third game state during variable symbol display, thereby mitigating the above concerns.

Feature AX5. The support game is characterized by comprising a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and a standby part which is executed at least before and after the execution of the main part in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state, as described in any one of Features AX2 to AX4.

In the configuration described in this feature, the various problems mentioned above can be suppressed by configuring the system so that a standby part is executed at least before and after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing a standby part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while also suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression).

Feature AX6. During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AX2 to AX5, characterized in that the sum of the execution period of the main part and the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same as or approximately the same as the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of the symbols is started in the symbol display unit during the first game state.

In the configuration described in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the standby part is executed at least before and after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing a standby part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to the smooth progress of the game). Moreover, in this feature in particular, the sum of the execution period of the main part and the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same as or approximately the same as the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period when the variable display of symbols is started during the first game state. This configuration allows the above effects to be effectively achieved.

Feature AX7. The gaming machine according to Feature AX6, characterized in that the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be longer than the execution period of the main part.

The configuration described in this feature allows the effects shown in feature AX6 to be effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features AX4 to AX7 above may also be applied to Feature AX1.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AW may be applied to feature AX1 to AX7.

<Characteristics of the AY group>
The following feature group A and Y were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game."

Feature AY1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first mode.
The second mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second mode (for example, a fourth normal game state) is provided.
The system includes a special transition means that, when a special condition (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) is met in the first game state, transitions to the second game state without going through the special game state.
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and maintains the variable mechanism in the non-acceptance state.
The execution period for the aforementioned ending part is set as a first period and a second period which is shorter than the first period.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the support game execution means has a means for defining the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the second game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, a configuration that changes the switching control mode without going through a special game state diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. When a special condition is met and the game transitions from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period before the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, reducing the smoothness of gameplay. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the second game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the second game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the second game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). However, if an ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part will hinder smooth game progression in the second game state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such concerns can be eliminated by configuring the system so that the execution period of the ending part is shortened in the second game state.

Feature AY2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when special conditions (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) are met in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and maintains the variable mechanism in the non-acceptance state.
The execution period for the aforementioned ending part is set as a first period and a second period which is shorter than the first period.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the support game execution means has a means for defining the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the system is configured such that the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained, and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when special conditions are met, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the various inconveniences described above can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, while suppressing frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). However, if an ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of this ending part will hinder smooth game progression in the third game state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the execution period of the ending part is shortened in the third game state, such concerns can be eliminated.

Feature AY3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area, a support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery),
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and maintains the variable mechanism in the non-acceptance state.
The execution period for the aforementioned ending part is set as a first period and a second period which is shorter than the first period.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the support game execution means has a means for defining the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the various inconveniences described above can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, while suppressing frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). However, if an ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of this ending part will hinder smooth game progression in the third game state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the execution period of the ending part is shortened in the third game state, such concerns can be eliminated.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AY4. A gaming machine according to Feature AY2 or Feature AY3, characterized in that, when the support game is started during the first game state, the execution period of the ending part constituting the support game is longer than the execution period of the main part constituting the support game, and when the support game is started during the third game state, the execution period of the ending part constituting the support game is shorter than the execution period of the main part constituting the support game.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the main part becomes dominant when the support game is started during the third game state, and the ending part becomes dominant when the support game is started during the first game state, the effects shown in feature AY2, etc., can be more effectively achieved.

Feature AY5. During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
The gaming machine according to any one of features AY2 to AY4, characterized in that if the support game is started during the first game state, the support game continues until the first period has elapsed from the start of the ending part, even if the game transitions to the third game state by the second transition means during the support game.

The configuration described in this feature suppresses the high frequency of the variable mechanism entering the acceptance state due to winning the support lottery in the first game state, while also contributing to reducing variability in the delay period.

Feature AY6. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AY2 to Feature AY5, characterized in that the second period is defined to be shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit is performed under the conditions of the third game state.

As shown in this feature, by making the second period set during the third game state shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the confirmed display period of the symbols, the existence of the ending part can be made less noticeable. This helps to prevent players from getting the impression that the ending part is bothersome.

Feature AY7. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area, a support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery),
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and a standby part which is executed either before or after the execution of the main part in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
The execution period for the aforementioned standby part is provided as a first period and a second period that is shorter than the first period.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the support game execution means has a means for defining the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the third game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed by configuring the system so that a standby part is executed either before or after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing a standby part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, while suppressing frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). However, if a standby part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of this standby part will hinder smooth game progression in the third game state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the execution period of the standby part is shortened in the third game state, such concerns can be eliminated.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AY8. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area, a support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery),
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the end of the main part and maintains the variable mechanism in the non-acceptance state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is different from the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration described in this feature, the various inconveniences mentioned above can be suppressed by configuring the system so that the ending part is executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing an ending part, the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state can be suppressed. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). If the execution time of the ending part is configured to differ depending on whether the support game is started during the first game state or during the third game state, it can further contribute to the smoother game progression described above.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Incidentally, the technical concepts described in features AY4 to AY6 above may also be applied to features AY1, AY7, and AY8.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AX may be applied to features AY1 to AY8.

<Characteristics of the AZ Group>
The following AZ features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game."

Feature AZ1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first mode.
The second mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second mode (for example, a fourth normal game state) is provided.
The system includes a special transition means that, when a special condition (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) is met in the first game state, transitions to the second game state without going through the special game state.
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and a standby part which is executed at least before and after the execution of the main part in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
In the second game state, the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit is shorter than in the first game state.
If, while the variable display of symbols corresponding to the result of the support lottery is being performed in the symbol display unit, the game transitions to the second game state via the special transition means, the support game becomes one that corresponds to the second game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the game transitions to the second game state by the special transition means while the support game corresponding to the first game state is being played, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the second game state.

As shown in this feature, a configuration that changes the switching control mode without going through a special game state diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. When a special condition is met and the game transitions from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period before the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, reducing the smoothness of gameplay. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the second game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the second game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the second game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). In particular, in this feature, if the transition to the second game state occurs during the variable display of the symbols, the benefits can be enjoyed from this support game. On the other hand, if the transition to the third game state occurs during the support game, although it is delayed by the standby part, the variable display period of the symbols will be shortened from the next time onward. In other words, the delay caused by the waiting phase and the delay caused by the long-term variable display do not occur simultaneously, and excessive delays are suppressed, thus mitigating the disadvantages of including a waiting phase.

Feature AZ2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when special conditions (special failure result, reaching the ceiling) are met in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and a standby part which is executed at least before and after the execution of the main part in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
In the second and third game states, the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit is shorter than in the first game state.
If the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result is being performed in the symbol display unit, the support game will correspond to the third game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed and the system transitions to the third game state via the second transition means, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, if the system is configured such that the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained, and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when special conditions are met, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while also suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). In particular, in this feature, if the transition to the third game state occurs during the variable display of the symbols, the benefits can be enjoyed from this support game. On the other hand, if the transition to the third game state occurs during the support game, although it is delayed by the standby part, the variable display period of the symbols will be shortened from the next time onward. In other words, the delay caused by the waiting phase and the delay caused by the long-term variable display do not occur simultaneously, and excessive delays are suppressed, thus mitigating the disadvantages of including a waiting phase.

Feature AZ3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area, a support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery),
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game comprises a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and a standby part which is executed at least before and after the execution of the main part in which the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
In the second and third game states, the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit is shorter than in the first game state.
If the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result is being performed in the symbol display unit, the support game will correspond to the third game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed and the system transitions to the third game state via the second transition means, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while also suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). In particular, in this feature, if the transition to the third game state occurs during the variable display of the symbols, the benefits can be enjoyed from this support game. On the other hand, if the transition to the third game state occurs during the support game, although it is delayed by the standby part, the variable display period of the symbols will be shortened from the next time onward. In other words, the delay caused by the waiting phase and the delay caused by the long-term variable display do not occur simultaneously, and excessive delays are suppressed, thus mitigating the disadvantages of including a waiting phase.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature AZ4. The variable display period for the pattern in the pattern display section is provided as a first display period and a second display period that is shorter than the first display period.
The display control means includes means for setting the first display period as a variable display period for the symbols in the first game state, and for setting the second display period as a variable display period for the symbols in the third game state.
The gaming machine according to feature AZ2 or feature AZ3, characterized in that the execution period of the support game, which is started in the first game state, is configured to not exceed the sum of the first display period and the confirmed display period of the symbols.

After becoming eligible to enjoy the benefits of transitioning to the third game state, the benefits can be experienced when the variable mechanism actually enters an accepting state. However, as mentioned above, if the transition to the third game state occurs while a support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game will remain corresponding to the first game state, and in a configuration where the next support game corresponds to the third game state, in order to experience the above benefits, it is necessary to win the support lottery again and go through the variable display and confirmation display of the symbols. Therefore, the period until the benefits can be experienced tends to be long. To address this, as shown in this feature, by defining the execution period of the support game started in the first game state to not exceed the sum of the first display period and the confirmation display period, the prolonged period until the benefits can be experienced can be suppressed even in the above-mentioned case.

Feature AZ5. The display control means, when the system is in the first game state and the pattern display unit is performing a variable display of patterns corresponding to a non-winning result in the support lottery, transitions to the third game state by the second transition means, has means to perform the confirmation display based on the elapsed time from the start of the variable display to the first display period, and to set the second display period as the variable display period of patterns after transitioning to the third game state.
The gaming machine according to feature AZ4, characterized in that the execution period of the support game initiated in the first game state is a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the confirmed display period of the symbols, and the difference from said sum is smaller than the sum of the second display period and the confirmed display period.

If the game transitions to the third game state while a variable display of symbols corresponding to a non-winning result is being executed in the first game state, the variable display continues, and the variable display period is shortened to the second display period from the next time onward. In this case, to experience the above benefits, it is necessary to win the support lottery again and go through the variable display and confirmed display of symbols. As shown in Feature AZ4, by defining the execution period of the support game that starts in the first game state to not exceed the sum of the first display period and the confirmed display period, it is possible to suppress the prolonged period until the benefits can be experienced even in the above case. However, if the difference becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult to effectively exert the above-mentioned effects. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the above difference is defined to be smaller than the sum of the second display period and the confirmed display period, a practically preferable configuration can be achieved.

Feature AZ6. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature AZ2 to Feature AZ5, characterized in that the standby part is an ending part executed after the main part.

If a support game is initiated during the first game state, there is a possibility that the game will transition to the third game state after the support game has started but before the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state. Even in such cases, there is a concern that player satisfaction may decrease because the acceptance state is executed in a manner corresponding to the first game state. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by constructing a waiting part with an ending part executed after the main part, the opportunities for the above-mentioned event to occur can be reduced, and the existence of a waiting part can be suppressed as a factor that reduces the player's desire to play.

Feature AZ7. The gaming machine according to Feature AZ6, characterized in that the start timing of the support game coincides with the start timing of the main part.

If the game transitions to the third game state during a support game, the benefits of the third game state can be experienced by winning the support lottery again after the current support game ends and triggering another support game. In this configuration, by making the waiting part the ending part, if the support lottery is won again and a support game is triggered, the variable mechanism will quickly switch to the acceptance state, thus suppressing the delay before experiencing the benefits.

Feature AZ8. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 92) which serves as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display unit D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display unit D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 84) provided in the game area, a support lottery means (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery),
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric mechanism 93G) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric power switching processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined such that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
The support game consists of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part which is executed after the execution of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is kept in the non-acceptance state.
During the execution of the aforementioned support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the symbols are restricted.
In the second and third game states, the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit is shorter than in the first game state.
If the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result is being performed in the symbol display unit, the support game will be adapted to the third game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed and the system transitions to the third game state via the second transition means, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, if the system is configured such that the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained, and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when special conditions are met, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefits of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until another benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat longer, this is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In contrast, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state, the period before the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) becomes prolonged, even though the game has internally transitioned to the third game state. This prolonged delay reduces the smoothness of game progression. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that it will hinder the improvement of players' motivation to play.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the acceptance state in the first game state. While it is possible to reduce the frequency of the acceptance state by, for example, extending the variable display period of the symbols in the symbol display unit, such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period as well.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing an ending part in the support game, it is possible to suppress the increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the symbols is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Furthermore, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending part side (for example, by smoothing it), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the acceptance state during the first game state, thereby ensuring the advantage of the third game state, while suppressing the prolonged period until the benefits of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smoother game progression). In particular, in this feature, if the transition to the third game state occurs during the variable display of the symbols, the benefits can be enjoyed from this support game. On the other hand, if the transition to the third game state occurs during the support game, although it is delayed by the ending part, the variable display period of the symbols will be shortened from the next time onward. In other words, the delay caused by the ending sequence and the delay caused by the long-term variable display do not occur simultaneously, and excessive delays are suppressed, thus mitigating the disadvantages of including an ending sequence.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features AZ4 to AZ6 above may also be applied to features AZ1 and AZ8.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AY may be applied to feature groups AZ1 to AZ8.

<Characteristics BA group>
The following feature group BA was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BA1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 24th to 30th embodiments),
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively high.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A second game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode,
A third game state (third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), and a predetermined condition is met in the game rounds after reaching the termination threshold number in the second game state (i.e., a fall occurs), a second transition means is provided to transition to the first game state.
A third transition means that, in the second game state, transitions to the third game state if the predetermined condition is met (a fall occurs) before the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number,
A fourth transition means that, in the third game state, transitions to the first game state when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds),
When transitioning to the second game state, the system includes a termination criterion count setting means (a function of setting the termination criterion count in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) which sets one of a plurality of reference counts (for example, 200 times, 500 times) as the termination criterion count.
When the second game state and the third game state are in progress, a predetermined performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (special stage) over multiple game rounds,
A special performance execution means that, when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100, 200, or 500 rounds) during the execution of the predetermined performance, executes a special performance (for example, a Type 2 special performance in the 23rd embodiment) that allows the player to identify whether the current game state is the second game state or the third game state,
When the special performance is executed, the performance mode determination means determines the form of the predetermined performance in the game after the special performance ends (for example, the type of ally character that is always displayed during the special stage) according to the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) that will reach the current number of games set by the termination criterion number setting means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined performance mode so that the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means becomes the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means, if the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means is different from the performance mode before the determination.

In the type of gaming machine described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second game state that is both a second switching mode and a high-probability mode. After transitioning to the second game state, regardless of whether the predetermined conditions (fall) are met, the player can enjoy the benefits of the second switching mode until the termination threshold number is reached. With this configuration, the player can aim to transition to the next special game state while keeping their investment low. Here, during the second and third game states, predetermined effects are executed over multiple game rounds, and if the number of game rounds executed during the predetermined effects reaches a predetermined number, a special effect occurs. This special effect clearly indicates whether the game state is the second or third game state, that is, whether the above predetermined conditions were met before reaching the predetermined number of rounds. Since the second game state is more advantageous for the player than the third game state, it is assumed that players who expect to transition to the special game state will pay attention to the special effect, hoping that the second game state will continue. Here, the fact that a predetermined condition has already been met through a special effect is a concern as it may reduce the player's interest in the subsequent gameplay. In this configuration, when a special effect occurs, the nature of the predetermined effect is determined and changed based on the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) required to reach the current termination threshold. In other words, the nature of the predetermined effect can change as a result of the special effect. By indicating the remaining number of games through the nature of the predetermined effect, it is possible to prevent the gameplay after the special effect from becoming monotonous. This contributes to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the description of the "modification means" shown in this feature can also be rephrased as "modification means for changing the manner of the predetermined performance so that it becomes the manner determined by the performance manner determination means."

Feature BA2. The plurality of reference counts include a first reference count (e.g., 200 times) and a second reference count that is greater than the first reference count (e.g., 500 times),
The gaming machine according to feature BA1, characterized in that the prescribed number of times includes a number of times that is specified to be less than the first reference number of times and the second reference number of times.

When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the predetermined number, the remaining number of game rounds will be greater when the second predetermined number is set as the termination threshold than when the first predetermined number is set. Thus, by including options where the predetermined number < termination threshold as candidates for both the termination threshold and predetermined number of rounds, the effect shown in feature BA1 can be effectively achieved.

Feature BA3. The predetermined performance execution means is configured to terminate the predetermined performance when transitioning to the special game state or the first game state.
The gaming machine according to feature BA1 or feature BA2, characterized in that if the game round in which the special performance is executed by the special performance execution means is a game round in which the determination result corresponds to the predetermined transition information, or if it is a game round in which the predetermined condition is met and triggers a transition to the first game state, then no change is made by the change means.

In a configuration where the manner of a predetermined performance can change in response to a special performance, there is a concern that a change in the manner of the predetermined performance when the predetermined performance ends (i.e., when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is reached or when the game transitions to the first game state due to the fulfillment of predetermined conditions) could confuse the player. Therefore, it is preferable to eliminate this concern by configuring the system so that when the predetermined performance ends, no change in the manner of the predetermined performance occurs in response to a special performance.

Feature BA4. The predetermined performance modes include a first mode and a second mode,
The game machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA3, characterized in that the means for determining the presentation mode is configured such that the probability of selecting the first mode is higher than the probability of selecting the second mode when the remaining number of games is greater than a predetermined number, and the probability of selecting the second mode is higher than the probability of selecting the first mode when the remaining number of games is less than a predetermined number.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the predetermined animation pattern changes to the second pattern as a result of a special animation, the expectation of having more remaining game turns increases compared to when it changes to the first pattern. With this configuration, players can proceed with the game while estimating the remaining game turns based on the predetermined animation pattern. This configuration allows for the effective enhancement of attention shown in feature BA1 to be optimally realized.

Feature BA5. The special performance has the function of informing the player of the judgment result by the judgment means, and includes a first half part before the judgment result is announced and a second half part after the judgment result is announced.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA4, characterized in that the modification means is configured to change the manner of the predetermined performance in the latter half part.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to change the pattern of the predetermined performance after the judgment result is announced in the special performance (the latter half of the performance), the coordination between the special performance and the predetermined performance can be strengthened. Furthermore, by changing the pattern of the predetermined performance before moving to the next game round, it is possible to appropriately secure time for changing the pattern of the predetermined performance.

Feature BA6. The special performance execution means is,
If the predetermined performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means matches the predetermined performance mode prior to the determination, and the predetermined performance continues even after the special performance ends, the means for executing the first second half part performance as the second half part,
The gaming machine according to feature BA5, further comprising: means for executing a second second half part performance as the second half part if the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means does not match the performance mode of the predetermined performance prior to the determination and the predetermined performance continues after the special performance has ended.

As shown in Feature BA1, etc., in a configuration where a special performance is triggered by reaching a predetermined number of occurrences, the opportunity to be notified that a judgment result corresponding to a predetermined transition condition has been reached is less frequent compared to a case where the special performance is triggered by a judgment result corresponding to a predetermined transition condition. In other words, the fact that a special performance almost always means a loss hinders efforts to increase attention to the special performance.

In this regard, as shown in this feature, in a game round in which a special effect is performed, the first second half part effect is executed when the pattern of the predetermined effect changes, and the second second half part effect is executed when the pattern of the predetermined effect does not change. By incorporating the change in the pattern of the predetermined effect as part of the special effect, monotony of the special effect can be effectively suppressed. This is desirable for increasing the attention given to the special effect.

Feature BA7. The predetermined performance execution means is configured to terminate the predetermined performance when transitioning to the special game state or the first game state.
The aforementioned multiple reference counts include a first reference count (e.g., 200 times), a second reference count greater than the first reference count (e.g., 500 times), and a third reference count greater than the second reference count (e.g., 1000 times),
The gaming machine according to feature BA5 or feature BA6, characterized in that the prescribed number of times includes a number of times that is the same as the first reference number of times.

In the configuration described in this feature, if a first trigger count is set as the termination trigger count, an event may occur where the game transitions to the first game state after the special performance in the game round that reaches the termination trigger count. By creating a configuration where the special performance marks a branching point—transition to the special game state, continuation of the second/third game state, or demotion to the first game state—the game aims to increase attention to the special performance. In this way, by changing the nature of the predetermined performance under situations where attention is expected to be high, the likelihood of missing the change can be effectively suppressed.

Feature BA8. The predetermined effect includes a display effect that keeps a character permanently on the display screen (display screen 95a), and the special effect is an effect that includes a display effect in which the character permanently on the display screen performs a specific action.
The gaming machine according to any one of BA1 to BA7, wherein the changing means is configured to change the manner of the predetermined performance by changing the type of character displayed on the display screen.

As shown in this feature, using the same character in both the standard and special effects enhances the coordination between them and effectively mitigates the sense of incongruity that can occur when the character (type) is changed as a result of the special effect.

Feature BA9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA8, characterized in that when the aforementioned special performance is executed, if the subsequent special information includes special information corresponding to the predetermined transition information, the modification by the modification means is not performed.

The fact that the predetermined performance ends immediately after a change in its format can give players the impression that the change function, as shown in Feature BA1, is cumbersome. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience by configuring the system so that the format of the predetermined performance does not change if the subsequent special information includes information corresponding to the predetermined transition information.

Feature BA10. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BA1 to Feature BA9, wherein the predetermined performance is initiated upon transition to the second game state and terminated upon transition from the second game state or the third game state to the first game state.

As shown in this feature, by ensuring a predetermined execution period, it is possible to prevent the function that changes the manner of the predetermined performance, as shown in feature BA1, from being effectively utilized.

Feature BA11. The plurality of reference counts include a first reference count (e.g., 200 times) and a second reference count (e.g., 500 times) that is greater than the first reference count.
The aforementioned prescribed number of times includes a special number of times that is specified to be fewer than the first standard number of times.
The gaming machine according to feature BA10, characterized in that the difference between the first reference number of times and the special number of times is configured to be equal to or greater than the special number of times.

With the configuration described in this feature, even if the manner of the predetermined performance is changed, it is possible to suppress the period during which the predetermined performance is executed in the changed manner from becoming extremely short. This effectively prevents the function that indicates the remaining number of games from becoming obsolete due to the change function.

Feature BA12. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 24th to 30th embodiments),
The system includes a first transition means that, when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is obtained, transitions to a special game state (second normal game state, third normal game state) included in the predetermined game state via the special game state,
If the game progresses in the aforementioned special game state without reaching a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information, the special game state is maintained until the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 or 500 rounds).
When transitioning to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a termination criterion count setting means (a function of setting the termination criterion count in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) which sets one of several reference counts (for example, 200 times, 500 times) as the termination criterion count,
When the aforementioned special game state is in place, a predetermined performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (special stage) over multiple game rounds,
A special performance execution means that, during the execution of the predetermined performance, executes a special performance (for example, a second type of special performance in the 23rd embodiment) that allows the player to identify whether or not the special game state will continue when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100, 200, or 500 rounds),
When the special performance is executed, the performance mode determination means determines the form of the predetermined performance in the game after the special performance ends (for example, the type of ally character that is always displayed during the special stage) according to the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) that will reach the current number of games set by the termination criterion number setting means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined performance mode so that the mode determined by the performance mode determination means becomes the mode determined by the performance mode determination means, if the mode determined by the performance mode determination means is different from the mode before the determination.

In the type of gaming machine described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a special game state. After transitioning to the special game state, the player can enjoy its benefits until the termination threshold number of rounds is reached, regardless of whether a predetermined condition (fall) is met. During the special game state, a predetermined performance is executed over multiple game rounds. If the number of game rounds executed during this predetermined performance reaches a predetermined number, a special performance occurs. This special performance clearly indicates whether the special game state continues, that is, whether the predetermined condition was met before reaching the predetermined number of rounds. It is a concern that the special performance revealing that the predetermined condition has already been met may reduce the player's interest in the subsequent game. In this regard, in the configuration described in this feature, when a special performance occurs, the manner of the predetermined performance is determined and changed based on the remaining number of game rounds (remaining guaranteed rounds) until the termination threshold number is reached. In other words, the manner of the predetermined performance can change as a result of the special performance. By indicating the remaining number of game rounds through the manner of the predetermined performance, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the special performance. This can contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Incidentally, the description of the "modification means" shown in this feature can also be rephrased as "modification means for changing the manner of the predetermined performance so that it becomes the manner determined by the performance manner determination means."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features BA2 to BA11 above may also be applied to feature BA12.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ may be applied to feature groups BA1 to BA12.

<Characteristics of the BB Group>
The following set of features BB were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BB1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 25th embodiment),
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively high.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A second game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode,
A third game state (third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), and a predetermined condition is met in the game rounds after reaching the termination threshold number in the second game state (i.e., a fall occurs), a second transition means is provided to transition to the first game state.
A third transition means that, in the second game state, transitions to the third game state if the predetermined condition is met (a fall occurs) before the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number,
A fourth transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), transitions to the first game state,
When transitioning to the second game state, the system includes a termination criterion count setting means (a function of setting the termination criterion count in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) which sets one of a plurality of reference counts (for example, 200 times, 500 times) as the termination criterion count.
When the second game state and the third game state are in progress, a predetermined performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (special stage) over multiple game rounds,
A special effect execution means that executes a special effect that suggests the lottery mode (for example, a second type special effect in the 24th embodiment) in any of the multiple game rounds in which the predetermined effect is being executed,
When the special performance is executed, the performance mode determination means determines the form of the predetermined performance in the game after the special performance ends (for example, the type of ally character that is always displayed during the special stage) based on the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) that will reach the current number of games set by the termination criterion count setting means and the currently set judgment mode (for example, the function of determining the type of ally character by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 in the 24th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined performance mode so that the mode determined by the performance mode determination means becomes the mode determined by the performance mode determination means, if the mode determined by the performance mode determination means is different from the mode before the determination.

In the type of gaming machine described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second game state that is both a second switching mode and a high-probability mode. After transitioning to the second game state, regardless of whether the predetermined conditions (fall) are met, the player can enjoy the benefits of the second switching mode until the termination threshold is reached. With this configuration, the player can aim to transition to the next special game state while keeping their investment low. Here, predetermined effects are executed over multiple game rounds during the second and third game states. If a special effect occurs during the predetermined effects, the special effect indicates whether the game state is the second or third game state, that is, whether the above predetermined conditions were met before the occurrence of the special effect. Since the second game state is more advantageous for the player than the third game state, it is assumed that players who expect to transition to a special game state will pay attention to special effects, hoping that the second game state (high-probability mode) is continuing. In this configuration, when a special effect occurs, the type of effect of the predetermined effect is determined and changed based on the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) until the current game's completion threshold is reached, and the current judgment mode. In other words, the type of effect of the predetermined effect can change as a result of the special effect. The player can infer the remaining number of games, the judgment mode, and the likelihood of reaching the special game state before transitioning to the first game state, based on the type of effect of the predetermined effect. This helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the special effect. This contributes to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the description of the "modification means" shown in this feature can also be rephrased as "modification means for changing the manner of the predetermined performance so that it becomes the manner determined by the performance manner determination means."

Feature BB2. The gaming machine according to Feature BB1, characterized in that the means for determining the performance mode is configured such that one of a plurality of predetermined performance modes determined when the remaining number of games is less than a predetermined number and the judgment mode is the high probability mode is the same as one of a plurality of predetermined performance modes determined when the remaining number of games is more than a predetermined number and the judgment mode is the low probability mode.

When aiming for a special game state, the relationship between the judgment mode and the remaining number of games can change as the game progresses. In other words, there may be situations where the expectation is focused on having many remaining games, and situations where the expectation is focused on the judgment mode being a high-probability mode. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if one of the predetermined performance patterns determined when the remaining number of games is less than a predetermined number and the judgment mode is the high-probability mode is the same as one of the predetermined performance patterns determined when the remaining number of games is more than a predetermined number and the judgment mode is a low-probability mode, then it is possible to suppress excessive diversification of predetermined performance patterns while achieving the effect shown in feature BB1.

Feature BB3. The predetermined performance modes include the first mode and the second mode,
The gaming machine according to feature BB1 or feature BB2, wherein the second mode is more likely to be determined as the mode of the predetermined performance as the number of remaining games increases, and the configuration is such that the second mode is more likely to occur when the judgment mode is the high probability mode compared to when it is the low probability mode.

In the configuration described in this feature, the change to the second mode is encouraged using two parameters: the remaining number of plays and the judgment mode. In this configuration, the player gains a greater advantage when the predetermined performance mode becomes the second mode than the first mode. This suppresses the pre-defined performance mode from becoming excessively complex, while simultaneously enhancing the emphasis of the suggestive function shown in feature BB1.

Feature BB4. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BB1 to Feature BB3, characterized in that the contribution of the remaining number of games played when determining the predetermined presentation mode by the presentation mode determination means is higher than the contribution of the type of judgment mode.

Regarding the judgment mode, after switching from high-probability mode to low-probability mode, it does not switch back to high-probability mode without going through a special game state. Therefore, it is undesirable for the judgment mode to have a strong influence when determining the type of predetermined performance while internally in low-probability mode. Thus, as shown in this feature, if the contribution of the type of judgment mode is less than the contribution of the remaining number of games, it is possible to effectively avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience while adding emphasis to a configuration where the performance is determined solely by the remaining number of games.

Feature BB5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BB1 to Feature BB3, characterized in that the contribution of the type of judgment mode when determining the predetermined performance mode by the performance mode determination means is higher than the contribution of the remaining number of games played.

In a configuration where the type of predetermined presentation is determined based on the remaining number of games, there is a concern that the presentation may become repetitive as the number of remaining games decreases. In this regard, the configuration described in this feature has a contribution less from the type of judgment mode than from the contribution of the remaining number of games. Therefore, even if the presentation changes to a high-expectation type as the number of games increases and the remaining number of games decreases, the impression that it is a false alarm can be reduced. This is desirable in terms of increasing the player's attention to the game by changing the type of predetermined presentation.

Feature BB6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BB1 to Feature BB5, characterized in that it has means for changing the contribution of the remaining number of games played and the contribution of the type of judgment mode when determining the predetermined presentation mode using the presentation mode determination means, according to the remaining number of games played.

As shown in this feature, if the contribution of the remaining number of games played and the contribution of the type of judgment mode can be changed according to the remaining number of games played, a practically desirable configuration can be realized.

Feature BB7. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BB1 to Feature BB6, characterized by having means for narrowing down the candidates for determining the predetermined performance mode according to the judgment mode.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to narrow down the candidates for the predetermined performance mode according to the judgment mode, it is possible to effectively avoid the predetermined performance mode being far removed from the actual gameplay situation.

Feature BB8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features BB1 to BB7, characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to execute the special performance at least when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches a predetermined number.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that a special effect is executed when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined number, the opportunity for the special effect to occur can be ensured, thereby preventing the modification function shown in feature BB1, etc., from being effectively utilized.

Feature BB9. The gaming machine according to Feature BB8, characterized in that the probability of the predetermined performance changing differs between the special performance executed when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the predetermined number, and the special performance executed in game rounds other than the number of game rounds reaching the predetermined number.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the game so that the probability of a special effect changing during a specific number of gameplay rounds differs between rounds where a predetermined number of rounds are reached and rounds where other rounds are not, the distinction between whether or not a change occurs can be enhanced.

Feature BB10. The gaming machine according to Feature BB8, characterized in that, in the special performance executed when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the predetermined number, the manner of the predetermined performance is more easily changed compared to when the special performance is executed in game rounds other than the game round that reaches the predetermined number.

In special effects that occur during the game round in which a predetermined number of plays is reached, the likelihood of them being false alarms is higher compared to configurations where special effects are triggered by a judgment result corresponding to predetermined transition information. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring special effects that occur during the game round in which a predetermined number of plays is reached to be more prone to changes in the predetermined effect pattern compared to special effects that occur during other game rounds, a practically preferable configuration can be achieved.

Feature BB11. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 25th embodiment),
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively high.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A second game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode,
A third game state (third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), and a predetermined condition is met in the game rounds after reaching the termination threshold number in the second game state (i.e., a fall occurs), a second transition means is provided to transition to the first game state.
A third transition means that, in the second game state, transitions to the third game state if the predetermined condition is met (a fall occurs) before the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number,
A fourth transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), transitions to the first game state,
When transitioning to the second game state, the system includes a termination criterion count setting means (a function of setting the termination criterion count in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
When the second game state and the third game state are in progress, a predetermined performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (special stage) over multiple game rounds,
A special performance execution means that performs a special performance (for example, a Type 2 special performance in the 24th embodiment) in any of the multiple game rounds in which the predetermined performance is being performed, to inform the player of the determination result by the determination means,
When the special performance is executed, the performance mode determination means determines the form of the predetermined performance in the game after the special performance ends (for example, the type of ally character that is always displayed during the special stage) based on the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) that will reach the current number of games set by the termination criterion count setting means and the currently set judgment mode (for example, the function of determining the type of ally character by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 in the 24th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined performance mode so that the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means becomes the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means, if the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means is different from the performance mode before the determination.

In the type of gaming machine described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second game state corresponding to a second switching mode and high probability mode. After transitioning to the second game state, regardless of whether a predetermined condition (fall) is met, the player can enjoy the benefits of the second switching mode until the termination threshold is reached. With this configuration, players can aim to transition to the next special game state while minimizing investment. During the second and third game states, predetermined effects are executed over multiple game rounds. If a special effect occurs during these predetermined effects, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined and changed based on the remaining number of game rounds (remaining guaranteed rounds) until the termination threshold is reached and the current judgment mode. In other words, the pattern of the predetermined effect can change as a result of a special effect. Players can infer the remaining number of game rounds and judgment mode, i.e., the probability of entering the special game state before transitioning to the first game state, from the pattern of the predetermined effect, thus preventing the game from becoming monotonous after the special effect. This contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Incidentally, the description of the "modification means" shown in this feature can also be rephrased as "modification means for changing the manner of the predetermined performance so that it becomes the manner determined by the performance manner determination means."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features BB2 to BB10 above may also be applied to feature BB11.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature group BA may also be applied to feature groups BB1 to BB11.

<Characteristics of the BC Group>
The following feature group B and C were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BC1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 26th embodiment),
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively high.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A second game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode,
A third game state (third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), and a predetermined condition is met in the game rounds after reaching the termination threshold number in the second game state (i.e., a fall occurs), a second transition means is provided to transition to the first game state.
A third transition means that, in the second game state, transitions to the third game state if the predetermined condition is met (a fall occurs) before the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number,
A fourth transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), transitions to the first game state,
When transitioning to the second game state, the system includes a termination criterion count setting means (a function of setting the termination criterion count in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) which sets one of several reference counts (for example, 200 times, 500 times) as the termination criterion count,
A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The aforementioned display screen includes a means for executing effects (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) that executes display effects,
The aforementioned performance execution means is
When the game is in a special game state which is the second game state or the third game state, a predetermined performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (special stage) over multiple game rounds,
The system includes a special effect execution means that executes a special effect (for example, a Type 2 special effect in the 26th to 30th embodiments) that notifies whether or not the special game state continues during any game round in which the predetermined effect is being executed,
The predetermined performance execution means is configured to indicate the expected probability of reaching the predetermined transition information during the special game state by displaying a first performance image (e.g., ally character FC) which is correlated with the remaining number of games (remaining guaranteed games) that will reach the termination criterion, and a second performance image (e.g., enemy character EC) which is correlated with the judgment mode.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special effect is configured to be a display effect using the first effect image and the second effect image.

In the type of gaming machine described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second game state that is both a second switching mode and a high-probability mode. After transitioning to the second game state, regardless of whether predetermined conditions (falls) are met, the player can enjoy the benefits of the second switching mode until the termination threshold is reached. With this configuration, the player can aim to transition to the next special game state while keeping investment to a minimum. Here, during the second and third game states, predetermined effects are executed over multiple game rounds. If a special effect occurs during the predetermined effect, the special effect will inform the player whether or not the special game state will continue. Here, in the configuration described in this feature, during the predetermined effect, a first effect image correlated with the remaining number of game rounds until the termination threshold is reached and a second effect image correlated with the judgment mode are displayed, respectively. These first and second effect images suggest the remaining number of game rounds and the judgment mode. The above special effect is a display effect that uses the first and second effect images, which are displayed continuously across game rounds. This strengthens the transition from the standard sequence to the special sequence, effectively mitigating the abruptness of the special sequence.

Feature BC2. The gaming machine according to Feature BC1, wherein the special effect includes a linked display (e.g., battle display) that synchronizes the first effect image and the second effect image in a predetermined area of the display screen (e.g., effect execution area BE).

By configuring the system to link the first and second performance images within a predetermined area, the relationship between the two performance images can be strengthened.

Feature BC3. The special performance execution means is configured to execute the special performance at least in the game round in which the determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is obtained, and in the final game round in which the transition to the first game state is made by the second transition means and the fourth transition means.
The gaming machine according to feature BC1 or feature BC2, characterized in that the predetermined performance can be terminated as a result of the special performance.

Special effects occur when transitioning from one special game state to another, or from a special game state to the first game state. In such a configuration, it is assumed that players will pay close attention to these special effects. While executing display effects across a wide area can effectively diversify the effects and enhance their impact, there is a concern that the first and second effect images used in the predetermined effects may become an obstacle if they are left as they are. On the other hand, while hiding the first and second effect images during special effects can resolve this concern, it is undesirable to disable the suggestive function provided by the predetermined effects. In this regard, by combining with feature BC1, etc., the above concerns can be effectively eliminated by using the first and second effect images for the special effects.

Feature BC4. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BC1 to Feature BC3, wherein the special effect includes a special display that emphasizes one of the first and second effect images, and the special display is configured to notify that a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined transition information has been reached.

By using a special display that emphasizes one of the first or second presentation images, which is predetermined, to inform the player that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined transition information has been reached, it is possible to suppress monotony in the presentation while effectively preventing an excessive amount of information from being provided to the player through the display screen.

Feature BC5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BC1 to Feature BC3, wherein the special effect includes a special display that emphasizes the image for the first effect, and the special display is configured to notify the player that a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined transition information has been reached.

The remaining number of games played equals the remaining number of draws (judgments) under the special game state, and these numbers inevitably decrease as the game progresses. Therefore, it is assumed that players' attention is more likely to be drawn to the first presentation image, which correlates with the remaining number of games played, compared to the second presentation image, which correlates with the judgment mode. Thus, as shown in this feature, in special presentations, a special display emphasizing the first presentation image is used to notify the player that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined transition information has been reached. This effectively suppresses the reduction in the impact of the display presentation due to players missing the special display.

Feature BC6. The display screen is provided with a partition display means that displays a partition image (partition image DG) that divides a predetermined display area of the display screen into a first display area (first display area FE) and a second display area (second display area EE),
A gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC5, characterized in that during the predetermined performance, the first performance image is displayed in the first display area and the second performance image is displayed in the second display area.

Dividing the display screen (predetermined display area) with a partition image to separate the display area for the first effect image from the display area for the second effect image is preferable in order to diversify the display modes of each effect image while suppressing the resulting difficulty in distinguishing between the first and second effect images.

Feature BC7. The partition display means has means for hiding the partition image when the special effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to feature BC6, characterized in that during the special performance, the partition image is hidden and the area where the first performance image is displayed and the area where the second performance image is displayed are each expanded, and at least a portion of these expanded areas overlap.

As shown in feature BC6 above, there is technical significance in separating the display area of the first effect image from the display area of the second effect image using a partition image (dividing the screen). In special effects, by hiding the partition image and expanding the display area of each effect image, a more impactful effect can be achieved. Furthermore, by configuring these expanded areas to overlap at least partially, this effect can be more effectively realized.

Feature BC8. The first image for presentation has a plurality of first images,
The aforementioned second image for presentation includes a plurality of second images,
A first modification means that changes the first performance image to another first image when the first modification condition is met,
The system includes a second modification means for changing the second performance image to another second image when the second modification condition is met,
The gaming machine according to feature BC7, characterized in that, at least when the partition image is not displayed while the special effect is being performed, the timing of the change of the first effect image by the first changing means and the timing of the change of the second effect image by the second changing means are avoided.

When the divider image is hidden and the display areas of the two visual effects images are expanded and overlapping, users may become confused if these visual effects images are simultaneously changed to other images. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by allowing each visual effect image to be changed while avoiding overlapping timing, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively suppressed.

Feature BC9. Equipped with a start suggestion means that indicates the start of the special performance,
The game machine according to feature BC7 or feature BC8, wherein the start suggestion means includes means for displacing at least one of the first performance image and the second performance image so as to be closer to the partition image, means for changing the display position of the partition image in accordance with the displacement, and means for hiding the partition image after changing the display position of the partition image.

As shown in this feature, the visual effect image is displaced toward the partition image → the display position of the partition image changes in conjunction with the displacement of the visual effect image → the start of a special effect is indicated by hiding the partition image, thereby allowing the partition image to be incorporated as part of the effect.

Feature BC10. The first image for presentation has a plurality of first images,
The aforementioned second image for presentation includes a plurality of second images,
The predetermined performance execution means is configured to display one of the plurality of first images on the display screen and one of the plurality of second images on the display screen.
A first changing means that, when the first change condition is met, changes the first presentation image to another first image according to the current remaining number of games,
A gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC9, further comprising a second changing means for changing the second presentation image to another second image according to the current determination mode when the second change condition is met.

According to the configuration described in this feature, it becomes possible to estimate the remaining number of games played from the type of the first presentation image, and to estimate the judgment mode from the type of the second presentation image.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BB may also be applied to feature groups BC1 to BC10.

<Features of the BD Group>
The following feature group BD was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BD1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments),
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is relatively high.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A second game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode,
A third game state (third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), and a predetermined condition is met in the game rounds after reaching the termination threshold number in the second game state (i.e., a fall occurs), a second transition means is provided to transition to the first game state.
A third transition means that, in the second game state, transitions to the third game state if the predetermined condition is met (a fall occurs) before the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the termination threshold number,
A fourth transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 200 rounds, 500 rounds), transitions to the first game state,
When transitioning to the second game state, the system includes a termination criterion count setting means (a function of setting the termination criterion count in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) which sets one of several reference counts (for example, 200 times, 500 times) as the termination criterion count,
A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The aforementioned display screen includes a means for executing effects (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) that executes display effects,
The aforementioned performance execution means is
When the game is in a special game state which is the second game state or the third game state, a predetermined performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (special stage) over multiple game rounds,
The system includes a special performance execution means that executes a special performance (for example, a Type 2 special performance in the 26th to 30th embodiments) that allows the player to identify whether or not the determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information has been obtained during any game round in which the predetermined performance is being executed.
The predetermined presentation is configured such that one of a plurality of first images (female character, fairy character, male character) correlated with the remaining number of games played (remaining guaranteed games) until the termination criteria are reached is displayed on the display screen as the first correlated image (e.g., ally character FC), and one of a plurality of second images (turtle character, crab character, shark character) correlated with the judgment mode is displayed on the display screen as the second correlated image (e.g., enemy character EC), and these first and second correlated images are used to suggest the expected probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined transition information during the special game state.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
If the special performance is executed in a game round in which the determination result does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, and the special game state continues after that game round, the first changing means can change the first correlation image to another first image according to the current remaining number of games,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the special performance is executed in a game round in which the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, and the special game state continues after that game round, the machine has a second changing means that can change the second correlation image to another second image according to the current judgment mode.

In the type of gaming machine described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second game state that is both a second switching mode and a high-probability mode. After transitioning to the second game state, regardless of whether predetermined conditions (falls) are met, the player can enjoy the benefits of the second switching mode until the termination threshold number of spins is reached. With this configuration, the player can aim to transition to the next special game state while keeping their investment low. Here, predetermined effects are executed over multiple spins during the second and third game states. If a special effect occurs during the predetermined effect, the special effect will inform the player whether or not the judgment result corresponds to predetermined transition information. In such a configuration, there is a concern that if the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined transition information after the special effect, the player's attention to the displayed effect will drop sharply. In this regard, in the configuration described in this feature, during the predetermined effect, a first correlation image correlated with the remaining spins until the termination threshold is reached and a second correlation image correlated with the judgment mode are displayed, respectively. These first and second correlation images suggest the remaining spins and the judgment mode. Furthermore, if the special animation results in a judgment that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information (a losing result), the first and second correlation images may be changed. In this way, if the special game state continues after the special animation, the first and second correlation images may be changed—that is, the information that forms the basis of the prediction may be updated. This configuration helps to prevent the display animation from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature BD2. The gaming machine according to Feature BD1, characterized in that the modification of the first correlation image by the first modification means and the modification of the second correlation image by the second modification means are performed during the game round in which the special effect is executed.

In game rounds where special effects are performed, extending the duration of the game round's actions is advantageous in increasing attention to other effects. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by using the duration of the game round in which special effects are performed to change the first/second correlation images, sufficient time can be appropriately secured for changing the correlation images. This is preferable for enhancing the impact of the correlation image changes. Furthermore, when special effects are performed, players' attention tends to be directed towards the display screen. Under these circumstances, configuring the system to change the correlation images is preferable in preventing players from missing the changes.

Feature BD3. The special performance includes a first half before the determination result by the determination means is notified, and a second half after the determination result is notified.
The first modification means modifies the first correlation image in the latter part,
The gaming machine according to feature BD1 or feature BD2, characterized in that the second modification means is configured to change the second correlation image in the latter part.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the special presentation to change the correlated image after the judgment result is announced (in the latter half of the presentation), it is possible to effectively suppress the rapid decline in attention to the display presentation when the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined transition conditions.

Feature BD4. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BD1 to Feature BD3, characterized in that if one of the first and second correlation images is changed as a result of the special performance, the change of the other image triggered by the special performance is avoided.

As shown in this feature, restricting changes to only one of the first and second correlation images is preferable in order to ensure opportunities for changes to the correlation images while suppressing the oversight of such changes.

Feature BD5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BD1 to Feature BD3, characterized in that, if one of the first and second correlation images is changed to the image with the lower expected value as a result of the special performance, the change of the other image to the image with the lower expected value as a result of the special performance is avoided.

As shown in this feature, configuring the first and second correlation images so that they do not simultaneously rank down as a result of a special effect is preferable in suppressing a rapid decline in the player's motivation to play triggered by that special effect.

Feature BD6. The gaming machine according to Feature BD4 or Feature BD5, characterized in that the modification of the first correlation image by the first modification means takes precedence over the modification of the second correlation image by the second modification means.

In a configuration where a special game state offers a chance to transition to another special game state, players tend to focus their attention on the remaining number of games in which the special game state will continue. As this feature demonstrates, if the configuration prioritizes the change of the first correlation image over the change of the second correlation image, it is possible to effectively stimulate the player's anticipation regarding the remaining number of games. In particular, considering that the remaining number of games decreases as the game progresses, prioritizing the change of the first correlation image to secure the opportunity for change has technical significance.

Feature BD7. The gaming machine according to Feature BD4 or Feature BD5, characterized in that the modification of the second correlation image by the second modification means takes precedence over the modification of the first correlation image by the first modification means.

As shown in Feature BD1, etc., in a gaming machine where the judgment mode has two stages, a low probability mode and a high probability mode, and where it is not possible to return to the high probability mode without going through a special game state after transitioning from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the opportunities for the judgment mode to switch are infrequent. Therefore, by configuring the machine to prioritize changing the second correlation image, which is correlated with the judgment mode, it is possible to prevent situations where the special game state ends without the second correlation image being changed, thus preventing the function of changing the second correlation image from being effectively utilized.

Feature BD8. The first modification means includes means for hiding the first correlation image before modification which is displayed at a first predetermined position on the display screen, means for enlarging and displaying the modified first correlation image in the center of the display screen, and means for shrinking and displaying the modified first correlation image at the first predetermined position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD7, characterized in that the second modification means includes means for hiding the second correlation image before modification which is displayed at a first predetermined position on the display screen, means for enlarging and displaying the modified second correlation image in the center of the display screen, and means for shrinking and displaying the modified second correlation image at the first predetermined position.

With the configuration described in this feature, in a display screen that shows the first and second correlation images, it is possible to effectively suppress the difficulty in understanding the relationship before and after the change while enhancing the impact of the change.

Feature BD9. The display screen is provided with a pattern display area that, after variably displaying multiple patterns, displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means in a stopped state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD8, characterized in that one of the first correlation image and the second correlation image is provided with a difference such that it has more opportunities to be changed than the other, and the other is configured to be displayed in a position closer to the pattern display area than the other.

By displaying frequently changing correlated images closer to the image display area than less frequently changing correlated images, user satisfaction can be significantly improved.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BC may also be applied to feature groups BD1 to BD9.

<Features of the BE group>
The following feature group BE was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BE1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The device includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the aforementioned display device,
The display control means is
A first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character FC) on the aforementioned display screen,
The aforementioned display screen is equipped with a second display means for displaying a second type character (enemy character EC),
The first display means is,
Means for displaying the first type character in the first display area (resident display area FCE) on the display screen in the predetermined game state,
The system includes means for hiding the Type 1 character currently displayed in the first display area and displaying the Type 1 character in the second display area (performance execution area BE) on the display screen when a special performance (Type 2 special performance) is executed during the predetermined game state,
The second display means is,
Means for displaying the second type character in the third display area (resident display area ECE) of the display screen over multiple game rounds in the predetermined game state,
The system includes means for hiding the Type 2 character displayed in the third display area and displaying the Type 2 character in the second display area (performance execution area BE) on the display screen when the special performance (Type 2 special performance) is executed during the predetermined game state,
The display control means is configured to dynamically display the first type character and the second type character, which are displayed in the second display area during the special performance, in the second display area as the special performance progresses.

During a predetermined game state, the first type character is displayed in the first display area and the second type character is displayed in the third display area over multiple game rounds. When a special effect is executed while these first and second type characters are displayed (in standby or permanently resident) on the screen, the first type character displayed in the first display area and the second type character displayed in the third display area become invisible, and then the invisible characters are displayed in the second display area. These characters then move to the second display area as the special effect progresses. By configuring the system in this way, where standby characters are moved to the second display area and the special effect progresses through dynamic display in that second display area, players will focus on the game in anticipation of a special effect occurring (dynamic display of their preferred character) while their favorite character is displayed during the predetermined game state, effectively preventing monotony in the game during that state.

Furthermore, the "predetermined game state" described in this feature may also be referred to as the "special game state."

Feature BE2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The device includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the aforementioned display device,
The display control means is
A first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character FC) on the aforementioned display screen,
The aforementioned display screen is equipped with a second display means for displaying a second type character (enemy character EC),
The first display means is,
Means for displaying the first type character in the first display area (resident display area FCE) on the display screen over multiple game rounds during the predetermined game state,
The system includes means for hiding the Type 1 character currently displayed in the first display area and displaying the Type 1 character in the second display area (performance execution area BE) on the display screen when a special performance (Type 2 special performance) is executed during the predetermined game state,
The second display means is,
Means for displaying the second type character in the third display area (resident display area ECE) on the display screen over the plurality of game rounds during the predetermined game state,
The system includes means for hiding the Type 2 character displayed in the third display area and displaying the Type 2 character in the second display area (performance execution area BE) on the display screen when the special performance (Type 2 special performance) is executed during the predetermined game state,
The display control means is configured to dynamically display the first type character and the second type character, which are displayed in the second display area during the special performance, in the second display area as the special performance progresses.

During a predetermined game state, the first type character is displayed in the first display area and the second type character is displayed in the third display area over multiple game rounds. When a special effect is executed while these first and second type characters are displayed (in standby or permanently resident) on the screen, the first type character displayed in the first display area and the second type character displayed in the third display area become invisible, and then the invisible characters are displayed in the second display area. These characters then move to the second display area as the special effect progresses. By configuring the system in this way, where standby characters are moved to the second display area and the special effect progresses through dynamic display in that second display area, players will focus on the game in anticipation of a special effect occurring (dynamic display of their preferred character) while their favorite character is displayed during the predetermined game state, effectively preventing monotony in the game during that state.

Furthermore, the "predetermined game state" described in this feature may also be referred to as the "special game state."

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is a gaming machine comprising a display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a), and display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the display device, wherein the display control means comprises a first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character FC) on the display screen, and a second display means for displaying a second type character (enemy character EC) on the display screen, wherein the first display means includes means for displaying the first type character in a first display area on the display screen in a predetermined game state, and means for hiding the first type character displayed in the first display area when a special performance (second type special performance) is executed during the predetermined game state, and the second The game machine is characterized by having means for displaying a Type 1 character in a second display area on the display screen, wherein the second display means includes means for displaying the Type 2 character in a third display area on the display screen during a predetermined game state, and means for hiding the Type 2 character displayed in the third display area and displaying the Type 2 character in the second display area on the display screen when a special effect (Type 2 special effect) is performed during the predetermined game state, and the display control means is configured to dynamically display the Type 1 character and the Type 2 character displayed in the second display area in accordance with the progress of the special effect.

Feature BE3. The first type character is configured such that when displayed in the first display area, its movement is suppressed or it appears stationary compared to when displayed in the second display area.
The gaming machine according to feature BE2, characterized in that when the second type of character is displayed in the third display area, its movement is suppressed or it appears stationary compared to when it is displayed in the second display area.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the movement of each character becomes more active as they move from the first/third display area to the second display area (execution of special effects). This configuration can attract the attention of players who expect dynamic character movements.

Feature BE4. Multiple characters are provided for each of the first type character and the second type character.
The first display means includes means for changing the first type character displayed in the first display area to another first type character when the first change condition is met.
The gaming machine according to feature BE2 or feature BE3, characterized in that the second display means has means for changing the second type character displayed in the second display area to another second type character when the second change condition is met.

As shown in this feature, by providing multiple copies of both Type 1 and Type 2 characters, the variations in special effects using these characters can be increased. This is desirable for increasing player attention through the diversification of special effects. By combining this configuration with the configuration shown in Feature BE2, etc., even when a special effect occurs during a predetermined game state, the timing of the special effect corresponding to the combination of Type 1 and Type 2 characters that the player expects will be limited. This is desirable for enhancing the dynamism of the game's progression.

Feature BE5. The size of the second display area is larger than the combined size of the first display area and the third display area.
A gaming machine according to any one of features BE2 to BE4, characterized in that it has means for enlarging the first type character and the second type character when they are displayed in the second display area.

By enlarging the characters when moving them from the first and third display areas (for standby/resident display) to the second display area (for special effects), the impact at the start of special effects can be enhanced.

Feature BE6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BE2 to Feature BE5, characterized in that the movement range of the first type character in the second display area and the movement range of the second type character in the second display area overlap.

As shown in Feature BE2, in a configuration where both Type 1 and Type 2 characters are dynamically displayed in the second display area, by overlapping the movement ranges of each character in the second display area, it becomes possible to dynamically move and enlarge these characters. This is desirable for increasing attention to special effects.

Feature BE7. When the special performance is to be started, the system is equipped with a start suggestion means that displays a start suggestion image on the display screen to indicate the start of the special performance.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BE2 to BE6, characterized in that the first display means and the second display means are configured to hide the first type character displayed in the first display area and the second type character displayed in the second display area after the start suggestion image is displayed in the second display area, and to display the first type character and the second type character in the second display area after the start suggestion image displayed in the second display area has been hidden.

When a special effect is about to begin, an indicator image is displayed on the screen, diverting the player's attention away from the Type 1 and Type 2 characters. Then, by displaying the Type 1 and Type 2 characters in the second display area as soon as the indicator image ends, a temporary period of the characters being hidden (a blank space) is created, making this blank space less noticeable. This is advantageous in strengthening the connection between the character displays in the first/third display areas and the character displays in the second display area.

Feature BE8. The second display area is provided between the first display area and the third display area on the display screen.
The gaming machine according to feature BE7, characterized in that the start indication means is configured to display at least a portion of the start indication image in the second display area.

As shown in this feature, by providing a second display area between the first and third display areas, and displaying the special performance start indication image so that at least a portion of the indication image is located within the second display area, when the indication image is finished displaying, each character will be displayed in the same second display area as the indication image. This effectively prevents players from losing sight of the characters, even when they are temporarily hidden at the start of a special performance.

Feature BE9. The gaming machine according to Feature BE7 or Feature BE8, characterized in that the display control means has means for dimming the display screen when the start suggestion image displayed on the display screen is hidden.

As shown in this feature, by dimming the display screen and hiding all images such as the start indication image and background image, the sense of unease caused by the disappearance of the characters that were displayed in the first and third display areas can be effectively reduced.

Feature BE10. The special performance is a performance that allows the player to identify whether or not the result corresponds to the predetermined transition information.
The first display means has means for returning the first type character displayed in the second display area to the first display area after it has been notified that the special effect has resulted in a determination that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BE2 to BE9, characterized in that the second display means has means for returning the second type character displayed in the second display area to the third display area after it is notified that the special effect has resulted in a determination that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information.

After the judgment result is announced via a special animation, the characters displayed in the second display area can be returned to the first and third display areas to prepare for the next special animation.

Feature BE11. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The device includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the aforementioned display device,
The display control means is
A first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character FC) on the aforementioned display screen,
The aforementioned display screen is equipped with a second display means for displaying a second type character (enemy character EC),
The first display means is,
Means for displaying the first type character in the first display area (resident display area FCE) on the display screen over multiple game rounds during the predetermined game state,
The system includes means for moving the first type character displayed in the first display area to the second display area (performance execution area BE) on the display screen when a special performance (second type special performance) is executed during the predetermined game state,
The second display means is,
Means for displaying the second type character in the third display area (resident display area ECE) on the display screen over the plurality of game rounds during the predetermined game state,
The system includes means for moving the Type 2 character displayed in the third display area to the second display area (performance execution area BE) on the display screen when the special performance (Type 2 special performance) is executed during the predetermined game state,
The display control means is configured to dynamically display the first type character and the second type character, which are displayed in the second display area during the special performance, in the second display area as the special performance progresses.

During a predetermined game state, the first type character is displayed in the first display area and the second type character is displayed in the third display area over multiple game rounds. When a special effect is executed while these first and second type characters are displayed (in standby or permanently resident) on the screen, the first type character displayed in the first display area and the second type character displayed in the third display area become hidden, and the displayed characters are moved to the second display area. These characters then move to the second display area as the special effect progresses. By configuring the system in this way, where standby characters are moved to the second display area and the special effect progresses through dynamic display in that second display area, players will focus on the game in anticipation of a special effect occurring (dynamic display of their preferred character) while their favorite character is displayed during the predetermined game state, effectively preventing monotony in the game during that state.

Furthermore, the "predetermined game state" described in this feature may also be referred to as the "special game state."

Feature BE12. The second display area is provided between the first display area and the third display area.
The gaming machine according to feature BE9, characterized in that the first display means and the second display means are configured to simultaneously move the first type character displayed in the first display area and the second type character displayed in the third display area to the second display area when the special performance is executed.

As shown in this feature, by providing a second display area between the first and third display areas, and simultaneously moving the first and second type characters to the second display area, the time required for character movement can be shortened. This is preferable for quickly initiating special effects.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BE3 to BE10 above may also be applied to Features BE1 and Features BE11 to BE12.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BD may be applied to feature groups BE1 to BE12.

<Characteristics of the BF Group>
The following feature group BF was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BF1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The device includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the aforementioned display device,
The display control means is
A first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character) on the aforementioned display screen,
A second display means for displaying a second type of character (enemy character) on the aforementioned display screen,
The system includes a third display means for displaying a partition (partition image DG) that divides a predetermined area of the display screen into a first display area (first display area FE) and a second display area (second display area EE),
The third display means is configured to hide the partition when a special effect (Type 2 special effect) is performed on the display screen.
The first display means displays the first type character in the first display area when the special effect is not being performed, and dynamically displays the first type character such that the predetermined area becomes the movement range of the first type character when the special effect is being performed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display means is configured to display the second type character in the second display area when the special performance is not being performed, and to dynamically display the second type character such that the predetermined area becomes the movement range of the second type character when the special performance is being performed.

The display areas for Type 1 and Type 2 characters are divided by a partition into a first display area for Type 1 characters and a second display area for Type 2 characters. This configuration, which separates each display area with a partition when displaying multiple characters on the screen, helps to prevent difficulty in distinguishing between the two characters. However, the presence of such a partition can reduce the flexibility of special effects performed using both characters. In this configuration, when a special effect is performed, the partition is hidden, and the movement range of each character is expanded from the first/second display area to a predetermined area, where the characters are dynamically displayed. By hiding the partition when a special effect is performed and expanding the movement range of each character's dynamic display in conjunction with this, it is possible to clearly show the player how the effect is progressing while enhancing the impact of the special effect. This contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature is a game machine comprising: a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed; a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation; and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable prize entry device 83) provided in the game area, wherein the machine includes: special information acquisition means (a function that executes a process to acquire the retained information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (retained information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which is the ball entry section; acquisition information storage means (retained ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; and the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means is predetermined transition information (for example, when the result is a jackpot). A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether or not the result corresponds to the corresponding random number group; a game round operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1, D2) is started prior to or based on the determination means, and the completion of the game round operation with a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is considered as one game round, and a game round control means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes game round control processing) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1, D2) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means; and based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game round operation by the game round control means, the game state is set to a predetermined game The system includes a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the current game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments), a display device (symbol display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a), and display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that control the display of the display device, wherein the display control means includes a first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character) on the display screen, a second display means for displaying a second type character (enemy character) on the display screen, and a third display means for displaying a partition (partition image DG) that divides a predetermined area of the display screen into a first display area (first display area FE) and a second display area (second display area EE), and the predetermined game state is a special game state (second normal game state The game machine is characterized by the following configuration: (including a normal game state and a third normal game state), the third display means is configured to hide the partition when a special effect (second type special effect) is executed on the display screen during the special game state, the first display means displays the first type character in the first display area when the special effect is not being executed in the special game state, and dynamically displays the first type character so that the predetermined area becomes the movement range of the first type character when the special effect is being executed in the special game state, and the second display means displays the second type character in the second display area when the special effect is not being executed in the special game state, and dynamically displays the second type character so that the predetermined area becomes the movement range of the second type character when the special effect is being executed in the special game state.

Feature BF2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The device includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the aforementioned display device,
The display control means is
A first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character) on the aforementioned display screen,
A second display means for displaying a second type of character (enemy character) on the aforementioned display screen,
The system includes a third display means for displaying a partition (partition image DG) that divides a predetermined area of the display screen into a first display area (first display area FE) and a second display area (second display area EE),
The third display means is configured to display the partition when a predetermined performance (special stage) is being performed over multiple game rounds during the predetermined game state, and to hide the partition when a special performance (second type special performance) is being performed on the display screen during the predetermined performance.
The first display means displays the first type character in the first display area when the special effect is not being performed, and dynamically displays the first type character such that the predetermined area on the display screen becomes the range of movement for the first type character when the special effect is being performed.
The game machine is characterized in that the second display means is configured to display the second type character in the second display area when the special performance is not being performed, and to dynamically display the second type character when the special performance is being performed such that the predetermined area on the display screen becomes the range of movement for the second type character.

During a predetermined game state, Type 1 and Type 2 characters are displayed over multiple game rounds through a predetermined animation. The area where these characters are displayed during the predetermined animation is divided by a partition into a first display area for Type 1 characters and a second display area for Type 2 characters. This configuration, which separates each display area with a partition during the predetermined animation, helps prevent difficulty in distinguishing between the two characters. However, the presence of such a partition can reduce the flexibility of special animations performed using both characters. In this configuration, when a special animation is performed during the predetermined animation, the partition is hidden, and the movement range of each character is expanded from the first/second display area to the predetermined area, where they are dynamically displayed. By hiding the partition in conjunction with the execution of a special animation during the predetermined animation, and expanding the movement range of each character's dynamic display in conjunction with this, it is possible to clearly show the player how the animation is progressing while enhancing the impact of the special animation. This can contribute to increasing interest in gaming.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine comprising a display device having a display screen and a display control means for controlling the display of the display device, wherein the display control means comprises a first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character) on the display screen, a second display means for displaying a second type character (enemy character) on the display screen, and a third display means for displaying a partition that divides the display screen into a first display area and a second display area, wherein the third display means displays the partition when a predetermined performance is being performed over multiple game rounds during the predetermined game state, and during the predetermined performance, the display screen displays The game machine is configured such that when a special effect is performed, the partition is hidden; the first display means displays the first type character in the first display area when the special effect is not being performed, and dynamically displays the first type character such that the predetermined area becomes the range of movement when the special effect is being performed; and the second display means displays the second type character in the second display area when the special effect is not being performed, and dynamically displays the second type character such that the predetermined area becomes the range of movement when the special effect is being performed.

Feature BF3. The gaming machine according to Feature BF2, characterized in that, when the partition is displayed on the display screen, the movement range of the first type character on the display screen is restricted to the first display area, and the movement range of the second type character on the display screen is restricted to the second display area.

As shown in this feature, by limiting the range of dynamic display, it is possible to effectively prevent players from losing sight of the character they want to focus on, even in configurations where multiple characters are displayed simultaneously and dynamically.

Feature BF4. A gaming machine according to Feature BF2 or Feature BF3, characterized in that, when the first type character is dynamically displayed in the special performance, the movement range of the first type character on the display screen and the movement range of the second type character on the display screen when the second type character is dynamically displayed overlap by at least a portion of each movement range.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the movement ranges of each character to overlap, it becomes possible to further expand the movement range and make each character's movements more dynamic or display them larger. This is advantageous in increasing attention to special effects.

Feature BF5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BF2 to Feature BF4, characterized in that it has means for enlarging at least one of the Type 1 character and the Type 2 character during the progress of the special performance.

As shown in this feature, if at least one of the characters is enlarged, it becomes difficult to increase the movement distance of that character. By applying the technical concept shown in Feature BF4 to such a configuration, the constraints related to movement distance can be suitably relaxed even when characters are enlarged.

Feature BF6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BF2 to Feature BF5, characterized in that the correlation between the movement of the first type character and the movement of the second type character during the execution of the special performance is stronger than the correlation between the movement of the first type character and the movement of the second type character during the predetermined performance and when the special performance is not being executed.

When the Type 1 and Type 2 characters are waiting (resident) in the respective display areas, the correlation between their movements is weak. However, when a special effect is executed, the correlation between their movements strengthens. This configuration effectively encourages players, who anticipate the coordinated movement of both characters, to focus on the special effect.

Feature BF7. The display control means includes means for displaying a start suggestion image that indicates the start of the special performance when the special performance is to be started, such that the image spans across the partition.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BF2 to BF6, characterized in that the third display means is configured to hide the partition when the start suggestion image is displayed.

As shown in this feature, by displaying the start indication image across the partition and hiding the partition before hiding the start indication image, the abruptness when the partition is hidden and the movement range of each character is expanded can be suppressed. Furthermore, if the partition is hidden while the player's attention is drawn to the start indication image, the chances of missing the transition from showing to hiding the partition can be reduced.

Feature BF8. As the aforementioned special effects, a first effect and a second effect are provided.
The third display means is,
A first shifting means that shifts the position of the partition towards the second character in conjunction with the movement of the first character toward the partition,
The system includes a second shifting means that shifts the position of the partition towards the first type character in conjunction with the movement of the second type character toward the partition,
A gaming machine according to any one of features BF2 to BF7, characterized in that the special performance is initiated when the position of the partition is changed by the first shift means, and the first performance is executed as the special performance when the position of the partition is changed by the second shift means, and the second performance is executed as the special performance.

As shown in this feature, if a special effect is initiated after a change in the position of the partition by the first shifting means, the first effect is executed as the special effect. If a special effect is initiated after a change in the position of the partition by the second shifting means, the second effect is executed as the special effect. This configuration effectively suppresses the monotony of the special effect initiation patterns when a special effect occurs during a predetermined effect.

Feature BF9. The gaming machine according to Feature BF8, characterized in that the third display means has means for concealing the partition portion at the position after the partition portion has been shifted by the first shift means or the second shift means.

As shown in Feature BF8, in a configuration where the position of the partition is shifted in conjunction with the character's movement, by making the partition invisible at the shifted position, it becomes clear which character's movement is the starting point for expanding the movement range, thereby effectively achieving the effect shown in Feature BF8.

Feature BF10. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined transition information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the 26th to 30th embodiments),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The device includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the aforementioned display device,
The display control means comprises a first display means for displaying a first type character (ally character) on the display screen, and a second display means for displaying a second type character (enemy character) on the display screen, wherein when the special performance is not being executed, the first type character is displayed in a first display area on the display screen and the second type character is displayed in a second display area on the display screen, and when the special performance is being executed, the first type character and the second type character are dynamically displayed such that a predetermined area larger than the first display area and the second display area becomes the movement range of the first type character and the second type character.

The display areas for Type 1 and Type 2 characters are divided by a partition into a first display area for Type 1 characters and a second display area for Type 2 characters. This configuration, which separates each display area with a partition when displaying multiple characters on the screen, helps to prevent difficulty in distinguishing between the two characters. However, the presence of such a partition can reduce the flexibility of special effects performed using both characters. In this configuration, when a special effect is performed, the partition is hidden, and the movement range of each character is expanded from the first/second display area to a predetermined area, where the characters are dynamically displayed. By hiding the partition when a special effect is performed and expanding the movement range of each character's dynamic display in conjunction with this, it is possible to clearly show the player how the effect is progressing while enhancing the impact of the special effect. This contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BF3 to BF9 above may also be applied to Features BF1 and BF10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BE may be applied to feature BF1 to feature BF10.

<Features of the BG Group>
The following set of features BG were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BG1. The starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) is provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display unit (hold display area SE),
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a special performance execution means that executes a special performance (hold notification performance) based on the result of the prior identification means,
The aforementioned special performance execution means is
A movable body (movable decorative body 801K) is provided with a movable part (protruding part 811K) that can be displaced between a standby position and a performance position,
A drive control means for controlling the drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
Light emission control means for controlling the emission of a light-emitting unit (for example, a first light-emitting unit 811K) provided on the movable body (a function that executes processing for light emission control in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
The system includes a display mode changing means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that executes processing for changing the color of the reserved symbols in a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) that is different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the identification by the aforementioned identification means,
The light-emitting unit is provided with a normal light-emitting mode (white) that correlates with the normal display mode, and a special light-emitting mode (blue, yellow, red) that correlates with the special display mode.
The light emission control means includes means for causing the light-emitting part to emit light in the special display mode when the movable part is in the standby position,
The drive control means includes means for driving the drive unit to displace the movable part to the performance position while the light-emitting unit is emitting light in the special display mode,
The display mode changing means is characterized in that when the light-emitting part is emitting light in the special display mode and the movable part is positioned at the performance position, the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to the special display mode.

The primary function of the hold display means is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information items stored in the special information storage means, i.e., the remaining number of hold items. In recent years, technologies have been proposed that predict the likelihood of receiving a bonus by pre-determining whether the special information corresponds to predetermined transition information and changing the appearance of the hold symbol (display pattern such as color and design) in subsequent game rounds. This increases attention to the hold symbol (for example, the game round to be played later). However, hold symbols are generally displayed small to allow for coexistence with other information provided to the user. Due to these circumstances, there are limitations to increasing the impact of changes in the display pattern of hold symbols, and there is a concern that the effect of increasing attention may not be fully realized if the changes in display pattern are overlooked.

In this configuration, the illumination pattern of the movable part (light-emitting section) is correlated with the display pattern of the held symbols. Specifically, there is a normal illumination pattern correlated with the normal display pattern of the held symbols, and a special illumination pattern correlated with the special display pattern of the held symbols. In the special effect, first, with the movable part in a standby position, the movable part (light-emitting section) illuminates in a special pattern, suggesting to the player the changed display pattern of the held symbols. Then, the movable part moves to the effect position, and the display pattern of the held symbols changes to the special display pattern. By scaling up the special effect using this movable effect device, it is possible to realize a novel and unprecedented effect. This strengthens the impact of the special effect and effectively achieves the attention-grabbing effect mentioned above.

The configuration described in this feature comprises: a starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE); special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section; an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function that executes the process for the jackpot lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result); and prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, the game rotation operation (variable display of patterns in the operation opening display units D1, D2) is started, and a report corresponding to the result of the determination is issued. The game includes: a game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed sequentially according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the completion of the game round operation as one game round as the result of the acquisition information storage means; a game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the predetermined transition information; a hold display means (a function that executes hold display processing in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that displays a number of hold symbols corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display unit (hold display area SE); and a hold display control means (a function that executes hold display processing in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that controls the display of the hold display means. The system includes a function to perform processing for displaying the reserved symbols in U442, and a pre-identification means (a function to perform pre-confirmation processing in MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information before it becomes the subject of the determination, and the reserved display control means has a display mode changing means that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols to a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the identification by the pre-identification means, a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) provided with a movable part (protruding part 811K) that can be displaced between a standby position and a performance position, a drive control means (a function to perform drive control processing in MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the drive of the drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body, a light-emitting part (for example, a first light-emitting part 810K) provided on the movable body, and a light-emitting control means that controls the light emission of the light-emitting part The game machine is characterized by comprising a performance device (movable performance device 800K and notification/performance control device 140) having a means (a function that executes processing for light emission control in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140), wherein the light emission unit is provided with a normal light emission mode (white) correlated with the normal display mode and a special light emission mode (blue, yellow, red) correlated with the special display mode, the light emission control means has means for causing the light emission unit to emit light in the special display mode when the movable unit is in the standby position, the drive control means has means for displacing the movable unit to the performance position when the light emission unit is emitting light in the special display mode, and the display mode changing means has means for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols to the special display mode when the movable unit is positioned at the performance position while the light emission unit is emitting light in the special display mode.

Feature BG2. The gaming machine according to Feature BG1, characterized in that the movable body is configured to move closer to the reserved symbol that is subject to the change to the special display mode by the displacement of the movable part from the standby position to the standby position.

With the configuration described in this feature, the player's gaze, which is focused on the movable part (movable section) that has entered a special luminescence mode, can be guided to the reserved symbol that is to be changed. This is preferable in preventing players from missing the moment when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes.

Feature BG3. The gaming machine according to Feature BG1 or Feature BG2, characterized in that, when the special effect is executed, the movable part is positioned at the effect location, thereby designating the reserved symbols among the reserved symbols displayed on the reserved symbol display unit that are subject to change by the display mode changing means.

According to Feature BG3, the display pattern of the held symbols is indicated by the illumination pattern of the movable part (light-emitting part), and the held symbols to be changed are specified by the movement of the movable part. Because the illumination pattern of the movable part becomes a special illumination pattern, players who focus on the movable part can understand which held symbols will be changed by following its movement with their eyes. In this way, by strengthening the coordination between the movable part and the held symbols, the effects shown in Feature BG1, etc., can be more effectively achieved.

Feature BG4. The hold display unit has a plurality of unit display areas (for example, unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK) capable of displaying the hold patterns,
The aforementioned performance positions include performance positions (for example, the third performance position to the sixth performance position, the eighth performance position to the eleventh performance position) which are each associated with a plurality of unit display areas.
The gaming machine according to feature BG3, characterized in that the drive control means is configured to specify the target of change by displacing the movable part to a performance position corresponding to the unit display area where the reserved pattern to be changed is displayed when the special performance is executed.

As shown in this feature, by displacing the movable part to the performance position corresponding to the unit display area where the pending image to be changed is displayed, the target of the change can be clearly indicated.

Feature BG5. The performance position is such that the movable part overlaps with the reserved pattern displayed in the unit display area from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized in that the display mode changing means is configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbol to the special display mode when the movable part is overlapping the reserved symbol that is the target of the change when the special performance is executed.

According to feature BG5, the display mode of the reserved symbol designated by the movable body is changed while maintaining its overlap with the movable body, thereby mitigating the abruptness of the change in display mode. This is also preferable in preventing the correlation between the illumination mode of the movable body and the display mode of the reserved symbol from becoming difficult to understand.

Feature BG6. The special display modes include a first special display mode (e.g., blue) and a second special display mode (e.g., red) which is set to have a higher probability of resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information than the first special display mode.
The special light emission modes include a first special light emission mode (e.g., blue) correlated with the first special display mode, and a second special light emission mode (e.g., red) correlated with the second special display mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features BG1 to BG5, characterized in that, in the special effect, when the movable part is positioned at the effect position and the light-emitting part is in the first special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the first special display mode, and when the movable part is positioned at the effect position and the light-emitting part is in the second special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the second special display mode.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that when the light-emitting part of the movable body is in the first special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the first special display mode, and when the light-emitting part of the movable body is in the second special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the second special display mode, a diversification of special effects can be suitably realized.

Feature BG7. The first special display mode and the first special light emission mode are defined such that the display color of the reserved pattern and the light emission color of the light emission part are the same color.
The gaming machine according to feature BG6, characterized in that the second special display mode and the second special light emission mode are defined such that the display color of the reserved pattern and the light emission color of the light emission part are the same color.

As shown in this feature, by making the light-emitting color of the movable part (light-emitting part) the same as the display color of the held image, it is possible to effectively suppress the difficulty in understanding the correlation between the light-emitting pattern and the display pattern in special effects.

Feature BG8. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BG1 to Feature BG7, characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to turn off the light emission unit before returning the movable unit from the performance position to the standby position.

By configuring the movable part (light-emitting section) to turn off before returning to its standby position, it is possible to effectively prevent the misunderstanding that further special effects will occur after returning to the standby position.

Feature BG9. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BG1 to Feature BG8, characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to turn off the light emission unit after the display mode of the held pattern has been changed to the special display mode by the display mode changing means.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to turn off the light-emitting part after the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed has been altered, that is, by configuring the system to change the display mode of the reserved symbol while the light-emitting part is emitting in a special light-emitting mode, it is possible to effectively suppress the difficulty in discerning the correlation between the light-emitting mode of the movable part (light-emitting part) and the display mode of the reserved symbol.

Feature BG10. The movable body is rotatable around its base portion (main body portion 810K).
The movable part is a protruding part (protruding part 811K) formed to protrude from the base part,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BG1 to BG9, characterized in that the light-emitting part is provided on the base part.

Increasing the operating speed (rotation speed) of the movable part is desirable for enhancing the impact of special effects. However, there is a concern that the constraints related to the operating speed will be too great in preventing the light emission of special illumination modes from being missed. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by providing the light-emitting part on the base portion that serves as the rotation center, it is possible to suppress the missed light emission of special illumination modes even when the movable part rotates rapidly, and to suitably alleviate the constraints related to the operating speed.

Feature BG11. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BG1 to Feature BG10, characterized in that the light-emitting part is larger than the reserved pattern.

By configuring the light-emitting area to be larger than the held image, the effects shown in Feature BG1, etc., can be effectively achieved.

Feature BG12. The hold display unit has a plurality of unit display areas (unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK) capable of displaying the hold patterns,
The aforementioned performance positions include performance positions (for example, the third performance position to the sixth performance position, the eighth performance position to the eleventh performance position) which are each associated with a plurality of unit display areas.
The aforementioned performance position is a position where the movable part overlaps with the reserved pattern displayed in the unit display area from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BG1 to BG11, characterized in that a light-transmitting portion is provided in the movable part that overlaps with the reserved pattern, and the reserved pattern can be viewed through the light-transmitting portion.

As shown in this feature, by making the reserved symbols visible through the light-transmitting part, players can understand through the movable part that the display of the reserved symbols designated by the movable part has changed. This effectively improves the satisfaction of players who are intently watching the reserved symbols in anticipation of a change in the designated symbols.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BF may also be applied to feature groups BG1 to BG12.

<Characteristics of the BH group>
The following feature group BH was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BH1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display unit (hold display area SE),
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a special performance execution means that executes a special performance (hold notification performance) based on the result of the prior identification means,
The aforementioned special performance execution means is
A movable body (movable decorative body 801K) is provided with a movable part (protruding part 811K) that can be displaced to a standby position where overlap with the display area of the reserved pattern is avoided and to a performance position where it overlaps with the display area,
A drive control means for controlling the drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
Light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the light-emitting part (third light-emitting part 813K) provided on the movable body (a function that executes processing for light emission control in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
A display mode changing means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that executes processing for changing the color of the reserved symbols in the MPU 442) changes the display mode of the reserved symbols to a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) that is different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the identification by the aforementioned identification means,
The system includes a target determination means for determining the reserved image to be changed by the display mode changing means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140's MPU 442 to determine the reserved image to be changed),
The light-emitting unit is provided with a normal light-emitting mode (white) that correlates with the normal display mode, and a special light-emitting mode (blue, yellow, red) that correlates with the special display mode.
The hold display unit has a plurality of unit display areas (unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK) capable of displaying the hold patterns,
The aforementioned performance positions include performance positions (for example, the third performance position to the sixth performance position, the eighth performance position to the eleventh performance position) which are each associated with a plurality of unit display areas.
The drive control means includes means for driving the drive unit to displace the movable part to a predetermined performance position corresponding to the reserved symbol that is to be changed, while the reserved symbol is being displayed.
The light emission control means includes means for causing the light emission unit to emit light in the special display mode when the movable unit is positioned in the predetermined display position,
The display mode changing means is characterized by having means for changing the display mode of the reserved pattern to the special display mode after the light-emitting unit has entered the special display mode.

The primary function of the hold display means is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information items stored in the special information storage means, i.e., the remaining number of hold items. In recent years, technologies have been proposed that predict the likelihood of receiving a bonus by pre-determining whether the special information corresponds to predetermined transition information and changing the appearance of the hold symbol (display pattern such as color and design) in subsequent game rounds. This increases attention to the hold symbol (for example, the game round to be played later). However, hold symbols are generally displayed small to allow for coexistence with other information provided to the user. Due to these circumstances, there are limitations to increasing the impact of changes in the display pattern of hold symbols, and there is a concern that the effect of increasing attention may not be fully realized if the changes in display pattern are overlooked.

In this configuration, the illumination pattern of the movable part (light-emitting section) is correlated with the display pattern of the held symbols. Specifically, there is a normal illumination pattern correlated with the normal display pattern of the held symbols, and a special illumination pattern correlated with the special display pattern of the held symbols. In the special effect, first, the movable part moves and is positioned at the effect location, suggesting to the player which held symbol is to be changed. Then, with the movable part in the standby position, the movable part (light-emitting section) illuminates in the special illumination pattern, and the display pattern of the held symbols changes to the special display pattern. By scaling up the special effect using this movable effect device, it is possible to realize a novel and unprecedented effect. This strengthens the impact of the special effect and effectively demonstrates the attention-grabbing effect mentioned above.

Feature BH2. The reserved display means has a shifting means that sequentially shifts the reserved symbols displayed in the unit display area as the game progresses.
The gaming machine according to feature BH1, characterized in that the display mode changing means is configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbols between the time the movable part is positioned at the predetermined performance position and the reserved symbols are shifted by the shifting means.

By configuring the display of the held symbols to change before the shift, the correlation between the illumination pattern of the movable part (light-emitting part) and the display pattern of the held symbols can be made unclear, effectively suppressing confusion for the player.

Feature BH3. The gaming machine according to Feature BH1 or Feature BH2, characterized in that, when the special effect is performed, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed is changed while the movable part is positioned at the predetermined effect position and the light-emitting part is in the special light-emitting mode.

As shown in this feature, by changing the display mode of the relevant reserved symbol (the reserved symbol to be changed) while the movable part is positioned in a predetermined display location and the light-emitting part is in a special illumination mode, it is possible to effectively suppress the difficulty in discerning the correlation between the illumination mode of the movable part (light-emitting part) and the display mode of the reserved symbol.

Feature BH4. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BH1 to Feature BH3, characterized in that, when positioned in the predetermined presentation position, the movable part overlaps with the reserved symbol that is the target of the change, while overlapping between the movable part and other reserved symbols is avoided.

According to feature BH4, the display mode of the reserved symbol, designated by the movable body, is changed while maintaining its overlap with the movable body, thereby mitigating the abruptness of the change in display mode. This is also desirable in preventing the correlation between the illumination mode of the movable body and the display mode of the reserved symbol from becoming difficult to understand. Furthermore, as shown in this feature, if the reserved symbol is covered by the light-emitting part, the light-emitting part emitting in a special illumination mode can function as a substitute for the reserved symbol.

Feature BH5. The gaming machine according to Feature BH4, characterized in that, when positioned in the predetermined display position, the movable part covers the predetermined reserved pattern so that it becomes invisible.

According to feature BH5, it can effectively function as a substitute for the reserved image in the light-emitting section.

Feature BH6. The light-emitting part has light transmittance,
The light guide unit is provided to guide light from the light source for the light-emitting unit to the light-emitting unit,
The gaming machine according to feature BH4 or feature BH5, characterized in that when the light-emitting part is turned off, the reserved pattern to be changed can be seen through the light-emitting part.

As shown in Feature BH1, etc., in a configuration where a movable body (movable part) is positioned at a performance location to indicate the pending symbol to be changed, and then the change in the display pattern of the pending symbol is indicated by illuminating the light-emitting part of the movable body in a special illumination pattern, it is preferable to allow a certain period of time between the completion of positioning at the performance location and the illumination in the special illumination pattern. It is undesirable for the pending symbol display function to malfunction during this period. In this regard, with the configuration shown in this feature, the light-emitting part is light-transmitting, and when the light-emitting part is off, the pending symbol to be changed can be seen through the light-emitting part. Therefore, even if the above period is ensured, the pending symbol display function will not be impaired.

Feature BH7. The gaming machine according to Feature BH6, characterized in that the brightness of the light-emitting part when it is emitting light in the special light-emitting mode is higher than the brightness of the reserved symbol when it is in the normal display mode.

When the light-emitting part is set to emit light in a special emission mode, and then the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed is set to the special display mode, the light from the light-emitting part in the special emission mode mixes with the light from the reserved symbol in the normal display mode, increasing the likelihood that the emitted color will be different from what was intended. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the brightness of the light-emitting part when it is emitting light in the special emission mode higher than the brightness of the reserved symbol when it is in the normal display mode, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be suitably suppressed.

Feature BH8. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BH1 to Feature BH7, characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to cause the light emission unit to emit light in the special light emission mode at a predetermined time after the movable unit has been positioned in the predetermined performance position.

According to Feature BH8, by separating the indication of the change from the indication of the changed display format and progressing the presentation in stages, it is possible to suppress the premature decline in attention to the special presentation.

Feature BH9. The drive control means is capable of displacing the movable part to the predetermined performance position when the special performance is initiated and multiple reserved symbols are displayed on the reserved display section.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BH1 to BH8, characterized in that each of the aforementioned performance positions is defined such that other performance positions are located on the movement path of the movable part directed toward one of the performance positions.

The configuration shown in Feature BH9 effectively suppresses the situation where the pending symbol to be changed becomes obvious from the initial movement of the movable body.

Feature BH10. The drive control means has means for returning the movable part to the standby position after the display mode of the held pattern has been changed by the display mode changing means while the movable part is positioned in the predetermined performance position.
The gaming machine according to feature BH9, characterized in that the light emission control means has means for turning off the light emission unit before moving to the adjacent performance position on the return path when the display mode of the held pattern is changed and the movable part is returned to the standby position.

If the movable part (light-emitting section) moves to a display position corresponding to a reserved symbol that has not been changed while still in a special illumination mode, there is a possibility that other reserved symbols that have not been changed may also be mistakenly perceived as being in a special illumination mode. Therefore, as shown in this feature, after the display mode of a reserved symbol has been changed, it is preferable to configure the movable part to turn off before moving to the adjacent display position along the return path when returning it to the standby position.

Feature BH11. The game machine according to any one of Feature BH1 to Feature BH10, wherein the drive control means is configured to return the movable part to the standby position by displacing it in a direction intersecting the direction of the arrangement of the performance positions when the special performance ends.

The configuration shown in Feature BH11 allows the movable part to be quickly retracted.

Furthermore, when applying the technical concept described in this feature to feature BH9, the following configuration is also possible: "A gaming machine according to feature BH9, characterized in that the path taken to displace the movable part from the standby position to the performance position is different from the path taken to displace the said movable part from the standby position to the performance position."

Feature BH12. The special display mode includes a first special display mode (e.g., blue) and a second special display mode (e.g., red) which is set to have a higher probability of resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information than the first special display mode.
The special light emission modes include a first special light emission mode (e.g., blue) correlated with the first special display mode, and a second special light emission mode (e.g., red) correlated with the second special display mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BH1 to BH11, characterized in that, in the special performance, when the movable part is positioned at the performance location and the light-emitting part is in the first special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the first special display mode, and when the movable part is positioned at the performance location and the light-emitting part is in the second special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the second special display mode.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that when the light-emitting part of the movable body is in the first special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the first special display mode, and when the light-emitting part of the movable body is in the second special light-emitting mode, the display mode of the reserved symbol to be changed becomes the second special display mode, a diversification of special effects can be suitably realized.

Feature BH13. The first special display mode and the first special light emission mode are defined such that the display color of the reserved pattern and the light emission color of the light emission part are the same color.
The gaming machine according to feature BH12, characterized in that the second special display mode and the second special light emission mode are defined such that the display color of the reserved pattern and the light emission color of the light emission part are the same color.

As shown in this feature, by making the light-emitting color of the movable part (light-emitting part) the same as the display color of the held image, it is possible to effectively suppress the difficulty in understanding the correlation between the light-emitting pattern and the display pattern in special effects.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BG may also be applied to feature groups BH1 to BH13.

<Characteristic BI Group>
The following set of Feature BIs was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BI1. The game area (game area PE) has starting ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a reserve display means (reserve display device 600K) that displays a number of reserve symbols corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a reserve display area (reserve number display unit 602K), and sequentially shifts the reserve symbols displayed in the reserve display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display unit 601K) as the game progresses,
A movable body (movable decorative body 801K) equipped with a display screen (display 814K),
The aforementioned display screen includes a display control means for performing display effects (a function that executes display control processing for the display 814K using the MPU 402 of the notification/effect control device 140),
The system includes a performance device (movable performance device 800K and notification/performance control device 140) having a driving means (stepping motor 815K) that displaces the movable body within a predetermined range including the area in front of the hold display means,
When the aforementioned performance device performs a special performance, the movable body is provided with a first mode of operation in which the movable body is temporarily stopped at a position in which the display screen overlaps with the hold display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a second mode of operation in which the movable body passes in front of the hold display means without stopping at the overlapping position when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means has means for displaying correlation information (pseudo-reserved symbols) that correlates with the display content of the reserved display means on the display screen when the movable body is operated in the first operating mode.

A configuration that operates a movable body with a display screen allows for various changes in the display position of images, etc., depending on the game situation. This is advantageous in preventing the game from becoming monotonous. For such a display device, using the area in front of the hold display means as the operating range of the movable body is preferable for achieving the coexistence of various devices in a limited space. However, the primary function of the hold display means is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information items stored in the special information storage means, i.e., the remaining number of holds. The difficulty in confirming the number of holds due to the movable body could reduce player satisfaction.

In the presenting device described in this feature, the movable body has two operating modes for performing special effects: a first mode in which the movable body is temporarily stationary at a position overlapping the hold display means, and a second mode in which the movable body passes in front of the hold display means without being stationary at the overlapping position. In the first mode, the visibility of the hold symbols tends to decrease compared to the second mode. Therefore, when operating the movable body in the first mode, correlation information (pseudo-hold symbols) correlated with the display content of the hold display means is displayed on the display screen, thereby suppressing the inconvenience caused by the diversification of special effects using the movable body. Thus, the effect of improving attention to the game can be effectively achieved.

Feature BI2. The system includes a pattern display means (pattern display device 500K) that starts a variable display of a plurality of patterns (designs) prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and stops displaying a pattern combination (design combination) corresponding to the result of the determination after the variable display.
The gaming machine according to feature BI1, characterized in that the performance device is configured to perform the special performance by operating the movable body in conjunction with the display of patterns in the pattern display means.

As shown in this feature, in a configuration where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner and the corresponding pattern combination is displayed in a stopped manner, the player's attention tends to be drawn to the pattern display means. Here, by operating the movable body in conjunction with the variable pattern display, it is possible to effectively suppress the monotony of the presentation for each round of play. In such a configuration, while increasing the range of motion of the movable body can improve the impact and flexibility of special effects, it is undesirable if this results in a decrease in the visibility of the hold display means. Therefore, by applying the technical concept shown in Feature BI1 to the configuration shown in this feature, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

The configuration described in this feature is defined as follows: "A starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE); a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section; an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function that executes the process for the jackpot lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result); and a game rotation operation (operation) prior to or based on the determination by the determination means. The variable display of patterns in the mouth display units D1 and D2 is started, and the operation of the game round is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation mouth display units D1 and D2) so that the operation of the game round is performed sequentially for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information. A number of reserved patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the reserved display area (reserved number display unit 602K), and the reserved table The presenter includes a hold display means (hold display device 600K) that sequentially shifts the hold symbols displayed in the display area to the judgment target display area (execution target display unit 601K) as the game progresses, a symbol display means that starts a variable display of a plurality of symbols (patterns) prior to or based on the judgment made by the judgment means, and stops displaying a symbol combination (pattern combination) corresponding to the result of the judgment after the variable display, a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) provided with a display screen (display 814K), a display control means that performs a display effect on the display screen (a function that executes the display control processing of the display 814K in the MPU 402 of the notification/performance control device 140), and a drive means (stepping motor 815K) that displaces the movable body within a predetermined range including the area in front of the hold display means. The game machine is equipped with a movable performance device (800K and a notification/performance control device 140), and the performance device is configured to perform a special performance by operating the movable body in conjunction with the display of patterns on the pattern display means. When the performance device performs the special performance, the movable body has two operating modes: a first mode in which the movable body is temporarily stationary at a position where the display screen overlaps the hold display means when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a second mode in which the movable body passes in front of the hold display means without being stationary at the overlapping position when viewed from the front of the game machine. The display control means has means for displaying correlation information (pseudo-hold patterns) correlated with the display content of the hold display means on the display screen when the movable body is operated in the first mode.

Feature BI3. When the movable body is stationary in the overlapping position, a portion of the display screen overlaps with a portion of the pattern display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
The display control means includes means for displaying a predetermined visual effect image (for example, a message image or an image resembling flames) on the display screen so as to span both the portion that overlaps with the image display means and the portion that does not overlap with the image display means when the movable body is stationary at the overlapping position.
The gaming machine according to feature BI2, characterized in that the display control means is configured to display the correlation information in a portion of the display screen where overlap with the pattern display means is avoided.

As described above, when coordinating the display screen with the image display means, by stopping the movable body at a position where a part of the display screen overlaps with a part of the image display means, special effects can be performed while minimizing the reduction in the visibility of the images. In such a configuration, by displaying the correlation information in the portion of the display screen that does not overlap with the image display means, it is possible to effectively achieve both the effect of improving convenience by providing correlation information and the effect of increasing attention to the game through special effects.

Feature BI4. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BI1 to Feature BI3, characterized in that the display control means is configured not to display the correlation information on the display screen when the movable body is operated in the second operating mode.

When operating the movable body in the second operating mode, by hiding the correlation information and avoiding duplication of information provided to the player (such as the number of reserved balls), the following effects can be expected: Specifically, the display area on the display screen is suppressed from being compressed by the display of correlation information, and the constraints on display when operating the movable body in the first operating mode can be suitably relaxed.

Feature BI5. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BI1 to Feature BI4, characterized in that the display control means is configured to display a pseudo-image that mimics the held pattern located behind the display screen as the correlation information.

As shown in this feature, by displaying a pseudo-image that mimics the hold symbol on the display screen and using it as a substitute for the hold symbol displayed on the hold symbol display means, the function of supporting the hold symbol display means can be effectively performed by the display screen.

Feature BI6. The gaming machine according to Feature BI5, characterized in that the display control means is configured to display the pseudo-image at a position in front of the reserved image located behind it.

By aligning the display position of the simulated image with the display position of the hold symbol, the sense of incongruity when supporting the hold symbol display can be effectively mitigated.

Feature BI7. The gaming machine according to Feature BI5 or Feature BI6, characterized in that the display control means is configured to terminate the display of the pseudo-image prior to the return operation when the movable body is returned to a standby position where overlap with the hold display means is avoided.

By configuring the system to terminate the display of the simulated image prior to the return movement of the movable part, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the movement of the movable part could disrupt the positional relationship between the simulated image and the held symbols, thus preventing the support function from causing discomfort to the player.

Feature BI8. The gaming machine according to Feature BI7, characterized in that, when the movable body is returned to the standby position, a specific image is displayed in a predetermined range on the display screen that includes the portion where the pseudo-image is displayed, thereby ending the display of the pseudo-image.

When returning to the standby position, the first performance image is displayed within a predetermined area on the display screen (including the display area of the pseudo-image), thereby ending the display of the pseudo-image and reducing the abruptness of the ending.

Feature BI9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features BI5 to BI8, characterized in that, when the movable body is moved to a position overlapping with the hold display means, the display control means displays a second performance image in a predetermined range on the display screen that includes the range for displaying the pseudo-image, and after the movable body has moved to the overlapping position, the second performance image is hidden and the pseudo-image is displayed.

This feature effectively reduces the abruptness when the display of a simulated image begins. For example, the display of the second animation image can be started in the standby position, and the movable body can be moved to the overlapping position while the second animation image is displayed.

Feature BI10. The pseudo-image is the first pseudo-image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BI5 to BI9, characterized in that the display control means is configured to display an image that mimics the area of the hold display means that is located behind the display screen, in addition to the first pseudo-image, from the hold display area and the determination target display area of the hold display means.

As shown in this feature, by displaying images that mimic not only the hold symbols but also the hold display area and the judgment target display area, the sense of incongruity when the hold display is supported by the movable part can be further effectively mitigated.

Feature BI11. The display modes of the held symbols include a first special display mode and a second special display mode that indicates a higher probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information than the first special display mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BI5 to BI10, characterized in that the display control means includes means for displaying a pseudo-image that imitates the first special display mode when the display mode of the target held pattern is the first special display mode, and means for displaying a pseudo-image that imitates the second special display mode when the display mode of the target held pattern is the second special display mode.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the display mode of the target hold symbol is the first special display mode, a pseudo-image mimicking the first special display mode is displayed on the display screen. When the display mode of the target hold symbol is the second special display mode, a pseudo-image mimicking the second special display mode is displayed. By configuring the system so that the display mode of the pseudo-image is determined according to the display mode of the hold symbol, the sense of incongruity when the movable body supports the hold symbol display can be effectively suppressed.

Feature BI12. The display modes of the held symbols include a first special display mode and a second special display mode that indicates a higher probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information than the first special display mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BI5 to BI10, characterized in that the display control means includes means for displaying a pseudo image that mimics the first special display mode when the display mode of the target held pattern is the first special display mode and the predetermined conditions are not met, and means for displaying a pseudo image that mimics the second special display mode when the display mode of the target held pattern is the first special display mode and the predetermined conditions are met.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the display mode of the target held symbol is the first special display mode, the display mode of the pseudo-image displayed on the display screen may differ depending on whether a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, if the predetermined condition is not met, a pseudo-image mimicking the first special display mode, which is correlated with the special display mode of the currently displayed held symbol, is displayed. If the predetermined condition is met, a pseudo-image mimicking the second special display mode, which has a higher expectation level than the special display mode of the currently displayed held symbol, is displayed. In other words, when the movable part supports the hold display, the hold display may be upgraded to one with a higher expectation level. With such a configuration, the support function by the movable part is enhanced with a visual effect, which can effectively contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BH may also be applied to feature groups BI1 to BI12.

<Characteristic BJ Group>
The following BJ features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BJ1. The starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) is provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display unit 602K),
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a special performance execution means that executes a special performance based on the result of the prior identification means,
The hold display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit hold display sections 602aK to 602hK) each capable of displaying the hold pattern,
The unit display area is equipped with a hold display control means (a function that executes hold display processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that sequentially shifts the hold symbols displayed in the unit display area in a predetermined direction as the game progresses.
The aforementioned special performance execution means is
A movable body (movable decorative body 801K) is provided with a movable part (protruding part 811K) that can be displaced to a standby position where overlap with the display area of the reserved pattern is avoided and to a performance position where it overlaps with the display area,
The drive unit for the movable body (stepping motor 815K)
The system includes a drive control means for controlling the drive unit (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
The drive control means is
When the special performance described above is performed, the first control means displaces the movable part to a predetermined performance position corresponding to the predetermined unit display area among the multiple unit display areas, while the reserved pattern is displayed in a predetermined unit display area among the performance positions.
A gaming machine characterized by having a second control means that, after the first control means has positioned the movable part to the predetermined display position, the first control means has shifted the predetermined reserved pattern, and the second control means has displaced the movable part in accordance with the predetermined reserved pattern.

The primary function of the hold display mechanism is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information items stored in the special information storage mechanism, i.e., the remaining number of hold items. In recent years, technologies have been proposed that pre-determine whether the special information corresponds to predetermined transition information and suggest the likelihood of receiving a bonus by changing the appearance of the hold symbol (display pattern, color, etc.) during the previous game round. This aims to increase the player's attention to the game. However, many of these technologies are quite similar, and there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the hold display mechanism to further enhance attention.

In this configuration, the movable body (movable display device) and the hold display means are coordinated. Specifically, when a special display is executed, while a hold symbol is displayed in a predetermined unit display area among multiple unit display areas, the movable part is displaced to a predetermined display position corresponding to that predetermined unit display area. Subsequently, when the predetermined hold symbol shifts, the movable part is displaced to follow the predetermined hold symbol. By generating such novel behavior, the aforementioned effect of increasing attention can be effectively achieved.

Feature BJ2. The gaming machine according to Feature BJ1, characterized in that the second control means has a means for displacing the movable part in synchronization with the movement of the predetermined reserved symbol when the predetermined reserved symbol shifts due to the reserved symbol display control means.

By synchronizing the shift of the held symbols with the displacement of the movable parts (moving them as a single unit), the approaching game round that triggers this effect is emphasized, effectively increasing the player's attention towards that round.

Feature BJ3. Multiple stationary positions are provided, each corresponding to the unit display area and capable of holding the movable part.
The gaming machine according to feature BJ1 or feature BJ2, characterized in that the second control means is configured to displace the movable part to the stationary position corresponding to the unit display area to which the predetermined held symbol is shifted when the held display control means shifts the movable part, and to stationary position the movable part at the stationary position.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the movable part to remain stationary together with the corresponding held symbol, the technical concept shown in feature BJ2 can be suitably realized.

Feature BJ4. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BJ1 to Feature BJ3, characterized in that the displacement direction of the movable part is the same direction or substantially the same direction as the predetermined direction.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the displacement direction of the movable part and the shift direction of the held symbol can be aligned. This effectively enhances the sense of unity between the movement of the movable part and the movement of the held symbol, even when multiple shifts are repeated.

Feature BJ5. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BJ1 to Feature BJ4, characterized in that the unit display area is arranged along the path (trajectory PLK) through which the movable part passes when it is displaced.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even when shifts are repeated, the movable part can avoid moving significantly away from the predetermined hold symbol. This is desirable because it helps to prevent it from becoming difficult to determine which hold symbol the movable part is linked to.

Feature BJ6. The game machine according to any one of Features BJ1 to BJ5, characterized in that, as the performance position, a plurality of stopping positions are provided, each corresponding to the unit display area and capable of holding the movable part; the second control means is configured to displace the movable part to the stopping position corresponding to the unit display area to which the predetermined reserved pattern shifts when the reserved display control means shifts, and to hold the movable part at that stopping position; and when the movable body is positioned at the stopping position, at least a portion of the movable part overlaps the predetermined reserved pattern from the front of the game machine.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the stationary movable part to overlap a predetermined reserved symbol from the front of the game machine, it is possible to effectively suppress the difficulty in identifying the predetermined reserved symbol that the movable part is linked to.

Feature BJ7. The hold display means has an execution target display area (execution target display unit 601K) which is arranged in parallel with the hold display area in the predetermined direction and displays a hold symbol corresponding to the game round currently being played.
The hold display control means is configured to sequentially shift the hold patterns displayed in the hold display area toward the execution target display area.
Multiple stopping positions are provided as the aforementioned performance positions, each corresponding to the unit display area and capable of stopping the movable part.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BJ1 to BJ6, characterized in that the drive control means has means for returning the movable body from the stationary position corresponding to the execution target display area to the standby position during the game round related to the predetermined held symbol after the predetermined held symbol has moved to the execution target display area by the shift.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the movable body that repeatedly displaces itself in accordance with a predetermined held symbol returns to its standby position during the game round related to that predetermined held symbol after the predetermined held symbol has moved to the target display area. This configuration prevents the player's attention from remaining focused on the movable body, thereby encouraging attention to the game round's effects. Furthermore, it allows for a favorable relaxation of constraints on performing effects using the movable body during the relevant game round.

Feature BJ8. The hold display means has an execution target display area (execution target display unit 601K) which is arranged in parallel with the hold display area in the predetermined direction and displays a hold symbol corresponding to the game round currently being played.
The hold display control means is configured to sequentially shift the hold patterns displayed in the hold display area toward the execution target display area.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BJ1 to BJ6, characterized in that the drive control means has means to return the movable body to the standby position without stopping the movable body by continuing the displacement of the movable body even after the shift of the predetermined reserved pattern is completed when the predetermined reserved pattern moves to the execution target display area by the shift.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the movable body, which has repeatedly displaced in accordance with a predetermined held symbol, returns to its standby position when the predetermined held symbol moves to the target display area. This configuration prevents the player's attention from remaining focused on the movable body, thereby encouraging attention to the game's in-game effects. Furthermore, it allows for a favorable relaxation of constraints on using the movable body for effects during the relevant game in-game round.

Feature BJ9. The movable part has a cover that covers the predetermined reserved pattern from the front of the gaming machine.
In the situation where the movable body is following the predetermined held pattern by the first control means and the second control means, the predetermined held pattern is positioned behind the cover portion, making it difficult or impossible to see.
The hold display control means includes a display mode changing means (a function that executes processing for changing the color of the hold pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that changes the display mode of the hold pattern to a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the specification by the prior identification means.
The display mode changing means includes a special changing means that changes the display mode of the predetermined reserved pattern to the special display mode when the special performance is performed.
The gaming machine according to feature BJ8, characterized in that the special modification means can change the display mode of the predetermined reserved pattern to the special display mode when the predetermined reserved pattern shifts to the execution target display area.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the connection with the movable body is released at the timing of the final shift, and the display mode of the reserved symbols can be changed to a special display mode. With such a configuration, it is assumed that the player will pay attention to whether the display mode of the reserved symbols changes to a special display mode when the previously hidden reserved symbols become visible. This avoids the inconvenience of the change in display mode being overlooked, while effectively enhancing the impact of the display mode change.

Feature BJ10. The movable part has a cover that covers the predetermined reserved pattern from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BJ1 to BJ8, characterized in that, when the movable body is following the predetermined reserved pattern by the first control means and the second control means, the predetermined reserved pattern is positioned behind the cover portion, making it difficult or impossible to see.

If the movable part is configured to cover a predetermined hold symbol, the cover can be used as a substitute for the predetermined hold symbol (a pseudo-hold symbol). By using both the hold symbol displayed on the hold symbol means and the structure to perform the hold symbol display, monotony of the hold symbol display can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, it is desirable that other reserved symbols that precede or follow a designated reserved symbol be configured to avoid overlapping with the movable part (specifically, the covering part).

Feature BJ11. The hold display control means has a display mode changing means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that executes processing for changing the color of the hold symbol in order to change the display mode of the hold symbol to a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the specification by the prior identification means.
A light-emitting means for causing the covering portion to emit light,
The light-emitting means includes a light-emitting control means for controlling the emission of light,
The covering portion is provided with a normal light emission mode (white) that correlates with the normal display mode and a special light emission mode (blue, yellow, red) that correlates with the special display mode.
The display mode changing means includes a special changing means that changes the display mode of the predetermined reserved pattern to the special display mode when the special performance is performed.
The gaming machine according to feature BJ10, characterized in that the light emission control means has means for causing the cover portion to emit light in the special light emission mode when the display mode of the predetermined reserved pattern is changed by the special modification means.

In a configuration where the hold indicator is displayed by a cover on a movable part, as shown in Feature BJ10, it is preferable to make the cover luminous and to change the luminescence pattern of the cover in accordance with the display pattern of the hold symbol, thereby suppressing a decrease in expressiveness due to the use of a structure. In particular, by changing the appearance (luminescence pattern) at a position closer to the player than the hold symbol, the impact of this change can be suitably emphasized.

Features BJ12. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display unit 602K),
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a special performance execution means that executes a special performance based on the result of the prior identification means,
The hold display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit hold display sections 602aK to 602hK) each capable of displaying the hold pattern,
The unit display area is equipped with a hold display control means (a function that executes hold display processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that sequentially shifts the hold symbols displayed in the unit display area in a predetermined direction as the game progresses.
The aforementioned special performance execution means is
A movable body (movable decorative body 801K) is provided with a movable part (protruding part 811K) that can be displaced to a standby position where overlap with the display area of the reserved pattern is avoided and to a performance position where it overlaps with the display area,
The drive unit for the movable body (stepping motor 815K)
The system includes a drive control means for controlling the drive unit (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
The drive control means includes means for displacing the movable part when the held symbol is shifted by the held display control means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the displacement direction of the movable part is the same as or substantially the same as the predetermined direction.

The primary function of the hold display mechanism is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information items stored in the special information storage mechanism, i.e., the remaining number of hold items. In recent years, technologies have been proposed that pre-determine whether the special information corresponds to predetermined transition information and suggest the likelihood of receiving a bonus by changing the appearance of the hold symbol (display pattern, color, etc.) during the previous game round. This aims to increase the player's attention to the game. However, many of these technologies are quite similar, and there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the hold display mechanism to further enhance attention.

In this configuration, the movable part (movable display device) and the hold display means are coordinated. Specifically, when a special display is executed, the movable part displaces in the same or approximately the same direction as the shift of the hold symbol (a predetermined direction). By generating such novel behavior, the aforementioned effect of increasing attention can be effectively achieved.

The configuration described in this feature is defined as follows: "A starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE); a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section; an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function that executes the process for the jackpot lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result); and the determination by the determination means Prior to or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the completion of the game cycle operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is considered as one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game state transition means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. The system comprises a function for executing a transition process, a hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display unit 602K), a pre-identification means (function for executing a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information before the determination is made, and a special performance execution means that executes a special performance based on the result of the determination by the pre-identification means, wherein the hold display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK) each capable of displaying the hold patterns, and the hold patterns displayed in the unit display areas are The game machine is characterized by having a hold display control means (a function that executes hold display processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that sequentially shifts the hold symbol in a predetermined direction as the game progresses, and the special performance execution means comprising a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) with a movable part (protruding part 811K) that can be displaced between a standby position where overlap with the display area of the hold symbol is avoided and a performance position where it overlaps with the display area, a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body, and a drive control means (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the drive of the drive unit, wherein the displacement direction of the movable part is the same direction or substantially the same direction as the predetermined direction.

Feature BJ13. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display unit 602K),
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a special performance execution means that executes a special performance based on the result of the prior identification means,
The hold display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit hold display sections 602aK to 602hK) each capable of displaying the hold pattern,
The unit display area is equipped with a hold display control means (a function that executes hold display processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that sequentially shifts the hold symbols displayed in the unit display area in a predetermined direction as the game progresses.
The aforementioned special performance execution means is
A movable body (movable decorative body 801K) is provided with a movable part (protruding part 811K) that can be displaced to a standby position where overlap with the display area of the reserved pattern is avoided and to a performance position where it overlaps with the display area,
The drive unit for the movable body (stepping motor 815K)
The system includes a drive control means for controlling the drive unit (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
The drive control means includes means for displacing the movable part when the held symbol is shifted by the held display control means,
The amusement machine is characterized in that the unit display area is arranged along the displacement path of the movable part.

The primary function of the hold display mechanism is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information items stored in the special information storage mechanism, i.e., the remaining number of hold items. In recent years, technologies have been proposed that pre-determine whether the special information corresponds to predetermined transition information and suggest the likelihood of receiving a bonus by changing the appearance of the hold symbol (display pattern, color, etc.) during the previous game round. This aims to increase the player's attention to the game. However, many of these technologies are quite similar, and there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the hold display mechanism to further enhance attention.

In this configuration, the movable part (movable display device) and the hold display means are coordinated. Specifically, when a special effect is performed, the movable part displaces in accordance with the shift of the hold symbol. Since the unit display area is positioned along the displacement path of the movable part, even when the movable part displaces in accordance with the shift, it is possible to avoid the movable part moving significantly away from the hold symbol. This allows the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features BJ5 to BJ11 above may also be applied to feature BJ12 or feature BJ13.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BI may be applied to feature groups BJ1 to BJ13.

<Characteristics of the BK group>
The following feature group BK was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BK1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display unit (hold display area SE),
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a display effect execution means (a symbol display device 500K and a notification/effect control device 140) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 500K) having a pattern display section (variable pattern display area), and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (patterns) in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (a function of controlling the display of patterns in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be displaced between a standby position and a performance position,
The system includes a drive control means for controlling the drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
When the movable body is positioned at the performance location, it is configured to overlap both the symbol display section and the hold display section when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
The linked performance execution means performs a linked performance by the pattern display means and the movable performance device by moving the movable body from the standby position to the performance position before the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed in the pattern display unit,
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a display mode changing means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that executes processing for changing the color of the reserved symbols in a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) that is different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the identification by the aforementioned identification means,
The game machine is characterized in that the display mode changing means includes a special changing means that, when the linked performance is executed in a game round in which the determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, changes the display mode of the held symbols from the normal display mode to the special display mode when the movable body returns to the standby position.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, a symbol display mechanism is provided that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a designated ball entry area within the game area. By performing various effects using this symbol display mechanism (symbol display unit), the machine aims to increase the player's attention to the game. In recent years, movable performance devices (movable bodies) have been placed around the symbol display unit, and synchronized effects are performed by linking the symbol display unit and the movable body, further increasing the player's attention.

Here, the aforementioned linked effects are often positioned as effects that significantly increase the expectation of a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined transition information when they occur. While this is a desirable configuration for improving player satisfaction when a jackpot occurs and for increasing attention to the game, if the linked effects, after building up the player's expectations using movable effects devices, result in a judgment result (a losing result) that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, it can significantly decrease the player's motivation to play.

In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a linked performance is executed, the movable body positioned at the performance location overlaps both the symbol display section and the hold display section. Furthermore, if the linked performance results in a judgment result (a losing result) that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, the final stop display of the symbol combination may change when the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position. In other words, the hold symbol with the changed display format will enter the player's field of vision while they are focusing on the movable body. In this way, by encouraging attention to the subsequent game rounds, the aforementioned concerns can be effectively alleviated.

Feature BK2. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display unit (hold display area SE),
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a display effect execution means (a symbol display device 500K and a notification/effect control device 140) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 500K) having a pattern display section (variable pattern display area), and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (patterns) in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (a function of controlling the display of patterns in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be displaced between a standby position and a performance position,
The system includes a drive control means for controlling the drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
When the movable body is positioned at the performance location, it is configured to overlap both the symbol display section and the hold display section when viewed from the front of the game machine.
The linked performance execution means performs a linked performance by the pattern display means and the movable performance device by moving the movable body from the standby position to the performance position before the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed in the pattern display unit,
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a display mode changing means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that executes processing for changing the color of the reserved symbols in a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) that is different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the prior identification means,
The game machine is characterized in that the display mode changing means includes a special changing means that, when the linked performance is performed in a game round in which the determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, changes the display mode of the reserved symbols from the normal display mode to the special display mode behind the movable body positioned at the performance location.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, a symbol display mechanism is provided that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a designated ball entry area within the game area. By performing various effects using this symbol display mechanism (symbol display unit), the machine aims to increase the player's attention to the game. In recent years, movable performance devices (movable bodies) have been placed around the symbol display unit, and synchronized effects are performed by linking the symbol display unit and the movable body, further increasing the player's attention.

Here, the aforementioned linked effects are often positioned as effects that significantly increase the expectation of a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined transition information when they occur. While this is a desirable configuration for improving player satisfaction when a jackpot occurs and for increasing attention to the game, if the linked effects, after building up the player's expectations using movable effects devices, result in a judgment result (a losing result) that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, it can significantly decrease the player's motivation to play.

In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a linked performance is executed, the movable body positioned at the performance location overlaps both the symbol display section and the hold display section. Then, when the linked performance results in a judgment result (a losing result) that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, the final stop display of the symbol combination may change behind the movable body as it returns from the performance position to the standby position. In other words, as the overlap with the hold display section is released upon the movable body's return, the changed display of the hold symbol enters the player's field of vision while they are watching the movable body. In this way, by encouraging attention to the subsequent game rounds, the aforementioned concerns can be effectively alleviated.

The configuration described in this feature is defined as follows: a starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE); special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section; acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; reserved display means (reserved display device 600K) that displays a number of reserved patterns corresponding to the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquisition information storage means in the reserved display section (reserved display area SE); determination means (a function that executes the process for the jackpot lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result); and game rotation operation prior to or based on the determination by the determination means. The variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2 is started, and the operation for each game round is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the operation for each game round is performed sequentially according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. The system includes a game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the judgment result is such, and a display effect execution means (a symbol display device 500K and a notification/effect control device 140) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game cycle operation when the game cycle operation is being performed, wherein the display effect execution means has a symbol display unit (a variable symbol display area), and the symbol display unit is capable of variably displaying multiple symbols (patterns). The game machine includes a display means (pattern display device 500K), a display control means (function of controlling the display of patterns via the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means, and a movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) that has a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be displaced between a standby position and a performance position, and a drive control means (function of executing drive control processing via the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the drive of the drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body, wherein when the movable body is positioned in the performance position, the movable body is configured to overlap both the pattern display unit and the hold display unit when viewed from the front of the game machine, and before the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed in the pattern display unit, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the performance position, thereby affecting the pattern display means and the movable performance device The gaming machine comprises: an interlocking effect execution means for performing interlocking effects using a display device; a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information before the determination is made; and a display mode changing means (a function that performs a process for changing the color of the held symbols in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140) for changing the display mode of the held symbols to a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) different from the normal display mode (white) based on the determination result by the pre-identification means. The display mode changing means also includes a special changing means that, when the interlocking effect is performed in a game round where the determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, changes the display mode of the held symbols from the normal display mode to the special display mode behind the movable body positioned at the effect location, while the variable display of the symbols is in operation.

Feature BK3. The gaming machine according to Feature BK1 or Feature BK2, characterized in that the movable body is formed in such a way that the area behind the movable body is not visible.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even if the display mode of the held symbol changes behind the movable body, the fact that the display mode has changed can be concealed until the movable body is displaced to a position where it does not overlap with the held symbol. Such a configuration enhances the impact when the held symbol with the changed display mode comes into view. The specific configuration for making the area behind the movable body invisible is arbitrary; for example, the movable body could be made of a colored, opaque material.

Feature BK4. The hold display unit has a plurality of unit display areas (for example, unit hold display units 602aK to 602hK) capable of displaying the hold patterns,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BK1 to BK3, characterized in that when the movable body is positioned at the performance position, the movable body is configured to overlap with at least a number of (for example, eight) unit display areas among the unit display areas.

The configuration described in this feature increases the number of potential hold symbols that overlap with the movable parts, making it easier to ensure opportunities to change the display of the hold symbols when the linked animation leads to a clear indication of a losing result. This is preferable in that it suppresses the disruption of the balance of the animation caused by unrealistic animation settings, while achieving the effects shown in Feature BK1, etc.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of the features BK1 to BK3, characterized in that the hold display unit has a plurality of unit display areas (for example, unit hold display areas 602aK to 602hK) capable of displaying the hold patterns, and when the movable body is positioned at the performance location, the movable body is configured to overlap all of the unit display areas."

Feature BK5. The gaming machine according to Feature BK4, characterized in that when the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, the overlap with the multiple hold display units is released one by one.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that each held symbol enters the player's field of vision in accordance with the movement of the movable part, the player can confirm whether the display of each held symbol has changed, thereby effectively suppressing a rapid decline in the player's anticipation.

Feature BK6. The gaming machine according to Feature BK5, characterized in that the linked performance execution means is configured to return the movable body from the performance position to the standby position when the final stop display of the pattern combination is being shown on the pattern display unit.

Regarding the display time (confirmation display time) of the final stopped symbol combination, it is preferable to ensure a certain length for various reasons, such as clearly indicating the game result. However, if the display time (confirmation display time) remains long after the aforementioned linked animation has finished and the game has not moved to the next round with the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result still displayed, it can decrease player satisfaction. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature (in combination with feature BK5) allows the reserved symbols to be viewed one by one sequentially while the final stop display is active, thus saving time for checking the reserved symbols. This suppresses the impression that the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is displayed for an unnecessarily long time, and can effectively contribute to improving player satisfaction.

Feature BK7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BK4 to Feature BK6, characterized in that the movable body is configured such that the direction of displacement when returning from the performance position to the standby position is the same as the direction of arrangement of the unit display area.

As shown in Feature BK7, by configuring the movable body to be displaced in the direction of the arrangement of the unit display area when returning it to its original position, the technical concept shown in Feature BK5 can be suitably realized.

Feature BK8. The reserved display means has a shift means that sequentially shifts the reserved symbols displayed in the unit display area as the game progresses.
The gaming machine according to feature BK7, characterized in that the direction of displacement of the movable body when it returns from the performance position to the standby position is the same as the direction of the shift.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the movable part returns to its standby position, the held symbols become visible in chronological order. Such a configuration is preferable for quickly indicating the number of held symbols at the time of return to the player. With such a quick indication of the number of held symbols, players can easily understand how many of the held symbols may be subject to a change in display mode during this return.

Feature BK9. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BK5 to Feature BK8, characterized in that the displacement speed when the movable body moves from the performance position to the standby position is slower than the displacement speed when the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position.

When initiating the linked performance (forward movement), the impact of the performance can be enhanced by quickly displacing the movable body from the standby position to the performance position. Conversely, when returning the movable body from the performance position to the standby position at the end of the linked performance (return movement), slowing the displacement speed of the movable body compared to the forward movement allows the function shown in Feature BK5 (the function that prompts the user to sequentially check each of the reserved symbols to be changed) to be effectively performed.

Feature BK10. The gaming machine according to Feature BK4, characterized in that when the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, the overlap between the multiple unit display areas constituting the hold display section is simultaneously released.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the unit so that multiple unit display areas become visible simultaneously upon returning to the standby position, the time required to confirm whether the display mode has changed can be shortened, thereby suppressing the prolonged waiting time for the movable part to return. This is a desirable configuration for facilitating smooth gameplay.

Feature BK11. The reserved display means has a shift means that sequentially shifts the reserved symbols displayed in the unit display area as the game progresses.
The gaming machine according to feature BK4 or feature BK10, characterized in that the direction of displacement of the movable body when it returns from the performance position to the standby position is configured to intersect with the direction of arrangement of the unit display area at least in the section until the overlap with the hold display unit is eliminated.

According to the configuration described in this feature, multiple unit display areas become visible simultaneously upon returning to the standby position. This configuration reduces the time required to confirm whether the display mode has changed, thereby preventing prolonged waiting times for the movable parts to return to their original position. This is a desirable configuration for facilitating smooth gameplay.

Feature BK12. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BK1 to Feature BK11, characterized in that, when the linked performance is executed in a game round resulting in a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, and it has already been decided that the display mode of the reserved symbols will be changed in a game round executed after that game round, the timing of the predetermined change in the display mode is changed to the timing before the movable body, which is positioned at the performance location in the game round in which the linked performance is executed, returns to the standby position.

As shown in this feature, if the decision to change the display mode is made before the linked performance, and the timing of that change falls within a later game round than the one in which the linked performance is executed, the timing of the change can be brought forward to the game round involving the linked performance. This configuration allows for the successful coexistence of this change with other display mode change patterns.

Feature BK13. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BK1 to Feature BK12, characterized in that, when the linked performance is executed in a game round in which it has already been determined that the display mode of the reserved symbols will be changed, the machine has means to delay the change in the display mode of the reserved symbols until at least the movable body is positioned at the performance location.

As shown in this feature, if the decision to change the display mode is made before the linked performance, and the timing of that change is before the linked performance in the game round in which the linked performance is executed, the timing of the change is delayed until at least the movable body is positioned at the performance location. This configuration allows for suitable coexistence with other display mode change patterns.

Feature BK14. The reserved display means has a shift means that sequentially shifts the reserved symbols displayed in the unit display area as the game progresses.
The game machine according to any one of features BK1 to BK13, characterized in that the movable body is configured to return to the standby position between the time a combination of symbols that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information is displayed at the final stop on the symbol display means and the start of the next game round.

By configuring the system to avoid the overlap between the shift of the held symbols and the return of the movable parts, as shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in understanding the effects caused by overlapping movements and to effectively demonstrate the effects of changing the display mode of the held symbols as shown in feature BK1.

Features BK15. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display unit (hold display area SE),
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a display effect execution means (a symbol display device 500K and a notification/effect control device 140) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 500K) having a pattern display section (variable pattern display area), and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (patterns) in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (a function of controlling the display of patterns in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be displaced between a standby position and a performance position,
The system includes a drive control means for controlling the drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body (a function that executes drive control processing in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140),
When the movable body is positioned at the performance location, it is configured to overlap both the symbol display section and the hold display section when viewed from the front of the game machine.
The linked performance execution means performs a linked performance by the pattern display means and the movable performance device by moving the movable body from the standby position to the performance position before the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed in the pattern display unit,
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a display mode changing means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that executes processing for changing the color of the reserved symbols in a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) that is different from the normal display mode (white) based on the result of the prior identification means,
As part of the linked performance, a first linked performance and a second linked performance are provided, which have a higher probability of resulting in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined transition information than the first linked performance.
The game machine is characterized in that the display mode changing means includes a special changing means that, when the second linked performance is executed in a game round in which the determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, changes the display mode of the held symbols from the normal display mode to the special display mode when the movable body returns to the standby position.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, a symbol display mechanism is provided that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a designated ball entry area within the game area. By performing various effects using this symbol display mechanism (symbol display unit), the machine aims to increase the player's attention to the game. In recent years, movable performance devices (movable bodies) have been placed around the symbol display unit, and synchronized effects are performed by linking the symbol display unit and the movable body, further increasing the player's attention.

Here, the aforementioned linked effects are often positioned as effects that significantly increase the expectation of a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined transition information when they occur. While this is a desirable configuration for improving player satisfaction when a jackpot occurs and for increasing attention to the game, if the linked effects, after building up the player's expectations using movable effects devices, result in a judgment result (a losing result) that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, it can significantly decrease the player's motivation to play.

In this regard, according to the configuration described in this feature, when a second linked performance with a relatively high expectation level is executed, the movable body positioned at the performance location overlaps both the symbol display section and the hold display section. Furthermore, when the second linked performance leads to a final stop display of a symbol combination corresponding to a judgment result (a losing result) that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information, the display mode of the hold symbols may change when the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position. In other words, the hold symbols with their changed display mode will enter the field of vision of the player who is focusing on the movable body. In this way, by encouraging attention to the subsequent game rounds, the aforementioned concerns can be effectively alleviated.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BK1 to BK14 above may also be applied to Feature BK15.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BJ may be applied to feature groups BK1 to BK15.

<Characteristic BL Group>
The following Feature BL group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BL1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a first display unit (hold display device 600K) displays a first display (e.g., a hold display) in parallel with the game rotation operation, and a second display unit (symbol display device 500K) displays a second display (e.g., a symbol change display),
The system comprises a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be switched between a first form (basic state LV0), a second form (first extended state LV1), and a third form (second extended state), and a movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) that has a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) that displaces the movable body to a standby position and a performance position.
The aforementioned movable performance device is
When a first linked performance (clearly held notification performance) is performed that links the display in the first display unit with the movable body, the first switching means displaces the movable body to the performance position while it remains in the first form, and then switches it to the second form at the performance position,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a second linked performance (continuous variation performance) is performed that links the display on the second display unit with the movable body, the movable body is displaced to the performance position while remaining in the first form, and then switched to the third form at the performance position.

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between the display unit and movable effects devices (movable parts) is intended to increase the player's attention during gameplay. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable effects devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of increasing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In this regard, the configuration described in this feature is linked to multiple display units (first and second display units). When the first linked performance, linked to the first display unit, is executed, the movable body displaces to the performance position while remaining in the first form, and then switches to the second form at that performance position. Conversely, when the second linked performance, linked to the second display unit, is executed, the movable body displaces to the performance position while remaining in the first form, and then switches to the third form at that performance position. In other words, the movement is standardized during the displacement from the standby position to the performance position, and a branching point occurs after reaching the performance position: whether it becomes the second form (the linked target becomes the display of the first display unit) or the third form (the linked target becomes the display of the second display unit). By achieving this diversification of linked performance modes, the above concerns can be mitigated. Furthermore, by standardizing some of the movement, it is possible to suppress the excessive complexity of the configuration related to the movable performance device due to the diversification of linked performance modes. This is preferable for allowing peripheral equipment such as display units and the movable performance device to coexist in a limited area.

Feature BL2. The movable body is configured to pass through the second form when switching from the first form to the third form.
The gaming machine according to feature BL1, characterized in that the second switching means is configured to switch from the first form to the third form without stopping the movable body in the second form.

By configuring the system to pass through the second form during the transition from the first to the third form, it is possible to achieve the effects shown in Feature BL1, etc., while suppressing excessive complexity in the configuration related to the form switching of the movable body. Here, when performing synchronized effects using the movable body, it is assumed that the impact of the effect will decrease due to the slow movement of the movable body. Therefore, when transitioning from the first form to the third form, the above concern can be effectively eliminated by configuring the system to switch directly to the third form without pausing in the second form.

Feature BL3. The game machine according to Feature BL1 or Feature BL2, characterized in that when the movable body is in the first configuration at the performance position, it avoids overlapping with either the first or second display unit; when it is in the second configuration at the performance position, a predetermined portion of the movable body (tip portion 813K) overlaps with the first display unit; and when it is in the third configuration at the performance position, the predetermined portion overlaps with the second display unit.

According to the configuration described in this feature, during the first linked performance, the movable body is moved to the performance position and then transformed into the second form, clearly indicating that the linked target is the first display unit through a predetermined part of the movable body. During the second linked performance, the movable body is moved to the performance position and then transformed into the third form, clearly indicating that the linked target is the second display unit through a predetermined part of the movable body. This configuration effectively suppresses the potential for the diversification of linked performances to confuse players.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature BL1 or feature BL2, characterized in that the movable body, when in the first form at the performance position, avoids overlapping with either the first display unit or the second display unit, designates the first display unit when in the second form at the performance position, and designates the second display unit when in the third form at the performance position."

Feature BL4. The gaming machine according to Feature BL3, characterized in that the displacement direction of the predetermined part when transitioning from the first form to the second form is the same as the displacement direction of the predetermined part when transitioning from the first form to the third form.

The configuration described in this feature allows for the effective implementation of the technical concepts outlined in Feature BL2 and Feature BL3.

Feature BL5. The gaming machine according to Feature BL4, characterized in that, when the movable body is positioned at the performance location, the first display unit, the second display unit, and the predetermined portion of the movable body are aligned in the direction of displacement (vertical direction) of the predetermined portion.

As shown in Feature BL1, etc., when the configuration involves the movable body shifting from a standby position to a performance position before switching, the increased complexity of the movement can confuse the player. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the predetermined part, the first display unit, and the second display unit are aligned in a single line (in the direction of displacement of the predetermined part) upon placement in the performance position, it is possible to diversify the movement of the movable performance device while effectively suppressing the aforementioned inconveniences caused by such diversification.

Feature BL6. The gaming machine according to Feature BL4 or Feature BL5, characterized in that the displacement direction (lateral direction) of the predetermined portion when the movable body is displaced from the standby position to the performance position is different from the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the predetermined portion when the movable body is switched from the first form to the second form and the third form.

The configuration described in this feature allows for dynamic movement by increasing the travel distance of a predetermined part, while simultaneously suppressing the resulting excessive increase in the range of motion of the movable body.

Feature BL7. The movable body is configured to remain in the first form for a predetermined period of time when it is displaced from the standby position to the performance position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BL1 to BL6, characterized in that the predetermined period is configured to be longer than the operating period for displacing the movable body from the standby position to the performance position.

When operating a movable display device, the shorter the period from the start to the completion of the operation, the smaller the time lag before the display for the synchronized display is executed on the display unit. In other words, the display can proceed more quickly. On the other hand, when branching occurs as shown in feature BL1, etc., the player pays attention to which branch to take, so there is technical significance in ensuring a certain amount of time when branching occurs. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by shortening the operation period when displacing from the standby position to the display position to enhance the impact of the movement, while maintaining the first form in the standby position and ensuring a longer interval (predetermined period), the above two problems can be suitably solved.

Feature BL8. The movable body is configured to pass through the second form when switching from the first form to the third form.
The first linked effect is an effect that changes the static display mode of the image that is statically displayed in the display area of the first display unit,
The second linked effect is an effect that changes the display pattern of the symbols that are displayed in the display area of the second display unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BL1 to BL7, characterized in that the display area of the linked pattern in the first display unit is smaller than the display area of the linked pattern in the second display unit.

In the first linked effect, where the static display mode is changed, the change in the movable body's form is also kept small (one stage), while in the second linked effect, where the dynamic display mode is changed, the change in the movable body's form is made larger (two stages). This enhances the contrast between the two linked effects.

Feature BL9. It has a third display unit and is equipped with an operation suggestion means that suggests the operation of the movable performance device on the third display unit when the first linked performance and the second linked performance are started.
The third display unit is positioned so as to overlap with the movable body when the movable body is positioned in the performance position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BL1 to BL8, characterized in that the suggestion continues at least until the movable body is positioned at the performance location.

The branching of the form switching described above occurs at the performance location. Therefore, by configuring the system to provide a suggestion at a location overlapping with the movable object when it is positioned at that performance location, it is possible to effectively prevent users from missing the branching point without explicitly indicating where it occurs. This is preferable because it simplifies the suggestion (reduces the amount of information) and makes it easier to understand.

Features BL10. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A hold display means (hold display device 600K) that displays a number of hold patterns corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display unit (hold display area SE),
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
A pattern display means (pattern display device 500K) having a pattern display section (variable pattern display area), and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (patterns) in the pattern display section,
A display control means (a function of the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that controls the display of patterns) controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns and then stopping to display the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The system comprises a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be switched between a first form (basic state LV0), a second form (first extended state LV1), and a third form (second extended state), and a movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) that has a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) that displaces the movable body to a standby position and a performance position.
The aforementioned movable performance device is
When a first linked performance is performed that links the display in the holding display unit with the movable body, the first switching means displaces the movable body to the performance position while it remains in the first form, and then switches it to the second form at the performance position.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a second linked performance is performed which links the display in the pattern display section with the movable body, the movable body is displaced to the performance position while remaining in the first form, and then switched to the third form at the performance position.

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between the symbol display unit and movable effect devices (movable parts) is intended to increase the player's attention during gameplay. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable effect devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of increasing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In this regard, the configuration described in this feature is linked to both the symbol display unit and the hold display unit. When the first linked effect, linked to the hold display unit, is executed, the movable body displaces to the effect position while remaining in its first form, and then switches to the second form at that effect position. Conversely, when the second linked effect, linked to the symbol display unit, is executed, the movable body displaces to the effect position while remaining in its first form, and then switches to the third form at that effect position. In other words, the movement is standardized during the displacement from the standby position to the effect position, and a branching occurs after reaching the effect position: either it becomes the second form (the linked target becomes the hold display unit) or the third form (the linked target becomes the symbol display unit). By achieving this diversification of the linked effects, the above concerns can be mitigated. Furthermore, by standardizing the movement in part, it is possible to suppress the excessive complexity of the configuration related to the movable effect device due to the diversification of linked effects. This is preferable for allowing peripheral equipment such as the symbol display unit and hold display unit to coexist with the movable effect device in a limited area.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BL1 to BL9 above may also be applied to Feature BL10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BK may be applied to feature groups BL1 to BL10.

<Features of the BM Group>
The following feature group BM was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BM1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a first display device (symbol display device 500K) and a second display device (hold display device 600K) that display information related to the game in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The first display device and the second display device are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction.
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be displaced in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction,
A first linked performance execution means that controls the first display device and the movable performance device to execute a first linked performance in which the display on the first display device and the movable body are linked,
The system includes a second linked performance execution means that controls the second display device and the movable performance device to execute a second linked performance in which the display on the second display device and the movable body are linked,
A gaming machine characterized in that the direction in which the movable body is displaced when the first linked performance is executed and the direction in which the movable body is displaced when the second linked performance is executed are the same.

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between display devices and movable performance devices (movable parts) is used to enhance the player's attention to the game. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable performance devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of enhancing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is such that the movable display device is linked to the displays of multiple display devices (first and second display devices). By using multiple display devices to be linked, monotony of the linked performance can be suppressed, thereby effectively enhancing the effect of increasing attention to the game. However, simply increasing the number of linked devices necessitates the coexistence of various devices in a limited area, which strengthens the constraints on the operating range of the movable display device (movable body). Stronger constraints on the operating range are undesirable because they impair the dynamism of the movement and reduce the impact of the linked performance. In this feature, the movable body is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the direction in which the first and second display devices are arranged side-by-side, and the direction in which the movable body is displaced when executing the first linked performance is the same as the direction in which the movable body is displaced when executing the second linked performance. This effectively mitigates the constraints on the operating range compared to the case where separate operating paths are provided considering the linkage with each display device. Therefore, the above concerns can be eliminated, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

Feature BM2. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
The system includes a display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that can execute display effects in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A first display device (pattern display device 500K) displays multiple patterns (designs) in a variable manner, and then displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means as the final stop display,
The system includes a second display device (auxiliary display device 700K) provided alongside the first display device,
A movable display device (movable display device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) that can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction in which the first display device and the second display device are arranged side by side,
A first linked performance execution means that controls the first display device and the movable performance device to execute a first linked performance in which the display on the first display device and the movable body are linked,
The system includes a second linked performance execution means that controls the second display device and the movable performance device to execute a second linked performance in which the display on the second display device and the movable body are linked,
A gaming machine characterized in that the direction in which the movable body is displaced when the first linked performance is executed and the direction in which the movable body is displaced when the second linked performance is executed are the same.

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between display devices and movable performance devices (movable parts) is used to enhance the player's attention to the game. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable performance devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of enhancing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is such that the movable display device is linked to the displays of multiple display devices (first and second display devices). By using multiple display devices to be linked, monotony of the linked performance can be suppressed, thereby effectively enhancing the effect of increasing attention to the game. However, simply increasing the number of linked devices necessitates the coexistence of various devices in a limited area, which strengthens the constraints on the operating range of the movable display device (movable body). Stronger constraints on the operating range are undesirable because they impair the dynamism of the movement and reduce the impact of the linked performance. In this feature, the movable body is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the direction in which the first and second display devices are arranged side-by-side, and the direction in which the movable body is displaced when executing the first linked performance is the same as the direction in which the movable body is displaced when executing the second linked performance. This effectively mitigates the constraints on the operating range compared to the case where separate operating paths are provided considering the linkage with each display device. Therefore, the above concerns can be eliminated, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

Furthermore, the description in Feature BM1 and Feature BM2, "Display performance execution means capable of executing display performances in parallel with the game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is being performed (e.g., symbol display device 500K, hold display device 600K, auxiliary display device 700K)," can also be changed to "Display performance execution means capable of executing display performances according to the progress of the game (e.g., symbol display device 500K, hold display device 600K, auxiliary display device 700K)."

Feature BM3. The gaming machine according to Feature BM1 or Feature BM2, characterized in that the movable body is configured to overlap with both the first display device and the second display device when the first and second linked effects are executed.

When coordinating a movable object and a display device, overlapping them during synchronized performances can enhance the sense of unity. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the movable object is configured to overlap both the first and second display devices when the first and second synchronized performances are executed (when positioned at the performance location), the aforementioned enhancement of unity can be achieved in both the first and second synchronized performances.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature BM1 or feature BM2, characterized in that the movable body is configured to move to the performance position while maintaining a state of overlapping both the first and second display devices, regardless of whether the first or second linked performance is performed."

Feature BM4. The movable body is configured to change its position between standby and performance positions by being displaced in a direction intersecting the parallel arrangement direction.
The aforementioned performance positions include a first performance position and a second performance position,
The movable body is configured to overlap both the first display device and the second display device, regardless of whether it is positioned at the first display position or the second display position.
The first linked performance execution means is
The means for executing the first synchronized performance, in which the display on the first display device and the movable body positioned at the first performance location are synchronized,
The system includes means for executing a second performance in which the display on the first display device and the movable body positioned at the second performance location are linked as the first linked performance,
The second linked performance execution means is
The means for executing the first performance, in which the display on the second display device and the movable body positioned at the first performance position are linked as the second linked performance,
The gaming machine according to feature BM3, characterized in that it has means for executing a second performance in which the display on the second display device and the movable body positioned at the second performance location are linked as the second linked performance.

As shown in this feature, by providing a first and second performance position in the intersecting direction, and enabling the first display device and the second performance device to be linked at each of these performance positions, the monotony of the linked performance can be more effectively suppressed.

Feature BM5. The gaming machine according to Feature BM4, characterized in that the display areas of the first display device and the second display device extend in a direction intersecting the parallel arrangement direction.

The effect shown in Feature BM4 is expected to become more pronounced when the first and second display positions are separated to a certain extent. For this reason, there is technical significance in relaxing the constraints related to the positional relationship between the first and second display positions. Therefore, by configuring the display areas of the first and second display devices to extend in a direction intersecting the aforementioned parallel arrangement direction, as shown in this feature, it is possible to relax the constraints related to the positional relationship between the first and second display positions while ensuring overlap with the movable body at both positions, thereby realizing a practically preferable configuration.

Feature BM6. The movable body is configured to change its position between standby and performance positions by being displaced in a direction intersecting the parallel arrangement direction.
A gaming machine according to any one of features BM1 to BK5, characterized in that the driving mode of the movable body when it is displaced from the standby position to the performance position in the first linked performance is different from the driving mode of the movable body when it is displaced from the standby position to the performance position in the second linked performance.

To achieve diversification of the synchronized effects by using both the first and second synchronized effects, it is possible to ensure diversity in the process of displacement to the effect position by differentiating the driving mode (operation mode) of the movable body when the first synchronized effect is executed from the driving mode (operation mode) of the movable body when the second synchronized effect is executed. This is preferable in preventing the synchronized effects from becoming obsolete due to the standardization of the displacement direction.

Feature BM7. The movable body is configured to change its position between standby and performance positions by being displaced in a direction intersecting the parallel arrangement direction.
A gaming machine according to any one of features BM1 to BK6, characterized in that the displacement speed of the movable body when it is moved from the standby position to the performance position in the first linked performance is different from the displacement speed of the movable body when it is moved from the standby position to the performance position in the second linked performance.

To achieve diversification of the synchronized effects by using both the first and second synchronized effects, it is possible to ensure diversity in the process of displacement to the effect position by differentiating the displacement speed of the movable body when the first synchronized effect is executed from the displacement speed of the movable body when the second synchronized effect is executed. This is preferable in preventing the synchronized effects from becoming obsolete due to the standardization of the displacement direction.

Feature BM8. The first linked effect is an effect in which the display of the first display device changes at the timing when the movable body reaches the effect position.
The second linked effect is an effect in which the display of the second display device is sequentially changed so that the display mode corresponds to the position of the movable body as the movable body is displaced toward the effect position.
A gaming machine according to any one of features BM1 to BM7, characterized in that the displacement speed of the movable body is relatively fast when the first linked performance is executed, and the displacement speed of the movable body is relatively slow when the second linked performance is executed.

For the first linked effect, the "timing" of the completion of the movable body's displacement is the key point of focus, while for the second linked effect, the "duration" of the movable body's displacement is the key point of focus. Specifically, for the second linked effect, the display on the second display device changes sequentially in accordance with the displacement of the movable body towards the effect position. In this configuration, the effect can be suitably improved by relatively slowing down the displacement speed of the movable body and emphasizing the relationship between the movement of the movable body and the change in the display on the second display device. In contrast, for the first linked effect, the display on the first display device changes at the moment the movable body reaches the effect position. In this configuration, the effect can be suitably improved by relatively increasing the displacement speed towards the effect position and strengthening the impact of the display change.

Feature BM9. The gaming machine according to Feature BM8, characterized in that, in the first linked performance, the display mode of the linked symbol among the multiple symbols on the first display device is changed to a predetermined mode by the movable body, and in the second linked performance, the display on the second display device changes in accordance with the movement of the movable body.

In the second linked effect, the display on the second display device changes sequentially in accordance with the displacement of the movable body towards the effect position. In this configuration, the effect can be suitably improved by relatively slowing the displacement speed of the movable body and emphasizing the relationship between the movement of the movable body and the change in the display on the second display device. In contrast, in the first linked effect, the display mode of the linked pattern becomes a predetermined mode at the moment the movable body reaches the effect position. In this configuration, the effect can be suitably improved by relatively increasing the displacement speed towards the effect position and strengthening the impact of the display change.

Feature BM10. The movable body is configured to change its position between standby and performance positions by being displaced in a direction intersecting the parallel arrangement direction.
The aforementioned movable body can be switched between multiple forms with different appearances.
The aforementioned plurality of forms include the first form, the second form, and the third form,
A first switching means for switching the movable body from a first form to a second form when the first linked performance is executed,
The system includes a second switching means for switching the movable body from the first state to the third state when the second linked performance is executed,
The first switching means is configured to switch from the first form to the second form while the movable body is in standby position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BM1 to BM9, characterized in that the second switching means is configured to switch from the first form to the third form while the movable body is in standby position. As shown in this feature, in the first linked performance, the configuration is such that the movable body is in standby position when it switches from the first form to the second form, and in the second linked performance, the configuration is such that the movable body is in standby position when it switches from the first form to the third form, thereby contributing to increased attention to the movable body while it is in standby position. Furthermore, by changing the form before displacement to the performance position, differences in appearance during displacement to the performance position are created, and the process of displacement can be suitably diversified while each linked performance is configured to displace in the same direction.

Feature BM11. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a first display unit (symbol display device 500K) and a second display unit (hold display device 600K) display information related to the game in parallel with the game rotation operation,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K),
A first linked performance execution means that controls the first display unit and the movable performance device to execute a first linked performance in which the display on the first display unit and the movable body are linked,
The system includes a second linked performance execution means that controls the second display unit and the movable performance device to execute a second linked performance in which the display on the second display unit and the movable body are linked,
A gaming machine characterized in that the direction in which the movable body is displaced when the first linked performance is executed and the direction in which the movable body is displaced when the second linked performance is executed are the same.

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between the display unit and movable effects devices (movable parts) is intended to increase the player's attention during gameplay. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable effects devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of increasing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is such that the movable display device is linked to the displays of multiple display units (first and second display units). By using multiple display units that are linked to each other, monotony of the linked display effects can be suppressed, thereby effectively enhancing the effect of increasing attention to the game. However, simply increasing the number of linked units necessitates the coexistence of various devices in a limited area, which strengthens the constraints on the operating range of the movable display device (movable body). Stronger constraints on the operating range are undesirable because they impair the dynamism of the movement and reduce the impact of the linked display effects. In this feature, the movable body is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the direction in which the first and second display units are arranged side by side, and the direction in which the movable body is displaced when executing the first linked display effect is the same as the direction in which the movable body is displaced when executing the second linked display effect. This effectively mitigates the constraints on the operating range compared to the case where separate operating paths are provided considering the linkage with each display unit. Therefore, the above concerns can be eliminated, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features BM3 to BM10 above may also be applied to feature BM11.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BL may be applied to feature groups BM1 to BM11.

<Characteristics of the BN group>
The following feature group BN was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BN1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a display means (for example, a symbol display device 500K or a hold display device 600K) that displays a predetermined information in parallel with the game rotation operation,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) and a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body,
The system includes a linked performance execution means (a function that executes processing for linked performances in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which executes linked performances by linking the display by the display means with the movement of the movable body,
As the aforementioned linked performance, there are multiple types of linked performances (for example, the first stop notification performance and the sixth type of reserved notification performance) provided, in which multiple linked patterns are provided in which the components to be linked in the display means (for example, the left symbol row, the middle symbol row, the right symbol row, and the reserved symbols displayed in each unit reserved display section 602aK to 602hK) are different.
When the aforementioned linked performance is to be executed, the system is equipped with teaching means (a function that displays the message "STOP!" or "Pending Change!" on the auxiliary display device 700K) that informs the user of the type of linked performance before the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized in that, after teaching by the teaching means, the movable body operates, and the movable body teaches the components that are the target of the linked performance in this linked performance.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, display means such as a symbol display means are provided that display changing symbols when a ball enters a designated ball entry area within the game area. By using these display means to perform various effects, the level of attention given to the game is increased. In recent years, movable performance devices (movable bodies) have been placed around the display means, and synchronized effects are implemented that link the display on the display means with the movement of the movable body, further increasing the level of attention.

As shown in this feature, by providing multiple types of linked effects and multiple components that are linked to each effect, it is possible to prevent the linked effects from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the enjoyment of the gaming machine. However, if the linked effects become too diverse, the number of linked patterns will increase, potentially confusing players. This is a concern as it may hinder the effect of increasing attention.

In this regard, this feature first informs the player of the type (category) of the linked performance when it is executed. Since this instruction (category instruction) is given before the movable part moves, it is possible to predict (narrow down) the movement of the movable part to some extent based on the instruction. After this instruction, the movable part moves, and the components (linking patterns) that are linked in the current linked performance are indicated. Thus, with a configuration where category instruction is given by the instruction means and component instruction is given by the movable part, the player can enjoy the linked performance with a certain degree of understanding, effectively eliminating the above concerns. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's attention to the game.

The configuration described in this feature is defined as follows: "A starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE); a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section; an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function that executes the process for the jackpot lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result); and prior to the determination by the determination means or Based on the determination means that the determination is made, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the termination of the game cycle operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is considered as one game cycle, and a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the predetermined transition information. The system includes, when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a display means (for example, a symbol display device 500K or a hold display device 600K) that displays a predetermined display in parallel with the game rotation operation, a movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) and a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body, and a linked performance execution means (a function that executes processing for linked performances in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that executes linked performances by linking the display by the display means with the movement of the movable body, the linked performances include a first linked performance (first stop notification performance) and a second linked performance (sixth type hold notification performance), and the linked pattern in the first linked performance includes the components that are linked in the display means (left symbol row, middle symbol The game machine is characterized by having multiple linkage patterns with different columns (right pattern column), and as linkage patterns in the second linkage performance, multiple linkage patterns with different components that are linked in the display means (reserved patterns displayed in each unit reserved display unit 602aK to 602hK), and when the first linkage performance or the second linkage performance is executed, a teaching means (a function that displays the message "STOP!" or "Reserved Change!" on the auxiliary display device 700K) that teaches the type of linkage performance to be either the first linkage performance or the second linkage performance before the movable body operates, and the movable body teaches the components that are linked in the current linkage performance.

Feature BN2. The gaming machine according to Feature BN1, characterized in that, during the game round in which the linked performance is executed, the type of linked performance is taught by the teaching means, and the component being linked is not explicitly shown until it is taught by the movable body.

If the components being linked are revealed before category teaching, the overall picture of the performance may be revealed prematurely based on the relationship between the components and categories. This is a concern as it could diminish the appeal of the linked performance. Therefore, in order to achieve the effect shown in feature BN1, it is preferable to have a configuration where the type of linked performance is taught by the teaching means and the components being linked are not revealed until they are taught by the movable body, as shown in this feature.

Feature BN3. The gaming machine according to Feature BN1 or Feature BN2, characterized in that the linked performance execution means operates the movable body under the condition that the type of linked performance is taught by the teaching means.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to allow players to confirm both the content (category) taught by the teaching means and the content (component) taught by the movable body, it is possible to aid the player's understanding. Furthermore, instead of completely separating the components targeted by one linked performance from those targeted by other linked performances, even if there is some overlap, the system retains the teaching from the teaching means, thereby effectively avoiding player misunderstanding. In other words, even if the components targeted by each linked performance overlap, the difficulty in understanding the linked performance can be effectively suppressed.

Feature BN4. The teaching means executes the teaching of the type of linked performance on a special display unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BN1 to BN3, characterized in that the portion in which the instruction is performed in the special display unit is configured to overlap with the range of motion of the movable unit when the linked performance is performed.

When a category is taught by a teaching means, it is undesirable for the player, who is intently watching the teaching, to miss the movement of the movable parts (for example, the flow of component designation). Therefore, by configuring the system to teach the category in a way that overlaps with the range of motion of the movable parts in the synchronized performance, the above concern can be effectively resolved.

Feature BN5. The movable body is displaceable to a position corresponding to each of the components.
The aforementioned linked performance execution means is configured to displace the movable body to a position corresponding to the component that is the target of the linked performance when the linked performance is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BN1 to BN4, characterized in that the teaching means is configured to teach the type of linked performance by changing the shape of the movable body according to the type of linked performance before the movable body is displaced to the position corresponding to the component.

As shown in this feature, if the movable body has a category teaching function, and the type of linked effect is taught by the change in the movable body's form, it can contribute to enhancing the impact of the linked effect.

Feature BN6. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BN1 to Feature BN5, wherein the teaching of the type of the linked performance by the teaching means continues until the linked display on the display means, which is linked to the movement of the movable body, is completed.

By configuring the system so that category guidance continues until the linked display is complete, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem of the overall presentation becoming difficult to understand due to missing category guidance.

Feature BN7. The display means includes a first display unit (e.g., a pattern display device 500K) that displays a first display and a second display unit (e.g., a hold display device 600K) that displays a second display.
The aforementioned linked performance includes a first linked performance that is linked to the first display on the first display unit, and a second linked performance that is linked to the second display on the second display unit.
A gaming machine according to any one of features BN1 to BN6, characterized in that at least a portion of the trajectory when the movable body operates in the first linked performance overlaps with at least a portion of the trajectory when the movable body operates in the second linked performance.

As shown in this feature, in a configuration where a movable body is linked to both the first and second display units, by partially overlapping the trajectories of the movable body during linked effects in the first and second linked effects, the operating distance can be increased to enhance the impact of the effects, while simultaneously preventing difficulties in coexistence with peripheral devices such as the first and second display units due to the need to secure the operating range of the movable body.

Feature BN8. The first display unit is a pattern display unit (pattern display device 500K) that, as the first display, variably displays a plurality of pattern sequences (left pattern, middle pattern sequence, right pattern sequence) which are the constituent elements, and then finally displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means.
The aforementioned movable body is configured to be positioned at a designated location that overlaps with the sequence of patterns that are the target of the linked performance in this instance.
The gaming machine according to feature BN7, characterized in that the linked performance execution means is configured to change the behavior of the pattern sequence specified by the movable body when the movable body is positioned at the specified position.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the movable body specifies (teachs) which of the multiple pattern sequences are to be linked, the coordination between the variable display of the pattern sequences and the movement of the movable body can be strengthened. For example, it is preferable to configure the system so that the expected probability of a judgment result corresponding to predetermined transition information differs depending on the pattern sequence specified by the movable body.

Feature BN9. The second display unit is a hold display unit (hold display device 600K) that displays the hold patterns, which are the constituent elements, as the second display, in a manner corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The acquired information storage means includes a pre-identification means (a function that performs a pre-confirmation process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information before it becomes the subject of the determination.
The aforementioned movable body is configured to be positioned at a designated location that overlaps with the aforementioned reserved symbol, which is the target of the linked performance in this instance.
The gaming machine according to feature BN7, characterized in that the linked performance execution means is configured to change the display mode of the reserved pattern specified by the movable body to a special display mode (blue, yellow, red) that is different from the normal display mode (white) when the movable body is positioned at the designated position.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the target of the linked hold symbol is specified (taught) by the movable body, the coordination between the display of the hold symbol and the movement of the movable body can be strengthened.

Feature BN10. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a display means (for example, a symbol display device 500K or a hold display device 600K) that displays a predetermined information in parallel with the game rotation operation,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) and a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body,
The system includes a linked performance execution means (a function that executes processing for linked performances in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which executes linked performances by linking the display by the display means with the movement of the movable body,
This includes the first linked performance (first stop notification performance) and the second linked performance (sixth type hold notification performance),
As the linking patterns in the first linked performance, there are multiple linking patterns in which the elements to be linked (left symbol column, middle symbol column, right symbol column) differ in the display means.
As the linking patterns in the second linked performance, there are multiple linking patterns in which the linked components (the held symbols displayed in each unit held display section 602aK to 602hK) are different in the display means.
When the first linked performance is to be executed, a first teaching means (a function that displays the message "STOP!" on the auxiliary display device 700K) is provided to inform the movable body that the first linked performance will be executed before the movement of the movable body,
After teaching by the first teaching means, the movable body teaches the components that are the target of the linked performance in this linked performance by a second teaching means,
When the second linked performance is to be performed, a third teaching means (a function that displays the message "Pending Change!" on the auxiliary display device 700K) is provided to inform the movable body that the second linked performance will be performed before the movement of the movable body,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a fourth teaching means, which, after teaching by the third teaching means, teaches the components that are the target of the linked performance in the current linked performance by the movable body.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, display means such as a symbol display means are provided that display changing symbols when a ball enters a designated ball entry area within the game area. By using these display means to perform various effects, the level of attention given to the game is increased. In recent years, movable performance devices (movable bodies) have been placed around the display means, and synchronized effects are implemented that link the display on the display means with the movement of the movable body, further increasing the level of attention.

As shown in this feature, by providing multiple types of linked effects and multiple components that are linked to each effect, it is possible to prevent the linked effects from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the enjoyment of the gaming machine. However, if the linked effects become too diverse, the number of linked patterns will increase, potentially confusing players. This is a concern as it may hinder the effect of increasing attention.

In this regard, this feature first informs the player of the type (category) of the linked performance when it is executed. Since this instruction (category instruction) is given before the movable part moves, it is possible to predict (narrow down) the movement of the movable part to some extent based on the instruction. After this instruction, the movable part moves, and the components (linking patterns) that are linked in the current linked performance are indicated. Thus, with a configuration where category instruction is given by the instruction means and component instruction is given by the movable part, the player can enjoy the linked performance with a certain degree of understanding, effectively eliminating the above concerns. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features BN2 to BN9 above may also be applied to feature BN10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BM may be applied to feature BN1 to feature BN10.

<Features BO Group>
The following set of features BO is based on the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The features BO are based on the background technology described above, which states that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BO1. The game area (game area PE) has starting ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a variable display of patterns is performed in parallel with the game rotation operation, and a pattern display unit (pattern display device 500K) displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means at the final stop,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) and a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body,
A gaming machine comprising: an interlocking effect execution means (a function that executes processing for interlocking effects in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140) which operates the movable body when the variable display of the image is being performed in the image display unit, thereby executing an interlocking effect that links the image and the movable body,
The device is equipped with a special display unit (auxiliary display device 700K) arranged alongside the aforementioned picture display unit, which is capable of displaying a special image (an image resembling a school of fish),
The aforementioned special image is displayed in such a way that it overlaps with the operating range of the movable body in the aforementioned linked performance.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the linked performance is executed while the special image is displayed on the special display unit, it is equipped with a means for changing the special image in accordance with the movement of the movable body (a function of changing the color of part or all of the image resembling a school of fish in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140).

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between the symbol display unit and movable effect devices (movable parts) is intended to increase the player's attention during gameplay. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable effect devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of increasing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In the configuration described above, a special image may be displayed in a special display section adjacent to the pattern display section. This special image is displayed so as to overlap with the operating area of the movable part during the linked performance. When the linked performance is executed while this special image is displayed, the special image changes in accordance with the movement of the movable part. In other words, under the special conditions described above, the linked area of the movable part can be extended to the special display section. By achieving this innovative linkage, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's attention to the game.

Feature BO2. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a variable display of patterns is performed in parallel with the game rotation operation, and a pattern display unit (pattern display device 500K) displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means at the final stop,
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) and a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body,
A gaming machine comprising: an interlocking effect execution means (a function that executes processing for interlocking effects in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140) which operates the movable body when the variable display of the image is being performed in the image display unit, thereby executing an interlocking effect that links the image and the movable body,
The device is equipped with a special display unit (auxiliary display device 700K) arranged alongside the aforementioned picture display unit, which is capable of displaying a special image (an image resembling a school of fish),
Both the display area of the aforementioned pattern display unit and the display area of the aforementioned special display unit are configured to overlap with the operating area of the movable body in the aforementioned linked performance.
A special display execution means that causes the special image to be displayed in the special display unit when predetermined display conditions are met,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the linked performance is executed while the special image is displayed on the special display unit, it is equipped with a means for changing the special image in accordance with the movement of the movable body that displaces in front of the special image (a function of changing the color of part or all of the image that imitates a school of fish in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140).

In some amusement machines such as pachinko machines, the coordination (synchronized effects) between the symbol display unit and movable effect devices (movable parts) is intended to increase the player's attention during gameplay. However, many of the synchronized effects performed using movable effect devices are similar, and while the synchronized effects may be elaborate, they tend to become monotonous. For these reasons, it is anticipated that the effect of increasing attention through these synchronized effects will diminish with repeated execution.

In the configuration described above, a special image may be displayed in a special display section adjacent to the pattern display section. This special image is displayed so as to overlap with the operating area of the movable part during the linked performance. When the linked performance is executed while this special image is displayed, the special image changes in accordance with the movement of the movable part. In other words, under the special conditions described above, the linked area of the movable part can be extended to the special display section. By achieving this innovative linkage, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's attention to the game.

Feature BO3. The gaming machine according to Feature BO1 or Feature BO2, characterized in that the changing means is configured to change the special image to an image that suggests the likelihood of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined transition information being reported after the linked performance, when the linked performance is executed while the special image is displayed on the special display unit.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when a linked performance is executed while a special image is displayed, the special image is changed to an image that suggests the probability of a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to predetermined transition information. This configuration effectively enhances the coordination between the movable body, the image display unit, and the special display unit.

Feature BO4. The gaming machine according to Feature BO3, characterized in that the modification means performs the modification such that the degree of modification of the special image by the modification means increases as the expectation level increases.

In a configuration where a significant change to the special image increases the expectation of a jackpot, it is assumed that players expecting a jackpot will pay close attention to the animation, anticipating a significant change in the special image. Thus, by linking the degree of change with the level of expectation, the impact of a significant change in the special image can be effectively enhanced.

Feature BO5. The pattern display unit is provided with multiple types of reach displays, each with a different expected probability of reporting a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined transition information.
The aforementioned linked performance execution means is configured to execute the linked performance by the movable body when transitioning to the reach display.
The gaming machine according to feature BO1 or feature BO2, characterized in that the changing means is configured to change the special image to an image correlated with the type of reach display to be transitioned to, when the linked performance is executed while the special image is displayed on the special display unit.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when a linked effect is executed while a special image is displayed, the movable part moves in conjunction with the transition to the reach display, and the special image is changed to an image correlated with the type of reach display. In other words, the type of reach display is indicated by the changed special image. With this configuration, the coordination between the movable part, the image display unit, and the special display unit can be effectively enhanced.

Feature BO6. The gaming machine according to Feature BO4, characterized in that the special image is hidden during the game round related to the reach display after being changed during that game round.

If the image changes to one that correlates with the type of reach display, the display of the special image can be terminated during that game round, thereby effectively avoiding the change function causing confusion for the player.

Feature BO7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BO1 to Feature BO6, characterized in that the special image is an image that continues to be displayed for multiple game rounds unless modified by the modification means.

If the display of the special image before the change continues across multiple game rounds, then opportunities to change the special image, as shown in Feature BO1, etc., can be appropriately ensured.

Feature BO8. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, a first display unit (symbol display device 500K) displays a first display (for example, a scrolling display of a row of symbols) in parallel with the game rotation operation, and a second display unit (auxiliary display device 700K) displays a second display (for example, a scrolling display of an image resembling a school of fish),
A movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) and a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body,
The system includes a linked performance execution means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that executes processing for linked performances) which operates the movable body when the first display is being executed on the first display unit, thereby linking the display on the first display unit with the movement of the movable body.
The display area of the first display unit and the display area of the second display unit are both configured to overlap with the operating area of the movable body when the movable body is operated by the linked performance.
The linked performance execution means is characterized in that, when the linked performance is executed while the second display is being executed on the second display unit, it has a changing means that changes the second display in accordance with the movement of the movable body that displaces in front of the display area of the second display unit.

In the configuration described above, when a linked effect is executed while the second display is being displayed on the second display unit, the second display is changed in accordance with the movement of a movable body that displaces in front of the display area of the second display unit. In other words, under the conditions described above, the movable body's linked target can be expanded from the first display unit to both the first and second display units. By achieving this innovative linkage, it is possible to effectively enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature is referred to as "Feature BO9. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE), a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, an acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and a determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result). 02 is a function that executes processing for the jackpot lottery, and prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round, and a game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the determination result by the determination means is the predetermined transition A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the judgment result corresponds to the information; a first display unit (symbol display device 500K) that displays a first display (for example, a scrolling display of a row of symbols) and a second display unit (auxiliary display device 700K) that displays a second display (for example, a scrolling display of an image resembling a school of fish) in parallel with the game cycle operation when the game cycle operation is being performed; a movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body (movable decorative body 801K) and a drive unit (stepping motor 815K) for the movable body; and the first display unit The gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a linked performance execution means (a function that executes processing for linked performance in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140), which executes a linked performance by operating the movable body when the first display is being executed, thereby linking the display of the first display unit and the movement of the movable body; the display area of the second display unit in the second display unit is configured to overlap with the operating area when the movable body is being operated; and the linked performance execution means has means to set the linked targets to the first display unit and the second display unit when the linked performance is executed while the second display unit is being executed.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BO3 to BO7 above may also be applied to Feature BO8.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BN may be applied to feature groups BO1 to BO8.

<Features BP Group>
The following feature group BP was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BP1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
A pattern display device (pattern display device 500K) having a pattern display unit, which variably displays multiple patterns (designs) on the pattern display unit and then displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means as the final stop display,
The system comprises a movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body and a drive unit for the movable body,
The system is configured to perform a synchronized effect by linking the display on the aforementioned pattern display device with the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an indication means (auxiliary display device 700K) provided near the movable performance device, which indicates the movement of the movable body when the movable body moves during the linked performance.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, a symbol display device is equipped that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a designated ball entry point within the game area. Various effects are employed on this symbol display device (symbol display unit) to enhance the player's attention to the game. In recent years, movable effect devices (movable bodies) have been placed around the symbol display device, and synchronized effects are implemented by linking the display on the symbol display unit with the movement of the movable body, further increasing the player's attention.

Increasing the operating range of a movable display device is advantageous in enhancing visual impact and preventing players from missing its movements. However, in gaming machines, the operating range of a movable display device is often constrained due to the need to ensure coexistence with surrounding components such as the flow area and symbol display device. For these reasons, strong constraints on the operating range are expected to hinder the enhancement of attention through synchronized performance between the movable display device and the symbol display device. In this regard, the configuration described in this feature includes a suggestion means near the movable display device, which provides an indication of the movable body's movement when a synchronized performance is to be executed. Players can anticipate the occurrence of a synchronized performance through this indication. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention-enhancing effect of the synchronized performance from being missed due to the movement of the movable body (especially its process). Furthermore, even when it is difficult to secure a large operating range due to coexistence with surrounding components, the suggestion means can support the enhancement of attention through the synchronized performance.

Furthermore, the description in this feature, "a suggestion means provided near the movable performance device that suggests the movement of the movable body when the movable body moves during the linked performance," can also be changed to "a suggestion means provided near the movable performance device that suggests the start of movement of the movable body when the movable body is started during the linked performance."

Feature BP2. The gaming machine according to Feature BP1, characterized in that the suggestion means is positioned parallel to the movable body so as to be on the side of the symbol display section when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, by positioning the suggestion means on the side of the movable body that faces the image display area, the suggestion means is more likely to enter the field of vision of a player who is focusing on the image display, thereby effectively reducing the chances of the suggestion being overlooked.

Feature BP3. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) sequentially determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed sequentially according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information,
A pattern display device (pattern display device 500K) having a pattern display unit, which variably displays multiple patterns (designs) on the pattern display unit and then displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means as the final stop display,
The system comprises a movable performance device (movable performance device 800K) having a movable body and a drive unit for the movable body,
The system is configured to perform a synchronized effect by linking the display on the aforementioned pattern display device with the aforementioned movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an indication means (auxiliary display device 700K) disposed between the pattern display unit and the movable body, which indicates the operation of the movable body when the linked performance is executed and the movable body is in operation.

In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, a symbol display device is equipped that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a designated ball entry point within the game area. Various effects are employed on this symbol display device (symbol display unit) to enhance the player's attention to the game. In recent years, movable effect devices (movable bodies) have been placed around the symbol display device, and synchronized effects are implemented by linking the display on the symbol display unit with the movement of the movable body, further increasing the player's attention.

Increasing the operating range of a movable performance device to a certain extent is advantageous in enhancing visual impact and preventing players from missing its movements. However, in gaming machines, the operating range of a movable performance device is often constrained due to the need to ensure coexistence with the surrounding configuration, such as the flow area and the symbol display device. Given these circumstances, it is assumed that strong constraints on the operating range would hinder the enhancement of attention through the synchronized performance between the movable performance device and the symbol display device. In this regard, the configuration described in this feature includes a suggestion means positioned between the symbol display section of the symbol display device and the movable body of the movable performance device. When a synchronized performance is executed, this suggestion means provides a suggestion for the movement of the movable body. This makes it easier for the suggestion means to enter the field of view of a player who is intently watching the symbol display device, and for a player who shifts their gaze to the suggestion means, the movable performance device is more easily entered their field of view. In other words, players can anticipate the occurrence of a synchronized performance through this suggestion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body (especially its process) from being missed, thus preventing the enhancement of attention through synchronization from being effectively realized. Furthermore, even when it is difficult to secure a large operating range due to coexistence with surrounding components, suggestive means can support the effect of increasing attention through synchronized performance.

Furthermore, the description in this feature, "a suggestion means disposed between the pattern display unit and the movable body, which suggests the operation of the movable body when the linked performance is executed and the movable body is operating," can also be changed to "a suggestion means disposed between the pattern display unit and the movable body, which suggests the start of operation of the movable body when the linked performance is executed and the movable body begins to operate."

Feature BP4. The gaming machine according to Feature BP3, characterized in that the suggestion means is disposed near the movable body while it is not in operation.

By arranging the suggestion means near a movable body that is not in operation, the effects shown in feature BP3 can be suitably achieved.

Feature BP5. The suggestion means has a special display unit that displays the suggestion,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BP1 to BP4, characterized in that the special display unit is positioned in a location that overlaps with the operating range in which the movable body operates when the linked performance is executed.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even if the time between the indication of action on the special display unit and the actual movement of the movable part is shortened, it is possible to effectively prevent a player who is intently watching the indication at the moment of indication from missing the movement of the movable part. In other words, even if the movable part moves when the player's gaze shifts from the indication to the movable part, it is possible to prevent the movement from deviating from the indication. Therefore, the attention-enhancing effect shown in feature BP1, etc., can be effectively achieved.

Feature BP6. The gaming machine according to Feature BP5, characterized in that the movable body is configured to reach a position that overlaps with the indication from the front when the indication is being made on the special display unit.

As shown in this feature, if the movable body reaches (arrives at) a position that overlaps with the suggestion during the suggestion, the effect shown in feature BP5 can be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature BP7. The game machine according to Feature BP6, characterized in that the suggestion means is configured to terminate the suggestion after an interlocking display linked to the movable body in the pattern display section is executed, under the condition that the movable body is positioned to overlap with the suggestion.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the suggestion to end behind the movable body, it is possible to effectively prevent the player's attention from shifting away from the movable body upon the termination of the suggestion.

Feature BP8. The suggestion by the suggestion means consists of a first suggestion (for example, the words "LOOK!") that suggests the start of the movement of the movable body, and a second suggestion (for example, the words "Pending Change!") that is executed immediately after the first suggestion and shows an outline of the linked performance that involves the movement of the movable body.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BP1 to BP7, characterized in that the suggestion means has means for switching the suggestion being executed from the first suggestion to the second suggestion before operating the movable body.

As shown in this feature, by first indicating the start of operation and then showing an overview of the linked effects, it is possible to suppress the possibility of the suggestion function confusing the player by providing an excessive amount of information at once.

Feature BP9. The gaming machine according to Feature BP8, characterized in that the execution period of the second suggestion is shorter than the execution period of the first suggestion.

When the first suggestion occurs and draws the player's attention to the suggestion mechanism, even if the second suggestion is executed, the player can quickly recognize it. As this feature demonstrates, when switching from the first to the second suggestion, shortening the execution period of the second suggestion prevents the total suggestion period (execution period of the first suggestion + execution period of the second suggestion) from becoming excessively long, thereby suppressing any disruption to the smooth progression of the game's presentation.

Feature BP10. The suggestion means has a special display unit that displays the suggestion,
The gaming machine according to feature BP8 or feature BP9, characterized in that the display range displayed by the first suggestion and the display range displayed by the second suggestion overlap in the special display unit.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the display range of the first suggestion and the display range of the second suggestion to overlap, it is possible to suppress the issue where the suggestion function of the second suggestion malfunctions when transitioning from the first suggestion to the second suggestion.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BO may also be applied to feature BP1 to BP10.

<Characteristics of the BQ Group>
The following feature group BQ was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BQ1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The aforementioned predetermined game states include a first type of game state (second probability variation state) and a second type of game state (first probability variation state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first type of game state.
A first transition means that, when the first transition condition is met, transitions from the first type of game state to the second type of game state,
The system includes a second transition means for transitioning from the first type of game state to the second type of game state when a second transition condition is met,
The game includes a display and animation execution means (a symbol display device 42, an animation control device 82, and a display control device 212) that executes a display animation in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 42) having a display screen (display screen 42a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern groups (pattern rows) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern groups and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The display screen is provided with two types of symbol combinations: a first-type symbol combination (first-type symbol combination) consisting of relatively advantageous first-type symbols (odd-numbered symbols), and a second-type symbol combination (second-type symbol combination) consisting of relatively disadvantageous second-type symbols (even-numbered symbols).
The display screen is equipped with a pattern group switching means that switches each of the pattern groups displayed on the display screen between a first pattern group (normal pattern row) consisting of the first type of pattern and the second type of pattern, and a second pattern group (special pattern row) consisting of the second type of pattern.
The game machine is characterized in that the pattern group switching means has means for determining whether the pattern group that is variably displayed in the third game state in accordance with the route to transition to the third game state is the first pattern group or the second pattern group.

In the configuration described above, the set of symbols (first symbol group/second symbol group) that are variably displayed in the third game state are determined by the transition route taken when transitioning to the third game state. This configuration helps to suppress monotony in the third game state and contributes to increasing player engagement.

Feature BQ2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for controlling the variable ball entry section so that the game balls that flow into the variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the variable ball entry section,
The system includes means for controlling the variable ball entry section such that, when the determination results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the special game state, the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the variable ball entry section.
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game state,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the special game state,
The transition from the third game state to the first game state is configured to go through the second game state.
The game includes a display and animation execution means (a symbol display device 42, an animation control device 82, and a display control device 212) that executes a display animation in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 42) having a display screen (display screen 42a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern groups (pattern rows) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern groups and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
When transitioning to the third game state by the first transition means, a first type symbol combination (first type symbol combination), which is a combination of first type symbols (odd-numbered symbols), is provided as the symbol combination to be displayed as the final stop on the display screen in the second game state.
When transitioning to the first game state by the second transition means, a second type of symbol combination (second type of symbol combination), which is a combination of second type of symbols (even-numbered symbols), is provided as the symbol combination to be displayed as the final stop on the display screen in the second game state.
The display screen includes a pattern group switching means that switches each of the pattern groups displayed on the display screen between a first pattern group (normal pattern row) consisting of the first type of pattern and the second type of pattern, and a second pattern group (special pattern row) consisting of the second type of pattern.
The game machine is characterized in that the pattern group switching means has means for making each pattern group that is variably displayed on the display screen in the third game state transitioned by the third transition means the second pattern group.

The transition between the first and third game states is primarily triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (first judgment result). However, in this feature, a transition in the game state can also occur if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (second judgment result). Specifically, if the second judgment result occurs during the second game state, the judgment mode does not change, but the switching control mode changes from the second switching mode to the first switching mode, and the game transitions to the third game state. Since the third game state is configured to transition to the first game state via the second game state, the possibility of the high probability mode ending is lower compared to the second game state (the expectation of looping in high probability mode increases). Here, if the game transitions to the third game state triggered by the second judgment result, the group of symbols displayed on the display screen changes to the second group of symbols. The second group of symbols consists of second-type symbols that are advantageous to the player, and the display of this second group of symbols suggests that the player will be able to avoid being demoted to the low probability mode at least once. This configuration effectively increases the level of attention given to the game.

Feature BQ3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for controlling the variable ball entry section so that the game balls that flow into the variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the variable ball entry section,
The system includes means for controlling the variable ball entry section such that, when the determination results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the special game state, the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the variable ball entry section.
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game state,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the special game state,
The transition from the third game state to the first game state is configured to go through the second game state.
The game includes a display and animation execution means (a symbol display device 42, an animation control device 82, and a display control device 212) that executes a display animation in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 42) having a display screen (display screen 42a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern groups (pattern rows) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern groups and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
When transitioning to the third game state by the first transition means, a first type symbol combination (first type symbol combination), which is a combination of first type symbols (odd-numbered symbols), is provided as the symbol combination to be displayed as the final stop on the display screen in the second game state.
When transitioning to the first game state by the second transition means, a second type of symbol combination (second type of symbol combination), which is a combination of second type of symbols (even-numbered symbols), is provided as the symbol combination to be displayed as the final stop on the display screen in the second game state.
The display screen includes a pattern group switching means that switches each of the pattern groups displayed on the display screen between a first pattern group (normal pattern row) consisting of the first type of pattern and the second type of pattern, and a second pattern group (special pattern row) consisting of the second type of pattern.
The game machine is characterized in that the pattern group switching means includes means for designating each pattern group displayed on the display screen in the third game state transitioned by the first transition means as the first pattern group, and means for designating each pattern group displayed on the display screen in the third game state transitioned by the third transition means as the second pattern group.

The transition between the first and third game states is primarily triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (first judgment result). However, in this feature, a transition in the game state can also occur when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (second judgment result). Specifically, if the second judgment result occurs during the second game state, the judgment mode does not change, but the switching control mode changes from the second switching mode to the first switching mode, and the game transitions to the third game state. Since the third game state is configured to transition to the first game state via the second game state, the possibility of the high probability mode ending is lower compared to the second game state (the expectation of looping the high probability mode increases). Here, when the transition to the third game state is triggered by the first judgment result, this is indicated by the combination of symbols displayed at the final stop, and when the transition to the third game state is triggered by the second judgment result, the group of symbols displayed on the display screen changes to the second group of symbols, indicating the transition to the third game state. Thus, by configuring the game so that multiple different suggestive functions are conveyed through the patterns, it is possible to suppress monotony in gameplay and effectively increase the level of attention the player receives.

Feature BQ4. The gaming machine according to Feature BQ2 or Feature BQ3, characterized in that, when the groups of symbols variably displayed on the display screen in the third game state are designated as the second symbol group, the display of the second symbol group continues at least until the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the judgment in the third game state is obtained.

In the third game state, the display of the second set of symbols continues until the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is reached. This configuration allows for a significant improvement in player satisfaction.

Feature BQ5. It has a state indication means that can switch between a second game state indication display that suggests the second game state is in progress and a third game state indication display that suggests the third game state is in progress.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BQ2 to BQ4, characterized in that the state indication means switches the state indication display to the third game state indication display when the group of symbols displayed on the display screen in the third game state transitioned by the first transition means is the first group of symbols, and continues the second game state indication display when the group of symbols displayed on the display screen in the third game state transitioned by the third transition means is the second group of symbols.

If the game transitions from the second game state to the third game state based on the second judgment result, the indication from the state indication means will remain as the indication for the second game state. This configuration allows for the effective demonstration of the effects shown in Feature BQ2, etc. (the effect of increasing attention to the game through the switching function of the symbol group).

Feature BQ6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BQ1 to Feature BQ5, wherein the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is such that the judgment mode is the same before and after the transition to the special game state triggered by the judgment result, and the switching control mode after the end of the special game state is the first switching mode.

The second judgment result does not affect the judgment mode. Therefore, compared to the first judgment result, control for ball entry into the predetermined location of the variable ball entry section becomes unnecessary, allowing for a quick transition to the third game state. This is preferable for differentiating the symbol display for each transition route to the third game state. For example, it is preferable to make the transition to the third game state triggered by the second judgment result less noticeable, thereby enhancing the impact when the symbol group changes.

Feature BQ7. A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned special game states include a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the first special game state.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result),
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A) and a second variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32B),
The aforementioned special game state transition means is:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state in which the first variable ball entry unit is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information,
The system includes means for switching to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information,
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 33B) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 34) to which the variable mechanism is not attached, and these first and second starting ball entry sections are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The aforementioned predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (first special display unit 37a) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit, and a second notification means (second special display unit 37b) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is capable of executing a game rotation operation in the other while a game rotation operation is being performed in either the first notification means or the second notification means.
The game round control means includes an execution period determination means (a function that determines the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) which determines the execution period of the game round operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game round operation in the second notification means.
The execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the game cycle operation (a function that identifies the variable display time table referenced in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for each game state) is provided with a first determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the second probability variation state), and a second determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the first probability variation state).
The system includes means for switching the decision mode such that the decision mode becomes the first decision mode in the first and second game states, and the decision mode becomes the second decision mode in the third game state (a function that switches the variable display time table referenced by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 according to the game state),
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the means for controlling the first variable ball entry section is provided such that the game balls that flow into the first variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The means for controlling the first variable ball entry section such that, when the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the game balls that have entered the first variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the first variable ball entry section,
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the first special game state,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the second special game state,
The transition from the third game state to the first game state is configured to go through the second game state.
The system includes a display and animation execution means (a symbol display device 42, an animation control device 82, and a display control device 212) that executes a display animation in parallel with the aforementioned game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 42) having a display screen (display screen 42a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern groups (pattern rows) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern groups and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
When transitioning to the third game state by the first transition means, a first type symbol combination (first type symbol combination), which is a combination of first type symbols (odd-numbered symbols), is provided as the symbol combination to be displayed as the final stop on the display screen in the second game state.
When transitioning to the first game state by the second transition means, a second type of symbol combination (second type of symbol combination), which is a combination of second type of symbols (even-numbered symbols), is provided as the symbol combination to be displayed as the final stop on the display screen in the second game state.
The display screen includes a pattern group switching means that switches each of the pattern groups displayed on the display screen between a first pattern group (normal pattern row) consisting of the first type of pattern and the second type of pattern, and a second pattern group (special pattern row) consisting of the second type of pattern.
The game machine is characterized in that the pattern group switching means has means for making each pattern group that is variably displayed on the display screen in the third game state transitioned by the third transition means the second pattern group.

The transition between the first and third game states is primarily triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (first judgment result). However, in this feature, a transition in the game state can also occur when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (second judgment result). Specifically, if the second judgment result occurs during the second game state, the judgment mode does not change, but the switching control mode changes from the second switching mode to the first switching mode, and the game transitions to the third game state. Since the third game state is configured to transition to the first game state via the second game state, the possibility of the high probability mode ending is lower compared to the second game state (the expectation of looping the high probability mode increases). Here, when the transition to the third game state is triggered by the first judgment result, this is indicated by the combination of symbols displayed at the final stop, and when the transition to the third game state is triggered by the second judgment result, the group of symbols displayed on the display screen changes to the second group of symbols, indicating the transition to the third game state. Thus, by configuring the game so that multiple different suggestive functions are conveyed through the patterns, it is possible to suppress monotony in gameplay and effectively increase the level of attention the player receives.

Feature BQ8. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BQ1 to Feature BQ7, characterized in that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched into the predetermined channel by the game ball launching means in the second game state, and the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched into the predetermined channel by the game ball launching means in the third game state, are the same or substantially the same.

The second and third game states have the same or nearly the same ratio (so-called base) of the number of game balls dispensed to the number of game balls launched into the predetermined flow path. This configuration prevents the current game state from becoming obvious from the game ball dispensed (changes in the number of balls held). This is preferable because it prevents a decrease in the impact of changing the symbol group, for example, when the transition from the second to the third game state is noticed based on the second judgment result.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BQ2 to BQ8 above may also be applied to Feature BQ1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, and feature groups BA to BP, may also be applied to feature BQ1 to feature BQ8.

<Characteristic BR Group>
The following feature group BR was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BR1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result),
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a low-probability game state (low-probability game state) corresponding to the low-probability mode, and a high-probability game state (second probability variation state and third probability variation state) corresponding to the high-probability mode.
As the first determination result, there are multiple types of determination results with different loop counts for the high probability game state,
A history information display unit (history information display area HE) capable of displaying history information (pattern) indicating which of the multiple types of judgment results the first judgment result corresponds to when the first judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information,
The system includes a history display control means for controlling the display of the history information display unit,
In the aforementioned high-probability game state, if the judgment results in a second judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the number of loops increases.
The history display control means is
A shifting means for shifting past history information such that when the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the high probability game state, history information indicating that judgment result is added,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for changing the displayed past history information when the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the high probability game state.

If the history display unit is configured to show past history information, players can predict how many times the high-probability game state will loop based on this history information. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game. However, since the type of the first judgment result is explicitly shown as history information, there is a possibility that unfavorable history will continue to be displayed to the player. This can be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is configured so that the loop count increases when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (second judgment result) is obtained, and when the loop count increases due to the second judgment result, the displayed history information is changed. Even if an unfavorable history is displayed, there is room for modification of that history, which effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience.

The number of history entries displayed in the history information display section is arbitrary; it can be one or two or more.

Incidentally, "loop count" refers to the number of repetitions when, after obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (first judgment result), the game returns to the high-probability mode-corresponding game state (high-probability game state) via a special game state.

Feature BR2. The history information display unit is capable of displaying multiple pieces of history information.
The gaming machine according to feature BR1, characterized in that the modification means is configured to change the most recent history information among the past history information displayed when the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the high probability game state.

A configuration that displays multiple historical records can contribute to increased player satisfaction by providing more data to predict future trends. However, if the number of historical records displayed increases, the number of records that can be changed may also increase, raising concerns that the aforementioned change function could confuse players. In this regard, as shown in this feature, targeting only the most recent historical record among the displayed past records for modification effectively eliminates this concern.

Feature BR3. The gaming machine according to Feature BR1 or Feature BR2, characterized in that the historical information that has been modified by the modification means is displayed while maintaining its modified state, at least until the next determination by the determination means results in the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

The configuration described in this feature effectively suppresses the failure of the effects shown in feature BR1, etc., to be properly exhibited due to oversight or other reasons.

Feature BR4. The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with the first V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with the second V),
The aforementioned multiple types of determination results include a first result corresponding to the first information (a jackpot result with a first V) and a second result corresponding to the second information (a jackpot result with a second V),
The number of loops in the case of the first result (for example, 2 times) is configured to be a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 time) greater than the number of loops in the case of the second result (for example, 1 time).
In the aforementioned high-probability game state, if the determination results in the second determination information corresponding to the second determination result, the number of loops increases by the predetermined number of times.
The aforementioned history information includes first history information (odd-numbered symbols) that suggests the first result and second history information (even-numbered symbols) that suggests the second result.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BR1 to BR3, characterized in that the changing means has means for changing the previous history information from the second history information to the first history information when the second determination result is obtained while the second history information is displayed as the previous history information in the history information display unit.

With the configuration described in this feature, players can easily understand the benefits they will receive when a history change occurs. This allows the effects described in Feature BR1, etc., to be effectively realized.

Feature BR5. The game machine according to any one of Features BR1 to BR4, characterized in that the modification means is configured to modify the displayed past history information during the special game state to which the player transitions, triggered by the second determination result, when the second determination result corresponds to the second determination result during the high probability game state.

In a configuration where the second judgment result leads to a special game state and then a high-probability game state, changing the history information during the special game state can reduce the impression that the game progression is drawn out.

Feature BR6. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for controlling the variable ball entry section so that the game balls that flow into the variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the variable ball entry section,
The system includes means for controlling the variable ball entry section such that, when the determination results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the special game state, the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the variable ball entry section.
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game state,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result (special win result) corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the special game state,
The transition from the third game state to the first game state is configured to go through the second game state.
A history information display unit (history information display area HE) capable of displaying history information (pattern) indicating whether the first determination result corresponds to the first information or the second information when the first determination result corresponds to the first determination information,
The system includes a history display control means for controlling the display of the history information display unit,
The history display control means is
A shifting means for shifting past history information such that, when the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the second game state, history information indicating that judgment result is added,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for changing past history information when the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second game state.

If the history display unit is configured to show past history information, players can predict how many times the high-probability game state will loop based on this history information. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game. However, since the type of the first judgment result is explicitly shown as history information, there is a possibility that unfavorable history will continue to be displayed to the player. This can be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is configured so that the loop count increases when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (second judgment result) is obtained, and when the loop count increases due to the second judgment result, the displayed history information is changed. Even if an unfavorable history is displayed, there is room for modification of that history, which effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience.

The number of history entries displayed in the history information display section is arbitrary; it can be one or two or more.

Feature BR7. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned special game states include a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the first special game state.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A) and a second variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32B),
The aforementioned special game state transition means is:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state in which the first variable ball entry unit is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information,
The system includes means for switching to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information,
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 33B) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 34) to which the variable mechanism is not attached, and these first and second starting ball entry sections are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The aforementioned predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (first special display unit 37a) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit, and a second notification means (second special display unit 37b) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is capable of executing a game rotation operation in the other while a game rotation operation is being performed in one of the first notification means and the second notification means.
The game round control means includes an execution period determination means (a function that determines the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) which determines the execution period of the game round operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game round operation in the second notification means.
The execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the game cycle operation (a function that identifies the variable display time table referenced in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for each game state) is provided with a first determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the second probability variation state), and a second determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the first probability variation state).
The system includes means for switching the decision mode such that the decision mode becomes the first decision mode in the first and second game states, and the decision mode becomes the second decision mode in the third game state (a function that switches the variable display time table referenced by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 according to the game state),
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the means for controlling the first variable ball entry section is provided such that the game balls that flow into the first variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The means for controlling the first variable ball entry section when the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the first special game state, such that the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the first variable ball entry section,
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the first special game state,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in the second determination result (special win result) corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the second special game state.
The transition from the third game state to the first game state is configured to go through the second game state.
A history information display unit (history information display area HE) capable of displaying history information (pattern) indicating whether the first determination result corresponds to the first information or the second information when the first determination result corresponds to the first determination information,
The system includes a history display control means for controlling the display of the history information display unit,
The history display control means is
A shifting means for shifting past history information such that, when the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the second game state, history information indicating that judgment result is added,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for changing past history information when the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second game state.

If the history display unit is configured to show past history information, players can predict how many times the high-probability game state will loop based on this history information. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game. However, since the type of the first judgment result is explicitly shown as history information, there is a possibility that unfavorable history will continue to be displayed to the player. This can be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is configured so that the loop count increases when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (second judgment result) is obtained, and when the loop count increases due to the second judgment result, the displayed history information is changed. Even if an unfavorable history is displayed, there is room for modification of that history, which effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience.

The number of history entries displayed in the history information display section is arbitrary; it can be one or two or more.

Incidentally, "loop count" refers to the number of repetitions when, after obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (first judgment result), the game returns to the high-probability mode-corresponding game state (high-probability game state) via a special game state.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BQ may also be applied to feature groups BR1 to BR7.

<Features of the BS Group>
The following set of features BS is based on the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The features BS are based on the background technology described above, which states that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BS1. A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The control means for the variable ball entry section is configured such that, when the determination by the determination means results in a first determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state in the special game state is longer than when the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a low-probability game state (low-probability game state) corresponding to the low-probability mode, and a high-probability game state (second probability variation state and third probability variation state) corresponding to the high-probability mode.
A stock display unit (V-stock information display area SE) capable of displaying a stock suggestion image (V-stock icon) that indicates the number of remaining rounds that may result in the first judgment in the aforementioned high-probability game state,
The system includes stock display control means for controlling the display of the stock display unit,
In the aforementioned high-probability game state, if the judgment results in a second judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the remaining number of plays increases.
The stock display control means is characterized by having a special additional means that adds the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the high probability game state.

If the stock display unit is configured to show the remaining number of attempts that could result in the first judgment result, the player can predict how long the high-probability game state will continue (loop) from the stock indication image. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game. The remaining number of attempts decreases when the first judgment result is determined to have a relatively longer acceptance period for the variable ball entry unit, but increases when the second judgment result is determined to have a relatively shorter acceptance period for the variable ball entry unit. This is desirable for suppressing the delay between securing a stock and the display of the stock indication image.

Feature BS2. A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned special game states include a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the first special game state.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A) and a second variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32B),
The aforementioned special game state transition means is:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state in which the first variable ball entry unit is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information,
The system includes means for switching to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information,
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 33B) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 34) to which the variable mechanism is not attached, and these first and second starting ball entry sections are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The aforementioned predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (first special display unit 37a) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit, and a second notification means (second special display unit 37b) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is capable of executing a game rotation operation in the other while a game rotation operation is being performed in one of the first notification means and the second notification means.
The game round control means includes an execution period determination means (a function that determines the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) which determines the execution period of the game round operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game round operation in the second notification means.
The execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the game cycle operation (a function that identifies the variable display time table referenced in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for each game state) is provided with a first determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the second probability variation state), and a second determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the first probability variation state).
The system includes means for switching the decision mode such that the decision mode becomes the first decision mode in the first and second game states, and the decision mode becomes the second decision mode in the third game state (a function that switches the variable display time table referenced by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 according to the game state),
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the means for controlling the first variable ball entry section is provided such that the game balls that flow into the first variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The means for controlling the first variable ball entry section when the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the first special game state, such that the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the first variable ball entry section,
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the first special game state,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in the second determination result (special win result) corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the second special game state.
The transition from the third game state to the first game state is configured to go through the second game state.
A stock display unit (V-stock information display area SE) capable of displaying a stock suggestion image (V-stock icon) that indicates the number of remaining rounds that can result in the first judgment result in the predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the high probability mode,
The system includes stock display control means for controlling the display of the stock display unit,
The stock display control means is characterized by having a special additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second game state.

If the stock display unit is configured to show the remaining number of attempts that could result in the first judgment result, the player can predict how long the high-probability game state will continue (loop) from the stock indication image. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game. The remaining number of attempts decreases when the first judgment result is determined to have a relatively longer acceptance period for the variable ball entry unit, but increases when the game transitions to the third game state when the second judgment result is determined to have a relatively shorter acceptance period for the variable ball entry unit. This is desirable for suppressing the delay between securing a stock and the display of the stock indication image.

Feature BS3. A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned special game states include a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the first special game state.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result),
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A) and a second variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32B),
The aforementioned special game state transition means is:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state in which the first variable ball entry unit is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information,
The system includes means for switching to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information,
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 33B) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 34) to which the variable mechanism is not attached, and these first and second starting ball entry sections are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The aforementioned predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (first special display unit 37a) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit, and a second notification means (second special display unit 37b) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is capable of executing a game rotation operation in the other while a game rotation operation is being performed in one of the first notification means and the second notification means.
The game round control means includes an execution period determination means (a function that determines the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) which determines the execution period of the game round operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game round operation in the second notification means.
The execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the game cycle operation (a function that identifies the variable display time table referenced in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for each game state) is provided with a first determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the second probability variation state), and a second determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the first probability variation state).
The system includes means for switching the decision mode such that the decision mode becomes the first decision mode in the first and second game states, and the decision mode becomes the second decision mode in the third game state (a function that switches the variable display time table referenced by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 according to the game state),
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the means for controlling the first variable ball entry section is provided such that the game balls that flow into the first variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The means for controlling the first variable ball entry section when the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the first special game state, such that the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the first variable ball entry section,
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, if the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the first special game state.
The second determination result is a determination result in which the determination mode is kept the same before and after the transition to the second special game state triggered by the second determination result, and the switching control mode after the end of the second special game state is set to the first switching mode.
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the second special game state.
The transition from the third game state to the first game state is configured to go through the second game state.
A stock display unit (V-stock information display area SE) capable of displaying a stock suggestion image (V-stock icon) that indicates the number of remaining rounds that can result in the first judgment result in the predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the high probability mode,
The system includes stock display control means for controlling the display of the stock display unit,
The stock display control means is characterized by having a special additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

If the stock display unit is configured to show the remaining number of attempts that could result in the first judgment result, the player can predict how long the high-probability game state will continue (loop) from the stock indication image. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and increasing attention to the game. The remaining number of attempts decreases when the first judgment result is determined to have a relatively longer acceptance period for the variable ball entry unit, but increases when the game transitions to the third game state when the second judgment result is determined to have a relatively shorter acceptance period for the variable ball entry unit. This is desirable for suppressing the delay between securing a stock and the display of the stock indication image.

Furthermore, the description in this feature, "The stock display control means has a special additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information," can also be changed to, "The stock display control means has a normal additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, and a special additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information." It is also possible to change this to, "The stock display control means has a first additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, and a second additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information."

Feature BS4. The gaming machine according to Feature BS2 or Feature BS3, characterized in that, when the stock display control means adds the stock suggestion image by the special addition means, it hides other stock suggestion images displayed on the stock display unit before the addition, and adds a number of stock suggestion images equal to the sum of the remaining number of times to be added and the number of other stock suggestion images that were hidden.

The configuration described in this feature allows for a desirable enhancement of the impact when adding stock suggestion images.

Feature BS5. The stock display control means has a normal additional means for adding the stock suggestion image to the stock display unit when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the first information.
The stock suggestion image added by the special addition means is the same as the stock suggestion image added by the normal addition means.
A gaming machine according to any one of features BS2 to BS4, characterized in that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched into the predetermined channel by the game ball launching means in the second gaming state and the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched into the predetermined channel by the game ball launching means in the third gaming state are the same or substantially the same.

Regardless of the circumstances under which the stock suggestion images are added, the ratio of game balls dispensed to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base) remains unchanged. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress any differences in quality between stock suggestion images due to changes in this base.

Feature BS6. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BS2 to Feature BS5, characterized in that the special additional means is configured to add the stock suggestion image before transitioning to the third game state when the transition to the third game state is triggered by the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

By adding stock indication images before transitioning to the third game state, and preventing the third game state from starting with insufficient stock indication images, it is possible to suppress any sense of incongruity regarding the display of stock indication images.

Feature BS7. When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, the system is equipped with display and performance execution means (symbol display device 42, performance control device 82, display control device 212) that executes display and performance in parallel with the game rotation operation,
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 42) having a display screen (display screen 42a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern groups (pattern rows) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern groups and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is capable of displaying the last stopped symbol combination even in the second special game state, which is transitioned to as a result of the second determination in the second game state, when the second determination result is obtained.
The gaming machine according to feature BS6, characterized in that the special additional means is configured to add the stock suggestion image during the second special game state.

The configuration described in this feature makes it possible to suppress the noticeable change in the game state when a stock suggestion image is added based on the second judgment result. This is preferable for concealing internal state changes and making it appear as if the stock has suddenly increased during the progression of gameplay.

Feature BS8. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BS2 to Feature BS5, characterized in that the special additional means has means for adding the stock suggestion image after transitioning to the third gaming state, triggered by the second judgment result in the judgment in the second gaming state.

In the configuration described in this feature, a stock indication image is suddenly added after transitioning to the third game state. Because this addition is less subject to constraints such as special game states, it effectively suppresses any sense of incongruity in the behavior when the stock indication image is added.

Feature BS9. The gaming machine according to Feature BS8, characterized in that the special additional means, when the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second game state, starts a timing indication display (timer display) that indicates the timing for adding the stock indication image, and continues the timing indication display until the additional stock indication image animation is started.

When stock suggestion images are added with a delay, as shown in this feature, the timing indication display (such as a timer display) that indicates the timing of the addition can be continued until the stock suggestion image addition animation begins, thereby effectively preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.

Feature BS10. The acquired information storage means is
A first acquisition information storage means capable of storing the special information relating to the first starting ball entry unit,
It has a second acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information relating to the second starting ball entry unit,
The system includes a pre-identification means for determining whether the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means corresponds to the first determination information before the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination,
The gaming machine according to feature BS8 or feature BS9, characterized in that the special additional means is configured to determine the timing of adding the stock suggestion image so as to add the stock suggestion image before the game round corresponding to the first determination information is executed, based on the result of the prior identification means.

The game progresses primarily around the rounds related to the second ball entry point, triggered by the transition to the third game state based on the second judgment result. Here, by checking whether the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means contains information that corresponds to the first judgment result, and determining the timing of adding the stock suggestion image based on that result, it is possible to prevent the first judgment result from occurring before the stock suggestion image is added, thus preventing difficulty in identifying the trigger for adding the stock suggestion image.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, and feature groups BA to BR, may also be applied to feature groups BS1 to BS10.

<Characteristic BT Group>
The following set of features BT is based on the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The features BT are based on the background technology described above, which states that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BT1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a low-probability game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and a high-probability game state corresponding to the high-probability mode.
The aforementioned high-probability game states include a first high-probability game state (second probability variation state) and a second high-probability game state (first probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first high-probability game state.
The transition from the second high-probability game state to the low-probability game state is configured to pass through the first high-probability game state.
The first determination information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a first V related to the first operating port 33) and second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without a V related to the first operating port 33),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for controlling the variable ball entry section so that the game balls that flow into the variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the variable ball entry section,
The system includes means for controlling the variable ball entry section such that, when the determination results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the special game state, the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the variable ball entry section.
A first transition means that, when the determination in the first high-probability game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the second high-probability game state after the end of the special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, if the determination in the first high-probability game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the low-probability game state after the end of the special game state.
The second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is a determination result that makes the determination mode the same before and after the transition to the special game state triggered by the second determination result.
The system is equipped with a special transition means that, when the determination in the first high-probability game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the second high-probability game state after the end of the special game state.
In the special game state transitioned by the special transition means, the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the special game state transitioned by the first transition means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the determination in the first high-probability game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, a special performance (V-stock acquisition performance) is performed that indicates the remaining number of times the determination mode can result in the first determination result in the predetermined game state where the determination mode is the high-probability mode, and a special performance execution means is provided that performs the same special performance as the special performance when the determination in the first high-probability game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

In the configuration described above, transitioning from the first high-probability game state to the second high-probability game state provides at least one grace period before transitioning to the low-probability game state. Here, there are two routes for transitioning to the second high-probability game state: a first route where a judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained during the first high-probability game state and the game ball is entered into a predetermined location in the variable ball entry section; and a second route where a second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the first probability variation game state. If the first route is taken, a special effect is performed after transitioning to the second high-probability game state that indicates the remaining number of times the first judgment result can be obtained. This effectively increases the player's motivation to play, as they anticipate not only the payout in the current special game state but also future payouts. Here, in the second route, it is not necessary for the game ball to pass through a predetermined location in the variable ball entry section, and the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is also shortened. When using the second route, the same special effects as in the first route are executed, thereby mitigating the decrease in player satisfaction due to the lower payout while also diversifying the transition routes.

Feature BT2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned special game states include a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the first special game state.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A) and a second variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32B),
The aforementioned special game state transition means is:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state in which the first variable ball entry unit is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information,
The system includes means for switching to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information,
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 33B) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 34) to which the variable mechanism is not attached, and these first and second starting ball entry sections are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The aforementioned predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (first special display unit 37a) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit, and a second notification means (second special display unit 37b) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is capable of executing a game rotation operation in the other while a game rotation operation is being performed in one of the first notification means and the second notification means.
The game round control means includes an execution period determination means (a function that determines the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) which determines the execution period of the game round operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game round operation in the second notification means.
The execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the game cycle operation (a function that identifies the variable display time table referenced in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for each game state) is provided with a first determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the second probability variation state), and a second determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the first probability variation state).
The system includes means for switching the decision mode such that the decision mode becomes the first decision mode in the first and second game states, and the decision mode becomes the second decision mode in the third game state (a function that switches the variable display time table referenced by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 according to the game state),
The first determination information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes: first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a first V related to the first operating port 33), second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without a V related to the first operating port 33), third information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a first V related to the second operating port 34), and fourth information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a second V related to the second operating port 33).
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to any of the first information, the third information, or the fourth information, and the game transitions to the first special game state, the means for controlling the first variable ball entry section is to cause the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry section to pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The system includes means for controlling the first variable ball entry section such that, when the determination results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the system transitions to the first special game state, the game balls that have entered the first variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the first variable ball entry section.
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the first special game state,
A third transition means that, when the determination in the third game state results in a determination result corresponding to the third information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state,
The system includes a fourth transition means that, when the determination in the third game state results in a determination corresponding to the fourth information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the second game state after the end of the first special game state.
When transitioning from the third game state to the first game state, the system is configured to pass through the second game state.
The second determination result is a determination result in which the determination mode is kept the same before and after the transition to the second special game state triggered by the second determination result, and the switching control mode after the end of the second special game state is set to the first switching mode.
The system includes a special transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the second special game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the determination in the third game state results in a determination result corresponding to the third information, a special performance (V-stock acquisition performance) is performed that indicates the remaining number of times the determination mode can result in the first determination result in the predetermined game state where the determination mode is the high probability mode, and a special performance execution means is provided that performs the same special performance as the special performance when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

In the configuration described in this feature, transitioning from the second game state to the third game state provides at least one grace period before transitioning back to the first game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode. By unifying the special effects executed when looping through the third game state with those executed when upgrading from the second to the third game state, it is possible to enhance the contrast of gameplay by differentiating the advantages between the second and third game states, while maintaining a sense of visual consistency across all game states corresponding to the high probability mode. This is desirable because it suppresses interruptions in the flow of effects and enhances the sense of exhilaration during high probability mode.

Feature BT3. The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a first V related to the first operating port 33), the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without a V related to the first operating port 33), the third information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a first V related to the second operating port 34), the fourth information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a second V related to the second operating port 33), and the fifth information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with a first V related to the first operating port 33).
The control means for the variable ball entry section includes means for controlling the first variable ball entry section so that, when the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the fifth information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry section pass through the predetermined location (V prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The system includes means for transitioning to the third game state after the end of the first special game state, when the determination in the first game state results in a determination corresponding to the fifth information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location.
The gaming machine according to feature BT2, characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to execute the same special performance as the special performance when the determination in the first game state results in a determination corresponding to the fifth information.

As shown in this feature, even when transitioning from the first game state to the third game state, executing the same special effects as when the high probability mode is looping allows the effects shown in feature BT2 to be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature BT4. The remaining number of spins indicated by the special effect is configured to continue to be displayed even after the completion of the special effect.
The gaming machine according to feature BT2 or feature BT3, characterized in that the special performance execution means has means for concealing the remaining number of times when the special performance is executed.

The difference between the remaining number of turns indicated during the special effect and the remaining number of turns indicated by the special effect may differ depending on what triggers the special effect. Therefore, by hiding the currently displayed remaining number of turns when the special effect is executed, and then indicating the remaining number of turns again, it becomes possible to completely standardize the special effect.

Feature BT5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features BT2 to BT4, characterized in that the special performance execution means executes the special performance during the first special game state triggered by the judgment result in the third game state if the judgment result in the third game state corresponds to the second judgment result in the second judgment information, and executes the special performance during the second special game state triggered by the second judgment result in the second game state.

By configuring all special effects to be executed during special gameplay states, it is possible to effectively avoid constraints arising between common special effects and effects specific to each game round.

Feature BT6. The predetermined judgment information includes the first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result), the second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to special win result B), and the third judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to special win result A).
The system includes means for transitioning to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a third determination result (special winning result A) corresponding to the third determination information,
The aforementioned special performance is the first special performance, and the aforementioned special performance execution means is the first special performance execution means.
A gaming machine according to any one of features BT2 to BT5, characterized in that, when the determination in the third gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the fourth information, a second special performance (V stock acquisition performance) is performed that indicates the remaining number of times the first determination result can be obtained in the predetermined gaming state where the determination mode becomes the high probability mode, and a second special performance execution means is provided that performs the same special performance as the second special performance when the determination in the second gaming state results in the third determination result corresponding to the third determination information.

If a judgment result corresponding to the fourth piece of information is obtained during the third game state (i.e., a predetermined location is passed), the game transitions to the second game state. In this case, the remaining number of turns effectively decreases. On the other hand, if a judgment result corresponding to the third piece of information is obtained during the second game state, the game remains in the second game state, and the remaining number of turns effectively carries over. In other words, the remaining number of turns is the same for these two patterns. Therefore, by configuring the game to execute a common second special effect in these two patterns, the consistency of the effects during loops can be increased.

Feature BT7. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned special game states include a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the first special game state.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A) and a second variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32B),
The aforementioned special game state transition means is:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state in which the first variable ball entry unit is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information,
The system includes means for switching to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information,
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a first game state (low probability game state) corresponding to the low probability mode, a second game state (second probability change state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (first probability change state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 33B) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 34) to which the variable mechanism is not attached, and these first and second starting ball entry sections are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The aforementioned predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (first special display unit 37a) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit, and a second notification means (second special display unit 37b) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is capable of executing a game rotation operation in the other while a game rotation operation is being performed in one of the first notification means and the second notification means.
The game round control means includes an execution period determination means (a function that determines the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) which determines the execution period of the game round operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game round operation in the second notification means.
The execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the game cycle operation (a function that identifies the variable display time table referenced in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for each game state) is provided with a first determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the second probability variation state), and a second determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the first probability variation state).
The system includes means for switching the decision mode such that the decision mode becomes the first decision mode in the first and second game states, and the decision mode becomes the second decision mode in the third game state (a function that switches the variable display time table referenced by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 according to the game state),
The first determination information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with the first V related to the first operating port 33), the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V related to the first operating port 33), and the third information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with the first V related to the first operating port 33).
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to either the first information or the third information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the means for controlling the first variable ball entry section is such that the game balls that flow into the first variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The means for controlling the first variable ball entry section when the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the first special game state, such that the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the first variable ball entry section,
A first transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the first game state after the end of the first special game state,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the first game state results in a determination corresponding to the third information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the third game state after the end of the first special game state.
When transitioning from the third game state to the first game state, the system is configured to pass through the second game state.
The second determination result is a determination result in which the determination mode is kept the same before and after the transition to the second special game state triggered by the second determination result, and the switching control mode after the end of the second special game state is set to the first switching mode.
The system includes a special transition means that, when the determination in the second game state results in the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the third game state via the second special game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the determination in the first game state results in a determination result corresponding to the third information, a special performance (V-stock acquisition performance) is performed that suggests the remaining number of times the first determination result can be obtained in the predetermined game state where the determination mode is the high probability mode, and a special performance execution means is provided that performs the same special performance as the special performance when the determination in the second game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

In the configuration described in this feature, the transition from the first game state to the third game state serves as the entry point to the high-probability mode loop. If the same special animation is executed when the judgment result corresponding to the third information occurs during the first game state, and when the second judgment result occurs during the second game state, then a sense of visual consistency can be maintained throughout the entire high-probability mode game state. This is desirable because it suppresses interruptions in the flow of animation and enhances the sense of exhilaration during the high-probability mode.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, and feature groups BA to BS, may also be applied to feature groups BT1 to BT7.

<Features of the BU Group>
The following set of features BUs were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature BU1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a low-probability game state (low-probability game state) corresponding to the low-probability mode, and a high-probability game state (second probability variation state and third probability variation state) corresponding to the high-probability mode.
The second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is a determination result in which the determination mode is the same before and after the transition to the special game state triggered by the second determination result.
A special effect execution means that, when the game is in the high probability game state, executes a special effect that suggests a downgrade from the high probability game state to the low probability game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a regulating means for regulating the special performance in the high-probability gaming state after the special gaming state triggered by the second regulating means when the judgment in the high-probability gaming state results in a second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

During high-probability gameplay, special effects are executed that suggest a potential downgrade from high-probability to low-probability gameplay, thereby increasing the tension of the game during high-probability gameplay. This is advantageous in preventing monotony when high-probability gameplay continues for extended periods, such as through loops. In this configuration, if the second judgment result, which does not affect the judgment mode, is obtained, the special effects are restricted. By restricting the special effects and creating a section without any buildup of excitement, the excessive tension mentioned above can be suppressed. This is desirable in reducing player fatigue and increasing player engagement with the game.

Feature BU2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a low-probability game state (low-probability game state) corresponding to the low-probability mode, and a high-probability game state (second probability variation state and third probability variation state) corresponding to the high-probability mode.
The aforementioned high-probability game states include a first high-probability state (first probability variation state) in which it is relatively difficult to transition to the low-probability game state, and a second high-probability state (second probability variation state) in which it is relatively easy to transition to the low-probability game state.
The second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is a determination result in which the determination mode is the same before and after the transition to the special game state triggered by the second determination result.
A means for upgrading to the first high probability state after the special game state ends, when the determination in the second high probability state results in the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information,
A means for returning to the first high probability state after the special game state ends, when the determination in the first high probability state results in the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information,
A special effect execution means that, when the game is in the high probability game state, executes a special effect that suggests a downgrade from the high probability game state to the low probability game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a regulating means for restricting the special performance when the judgment in the high-probability game state results in a second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

During high-probability gameplay, special effects are executed that suggest a potential downgrade from high-probability to low-probability gameplay, thereby increasing the tension of the game during high-probability gameplay. This is advantageous in preventing monotony when high-probability gameplay continues for extended periods, such as through loops. In this configuration, if the second judgment result, which does not affect the judgment mode, is obtained, the special effects are restricted. By restricting the special effects and creating a section without any buildup of excitement, the excessive tension mentioned above can be suppressed. This is desirable in reducing player fatigue and increasing player engagement with the game.

Feature BU3. The gaming machine according to Feature BU1 or Feature BU2, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to regulate the special effects until the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

If the second judgment result is obtained, the game returns from the second high-probability state to the first high-probability state, thus reducing the likelihood of transitioning to the low-probability game state. Furthermore, once the game returns to the first high-probability state, it remains in that state until the first judgment result is obtained again. Therefore, the restriction of special effects can be maintained until the next first judgment result is obtained, resulting in a practically desirable configuration.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature may also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature BU1 or feature BU2, characterized by having means for releasing the restriction of the special performance by the restricting means when the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information."

Feature BU4. The special effect execution means has an execution period setting means for setting the execution period of the special effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BU1 to BU3, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to restrict the start of the special performance again after the execution period of the special performance has elapsed, if the judgment results in a second judgment corresponding to the second judgment information during the execution of the special performance.

As shown in this feature, by having the system wait for special effects that have already started to complete, it is possible to avoid giving the impression that the special effects have ended abruptly.

Feature BU5. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BU1 to Feature BU4, characterized in that the regulating means includes means for delaying the start timing of the regulation so that the regulation begins in a game round executed after the game round in which the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information was obtained in the determination.

If it becomes possible to delay the regulation of special effects, the timing of the regulation's commencement can be effectively suppressed from being revealed in advance. Even if special effects are not internally regulated but occur coincidentally for an extended period, the possibility of regulation still exists, thus effectively increasing player attention during periods when special effects are not occurring.

Feature BU6. A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 331) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power support processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The aforementioned special game states include a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state is shorter than in the first special game state.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A) and a second variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32B),
The aforementioned special game state transition means is:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state in which the first variable ball entry unit is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information,
The system includes means for switching to the second special game state, which is the target of switching, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information,
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism remains in the acceptance state for a longer period than in the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a low-probability game state (low-probability game state) corresponding to the low-probability mode, and a high-probability game state (probability variation game state) corresponding to the high-probability mode.
The aforementioned high-probability game state includes a first game state (second probability variation state) which corresponds to the second switching mode and the high-probability mode and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a second game state (first probability variation state) which corresponds to the first switching mode and the high-probability mode and is more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 33B) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 34) to which the variable mechanism is not attached, and these first and second starting ball entry sections are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The aforementioned predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (first special display unit 37a) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit, and a second notification means (second special display unit 37b) that performs a game rotation operation based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is capable of executing a game rotation operation in the other while a game rotation operation is being performed in one of the first notification means and the second notification means.
The game round control means includes an execution period determination means (a function that determines the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) which determines the execution period of the game round operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game round operation in the second notification means.
The execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the game cycle operation (a function that identifies the variable display time table referenced in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for each game state) is provided with a first determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the second probability variation state), and a second determination mode that determines the execution period such that the execution period of the game cycle operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game cycle operation in the second notification means (for example, a function that references the variable display time table corresponding to the first probability variation state).
The system includes means for switching the decision mode such that the decision mode becomes the first decision mode in the low probability game state and the first game state, and the decision mode becomes the second decision mode in the second game state (a function that switches the variable display time table referenced by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 according to the game state),
The first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) includes the first information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result with V) and the second information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result without V),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination results in a determination corresponding to the first information and the game transitions to the first special game state, the means for controlling the first variable ball entry section is provided such that the game balls that flow into the first variable ball entry section pass through a predetermined location (V-prize area 356) in the first variable ball entry section.
The means for controlling the first variable ball entry section when the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the game transitions to the first special game state, such that the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry section cannot or have difficulty passing through the predetermined location in the first variable ball entry section,
A first transition means that, when the determination in the first game state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, transitions to the second game state after the end of the first special game state,
The system includes a second transition means that, if the determination in the first game state results in a determination corresponding to the second information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, transitions to the low probability game state after the end of the first special game state.
When transitioning from the second game state to the low probability game state, the system is configured to pass through the first game state.
The second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is a determination result in which the determination mode is the same before and after the transition to the second special game state triggered by the second determination result,
The system includes a third transition means that, when the determination in the first game state results in the second determination result (special win result) corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the second game state via the second special game state.
A special effect execution means that, when in the high probability game state, executes a special effect that suggests a downgrade to the low probability game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a regulating means for restricting the special performance when the judgment in the high-probability game state results in a second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

During high-probability gameplay, special effects are executed that suggest a potential downgrade from high-probability to low-probability gameplay, thereby increasing the tension of the game during high-probability gameplay. This is advantageous in preventing monotony when high-probability gameplay continues for extended periods, such as through loops. In this configuration, if the second judgment result, which does not affect the judgment mode, is obtained, the special effects are restricted. By restricting the special effects and creating a section without any buildup of excitement, the excessive tension mentioned above can be suppressed. This is desirable in reducing player fatigue and increasing player engagement with the game.

Feature BU7. A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 76) that dispenses game balls based on balls entering ball entry sections (operating openings 33, 34 and variable prize entry devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 32A, 32B) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the special figure display units 37a and 37b) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) controls a predetermined notification means (special figure display units 37a and 37b) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (low probability game state or probability variation game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 32A, 32B) is a ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special jackpot result).
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined game states include a low-probability game state (low-probability game state) corresponding to the low-probability mode, and a high-probability game state (second probability variation state and third probability variation state) corresponding to the high-probability mode.
The second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is a determination result in which the determination mode is the same before and after the transition to the special game state triggered by the second determination result.
A special effect execution means that, when the game is in the high-probability game state, executes a special effect that suggests a downgrade from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: an termination means for terminating a special performance when, in the judgment in the high-probability game state, the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained and the special performance is in progress.

During high-probability gameplay, a special animation is executed that suggests a potential downgrade from high-probability to low-probability gameplay, thereby increasing the tension of the game during high-probability gameplay. This is advantageous in preventing monotony when high-probability gameplay continues for a long period, such as through loops. In this configuration, if the second judgment result, which does not affect the judgment mode, is obtained, the special animation will end (be canceled) midway. Ending the special animation increases the expectation that the loop will continue. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature BU8. When the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed, the system is equipped with display and animation execution means (symbol display device 42, animation control device 82, display control device 212) that executes display and animation in parallel with the game rotation operation,
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 42) having a display screen (display screen 42a) and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The display control means includes a means for the predetermined notification means to display the symbol combination in advance as the final stop while the game rotation operation is being performed, when the determination in the high probability game state results in a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.
The gaming machine according to feature BU8, characterized in that the termination means is configured to initiate an termination indication演出 that terminates the special effect when the combination of patterns has been displayed in the final stop state.

As mentioned above, it is assumed that ending a special effect midway through will increase the player's attention to the game. This effect can be further enhanced by executing an ending indication that suggests the special effect is ending. If the ending indication is executed during the final stopping display of the symbol combination, the player's attention can be effectively increased even during rounds with losing results. This execution period can be effectively secured by advancing the timing of the final stopping of the symbol combination.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BT may also be applied to feature groups BU1 to BU8.

<Features of the BV Group>
The following set of features BV is based on the background technology described above, which states that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a symbol display device that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this symbol display device to notify the results of a lottery based on the ball entering the ball entry section. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that aim to increase attention to the game by providing, for example, an effect means having a movable body around the display screen and establishing a predetermined correspondence between the effect of changing symbols and the effect of the effect means (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and is based on the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature BV1. A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) that can move from a standby position to a performance position,
A drive mechanism (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that performs a special performance (combination) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the forward journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the standby position to the performance position, the movement of the first movable body is started before that of the second movable body, while in the return journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the performance position to the standby position, the movement of the second movable body is started before that of the first movable body.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combined effects), that is, by combining separate pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while minimizing the constraints on placement and other related aspects, and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects.

In the configuration described in this feature, the first movable body starts moving before the second movable body on the outward journey, while on the return journey, the second movable body starts moving before the first movable body. This configuration makes it easy to increase the movement distance of the first movable body on the outward journey, allowing the performance position to be biased towards the second movable body. In other words, by moving the movable body (first movable body) significantly, the impact of the special performance can be enhanced. Furthermore, on the return journey, the second movable body can be quickly returned to its standby position, making the movement of the first movable body more prominent. This makes it easy to incorporate, for example, a performance by the first movable body into the return journey. Thus, the configuration described in this feature promotes further enhancement of the performance function and can effectively contribute to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature BV2. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) are movable from a standby position to a performance position that overlaps with the display screen from the front,
A drive mechanism (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A special performance execution means that performs a special performance (combination) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
The system includes a coordinated performance execution means that, when the special performance ends and the first movable body and the second movable body are returned from the performance position to the standby position, displays a predetermined image on the display screen and executes a coordinated performance involving the first movable body moving toward the standby position and the predetermined image,
The directions of movement of the first movable body and the second movable body are defined such that they move toward and away from each other.
The aforementioned performance position is biased toward the standby position of the second movable body, among the standby positions of the first movable body and the second movable body.
The special performance execution means is configured such that, in the forward journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the standby position to the performance position, the movement of the first movable body starts before that of the second movable body.
The aforementioned coordinated performance execution means is configured such that, in the return journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the performance position to the standby position, the movement of the second movable body is started before that of the first movable body.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combined effects), that is, by combining separate pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while minimizing the constraints on placement and other related aspects, and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects.

In the configuration described in this feature, the performance position is particularly biased towards the standby position of the second movable body. In other words, the distance traveled to the performance position is greater for the second movable body than for the first. By moving the movable body (second movable body) more significantly, the impact of the special performance can be enhanced. Here, by setting the start timing of the first movable body's movement to precede the start timing of the second movable body's movement, the effect of the bias in movement distance can be suppressed. In other words, the visual deterioration of the above-mentioned combination performance can be suppressed.

During the return journey after the special performance, a coordinated performance is executed using the first movable body and a display screen (a predetermined image). By setting the start timing of the second movable body's operation to precede that of the first movable body, a rapid return of the second movable body to its standby position can be achieved. This effectively prevents the second movable body from obstructing the view of the first movable body or the predetermined image.

In this way, by carefully devising the timing of the start of each movable part's movement when transitioning from a special effect to a linked effect, the effect of increasing the player's attention to the game can be more effectively achieved.

Feature BV3. The gaming machine according to Feature BV2, characterized in that the difference in the timing of the start of operation between the first movable body and the second movable body in the forward stroke is smaller than the difference in the timing of the start of operation between the first movable body and the second movable body in the return stroke.

When executing special effects, a significant delay in the timing of each movable part reaching its performance position is a concern as it would greatly detract from the visual appeal of the special effects. In contrast, it is preferable to ensure a certain amount of time on the return journey to allow the second movable part to complete its retraction before executing the aforementioned coordinated effects. Therefore, as shown in this feature, there is technical significance in relatively reducing the timing delay on the outward journey and relatively increasing the timing delay on the return journey.

Feature BV4. The gaming machine according to Feature BV2 or Feature BV3, characterized in that the timing difference between the start of operation of the first movable body and the second movable body during the return journey is such that the return of the second movable body to the standby position is completed before the movement of the first movable body to the standby position begins.

According to Feature BV4, on the return journey, by completing the return to the standby position of the second movable body before the movement of the first movable body, which is the main component of the performance, begins, the effects shown in Feature BV2 can be effectively achieved.

Feature BV5. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature BV2 to Feature BV4, characterized in that the timing difference between the start of movement of the first movable body and the second movable body during the forward journey is such that the movement of the second movable body toward the performance position begins while the first movable body is moving toward the performance position.

During the outward journey, the movement of the second movable unit begins while the first movable unit is still moving, allowing the special effects to proceed quickly.

Feature BV6. A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) that can move from a standby position to a performance position,
A drive mechanism (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that performs a special performance (combination) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
In the forward journey, when the first movable body and the second movable body move from the standby position to the performance position, the movement speed of the first movable body is higher than that of the second movable body, and in the return journey, when the first movable body and the second movable body move from the performance position to the standby position, the movement speed of the first movable body is lower than that of the second movable body.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to cause the movement of the first movable body to start before the movement of the second movable body during the outward journey, while causing the movement of the second movable body to start before the movement of the first movable body during the return journey.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combined effects), that is, by combining subdivided pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while minimizing the constraints on placement and other related aspects, and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects.

In this configuration, during the outward journey, the start of movement of the first movable body, which has a relatively higher speed, occurs earlier than that of the second movable body, which has a relatively lower speed. Conversely, during the return journey after the special effect, the start of movement of the first movable body, which has a relatively lower speed, occurs later than that of the second movable body, which has a relatively higher speed. This configuration significantly alters the relationship between the two movable bodies during the outward and return journeys, preventing the movement of the movable bodies from becoming monotonous.

In particular, on the outward journey, a configuration that shifts the performance position towards the second movable body can be easily realized by significantly increasing the travel distance of the first movable body. In other words, the constraints on the performance position can be alleviated. Furthermore, on the return journey, while quickly returning the second movable body to its standby position, it becomes possible to create new performances utilizing the movement of the first movable body, which has traveled a longer distance. In this case, since the movement speed of the first movable body is reduced, the execution period for the new performance can be secured, thereby increasing the flexibility of the performance. For these reasons, the configuration described in this feature can effectively contribute to increasing the attention given to the game.

Feature BV7. The first movable body and the second movable body are defined to move toward and away from each other in their respective directions of movement.
The gaming machine according to feature BV6, characterized in that the performance position is biased toward the standby position of the second movable body, between the standby position of the first movable body and the standby position of the second movable body.

As shown in this feature, if the performance position can be shifted toward the standby position of the second movable body, it becomes possible to perform special effects (combined effects) by the first and second movable bodies in a novel and unprecedented position. Applying the technical concept shown in feature BV6 to such a configuration will enable a practically desirable setup.

Feature BV8. The first movable body and the second movable body are configured to reach the performance position at the same time.
The gaming machine according to feature BV6 or feature BV7, characterized in that the second movable body is larger than the first movable body.

When the first and second movable bodies are positioned at the performance location during a special effect, their ability to stop precisely at a fixed position improves the visual appeal. In this configuration, the first movable body, which has a relatively high forward movement speed, is made relatively small (compact), while the second movable body, which has a relatively low movement speed, is made relatively large (large). This suppresses bouncing from the performance location and contributes to the improved visual appeal.

Feature BV9. The posture of the first movable body in the performance position is different from the posture of the first movable body in the standby position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BV6 to BV8, characterized in that the first movable body is configured to change to the posture of the first movable body in the standby position immediately after starting to move from the standby position toward the performance position, and moves toward the performance position while maintaining that posture.

For the first movable body, which moves at a relatively high speed on the outward journey, even if the posture change is completed in advance, it can be less likely to catch the player's eye compared to the second movable body, which moves at a relatively low speed. This is desirable for enhancing the impact of special effects caused by changes in posture.

Feature BV10. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BV6 to Feature BV9, characterized in that when the special performance ends and the first movable body and the second movable body are returned from the performance position to the standby position, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen, and means are provided to perform a coordinated performance between the first movable body moving toward the standby position and the predetermined image during the return journey.

As shown in this feature, during the return journey, a coordinated performance is performed between the first movable body, which returns to its standby position, and the display screen (a predetermined image), thereby suppressing a decrease in attention to the game at the end of the special performance. Here, when this coordinated performance is performed, the second movable body, which is not part of the coordinated performance, quickly returns to its standby position, thus effectively preventing the second movable body from obstructing the above-mentioned coordination (especially the viewing of the predetermined image).

Feature BV11. In the forward journey, while the first movable body is moving toward the performance position, the movement of the second movable body toward the performance position begins.
The gaming machine according to feature BV10, characterized in that, in the return journey, the first movable body starts moving toward the standby position of the first movable body after the second movable body has returned to its standby position.

During the outward journey, the configuration allows the movement of the second movable body to begin while the first movable body is moving, enabling the special effects to proceed quickly. Conversely, during the return journey, the effect described in feature BV10 can be effectively achieved by ensuring that the second movable body returns to its standby position before the first movable body, which is the main component of the effects, begins moving.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature may also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature BV10, characterized in that the difference in the timing of the start of movement between the first movable body and the second movable body in the return journey is set to be greater than the difference in the timing of the start of movement between the first movable body and the second movable body in the forward journey."

Feature BV12. A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) that can move from a standby position to a performance position,
A drive mechanism (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that performs a special performance (combination) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
The movement speed of the first movable body is defined as a first movement speed and a second movement speed that is higher than the first movement speed.
The second movable body is defined as a second moving speed that is higher than the first moving speed and lower than the second moving speed.
In the forward journey, when the first movable body and the second movable body move from the standby position to the performance position, the movement speed of the first movable body is the second movement speed and the movement speed of the second movable body is the third movement speed. In the return journey, when the first movable body and the second movable body move from the performance position to the standby position, the movement speed of the first movable body is the first movement speed and the movement speed of the second movable body is the third movement speed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to cause the movement of the first movable body to start before the movement of the second movable body during the outward journey, while causing the movement of the second movable body to start before the movement of the first movable body during the return journey.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combined effects), that is, by combining subdivided pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while minimizing the constraints on placement and other related aspects, and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects.

In this configuration, during the outward journey, the start of movement of the first movable body, which has a relatively higher speed, occurs earlier than that of the second movable body, which has a relatively lower speed. Conversely, during the return journey after the special effect, the start of movement of the first movable body, which has a relatively lower speed, occurs later than that of the second movable body, which has a relatively higher speed. This configuration significantly alters the relationship between the two movable bodies during the outward and return journeys, preventing the movement of the movable bodies from becoming monotonous.

In particular, on the outward journey, a configuration that shifts the performance position towards the second movable body can be easily realized by significantly increasing the travel distance of the first movable body. In other words, the constraints on the performance position can be alleviated. Furthermore, on the return journey, while quickly returning the second movable body to its standby position, it becomes possible to create new performances utilizing the movement of the first movable body, which has traveled a longer distance. In this case, since the movement speed of the first movable body is reduced, the execution period for the new performance can be secured, thereby increasing the flexibility of the performance. For these reasons, the configuration described in this feature can effectively contribute to increasing the attention given to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BV2 to BV6 above may also be applied to Feature BV1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, and feature groups BA to BU, may also be applied to feature groups BV1 to BV12.

<Characteristics of the BW Group>
The following feature group BW was developed in consideration of the background technology, which states that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a symbol display device that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this symbol display device to notify the results of the lottery based on the ball entering the ball entry section. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that aim to increase attention to the game by providing an effect means having movable parts around the display screen, and establishing a predetermined correspondence between the effect of changing symbols and the effect of the effect means (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues, which state that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature BW1. A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) that can move from a standby position to a performance position,
A drive mechanism (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that performs a special performance (combination) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the forward journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the standby position to the performance position, the moving speed of the first movable body is higher than the moving speed of the second movable body, while in the return journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the performance position to the standby position, the moving speed of the second movable body is higher than the moving speed of the first movable body.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combined effects), that is, by combining separate pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while suppressing the constraints on placement and other related aspects that result from this, and improving the operating speed. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, the relationship between the high and low movement speeds of each movable part is reversed between the outward and return journeys. This prevents the movement of the movable parts from becoming monotonous.

Feature BW2. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) are movable from a standby position to a performance position that overlaps with the display screen from the front,
A drive mechanism (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A special performance execution means that performs a special performance (combination) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
The system includes a coordinated performance execution means that, when the special performance ends and the first movable body and the second movable body are returned from the performance position to the standby position, displays a predetermined image on the display screen and executes a coordinated performance involving the first movable body moving toward the standby position and the predetermined image,
The directions of movement of the first movable body and the second movable body are defined such that they move toward and away from each other.
The aforementioned performance position is biased toward the standby position of the second movable body, among the standby positions of the first movable body and the second movable body.
In the forward journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the standby position to the performance position, the movement speed of the first movable body is configured to be higher than the movement speed of the second movable body.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the return journey of moving the first movable body and the second movable body from the performance position to the standby position, the movement speed of the second movable body is set to be higher than the movement speed of the first movable body.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combined effects), that is, by combining separate pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while minimizing the constraints on placement and other related aspects, and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects.

In the configuration described in this feature, the performance position is particularly biased towards the standby position of the second movable body. In other words, the distance traveled to the performance position is greater for the second movable body than for the first. By moving the movable body (second movable body) more significantly, the impact of the special performance can be enhanced. Here, by configuring the system so that the movement speed of the first movable body is higher than that of the second movable body during the outward journey, the effect of the bias in movement distance can be suppressed. In other words, the visual impact of the combined performance can be mitigated.

During the return journey after the special performance, a coordinated performance is executed between the first movable body and the display screen (a predetermined image). During this coordinated performance, the movement speed of the second movable body is slower than that of the first movable body, enabling a quick return of the second movable body to its standby position. This effectively avoids the second movable body obstructing the view of the first movable body or the predetermined image. Furthermore, by suppressing the movement speed of the first movable body, a suitable period for executing the coordinated performance can be secured. This is desirable for improving the flexibility and visual appeal of the coordinated performance, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In this way, by devising the relationship between the movement speeds of each movable part when transitioning from a special effect to a linked effect, the effect of increasing attention to the game can be more effectively achieved.

Feature BW3. The first movable body and the second movable body are configured to reach the performance position at the same time.
The gaming machine according to feature BW2, characterized in that the second movable body is larger than the first movable body.

When the first and second movable bodies are positioned at the performance location during a special effect, their ability to stop precisely at a fixed position improves the visual appeal. In this configuration, the first movable body, which has a relatively high forward movement speed, is made relatively small (compact), while the second movable body, which has a relatively low movement speed, is made relatively large (large). This suppresses bouncing from the performance location and contributes to the improved visual appeal.

Feature BW4. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) are movable from a standby position to a performance position that overlaps with the display screen from the front,
A drive mechanism (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A special performance execution means that performs a special performance (combination) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
The system includes a coordinated performance execution means that, when the special performance ends and the first movable body and the second movable body are returned from the performance position to the standby position, displays a predetermined image on the display screen and executes a coordinated performance involving the first movable body moving toward the standby position and the predetermined image,
The directions of movement of the first movable body and the second movable body are defined such that they move toward and away from each other.
The aforementioned performance position is biased toward the standby position of the second movable body, among the standby positions of the first movable body and the second movable body.
The movement speed of the first movable body is defined as a first movement speed and a second movement speed that is higher than the first movement speed.
The second movable body is defined as a second moving speed that is higher than the first moving speed and lower than the second moving speed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the forward journey when the first movable body and the second movable body move from the standby position to the performance position, the movement speed of the first movable body is the second movement speed and the movement speed of the second movable body is the third movement speed, and during the return journey when the first movable body and the second movable body move from the performance position to the standby position, the movement speed of the first movable body is the first movement speed and the movement speed of the second movable body is the third movement speed.

In the configuration described in this feature, the performance position is particularly biased towards the standby position of the second movable body. In other words, the distance traveled to the performance position is greater for the second movable body than for the first. By moving the movable body (second movable body) more significantly, the impact of the special performance can be enhanced. Here, by configuring the system so that the movement speed of the first movable body is higher than that of the second movable body during the outward journey, the effect of the bias in movement distance can be suppressed. In other words, the visual impact of the combined performance can be mitigated.

During the return journey after the special performance, a coordinated performance is executed between the first movable body and the display screen (a predetermined image). During this coordinated performance, the movement speed of the second movable body is slower than that of the first movable body, enabling a quick return of the second movable body to its standby position. This effectively avoids the second movable body obstructing the view of the first movable body or the predetermined image. Furthermore, by suppressing the movement speed of the first movable body, a suitable period for executing the coordinated performance can be secured. This is desirable for improving the flexibility and visual appeal of the coordinated performance, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In this way, by devising the relationship between the movement speeds of each movable part when transitioning from a special effect to a linked effect, the effect of increasing attention to the game can be more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features BW2 to BW4 above may also be applied to Feature BW1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BV may also be applied to feature groups BW1 to BW4.

<Features of the BX Group>
The following set of features BX was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a symbol display device that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this symbol display device to notify the results of a lottery based on the ball entering the ball entry section. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that aim to increase attention to the game by providing, for example, an effect means having a movable body around the display screen and establishing a predetermined correspondence between the effect of changing symbols and the effect of the effect means (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature BX1. A movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can move from the standby position to the performance position,
A drive mechanism (guide rail 920, drive unit 930L, and drive force transmission mechanism 940) for moving the movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that executes a special performance (combined performance) by arranging the movable body to the performance position,
The aforementioned movable body is provided with multiple positions that differ in their tilt when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the drive mechanism is configured to make the posture of the movable body different when it is moving from the standby position to the performance position from the performance position to the standby position.

The configuration described in this feature prevents the posture in the return journey (performance position → standby position) from being determined based on the posture in the outward journey (standby position → performance position), or vice versa. This increased freedom in posture determination allows for a posture that considers the posture of the movable body at the performance position during the outward journey, and a posture that considers the posture of the movable body at the standby position during the return journey. This allows for a more favorable flow of movement → stop → special performance, and movement → stop → completion of retraction. This is desirable for increasing attention to the game using the movable body. Furthermore, differentiating the posture of the movable body during the outward and return journeys is also desirable for preventing monotony in the movement of the movable body.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine comprising a movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can move to a first position and a second position, and a drive mechanism (guide rail 920, drive unit 930L, and drive force transmission mechanism 940) for moving the movable body to the first position and the second position, wherein the movable body is provided with multiple positions having different inclinations when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the drive mechanism is configured to make the position of the movable body different when moving from the first position to the second position and when moving from the second position to the first position."

Incidentally, the description "a special effect execution means that executes a special effect (combination effect) by positioning the movable body at the performance position" can also be rephrased as "the configuration is such that the movable body is positioned at the performance position when the special effect is executed."

Feature BX2. The posture of the movable body is configured to change according to the movement speed of the movable body.
The gaming machine according to feature BX1, characterized in that the drive mechanism is configured to make the posture of the movable body different in the forward journey from the standby position to the performance position and in the return journey from the performance position to the standby position by individually setting the speed of movement of the movable body in the forward journey and in the return journey.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the posture is determined according to the movement speed of the movable body, and by setting the movement speed for the outward and return journeys individually, the technical concept shown in feature BX1 can be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature BX3. The configuration is such that the posture of the movable body when it is in the performance position is different from the posture of the movable body when it is in the standby position.
The gaming machine according to feature BX1 or feature BX2, characterized in that the posture of the movable body during the outward journey is defined to be the same as the posture of the movable body at the performance position, and the posture of the movable body during the return journey is defined to be the same as the posture of the movable body at the standby position.

As shown in this feature, by matching the posture of the movable body during the outward journey to the posture of the movable body at the performance position (posture during performance), a smooth transition from the outward movement to the special performance becomes possible. Furthermore, by matching the posture of the movable body during the return journey to the posture of the movable body at the standby position (standby posture), a smooth transition from the return movement to the completion of the evacuation becomes possible.

Feature BX4. A display screen (display screen 95a) is provided, and a pattern display means (pattern display device 95) is provided for displaying patterns on the display screen,
A movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can slide from a standby position near one of the left or right edges of the aforementioned display screen to a performance position that overlaps with the aforementioned display screen when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
A drive mechanism (guide rail 920L, drive unit 930L, power transmission mechanism 940L) for sliding the movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that executes a special performance (combined performance) by arranging the movable body to the performance position,
The movable body is switchable between a first posture (inclined posture) and a second posture (vertical posture) which has a different inclination from the first posture.
The drive mechanism is configured such that, in the forward movement of sliding the movable body from the standby position to the performance position, the posture of the movable body is set to the first posture, and in the return movement of sliding the movable body from the performance position to the standby position, the posture of the movable body is set to the second posture.

The configuration described in this feature prevents the posture in the return journey (performance position → standby position) from being determined based on the posture in the outward journey (standby position → performance position), or vice versa. This increased freedom in posture determination allows for a posture that considers the posture of the movable body at the performance position during the outward journey, and a posture that considers the posture of the movable body at the standby position during the return journey. This allows for a more favorable flow of movement → stop → special performance, and movement → stop → completion of retraction. This is desirable for increasing attention to the game using the movable body. Furthermore, differentiating the posture of the movable body during the outward and return journeys is also desirable for preventing monotony in the movement of the movable body.

Furthermore, the description "a special effect execution means that executes a special effect (combination effect) by positioning the movable body at the performance position" can also be changed to "the configuration is such that the movable body is positioned at the performance position when the special effect is executed."

Feature BX5. The movable body is configured such that when the sliding speed of the movable body is at a first speed, it assumes the first posture, and when the sliding speed of the movable body is at a second speed, it assumes the second posture.
The gaming machine according to feature BX4, characterized in that the drive mechanism is configured such that the sliding speed of the movable body is set to the first speed during the forward journey and to the sliding speed of the movable body is set to the second speed during the return journey.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the posture is determined according to the sliding speed of the movable body, and by setting the sliding speeds for the forward and return journeys individually, the technical concept shown in feature BX4 can be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature BX6. In the forward journey, the movable body reaches the performance position while maintaining the first posture, and is configured to maintain the first posture at the performance position.
The gaming machine according to feature BX4 or feature BX5, characterized in that, on the return journey, the movable body reaches the standby position while maintaining the second posture, and is maintained in the second posture at the standby position.

As shown in this feature, by matching the posture of the movable body during the outward journey to the posture of the movable body at the performance position (posture during performance), a smooth transition from the outward movement to the special performance becomes possible. Furthermore, by matching the posture of the movable body during the return journey to the posture of the movable body at the standby position (standby posture), a smooth transition from the return movement to the completion of the evacuation becomes possible.

Feature BX7. The movable body extends vertically and is rotatable around one end of the movable body.
The drive mechanism is configured to push and pull one end of the movable body in the direction of the sliding movement.
The gaming machine according to feature BX5 or feature BX6, characterized in that the first speed is higher than the second speed.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the movable body moves at a relatively high speed (first speed), a delay occurs at the other end of the movable body, causing a change in its posture. Conversely, when the movable body moves at a relatively low speed (second speed), the above delay is reduced, and changes in posture become less likely. When executing a special effect, it is preferable to quickly position the movable body at the effect location, and sliding it at the first speed is significant. In particular, in combination with feature BX6, the first posture is achieved during the process of reaching the effect location, eliminating the need to adjust the posture after reaching the effect location. This allows the special effect to proceed quickly, contributing to an enhanced impact of the special effect.

Feature BX8. The movable body extends vertically and is rotatable around its upper end.
The drive mechanism is configured to push and pull the upper end of the movable body in the direction of the sliding movement.
The gaming machine according to feature BX5 or feature BX6, characterized in that the first speed is higher than the second speed.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the movable body moves at a relatively high speed (first speed), a delay occurs at the lower end of the movable body, causing a change in its posture. Conversely, when the movable body moves at a relatively low speed (second speed), the above delay is reduced, and changes in posture become less likely. When executing a special effect, it is preferable to quickly position the movable body at the effect location, and sliding it at the first speed is significant. In particular, in combination with feature BX6, the first posture is achieved during the process of reaching the effect location, eliminating the need to adjust the posture after reaching the effect location. This allows the special effect to proceed quickly, contributing to an enhanced impact of the special effect.

Feature BX9. A gaming machine according to Feature BX7 or Feature BX8, characterized in that it comprises a stopper portion that contacts the rotating tip of the movable body when it reaches the performance position, and the change in the posture of the movable body at the performance position is prevented by the stopper portion.

As shown in this feature, if the stopper prevents a change in posture when the performance position is reached, the special performance can proceed while maintaining the posture from the outward journey.

Feature BX10. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BX5 to Feature BX9, characterized in that when the special performance ends and the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen, and during the return journey, a means is provided to perform a coordinated performance using the movable body in the second posture moving toward the standby position and the predetermined image.

As shown in this feature, when performing a coordinated performance between the moving body and the display screen (a predetermined image) during the return journey, it is preferable to have a configuration that allows the posture of the moving body to be set in accordance with the predetermined image. This increases the degree of freedom in the coordination and enhances the level of attention the player receives through the coordinated performance.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BW may also be applied to feature BX1 to feature BX10.

<Characteristics of the BY Group>
The following BY features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a symbol display device that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this symbol display device to notify the results of a lottery based on the ball entering the ball entry section. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that aim to increase attention to the game by providing, for example, an effect means having a movable body around the display screen and establishing a predetermined correspondence between the effect of changing symbols and the effect of the effect means (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase attention to the game."

Features BY1. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can move to a standby position and a performance position in front of the display screen,
A gaming machine comprising a drive mechanism (drive unit 930L and power transmission mechanism 940L) for moving the movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A means for executing a linked performance (combined performance) that links the movable body positioned at the performance location with a predetermined image (e.g., an effect image) displayed on the display screen,
When the aforementioned coordinated performance ends and the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, the system includes parallel display execution means that displays a first special image (e.g., a night stage image) and a second special image (e.g., a day stage image) that are different from the predetermined image, side by side in the direction of movement (horizontal direction) of the movable body.
The parallel display execution means is characterized in that it displays the first special image and the second special image such that the boundary portion (boundary portion BL) between the first special image and the second special image is located behind the movable body.

Performing a coordinated performance by linking a movable body positioned at the performance location with a display means (a predetermined image) is desirable for increasing attention to the game. After the coordinated performance ends, the movable body needs to be returned to its standby position. On the return journey, the first and second special images are displayed side-by-side on the display screen. The boundary between the first and second special images is positioned behind the movable body, making it appear as if the two images are displayed separately, with the movable body in between. By covering the boundary between the two different images with the movable body, the sense of incongruity that occurs at the boundary between two different special images when they are displayed side-by-side can be effectively reduced. With this configuration, attention to the game is encouraged by the special images even on the return journey of the movable body, and the rapid decline in attention to the game after the end of the coordinated performance can be suppressed. Furthermore, to achieve this effect, it is preferable to configure the movable body so that the area behind it is difficult or impossible to see.

Features BY2. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can move to a standby position and a performance position in front of the display screen,
A gaming machine comprising a drive mechanism (drive unit 930L and power transmission mechanism 940L) for moving the movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
The system includes a means for executing a coordinated performance (combined performance) that coordinates the movable body positioned at the performance location with a predetermined image (e.g., an effect image) displayed on the display screen,
The movable body extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) intersecting the direction of movement of the movable body, and is configured such that the area behind the movable body is difficult or impossible to see.
In the return journey after the aforementioned linked performance has ended and the movable body is returned from the performance position to the standby position, the movable body is configured to move while maintaining a state in which the display screen is divided in two when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
When the aforementioned coordinated performance ends and the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, the system includes parallel display execution means that displays a first special image (e.g., a night stage image) and a second special image (e.g., a day stage image) different from the predetermined image, arranged in the direction of movement of the movable body, and the boundary portion (boundary portion BL) between the first special image and the second special image is located behind the movable body.
The parallel display execution means is characterized by having means for changing the display range of the first special image and the second special image so that the boundary portion shifts in the same direction as the direction of movement of the movable body during the movement of the movable body on the return journey.

Performing a coordinated performance by linking a movable body positioned at the performance location with a display means (a predetermined image) is desirable for increasing attention to the game. After the coordinated performance ends, the movable body needs to be returned to its standby position. On the return journey, the first and second special images are displayed side-by-side on the display screen. The boundary between the first and second special images is positioned behind the movable body, making it appear as if the two images are displayed separately with the movable body in between. By covering the boundary between the two different images with the movable body, the sense of incongruity that occurs at the boundary between images when displaying two different special images side-by-side can be effectively reduced. With this configuration, attention to the game is encouraged by the special images even on the return journey of the movable body, and the rapid decline in attention to the game after the end of the coordinated performance can be suppressed.

Features BY3. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can move to a standby position and a performance position in front of the display screen,
A gaming machine comprising a drive mechanism (drive unit 930L and power transmission mechanism 940L) for moving the movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
The system includes a means for executing a coordinated performance (combined performance) that coordinates the movable body positioned at the performance location with a predetermined image (e.g., an effect image) displayed on the display screen,
The movable body extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) intersecting the direction of movement of the movable body, and is configured such that the area behind the movable body is difficult or impossible to see.
In the return journey after the aforementioned linked performance has ended and the movable body is returned from the performance position to the standby position, the movable body is configured to move while maintaining a state in which the display screen is divided in two when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
When the aforementioned coordinated performance ends and the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, the system includes parallel display execution means that displays a first special image (e.g., a night stage image) and a second special image (e.g., a day stage image) that are different from the predetermined image, arranged in the direction of movement of the movable body, and the boundary between the first special image and the second special image is located behind the movable body.
The parallel display execution means is characterized by having means for changing the display range of the first special image and the second special image so that the boundary portion shifts in accordance with the movement of the movable body.

Performing a coordinated performance by linking a movable body positioned at the performance location with a display means (a predetermined image) is desirable for increasing attention to the game. After the coordinated performance ends, the movable body needs to be returned to its standby position. On the return journey, the first and second special images are displayed side-by-side on the display screen. The boundary between the first and second special images is positioned behind the movable body, making it appear as if the two images are displayed separately with the movable body in between. By covering the boundary between the two different images with the movable body, the sense of incongruity that occurs at the boundary between images when displaying two different special images side-by-side can be effectively reduced. With this configuration, attention to the game is encouraged by the special images even on the return journey of the movable body, and the rapid decline in attention to the game after the end of the coordinated performance can be suppressed.

Feature BY4. The gaming machine according to Feature BY2 or Feature BY3, characterized in that the movable body is configured to straddle one end and the other end of the display screen in the predetermined direction when it is divided into two parts.

The movable body effectively suppresses the exposure of the boundary area.

Feature BY5: The gaming machine according to Feature BY4, characterized in that the posture of the movable body is changed when the linked performance ends and the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position.

The pose of the movable body is changed when the synchronized performance ends and it returns to its standby position. By having such a change function, the function of covering the boundary between the first and second special images can be prevented from reducing the flexibility of the synchronized performance (and thus preventing it from becoming obsolete).

Feature BY6. The parallel display execution means is configured to display the first and second special images side by side by changing a portion of the displayed image to the other of the first and second special images when one of the first and second special images is displayed on the display screen. This is the gaming machine according to any one of Feature BY1 to Feature BY5.

As shown in this feature, by displaying one of the first or second special images in advance and then changing a part of the first special image to the other to display the two special images side by side, the sense of incongruity when starting the side-by-side display can be effectively reduced.

Feature BY7. When predetermined acquisition conditions are met (winning at the operating ports 91 and 92), a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special loss result),
The system includes a reward granting means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that grants a reward to the player when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information,
The first special image and the second special image are images that suggest the likelihood of the reward being granted by the reward granting means, and the likelihood suggested by the first special image is configured to be higher than the likelihood suggested by the second special image.
The game machine according to any one of features BY1 to BY6, characterized in that the parallel display execution means is configured to display the first special image and the second special image side by side such that the second special image (e.g., daytime stage image) is positioned ahead of the first special image (e.g., nighttime stage image) in the direction of movement of the movable body on the return journey.

According to the configuration described in this feature, as the movable body approaches the standby position, the display range of the first special image, which has a relatively high expectation level, increases, while the display range of the second special image, which has a relatively low expectation level, decreases. With such a configuration, the player's expectation level increases as the body approaches the standby position, thus more effectively suppressing a decrease in the player's attention to the game.

Feature BY8. When predetermined acquisition conditions are met (winning at the operating ports 91 and 92), a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special loss result),
The system includes a reward granting means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that grants a reward to the player when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BY1 to BY7, characterized in that the parallel display execution means has means for displaying the first special image and the second special image side by side when it is notified that the result is not corresponding to the predetermined judgment information after the linked performance.

When a miss is announced after a linked performance, the drop in attention to the game is expected to be significant because the performance has heightened attention to the game. Therefore, by applying the technical ideas shown in Feature BY1, etc., to the configuration shown in this feature, such problems can be effectively suppressed.

Feature BY9. The movable body is the first movable body (right movable decorative body 910L),
A second movable body (left-side movable decorative body 810L) is provided separately from the first movable body and is movable between a standby position and the performance position.
The aforementioned coordinated performance execution means is configured to move the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position when executing the coordinated performance.
The system has means for returning the second movable body to its standby position when the aforementioned coordinated performance is completed and the first movable body is positioned at the performance location,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BY1 to BY8, characterized in that the parallel display execution means is configured to switch from displaying one of the first special image and the second special image to displaying both images in conjunction with the return of the second movable body.

By using multiple movable parts in conjunction to create coordinated effects—that is, by combining subdivided pieces to create coordinated effects—it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while minimizing the constraints on placement and other related aspects, and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through coordinated effects.

Here, after the synchronized performance ends, the second movable body first returns to its standby position, and upon this return, the parallel display of the first and second special images begins. With this configuration, only the first movable body, which is the object of the player's attention, remains in the performance position, making it easier to identify the object of attention and ensuring optimal visibility of the first and second special images.

Feature BY10. The movable body is the first movable body,
A second movable body (left-side movable decorative body 810L) is provided separately from the first movable body and is movable between a standby position and the performance position.
The aforementioned collaborative performance execution means is configured to execute the collaborative performance when either the first special image or the second special image is displayed on the display screen.
The system has means for returning the second movable body to its standby position when the aforementioned coordinated performance is completed and the first movable body is positioned at the performance location,
The direction of movement when returning the second movable body to its standby position is opposite to the direction of movement when returning the first movable body to its standby position.
The parallel display execution means is configured to display the first image and the second image side by side by changing a portion of one of the first image and the second image displayed on the display screen that overlaps with the range of movement of the second movable body to the other of the first image and the second image as the second movable body returns to its original position. This is the gaming machine according to any one of features BY1 to BY9.

As shown in this feature, by displaying one of the first or second special images in advance and then changing a portion of the first special image to the other to display the two special images side by side, the sense of incongruity when starting the side-by-side display can be effectively reduced. In particular, by linking this change to the movement of the second movable body, the movement of the second movable body also serves as a preparatory operation for the side-by-side display of the special images, thereby realizing a practically preferable configuration.

Furthermore, as the first movable body approaches the standby position, the display range of the first special image, which has a relatively high expectation level, increases, while the display range of the second special image, which has a relatively low expectation level, decreases. With this configuration, the player's expectation level increases as the body approaches the standby position, thus more effectively suppressing a decrease in the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BX may also be applied to feature BY1 to feature BY10.

<Characteristics of the BZ group>
The following feature group BZ was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a symbol display device that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this symbol display device to notify the results of a lottery based on the ball entering the ball entry section. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that aim to increase attention to the game by providing an effect means having movable parts around the display screen, for example, and establishing a predetermined correspondence between the effect of displaying changing symbols and the effect of the effect means (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature BZ1. A pair of decorative elements (left movable decorative element 810L and right movable decorative element 910L),
A gaming machine comprising variable means (drive units 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanisms 840L, 940L) that can switch between a standby state (positioned in standby position) in which the pair of decorative elements are separated when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a performance execution state (positioned in performance position) in which parts of the decorative elements overlap each other, by changing the relative distance between the pair of decorative elements,
A gaming machine characterized in that the relative positional relationship of the pair of decorative elements in a front view of the gaming machine is reversed between the standby state and the performance execution state.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that the relative positions of the two decorative elements in the front view of the gaming machine are reversed when switching from the standby state to the performance execution state, it becomes possible to create novel and unprecedented performances, contributing to increased attention to the game.

Feature BZ2. A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) that can move from a standby position to a performance position,
A drive mechanism (drive unit 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanism 840L, 940L) that displaces the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that executes a special performance (matching performance) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body is reversed when they are positioned in the standby position and when they are positioned in the performance position.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combination effects), that is, by combining subdivided pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while suppressing the constraints on placement and other related aspects that result from this, and improving the operating speed. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects. In the configuration shown in this feature, in particular, when the special effect (combination effect) is executed, the relative positional relationship between the first movable part and the second movable part is reversed. For example, the left-right positions or the up-down positions of the first and second movable parts are reversed. With such a configuration, not only can the impact of the special effect be strengthened, but the combined form can be prevented from being revealed from the movable parts that are in standby positions. This makes it possible to further effectively achieve the aforementioned effect of increasing attention.

Furthermore, the description "a special effect execution means that executes a special effect (matching effect) by positioning the first movable body and the second movable body at the respective performance positions" can also be changed to "the configuration is such that when a special effect is executed, the first movable body and the second movable body are positioned at the respective performance positions."

Feature BZ3. A first movable body (left movable decorative body 810L) and a second movable body (right movable decorative body 910L) that can move from a standby position to a performance position,
A drive mechanism (drive unit 830L, 930L and power transmission mechanism 840L, 940L) that displaces the first movable body and the second movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A gaming machine comprising a special performance execution means that executes a special performance (combined performance) by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position,
The first movable body and the second movable body are movable toward and toward each other, and in a front view of the gaming machine, the range of motion of the first movable body and the range of motion of the second movable body partially overlap.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body is reversed when they are positioned in the standby position and when they are positioned in the performance position.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform special effects (combination effects), that is, by combining subdivided pieces to perform special effects, it is possible to enlarge the movable effect device while suppressing the constraints on placement and other related aspects that result from this, and improving the operating speed. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through special effects. In the configuration shown in this feature, in particular, when the special effect (combination effect) is executed, the relative positional relationship between the first movable part and the second movable part is reversed. For example, the left-right positions or the up-down positions of the first and second movable parts are reversed. With such a configuration, not only can the impact of the special effect be strengthened, but the combined form can be prevented from being revealed from the movable parts that are in standby positions. This makes it possible to further effectively achieve the aforementioned effect of increasing attention.

Furthermore, the description "a special effect execution means that executes a special effect (matching effect) by positioning the first movable body and the second movable body at the respective performance positions" can also be changed to "the configuration is such that when a special effect is executed, the first movable body and the second movable body are positioned at the respective performance positions."

Feature BZ4. The gaming machine according to Feature BZ2 or Feature BZ3, characterized in that, when the first movable body and the second movable body are positioned at the performance location, a portion of the first movable body and a portion of the second movable body overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, even if the relative positions of the two movable parts are reversed during the execution of a special effect, the configuration in which a part of the first movable part and a part of the second movable part overlap enhances the sense of unity between the two movable parts.

Feature BZ5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BZ2 to Feature BZ4, characterized in that, during the process of positioning the first and second movable bodies to the performance position, the movement of the first and second movable bodies continues from the time the overlap of the first and second movable bodies occurs in a front view of the gaming machine until the positioning to the performance position is completed.

By configuring the system so that the relative positions of the two movable parts are reversed in a dynamic state, the time required from the time overlap occurs until the exchange is completed can be shortened. This shortening of the required time allows for a more effective enhancement of the impact of the special effects.

Feature BZ6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BZ2 to Feature BZ5, characterized in that at least a part of the appearance of the first movable body and the second movable body differs when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, by making at least a part of the appearance of the two movable parts different, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in noticing that the relative positional relationship between the first and second movable parts has been reversed during the execution of special effects.

Feature BZ7. The aforementioned performance position is the first performance position,
The aforementioned special performance is the first special performance, and the aforementioned special performance execution means is the first special performance execution means.
The system includes a second special performance execution means that executes a second special performance by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body at a second performance position different from the first performance position,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BZ2 to BZ6, characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body is the same when they are positioned in the standby position and when they are positioned in the second performance position.

By using a second special effect that maintains the relative positional relationship between the two movable parts, it is possible to diversify the effects using movable parts while suppressing the complexity of the structure.

Feature BZ8. The first movable body and the second movable body are configured such that they form a first display mode when positioned at the first performance position and a second display mode when positioned at the second performance position.
The gaming machine according to feature BZ7, characterized in that the appearance of the first display form and the appearance of the second display form are different.

The difference in appearance between the first display form and the second display form allows the effects shown in feature BZ7 to be effectively achieved.

Feature BZ9. The gaming machine according to Feature BZ7 and Feature BZ8, characterized in that, in the second display mode, a portion of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, both the first display mode, which executes the first special effect, and the second display mode, which executes the second special effect, can function as a combined effect. This is preferable for increasing the range of motion (travel distance) of the movable parts in both special effects, thereby enhancing the impact of the special effects.

Feature BZ10. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature BZ7 to Feature BZ9, characterized in that, when the first movable body and the second movable body are positioned at the first performance position, the first movable body and the second movable body are configured to pass through the second performance position.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when a special effect is executed, it becomes difficult to visually determine which display form will be used until partway through the process. This branching mechanism allows for a degree of slowing down of the movable parts, providing room for the audience to enjoy the uncertainty of whether the first or second special effect will occur. This is desirable for enhancing entertainment value through diversification of effects while simultaneously reducing the load on the movable effect device.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features BZ2 to BZ10 above may also be applied to feature BZ1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, and feature groups BA to BY, may also be applied to feature groups BZ1 to BZ10.

<Characteristic CA Group>
The following set of features CA was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a symbol display device that displays changing symbols when a ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this symbol display device to notify the results of a lottery based on the ball entering the ball entry section. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that aim to increase attention to the game by providing, for example, an effect means having a movable body around the display screen and establishing a predetermined correspondence between the effect of changing symbols and the effect of the effect means (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature CA1. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A gaming machine comprising a movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can move to a standby position and to a performance position in front of the display screen, and a movable performance means (right-side movable performance device 900L) having a drive mechanism (drive unit 930L and power transmission mechanism 940L) that moves the movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
A first linked performance execution means for executing a first linked performance that links the movable body positioned at the performance location with the first image (effect image) displayed on the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second linked performance execution means for executing a second linked performance in which, when the first linked performance is completed and the movable body is returned from the performance position to the standby position, the light-emitting parts of the movable body (first light-emitting part PL1 to ninth light-emitting part PL9) and a second image (image of fireworks) displayed on the display screen are linked during the return process.

By executing a first linked performance that coordinates a movable body positioned at the performance location with a display means (first image), it is possible to increase the player's attention. Here, in order to enhance the impact of the first linked performance, it is important to significantly change the appearance before and after the performance. To create such a significant change, it is preferable to greatly separate the performance location and the standby location to increase the range of motion of the movable body.

In the configuration described in this feature, when the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, a second linked performance is executed, coordinating the light-emitting part of the movable body with the display means (second image). The second linked performance is executed while the movable body is moving, effectively eliminating the drawbacks of increasing the movable body's range of motion. This is because the second linked performance allows for the use of the movable body's larger range of motion, contributing to improved performance flexibility and visual appeal. In other words, the configuration described in this feature enhances the impact of the first linked performance while simultaneously suppressing the rapid decline in attention after the first performance through the second linked performance executed afterward.

Feature CA2. The display screen is roughly rectangular in shape.
The gaming machine according to feature CA1, characterized in that the standby position is located near one of the pair of ends of the display screen, and the performance position is located near the other of the pair of ends.

As shown in this feature, by setting the performance position and the standby position, it is possible to achieve a configuration in which the movable body crosses widely in front of the display screen when the first linked performance is executed. This allows the effects shown in feature CA1 to be effectively realized.

Feature CA3. The first linked performance execution means is configured to move the movable body to the performance position at a first speed (high speed) when executing the first linked performance.
The gaming machine according to feature CA1 or feature CA2, characterized in that the second linked performance execution means is configured to move the movable body to the standby position at a second speed (low speed) lower than the first speed when the second linked performance is executed.

For the first linked performance, the movable body is positioned at the performance location and executed. Therefore, during the first linked performance, moving the movable body at a relatively fast speed (first speed) can effectively enhance the impact at the start of the first linked performance. In contrast, for the second linked performance, coordination with the movable body moving towards the standby position is crucial. Therefore, when returning to the standby position, moving the movable body at a relatively low speed (second speed) enhances the coordinated function in the second linked performance and reduces the likelihood of missing the performance.

Feature CA4. The light-emitting part of the movable body has a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) arranged in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) intersecting the direction of movement (horizontal direction) of the movable body, and the light-emitting pattern can be changed by controlling the light emission of these light-emitting elements.
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA3, characterized in that the second linked performance execution means includes means for moving a plurality of patterns displayed on the display screen in a predetermined direction, and means for changing the light emission pattern of the light-emitting part by moving a predetermined light emission pattern in the predetermined direction.

According to the configuration described in this feature, multiple patterns displayed on the display screen move in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the movable body, and the luminous pattern displayed on the movable body moves in the same direction as the patterns. This relationship allows for optimal coordination between the movable body and the display means.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine comprising: a display means having a display screen; a display control means for controlling the display of the display means; a movable body that can move from a standby position to a performance position in front of the display screen; a drive mechanism for moving the movable body to the standby position and the performance position; and a movable performance means for moving the movable body from the standby position to the performance position when a special performance is performed, wherein the display control means has a special control means for displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen so as to move in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the movable body when the special performance is completed and the movable body is moved to the standby position; and the movable performance means is characterized by comprising: a light-emitting unit provided on the movable body and having a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged in the intersecting direction; and a light-emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the light-emitting unit so as to move in the intersecting direction during the movement process of the movable body when the special performance is completed and the movable body is moved to the standby position." Furthermore, it is also possible to describe a gaming machine comprising: "a display means having a display screen; a display control means for controlling the display of the display means; a movable body that can move from a standby position to a performance position in front of the display screen; a drive mechanism for moving the movable body between the standby position and the performance position; and a movable performance means for moving the movable body from the standby position to the performance position at a first speed when performing a special performance that links the display on the movable body and the display screen, wherein the display control means has a special control means for displaying multiple patterns on the display screen so that they move in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the movable body when the special performance ends and the movable body is returned to the standby position; the movable performance means has a light-emitting section provided on the movable body and having multiple light-emitting elements arranged in the intersecting direction; and the movable performance means has a light-emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the light-emitting section of the movable body so that the light-emitting pattern moves in the intersecting direction when the special performance ends and the movable body is moved to the standby position at a second speed slower than the first speed."

Feature CA5. The gaming machine according to Feature CA4, characterized in that the second speed, which is the movement speed of the movable body moving to the standby position, is set to be lower than either the movement speed of the predetermined light-emitting pattern or the movement speed of the multiple patterns.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the appearance of the second linked animation as time progresses can be enlarged in a direction intersecting the movement direction of the movable body. This effectively suppresses the monotony of the second linked animation and allows for a configuration that ensures a longer execution time for the second linked animation.

Feature CA6. The gaming machine according to Feature CA4 or Feature CA5, characterized in that the multiple patterns are displayed at multiple different positions in the direction of movement of the movable body, and the period during which one pattern is displayed partially overlaps with the period during which other patterns are displayed.

As shown in feature CA6, by configuring the display of patterns at multiple different positions in the direction of movement of the movable body, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned coordination from failing due to all patterns being hidden behind the movable body, etc.

Feature CA7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature CA1 to Feature CA6, characterized in that the brightness of the light-emitting part of the movable body is configured to be higher than the brightness of the display screen during the execution of the second linked performance.

As shown in this feature, by setting the brightness of the movable object's illumination higher than the brightness of the display screen, the sense of depth can be emphasized in the coordinated effect between the movable object in the foreground and the display screen in the background.

Feature CA8. The movable body is provided with the light-emitting part and a non-light-emitting part (link part 915L) that does not function as the light-emitting part side by side in the predetermined direction.
When the second linked performance is executed, the display area of the display screen is set so that the pattern display area (lower area LE) for displaying the multiple patterns and the pattern non-display area (upper area UE) for not displaying the multiple patterns are aligned in the predetermined direction.
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA7, characterized in that when the second linked performance is executed, the light-emitting part moves in front of the pattern display area and the non-light-emitting part moves in front of the pattern non-display area.

If the non-illuminating parts (such as link parts) of the movable body pass in front of the non-image area on the display screen where the above-mentioned image is not displayed when returning to the standby position, it is possible to suppress the presence of these non-illuminating parts from hindering the improvement of the appearance and strengthening of the second linked performance. For example, it is advisable to display a background image of the same color as the non-illuminating parts in the non-image area to make the non-illuminating parts less noticeable.

Feature CA9. The movable body is the first movable body (right movable decorative body 910L),
A second movable body (left-side movable decorative body 810L) is provided separately from the first movable body and is movable between a standby position and the performance position.
The first linked performance execution means is configured to move the first movable body and the second movable body to the performance position, respectively, when executing the first linked performance.
The system has means for moving the second movable body to its standby position when the aforementioned linked performance is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA8, characterized in that the distance traveled from the performance position to the standby position of the first movable body is longer than the distance traveled from the performance position to the standby position of the second movable body.

By using multiple movable parts in combination to perform the first linked performance, that is, by combining subdivided pieces, it is possible to enlarge the movable performance device while suppressing the resulting constraints on placement and improving the speed of operation. This is advantageous in achieving the effect of increasing the player's attention through the first linked performance.

Here, by creating a difference in the distance each movable object moves when executing the first linked performance, and by configuring it so that movable object 1 moves a greater distance, the impact of executing the first linked performance can be enhanced. Furthermore, by performing the second linked performance when returning the movable object that moved a longer distance (the first movable object) to its standby position, the various effects described above can be effectively achieved.

Feature CA10. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature CA1 to Feature CA9, characterized in that, when the second linked performance is executed, the second movable body is moved to its standby position while the first movable body is positioned at the performance location, and after the second movable body returns to its standby position, the movement of the first movable body toward the standby position of the first movable body begins.

As shown in this feature, by retracting the second movable body to a standby position before initiating the movement of the first movable body responsible for the second linked effect, the display area for the images related to the second linked effect can be suitably secured.

Feature CA11. A display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
A gaming machine comprising a movable body (right-side movable decorative body 910L) that can move to a standby position and to a performance position in front of the display screen, and a movable performance means (right-side movable performance device 900L) having a drive mechanism (drive unit 930L and power transmission mechanism 940L) that moves the movable body to the standby position and the performance position,
The front surface of the movable body is provided with a display unit capable of displaying an image.
A first linked performance execution means for executing a first linked performance that links a first special image (e.g., a character image) displayed on the display unit of the movable body positioned at the performance location with a first predetermined image (effect image) displayed on the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second linked performance means that, when the first linked performance ends and the movable body is returned from the performance position to the standby position, executes a second linked performance that links a second special image (fireworks image) displayed on the display unit of the movable body with a second predetermined image (fireworks image) displayed on the display screen during the return process.

By executing a first linked performance, which involves coordinating a movable body (first special image) positioned at the performance location with a display means (first predetermined image), it is possible to increase the player's attention. Here, in order to enhance the impact of the first linked performance, it is important to significantly change the appearance before and after the performance. To create such a significant change, it is preferable to greatly separate the performance location and the standby location to increase the range of motion of the movable body.

In the configuration described in this feature, when the movable body returns from the performance position to the standby position, a second linked performance is executed, coordinating the movable body (second special image) and the display means (second predetermined image). The second linked performance is executed while the movable body is moving, effectively eliminating the drawbacks of increasing the movable body's range of motion. This is because the second linked performance allows for the use of a larger range of motion, contributing to improved performance flexibility and visual appeal. In other words, the configuration described in this feature enhances the impact of the first linked performance while simultaneously suppressing the rapid decline in attention after the first performance through the second linked performance executed afterward.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features CA1 to CA10 above may also be applied to feature CA11.

Feature CA12. The gaming machine according to Feature CA11, characterized in that the first special image and the first predetermined image are dissimilar images configured to be perceived by the player as not being identical, and the second special image and the second predetermined image are similar images configured to be perceived by the player as being identical.

By making the first special image and the first predetermined image dissimilar, and the second special image and the second predetermined image similar, monotony in the linked performance can be suppressed. In particular, in the second linked performance executed when the movable body returns to its original position, the position of the movable body changes over time. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the second special image and the second predetermined image similar, the sense of incongruity that arises when the positional relationship with the display means changes can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ and feature groups BA to BZ may also be applied to feature groups CA1 to CA12.

<Characteristics of the CB Group>
The following describes the group of features CB, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CB group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are shown on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CB1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that can execute display effects in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns (designs) in a variable manner on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the plurality of patterns to change and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
As for the display modes of the aforementioned pattern, there are multiple display modes in which the appearance of the pattern differs (display modes in which the character images constituting the pattern are displayed in a simplified display or a normal display),
The display control means is
A speed changing means (a function of the display control device 410 to change the scrolling speed of the patterns displayed on the display screen),
A gaming machine characterized by having a display mode changing means (a function of the display control device 410 to change the display mode of the character images constituting the pattern) which changes the display mode of the pattern in accordance with the change in the display speed when the display speed of the pattern is changed by the speed changing means.

In a configuration where the result of a draw (e.g., a miss or a jackpot) is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" indicators, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, when the display speed of the symbols changes, the appearance of the symbols changes in accordance with that speed change. This configuration effectively prevents the display of symbols on the screen from becoming monotonous, thus reducing the effectiveness of increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature CB2. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns (designs) in a variable manner on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the plurality of patterns to change and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
As for the display modes of the aforementioned pattern, a first display mode (a display mode in which the character images constituting the pattern are displayed in a simplified manner) and a second display mode (a display mode in which the character images constituting the pattern are displayed in a normal manner) which has a different appearance from the first display mode are provided.
The display control means is
When stopping a fluctuating pattern on the aforementioned display screen at a predetermined stopping position, a speed changing means (a function of the display control device 410 to change the scrolling speed of the pattern) is provided to change the fluctuating display speed of the pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by having a display mode changing means (a function of the display control device 410 to change the display mode of the character images constituting the pattern in accordance with the change in the display speed of the pattern when the display speed of the pattern is changed by the speed changing means) which changes the display mode of the pattern that is displayed in the first display mode from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the change in the display speed.

In a configuration where the result of a draw (e.g., a miss or a jackpot) is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" indicators, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, when the display speed of the symbols changes, the appearance of the symbols changes in accordance with that speed change. This configuration effectively prevents the display of symbols on the screen from becoming monotonous, thus reducing the effectiveness of increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature CB3. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple pattern rows (left pattern row, middle pattern row, right pattern row) consisting of multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen has a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that, after displaying the multiple pattern sequences in a variable manner, stops the variable display of those pattern sequences in order to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means at a predetermined position (effective line L) on the display screen.
As a display mode for each of the patterns constituting the aforementioned pattern sequence, a first display mode (a display mode in which the character images constituting the pattern are displayed in a simplified manner) and a second display mode (a display mode in which the character images constituting the pattern are displayed in a normal manner) which has a different appearance from the first display mode,
The display control means is
When a predetermined pattern constituting the pattern sequence is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, a speed changing means (a function of changing the scrolling speed of the pattern in the display control device 410) is provided to change the display speed of the pattern sequence during the changing display,
A gaming machine characterized by having a display mode changing means (a function of the display control device 410 to change the display mode of character images constituting the patterns) which changes the display mode of the predetermined patterns displayed in the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the change in the display mode when the variable display speed of the pattern row is changed by the speed changing means.

In a configuration where the result of a draw (e.g., a miss or a jackpot) is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" indicators, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, when the display speed of the symbol sequence changes, the appearance of the symbols changes in accordance with that speed change. This configuration effectively prevents the display of the symbol sequence on the screen from becoming monotonous, thus reducing the effectiveness of increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature CB4. The gaming machine according to Feature CB2 or Feature CB3, characterized in that the first display mode is a display mode in which the image is simplified compared to the second display mode.

By configuring the display to change from a simplified first display mode to a second display mode through a change in the variable display speed, it is possible to prevent giving players the impression that the symbols in the first and second display modes are completely different symbols.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature CB2 or feature CB3, characterized in that the first display mode is a display mode in which the appearance of the image is simplified compared to the second display mode."

Feature CB5. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature CB2 to Feature CB4, characterized in that the display mode changing means makes the change so that the display mode of the pattern changes continuously or stepwise from the first display mode to the second display mode.

To enhance the effects shown in Feature CB2, etc., it is preferable to increase the difference between the first and second display modes. However, simply increasing the difference in display modes can confuse players. In this regard, by configuring the display mode of the symbols to change continuously or gradually from the first to the second display mode, it is possible to increase the difference in display modes while effectively suppressing the potential for player confusion.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features CB2 to CB5, characterized in that the display mode of the patterns is gradually changed in conjunction with the change in the display speed of the pattern sequence by the speed changing means, thereby changing the display mode from the first display mode to the second display mode."

Feature CB6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature CB2 to Feature CB4, characterized in that a portion of the pattern composition image constituting the pattern, which is unique to that pattern, is configured to have the same display configuration in the first display mode and the second display mode.

By excluding a portion of the image composition that constitutes the pattern, specifically the unique part of that pattern, from the display mode change, and by making this portion common to both display modes, it is possible to prevent players from mistakenly perceiving the pattern as completely different before and after the display mode change.

Feature CB7. The speed changing means is configured to change the display speed of the variable display of multiple rows of symbols in a manner that synchronizes the variable display of those rows of symbols when transitioning to a reach display.
The gaming machine according to any one of features CB2 to CB6, characterized in that the display mode changing means has means for changing the display mode of each symbol constituting a reach line in those symbol sequences whose variable display speed is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, and is configured to synchronize these changes.

When synchronizing the display of multiple symbol sequences during the transition to a "reach" display, synchronizing the changes in the display patterns of each symbol constituting the reach line can enhance the impact of the display pattern change.

Features CB8. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple pattern rows (left pattern row, middle pattern row, right pattern row) consisting of multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen has a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that, after displaying the multiple pattern sequences in a variable manner, stops the variable display of those pattern sequences in order to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means at a predetermined position (effective line L) on the display screen.
As a display mode for each of the patterns constituting the aforementioned pattern sequence, a first display mode (a display mode in which the character images constituting the pattern are displayed in a simplified manner) and a second display mode (a display mode in which the character images constituting the pattern are displayed in a normal manner) which has a different appearance from the first display mode,
The display control means is
When a predetermined pattern constituting the pattern sequence is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, a speed changing means (a function of changing the scrolling speed of the pattern in the display control device 410) is provided to change the display speed of the pattern sequence during the changing display,
When the variable display speed of the pattern sequence is changed by the speed changing means, the display mode changing means (a function of the display control device 410 to change the display mode of the character images constituting the pattern) changes the display mode of the predetermined pattern displayed in the first display mode from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the change in variable display speed.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the image is simplified compared to the second display mode, and the modification is made so that the display mode of the image changes continuously from the first display mode to the second display mode.
The display mode changing means is configured to change the display mode of the pattern from the first display mode to the second display mode in a predetermined section of the path through which the pattern row is displayed in the display screen, and after changing the display mode of the pattern to the second display mode, it continues to display the pattern in the second display mode before stopping the display of the pattern row including the pattern.

In a configuration where the result of a draw (e.g., a miss or a jackpot) is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" indicators, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, when the display speed of the symbol sequence changes, the appearance of the symbols changes in accordance with that speed change. This configuration effectively prevents the display of the symbol sequence on the screen from becoming monotonous, thus reducing the effectiveness of increasing the player's attention to the game.

By configuring the display to change from a simplified first display mode to a second display mode through a change in the variable display speed, it is possible to prevent giving players the impression that the symbols in the first and second display modes are completely different symbols.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature CB2 or feature CB3, characterized in that the first display mode is a display mode in which the appearance of the image is simplified compared to the second display mode."

To enhance the various effects described above, it is preferable to increase the difference between the first and second display modes. However, simply increasing the difference in display modes can confuse players. In this regard, a configuration that continuously changes the display mode of the symbols from the first to the second display mode allows for a large difference in display modes while effectively suppressing the potential for player confusion.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA may also be applied to feature groups CB1 to CB8.

<Characteristic CC Group>
The following describes the group of features CC, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CC group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are shown on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CC1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91 and 92) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) capable of scrolling and displaying multiple patterns (designs) in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by scrolling the plurality of patterns in the predetermined direction and then stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means.
The aforementioned pattern is configured to include a first image (the opaque portion of the character image P2) and a second image (the semi-transparent portion of the character image P2),
The display control means is characterized by having a means for changing the area ratio such that when the pattern is scrolled in the predetermined direction, the area ratio of the first image to the second image becomes the first area ratio when the pattern is located at the first position in the path, and the area ratio of the first image to the second image becomes the second area ratio when the pattern is located at the second position in the path.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery), such as a loss or a jackpot, is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" displays, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, when symbols are displayed in a scrolling manner, the area ratio between the first and second images is changed depending on the symbol's display position (first position/second position on the path it passes). By changing the appearance of the symbols according to their display position in this way, the behavior when switching the symbol display mode becomes novel, and the effect of using symbols to increase the player's attention to the game can be effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the description of the feature described above, "A gaming machine characterized in that the display control means has a means for changing the area ratio such that when the pattern is located at a first position in the predetermined direction, the area ratio of the first image and the second image becomes a first area ratio, and when the pattern is located at a second position in the predetermined direction, the area ratio of the first image and the second image becomes a second area ratio," can also be changed to "A gaming machine characterized in that the display control means has a means for changing the area ratio of the first image and the second image constituting the pattern according to the display position of the pattern in the predetermined direction."

Feature CC2. In the display screen, multiple rows of patterns consisting of the multiple patterns are arranged side by side.
The gaming machine according to feature CC1, characterized in that the modifying means is configured to change the area ratio of the first image and the second image by changing the size ratio of the first image and the second image in at least the predetermined direction.

By configuring the system to change the size ratio of both images in the scrolling direction (a predetermined direction), and by suppressing the expansion of the area of focus for the player in a direction intersecting the scrolling direction when the size ratio changes during scrolling, it is possible to suitably achieve coexistence with other rows of images.

Feature CC3. A third image (for example, a number image P1 or a base image P4) is provided that, together with the first image and the second image, constitutes the pattern.
The gaming machine according to CC1 or CC3, characterized in that the third image is configured to be the same size regardless of whether the pattern is displayed at the first position or the second position.

As shown in this feature, by ensuring that the size of the third image constituting the pattern remains unchanged, this third image can be used as a visual reference (indicator) when determining changes in area ratio.

Feature CC4. When displaying the aforementioned pattern in a scrolling manner, a first speed (speed for high-speed scrolling) and a second speed (speed for low-speed scrolling) that is slower than the first speed are provided.
The game machine according to any one of features CC1 to CC3, wherein the changing means is configured not to perform the change when the pattern moves from the first position to the second position at the first speed, and to perform the change when the pattern moves from the first position to the second position at the second speed.

By configuring the display to change the area ratio when moving from the first position to the second position using a low-speed second-speed scroll display, the chances of missing this change can be effectively reduced, thereby allowing the effects shown in feature CC1, etc., to be effectively achieved.

Feature CC5. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91 and 92) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a), which is capable of scrolling and displaying multiple rows of patterns (designs) consisting of multiple designs in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by scrolling the plurality of patterns in the predetermined direction and then stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means.
The aforementioned pattern is configured to include a first image (the opaque portion of the character image P2) and a second image (the semi-transparent portion of the character image P2),
The display control means includes a means for changing the area ratio such that when the pattern is located at a first position on the path along which the pattern sequence is scrolled in a predetermined direction, the area ratio of the first image to the second image becomes the first area ratio, and when the pattern is located at a second position on the path, the area ratio of the first image to the second image becomes the second area ratio.
The modification means is configured to change the area ratio of the first image and the second image by changing the size ratio of the first image and the second image in at least the predetermined direction,
When displaying each of the aforementioned rows of patterns in a scrolling manner, a first speed (high-speed scrolling display speed) and a second speed (low-speed scrolling display speed) slower than the first speed are provided.
The aforementioned pattern sequence includes a first pattern sequence and a second pattern sequence,
A gaming machine characterized in that, while the area ratio of predetermined patterns constituting the first pattern row is being changed, the area ratio is not changed even if the second pattern row is scrolled at the first speed and the predetermined patterns in the second pattern row move from the first position to the second position, and after the change in the area ratio of predetermined patterns constituting the first pattern row is completed, the area ratio is changed when the predetermined patterns in the second pattern row, which is scrolled at the second speed, move from the first position to the second position.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery), such as a loss or a jackpot, is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" displays, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, when symbols are displayed in a scrolling manner, the area ratio between the first and second images is changed depending on the symbol's display position (first position/second position on the path it passes). By changing the appearance of the symbols according to their display position in this way, the behavior when switching the symbol display mode becomes novel, and the effect of using symbols to increase the player's attention to the game can be effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the description of the feature described above, "A gaming machine characterized in that the display control means has a means for changing the area ratio such that when the pattern is located at a first position in the predetermined direction, the area ratio of the first image and the second image becomes a first area ratio, and when the pattern is located at a second position in the predetermined direction, the area ratio of the first image and the second image becomes a second area ratio," can also be changed to "A gaming machine characterized in that the display control means has a means for changing the area ratio of the first image and the second image constituting the pattern according to the display position of the pattern in the predetermined direction."

By configuring the system to change the size ratio of both images in the scrolling direction (a predetermined direction), and by suppressing the expansion of the area of focus for the player in a direction intersecting the scrolling direction when the size ratio changes during scrolling, it is possible to suitably achieve coexistence with other rows of images.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CB may also be applied to feature CC1 to CC5.

<Features CD Group>
The following describes a group of features CD, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CD group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changing symbols in response to balls entering the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are shown on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CD1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns on the display screen,
The system includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140, display control device 410) for controlling the aforementioned display device.
The display control means is
The display screen displays the multiple patterns, scrolls them in a predetermined direction (vertical direction), and then displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means as a final stop (confirmation display). This is a pattern display means (a function that performs pattern display control in the display control device 410),
The display screen includes a background display means (a function that controls the display of the background by the display control device 410) that displays a background so as to overlap the multiple images on the display screen and changes the display of the background according to the progress of the game.
As for the display modes of the aforementioned pattern, there are two modes: one in which the background can be seen through the pattern, and another in which the background cannot be seen through the pattern.
The pattern display means includes a suggestion means that suggests at least a portion of the pattern combination that will be displayed at the final stop while the scrolling display is in progress.
The suggestion means is configured such that, when making the suggestion, the portion of the image through which the background can be seen gradually becomes smaller as the game progresses.

In a configuration where the result of a draw (e.g., a miss or a jackpot) is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of a symbol display device, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. In the configuration described in this feature, by including a display mode that allows the background to be visible through the symbols, it is possible to enlarge the symbols while suppressing the loss of the background display function. This is advantageous, for example, when diversifying the effects by displaying icons or characters for effects in the background, as it eases the constraints on the display position of those images. Here, in the configuration described in this feature, at least a portion (some symbols) of the symbol combination that will finally stop during scrolling is hinted at during the scrolling display. In this hint, the portion of the background visible through the symbols gradually shrinks. In this way, the player's attention can be drawn back from other images such as the background to the symbols, thus effectively utilizing the hinting function described above.

Feature CD2. The gaming machine according to Feature CD1, characterized in that the portion of the background that is visible gradually decreases in the predetermined direction as the game progresses.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the display to link changes in background visibility with scrolling, the image variation display function and the suggestive function can be suitably integrated.

Feature CD3. The gaming machine according to Feature CD1 or Feature CD2, wherein the background display means is configured to scroll and display the background in a direction different from the predetermined direction.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the background to scroll in a direction different from the scrolling direction of the image (a predetermined direction), the visual changes of the image described above can be effectively suppressed from being obscured by the background.

Feature CD4. The game machine according to Feature CD3, characterized in that the suggestion means is configured such that the speed at which the portion of the image through which the background is visible gradually decreases as the game progresses is faster than the scrolling display speed of the background.

When the display of both the image and the background are continuously changed, rapidly changing the display of the image can contribute to enhancing the impact.

Feature CD5. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns on the display screen,
The system includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140, display control device 410) for controlling the aforementioned display device.
The display control means is
The display screen displays the multiple patterns, scrolls them in a predetermined direction (vertical direction), and then displays the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means as a final stop (confirmation display). This is a pattern display means (a function that performs pattern display control in the display control device 410),
The display screen includes a background display means (a function that controls the display of the background by the display control device 410) that displays a background so as to overlap the multiple images on the display screen and changes the display of the background according to the progress of the game.
As for the display modes of the aforementioned pattern, there are two modes: one in which the background can be seen through the pattern, and another in which the background cannot be seen through the pattern.
The luminance of the outline lines constituting the outer edge of the aforementioned pattern can be changed between a first luminance and a second luminance that is relatively higher than the first luminance.
The pattern display means includes a suggestion means that suggests at least a portion of the pattern combination that will be displayed at the final stop while the scrolling display is in progress.
The suggestion means is configured to make the suggestion by gradually reducing the portion of the image displayed on the display screen that allows the background to be seen through the image in a predetermined direction as the game progresses.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the suggestion is made by the suggestion means, the brightness of the outline lines that constitute the outer edge of the visible portion of the pattern is configured to be the second brightness.

In a configuration where the result of a draw (e.g., a miss or a jackpot) is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of a symbol display device, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. In the configuration described in this feature, by including a display mode that allows the background to be visible through the symbols, it is possible to enlarge the symbols while suppressing the loss of the background display function. This is advantageous, for example, when diversifying the effects by displaying icons or characters for effects in the background, as it eases the constraints on the display position of those images. Here, in the configuration described in this feature, at least a portion (some symbols) of the symbol combination that will finally stop during scrolling is hinted at during the scrolling display. In this hint, the portion of the background visible through the symbols gradually shrinks. In this way, the player's attention can be drawn back from other images such as the background to the symbols, thus effectively utilizing the hinting function described above.

Furthermore, by configuring the system to link changes in background visibility with scrolling display, as shown in this feature, the image variation display function and the suggestive function can be suitably integrated.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CC may also be applied to feature CD1 to CD5.

<Features of the CE Group>
The following describes the group of features CE, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CE group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are shown on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CE1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units 91, 92) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91, 92) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns (designs) in a variable manner on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the plurality of patterns to change and then stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means at a predetermined position (effective line L),
As for the display modes of the aforementioned pattern, there is a first display mode (simplified display mode) in which the pattern is composed using a first image (digital image P1, character image P2, base image P4), and a second display mode (normal display mode) in which the pattern is composed using the first image and a second image (rear decorative image P3).
The display control means is
A first switching means for switching the display mode of the pattern such that the display mode of the pattern during the variable display becomes the first display mode, and the display mode of the pattern while it is stopped at the predetermined position becomes the second display mode,
A gaming machine characterized by having a second switching means that, when a predetermined switching condition (start of a game round) is met while a plurality of the patterns constituting the pattern combination are stopped and displayed in the predetermined position, switches the display mode of those patterns from the second display mode to the first display mode after a specific performance (such as a jump action of character image P2).

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery) (e.g., a miss, a jackpot) is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. Although various effects, such as a reach display, are performed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration shown in this feature, the display mode of the symbols is switched so that the display mode of symbols during the fluctuation display becomes the first display mode, and the display mode of symbols stopped at a predetermined position becomes the second display mode. In other words, the appearance of the symbols changes when a second image is added when they are stopped. When a predetermined switching condition is met while multiple symbols constituting a symbol combination are stopped at predetermined positions, the second image is hidden after a specific effect, and the display mode of those symbols switches from the second display mode to the first display mode. While the display is stationary, the lack of movement in the images can make it appear monotonous. However, by switching to a simplified display mode after a specific animation sequence, the decrease in interest caused by the display mode change can be effectively suppressed.

Feature CE2. The gaming machine according to Feature CE1, wherein the second switching means is configured to perform the switching so that the switching of the display modes of each stopped displaying pattern is synchronized.

By synchronizing the switching of display modes for each image that is currently displayed, even a simple switch to a simplified display mode can contribute to enhanced impact.

Feature CE3. The gaming machine according to Feature CE1 or Feature CE2, wherein the second image is larger than the first image and is displayed overlapping the first image from behind.

In a configuration where the first and second images are displayed overlapping, hiding the second image allows for a difference in display mode while avoiding a significant change in the image size.

Feature CE4. The display control means is configured to scroll the sequence of patterns consisting of the plurality of patterns in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) as the variable display.
The gaming machine according to any one of features CE1 to CE3, characterized in that the particular effect includes a display effect that moves the first image from a stopping position in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

By configuring the system to perform a specific effect using the stopped image display, it is possible to prevent players from missing the change in the display pattern even when they are focused on the specific effect. Furthermore, since the first image moves in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction during the specific effect, confusion between the specific effect and the scrolling display can be effectively suppressed.

Feature CE5. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units 91, 92) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91, 92) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns (designs) consisting of multiple designs on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by scrolling the plurality of pattern rows in a predetermined direction, and then stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means at a predetermined position (effective line L),
The aforementioned display screen is capable of displaying multiple patterns for each pattern row,
As for the display modes of the aforementioned pattern, there is a first display mode (simplified display mode) in which the pattern is composed using a first image (for example, a character image P2), and a second display mode (normal display mode) in which the pattern is composed using the first image and a second image (rear decorative image P3) which is larger than the first image and is displayed overlapping the first image from behind.
When displaying each of the aforementioned rows of patterns in a scrolling manner, a first speed (high-speed scrolling display speed) and a second speed (low-speed scrolling display speed) slower than the first speed are provided.
The display control means is
A first switching means for switching the display mode of the pattern such that the display mode of the pattern during scrolling becomes the first display mode, and the display mode of the pattern while stopped at a predetermined position becomes the second display mode,
The system includes a second switching means that, when a predetermined switching condition (start of a game round) is met under the condition that some of the rows of patterns are stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, while other rows of patterns are scrolled at the second speed, the patterns constituting the pattern combination are stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, and the system is otherwise stopped and displayed at the second speed, the system includes a second switching means that switches the display mode of the patterns from the second display mode to the first display mode via a specific display (such as a jump action of character image P2) that moves either the first image or the second image in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The second switching means is configured to perform the specific display for each of the symbols (preceding symbols, symbols on the active line, and subsequent symbols) that are stopped in a certain sequence of symbols, and to synchronize the switching from the second display mode to the first display mode after these specific displays with the switching to the first display mode.

By having a portion of the images constituting the multiple symbols in a stopped symbol sequence move in the scrolling direction (as if the images were separating) from the other symbols being scrolled, attention can be drawn to the stopped symbols without making the action excessively large. Then, by switching to a display mode where the second image is omitted, the player is less likely to be confused. Furthermore, because the action involves, for example, the separation of the first and second images, the omission of the second image's display is less jarring.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CD may also be applied to feature groups CE1 to CE5.

<Characteristic CF Group>
The following describes the group of features CF, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CF group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are performed on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CF1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units 91, 92) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91, 92) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying patterns (designs) on the display screen,
It has a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the aforementioned pattern display means,
The determination result by the determination means is indicated by the pattern displayed in a predetermined area (effective line L) on the display screen.
The display control means is
When the pattern is displayed in the predetermined area, a positional relationship changing means (a function in the display control device 410 to move the effect image P5 upward) changes the positional relationship between the first image and the second image (effect image P5) that constitute the pattern by moving at least one of them to the other side.
A gaming machine characterized by having a display mode changing means (a function in the display control device 410 to switch the character image P2 from normal display to simplified display) which changes the display mode of the pattern by changing the display mode of at least one of the first image and the second image in conjunction with the change in the positional relationship by the positional relationship changing means.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery), such as a loss or a jackpot, is indicated by the image displayed on the display screen of the image display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. When this indication occurs, the positional relationship between the first and second images constituting the image is changed, and in conjunction with this change, the display mode of at least one of the first and second images changes. This results in a change in the display mode of the image. Such a configuration creates novel and unprecedented image behavior and effectively suppresses monotony in the display effects. This is desirable for increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature CF2. The gaming machine according to Feature CF1, wherein the positional relationship changing means is configured to move the second image toward the first image, and the display mode changing means is configured to change the display mode of the first image in conjunction with the movement of the second image toward the first image, thereby changing the display mode of the pattern.

If the second image moves toward the first image, changing the relative positions of the two images, and the display mode of the first image changes in conjunction with this movement of the second image, the visual effect created by the coordination of the two images can be effectively enhanced.

Feature CF3. The gaming machine according to Feature CF2, characterized in that the movement path of the second image, as moved by the positional relationship changing means, is configured to overlap with the display area where the first image is displayed.

As shown in this feature, if the movement path and the display area overlap, the effects shown in feature CF2 can be more effectively achieved.

Feature CF4. The gaming machine according to Feature CF2 or Feature CF3, characterized in that the degree of change in the display manner of the first image increases as the amount of movement of the second image increases.

The configuration described in this feature allows for a suitable enhancement of the coordination between the movement of the second image and the change in the display mode of the first image.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CE may also be applied to feature CF1 to CF4.

<Features CG Group>
The following describes a group of feature CGs that represent technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CG group was created in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changing patterns triggered by events such as balls entering a designated entry point in the game area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on ball entry into the entry point. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are performed on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is as follows: "In gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CG1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The aforementioned display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that scrolls a group of patterns (for example, the left row of patterns) in a predetermined direction (vertically), and then stops the scrolling display of the group of patterns so that a predetermined pattern corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means is displayed in a stopped state.
The display screen is configured such that multiple patterns constituting the pattern group are arranged in a predetermined area of the display screen (for example, a variable display area for the left pattern column) and can each be displayed at a pause.
The display control means includes a display mode changing means that changes the display mode of each of the plurality of patterns when the display is stopped.
The display mode changing means is configured to change the display mode of each pattern such that the timing for changing the display mode of one of the multiple patterns overlaps with the timing for changing the display mode of the other patterns among the multiple patterns.

When multiple symbols constituting a group of symbols are arranged in a predetermined area of the display screen and each is stopped and displayed, the timing of changing the display mode of one symbol coincides with the timing of changing the display mode of another symbol. This allows for a unified presentation using multiple symbols. This helps to prevent monotony in gameplay and contributes to increasing player engagement.

Feature CG2. The gaming machine according to Feature CG1, characterized in that the display mode changing means is configured to synchronize the change in the display mode of one of the multiple patterns with the change in the display mode of the other patterns among the multiple patterns.

By configuring the display mode changes for multiple symbols constituting a group of symbols to be synchronized, the impact of the display mode change can be enhanced. Furthermore, compared to a configuration where the display mode changes are not synchronized, the time required for such changes can be reduced. This is desirable for increasing the number of gameplay rounds in which this change function can be applied.

Feature CG3. The game machine according to Feature CG1 or Feature CG2, characterized in that the display mode changing means is configured such that the timing of starting to change the display mode of the first pattern coincides with the timing of starting to change the display mode of the other patterns, the timing of ending the change in the display mode of the first pattern coincides with the timing of ending the change in the display mode of the other patterns, and the speed of changing the display mode of the first pattern coincides with the speed of changing the display mode of the other patterns.

The configuration shown in this feature allows for the effective implementation of the technical concept presented in Feature CG2.

Feature CG4. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature CG1 to Feature CG3, characterized in that the change of the display mode by the display mode changing means is performed while the multiple patterns are displayed in the predetermined area.

As shown in this feature, by changing the display mode while multiple patterns are displayed in a predetermined area, the various effects shown in feature CG1, etc., can be effectively achieved.

Feature CG5. A game board (game board unit 80) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The aforementioned display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that, after displaying a group of patterns (for example, the left row of patterns) in a predetermined direction (vertical direction), stops the display of the pattern group in a variable manner so that a predetermined pattern corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is displayed in a fixed position.
The display screen is configured such that the multiple patterns constituting the pattern group can be stopped so that they are arranged in a predetermined area of the display screen (for example, a variable display area for the left pattern column),
When the aforementioned group of patterns is displayed in a variable manner, a first speed (speed for high-speed scrolling) and a second speed (speed for low-speed scrolling) that is slower than the first speed are provided as variable display speeds.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A variable display means that can change the variable display speed of the pattern group from the first speed to the second speed before stopping the pattern group,
The system includes a means for changing the display mode of each of the multiple patterns that are stopped and displayed in the predetermined area, while the multiple patterns are displayed in the predetermined area when the system is stopped and displayed.
The variable display means is configured such that, when the display mode is changed by the display mode changing means, it synchronizes the movement of one of the multiple patterns that is the target of the display mode change in the predetermined area with the movement of the other patterns in the predetermined area.
The display mode changing means changes the display modes of the multiple patterns such that the timing of starting to change the display mode of one of the multiple patterns coincides with the timing of starting to change the display mode of the other patterns, and the timing of ending the change of the display mode of the one pattern coincides with the timing of ending the change of the display mode of the other patterns, and the change pattern for changing the display mode of the one pattern and the change pattern for changing the display mode of the other patterns are the same, and the display mode is changed in such a way that each display mode is changed.

When multiple symbols constituting a group of symbols are arranged in a predetermined area of the display screen and each is stopped and displayed, the timing of changing the display mode of one symbol coincides with the timing of changing the display mode of another symbol. This allows for a unified presentation using multiple symbols. This helps to prevent monotony in gameplay and contributes to increasing player engagement.

By configuring the display mode changes for multiple symbols constituting a group of symbols to be synchronized, the impact of the display mode change can be enhanced. Furthermore, compared to a configuration where the display mode changes are not synchronized, the time required for such changes can be reduced. This is desirable for increasing the number of gameplay rounds in which this change function can be applied.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CF may also be applied to feature groups CG1 to CG5.

<Characteristic CH group>
The following describes the group of features CH, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The CH feature group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are performed on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The CH feature group was developed in light of this background and the challenges, specifically the fact that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CH1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units 91, 92) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91, 92) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns (designs) in a variable manner on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the plurality of patterns to change and display in a predetermined direction (vertical direction), and then stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means at a predetermined position (effective line L) on the display screen.
For each of the aforementioned designs, there are two display modes: a first display mode (simplified display mode) and a second display mode (normal display mode).
The game machine is characterized in that the display control means has a display mode changing means that, when a predetermined change condition is met while one of the patterns forming the pattern combination is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the first type of display mode and the other patterns forming the pattern combination are displayed in the first type of display mode, changes the display mode of the stopped pattern and the display mode of the other patterns displayed in the changing mode from the first type of display mode to the second type of display mode.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery), such as a loss or a jackpot, is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" displays, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, two display modes, Type 1 and Type 2, are provided for the symbols. When one symbol forming a combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined position in Type 1 display mode, and the other symbols forming that combination are displayed in a variable state in Type 1 display mode, and a predetermined change condition is met, both the display mode of the stopped symbol and the display mode of the other symbols in the variable state are changed from Type 1 to Type 2 display mode. This configuration strengthens the coordination between the stopped and variable symbols, preventing the process leading up to the stopping display of the symbol combination from becoming monotonous.

Feature CH2. As a variable display speed, a first speed and a second speed that is slower than the first speed are provided.
The gaming machine according to feature CH1, characterized in that the display mode changing means is configured such that the predetermined changing condition is met when the display speed of the changing patterns during the changing display is the second speed.

When there are multiple images of interest, and one of them is being displayed in a variable state, it is assumed that whether or not both changes in the display patterns of both images can be visually perceived depends on the variable display speed of the variable image. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the variable image is configured so that a predetermined change condition is met and the display pattern changes when the variable display speed is at a relatively slow second speed, then, compared to a configuration where the predetermined change condition is met and the display pattern changes when the speed is relatively fast first speed, both changes become easier to perceive, and the effect shown in feature CH1 can be suitably achieved.

Feature CH3. The gaming machine according to Feature CH1 or Feature CH2, characterized in that the display mode changing means is configured to synchronize the change in the display mode of the symbols during the stopped display and the change in the display mode of the symbols during the fluctuating display.

By synchronizing the display patterns of each image, it becomes possible to create innovative and unprecedented display effects. This enhances the impact of the image while it is stopped, and the impact of changing the display patterns of the stopped image.

Feature CH4. An operating means for performances (performance button 35) is provided on the front of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player,
In a situation where the first pattern forming the pattern combination is displayed in a stationary state in the first display mode and the other patterns are displayed in a variable state in the first display mode, the system includes an operation suggestion means (a function that displays an image resembling the performance button 35 and a message prompting operation on the display screen 95a),
The display mode changing means has a means for determining that a predetermined change condition has been met when the performance operation means is operated under the circumstances in which the suggestion has been made, and when it is determined that the predetermined change condition has been met, the display mode of the 1 symbol that is in variable display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the display mode of the other symbols that is in stopped display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, as described in any one of features CH1 to CH3.

In a situation where some of the symbols forming a combination are displayed in a first display mode while other symbols are displayed in a variation mode, the player can operate a special control device to change the display modes of both the stopped and variational symbols. This configuration effectively reduces the chance of the display mode change being overlooked. Furthermore, such an innovative presentation enhances the impact of the display mode change.

Feature CH5. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units 91, 92) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91, 92) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of displaying multiple patterns (designs) consisting of multiple designs on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the plurality of pattern rows to change and display in a predetermined direction (vertical direction), and then stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means at a predetermined position (effective line L) on the display screen.
For each of the aforementioned designs, there are two display modes: a first display mode (simplified display mode) and a second display mode (normal display mode).
The first type of display mode is a display mode in which the image is simpler than that of the second type of display mode.
The display control means includes a variable display means for displaying the plurality of pattern sequences in a variable manner while the display mode of each pattern in the pattern sequence is the first type of display mode, and it is possible to stop each of the plurality of pattern sequences while the display mode of each pattern in the pattern sequence is the first type of display mode.
When each of the aforementioned rows of patterns is displayed in a variable manner, a first speed (speed for high-speed scrolling) and a second speed (speed for low-speed scrolling) that is slower than the first speed are provided as variable display speeds.
The variable display means is capable of changing the variable display speed of the pattern group from the first speed to the second speed before stopping the pattern group.
The display control means is
A first display mode changing means for stopping one of the plurality of pattern sequences to change the display mode of the patterns forming the pattern combination in that one pattern sequence from the first type of display mode to the second type of display mode,
When one of the plurality of pattern sequences is stopped and the patterns forming the pattern combination in that one pattern sequence are stopped and displayed at the predetermined position in the first type of display mode, and the other patterns in the plurality of pattern sequences are being displayed at the second speed with the patterns forming the pattern combination in the first type of display mode, and when a predetermined change condition is met, the system has a second display mode changing means that changes the display mode of the patterns in the stopped one pattern sequence and the display mode of the patterns in the other patterns being displayed with the movement from the first type of display mode to the second type of display mode, respectively.
The amusement machine is characterized in that the second display mode changing means is configured to simultaneously perform a change in the display mode of the patterns in the first pattern row and a change in the display mode of the patterns in the other pattern row.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery), such as a loss or a jackpot, is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. While various effects, such as "reach" displays, are executed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration described in this feature, two display modes, Type 1 and Type 2, are provided for the symbols. When one symbol forming a combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined position in Type 1 display mode, and the other symbols forming that combination are displayed in a variable state in Type 1 display mode, and a predetermined change condition is met, both the display mode of the stopped symbol and the display mode of the other symbols in the variable state are changed from Type 1 to Type 2 display mode. This configuration strengthens the coordination between the stopped and variable symbols, preventing the process leading up to the stopping display of the symbol combination from becoming monotonous.

When there are multiple images of interest, and one of them is being displayed in a variable state, it is assumed that whether or not both changes in the display patterns of both images can be visually perceived depends on the variable display speed of the variable image. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the variable image is configured so that a predetermined change condition is met and the display pattern changes when the variable display speed is at a relatively slow second speed, then, compared to a configuration where the predetermined change condition is met and the display pattern changes when the speed is relatively fast first speed, both changes become easier to perceive, and the effect shown in feature CH1 can be suitably achieved.

By synchronizing the display patterns of each image, it becomes possible to create innovative and unprecedented display effects. This enhances the impact of changes to the displayed image while it is stationary, as well as the impact of changing the display patterns of the stationary image.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CG may also be applied to feature CH1 to CH5.

<Characteristic CI Group>
The following describes a group of characteristic features (CIs) that represent technical ideas extracted mainly from the 58th embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CI group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are shown on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CI1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units 91, 92) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units 91, 92) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the display device by causing a group of multiple patterns to be displayed in a predetermined direction and then causing the combination of patterns corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means to be finally stopped and displayed at a predetermined position (effective line).
The image displayed on the aforementioned display screen is composed of a first image (digital image P1) and a second image (character image P2),
The display control means is
When the aforementioned pattern is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, the display mode of the first image constituting the pattern is kept the same before and after the first special action of the pattern (the bound action of the character image P2, which is the stopping action), while the display mode of the second image constituting the pattern is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first special action,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when initiating the display of a pattern that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the display mode of the first image constituting the pattern is kept the same before and after the second special action of the pattern (the jump action of the character image P2, which is the starting action), while having a second changing means for changing the display mode of the second image constituting the pattern from the second display mode to the first display mode.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery) (e.g., a miss, a jackpot) is announced by a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen (a predetermined position) of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. Although various effects, such as a reach display, are performed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration shown in this feature, the symbols are composed of a first image and a second image, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the display mode of the second image of the first and second images is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first special movement of the symbols. Furthermore, when the variable display of the symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined position is started, the display mode of the second image of the first and second images is changed from the second display mode to the first display mode in accordance with the second special movement of the symbols. With such a configuration, the monotony of the effects when the stopped display and variable display of symbols are repeated can be suitably mitigated. Furthermore, while changing the display mode could potentially give the impression that the image itself has changed to a different image, the first image is intentionally configured to maintain its display mode even when the first or second special operation occurs. This effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience.

Feature CI2. The first and second images are unique to each design.
The gaming machine according to feature CI1, characterized in that the second image is larger than the first image.

By configuring the display to change the display mode of the larger of the two images (the second image) unique to each design, the impact of the change can be effectively enhanced.

Feature CI3. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The display screen includes a display control means (performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the display device by causing a group of patterns consisting of multiple patterns to move in a predetermined direction, and then causing the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means to finally stop and display at a predetermined position (effective line).
The pattern to be displayed on the display screen includes a first image which is a numerical image or symbol image for identifying the pattern, and a second image which is a decorative image which together with the first image constitutes the pattern.
The display control means is
When the aforementioned pattern is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, the display mode of the first image constituting the pattern is kept the same before and after the first special action of the pattern (the bound action of the character image P2, which is the stopping action), while the display mode of the second image constituting the pattern is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first special action,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when initiating the display of a pattern that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the display mode of the first image constituting the pattern is kept the same before and after the second special action of the pattern (the jump action of the character image P2, which is the starting action), while having a second changing means for changing the display mode of the second image constituting the pattern from the second display mode to the first display mode.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery) (e.g., a miss, a jackpot) is announced by a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen (a predetermined position) of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. Although various effects, such as a reach display, are performed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration shown in this feature, the symbols are composed of a first image and a second image, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the display mode of the second image of the first and second images is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first special movement of the symbols. Furthermore, when the variable display of the symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined position is started, the display mode of the second image of the first and second images is changed from the second display mode to the first display mode in accordance with the second special movement of the symbols. With such a configuration, the monotony of the effects when the stopped display and variable display of symbols are repeated can be suitably mitigated. Furthermore, while changing the display mode could potentially give the impression that the image itself has changed to a different image, the first image is intentionally configured to maintain its display mode even when the first or second special operation occurs. This effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience.

Feature CI4. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature CI1 to Feature CI3, characterized in that the first display mode of the second image is set to be a display mode in which the second image is simpler than the second display mode.

During the variable display phase, the symbols are moving, so using a simpler second display mode helps to prevent the display effects from becoming too complex. Conversely, during the stationary display phase, using the visually appealing first display mode makes it easier to visually confirm the details of the symbols, thus significantly contributing to increased player satisfaction.

Feature CI5. Both the first special operation and the second special operation are configured to be performed at the predetermined position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features CI1 to CI4, characterized in that the operating directions of the first special operation and the second special operation are both defined to be different from the predetermined direction.

By configuring the system to execute the first and second special actions of the image at predetermined positions, the likelihood of missing these actions can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, by setting the direction of the first and second special actions to differ from the direction of the fluctuating display (predetermined direction), confusion between the fluctuating display and the special actions can be minimized.

Feature CI6. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 91, 92) provided in the game area,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 232 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game round operation (display of changing patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. A game round control means (a function that executes a first game round control process and a second game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A display device (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a),
The display screen includes a display control means (performance control device 82 and display control device 212) that controls the display of the display device by causing a group of patterns consisting of multiple patterns to move in a predetermined direction, and then causing the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means to finally stop and display at a predetermined position (effective line).
The image displayed on the screen is composed of a first image (digital image P1) and a second image larger than the first image (character image P2 and rear decorative image P3).
Of the first and second images, at least the first image is unique to each design.
The display control means is
When the aforementioned pattern is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, the display mode of the first image constituting the pattern is kept the same before and after the first special action of the pattern at the predetermined position (the bouncing action of the character image P2, which is the stopping action), while the display mode of the second image constituting the pattern is changed from the first display mode to a second display mode with more decoration than the first display mode in conjunction with the first special action,
When the aforementioned pattern is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, a second changing means is provided to change the display mode of the second image constituting the pattern from the first display mode to the second display mode without being associated with the first special operation (the bouncing action of the character image P2, which is the stopping action),
When initiating the display of the pattern that is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, the display mode of the first image constituting the pattern is kept the same before and after the second special action of the pattern at the predetermined position (the jump action of the character image P2, which is the starting action), while the display mode of the second image constituting the pattern is changed from the second display mode to the first display mode.
The operating directions of the first special operation and the second special operation are both specified to be different from the predetermined direction, and the operating time of the first special operation is specified to be longer than the operating time of the second special operation.

In a configuration where the result of a judgment (lottery) (e.g., a miss, a jackpot) is announced by a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen (a predetermined position) of the symbol display means, the player's attention is easily drawn to the display screen. Although various effects, such as a reach display, are performed during this announcement process to increase the player's attention to the game, many of these effects are similar. In the configuration shown in this feature, the symbols are composed of a first image and a second image, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the display mode of the second image of the first and second images is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first special movement of the symbols. Furthermore, when the variable display of the symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined position is started, the display mode of the second image of the first and second images is changed from the second display mode to the first display mode in accordance with the second special movement of the symbols. With such a configuration, the monotony of the effects when the stopped display and variable display of symbols are repeated can be suitably mitigated. Furthermore, while changing the display mode could potentially give the impression that the image itself has changed to a different image, the first image is intentionally configured to maintain its display mode even when the first or second special operation occurs. This effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience.

By configuring the display to change the display mode of the larger of the two images (the second image) unique to each design, the impact of the change can be effectively enhanced.

By configuring the system to execute the first and second special actions of the image at predetermined positions, the likelihood of missing these actions can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, by setting the direction of the first and second special actions to differ from the direction of the fluctuating display (predetermined direction), confusion between the fluctuating display and the special actions can be minimized.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CH may also be applied to feature groups CI1 to CI6.

<Characteristic CJ Group>
The following describes the group of features CJ, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 59th embodiment, the 60th embodiment, modified examples, or combinations thereof.

The CJ feature group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changing symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are performed on the display screen before the symbols are finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The CJ feature group was developed in light of this background and the challenges identified.

Feature CJ1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 62a, 63a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A bonus granting means that, based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game turn operation by the game turn control means, grants a predetermined bonus (transition to high probability mode) to the player,
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 75, a notification and effect control device 143, and a display control device 710) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) having a pattern display section (variable display area ME on the display screen 75a), and capable of variably displaying patterns (group of patterns) in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means by displaying the pattern in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means in a final stop (confirmation display),
The aforementioned pattern is formed by combining multiple pattern composition images, including a predetermined pattern composition image (a first specific pattern which is an odd-numbered pattern).
As a display mode for the predetermined pattern composition image, a first display mode (for example, a red "1" pattern) and a second display mode (for example, a gold "1" pattern) which has a different appearance from the first display mode are provided.
A display mode switching means that, when a predetermined game state is in place and a predetermined switching condition is met, switches the display mode of the symbol display unit from a first display mode to a second display mode in which at least the background image of the symbol display unit is different from that of the first display mode over multiple game rounds,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a changing means for changing the display mode of the predetermined pattern composition image, which is in the first display mode, from the first display mode to the second display mode when the display mode switching means switches from the first display mode to the second display mode.

As shown in this feature, displaying the pattern determined by the judgment result of the judgment means as the final stop on the pattern display unit, thereby indicating the expected probability of receiving a predetermined bonus, is preferable for increasing attention to the game through display effects for each game round. In the configuration shown in this feature, when a predetermined game state is reached, a predetermined switching condition is met, causing the display mode of the pattern display unit to switch from a first display mode to a second display mode with a different background image over multiple game rounds. In conjunction with this display mode switch, the display mode of the predetermined pattern composition image, which is in the first display mode, is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. By changing the display of the predetermined pattern composition image when the display mode switches in this way, appropriate pattern display according to the situation becomes possible. In particular, a configuration that changes the display mode rather than changing the predetermined pattern composition image itself is preferable in order to suppress the possibility of this change function confusing the player and to effectively enhance attention to the game.

Feature CJ2. The gaming machine according to Feature CJ1, characterized in that, when the pattern includes a plurality of predetermined pattern configuration images, the display mode of those plurality of predetermined pattern configuration images is simultaneously changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

When a design includes multiple predetermined image components, simultaneously changing the display mode of these predetermined image components minimizes the time required for the change and enhances the impact of the change.

Feature CJ3. The gaming machine according to Feature CJ1 or Feature CJ2, wherein the display mode switching means is configured to switch the display mode of the pattern display unit from the first display mode to the second display mode while the pattern is displayed in a stationary state, and the changing means is configured to change the display mode of the predetermined pattern configuration image, which is in the first display mode, from the first display mode to the second display mode while the pattern is displayed in a stationary state.

Changing the display configuration of a predetermined image while the image is displayed in a static state is effective in making the change itself function as part of the display effect.

Feature CJ4. The predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information and a second judgment information that is more advantageous to the player than the first judgment information.
The predetermined game states include a first game state in which the determination result by the determination means is set to be a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, and a second game state in which the determination result by the determination means is suppressed from being a determination result corresponding to the first determination information.
The display mode switching means is configured to switch the display mode of the pattern display unit from the first display mode corresponding to the first game state to the second display mode corresponding to the second game state when the predetermined switching conditions are met.
The aforementioned pattern includes a first pattern (first type pattern combination) which is displayed on the pattern display unit when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and a second pattern (second type pattern combination) which is displayed on the pattern display unit when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the second determination information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features CJ1 to CJ3, characterized in that the first pattern is composed of the predetermined pattern composition image in the first display mode, and the second pattern is composed of the predetermined pattern composition image in the second display mode.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system so that elements that are excluded from the winning pool due to changes in the game state are removed from the display area of the symbol display section, it is possible to suppress the waste of parts of the symbol composition image and properly execute the game animations using the symbols.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CI may also be applied to features CJ1 to CJ4.

<Characteristic CK Group>
The following describes the group of features CK, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 59th embodiment, the 60th embodiment, modified examples, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CK group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are shown on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Features CK1. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 62a, 63a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A reward granting means that, based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, grants a predetermined reward (transition to high probability mode or loop of high probability mode) to the player,
The system includes a suggestion means that indicates the likelihood of being granted the predetermined benefit by displaying the pattern combination determined according to the determination result by the determination means at a predetermined position (effective line) in the pattern display unit (variable display area ME in the display screen 75a),
The patterns capable of forming the aforementioned pattern combination include a first pattern (a non-specific pattern that is an even-numbered pattern) and a second pattern (a specific pattern that is an odd-numbered pattern) which is defined such that the expected probability of receiving the aforementioned predetermined benefit is higher than that of the first pattern.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a situation where multiple patterns including the first pattern are displayed at predetermined positions in order to form the aforementioned pattern combination, a special effect (dynamic display of a special character) is performed at a position overlapping with the predetermined position in the pattern display section, and a changing means is provided for changing the first pattern to the second pattern in conjunction with the special effect.

As shown in this feature, displaying the pattern combination determined by the determination means at a predetermined position on the pattern display unit, thereby indicating the likelihood of receiving a predetermined bonus, is preferable for increasing player attention through display effects during gameplay. In this configuration, the patterns capable of forming a pattern combination include a first pattern and a second pattern defined to have a higher likelihood of receiving a predetermined bonus than the first pattern. When multiple patterns, including the first pattern, are displayed at predetermined positions to form a pattern combination, a special effect is executed at a position overlapping with the predetermined position on the pattern display unit, and the first pattern is changed to the second pattern in conjunction with this special effect. This configuration encourages player attention to the display effects on the pattern display unit, and even when the pattern combination includes patterns with low expectations, it prevents a premature decline in player attention.

Features CK2. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 62a, 63a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A reward granting means that, based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, grants the player a predetermined reward (transition to high probability mode or loop of high probability mode),
The system includes a display effect execution means (symbol display device 75, notification/effect control device 143, display control device 710) that executes a display effect (game effect) in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) having a pattern display section (variable display area ME on the display screen 75a), and capable of displaying a group of patterns (pattern group) in a variable manner in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing a group of patterns to change and then causing the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means to be finally stopped and displayed (confirmed) at a predetermined effective position (effective line) on the pattern display unit.
The patterns capable of forming the aforementioned pattern combination include a first pattern and a second pattern defined such that the expected likelihood of receiving the predetermined benefit is higher than that of the first pattern.
A gaming machine characterized in that, while a plurality of patterns including the first pattern are displayed in the predetermined effective position in order to form the pattern combination, a special effect (dynamic display of a special character) is performed at a position that overlaps with the predetermined effective position in the pattern display section, and a changing means is provided for changing the first pattern to the second pattern in conjunction with the special effect.

As shown in this feature, displaying the pattern combination determined by the determination means at a predetermined effective position on the pattern display unit, thereby indicating the expected probability of receiving a predetermined bonus, is preferable for increasing attention to the game through display effects during gameplay. In this configuration, the patterns capable of forming a pattern combination include a first pattern and a second pattern defined to have a higher expected probability of receiving a predetermined bonus than the first pattern. When multiple patterns, including the first pattern, are displayed at predetermined positions to form a pattern combination, a special effect is executed at a position overlapping with the predetermined position on the pattern display unit, and the first pattern is changed to the second pattern in conjunction with this special effect. Such a configuration can encourage the player's attention to the display effects on the pattern display unit, and even if the pattern combination includes patterns with low expectations, it can prevent the player's attention from waning prematurely.

Features CK3. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 62a, 63a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A bonus granting means that, based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game turn operation by the game turn control means, grants a predetermined bonus (transition to high probability mode) to the player,
The system includes a display effect execution means (symbol display device 75, notification/effect control device 143, display control device 710) that executes a display effect (game effect) in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) having a pattern display section (variable display area ME on the display screen 75a), and capable of displaying a group of patterns (pattern group) in a variable manner in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the pattern group to change and then, after a reach display, causing the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means to finally stop and display (confirm display) at a predetermined effective position (effective line) on the pattern display unit.
The patterns capable of forming the aforementioned pattern combination include a first pattern and a second pattern defined such that the expected likelihood of receiving the predetermined benefit is higher than that of the first pattern.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a situation where the reach display is performed by a plurality of symbols including the first symbol stopped and displayed at the predetermined effective position, a special effect is performed at a position in the symbol display unit that overlaps with the predetermined effective position, and a changing means is provided for changing the first symbol stopped and displayed at the predetermined effective position to the second symbol in conjunction with the special effect.

As shown in this feature, displaying the combination of symbols determined by the determination means at a predetermined effective position on the symbol display unit, thereby indicating the expected probability of receiving a predetermined bonus, is preferable for increasing attention to the game through display effects during gameplay. In this configuration, the symbols capable of forming a combination include a first symbol and a second symbol defined to have a higher expected probability of receiving a predetermined bonus than the first symbol. When a reach is displayed using multiple symbols, including the first symbol, a special effect is executed at a position overlapping with the predetermined effective position on the symbol display unit, and the first symbol is changed to the second symbol in conjunction with this special effect. Such a configuration can encourage the player's attention to the display effects on the symbol display unit, and even when the reach display includes a symbol with low expectation (the first symbol), it can prevent the player's attention from waning prematurely.

Features CK4. Starting ball entry section (operation opening 62a, 63a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A bonus granting means that, based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game turn operation by the game turn control means, grants a predetermined bonus (transition to high probability mode) to the player,
The system includes a display effect execution means (symbol display device 75, notification/effect control device 143, display control device 710) that executes a display effect (game effect) in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) having a pattern display section (variable display area ME on the display screen 75a), and capable of displaying a group of patterns (pattern group) in a variable manner in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the pattern group to change and then, after a reach display, causing the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means to finally stop and display (confirm display) at a predetermined effective position (effective line) on the pattern display unit.
The patterns capable of forming the aforementioned pattern combination include a first pattern, a second pattern defined such that the expected probability of being granted the predetermined benefit is higher than that of the first pattern, and a third pattern defined such that the expected probability of being granted the predetermined benefit is higher than that of the second pattern.
A gaming machine characterized in that, while the reach display is being performed with a reach line formed by the first symbol stopped and displayed at a predetermined effective position and a reach line formed by the second symbol, a special effect is performed at a position in the symbol display section that overlaps with the predetermined effective position, and a changing means is provided to change the first symbol stopped and displayed at the predetermined position to the third symbol in conjunction with the special effect.

As shown in this feature, displaying the combination of symbols determined according to the judgment result by the judgment means at a predetermined effective position on the symbol display unit, thereby indicating the likelihood of receiving a predetermined bonus, is preferable for increasing attention to the game through display effects during gameplay. In the configuration shown in this feature, the symbols capable of forming a combination of symbols include a first symbol, a second symbol defined to have a higher likelihood of receiving a predetermined bonus than the first symbol, and a third symbol defined to have a higher likelihood of receiving a predetermined bonus than the second symbol. When a reach is displayed by the first and second symbols, a special effect is performed at a position overlapping with a predetermined effective position on the symbol display unit, and the first symbol is changed to the third symbol in conjunction with the special effect. With such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to the display effects on the symbol display unit, and even if the reach display includes a symbol with low expectations (the first symbol), it is possible to prevent the player's attention from decreasing prematurely.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CJ may also be applied to features CK1 to CK4.

<Features of the CL group>
The following describes the group of features CL, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 62nd embodiment, the 63rd embodiment, the 64th embodiment, modified examples, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CL group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are performed on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CL1. A predetermined ball entry section (through gate 66) is provided in the game area (game area PE),
A predetermined information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that acquires predetermined information (reserved information) based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry section,
An acquired information storage means (electrical power storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the lottery for winning a drawing) that determines whether predetermined information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of winning a drawing),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns on the through-gate display unit DS) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes a general game cycle control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (through-gate display unit DS) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to predetermined information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a symbol display device 75, a notification/effect control device 143, and a display control device 710) that executes a display effect (for example, a game effect) in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) having a pattern display section (variable display area ME on the display screen 75a), and capable of displaying a group of patterns (pattern group) in a variable manner in the pattern display section,
The system includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means by causing the pattern group to change and display in a first direction (for example, horizontally), and then causing the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means to be finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at a predetermined effective position (effective line) on the pattern display unit.
The display control means is characterized by having a changing means that changes the symbol combination stopped and displayed at the predetermined effective position from the first symbol combination to the second symbol combination, by temporarily stopping and displaying a first symbol combination that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss) at the predetermined effective position before the final stop display, maintaining the state in which a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination have been formed, and then displaying the group of symbols in a second direction different from the first direction (for example, the vertical direction), and finally stopping and displaying a second symbol combination (a symbol combination corresponding to a chance symbol), which is one of the plurality of formed symbol combinations, at the predetermined effective position.

As shown in this feature, a configuration in which a pattern group is displayed in a variable state, and then a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from a predetermined notification means is displayed as the final stop at a predetermined effective position in the pattern display section, is preferable for increasing attention to the game through display effects during gameplay. Here, if a configuration is implemented in which a first pattern combination that does not correspond to predetermined judgment information is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined effective position before the final stop display, and while maintaining the state in which multiple pattern combinations including the first pattern combination have been formed, the pattern group is displayed in a second direction (e.g., vertical direction) different from the first direction which was the variable display direction until then, and a second pattern combination, which is one of the multiple already formed pattern combinations, is displayed as the final stop at a predetermined effective position, thereby changing the pattern combination displayed at the predetermined effective position from the first pattern combination to the second pattern combination, it is possible to dramatically increase attention to the game through a novel and unprecedented display effect.

Feature CL2. Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game round operation by the game round control means, the system is equipped with a reward granting means that grants a predetermined reward to the player.
The gaming machine according to CL1, characterized in that the probability of the predetermined designation being assigned is higher when the second combination of symbols is displayed at the predetermined effective position than when the first combination of symbols is displayed at the predetermined effective position.

As shown in Feature CL, when changing the combination of symbols, the combination that stops later (final stop display) is configured to have a higher expectation than the combination that stops earlier (temporarily stop display). This is expected to cause players to focus on the symbol display area when a combination of symbols stops, anticipating a significant change in the movement of the symbol group. This effectively enhances the attention-grabbing effect shown in Feature CL1.

Feature CL3. The game machine according to Feature CL1 or Feature CL2, characterized in that the pattern display unit is provided with a first pattern display speed and a second pattern display speed, the second of which has a lower maximum speed than the first pattern display speed, and the second pattern display speed is set as the pattern display speed for the pattern display in the second direction.

As shown in Feature CL1, when changing the pattern combination, a second variable display speed is set, which is a reduced speed, for the variable display in the second direction. This configuration encourages visual confirmation of the variable display in the second direction, thereby effectively achieving the attention-grabbing effect shown in Feature CL1.

Feature CL4. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature CL1 to Feature CL3, characterized in that, when the group of patterns is displayed in the second direction, the background image displayed on the pattern display unit is scrolled together with the group of patterns in the second direction.

By scrolling the background image along with the symbols in the second direction when displaying the symbols in a second direction, it is possible to give the player the impression that the symbols themselves are stationary. In other words, it is possible to create a display effect that makes it seem as if the player is searching for the second symbol combination within a stationary set of symbols.

Feature CL5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature CL1 to Feature CL4, characterized in that the arrangement of patterns in the first direction is regular, and the arrangement of patterns in the second direction is not regular.

In the first direction, when displaying a group of symbols, the player can predict in advance which symbols will reach a predetermined valid position. In contrast, in the second direction, the symbols are displayed in a pre-formed combination, making it even easier to predict the outcome. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making it difficult to predict which symbol combinations will reach a predetermined valid position when displaying symbols in the second direction, the obsolescence of the symbol combination swapping function shown in feature CL1 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CK may also be applied to feature groups CL1 to CL5.

<Features of the commercials>
The following describes a group of features CM, which are technical ideas extracted mainly from the 61st embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CM group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The CM group was developed in consideration of the background and challenges, specifically the fact that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CM1. A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 62d, 62e) provided in the game area,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a first transition means (a function that executes the process of transitioning to the special game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state (first normal game state),
A second transition means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to transition to the second normal game state) is provided for transitioning the game state to a second predetermined game state (second normal game state) when the special game state ends.
A support lottery means (a function of the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that performs a support lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a passage section (through gate 66) provided in the game area,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gates) capable of displaying a variable pattern,
Prior to the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery conducted by the support lottery means, the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display unit is started, and the pattern display unit is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is displayed in a fixed position (a function that controls the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (the vane member 325 and the flow path switching member 326 of the special electric ball entry unit 64) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the special ball entry section (special electric start port 324) and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply switching processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and a support game execution means that executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished confirming the symbols.
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to make it easier for balls to enter the special ball-entry area than in the first mode.
The second predetermined game state is a game state in which the switching control mode is the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a ball enters the special ball entry section while the game rotation operation is being performed in the second predetermined game state, the game rotation operation ends in such a way that the notification result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, and the game state transitions from the second predetermined game state to the special game state based on the ball entering the special ball entry section.

As shown in this feature, having a configuration that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired based on ball entry into the starting ball entry section is preferable for facilitating the smooth progress of the game in the first predetermined game state. Here, by using the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state in combination, and when a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained, the game can be diversified by transitioning from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state via a special game state. This is advantageous in strengthening the contrast of the game and suppressing monotony. For the second predetermined game state, the switching control mode corresponds to the second mode, making it possible to play by having the game ball pass through the passage section and aiming for the special ball entry section. This is preferable in significantly changing the flow of the game. However, as mentioned above, with a configuration that stores multiple pieces of special information, game rounds corresponding to the special information can continue to progress even after transitioning to the second predetermined game state. In other words, although the transition to the second predetermined game state should ideally significantly change the flow from the first predetermined game state, this flow may be impaired by the remaining game rounds. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if, while the game rotation operation is being performed in the second predetermined game state, a ball enters the special ball entry area, the game rotation operation ends with a notification result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, and the game state transitions from the second predetermined game state to the special game state based on the ball entering the special ball entry area, then it is possible to effectively suppress disruptions in the game machine's behavior due to overlapping special game states, etc. Furthermore, it is possible to effectively avoid giving the player the impression that they have lost the right to transition to one special game state when they would otherwise have had two chances to transition to it. For these reasons, the configuration shown in this feature effectively enhances the effect of increasing attention to the game through game diversification.

Feature CM2. The gaming machine according to Feature CM1, characterized in that, while the predetermined notification means is notifying that the result of the determination corresponding to the predetermined determination information has been determined in the second predetermined game state, if a ball enters the special ball entry section, the ball entry is invalidated, and the game transitions to the special game state when the notification by the predetermined notification means is completed.

As described above, when using both a route that transitions to a special game state based on a lottery result derived from a ball entering the starting ball entry section and a route that transitions to a special game state based on a ball entering the special ball entry section, it cannot be ruled out that a ball may enter the special ball entry section while the predetermined notification means is notifying that the result of the determination corresponding to the predetermined determination information has been determined in the second predetermined game state. In such cases, if the ball entering the special ball entry section is invalidated and the game transitions to a special game state only after the notification by the predetermined notification means is completed, it is possible to effectively suppress the possibility of the notification by the predetermined notification means terminating prematurely and causing discomfort to the player.

Feature CM3. The variable mechanism can be switched to the acceptance state even when in the special game state.
The gaming machine according to feature CM1 or feature CM2, which is configured to invalidate a ball entry into the special ball entry section if such entry occurs during the special game state.

If a ball enters the special ball entry area during the special game state, the ball entry will be invalidated. This prevents the game from behaving as if the special game state had ended and then restarted.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CL may also be applied to feature CM1 to CM3.

<Characteristic CN Group>
The following describes the characteristic CN group, which is a technical idea extracted mainly from the 61st embodiment, its modifications, or combinations thereof.

The Feature CN group was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, specifically the fact that "in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is still room for improvement in the configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game." This is based on the understanding that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are symbol display devices that display changes in symbols triggered by the entry of balls into the ball entry area. The display screen of this symbol display device announces the lottery results based on the ball entry into the ball entry area. Various effects, such as "reach" displays, are shown on the display screen before the symbol combination is finalized, thereby increasing the level of attention given to the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology described above is that "in gaming machines of this type, there is still room for improvement in their configuration to enhance the level of attention given to the game."

Feature CN1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation opening 62d, 62e) provided in the game area,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes processing for the jackpot lottery) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
In a situation where the game is in a first predetermined game state (first normal game state), the determination means determines that the determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means has finished, and the first transition means (a function that executes the process of transitioning to the special game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state,
The system includes a second transition means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 that executes a process to transition to the second normal game state) which transitions the game state to a second predetermined game state (second normal game state) when the special game state ends.
The game cycle control means is configured to withhold the start of the game cycle operation even if special information is stored in the special information acquisition means during the special game state, and to start the game cycle operation when the special game state ends.
The game cycle operation is provided with an operation period setting means (a function that sets the display time of the changing patterns in the operation port display units D1 and D2 using the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The operation period setting means is configured such that, in the second predetermined game state, the operation period of the game cycle operation is shorter than in the first predetermined game state.
A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying patterns on the display screen,
The system includes a display control means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the pattern display means so that when the game rotation operation is performed in the state of the first predetermined game state, a predetermined display effect (game rotation effect) is executed in parallel with the game rotation operation in a predetermined area (variable display area ME) on the display screen,
The display control means includes a special effect execution means that, when the game state is transitioned from the special game state to the second predetermined game state by the second transition means, starts a special effect (second to fourth ending display) in the predetermined area of the display screen during the special game state, and ends the special effect after the transition to the second predetermined game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the special game state ends, special information is stored in the acquired information storage means and the special information does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, the special performance is configured to continue until at least the game operation for the game round related to the special information stored when the special game state ends has finished.

As shown in this feature, having a configuration that can store multiple pieces of special information acquired based on ball entry into the starting ball entry section is preferable for facilitating the smooth progress of the game in the first predetermined game state. Here, by using the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state in combination, and transitioning from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state via a special game state when a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained, the game can be diversified. This is advantageous in strengthening the contrast of the game and suppressing monotony. In such a configuration, it is preferable to significantly change the flow of the game by using a different ball entry section (through gate 66) than the starting ball entry section described above in the second predetermined game state. However, as described above, with a configuration that stores multiple pieces of special information, game rounds corresponding to the special information can continue to progress even after transitioning to the second predetermined game state. In other words, although the flow should ideally change significantly from the first predetermined game state upon transitioning to the second predetermined game state, this flow may be impaired by the remaining game rounds. In this regard, as shown in this feature, when transitioning from a special game state to a second predetermined game state, if a special effect is initiated in a predetermined area of the display screen during the special game state, and this special effect continues even after the transition to the second predetermined game state, at least until the game rounds related to the special information stored at the time of the transition have ended, then it is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity even if game rounds related to the special information remain. In particular, since the operation period of game rounds related to the special information is shortened in the second predetermined game state, the special effect does not become excessively drawn out, and even if the special effect continues after the transition to the second predetermined game state, it is possible to suppress the cause of incongruity. For these reasons, the configuration shown in this feature can contribute to increasing the level of attention given to the game.

Feature CN2. The game machine according to Feature CN1, characterized in that the special performance is configured to terminate at least when the game round operation related to the special information ends, provided that special information is stored in the special information storage means when the special game state ends and the special information corresponds to the predetermined judgment information.

Special information carried over from a special game state to the second predetermined game state may also result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information. Therefore, if the special information consumed after transitioning to the second predetermined game state includes information corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it is preferable to terminate the special performance described above upon the completion of the game-time operation related to that special information, thereby preventing the special performance from continuing into the next special game state. This is desirable in preventing the newly transitioned special game state from being overlooked.

Feature CN3. A gaming machine according to Feature CN1 or Feature CN2, characterized in that, when the special game state ends, special information is stored in the special information storage means and the special information does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, the execution period of the game round operation related to the special information is calculated, and the duration of the special performance after the end of the special game state is determined based on the calculation result.

In realizing the technical concepts shown in Feature CN1, etc., the execution period of the game-time operations related to special information is calculated, and the duration of the special performance after the special game state ends is determined based on the calculation result, thereby effectively suppressing the prolonged nature of the special performance.

Feature CN4. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires first special information (hold information) when a ball enters the first ball entry section (operation opening 62d, 62e) provided in the first flow path (left route) of the game area,
A first storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple first special information acquired by the first acquisition means,
A first determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes a lottery process for a jackpot in the MPU 602) that determines whether the first special information stored in the first storage means corresponds to predetermined first determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the first determination means or based on the determination made by the first determination means, the first game round operation (variable display of symbols in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the first game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. The first game round control means (a function that executes special symbol game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) controls the first notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the first game round operation is performed for each game round according to the first special information stored in the first storage means.
In a situation where the game is in a first predetermined game state (first normal game state), the first transition means (a function that executes a process to transition to a special game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state, based on the fact that the determination result by the first determination means corresponds to the predetermined first determination information and the first game cycle operation by the first game cycle control means has been completed,
The system includes a second transition means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to transition to the second normal game state) which transitions the game state to a second predetermined game state (second normal game state) when the special game state ends.
The first game cycle control means is configured to withhold the start of the first game cycle operation even if special information is stored in the first acquisition means during the special game state, and to start the first game cycle operation when the special game state ends.
The system includes an operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the first game cycle operation (a function that sets the display time of the changing patterns in the operation port display units D1 and D2 using the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The operation period setting means is configured such that, in the second predetermined game state, the operation period of the first game cycle operation is shorter than that of the first predetermined game state.
A display screen is provided, and a pattern display means is capable of displaying a variable pattern on the display screen,
The system includes a display control means that controls the pattern display means so that when the game rotation operation is performed in the state described above as the first predetermined game state, a predetermined display effect (game rotation effect) is executed in parallel with the game rotation operation in a predetermined area (variable display area ME) on the display screen,
A second acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires second special information (hold information) when a ball enters the second ball entry section (through gate 66) provided in the second flow path (right route) of the game area,
A second storage means (electrical operation storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second acquisition means,
A second determination means (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 that executes a lottery process for a winning figure in the MPU 602) that determines whether the second special information stored in the second storage means corresponds to predetermined second determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the winning result in the general drawing),
Prior to the determination by the second determination means or based on the determination made by the second determination means, a second game round operation (variable display of patterns on the through-gate display unit DS) is started, and the second game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game round. The system includes a second game round control means (a function that executes general game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) which controls the second notification means (through-gate display unit DS) so that the second game round operation is performed for each game round according to the second special information stored in the second storage means.
The second game round control means is capable of executing the second game round operation in parallel with the first game round operation by the first game round control means.
The display control means includes a special effect execution means that, when transitioning from the special game state to the second predetermined game state, starts a special effect (second to fourth type ending display) in the predetermined area of the display screen during the special game state, and ends the special effect after transitioning to the second predetermined game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the special game state ends, if the first special information is stored in the first storage means and the first special information does not correspond to the predetermined first determination information, the special performance continues until at least the operation for the first game round related to the first special information stored when the special game state ends is completed.

As shown in this feature, having a configuration that can store multiple first special information acquired based on ball entry into the first ball entry section is preferable for facilitating the smooth progress of the game in the first predetermined game state. Here, by using the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state in combination, and when a judgment result corresponding to a predetermined first judgment information is obtained, the game can be diversified by transitioning from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state via a special game state. This is advantageous in strengthening the contrast of the game and suppressing monotony. In such a configuration, it is preferable to significantly change the flow of the game in the second predetermined game state by using a second ball entry section (through gate 66) different from the first ball entry section described above. However, as described above, in a configuration that stores multiple first special information, the game rounds (first game rounds) corresponding to the first special information can continue to progress even after transitioning to the second predetermined game state. In other words, although the flow should ideally change significantly from the first predetermined game state by transitioning to the second predetermined game state, this flow may be impaired by the remaining first game rounds. In this regard, as shown in this feature, when transitioning from a special game state to a second predetermined game state, if a special effect is initiated in a predetermined area of the display screen during the special game state, and this special effect continues even after the transition to the second predetermined game state, at least until the game rounds related to the first special information stored at the time of the transition have finished, then it is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity even if game rounds related to the first special information remain. In particular, in the second predetermined game state, the operation period of the first game round related to the first special information is shortened, so the special effect does not become excessively drawn out. Therefore, even if the special effect continues after the transition to the second predetermined game state, it is possible to suppress the cause of incongruity. For these reasons, the configuration shown in this feature can contribute to increasing the level of attention given to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and CA to CM may also be applied to feature groups CN1 to CN5.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine comprising an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guidance rail 100) that guides the launched game balls to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, which grants a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage section (general prize entry opening 81, etc.) among these game components.

Slot machines and other revolving gaming machines: These machines are equipped with a variable display means that displays a sequence of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the final stopped symbol sequence. The symbol variation begins when a starting operation means is operated, and the symbol variation stops when a stopping operation means is operated or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game state (such as a bonus game) advantageous to the player is generated, provided that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol.

A ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: This gaming machine features a variable display means that displays a sequence of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the final stopped symbol sequence. The symbol variation begins when a starting operation means is operated, and stops when a stopping operation means is operated or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game state (such as a bonus game) advantageous to the player is generated, provided that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. Furthermore, the machine includes a ball tray and an input device that takes game balls from the ball tray, and a payout device that dispenses game balls into the ball tray. The operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when game balls are inserted by the input device.

10...Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41...Game ball launching handle, 60...Game board, 62a, 62d, 62e...Operation port, 64...Special electric ball entry unit, 66...Through gate, 83...Variable prize entry device, 80...Game board unit, 80a...Game board, 82...Operation port unit, 83...Variable prize entry device, 84...Through gate, 85K...Variable display unit, 86...Out port, 91...First operation port, 92...Second operation port, 93...Electric mechanism, 95 ...Pattern display device, 95a...Display screen, 99...Main display unit, 110...Game ball launching mechanism, 140...Notification/effect control device, 162...Main control device, 224...Payout device, 242...Payout control device, 402...MPU, 403...ROM, 404...RAM, 410...Display control device, 421...Win/Loss table storage area, 422...Distribution table storage area, 423...Variable display time table storage area, 431...Batch for lottery counter F, 432...Retained ball storage area, 433...Electric role retained area, 442...MPU, 500D, 500E, 500F...Special effect device, 500K...Pattern display device, 511D, 511F...Preview unit, 512D, 512F...Notification unit, 600K...Retained display device, 601K...Execution target display unit, 602K...Retained number display unit, 602aK~602hK...Unit retained display unit, 630E, 630F...Lighting unit, 641E, 641F...Light emission Body, 670E, 670F... Front cover, 671E, 671F... Opposing part, 690E, 690F... Drive mechanism, 700K... Auxiliary display device, 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F... Non-light diffusion part, 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F... Light diffusion part, 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F... Annular protrusion, 800K... Movable effect Device, 801G...Recovery passage, 801K...Movable decorative body, 802G...Detection sensor, 810K...Main body or first light-emitting part, 811K...Protruding part, 812K...Second light-emitting part, 813K...Third light-emitting part, 815K...Stepping motor, 851G...Base part, 861G...First bulge part, 871G...Second bulge part, 872G...Opposite part, 874G...Lower open part, 901G, 901H, 901I, 901J...Movable body, 902G...Shaft body, 90 3G, 903H, 903I...first surface part, 904G, 904H, 904I...second surface part, 905G, 905H, 905I, 905J...plane part, 906I...step part, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J...first End, 909G, 909J, 909I, 909J...Second end, 911G...Driver, 921G, 921J...Inlet, 97L...Movable presentation device, 800L...Left side movable presentation device, 810L...Left side movable decoration, 813 L...Light-emitting substrate, 825L...Stopper, 830L...Drive unit, 840L...Power transmission mechanism, 900L...Right-side movable display device, 910L...Right-side movable decorative body, 913L...Light-emitting substrate, 915L...Connecting part, 923L, 927L...Stopper, 930L...Drive unit, 940L...Power transmission mechanism, BL...Boundary section, C1...Winning random number counter, C2...Type counter, C5...Falling random number counter, CL1...Center axis, CL5-CL7...Center axis CL10…Center axis, CLK…Rotation center axis, DG…Divider line, EC…Enemy character, EE…Second display area, FB…Virtual plane, FC…Ally character, FE…First display area, FL2…Virtual line, ME…Variable display area, NE…Hold count display area, PLa~PLf…Trajectory, P1…Number image, P2…Character image, P3…Rear decoration image, P4…Base image, P5…Effect image, PE…Game area, SE…Hold display area.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a means for controlling the display of a pattern display means by variably displaying patterns using the pattern display means, and then stopping the display of patterns corresponding to the result of the game,
The aforementioned pattern is composed of an image that includes at least an image corresponding to predetermined information,
As for the display modes of the predetermined information, a first display mode and a second display mode that differs in appearance from the first display mode are provided.
The configuration allows switching the display mode of the pattern display means from a first display mode to a second display mode in which at least the background image of the pattern display means is different from that of the first display mode.
When switching from the first display mode to the second display mode, the configuration allows the display mode of the predetermined information, which is in the first display mode, to be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.
It has a first predetermined game state corresponding to the first display mode and a second predetermined game state corresponding to the second display mode,
In the first predetermined game state, it is possible that the result of the game will be the first result.
In the second predetermined game state, it is possible that the result of the game will be the second result.
If the result of the game is the first result, it is possible to stop displaying the first pattern, which includes an image corresponding to the predetermined information in the first display mode.
If the result of the game is the second result, it is possible to stop displaying a second pattern including an image corresponding to the predetermined information in the second display mode .
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that the variablely displayed patterns in the second predetermined gaming state do not include patterns of images corresponding to the predetermined information in the first display mode .